Catalyst 3560 Switch Software Configuration Guide

Catalyst 3560 Switch Software
Configuration Guide
Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE
March 2009
Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 527-0883
Text Part Number: OL-8553-06

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL
STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT
SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE
OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public
domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO
OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
CCDE, CCENT, Cisco Eos, Cisco HealthPresence, the Cisco logo, Cisco Lumin, Cisco Nexus, Cisco StadiumVision, Cisco TelePresence, Cisco WebEx, DCE, and Welcome
to the Human Network are trademarks; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn and Cisco Store are service marks; and Access Registrar, Aironet, AsyncOS,
Bringing the Meeting To You, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCIP, CCNA, CCNP, CCSP, CCVP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS,
Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Cisco Unity, Collaboration Without Limitation, EtherFast, EtherSwitch, Event Center, Fast Step,
Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, GigaDrive, HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, iPhone, iQuick Study, IronPort, the IronPort logo, LightStream, Linksys, MediaTone,
MeetingPlace, MeetingPlace Chime Sound, MGX, Networkers, Networking Academy, Network Registrar, PCNow, PIX, PowerPanels, ProConnect, ScriptShare, SenderBase,
SMARTnet, Spectrum Expert, StackWise, The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, TransPath, WebEx, and the WebEx logo are registered trademarks of
Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document or website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship
between Cisco and any other company. (0812R)
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and figures included in the
document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental.
Catalyst 3560 Switch Software Configuration Guide

© 2006-2008 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
CONTENTS
Preface xlv
Audience xlv
Purpose xlv
Conventions xlvi
Related Publications xlvi
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security Guidelines xlvii
CHAPTER 1 Overview 1-1
Features 1-1
Ease-of-Deployment and Ease-of-Use Features 1-2
Performance Features 1-3
Management Options 1-4
Manageability Features 1-5
Availability and Redundancy Features 1-7
VLAN Features 1-7
Security Features 1-8
QoS and CoS Features 1-11
Layer 3 Features 1-12
Power over Ethernet Features 1-13
Monitoring Features 1-13
Default Settings After Initial Switch Configuration 1-14
Network Configuration Examples 1-17

Design Concepts for Using the Switch 1-17
Small to Medium-Sized Network Using Catalyst 3560 Switches 1-20
Large Network Using Catalyst 3560 Switches 1-21
Long-Distance, High-Bandwidth Transport Configuration 1-23
Where to Go Next 1-23
CHAPTER 2 Using the Command-Line Interface 2-1
Understanding Command Modes 2-1
Understanding the Help System 2-3
Understanding Abbreviated Commands 2-4
Understanding no and default Forms of Commands 2-4

OL-8553-06 iii
Contents
Understanding CLI Error Messages 2-5
Using Configuration Logging 2-5
Using Command History 2-6

Changing the Command History Buffer Size 2-6
Recalling Commands 2-6
Disabling the Command History Feature 2-7
Using Editing Features 2-7
Enabling and Disabling Editing Features 2-7
Editing Commands through Keystrokes 2-7
Editing Command Lines that Wrap 2-9
Searching and Filtering Output of show and more Commands 2-10
Accessing the CLI 2-10

Accessing the CLI through a Console Connection or through Telnet 2-10
CHAPTER 3 Assigning the Switch IP Address and Default Gateway 3-1
Understanding the Boot Process 3-1
Assigning Switch Information 3-2

Default Switch Information 3-3
Understanding DHCP-Based Autoconfiguration 3-3
DHCP Client Request Process 3-4
Understanding DHCP-based Autoconfiguration and Image Update 3-5
DHCP Autoconfiguration 3-5
DHCP Auto-Image Update 3-5
Limitations and Restrictions 3-5
Configuring DHCP-Based Autoconfiguration 3-6
DHCP Server Configuration Guidelines 3-6
Configuring the TFTP Server 3-7
Configuring the DNS 3-7
Configuring the Relay Device 3-8
Obtaining Configuration Files 3-8
Example Configuration 3-9
Configuring the DHCP Auto Configuration and Image Update Features 3-11
Configuring DHCP Autoconfiguration (Only Configuration File) 3-11
Configuring DHCP Auto-Image Update (Configuration File and Image) 3-12
Configuring the Client 3-13
Manually Assigning IP Information 3-14
Checking and Saving the Running Configuration 3-15

iv OL-8553-06
Contents
Modifying the Startup Configuration 3-16

Default Boot Configuration 3-16
Automatically Downloading a Configuration File 3-16
Specifying the Filename to Read and Write the System Configuration 3-16
Booting Manually 3-17
Booting a Specific Software Image 3-18
Controlling Environment Variables 3-18
Scheduling a Reload of the Software Image 3-20
Configuring a Scheduled Reload 3-20
Displaying Scheduled Reload Information 3-21
CHAPTER 4 Configuring Cisco EnergyWise 4-1
Managing Single Entities 4-1

EnergyWise Entity 4-1
EnergyWise Domain 4-2
EnergyWise Network 4-2
Single PoE Switch Scenario 4-3
EnergyWise Power Level 4-4
EnergyWise Importance 4-5
EnergyWise Names, Roles, and Keywords 4-5
Configuration Guidelines 4-5
PoE and EnergyWise Interactions 4-5
Manually Managing Power 4-6
Powering the Entity 4-6
Configuring Entity Attributes 4-7
Powering the PoE Port 4-8
Configuring PoE-Port Attributes 4-8
Automatically Managing Power (Recurrence) 4-9
Examples 4-11
Setting Up the Domain 4-11
Manually Managing Power 4-12
Automatically Managing Power 4-12
Managing Multiple Entities 4-12
Multiple PoE Switch Scenario 4-13
EnergyWise Query 4-13
Using Queries to Manage Power in the Domain 4-14

OL-8553-06 v
Contents
Examples 4-15
Querying with the Name Attribute 4-15
Querying with Keywords 4-16
Querying to Set Power Levels 4-16
Troubleshooting EnergyWise 4-16
Using CLI Commands 4-17
Verifying the Power Usage 4-17
Additional Information 4-18
Managing Power in a LAN 4-18
Managing Power with IP Routing 4-18
CHAPTER 5 Configuring Cisco IOS Configuration Engine 5-1
Understanding Cisco Configuration Engine Software 5-1

Configuration Service 5-2
Event Service 5-3
NameSpace Mapper 5-3
What You Should Know About the CNS IDs and Device Hostnames 5-3
ConfigID 5-3
DeviceID 5-4
Hostname and DeviceID 5-4
Using Hostname, DeviceID, and ConfigID 5-4
Understanding Cisco IOS Agents 5-5
Initial Configuration 5-5
Incremental (Partial) Configuration 5-6
Synchronized Configuration 5-6
Configuring Cisco IOS Agents 5-6
Enabling Automated CNS Configuration 5-6
Enabling the CNS Event Agent 5-7
Enabling the Cisco IOS CNS Agent 5-9
Enabling an Initial Configuration 5-9
Enabling a Partial Configuration 5-13
Displaying CNS Configuration 5-14
CHAPTER 6 Clustering Switches 6-1
Understanding Switch Clusters 6-1

Cluster Command Switch Characteristics 6-3
Standby Cluster Command Switch Characteristics 6-3
Candidate Switch and Cluster Member Switch Characteristics 6-3

vi OL-8553-06
Contents
Planning a Switch Cluster 6-4

Automatic Discovery of Cluster Candidates and Members 6-4
Discovery Through CDP Hops 6-5
Discovery Through Non-CDP-Capable and Noncluster-Capable Devices 6-6
Discovery Through Different VLANs 6-6
Discovery Through Different Management VLANs 6-7
Discovery Through Routed Ports 6-8
Discovery of Newly Installed Switches 6-9
HSRP and Standby Cluster Command Switches 6-10
Virtual IP Addresses 6-10
Other Considerations for Cluster Standby Groups 6-11
Automatic Recovery of Cluster Configuration 6-12
IP Addresses 6-13
Hostnames 6-13
Passwords 6-13
SNMP Community Strings 6-14
TACACS+ and RADIUS 6-14
LRE Profiles 6-14
Using the CLI to Manage Switch Clusters 6-15

Catalyst 1900 and Catalyst 2820 CLI Considerations 6-15
Using SNMP to Manage Switch Clusters 6-15
CHAPTER 7 Administering the Switch 7-1
Managing the System Time and Date 7-1

Understanding the System Clock 7-1
Understanding Network Time Protocol 7-2
Configuring NTP 7-3
Default NTP Configuration 7-4
Configuring NTP Authentication 7-4
Configuring NTP Associations 7-5
Configuring NTP Broadcast Service 7-6
Configuring NTP Access Restrictions 7-8
Configuring the Source IP Address for NTP Packets 7-10
Displaying the NTP Configuration 7-11
Configuring Time and Date Manually 7-11
Setting the System Clock 7-11
Displaying the Time and Date Configuration 7-12
Configuring the Time Zone 7-12
Configuring Summer Time (Daylight Saving Time) 7-13

OL-8553-06 vii
Contents
Configuring a System Name and Prompt 7-14

Default System Name and Prompt Configuration 7-15
Configuring a System Name 7-15
Understanding DNS 7-15
Default DNS Configuration 7-16
Setting Up DNS 7-16
Displaying the DNS Configuration 7-17
Creating a Banner 7-17
Default Banner Configuration 7-17
Configuring a Message-of-the-Day Login Banner 7-18
Configuring a Login Banner 7-18
Managing the MAC Address Table 7-19
Building the Address Table 7-20
MAC Addresses and VLANs 7-20
Default MAC Address Table Configuration 7-21
Changing the Address Aging Time 7-21
Removing Dynamic Address Entries 7-22
Configuring MAC Address Notification Traps 7-22
Adding and Removing Static Address Entries 7-24
Configuring Unicast MAC Address Filtering 7-25
Disabling MAC Address Learning on a VLAN 7-26
Displaying Address Table Entries 7-27
Managing the ARP Table 7-28
CHAPTER 8 Configuring SDM Templates 8-1

Understanding the SDM Templates 8-1
Dual IPv4 and IPv6 SDM Templates 8-2
Configuring the Switch SDM Template 8-3
Default SDM Template 8-3
SDM Template Configuration Guidelines 8-3
Setting the SDM Template 8-4
Displaying the SDM Templates 8-5
CHAPTER 9 Configuring Switch-Based Authentication 9-1
Preventing Unauthorized Access to Your Switch 9-1
Protecting Access to Privileged EXEC Commands 9-2

Default Password and Privilege Level Configuration 9-2
Setting or Changing a Static Enable Password 9-3
Protecting Enable and Enable Secret Passwords with Encryption 9-3

viii OL-8553-06
Contents
Disabling Password Recovery 9-5

Setting a Telnet Password for a Terminal Line 9-6
Configuring Username and Password Pairs 9-6
Configuring Multiple Privilege Levels 9-7
Setting the Privilege Level for a Command 9-8
Changing the Default Privilege Level for Lines 9-9
Logging into and Exiting a Privilege Level 9-9
Controlling Switch Access with TACACS+ 9-10
Understanding TACACS+ 9-10
TACACS+ Operation 9-12
Configuring TACACS+ 9-12
Default TACACS+ Configuration 9-13
Identifying the TACACS+ Server Host and Setting the Authentication Key 9-13
Configuring TACACS+ Login Authentication 9-14
Configuring TACACS+ Authorization for Privileged EXEC Access and Network Services 9-16
Starting TACACS+ Accounting 9-17
Displaying the TACACS+ Configuration 9-17
Controlling Switch Access with RADIUS 9-17
Understanding RADIUS 9-18
RADIUS Operation 9-19
Configuring RADIUS 9-19
Default RADIUS Configuration 9-20
Identifying the RADIUS Server Host 9-20
Configuring RADIUS Login Authentication 9-23
Defining AAA Server Groups 9-25
Configuring RADIUS Authorization for User Privileged Access and Network Services 9-27
Starting RADIUS Accounting 9-28
Configuring Settings for All RADIUS Servers 9-29
Configuring the Switch to Use Vendor-Specific RADIUS Attributes 9-29
Configuring the Switch for Vendor-Proprietary RADIUS Server Communication 9-31
Configuring RADIUS Server Load Balancing 9-31
Displaying the RADIUS Configuration 9-32
Controlling Switch Access with Kerberos 9-32
Understanding Kerberos 9-32
Kerberos Operation 9-34
Authenticating to a Boundary Switch 9-35
Obtaining a TGT from a KDC 9-35
Authenticating to Network Services 9-35
Configuring Kerberos 9-35

OL-8553-06 ix
Contents
Configuring the Switch for Local Authentication and Authorization 9-36
Configuring the Switch for Secure Shell 9-37

Understanding SSH 9-38
SSH Servers, Integrated Clients, and Supported Versions 9-38
Limitations 9-39
Configuring SSH 9-39
Setting Up the Switch to Run SSH 9-39
Configuring the SSH Server 9-40
Displaying the SSH Configuration and Status 9-41
Configuring the Switch for Secure Socket Layer HTTP 9-42
Understanding Secure HTTP Servers and Clients 9-42
Certificate Authority Trustpoints 9-42
CipherSuites 9-44
Configuring Secure HTTP Servers and Clients 9-44
Default SSL Configuration 9-45
SSL Configuration Guidelines 9-45
Configuring a CA Trustpoint 9-45
Configuring the Secure HTTP Server 9-46
Configuring the Secure HTTP Client 9-47
Displaying Secure HTTP Server and Client Status 9-48
Configuring the Switch for Secure Copy Protocol 9-48
Information About Secure Copy 9-49
CHAPTER 10 Configuring IEEE 802.1x Port-Based Authentication 10-1

Understanding IEEE 802.1x Port-Based Authentication 10-1
Device Roles 10-2
Authentication Process 10-3
Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange 10-5
Authentication Manager 10-7
Port-Based Authentication Methods 10-7
Per-User ACLs and Filter-Ids 10-8
Authentication Manager CLI Commands 10-8
Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States 10-9
802.1x Host Mode 10-10
Multidomain Authentication 10-11
802.1x Multiple Authentication Mode 10-12
802.1x Accounting 10-12
802.1x Accounting Attribute-Value Pairs 10-13

x OL-8553-06
Contents
802.1x Readiness Check 10-14

802.1x Authentication with VLAN Assignment 10-14
Using 802.1x Authentication with Per-User ACLs 10-15
802.1x Authentication with Downloadable ACLs and Redirect URLs 10-16
Cisco Secure ACS and Attribute-Value Pairs for the Redirect URL 10-17
Cisco Secure ACS and Attribute-Value Pairs for Downloadable ACLs 10-17
802.1x Authentication with Guest VLAN 10-17
802.1x Authentication with Restricted VLAN 10-18
802.1x Authentication with Inaccessible Authentication Bypass 10-19
802.1x Authentication with Voice VLAN Ports 10-21
802.1x Authentication with Port Security 10-21
802.1x Authentication with Wake-on-LAN 10-22
802.1x Authentication with MAC Authentication Bypass 10-23
Network Admission Control Layer 2 802.1x Validation 10-24
Flexible Authentication Ordering 10-24
Open1x Authentication 10-25
Using Voice Aware 802.1x Security 10-25
802.1x Switch Supplicant with Network Edge Access Topology (NEAT) 10-25
Web Authentication 10-26
Web Authentication with Automatic MAC Check 10-27
Local Web Authentication Banner 10-27
Configuring 802.1x Authentication 10-29
Default 802.1x Authentication Configuration 10-30
802.1x Authentication Configuration Guidelines 10-31
802.1x Authentication 10-31
VLAN Assignment, Guest VLAN, Restricted VLAN, and Inaccessible Authentication
Bypass 10-32
MAC Authentication Bypass 10-33
Maximum Number of Allowed Devices Per Port 10-33
Configuring 802.1x Readiness Check 10-34
Configuring Voice Aware 802.1x Security 10-35
Configuring 802.1x Violation Modes 10-36
Configuring 802.1x Authentication 10-37
Configuring the Switch-to-RADIUS-Server Communication 10-38
Configuring the Host Mode 10-40
Configuring Periodic Re-Authentication 10-41
Manually Re-Authenticating a Client Connected to a Port 10-42
Changing the Quiet Period 10-42
Changing the Switch-to-Client Retransmission Time 10-43
Setting the Switch-to-Client Frame-Retransmission Number 10-44

OL-8553-06 xi
Contents
Setting the Re-Authentication Number 10-44

Configuring 802.1x Accounting 10-45
Configuring a Guest VLAN 10-46
Configuring a Restricted VLAN 10-47
Configuring the Inaccessible Authentication Bypass Feature 10-49
Configuring 802.1x Authentication with WoL 10-52
Configuring MAC Authentication Bypass 10-53
Configuring NAC Layer 2 802.1x Validation 10-54
Configuring 802.1x Switch Supplicant with NEAT 10-55
Configuring 802.1x Authentication with Downloadable ACLs and Redirect URLs 10-57
Configuring Downloadable ACLs 10-57
Configuring a Downloadable Policy 10-58
Configuring Flexible Authentication Ordering 10-59
Configuring Open1x 10-60
Configuring Web Authentication 10-60
Configuring a Web Authentication Local Banner 10-64
Disabling 802.1x Authentication on the Port 10-64
Resetting the 802.1x Authentication Configuration to the Default Values 10-65
Displaying 802.1x Statistics and Status 10-65
CHAPTER 11 Configuring Interface Characteristics 11-1
Understanding Interface Types 11-1

Port-Based VLANs 11-2
Switch Ports 11-2
Access Ports 11-3
Trunk Ports 11-3
Tunnel Ports 11-3
Routed Ports 11-4
Switch Virtual Interfaces 11-4
SVI Autostate Exclude 11-5
EtherChannel Port Groups 11-6
Dual-Purpose Uplink Ports 11-6
Power over Ethernet Ports 11-7
Supported Protocols and Standards 11-7
Powered-Device Detection and Initial Power Allocation 11-7
Power Management Modes 11-8
Connecting Interfaces 11-9

xii OL-8553-06
Contents
Using Interface Configuration Mode 11-10

Procedures for Configuring Interfaces 11-11
Configuring a Range of Interfaces 11-11
Configuring and Using Interface Range Macros 11-13
Configuring Ethernet Interfaces 11-14

Default Ethernet Interface Configuration 11-15
Setting the Type of a Dual-Purpose Uplink Port 11-16
Configuring Interface Speed and Duplex Mode 11-17
Speed and Duplex Configuration Guidelines 11-18
Setting the Interface Speed and Duplex Parameters 11-18
Configuring IEEE 802.3x Flow Control 11-20
Configuring Auto-MDIX on an Interface 11-21
Configuring a Power Management Mode on a PoE Port 11-22
Budgeting Power for Devices Connected to a PoE Port 11-23
Adding a Description for an Interface 11-24
Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces 11-25
Configuring SVI Autostate Exclude 11-27
Configuring the System MTU 11-27
Monitoring and Maintaining the Interfaces 11-29

Monitoring Interface Status 11-29
Clearing and Resetting Interfaces and Counters 11-30
Shutting Down and Restarting the Interface 11-31
CHAPTER 12 Configuring Auto Smartports Macros 12-1
Understanding Auto Smartports and Static Smartports Macros 12-1
Configuring Auto Smartports 12-2

Default Auto Smartports Configuration 12-2
Auto Smartports Configuration Guidelines 12-3
Enabling Auto Smartports 12-3
Configuring Auto Smartports Built-in Macros 12-4
Configuring Event Triggers 12-6
Configuring Auto Smartports User-Defined Macros 12-9
Configuring Static Smartports Macros 12-11
Default Static Smartports Configuration 12-11
Static Smartports Configuration Guidelines 12-12
Applying Static Smartports Macros 12-12
Displaying Auto Smartports and Static Smartports Macros 12-14

OL-8553-06 xiii
Contents
CHAPTER 13 Configuring VLANs 13-1
Understanding VLANs 13-1

Supported VLANs 13-2
VLAN Port Membership Modes 13-3
Configuring Normal-Range VLANs 13-4

Token Ring VLANs 13-6
Normal-Range VLAN Configuration Guidelines 13-6
VLAN Configuration Mode Options 13-7
VLAN Configuration in config-vlan Mode 13-7
VLAN Configuration in VLAN Database Configuration Mode 13-7
Saving VLAN Configuration 13-7
Default Ethernet VLAN Configuration 13-8
Creating or Modifying an Ethernet VLAN 13-9
Deleting a VLAN 13-10
Assigning Static-Access Ports to a VLAN 13-11
Configuring Extended-Range VLANs 13-12
Default VLAN Configuration 13-12
Extended-Range VLAN Configuration Guidelines 13-13
Creating an Extended-Range VLAN 13-13
Creating an Extended-Range VLAN with an Internal VLAN ID 13-15
Displaying VLANs 13-16
Configuring VLAN Trunks 13-16

Trunking Overview 13-16
Encapsulation Types 13-18
IEEE 802.1Q Configuration Considerations 13-19
Default Layer 2 Ethernet Interface VLAN Configuration 13-19
Configuring an Ethernet Interface as a Trunk Port 13-19
Interaction with Other Features 13-20
Configuring a Trunk Port 13-20
Defining the Allowed VLANs on a Trunk 13-21
Changing the Pruning-Eligible List 13-23
Configuring the Native VLAN for Untagged Traffic 13-23
Configuring Trunk Ports for Load Sharing 13-24
Load Sharing Using STP Port Priorities 13-24
Load Sharing Using STP Path Cost 13-26
Configuring VMPS 13-27
Understanding VMPS 13-28
Dynamic-Access Port VLAN Membership 13-28
Default VMPS Client Configuration 13-29

xiv OL-8553-06
Contents
VMPS Configuration Guidelines 13-29

Configuring the VMPS Client 13-30
Entering the IP Address of the VMPS 13-30
Configuring Dynamic-Access Ports on VMPS Clients 13-30
Reconfirming VLAN Memberships 13-31
Changing the Reconfirmation Interval 13-31
Changing the Retry Count 13-32
Monitoring the VMPS 13-32
Troubleshooting Dynamic-Access Port VLAN Membership 13-33
VMPS Configuration Example 13-33
CHAPTER 15 Configuring Voice VLAN 15-1
Understanding Voice VLAN 15-1

Cisco IP Phone Voice Traffic 15-2
Cisco IP Phone Data Traffic 15-2
Configuring Voice VLAN 15-3
Default Voice VLAN Configuration 15-3
Voice VLAN Configuration Guidelines 15-3
Configuring a Port Connected to a Cisco 7960 IP Phone 15-4
Configuring Cisco IP Phone Voice Traffic 15-5
Configuring the Priority of Incoming Data Frames 15-6
Displaying Voice VLAN 15-7
CHAPTER 16 Configuring VTP 16-1

Understanding VTP 16-1
The VTP Domain 16-2
VTP Modes 16-3
VTP Advertisements 16-3
VTP Version 2 16-4
VTP Pruning 16-4
Configuring VTP 16-6
Default VTP Configuration 16-6
VTP Configuration Options 16-7
VTP Configuration in Global Configuration Mode 16-7
VTP Configuration in VLAN Database Configuration Mode 16-7

OL-8553-06 xv
Contents
VTP Configuration Guidelines 16-8

Domain Names 16-8
Passwords 16-8
VTP Version 16-8
Configuration Requirements 16-9
Configuring a VTP Server 16-9
Configuring a VTP Client 16-11
Disabling VTP (VTP Transparent Mode) 16-12
Enabling VTP Version 2 16-13
Enabling VTP Pruning 16-14
Adding a VTP Client Switch to a VTP Domain 16-14
Monitoring VTP 16-16
CHAPTER 14 Configuring Private VLANs 14-1
Understanding Private VLANs 14-1

IP Addressing Scheme with Private VLANs 14-3
Private VLANs across Multiple Switches 14-4
Private-VLAN Interaction with Other Features 14-4
Private VLANs and Unicast, Broadcast, and Multicast Traffic 14-5
Private VLANs and SVIs 14-5
Configuring Private VLANs 14-5
Tasks for Configuring Private VLANs 14-6
Default Private-VLAN Configuration 14-6
Private-VLAN Configuration Guidelines 14-6
Secondary and Primary VLAN Configuration 14-6
Private-VLAN Port Configuration 14-8
Limitations with Other Features 14-8
Configuring and Associating VLANs in a Private VLAN 14-9
Configuring a Layer 2 Interface as a Private-VLAN Host Port 14-11
Configuring a Layer 2 Interface as a Private-VLAN Promiscuous Port 14-12
Mapping Secondary VLANs to a Primary VLAN Layer 3 VLAN Interface 14-13
Monitoring Private VLANs 14-14
CHAPTER 16 Configuring IEEE 802.1Q and Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 16-1
Understanding IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling 16-1
Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling 16-4

Default IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Configuration 16-4
IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Configuration Guidelines 16-4
Native VLANs 16-4

xvi OL-8553-06
Contents
System MTU 16-5

IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling and Other Features 16-6
Configuring an IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Port 16-6
Understanding Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 16-7
Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 16-10

Default Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Configuration 16-11
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Configuration Guidelines 16-11
Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 16-12
Configuring Layer 2 Tunneling for EtherChannels 16-14
Configuring the SP Edge Switch 16-14
Configuring the Customer Switch 16-15
Monitoring and Maintaining Tunneling Status 16-17
CHAPTER 17 Configuring STP 17-1
Understanding Spanning-Tree Features 17-1

STP Overview 17-2
Spanning-Tree Topology and BPDUs 17-3
Bridge ID, Switch Priority, and Extended System ID 17-4
Spanning-Tree Interface States 17-4
Blocking State 17-5
Listening State 17-6
Learning State 17-6
Forwarding State 17-6
Disabled State 17-7
How a Switch or Port Becomes the Root Switch or Root Port 17-7
Spanning Tree and Redundant Connectivity 17-8
Spanning-Tree Address Management 17-8
Accelerated Aging to Retain Connectivity 17-8
Spanning-Tree Modes and Protocols 17-9
Supported Spanning-Tree Instances 17-9
Spanning-Tree Interoperability and Backward Compatibility 17-10
STP and IEEE 802.1Q Trunks 17-10
VLAN-Bridge Spanning Tree 17-10
Configuring Spanning-Tree Features 17-11
Default Spanning-Tree Configuration 17-11
Spanning-Tree Configuration Guidelines 17-12
Changing the Spanning-Tree Mode. 17-13
Disabling Spanning Tree 17-14
Configuring the Root Switch 17-14

OL-8553-06 xvii
Contents
Configuring a Secondary Root Switch 17-16

Configuring Port Priority 17-17
Configuring Path Cost 17-18
Configuring the Switch Priority of a VLAN 17-19
Configuring Spanning-Tree Timers 17-20
Configuring the Hello Time 17-20
Configuring the Forwarding-Delay Time for a VLAN 17-21
Configuring the Maximum-Aging Time for a VLAN 17-21
Configuring the Transmit Hold-Count 17-22
Displaying the Spanning-Tree Status 17-22
CHAPTER 18 Configuring MSTP 18-1
Understanding MSTP 18-2

Multiple Spanning-Tree Regions 18-2
IST, CIST, and CST 18-2
Operations Within an MST Region 18-3
Operations Between MST Regions 18-3
IEEE 802.1s Terminology 18-5
Hop Count 18-5
Boundary Ports 18-6
IEEE 802.1s Implementation 18-6
Port Role Naming Change 18-6
Interoperation Between Legacy and Standard Switches 18-7
Detecting Unidirectional Link Failure 18-7
Interoperability with IEEE 802.1D STP 18-8
Understanding RSTP 18-8
Port Roles and the Active Topology 18-9
Rapid Convergence 18-10
Synchronization of Port Roles 18-11
Bridge Protocol Data Unit Format and Processing 18-12
Processing Superior BPDU Information 18-13
Processing Inferior BPDU Information 18-13
Topology Changes 18-13
Configuring MSTP Features 18-14
Default MSTP Configuration 18-14
MSTP Configuration Guidelines 18-15
Specifying the MST Region Configuration and Enabling MSTP 18-16
Configuring the Root Switch 18-17
Configuring a Secondary Root Switch 18-18

xviii OL-8553-06
Contents
Configuring Port Priority 18-19

Configuring Path Cost 18-20
Configuring the Switch Priority 18-21
Configuring the Hello Time 18-22
Configuring the Forwarding-Delay Time 18-23
Configuring the Maximum-Aging Time 18-23
Configuring the Maximum-Hop Count 18-24
Specifying the Link Type to Ensure Rapid Transitions 18-24
Designating the Neighbor Type 18-25
Restarting the Protocol Migration Process 18-25
Displaying the MST Configuration and Status 18-26
CHAPTER 19 Configuring Optional Spanning-Tree Features 19-1
Understanding Optional Spanning-Tree Features 19-1

Understanding Port Fast 19-2
Understanding BPDU Guard 19-2
Understanding BPDU Filtering 19-3
Understanding UplinkFast 19-3
Understanding BackboneFast 19-5
Understanding EtherChannel Guard 19-7
Understanding Root Guard 19-8
Understanding Loop Guard 19-9
Configuring Optional Spanning-Tree Features 19-9
Default Optional Spanning-Tree Configuration 19-9
Optional Spanning-Tree Configuration Guidelines 19-10
Enabling Port Fast 19-10
Enabling BPDU Guard 19-11
Enabling BPDU Filtering 19-12
Enabling UplinkFast for Use with Redundant Links 19-13
Enabling BackboneFast 19-13
Enabling EtherChannel Guard 19-14
Enabling Root Guard 19-15
Enabling Loop Guard 19-15
Displaying the Spanning-Tree Status 19-16
CHAPTER 20 Configuring Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move Update Feature 20-1
Understanding Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move Update 20-1
Flex Links 20-1
VLAN Flex Link Load Balancing and Support 20-2

OL-8553-06 xix
Contents
Flex Link Multicast Fast Convergence 20-3

Learning the Other Flex Link Port as the mrouter Port 20-3
Generating IGMP Reports 20-3
Leaking IGMP Reports 20-4
Configuration Examples 20-4
MAC Address-Table Move Update 20-6
Configuring Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move Update 20-7
Default Configuration 20-8
Configuring Flex Links 20-9
Configuring VLAN Load Balancing on Flex Links 20-11
Configuring the MAC Address-Table Move Update Feature 20-12
Monitoring Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move Update 20-14
CHAPTER 21 Configuring DHCP Features and IP Source Guard 21-1
Understanding DHCP Snooping 21-1

DHCP Server 21-2
DHCP Relay Agent 21-2
DHCP Snooping 21-2
Option-82 Data Insertion 21-3
Cisco IOS DHCP Server Database 21-6
DHCP Snooping Binding Database 21-6
Configuring DHCP Snooping 21-8
Default DHCP Snooping Configuration 21-8
DHCP Snooping Configuration Guidelines 21-9
Configuring the DHCP Server 21-10
Configuring the DHCP Relay Agent 21-10
Specifying the Packet Forwarding Address 21-10
Enabling DHCP Snooping and Option 82 21-12
Enabling DHCP Snooping on Private VLANs 21-13
Enabling the Cisco IOS DHCP Server Database 21-14
Enabling the DHCP Snooping Binding Database Agent 21-14
Displaying DHCP Snooping Information 21-15
Understanding IP Source Guard 21-15

Source IP Address Filtering 21-16
Source IP and MAC Address Filtering 21-16

xx OL-8553-06
Contents
Configuring IP Source Guard 21-16

Default IP Source Guard Configuration 21-16
IP Source Guard Configuration Guidelines 21-17
Enabling IP Source Guard 21-17
Displaying IP Source Guard Information 21-19
Understanding DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation 21-19
Configuring DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation 21-19

Default Port-Based Address Allocation Configuration 21-19
Port-Based Address Allocation Configuration Guidelines 21-20
Enabling DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation 21-20
Displaying DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation 21-22
CHAPTER 22 Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection 22-1
Understanding Dynamic ARP Inspection 22-1

Interface Trust States and Network Security 22-3
Rate Limiting of ARP Packets 22-4
Relative Priority of ARP ACLs and DHCP Snooping Entries 22-4
Logging of Dropped Packets 22-4
Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection 22-5
Default Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration 22-5
Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration Guidelines 22-6
Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection in DHCP Environments 22-7
Configuring ARP ACLs for Non-DHCP Environments 22-8
Limiting the Rate of Incoming ARP Packets 22-10
Performing Validation Checks 22-11
Configuring the Log Buffer 22-12
Displaying Dynamic ARP Inspection Information 22-14
CHAPTER 23 Configuring IGMP Snooping and MVR 23-1
Understanding IGMP Snooping 23-2

IGMP Versions 23-3
Joining a Multicast Group 23-3
Leaving a Multicast Group 23-5
Immediate Leave 23-5
IGMP Configurable-Leave Timer 23-6
IGMP Report Suppression 23-6

OL-8553-06 xxi
Contents
Configuring IGMP Snooping 23-6

Default IGMP Snooping Configuration 23-7
Enabling or Disabling IGMP Snooping 23-7
Setting the Snooping Method 23-8
Configuring a Multicast Router Port 23-9
Configuring a Host Statically to Join a Group 23-10
Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave 23-10
Configuring the IGMP Leave Timer 23-11
Configuring TCN-Related Commands 23-12
Controlling the Multicast Flooding Time After a TCN Event 23-12
Recovering from Flood Mode 23-13
Disabling Multicast Flooding During a TCN Event 23-13
Configuring the IGMP Snooping Querier 23-14
Disabling IGMP Report Suppression 23-15
Displaying IGMP Snooping Information 23-15
Understanding Multicast VLAN Registration 23-17

Using MVR in a Multicast Television Application 23-17
Configuring MVR 23-19

Default MVR Configuration 23-19
MVR Configuration Guidelines and Limitations 23-19
Configuring MVR Global Parameters 23-20
Configuring MVR Interfaces 23-21
Displaying MVR Information 23-23
Configuring IGMP Filtering and Throttling 23-23

Default IGMP Filtering and Throttling Configuration 23-24
Configuring IGMP Profiles 23-24
Applying IGMP Profiles 23-26
Setting the Maximum Number of IGMP Groups 23-26
Configuring the IGMP Throttling Action 23-27
Displaying IGMP Filtering and Throttling Configuration 23-28
CHAPTER 24 Configuring Port-Based Traffic Control 24-1
Configuring Storm Control 24-1

Understanding Storm Control 24-1
Default Storm Control Configuration 24-3
Configuring Storm Control and Threshold Levels 24-3
Configuring Small-Frame Arrival Rate 24-5

xxii OL-8553-06
Contents
Configuring Protected Ports 24-6

Default Protected Port Configuration 24-6
Protected Port Configuration Guidelines 24-7
Configuring a Protected Port 24-7
Configuring Port Blocking 24-7
Default Port Blocking Configuration 24-8
Blocking Flooded Traffic on an Interface 24-8
Configuring Port Security 24-8
Understanding Port Security 24-9
Secure MAC Addresses 24-9
Security Violations 24-10
Default Port Security Configuration 24-11
Port Security Configuration Guidelines 24-11
Enabling and Configuring Port Security 24-13
Enabling and Configuring Port Security Aging 24-17
Port Security and Private VLANs 24-18
Displaying Port-Based Traffic Control Settings 24-19
CHAPTER 25 Configuring CDP 25-1
Understanding CDP 25-1
Configuring CDP 25-2

Default CDP Configuration 25-2
Configuring the CDP Characteristics 25-2
Disabling and Enabling CDP 25-3
Disabling and Enabling CDP on an Interface 25-4
Monitoring and Maintaining CDP 25-4
CHAPTER 26 Configuring LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired Location Service 26-1
Understanding LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired Location Service 26-1

LLDP 26-1
LLDP-MED 26-2
Wired Location Service 26-3
Configuring LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired Location Service 26-4
Default LLDP Configuration 26-4
Enabling LLDP 26-5
Configuring LLDP Characteristics 26-5

OL-8553-06 xxiii
Contents
Configuring LLDP-MED TLVs 26-6

Configuring Network-Policy TLV 26-7
Configuring Location TLV and Wired Location Service 26-9
Monitoring and Maintaining LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired Location Service 26-10
CHAPTER 27 Configuring UDLD 27-1
Understanding UDLD 27-1

Modes of Operation 27-1
Methods to Detect Unidirectional Links 27-2
Configuring UDLD 27-3

Default UDLD Configuration 27-4
Enabling UDLD Globally 27-5
Enabling UDLD on an Interface 27-5
Resetting an Interface Disabled by UDLD 27-6
Displaying UDLD Status 27-6
CHAPTER 28 Configuring SPAN and RSPAN 28-1
Understanding SPAN and RSPAN 28-1

Local SPAN 28-2
Remote SPAN 28-2
SPAN and RSPAN Concepts and Terminology 28-3
SPAN Sessions 28-3
Monitored Traffic 28-4
Source Ports 28-5
Source VLANs 28-6
VLAN Filtering 28-6
Destination Port 28-7
RSPAN VLAN 28-8
SPAN and RSPAN Interaction with Other Features 28-8
Configuring SPAN and RSPAN 28-9
Default SPAN and RSPAN Configuration 28-9
Configuring Local SPAN 28-10
SPAN Configuration Guidelines 28-10
Creating a Local SPAN Session 28-11
Creating a Local SPAN Session and Configuring Incoming Traffic 28-13
Specifying VLANs to Filter 28-15

xxiv OL-8553-06
Contents
Configuring RSPAN 28-16

RSPAN Configuration Guidelines 28-16
Configuring a VLAN as an RSPAN VLAN 28-17
Creating an RSPAN Source Session 28-18
Creating an RSPAN Destination Session 28-19
Creating an RSPAN Destination Session and Configuring Incoming Traffic 28-20
Specifying VLANs to Filter 28-22
Displaying SPAN and RSPAN Status 28-23
CHAPTER 29 Configuring RMON 29-1
Understanding RMON 29-1
Configuring RMON 29-2

Default RMON Configuration 29-3
Configuring RMON Alarms and Events 29-3
Collecting Group History Statistics on an Interface 29-5
Collecting Group Ethernet Statistics on an Interface 29-5
Displaying RMON Status 29-6
CHAPTER 30 Configuring System Message Logging 30-1
Understanding System Message Logging 30-1
Configuring System Message Logging 30-2

System Log Message Format 30-2
Default System Message Logging Configuration 30-3
Disabling Message Logging 30-4
Setting the Message Display Destination Device 30-5
Synchronizing Log Messages 30-6
Enabling and Disabling Time Stamps on Log Messages 30-7
Enabling and Disabling Sequence Numbers in Log Messages 30-8
Defining the Message Severity Level 30-8
Limiting Syslog Messages Sent to the History Table and to SNMP 30-10
Enabling the Configuration-Change Logger 30-10
Configuring UNIX Syslog Servers 30-12
Logging Messages to a UNIX Syslog Daemon 30-12
Configuring the UNIX System Logging Facility 30-12
Displaying the Logging Configuration 30-13

OL-8553-06 xxv
Contents
CHAPTER 31 Configuring SNMP 31-1
Understanding SNMP 31-1

SNMP Versions 31-2
SNMP Manager Functions 31-3
SNMP Agent Functions 31-3
SNMP Community Strings 31-4
Using SNMP to Access MIB Variables 31-4
SNMP Notifications 31-5
SNMP ifIndex MIB Object Values 31-5
Configuring SNMP 31-6
Default SNMP Configuration 31-6
SNMP Configuration Guidelines 31-6
Disabling the SNMP Agent 31-7
Configuring Community Strings 31-8
Configuring SNMP Groups and Users 31-9
Configuring SNMP Notifications 31-11
Setting the CPU Threshold Notification Types and Values 31-15
Setting the Agent Contact and Location Information 31-16
Limiting TFTP Servers Used Through SNMP 31-16
SNMP Examples 31-17
Displaying SNMP Status 31-18
CHAPTER 32 Configuring Embedded Event Manager 32-1
Understanding Embedded Event Manager 32-1

Event Detectors 32-2
Embedded Event Manager Actions 32-4
Embedded Event Manager Policies 32-4
Embedded Event Manager Environment Variables 32-5
Configuring Embedded Event Manager 32-5

Registering and Defining an Embedded Event Manager Applet 32-5
Registering and Defining an Embedded Event Manager TCL Script 32-6
Displaying Embedded Event Manager Information 32-7
CHAPTER 33 Configuring Network Security with ACLs 33-1
Understanding ACLs 33-1

Supported ACLs 33-2
Port ACLs 33-3
Router ACLs 33-4
VLAN Maps 33-5

xxvi OL-8553-06
Contents
Handling Fragmented and Unfragmented Traffic 33-5
Configuring IPv4 ACLs 33-6

Creating Standard and Extended IPv4 ACLs 33-7
Access List Numbers 33-8
ACL Logging 33-8
Creating a Numbered Standard ACL 33-9
Creating a Numbered Extended ACL 33-10
Resequencing ACEs in an ACL 33-14
Creating Named Standard and Extended ACLs 33-14
Using Time Ranges with ACLs 33-16
Including Comments in ACLs 33-18
Applying an IPv4 ACL to a Terminal Line 33-18
Applying an IPv4 ACL to an Interface 33-19
Hardware and Software Treatment of IP ACLs 33-21
Troubleshooting ACLs 33-21
IPv4 ACL Configuration Examples 33-22
Numbered ACLs 33-24
Extended ACLs 33-24
Named ACLs 33-24
Time Range Applied to an IP ACL 33-25
Commented IP ACL Entries 33-25
ACL Logging 33-26
Creating Named MAC Extended ACLs 33-27
Applying a MAC ACL to a Layer 2 Interface 33-28
Configuring VLAN Maps 33-29

VLAN Map Configuration Guidelines 33-30
Creating a VLAN Map 33-31
Examples of ACLs and VLAN Maps 33-32
Applying a VLAN Map to a VLAN 33-34
Using VLAN Maps in Your Network 33-34
Wiring Closet Configuration 33-34
Denying Access to a Server on Another VLAN 33-35
Using VLAN Maps with Router ACLs 33-36

VLAN Maps and Router ACL Configuration Guidelines 33-37
Examples of Router ACLs and VLAN Maps Applied to VLANs 33-38
ACLs and Switched Packets 33-38
ACLs and Bridged Packets 33-38

OL-8553-06 xxvii
Contents
ACLs and Routed Packets 33-39

ACLs and Multicast Packets 33-40
Displaying IPv4 ACL Configuration 33-40
CHAPTER 34 Configuring QoS 34-1
Understanding QoS 34-2

Basic QoS Model 34-3
Classification 34-5
Classification Based on QoS ACLs 34-7
Classification Based on Class Maps and Policy Maps 34-7
Policing and Marking 34-8
Policing on Physical Ports 34-9
Policing on SVIs 34-10
Mapping Tables 34-12
Queueing and Scheduling Overview 34-13
Weighted Tail Drop 34-13
SRR Shaping and Sharing 34-14
Queueing and Scheduling on Ingress Queues 34-15
Queueing and Scheduling on Egress Queues 34-16
Packet Modification 34-19
Configuring Auto-QoS 34-20
Generated Auto-QoS Configuration 34-20
Effects of Auto-QoS on the Configuration 34-25
Auto-QoS Configuration Guidelines 34-25
Upgrading from a Previous Software Release 34-26
Enabling Auto-QoS for VoIP 34-27
Auto-QoS Configuration Example 34-28
Displaying Auto-QoS Information 34-29
Configuring Standard QoS 34-30

Default Standard QoS Configuration 34-30
Default Ingress Queue Configuration 34-31
Default Egress Queue Configuration 34-31
Default Mapping Table Configuration 34-32
Standard QoS Configuration Guidelines 34-33
QoS ACL Guidelines 34-33
Applying QoS on Interfaces 34-33
Policing Guidelines 34-34
General QoS Guidelines 34-34
Enabling QoS Globally 34-35

xxviii OL-8553-06
Contents
Enabling VLAN-Based QoS on Physical Ports 34-35

Configuring Classification Using Port Trust States 34-36
Configuring the Trust State on Ports within the QoS Domain 34-36
Configuring the CoS Value for an Interface 34-38
Configuring a Trusted Boundary to Ensure Port Security 34-38
Enabling DSCP Transparency Mode 34-40
Configuring the DSCP Trust State on a Port Bordering Another QoS Domain 34-40
Configuring a QoS Policy 34-42
Classifying Traffic by Using ACLs 34-43
Classifying Traffic by Using Class Maps 34-46
Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic on Physical Ports by Using Policy Maps 34-48
Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic on SVIs by Using Hierarchical Policy Maps 34-52
Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic by Using Aggregate Policers 34-58
Configuring DSCP Maps 34-60
Configuring the CoS-to-DSCP Map 34-60
Configuring the IP-Precedence-to-DSCP Map 34-62
Configuring the Policed-DSCP Map 34-63
Configuring the DSCP-to-CoS Map 34-64
Configuring the DSCP-to-DSCP-Mutation Map 34-65
Configuring Ingress Queue Characteristics 34-66
Mapping DSCP or CoS Values to an Ingress Queue and Setting WTD Thresholds 34-67
Allocating Buffer Space Between the Ingress Queues 34-68
Allocating Bandwidth Between the Ingress Queues 34-68
Configuring the Ingress Priority Queue 34-69
Configuring Egress Queue Characteristics 34-70
Allocating Buffer Space to and Setting WTD Thresholds for an Egress Queue-Set 34-71
Mapping DSCP or CoS Values to an Egress Queue and to a Threshold ID 34-73
Configuring SRR Shaped Weights on Egress Queues 34-74
Configuring SRR Shared Weights on Egress Queues 34-75
Configuring the Egress Expedite Queue 34-76
Limiting the Bandwidth on an Egress Interface 34-77
Displaying Standard QoS Information 34-78
CHAPTER 35 Configuring EtherChannels and Link-State Tracking 35-1

Understanding EtherChannels 35-1
EtherChannel Overview 35-2
Port-Channel Interfaces 35-3
Port Aggregation Protocol 35-4

OL-8553-06 xxix
Contents
PAgP Modes 35-4

PAgP Interaction with Virtual Switches and Dual-Active Detection 35-5
PAgP Interaction with Other Features 35-5
Link Aggregation Control Protocol 35-5
LACP Modes 35-6
LACP Interaction with Other Features 35-6
EtherChannel On Mode 35-6
Load Balancing and Forwarding Methods 35-7
Configuring EtherChannels 35-8
Default EtherChannel Configuration 35-9
EtherChannel Configuration Guidelines 35-9
Configuring Layer 2 EtherChannels 35-10
Configuring Layer 3 EtherChannels 35-13
Creating Port-Channel Logical Interfaces 35-13
Configuring the Physical Interfaces 35-14
Configuring EtherChannel Load Balancing 35-16
Configuring the PAgP Learn Method and Priority 35-16
Configuring LACP Hot-Standby Ports 35-18
Configuring the LACP System Priority 35-19
Configuring the LACP Port Priority 35-19
Displaying EtherChannel, PAgP, and LACP Status 35-20
Understanding Link-State Tracking 35-21
Configuring Link-State Tracking 35-23

Default Link-State Tracking Configuration 35-24
Link-State Tracking Configuration Guidelines 35-24
Configuring Link-State Tracking 35-24
Displaying Link-State Tracking Status 35-25
CHAPTER 36 Configuring IP Unicast Routing 36-1
Understanding IP Routing 36-2

Types of Routing 36-2
Steps for Configuring Routing 36-3
Configuring IP Addressing 36-4

Default Addressing Configuration 36-4
Assigning IP Addresses to Network Interfaces 36-5
Use of Subnet Zero 36-6
Classless Routing 36-6

xxx OL-8553-06
Contents
Configuring Address Resolution Methods 36-8

Define a Static ARP Cache 36-9
Set ARP Encapsulation 36-9
Enable Proxy ARP 36-10
Routing Assistance When IP Routing is Disabled 36-10
Proxy ARP 36-11
Default Gateway 36-11
ICMP Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP) 36-11
Configuring Broadcast Packet Handling 36-13
Enabling Directed Broadcast-to-Physical Broadcast Translation 36-13
Forwarding UDP Broadcast Packets and Protocols 36-14
Establishing an IP Broadcast Address 36-15
Flooding IP Broadcasts 36-16
Monitoring and Maintaining IP Addressing 36-17
Enabling IP Unicast Routing 36-18
Configuring RIP 36-18

Default RIP Configuration 36-19
Configuring Basic RIP Parameters 36-20
Configuring RIP Authentication 36-21
Configuring Summary Addresses and Split Horizon 36-22
Configuring Split Horizon 36-23
Configuring OSPF 36-24
Default OSPF Configuration 36-25
OSPF NSF Awareness 36-26
Configuring Basic OSPF Parameters 36-26
Configuring OSPF Interfaces 36-27
Configuring OSPF Area Parameters 36-28
Configuring Other OSPF Parameters 36-29
Changing LSA Group Pacing 36-31
Configuring a Loopback Interface 36-32
Monitoring OSPF 36-32
Configuring EIGRP 36-33
Default EIGRP Configuration 36-34
EIGRP NSF Awareness 36-36
Configuring Basic EIGRP Parameters 36-36
Configuring EIGRP Interfaces 36-37
Configuring EIGRP Route Authentication 36-38
Configuring EIGRP Stub Routing 36-39
Monitoring and Maintaining EIGRP 36-40

OL-8553-06 xxxi
Contents
Configuring BGP 36-40

Default BGP Configuration 36-43
Nonstop Forwarding Awareness 36-45
Enabling BGP Routing 36-45
Managing Routing Policy Changes 36-47
Configuring BGP Decision Attributes 36-49
Configuring BGP Filtering with Route Maps 36-51
Configuring BGP Filtering by Neighbor 36-51
Configuring Prefix Lists for BGP Filtering 36-53
Configuring BGP Community Filtering 36-54
Configuring BGP Neighbors and Peer Groups 36-55
Configuring Aggregate Addresses 36-57
Configuring Routing Domain Confederations 36-58
Configuring BGP Route Reflectors 36-58
Configuring Route Dampening 36-59
Monitoring and Maintaining BGP 36-60
Configuring ISO CLNS Routing 36-61
Configuring IS-IS Dynamic Routing 36-62
Default IS-IS Configuration 36-63
Nonstop Forwarding Awareness 36-64
Enabling IS-IS Routing 36-64
Configuring IS-IS Global Parameters 36-66
Configuring IS-IS Interface Parameters 36-68
Monitoring and Maintaining ISO IGRP and IS-IS 36-70
Configuring Multi-VRF CE 36-71
Understanding Multi-VRF CE 36-72
Default Multi-VRF CE Configuration 36-74
Multi-VRF CE Configuration Guidelines 36-74
Configuring VRFs 36-75
Configuring Multicast VRFs 36-76
Configuring VRF-Aware Services 36-77
User Interface for ARP 36-77
User Interface for PING 36-78
User Interface for SNMP 36-78
User Interface for HSRP 36-78
User Interface for uRPF 36-79
User Interface for Syslog 36-79
User Interface for Traceroute 36-80
User Interface for FTP and TFTP 36-80

xxxii OL-8553-06
Contents
Configuring a VPN Routing Session 36-80

Configuring BGP PE to CE Routing Sessions 36-81
Multi-VRF CE Configuration Example 36-82
Displaying Multi-VRF CE Status 36-86
Configuring Protocol-Independent Features 36-86
Configuring Cisco Express Forwarding 36-86
Configuring the Number of Equal-Cost Routing Paths 36-88
Configuring Static Unicast Routes 36-88
Specifying Default Routes and Networks 36-89
Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information 36-90
Configuring Policy-Based Routing 36-94
PBR Configuration Guidelines 36-94
Enabling PBR 36-95
Filtering Routing Information 36-97
Setting Passive Interfaces 36-97
Controlling Advertising and Processing in Routing Updates 36-98
Filtering Sources of Routing Information 36-99
Managing Authentication Keys 36-99
Monitoring and Maintaining the IP Network 36-100
CHAPTER 37 Configuring IPv6 Unicast Routing 37-1
Understanding IPv6 37-1

IPv6 Addresses 37-2
Supported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features 37-2
128-Bit Wide Unicast Addresses 37-3
DNS for IPv6 37-4
Path MTU Discovery for IPv6 Unicast 37-4
ICMPv6 37-4
Neighbor Discovery 37-4
Default Router Preference 37-4
IPv6 Stateless Autoconfiguration and Duplicate Address Detection 37-5
IPv6 Applications 37-5
Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks 37-5
DHCP for IPv6 Address Assignment 37-6
Static Routes for IPv6 37-6
RIP for IPv6 37-6
OSPF for IPv6 37-6
EIGRP for IPv6 37-7
HSRP for IPv6 37-7

OL-8553-06 xxxiii
Contents
SNMP and Syslog Over IPv6 37-7

HTTP(S) Over IPv6 37-8
Unsupported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features 37-8
Limitations 37-8
Configuring IPv6 37-9
Default IPv6 Configuration 37-10
Configuring IPv6 Addressing and Enabling IPv6 Routing 37-10
Configuring Default Router Preference 37-12
Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks 37-13
Configuring DHCP for IPv6 Address Assignment 37-14
Default DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration 37-14
DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration Guidelines 37-14
Enabling DHCPv6 Server Function 37-15
Enabling DHCPv6 Client Function 37-17
Configuring IPv6 ICMP Rate Limiting 37-18
Configuring CEF for IPv6 37-18
Configuring Static Routes for IPv6 37-19
Configuring RIP for IPv6 37-20
Configuring OSPF for IPv6 37-21
Configuring EIGRP for IPv6 37-23
Configuring HSRP for IPv6 37-23
Enabling HSRP Version 2 37-24
Enabling an HSRP Group for IPv6 37-24
Displaying IPv6 37-25
CHAPTER 38 Configuring IPv6 MLD Snooping 38-1
Understanding MLD Snooping 38-1

MLD Messages 38-2
MLD Queries 38-2
Multicast Client Aging Robustness 38-3
Multicast Router Discovery 38-3
MLD Reports 38-4
MLD Done Messages and Immediate-Leave 38-4
Topology Change Notification Processing 38-4
Configuring IPv6 MLD Snooping 38-5
Default MLD Snooping Configuration 38-5
MLD Snooping Configuration Guidelines 38-6
Enabling or Disabling MLD Snooping 38-6
Configuring a Static Multicast Group 38-7

xxxiv OL-8553-06
Contents
Configuring a Multicast Router Port 38-8

Enabling MLD Immediate Leave 38-8
Configuring MLD Snooping Queries 38-9
Disabling MLD Listener Message Suppression 38-10
Displaying MLD Snooping Information 38-11
CHAPTER 39 Configuring IPv6 ACLs 39-1
Understanding IPv6 ACLs 39-2

Supported ACL Features 39-2
IPv6 ACL Limitations 39-3
Configuring IPv6 ACLs 39-3
Default IPv6 ACL Configuration 39-4
Interaction with Other Features 39-4
Creating IPv6 ACLs 39-4
Applying an IPv6 ACL to an Interface 39-8
Displaying IPv6 ACLs 39-9
CHAPTER 40 Configuring HSRP 40-1
Understanding HSRP 40-1

HSRP Versions 40-3
Multiple HSRP 40-4
Configuring HSRP 40-4
Default HSRP Configuration 40-5
HSRP Configuration Guidelines 40-5
Enabling HSRP 40-6
Configuring HSRP Priority 40-7
Configuring MHSRP 40-10
Configuring HSRP Authentication and Timers 40-10
Enabling HSRP Support for ICMP Redirect Messages 40-12
Configuring HSRP Groups and Clustering 40-12
Troubleshooting HSRP 40-12
Displaying HSRP Configurations 40-13
CHAPTER 41 Configuring Cisco IOS IP SLAs Operations 41-1

Understanding Cisco IOS IP SLAs 41-1
Using Cisco IOS IP SLAs to Measure Network Performance 41-3
IP SLAs Responder and IP SLAs Control Protocol 41-4
Response Time Computation for IP SLAs 41-4

OL-8553-06 xxxv
Contents
IP SLAs Operation Scheduling 41-5

IP SLAs Operation Threshold Monitoring 41-5
Configuring IP SLAs Operations 41-6

Configuring the IP SLAs Responder 41-8
Analyzing IP Service Levels by Using the UDP Jitter Operation 41-8
Analyzing IP Service Levels by Using the ICMP Echo Operation 41-11
Monitoring IP SLAs Operations 41-13
CHAPTER 42 Configuring Enhanced Object Tracking 42-1
Understanding Enhanced Object Tracking 42-1
Configuring Enhanced Object Tracking Features 42-2

Tracking Interface Line-Protocol or IP Routing State 42-2
Configuring a Tracked List 42-3
Configuring a Tracked List with a Boolean Expression 42-3
Configuring a Tracked List with a Weight Threshold 42-4
Configuring a Tracked List with a Percentage Threshold 42-5
Configuring HSRP Object Tracking 42-7
Configuring Other Tracking Characteristics 42-8
Configuring IP SLAs Object Tracking 42-9
Configuring Static Routing Support 42-10
Configuring a Primary Interface 42-10
Configuring a Cisco IP SLAs Monitoring Agent and Track Object 42-11
Configuring a Routing Policy and Default Route 42-12
Monitoring Enhanced Object Tracking 42-12
CHAPTER 43 Configuring Web Cache Services By Using WCCP 43-1
Understanding WCCP 43-1

WCCP Message Exchange 43-2
WCCP Negotiation 43-3
MD5 Security 43-3
Packet Redirection and Service Groups 43-3
Unsupported WCCP Features 43-4

xxxvi OL-8553-06
Contents
Configuring WCCP 43-5

Default WCCP Configuration 43-5
WCCP Configuration Guidelines 43-5
Enabling the Web Cache Service 43-6
Monitoring and Maintaining WCCP 43-9
CHAPTER 44 Configuring IP Multicast Routing 44-1
Understanding Cisco’s Implementation of IP Multicast Routing 44-2

Understanding IGMP 44-3
IGMP Version 1 44-3
IGMP Version 2 44-3
Understanding PIM 44-4
PIM Versions 44-4
PIM Modes 44-4
PIM Stub Routing 44-5
IGMP Helper 44-6
Auto-RP 44-6
Bootstrap Router 44-7
Multicast Forwarding and Reverse Path Check 44-7
Understanding DVMRP 44-8
Understanding CGMP 44-9
Configuring IP Multicast Routing 44-9
Default Multicast Routing Configuration 44-10
Multicast Routing Configuration Guidelines 44-10
PIMv1 and PIMv2 Interoperability 44-10
Auto-RP and BSR Configuration Guidelines 44-11
Configuring Basic Multicast Routing 44-11
Configuring Source-Specific Multicast 44-13
SSM Components Overview 44-13
How SSM Differs from Internet Standard Multicast 44-14
SSM IP Address Range 44-14
SSM Operations 44-14
IGMPv3 Host Signalling 44-15
Configuring SSM 44-16
Monitoring SSM 44-16
Configuring Source Specific Multicast Mapping 44-16
SSM Mapping Overview 44-17

OL-8553-06 xxxvii
Contents
Configuring SSM Mapping 44-19

Monitoring SSM Mapping 44-21
Configuring PIM Stub Routing 44-22
PIM Stub Routing Configuration Guidelines 44-22
Enabling PIM Stub Routing 44-22
Configuring a Rendezvous Point 44-23
Manually Assigning an RP to Multicast Groups 44-23
Configuring Auto-RP 44-25
Configuring PIMv2 BSR 44-29
Using Auto-RP and a BSR 44-33
Monitoring the RP Mapping Information 44-33
Troubleshooting PIMv1 and PIMv2 Interoperability Problems 44-34
Configuring Advanced PIM Features 44-34

Understanding PIM Shared Tree and Source Tree 44-34
Delaying the Use of PIM Shortest-Path Tree 44-35
Modifying the PIM Router-Query Message Interval 44-36
Configuring Optional IGMP Features 44-37
Default IGMP Configuration 44-38
Configuring the Switch as a Member of a Group 44-38
Controlling Access to IP Multicast Groups 44-39
Changing the IGMP Version 44-40
Modifying the IGMP Host-Query Message Interval 44-40
Changing the IGMP Query Timeout for IGMPv2 44-41
Changing the Maximum Query Response Time for IGMPv2 44-42
Configuring the Switch as a Statically Connected Member 44-42
Configuring Optional Multicast Routing Features 44-43
Enabling CGMP Server Support 44-43
Configuring sdr Listener Support 44-44
Enabling sdr Listener Support 44-45
Limiting How Long an sdr Cache Entry Exists 44-45
Configuring an IP Multicast Boundary 44-45
Configuring Basic DVMRP Interoperability Features 44-47
Configuring DVMRP Interoperability 44-48
Configuring a DVMRP Tunnel 44-50
Advertising Network 0.0.0.0 to DVMRP Neighbors 44-51
Responding to mrinfo Requests 44-52
Configuring Advanced DVMRP Interoperability Features 44-52
Enabling DVMRP Unicast Routing 44-53
Rejecting a DVMRP Nonpruning Neighbor 44-54

xxxviii OL-8553-06
Contents
Controlling Route Exchanges 44-55

Limiting the Number of DVMRP Routes Advertised 44-56
Changing the DVMRP Route Threshold 44-56
Configuring a DVMRP Summary Address 44-57
Disabling DVMRP Autosummarization 44-59
Adding a Metric Offset to the DVMRP Route 44-59
Monitoring and Maintaining IP Multicast Routing 44-60
Clearing Caches, Tables, and Databases 44-60
Displaying System and Network Statistics 44-61
Monitoring IP Multicast Routing 44-62
CHAPTER 45 Configuring MSDP 45-1
Understanding MSDP 45-1

MSDP Operation 45-2
MSDP Benefits 45-3
Configuring MSDP 45-3
Default MSDP Configuration 45-4
Configuring a Default MSDP Peer 45-4
Caching Source-Active State 45-6
Requesting Source Information from an MSDP Peer 45-8
Controlling Source Information that Your Switch Originates 45-8
Redistributing Sources 45-9
Filtering Source-Active Request Messages 45-10
Controlling Source Information that Your Switch Forwards 45-11
Using a Filter 45-12
Using TTL to Limit the Multicast Data Sent in SA Messages 45-13
Controlling Source Information that Your Switch Receives 45-13
Configuring an MSDP Mesh Group 45-15
Shutting Down an MSDP Peer 45-15
Including a Bordering PIM Dense-Mode Region in MSDP 45-16
Configuring an Originating Address other than the RP Address 45-17
Monitoring and Maintaining MSDP 45-18
CHAPTER 46 Configuring Fallback Bridging 46-1
Understanding Fallback Bridging 46-1
Configuring Fallback Bridging 46-2

Default Fallback Bridging Configuration 46-3
Fallback Bridging Configuration Guidelines 46-3
Creating a Bridge Group 46-3

OL-8553-06 xxxix
Contents
Adjusting Spanning-Tree Parameters 46-5

Changing the VLAN-Bridge Spanning-Tree Priority 46-5
Changing the Interface Priority 46-6
Assigning a Path Cost 46-6
Adjusting BPDU Intervals 46-7
Disabling the Spanning Tree on an Interface 46-9
Monitoring and Maintaining Fallback Bridging 46-10
CHAPTER 47 Troubleshooting 47-1
Recovering from a Software Failure 47-2
Recovering from a Lost or Forgotten Password 47-3

Procedure with Password Recovery Enabled 47-4
Procedure with Password Recovery Disabled 47-6
Recovering from a Command Switch Failure 47-7
Replacing a Failed Command Switch with a Cluster Member 47-8
Replacing a Failed Command Switch with Another Switch 47-10
Recovering from Lost Cluster Member Connectivity 47-11
Preventing Autonegotiation Mismatches 47-11
Troubleshooting Power over Ethernet Switch Ports 47-12

Disabled Port Caused by Power Loss 47-12
Disabled Port Caused by False Link Up 47-12
SFP Module Security and Identification 47-12
Monitoring SFP Module Status 47-13
Monitoring Temperature 47-13
Using Ping 47-13

Understanding Ping 47-13
Executing Ping 47-14
Using Layer 2 Traceroute 47-15
Understanding Layer 2 Traceroute 47-15
Usage Guidelines 47-15
Displaying the Physical Path 47-16
Using IP Traceroute 47-16
Understanding IP Traceroute 47-16
Executing IP Traceroute 47-17
Using TDR 47-18
Understanding TDR 47-18
Running TDR and Displaying the Results 47-19

xl OL-8553-06
Contents
Using Debug Commands 47-19

Enabling Debugging on a Specific Feature 47-19
Enabling All-System Diagnostics 47-20
Redirecting Debug and Error Message Output 47-20
Using the show platform forward Command 47-20
Using the crashinfo Files 47-23

Basic crashinfo Files 47-23
Extended crashinfo Files 47-23
Troubleshooting Tables 47-24
Troubleshooting CPU Utilization 47-24
Possible Symptoms of High CPU Utilization 47-24
Verifying the Problem and Cause 47-24
Troubleshooting Power over Ethernet (PoE) 47-26
Troubleshooting Stackwise 47-29
CHAPTER 48 Configuring Online Diagnostics 48-1
Understanding How Online Diagnostics Work 48-1
Scheduling Online Diagnostics 48-1
Configuring Health-Monitoring Diagnostics 48-2
Running Online Diagnostic Tests 48-3

Starting Online Diagnostic Tests 48-3
Displaying Online Diagnostic Tests and Test Results 48-3
APPENDIX A Supported MIBs A-1

MIB List A-1
Using FTP to Access the MIB Files A-3
APPENDIX B Working with the Cisco IOS File System, Configuration Files, and Software Images B-1
Working with the Flash File System B-1

Displaying Available File Systems B-2
Setting the Default File System B-3
Displaying Information about Files on a File System B-3
Changing Directories and Displaying the Working Directory B-4
Creating and Removing Directories B-4
Copying Files B-5
Deleting Files B-5

OL-8553-06 xli
Contents
Creating, Displaying, and Extracting tar Files B-6

Creating a tar File B-6
Displaying the Contents of a tar File B-7
Extracting a tar File B-7
Displaying the Contents of a File B-8
Working with Configuration Files B-8
Guidelines for Creating and Using Configuration Files B-9
Configuration File Types and Location n B-10
Creating a Configuration File By Using a Text Editor B-10
Copying Configuration Files By Using TFTP B-10
Preparing to Download or Upload a Configuration File B y Using TFTP B-10
Downloading the Configuration File By Using TFTP B-11
Uploading the Configuration File By Using TFTP B-12
Copying Configuration Files By Using FTP B-12
Preparing to Download or Upload a Configuration File By Using FTP B-13
Downloading a Configuration File By Using FTP B-13
Uploading a Configuration File By Using FTP B-14
Copying Configuration Files By Using RCP B-15
Preparing to Download or Upload a Configuration File By Using RCP B-16
Downloading a Configuration File By Using RCP B-17
Uploading a Configuration File By Using RCP B-18
Clearing Configuration Information B-18
Clearing the Startup Configuration File B-19
Deleting a Stored Configuration File B-19
Replacing and Rolling Back Configurations B-19
Understanding Configuration Replacement and Rollback B-19
Configuration Guidelines B-21
Configuring the Configuration Archive B-21
Performing a Configuration Replacement or Rollback Operation B-22
Working with Software Images B-23
Image Location on the Switch B-24
tar File Format of Images on a Server or Cisco.com B-24
Copying Image Files By Using TFTP B-25
Preparing to Download or Upload an Image File By Using TFTP B-25
Downloading an Image File By Using TFTP B-26
Uploading an Image File By Using TFTP B-28
Copying Image Files By Using FTP B-28
Preparing to Download or Upload an Image File By Using FTP B-29
Downloading an Image File By Using FTP B-30
Uploading an Image File By Using FTP B-31

xlii OL-8553-06
Contents
Copying Image Files By Using RCP B-32

Preparing to Download or Upload an Image File By Using RCP B-33
Downloading an Image File By Using RCP B-34
Uploading an Image File By Using RCP B-36
APPENDIX C Unsupported Commands in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE C-1
Access Control Lists C-2

Unsupported Privileged EXEC Commands C-2
Unsupported Global Configuration Commands C-2
Unsupported Route-Map Configuration Commands C-2
Archive Commands C-2
ARP Commands C-3

Unsupported Interface Configuration Commands C-3
Boot Loader Commands C-3
Embedded Event Manager C-3

Unsupported Commands in Applet Configuration Mode C-4
Debug Commands C-4

FallBack Bridging C-4

High Availability C-6
Unsupported SSO-Aware HSRP Commands C-6
HSRP C-6
IGMP Snooping Commands C-6
Interface Commands C-7


OL-8553-06 xliii
Contents
IP Multicast Routing C-7

IP SLA C-8
Unsupported MPLS Health Monitor Commands C-8
Unsupported Ethernet Gatekeeper Registration Commands C-8
Unsupported VoIP Call Setup Probe Commands C-8
IP Unicast Routing C-9
Unsupported Privileged EXEC or User EXEC Commands C-9
Unsupported BGP Router Configuration Commands C-10
Unsupported VPN Configuration Commands C-10
Unsupported Route Map Commands C-10
IPv6 C-11
IPv4-v6 Tunneling Commands C-11
Layer 3 C-11
BGP C-11
Other Unsupported BGP Commands C-11
OSPF C-12
VRF aware AAA C-13
MAC Address Commands C-13
Miscellaneous C-14
Unsupported User EXEC Commands C-14
MSDP C-14
Multicast C-15
Unsupported BiDirectional PIM Commands C-15
Unsupported Multicast Routing Manager Commands C-15
Unsupported IP Multicast Rate Limiting Commands C-15
Unsupported UDLR Commands C-15
Unsupported Multicast Over GRE Commands C-15

xliv OL-8553-06
Contents
NetFlow Commands C-15

Network Address Translation (NAT) Commands C-15

QoS C-16
Unsupported Global Configuration Command C-16
Unsupported Policy-Map Configuration Command C-16
RADIUS C-16
SNMP C-16
SNMPv3 C-17
Unsupported 3DES Encryption Commands C-17
Spanning Tree C-17

Unsupported Interface Configuration Command C-17
VLAN C-17
Unsupported User EXEC Commands C-17
VTP C-17
INDEX

OL-8553-06 xlv
Contents

xlvi OL-8553-06
Preface
Audience
This guide is for the networking professional managing the Catalyst 3560 switch, hereafter referred to
as the switch. Before using this guide, you should have experience working with the Cisco IOS software
and be familiar with the concepts and terminology of Ethernet and local area networking.
Purpose
The Catalyst 3560 switch is supported by either the IP base image (formerly known as the standard
multilayer image [SMI]) or the IP services image (formerly known as the enhanced multilayer image
[EMI]). The IP base image provides Layer 2+ features including access control lists (ACLs), quality of
service (QoS), static routing, EIGRP stub routing, and the Routing Information IP services image
provides a richer set of enterprise-class features. It includes Layer 2+ features and full Layer 3 routing
(IP unicast routing, IP multicast routing, and fallback bridging). To distinguish it from the Layer 2+
static routing and RIP, the IP services image includes protocols such as the Enhanced Interior Gateway
Routing Protocol (EIGRP) and the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol.
This guide provides procedures for using the commands that have been created or changed for use with
the switch. It does not provide detailed information about these commands. For detailed information
about these commands, see the Catalyst 3560 Switch Command Reference for this release. For
information about the standard Cisco IOS Release 12.2 commands, see the Cisco IOS documentation set
available from the Cisco.com home page at Documentation > Cisco IOS Software.
This guide does not provide detailed information on the graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for the
embedded device manager or for Cisco Network Assistant (hereafter referred to as Network Assistant)
that you can use to manage the switch. However, the concepts in this guide are applicable to the GUI
user. For information about the device manager, see the switch online help. For information about
Network Assistant, see Getting Started with Cisco Network Assistant, available on Cisco.com.
This guide does not describe system messages you might encounter or how to install your switch. For
more information, see the Catalyst 3560 Switch System Message Guide for this release and the
Catalyst 3560 Switch Hardware Installation Guide.
For documentation updates, see the release notes for this release.

OL-8553-06 xlv
Preface
Conventions
This publication uses these conventions to convey instructions and information:
Command descriptions use these conventions:
• Commands and keywords are in boldface text.
• Arguments for which you supply values are in italic.
• Square brackets ([ ]) mean optional elements.
• Braces ({ }) group required choices, and vertical bars ( | ) separate the alternative elements.
• Braces and vertical bars within square brackets ([{ | }]) mean a required choice within an optional
element.
Interactive examples use these conventions:
• Terminal sessions and system displays are in screen font.
• Information you enter is in boldface screen font.
• Nonprinting characters, such as passwords or tabs, are in angle brackets (< >).
Notes, cautions, and timesavers use these conventions and symbols:
Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in
this manual.
Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment
damage or loss of data.
Related Publications
These documents provide complete information about the switch and are available from this Cisco.com
site:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps5528/tsd_products_support_series_home.html
Note Before installing, configuring, or upgrading the switch, see these documents:
• For initial configuration information, see the “Using Express Setup” section in the getting started
guide or the “Configuring the Switch with the CLI-Based Setup Program” appendix in the hardware
installation guide.
• For device manager requirements, see the “System Requirements” section in the release notes (not
orderable but available on Cisco.com).
• For Network Assistant requirements, see the Getting Started with Cisco Network Assistant (not
orderable but available on Cisco.com).

xlvi OL-8553-06
Preface
• For cluster requirements, see the Release Notes for Cisco Network Assistant (not orderable but
available on Cisco.com).
• For upgrading information, see the “Downloading Software” section in the release notes.
See these documents for other information about the switch:

• Release Notes for the Catalyst 3750, 3560, 2970, and 2960 Switches
• Catalyst 3750, 3560, 3550, 2975, 2975, 2970, and 2960 Switch System Message Guide
• Catalyst 3560 Switch Software Configuration Guide
• Catalyst 3560 Switch Command Reference
• Device manager online help (available on the switch)
• Catalyst 3560 Switch Hardware Installation Guide
• Catalyst 3560 Switch Getting Started Guide
• Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the Catalyst 3560 Switch
• Getting Started with Cisco Network Assistant
• Release Notes for Cisco Network Assistant
• Cisco Small Form-Factor Pluggable Modules Installation Notes
• Cisco CWDM GBIC and CWDM SFP Installation Note
• Cisco RPS 300 Redundant Power System Hardware Installation Guide
• Cisco RPS 675 Redundant Power System Hardware Installation Guide
• Cisco Redundant Power System 2300 Hardware Installation Guide
• For more information about the Network Admission Control (NAC) features, see the Network
Admission Control Software Configuration Guide
• These compatibility matrix documents are available from this Cisco.com site:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps5455/products_device_support_tables_list.html
– Cisco Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver Modules Compatibility Matrix
– Cisco 100-Megabit Ethernet SFP Modules Compatibility Matrix
– Cisco Small Form-Factor Pluggable Modules Compatibility Matrix
– Compatibility Matrix for 1000BASE-T Small Form-Factor Pluggable Modules
Obtaining Documentation, Obtaining Support, and Security

Guidelines
For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional
information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and
revised Cisco technical documentation, at:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html
Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed
and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free
service and Cisco currently supports RSS version 2.0.

OL-8553-06 xlvii
Preface

xlviii OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 1
Overview
This chapter provides these topics about the Catalyst 3560 switch software:
• Features, page 1-1
• Default Settings After Initial Switch Configuration, page 1-14
• Network Configuration Examples, page 1-17
• Where to Go Next, page 1-23
In this document, IP refers to IP Version 4 (IPv4) unless there is a specific reference to IP Version 6
(IPv6).
Features
The switch ships with either of these software images installed:
• IP base image (formerly known as the standard multilayer image [SMI]), which provides Layer 2+
features (enterprise-class intelligent services). These features include access control lists (ACLs),
quality of service (QoS), static routing, EIGRP stub routing, PIM stub routing, the Hot Standby
Router Protocol (HSRP), and the Routing Information Protocol (RIP). Switches with the IP base
image installed can be upgraded to IP services image (formerly known as the enhanced multilayer
image [EMI].)
• IP services image, which provides a richer set of enterprise-class intelligent services. It includes all
IP base image features plus full Layer 3 routing (IP unicast routing, IP multicast routing, and
fallback bridging). To distinguish it from the Layer 2+ static routing and RIP, the IP services image
includes protocols such as the Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) and the Open
Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol.
IP services image-only Layer 3 features are described in the “Layer 3 Features” section on
page 1-12.
Note Unless otherwise noted, all features described in this chapter and in this guide are supported on
both the IP base image and IP services image.
IPv6 Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping is supported in all Catalyst 3560 and 3750 images;
for more information, see Chapter 38, “Configuring IPv6 MLD Snooping.”
For full IPv6 support, the IP services image is required. For more information on IPv6 routing, see
Chapter 37, “Configuring IPv6 Unicast Routing.”

OL-8553-06 1-1
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
For more information on IPv6 ACLs, see Chapter 39, “Configuring IPv6 ACLs.”
Some features described in this chapter are available only on the cryptographic (supports encryption)
versions of the software IP base and IP services images. You must obtain authorization to use this feature
and to download the cryptographic version of the software from Cisco.com. For more information, see
the release notes for this release.
• Ease-of-Deployment and Ease-of-Use Features, page 1-2
• Performance Features, page 1-3
• Management Options, page 1-4
• Manageability Features, page 1-5 (includes a feature requiring the cryptographic versions of the
software IP base and IP services images)
• Availability and Redundancy Features, page 1-7
• VLAN Features, page 1-7
• Security Features, page 1-8 (includes a feature requiring the cryptographic versions of the software
IP base and IP services images)
• QoS and CoS Features, page 1-11
• Layer 3 Features, page 1-12 (includes features requiring the IP services image)
• Power over Ethernet Features, page 1-13
• Monitoring Features, page 1-13
Ease-of-Deployment and Ease-of-Use Features

• Express Setup for quickly configuring a switch for the first time with basic IP information, contact
information, switch and Telnet passwords, and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
information through a browser-based program. For more information about Express Setup, see the
getting started guide.
• User-defined and Cisco-default Smartports macros for creating custom switch configurations for
simplified deployment across the network.
• An embedded device manager GUI for configuring and monitoring a single switch through a web
browser. For information about launching the device manager, see the getting started guide. For more
information about the device manager, see the switch online help.
• Cisco Network Assistant (hereafter referred to as Network Assistant) for
– Managing communities, which are device groups like clusters, except that they can contain
routers and access points and can be made more secure.
– Simplifying and minimizing switch and switch cluster management from anywhere in your
intranet.
– Accomplishing multiple configuration tasks from a single graphical interface without needing
to remember command-line interface (CLI) commands to accomplish specific tasks.
– Interactive guide mode that guides you in configuring complex features such as VLANs, ACLs,
and quality of service (QoS).
– Configuration wizards that prompt you to provide only the minimum required information to
configure complex features such as QoS priorities for traffic, priority levels for data
applications, and security.
– Downloading an image to a switch.

1-2 OL-8553-06
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
– Applying actions to multiple ports and multiple switches at the same time, such as VLAN and
QoS settings, inventory and statistic reports, link- and switch-level monitoring and
troubleshooting, and multiple switch software upgrades.
– Viewing a topology of interconnected devices to identify existing switch clusters and eligible
switches that can join a cluster and to identify link information between switches.
– Monitoring real-time status of a switch or multiple switches from the LEDs on the front-panel
images. The system, redundant power system (RPS), and port LED colors on the images are
similar to those used on the physical LEDs.
Note The Network Assistant must be downloaded from cisco.com/go/cna.
• Switch clustering technology for

– Unified configuration, monitoring, authentication, and software upgrade of multiple,
cluster-capable switches, regardless of their geographic proximity and interconnection media,
including Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Fast EtherChannel, small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules, Gigabit Ethernet, and Gigabit EtherChannel connections. For a list of cluster-capable
switches, see the release notes.
– Automatic discovery of candidate switches and creation of clusters of up to 16 switches that can
be managed through a single IP address.
– Extended discovery of cluster candidates that are not directly connected to the command switch.
• Auto Smartports Cisco-default and user-defined macros for dynamic port configuration based on the
device type detected on the port.
Performance Features
• Cisco EnergyWise manages the energy usage of power over Ethernet (PoE) entities.
• Autosensing of port speed and autonegotiation of duplex mode on all switch ports for optimizing
bandwidth
• Automatic-medium-dependent interface crossover (auto-MDIX) capability on 10/100 and
10/100/1000 Mb/s interfaces and on 10/100/1000 BASE-TX SFP module interfaces that enables the
interface to automatically detect the required cable connection type (straight-through or crossover)
and to configure the connection appropriately
• Support for up to 1546 bytes routed frames, up to 9000 bytes for frames that are bridged in hardware,
and up to 2000 bytes for frames that are bridged by software
• IEEE 802.3x flow control on all ports (the switch does not send pause frames)
• EtherChannel for enhanced fault tolerance and for providing up to 8 Gb/s (Gigabit EtherChannel)
or 800 Mb/s (Fast EtherChannel) full-duplex bandwidth among switches, routers, and servers
• Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) and Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for automatic
creation of EtherChannel links
• Forwarding of Layer 2 and Layer 3 packets at Gigabit line rate
• Multicast virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) Lite for configuring multiple private routing
domains for network virtualization and virtual private multicast networks
• Per-port storm control for preventing broadcast, multicast, and unicast storms

OL-8553-06 1-3
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
• Port blocking on forwarding unknown Layer 2 unknown unicast, multicast, and bridged broadcast
traffic
• Cisco Group Management Protocol (CGMP) server support and Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) snooping for IGMP Versions 1, 2, and 3:
– (For CGMP devices) CGMP for limiting multicast traffic to specified end stations and reducing
overall network traffic
– (For IGMP devices) IGMP snooping for forwarding multimedia and multicast traffic
• IGMP report suppression for sending only one IGMP report per multicast router query to the
multicast devices (supported only for IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 queries)
• IGMP snooping querier support to configure switch to generate periodic IGMP general query
messages
• IGMP helper to allow the switch to forward a host request to join a multicast stream to a specific IP
destination address
• Multicast VLAN registration (MVR) to continuously send multicast streams in a multicast VLAN
while isolating the streams from subscriber VLANs for bandwidth and security reasons
• IGMP filtering for controlling the set of multicast groups to which hosts on a switch port can belong
• IGMP throttling for configuring the action when the maximum number of entries is in the IGMP
forwarding table
• IGMP leave timer for configuring the leave latency for the network
• Switch Database Management (SDM) templates for allocating system resources to maximize
support for user-selected features
• Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP) for redirecting traffic to local wide-area application
engines, for enabling content requests to be fulfilled locally, and for localizing web-traffic patterns
in the network (requires the IP services image)
• Cisco IOS IP Service Level Agreements (SLAs), a part of Cisco IOS software that uses active traffic
monitoring for measuring network performance.
• Configurable small-frame arrival threshold to prevent storm control when small frames (64 bytes or
less) arrive on an interface at a specified rate (the threshold)
• Flex Link Multicast Fast Convergence to reduce the multicast traffic convergence time after a Flex
Link failure
• RADIUS server load balancing to allow access and authentication requests to be distributed evenly
across a server group.
Management Options
• An embedded device manager—The device manager is a GUI that is integrated in the software
image. You use it to configure and to monitor a single switch. For information about launching the
device manager, see the getting started guide. For more information about the device manager, see the
switch online help.
• Network Assistant—Network Assistant is a network management application that can be
downloaded from Cisco.com. You use it to manage a single switch, a cluster of switches, or a
community of devices. For more information about Network Assistant, see Getting Started with
Cisco Network Assistant, available on Cisco.com.

1-4 OL-8553-06
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
• CLI—The Cisco IOS software supports desktop- and multilayer-switching features. You can access
the CLI either by connecting your management station directly to the switch console port or by using
Telnet from a remote management station. For more information about the CLI, see Chapter 2,
“Using the Command-Line Interface.”
• SNMP—SNMP management applications such as CiscoWorks2000 LAN Management Suite (LMS)
and HP OpenView. You can manage from an SNMP-compatible management station that is running
platforms such as HP OpenView or SunNet Manager. The switch supports a comprehensive set of
MIB extensions and four remote monitoring (RMON) groups. For more information about using
SNMP, see Chapter 31, “Configuring SNMP.”
• Cisco IOS Configuration Engine (previously known to as the Cisco IOS CNS
agent)-—Configuration service automates the deployment and management of network devices and
services. You can automate initial configurations and configuration updates by generating
switch-specific configuration changes, sending them to the switch, executing the configuration
change, and logging the results.
For more information about CNS, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Cisco IOS Configuration Engine.”
Manageability Features
• CNS embedded agents for automating switch management, configuration storage, and delivery
• DHCP for automating configuration of switch information (such as IP address, default gateway,
hostname, and Domain Name System [DNS] and TFTP server names)
• DHCP relay for forwarding User Datagram Protocol (UDP) broadcasts, including IP address
requests, from DHCP clients
• DHCP server for automatic assignment of IP addresses and other DHCP options to IP hosts
• DHCP-based autoconfiguration and image update to download a specified configuration a new
image to a large number of switches
• DHCP server port-based address allocation for the preassignment of an IP address to a switch port
• Directed unicast requests to a DNS server for identifying a switch through its IP address and its
corresponding hostname and to a TFTP server for administering software upgrades from a TFTP
server
• Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) for identifying a switch through its IP address and its
corresponding MAC address
• Unicast MAC address filtering to drop packets with specific source or destination MAC addresses
• Configurable MAC address scaling that allows disabling MAC address learning on a VLAN to limit
the size of the MAC address table
• Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) Versions 1 and 2 for network topology discovery and mapping
between the switch and other Cisco devices on the network
• Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) and LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) for
interoperability with third-party IP phones
• LLDP media extensions (LLDP-MED) location TLV that provides location information from the
switch to the endpoint device
• Network Time Protocol (NTP) for providing a consistent time stamp to all switches from an external
source
• Cisco IOS File System (IFS) for providing a single interface to all file systems that the switch uses

OL-8553-06 1-5
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
• Support for the SSM PIM protocol to optimize multicast applications, such as video
• Source Specific Multicast (SSM) mapping for multicast applications provides a mapping of source
to group, allowing listeners to connect to multicast sources dynamically and reduces dependencies
on the application
• Support for Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) IPv6 to utilize IPv6 transport,
communicate with IPv6 peers, and advertise IPv6 routes
• Support for these IP services, making them VRF aware so that they can operate on multiple routing
instances: HSRP, GLBP, uRPF, ARP, SNMP, IP SLA, TFTP, FTP, syslog, traceroute, and ping
• Configuration logging to log and to view changes to the switch configuration
• Unique device identifier to provide product identification information through a show inventory
user EXEC command display
• In-band management access through the device manager over a Netscape Navigator or Microsoft
Internet Explorer browser session
• In-band management access for up to 16 simultaneous Telnet connections for multiple CLI-based
sessions over the network
• In-band management access for up to five simultaneous, encrypted Secure Shell (SSH) connections
for multiple CLI-based sessions over the network (requires the cryptographic versions of the
software IP base and IP services images)
• In-band management access through SNMP Versions 1, 2c, and 3 get and set requests
• Out-of-band management access through the switch console port to a directly attached terminal or
to a remote terminal through a serial connection or a modem
• Secure Copy Protocol (SCP) feature to provide a secure and authenticated method for copying
switch configuration or switch image files (requires the cryptographic versions of the software IP
base and IP services images)
• Configuration replacement and rollback to replace the running configuration on a switch with any
saved Cisco IOS configuration file
• The HTTP client in Cisco IOS supports can send requests to both IPv4 and IPv6 HTTP server, and
the HTTP server in Cisco IOS can service HTTP requests from both IPv4 and IPv6 HTTP clients
• Simple Network and Management Protocol (SNMP) can be configured over IPv6 transport so that
an IPv6 host can send SNMP queries and receive SNMP notifications from a device running IPv6
• IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration to manage link, subnet, and site addressing changes, such as
management of host and mobile IP addresses
• Disabling MAC address learning on a VLAN
• DHCP server port-based address allocation for the preassignment of an IP address to a switch port.
• Wired location service sends location and attachment tracking information for connected devices to
a Cisco Mobility Services Engine (MSE).
• CPU utilization threshold trap monitors CPU utilization.
• LLDP-MED network-policy profile time, length, value (TLV) for creating a profile for voice and
voice-signalling by specifying the values for VLAN, class of service (CoS), differentiated services
code point (DSCP), and tagging mode

1-6 OL-8553-06
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
Availability and Redundancy Features

• HSRP for command switch and Layer 3 router redundancy
• Enhanced object tracking, which separates the tracking mechanism from HSRP and creates a
separate, standalone tracking process that can be used by processes other than HSRP
• UniDirectional Link Detection (UDLD) and aggressive UDLD for detecting and disabling
unidirectional links on fiber-optic interfaces caused by incorrect fiber-optic wiring or port faults
• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) for redundant backbone connections and loop-free
networks. STP has these features:
– Up to 128 spanning-tree instances supported
– Per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (PVST+) for load balancing across VLANs
– Rapid PVST+ for load balancing across VLANs and providing rapid convergence of
spanning-tree instances
– UplinkFast and BackboneFast for fast convergence after a spanning-tree topology change and
for achieving load balancing between redundant uplinks, including Gigabit uplinks
• IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) for grouping VLANs into a spanning-tree
instance and for providing multiple forwarding paths for data traffic and load balancing and rapid
per-VLAN Spanning-Tree plus (rapid-PVST+) based on the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP) for rapid convergence of the spanning tree by immediately changing root and
designated ports to the forwarding state
• Optional spanning-tree features available in PVST+, rapid-PVST+, and MSTP mode:
– Port Fast for eliminating the forwarding delay by enabling a port to immediately change from
the blocking state to the forwarding state
– BPDU guard for shutting down Port Fast-enabled ports that receive bridge protocol data units
(BPDUs)
– BPDU filtering for preventing a Port Fast-enabled port from sending or receiving BPDUs
– Root guard for preventing switches outside the network core from becoming the spanning-tree
root
– Loop guard for preventing alternate or root ports from becoming designated ports because of a
failure that leads to a unidirectional link
• Equal-cost routing for link-level and switch-level redundancy
• Flex Link Layer 2 interfaces to back up one another as an alternative to STP for basic link
redundancy
• Link-state tracking to mirror the state of the ports that carry upstream traffic from connected hosts
and servers, and to allow the failover of the server traffic to an operational link on another Cisco
Ethernet switch.
VLAN Features
• Support for up to 1005 VLANs for assigning users to VLANs associated with appropriate network
resources, traffic patterns, and bandwidth
• Support for VLAN IDs in the 1 to 4094 range as allowed by the IEEE 802.1Q standard
• VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) for dynamic VLAN membership

OL-8553-06 1-7
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
• Inter-Switch Link (ISL) and IEEE 802.1Q trunking encapsulation on all ports for network moves,
adds, and changes; management and control of broadcast and multicast traffic; and network security
by establishing VLAN groups for high-security users and network resources
• Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) for negotiating trunking on a link between two devices and for
negotiating the type of trunking encapsulation (IEEE 802.1Q or ISL) to be used
• VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) and VTP pruning for reducing network traffic by restricting
flooded traffic to links destined for stations receiving the traffic
• Voice VLAN for creating subnets for voice traffic from Cisco IP Phones
• VLAN 1 minimization for reducing the risk of spanning-tree loops or storms by allowing VLAN 1
to be disabled on any individual VLAN trunk link. With this feature enabled, no user traffic is sent
or received on the trunk. The switch CPU continues to send and receive control protocol frames.
• Private VLANs to address VLAN scalability problems, to provide a more controlled IP address
allocation, and to allow Layer 2 ports to be isolated from other ports on the switch
• Port security on a PVLAN host to limit the number of MAC addresses learned on a port, or define
which MAC addresses may be learned on a port
• VLAN Flex Link Load Balancing to provide Layer 2 redundancy without requiring Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP). A pair of interfaces configured as primary and backup links can load balance traffic
based on VLAN.
Security Features
• IP Service Level Agreements (IP SLAs) support to measure network performance by using active
traffic monitoring
• IP SLAs EOT to use the output from IP SLAs tracking operations triggered by an action such as
latency, jitter, or packet loss for a standby router failover takeover
• Web authentication to allow a supplicant (client) that does not support IEEE 802.1x functionality to
be authenticated using a web browser
• Local web authentication banner so that a custom banner or an image file can be displayed at a web
authentication login screen
• MAC authentication bypass (MAB) aging timer to detect inactive hosts that have authenticated after
they have authenticated by using MAB
• Password-protected access (read-only and read-write access) to management interfaces (device
manager, Network Assistant, and the CLI) for protection against unauthorized configuration
changes
• Multilevel security for a choice of security level, notification, and resulting actions
• Static MAC addressing for ensuring security
• Protected port option for restricting the forwarding of traffic to designated ports on the same switch
• Port security option for limiting and identifying MAC addresses of the stations allowed to access
the port
• VLAN aware port security option to shut down the VLAN on the port when a violation occurs,
instead of shutting down the entire port.
• Port security aging to set the aging time for secure addresses on a port
• BPDU guard for shutting down a Port Fast-configured port when an invalid configuration occurs

1-8 OL-8553-06
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
• Standard and extended IP access control lists (ACLs) for defining security policies in both
directions on routed interfaces (router ACLs) and VLANs and inbound on Layer 2 interfaces (port
ACLs)
• Extended MAC access control lists for defining security policies in the inbound direction on Layer 2
interfaces
• VLAN ACLs (VLAN maps) for providing intra-VLAN security by filtering traffic based on
information in the MAC, IP, and TCP/UDP headers
• Source and destination MAC-based ACLs for filtering non-IP traffic
• IPv6 ACLs to be applied to interfaces to filter IPv6 traffic:
• DHCP snooping to filter untrusted DHCP messages between untrusted hosts and DHCP servers
• IP source guard to restrict traffic on nonrouted interfaces by filtering traffic based on the DHCP
snooping database and IP source bindings
• Dynamic ARP inspection to prevent malicious attacks on the switch by not relaying invalid ARP
requests and responses to other ports in the same VLAN
• IEEE 802.1Q tunneling so that customers with users at remote sites across a service-provider
network can keep VLANs segregated from other customers and Layer 2 protocol tunneling to ensure
that the customer’s network has complete STP, CDP, and VTP information about all users
• Layer 2 point-to-point tunneling to facilitate the automatic creation of EtherChannels
• Layer 2 protocol tunneling bypass feature to provide interoperability with third-party vendors
• IEEE 802.1x port-based authentication to prevent unauthorized devices (clients) from gaining
access to the network. These features are supported:
– Multidomain authentication (MDA) to allow both a data device and a voice device, such as an
IP phone (Cisco or non-Cisco), to independently authenticate on the same IEEE 802.1x-enabled
switch port
– Dynamic voice virtual LAN (VLAN) for MDA to allow a dynamic voice VLAN on an
MDA-enabled port
– VLAN assignment for restricting 802.1x-authenticated users to a specified VLAN
– Port security for controlling access to 802.1x ports
– Voice VLAN to permit a Cisco IP Phone to access the voice VLAN regardless of the authorized
or unauthorized state of the port
– IP phone detection enhancement to detect and recognize a Cisco IP phone.
– Guest VLAN to provide limited services to non-802.1x-compliant users
– Restricted VLAN to provide limited services to users who are 802.1x compliant, but do not have
the credentials to authenticate via the standard 802.1x processes
– 802.1x accounting to track network usage
– 802.1x with wake-on-LAN to allow dormant PCs to be powered on based on the receipt of a
specific Ethernet frame
– 802.1x readiness check to determine the readiness of connected end hosts before configuring
IEEE 802.1x on the switch
– Voice aware 802.1x security to apply traffic violation actions only on the VLAN on which a
security violation occurs.
– MAC authentication bypass to authorize clients based on the client MAC address.

OL-8553-06 1-9
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
– Network Edge Access Topology (NEAT) with 802.1X switch supplicant, host authorization
with CISP, and auto enablement to authenticate a switch outside a wiring closet as a supplicant
to another switch.
– IEEE 802.1x with open access to allow a host to access the network before being authenticated.
– IEEE 802.1x authentication with downloadable ACLs and redirect URLs to allow per-user ACL
downloads from a Cisco Secure ACS server to an authenticated switch.
– Flexible-authentication sequencing to configure the order of the authentication methods that a
port tries when authenticating a new host.
– Multiple-user authentication to allow more than one host to authenticate on an 802.1x-enabled
port.
• Network Admission Control (NAC) features:
– NAC Layer 2 802.1x validation of the antivirus condition or posture of endpoint systems or
clients before granting the devices network access.
For information about configuring NAC Layer 2 802.1x validation, see the “Configuring NAC
Layer 2 802.1x Validation” section on page 10-54.
– NAC Layer 2 IP validation of the posture of endpoint systems or clients before granting the
devices network access.
For information about configuring NAC Layer 2 IP validation, see the Network Admission
Control Software Configuration Guide.
– IEEE 802.1x inaccessible authentication bypass.
For information about configuring this feature, see the “Configuring the Inaccessible
Authentication Bypass Feature” section on page 10-49.
– Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) down policy for a NAC Layer 2 IP
validation of a host if the AAA server is not available when the posture validation occurs.
For information about this feature, see the Network Admission Control Software Configuration
Guide.
• TACACS+, a proprietary feature for managing network security through a TACACS server
• RADIUS for verifying the identity of, granting access to, and tracking the actions of remote users
through AAA services
• Kerberos security system to authenticate requests for network resources by using a trusted third
party (requires the cryptographic versions of the software (IP base and IP services images)
• Secure Socket Layer (SSL) Version 3.0 support for the HTTP 1.1 server authentication, encryption,
and message integrity and HTTP client authentication to allow secure HTTP communications
(requires the cryptographic versions of the software IP base and IP services images)
• Voice aware IEEE 802.1x and mac authentication bypass (MAB) security violation to shut down
only the data VLAN on a port when a security violation occurs

1-10 OL-8553-06
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
QoS and CoS Features

• Automatic QoS (auto-QoS) to simplify the deployment of existing QoS features by classifying
traffic and configuring egress queues
• Automatic quality of service (QoS) Voice over IP (VoIP) enhancement for port -based trust of DSCP
and priority queuing for egress traffic
• Classification
– IP type-of-service/Differentiated Services Code Point (IP ToS/DSCP) and IEEE 802.1p CoS
marking priorities on a per-port basis for protecting the performance of mission-critical
applications
– IP ToS/DSCP and IEEE 802.1p CoS marking based on flow-based packet classification
(classification based on information in the MAC, IP, and TCP/UDP headers) for
high-performance quality of service at the network edge, allowing for differentiated service
levels for different types of network traffic and for prioritizing mission-critical traffic in the
network
– Trusted port states (CoS, DSCP, and IP precedence) within a QoS domain and with a port
bordering another QoS domain
– Trusted boundary for detecting the presence of a Cisco IP Phone, trusting the CoS value
received, and ensuring port security
• Policing
– Traffic-policing policies on the switch port for managing how much of the port bandwidth
should be allocated to a specific traffic flow
– If you configure multiple class maps for a hierarchical policy map, each class map can be
associated with its own port-level (second-level) policy map. Each second-level policy map can
have a different policer.
– Aggregate policing for policing traffic flows in aggregate to restrict specific applications or
traffic flows to metered, predefined rates
• Out-of-Profile
– Out-of-profile markdown for packets that exceed bandwidth utilization limits
• Ingress queueing and scheduling
– Two configurable ingress queues for user traffic (one queue can be the priority queue)
– Weighted tail drop (WTD) as the congestion-avoidance mechanism for managing the queue
lengths and providing drop precedences for different traffic classifications
– Shaped round robin (SRR) as the scheduling service for specifying the rate at which packets are
sent to the internal ring (sharing is the only supported mode on ingress queues)
• Egress queues and scheduling
– Four egress queues per port
– WTD as the congestion-avoidance mechanism for managing the queue lengths and providing
drop precedences for different traffic classifications
– SRR as the scheduling service for specifying the rate at which packets are dequeued to the
egress interface (shaping or sharing is supported on egress queues). Shaped egress queues are
guaranteed but limited to using a share of port bandwidth. Shared egress queues are also
guaranteed a configured share of bandwidth, but can use more than the guarantee if other queues
become empty and do not use their share of the bandwidth.

OL-8553-06 1-11
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
Layer 3 Features
These are the Layer 3 features:
Note Some features noted in this section are available only on the IP services image.
• HSRP Version 1 (HSRPv1) and HSRP Version 2 (HSRPv2) for Layer 3 router redundancy
• IP routing protocols for load balancing and for constructing scalable, routed backbones:
– RIP Versions 1 and 2
– OSPF (requires the IP services image)
– Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) IPv6 to utilize IPv6 transport,
communicate with IPv6 peers, and advertise IPv6 routes
– HSRP for IPv6 (requires the IP services image)
– Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Version 4 (requires the IP services image)
• IP routing between VLANs (inter-VLAN routing) for full Layer 3 routing between two or more
VLANs, allowing each VLAN to maintain its own autonomous data-link domain
• Policy-based routing (PBR) for configuring defined policies for traffic flows
• Multiple VPN routing/forwarding (multi-VRF) instances in customer edge devices to allow service
providers to support multiple virtual private networks (VPNs) and overlap IP addresses between
VPNs (requires the IP services image)
• Fallback bridging for forwarding non-IP traffic between two or more VLANs (requires the IP
services image)
• Static IP routing for manually building a routing table of network path information
• Equal-cost routing for load balancing and redundancy
• Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) and ICMP Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP) for using
router advertisement and router solicitation messages to discover the addresses of routers on directly
attached subnets
• Protocol-Independent Multicast (PIM) for multicast routing within the network, allowing for
devices in the network to receive the multicast feed requested and for switches not participating in
the multicast to be pruned. Includes support for PIM sparse mode (PIM-SM), PIM dense mode
(PIM-DM), and PIM sparse-dense mode (requires the IP services image)
• Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) for connecting multiple PIM-SM domains (requires
the IP services image)
• Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) tunneling for interconnecting two
multicast-enabled networks across nonmulticast networks (requires the IP services image)
• DHCP relay for forwarding UDP broadcasts, including IP address requests, from DHCP clients
• DHCP for IPv6 relay, client, server address assignment and prefix delegation
• IPv6 unicast routing capability for forwarding IPv6 traffic through configured interfaces (requires
the IP services image)
• IPv6 default router preference (DRP) for improving the ability of a host to select an appropriate
router

1-12 OL-8553-06
Chapter 1 Overview
Features
• Nonstop forwarding (NSF) awareness to enable the Layer 3 switch to continue forwarding packets
from an NSF-capable neighboring router when the primary route processor (RP) is failing and the
backup RP is taking over, or when the primary RP is manually reloaded for a nondisruptive software
upgrade (requires the IP services image)
• The ability to exclude a port in a VLAN from the SVI line-state up or down calculation
• Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) routing supports dynamic routing protocols for
Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) networks.\
Power over Ethernet Features

• Ability to provide power to connected Cisco pre-standard and IEEE 802.3af-compliant powered
devices from Power over Ethernet (PoE)-capable ports if the switch detects that there is no power
on the circuit.
• Support for CDP with power consumption. The powered device notifies the switch of the amount of
power it is consuming.
• Support for Cisco intelligent power management. The powered device and the switch negotiate
through power-negotiation CDP messages for an agreed power-consumption level. The negotiation
allows a high-power Cisco powered device to operate at its highest power mode.
• Automatic detection and power budgeting; the switch maintains a power budget, monitors and tracks
requests for power, and grants power only when it is available.
• Support for HSRP Version 2 (HSRPv2)
Monitoring Features
• EOT and IP SLAs EOT static route support identify when a preconfigured static route or a DHCP
route goes down
• Embedded event manager (EEM) for device and system management to monitor key system events
and then act on them though a policy (requires the IP services image)
• Switch LEDs that provide port- and switch-level status
• MAC address notification traps and RADIUS accounting for tracking users on a network by storing
the MAC addresses that the switch has learned or removed
• Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) and Remote SPAN (RSPAN) for traffic monitoring on any port or
VLAN
• SPAN and RSPAN support of Intrusion Detection Systems (IDS) to monitor, repel, and report
network security violations
• Four groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events) of embedded RMON agents for network
monitoring and traffic analysis
• Syslog facility for logging system messages about authentication or authorization errors, resource
issues, and time-out events
• Layer 2 traceroute to identify the physical path that a packet takes from a source device to a
destination device

OL-8553-06 1-13
Chapter 1 Overview
Default Settings After Initial Switch Configuration
• Time Domain Reflector (TDR) to diagnose and resolve cabling problems on 10/100/1000 copper
Ethernet ports
• SFP module diagnostic management interface to monitor physical or operational status of an SFP
module
• Generic online diagnostics to test hardware functionality of the supervisor engine, modules, and
switch while the switch is connected to a live network.
• Enhanced object tracking for HSRP.
• Digital optical monitoring (DOM) to check status of X2 small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules

The switch is designed for plug-and-play operation, requiring only that you assign basic IP information
to the switch and connect it to the other devices in your network. If you have specific network needs,
you can change the interface-specific and system-wide settings.
Note For information about assigning an IP address by using the browser-based Express Setup program, see
the getting started guide. For information about assigning an IP address by using the CLI-based setup
program, see the hardware installation guide.
If you do not configure the switch at all, the switch operates with these default settings:
• Default switch IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway is 0.0.0.0. For more information, see
Chapter 3, “Assigning the Switch IP Address and Default Gateway,” and Chapter 21, “Configuring
DHCP Features and IP Source Guard.”
• Default domain name is not configured. For more information, see Chapter 3, “Assigning the Switch
IP Address and Default Gateway.”
• DHCP client is enabled, the DHCP server is enabled (only if the device acting as a DHCP server is
configured and is enabled), and the DHCP relay agent is enabled (only if the device is acting as a
DHCP relay agent is configured and is enabled). For more information, see Chapter 3, “Assigning
the Switch IP Address and Default Gateway,” and Chapter 21, “Configuring DHCP Features and IP
Source Guard.”
• Switch cluster is disabled. For more information about switch clusters, see Chapter 6, “Clustering
Switches,” and the Getting Started with Cisco Network Assistant, available on Cisco.com.
• No passwords are defined. For more information, see Chapter 7, “Administering the Switch.”
• System name and prompt is Switch. For more information, see Chapter 7, “Administering the
Switch.”
• NTP is enabled. For more information, see Chapter 7, “Administering the Switch.”
• DNS is enabled. For more information, see Chapter 7, “Administering the Switch.”
• TACACS+ is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 9, “Configuring Switch-Based
Authentication.”
• RADIUS is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 9, “Configuring Switch-Based
Authentication.”
• The standard HTTP server and Secure Socket Layer (SSL) HTTPS server are both enabled. For more
information, see Chapter 9, “Configuring Switch-Based Authentication.”

1-14 OL-8553-06
Chapter 1 Overview
• IEEE 802.1x is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 10, “Configuring IEEE 802.1x
Port-Based Authentication.”
• Port parameters
– Operating mode is Layer 2 (switchport). For more information, see Chapter 11, “Configuring
Interface Characteristics.”
– Interface speed and duplex mode is autonegotiate. For more information, see Chapter 11,
“Configuring Interface Characteristics.”
– Auto-MDIX is enabled. For more information, see Chapter 11, “Configuring Interface
Characteristics.”
– Flow control is off. For more information, see Chapter 11, “Configuring Interface
Characteristics.”
– PoE is autonegotiate. For more information, see Chapter 11, “Configuring Interface
Characteristics.”
• VLANs
– Default VLAN is VLAN 1. For more information, see Chapter 13, “Configuring VLANs.”
– VLAN trunking setting is dynamic auto (DTP). For more information, see Chapter 13,
“Configuring VLANs.”
– Trunk encapsulation is negotiate. For more information, see Chapter 13, “Configuring VLANs.”
– VTP mode is server. For more information, see Chapter 16, “Configuring VTP.”
– VTP version is Version 1. For more information, see Chapter 16, “Configuring VTP.”
– No private VLANs are configured. For more information, see Chapter 14, “Configuring Private
VLANs.”
– Voice VLAN is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 15, “Configuring Voice VLAN.”
• IEEE 802.1Q tunneling and Layer 2 protocol tunneling are disabled. For more information, see
Chapter 16, “Configuring IEEE 802.1Q and Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling.”
• STP, PVST+ is enabled on VLAN 1. For more information, see Chapter 17, “Configuring STP.”
• MSTP is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 18, “Configuring MSTP.”
• Optional spanning-tree features are disabled. For more information, see Chapter 19, “Configuring
Optional Spanning-Tree Features.”
• Flex Links are not configured. For more information, see Chapter 20, “Configuring Flex Links and
the MAC Address-Table Move Update Feature.”
• DHCP snooping is disabled. The DHCP snooping information option is enabled. For more
information, see Chapter 21, “Configuring DHCP Features and IP Source Guard.”
• IP source guard is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 21, “Configuring DHCP Features
and IP Source Guard.”
• DHCP server port-based address allocation is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 21,
“Configuring DHCP Features and IP Source Guard.”
• Dynamic ARP inspection is disabled on all VLANs. For more information, see Chapter 22,
“Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection.”
• IGMP snooping is enabled. No IGMP filters are applied. For more information, see Chapter 23,
“Configuring IGMP Snooping and MVR.”
• IGMP throttling setting is deny. For more information, see Chapter 23, “Configuring IGMP
Snooping and MVR.”

OL-8553-06 1-15
Chapter 1 Overview
• The IGMP snooping querier feature is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 23, “Configuring
IGMP Snooping and MVR.”
• MVR is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 23, “Configuring IGMP Snooping and MVR.”
• Port-based traffic
– Broadcast, multicast, and unicast storm control is disabled. For more information, see
Chapter 24, “Configuring Port-Based Traffic Control.”
– No protected ports are defined. For more information, see Chapter 24, “Configuring Port-Based
Traffic Control.”
– Unicast and multicast traffic flooding is not blocked. For more information, see Chapter 24,
“Configuring Port-Based Traffic Control.”
– No secure ports are configured. For more information, see Chapter 24, “Configuring Port-Based
Traffic Control.”
• CDP is enabled. For more information, see Chapter 25, “Configuring CDP.”
• UDLD is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 27, “Configuring UDLD.”
• SPAN and RSPAN are disabled. For more information, see Chapter 28, “Configuring SPAN and
RSPAN.”
• RMON is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 29, “Configuring RMON.”
• Syslog messages are enabled and appear on the console. For more information, see Chapter 30,
“Configuring System Message Logging.”
• SNMP is enabled (Version 1). For more information, see Chapter 31, “Configuring SNMP.”
• No ACLs are configured. For more information, see Chapter 33, “Configuring Network Security
with ACLs.”
• QoS is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 34, “Configuring QoS.”
• No EtherChannels are configured. For more information, see Chapter 35, “Configuring
EtherChannels and Link-State Tracking.”
• IP unicast routing is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 36, “Configuring IP Unicast
Routing.”
• IPv6 unicast routing is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 37, “Configuring IPv6 Unicast
Routing.”
• No HSRP groups are configured. For more information, see Chapter 40, “Configuring HSRP.”
• IP multicast routing is disabled on all interfaces. For more information, see Chapter 44,
“Configuring IP Multicast Routing.”
• MSDP is disabled. For more information, see Chapter 45, “Configuring MSDP.”
• Fallback bridging is not configured. For more information, see Chapter 46, “Configuring Fallback
Bridging.”

1-16 OL-8553-06
Chapter 1 Overview
Network Configuration Examples

This section provides network configuration concepts and includes examples of using the switch to
create dedicated network segments and interconnecting the segments through Fast Ethernet and Gigabit
Ethernet connections.
• “Design Concepts for Using the Switch” section on page 1-17
• “Small to Medium-Sized Network Using Catalyst 3560 Switches” section on page 1-20
• “Large Network Using Catalyst 3560 Switches” section on page 1-21
• “Long-Distance, High-Bandwidth Transport Configuration” section on page 1-23
Design Concepts for Using the Switch

As your network users compete for network bandwidth, it takes longer to send and receive data. When
you configure your network, consider the bandwidth required by your network users and the relative
priority of the network applications that they use.
Table 1-1 describes what can cause network performance to degrade and how you can configure your
network to increase the bandwidth available to your network users.
Table 1-1 Increasing Network Performance
Network Demands Suggested Design Methods

Too many users on a single network • Create smaller network segments so that fewer users share the bandwidth, and use
segment and a growing number of VLANs and IP subnets to place the network resources in the same logical network
users accessing the Internet as the users who access those resources most.
• Use full-duplex operation between the switch and its connected workstations.
• Increased power of new PCs, • Connect global resources—such as servers and routers to which the network users
workstations, and servers require equal access—directly to the high-speed switch ports so that they have
their own high-speed segment.
• High bandwidth demand from
networked applications (such as • Use the EtherChannel feature between the switch and its connected servers and
e-mail with large attached files) routers.
and from bandwidth-intensive
applications (such as
multimedia)
Bandwidth alone is not the only consideration when designing your network. As your network traffic
profiles evolve, consider providing network services that can support applications for voice and data
integration, multimedia integration, application prioritization, and security. Table 1-2 describes some
network demands and how you can meet them.

OL-8553-06 1-17
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1-2 Providing Network Services
Network Demands Suggested Design Methods

Efficient bandwidth usage for • Use IGMP snooping to efficiently forward multimedia and multicast traffic.
multimedia applications and
• Use other QoS mechanisms such as packet classification, marking, scheduling,
guaranteed bandwidth for critical
and congestion avoidance to classify traffic with the appropriate priority level,
applications
thereby providing maximum flexibility and support for mission-critical, unicast,
and multicast and multimedia applications.
• Use optional IP multicast routing to design networks better suited for multicast
traffic.
• Use MVR to continuously send multicast streams in a multicast VLAN but to
isolate the streams from subscriber VLANs for bandwidth and security reasons.
High demand on network redundancy • Use Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for cluster command switch and router
and availability to provide always on redundancy.
mission-critical applications
• Use VLAN trunks and BackboneFast for traffic-load balancing on the uplink ports
so that the uplink port with a lower relative port cost is selected to carry the VLAN
traffic.
An evolving demand for IP telephony • Use QoS to prioritize applications such as IP telephony during congestion and to
help control both delay and jitter within the network.
• Use switches that support at least two queues per port to prioritize voice and data
traffic as either high- or low-priority, based on IEEE 802.1p/Q. The switch
supports at least four queues per port.
• Use voice VLAN IDs (VVIDs) to provide separate VLANs for voice traffic.
A growing demand for using existing Use the Catalyst Long-Reach Ethernet (LRE) switches to provide up to 15 Mb of IP
infrastructure to transport data and connectivity over existing infrastructure, such as existing telephone lines.
voice from a home or office to the
Note LRE is the technology used in the Catalyst 2900 LRE XL and Catalyst 2950
Internet or an intranet at higher
LRE switches. See the documentation sets specific to these switches for LRE
speeds
information.
You can use the switches to create the following:

• Cost-effective Gigabit-to-the-desktop for high-performance workgroups (Figure 1-1)—For
high-speed access to network resources, you can use the Cisco Catalyst 3560 switches in the access
layer to provide Gigabit Ethernet to the desktop. To prevent congestion, use QoS DSCP marking
priorities on these switches. For high-speed IP forwarding at the distribution layer, connect the
switches in the access layer to a Gigabit multilayer switch with routing capability, such as a
Catalyst 3750 switch, or to a router.
The first illustration is of an isolated high-performance workgroup, where the Catalyst 3560
switches are connected to Catalyst 3750 switches in the distribution layer. The second illustration is
of a high-performance workgroup in a branch office, where the Catalyst 3560 switches are
connected to a router in the distribution layer.
Each switch in this configuration provides users with a dedicated 1-Gb/s connection to network
resources. Using SFP modules also provides flexibility in media and distance options through
fiber-optic connections.

1-18 OL-8553-06
Chapter 1 Overview
Figure 1-1 High-Performance Workgroup (Gigabit-to-the-Desktop)
Catalyst 3750
switches
Access-layer
Catalyst
switches
WAN 89373
Cisco 2600
router
Access-layer
Catalyst
switches
89374
• Server aggregation (Figure 1-2)—You can use the switches to interconnect groups of servers,
centralizing physical security and administration of your network. For high-speed IP forwarding at
the distribution layer, connect the switches in the access layer to multilayer switches with routing
capability. The Gigabit interconnections minimize latency in the data flow.
QoS and policing on the switches provide preferential treatment for certain data streams. They
segment traffic streams into different paths for processing. Security features on the switch ensure
rapid handling of packets.
Fault tolerance from the server racks to the core is achieved through dual homing of servers
connected to switches, which have redundant Gigabit EtherChannels.
Using dual SFP module uplinks from the switches provides redundant uplinks to the network core.
Using SFP modules provides flexibility in media and distance options through fiber-optic
connections.

OL-8553-06 1-19
Chapter 1 Overview
Figure 1-2 Server Aggregation
Campus
core
Catalyst
6500 switches
Catalyst 3750
StackWise
switch stacks
Access-layer
Catalyst
switches
Server racks
89376
Small to Medium-Sized Network Using Catalyst 3560 Switches
Figure 1-3 shows a configuration for a network of up to 500 employees. This network uses Catalyst 3560
Layer 3 switches with high-speed connections to two routers. For network reliability and load balancing,
this network has HSRP enabled on the routers and on the switches. This ensures connectivity to the
Internet, WAN, and mission-critical network resources if one of the routers or switches fails. The
switches are using routed uplinks for faster failover. They are also configured with equal-cost routing
for load sharing and redundancy.
The switches are connected to workstations, local servers, and IEEE 802.3af compliant and
noncompliant powered devices (such as Cisco IP Phones). The server farm includes a call-processing
server running Cisco CallManager software. Cisco CallManager controls call processing, routing, and
Cisco IP Phone features and configuration. The switches are interconnected through Gigabit interfaces.
This network uses VLANs to logically segment the network into well-defined broadcast groups and for
security management. Data and multimedia traffic are configured on the same VLAN. Voice traffic from
the Cisco IP Phones are configured on separate VVIDs. If data, multimedia, and voice traffic are
assigned to the same VLAN, only one VLAN can be configured per wiring closet.
When an end station in one VLAN needs to communicate with an end station in another VLAN, a router
or Layer 3 switch routes the traffic to the destination VLAN. In this network, the switches are providing
inter-VLAN routing. VLAN access control lists (VLAN maps) on the switch provide intra-VLAN
security and prevent unauthorized users from accessing critical areas of the network.
In addition to inter-VLAN routing, the multilayer switches provide QoS mechanisms such as DSCP
priorities to prioritize the different types of network traffic and to deliver high-priority traffic. If
congestion occurs, QoS drops low-priority traffic to allow delivery of high-priority traffic.
For prestandard and IEEE 802.3af-compliant powered devices connected to Catalyst PoE switches, IEEE
802.1p/Q QoS gives voice traffic forwarding-priority over data traffic.

1-20 OL-8553-06
Chapter 1 Overview
Catalyst PoE switch ports automatically detect any Cisco pre-standard and IEEE 802.3af-compliant
powered devices that are connected. Each PoE switch port provides 15.4 W of power per port. The
powered device, such as a Cisco IP Phone, can receive redundant power when it is also connected to an
AC power source. Powered devices not connected to Catalyst PoE switches must be connected to AC
power sources to receive power.
Cisco CallManager controls call processing, routing, and Cisco IP Phone features and configuration.
Users with workstations running Cisco SoftPhone software can place, receive, and control calls from
their PCs. Using Cisco IP Phones, Cisco CallManager software, and Cisco SoftPhone software integrates
telephony and IP networks, and the IP network supports both voice and data.
With the multilayer switches providing inter-VLAN routing and other network services, the routers
focus on firewall services, Network Address Translation (NAT) services, voice-over-IP (VoIP) gateway
services, and WAN and Internet access.
Figure 1-3 Catalyst 3560 Switchesin a Collapsed Backbone Configuration
Internet
Cisco 2600 or
3700 routers
Gigabit
servers
IP IP
101388
Aironet wireless
Cisco IP access points
phones Workstations
running
Cisco SoftPhone
software
Large Network Using Catalyst 3560 Switches

Switches in the wiring closet have traditionally been only Layer 2 devices, but as network traffic profiles
evolve, switches in the wiring closet are increasingly employing multilayer services such as multicast
management and traffic classification. Figure 1-4 shows a configuration for a network that only use
Catalyst 3560 multilayer switches in the wiring closets and two backbone switches, such as the
Catalyst 6500 switches, to aggregate up to ten wiring closets.
In the wiring closet, each switch has IGMP snooping enabled to efficiently forward multimedia and
multicast traffic. QoS ACLs that either drop or mark nonconforming traffic based on bandwidth limits
are also configured on each switch. VLAN maps provide intra-VLAN security and prevent unauthorized
users from accessing critical pieces of the network. QoS features can limit bandwidth on a per-port or

OL-8553-06 1-21
Chapter 1 Overview
per-user basis. The switch ports are configured as either trusted or untrusted. You can configure a trusted
port to trust the CoS value, the DSCP value, or the IP precedence. If you configure the port as untrusted,
you can use an ACL to mark the frame in accordance with the network policy.
Each switch provides inter-VLAN routing. They provide proxy ARP services to get IP and MAC address
mapping, thereby removing this task from the routers and decreasing this type of traffic on the WAN
links. These switches also have redundant uplink connections to the backbone switches, with each uplink
port configured as a trusted routed uplink to provide faster convergence in case of an uplink failure.
The routers and backbone switches have HSRP enabled for load balancing and redundant connectivity
to guarantee mission-critical traffic.
Figure 1-4 Catalyst 3560 Switches in Wiring Closets in a Backbone Configuration
WAN
Cisco 7x00 routers
Catalyst 6500
multilayer switches
IEEE 802.3af-compliant IEEE 802.3af-compliant

powered device powered device
(such as a web cam) (such as a web cam)
Aironet wireless Aironet wireless

access points IP IP IP access points
IP IP
IP
Cisco IP Phones
with workstations
101389
Cisco IP Phones
with workstations

1-22 OL-8553-06
Chapter 1 Overview
Where to Go Next
Long-Distance, High-Bandwidth Transport Configuration

Figure 1-5 shows a configuration for sending 8 Gigabits of data over a single fiber-optic cable. The
Catalyst 3560 switches have coarse wavelength-division multiplexing (CWDM) fiber-optic SFP
modules installed. Depending on the CWDM SFP module, data is sent at wavelengths from 1470 to
1610 nm. The higher the wavelength, the farther the transmission can travel. A common wavelength used
for long-distance transmissions is 1550 nm.
The CWDM SFP modules connect to CWDM optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) modules over
distances of up to 393,701 feet (74.5 miles or 120 km). The CWDM OADM modules combine (or
multiplex) the different CWDM wavelengths, allowing them to travel simultaneously on the same
fiber-optic cable. The CWDM OADM modules on the receiving end separate (or demultiplex) the
different wavelengths.
For more information about the CWDM SFP modules and CWDM OADM modules, see the Cisco
CWDM GBIC and CWDM SFP Installation Note.
Figure 1-5 Long-Distance, High-Bandwidth Transport Configuration
Access layer
Aggregation layer
8 Gbps
CWDM CWDM
OADM OADM
modules modules Catalyst 4500
Eight multilayer
1-Gbps switches
95750
connections
Catalyst switches
Where to Go Next
Before configuring the switch, review these sections for startup information:
• Chapter 2, “Using the Command-Line Interface”
• Chapter 3, “Assigning the Switch IP Address and Default Gateway”

OL-8553-06 1-23
Chapter 1 Overview
Where to Go Next

1-24 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 2
Using the Command-Line Interface
This chapter describes the Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI) and how to use it to configure your
Catalyst 3560 switch. It contains these sections:
• Understanding Command Modes, page 2-1
• Understanding the Help System, page 2-3
• Understanding Abbreviated Commands, page 2-4
• Understanding no and default Forms of Commands, page 2-4
• Understanding CLI Error Messages, page 2-5
• Using Configuration Logging, page 2-5
• Using Command History, page 2-6
• Using Editing Features, page 2-7
• Searching and Filtering Output of show and more Commands, page 2-10
• Accessing the CLI, page 2-10
Understanding Command Modes

The Cisco IOS user interface is divided into many different modes. The commands available to you
depend on which mode you are currently in. Enter a question mark (?) at the system prompt to obtain a
list of commands available for each command mode.
When you start a session on the switch, you begin in user mode, often called user EXEC mode. Only a
limited subset of the commands are available in user EXEC mode. For example, most of the user EXEC
commands are one-time commands, such as show commands, which show the current configuration
status, and clear commands, which clear counters or interfaces. The user EXEC commands are not saved
when the switch reboots.
To have access to all commands, you must enter privileged EXEC mode. Normally, you must enter a
password to enter privileged EXEC mode. From this mode, you can enter any privileged EXEC
command or enter global configuration mode.
Using the configuration modes (global, interface, and line), you can make changes to the running
configuration. If you save the configuration, these commands are stored and used when the switch
reboots. To access the various configuration modes, you must start at global configuration mode. From
global configuration mode, you can enter interface configuration mode and line configuration mode.

OL-8553-06 2-1
Chapter 2 Using the Command-Line Interface
Understanding Command Modes
Table 2-1 describes the main command modes, how to access each one, the prompt you see in that mode,
and how to exit the mode. The examples in the table use the hostname Switch.
Table 2-1 Command Mode Summary
Mode Access Method Prompt Exit Method About This Mode

User EXEC Begin a session with Switch> Enter logout or Use this mode to
your switch. quit.
• Change terminal settings.
• Perform basic tests.
• Display system
information.
Privileged EXEC While in user EXEC Switch# Enter disable to Use this mode to verify
mode, enter the exit. commands that you have
enable command. entered. Use a password to
protect access to this mode.
Global configuration While in privileged Switch(config)# To exit to privileged Use this mode to configure
EXEC mode, enter EXEC mode, enter parameters that apply to the
the configure exit or end, or press entire switch.
command. Ctrl-Z.
Config-vlan While in global Switch(config-vlan)# To exit to global Use this mode to configure
configuration mode, configuration mode, VLAN parameters. When VTP
enter the enter the exit mode is transparent, you can
vlan vlan-id command. create extended-range VLANs
command. (VLAN IDs greater than 1005)
To return to
and save configurations in the
privileged EXEC
switch startup configuration
mode, press Ctrl-Z
file.
or enter end.
VLAN configuration While in privileged Switch(vlan)# To exit to privileged Use this mode to configure
EXEC mode, enter EXEC mode, enter VLAN parameters for VLANs
the vlan database exit. 1 to 1005 in the VLAN
command. database.

2-2 OL-8553-06
Understanding the Help System
Table 2-1 Command Mode Summary (continued)
Mode Access Method Prompt Exit Method About This Mode

Interface While in global Switch(config-if)# To exit to global Use this mode to configure
configuration configuration mode, configuration mode, parameters for the Ethernet
enter the interface enter exit. ports.
command (with a
To return to For information about defining
specific interface).
privileged EXEC interfaces, see the “Using
mode, press Ctrl-Z Interface Configuration Mode”
or enter end. section on page 11-10.
To configure multiple
interfaces with the same
parameters, see the
“Configuring a Range of
Interfaces” section on
page 11-11.
Line configuration While in global Switch(config-line)# To exit to global Use this mode to configure
configuration mode, configuration mode, parameters for the terminal
specify a line with enter exit. line.
the line vty or line
To return to
console command.
privileged EXEC
mode, press Ctrl-Z
or enter end.
For more detailed information on the command modes, see the command reference guide for this release.
Understanding the Help System

You can enter a question mark (?) at the system prompt to display a list of commands available for each
command mode. You can also obtain a list of associated keywords and arguments for any command, as
shown in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Help Summary
Command Purpose
help Obtain a brief description of the help system in any command mode.
abbreviated-command-entry? Obtain a list of commands that begin with a particular character string.
For example:
Switch# di?
dir disable disconnect
abbreviated-command-entry<Tab> Complete a partial command name.
For example:
Switch# sh conf<tab>
Switch# show configuration

OL-8553-06 2-3
Understanding Abbreviated Commands
Table 2-2 Help Summary (continued)
Command Purpose
? List all commands available for a particular command mode.
For example:
Switch> ?
command ? List the associated keywords for a command.
For example:
Switch> show ?
command keyword ? List the associated arguments for a keyword.
For example:
Switch(config)# cdp holdtime ?
<10-255> Length of time (in sec) that receiver must keep this packet
Understanding Abbreviated Commands

You need to enter only enough characters for the switch to recognize the command as unique.
This example shows how to enter the show configuration privileged EXEC command in an abbreviated
form:
Switch# show conf
Understanding no and default Forms of Commands

Almost every configuration command also has a no form. In general, use the no form to disable a feature
or function or reverse the action of a command. For example, the no shutdown interface configuration
command reverses the shutdown of an interface. Use the command without the keyword no to re-enable
a disabled feature or to enable a feature that is disabled by default.
Configuration commands can also have a default form. The default form of a command returns the
command setting to its default. Most commands are disabled by default, so the default form is the same
as the no form. However, some commands are enabled by default and have variables set to certain
default values. In these cases, the default command enables the command and sets variables to their
default values.

2-4 OL-8553-06
Understanding CLI Error Messages
Understanding CLI Error Messages

Table 2-3 lists some error messages that you might encounter while using the CLI to configure your
switch.
Table 2-3 Common CLI Error Messages
Error Message Meaning How to Get Help

% Ambiguous command: You did not enter enough characters Re-enter the command followed by a question mark (?)
"show con" for your switch to recognize the with a space between the command and the question
command. mark.
The possible keywords that you can enter with the
command appear.
% Incomplete command. You did not enter all the keywords or Re-enter the command followed by a question mark (?)
values required by this command. with a space between the command and the question
mark.
command appear.
% Invalid input detected You entered the command Enter a question mark (?) to display all the commands
at ‘^’ marker. incorrectly. The caret (^) marks the that are available in this command mode.
point of the error.
command appear.
Using Configuration Logging

You can log and view changes to the switch configuration. You can use the Configuration Change
Logging and Notification feature to track changes on a per-session and per-user basis. The logger tracks
each configuration command that is applied, the user who entered the command, the time that the
command was entered, and the parser return code for the command. This feature includes a mechanism
for asynchronous notification to registered applications whenever the configuration changes. You can
choose to have the notifications sent to the syslog.
For more information, see the Configuration Change Notification and Logging feature module at this
URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps5207/products_feature_guide09186a00801d1e81
.html
Note Only CLI or HTTP changes are logged.

OL-8553-06 2-5
Using Command History
Using Command History

The software provides a history or record of commands that you have entered. The command history
feature is particularly useful for recalling long or complex commands or entries, including access lists.
You can customize this feature to suit your needs as described in these sections:
• Changing the Command History Buffer Size, page 2-6 (optional)
• Recalling Commands, page 2-6 (optional)
• Disabling the Command History Feature, page 2-7 (optional)
Changing the Command History Buffer Size

By default, the switch records ten command lines in its history buffer. You can alter this number for a
current terminal session or for all sessions on a particular line. These procedures are optional.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, enter this command to change the number of command lines that
the switch records during the current terminal session:
Switch# terminal history [size number-of-lines]
The range is from 0 to 256.

Beginning in line configuration mode, enter this command to configure the number of command lines
the switch records for all sessions on a particular line:
Switch(config-line)# history [size number-of-lines]
Recalling Commands
To recall commands from the history buffer, perform one of the actions listed in Table 2-4. These actions
are optional.
Table 2-4 Recalling Commands
Action1 Result
Press Ctrl-P or the up arrow key. Recall commands in the history buffer, beginning with the most recent command.
Repeat the key sequence to recall successively older commands.
Press Ctrl-N or the down arrow key. Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands
with Ctrl-P or the up arrow key. Repeat the key sequence to recall successively
more recent commands.
show history While in privileged EXEC mode, list the last several commands that you just
entered. The number of commands that appear is controlled by the setting of the
terminal history global configuration command and the history line configuration
command.
1. The arrow keys function only on ANSI-compatible terminals such as VT100s.

2-6 OL-8553-06
Using Editing Features
Disabling the Command History Feature

The command history feature is automatically enabled. You can disable it for the current terminal session
or for the command line. These procedures are optional.
To disable the feature during the current terminal session, enter the terminal no history privileged
EXEC command.
To disable command history for the line, enter the no history line configuration command.

This section describes the editing features that can help you manipulate the command line. It contains
these sections:
• Enabling and Disabling Editing Features, page 2-7 (optional)
• Editing Commands through Keystrokes, page 2-7 (optional)
• Editing Command Lines that Wrap, page 2-9 (optional)
Enabling and Disabling Editing Features

Although enhanced editing mode is automatically enabled, you can disable it, re-enable it, or configure
a specific line to have enhanced editing. These procedures are optional.
To globally disable enhanced editing mode, enter this command in line configuration mode:
Switch (config-line)# no editing
To re-enable the enhanced editing mode for the current terminal session, enter this command in
privileged EXEC mode:
Switch# terminal editing
To reconfigure a specific line to have enhanced editing mode, enter this command in line configuration
mode:
Switch(config-line)# editing
Editing Commands through Keystrokes

Table 2-5 shows the keystrokes that you need to edit command lines. These keystrokes are optional.
Table 2-5 Editing Commands through Keystrokes
Capability Keystroke1 Purpose

Move around the command line to Press Ctrl-B, or press the Move the cursor back one character.
make changes or corrections. left arrow key.

OL-8553-06 2-7
Table 2-5 Editing Commands through Keystrokes (continued)

Press Ctrl-F, or press the Move the cursor forward one character.
right arrow key.
Press Ctrl-A. Move the cursor to the beginning of the command line.
Press Ctrl-E. Move the cursor to the end of the command line.
Press Esc B. Move the cursor back one word.
Press Esc F. Move the cursor forward one word.
Press Ctrl-T. Transpose the character to the left of the cursor with the
character located at the cursor.
Recall commands from the buffer Press Ctrl-Y. Recall the most recent entry in the buffer.
and paste them in the command line.
The switch provides a buffer with the
last ten items that you deleted.
Press Esc Y. Recall the next buffer entry.
The buffer contains only the last 10 items that you have
deleted or cut. If you press Esc Y more than ten times, you
cycle to the first buffer entry.
Delete entries if you make a mistake Press the Delete or Erase the character to the left of the cursor.
or change your mind. Backspace key.
Press Ctrl-D. Delete the character at the cursor.
Press Ctrl-K. Delete all characters from the cursor to the end of the
command line.
Press Ctrl-U or Ctrl-X. Delete all characters from the cursor to the beginning of
the command line.
Press Ctrl-W. Delete the word to the left of the cursor.
Press Esc D. Delete from the cursor to the end of the word.
Capitalize or lowercase words or Press Esc C. Capitalize at the cursor.
capitalize a set of letters.
Press Esc L. Change the word at the cursor to lowercase.
Press Esc U. Capitalize letters from the cursor to the end of the word.
Designate a particular keystroke as Press Ctrl-V or Esc Q.
an executable command, perhaps as a
shortcut.

2-8 OL-8553-06
Table 2-5 Editing Commands through Keystrokes (continued)

Scroll down a line or screen on Press the Return key. Scroll down one line.
displays that are longer than the
terminal screen can display.
Note The More prompt is used for
any output that has more
lines than can be displayed
on the terminal screen,
including show command
output. You can use the
Return and Space bar
keystrokes whenever you see
the More prompt.
Press the Space bar. Scroll down one screen.
Redisplay the current command line Press Ctrl-L or Ctrl-R. Redisplay the current command line.
if the switch suddenly sends a
message to your screen.
1. The arrow keys function only on ANSI-compatible terminals such as VT100s.
Editing Command Lines that Wrap

You can use a wraparound feature for commands that extend beyond a single line on the screen. When
the cursor reaches the right margin, the command line shifts ten spaces to the left. You cannot see the
first ten characters of the line, but you can scroll back and check the syntax at the beginning of the
command. The keystroke actions are optional.
To scroll back to the beginning of the command entry, press Ctrl-B or the left arrow key repeatedly. You
can also press Ctrl-A to immediately move to the beginning of the line.
The arrow keys function only on ANSI-compatible terminals such as VT100s.
In this example, the access-list global configuration command entry extends beyond one line. When the
cursor first reaches the end of the line, the line is shifted ten spaces to the left and redisplayed. The dollar
sign ($) shows that the line has been scrolled to the left. Each time the cursor reaches the end of the line,
the line is again shifted ten spaces to the left.
Switch(config)# access-list 101 permit tcp 131.108.2.5 255.255.255.0 131.108.1
Switch(config)# $ 101 permit tcp 131.108.2.5 255.255.255.0 131.108.1.20 255.25
Switch(config)# $t tcp 131.108.2.5 255.255.255.0 131.108.1.20 255.255.255.0 eq
Switch(config)# $108.2.5 255.255.255.0 131.108.1.20 255.255.255.0 eq 45
After you complete the entry, press Ctrl-A to check the complete syntax before pressing the Return key
to execute the command. The dollar sign ($) appears at the end of the line to show that the line has been
scrolled to the right:
Switch(config)# access-list 101 permit tcp 131.108.2.5 255.255.255.0 131.108.1$
The software assumes you have a terminal screen that is 80 columns wide. If you have a width other than
that, use the terminal width privileged EXEC command to set the width of your terminal.
Use line wrapping with the command history feature to recall and modify previous complex command
entries. For information about recalling previous command entries, see the “Editing Commands through
Keystrokes” section on page 2-7.

OL-8553-06 2-9
Searching and Filtering Output of show and more Commands
Searching and Filtering Output of show and more Commands

You can search and filter the output for show and more commands. This is useful when you need to sort
through large amounts of output or if you want to exclude output that you do not need to see. Using these
commands is optional.
To use this functionality, enter a show or more command followed by the pipe character (|), one of the
keywords begin, include, or exclude, and an expression that you want to search for or filter out:
command | {begin | include | exclude} regular-expression
Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output
are not displayed, but the lines that contain Output appear.
This example shows how to include in the output display only lines where the expression protocol
appears:
Switch# show interfaces | include protocol
Vlan1 is up, line protocol is up
Vlan10 is up, line protocol is down
GigabitEthernet0/1 is up, line protocol is down
GigabitEthernet0/2 is up, line protocol is up
Accessing the CLI

You can access the CLI through a console connection, through Telnet, or by using the browser.
Accessing the CLI through a Console Connection or through Telnet

Before you can access the CLI, you must connect a terminal or PC to the switch console port and power
on the switch, as described in the getting started guide that shipped with your switch. Then, to understand
the boot process and the options available for assigning IP information, see Chapter 3, “Assigning the
Switch IP Address and Default Gateway.”
If your switch is already configured, you can access the CLI through a local console connection or
through a remote Telnet session, but your switch must first be configured for this type of access. For
more information, see the “Setting a Telnet Password for a Terminal Line” section on page 9-6.
You can use one of these methods to establish a connection with the switch:
• Connect the switch console port to a management station or dial-up modem. For information about
connecting to the console port, see the switch getting started guide or hardware installation guide.
• Use any Telnet TCP/IP or encrypted Secure Shell (SSH) package from a remote management
station. The switch must have network connectivity with the Telnet or SSH client, and the switch
must have an enable secret password configured.
For information about configuring the switch for Telnet access, see the “Setting a Telnet Password
for a Terminal Line” section on page 9-6. The switch supports up to 16 simultaneous Telnet sessions.
Changes made by one Telnet user are reflected in all other Telnet sessions.
For information about configuring the switch for SSH, see the “Configuring the Switch for Secure
Shell” section on page 9-37. The switch supports up to five simultaneous secure SSH sessions.
After you connect through the console port, through a Telnet session or through an SSH session, the
user EXEC prompt appears on the management station.

2-10 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 3
Assigning the Switch IP Address and Default
Gateway
This chapter describes how to create the initial switch configuration (for example, assigning the IP
address and default gateway information) for the Catalyst 3560 switch by using a variety of automatic
and manual methods. It also describes how to modify the switch startup configuration.
Note For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the command
reference for this release and the Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 1 of 3: Addressing and
Services from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline >
Command References.
This chapter consists of these sections:

• Understanding the Boot Process, page 3-1
• Assigning Switch Information, page 3-2
• Checking and Saving the Running Configuration, page 3-15
• Modifying the Startup Configuration, page 3-16
• Scheduling a Reload of the Software Image, page 3-20
Note Information in this chapter about configuring IP addresses and DHCP is specific to IP Version 4 (IPv4).
If you plan to enable IP Version 6 (IPv6) forwarding on your switch, see Chapter 37, “Configuring IPv6
Unicast Routing” for information specific to IPv6 address format and configuration. To enable IPv6, the
switch must be running the IP services image.
Understanding the Boot Process

To start your switch, you need to follow the procedures in the Getting Started Guide or the hardware
installation guide for installing and powering on the switch and for setting up the initial switch
configuration (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, secret and Telnet passwords, and so forth).

OL-8553-06 3-1
Chapter 3 Assigning the Switch IP Address and Default Gateway
Assigning Switch Information
The normal boot process involves the operation of the boot loader software, which performs these
activities:
• Performs low-level CPU initialization. It initializes the CPU registers, which control where physical
memory is mapped, its quantity, its speed, and so forth.
• Performs power-on self-test (POST) for the CPU subsystem. It tests the CPU DRAM and the portion
of the flash device that makes up the flash file system.
• Loads a default operating system software image into memory and boots up the switch.
The boot loader provides access to the flash file system before the operating system is loaded. Normally,
the boot loader is used only to load, uncompress, and launch the operating system. After the boot loader
gives the operating system control of the CPU, the boot loader is not active until the next system reset
or power-on.
The boot loader also provides trap-door access into the system if the operating system has problems
serious enough that it cannot be used. The trap-door mechanism provides enough access to the system
so that if it is necessary, you can format the flash file system, reinstall the operating system software
image by using the Xmodem Protocol, recover from a lost or forgotten password, and finally restart the
operating system. For more information, see the “Recovering from a Software Failure” section on
page 47-2 and the “Recovering from a Lost or Forgotten Password” section on page 47-3.
Note You can disable password recovery. For more information, see the “Disabling Password Recovery”
section on page 9-5.
Before you can assign switch information, make sure you have connected a PC or terminal to the console
port, and configured the PC or terminal-emulation software baud rate and character format to match
these of the switch console port:
• Baud rate default is 9600.
• Data bits default is 8.
Note If the data bits option is set to 8, set the parity option to none.
• Stop bits default is 1.

• Parity settings default is none.

You can assign IP information through the switch setup program, through a DHCP server, or manually.
Use the switch setup program if you want to be prompted for specific IP information. With this program,
you can also configure a hostname and an enable secret password. It gives you the option of assigning a
Telnet password (to provide security during remote management) and configuring your switch as a
command or member switch of a cluster or as a standalone switch. For more information about the setup
program, see the hardware installation guide.
Use a DHCP server for centralized control and automatic assignment of IP information after the server
is configured.

3-2 OL-8553-06
Note If you are using DHCP, do not respond to any of the questions in the setup program until the switch
receives the dynamically assigned IP address and reads the configuration file.
If you are an experienced user familiar with the switch configuration steps, manually configure the
switch. Otherwise, use the setup program described previously.
These sections contain this configuration information:
• Default Switch Information, page 3-3
• Understanding DHCP-Based Autoconfiguration, page 3-3
• Manually Assigning IP Information, page 3-14
Default Switch Information

Table 3-1 shows the default switch information.
Table 3-1 Default Switch Information
Feature Default Setting

IP address and subnet mask No IP address or subnet mask are defined.
Default gateway No default gateway is defined.
Enable secret password No password is defined.
Hostname The factory-assigned default hostname is Switch.
Telnet password No password is defined.
Cluster command switch functionality Disabled.
Cluster name No cluster name is defined.
Understanding DHCP-Based Autoconfiguration

DHCP provides configuration information to Internet hosts and internetworking devices. This protocol
consists of two components: one for delivering configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a device
and a mechanism for allocating network addresses to devices. DHCP is built on a client-server model,
in which designated DHCP servers allocate network addresses and deliver configuration parameters to
dynamically configured devices. The switch can act as both a DHCP client and a DHCP server.
During DHCP-based autoconfiguration, your switch (DHCP client) is automatically configured at
startup with IP address information and a configuration file.
With DHCP-based autoconfiguration, no DHCP client-side configuration is needed on your switch.
However, you need to configure the DHCP server for various lease options associated with IP addresses.
If you are using DHCP to relay the configuration file location on the network, you might also need to
configure a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server and a Domain Name System (DNS) server.
The DHCP server for your switch can be on the same LAN or on a different LAN than the switch. If the
DHCP server is running on a different LAN, you should configure a DHCP relay device between your
switch and the DHCP server. A relay device forwards broadcast traffic between two directly connected
LANs. A router does not forward broadcast packets, but it forwards packets based on the destination IP
address in the received packet.

OL-8553-06 3-3
DHCP-based autoconfiguration replaces the BOOTP client functionality on your switch.
DHCP Client Request Process

When you boot up your switch, the DHCP client is invoked and requests configuration information from
a DHCP server when the configuration file is not present on the switch. If the configuration file is present
and the configuration includes the ip address dhcp interface configuration command on specific routed
interfaces, the DHCP client is invoked and requests the IP address information for those interfaces.
Figure 3-1 shows the sequence of messages that are exchanged between the DHCP client and the DHCP
server.
Figure 3-1 DHCP Client and Server Message Exchange
DHCPDISCOVER (broadcast)
Switch A DHCPOFFER (unicast) DHCP server
DHCPREQUEST (broadcast)
DHCPACK (unicast)
51807
The client, Switch A, broadcasts a DHCPDISCOVER message to locate a DHCP server. The DHCP
server offers configuration parameters (such as an IP address, subnet mask, gateway IP address, DNS IP
address, a lease for the IP address, and so forth) to the client in a DHCPOFFER unicast message.
In a DHCPREQUEST broadcast message, the client returns a formal request for the offered
configuration information to the DHCP server. The formal request is broadcast so that all other DHCP
servers that received the DHCPDISCOVER broadcast message from the client can reclaim the IP
addresses that they offered to the client.
The DHCP server confirms that the IP address has been allocated to the client by returning a DHCPACK
unicast message to the client. With this message, the client and server are bound, and the client uses
configuration information received from the server. The amount of information the switch receives
depends on how you configure the DHCP server. For more information, see the “Configuring the TFTP
Server” section on page 3-7.
If the configuration parameters sent to the client in the DHCPOFFER unicast message are invalid (a
configuration error exists), the client returns a DHCPDECLINE broadcast message to the DHCP server.
The DHCP server sends the client a DHCPNAK denial broadcast message, which means that the offered
configuration parameters have not been assigned, that an error has occurred during the negotiation of the
parameters, or that the client has been slow in responding to the DHCPOFFER message. (The DHCP
server assigned the parameters to another client.)
A DHCP client might receive offers from multiple DHCP or BOOTP servers and can accept any of the
offers; however, the client usually accepts the first offer it receives. The offer from the DHCP server is
not a guarantee that the IP address is allocated to the. However, the server usually reserves the address
until the client has had a chance to formally request the address. If the switch accepts replies from a
BOOTP server and configures itself, the switch broadcasts, instead of unicasts, TFTP requests to obtain
the switch configuration file.

3-4 OL-8553-06
Understanding DHCP-based Autoconfiguration and Image Update

You can use the DHCP image upgrade features to configure a DHCP server to download both a new
image and a new configuration file to one or more switches in a network. This helps ensure that each
new switch added to a network receives the same image and configuration.
There are two types of DHCP image upgrades: DHCP autoconfiguration and DHCP auto-image update.
DHCP Autoconfiguration
DHCP autoconfiguration downloads a configuration file to one or more switches in your network from
a DHCP server. The downloaded configuration file becomes the running configuration of the switch. It
does not over write the bootup configuration saved in the flash, until you reload the switch.
DHCP Auto-Image Update

You can use DHCP auto-image upgrade with DHCP autoconfiguration to download both a configuration
and a new image to one or more switches in your network. The switch (or switches) downloading the
new configuration and the new image can be blank (or only have a default factory configuration loaded).
If the new configuration is downloaded to a switch that already has a configuration, the downloaded
configuration is appended to the configuration file stored on the switch. (Any existing configuration is
not overwritten by the downloaded one.)
Note To enable a DHCP auto-image update on the switch, the TFTP server where the image and configuration
files are located must be configured with the correct option 67 (the configuration filename), option 66
(the DHCP server hostname) option 150 (the TFTP server address), and option 125 (description of the
file) settings.
For procedures to configure the switch as a DHCP server, see the “Configuring DHCP-Based
Autoconfiguration” section on page 3-6 and the “Configuring DHCP” section of the “IP addressing and
Services” section of the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide, Release 12.2.
After you install the switch in your network, the auto-image update feature starts. The downloaded
configuration file is saved in the running configuration of the switch, and the new image is downloaded
and installed on the switch. When you reboot the switch, the configuration is stored in the saved
configuration on the switch.
Limitations and Restrictions

These are the limitations:
• The DHCP-based autoconfiguration with a saved configuration process stops if there is not at least
one Layer 3 interface in an up state without an assigned IP address in the network.
• Unless you configure a timeout, the DHCP-based autoconfiguration with a saved configuration
feature tries indefinitely to download an IP address.
• The auto-install process stops if a configuration file cannot be downloaded or it the configuration
file is corrupted.

OL-8553-06 3-5
Note The configuration file that is downloaded from TFTP is merged with the existing configuration in the
running configuration but is not saved in the NVRAM unless you enter the write memory or
copy running-configuration startup-configuration privileged EXEC command. Note that if the
downloaded configuration is saved to the startup configuration, the feature is not triggered during
subsequent system restarts.
Configuring DHCP-Based Autoconfiguration

• DHCP Server Configuration Guidelines, page 3-6
• Configuring the TFTP Server, page 3-7
• Configuring the DNS, page 3-7
• Configuring the Relay Device, page 3-8
• Obtaining Configuration Files, page 3-8
• Example Configuration, page 3-9
If your DHCP server is a Cisco device, for additional information about configuring DHCP, see the
“Configuring DHCP” section of the “IP Addressing and Services” section of the Cisco IOS IP
Configuration Guide from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2
Mainline > Configuration Guides.
DHCP Server Configuration Guidelines

Follow these guidelines if you are configuring a device as a DHCP server:
You should configure the DHCP server with reserved leases that are bound to each switch by the switch
hardware address.
If you want the switch to receive IP address information, you must configure the DHCP server with these
lease options:
• IP address of the client (required)
• Subnet mask of the client (required)
• Router IP address (default gateway address to be used by the switch) (required)
• DNS server IP address (optional)
If you want the switch to receive the configuration file from a TFTP server, you must configure the
DHCP server with these lease options:
• TFTP server name (required)
• Boot filename (the name of the configuration file that the client needs) (recommended)
• Hostname (optional)
Depending on the settings of the DHCP server, the switch can receive IP address information, the
configuration file, or both.

3-6 OL-8553-06
If you do not configure the DHCP server with the lease options described previously, it replies to client
requests with only those parameters that are configured. If the IP address and the subnet mask are not in
the reply, the switch is not configured. If the router IP address or the TFTP server name are not found,
the switch might send broadcast, instead of unicast, TFTP requests. Unavailability of other lease options
does not affect autoconfiguration.
Configuring the TFTP Server

Based on the DHCP server configuration, the switch attempts to download one or more configuration
files from the TFTP server. If you configured the DHCP server to respond to the switch with all the
options required for IP connectivity to the TFTP server, and if you configured the DHCP server with a
TFTP server name, address, and configuration filename, the switch attempts to download the specified
configuration file from the specified TFTP server.
If you did not specify the configuration filename, the TFTP server, or if the configuration file could not
be downloaded, the switch attempts to download a configuration file by using various combinations of
filenames and TFTP server addresses. The files include the specified configuration filename (if any) and
these files: network-config, cisconet.cfg, hostname.config, or hostname.cfg, where hostname is the
switch’s current hostname. The TFTP server addresses used include the specified TFTP server address
(if any) and the broadcast address (255.255.255.255).
For the switch to successfully download a configuration file, the TFTP server must contain one or more
configuration files in its base directory. The files can include these files:
• The configuration file named in the DHCP reply (the actual switch configuration file).
• The network-confg or the cisconet.cfg file (known as the default configuration files).
• The router-confg or the ciscortr.cfg file (These files contain commands common to all switches.
Normally, if the DHCP and TFTP servers are properly configured, these files are not accessed.)
If you specify the TFTP server name in the DHCP server-lease database, you must also configure the
TFTP server name-to-IP-address mapping in the DNS-server database.
If the TFTP server to be used is on a different LAN from the switch, or if it is to be accessed by the
switch through the broadcast address (which occurs if the DHCP server response does not contain all the
required information described previously), a relay must be configured to forward the TFTP packets to
the TFTP server. For more information, see the “Configuring the Relay Device” section on page 3-8. The
preferred solution is to configure the DHCP server with all the required information.
Configuring the DNS

The DHCP server uses the DNS server to resolve the TFTP server name to an IP address. You must
configure the TFTP server name-to-IP address map on the DNS server. The TFTP server contains the
configuration files for the switch.
You can configure the IP addresses of the DNS servers in the lease database of the DHCP server from
where the DHCP replies will retrieve them. You can enter up to two DNS server IP addresses in the lease
database.
The DNS server can be on the same or on a different LAN as the switch. If it is on a different LAN, the
switch must be able to access it through a router.

OL-8553-06 3-7
Configuring the Relay Device

You must configure a relay device, also referred to as a relay agent, when a switch sends broadcast
packets that require a response from a host on a different LAN. Examples of broadcast packets that the
switch might send are DHCP, DNS, and in some cases, TFTP packets. You must configure this relay
device to forward received broadcast packets on an interface to the destination host.
If the relay device is a Cisco router, enable IP routing (ip routing global configuration command), and
configure helper addresses by using the ip helper-address interface configuration command.
For example, in Figure 3-2, configure the router interfaces as follows:
On interface 10.0.0.2:
router(config-if)# ip helper-address 20.0.0.2
On interface 20.0.0.1
Note If the switch is acting as the relay device, configure the interface as a routed port. For more information,
see the “Routed Ports” section on page 11-4 and the “Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces” section on
page 11-25.
Figure 3-2 Relay Device Used in Autoconfiguration
Switch Cisco router

(DHCP client) (Relay)
10.0.0.2
10.0.0.1 20.0.0.1
20.0.0.2 20.0.0.3 20.0.0.4

49068
DHCP server TFTP server DNS server
Obtaining Configuration Files

Depending on the availability of the IP address and the configuration filename in the DHCP reserved
lease, the switch obtains its configuration information in these ways:
• The IP address and the configuration filename is reserved for the switch and provided in the DHCP
reply (one-file read method).
The switch receives its IP address, subnet mask, TFTP server address, and the configuration
filename from the DHCP server. The switch sends a unicast message to the TFTP server to retrieve
the named configuration file from the base directory of the server and upon receipt, it completes its
boot-up process.

3-8 OL-8553-06
• The IP address and the configuration filename is reserved for the switch, but the TFTP server
address is not provided in the DHCP reply (one-file read method).
The switch receives its IP address, subnet mask, and the configuration filename from the DHCP
server. The switch sends a broadcast message to a TFTP server to retrieve the named configuration
file from the base directory of the server, and upon receipt, it completes its boot-up process.
• Only the IP address is reserved for the switch and provided in the DHCP reply. The configuration
filename is not provided (two-file read method).
The switch receives its IP address, subnet mask, and the TFTP server address from the DHCP server.
The switch sends a unicast message to the TFTP server to retrieve the network-confg or cisconet.cfg
default configuration file. (If the network-confg file cannot be read, the switch reads the cisconet.cfg
file.)
The default configuration file contains the hostnames-to-IP-address mapping for the switch. The
switch fills its host table with the information in the file and obtains its hostname. If the hostname
is not found in the file, the switch uses the hostname in the DHCP reply. If the hostname is not
specified in the DHCP reply, the switch uses the default Switch as its hostname.
After obtaining its hostname from the default configuration file or the DHCP reply, the switch reads
the configuration file that has the same name as its hostname (hostname-confg or hostname.cfg,
depending on whether network-confg or cisconet.cfg was read earlier) from the TFTP server. If the
cisconet.cfg file is read, the filename of the host is truncated to eight characters.
If the switch cannot read the network-confg, cisconet.cfg, or the hostname file, it reads the
router-confg file. If the switch cannot read the router-confg file, it reads the ciscortr.cfg file.
Note The switch broadcasts TFTP server requests if the TFTP server is not obtained from the DHCP replies,
if all attempts to read the configuration file through unicast transmissions fail, or if the TFTP server
name cannot be resolved to an IP address.
Example Configuration
Figure 3-3 shows a sample network for retrieving IP information by using DHCP-based autoconfiguration.
Figure 3-3 DHCP-Based Autoconfiguration Network Example
Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4

00e0.9f1e.2001 00e0.9f1e.2002 00e0.9f1e.2003 00e0.9f1e.2004
Cisco router
10.0.0.10
10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.3

111394
DHCP server DNS server TFTP server

(tftpserver)
Table 3-2 shows the configuration of the reserved leases on the DHCP server.

OL-8553-06 3-9
Table 3-2 DHCP Server Configuration
Switch A Switch B Switch C Switch D

Binding key (hardware address) 00e0.9f1e.2001 00e0.9f1e.2002 00e0.9f1e.2003 00e0.9f1e.2004
IP address 10.0.0.21 10.0.0.22 10.0.0.23 10.0.0.24
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router address 10.0.0.10 10.0.0.10 10.0.0.10 10.0.0.10
DNS server address 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.2
TFTP server name tftpserver or tftpserver or tftpserver or tftpserver or
10.0.0.3 10.0.0.3 10.0.0.3 10.0.0.3
Boot filename (configuration file) switcha-confg switchb-confg switchc-confg switchd-confg
(optional)
Hostname (optional) switcha switchb switchc switchd
DNS Server Configuration

The DNS server maps the TFTP server name tftpserver to IP address 10.0.0.3.
TFTP Server Configuration (on UNIX)
The TFTP server base directory is set to /tftpserver/work/. This directory contains the network-confg file
used in the two-file read method. This file contains the hostname to be assigned to the switch based on
its IP address. The base directory also contains a configuration file for each switch (switcha-confg,
switchb-confg, and so forth) as shown in this display:
prompt> cd /tftpserver/work/
prompt> ls
network-confg
switcha-confg
switchb-confg
switchc-confg
switchd-confg
prompt> cat network-confg
ip host switcha 10.0.0.21
ip host switchb 10.0.0.22
ip host switchc 10.0.0.23
ip host switchd 10.0.0.24
DHCP Client Configuration

No configuration file is present on Switch A through Switch D.
Configuration Explanation
In Figure 3-3, Switch A reads its configuration file as follows:
• It obtains its IP address 10.0.0.21 from the DHCP server.
• If no configuration filename is given in the DHCP server reply, Switch A reads the network-confg
file from the base directory of the TFTP server.
• It adds the contents of the network-confg file to its host table.
• It reads its host table by indexing its IP address 10.0.0.21 to its hostname (switcha).
• It reads the configuration file that corresponds to its hostname; for example, it reads switch1-confg
from the TFTP server.
Switches B through D retrieve their configuration files and IP addresses in the same way.

3-10 OL-8553-06
Configuring the DHCP Auto Configuration and Image Update Features

Using DHCP to download a new image and a new configuration to a switch requires that you configure
at least two switches: One switch acts as a DHCP and TFTP server. The client switch is configured to
download either a new configuration file or a new configuration file and a new image file.
Configuring DHCP Autoconfiguration (Only Configuration File)

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure DHCP autoconfiguration of the
TFTP and DHCP settings on a new switch to download a new configuration file.
Command Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode.
Step 2 ip dhcp poolname Create a name for the DHCP Server address pool, and enter DHCP
pool configuration mode.
Step 3 bootfile filename Specify the name of the configuration file that is used as a boot image.
Step 4 network network-number mask Specify the subnet network number and mask of the DHCP address
prefix-length pool.
Note The prefix length specifies the number of bits that comprise
the address prefix. The prefix is an alternative way of
specifying the network mask of the client. The prefix length
must be preceded by a forward slash (/).
Step 5 default-router address Specify the IP address of the default router for a DHCP client.
Step 6 option 150 address Specify the IP address of the TFTP server.
Step 7 exit Return to global configuration mode.
Step 8 tftp-server flash:filename.text Specify the configuration file on the TFTP server.
Step 9 interface interface-id Specify the address of the client that will receive the configuration
file.
Step 10 no switchport Put the interface into Layer 3 mode.
Step 11 ip address address mask Specify the IP address and mask for the interface.
Step 12 end Return to privileged EXEC mode.
Step 13 copy running-config startup-config (Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.
This example shows how to configure a switch as a DHCP server so that it will download a configura-
tion file:
Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# ip dhcp pool pool1
Switch(dhcp-config)# network 10.10.10.0 255.255.255.0
Switch(dhcp-config)# bootfile config-boot.text
Switch(dhcp-config)# default-router 10.10.10.1
Switch(dhcp-config)# option 150 10.10.10.1
Switch(dhcp-config)# exit
Switch(config)# tftp-server flash:config-boot.text
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/4
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0
Switch(config-if)# end

OL-8553-06 3-11
Configuring DHCP Auto-Image Update (Configuration File and Image)

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure DHCP autoconfiguration to
configure TFTP and DHCP settings on a new switch to download a new image and a new configuration
file.
Note Before following the steps in this table, you must create a text file (for example, autoinstall_dhcp) that
will be uploaded to the switch. In the text file, put the name of the image that you want to download (for
example, c3560-ipservices-mz.122-44.3.SE.tar). This image must be a tar and not a bin file.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip dhcp pool name Create a name for the DHCP server address pool and enter DHCP pool
configuration mode.
Step 3 bootfile filename Specify the name of the file that is used as a boot image.
Step 4 network network-number mask Specify the subnet network number and mask of the DHCP address pool.
prefix-length
Note The prefix length specifies the number of bits that comprise the
address prefix. The prefix is an alternative way of specifying the
network mask of the client. The prefix length must be preceded
by a forward slash (/).
Step 5 default-router address Specify the IP address of the default router for a DHCP client.
Step 6 option 150 address Specify the IP address of the TFTP server.
Step 7 option 125 hex Specify the path to the text file that describes the path to the image file.
Step 8 copy tftp flash filename.txt Upload the text file to the switch.
Step 9 copy tftp flash imagename.tar Upload the tar file for the new image to the switch.
Step 11 tftp-server flash:config.text Specify the Cisco IOS configuration file on the TFTP server.
Step 12 tftp-server flash:imagename.tar Specify the image name on the TFTP server.
Step 13 tftp-server flash:filename.txt Specify the text file that contains the name of the image file to download
Step 14 interface interface-id Specify the address of the client that will receive the configuration file.
Step 16 ip address address mask Specify the IP address and mask for the interface.
This example shows how to configure a switch as a DHCP server so it downloads a configuration file:
Switch# config terminal
Switch(config)# ip dhcp pool pool1
Switch(dhcp-config)# network 10.10.10.0 255.255.255.0
Switch(dhcp-config)# bootfile config-boot.text
Switch(dhcp-config)# default-router 10.10.10.1
Switch(dhcp-config)# option 150 10.10.10.1
Switch(dhcp-config)# option 125 hex
0000.0009.0a05.08661.7574.6f69.6e73.7461.6c6c.5f64.686370

3-12 OL-8553-06
Switch(dhcp-config)# exit
Switch(config)# tftp-server flash:config-boot.text
Switch(config)# tftp-server flash:c3560-ipservices-mz.122-44.3.SE.tar
Switch(config)# tftp-server flash:boot-config.text
Switch(config)# tftp-server flash: autoinstall_dhcp
Configuring the Client

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a switch to download a
configuration file and new image from a DHCP server:
Command Purpose
Step 2 boot host dhcp Enable autoconfiguration with a saved configuration.
Step 3 boot host retry timeout timeout-value (Optional) Set the amount of time the system tries to
download a configuration file.
Note If you do not set a timeout the system will
indefinitely try to obtain an IP address from the
DHCP server.
Step 4 banner config-save ^C warning-message ^C (Optional) Create warning messages to be displayed
when you try to save the configuration file to NVRAM.
Step 6 show boot Verify the configuration.
This example uses a Layer 3 SVI interface on VLAN 99 to enable DHCP-based autoconfiguration with
a saved configuration:
Switch(conf)# boot host dhcp
Switch(conf)# boot host retry timeout 300
Switch(conf)# banner config-save ^C Caution - Saving Configuration File to NVRAM May Cause
You to Nolonger Automatically Download Configuration Files at Reboot^C
Switch(config)# vlan 99
Switch(config-vlan)# interface vlan 99
Switch(config-if)# no shutdown
Switch# show boot
BOOT path-list:
Config file: flash:/config.text
Private Config file: flash:/private-config.text
Enable Break: no
Manual Boot: no
HELPER path-list:
NVRAM/Config file
buffer size: 32768
Timeout for Config
Download: 300 seconds
Config Download
via DHCP: enabled (next boot: enabled)
Switch#

OL-8553-06 3-13
Note You should only configure and enable the Layer 3 interface. Do not assign an IP address or DHCP-based
autoconfiguration with a saved configuration.
Manually Assigning IP Information

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to manually assign IP information to multiple
switched virtual interfaces (SVIs):
Note If the switch is running the IP services image, you can also manually assign IP information to a port if
you first put the port into Layer 3 mode by using the no switchport interface configuration command.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface vlan vlan-id Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the VLAN to which the IP
information is assigned. The VLAN range is 1 to 4094.
Step 3 ip address ip-address subnet-mask Enter the IP address and subnet mask.
Step 5 ip default-gateway ip-address Enter the IP address of the next-hop router interface that is directly
connected to the switch where a default gateway is being configured. The
default gateway receives IP packets with unresolved destination IP
addresses from the switch.
Once the default gateway is configured, the switch has connectivity to the
remote networks with which a host needs to communicate.
Note When your switch is configured to route with IP, it does not need
to have a default gateway set.
Step 7 show interfaces vlan vlan-id Verify the configured IP address.
Step 8 show ip redirects Verify the configured default gateway.
To remove the switch IP address, use the no ip address interface configuration command. If you are
removing the address through a Telnet session, your connection to the switch will be lost. To remove the
default gateway address, use the no ip default-gateway global configuration command.
For information on setting the switch system name, protecting access to privileged EXEC commands,
and setting time and calendar services, see Chapter 7, “Administering the Switch.”

3-14 OL-8553-06
Checking and Saving the Running Configuration
Checking and Saving the Running Configuration

You can check the configuration settings that you entered or changes that you made by entering this
privileged EXEC command:
Switch# show running-config
Building configuration...
Current configuration: 1363 bytes

!
version 12.2
no service pad
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password-encryption
!
hostname Switch A
!
enable secret 5 $1$ej9.$DMUvAUnZOAmvmgqBEzIxE0
!
.
<output truncated>
.
interface gigabitethernet0/1
no switchport
ip address 172.20.137.50 255.255.255.0
!
interface gigabitethernet0/2
mvr type source
<output truncated>
...!
interface VLAN1
ip address 172.20.137.50 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
ip default-gateway 172.20.137.1 !
!
snmp-server community private RW
snmp-server community public RO
snmp-server community private@es0 RW
snmp-server community public@es0 RO
snmp-server chassis-id 0x12
!
end
To store the configuration or changes you have made to your startup configuration in flash memory, enter
this privileged EXEC command:
Switch# copy running-config startup-config
Destination filename [startup-config]?
This command saves the configuration settings that you made. If you fail to do this, your configuration
will be lost the next time you reload the system. To display information stored in the NVRAM section
of flash memory, use the show startup-config or more startup-config privileged EXEC command.
For more information about alternative locations from which to copy the configuration file, see
Appendix B, “Working with the Cisco IOS File System, Configuration Files, and Software Images.”

OL-8553-06 3-15
Modifying the Startup Configuration

These sections describe how to modify the switch startup configuration:
• Default Boot Configuration, page 3-16
• Automatically Downloading a Configuration File, page 3-16
• Booting Manually, page 3-17
• Booting a Specific Software Image, page 3-18
• Controlling Environment Variables, page 3-18
See also Appendix B, “Working with the Cisco IOS File System, Configuration Files, and Software
Images,” for information about switch configuration files.
Default Boot Configuration

Table 3-3 shows the default boot-up configuration.
Table 3-3 Default Boot Configuration

Operating system software image The switch attempts to automatically boot up the system using information in the
BOOT environment variable. If the variable is not set, the switch attempts to load and
execute the first executable image it can by performing a recursive, depth-first search
throughout the flash file system.
The Cisco IOS image is stored in a directory that has the same name as the image file
(excluding the .bin extension).
In a depth-first search of a directory, each encountered subdirectory is completely
searched before continuing the search in the original directory.
Configuration file Configured switches use the config.text file stored on the system board in flash
memory.
A new switch has no configuration file.
Automatically Downloading a Configuration File

You can automatically download a configuration file to your switch by using the DHCP-based
autoconfiguration feature. For more information, see the “Understanding DHCP-Based
Autoconfiguration” section on page 3-3.
Specifying the Filename to Read and Write the System Configuration

By default, the Cisco IOS software uses the file config.text to read and write a nonvolatile copy of the
system configuration. However, you can specify a different filename, which will be loaded during the
next boot-up cycle.

3-16 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to specify a different configuration filename:
Command Purpose
Step 2 boot config-file flash:/file-url Specify the configuration file to load during the next boot-up
cycle.
For file-url, specify the path (directory) and the configuration
filename.
Filenames and directory names are case sensitive.
Step 4 show boot Verify your entries.
The boot config-file global configuration command changes the
setting of the CONFIG_FILE environment variable.
To return to the default setting, use the no boot config-file global configuration command.
Booting Manually
By default, the switch automatically boots up; however, you can configure it to manually boot up.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch to manually boot up
during the next boot cycle:
Command Purpose
Step 2 boot manual Enable the switch to manually boot up during the next boot cycle.
The boot manual global command changes the setting of the
MANUAL_BOOT environment variable.
The next time you reboot the system, the switch is in boot loader
mode, shown by the switch: prompt. To boot up the system, use the
boot filesystem:/file-url boot loader command.
• For filesystem:, use flash: for the system board flash device.
• For file-url, specify the path (directory) and the name of the
bootable image.
To disable manual booting, use the no boot manual global configuration command.

OL-8553-06 3-17
Booting a Specific Software Image

By default, the switch attempts to automatically boot up the system using information in the BOOT
environment variable. If this variable is not set, the switch attempts to load and execute the first
executable image it can by performing a recursive, depth-first search throughout the flash file system. In
a depth-first search of a directory, each encountered subdirectory is completely searched before
continuing the search in the original directory. However, you can specify a specific image to boot up.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch to boot a specific image
during the next boot cycle:
Command Purpose
Step 2 boot system filesystem:/file-url Configure the switch to boot a specific image in flash memory during the
next boot cycle.
• For filesystem:, use flash: for the system board flash device.
• For file-url, specify the path (directory) and the name of the bootable
image.
The boot system global command changes the setting of the BOOT
environment variable.
During the next boot cycle, the switch attempts to automatically boot up the
system using information in the BOOT environment variable.
To return to the default setting, use the no boot system global configuration command.
Controlling Environment Variables

With a normally operating switch, you enter the boot loader mode only through a switch console
connection configured for 9600 b/s. Unplug the switch power cord, and press the switch Mode button
while reconnecting the power cord. You can release the Mode button a second or two after the LED
above port 1 turns off. Then the boot loader switch: prompt appears.
The switch boot loader software provides support for nonvolatile environment variables, which can be
used to control how the boot loader, or any other software running on the system, behaves. Boot loader
environment variables are similar to environment variables that can be set on UNIX or DOS systems.
Environment variables that have values are stored in flash memory outside of the flash file system.
Each line in these files contains an environment variable name and an equal sign followed by the value
of the variable. A variable has no value if it is not listed in this file; it has a value if it is listed in the file
even if the value is a null string. A variable that is set to a null string (for example, “ ”) is a variable with
a value. Many environment variables are predefined and have default values.

3-18 OL-8553-06
Environment variables store two kinds of data:

• Data that controls code, which does not read the Cisco IOS configuration file. For example, the
name of a boot loader helper file, which extends or patches the functionality of the boot loader can
be stored as an environment variable.
• Data that controls code, which is responsible for reading the Cisco IOS configuration file. For
example, the name of the Cisco IOS configuration file can be stored as an environment variable.
You can change the settings of the environment variables by accessing the boot loader or by using Cisco
IOS commands. Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to alter the setting of the environment
variables.
Note For complete syntax and usage information for the boot loader commands and environment variables,
see the command reference for this release.
Table 3-4 describes the function of the most common environment variables.
Table 3-4 Environment Variables
Variable Boot Loader Command Cisco IOS Global Configuration Command

BOOT set BOOT filesystem:/file-url ... boot system filesystem:/file-url ...
A semicolon-separated list of executable files to Specifies the Cisco IOS image to load during the
try to load and execute when automatically next boot cycle. This command changes the
booting. If the BOOT environment variable is not setting of the BOOT environment variable.
set, the system attempts to load and execute the
first executable image it can find by using a
recursive, depth-first search through the flash file
system. If the BOOT variable is set but the
specified images cannot be loaded, the system
attempts to boot the first bootable file that it can
find in the flash file system.
MANUAL_BOOT set MANUAL_BOOT yes boot manual
Decides whether the switch automatically or Enables manually booting up the switch during
manually boots up. the next boot cycle and changes the setting of the
MANUAL_BOOT environment variable.
Valid values are 1, yes, 0, and no. If it is set to no
or 0, the boot loader attempts to automatically The next time you reboot the system, the switch is
boot up the system. If it is set to anything else, in boot loader mode. To boot up the system, use
you must manually boot up the switch from the the boot flash:filesystem:/file-url boot loader
boot loader mode. command, and specify the name of the bootable
image.
CONFIG_FILE set CONFIG_FILE flash:/file-url boot config-file flash:/file-url
Changes the filename that Cisco IOS uses to read Specifies the filename that Cisco IOS uses to read
and write a nonvolatile copy of the system and write a nonvolatile copy of the system
configuration. configuration. This command changes the
CONFIG_FILE environment variable.

OL-8553-06 3-19
Scheduling a Reload of the Software Image

You can schedule a reload of the software image to occur on the switch at a later time (for example, late
at night or during the weekend when the switch is used less), or you can synchronize a reload
network-wide (for example, to perform a software upgrade on all switches in the network).
Note A scheduled reload must take place within approximately 24 days.
Configuring a Scheduled Reload

To configure your switch to reload the software image at a later time, use one of these commands in
privileged EXEC mode:
• reload in [hh:]mm [text]
This command schedules a reload of the software to take affect in the specified minutes or hours and
minutes. The reload must take place within approximately 24 days. You can specify the reason for
the reload in a string up to 255 characters in length.
• reload at hh:mm [month day | day month] [text]
This command schedules a reload of the software to take place at the specified time (using a 24-hour
clock). If you specify the month and day, the reload is scheduled to take place at the specified time
and date. If you do not specify the month and day, the reload takes place at the specified time on the
current day (if the specified time is later than the current time) or on the next day (if the specified
time is earlier than the current time). Specifying 00:00 schedules the reload for midnight.
Note Use the at keyword only if the switch system clock has been set (through Network Time
Protocol (NTP), the hardware calendar, or manually). The time is relative to the configured
time zone on the switch. To schedule reloads across several switches to occur
simultaneously, the time on each switch must be synchronized with NTP.
The reload command halts the system. If the system is not set to manually boot up, it reboots itself. Use
the reload command after you save the switch configuration information to the startup configuration
(copy running-config startup-config).
If your switch is configured for manual booting, do not reload it from a virtual terminal. This restriction
prevents the switch from entering the boot loader mode and thereby taking it from the remote user’s
control.
If you modify your configuration file, the switch prompts you to save the configuration before reloading.
During the save operation, the system requests whether you want to proceed with the save if the
CONFIG_FILE environment variable points to a startup configuration file that no longer exists. If you
proceed in this situation, the system enters setup mode upon reload.
This example shows how to reload the software on the switch on the current day at 7:30 p.m:
Switch# reload at 19:30
Reload scheduled for 19:30:00 UTC Wed Jun 5 1996 (in 2 hours and 25 minutes)
Proceed with reload? [confirm]
This example shows how to reload the software on the switch at a future time:
Switch# reload at 02:00 jun 20
Reload scheduled for 02:00:00 UTC Thu Jun 20 1996 (in 344 hours and 53 minutes)

3-20 OL-8553-06
To cancel a previously scheduled reload, use the reload cancel privileged EXEC command.
Displaying Scheduled Reload Information

To display information about a previously scheduled reload or to find out if a reload has been scheduled
on the switch, use the show reload privileged EXEC command.
It displays reload information including the time the reload is scheduled to occur and the reason for the
reload (if it was specified when the reload was scheduled).

OL-8553-06 3-21

3-22 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 4
Configuring Cisco EnergyWise
The Catalyst 3560 switch command reference has command syntax and usage information.
• Managing Single Entities, page 4-1
• Managing Multiple Entities, page 4-12
• Troubleshooting EnergyWise, page 4-16
• Additional Information, page 4-18
For more information about EnergyWise, go to
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10195/tsd_products_support_series_home.html.
Managing Single Entities

Use Cisco EnergyWise to manage the energy usage of entities in an EnergyWise network.
• EnergyWise Entity, page 4-1
• EnergyWise Domain, page 4-2
• EnergyWise Network, page 4-2
• Single PoE Switch Scenario, page 4-3
• EnergyWise Power Level, page 4-4
• EnergyWise Importance, page 4-5
• Configuration Guidelines, page 4-5
• PoE and EnergyWise Interactions, page 4-5
• Manually Managing Power, page 4-6
• Automatically Managing Power (Recurrence), page 4-9
• Examples, page 4-11
EnergyWise Entity
An EnergyWise entity is a physical or logical device with EnergyWise enabled, such as a Catalyst
switch, a power over Ethernet (PoE) port, or a PoE device.

OL-8553-06 4-1
Chapter 4 Configuring Cisco EnergyWise
EnergyWise uses a distributed model to manage energy usage.

• Switches are grouped in an EnergyWise domain and become domain entities. They receive messages
from and send them to other domain entities.
• An entity in the EnergyWise domain responds to queries.
• An entity participating in EnergyWise controls the power usage of connected PoE devices, such as
an IP phone, an IP camera, or a PoE-enabled device. For example, a Catalyst switch sends a
power-off message to an IP phone.
On an EnergyWise-enabled entity
• The entity always participates in EnergyWise.
• PoE ports participate in EnergyWise.
• Non-PoE ports do not participate in EnergyWise.
EnergyWise Domain
An EnergyWise domain can be an EnergyWise network.
The domain is treated as one unit of power management.
Entities have neighbor-to-neighbor relationships with other domain entities.
For more information, see the “Additional Information” section on page 4-18.
EnergyWise Network
An EnergyWise network has EnergyWise entities in a domain.

4-2 OL-8553-06
Figure 4-1 Typical Network
1 SNMP Manager
SNMP TCP
3 3 3
Catalyst 6500 3
switches
Catalyst non-PoE
switches
2 3 3
3
3
Catalyst PoE Access
switches Wireless point
controller
3 IP 3
205655
IP phone Cisco IP camera
1 Entity managing power usage 3 Entities

2 Domain
Single PoE Switch Scenario

Managing the power usage when
• A PoE entity powers on or off the connected entities.
• A PoE entity applies a network policy that powers on and powers off connected entities. The
specified times are local times based on the PoE-entity time zone. For example, IP phones are
powered on at 7:00 a.m. (0700) local time, and they are powered off at 7:00 p.m. (1900) local time.
This is also known as the recurrence scenario.

OL-8553-06 4-3
Figure 4-2 Single PoE Switch Example
Catalyst PoE switch

1
3
Catalyst non-PoE
switch
1
3
WAN
Catalyst non-PoE
switch
1
3
Router
Catalyst PoE
switch
1
3
3 3 3
IP IP
205656
IP phone Cisco IP camera IP phone

2 Domain
EnergyWise Power Level

The EnergyWise power level is for both a PoE port and a switch.
The default power level is 10.
A Catalyst switch does not support level 0.
A PoE port supports level 0 to level 10.
If the power level is 0, the port is powered off.
If the power level is from 1 to 10, the port is powered on. If the power level is 0, enter any value in this
range to power on the PoE port or the switch.
When the power level changes, the port determines the action for the connected entities.

4-4 OL-8553-06
EnergyWise Importance
Set the EnergyWise importance value on a PoE port or a switch to rank domain entities.
The default importance value is 1.
EnergyWise Names, Roles, and Keywords

Set an EnergyWise-specific entity name to identify the domain entity.
• For a PoE port, the default is a short version of the port name; for example, Gi0.2 for Gigabit
Ethernet 0/2.
• For a switch, the default is the hostname.
Set the role of the domain entity to differentiate it from other entities.
• For a PoE port, the default is interface.
• For a switch, the default is the model number.
Set at least one keyword describing an entity to differentiate it from other entities.
Configuration Guidelines
By default, EnergyWise is disabled.
When you add an entity to a domain, EnergyWise is enabled on the entity and its PoE ports.
Use the energywise level 0 interface configuration command to power off a PoE port.
You cannot use the energywise level 0 global configuration command to power off the entity.
If you schedule the entity to power on the PoE port at 7:00 a.m. (0700), the port powers on within 1
minute, between 7:00 a.m.(0700) and 7:01 a.m. (0701) local time.
PoE and EnergyWise Interactions

Table 4-1 Does the Entity Participate in EnergyWise?
PoE Mode
EnergyWise Entity auto never static
PoE port Yes No Yes
Non-PoE port No No No
If the PoE port mode is never, the port power is off, but EnergyWise is not disabled. You can
• Configure EnergyWise on the port.
• Configure the port power level. The level takes effect after you change the port mode to auto or
static. You do not need to restart the switch.
If EnergyWise is disabled, the entity can use PoE to manage port power.

OL-8553-06 4-5
Manually Managing Power

• Powering the Entity, page 4-6
• Configuring Entity Attributes, page 4-7
• Powering the PoE Port, page 4-8
• Configuring PoE-Port Attributes, page 4-8
Powering the Entity

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode:
Command Purpose
Step 1 show energywise (Optional) Verify that EnergyWise is disabled.
Step 3 energywise domain domain-name secret [0 | 7] Enable EnergyWise on the entity, assign the entity to a domain
password [protocol udp port udp-port-number with the specified domain-name, and set the password for secure
[interface interface-id | ip ip-address]] communication among the entities in the domain.
• (Optional) 0—Use an unencrypted password. This is the
default.
• (Optional) 7—Use a hidden password.
If you do not enter 0 or 7, the entity uses the default value of
0.
• (Optional) port udp-port-number—Specify the UDP port
that sends and receives queries.
The range is from 1 to 65000. The default is 43440.
• (Optional) interface interface-id—Specify the port from
which the EnergyWise messages are sent.
• (Optional) ip ip-address—Specify the IP address from which
the EnergyWise messages are sent.
For the domain-name and password
• You can enter alphanumeric characters and symbols such as
#, (, %, !, or &.
• Do not use an asterisk (*) or a blank space between the
characters and symbols.
By default, no domain and password are assigned.
Step 5 show energywise Verify your entries.
show energywise domain

4-6 OL-8553-06
Configuring Entity Attributes

Command Purpose
Step 1 show energywise (Optional) Verify that EnergyWise is enabled.
Step 3 energywise importance importance (Optional) Set the importance of the entity.
The default is 1.
Step 4 energywise keywords word,word,... (Optional) Assign at least one keyword for the entity.
When assigning multiple keywords, separate the keywords with
commas, and do not use spaces between keywords.
#, (, %, !, or &.
By default, no keywords are defined.
Step 5 energywise management udp-port-number (Optional) Specify the UDP port that sends and receives queries.
The default is 43440.
Step 6 energywise name name (Optional) Specify the EnergyWise-specific entity name.
#, (, %, !, or &.
The default is the hostname.
Step 7 energywise neighbor [hostname| ip-address] (Optional) Assign a static neighbor.
udp-port-number
• (Optional) Hostname (hostname) or IP address (ip-address).
• UDP port (udp-port-number) that sends and receives queries.
By default, no static neighbors are assigned.
Step 8 energywise role role (Optional) Specify the role of the entity in the EnergyWise
domain. For example, lobby.b20.
#, (, %, !, or &.
The default is the model number.

OL-8553-06 4-7
Command Purpose
Step 10 show energywise Verify your entries.
show energywise domain
Powering the PoE Port

Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port or the range of ports to be configured, and enter
interface configuration mode.
Step 3 energywise level 0 (Optional) Manually power off the port, or
or
energywise level 10 Manually power on the port.
Step 5 show energywise domain Verify your entries.
show energywise children
Note The power level that you set in Step 3 is the default power
level when the switch restarts.
Configuring PoE-Port Attributes

Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port or the range of ports to be configured, and enter
Step 3 energywise importance importance (Optional) Set the importance of the port.
The default is 1.

4-8 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 4 energywise keywords word,word,... (Optional) Assign at least one keyword for the port.
When assigning multiple keywords, separate the keywords with
commas, and do not use spaces between keywords.
#, (, %, !, or &.
By default, no keywords are defined.
Step 5 energywise name name (Optional) Specify the EnergyWise-specific port name.
#, (, %, !, or &.
The default is a short version of the port name; for example, Gi0.2
for Gigabit Ethernet 0/2.
Step 6 energywise role role (Optional) Specify the role of the port in the domain. For
example, lobbyport.
#, (, %, !, or &.
By default, the role is interface.
Step 8 show energywise domain Verify your entries.
show energywise children
Automatically Managing Power (Recurrence)

Command Purpose
Step 1 show energywise (Optional) Verify that EnergyWise is enabled.

OL-8553-06 4-9
Command Purpose
Step 3 energywise domain domain-name secret [0 | 7] Enable EnergyWise on the entity, assign the entity to a domain
password [protocol udp port udp-port-number with the specified domain-name, and set the password for secure
[interface interface-id | ip ip-address]] communication among the entities in the domain.
• (Optional) 0—Use an unencrypted password. This is the
default.
• (Optional) 7—Use a hidden password.
If you do not enter 0 or 7, the entity uses the default value of
0.
• (Optional) port udp-port-number—Specify the UDP port
that sends and receives queries.
The default is 43440.
• (Optional) interface interface-id—Specify the port that
sends EnergyWise messages.
• (Optional) ip ip-address—Specify the IP address of the port
that sends EnergyWise messages.
For the domain-name and password,
#, (, %, !, or &.
By default, no domain and password are assigned.
Step 4 interface interface-id Specify the port or a range of ports to be configured, and enter
Step 5 energywise level 10 recurrence importance (Optional) Schedule the power-on recurrence.
importance at minute hour day_of_month month
• importance importance—Set the importance of the port in
day_of_week
the domain. The range is from 1 to 100. The default is 1.
• minute—The range is from 0 to 59. Use * for the wildcard.
• hour—The range is from 0 to 23. Use * for the wildcard.
• day_of_month—The range is from 1 to 31. Use * for the
wildcard.
• month—The range is from 1 (January) to 12 (December). Use
* for the wildcard.
• day_of_week—The range is from 0 (Sunday) to 6 (Saturday).
Use * for the wildcard.
Note The specified time is the local time based on the
PoE-entity time zone.

4-10 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 6 energywise level 0 recurrence importance (Optional) Schedule the power-off recurrence.
importance at minute hour day_of_month month
• importance importance—Set the importance of the port in
day_of_week
the domain. The range is from 1 to 100. The default is 1.
• minute—The range is from 0 to 59. Use * for the wildcard.
• hour—The range is from 0 to 23. Use * for the wildcard.
• day_of_month—The range is from 1 to 31. Use * for the
wildcard.
• month—The range is from 1 (January) to 12 (December). Use
* for the wildcard.
• day_of_week—The range is from 0 (Sunday) to 6 (Saturday).
Use * for the wildcard.
Note The specified time is the local time based on the
PoE-entity time zone.
Step 8 show energywise recurrence Verify your entries.
Examples
• Setting Up the Domain, page 4-11
• Manually Managing Power, page 4-12
• Automatically Managing Power, page 4-12
Setting Up the Domain

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# energywise domain cisco secret cisco protocol udp port 43440 ip 2.2.4.30
Switch(config)# energywise importance 50
Switch(config)# energywise keywords lab1,devlab
Switch(config)# energywise name LabSwitch
Switch(config)# energywise neighbor TG3560G-21 43440
Switch(config)# energywise role role.labaccess
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show energywise domain
Name : TG3560G-41
Domain : cisco
Protocol : udp
IP : 2.2.2.21
Port : 43440
Switch# show energywise neighbors
Capability Codes: R - Router, T - Trans Bridge, B - Source Route Bridge
S - Switch, H - Host, I - IGMP, r - Repeater, P - Phone
Id Neighbor Name Ip:Port Prot Capability
-- ------------- ------- ---- ----------
1 TG3560G-21 2.2.2.21:43440 udp S I
2 TG3560G-31 2.2.4.31:43440 static S I
3 TG3560G-22 2.2.2.22:43440 cdp S I

OL-8553-06 4-11
Managing Multiple Entities
Manually Managing Power

To power on the lab IP phones now:
Switch(config-if)# energywise importance 65
Switch(config-if)# energywise name labphone.5
Switch(config-if)# energywise role role.labphone
Automatically Managing Power

The lab IP phones automatically power on at 8:00 a.m. (0800) local time and power off at
8:00 p.m.(2000) local time.
Switch(config-if)# energywise level 10 recurrence importance 90 at 0 8 * * *
Switch(config-if)# energywise level 0 recurrence importance 90 at 0 20 * * *
Switch(config-if)# energywise importance 50
Switch(config-if)# energywise name labInterface.3
Switch(config-if)# energywise role role.labphone
Switch# show energywise recurrences

Id Addr Class Action Lvl Cron
-- ---- ----- ------ --- ----
1 Gi0/3 QUERY SET 10 minutes: 0 hour: 8 day: * month: * weekday: *
2 Gi0/3 QUERY SET 0 minutes: 0 hour: 20 day: * month: * weekday: *

<output truncated>
interface GigabitEthernet0/3
energywise level 10 recurrence at 0 8 * * *
energywise level 0 recurrence at 0 20 * * *
energywise importance 50
energywise role role.lobbyaccess
energywise name lobbyInterface.3
end
<output truncated>

• Multiple PoE Switch Scenario, page 4-13
• EnergyWise Query, page 4-13
• Using Queries to Manage Power in the Domain, page 4-14
• Examples, page 4-15

4-12 OL-8553-06
Multiple PoE Switch Scenario

Figure 4-3 Multiple PoE Switches Example
WAN
Catalyst PoE switch

1
3
Router Router
3 Catalyst Catalyst 3
non-PoE non-PoE
switches switches
3 3
2
1 Catalyst PoE 1 Catalyst PoE
switches switches
3 3
3 3 3 3
IP IP IP
205657
IP phone Cisco IP camera IP phone IP phone

2 Domain
EnergyWise Query
• Collect power usage information.
• Summarize power information from entities.
• Set parameters.
Use these attributes to filter results:
• Importance.
• Entity name.
• One or more keywords for a port or for a group of ports.

OL-8553-06 4-13
Use EnergyWise importance values to select entities in a query. For example, an office phone is less
important than an emergency phone that should never be in sleep mode.
Query results show entities, such as PoE ports, with importance values less than or equal to the specified
value in the query.
The entity sending a query to all domain entities receives the results.
Using Queries to Manage Power in the Domain

Command Purpose
Step 1 energywise query importance importance (Optional) Run a query to display power information for the
{keywords word,word,... | name name} collect domain entities and PoE ports.
{delta | usage}
• importance importance—Filter the results based on the
or importance value. Only entities with values less than or equal
to the specified value appear. The importance range is from
energywise query importance importance
1 to 100.
{keywords word,word,... | name name} sum
{delta | usage} • (Optional) keywords word,word,...—Filter the results based
on one or more of the specified keywords.
• (Optional) name name —Filter the results based on the name.
For the wildcard, use * or name* with the asterisk at the end
of the name phrase.
• collect {delta | usage}—Display the delta or usage values
for the entities and PoE ports.
– delta—Display only the differences between the current
and available power usage.
– usage—Display only the current power usage.
• sum {delta | usage}—Display the sum of the delta or usage
values for the entities and PoE ports.
– delta—Display only the sum of the differences between
the current and available power usage.
– usage—Display the sum of the current power usage.
Note In the results with the sum keyword, the Responded total
is not accurate. The Queried total is accurate and is the
total number of entities that respond to the query.
Repeat this step to run another query.

4-14 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 2 energywise query importance importance (Optional) Run a query to power on or power off the domain
{keywords word,word,... | name name} set level entities or PoE ports.
level
Caution Use this query with care because it affects the entity on
which you enter the command and other domain
entities that match the query criteria.
• importance importance—Filter the results based on the

importance value. Only entities with values less than or equal
to the specified value appear. The importance range is from
1 to 100.
• (Optional) keywords word,word,...—Filter the results based
on one or more of the specified keywords.
• (Optional) name name —Filter the results based on the name.
For the wildcard, use * or name* with the asterisk at the end
of the name phrase.
• set level level—Set the power level of the entities or PoE
ports. The range is from 0 to 10.
Repeat this step to run another query.
Examples
• Querying with the Name Attribute, page 4-15
• Querying with Keywords, page 4-16
• Querying to Set Power Levels, page 4-16
In these examples, Switch 1 and Switch 2 are in the same domain. The entity called shipping.1 is a PoE
port on Switch 1, and the entity called shipping.2 is a PoE port on Switch 2.
Querying with the Name Attribute

To show the power usage of the domain entities with names beginning with shipping and with
importance values less than or equal to 80, run this query on Switch 1:
Switch# energywise query importance 80 name shipping.* collect usage
EnergyWise query, timeout is 3 seconds:
Host Name Usage

---- ---- -----
192.168.20.1 shipping.1 6.3 (W)
192.168.20.2 shipping.2 8.5 (W)
Queried: 2 Responded: 2 Time: 0.4 seconds
The first row (shipping.1) is from Switch 1. The second row (shipping.2) is from Switch 2, a neighbor
of Switch 1.

OL-8553-06 4-15
Troubleshooting EnergyWise
Querying with Keywords

To show the power usage of IP phones with different names, different roles, and importance values less
than or equal to 80, but all with the Admin keyword, run this query on Switch 1:
Switch# energywise query importance 80 keyword Admin collect usage
Host Name Usage

---- ---- -----
192.168.40.2 shipping.1 6.3 (W)
192.168.50.2 orders.1 10.3 (W)
Switch 1 reports two phones are connected to Switch 2, a neighbor of Switch 1.
Querying to Set Power Levels

Run these queries on Switch 1 to
• Set the power level of the shipping.2 entity to 0:
Switch# energywise query importance 80 name shipping.2 set level 0
• Manually set the power level of the shipping.1 entity and the shipping.2 entity to 0:
Switch# energywise query importance 90 name shipping.* set level 0
• Set the power level of entities with the keyword Admin to 10:
Switch# energywise query importance 60 keyword Admin set level 10
!!!!
Success rate is (2/2) setting entities
Verify the power levels:

Switch# energywise query importance 85 keyword Admin collect usage
Host Name Usage

---- ---- -----
192.168.40.2 shipping.1 0.0 (W)
192.168.50.2 orders.1 0.0 (W)
You can also use the show energywise usage privileged EXEC command on Switch 1 and Switch 2
to verify the power levels.
• Using CLI Commands, page 4-17
• Verifying the Power Usage, page 4-17

4-16 OL-8553-06
Using CLI Commands
Table 4-2 EnergyWise Commands
Command Purpose
clear energywise neighbors privileged EXEC Delete the EnergyWise neighbor tables on the entity. It immediately
discovers the neighbors and recreates the table.
no energywise interface configuration Disable EnergyWise on the PoE port.
no energywise domain global configuration Disable EnergyWise on the entity.
Table 4-3 show Privileged EXEC Commands
Command Purpose
show energywise Display the settings and status for the entity.
show energywise children Display the status of the entity and the PoE ports in the
domain.
show energywise domain Display the domain to which the entity belongs.
show energywise events Display the last ten events (messages) sent to other entities
in the domain.
show energywise neighbors Display the neighbor tables for the domains to which the
entity belongs.
show energywise recurrences Display the EnergyWise settings and status for recurrence.
show energywise statistics Display the counters for events and errors.
show energywise usage Display the current power usage on the entity.
show energywise version Display the current EnergyWise version.
show power inline Display the PoE status.
show cdp neighbors Display the neighbors discovered by CDP.
For more information about the commands, see the command reference for this release.
Verifying the Power Usage

• This example shows that the Cisco 7960 IP Phone uses 6.3 watts and that the Cisco 7970G IP Phone
uses 10.3 watts.
Switch# show energywise usage children
Interface Name Usage Caliber
--------- ---- ----- -------
Switch 144.0 (W) max
Gi0/1 Gi1.0.1 6.3 (W) trusted
Gi0/2 Gi1.0.2 10.3 (W) trusted

OL-8553-06 4-17
Additional Information
• Managing Power in a LAN, page 4-18
• Managing Power with IP Routing, page 4-18
Managing Power in a LAN

Multiple switches connected in the same LAN and in the same EnergyWise domain.
Figure 4-4 EnergyWise with LANs
Switch 1 Switch 2
Port 24 Port 1 Port 24
Port 23
205694
Catalyst PoE switch
The domain configuration includes

• UDP default port (43440)
• Gigabit Ethernet port 0/23 on Switch 2 with a connected Catalyst PoE switch.
On Switch 1, configure the domain:
Switch(config): energywise domain cisco secret 0 cisco protocol udp port 43440 interface
gigabitethernet1/0/23
On Switch 1, verify that the EnergyWise protocols discovered the neighbors:

Capability Codes: R - Router, T - Trans Bridge, B - Source Route Bridge
S - Switch, H - Host, I - IGMP, r - Repeater, P - Phone
-- ------------- ------- ---- ----------
4 Switch-2 192.168.20.2:43440 udp S I
Managing Power with IP Routing

Switch 1 and Switch 2 are in a disjointed domain. Neighbors might not be discovered automatically.

4-18 OL-8553-06
Figure 4-5 EnergyWise with IP Routing
LAN 10 LAN 20
Switch 1 Router A Switch 2
192.168.1.2 Port 24 Port 1 Port 24 Port 1

192.168.1.1/24 192.168.2.1/24 192.168.2.2
Switch 3
192.168.1.3
205695
On Switch 1, to prevent a disjointed domain, manually assign Switch 2 as a static neighbor or the reverse.
Switch(config)# energywise neighbor 192.168.2.2 43440
Switch 1 discovers Switch 3 as a neighbor because they are in the same LAN.
On Switch 1, verify neighbor discovery.
Capability Codes: R-Router, T-Trans Bridge, B-Source Route Bridge
S-Switch, H-Host, I-IGMP, r-Repeater, P-Phone

-- ------------- ------- ---- ----------
6 Switch-2 192.168.2.2:43440 static S I
9 Switch-3 192.168.1.3:43440 cdp S I
Switch 1 uses both static and dynamic protocols to detect neighbors.

Verify that switches are in the same domain:
Switch# energywise query name * collect usage
Host Name Usage
---- ---- -----
192.168.1.2 Switch-1 96.0 (W)
192.168.40.2 shipping.1 6.3 (W)
192.168.40.2 guest.1 10.3 (W)
192.168.50.2 shipping.2 8.5 (W)
192.168.50.2 lobby.1 10.3 (W)
Queried: 72 Responded: 72 Time: 0.65 second
In a routed network, a switch port assigned to a VLAN can be connected to a router interface. The IP
address of the VLAN SVI is 192.168.1.2, and the IP address of the router interface is 192.168.1.1.
Configure the domain:
Switch(config)# energywise domain cisco secret 0 cisco protocol udp port 43440 ip
192.168.1.2

OL-8553-06 4-19
Note To prevent a disjointed domain, you can also configure a helper address on Router A and specify that the
router use UDP to forward broadcast packets with the
ip helper-address address interface configuration command.
ip forward-protocol udp [port] global configuration command.

4-20 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 5
Configuring Cisco IOS Configuration Engine
This chapter describes how to configure the feature on the Catalyst 3560 switch.
Note For complete configuration information for the Cisco Configuration Engine, go to
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/netmgtsw/ps4617/tsd_products_support_series_home.html
For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, go to the Cisco IOS
Network Management Command Reference, Release 12.4 at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/netmgmt/command/reference/nm_book.html
• Understanding Cisco Configuration Engine Software, page 5-1

• Understanding Cisco IOS Agents, page 5-5
• Configuring Cisco IOS Agents, page 5-6
• Displaying CNS Configuration, page 5-14
Understanding Cisco Configuration Engine Software

The Cisco Configuration Engine is network management software that acts as a configuration service
for automating the deployment and management of network devices and services (see Figure 5-1). Each
Configuration Engine manages a group of Cisco devices (switches and routers) and the services that they
deliver, storing their configurations and delivering them as needed. The Configuration Engine automates
initial configurations and configuration updates by generating device-specific configuration changes,
sending them to the device, executing the configuration change, and logging the results.
The Configuration Engine supports standalone and server modes and has these CNS components:
• Configuration service (web server, file manager, and namespace mapping server)
• Event service (event gateway)
• Data service directory (data models and schema)
In standalone mode, the Configuration Engine supports an embedded Directory Service. In this mode,
no external directory or other data store is required. In server mode, the Configuration Engine supports
the use of a user-defined external directory.

OL-8553-06 5-1
Chapter 5 Configuring Cisco IOS Configuration Engine
Figure 5-1 Configuration Engine Architectural Overview
Service provider network
Data service
Configuration directory
engine
Configuration server
Event service
Web-based
user interface
141327
Order entry
configuration management
• Configuration Service, page 5-2

• Event Service, page 5-3
• What You Should Know About the CNS IDs and Device Hostnames, page 5-3
Configuration Service
The Configuration Service is the core component of the Cisco Configuration Engine. It consists of a
configuration server that works with Cisco IOS CNS agents on the switch. The Configuration Service
delivers device and service configurations to the switch for initial configuration and mass
reconfiguration by logical groups. Switches receive their initial configuration from the Configuration
Service when they start up on the network for the first time.
The Configuration Service uses the CNS Event Service to send and receive configuration change events
and to send success and failure notifications.
The configuration server is a web server that uses configuration templates and the device-specific
configuration information stored in the embedded (standalone mode) or remote (server mode) directory.
Configuration templates are text files containing static configuration information in the form of CLI
commands. In the templates, variables are specified using Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) URLs that reference the device-specific configuration information stored in a directory.
The Cisco IOS agent can perform a syntax check on received configuration files and publish events to
show the success or failure of the syntax check. The configuration agent can either apply configurations
immediately or delay the application until receipt of a synchronization event from the configuration
server.

5-2 OL-8553-06
Event Service
The Cisco Configuration Engine uses the Event Service for receipt and generation of configuration
events. The event agent is on the switch and facilitates the communication between the switch and the
event gateway on the Configuration Engine.
The Event Service is a highly capable publish-and-subscribe communication method. The Event Service
uses subject-based addressing to send messages to their destinations. Subject-based addressing
conventions define a simple, uniform namespace for messages and their destinations.
NameSpace Mapper
The Configuration Engine includes the NameSpace Mapper (NSM) that provides a lookup service for
managing logical groups of devices based on application, device or group ID, and event.
Cisco IOS devices recognize only event subject-names that match those configured in Cisco IOS
software; for example, cisco.cns.config.load. You can use the namespace mapping service to designate
events by using any desired naming convention. When you have populated your data store with your
subject names, NSM changes your event subject-name strings to those known by Cisco IOS.
For a subscriber, when given a unique device ID and event, the namespace mapping service returns a set
of events to which to subscribe. Similarly, for a publisher, when given a unique group ID, device ID,
and event, the mapping service returns a set of events on which to publish.
What You Should Know About the CNS IDs and Device Hostnames
The Configuration Engine assumes that a unique identifier is associated with each configured switch.
This unique identifier can take on multiple synonyms, where each synonym is unique within a particular
namespace. The event service uses namespace content for subject-based addressing of messages.
The Configuration Engine intersects two namespaces, one for the event bus and the other for the
configuration server. Within the scope of the configuration server namespace, the term ConfigID is the
unique identifier for a device. Within the scope of the event bus namespace, the term DeviceID is the
CNS unique identifier for a device.
Because the Configuration Engine uses both the event bus and the configuration server to provide
configurations to devices, you must define both ConfigID and Device ID for each configured switch.
Within the scope of a single instance of the configuration server, no two configured switches can share
the same value for ConfigID. Within the scope of a single instance of the event bus, no two configured
switches can share the same value for DeviceID.
ConfigID
Each configured switch has a unique ConfigID, which serves as the key into the Configuration Engine
directory for the corresponding set of switch CLI attributes. The ConfigID defined on the switch must
match the ConfigID for the corresponding switch definition on the Configuration Engine.
The ConfigID is fixed at startup time and cannot be changed until the device restarts, even if the switch
hostname is reconfigured.

OL-8553-06 5-3
DeviceID
Each configured switch participating on the event bus has a unique DeviceID, which is analogous to the
switch source address so that the switch can be targeted as a specific destination on the bus. All switches
configured with the cns config partial global configuration command must access the event bus.
Therefore, the DeviceID, as originated on the switch, must match the DeviceID of the corresponding
switch definition in the Configuration Engine.
The origin of the DeviceID is defined by the Cisco IOS hostname of the switch. However, the DeviceID
variable and its usage reside within the event gateway adjacent to the switch.
The logical Cisco IOS termination point on the event bus is embedded in the event gateway, which in
turn functions as a proxy on behalf of the switch. The event gateway represents the switch and its
corresponding DeviceID to the event bus.
The switch declares its hostname to the event gateway immediately after the successful connection to
the event gateway. The event gateway couples the DeviceID value to the Cisco IOS hostname each time
this connection is established. The event gateway caches this DeviceID value for the duration of its
connection to the switch.
Hostname and DeviceID

The DeviceID is fixed at the time of the connection to the event gateway and does not change even when
the switch hostname is reconfigured.
When changing the switch hostname on the switch, the only way to refresh the DeviceID is to break the
connection between the switch and the event gateway. Enter the no cns event global configuration
command followed by the cns event global configuration command.
When the connection is re-established, the switch sends its modified hostname to the event gateway. The
event gateway redefines the DeviceID to the new value.
Caution When using the Configuration Engine user interface, you must first set the DeviceID field to the
hostname value that the switch acquires after–not before–you use the cns config initial global
configuration command at the switch. Otherwise, subsequent cns config partial global configuration
command operations malfunction.
Using Hostname, DeviceID, and ConfigID

In standalone mode, when a hostname value is set for a switch, the configuration server uses the
hostname as the DeviceID when an event is sent on hostname. If the hostname has not been set, the event
is sent on the cn=<value> of the device.
In server mode, the hostname is not used. In this mode, the unique DeviceID attribute is always used for
sending an event on the bus. If this attribute is not set, you cannot update the switch.
These and other associated attributes (tag value pairs) are set when you run Setup on the Configuration
Engine.
Note For more information about running the setup program on the Configuration Engine, see the
Configuration Engine setup and configuration guide at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/netmgtsw/ps4617/prod_installation_guides_list.html

5-4 OL-8553-06
Understanding Cisco IOS Agents
Understanding Cisco IOS Agents

The CNS event agent feature allows the switch to publish and subscribe to events on the event bus and
works with the Cisco IOS agent. The Cisco IOS agent feature supports the switch by providing these
features:
• Initial Configuration, page 5-5
• Incremental (Partial) Configuration, page 5-6
• Synchronized Configuration, page 5-6
Initial Configuration
When the switch first comes up, it attempts to get an IP address by broadcasting a DHCP request on the
network. Assuming there is no DHCP server on the subnet, the distribution switch acts as a DHCP relay
agent and forwards the request to the DHCP server. Upon receiving the request, the DHCP server assigns
an IP address to the new switch and includes the TFTP server IP address, the path to the bootstrap
configuration file, and the default gateway IP address in a unicast reply to the DHCP relay agent. The
DHCP relay agent forwards the reply to the switch.
The switch automatically configures the assigned IP address on interface VLAN 1 (the default) and
downloads the bootstrap configuration file from the TFTP server. Upon successful download of the
bootstrap configuration file, the switch loads the file in its running configuration.
The Cisco IOS agents initiate communication with the Configuration Engine by using the appropriate
ConfigID and EventID. The Configuration Engine maps the Config ID to a template and downloads the
full configuration file to the switch.
Figure 5-2 shows a sample network configuration for retrieving the initial bootstrap configuration file
by using DHCP-based autoconfiguration.
Figure 5-2 Initial Configuration Overview
TFTP
server
Configuration WAN
Engine V
DHCP
server
DHCP relay agent

Distribution layer default gateway
Access layer
141328
switches

OL-8553-06 5-5
Configuring Cisco IOS Agents
Incremental (Partial) Configuration

After the network is running, new services can be added by using the Cisco IOS agent. Incremental
(partial) configurations can be sent to the switch. The actual configuration can be sent as an event
payload by way of the event gateway (push operation) or as a signal event that triggers the switch to
initiate a pull operation.
The switch can check the syntax of the configuration before applying it. If the syntax is correct, the
switch applies the incremental configuration and publishes an event that signals success to the
configuration server. If the switch does not apply the incremental configuration, it publishes an event
showing an error status. When the switch has applied the incremental configuration, it can write it to
NVRAM or wait until signaled to do so.
Synchronized Configuration
When the switch receives a configuration, it can defer application of the configuration upon receipt of a
write-signal event. The write-signal event tells the switch not to save the updated configuration into its
NVRAM. The switch uses the updated configuration as its running configuration. This ensures that the
switch configuration is synchronized with other network activities before saving the configuration in
NVRAM for use at the next reboot.

The Cisco IOS agents embedded in the switch Cisco IOS software allow the switch to be connected and
automatically configured as described in the “Enabling Automated CNS Configuration” section on
page 5-6. If you want to change the configuration or install a custom configuration, see these sections
for instructions:
• Enabling the CNS Event Agent, page 5-7
• Enabling the Cisco IOS CNS Agent, page 5-9
Enabling Automated CNS Configuration

To enable automated CNS configuration of the switch, you must first complete the prerequisites in
Table 5-1. When you complete them, power on the switch. At the setup prompt, do nothing: The switch
begins the initial configuration as described in the “Initial Configuration” section on page 5-5. When the
full configuration file is loaded on your switch, you need to do nothing else.
Table 5-1 Prerequisites for Enabling Automatic Configuration
Device Required Configuration

Access switch Factory default (no configuration file)
Distribution switch • IP helper address
• Enable DHCP relay agent
• IP routing (if used as default gateway)

5-6 OL-8553-06
Table 5-1 Prerequisites for Enabling Automatic Configuration (continued)
Device Required Configuration

DHCP server • IP address assignment
• TFTP server IP address
• Path to bootstrap configuration file on the TFTP server
• Default gateway IP address
TFTP server • A bootstrap configuration file that includes the CNS
configuration commands that enable the switch to
communicate with the Configuration Engine
• The switch configured to use either the switch MAC address
or the serial number (instead of the default hostname) to
generate the ConfigID and EventID
• The CNS event agent configured to push the configuration file
to the switch
CNS Configuration Engine One or more templates for each type of device, with the ConfigID
of the device mapped to the template.
Note For more information about running the setup program and creating templates on the Configuration
Engine, see the Cisco Configuration Engine Installation and Setup Guide, 1.5 for Linux at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/net_mgmt/configuration_engine/1.5/installation_linux/guide/setup_
1.html
Enabling the CNS Event Agent
Note You must enable the CNS event agent on the switch before you enable the CNS configuration agent.

OL-8553-06 5-7
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the CNS event agent on the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 cns event {hostname | ip-address} [port-number] Enable the event agent, and enter the gateway parameters.
[backup] [failover-time seconds] [keepalive seconds
• For {hostname | ip-address}, enter either the
retry-count] [reconnect time] [source ip-address]
hostname or the IP address of the event gateway.
• (Optional) For port number, enter the port number for
the event gateway. The default port number is 11011.
• (Optional) Enter backup to show that this is the
backup gateway. (If omitted, this is the primary
gateway.)
• (Optional) For failover-time seconds, enter how long
the switch waits for the primary gateway route after
the route to the backup gateway is established.
• (Optional) For keepalive seconds, enter how often
the switch sends keepalive messages. For retry-count,
enter the number of unanswered keepalive messages
that the switch sends before the connection is
terminated. The default for each is 0.
• (Optional) For reconnect time, enter the maximum
time interval that the switch waits before trying to
reconnect to the event gateway.
• (Optional) For source ip-address, enter the source IP
address of this device.
Note Though visible in the command-line help string,
the encrypt and the clock-timeout time keywords
are not supported.
Step 4 show cns event connections Verify information about the event agent.
Step 5 show running-config Verify your entries.
To disable the CNS event agent, use the no cns event {ip-address | hostname} global configuration
command.
This example shows how to enable the CNS event agent, set the IP address gateway to 10.180.1.27, set
120 seconds as the keepalive interval, and set 10 as the retry count.
Switch(config)# cns event 10.180.1.27 keepalive 120 10

5-8 OL-8553-06
Enabling the Cisco IOS CNS Agent

After enabling the CNS event agent, start the Cisco IOS CNS agent on the switch. You can enable the
Cisco IOS agent with these commands:
• The cns config initial global configuration command enables the Cisco IOS agent and initiates an
initial configuration on the switch.
• The cns config partial global configuration command enables the Cisco IOS agent and initiates a
partial configuration on the switch. You can then use the Configuration Engine to remotely send
incremental configurations to the switch.
Enabling an Initial Configuration

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the CNS configuration agent and
initiate an initial configuration on the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 cns template connect name Enter CNS template connect configuration mode, and
specify the name of the CNS connect template.
Step 3 cli config-text Enter a command line for the CNS connect template.
Repeat this step for each command line in the template.
Step 4 Repeat Steps 2 to 3 to configure another CNS connect
template.
Step 6 cns connect name [retries number] [retry-interval Enter CNS connect configuration mode, specify the name
seconds] [sleep seconds] [timeout seconds] of the CNS connect profile, and define the profile
parameters. The switch uses the CNS connect profile to
connect to the Configuration Engine.
• Enter the name of the CNS connect profile.
• (Optional) For retries number, enter the number of
connection retries. The range is 1 to 30. The default
is 3.
• (Optional) For retry-interval seconds, enter the
interval between successive connection attempts to the
Configuration Engine. The range is 1 to 40 seconds.
The default is 10 seconds.
• (Optional) For sleep seconds, enter the amount of time
before which the first connection attempt occurs. The
range is 0 to 250 seconds. The default is 0.
• (Optional) For timeout seconds, enter the amount of
time after which the connection attempts end. The
range is 10 to 2000 seconds. The default is 120.

OL-8553-06 5-9
Command Purpose
Step 7 discover {controller controller-type | dlci Specify the interface parameters in the CNS connect
[subinterface subinterface-number] | interface profile.
[interface-type] | line line-type}
• For controller controller-type, enter the controller
type.
• For dlci, enter the active data-link connection
identifiers (DLCIs).
(Optional) For subinterface subinterface-number,
specify the point-to-point subinterface number that is
used to search for active DLCIs.
• For interface [interface-type], enter the type of
interface.
• For line line-type, enter the line type.
Step 8 template name [ ... name] Specify the list of CNS connect templates in the CNS
connect profile to be applied to the switch configuration.
You can specify more than one template.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 7 to 8 to specify more interface parameters
and CNS connect templates in the CNS connect profile.
Step 11 hostname name Enter the hostname for the switch.
Step 12 ip route network-number (Optional) Establish a static route to the Configuration
Engine whose IP address is network-number.

5-10 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 13 cns id interface num {dns-reverse | ipaddress | (Optional) Set the unique EventID or ConfigID used by the
mac-address} [event] [image] Configuration Engine.
or • For interface num, enter the type of interface–for
example, ethernet, group-async, loopback, or
cns id {hardware-serial | hostname | string string |
virtual-template. This setting specifies from which
udi} [event] [image]
interface the IP or MAC address should be retrieved to
define the unique ID.
• For {dns-reverse | ipaddress | mac-address}, enter
dns-reverse to retrieve the hostname and assign it as
the unique ID, enter ipaddress to use the IP address,
or enter mac-address to use the MAC address as the
unique ID.
• (Optional) Enter event to set the ID to be the event-id
value used to identify the switch.
• (Optional) Enter image to set the ID to be the image-id
value used to identify the switch.
Note If both the event and image keywords are omitted,
the image-id value is used to identify the switch.
• For {hardware-serial | hostname| string string |

udi}, enter hardware-serial to set the switch serial
number as the unique ID, enter hostname (the default)
to select the switch hostname as the unique ID, enter
an arbitrary text string for string string as the unique
ID, or enter udi to set the unique device identifier
(UDI) as the unique ID.

OL-8553-06 5-11
Command Purpose
Step 14 cns config initial {hostname | ip-address} Enable the Cisco IOS agent, and initiate an initial
[port-number] [event] [no-persist] [page page] configuration.
[source ip-address] [syntax-check]
• For {hostname | ip-address}, enter the hostname or the
IP address of the configuration server.
• (Optional) For port-number, enter the port number of
the configuration server. The default port number is
80.
• (Optional) Enable event for configuration success,
failure, or warning messages when the configuration is
finished.
• (Optional) Enable no-persist to suppress the
automatic writing to NVRAM of the configuration
pulled as a result of entering the cns config initial
global configuration command. If the no-persist
keyword is not entered, using the cns config initial
command causes the resultant configuration to be
automatically written to NVRAM.
• (Optional) For page page, enter the web page of the
initial configuration. The default is
/Config/config/asp.
• (Optional) Enter source ip-address to use for source IP
address.
• (Optional) Enable syntax-check to check the syntax
when this parameter is entered.
the encrypt, status url, and inventory keywords
are not supported.
Step 16 show cns config connections Verify information about the configuration agent.
To disable the CNS Cisco IOS agent, use the no cns config initial {ip-address | hostname} global
configuration command.
This example shows how to configure an initial configuration on a remote switch when the switch
configuration is unknown (the CNS Zero Touch feature).
Switch(config)# cns template connect template-dhcp
Switch(config-tmpl-conn)# cli ip address dhcp
Switch(config-tmpl-conn)# exit
Switch(config)# cns template connect ip-route
Switch(config-tmpl-conn)# cli ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 ${next-hop}
Switch(config)# cns connect dhcp
Switch(config-cns-conn)# discover interface gigabitethernet
Switch(config-cns-conn)# template template-dhcp
Switch(config-cns-conn)# template ip-route
Switch(config-cns-conn)# exit
Switch(config)# hostname RemoteSwitch
RemoteSwitch(config)# cns config initial 10.1.1.1 no-persist

5-12 OL-8553-06
This example shows how to configure an initial configuration on a remote switch when the switch IP
address is known. The Configuration Engine IP address is 172.28.129.22.
Switch(config)# cns template connect template-dhcp
Switch(config-tmpl-conn)# cli ip address dhcp
Switch(config)# cns template connect ip-route
Switch(config-tmpl-conn)# cli ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 ${next-hop}
Switch(config)# cns connect dhcp
Switch(config-cns-conn)# discover interface gigabitethernet
Switch(config-cns-conn)# template template-dhcp
Switch(config-cns-conn)# template ip-route
Switch(config-cns-conn)# exit
Switch(config)# hostname RemoteSwitch
RemoteSwitch(config)# ip route 172.28.129.22 255.255.255.255 11.11.11.1
RemoteSwitch(config)# cns id ethernet 0 ipaddress
RemoteSwitch(config)# cns config initial 172.28.129.22 no-persist
Enabling a Partial Configuration

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the Cisco IOS agent and to initiate a
partial configuration on the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 cns config partial {ip-address | hostname} Enable the configuration agent, and initiate a partial
[port-number] [source ip-address] configuration.
• For {ip-address | hostname}, enter the IP address or
the hostname of the configuration server.
• (Optional) For port-number, enter the port number of
the configuration server. The default port number is
80.
• (Optional) Enter source ip-address to use for the
source IP address.
the encrypt keyword is not supported.
Step 4 show cns config stats Verify information about the configuration agent.
or
show cns config outstanding
To disable the Cisco IOS agent, use the no cns config partial {ip-address | hostname} global
configuration command. To cancel a partial configuration, use the cns config cancel privileged EXEC
command.

OL-8553-06 5-13
Displaying CNS Configuration
Displaying CNS Configuration

Table 5-2 Privileged EXEC show Commands
Command Purpose
show cns config connections Displays the status of the CNS Cisco IOS agent connections.
show cns config outstanding Displays information about incremental (partial) CNS
configurations that have started but are not yet completed.
show cns config stats Displays statistics about the Cisco IOS agent.
show cns event connections Displays the status of the CNS event agent connections.
show cns event stats Displays statistics about the CNS event agent.
show cns event subject Displays a list of event agent subjects that are subscribed to by
applications.

5-14 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 6
Clustering Switches
This chapter provides the concepts and procedures to create and manage Catalyst 3560 switch clusters.
You can create and manage switch clusters by using Cisco Network Assistant (hereafter known as
Network Assistant), the command-line interface (CLI), or SNMP. For complete procedures, see the
online help. For the CLI cluster commands, see the switch command reference.
Note Network Assistant supports switch clusters, but we recommend that you instead group switches into
communities. Network Assistant has a Cluster Conversion Wizard to help you convert a cluster to a
community. For more information about Network Assistant, including introductory information on
managing switch clusters and converting a switch cluster to a community, see Getting Started with Cisco
Network Assistant, available on Cisco.com.
This chapter focuses on Catalyst 3560 switch clusters. It also includes guidelines and limitations for
clusters mixed with other cluster-capable Catalyst switches, but it does not provide complete
descriptions of the cluster features for these other switches. For complete cluster information for a
specific Catalyst platform, refer to the software configuration guide for that switch.
• Understanding Switch Clusters, page 6-1
• Planning a Switch Cluster, page 6-4
• Using the CLI to Manage Switch Clusters, page 6-15
• Using SNMP to Manage Switch Clusters, page 6-15
Note We do not recommend using the ip http access-class global configuration command to limit access to
specific hosts or networks. Access should be controlled through the cluster command switch or by
applying access control lists (ACLs) on interfaces that are configured with IP address. For more
information on ACLs, see Chapter 33, “Configuring Network Security with ACLs.”.
Understanding Switch Clusters

A switch cluster is a set of up to 16 connected, cluster-capable Catalyst switches that are managed as a
single entity. The switches in the cluster use the switch clustering technology so that you can configure
and troubleshoot a group of different Catalyst desktop switch platforms through a single IP address.

OL-8553-06 6-1
Chapter 6 Clustering Switches
In a switch cluster, 1 switch must be the cluster command switch and up to 15 other switches can be
cluster member switches. The total number of switches in a cluster cannot exceed 16 switches. The
cluster command switch is the single point of access used to configure, manage, and monitor the cluster
member switches. Cluster members can belong to only one cluster at a time.
The benefits of clustering switches include:
• Management of Catalyst switches regardless of their interconnection media and their physical
locations. The switches can be in the same location, or they can be distributed across a Layer 2 or
Layer 3 (if your cluster is using a Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 3560, or Catalyst 3750 switch as a Layer 3
router between the Layer 2 switches in the cluster) network.
Cluster members are connected to the cluster command switch according to the connectivity
guidelines described in the “Automatic Discovery of Cluster Candidates and Members” section on
page 6-4. This section includes management VLAN considerations for the Catalyst 1900,
Catalyst 2820, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2950, and Catalyst 3500 XL switches. For complete
information about these switches in a switch-cluster environment, refer to the software
configuration guide for that specific switch.
• Command-switch redundancy if a cluster command switch fails. One or more switches can be
designated as standby cluster command switches to avoid loss of contact with cluster members. A
cluster standby group is a group of standby cluster command switches.
• Management of a variety of Catalyst switches through a single IP address. This conserves on IP
addresses, especially if you have a limited number of them. All communication with the switch
cluster is through the cluster command switch IP address.
Table 6-1 lists the Catalyst switches eligible for switch clustering, including which ones can be cluster
command switches and which ones can only be cluster member switches, and the required software
versions.
Table 6-1 Switch Software and Cluster Capability
Switch Cisco IOS Release Cluster Capability

Catalyst 3750-E or Catalyst 3560-E 12.2(35)SE2 or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 3750 12.1(11)AX or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 3560 12.1(19)EA1b or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 3550 12.1(4)EA1 or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 2975 12.2(46)EX or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 2970 12.1(11)AX or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 2960 12.2(25)FX or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 2955 12.1(12c)EA1 or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 2950 12.0(5.2)WC(1) or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 2950 LRE 12.1(11)JY or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 2940 12.1(13)AY or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 3500 XL 12.0(5.1)XU or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 2900 XL (8-MB switches) 12.0(5.1)XU or later Member or command switch
Catalyst 2900 XL (4-MB switches) 11.2(8.5)SA6 (recommended) Member switch only
Catalyst 1900 and 2820 9.00(-A or -EN) or later Member switch only

6-2 OL-8553-06
Cluster Command Switch Characteristics

A cluster command switch must meet these requirements:
• It is running Cisco IOS Release 12.1(19)EA1 or later.
• It has an IP address.
• It has Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) version 2 enabled (the default).
• It is not a command or cluster member switch of another cluster.
• It is connected to the standby cluster command switches through the management VLAN and to the
cluster member switches through a common VLAN.
Standby Cluster Command Switch Characteristics

A standby cluster command switch must meet these requirements:
• It is running Cisco IOS 12.1(19)EA1 or later.
• It has an IP address.
• It has CDP version 2 enabled.
• It is connected to the command switch and to other standby command switches through its
management VLAN.
• It is connected to all other cluster member switches (except the cluster command and standby
command switches) through a common VLAN.
• It is redundantly connected to the cluster so that connectivity to cluster member switches is
maintained.
• It is not a command or member switch of another cluster.
Note Standby cluster command switches must be the same type of switches as the cluster command
switch. For example, if the cluster command switch is a Catalyst 3560 switch, the standby
cluster command switches must also be Catalyst 3560 switches. Refer to the switch
configuration guide of other cluster-capable switches for their requirements on standby cluster
command switches.
Candidate Switch and Cluster Member Switch Characteristics

Candidate switches are cluster-capable switches that have not yet been added to a cluster. Cluster
member switches are switches that have actually been added to a switch cluster. Although not required,
a candidate or cluster member switch can have its own IP address and password (for related
considerations, see the “IP Addresses” section on page 6-13 and “Passwords” section on page 6-13).
To join a cluster, a candidate switch must meet these requirements:
• It is running cluster-capable software.
• It has CDP version 2 enabled.
• It is not a command or cluster member switch of another cluster.

OL-8553-06 6-3
Planning a Switch Cluster
• If a cluster standby group exists, it is connected to every standby cluster command switch through
at least one common VLAN. The VLAN to each standby cluster command switch can be different.
• It is connected to the cluster command switch through at least one common VLAN.
Note Catalyst 1900, Catalyst 2820, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2950, and Catalyst 3500 XL
candidate and cluster member switches must be connected through their management VLAN
to the cluster command switch and standby cluster command switches. For complete
information about these switches in a switch-cluster environment, refer to the software
configuration guide for that specific switch.
This requirement does not apply if you have a Catalyst 2970, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 3560,
or Catalyst 3750 cluster command switch. Candidate and cluster member switches can
connect through any VLAN in common with the cluster command switch.

Anticipating conflicts and compatibility issues is a high priority when you manage several switches
through a cluster. This section describes these guidelines, requirements, and caveats that you should
understand before you create the cluster:
• Automatic Discovery of Cluster Candidates and Members, page 6-4
• HSRP and Standby Cluster Command Switches, page 6-10
• IP Addresses, page 6-13
• Hostnames, page 6-13
• Passwords, page 6-13
• SNMP Community Strings, page 6-14
• TACACS+ and RADIUS, page 6-14
• LRE Profiles, page 6-14
Refer to the release notes for the list of Catalyst switches eligible for switch clustering, including which
ones can be cluster command switches and which ones can only be cluster member switches, and for the
required software versions and browser and Java plug-in configurations.
Automatic Discovery of Cluster Candidates and Members

The cluster command switch uses Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) to discover cluster member switches,
candidate switches, neighboring switch clusters, and edge devices across multiple VLANs and in star or
cascaded topologies.
Note Do not disable CDP on the cluster command switch, on cluster members, or on any cluster-capable
switches that you might want a cluster command switch to discover. For more information about CDP,
see Chapter 25, “Configuring CDP.”

6-4 OL-8553-06
Following these connectivity guidelines ensures automatic discovery of the switch cluster, cluster
candidates, connected switch clusters, and neighboring edge devices:
• Discovery Through CDP Hops, page 6-5
• Discovery Through Non-CDP-Capable and Noncluster-Capable Devices, page 6-6
• Discovery Through Different VLANs, page 6-6
• Discovery Through Different Management VLANs, page 6-7
• Discovery Through Routed Ports, page 6-8
• Discovery of Newly Installed Switches, page 6-9
Discovery Through CDP Hops

By using CDP, a cluster command switch can discover switches up to seven CDP hops away (the default
is three hops) from the edge of the cluster. The edge of the cluster is where the last cluster member
switches are connected to the cluster and to candidate switches. For example, cluster member switches 9
and 10 in Figure 6-1 are at the edge of the cluster.
In Figure 6-1, the cluster command switch has ports assigned to VLANs 16 and 62. The CDP hop count
is three. The cluster command switch discovers switches 11, 12, 13, and 14 because they are within three
hops from the edge of the cluster. It does not discover switch 15 because it is four hops from the edge
of the cluster.
Figure 6-1 Discovery Through CDP Hops
Command device
VLAN 16 VLAN 62
Member Member
device 8 device 10
Member
device 9 Device 12
Device 11
candidate Device 13 Candidate
device devices
Edge of
cluster Device 14
Device 15
101321

OL-8553-06 6-5
Discovery Through Non-CDP-Capable and Noncluster-Capable Devices

If a cluster command switch is connected to a non-CDP-capable third-party hub (such as a non-Cisco
hub), it can discover cluster-enabled devices connected to that third-party hub. However, if the cluster
command switch is connected to a noncluster-capable Cisco device, it cannot discover a cluster-enabled
device connected beyond the noncluster-capable Cisco device.
Figure 6-2 shows that the cluster command switch discovers the switch that is connected to a third-party
hub. However, the cluster command switch does not discover the switch that is connected to a
Catalyst 5000 switch.
Figure 6-2 Discovery Through Non-CDP-Capable and Noncluster-Capable Devices
Command device
Third-party hub Catalyst 5000 switch

(non-CDP-capable) (noncluster-capable)
89377
Candidate device Candidate device
Discovery Through Different VLANs

If the cluster command switch is a Catalyst 2970, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 3560, or Catalyst 3750 switch,
the cluster can have cluster member switches in different VLANs. As cluster member switches, they
must be connected through at least one VLAN in common with the cluster command switch. The cluster
command switch in Figure 6-3 has ports assigned to VLANs 9, 16, and 62 and therefore discovers the
switches in those VLANs. It does not discover the switch in VLAN 50. It also does not discover the
switch in VLAN 16 in the first column because the cluster command switch has no VLAN connectivity
to it.
Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2950, and Catalyst 3500 XL cluster member switches must be connected to
the cluster command switch through their management VLAN. For information about discovery through
management VLANs, see the “Discovery Through Different Management VLANs” section on page 6-7.
For more information about VLANs, see Chapter 13, “Configuring VLANs.”

6-6 OL-8553-06
Figure 6-3 Discovery Through Different VLANs
Command device
VLAN 62 VLAN trunk 9,16
VLAN 50
101322
Discovery Through Different Management VLANs
Catalyst 2970, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 3560, or Catalyst 3750 cluster command switches can discover
and manage cluster member switches in different VLANs and different management VLANs. As cluster
member switches, they must be connected through at least one VLAN in common with the cluster
command switch. They do not need to be connected to the cluster command switch through their
management VLAN. The default management VLAN is VLAN 1.
Note If the switch cluster has a Catalyst 3750 or 2975 switch or has a switch stack, that switch or switch stack
must be the cluster command switch.
The cluster command switch and standby command switch in Figure 6-4 (assuming they are
Catalyst 2960, Catalyst 2970, Catalyst 2975, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 3560, or Catalyst 3750 cluster
command switches) have ports assigned to VLANs 9, 16, and 62. The management VLAN on the cluster
command switch is VLAN 9. Each cluster command switch discovers the switches in the different
management VLANs except these:
• Switches 7 and 10 (switches in management VLAN 4) because they are not connected through a
common VLAN (meaning VLANs 62 and 9) with the cluster command switch
• Switch 9 because automatic discovery does not extend beyond a noncandidate device, which is
switch 7

OL-8553-06 6-7
Figure 6-4 Discovery Through Different Management VLANs with a Layer 3 Cluster Command
Switch
Command Standby command

device device
VLAN 9
VLAN 16 VLAN 62 VLAN 9

Device 3
(management
VLAN 16) Device 5 Device 6
(management (management
VLAN 62) VLAN 9)
VLAN 16 VLAN trunk 4, 62 VLAN 9
Device 7 Device 8
VLAN 4) VLAN 9)
Device 4
(management VLAN 62 VLAN 4
VLAN 16)
Device 9 Device 10
101323
VLAN 62) VLAN 4)
Discovery Through Routed Ports

If the cluster command switch has a routed port (RP) configured, it discovers only candidate and cluster
member switches in the same VLAN as the routed port. For more information about routed ports, see the
“Routed Ports” section on page 11-4.
The Layer 3 cluster command switch in Figure 6-5 can discover the switches in VLANs 9 and 62 but not
the switch in VLAN 4. If the routed port path between the cluster command switch and cluster member
switch 7 is lost, connectivity with cluster member switch 7 is maintained because of the redundant path
through VLAN 9.

6-8 OL-8553-06
Figure 6-5 Discovery Through Routed Ports
Command device
VLAN 9
RP
RP
VLAN 62
VLAN
9
VLAN 62
VLAN 9
(management Member
VLAN 62) device 7
VLAN 4
101324
Discovery of Newly Installed Switches
To join a cluster, the new, out-of-the-box switch must be connected to the cluster through one of its
access ports. An access port (AP) carries the traffic of and belongs to only one VLAN. By default, the
new switch and its access ports are assigned to VLAN 1.
When the new switch joins a cluster, its default VLAN changes to the VLAN of the immediately
upstream neighbor. The new switch also configures its access port to belong to the VLAN of the
immediately upstream neighbor.
The cluster command switch in Figure 6-6 belongs to VLANs 9 and 16. When new cluster-capable
switches join the cluster:
• One cluster-capable switch and its access port are assigned to VLAN 9.
• The other cluster-capable switch and its access port are assigned to management VLAN 16.
Figure 6-6 Discovery of Newly Installed Switches
Command device
VLAN 9 VLAN 16
Device A Device B
AP AP
VLAN 9 VLAN 16
New (out-of-box) New (out-of-box)

101325
candidate device candidate device

OL-8553-06 6-9
HSRP and Standby Cluster Command Switches

The switch supports Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) so that you can configure a group of standby
cluster command switches. Because a cluster command switch manages the forwarding of all
communication and configuration information to all the cluster member switches, we strongly
recommend the following:
• For a cluster command switch stack, a standby cluster command switch is necessary if the entire
switch stack fails. However, if only the stack master in the command switch stack fails, the switch
stack elects a new stack master and resumes its role as the cluster command switch stack.
• For a cluster command switch that is a standalone switch, configure a standby cluster command
switch to take over if the primary cluster command switch fails.
A cluster standby group is a group of command-capable switches that meet the requirements described
in the “Standby Cluster Command Switch Characteristics” section on page 6-3. Only one cluster standby
group can be assigned per cluster.
Note The cluster standby group is an HSRP group. Disabling HSRP disables the cluster standby group.
The switches in the cluster standby group are ranked according to HSRP priorities. The switch with the
highest priority in the group is the active cluster command switch (AC). The switch with the next highest
priority is the standby cluster command switch (SC). The other switches in the cluster standby group are
the passive cluster command switches (PC). If the active cluster command switch and the standby cluster
command switch become disabled at the same time, the passive cluster command switch with the highest
priority becomes the active cluster command switch. For the limitations to automatic discovery, see the
“Automatic Recovery of Cluster Configuration” section on page 6-12. For information about changing
HSRP priority values, see the “Configuring HSRP Priority” section on page 40-7. The HSRP standby
priority interface configuration commands are the same for changing the priority of cluster standby
group members and router-redundancy group members.
Note The HSRP standby hold time interval should be greater than or equal to three times the hello time
interval. The default HSRP standby hold time interval is 10 seconds. The default HSRP standby hello
time interval is 3 seconds. For more information about the standby hold time and standby hello time
intervals, see the “Configuring HSRP Authentication and Timers” section on page 40-10.
These connectivity guidelines ensure automatic discovery of the switch cluster, cluster candidates,
connected switch clusters, and neighboring edge devices. These topics also provide more detail about
standby cluster command switches:
• Virtual IP Addresses, page 6-10
• Other Considerations for Cluster Standby Groups, page 6-11
• Automatic Recovery of Cluster Configuration, page 6-12
Virtual IP Addresses
You need to assign a unique virtual IP address and group number and name to the cluster standby group.
This information must be configured on a specific VLAN or routed port on the active cluster command
switch. The active cluster command switch receives traffic destined for the virtual IP address. To

6-10 OL-8553-06
manage the cluster, you must access the active cluster command switch through the virtual IP address,
not through the command-switch IP address. This is in case the IP address of the active cluster command
switch is different from the virtual IP address of the cluster standby group.
If the active cluster command switch fails, the standby cluster command switch assumes ownership of
the virtual IP address and becomes the active cluster command switch. The passive switches in the
cluster standby group compare their assigned priorities to decide the new standby cluster command
switch. The passive standby switch with the highest priority then becomes the standby cluster command
switch. When the previously active cluster command switch becomes active again, it resumes its role as
the active cluster command switch, and the current active cluster command switch becomes the standby
cluster command switch again. For more information about IP address in switch clusters, see the “IP
Addresses” section on page 6-13.
Other Considerations for Cluster Standby Groups

These requirements also apply:
• Standby cluster command switches must be the same type of switches as the cluster command
switch. For example, if the cluster command switch is a Catalyst 3560 switch, the standby cluster
command switches must also be Catalyst 3560 switches. Refer to the switch configuration guide of
other cluster-capable switches for their requirements on standby cluster command switches.
If your switch cluster has a Catalyst 3560 switch, it should be the cluster command switch unless
the cluster has a Catalyst 3750 switch or switch stack. If the switch cluster has a Catalyst 3750
switch or switch stack, that switch or switch stack must be the cluster command switch.
• Only one cluster standby group can be assigned to a cluster. You can have more than one
router-redundancy standby group.
An HSRP group can be both a cluster standby group and a router-redundancy group. However, if a
router-redundancy group becomes a cluster standby group, router redundancy becomes disabled on
that group. You can re-enable it by using the CLI. For more information about HSRP and router
redundancy, see Chapter 40, “Configuring HSRP.”
• All standby-group members must be members of the cluster.
Note There is no limit to the number of switches that you can assign as standby cluster command
switches. However, the total number of switches in the cluster—which would include the
active cluster command switch, standby-group members, and cluster member
switches—cannot be more than 16.
• Each standby-group member (Figure 6-7) must be connected to the cluster command switch through
the same VLAN. In this example, the cluster command switch and standby cluster command
switches are Catalyst 2970, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 3560, or Catalyst 3750 cluster command
switches. Each standby-group member must also be redundantly connected to each other through at
least one VLAN in common with the switch cluster.

OL-8553-06 6-11
Catalyst 1900, Catalyst 2820, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2950, and Catalyst 3500 XL cluster
member switches must be connected to the cluster standby group through their management
VLANs. For more information about VLANs in switch clusters, see these sections:
– “Discovery Through Different VLANs” section on page 6-6
– “Discovery Through Different Management VLANs” section on page 6-7
Figure 6-7 VLAN Connectivity between Standby-Group Members and Cluster Members
Command Passive Standby

device command device command device
VLANs 9,16 VLANs 9,16
Management
VLAN 9 VLAN 16
Management VLAN 9 Management

VLAN 16
VLAN 9 VLAN 16
101326
Member devices
Automatic Recovery of Cluster Configuration

The active cluster command switch continually forwards cluster-configuration information (but not
device-configuration information) to the standby cluster command switch. This ensures that the standby
cluster command switch can take over the cluster immediately after the active cluster command switch
fails.
Automatic discovery has these limitations:
• This limitation applies only to clusters that have Catalyst 2950, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 3560, and
Catalyst 3750 command and standby cluster command switches: If the active cluster command
switch and standby cluster command switch become disabled at the same time, the passive cluster
command switch with the highest priority becomes the active cluster command switch. However,
because it was a passive standby cluster command switch, the previous cluster command switch did
not forward cluster-configuration information to it. The active cluster command switch only
forwards cluster-configuration information to the standby cluster command switch. You must
therefore rebuild the cluster.
• This limitation applies to all clusters: If the active cluster command switch fails and there are more
than two switches in the cluster standby group, the new cluster command switch does not discover
any Catalyst 1900, Catalyst 2820, and Catalyst 2916M XL cluster member switches. You must
re-add these cluster member switches to the cluster.
• This limitation applies to all clusters: If the active cluster command switch fails and becomes active
again, it does not discover any Catalyst 1900, Catalyst 2820, and Catalyst 2916M XL cluster
member switches. You must again add these cluster member switches to the cluster.

6-12 OL-8553-06
When the previously active cluster command switch resumes its active role, it receives a copy of the
latest cluster configuration from the active cluster command switch, including members that were added
while it was down. The active cluster command switch sends a copy of the cluster configuration to the
cluster standby group.
IP Addresses
You must assign IP information to a cluster command switch. You can assign more than one IP address
to the cluster command switch, and you can access the cluster through any of the command-switch IP
addresses. If you configure a cluster standby group, you must use the standby-group virtual IP address
to manage the cluster from the active cluster command switch. Using the virtual IP address ensures that
you retain connectivity to the cluster if the active cluster command switch fails and that a standby cluster
command switch becomes the active cluster command switch.
If the active cluster command switch fails and the standby cluster command switch takes over, you must
either use the standby-group virtual IP address or any of the IP addresses available on the new active
cluster command switch to access the cluster.
You can assign an IP address to a cluster-capable switch, but it is not necessary. A cluster member switch
is managed and communicates with other cluster member switches through the command-switch IP
address. If the cluster member switch leaves the cluster and it does not have its own IP address, you must
assign an IP address to manage it as a standalone switch.
For more information about IP addresses, see Chapter 3, “Assigning the Switch IP Address and Default
Gateway.”
Hostnames
You do not need to assign a host name to either a cluster command switch or an eligible cluster member.
However, a hostname assigned to the cluster command switch can help to identify the switch cluster. The
default hostname for the switch is Switch.
If a switch joins a cluster and it does not have a hostname, the cluster command switch appends a unique
member number to its own hostname and assigns it sequentially as each switch joins the cluster. The
number means the order in which the switch was added to the cluster. For example, a cluster command
switch named eng-cluster could name the fifth cluster member eng-cluster-5.
If a switch has a hostname, it retains that name when it joins a cluster and when it leaves the cluster.
If a switch received its hostname from the cluster command switch, was removed from a cluster, was
then added to a new cluster, and kept the same member number (such as 5), the switch overwrites the
old hostname (such as eng-cluster-5) with the hostname of the cluster command switch in the new cluster
(such as mkg-cluster-5). If the switch member number changes in the new cluster (such as 3), the switch
retains the previous name (eng-cluster-5).
Passwords
You do not need to assign passwords to an individual switch if it will be a cluster member. When a switch
joins a cluster, it inherits the command-switch password and retains it when it leaves the cluster. If no
command-switch password is configured, the cluster member switch inherits a null password. Cluster
member switches only inherit the command-switch password.

OL-8553-06 6-13
If you change the member-switch password to be different from the command-switch password and save
the change, the switch is not manageable by the cluster command switch until you change the
member-switch password to match the command-switch password. Rebooting the member switch does
not revert the password back to the command-switch password. We recommend that you do not change
the member-switch password after it joins a cluster.
For more information about passwords, see the “Preventing Unauthorized Access to Your Switch”
For password considerations specific to the Catalyst 1900 and Catalyst 2820 switches, refer to the
installation and configuration guides for those switches.
SNMP Community Strings

A cluster member switch inherits the command-switch first read-only (RO) and read-write (RW)
community strings with @esN appended to the community strings:
• command-switch-readonly-community-string@esN, where N is the member-switch number.
• command-switch-readwrite-community-string@esN, where N is the member-switch number.
If the cluster command switch has multiple read-only or read-write community strings, only the first
read-only and read-write strings are propagated to the cluster member switch.
The switches support an unlimited number of community strings and string lengths. For more
information about SNMP and community strings, see Chapter 31, “Configuring SNMP.”
For SNMP considerations specific to the Catalyst 1900 and Catalyst 2820 switches, refer to the
installation and configuration guides specific to those switches.
TACACS+ and RADIUS

If Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+) is configured on a cluster
member, it must be configured on all cluster members. Similarly, if RADIUS is configured on a cluster
member, it must be configured on all cluster members. Further, the same switch cluster cannot have some
members configured with TACACS+ and other members configured with RADIUS.
For more information about TACACS+, see the “Controlling Switch Access with TACACS+” section on
page 9-10. For more information about RADIUS, see the “Controlling Switch Access with RADIUS”
LRE Profiles
A configuration conflict occurs if a switch cluster has Long-Reach Ethernet (LRE) switches that use both
private and public profiles. If one LRE switch in a cluster is assigned a public profile, all LRE switches
in that cluster must have that same public profile. Before you add an LRE switch to a cluster, make sure
that you assign it the same public profile used by other LRE switches in the cluster.
A cluster can have a mix of LRE switches that use different private profiles.

6-14 OL-8553-06
Using the CLI to Manage Switch Clusters
Using the CLI to Manage Switch Clusters

You can configure cluster member switches from the CLI by first logging into the cluster command
switch. Enter the rcommand user EXEC command and the cluster member switch number to start a
Telnet session (through a console or Telnet connection) and to access the cluster member switch CLI.
The command mode changes, and the Cisco IOS commands operate as usual. Enter the exit privileged
EXEC command on the cluster member switch to return to the command-switch CLI.
This example shows how to log into member-switch 3 from the command-switch CLI:
switch# rcommand 3
If you do not know the member-switch number, enter the show cluster members privileged EXEC
command on the cluster command switch. For more information about the rcommand command and all
other cluster commands, refer to the switch command reference.
The Telnet session accesses the member-switch CLI at the same privilege level as on the cluster
command switch. The Cisco IOS commands then operate as usual. For instructions on configuring the
switch for a Telnet session, see the “Disabling Password Recovery” section on page 9-5.
Catalyst 1900 and Catalyst 2820 CLI Considerations

If your switch cluster has Catalyst 1900 and Catalyst 2820 switches running standard edition software,
the Telnet session accesses the management console (a menu-driven interface) if the cluster command
switch is at privilege level 15. If the cluster command switch is at privilege level 1 to 14, you are
prompted for the password to access the menu console.
Command-switch privilege levels map to the Catalyst 1900 and Catalyst 2820 cluster member switches
running standard and Enterprise Edition Software as follows:
• If the command-switch privilege level is 1 to 14, the cluster member switch is accessed at privilege
level 1.
• If the command-switch privilege level is 15, the cluster member switch is accessed at privilege level
15.
Note The Catalyst 1900 and Catalyst 2820 CLI is available only on switches running Enterprise
Edition Software.
For more information about the Catalyst 1900 and Catalyst 2820 switches, refer to the installation and
configuration guides for those switches.
Using SNMP to Manage Switch Clusters

When you first power on the switch, SNMP is enabled if you enter the IP information by using the setup
program and accept its proposed configuration. If you did not use the setup program to enter the IP
information and SNMP was not enabled, you can enable it as described in the “Configuring SNMP”
section on page 31-6. On Catalyst 1900 and Catalyst 2820 switches, SNMP is enabled by default.
When you create a cluster, the cluster command switch manages the exchange of messages between
cluster member switches and an SNMP application. The cluster software on the cluster command switch
appends the cluster member switch number (@esN, where N is the switch number) to the first configured
read-write and read-only community strings on the cluster command switch and propagates them to the

OL-8553-06 6-15
Using SNMP to Manage Switch Clusters
cluster member switch. The cluster command switch uses this community string to control the
forwarding of gets, sets, and get-next messages between the SNMP management station and the cluster
member switches.
Note When a cluster standby group is configured, the cluster command switch can change without your
knowledge. Use the first read-write and read-only community strings to communicate with the cluster
command switch if there is a cluster standby group configured for the cluster.
If the cluster member switch does not have an IP address, the cluster command switch redirects traps
from the cluster member switch to the management station, as shown in Figure 6-8. If a cluster member
switch has its own IP address and community strings, the cluster member switch can send traps directly
to the management station, without going through the cluster command switch.
If a cluster member switch has its own IP address and community strings, they can be used in addition
to the access provided by the cluster command switch. For more information about SNMP and
community strings, see Chapter 31, “Configuring SNMP.”
Figure 6-8 SNMP Management for a Cluster
SNMP Manager Command switch

Trap 1, Trap 2, Trap 3
Tr
ap
Trap
ap
Tr
33020
Member 1 Member 2 Member 3

6-16 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 7
Administering the Switch
This chapter describes how to perform one-time operations to administer the Catalyst 3560 switch.
• Managing the System Time and Date, page 7-1
• Configuring a System Name and Prompt, page 7-14
• Creating a Banner, page 7-17
• Managing the MAC Address Table, page 7-19
• Managing the ARP Table, page 7-28
Managing the System Time and Date

You can manage the system time and date on your switch using automatic configuration, such as the
Network Time Protocol (NTP), or manual configuration methods.
Note For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this section, see the Cisco IOS
Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference from the Cisco.com page under Documentation >
Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command References.

• Understanding the System Clock, page 7-1
• Understanding Network Time Protocol, page 7-2
• Configuring NTP, page 7-3
• Configuring Time and Date Manually, page 7-11
Understanding the System Clock

The heart of the time service is the system clock. This clock runs from the moment the system starts up
and keeps track of the date and time.
The system clock can then be set from these sources:
• NTP
• Manual configuration

OL-8553-06 7-1
Chapter 7 Administering the Switch
The system clock can provide time to these services:

• User show commands
• Logging and debugging messages
The system clock keeps track of time internally based on Universal Time Coordinated (UTC), also
known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). You can configure information about the local time zone and
summer time (daylight saving time) so that the time appears correctly for the local time zone.
The system clock keeps track of whether the time is authoritative or not (that is, whether it has been set
by a time source considered to be authoritative). If it is not authoritative, the time is available only for
display purposes and is not redistributed. For configuration information, see the “Configuring Time and
Date Manually” section on page 7-11.
Understanding Network Time Protocol

The NTP is designed to time-synchronize a network of devices. NTP runs over User Datagram Protocol
(UDP), which runs over IP. NTP is documented in RFC 1305.
An NTP network usually gets its time from an authoritative time source, such as a radio clock or an
atomic clock attached to a time server. NTP then distributes this time across the network. NTP is
extremely efficient; no more than one packet per minute is necessary to synchronize two devices to
within a millisecond of one another.
NTP uses the concept of a stratum to describe how many NTP hops away a device is from an
authoritative time source. A stratum 1 time server has a radio or atomic clock directly attached, a
stratum 2 time server receives its time through NTP from a stratum 1 time server, and so on. A device
running NTP automatically chooses as its time source the device with the lowest stratum number with
which it communicates through NTP. This strategy effectively builds a self-organizing tree of NTP
speakers.
NTP avoids synchronizing to a device whose time might not be accurate by never synchronizing to a
device that is not synchronized. NTP also compares the time reported by several devices and does not
synchronize to a device whose time is significantly different than the others, even if its stratum is lower.
The communications between devices running NTP (known as associations) are usually statically
configured; each device is given the IP address of all devices with which it should form associations.
Accurate timekeeping is possible by exchanging NTP messages between each pair of devices with an
association. However, in a LAN environment, NTP can be configured to use IP broadcast messages
instead. This alternative reduces configuration complexity because each device can simply be
configured to send or receive broadcast messages. However, in that case, information flow is one-way
only.
The time kept on a device is a critical resource; you should use the security features of NTP to avoid the
accidental or malicious setting of an incorrect time. Two mechanisms are available: an access list-based
restriction scheme and an encrypted authentication mechanism.
Cisco’s implementation of NTP does not support stratum 1 service; it is not possible to connect to a radio
or atomic clock. We recommend that the time service for your network be derived from the public NTP
servers available on the IP Internet.

7-2 OL-8553-06
Figure 7-1 shows a typical network example using NTP. Switch A is the NTP master, with Switches B,
C, and D configured in NTP server mode, in server association with Switch A. Switch E is configured
as an NTP peer to the upstream and downstream switches, Switch B and Switch F.
Figure 7-1 Typical NTP Network Configuration
Switch A
Local
workgroup
servers
Switch B Switch C Switch D
Switch E
Workstations
Switch F
101349
Workstations
If the network is isolated from the Internet, Cisco’s implementation of NTP allows a device to act as if
it is synchronized through NTP, when in fact it has learned the time by using other means. Other devices
then synchronize to that device through NTP.
When multiple sources of time are available, NTP is always considered to be more authoritative. NTP
time overrides the time set by any other method.
Several manufacturers include NTP software for their host systems, and a publicly available version for
systems running UNIX and its various derivatives is also available. This software allows host systems
to be time-synchronized as well.
Configuring NTP
The switch does not have a hardware-supported clock and cannot function as an NTP master clock to
which peers synchronize themselves when an external NTP source is not available. The switch also has
no hardware support for a calendar. As a result, the ntp update-calendar and the ntp master global
configuration commands are not available.

OL-8553-06 7-3

• Default NTP Configuration, page 7-4
• Configuring NTP Authentication, page 7-4
• Configuring NTP Associations, page 7-5
• Configuring NTP Broadcast Service, page 7-6
• Configuring NTP Access Restrictions, page 7-8
• Configuring the Source IP Address for NTP Packets, page 7-10
• Displaying the NTP Configuration, page 7-11
Default NTP Configuration

Table 7-1 shows the default NTP configuration.
Table 7-1 Default NTP Configuration

NTP authentication Disabled. No authentication key is specified.
NTP peer or server associations None configured.
NTP broadcast service Disabled; no interface sends or receives NTP broadcast packets.
NTP access restrictions No access control is specified.
NTP packet source IP address The source address is set by the outgoing interface.
NTP is enabled on all interfaces by default. All interfaces receive NTP packets.
Configuring NTP Authentication

This procedure must be coordinated with the administrator of the NTP server; the information you
configure in this procedure must be matched by the servers used by the switch to synchronize its time to
the NTP server.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to authenticate the associations (communications
between devices running NTP that provide for accurate timekeeping) with other devices for security
purposes:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ntp authenticate Enable the NTP authentication feature, which is disabled by
default.

7-4 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 ntp authentication-key number md5 value Define the authentication keys. By default, none are defined.
• For number, specify a key number. The range is 1 to
4294967295.
• md5 specifies that message authentication support is provided
by using the message digest algorithm 5 (MD5).
• For value, enter an arbitrary string of up to eight characters for
the key.
The switch does not synchronize to a device unless both have one
of these authentication keys, and the key number is specified by the
ntp trusted-key key-number command.
Step 4 ntp trusted-key key-number Specify one or more key numbers (defined in Step 3) that a peer
NTP device must provide in its NTP packets for this switch to
synchronize to it.
By default, no trusted keys are defined.
For key-number, specify the key defined in Step 3.
This command provides protection against accidentally
synchronizing the switch to a device that is not trusted.
To disable NTP authentication, use the no ntp authenticate global configuration command. To remove
an authentication key, use the no ntp authentication-key number global configuration command. To
disable authentication of the identity of a device, use the no ntp trusted-key key-number global
This example shows how to configure the switch to synchronize only to devices providing authentication
key 42 in the device’s NTP packets:
Switch(config)# ntp authenticate
Switch(config)# ntp authentication-key 42 md5 aNiceKey
Switch(config)# ntp trusted-key 42
Configuring NTP Associations

An NTP association can be a peer association (this switch can either synchronize to the other device or
allow the other device to synchronize to it), or it can be a server association (meaning that only this
switch synchronizes to the other device, and not the other way around).

OL-8553-06 7-5
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to form an NTP association with another device:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ntp peer ip-address [version number] Configure the switch system clock to synchronize a peer or to be
[key keyid] [source interface] [prefer] synchronized by a peer (peer association).
or or
ntp server ip-address [version number] Configure the switch system clock to be synchronized by a time server
[key keyid] [source interface] [prefer] (server association).
No peer or server associations are defined by default.
• For ip-address in a peer association, specify either the IP address of
the peer providing, or being provided, the clock synchronization. For
a server association, specify the IP address of the time server
providing the clock synchronization.
• (Optional) For number, specify the NTP version number. The range
is 1 to 3. By default, Version 3 is selected.
• (Optional) For keyid, enter the authentication key defined with the
ntp authentication-key global configuration command.
• (Optional) For interface, specify the interface from which to pick the
IP source address. By default, the source IP address is taken from the
outgoing interface.
• (Optional) Enter the prefer keyword to make this peer or server the
preferred one that provides synchronization. This keyword reduces
switching back and forth between peers and servers.
You need to configure only one end of an association; the other device can automatically establish the
association. If you are using the default NTP version (Version 3) and NTP synchronization does not
occur, try using NTP Version 2. Many NTP servers on the Internet run Version 2.
To remove a peer or server association, use the no ntp peer ip-address or the no ntp server ip-address
global configuration command.
This example shows how to configure the switch to synchronize its system clock with the clock of the
peer at IP address 172.16.22.44 using NTP Version 2:
Switch(config)# ntp server 172.16.22.44 version 2
Configuring NTP Broadcast Service

The communications between devices running NTP (known as associations) are usually statically
configured; each device is given the IP addresses of all devices with which it should form associations.
Accurate timekeeping is possible by exchanging NTP messages between each pair of devices with an
association. However, in a LAN environment, NTP can be configured to use IP broadcast messages
instead. This alternative reduces configuration complexity because each device can simply be
configured to send or receive broadcast messages. However, the information flow is one-way only.

7-6 OL-8553-06
The switch can send or receive NTP broadcast packets on an interface-by-interface basis if there is an
NTP broadcast server, such as a router, broadcasting time information on the network. The switch can
send NTP broadcast packets to a peer so that the peer can synchronize to it. The switch can also receive
NTP broadcast packets to synchronize its own clock. This section provides procedures for both sending
and receiving NTP broadcast packets.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch to send NTP broadcast
packets to peers so that they can synchronize their clock to the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface to send NTP broadcast packets, and enter
Step 3 ntp broadcast [version number] [key keyid] Enable the interface to send NTP broadcast packets to a peer.
[destination-address]
By default, this feature is disabled on all interfaces.
• (Optional) For number, specify the NTP version number. The
range is 1 to 3. If you do not specify a version, Version 3 is used.
• (Optional) For keyid, specify the authentication key to use when
sending packets to the peer.
• (Optional) For destination-address, specify the IP address of the
peer that is synchronizing its clock to this switch.
Step 7 Configure the connected peers to receive NTP broadcast packets as
described in the next procedure.
To disable the interface from sending NTP broadcast packets, use the no ntp broadcast interface
This example shows how to configure a port to send NTP Version 2 packets:
Switch(config-if)# ntp broadcast version 2
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch to receive NTP
broadcast packets from connected peers:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface to receive NTP broadcast packets, and enter
Step 3 ntp broadcast client Enable the interface to receive NTP broadcast packets.
By default, no interfaces receive NTP broadcast packets.

OL-8553-06 7-7
Command Purpose
Step 5 ntp broadcastdelay microseconds (Optional) Change the estimated round-trip delay between the switch and
the NTP broadcast server.
The default is 3000 microseconds; the range is 1 to 999999.
To disable an interface from receiving NTP broadcast packets, use the no ntp broadcast client interface
configuration command. To change the estimated round-trip delay to the default, use the no ntp
broadcastdelay global configuration command.
This example shows how to configure a port to receive NTP broadcast packets:
Switch(config-if)# ntp broadcast client
Configuring NTP Access Restrictions

You can control NTP access on two levels as described in these sections:
• Creating an Access Group and Assigning a Basic IP Access List, page 7-8
• Disabling NTP Services on a Specific Interface, page 7-10
Creating an Access Group and Assigning a Basic IP Access List
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to control access to NTP services by using
access lists:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ntp access-group {query-only | Create an access group, and apply a basic IP access list.
serve-only | serve | peer}
The keywords have these meanings:
access-list-number
• query-only—Allows only NTP control queries.
• serve-only—Allows only time requests.
• serve—Allows time requests and NTP control queries, but does not
allow the switch to synchronize to the remote device.
• peer—Allows time requests and NTP control queries and allows the
switch to synchronize to the remote device.
For access-list-number, enter a standard IP access list number from 1
to 99.

7-8 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 access-list access-list-number permit Create the access list.
source [source-wildcard]
• For access-list-number, enter the number specified in Step 2.
• Enter the permit keyword to permit access if the conditions are
matched.
• For source, enter the IP address of the device that is permitted access
to the switch.
• (Optional) For source-wildcard, enter the wildcard bits to be applied
to the source.
Note When creating an access list, remember that, by default, the end
of the access list contains an implicit deny statement for
everything if it did not find a match before reaching the end.
The access group keywords are scanned in this order, from least restrictive to most restrictive:
1. peer—Allows time requests and NTP control queries and allows the switch to synchronize itself to
a device whose address passes the access list criteria.
2. serve—Allows time requests and NTP control queries, but does not allow the switch to synchronize
itself to a device whose address passes the access list criteria.
3. serve-only—Allows only time requests from a device whose address passes the access list criteria.
4. query-only—Allows only NTP control queries from a device whose address passes the access list
criteria.
If the source IP address matches the access lists for more than one access type, the first type is granted.
If no access groups are specified, all access types are granted to all devices. If any access groups are
specified, only the specified access types are granted.
To remove access control to the switch NTP services, use the no ntp access-group {query-only |
serve-only | serve | peer} global configuration command.
This example shows how to configure the switch to allow itself to synchronize to a peer from access
list 99. However, the switch restricts access to allow only time requests from access list 42:
Switch(config)# ntp access-group peer 99
Switch(config)# ntp access-group serve-only 42
Switch(config)# access-list 99 permit 172.20.130.5
Switch(config)# access list 42 permit 172.20.130.6

OL-8553-06 7-9
Disabling NTP Services on a Specific Interface
NTP services are enabled on all interfaces by default.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable NTP packets from being received on
an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface to disable.
Step 3 ntp disable Disable NTP packets from being received on the interface.
By default, all interfaces receive NTP packets.
To re-enable receipt of NTP packets on an interface, use the no ntp disable interface configuration
command.
Configuring the Source IP Address for NTP Packets

When the switch sends an NTP packet, the source IP address is normally set to the address of the
interface through which the NTP packet is sent. Use the ntp source global configuration command when
you want to use a particular source IP address for all NTP packets. The address is taken from the
specified interface. This command is useful if the address on an interface cannot be used as the
destination for reply packets.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a specific interface from which the
IP source address is to be taken:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ntp source type number Specify the interface type and number from which the IP source address
is taken.
By default, the source address is set by the outgoing interface.
The specified interface is used for the source address for all packets sent to all destinations. If a source
address is to be used for a specific association, use the source keyword in the ntp peer or ntp server
global configuration command as described in the “Configuring NTP Associations” section on page 7-5.

7-10 OL-8553-06
Displaying the NTP Configuration

You can use two privileged EXEC commands to display NTP information:
• show ntp associations [detail]
• show ntp status
Note For detailed information about the fields in these displays, see the Cisco IOS Configuration
Fundamentals Command Reference, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation >
Configuring Time and Date Manually

If no other source of time is available, you can manually configure the time and date after the system is
restarted. The time remains accurate until the next system restart. We recommend that you use manual
configuration only as a last resort. If you have an outside source to which the switch can synchronize,
you do not need to manually set the system clock.
• Setting the System Clock, page 7-11
• Displaying the Time and Date Configuration, page 7-12
• Configuring the Time Zone, page 7-12
• Configuring Summer Time (Daylight Saving Time), page 7-13
Setting the System Clock

If you have an outside source on the network that provides time services, such as an NTP server, you do
not need to manually set the system clock.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the system clock:
Command Purpose
Step 1 clock set hh:mm:ss day month year Manually set the system clock using one of these formats.
or • For hh:mm:ss, specify the time in hours (24-hour format), minutes,
and seconds. The time specified is relative to the configured time
clock set hh:mm:ss month day year
zone.
• For day, specify the day by date in the month.
• For month, specify the month by name.
• For year, specify the year (no abbreviation).
This example shows how to manually set the system clock to 1:32 p.m. on July 23, 2001:
Switch# clock set 13:32:00 23 July 2001

OL-8553-06 7-11
Displaying the Time and Date Configuration

To display the time and date configuration, use the show clock [detail] privileged EXEC command.
The system clock keeps an authoritative flag that shows whether the time is authoritative (believed to be
accurate). If the system clock has been set by a timing source such as NTP, the flag is set. If the time is
not authoritative, it is used only for display purposes. Until the clock is authoritative and the
authoritative flag is set, the flag prevents peers from synchronizing to the clock when the peers’ time is
invalid.
The symbol that precedes the show clock display has this meaning:
• *—Time is not authoritative.
• (blank)—Time is authoritative.
• .—Time is authoritative, but NTP is not synchronized.
Configuring the Time Zone

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to manually configure the time zone:
Command Purpose
Step 2 clock timezone zone hours-offset Set the time zone.
[minutes-offset]
The switch keeps internal time in universal time coordinated (UTC), so
this command is used only for display purposes and when the time is
manually set.
• For zone, enter the name of the time zone to be displayed when
standard time is in effect. The default is UTC.
• For hours-offset, enter the hours offset from UTC.
• (Optional) For minutes-offset, enter the minutes offset from UTC.
The minutes-offset variable in the clock timezone global configuration command is available for those
cases where a local time zone is a percentage of an hour different from UTC. For example, the time zone
for some sections of Atlantic Canada (AST) is UTC-3.5, where the 3 means 3 hours and .5 means 50
percent. In this case, the necessary command is clock timezone AST -3 30.
To set the time to UTC, use the no clock timezone global configuration command.

7-12 OL-8553-06
Configuring Summer Time (Daylight Saving Time)

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure summer time (daylight saving time)
in areas where it starts and ends on a particular day of the week each year:
Command Purpose
Step 2 clock summer-time zone recurring Configure summer time to start and end on the specified days every year.
[week day month hh:mm week day month
Summer time is disabled by default. If you specify clock summer-time
hh:mm [offset]]
zone recurring without parameters, the summer time rules default to the
United States rules.
• For zone, specify the name of the time zone (for example, PDT) to be
displayed when summer time is in effect.
• (Optional) For week, specify the week of the month (1 to 5 or last).
• (Optional) For day, specify the day of the week (Sunday, Monday...).
• (Optional) For month, specify the month (January, February...).
• (Optional) For hh:mm, specify the time (24-hour format) in hours and
minutes.
• (Optional) For offset, specify the number of minutes to add during
summer time. The default is 60.
The first part of the clock summer-time global configuration command specifies when summer time
begins, and the second part specifies when it ends. All times are relative to the local time zone. The start
time is relative to standard time. The end time is relative to summer time. If the starting month is after
the ending month, the system assumes that you are in the southern hemisphere.
This example shows how to specify that summer time starts on the first Sunday in April at 02:00 and
ends on the last Sunday in October at 02:00:
Switch(config)# clock summer-time PDT recurring 1 Sunday April 2:00 last Sunday October
2:00

OL-8553-06 7-13
Configuring a System Name and Prompt
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps if summer time in your area does not follow a
recurring pattern (configure the exact date and time of the next summer time events):
Command Purpose
Step 2 clock summer-time zone date [month Configure summer time to start on the first date and end on the second
date year hh:mm month date year hh:mm date.
[offset]]
Summer time is disabled by default.
or
• For zone, specify the name of the time zone (for example, PDT) to be
clock summer-time zone date [date displayed when summer time is in effect.
month year hh:mm date month year
• (Optional) For week, specify the week of the month (1 to 5 or last).
hh:mm [offset]]
• (Optional) For day, specify the day of the week (Sunday, Monday...).
• (Optional) For month, specify the month (January, February...).
• (Optional) For hh:mm, specify the time (24-hour format) in hours and
minutes.
• (Optional) For offset, specify the number of minutes to add during
summer time. The default is 60.
The first part of the clock summer-time global configuration command specifies when summer time
begins, and the second part specifies when it ends. All times are relative to the local time zone. The start
time is relative to standard time. The end time is relative to summer time. If the starting month is after
the ending month, the system assumes that you are in the southern hemisphere.
To disable summer time, use the no clock summer-time global configuration command.
This example shows how to set summer time to start on October 12, 2000, at 02:00, and end on April 26,
2001, at 02:00:
Switch(config)# clock summer-time pdt date 12 October 2000 2:00 26 April 2001 2:00

You configure the system name on the switch to identify it. By default, the system name and prompt are
Switch.
If you have not configured a system prompt, the first 20 characters of the system name are used as the
system prompt. A greater-than symbol [>] is appended. The prompt is updated whenever the system
name changes.
For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this section, from the Cisco.com
page, select Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command References and see
the Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference and the Cisco IOS IP Command
Reference, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols.

7-14 OL-8553-06

• Default System Name and Prompt Configuration, page 7-15
• Configuring a System Name, page 7-15
• Understanding DNS, page 7-15
Default System Name and Prompt Configuration

The default switch system name and prompt is Switch.
Configuring a System Name

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to manually configure a system name:
Command Purpose
Step 2 hostname name Manually configure a system name.
The default setting is switch.
The name must follow the rules for ARPANET hostnames. They must start
with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and have as interior characters only
letters, digits, and hyphens. Names can be up to 63 characters.
When you set the system name, it is also used as the system prompt.
To return to the default hostname, use the no hostname global configuration command.
Understanding DNS
The DNS protocol controls the Domain Name System (DNS), a distributed database with which you can
map hostnames to IP addresses. When you configure DNS on your switch, you can substitute the
hostname for the IP address with all IP commands, such as ping, telnet, connect, and related Telnet
support operations.
IP defines a hierarchical naming scheme that allows a device to be identified by its location or domain.
Domain names are pieced together with periods (.) as the delimiting characters. For example, Cisco
Systems is a commercial organization that IP identifies by a com domain name, so its domain name is
cisco.com. A specific device in this domain, for example, the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) system is
identified as ftp.cisco.com.
To keep track of domain names, IP has defined the concept of a domain name server, which holds a cache
(or database) of names mapped to IP addresses. To map domain names to IP addresses, you must first
identify the hostnames, specify the name server that is present on your network, and enable the DNS.

OL-8553-06 7-15

• Default DNS Configuration, page 7-16
• Setting Up DNS, page 7-16
• Displaying the DNS Configuration, page 7-17
Default DNS Configuration

Table 7-2 shows the default DNS configuration.
Table 7-2 Default DNS Configuration

DNS enable state Enabled.
DNS default domain name None configured.
DNS servers No name server addresses are configured.
Setting Up DNS
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set up your switch to use the DNS:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip domain-name name Define a default domain name that the software uses to complete unqualified
hostnames (names without a dotted-decimal domain name).
Do not include the initial period that separates an unqualified name from the
domain name.
At boot-up time, no domain name is configured; however, if the switch
configuration comes from a BOOTP or Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) server, then the default domain name might be set by the BOOTP or
DHCP server (if the servers were configured with this information).
Step 3 ip name-server server-address1 Specify the address of one or more name servers to use for name and address
[server-address2 ... resolution.
server-address6]
You can specify up to six name servers. Separate each server address with a
space. The first server specified is the primary server. The switch sends DNS
queries to the primary server first. If that query fails, the backup servers are
queried.
Step 4 ip domain-lookup (Optional) Enable DNS-based hostname-to-address translation on your switch.
This feature is enabled by default.
If your network devices require connectivity with devices in networks for which
you do not control name assignment, you can dynamically assign device names
that uniquely identify your devices by using the global Internet naming scheme
(DNS).

7-16 OL-8553-06
Creating a Banner
Command Purpose
Step 7 copy running-config (Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.
startup-config
If you use the switch IP address as its hostname, the IP address is used and no DNS query occurs. If you
configure a hostname that contains no periods (.), a period followed by the default domain name is
appended to the hostname before the DNS query is made to map the name to an IP address. The default
domain name is the value set by the ip domain-name global configuration command. If there is a
period (.) in the hostname, the Cisco IOS software looks up the IP address without appending any default
domain name to the hostname.
To remove a domain name, use the no ip domain-name name global configuration command. To
remove a name server address, use the no ip name-server server-address global configuration
command. To disable DNS on the switch, use the no ip domain-lookup global configuration command.
Displaying the DNS Configuration

To display the DNS configuration information, use the show running-config privileged EXEC
command.
Creating a Banner
You can configure a message-of-the-day (MOTD) and a login banner. The MOTD banner displays on
all connected terminals at login and is useful for sending messages that affect all network users (such as
impending system shutdowns).
The login banner also displays on all connected terminals. It appears after the MOTD banner and before
the login prompts.
Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under
Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command References.

• Default Banner Configuration, page 7-17
• Configuring a Message-of-the-Day Login Banner, page 7-18
• Configuring a Login Banner, page 7-18
Default Banner Configuration

The MOTD and login banners are not configured.

OL-8553-06 7-17
Creating a Banner
Configuring a Message-of-the-Day Login Banner

You can create a single or multiline message banner that appears on the screen when someone logs in to
the switch.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a MOTD login banner:
Command Purpose
Step 2 banner motd c message c Specify the message of the day.
For c, enter the delimiting character of your choice, for example, a
pound sign (#), and press the Return key. The delimiting character
signifies the beginning and end of the banner text. Characters after the
ending delimiter are discarded.
For message, enter a banner message up to 255 characters. You cannot
use the delimiting character in the message.
To delete the MOTD banner, use the no banner motd global configuration command.
This example shows how to configure a MOTD banner for the switch by using the pound sign (#) symbol
as the beginning and ending delimiter:
Switch(config)# banner motd #
This is a secure site. Only authorized users are allowed.
For access, contact technical support.
#
Switch(config)#
This example shows the banner that appears from the previous configuration:
Unix> telnet 172.2.5.4
Trying 172.2.5.4...
Connected to 172.2.5.4.
Escape character is '^]'.
This is a secure site. Only authorized users are allowed.

For access, contact technical support.
User Access Verification
Password:
Configuring a Login Banner

You can configure a login banner to be displayed on all connected terminals. This banner appears after
the MOTD banner and before the login prompt.

7-18 OL-8553-06
Managing the MAC Address Table
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a login banner:
Command Purpose
Step 2 banner login c message c Specify the login message.
For c, enter the delimiting character of your choice, for example, a pound
sign (#), and press the Return key. The delimiting character signifies the
beginning and end of the banner text. Characters after the ending delimiter
are discarded.
For message, enter a login message up to 255 characters. You cannot use the
delimiting character in the message.
To delete the login banner, use the no banner login global configuration command.
This example shows how to configure a login banner for the switch by using the dollar sign ($) symbol
as the beginning and ending delimiter:
Switch(config)# banner login $
Access for authorized users only. Please enter your username and password.
$
Switch(config)#

The MAC address table contains address information that the switch uses to forward traffic between
ports. All MAC addresses in the address table are associated with one or more ports. The address table
includes these types of addresses:
• Dynamic address: a source MAC address that the switch learns and then ages when it is not in use.
• Static address: a manually entered unicast address that does not age and that is not lost when the
switch resets.
The address table lists the destination MAC address, the associated VLAN ID, and port number
associated with the address and the type (static or dynamic).
Note For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this section, see the command
reference for this release.

• Building the Address Table, page 7-20
• MAC Addresses and VLANs, page 7-20
• Default MAC Address Table Configuration, page 7-21
• Changing the Address Aging Time, page 7-21
• Removing Dynamic Address Entries, page 7-22

OL-8553-06 7-19
• Configuring MAC Address Notification Traps, page 7-22

• Adding and Removing Static Address Entries, page 7-24
• Configuring Unicast MAC Address Filtering, page 7-25
• Disabling MAC Address Learning on a VLAN, page 7-26
• Displaying Address Table Entries, page 7-27
Building the Address Table

With multiple MAC addresses supported on all ports, you can connect any port on the switch to
individual workstations, repeaters, switches, routers, or other network devices. The switch provides
dynamic addressing by learning the source address of packets it receives on each port and adding the
address and its associated port number to the address table. As stations are added or removed from the
network, the switch updates the address table, adding new dynamic addresses and aging out those that
are not in use.
The aging interval is globally configured. However, the switch maintains an address table for each
VLAN, and STP can accelerate the aging interval on a per-VLAN basis.
The switch sends packets between any combination of ports, based on the destination address of the
received packet. Using the MAC address table, the switch forwards the packet only to the port associated
with the destination address. If the destination address is on the port that sent the packet, the packet is
filtered and not forwarded. The switch always uses the store-and-forward method: complete packets are
stored and checked for errors before transmission.
MAC Addresses and VLANs

All addresses are associated with a VLAN. An address can exist in more than one VLAN and have
different destinations in each. Unicast addresses, for example, could be forwarded to port 1 in VLAN 1
and ports 9, 10, and 1 in VLAN 5.
Each VLAN maintains its own logical address table. A known address in one VLAN is unknown in
another until it is learned or statically associated with a port in the other VLAN.
When private VLANs are configured, address learning depends on the type of MAC address:
• Dynamic MAC addresses learned in one VLAN of a private VLAN are replicated in the associated
VLANs. For example, a MAC address learned in a private-VLAN secondary VLAN is replicated in
the primary VLAN.
• Static MAC addresses configured in a primary or secondary VLAN are not replicated in the
associated VLANs. When you configure a static MAC address in a private VLAN primary or
secondary VLAN, you should also configure the same static MAC address in all associated VLANs.
For more information about private VLANs, see Chapter 14, “Configuring Private VLANs.”

7-20 OL-8553-06
Default MAC Address Table Configuration

Table 7-3 shows the default MAC address table configuration.
Table 7-3 Default MAC Address Table Configuration

Aging time 300 seconds
Dynamic addresses Automatically learned
Static addresses None configured
Changing the Address Aging Time

Dynamic addresses are source MAC addresses that the switch learns and then ages when they are not in
use. You can change the aging time setting for all VLANs or for a specified VLAN.
Setting too short an aging time can cause addresses to be prematurely removed from the table. Then
when the switch receives a packet for an unknown destination, it floods the packet to all ports in the same
VLAN as the receiving port. This unnecessary flooding can impact performance. Setting too long an
aging time can cause the address table to be filled with unused addresses, which prevents new addresses
from being learned. Flooding results, which can impact switch performance.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the dynamic address table aging
time:
Command Purpose
Step 2 mac address-table aging-time [0 | Set the length of time that a dynamic entry remains in the MAC
10-1000000] [vlan vlan-id] address table after the entry is used or updated.
The range is 10 to 1000000 seconds. The default is 300. You can also
enter 0, which disables aging. Static address entries are never aged
or removed from the table.
For vlan-id, valid IDs are 1 to 4094.
Step 4 show mac address-table aging-time Verify your entries.
To return to the default value, use the no mac address-table aging-time global configuration command.

OL-8553-06 7-21
Removing Dynamic Address Entries

To remove all dynamic entries, use the clear mac address-table dynamic command in privileged EXEC
mode. You can also remove a specific MAC address (clear mac address-table dynamic address
mac-address), remove all addresses on the specified physical port or port channel (clear mac
address-table dynamic interface interface-id), or remove all addresses on a specified VLAN (clear
mac address-table dynamic vlan vlan-id).
To verify that dynamic entries have been removed, use the show mac address-table dynamic privileged
EXEC command.
Configuring MAC Address Notification Traps

MAC address notification enables you to track users on a network by storing the MAC address activity
on the switch. Whenever the switch learns or removes a MAC address, an SNMP notification can be
generated and sent to the NMS. If you have many users coming and going from the network, you can set
a trap interval time to bundle the notification traps and reduce network traffic. The MAC notification
history table stores the MAC address activity for each hardware port for which the trap is enabled. MAC
address notifications are generated for dynamic and secure MAC addresses; events are not generated for
self addresses, multicast addresses, or other static addresses.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch to send MAC address
notification traps to an NMS host:
Command Purpose
Step 2 snmp-server host host-addr {traps | informs} {version {1 Specify the recipient of the trap message.
| 2c | 3}} community-string notification-type
• For host-addr, specify the name or address of the
NMS.
• Specify traps (the default) to send SNMP traps
to the host. Specify informs to send SNMP
informs to the host.
• Specify the SNMP version to support. Version 1,
the default, is not available with informs.
• For community-string, specify the string to send
with the notification operation. Though you can
set this string by using the snmp-server host
command, we recommend that you define this
string by using the snmp-server community
command before using the snmp-server host
command.
• For notification-type, use the mac-notification
keyword.
Step 3 snmp-server enable traps mac-notification Enable the switch to send MAC address traps to the
NMS.
Step 4 mac address-table notification Enable the MAC address notification feature.

7-22 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 5 mac address-table notification [interval value] | Enter the trap interval time and the history table size.
[history-size value]
• (Optional) For interval value, specify the
notification trap interval in seconds between
each set of traps that are generated to the NMS.
The range is 0 to 2147483647 seconds; the
default is 1 second.
• (Optional) For history-size value, specify the
maximum number of entries in the MAC
notification history table. The range is 0 to 500;
the default is 1.
Step 6 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the
Layer 2 interface on which to enable the SNMP
MAC address notification trap.
Step 7 snmp trap mac-notification {added | removed} Enable the MAC address notification trap.
• Enable the MAC notification trap whenever a
MAC address is added on this interface.
• Enable the MAC notification trap whenever a
MAC address is removed from this interface.
Step 9 show mac address-table notification interface Verify your entries.
show running-config
Step 10 copy running-config startup-config (Optional) Save your entries in the configuration
file.
To disable the switch from sending MAC address notification traps, use the no snmp-server enable
traps mac-notification global configuration command. To disable the MAC address notification traps
on a specific interface, use the no snmp trap mac-notification {added | removed} interface
configuration command. To disable the MAC address notification feature, use the no mac address-table
notification global configuration command.
This example shows how to specify 172.20.10.10 as the NMS, enable the switch to send MAC address
notification traps to the NMS, enable the MAC address notification feature, set the interval time to
60 seconds, set the history-size to 100 entries, and enable traps whenever a MAC address is added on
the specified port.
Switch(config)# snmp-server host 172.20.10.10 traps private
Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps mac-notification
Switch(config)# mac address-table notification
Switch(config)# mac address-table notification interval 60
Switch(config)# mac address-table notification history-size 100
Switch(config-if)# snmp trap mac-notification added
You can verify the previous commands by entering the show mac address-table notification interface
and the show mac address-table notification privileged EXEC commands.

OL-8553-06 7-23
Adding and Removing Static Address Entries

A static address has these characteristics:
• It is manually entered in the address table and must be manually removed.
• It can be a unicast or multicast address.
• It does not age and is retained when the switch restarts.
You can add and remove static addresses and define the forwarding behavior for them. The forwarding
behavior defines how a port that receives a packet forwards it to another port for transmission. Because
all ports are associated with at least one VLAN, the switch acquires the VLAN ID for the address from
the ports that you specify. You can specify a different list of destination ports for each source port.
A packet with a static address that arrives on a VLAN where it has not been statically entered is flooded
to all ports and not learned.
You add a static address to the address table by specifying the destination MAC unicast address and the
VLAN from which it is received. Packets received with this destination address are forwarded to the
interface specified with the interface-id option.
When you configure a static MAC address in a private-VLAN primary or secondary VLAN, you should
also configure the same static MAC address in all associated VLANs. Static MAC addresses configured
in a private-VLAN primary or secondary VLAN are not replicated in the associated VLAN. For more
information about private VLANs, see Chapter 14, “Configuring Private VLANs.”
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to add a static address:
Command Purpose
Step 2 mac address-table static mac-addr Add a static address to the MAC address table.
vlan vlan-id interface interface-id
• For mac-addr, specify the destination MAC unicast address to add to
the address table. Packets with this destination address received in the
specified VLAN are forwarded to the specified interface.
• For vlan-id, specify the VLAN for which the packet with the
specified MAC address is received. Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to 4094.
• For interface-id, specify the interface to which the received packet is
forwarded. Valid interfaces include physical ports or port channels.
For static multicast addresses, you can enter multiple interface IDs.
For static unicast addresses, you can enter only one interface at a
time, but you can enter the command multiple times with the same
MAC address and VLAN ID.
Step 4 show mac address-table static Verify your entries.
To remove static entries from the address table, use the no mac address-table static mac-addr vlan
vlan-id [interface interface-id] global configuration command.

7-24 OL-8553-06
This example shows how to add the static address c2f3.220a.12f4 to the MAC address table. When a
packet is received in VLAN 4 with this MAC address as its destination address, the packet is forwarded
to the specified port:
Switch(config)# mac address-table static c2f3.220a.12f4 vlan 4 interface
gigabitethernet0/1
Configuring Unicast MAC Address Filtering

When unicast MAC address filtering is enabled, the switch drops packets with specific source or
destination MAC addresses. This feature is disabled by default and only supports unicast static
addresses.
Follow these guidelines when using this feature:
• Multicast MAC addresses, broadcast MAC addresses, and router MAC addresses are not supported.
If you specify one of these addresses when entering the mac address-table static mac-addr vlan
vlan-id drop global configuration command, one of these messages appears:
% Only unicast addresses can be configured to be dropped
% CPU destined address cannot be configured as drop address
• Packets that are forwarded to the CPU are also not supported.
• If you add a unicast MAC address as a static address and configure unicast MAC address filtering,
the switch either adds the MAC address as a static address or drops packets with that MAC address,
depending on which command was entered last. The second command that you entered overrides
the first command.
For example, if you enter the mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface
interface-id global configuration command followed by the mac address-table static mac-addr
vlan vlan-id drop command, the switch drops packets with the specified MAC address as a source
or destination.
If you enter the mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id drop global configuration
command followed by the mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface interface-id
command, the switch adds the MAC address as a static address.
You enable unicast MAC address filtering and configure the switch to drop packets with a specific
address by specifying the source or destination unicast MAC address and the VLAN from which it is
received.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch to drop a source or
destination unicast static address:
Command Purpose
Step 2 mac address-table static mac-addr Enable unicast MAC address filtering and configure the switch to drop a
vlan vlan-id drop packet with the specified source or destination unicast static address.
• For mac-addr, specify a source or destination unicast MAC address.
Packets with this MAC address are dropped.
• For vlan-id, specify the VLAN for which the packet with the
specified MAC address is received. Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to 4094.

OL-8553-06 7-25
Command Purpose
Step 4 show mac address-table static Verify your entries.
To disable unicast MAC address filtering, use the no mac address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id
This example shows how to enable unicast MAC address filtering and to configure the switch to drop
packets that have a source or destination address of c2f3.220a.12f4. When a packet is received in
VLAN 4 with this MAC address as its source or destination, the packet is dropped:
Switch(config)# mac a ddress-table static c2f3.220a.12f4 vlan 4 drop
Disabling MAC Address Learning on a VLAN

By default, MAC address learning is enabled on all VLANs on the switch. You can control MAC address
learning on a VLAN to manage the available MAC address table space by controlling which VLANs,
and therefore which ports, can learn MAC addresses. Before you disable MAC address learning, be sure
that you are familiar with the network topology and the switch system configuration. Disabling MAC
address learning on a VLAN could cause flooding in the network.
Follow these guidelines when disabling MAC address learning on a VLAN:
• Use caution before disabling MAC address learning on a VLAN with a configured switch virtual
interface (SVI). The switch then floods all IP packets in the Layer 2 domain.
• You can disa ble MAC address learning on a single VLAN ID (for example, no mac address-table
learning vlan 223) or on a range of VLAN IDs (for example, no mac address-table learning vlan
1-20, 15).
• We recommend that you disable MAC address learning only in VLANs with two ports. If you
disable MAC address learning on a VLAN with more than two ports, every packet entering the
switch is flooded in that VLAN domain.
• You cannot disable MAC address learning on a VLAN that is used internally by the switch. If the
VLAN ID that you enter is an internal VLAN, the switch generates an error message and rejects the
command. To view internal VLANs in use, enter the show vlan internal usage privileged EXEC
command.
• If you disable MAC address learning on a VLAN configured as a private-VLAN primary VLAN,
MAC addresses are still learned on the secondary VLAN that belongs to the private VLAN and are
then replicated on the primary VLAN. If you disable MAC address learning on the secondary
VLAN, but not the primary VLAN of a private VLAN, MAC address learning occurs on the primary
VLAN and is replicated on the secondary VLAN.
• You cannot disable MAC address learning on an RSPAN VLAN. The configuration is not allowed.
• If you disable MAC address learning on a VLAN that includes a secure port, MAC address learning
is not disabled on that port. If you disable port security, the configured MAC address learning state
is enabled.

7-26 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable MAC address learning on a VLAN:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no mac address-table learning vlan Disable MAC address learning on the specified VLAN or VLANs. You
vlan-id can specify a single VLAN ID or a range of VLAN IDs separated by a
hyphen or comma. Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to 4094.
Step 4 show mac address-table learning [vlan Verify the configuration.
vlan-id]
To reenable MAC address learning on a VLAN, use the default mac address-table learning vlan
vlan-id global configuration command. You can also reenable MAC address learning on a VLAN by
entering the mac address-table learning vlan vlan-id global configuration command. The first
(default) command returns to a default condition and therefore does not appear in the output from the
show running-config command. The second command causes the configuration to appear in the show
running-config privileged EXEC command display.
This example shows how to disable MAC address learning on VLAN 200:
Switch(config)# no mac a ddress-table learning vlan 200
You can display the MAC address learning status of all VLANs or a specified VLAN by entering the
show mac-address-table learning [vlan vlan-id] privileged EXEC command.
Displaying Address Table Entries

You can display the MAC address table by using one or more of the privileged EXEC commands
described in Table 7-4:
Table 7-4 Commands for Displaying the MAC Address Table
Command Description
show ip igmp snooping groups Displays the Layer 2 multicast entries for all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table address Displays MAC address table information for the specified MAC address.
show mac address-table aging-time Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table count Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table dynamic Displays only dynamic MAC address table entries.
show mac address-table interface Displays the MAC address table information for the specified interface.
show mac address-table learning Displays MAC address learning status of all VLANs or the specified VLAN.
show mac address-table notification Displays the MAC notification parameters and history table.
show mac address-table static Displays only static MAC address table entries.
show mac address-table vlan Displays the MAC address table information for the specified VLAN.

OL-8553-06 7-27
Managing the ARP Table
Managing the ARP Table

To communicate with a device (over Ethernet, for example), the software first must learn the 48-bit MAC
address or the local data link address of that device. The process of learning the local data link address
from an IP address is called address resolution.
The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) associates a host IP address with the corresponding media or
MAC addresses and the VLAN ID. Using an IP address, ARP finds the associated MAC address. When
a MAC address is found, the IP-MAC address association is stored in an ARP cache for rapid retrieval.
Then the IP datagram is encapsulated in a link-layer frame and sent over the network. Encapsulation of
IP datagrams and ARP requests and replies on IEEE 802 networks other than Ethernet is specified by
the Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP). By default, standard Ethernet-style ARP encapsulation
(represented by the arpa keyword) is enabled on the IP interface.
ARP entries added manually to the table do not age and must be manually removed.
Note For CLI procedures, see the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 documentation from the Cisco.com page under
Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline.

7-28 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 8
Configuring SDM Templates
This chapter describes how to configure the Switch Database Management (SDM) templates on the

• Understanding the SDM Templates, page 8-1
• Configuring the Switch SDM Template, page 8-3
• Displaying the SDM Templates, page 8-5
Understanding the SDM Templates

You can use SDM templates to configure system resources in the switch to optimize support for specific
features, depending on how the switch is used in the network. You can select a template to provide
maximum system usage for some functions or use the default template to balance resources. For
example, you could use access template to obtain maximum ACL usage.
To allocate ternary content addressable memory (TCAM) resources for different usages, the switch SDM
templates prioritize system resources to optimize support for certain features. You can select SDM
templates for IP Version 4 (IPv4) to optimize these features:
• Access—The access template maximizes system resources for access control lists (ACLs) to
accommodate a large number of ACLs.
• Default—The default template gives balance to all functions.
• Routing—The routing template maximizes system resources for unicast routing, typically required
for a router or aggregator in the center of a network.
• VLANs—The VLAN template disables routing and supports the maximum number of unicast MAC
addresses. It would typically be selected for a Layer 2 switch.
In addition, the dual IPv4 and IPv6 templates enable a dual stack environment. See the “Dual IPv4 and
IPv6 SDM Templates” section on page 8-2.
Table 8-1 lists the approximate numbers of each resource supported in each of the three templates for a
desktop switch.

OL-8553-06 8-1
Chapter 8 Configuring SDM Templates
Understanding the SDM Templates
Table 8-1 Approximate Number of Feature Resources Allowed by Each Template
Resource Access Default Routing VLAN

Unicast MAC addresses 4K 6K 3K 12 K
IGMP groups and multicast routes 1K 1K 1K 1K
Unicast routes 6K 8K 11 K 0
• Directly connected hosts 4K 6K 3K 0
• Indirect routes 2K 2K 8K 0
Policy-based routing ACEs 512 0 512 0
QoS classification ACEs 512 512 512 512
Security ACEs 2K 1K 1K 1K
Layer 2 VLANs 1K 1K 1K 1K
The first eight rows in the tables (unicast MAC addresses through security ACEs) represent approximate
hardware boundaries set when a template is selected. If a section of a hardware resource is full, all
processing overflow is sent to the CPU, seriously impacting switch performance. The last row is a
guideline used to calculate hardware resource consumption related to the number of Layer 2 VLANs on
the switch.
Dual IPv4 and IPv6 SDM Templates

You can select SDM templates to support IP Version 6 (IPv6). For more information about IPv6 and how
to configure IPv6 routing, see Chapter 36, “Configuring IP Unicast Routing.”
This software release does not support Policy-Based Routing (PBR) when forwarding IPv6 traffic. The
software supports IPv4 PBR only when the dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 routing template is configured.
The dual IPv4 and IPv6 templates allow the switch to be used in dual stack environments (supporting
both IPv4 and IPv6). Using the dual stack templates results in less TCAM capacity allowed for each
resource. Do not use them if you plan to forward only IPv4 traffic.
These SDM templates support IPv4 and IPv6 environments:
• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 default template—supports Layer 2, multicast, routing, QoS, and ACLs for
IPv4; and Layer 2, routing, and ACLs for IPv6 on the switch
• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 routing template—supports Layer 2, multicast, routing (including policy-based
routing), QoS, and ACLs for IPv4; and Layer 2, routing, and ACLs for IPv6 on the switch
• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 VLAN template—supports basic Layer 2, multicast, QoS, and ACLs for IPv4,
and basic Layer 2 and ACLs for IPv6 on the switch
Note An IPv4 route requires only one TCAM entry. Because of the hardware compression scheme used for
IPv6, an IPv6 route can take more than one TCAM entry, reducing the number of entries forwarded in
hardware. For example, for IPv6 directly connected IP addresses, the desktop template might allow less
than two thousand entries.
Table 8-2 defines the approximate feature resources allocated by each new template. Template
estimations are based on a switch with 8 routed interfaces and approximately 1000 VLANs.

8-2 OL-8553-06
Configuring the Switch SDM Template
Table 8-2 Approximate Feature Resources Allowed by Dual IPv4-IPv6 Templates
IPv4-and-IPv6 IPv4-and-IPv6 IPv4-and-IPv6

Resource Default Routing VLAN
Unicast MAC addresses 2K 1536 8K
IPv4 IGMP groups and multicast routes 1K 1K 1K
Total IPv4 unicast routes: 3K 2816 0
• Directly connected IPv4 hosts 2K 1536 0
• Indirect IPv4 routes 1K 1280 0
IPv6 multicast groups 1K 1152 1K
Total IPv6 unicast routes: 3K 2816 0
• Directly connected IPv6 addresses 2K 1536 0
• Indirect IPv6 unicast routes 1K 1280 0
IPv4 policy-based routing ACEs 0 256 0
IPv4 or MAC QoS ACEs (total) 512 512 512
IPv4 or MAC security ACEs (total) 1K 512 1K
IPv6 policy-based routing ACEs1 0 255 0
IPv6 QoS ACEs 510 510 510
IPv6 security ACEs 510 510 510
1. IPv6 policy-based routing is not supported.

• Default SDM Template, page 8-3
• SDM Template Configuration Guidelines, page 8-3
• Setting the SDM Template, page 8-4
Default SDM Template

The default template is the default desktop template. .
SDM Template Configuration Guidelines

Follow these guidelines when selecting and configuring SDM templates:
• When you select and configure SDM templates, you must reload the switch for the configuration to
take effect.

OL-8553-06 8-3
• Use the sdm prefer vlan global configuration command only on switches intended for Layer 2
switching with no routing. When you use the VLAN template, no system resources are reserved for
routing entries, and any routing is done through software. This overloads the CPU and severely
degrades routing performance.
• Do not use the routing template if you do not have routing enabled on your switch. The sdm prefer
routing global configuration command prevents other features from using the memory allocated to
unicast routing in the routing template.
• If you try to configure IPv6 features without first selecting a dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, a warning
message is generated.
• Using the dual stack templates results in less TCAM capacity allowed for each resource, so do not
use if you plan to forward only IPv4 traffic.
Setting the SDM Template

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to use the SDM template to maximize feature
usage:
Command Purpose
Step 2 sdm prefer {access | default | Specify the SDM template to be used on the switch:
dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default | routing |
vlan} | routing | vlan}
• access—Maximizes system resources for ACLs.
• default—Gives balance to all functions.
• dual-ipv4-and-ipv6—Select a template that supports both IPv4
and IPv6 routing.
– default—Balance IPv4 and IPv6 Layer 2 and Layer 3
functionality.
– routing—Provide maximum usage for IPv4 and IPv6
routing, including IPv4 policy-based routing.
– vlan—Provide maximum usage for IPv4 and IPv6 VLANs.
• routing—Maximizes routing on the switch.
• vlan—Maximizes VLAN configuration on the switch with no
routing supported in hardware.
Use the no sdm prefer command to set the switch to the default
desktop template.
The default template balances the use of system resources.
Step 4 reload Reload the operating system.
After the system reboots, you can use the show sdm prefer privileged EXEC command to verify the
new template configuration. If you enter the show sdm prefer command before you enter the reload
privileged EXEC command, the show sdm prefer command shows the template currently in use and the
template that will become active after a reload.

8-4 OL-8553-06
Displaying the SDM Templates
This is an example of an output display when you have changed the template and have not reloaded the
switch:
Switch# show sdm prefer
The current template is "desktop routing" template.
The selected template optimizes the resources in
the switch to support this level of features for
8 routed interfaces and 1024 VLANs.
number of unicast mac addresses: 3K

number of igmp groups + multicast routes: 1K
number of unicast routes: 11K
number of directly connected hosts: 3K
number of indirect routes: 8K
number of qos aces: 512
number of security aces: 1K
On next reload, template will be “desktop vlan” template.
To return to the default template, use the no sdm prefer global configuration command.
This example shows how to configure a switch with the routing template.
Switch(config)# sdm prefer routing
Switch(config)# end
Switch# reload
This example shows how to configure the IPv4-and-IPv6 default template on a desktop switch:
Switch(config)# sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 default
Switch(config)# exit
Switch# reload

Use the show sdm prefer privileged EXEC command with no parameters to display the active template.
Use the show sdm prefer [access | default | dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default | vlan} |routing | vlan]
privileged EXEC command to display the resource numbers supported by the specified template.
This is an example of output from the show sdm prefer command, displaying the template in use.
Switch# show sdm prefer
The current template is "desktop default" template.

number of policy based routing aces: 0
This is an example of output from the show sdm prefer routing command entered on a switch:

OL-8553-06 8-5
Switch# show sdm prefer routing

"desktop routing" template:

number of policy based routing aces: 512
This is an example of output from the show sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 default command entered
on a switch:
Switch# show sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 default
“desktop IPv4 and IPv6 default” template:

number of IPv4 IGMP groups + multicast routes: 1K
number of IPv4 unicast routes: 3K
number of directly-connected IPv4 hosts: 2K
number of indirect IPv4 routes: 1K
number of IPv6 multicast groups: 1K
number of directly-connected IPv6 addresses: 2K
number of indirect IPv6 unicast routes: 1K
number of IPv4 policy based routing aces: 0
number of IPv4/MAC qos aces: 512
number of IPv4/MAC security aces: 1K
number of IPv6 policy based routing aces: 0
number of IPv6 qos aces: 510
number of IPv6 security aces: 510

8-6 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 9
Configuring Switch-Based Authentication
This chapter describes how to configure switch-based authentication on the Catalyst 3560 switch.
It consists of these sections:
• Preventing Unauthorized Access to Your Switch, page 9-1
• Protecting Access to Privileged EXEC Commands, page 9-2
• Controlling Switch Access with TACACS+, page 9-10
• Controlling Switch Access with RADIUS, page 9-17
• Controlling Switch Access with Kerberos, page 9-32
• Configuring the Switch for Local Authentication and Authorization, page 9-36
• Configuring the Switch for Secure Shell, page 9-37
• Configuring the Switch for Secure Socket Layer HTTP, page 9-42
• Configuring the Switch for Secure Copy Protocol, page 9-48
Preventing Unauthorized Access to Your Switch

You can prevent unauthorized users from reconfiguring your switch and viewing configuration
information. Typically, you want network administrators to have access to your switch while you restrict
access to users who dial from outside the network through an asynchronous port, connect from outside
the network through a serial port, or connect through a terminal or workstation from within the local
network.
To prevent unauthorized access into your switch, you should configure one or more of these security
features:
• At a minimum, you should configure passwords and privileges at each switch port. These passwords
are locally stored on the switch. When users attempt to access the switch through a port or line, they
must enter the password specified for the port or line before they can access the switch. For more
information, see the “Protecting Access to Privileged EXEC Commands” section on page 9-2.
• For an additional layer of security, you can also configure username and password pairs, which are
locally stored on the switch. These pairs are assigned to lines or ports and authenticate each user
before that user can access the switch. If you have defined privilege levels, you can also assign a
specific privilege level (with associated rights and privileges) to each username and password pair.
For more information, see the “Configuring Username and Password Pairs” section on page 9-6.

OL-8553-06 9-1
Chapter 9 Configuring Switch-Based Authentication
Protecting Access to Privileged EXEC Commands
• If you want to use username and password pairs, but you want to store them centrally on a server
instead of locally, you can store them in a database on a security server. Multiple networking devices
can then use the same database to obtain user authentication (and, if necessary, authorization)
information. For more information, see the “Controlling Switch Access with TACACS+” section on
page 9-10.
• You can also enable the login enhancements feature, which logs both failed and unsuccessful login
attempts. Login enhancements can also be configured to block future login attempts after a set
number of unsuccessful attempts are made. For more information, see the Cisco IOS Login
Enhancements documentation at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_3t/12_3t4/feature/guide/gt_login.html

A simple way of providing terminal access control in your network is to use passwords and assign
privilege levels. Password protection restricts access to a network or network device. Privilege levels
define what commands users can enter after they have logged into a network device.
Security Command Reference, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco
IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command References.

• Default Password and Privilege Level Configuration, page 9-2
• Setting or Changing a Static Enable Password, page 9-3
• Protecting Enable and Enable Secret Passwords with Encryption, page 9-3
• Disabling Password Recovery, page 9-5
• Setting a Telnet Password for a Terminal Line, page 9-6
• Configuring Username and Password Pairs, page 9-6
• Configuring Multiple Privilege Levels, page 9-7
Default Password and Privilege Level Configuration

Table 9-1 shows the default password and privilege level configuration.
Table 9-1 Default Password and Privilege Levels

Enable password and privilege level No password is defined. The default is level 15 (privileged EXEC level).
The password is not encrypted in the configuration file.
Enable secret password and privilege level No password is defined. The default is level 15 (privileged EXEC level).
The password is encrypted before it is written to the configuration file.
Line password No password is defined.

9-2 OL-8553-06
Setting or Changing a Static Enable Password

The enable password controls access to the privileged EXEC mode. Beginning in privileged EXEC
mode, follow these steps to set or change a static enable password:
Command Purpose
Step 2 enable password password Define a new password or change an existing password for access to
privileged EXEC mode.
By default, no password is defined.
For password, specify a string from 1 to 25 alphanumeric characters. The
string cannot start with a number, is case sensitive, and allows spaces but
ignores leading spaces. It can contain the question mark (?) character if
you precede the question mark with the key combination Crtl-v when you
create the password; for example, to create the password abc?123, do this:
Enter abc.
Enter Crtl-v.
Enter ?123.
When the system prompts you to enter the enable password, you need not
precede the question mark with the Ctrl-v; you can simply enter abc?123
at the password prompt.
The enable password is not encrypted and can be read in the switch
configuration file.
To remove the password, use the no enable password global configuration command.
This example shows how to change the enable password to l1u2c3k4y5. The password is not encrypted
and provides access to level 15 (traditional privileged EXEC mode access):
Switch(config)# enable password l1u2c3k4y5
Protecting Enable and Enable Secret Passwords with Encryption

To provide an additional layer of security, particularly for passwords that cross the network or that are
stored on a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server, you can use either the enable password or
enable secret global configuration commands. Both commands accomplish the same thing; that is, you
can establish an encrypted password that users must enter to access privileged EXEC mode (the default)
or any privilege level you specify.
We recommend that you use the enable secret command because it uses an improved encryption
algorithm.
If you configure the enable secret command, it takes precedence over the enable password command;
the two commands cannot be in effect simultaneously.

OL-8553-06 9-3
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure encryption for enable and enable
secret passwords:
Command Purpose
Step 2 enable password [level level] {password | Define a new password or change an existing password for
encryption-type encrypted-password} access to privileged EXEC mode.
or or
enable secret [level level] {password | Define a secret password, which is saved using a
encryption-type encrypted-password} nonreversible encryption method.
• (Optional) For level, the range is from 0 to 15. Level 1
is normal user EXEC mode privileges. The default level
is 15 (privileged EXEC mode privileges).
• For password, specify a string from 1 to 25
alphanumeric characters. The string cannot start with a
number, is case sensitive, and allows spaces but ignores
leading spaces. By default, no password is defined.
• (Optional) For encryption-type, only type 5, a Cisco
proprietary encryption algorithm, is available. If you
specify an encryption type, you must provide an
encrypted password—an encrypted password that you
copy from another switch configuration.
Note If you specify an encryption type and then enter a
clear text password, you can not re-enter privileged
EXEC mode. You cannot recover a lost encrypted
password by any method.
Step 3 service password-encryption (Optional) Encrypt the password when the password is
defined or when the configuration is written.
Encryption prevents the password from being readable in the
configuration file.
If both the enable and enable secret passwords are defined, users must enter the enable secret password.
Use the level keyword to define a password for a specific privilege level. After you specify the level and
set a password, give the password only to users who need to have access at this level. Use the privilege
level global configuration command to specify commands accessible at various levels. For more
information, see the “Configuring Multiple Privilege Levels” section on page 9-7.
If you enable password encryption, it applies to all passwords including username passwords,
authentication key passwords, the privileged command password, and console and virtual terminal line
passwords.
To remove a password and level, use the no enable password [level level] or no enable secret [level
level] global configuration command. To disable password encryption, use the no service
password-encryption global configuration command.

9-4 OL-8553-06
This example shows how to configure the encrypted password $1$FaD0$Xyti5Rkls3LoyxzS8 for
privilege level 2:
Switch(config)# enable secret level 2 5 $1$FaD0$Xyti5Rkls3LoyxzS8
Disabling Password Recovery

By default, any end user with physical access to the switch can recover from a lost password by
interrupting the boot process while the switch is powering on and then by entering a new password.
The password-recovery disable feature protects access to the switch password by disabling part of this
functionality. When this feature is enabled, the end user can interrupt the boot process only by agreeing
to set the system back to the default configuration. With password recovery disabled, you can still
interrupt the boot process and change the password, but the configuration file (config.text) and the
VLAN database file (vlan.dat) are deleted.
Note If you disable password recovery, we recommend that you keep a backup copy of the configuration file
on a secure server in case the end user interrupts the boot process and sets the system back to default
values. Do not keep a backup copy of the configuration file on the switch. If the switch is operating in
VTP transparent mode, we recommend that you also keep a backup copy of the VLAN database file on
a secure server. When the switch is returned to the default system configuration, you can download the
saved files to the switch by using the Xmodem protocol. For more information, see the “Recovering from
a Lost or Forgotten Password” section on page 47-3.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable password recovery:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no service password-recovery Disable password recovery.
This setting is saved in an area of the flash memory that is accessible by
the boot loader and the Cisco IOS image, but it is not part of the file
system and is not accessible by any user.
Step 4 show version Verify the configuration by checking the last few lines of the command
output.
To re-enable password recovery, use the service password-recovery global configuration command.
Note Disabling password recovery will not work if you have set the switch to boot up manually by using the
boot manual global configuration command. This command produces the boot loader prompt (switch:)
after the switch is power cycled.

OL-8553-06 9-5
Setting a Telnet Password for a Terminal Line

When you power-up your switch for the first time, an automatic setup program runs to assign IP
information and to create a default configuration for continued use. The setup program also prompts you
to configure your switch for Telnet access through a password. If you did not configure this password
during the setup program, you can configure it now through the command-line interface (CLI).
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure your switch for Telnet access:
Command Purpose
Step 1 Attach a PC or workstation with emulation software to the switch console
port.
The default data characteristics of the console port are 9600, 8, 1, no
parity. You might need to press the Return key several times to see the
command-line prompt.
Step 2 enable password password Enter privileged EXEC mode.
Step 4 line vty 0 15 Configure the number of Telnet sessions (lines), and enter line
configuration mode.
There are 16 possible sessions on a command-capable switch. The 0
and 15 mean that you are configuring all 16 possible Telnet sessions.
Step 5 password password Enter a Telnet password for the line or lines.
For password, specify a string from 1 to 25 alphanumeric characters. The
string cannot start with a number, is case sensitive, and allows spaces but
ignores leading spaces. By default, no password is defined.
The password is listed under the command line vty 0 15.
To remove the password, use the no password global configuration command.

This example shows how to set the Telnet password to let45me67in89:
Switch(config)# line vty 10
Switch(config-line)# password let45me67in89
Configuring Username and Password Pairs

You can configure username and password pairs, which are locally stored on the switch. These pairs are
assigned to lines or ports and authenticate each user before that user can access the switch. If you have
defined privilege levels, you can also assign a specific privilege level (with associated rights and
privileges) to each username and password pair.

9-6 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to establish a username-based authentication
system that requests a login username and a password:
Command Purpose
Step 2 username name [privilege level] Enter the username, privilege level, and password for each user.
{password encryption-type password}
• For name, specify the user ID as one word. Spaces and quotation
marks are not allowed.
• (Optional) For level, specify the privilege level the user has after
gaining access. The range is 0 to 15. Level 15 gives privileged EXEC
mode access. Level 1 gives user EXEC mode access.
• For encryption-type, enter 0 to specify that an unencrypted password
will follow. Enter 7 to specify that a hidden password will follow.
• For password, specify the password the user must enter to gain access
to the switch. The password must be from 1 to 25 characters, can
contain embedded spaces, and must be the last option specified in the
username command.
Step 3 line console 0 Enter line configuration mode, and configure the console port (line 0) or
the VTY lines (line 0 to 15).
or
line vty 0 15
Step 4 login local Enable local password checking at login time. Authentication is based on
the username specified in Step 2.
To disable username authentication for a specific user, use the no username name global configuration
command. To disable password checking and allow connections without a password, use the no login
line configuration command.
Configuring Multiple Privilege Levels

By default, the Cisco IOS software has two modes of password security: user EXEC and privileged
EXEC. You can configure up to 16 hierarchical levels of commands for each mode. By configuring
multiple passwords, you can allow different sets of users to have access to specified commands.
For example, if you want many users to have access to the clear line command, you can assign it
level 2 security and distribute the level 2 password fairly widely. But if you want more restricted access
to the configure command, you can assign it level 3 security and distribute that password to a more
restricted group of users.
• Setting the Privilege Level for a Command, page 9-8
• Changing the Default Privilege Level for Lines, page 9-9
• Logging into and Exiting a Privilege Level, page 9-9

OL-8553-06 9-7
Setting the Privilege Level for a Command

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the privilege level for a command mode:
Command Purpose
Step 2 privilege mode level level command Set the privilege level for a command.
• For mode, enter configure for global configuration mode, exec for
EXEC mode, interface for interface configuration mode, or line for
line configuration mode.
• For level, the range is from 0 to 15. Level 1 is for normal user EXEC
mode privileges. Level 15 is the level of access permitted by the
enable password.
• For command, specify the command to which you want to restrict
access.
Step 3 enable password level level password Specify the enable password for the privilege level.
• For level, the range is from 0 to 15. Level 1 is for normal user EXEC
mode privileges.
• For password, specify a string from 1 to 25 alphanumeric characters.
The string cannot start with a number, is case sensitive, and allows
spaces but ignores leading spaces. By default, no password is
defined.
or The first command shows the password and access level configuration.
The second command shows the privilege level configuration.
show privilege
When you set a command to a privilege level, all commands whose syntax is a subset of that command
are also set to that level. For example, if you set the show ip traffic command to level 15, the show
commands and show ip commands are automatically set to privilege level 15 unless you set them
individually to different levels.
To return to the default privilege for a given command, use the no privilege mode level level command
This example shows how to set the configure command to privilege level 14 and define SecretPswd14
as the password users must enter to use level 14 commands:
Switch(config)# privilege exec level 14 configure
Switch(config)# enable password level 14 SecretPswd14

9-8 OL-8553-06
Changing the Default Privilege Level for Lines

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the default privilege level for a line:
Command Purpose
Step 2 line vty line Select the virtual terminal line on which to restrict access.
Step 3 privilege level level Change the default privilege level for the line.
For level, the range is from 0 to 15. Level 1 is for normal user EXEC mode
privileges. Level 15 is the level of access permitted by the enable
password.
or The first command shows the password and access level configuration.
The second command shows the privilege level configuration.
show privilege
Users can override the privilege level you set using the privilege level line configuration command by
logging in to the line and enabling a different privilege level. They can lower the privilege level by using
the disable command. If users know the password to a higher privilege level, they can use that password
to enable the higher privilege level. You might specify a high level or privilege level for your console
line to restrict line usage.
To return to the default line privilege level, use the no privilege level line configuration command.
Logging into and Exiting a Privilege Level

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to log in to a specified privilege level and to exit
to a specified privilege level:
Command Purpose
Step 1 enable level Log in to a specified privilege level.
For level, the range is 0 to 15.
Step 2 disable level Exit to a specified privilege level.
For level, the range is 0 to 15.

OL-8553-06 9-9
Controlling Switch Access with TACACS+

This section describes how to enable and configure Terminal Access Controller Access Control System
Plus (TACACS+), which provides detailed accounting information and flexible administrative control
over authentication and authorization processes. TACACS+ is facilitated through authentication,
authorization, accounting (AAA) and can be enabled only through AAA commands.
Security Command Reference, Release 12.2.

• Understanding TACACS+, page 9-10
• TACACS+ Operation, page 9-12
• Configuring TACACS+, page 9-12
• Displaying the TACACS+ Configuration, page 9-17
Understanding TACACS+
TACACS+ is a security application that provides centralized validation of users attempting to gain
access to your switch. TACACS+ services are maintained in a database on a TACACS+ daemon
typically running on a UNIX or Windows NT workstation. You should have access to and should
configure a TACACS+ server before the configuring TACACS+ features on your switch.
TACACS+ provides for separate and modular authentication, authorization, and accounting facilities.
TACACS+ allows for a single access control server (the TACACS+ daemon) to provide each
service—authentication, authorization, and accounting—independently. Each service can be tied into its
own database to take advantage of other services available on that server or on the network, depending
on the capabilities of the daemon.
The goal of TACACS+ is to provide a method for managing multiple network access points from a single
management service. Your switch can be a network access server along with other Cisco routers and
access servers. A network access server provides connections to a single user, to a network or
subnetwork, and to interconnected networks as shown in Figure 9-1.

9-10 OL-8553-06
Figure 9-1 Typical TACACS+ Network Configuration
UNIX workstation
(TACACS+ Catalyst 6500
server 1) series switch
171.20.10.7
UNIX workstation
(TACACS+
server 2)
171.20.10.8
Configure the switches with the

TACACS+ server addresses.
Set an authentication key
(also configure the same key on
the TACACS+ servers).
Enable AAA.
101230
Create a login authentication method list.
Apply the list to the terminal lines.
Create an authorization and accounting
Workstations method list as required. Workstations
TACACS+, administered through the AAA security services, can provide these services:
• Authentication—Provides complete control of authentication through login and password dialog,
challenge and response, and messaging support.
The authentication facility can conduct a dialog with the user (for example, after a username and
password are provided, to challenge a user with several questions, such as home address, mother’s
maiden name, service type, and social security number). The TACACS+ authentication service can
also send messages to user screens. For example, a message could notify users that their passwords
must be changed because of the company’s password aging policy.
• Authorization—Provides fine-grained control over user capabilities for the duration of the user’s
session, including but not limited to setting autocommands, access control, session duration, or
protocol support. You can also enforce restrictions on what commands a user can execute with the
TACACS+ authorization feature.
• Accounting—Collects and sends information used for billing, auditing, and reporting to the
TACACS+ daemon. Network managers can use the accounting facility to track user activity for a
security audit or to provide information for user billing. Accounting records include user identities,
start and stop times, executed commands (such as PPP), number of packets, and number of bytes.
The TACACS+ protocol provides authentication between the switch and the TACACS+ daemon, and it
ensures confidentiality because all protocol exchanges between the switch and the TACACS+ daemon
are encrypted.
You need a system running the TACACS+ daemon software to use TACACS+ on your switch.

OL-8553-06 9-11
TACACS+ Operation
When a user attempts a simple ASCII login by authenticating to a switch using TACACS+, this process
occurs:
1. When the connection is established, the switch contacts the TACACS+ daemon to obtain a username
prompt to show to the user. The user enters a username, and the switch then contacts the TACACS+
daemon to obtain a password prompt. The switch displays the password prompt to the user, the user
enters a password, and the password is then sent to the TACACS+ daemon.
TACACS+ allows a dialog between the daemon and the user until the daemon receives enough
information to authenticate the user. The daemon prompts for a username and password
combination, but can include other items, such as the user’s mother’s maiden name.
2. The switch eventually receives one of these responses from the TACACS+ daemon:
• ACCEPT—The user is authenticated and service can begin. If the switch is configured to
require authorization, authorization begins at this time.
• REJECT—The user is not authenticated. The user can be denied access or is prompted to retry
the login sequence, depending on the TACACS+ daemon.
• ERROR—An error occurred at some time during authentication with the daemon or in the
network connection between the daemon and the switch. If an ERROR response is received, the
switch typically tries to use an alternative method for authenticating the user.
• CONTINUE—The user is prompted for additional authentication information.
After authentication, the user undergoes an additional authorization phase if authorization has been
enabled on the switch. Users must first successfully complete TACACS+ authentication before
proceeding to TACACS+ authorization.
3. If TACACS+ authorization is required, the TACACS+ daemon is again contacted, and it returns an
ACCEPT or REJECT authorization response. If an ACCEPT response is returned, the response
contains data in the form of attributes that direct the EXEC or NETWORK session for that user and
the services that the user can access:
• Telnet, Secure Shell (SSH), rlogin, or privileged EXEC services
• Connection parameters, including the host or client IP address, access list, and user timeouts
Configuring TACACS+
This section describes how to configure your switch to support TACACS+. At a minimum, you must
identify the host or hosts maintaining the TACACS+ daemon and define the method lists for TACACS+
authentication. You can optionally define method lists for TACACS+ authorization and accounting. A
method list defines the sequence and methods to be used to authenticate, to authorize, or to keep accounts
on a user. You can use method lists to designate one or more security protocols to be used, thus ensuring
a backup system if the initial method fails. The software uses the first method listed to authenticate, to
authorize, or to keep accounts on users; if that method does not respond, the software selects the next
method in the list. This process continues until there is successful communication with a listed method
or the method list is exhausted.

9-12 OL-8553-06

• Default TACACS+ Configuration, page 9-13
• Identifying the TACACS+ Server Host and Setting the Authentication Key, page 9-13
• Configuring TACACS+ Login Authentication, page 9-14
• Configuring TACACS+ Authorization for Privileged EXEC Access and Network Services,
page 9-16
• Starting TACACS+ Accounting, page 9-17
Default TACACS+ Configuration

TACACS+ and AAA are disabled by default.
To prevent a lapse in security, you cannot configure TACACS+ through a network management
application. When enabled, TACACS+ can authenticate users accessing the switch through the CLI.
Note Although TACACS+ configuration is performed through the CLI, the TACACS+ server authenticates
HTTP connections that have been configured with a privilege level of 15.
Identifying the TACACS+ Server Host and Setting the Authentication Key
You can configure the switch to use a single server or AAA server groups to group existing server hosts
for authentication. You can group servers to select a subset of the configured server hosts and use them
for a particular service. The server group is used with a global server-host list and contains the list of IP
addresses of the selected server hosts.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to identify the IP host or host maintaining
TACACS+ server and optionally set the encryption key:
Command Purpose
Step 2 tacacs-server host hostname [port Identify the IP host or hosts maintaining a TACACS+ server. Enter this
integer] [timeout integer] [key string] command multiple times to create a list of preferred hosts. The software
searches for hosts in the order in which you specify them.
• For hostname, specify the name or IP address of the host.
• (Optional) For port integer, specify a server port number. The default
is port 49. The range is 1 to 65535.
• (Optional) For timeout integer, specify a time in seconds the switch
waits for a response from the daemon before it times out and declares
an error. The default is 5 seconds. The range is 1 to 1000 seconds.
• (Optional) For key string, specify the encryption key for encrypting
and decrypting all traffic between the switch and the TACACS+
daemon. You must configure the same key on the TACACS+ daemon
for encryption to be successful.
Step 3 aaa new-model Enable AAA.

OL-8553-06 9-13
Command Purpose
Step 4 aaa group server tacacs+ group-name (Optional) Define the AAA server-group with a group name.
This command puts the switch in a server group subconfiguration mode.
Step 5 server ip-address (Optional) Associate a particular TACACS+ server with the defined
server group. Repeat this step for each TACACS+ server in the AAA
server group.
Each server in the group must be previously defined in Step 2.
Step 7 show tacacs Verify your entries.
To remove the specified TACACS+ server name or address, use the no tacacs-server host hostname
global configuration command. To remove a server group from the configuration list, use the no aaa
group server tacacs+ group-name global configuration command. To remove the IP address of a
TACACS+ server, use the no server ip-address server group subconfiguration command.
Configuring TACACS+ Login Authentication

To configure AAA authentication, you define a named list of authentication methods and then apply that
list to various ports. The method list defines the types of authentication to be performed and the sequence
in which they are performed; it must be applied to a specific port before any of the defined authentication
methods are performed. The only exception is the default method list (which, by coincidence, is named
default). The default method list is automatically applied to all ports except those that have a named
method list explicitly defined. A defined method list overrides the default method list.
A method list describes the sequence and authentication methods to be queried to authenticate a user.
You can designate one or more security protocols to be used for authentication, thus ensuring a backup
system for authentication in case the initial method fails. The software uses the first method listed to
authenticate users; if that method fails to respond, the software selects the next authentication method
in the method list. This process continues until there is successful communication with a listed
authentication method or until all defined methods are exhausted. If authentication fails at any point in
this cycle—meaning that the security server or local username database responds by denying the user
access—the authentication process stops, and no other authentication methods are attempted.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure login authentication:
Command Purpose

9-14 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 aaa authentication login {default | Create a login authentication method list.
list-name} method1 [method2...]
• To create a default list that is used when a named list is not specified
in the login authentication command, use the default keyword
followed by the methods that are to be used in default situations. The
default method list is automatically applied to all ports.
• For list-name, specify a character string to name the list you are
creating.
• For method1..., specify the actual method the authentication
algorithm tries. The additional methods of authentication are used
only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails.
Select one of these methods:
• enable—Use the enable password for authentication. Before you can
use this authentication method, you must define an enable password
by using the enable password global configuration command.
• group tacacs+—Uses TACACS+ authentication. Before you can use
this authentication method, you must configure the TACACS+
server. For more information, see the “Identifying the TACACS+
Server Host and Setting the Authentication Key” section on
page 9-13.
• line—Use the line password for authentication. Before you can use
this authentication method, you must define a line password. Use the
password password line configuration command.
• local—Use the local username database for authentication. You must
enter username information in the database. Use the username
password global configuration command.
• local-case—Use a case-sensitive local username database for
authentication. You must enter username information in the database
by using the username name password global configuration
command.
• none—Do not use any authentication for login.
Step 4 line [console | tty | vty] line-number Enter line configuration mode, and configure the lines to which you want
[ending-line-number] to apply the authentication list.
Step 5 login authentication {default | Apply the authentication list to a line or set of lines.
list-name}
• If you specify default, use the default list created with the aaa
authentication login command.
• For list-name, specify the list created with the aaa authentication
login command.

OL-8553-06 9-15
To disable AAA, use the no aaa new-model global configuration command. To disable AAA
authentication, use the no aaa authentication login {default | list-name} method1 [method2...] global
configuration command. To either disable TACACS+ authentication for logins or to return to the default
value, use the no login authentication {default | list-name} line configuration command.
Note To secure the switch for HTTP access by using AAA methods, you must configure the switch with the
ip http authentication aaa global configuration command. Configuring AAA authentication does not
secure the switch for HTTP access by using AAA methods.
For more information about the ip http authentication command, see the Cisco IOS Security Command
Reference, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2
Mainline > Command References.
Configuring TACACS+ Authorization for Privileged EXEC Access and Network Services
AAA authorization limits the services available to a user. When AAA authorization is enabled, the
switch uses information retrieved from the user’s profile, which is located either in the local user
database or on the security server, to configure the user’s session. The user is granted access to a
requested service only if the information in the user profile allows it.
You can use the aaa authorization global configuration command with the tacacs+ keyword to set
parameters that restrict a user’s network access to privileged EXEC mode.
The aaa authorization exec tacacs+ local command sets these authorization parameters:
• Use TACACS+ for privileged EXEC access authorization if authentication was performed by using
TACACS+.
• Use the local database if authentication was not performed by using TACACS+.
Note Authorization is bypassed for authenticated users who log in through the CLI even if authorization has
been configured.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to specify TACACS+ authorization for
privileged EXEC access and network services:
Command Purpose
Step 2 aaa authorization network tacacs+ Configure the switch for user TACACS+ authorization for all
network-related service requests.
Step 3 aaa authorization exec tacacs+ Configure the switch for user TACACS+ authorization if the user has
privileged EXEC access.
The exec keyword might return user profile information (such as
autocommand information).

9-16 OL-8553-06
Controlling Switch Access with RADIUS
To disable authorization, use the no aaa authorization {network | exec} method1 global configuration
command.
Starting TACACS+ Accounting

The AAA accounting feature tracks the services that users are accessing and the amount of network
resources that they are consuming. When AAA accounting is enabled, the switch reports user activity to
the TACACS+ security server in the form of accounting records. Each accounting record contains
accounting attribute-value (AV) pairs and is stored on the security server. This data can then be analyzed
for network management, client billing, or auditing.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable TACACS+ accounting for each Cisco
IOS privilege level and for network services:
Command Purpose
Step 2 aaa accounting network start-stop Enable TACACS+ accounting for all network-related service requests.
tacacs+
Step 3 aaa accounting exec start-stop tacacs+ Enable TACACS+ accounting to send a start-record accounting notice
at the beginning of a privileged EXEC process and a stop-record at the
end.
To disable accounting, use the no aaa accounting {network | exec} {start-stop} method1... global
Displaying the TACACS+ Configuration

To display TACACS+ server statistics, use the show tacacs privileged EXEC command.

This section describes how to enable and configure the RADIUS, which provides detailed accounting
information and flexible administrative control over authentication and authorization processes.
RADIUS is facilitated through AAA and can be enabled only through AAA commands.
Security Command Reference, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco
IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command References.

• Understanding RADIUS, page 9-18
• RADIUS Operation, page 9-19

OL-8553-06 9-17
• Configuring RADIUS, page 9-19

• Displaying the RADIUS Configuration, page 9-32
Understanding RADIUS
RADIUS is a distributed client/server system that secures networks against unauthorized access.
RADIUS clients run on supported Cisco routers and switches. Clients send authentication requests to a
central RADIUS server, which contains all user authentication and network service access information.
The RADIUS host is normally a multiuser system running RADIUS server software from Cisco (Cisco
Secure Access Control Server Version 3.0), Livingston, Merit, Microsoft, or another software provider.
For more information, see the RADIUS server documentation.
Use RADIUS in these network environments that require access security:
• Networks with multiple-vendor access servers, each supporting RADIUS. For example, access
servers from several vendors use a single RADIUS server-based security database. In an IP-based
network with multiple vendors’ access servers, dial-in users are authenticated through a RADIUS
server that has been customized to work with the Kerberos security system.
• Turnkey network security environments in which applications support the RADIUS protocol, such
as in an access environment that uses a smart card access control system. In one case, RADIUS has
been used with Enigma’s security cards to validates users and to grant access to network resources.
• Networks already using RADIUS. You can add a Cisco switch containing a RADIUS client to the
network. This might be the first step when you make a transition to a TACACS+ server. See
Figure 9-2 on page 9-19.
• Network in which the user must only access a single service. Using RADIUS, you can control user
access to a single host, to a single utility such as Telnet, or to the network through a protocol such
as IEEE 802.1x. For more information about this protocol, see Chapter 10, “Configuring IEEE
802.1x Port-Based Authentication.”
• Networks that require resource accounting. You can use RADIUS accounting independently of
RADIUS authentication or authorization. The RADIUS accounting functions allow data to be sent
at the start and end of services, showing the amount of resources (such as time, packets, bytes, and
so forth) used during the session. An Internet service provider might use a freeware-based version
of RADIUS access control and accounting software to meet special security and billing needs.
RADIUS is not suitable in these network security situations:
• Multiprotocol access environments. RADIUS does not support AppleTalk Remote Access (ARA),
NetBIOS Frame Control Protocol (NBFCP), NetWare Asynchronous Services Interface (NASI), or
X.25 PAD connections.
• Switch-to-switch or router-to-router situations. RADIUS does not provide two-way authentication.
RADIUS can be used to authenticate from one device to a non-Cisco device if the non-Cisco device
requires authentication.
• Networks using a variety of services. RADIUS generally binds a user to one service model.

9-18 OL-8553-06
Figure 9-2 Transitioning from RADIUS to TACACS+ Services
R1 RADIUS
server
R2 RADIUS
server
T1 TACACS+
server
Remote T2 TACACS+
PC server
86891
Workstation
RADIUS Operation
When a user attempts to log in and authenticate to a switch that is access controlled by a RADIUS server,
these events occur:
1. The user is prompted to enter a username and password.
2. The username and encrypted password are sent over the network to the RADIUS server.
3. The user receives one of these responses from the RADIUS server:
a. ACCEPT—The user is authenticated.
b. REJECT—The user is either not authenticated and is prompted to re-enter the username and
password, or access is denied.
c. CHALLENGE—A challenge requires additional data from the user.
d. CHALLENGE PASSWORD—A response requests the user to select a new password.
The ACCEPT or REJECT response is bundled with additional data that is used for privileged EXEC or
network authorization. Users must first successfully complete RADIUS authentication before
proceeding to RADIUS authorization, if it is enabled. The additional data included with the ACCEPT or
REJECT packets includes these items:
• Telnet, SSH, rlogin, or privileged EXEC services
• Connection parameters, including the host or client IP address, access list, and user timeouts
Configuring RADIUS
This section describes how to configure your switch to support RADIUS. At a minimum, you must
identify the host or hosts that run the RADIUS server software and define the method lists for RADIUS
authentication. You can optionally define method lists for RADIUS authorization and accounting.
A method list defines the sequence and methods to be used to authenticate, to authorize, or to keep
accounts on a user. You can use method lists to designate one or more security protocols to be used (such
as TACACS+ or local username lookup), thus ensuring a backup system if the initial method fails. The

OL-8553-06 9-19
software uses the first method listed to authenticate, to authorize, or to keep accounts on users. If that
method does not respond, the software selects the next method in the list. This process continues until
there is successful communication with a listed method or the method list is exhausted.
You should have access to and should configure a RADIUS server before configuring RADIUS features
on your switch.
• Default RADIUS Configuration, page 9-20
• Identifying the RADIUS Server Host, page 9-20 (required)
• Configuring RADIUS Login Authentication, page 9-23 (required)
• Defining AAA Server Groups, page 9-25 (optional)
• Configuring RADIUS Authorization for User Privileged Access and Network Services, page 9-27
(optional)
• Starting RADIUS Accounting, page 9-28 (optional)
• Configuring Settings for All RADIUS Servers, page 9-29 (optional)
• Configuring the Switch to Use Vendor-Specific RADIUS Attributes, page 9-29 (optional)
• Configuring the Switch for Vendor-Proprietary RADIUS Server Communication, page 9-31
(optional)
• Configuring RADIUS Server Load Balancing, page 9-31 (optional)
Default RADIUS Configuration

RADIUS and AAA are disabled by default.
To prevent a lapse in security, you cannot configure RADIUS through a network management
application. When enabled, RADIUS can authenticate users accessing the switch through the CLI.
Identifying the RADIUS Server Host

Switch-to-RADIUS-server communication involves several components:
• Hostname or IP address
• Authentication destination port
• Accounting destination port
• Key string
• Timeout period
• Retransmission value
You identify RADIUS security servers by their hostname or IP address, hostname and specific UDP port
numbers, or their IP address and specific UDP port numbers. The combination of the IP address and the
UDP port number creates a unique identifier, allowing different ports to be individually defined as
RADIUS hosts providing a specific AAA service. This unique identifier enables RADIUS requests to be
sent to multiple UDP ports on a server at the same IP address.
If two different host entries on the same RADIUS server are configured for the same service—for
example, accounting—the second host entry configured acts as a fail-over backup to the first one. Using
this example, if the first host entry fails to provide accounting services, the %RADIUS-4-RADIUS_DEAD
message appears, and then the switch tries the second host entry configured on the same device for
accounting services. (The RADIUS host entries are tried in the order that they are configured.)

9-20 OL-8553-06
A RADIUS server and the switch use a shared secret text string to encrypt passwords and exchange
responses. To configure RADIUS to use the AAA security commands, you must specify the host running
the RADIUS server daemon and a secret text (key) string that it shares with the switch.
The timeout, retransmission, and encryption key values can be configured globally for all RADIUS
servers, on a per-server basis, or in some combination of global and per-server settings. To apply these
settings globally to all RADIUS servers communicating with the switch, use the three unique global
configuration commands: radius-server timeout, radius-server retransmit, and radius-server key.
To apply these values on a specific RADIUS server, use the radius-server host global configuration
command.
Note If you configure both global and per-server functions (timeout, retransmission, and key commands) on
the switch, the per-server timer, retransmission, and key value commands override global timer,
retransmission, and key value commands. For information on configuring these settings on all RADIUS
servers, see the “Configuring Settings for All RADIUS Servers” section on page 9-29.
You can configure the switch to use AAA server groups to group existing server hosts for authentication.
For more information, see the “Defining AAA Server Groups” section on page 9-25.

OL-8553-06 9-21
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure per-server RADIUS server
communication. This procedure is required.
Command Purpose
Step 2 radius-server host {hostname | Specify the IP address or hostname of the remote RADIUS server host.
ip-address} [auth-port port-number]
• (Optional) For auth-port port-number, specify the UDP destination
[acct-port port-number] [timeout
port for authentication requests.
seconds] [retransmit retries] [key
string] • (Optional) For acct-port port-number, specify the UDP destination
port for accounting requests.
• (Optional) For timeout seconds, specify the time interval that the
switch waits for the RADIUS server to reply before resending. The
range is 1 to 1000. This setting overrides the radius-server timeout
global configuration command setting. If no timeout is set with the
radius-server host command, the setting of the radius-server
timeout command is used.
• (Optional) For retransmit retries, specify the number of times a
RADIUS request is resent to a server if that server is not responding
or responding slowly. The range is 1 to 1000. If no retransmit value
is set with the radius-server host command, the setting of the
radius-server retransmit global configuration command is used.
• (Optional) For key string, specify the authentication and encryption
key used between the switch and the RADIUS daemon running on the
RADIUS server.
Note The key is a text string that must match the encryption key used
on the RADIUS server. Always configure the key as the last item
in the radius-server host command. Leading spaces are ignored,
but spaces within and at the end of the key are used. If you use
spaces in your key, do not enclose the key in quotation marks
unless the quotation marks are part of the key.
To configure the switch to recognize more than one host entry associated
with a single IP address, enter this command as many times as necessary,
making sure that each UDP port number is different. The switch software
searches for hosts in the order in which you specify them. Set the timeout,
retransmit, and encryption key values to use with the specific RADIUS
host.
To remove the specified RADIUS server, use the no radius-server host hostname | ip-address global
This example shows how to configure one RADIUS server to be used for authentication and another to
be used for accounting:
Switch(config)# radius-server host 172.29.36.49 auth-port 1612 key rad1
Switch(config)# radius-server host 172.20.36.50 acct-port 1618 key rad2

9-22 OL-8553-06
This example shows how to configure host1 as the RADIUS server and to use the default ports for both
authentication and accounting:
Switch(config)# radius-server host host1
Note You also need to configure some settings on the RADIUS server. These settings include the IP address
of the switch and the key string to be shared by both the server and the switch. For more information,
see the RADIUS server documentation.
Configuring RADIUS Login Authentication

To configure AAA authentication, you define a named list of authentication methods and then apply that
list to various ports. The method list defines the types of authentication to be performed and the sequence
in which they are performed; it must be applied to a specific port before any of the defined authentication
methods are performed. The only exception is the default method list (which, by coincidence, is named
default). The default method list is automatically applied to all ports except those that have a named
method list explicitly defined.
A method list describes the sequence and authentication methods to be queried to authenticate a user.
You can designate one or more security protocols to be used for authentication, thus ensuring a backup
system for authentication in case the initial method fails. The software uses the first method listed to
authenticate users; if that method fails to respond, the software selects the next authentication method
in the method list. This process continues until there is successful communication with a listed
authentication method or until all defined methods are exhausted. If authentication fails at any point in
this cycle—meaning that the security server or local username database responds by denying the user
access—the authentication process stops, and no other authentication methods are attempted.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure login authentication. This
procedure is required.
Command Purpose

OL-8553-06 9-23
Command Purpose
Step 3 aaa authentication login {default | Create a login authentication method list.
list-name} method1 [method2...]
• To create a default list that is used when a named list is not specified
in the login authentication command, use the default keyword
followed by the methods that are to be used in default situations. The
default method list is automatically applied to all ports.
• For list-name, specify a character string to name the list you are
creating.
• For method1..., specify the actual method the authentication
algorithm tries. The additional methods of authentication are used
only if the previous method returns an error, not if it fails.
Select one of these methods:
– enable—Use the enable password for authentication. Before you
can use this authentication method, you must define an enable
password by using the enable password global configuration
command.
– group radius—Use RADIUS authentication. Before you can use
this authentication method, you must configure the RADIUS
server. For more information, see the “Identifying the RADIUS
Server Host” section on page 9-20.
– line—Use the line password for authentication. Before you can
use this authentication method, you must define a line password.
Use the password password line configuration command.
– local—Use the local username database for authentication. You
must enter username information in the database. Use the
username name password global configuration command.
– local-case—Use a case-sensitive local username database for
authentication. You must enter username information in the
database by using the username password global configuration
command.
– none—Do not use any authentication for login.
Step 4 line [console | tty | vty] line-number Enter line configuration mode, and configure the lines to which you want
[ending-line-number] to apply the authentication list.
Step 5 login authentication {default | Apply the authentication list to a line or set of lines.
list-name}
• If you specify default, use the default list created with the aaa
authentication login command.
• For list-name, specify the list created with the aaa authentication
login command.

9-24 OL-8553-06
To disable AAA, use the no aaa new-model global configuration command. To disable AAA
authentication, use the no aaa authentication login {default | list-name} method1 [method2...] global
configuration command. To either disable RADIUS authentication for logins or to return to the default
value, use the no login authentication {default | list-name} line configuration command.
Defining AAA Server Groups

You can configure the switch to use AAA server groups to group existing server hosts for authentication.
You select a subset of the configured server hosts and use them for a particular service. The server group
is used with a global server-host list, which lists the IP addresses of the selected server hosts.
Server groups also can include multiple host entries for the same server if each entry has a unique
identifier (the combination of the IP address and UDP port number), allowing different ports to be
individually defined as RADIUS hosts providing a specific AAA service. If you configure two different
host entries on the same RADIUS server for the same service, (for example, accounting), the second
configured host entry acts as a fail-over backup to the first one.
You use the server group server configuration command to associate a particular server with a defined
group server. You can either identify the server by its IP address or identify multiple host instances or
entries by using the optional auth-port and acct-port keywords.

OL-8553-06 9-25
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define the AAA server group and associate
a particular RADIUS server with it:
Command Purpose
Step 2 radius-server host {hostname | Specify the IP address or hostname of the remote RADIUS server host.
ip-address} [auth-port port-number]
• (Optional) For auth-port port-number, specify the UDP destination
[acct-port port-number] [timeout
port for authentication requests.
seconds] [retransmit retries] [key
string] • (Optional) For acct-port port-number, specify the UDP destination
port for accounting requests.
• (Optional) For timeout seconds, specify the time interval that the
switch waits for the RADIUS server to reply before resending. The
range is 1 to 1000. This setting overrides the radius-server timeout
global configuration command setting. If no timeout is set with the
radius-server host command, the setting of the radius-server
timeout command is used.
• (Optional) For retransmit retries, specify the number of times a
RADIUS request is resent to a server if that server is not responding
or responding slowly. The range is 1 to 1000. If no retransmit value
is set with the radius-server host command, the setting of the
radius-server retransmit global configuration command is used.
• (Optional) For key string, specify the authentication and encryption
key used between the switch and the RADIUS daemon running on the
RADIUS server.
Note The key is a text string that must match the encryption key used
on the RADIUS server. Always configure the key as the last item
in the radius-server host command. Leading spaces are ignored,
but spaces within and at the end of the key are used. If you use
spaces in your key, do not enclose the key in quotation marks
unless the quotation marks are part of the key.
To configure the switch to recognize more than one host entry associated
with a single IP address, enter this command as many times as necessary,
making sure that each UDP port number is different. The switch software
searches for hosts in the order in which you specify them. Set the timeout,
retransmit, and encryption key values to use with the specific RADIUS
host.
Step 4 aaa group server radius group-name Define the AAA server-group with a group name.
This command puts the switch in a server group configuration mode.
Step 5 server ip-address Associate a particular RADIUS server with the defined server group.
Repeat this step for each RADIUS server in the AAA server group.
Each server in the group must be previously defined in Step 2.

9-26 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 9 Enable RADIUS login authentication. See the “Configuring RADIUS
Login Authentication” section on page 9-23.
To remove the specified RADIUS server, use the no radius-server host hostname | ip-address global
configuration command. To remove a server group from the configuration list, use the no aaa group
server radius group-name global configuration command. To remove the IP address of a RADIUS
server, use the no server ip-address server group configuration command.
In this example, the switch is configured to recognize two different RADIUS group servers (group1 and
group2). Group1 has two different host entries on the same RADIUS server configured for the same
services. The second host entry acts as a fail-over backup to the first entry.
Switch(config)# radius-server host 172.20.0.1 auth-port 1000 acct-port 1001
Switch(config)# radius-server host 172.10.0.1 auth-port 1645 acct-port 1646
Switch(config)# aaa new-model
Switch(config)# aaa group server radius group1
Switch(config-sg-radius)# server 172.20.0.1 auth-port 1000 acct-port 1001
Switch(config-sg-radius)# exit
Switch(config)# aaa group server radius group2
Switch(config-sg-radius)# server 172.20.0.1 auth-port 2000 acct-port 2001
Switch(config-sg-radius)# exit
Configuring RADIUS Authorization for User Privileged Access and Network Services
AAA authorization limits the services available to a user. When AAA authorization is enabled, the
switch uses information retrieved from the user’s profile, which is in the local user database or on the
security server, to configure the user’s session. The user is granted access to a requested service only if
the information in the user profile allows it.
You can use the aaa authorization global configuration command with the radius keyword to set
parameters that restrict a user’s network access to privileged EXEC mode.
The aaa authorization exec radius local command sets these authorization parameters:
• Use RADIUS for privileged EXEC access authorization if authentication was performed by using
RADIUS.
• Use the local database if authentication was not performed by using RADIUS.
Note Authorization is bypassed for authenticated users who log in through the CLI even if authorization has
been configured.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to specify RADIUS authorization for privileged
EXEC access and network services:
Command Purpose
Step 2 aaa authorization network radius Configure the switch for user RADIUS authorization for all
network-related service requests.

OL-8553-06 9-27
Command Purpose
Step 3 aaa authorization exec radius Configure the switch for user RADIUS authorization if the user has
privileged EXEC access.
The exec keyword might return user profile information (such as
autocommand information).
To disable authorization, use the no aaa authorization {network | exec} method1 global configuration
command.
Starting RADIUS Accounting

The AAA accounting feature tracks the services that users are accessing and the amount of network
resources that they are consuming. When AAA accounting is enabled, the switch reports user activity to
the RADIUS security server in the form of accounting records. Each accounting record contains
accounting attribute-value (AV) pairs and is stored on the security server. This data can then be analyzed
for network management, client billing, or auditing.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable RADIUS accounting for each Cisco
IOS privilege level and for network services:
Command Purpose
Step 2 aaa accounting network start-stop Enable RADIUS accounting for all network-related service requests.
radius
Step 3 aaa accounting exec start-stop radius Enable RADIUS accounting to send a start-record accounting notice at
the beginning of a privileged EXEC process and a stop-record at the
end.
To disable accounting, use the no aaa accounting {network | exec} {start-stop} method1... global

9-28 OL-8553-06
Configuring Settings for All RADIUS Servers

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure global communication settings
between the switch and all RADIUS servers:
Command Purpose
Step 2 radius-server key string Specify the shared secret text string used between the switch and all
RADIUS servers.
Note The key is a text string that must match the encryption key used on
the RADIUS server. Leading spaces are ignored, but spaces within
and at the end of the key are used. If you use spaces in your key, do
not enclose the key in quotation marks unless the quotation marks
are part of the key.
Step 3 radius-server retransmit retries Specify the number of times the switch sends each RADIUS request to the
server before giving up. The default is 3; the range 1 to 1000.
Step 4 radius-server timeout seconds Specify the number of seconds a switch waits for a reply to a RADIUS
request before resending the request. The default is 5 seconds; the range is
1 to 1000.
Step 5 radius-server deadtime minutes Specify the number of minutes a RADIUS server, which is not responding
to authentication requests, to be skipped, thus avoiding the wait for the
request to timeout before trying the next configured server. The default is
0; the range is 1 to 1440 minutes.
Step 7 show running-config Verify your settings.
To return to the default setting for the retransmit, timeout, and deadtime, use the no forms of these
commands.
Configuring the Switch to Use Vendor-Specific RADIUS Attributes

The Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) draft standard specifies a method for communicating
vendor-specific information between the switch and the RADIUS server by using the vendor-specific
attribute (attribute 26). Vendor-specific attributes (VSAs) allow vendors to support their own extended
attributes not suitable for general use. The Cisco RADIUS implementation supports one vendor-specific
option by using the format recommended in the specification. Cisco’s vendor-ID is 9, and the supported
option has vendor-type 1, which is named cisco-avpair. The value is a string with this format:
protocol : attribute sep value *
Protocol is a value of the Cisco protocol attribute for a particular type of authorization. Attribute and
value are an appropriate attribute-value (AV) pair defined in the Cisco TACACS+ specification, and sep
is = for mandatory attributes and is * for optional attributes. The full set of features available for
TACACS+ authorization can then be used for RADIUS.
For example, this AV pair activates Cisco’s multiple named ip address pools feature during IP
authorization (during PPP IPCP address assignment):
cisco-avpair= ”ip:addr-pool=first“

OL-8553-06 9-29
This example shows how to provide a user logging in from a switch with immediate access to privileged
EXEC commands:
cisco-avpair= ”shell:priv-lvl=15“
This example shows how to specify an authorized VLAN in the RADIUS server database:
cisco-avpair= ”tunnel-type(#64)=VLAN(13)”
cisco-avpair= ”tunnel-medium-type(#65)=802 media(6)”
cisco-avpair= ”tunnel-private-group-ID(#81)=vlanid”
This example shows how to apply an input ACL in ASCII format to an interface for the duration of this
connection:
cisco-avpair= “ip:inacl#1=deny ip 10.10.10.10 0.0.255.255 20.20.20.20 255.255.0.0”
cisco-avpair= “ip:inacl#2=deny ip 10.10.10.10 0.0.255.255 any”
cisco-avpair= “mac:inacl#3=deny any any decnet-iv”
This example shows how to apply an output ACL in ASCII format to an interface for the duration of this
connection:
cisco-avpair= “ip:outacl#2=deny ip 10.10.10.10 0.0.255.255 any”
Other vendors have their own unique vendor-IDs, options, and associated VSAs. For more information
about vendor-IDs and VSAs, see RFC 2138, “Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS).”
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch to recognize and use
VSAs:
Command Purpose
Step 2 radius-server vsa send [accounting | Enable the switch to recognize and use VSAs as defined by RADIUS IETF
authentication] attribute 26.
• (Optional) Use the accounting keyword to limit the set of recognized
vendor-specific attributes to only accounting attributes.
• (Optional) Use the authentication keyword to limit the set of
recognized vendor-specific attributes to only authentication attributes.
If you enter this command without keywords, both accounting and
authentication vendor-specific attributes are used.
Note For a complete list of RADIUS attributes or more information about vendor-specific attribute 26, see the
“RADIUS Attributes” appendix in the Cisco IOS Security Configuration Guide, Release 12.2 from the
Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command
References.

9-30 OL-8553-06
Configuring the Switch for Vendor-Proprietary RADIUS Server Communication

Although an IETF draft standard for RADIUS specifies a method for communicating vendor-proprietary
information between the switch and the RADIUS server, some vendors have extended the RADIUS
attribute set in a unique way. Cisco IOS software supports a subset of vendor-proprietary RADIUS
attributes.
As mentioned earlier, to configure RADIUS (whether vendor-proprietary or IETF draft-compliant), you
must specify the host running the RADIUS server daemon and the secret text string it shares with the
switch. You specify the RADIUS host and secret text string by using the radius-server global
configuration commands.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to specify a vendor-proprietary RADIUS server
host and a shared secret text string:
Command Purpose
Step 2 radius-server host {hostname | ip-address} non-standard Specify the IP address or hostname of the remote
RADIUS server host and identify that it is using a
vendor-proprietary implementation of RADIUS.
Step 3 radius-server key string Specify the shared secret text string used between the
switch and the vendor-proprietary RADIUS server.
The switch and the RADIUS server use this text
string to encrypt passwords and exchange responses.
Note The key is a text string that must match the
encryption key used on the RADIUS server.
Leading spaces are ignored, but spaces within
and at the end of the key are used. If you use
spaces in your key, do not enclose the key in
quotation marks unless the quotation marks
are part of the key.
To delete the vendor-proprietary RADIUS host, use the no radius-server host {hostname | ip-address}
non-standard global configuration command. To disable the key, use the no radius-server key global
This example shows how to specify a vendor-proprietary RADIUS host and to use a secret key of rad124
between the switch and the server:
Switch(config)# radius-server host 172.20.30.15 nonstandard
Switch(config)# radius-server key rad124
Configuring RADIUS Server Load Balancing

This feature allows access and authentication requests to be evenly across all RADIUS servers in a server
group. For more information, see the “RADIUS Server Load Balancing” chapter of the “Cisco IOS
Security Configuration Guide”, Release 12.2:
http://www.ciscosystems.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_2sb/feature/guide/sbrdldbl.html

OL-8553-06 9-31
Controlling Switch Access with Kerberos
Displaying the RADIUS Configuration

To display the RADIUS configuration, use the show running-config privileged EXEC command.

This section describes how to enable and configure the Kerberos security system, which authenticates
requests for network resources by using a trusted third party. To use this feature, the cryptographic (that
is, supports encryption) versions of the switch software must be installed on your switch.
You must obtain authorization to use this feature and to download the cryptographic software files from
Cisco.com. For more information, see the release notes for this release.
These sections contain this information:
• Understanding Kerberos, page 9-32
• Kerberos Operation, page 9-34
• Configuring Kerberos, page 9-35
For Kerberos configuration examples, see the “Kerberos Configuration Examples” section in the
“Security Server Protocols” chapter of the Cisco IOS Security Configuration Guide, Release 12.2, at this
URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/products_configuration_guide_book09186a
0080087df1.html
For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this section, see the “Kerberos
Commands” section in the “Security Server Protocols” chapter of the Cisco IOS Security Command
Reference, Release 12.2, at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/products_command_reference_book09186a
0080087e33.html
Note In the Kerberos configuration examples and in the Cisco IOS Security Command Reference,
Release 12.2, the trusted third party can be a Catalyst 3560 switch that supports Kerberos, that is
configured as a network security server, and that can authenticate users by using the Kerberos protocol.
Understanding Kerberos
Kerberos is a secret-key network authentication protocol, which was developed at the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology (MIT). It uses the Data Encryption Standard (DES) cryptographic algorithm for
encryption and authentication and authenticates requests for network resources. Kerberos uses the
concept of a trusted third party to perform secure verification of users and services. This trusted third
party is called the key distribution center (KDC).
Kerberos verifies that users are who they claim to be and the network services that they use are what the
services claim to be. To do this, a KDC or trusted Kerberos server issues tickets to users. These tickets,
which have a limited lifespan, are stored in user credential caches. The Kerberos server uses the tickets
instead of usernames and passwords to authenticate users and network services.

9-32 OL-8553-06
Note A Kerberos server can be a Catalyst 3560 switch that is configured as a network security server and that
can authenticate users by using the Kerberos protocol.
The Kerberos credential scheme uses a process called single logon. This process authenticates a user
once and then allows secure authentication (without encrypting another password) wherever that user
credential is accepted.
This software release supports Kerberos 5, which allows organizations that are already using Kerberos 5
to use the same Kerberos authentication database on the KDC that they are already using on their other
network hosts (such as UNIX servers and PCs).
In this software release, Kerberos supports these network services:
• Telnet
• rlogin
• rsh (Remote Shell Protocol)
Table 9-2 lists the common Kerberos-related terms and definitions:
Table 9-2 Kerberos Terms
Term Definition
Authentication A process by which a user or service identifies itself to another service.
For example, a client can authenticate to a switch or a switch can
authenticate to another switch.
Authorization A means by which the switch identifies what privileges the user has in a
network or on the switch and what actions the user can perform.
Credential A general term that refers to authentication tickets, such as TGTs1 and
service credentials. Kerberos credentials verify the identity of a user or
service. If a network service decides to trust the Kerberos server that
issued a ticket, it can be used in place of re-entering a username and
password. Credentials have a default lifespan of eight hours.
Instance An authorization level label for Kerberos principals. Most Kerberos
principals are of the form user@REALM (for example,
smith@EXAMPLE.COM). A Kerberos principal with a Kerberos
instance has the form user/instance@REALM (for example,
smith/admin@EXAMPLE.COM). The Kerberos instance can be used to
specify the authorization level for the user if authentication is successful.
The server of each network service might implement and enforce the
authorization mappings of Kerberos instances but is not required to do so.
Note The Kerberos principal and instance names must be in all
lowercase characters.
Note The Kerberos realm name must be in all uppercase characters.

2
KDC Key distribution center that consists of a Kerberos server and database
program that is running on a network host.
Kerberized A term that describes applications and services that have been modified
to support the Kerberos credential infrastructure.

OL-8553-06 9-33
Table 9-2 Kerberos Terms (continued)
Term Definition
Kerberos realm A domain consisting of users, hosts, and network services that are
registered to a Kerberos server. The Kerberos server is trusted to verify
the identity of a user or network service to another user or network
service.
Note The Kerberos realm name must be in all uppercase characters.
Kerberos server A daemon that is running on a network host. Users and network services
register their identity with the Kerberos server. Network services query
the Kerberos server to authenticate to other network services.
KEYTAB3 A password that a network service shares with the KDC. In Kerberos 5
and later Kerberos versions, the network service authenticates an
encrypted service credential by using the KEYTAB to decrypt it. In
Kerberos versions earlier than Kerberos 5, KEYTAB is referred to as
SRVTAB4.
Principal Also known as a Kerberos identity, this is who you are or what a service
is according to the Kerberos server.
Note The Kerberos principal name must be in all lowercase characters.
Service credential A credential for a network service. When issued from the KDC, this
credential is encrypted with the password shared by the network service
and the KDC. The password is also shared with the user TGT.
SRVTAB A password that a network service shares with the KDC. In Kerberos 5
or later Kerberos versions, SRVTAB is referred to as KEYTAB.
TGT Ticket granting ticket that is a credential that the KDC issues to
authenticated users. When users receive a TGT, they can authenticate to
network services within the Kerberos realm represented by the KDC.
1. TGT = ticket granting ticket
2. KDC = key distribution center
3. KEYTAB = key table
4. SRVTAB = server table
Kerberos Operation
A Kerberos server can be a Catalyst 3560 switch that is configured as a network security server and that
can authenticate remote users by using the Kerberos protocol. Although you can customize Kerberos in
a number of ways, remote users attempting to access network services must pass through three layers of
security before they can access network services.
To authenticate to network services by using a Catalyst 3560 switch as a Kerberos server, remote users
must follow these steps:
1. Authenticating to a Boundary Switch, page 9-35
2. Obtaining a TGT from a KDC, page 9-35
3. Authenticating to Network Services, page 9-35

9-34 OL-8553-06
Authenticating to a Boundary Switch

This section describes the first layer of security through which a remote user must pass. The user must
first authenticate to the boundary switch. This process then occurs:
1. The user opens an un-Kerberized Telnet connection to the boundary switch.
2. The switch prompts the user for a username and password.
3. The switch requests a TGT from the KDC for this user.
4. The KDC sends an encrypted TGT that includes the user identity to the switch.
5. The switch attempts to decrypt the TGT by using the password that the user entered.
• If the decryption is successful, the user is authenticated to the switch.
• If the decryption is not successful, the user repeats Step 2 either by re-entering the username
and password (noting if Caps Lock or Num Lock is on or off) or by entering a different username
and password.
A remote user who initiates a un-Kerberized Telnet session and authenticates to a boundary switch is
inside the firewall, but the user must still authenticate directly to the KDC before getting access to the
network services. The user must authenticate to the KDC because the TGT that the KDC issues is stored
on the switch and cannot be used for additional authentication until the user logs on to the switch.
Obtaining a TGT from a KDC

This section describes the second layer of security through which a remote user must pass. The user must
now authenticate to a KDC and obtain a TGT from the KDC to access network services.
For instructions about how to authenticate to a KDC, see the “Obtaining a TGT from a KDC” section in
the “Security Server Protocols” chapter of the Cisco IOS Security Configuration Guide, Release 12.2, at
this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/products_configuration_guide_chapter0918
6a00800ca7ad.html
Authenticating to Network Services

This section describes the third layer of security through which a remote user must pass. The user with
a TGT must now authenticate to the network services in a Kerberos realm.
For instructions about how to authenticate to a network service, see the “Authenticating to Network
Services” section in the “Security Server Protocols” chapter of the Cisco IOS Security Configuration
Guide, Release 12.2, at this URL:
6a00800ca7ad.html
Configuring Kerberos
So that remote users can authenticate to network services, you must configure the hosts and the KDC in
the Kerberos realm to communicate and mutually authenticate users and network services. To do this,
you must identify them to each other. You add entries for the hosts to the Kerberos database on the KDC
and add KEYTAB files generated by the KDC to all hosts in the Kerberos realm. You also create entries
for the users in the KDC database.

OL-8553-06 9-35
Configuring the Switch for Local Authentication and Authorization
When you add or create entries for the hosts and users, follow these guidelines:
• The Kerberos principal name must be in all lowercase characters.
• The Kerberos instance name must be in all lowercase characters.
• The Kerberos realm name must be in all uppercase characters.
Note A Kerberos server can be a Catalyst 3560 that is configured as a network security server and that can
authenticate users by using the Kerberos protocol.
To set up a Kerberos-authenticated server-client system, follow these steps:

• Configure the KDC by using Kerberos commands.
• Configure the switch to use the Kerberos protocol.
For instructions, see the “Kerberos Configuration Task List” section in the “Security Server Protocols”
chapter of the Cisco IOS Security Configuration Guide, Release 12.2, at this URL:
6a00800ca7ad.html
Configuring the Switch for Local Authentication and

Authorization
You can configure AAA to operate without a server by setting the switch to implement AAA in local
mode. The switch then handles authentication and authorization. No accounting is available in this
configuration.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch for local AAA:
Command Purpose
Step 3 aaa authentication login default local Set the login authentication to use the local username database. The
default keyword applies the local user database authentication to all
ports.
Step 4 aaa authorization exec local Configure user AAA authorization, check the local database, and allow
the user to run an EXEC shell.
Step 5 aaa authorization network local Configure user AAA authorization for all network-related service
requests.

9-36 OL-8553-06
Configuring the Switch for Secure Shell
Command Purpose
Step 6 username name [privilege level] Enter the local database, and establish a username-based authentication
{password encryption-type password} system.
Repeat this command for each user.
• For name, specify the user ID as one word. Spaces and quotation
marks are not allowed.
• (Optional) For level, specify the privilege level the user has after
gaining access. The range is 0 to 15. Level 15 gives privileged EXEC
mode access. Level 0 gives user EXEC mode access.
• For encryption-type, enter 0 to specify that an unencrypted password
follows. Enter 7 to specify that a hidden password follows.
• For password, specify the password the user must enter to gain access
to the switch. The password must be from 1 to 25 characters, can
contain embedded spaces, and must be the last option specified in the
username command.
To disable AAA, use the no aaa new-model global configuration command. To disable authorization,
use the no aaa authorization {network | exec} method1 global configuration command.
Reference, Release 12.2.

This section describes how to configure the Secure Shell (SSH) feature. To use this feature, you must
install the cryptographic (encrypted) software image on your switch. You must obtain authorization to
use this feature and to download the cryptographic software files from Cisco.com. For more information,
see the release notes for this release.
• Understanding SSH, page 9-38
• Configuring SSH, page 9-39
• Displaying the SSH Configuration and Status, page 9-41

OL-8553-06 9-37
For SSH configuration examples, see the “SSH Configuration Examples” section in the “Configuring
Secure Shell” chapter of the Cisco IOS Security Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 12.2, at
this URL:
6a00800ca7d5.html
reference for this release and the command reference for Cisco IOS Release 12.2 at this URL:
0080087e33.html
Understanding SSH
SSH is a protocol that provides a secure, remote connection to a device. SSH provides more security for
remote connections than Telnet does by providing strong encryption when a device is authenticated. This
software release supports SSH Version 1 (SSHv1) and SSH Version 2 (SSHv2).
This section consists of these topics:
• SSH Servers, Integrated Clients, and Supported Versions, page 9-38
• Limitations, page 9-39
SSH Servers, Integrated Clients, and Supported Versions

The SSH feature has an SSH server and an SSH integrated client, which are applications that run on the
switch. You can use an SSH client to connect to a switch running the SSH server. The SSH server works
with the SSH client supported in this release and with non-Cisco SSH clients. The SSH client also works
with the SSH server supported in this release and with non-Cisco SSH servers.
The switch supports an SSHv1 or an SSHv2 server.
The switch supports an SSHv1 client.
SSH supports the Data Encryption Standard (DES) encryption algorithm, the Triple DES (3DES)
encryption algorithm, and password-based user authentication.
SSH also supports these user authentication methods:
• TACACS+ (for more information, see the “Controlling Switch Access with TACACS+” section on
page 9-10)
• RADIUS (for more information, see the “Controlling Switch Access with RADIUS” section on
page 9-17)
• Local authentication and authorization (for more information, see the “Configuring the Switch for
Local Authentication and Authorization” section on page 9-36)
Note This software release does not support IP Security (IPSec).

9-38 OL-8553-06
Limitations
These limitations apply to SSH:
• The switch supports Rivest, Shamir, and Adelman (RSA) authentication.
• SSH supports only the execution-shell application.
• The SSH server and the SSH client are supported only on DES (56-bit) and 3DES (168-bit) data
encryption software.
• The switch does not support the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) symmetric encryption
algorithm.
Configuring SSH
This section has this configuration information:
• Setting Up the Switch to Run SSH, page 9-39 (required)
• Configuring the SSH Server, page 9-40 (required only if you are configuring the switch as an SSH
server)
Follow these guidelines when configuring the switch as an SSH server or SSH client:
• An RSA key pair generated by a SSHv1 server can be used by an SSHv2 server, and the reverse.
• If you get CLI error messages after entering the crypto key generate rsa global configuration
command, an RSA key pair has not been generated. Reconfigure the hostname and domain, and then
enter the crypto key generate rsa command. For more information, see the “Setting Up the Switch
to Run SSH” section on page 9-39.
• When generating the RSA key pair, the message No host name specified might appear. If it does,
you must configure a hostname by using the hostname global configuration command.
• When generating the RSA key pair, the message No domain specified might appear. If it does, you
must configure an IP domain name by using the ip domain-name global configuration command.
• When configuring the local authentication and authorization authentication method, make sure that
AAA is disabled on the console.
Setting Up the Switch to Run SSH

Follow these steps to set up your switch to run SSH:
1. Download the cryptographic software image from Cisco.com. This step is required. For more
information, see the release notes for this release.
2. Configure a hostname and IP domain name for the switch. Follow this procedure only if you are
configuring the switch as an SSH server.

OL-8553-06 9-39
3. Generate an RSA key pair for the switch, which automatically enables SSH. Follow this procedure
only if you are configuring the switch as an SSH server.
4. Configure user authentication for local or remote access. This step is required. For more
information, see the “Configuring the Switch for Local Authentication and Authorization” section
on page 9-36.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a hostname and an IP domain name
and to generate an RSA key pair. This procedure is required if you are configuring the switch as an SSH
server.
Command Purpose
Step 2 hostname hostname Configure a hostname for your switch.
Step 3 ip domain-name domain_name Configure a host domain for your switch.
Step 4 crypto key generate rsa Enable the SSH server for local and remote authentication on the switch
and generate an RSA key pair.
We recommend that a minimum modulus size of 1024 bits.
When you generate RSA keys, you are prompted to enter a modulus
length. A longer modulus length might be more secure, but it takes longer
to generate and to use.
Step 6 show ip ssh Show the version and configuration information for your SSH server.
or
show ssh Show the status of the SSH server on the switch.
To delete the RSA key pair, use the crypto key zeroize rsa global configuration command. After the
RSA key pair is deleted, the SSH server is automatically disabled.
Configuring the SSH Server

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the SSH server:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip ssh version [1 | 2] (Optional) Configure the switch to run SSH Version 1 or SSH Version 2.
• 1—Configure the switch to run SSH Version 1.
• 2—Configure the switch to run SSH Version 2.
If you do not enter this command or do not specify a keyword, the SSH
server selects the latest SSH version supported by the SSH client. For
example, if the SSH client supports SSHv1 and SSHv2, the SSH server
selects SSHv2.

9-40 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip ssh {timeout seconds | Configure the SSH control parameters:
authentication-retries number}
• Specify the time-out value in seconds; the default is 120 seconds. The
range is 0 to 120 seconds. This parameter applies to the SSH
negotiation phase. After the connection is established, the switch uses
the default time-out values of the CLI-based sessions.
By default, up to five simultaneous, encrypted SSH connections for
multiple CLI-based sessions over the network are available (session
0 to session 4). After the execution shell starts, the CLI-based session
time-out value returns to the default of 10 minutes.
• Specify the number of times that a client can re-authenticate to the
server. The default is 3; the range is 0 to 5.
Repeat this step when configuring both parameters.
Step 4 line vty line_number (Optional) Configure the virtual terminal line settings.
[ending_line_number]
• Enter line configuration mode to configure the virtual terminal line
transport input ssh settings. For line_number and ending_line_number, specify a pair of
lines. The range is 0 to 15.
• Specify that the switch prevent non-SSH Telnet connections. This
limits the router to only SSH connections.
Step 6 show ip ssh Show the version and configuration information for your SSH server.
or
show ssh Show the status of the SSH server connections on the switch.
To return to the default SSH control parameters, use the no ip ssh {timeout | authentication-retries}
Displaying the SSH Configuration and Status

To display the SSH server configuration and status, use one or more of the privileged EXEC commands
in Table 9-3:
Table 9-3 Commands for Displaying the SSH Server Configuration and Status
Command Purpose
show ip ssh Shows the version and configuration information for the SSH server.
show ssh Shows the status of the SSH server.

OL-8553-06 9-41
Configuring the Switch for Secure Socket Layer HTTP
For more information about these commands, see the “Secure Shell Commands” section in the “Other
Security Features” chapter of the Cisco IOS Security Command Reference, Cisco IOS Release 12.2, at
this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/products_command_reference_chapter0918
6a00800ca7cd.html

This section describes how to configure Secure Socket Layer (SSL) version 3.0 support for the HTTP 1.1
server and client. SSL provides server authentication, encryption, and message integrity, as well as
HTTP client authentication, to allow secure HTTP communications.To use this feature, the
cryptographic (encrypted) software image must be installed on your switch. You must obtain
authorization to use this feature and to download the cryptographic software files from Cisco.com. For
more information about the crypto image, see the release notes for this release.
• Understanding Secure HTTP Servers and Clients, page 9-42
• Configuring Secure HTTP Servers and Clients, page 9-44
• Displaying Secure HTTP Server and Client Status, page 9-48
For configuration examples and complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this
section, see the “HTTPS - HTTP Server and Client with SSL 3.0” feature description for Cisco IOS
Release 12.2(15)T at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1839/products_feature_guide09186a008015a4c6.
html
Understanding Secure HTTP Servers and Clients

On a secure HTTP connection, data to and from an HTTP server is encrypted before being sent over the
Internet. HTTP with SSL encryption provides a secure connection to allow such functions as configuring
a switch from a Web browser. Cisco's implementation of the secure HTTP server and secure HTTP client
uses an implementation of SSL Version 3.0 with application-layer encryption. HTTP over SSL is
abbreviated as HTTPS; the URL of a secure connection begins with https:// instead of http://.
The primary role of the HTTP secure server (the switch) is to listen for HTTPS requests on a designated
port (the default HTTPS port is 443) and pass the request to the HTTP 1.1 Web server. The HTTP 1.1
server processes requests and passes responses (pages) back to the HTTP secure server, which, in turn,
responds to the original request.
The primary role of the HTTP secure client (the web browser) is to respond to Cisco IOS application
requests for HTTPS User Agent services, perform HTTPS User Agent services for the application, and
pass the response back to the application.
Certificate Authority Trustpoints

Certificate authorities (CAs) manage certificate requests and issue certificates to participating network
devices. These services provide centralized security key and certificate management for the participating
devices. Specific CA servers are referred to as trustpoints.

9-42 OL-8553-06
When a connection attempt is made, the HTTPS server provides a secure connection by issuing a
certified X.509v3 certificate, obtained from a specified CA trustpoint, to the client. The client (usually
a Web browser), in turn, has a public key that allows it to authenticate the certificate.
For secure HTTP connections, we highly recommend that you configure a CA trustpoint. If a CA
trustpoint is not configured for the device running the HTTPS server, the server certifies itself and
generates the needed RSA key pair. Because a self-certified (self-signed) certificate does not provide
adequate security, the connecting client generates a notification that the certificate is self-certified, and
the user has the opportunity to accept or reject the connection. This option is useful for internal network
topologies (such as testing).
If you do not configure a CA trustpoint, when you enable a secure HTTP connection, either a temporary
or a persistent self-signed certificate for the secure HTTP server (or client) is automatically generated.
• If the switch is not configured with a hostname and a domain name, a temporary self-signed
certificate is generated. If the switch reboots, any temporary self-signed certificate is lost, and a new
temporary new self-signed certificate is assigned.
• If the switch has been configured with a host and domain name, a persistent self-signed certificate
is generated. This certificate remains active if you reboot the switch or if you disable the secure
HTTP server so that it will be there the next time you re-enable a secure HTTP connection.
Note The certificate authorities and trustpoints must be configured on each device individually. Copying them
from other devices makes them invalid on the switch.
If a self-signed certificate has been generated, this information is included in the output of the show
running-config privileged EXEC command. This is a partial sample output from that command
displaying a self-signed certificate.
<output truncated>
crypto pki trustpoint TP-self-signed-3080755072

enrollment selfsigned
subject-name cn=IOS-Self-Signed-Certificate-3080755072
revocation-check none
rsakeypair TP-self-signed-3080755072
!
!
crypto ca certificate chain TP-self-signed-3080755072
certificate self-signed 01
3082029F 30820208 A0030201 02020101 300D0609 2A864886 F70D0101 04050030
59312F30 2D060355 04031326 494F532D 53656C66 2D536967 6E65642D 43657274
69666963 6174652D 33303830 37353530 37323126 30240609 2A864886 F70D0109
<output truncated>
You can remove this self-signed certificate by disabling the secure HTTP server and entering the no
crypto pki trustpoint TP-self-signed-30890755072 global configuration command. If you later
re-enable a secure HTTP server, a new self-signed certificate is generated.
Note The values that follow TP self-signed depend on the serial number of the device.
You can use an optional command (ip http secure-client-auth) to allow the HTTPS server to request
an X.509v3 certificate from the client. Authenticating the client provides more security than server
authentication by itself.

OL-8553-06 9-43
For additional information on Certificate Authorities, see the “Configuring Certification Authority
Interoperability” chapter in the Cisco IOS Security Configuration Guide, Release 12.2 from the
References.
CipherSuites
A CipherSuite specifies the encryption algorithm and the digest algorithm to use on a SSL connection.
When connecting to the HTTPS server, the client Web browser offers a list of supported CipherSuites,
and the client and server negotiate the best encryption algorithm to use from those on the list that are
supported by both. For example, Netscape Communicator 4.76 supports U.S. security with RSA Public
Key Cryptography, MD2, MD5, RC2-CBC, RC4, DES-CBC, and DES-EDE3-CBC.
For the best possible encryption, you should use a client browser that supports 128-bit encryption, such
as Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5.5 (or later) or Netscape Communicator Version 4.76 (or later).
The SSL_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA CipherSuite provides less security than the other CipherSuites,
as it does not offer 128-bit encryption.
The more secure and more complex CipherSuites require slightly more processing time. This list defines
the CipherSuites supported by the switch and ranks them from fastest to slowest in terms of router
processing load (speed):
1. SSL_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA—RSA key exchange (RSA Public Key Cryptography) with
DES-CBC for message encryption and SHA for message digest
2. SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5—RSA key exchange with RC4 128-bit encryption and MD5 for
message digest
3. SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA—RSA key exchange with RC4 128-bit encryption and SHA for
message digest
4. SSL_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA—RSA key exchange with 3DES and DES-EDE3-CBC
for message encryption and SHA for message digest
RSA (in conjunction with the specified encryption and digest algorithm combinations) is used for both
key generation and authentication on SSL connections. This usage is independent of whether or not a
CA trustpoint is configured.
Configuring Secure HTTP Servers and Clients

• Default SSL Configuration, page 9-45
• SSL Configuration Guidelines, page 9-45
• Configuring a CA Trustpoint, page 9-45
• Configuring the Secure HTTP Server, page 9-46
• Configuring the Secure HTTP Client, page 9-47

9-44 OL-8553-06
Default SSL Configuration

The standard HTTP server is enabled.
SSL is enabled.
No CA trustpoints are configured.
No self-signed certificates are generated.
SSL Configuration Guidelines

When SSL is used in a switch cluster, the SSL session terminates at the cluster commander. Cluster
member switches must run standard HTTP.
Before you configure a CA trustpoint, you should ensure that the system clock is set. If the clock is not
set, the certificate is rejected due to an incorrect date.
Configuring a CA Trustpoint
For secure HTTP connections, we recommend that you configure an official CA trustpoint.
A CA trustpoint is more secure than a self-signed certificate.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a CA trustpoint:
Command Purpose
Step 2 hostname hostname Specify the hostname of the switch (required only if you have not
previously configured a hostname). The hostname is required for security
keys and certificates.
Step 3 ip domain-name domain-name Specify the IP domain name of the switch (required only if you have not
previously configured an IP domain name). The domain name is required
for security keys and certificates.
Step 4 crypto key generate rsa (Optional) Generate an RSA key pair. RSA key pairs are required before
you can obtain a certificate for the switch. RSA key pairs are generated
automatically. You can use this command to regenerate the keys, if
needed.
Step 5 crypto ca trustpoint name Specify a local configuration name for the CA trustpoint and enter CA
trustpoint configuration mode.
Step 6 enrollment url url Specify the URL to which the switch should send certificate requests.
Step 7 enrollment http-proxy host-name (Optional) Configure the switch to obtain certificates from the CA
port-number through an HTTP proxy server.
Step 8 crl query url Configure the switch to request a certificate revocation list (CRL) to
ensure that the certificate of the peer has not been revoked.
Step 9 primary (Optional) Specify that the trustpoint should be used as the primary
(default) trustpoint for CA requests.
Step 10 exit Exit CA trustpoint configuration mode and return to global configuration
mode.
Step 11 crypto ca authentication name Authenticate the CA by getting the public key of the CA. Use the same
name used in Step 5.

OL-8553-06 9-45
Command Purpose
Step 12 crypto ca enroll name Obtain the certificate from the specified CA trustpoint. This command
requests a signed certificate for each RSA key pair.
Step 14 show crypto ca trustpoints Verify the configuration.
Use the no crypto ca trustpoint name global configuration command to delete all identity information
and certificates associated with the CA.
Configuring the Secure HTTP Server

If you are using a certificate authority for certification, you should use the previous procedure to
configure the CA trustpoint on the switch before enabling the HTTP server. If you have not configured
a CA trustpoint, a self-signed certificate is generated the first time that you enable the secure HTTP
server. After you have configured the server, you can configure options (path, access list to apply,
maximum number of connections, or timeout policy) that apply to both standard and secure HTTP
servers.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a secure HTTP server:
Command Purpose
Step 1 show ip http server status (Optional) Display the status of the HTTP server to determine if the
secure HTTP server feature is supported in the software. You should see
one of these lines in the output:
HTTP secure server capability: Present
or
HTTP secure server capability: Not present
Step 3 ip http secure-server Enable the HTTPS server if it has been disabled. The HTTPS server is
enabled by default.
Step 4 ip http secure-port port-number (Optional) Specify the port number to be used for the HTTPS server. The
default port number is 443. Valid options are 443 or any number in the
range 1025 to 65535.
Step 5 ip http secure-ciphersuite (Optional) Specify the CipherSuites (encryption algorithms) to be used
{[3des-ede-cbc-sha] [rc4-128-md5] for encryption over the HTTPS connection. If you do not have a reason to
[rc4-128-sha] [des-cbc-sha]} specify a particularly CipherSuite, you should allow the server and client
to negotiate a CipherSuite that they both support. This is the default.
Step 6 ip http secure-client-auth (Optional) Configure the HTTP server to request an X.509v3 certificate
from the client for authentication during the connection process. The
default is for the client to request a certificate from the server, but the
server does not attempt to authenticate the client.
Step 7 ip http secure-trustpoint name Specify the CA trustpoint to use to get an X.509v3 security certificate and
to authenticate the client certificate connection.
Note Use of this command assumes you have already configured a CA
trustpoint according to the previous procedure.

9-46 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 8 ip http path path-name (Optional) Set a base HTTP path for HTML files. The path specifies the
location of the HTTP server files on the local system (usually located in
system flash memory).
Step 9 ip http access-class access-list-number (Optional) Specify an access list to use to allow access to the HTTP
server.
Step 10 ip http max-connections value (Optional) Set the maximum number of concurrent connections that are
allowed to the HTTP server. The range is 1 to 16; the default value is 5.
Step 11 ip http timeout-policy idle seconds life (Optional) Specify how long a connection to the HTTP server can remain
seconds requests value open under the defined circumstances:
• idle—the maximum time period when no data is received or response
data cannot be sent. The range is 1 to 600 seconds. The default is
180 seconds (3 minutes).
• life—the maximum time period from the time that the connection is
established. The range is 1 to 86400 seconds (24 hours). The default
is 180 seconds.
• requests—the maximum number of requests processed on a
persistent connection. The maximum value is 86400. The default is 1.
Step 13 show ip http server secure status Display the status of the HTTP secure server to verify the configuration.
Use the no ip http server global configuration command to disable the standard HTTP server. Use the
no ip http secure-server global configuration command to disable the secure HTTP server. Use the no
ip http secure-port and the no ip http secure-ciphersuite global configuration commands to return to
the default settings. Use the no ip http secure-client-auth global configuration command to remove the
requirement for client authentication.
To verify the secure HTTP connection by using a Web browser, enter https://URL, where the URL is the
IP address or hostname of the server switch. If you configure a port other than the default port, you must
also specify the port number after the URL. For example:
https://209.165.129:1026
or
https://host.domain.com:1026
Configuring the Secure HTTP Client

The standard HTTP client and secure HTTP client are always enabled. A certificate authority is required
for secure HTTP client certification. This procedure assumes that you have previously configured a CA
trustpoint on the switch. If a CA trustpoint is not configured and the remote HTTPS server requires client
authentication, connections to the secure HTTP client fail.

OL-8553-06 9-47
Configuring the Switch for Secure Copy Protocol
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a secure HTTP client:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip http client secure-trustpoint name (Optional) Specify the CA trustpoint to be used if the remote HTTP server
requests client authentication. Using this command assumes that you have
already configured a CA trustpoint by using the previous procedure. The
command is optional if client authentication is not needed or if a primary
trustpoint has been configured.
Step 3 ip http client secure-ciphersuite (Optional) Specify the CipherSuites (encryption algorithms) to be used
{[3des-ede-cbc-sha] [rc4-128-md5] for encryption over the HTTPS connection. If you do not have a reason to
[rc4-128-sha] [des-cbc-sha]} specify a particular CipherSuite, you should allow the server and client to
negotiate a CipherSuite that they both support. This is the default.
Step 5 show ip http client secure status Display the status of the HTTP secure server to verify the configuration.
Use the no ip http client secure-trustpoint name to remove a client trustpoint configuration. Use the
no ip http client secure-ciphersuite to remove a previously configured CipherSuite specification for
the client.
Displaying Secure HTTP Server and Client Status

To display the SSL secure server and client status, use the privileged EXEC commands in Table 9-4:
Table 9-4 Commands for Displaying the SSL Secure Server and Client Status
Command Purpose
show ip http client Shows the HTTP secure client configuration.
secure status
show ip http server Shows the HTTP secure server configuration.
secure status
show running-config Shows the generated self-signed certificate for secure HTTP connections.

The Secure Copy Protocol (SCP) feature provides a secure and authenticated method for copying switch
configurations or switch image files. SCP relies on Secure Shell (SSH), an application and a protocol
that provides a secure replacement for the Berkeley r-tools.
For SSH to work, the switch needs an RSA public/private key pair. This is the same with SCP, which
relies on SSH for its secure transport.

9-48 OL-8553-06
Because SSH also relies on AAA authentication, and SCP relies further on AAA authorization, correct
configuration is necessary.
• Before enabling SCP, you must correctly configure SSH, authentication, and authorization on the
switch.
• Because SCP relies on SSH for its secure transport, the router must have an Rivest, Shamir, and
Adelman (RSA) key pair.
Note When using SCP, you cannot enter the password into the copy command. You must enter the password
when prompted.
Information About Secure Copy

To configure the Secure Copy feature, you should understand these concepts.
The behavior of SCP is similar to that of remote copy (rcp), which comes from the Berkeley r-tools
suite, except that SCP relies on SSH for security. SCP also requires that authentication, authorization,
and accounting (AAA) authorization be configured so the router can determine whether the user has the
correct privilege level.
A user who has appropriate authorization can use SCP to copy any file in the Cisco IOS File System
(IFS) to and from a switch by using the copy command. An authorized administrator can also do this
from a workstation.
For more information on how to configure and verify SCP, see the “Secure Copy Protocol” chapter of
the Cisco IOS New Features, Cisco IOS Release 12.2, at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1839/products_feature_guide09186a0080087b18
.html

OL-8553-06 9-49

9-50 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 10
Configuring IEEE 802.1x Port-Based
Authentication
IEEE 802.1x port-based authentication prevents unauthorized devices (clients) from gaining access to
the network.
The Catalyst 3560 switch command reference and the “RADIUS Commands” section in the Cisco IOS
Security Command Reference, Release 12.2, have command syntax and usage information.
• Understanding IEEE 802.1x Port-Based Authentication, page 10-1
• Configuring 802.1x Authentication, page 10-29
• Displaying 802.1x Statistics and Status, page 10-65
Understanding IEEE 802.1x Port-Based Authentication

The standard defines a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that prevents
clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports unless they are authenticated. The
authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any
switch or LAN services.
Until the client is authenticated, IEEE 802.1x access control allows only Extensible Authentication
Protocol over LAN (EAPOL), Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), and Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
traffic through the port to which the client is connected. After authentication, normal traffic passes
through the port.
• Device Roles, page 10-2
• Authentication Process, page 10-3
• Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange, page 10-5
• Authentication Manager, page 10-7
• Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States, page 10-9
• 802.1x Host Mode, page 10-10
• Multidomain Authentication, page 10-11
• 802.1x Multiple Authentication Mode, page 10-12
• 802.1x Accounting, page 10-12
• 802.1x Accounting Attribute-Value Pairs, page 10-13
• 802.1x Readiness Check, page 10-14

OL-8553-06 10-1
Chapter 10 Configuring IEEE 802.1x Port-Based Authentication
• 802.1x Authentication with VLAN Assignment, page 10-14

• Using 802.1x Authentication with Per-User ACLs, page 10-15
• 802.1x Authentication with Guest VLAN, page 10-17
• 802.1x Authentication with Restricted VLAN, page 10-18
• 802.1x Authentication with Inaccessible Authentication Bypass, page 10-19
• 802.1x Authentication with Voice VLAN Ports, page 10-21
• 802.1x Authentication with Port Security, page 10-21
• 802.1x Authentication with Wake-on-LAN, page 10-22
• 802.1x Authentication with MAC Authentication Bypass, page 10-23
• Network Admission Control Layer 2 802.1x Validation, page 10-24
• Flexible Authentication Ordering, page 10-24
• Open1x Authentication, page 10-25
• Using Voice Aware 802.1x Security, page 10-25
• 802.1x Switch Supplicant with Network Edge Access Topology (NEAT), page 10-25
• 802.1x Authentication with Downloadable ACLs and Redirect URLs, page 10-16
• Web Authentication, page 10-26
Device Roles
Devices roles with 802.1x port-based authentication:
Figure 10-1 802.1x Device Roles
Authentication
server
(RADIUS)
Workstations
(clients)
101229
• Client—the device (workstation) that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds
to requests from the switch. The workstation must be running 802.1x-compliant client software such
as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system. (The client is the supplicant in
the 802.1x standard.)
Note To resolve Windows XP network connectivity and 802.1x authentication issues, read the
Microsoft Knowledge Base article at this URL:
http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q303/5/97.ASP

10-2 OL-8553-06
• Authentication server—performs the actual authentication of the client. The authentication server
validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to
access the LAN and switch services. Because the switch acts as the proxy, the authentication service
is transparent to the client. In this release, the RADIUS security system with Extensible
Authentication Protocol (EAP) extensions is the only supported authentication server. It is available
in Cisco Secure Access Control Server Version 3.0 or later. RADIUS operates in a client/server
model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and
one or more RADIUS clients.
• Switch (edge switch or wireless access point)—controls the physical access to the network based on
the authentication status of the client. The switch acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the client
and the authentication server, requesting identity information from the client, verifying that
information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the client. The switch includes
the RADIUS client, which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the EAP frames and
interacting with the authentication server. (The switch is the authenticator in the 802.1x standard.)
When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server, the Ethernet
header is stripped, and the remaining EAP frame is re-encapsulated in the RADIUS format. The
EAP frames are not modified during encapsulation, and the authentication server must support EAP
within the native frame format. When the switch receives frames from the authentication server, the
server’s frame header is removed, leaving the EAP frame, which is then encapsulated for Ethernet
and sent to the client.
The devices that can act as intermediaries include the Catalyst 3750-E, Catalyst 3560-E,
Catalyst 3750, Catalyst 3560, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 2975, Catalyst 2970, Catalyst 2960,
Catalyst 2955, Catalyst 2950, Catalyst 2940 switches, or a wireless access point. These devices must
be running software that supports the RADIUS client and 802.1x authentication.
Authentication Process
When 802.1x port-based authentication is enabled and the client supports 802.1x-compliant client
software, these events occur:
• If the client identity is valid and the 802.1x authentication succeeds, the switch grants the client
access to the network.
• If 802.1x authentication times out while waiting for an EAPOL message exchange and MAC
authentication bypass is enabled, the switch can use the client MAC address for authorization. If the
client MAC address is valid and the authorization succeeds, the switch grants the client access to the
network. If the client MAC address is invalid and the authorization fails, the switch assigns the client
to a guest VLAN that provides limited services if a guest VLAN is configured.
• If the switch gets an invalid identity from an 802.1x-capable client and a restricted VLAN is
specified, the switch can assign the client to a restricted VLAN that provides limited services.
• If the RADIUS authentication server is unavailable (down) and inaccessible authentication bypass
is enabled, the switch grants the client access to the network by putting the port in the
critical-authentication state in the RADIUS-configured or the user-specified access VLAN.
Note Inaccessible authentication bypass is also referred to as critical authentication or the AAA fail
policy.

OL-8553-06 10-3
Figure 10-2 shows the authentication process.
Figure 10-2 Authentication Flowchart
Start
Is the client IEEE No IEEE 802.1x authentication Is MAC authentication

802.1x capable? process times out. bypass enabled? 1
Yes Yes No
The switch gets an
EAPOL message,
and the EAPOL
message
Start IEEE 802.1x port-based exchange begins. Use MAC authentication
authentication. bypass. 1
Client Client Client MAC Client MAC
identity is identity is address address
invalid valid identity identity
is valid. is invalid.
Assign the port to Assign the port to Assign the port to Assign the port to
a restricted VLAN. a VLAN. a VLAN. a guest VLAN. 1
141679
Done Done Done Done
All authentication All authentication

servers are down. servers are down.
Use inaccessible
authentication bypass
(critical authentication)
to assign the critical
port to a VLAN.
Done
1 = This occurs if the switch does not detect EAPOL packets from the client.
The switch re-authenticates a client when one of these situations occurs:

• Periodic re-authentication is enabled, and the re-authentication timer expires.
You can configure the re-authentication timer to use a switch-specific value or to be based on values
from the RADIUS server.
After 802.1x authentication using a RADIUS server is configured, the switch uses timers based on
the Session-Timeout RADIUS attribute (Attribute[27]) and the Termination-Action RADIUS
attribute (Attribute [29]).
The Session-Timeout RADIUS attribute (Attribute[27]) specifies the time after which
re-authentication occurs.

10-4 OL-8553-06
The Termination-Action RADIUS attribute (Attribute [29]) specifies the action to take during
re-authentication. The actions are Initialize and ReAuthenticate. When the Initialize action is set (the
attribute value is DEFAULT), the 802.1x session ends, and connectivity is lost during
re-authentication. When the ReAuthenticate action is set (the attribute value is RADIUS-Request),
the session is not affected during re-authentication.
• You manually re-authenticate the client by entering the dot1x re-authenticate interface
interface-id privileged EXEC command.
If Multidomain authentication (MDA) is enabled on a port, this flow can be used with some exceptions
that are applicable to voice authorization. For more information on MDA, see “Multidomain
Authentication” section on page 10-11.
Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange

During 802.1x authentication, the switch or the client can initiate authentication. If you enable
authentication on a port by using the authentication port-control auto or dot1x port-control auto
interface configuration command, the switch initiates authentication when the link state changes from
down to up or periodically as long as the port remains up and unauthenticated. The switch sends an
EAP-request/identity frame to the client to request its identity. Upon receipt of the frame, the client
responds with an EAP-response/identity frame.
However, if during boot up, the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame from the switch,
the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame, which prompts the switch to
request the client’s identity.
Note If 802.1x authentication is not enabled or supported on the network access device, any EAPOL frames
from the client are dropped. If the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame after three
attempts to start authentication, the client sends frames as if the port is in the authorized state. A port in
the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated. For more
information, see the “Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States” section on page 10-9.
When the client supplies its identity, the switch begins its role as the intermediary, passing EAP frames
between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails. If the
authentication succeeds, the switch port becomes authorized. If the authentication fails, authentication
can be retried, the port might be assigned to a VLAN that provides limited services, or network access
is not granted. For more information, see the “Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States” section on
page 10-9.
The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used. Figure 10-3
shows a message exchange initiated by the client when the client uses the One-Time-Password (OTP)
authentication method with a RADIUS server.

OL-8553-06 10-5
Figure 10-3 Message Exchange
Authentication
Client server
(RADIUS)
EAPOL-Start
EAP-Request/Identity
EAP-Response/Identity RADIUS Access-Request
EAP-Request/OTP RADIUS Access-Challenge
EAP-Response/OTP RADIUS Access-Request
EAP-Success RADIUS Access-Accept
Port Authorized
EAPOL-Logoff
101228
Port Unauthorized
If 802.1x authentication times out while waiting for an EAPOL message exchange and MAC
authentication bypass is enabled, the switch can authorize the client when the switch detects an Ethernet
packet from the client. The switch uses the MAC address of the client as its identity and includes this
information in the RADIUS-access/request frame that is sent to the RADIUS server. After the server
sends the switch the RADIUS-access/accept frame (authorization is successful), the port becomes
authorized. If authorization fails and a guest VLAN is specified, the switch assigns the port to the guest
VLAN. If the switch detects an EAPOL packet while waiting for an Ethernet packet, the switch stops
the MAC authentication bypass process and stops 802.1x authentication.
Figure 10-4 shows the message exchange during MAC authentication bypass.
Figure 10-4 Message Exchange During MAC Authentication Bypass
Authentication
Client server
Switch (RADIUS)
EAPOL Request/Identity
Ethernet packet RADIUS Access/Request

RADIUS Access/Accept
141681

10-6 OL-8553-06
Authentication Manager
In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(46)SE and earlier, you could not use the same authorization methods, including
CLI commands and messages, on this switch and also on other network devices, such as a Catalyst 6000.
You had to use separate authentication configurations. Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE and later supports
the same authorization methods on all Catalyst switches in a network.
• Port-Based Authentication Methods, page 10-7
• Per-User ACLs and Filter-Ids, page 10-8
• Authentication Manager CLI Commands, page 10-8
Port-Based Authentication Methods
Table 10-1 802.1x Features
Mode
Multiple
Authentication method Single host Multiple host MDA1 Authentication22
802.1x VLAN assignment VLAN assignment VLAN assignment Per-user ACL2
Per-user ACL Per-user ACL2 Filter-Id attribute2
Filter-ID attribute Filter-Id attribute2 Downloadable
ACL2
Downloadable Downloadable
ACL3 ACL2 Redirect URL2
Redirect URL 2 Redirect URL2
MAC authentication bypass VLAN assignment VLAN assignment VLAN assignment Per-user ACL2
Per-user ACL Per-user ACL2 Filter-Id attribute2
Filter-ID attribute Filter-Id attribute2 Downloadable
ACL2
Downloadable Downloadable
ACL2 ACL2 Redirect URL2
Redirect URL2 Redirect URL2
Standalone web authentication4 Proxy ACL, Filter-Id attribute, downloadable ACL2
NAC Layer 2 IP validation Filter-Id attribute2 Filter-Id attribute2 Filter-Id attribute2 Filter-Id attribute2
Downloadable ACL Downloadable ACL Downloadable ACL Downloadable
ACL2
Redirect URL Redirect URL Redirect URL
Redirect URL2
Web authentication as fallback Proxy ACL Proxy ACL Proxy ACL Proxy ACL2
method4
Filter-Id attribute2 Filter-Id attribute2 Filter-Id attribute2 Filter-Id attribute2
Downloadable Downloadable Downloadable Downloadable
ACL2 ACL2 ACL2 ACL2
1. MDA = Multidomain authentication.
2. Also referred to as multiauth.
3. Supported in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE and later.
4. For clients that do not support 802.1x authentication.

OL-8553-06 10-7
Per-User ACLs and Filter-Ids

In releases earlier than Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE, an ACL configured on the switch is not
compatible with an ACL configured on another device running Cisco IOS software, such as a
In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE or later, the ACLs configured on the switch are compatible with other
devices running Cisco IOS release.
You can only set any as the source in the ACL.
Authentication Manager CLI Commands

The authentication-manager interface-configuration commands control all the authentication methods,
such as 802.1x, MAC authentication bypass, and web authentication. The authentication manager
commands determine the priority and order of authentication methods applied to a connected host.
The authentication manager commands control generic authentication features, such as host-mode,
violation mode, and the authentication timer. Generic authentication commands include the
authentication host-mode, authentication violation, and authentication timer interface
802.1x-specific commands begin with the dot1x keyword. For example, the authentication
port-control auto interface configuration command enables authentication on an interface. However,
the dot1x system-authentication control global configuration command only globally enables or
disables 802.1x authentication.
Note If 802.1x authentication is globally disabled, other authentication methods are still enabled on that port,
such as web authentication.
The authentication manager commands provide the same functionality as earlier 802.1x commands.
Table 10-2 Authentication Manager Commands and Earlier 802.1x Commands
The authentication manager The equivalent 802.1x commands in

commands in Cisco IOS Cisco IOS Release 12.2(46)SE and
Release 12.2(50)SE or later earlier Description
authentication control-direction dot1x control-direction {both | Enable 802.1x authentication with the
{both | in} in} wake-on-LAN (WoL) feature, and configure the
port control as unidirectional or bidirectional.
authentication event dot1x auth-fail vlan Enable the restricted VLAN on a port.
dot1x critical (interface Enable the inaccessible-authentication-bypass
configuration) feature.
Specify an active VLAN as an 802.1x guest
dot1x guest-vlan6 VLAN.
authentication fallback dot1x fallback fallback-profile Configure a port to use web authentication as a
fallback-profile fallback method for clients that do not support
802.1x authentication.
authentication host-mode dot1x host-mode {single-host | Allow a single host (client) or multiple hosts on
[multi-auth | multi-domain | multi-host | multi-domain} an 802.1x-authorized port.
multi-host | single-host]

10-8 OL-8553-06
Table 10-2 Authentication Manager Commands and Earlier 802.1x Commands (continued)
The authentication manager The equivalent 802.1x commands in

commands in Cisco IOS Cisco IOS Release 12.2(46)SE and
Release 12.2(50)SE or later earlier Description
authentication order dot1x mac-auth-bypass Enable the MAC authentication bypass feature.
authentication periodic dot1x reauthentication Enable periodic re-authentication of the client.
authentication port-control {auto dot1x port-control {auto | Enable manual control of the authorization state of
| force-authorized | force-un force-authorized | the port.
authorized} force-unauthorized}
authentication timer dot1x timeout Set the 802.1x timers.
authentication violation {protect | dot1x violation-mode {shutdown Configure the violation modes that occur when a
restrict | shutdown} | restrict | protect} new device connects to a port or when a new
device connects to a port after the maximum
number of devices are connected to that port.
show authentication show dot1x Display 802.1x statistics, administrative status,
and operational status for the switch or for the
specified port.
For more information, see the command reference for this release.
Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States

During 802.1x authentication, depending on the switch port state, the switch can grant a client access to
the network. The port starts in the unauthorized state. While in this state, the port that is not configured
as a voice VLAN port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802.1x authentication, CDP, and
STP packets. When a client is successfully authenticated, the port changes to the authorized state,
allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally. If the port is configured as a voice VLAN port, the
port allows VoIP traffic and 802.1x protocol packets before the client is successfully authenticated.
If a client that does not support 802.1x authentication connects to an unauthorized 802.1x port, the
switch requests the client’s identity. In this situation, the client does not respond to the request, the port
remains in the unauthorized state, and the client is not granted access to the network.
In contrast, when an 802.1x-enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802.1x standard, the
client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL-start frame. When no response is
received, the client sends the request for a fixed number of times. Because no response is received, the
client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state.
You control the port authorization state by using the authentication port-control or dot1x port-control
interface configuration command and these keywords:
• force-authorized—disables 802.1x authentication and causes the port to change to the authorized
state without any authentication exchange required. The port sends and receives normal traffic
without 802.1x-based authentication of the client. This is the default setting.
• force-unauthorized—causes the port to remain in the unauthorized state, ignoring all attempts by
the client to authenticate. The switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the
port.

OL-8553-06 10-9
• auto—enables 802.1x authentication and causes the port to begin in the unauthorized state, allowing
only EAPOL frames to be sent and received through the port. The authentication process begins
when the link state of the port changes from down to up or when an EAPOL-start frame is received.
The switch requests the identity of the client and begins relaying authentication messages between
the client and the authentication server. Each client attempting to access the network is uniquely
identified by the switch by using the client MAC address.
If the client is successfully authenticated (receives an Accept frame from the authentication server), the
port state changes to authorized, and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the
port. If the authentication fails, the port remains in the unauthorized state, but authentication can be
retried. If the authentication server cannot be reached, the switch can resend the request. If no response
is received from the server after the specified number of attempts, authentication fails, and network
access is not granted.
When a client logs off, it sends an EAPOL-logoff message, causing the switch port to change to the
unauthorized state.
If the link state of a port changes from up to down, or if an EAPOL-logoff frame is received, the port
returns to the unauthorized state.
802.1x Host Mode

You can configure an 802.1x port for single-host or for multiple-hosts mode. In single-host mode (see
Figure 10-1 on page 10-2), only one client can be connected to the 802.1x-enabled switch port. The
switch detects the client by sending an EAPOL frame when the port link state changes to the up state. If
a client leaves or is replaced with another client, the switch changes the port link state to down, and the
port returns to the unauthorized state.
In multiple-hosts mode, you can attach multiple hosts to a single 802.1x-enabled port. Figure 10-5 on
page 10-10 shows 802.1x port-based authentication in a wireless LAN. In this mode, only one of the
attached clients must be authorized for all clients to be granted network access. If the port becomes
unauthorized (re-authentication fails or an EAPOL-logoff message is received), the switch denies
network access to all of the attached clients. In this topology, the wireless access point is responsible for
authenticating the clients attached to it, and it also acts as a client to the switch.
With the multiple-hosts mode enabled, you can use 802.1x authentication to authenticate the port and
port security to manage network access for all MAC addresses, including that of the client.
Figure 10-5 Multiple Host Mode Example
Authentication
server
Access point (RADIUS)
Wireless clients
101227

10-10 OL-8553-06
The switch supports Multi-Domain Authentication (MDA), which allows both a data device and a voice
device, such as an IP Phone (Cisco or non-Cisco), to connect to the same switch port. For more
information, see the “Multidomain Authentication” section on page 10-11.
Multidomain Authentication
The switch supports multidomain authentication (MDA), which allows both a data device and voice
device, such as an IP phone (Cisco or non-Cisco), to authenticate on the same switch port. The port is
divided into a data domain and a voice domain.
MDA does not enforce the order of device authentication. However, for best results, we recommend that
a voice device is authenticated before a data device on an MDA-enabled port.
Follow these guidelines for configuring MDA:
• To configure a switch port for MDA, see the “Configuring the Host Mode” section on page 10-40.
• You must configure the voice VLAN for the IP phone when the host mode is set to multidomain. For
more information, see Chapter 13, “Configuring VLANs.”
• Voice VLAN assignment on an MDA-enabled port is supported in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(40)SE
and later.
Note If you use a dynamic VLAN to assign a voice VLAN on an MDA-enabled switch port on a switch
running Cisco IOS Release 12.2(37)SE, the voice device fails authorization.
• To authorize a voice device, the AAA server must be configured to send a Cisco Attribute-Value
(AV) pair attribute with a value of device-traffic-class=voice. Without this value, the switch
treats the voice device as a data device.
• The guest VLAN and restricted VLAN features only apply to the data devices on an MDA-enabled
port. The switch treats a voice device that fails authorization as a data device.
• If more than one device attempts authorization on either the voice or the data domain of a port, it is
error disabled.
• Until a device is authorized, the port drops its traffic. Non-Cisco IP phones or voice devices are
allowed into both the data and voice VLANs. The data VLAN allows the voice device to contact a
DHCP server to obtain an IP address and acquire the voice VLAN information. After the voice
device starts sending on the voice VLAN, its access to the data VLAN is blocked.
• A voice device MAC address that is binding on the data VLAN is not counted towards the port
security MAC address limit.
• You can use dynamic VLAN assignment from a RADIUS server only for data devices.
• MDA can use MAC authentication bypass as a fallback mechanism to allow the switch port to
connect to devices that do not support 802.1x authentication. For more information, see the “MAC
Authentication Bypass” section on page 10-33.
• When a data or a voice device is detected on a port, its MAC address is blocked until authorization
succeeds. If the authorization fails, the MAC address remains blocked for 5 minutes.
• If more than five devices are detected on the data VLAN or more than one voice device is detected
on the voice VLAN while a port is unauthorized, the port is error disabled.
• When a port host mode changes from single- or multihost to multidomain mode, an authorized data
device remains authorized on the port. However, a Cisco IP phone on the port voice VLAN is
automatically removed and must be reauthenticated on that port.

OL-8553-06 10-11
• Active fallback mechanisms such as guest VLAN and restricted VLAN remain configured after a
port changes from single-host or multiple-host mode to multidomain mode.
• Switching a port host mode from multidomain to single-host or multiple-hosts mode removes all
authorized devices from the port.
• If a data domain is authorized first and placed in the guest VLAN, non-802.1x-capable voice devices
need their packets tagged on the voice VLAN to trigger authentication.
• We do not recommend per-user ACLs with an MDA-enabled port. An authorized device with a
per-user ACL policy might impact traffic on both the port voice and data VLANs. You can use only
one device on the port to enforce per-user ACLs.
For more information, see the “Configuring the Host Mode” section on page 10-40.
802.1x Multiple Authentication Mode

Multiple-authentication (multiauth) mode allows one client on the voice VLAN and multiple
authenticated clients on the data VLAN. When a hub or access point is connected to an 802.1x-enabled
port, multiple-authentication mode provides enhanced security over multiple-hosts mode by requiring
authentication of each connected client. For non-802.1x devices, you can use MAC authentication
bypass or web authentication as the fallback method for individual host authentications to authenticate
different hosts through by different methods on a single port.
Note Multiple-authentication mode is limited to eight authentications (hosts) per port.
Multiple-authentication mode also supports MDA functionality on the voice VLAN by assigning
authenticated devices to either a data or voice VLAN, depending on the VSAs received from the
authentication server.
Note When a port is in multiple-authentication mode, all the VLAN assignment features, including the
RADIUS server supplied VLAN assignment, the Guest VLAN, the Inaccessible Authentication Bypass,
and the Authentication Failed VLAN do not activate.
For more information see the “Configuring the Host Mode” section on page 10-40.
802.1x Accounting
The 802.1x standard defines how users are authorized and authenticated for network access but does not
keep track of network usage. 802.1x accounting is disabled by default. You can enable 802.1x accounting
to monitor this activity on 802.1x-enabled ports:
• User successfully authenticates.
• User logs off.
• Link-down occurs.
• Re-authentication successfully occurs.
• Re-authentication fails.
The switch does not log 802.1x accounting information. Instead, it sends this information to the
RADIUS server, which must be configured to log accounting messages.

10-12 OL-8553-06
802.1x Accounting Attribute-Value Pairs

The information sent to the RADIUS server is represented in the form of Attribute-Value (AV) pairs.
These AV pairs provide data for different applications. (For example, a billing application might require
information that is in the Acct-Input-Octets or the Acct-Output-Octets attributes of a RADIUS packet.)
AV pairs are automatically sent by a switch that is configured for 802.1x accounting. Three types of
RADIUS accounting packets are sent by a switch:
• START–sent when a new user session starts
• INTERIM–sent during an existing session for updates
• STOP–sent when a session terminates
Table 10-3 lists the AV pairs and when they are sent are sent by the switch:
Table 10-3 Accounting AV Pairs
Attribute Number AV Pair Name START INTERIM STOP

Attribute[1] User-Name Always Always Always
Attribute[4] NAS-IP-Address Always Always Always
Attribute[5] NAS-Port Always Always Always
1
Attribute[8] Framed-IP-Address Never Sometimes Sometimes1
Attribute[25] Class Always Always Always
Attribute[30] Called-Station-ID Always Always Always
Attribute[31] Calling-Station-ID Always Always Always
Attribute[40] Acct-Status-Type Always Always Always
Attribute[41] Acct-Delay-Time Always Always Always
Attribute[42] Acct-Input-Octets Never Always Always
Attribute[43] Acct-Output-Octets Never Always Always
Attribute[44] Acct-Session-ID Always Always Always
Attribute[45] Acct-Authentic Always Always Always
Attribute[46] Acct-Session-Time Never Always Always
Attribute[49] Acct-Terminate-Cause Never Never Always
Attribute[61] NAS-Port-Type Always Always Always
1. The Framed-IP-Address AV pair is sent only if a valid Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) binding
exists for the host in the DHCP snooping bindings table.
You can view the AV pairs that are being sent by the switch by entering the debug radius accounting
privileged EXEC command. For more information about this command, see the Cisco IOS Debug
Command Reference, Release 12.2 at this URL:
00800872ce.html
For more information about AV pairs, see RFC 3580, “802.1x Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
(RADIUS) Usage Guidelines.”

OL-8553-06 10-13
802.1x Readiness Check

The 802.1x readiness check monitors 802.1x activity on all the switch ports and displays information
about the devices connected to the ports that support 802.1x. You can use this feature to determine if the
devices connected to the switch ports are 802.1x-capable. You use an alternate authentication such as
MAC authentication bypass or web authentication for the devices that do not support 802.1x
functionality.
This feature only works if the supplicant on the client supports a query with the NOTIFY EAP
notification packet. The client must respond within the 802.1x timeout value.
For information on configuring the switch for the 802.1x readiness check, see the “Configuring 802.1x
Readiness Check” section on page 10-34.
802.1x Authentication with VLAN Assignment

The RADIUS server sends the VLAN assignment to configure the switch port. The RADIUS server
database maintains the username-to-VLAN mappings, assigning the VLAN based on the username of
the client connected to the switch port. You can use this feature to limit network access for certain users.
Voice device authentication is supported with multidomain host mode in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(37)SE.
In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(40)SE and later, when a voice device is authorized and the RADIUS server
returned an authorized VLAN, the voice VLAN on the port is configured to send and receive packets on
the assigned voice VLAN. Voice VLAN assignment behaves the same as data VLAN assignment on
multidomain authentication (MDA)-enabled ports. For more information, see the “Multidomain
When configured on the switch and the RADIUS server, 802.1x authentication with VLAN assignment
has these characteristics:
• If no VLAN is supplied by the RADIUS server or if 802.1x authentication is disabled, the port is
configured in its access VLAN after successful authentication. Recall that an access VLAN is a
VLAN assigned to an access port. All packets sent from or received on this port belong to this
VLAN.
• If 802.1x authentication is enabled but the VLAN information from the RADIUS server is not valid,
authorization fails and configured VLAN remains in use. This prevents ports from appearing
unexpectedly in an inappropriate VLAN because of a configuration error.
Configuration errors could include specifying a malformed VLAN ID, a nonexistent VLAN ID, an
RSPAN VLAN, a shut down or suspended VLAN. In the case of a mutlidomain host port,
configuration errors can also be due to an attempted assignment of a data VLAN that matches the
configured or assigned voice VLAN ID (or the reverse).
• If 802.1x authentication is enabled and all information from the RADIUS server is valid, the
authorized device is placed in the specified VLAN after authentication.
• If the multiple-hosts mode is enabled on an 802.1x port, all hosts are placed in the same VLAN
(specified by the RADIUS server) as the first authenticated host.
• Enabling port security does not impact the RADIUS server-assigned VLAN behavior.
• If 802.1x authentication is disabled on the port, it is returned to the configured access VLAN and
configured voice VLAN.
• If an 802.1x port is authenticated and put in the RADIUS server-assigned VLAN, any change to the
port access VLAN configuration does not take effect. In the case of a multidomain host, the same
applies to voice devices when the port is fully authorized with these exceptions:

10-14 OL-8553-06
– If the VLAN configuration change of one device results in matching the other device configured
or assigned VLAN, then authorization of all devices on the port is terminated and multidomain
host mode is disabled until a valid configuration is restored where data and voice device
configured VLANs no longer match.
– If a voice device is authorized and is using a downloaded voice VLAN, the removal of the voice
VLAN configuration, or modifying the configuration value to dot1p or untagged results in voice
device un-authorization and the disablement of multi-domain host mode.
When the port is in the force authorized, force unauthorized, unauthorized, or shutdown state, it is put
into the configured access VLAN.
The 802.1x authentication with VLAN assignment feature is not supported on trunk ports, dynamic
ports, or with dynamic-access port assignment through a VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS).
To configure VLAN assignment you need to perform these tasks:
• Enable AAA authorization by using the network keyword to allow interface configuration from the
RADIUS server.
• Enable 802.1x authentication. (The VLAN assignment feature is automatically enabled when you
configure 802.1x authentication on an access port).
• Assign vendor-specific tunnel attributes in the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server must return
these attributes to the switch:
– [64] Tunnel-Type = VLAN
– [65] Tunnel-Medium-Type = 802
– [81] Tunnel-Private-Group-ID = VLAN name or VLAN ID
Attribute [64] must contain the value VLAN (type 13). Attribute [65] must contain the value 802
(type 6). Attribute [81] specifies the VLAN name or VLAN ID assigned to the 802.1x-authenticated
user.
For examples of tunnel attributes, see the “Configuring the Switch to Use Vendor-Specific RADIUS
Attributes” section on page 9-29.
Using 802.1x Authentication with Per-User ACLs

You can enable per-user access control lists (ACLs) to provide different levels of network access and
service to an 802.1x-authenticated user. When the RADIUS server authenticates a user connected to an
802.1x port, it retrieves the ACL attributes based on the user identity and sends them to the switch. The
switch applies the attributes to the 802.1x port for the duration of the user session. The switch removes
the per-user ACL configuration when the session is over, if authentication fails, or if a link-down
condition occurs. The switch does not save RADIUS-specified ACLs in the running configuration. When
the port is unauthorized, the switch removes the ACL from the port.
You can configure router ACLs and input port ACLs on the same switch. However, a port ACL takes
precedence over a router ACL. If you apply input port ACL to an interface that belongs to a VLAN, the
port ACL takes precedence over an input router ACL applied to the VLAN interface. Incoming packets
received on the port to which a port ACL is applied are filtered by the port ACL. Incoming routed packets
received on other ports are filtered by the router ACL. Outgoing routed packets are filtered by the router
ACL. To avoid configuration conflicts, you should carefully plan the user profiles stored on the RADIUS
server.
RADIUS supports per-user attributes, including vendor-specific attributes. These vendor-specific
attributes (VSAs) are in octet-string format and are passed to the switch during the authentication
process. The VSAs used for per-user ACLs are inacl#<n> for the ingress direction and outacl#<n> for

OL-8553-06 10-15
the egress direction. MAC ACLs are supported only in the ingress direction. The switch supports VSAs
only in the ingress direction. It does not support port ACLs in the egress direction on Layer 2 ports. For
more information, see Chapter 33, “Configuring Network Security with ACLs.”
Use only the extended ACL syntax style to define the per-user configuration stored on the RADIUS
server. When the definitions are passed from the RADIUS server, they are created by using the extended
naming convention. However, if you use the Filter-Id attribute, it can point to a standard ACL.
You can use the Filter-Id attribute to specify an inbound or outbound ACL that is already configured on
the switch. The attribute contains the ACL number followed by .in for ingress filtering or .out for egress
filtering. If the RADIUS server does not allow the .in or .out syntax, the access list is applied to the
outbound ACL by default. Because of limited support of Cisco IOS access lists on the switch, the
Filter-Id attribute is supported only for IP ACLs numbered 1 to 199 and 1300 to 2699 (IP standard and
IP extended ACLs).
Only one 802.1x-authenticated user is supported on a port. If multiple-hosts mode is enabled on the port,
the per-user ACL attribute is disabled for the associated port.
The maximum size of the per-user ACL is 4000 ASCII characters but is limited by the maximum size of
RADIUS-server per-user ACLs.
For examples of vendor-specific attributes, see the “Configuring the Switch to Use Vendor-Specific
RADIUS Attributes” section on page 9-29. For more information about configuring ACLs, see
Chapter 33, “Configuring Network Security with ACLs.”
To configure per-user ACLs, you need to perform these tasks:
• Enable AAA authentication.
• Enable AAA authorization by using the network keyword to allow interface configuration from the
RADIUS server.
• Enable 802.1x authentication.
• Configure the user profile and VSAs on the RADIUS server.
• Configure the 802.1x port for single-host mode.
For more configuration information, see the “Authentication Manager” section on page 10-7.
802.1x Authentication with Downloadable ACLs and Redirect URLs

You can download ACLs and redirect URLs from a RADIUS server to the switch during 802.1x
authentication or MAC authentication bypass of the host. You can also download ACLs during web
authentication.
Note A downloadable ACL is also referred to as a dACL.
If the host mode is single-host, MDA, or multiple-authentication mode, the switch modifies the source
address of the ACL to be the host IP address.
Note A port in multiple-host mode does not support the downloadable ACL and redirect URL feature.
You can apply the ACLs and redirect URLs to all the devices connected to the 802.1x-enabled port.
If no ACLs are downloaded during 802.1x authentication, the switch applies the static default ACL on
the port to the host. On a voice VLAN port, the switch applies the ACL only to the phone.

10-16 OL-8553-06
Note If a downloadable ACL or redirect URL is configured for a client on the authentication server, a default
port ACL on the connected client switch port must also be configured.
Cisco Secure ACS and Attribute-Value Pairs for the Redirect URL
The switch uses these cisco-av-pair VSAs:
• url-redirect is the HTTP to HTTPS URL.
• url-redirect-acl is the switch ACL name or number.
The switch uses the CiscoSecure-Defined-ACL AV pair to intercept an HTTP or HTTPS request from
the endpoint device. The switch then forwards the client web browser to the specified redirect address.
The url-redirect AV pair on the Cisco Secure ACS contains the URL to which the web browser is
redirected. The url-redirect-acl AV pair contains the name or number of an ACL that specifies the HTTP
or HTTPS traffic to redirect. Traffic that matches a permit ACE in the ACL is redirected.
Note Define the URL redirect ACL and the default port ACL on the switch.
If a redirect URL configured for a client on the authentication server, a default port ACL on the
connected client switch port must also be configured
Cisco Secure ACS and Attribute-Value Pairs for Downloadable ACLs

You can set the CiscoSecure-Defined-ACL Attribute-Value (AV) pair on the Cisco Secure ACS with the
RADIUS cisco-av-pair vendor-specific attributes (VSAs). This pair specifies the names of the
downloadable ACLs on the Cisco Secure ACS with the #ACL#-IP-name-number attribute.
• The name is the ACL name.
• The number is the version number (for example, 3f783768).
If a downloadable ACL is configured for a client on the authentication server, a default port ACL on the
connected client switch port must also be configured.
If the default ACL is configured on the switch and the Cisco Secure ACS sends a host-access-policy to
the switch, it applies the policy to traffic from the host connected to a switch port. If the policy does not
apply, the switch applies the default ACL. If the Cisco Secure ACS sends the switch a downloadable
ACL, this ACL takes precedence over the default ACL that is configured on the switch port. However,
if the switch receives an host access policy from the Cisco Secure ACS but the default ACL is not
configured, the authorization failure is declared.
For configuration details, see the ““Authentication Manager” section on page 10-7 and the “Configuring
802.1x Authentication with Downloadable ACLs and Redirect URLs” section on page 10-57.
802.1x Authentication with Guest VLAN

You can configure a guest VLAN for each 802.1x port on the switch to provide limited services to
clients, such as downloading the 802.1x client. These clients might be upgrading their system for 802.1x
authentication, and some hosts, such as Windows 98 systems, might not be 802.1x-capable.

OL-8553-06 10-17
When you enable a guest VLAN on an 802.1x port, the switch assigns clients to a guest VLAN when the
switch does not receive a response to its EAP request/identity frame or when EAPOL packets are not
sent by the client.
The switch maintains the EAPOL packet history. If an EAPOL packet is detected on the interface during
the lifetime of the link, the switch determines that the device connected to that interface is
an 802.1x-capable supplicant, and the interface does not change to the guest VLAN state. EAPOL
history is cleared if the interface link status goes down. If no EAPOL packet is detected on the interface,
the interface changes to the guest VLAN state.
If devices send EAPOL packets to the switch during the lifetime of the link, the switch no longer allows
clients that fail authentication access to the guest VLAN.
If the switch is trying to authorize an 802.1x-capable voice device and the AAA server is unavailable,
the authorization attempt fails, but the detection of the EAPOL packet is saved in the EAPOL history.
When the AAA server becomes available, the switch authorizes the voice device. However, the switch
no longer allows other devices access to the guest VLAN. To prevent this situation, use one of these
command sequences:
• Enter the dot1x guest-vlan supplicant global configuration command to allow access to the guest
VLAN.
• Enter the shutdown interface configuration command followed by the no shutdown interface
configuration command to restart the port.
Note If an EAPOL packet is detected after the interface has changed to the guest VLAN, the interface reverts
to an unauthorized state, and 802.1x authentication restarts.
Any number of 802.1x-incapable clients are allowed access when the switch port is moved to the guest
VLAN. If an 802.1x-capable client joins the same port on which the guest VLAN is configured, the port
is put into the unauthorized state in the user-configured access VLAN, and authentication is restarted.
Guest VLANs are supported on 802.1x ports in single-host or multiple-hosts mode.
You can configure any active VLAN except an RSPAN VLAN, a private VLAN, or a voice VLAN as an
802.1x guest VLAN. The guest VLAN feature is not supported on internal VLANs (routed ports) or
trunk ports; it is supported only on access ports.
The switch supports MAC authentication bypass in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SEE and later. When
MAC authentication bypass is enabled on an 802.1x port, the switch can authorize clients based on the
client MAC address when 802.1x authentication times out while waiting for an EAPOL message
exchange. After detecting a client on an 802.1x port, the switch waits for an Ethernet packet from the
client. The switch sends the authentication server a RADIUS-access/request frame with a username and
password based on the MAC address. If authorization succeeds, the switch grants the client access to the
network. If authorization fails, the switch assigns the port to the guest VLAN if one is specified. For
more information, see the“802.1x Authentication with MAC Authentication Bypass” section on
page 10-23.
For more information, see the “Configuring a Guest VLAN” section on page 10-46.
802.1x Authentication with Restricted VLAN

You can configure a restricted VLAN (also referred to as an authentication failed VLAN) for each 802.1x
port on a switch to provide limited services to clients that cannot access the guest VLAN. These clients
are 802.1x-compliant and cannot access another VLAN because they fail the authentication process. A

10-18 OL-8553-06
restricted VLAN allows users without valid credentials in an authentication server (typically, visitors to
an enterprise) to access a limited set of services. The administrator can control the services available to
the restricted VLAN.
Note You can configure a VLAN to be both the guest VLAN and the restricted VLAN if you want to provide
the same services to both types of users.
Without this feature, the client attempts and fails authentication indefinitely, and the switch port remains
in the spanning-tree blocking state. With this feature, you can configure the switch port to be in the
restricted VLAN after a specified number of authentication attempts (the default value is 3 attempts).
The authenticator counts the failed authentication attempts for the client. When this count exceeds the
configured maximum number of authentication attempts, the port moves to the restricted VLAN. The
failed attempt count increments when the RADIUS server replies with either an EAP failure or an empty
response without an EAP packet. When the port moves into the restricted VLAN, the failed attempt
counter resets.
Users who fail authentication remain in the restricted VLAN until the next re-authentication attempt. A
port in the restricted VLAN tries to re-authenticate at configured intervals (the default is 60 seconds). If
re-authentication fails, the port remains in the restricted VLAN. If re-authentication is successful, the
port moves either to the configured VLAN or to a VLAN sent by the RADIUS server. You can disable
re-authentication. If you do this, the only way to restart the authentication process is for the port to
receive a link down or EAP logoff event. We recommend that you keep re-authentication enabled if a
client might connect through a hub. When a client disconnects from the hub, the port might not receive
the link down or EAP logoff event.
After a port moves to the restricted VLAN, a simulated EAP success message is sent to the client. This
prevents clients from indefinitely attempting authentication. Some clients (for example, devices running
Windows XP) cannot implement DHCP without EAP success.
Restricted VLANs are supported only on 802.1x ports in single-host mode and on Layer 2 ports.
You can configure any active VLAN except an RSPAN VLAN, a primary private VLAN, or a voice
VLAN as an 802.1x restricted VLAN. The restricted VLAN feature is not supported on internal VLANs
(routed ports) or trunk ports; it is supported only on access ports.
This feature works with port security. As soon as the port is authorized, a MAC address is provided to
port security. If port security does not permit the MAC address or if the maximum secure address count
is reached, the port becomes unauthorized and error disabled.
Other port security features such as dynamic ARP Inspection, DHCP snooping, and IP source guard can
be configured independently on a restricted VLAN.
For more information, see the “Configuring a Restricted VLAN” section on page 10-47.
802.1x Authentication with Inaccessible Authentication Bypass

When the switch cannot reach the configured RADIUS servers and hosts cannot be authenticated, you
can configure the switch to allow network access to the hosts connected to critical ports. A critical port
is enabled for the inaccessible authentication bypass feature, also referred to as critical authentication
or the AAA fail policy.

OL-8553-06 10-19
When this feature is enabled, the switch checks the status of the configured RADIUS servers whenever
the switch tries to authenticate a host connected to a critical port. If a server is available, the switch can
authenticate the host. However, if all the RADIUS servers are unavailable, the switch grants network
access to the host and puts the port in the critical-authentication state, which is a special case of the
authentication state.
The behavior of the inaccessible authentication bypass feature depends on the authorization state of the
port:
• If the port is unauthorized when a host connected to a critical port tries to authenticate and all servers
are unavailable, the switch puts the port in the critical-authentication state in the
RADIUS-configured or user-specified access VLAN.
• If the port is already authorized and re-authentication occurs, the switch puts the critical port in the
critical-authentication state in the current VLAN, which might be the one previously assigned by
the RADIUS server.
• If the RADIUS server becomes unavailable during an authentication exchange, the current
exchanges times out, and the switch puts the critical port in the critical-authentication state during
the next authentication attempt.
When a RADIUS server that can authenticate the host is available, all critical ports in the
critical-authentication state are automatically re-authenticated.
Inaccessible authentication bypass interacts with these features:
• Guest VLAN—Inaccessible authentication bypass is compatible with guest VLAN. When a guest
VLAN is enabled on 8021.x port, the features interact as follows:
– If at least one RADIUS server is available, the switch assigns a client to a guest VLAN when
the switch does not receive a response to its EAP request/identity frame or when EAPOL
packets are not sent by the client.
– If all the RADIUS servers are not available and the client is connected to a critical port, the
switch authenticates the client and puts the critical port in the critical-authentication state in the
RADIUS-configured or user-specified access VLAN.
– If all the RADIUS servers are not available and the client is not connected to a critical port, the
switch might not assign clients to the guest VLAN if one is configured.
– If all the RADIUS servers are not available and if a client is connected to a critical port and was
previously assigned to a guest VLAN, the switch keeps the port in the guest VLAN.
• Restricted VLAN—If the port is already authorized in a restricted VLAN and the RADIUS servers
are unavailable, the switch puts the critical port in the critical-authentication state in the restricted
VLAN.
• 802.1x accounting—Accounting is not affected if the RADIUS servers are unavailable.
• Private VLAN—You can configure inaccessible authentication bypass on a private VLAN host port.
The access VLAN must be a secondary private VLAN.
• Voice VLAN—Inaccessible authentication bypass is compatible with voice VLAN, but the
RADIUS-configured or user-specified access VLAN and the voice VLAN must be different.
• Remote Switched Port Analyzer (RSPAN)—Do not configure an RSPAN VLAN as the
RADIUS-configured or user-specified access VLAN for inaccessible authentication bypass.

10-20 OL-8553-06
802.1x Authentication with Voice VLAN Ports

A voice VLAN port is a special access port associated with two VLAN identifiers:
• VVID to carry voice traffic to and from the IP phone. The VVID is used to configure the IP phone
connected to the port.
• PVID to carry the data traffic to and from the workstation connected to the switch through the IP
phone. The PVID is the native VLAN of the port.
The IP phone uses the VVID for its voice traffic, regardless of the authorization state of the port. This
allows the phone to work independently of 802.1x authentication.
In single-host mode, only the IP phone is allowed on the voice VLAN. In multiple-hosts mode,
additional clients can send traffic on the voice VLAN after a supplicant is authenticated on the PVID.
When multiple-hosts mode is enabled, the supplicant authentication affects both the PVID and the
VVID.
A voice VLAN port becomes active when there is a link, and the device MAC address appears after the
first CDP message from the IP phone. Cisco IP phones do not relay CDP messages from other devices.
As a result, if several IP phones are connected in series, the switch recognizes only the one directly
connected to it. When 802.1x authentication is enabled on a voice VLAN port, the switch drops packets
from unrecognized IP phones more than one hop away.
When 802.1x authentication is enabled on a port, you cannot configure a port VLAN that is equal to a
voice VLAN.
Note If you enable 802.1x authentication on an access port on which a voice VLAN is configured and to which
a Cisco IP Phone is connected, the Cisco IP phone loses connectivity to the switch for up to 30 seconds.
For more information about voice VLANs, see Chapter 13, “Configuring VLANs.”
802.1x Authentication with Port Security

You can configure an 802.1x port with port security in either single-host or multiple-hosts mode. (You
also must configure port security on the port by using the switchport port-security interface
configuration command.) When you enable port security and 802.1x authentication on a port, 802.1x
authentication authenticates the port, and port security manages network access for all MAC addresses,
including that of the client. You can then limit the number or group of clients that can access the network
through an 802.1x port.
These are some examples of the interaction between 802.1x authentication and port security on the
switch:
• When a client is authenticated, and the port security table is not full, the client MAC address is added
to the port security list of secure hosts. The port then proceeds to come up normally.
When a client is authenticated and manually configured for port security, it is guaranteed an entry
in the secure host table (unless port security static aging has been enabled).
A security violation occurs if the client is authenticated, but the port security table is full. This can
happen if the maximum number of secure hosts has been statically configured or if the client ages
out of the secure host table. If the client address is aged, its place in the secure host table can be
taken by another host.
If the security violation is caused by the first authenticated host, the port becomes error-disabled and
immediately shuts down.

OL-8553-06 10-21
The port security violation modes determine the action for security violations. For more
information, see the “Security Violations” section on page 24-10.
• When you manually remove an 802.1x client address from the port security table by using the no
switchport port-security mac-address mac-address interface configuration command, you should
re-authenticate the 802.1x client by using the dot1x re-authenticate interface interface-id
privileged EXEC command.
• When an 802.1x client logs off, the port changes to an unauthenticated state, and all dynamic entries
in the secure host table are cleared, including the entry for the client. Normal authentication then
takes place.
• If the port is administratively shut down, the port becomes unauthenticated, and all dynamic entries
are removed from the secure host table.
• Port security and a voice VLAN can be configured simultaneously on an 802.1x port that is in either
single-host or multiple-hosts mode. Port security applies to both the voice VLAN identifier (VVID)
and the port VLAN identifier (PVID).
• You can configure the authentication violation or dot1x violation-mode interface configuration
command so that a port shuts down, generates a syslog error, or discards packets from a new device
when it connects to an 802.1x-enabled port or when the maximum number of allowed devices have
been authenticated. For more information see the “Maximum Number of Allowed Devices Per Port”
section on page 10-33 and the command reference for this release.
For more information about enabling port security on your switch, see the “Configuring Port Security”
802.1x Authentication with Wake-on-LAN

The 802.1x authentication with the wake-on-LAN (WoL) feature allows dormant PCs to be powered
when the switch receives a specific Ethernet frame, known as the magic packet. You can use this feature
in environments where administrators need to connect to systems that have been powered down.
When a host that uses WoL is attached through an 802.1x port and the host powers off, the 802.1x port
becomes unauthorized. The port can only receive and send EAPOL packets, and WoL magic packets
cannot reach the host. When the PC is powered off, it is not authorized, and the switch port is not opened.
When the switch uses 802.1x authentication with WoL, the switch forwards traffic to
unauthorized 802.1x ports, including magic packets. While the port is unauthorized, the switch
continues to block ingress traffic other than EAPOL packets. The host can receive packets but cannot
send packets to other devices in the network.
Note If PortFast is not enabled on the port, the port is forced to the bidirectional state.
When you configure a port as unidirectional by using the authentication control-direction in or dot1x
control-direction in interface configuration command, the port changes to the spanning-tree forwarding
state. The port can send packets to the host but cannot receive packets from the host.
When you configure a port as bidirectional by using the authentication control-direction both or dot1x
control-direction both interface configuration command, the port is access-controlled in both
directions. The port does not receive packets from or send packets to the host.

10-22 OL-8553-06
802.1x Authentication with MAC Authentication Bypass

You can configure the switch to authorize clients based on the client MAC address (see Figure 10-2 on
page 10-4) by using the MAC authentication bypass feature. For example, you can enable this feature
on 802.1x ports connected to devices such as printers.
If 802.1x authentication times out while waiting for an EAPOL response from the client, the switch tries
to authorize the client by using MAC authentication bypass.
When the MAC authentication bypass feature is enabled on an 802.1x port, the switch uses the MAC
address as the client identity. The authentication server has a database of client MAC addresses that are
allowed network access. After detecting a client on an 802.1x port, the switch waits for an Ethernet
packet from the client. The switch sends the authentication server a RADIUS-access/request frame with
a username and password based on the MAC address. If authorization succeeds, the switch grants the
client access to the network. If authorization fails, the switch assigns the port to the guest VLAN if one
is configured.
If an EAPOL packet is detected on the interface during the lifetime of the link, the switch determines
that the device connected to that interface is an 802.1x-capable supplicant and uses 802.1x
authentication (not MAC authentication bypass) to authorize the interface. EAPOL history is cleared if
the interface link status goes down.
If the switch already authorized a port by using MAC authentication bypass and detects an 802.1x
supplicant, the switch does not unauthorize the client connected to the port. When re-authentication
occurs, the switch uses 802.1x authentication as the preferred re-authentication process if the previous
session ended because the Termination-Action RADIUS attribute value is DEFAULT.
Clients that were authorized with MAC authentication bypass can be re-authenticated. The
re-authentication process is the same as that for clients that were authenticated with 802.1x. During
re-authentication, the port remains in the previously assigned VLAN. If re-authentication is successful,
the switch keeps the port in the same VLAN. If re-authentication fails, the switch assigns the port to the
guest VLAN, if one is configured.
If re-authentication is based on the Session-Timeout RADIUS attribute (Attribute[27]) and the
Termination-Action RADIUS attribute (Attribute [29]) and if the Termination-Action RADIUS attribute
(Attribute [29]) action is Initialize, (the attribute value is DEFAULT), the MAC authentication bypass
session ends, and connectivity is lost during re-authentication. If MAC authentication bypass is enabled
and the 802.1x authentication times out, the switch uses the MAC authentication bypass feature to
initiate re-authorization. For more information about these AV pairs, see RFC 3580, “802.1X Remote
Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) Usage Guidelines.”
MAC authentication bypass interacts with the features:
• 802.1x authentication—You can enable MAC authentication bypass only if 802.1x authentication is
enabled on the port.
• Guest VLAN—If a client has an invalid MAC address identity, the switch assigns the client to a
guest VLAN if one is configured.
• Restricted VLAN—This feature is not supported when the client connected to an 802.lx port is
authenticated with MAC authentication bypass.
• Port security—See the “802.1x Authentication with Port Security” section on page 10-21.
• Voice VLAN—See the “802.1x Authentication with Voice VLAN Ports” section on page 10-21.
• VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS)—802.1x and VMPS are mutually exclusive.

OL-8553-06 10-23
• Private VLAN—You can assign a client to a private VLAN.

• Network admission control (NAC) Layer 2 IP validation—This feature takes effect after an 802.1x
port is authenticated with MAC authentication bypass, including hosts in the exception list.
Network Admission Control Layer 2 802.1x Validation

The switch supports the Network Admission Control (NAC) Layer 2 802.1x validation, which checks
the antivirus condition or posture of endpoint systems or clients before granting the devices network
access. With NAC Layer 2 802.1x validation, you can do these tasks:
• Download the Session-Timeout RADIUS attribute (Attribute[27]) and the Termination-Action
RADIUS attribute (Attribute[29]) from the authentication server.
• Set the number of seconds between re-authentication attempts as the value of the Session-Timeout
RADIUS attribute (Attribute[27]) and get an access policy against the client from the RADIUS
server.
• Set the action to be taken when the switch tries to re-authenticate the client by using the
Termination-Action RADIUS attribute (Attribute[29]). If the value is the DEFAULT or is not set, the
session ends. If the value is RADIUS-Request, the re-authentication process starts.
• View the NAC posture token, which shows the posture of the client, by using the show
authentication or show dot1x privileged EXEC command.
• Configure secondary private VLANs as guest VLANs.
Configuring NAC Layer 2 802.1x validation is similar to configuring 802.1x port-based authentication
except that you must configure a posture token on the RADIUS server. For information about
configuring NAC Layer 2 802.1x validation, see the “Configuring NAC Layer 2 802.1x Validation”
section on page 10-54 and the “Configuring Periodic Re-Authentication” section on page 10-41.
For more information about NAC, see the Network Admission Control Software Configuration Guide.
Flexible Authentication Ordering

You can use flexible authentication ordering to configure the order of methods that a port uses to
authenticate a new host. MAC authentication bypass and 802.1x can be the primary or secondary
authentication methods, and web authentication can be the fallback method if either or both of those
authentication attempts fail. For more information see the “Configuring Flexible Authentication
Ordering” section on page 10-59.

10-24 OL-8553-06
Open1x Authentication
Open1x authentication allows a device access to a port before that device is authenticated. When open
authentication is configured, a new host on the port can only send traffic to the switch. After the host is
authenticated, the policies configured on the RADIUS server are applied to that host.
You can configure open authentication with these scenarios:
• Single-host mode with open authentication–Only one user is allowed network access before and
after authentication.
• MDA mode with open authentication–Only one user in the voice domain and one user in the data
domain are allowed.
• Multiple-hosts mode with open authentication–Any host can access the network.
• Multiple-authentication mode with open authentication–Similar to MDA, except multiple hosts can
be authenticated.
For more information see the “Configuring the Host Mode” section on page 10-40.
Using Voice Aware 802.1x Security

You use the voice aware 802.1x security feature to configure the switch to disable only the VLAN on
which a security violation occurs, whether it is a data or voice VLAN. When an attempt to authenticate
the data client caused a security violation in previous releases, the entire port shut down, resulting in a
complete loss of connectivity.
You can use this feature where a PC is connected to the IP phone. A security violation found on the data
VLAN shuts down only the data VLAN. The traffic on the voice VLAN continues without interruption.
For information on configuring voice aware 802.1x security, see the “Configuring Voice Aware 802.1x
Security” section on page 10-35.
802.1x Switch Supplicant with Network Edge Access Topology (NEAT)

NEAT extends identity to areas outside the wiring closet (such as conference rooms) through the
following:
• 802.1x switch supplicant: You can configure a switch to act as a supplicant to another switch by
using the 802.1x supplicant feature. This configuration is helpful in a scenario where, for example,
a switch is outside a wiring closet and is connected to an upstream switch through a trunk port. A
switch configured with the 802.1x switch supplicant feature authenticates with the upstream switch
for secure connectivity.
Note You cannot enable MDA or multiauth mode on the authenticator switch interface that connects
to one more supplicant switches.
• Host Authorization: NEAT ensures that only traffic from authorized hosts (connecting to the switch
with supplicant) is allowed on the network. The switches use Client Information Signalling Protocol
(CISP) to send the MAC addresses connecting to the supplicant switch to the authenticator switch,
as shown in Figure 10-6.

OL-8553-06 10-25
• Auto enablement: Automatically enables trunk configuration on the authenticator switch, allowing
user traffic from multiple VLANs coming from supplicant switches. This can be achieved by
configuring the cisco-av-pair as device-traffic-class=switch at the ACS. (You can configure this
under the group or user setttings.)
Figure 10-6 Authenticator and Supplicant Switch using CISP
4
2 3
205718
1 Workstations (clients) 2 Supplicant switch (outside wiring closet)
3 Authenticator switch 4 Access control server (ACS)
5 Trunk port
For more information, see the “Configuring 802.1x Switch Supplicant with NEAT” section on
page 10-55.
Web Authentication
You can use a web browser to authenticate a client that does not support 802.1x functionality. This
feature can authenticate up to eight users on the same shared port and apply the appropriate policies for
each end host on a shared port.
You can configure a port to use only web authentication. You can also configure the port to first try and
use 802.1x authentication and then to use web authorization if the client does not support 802.1x
authentication.
Web authentication requires two Cisco Attribute-Value (AV) pair attributes:
• The first attribute, priv-lvl=15, must always be set to 15. This sets the privilege level of the user
who is logging into the switch.
• The second attribute is an access list to be applied for web-authenticated hosts. The syntax is similar
to 802.1x per-user access control lists (ACLs). However, instead of ip:inacl, this attribute must
begin with proxyacl, and the source field in each entry must be any. (After authentication, the
client IP address replaces the any field when the ACL is applied.)
For example:
proxyacl# 10=permit ip any 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0
proxyacl# 20=permit ip any 11.1.0.0 255.255.0.0
proxyacl# 30=permit udp any any eq syslog
proxyacl# 40=permit udp any any eq tftp
Note The proxyacl entry determines the type of allowed network access.

10-26 OL-8553-06
For more information, see the “Authentication Manager” section on page 10-7 and the “Configuring Web
Web Authentication with Automatic MAC Check

You can use web authentication with automatic MAC check to authenticate a client that does not
support 802.1x or web-browser functionality. End hosts, such as printers, can automatically authenticate
by using the MAC address without any other requirements.
Web authentication with automatic MAC check only works in web authentication standalone mode. You
cannot use this if web authentication is configured as a fallback to 802.1x authentication.
The MAC address of the device must be configured in the Access Control Server (ACS) for the automatic
MAC check to succeed. The automatic MAC check allows managed devices, such as printers, to skip
web authentication.
Note The interoperability of web authentication (with automatic MAC check) and 802.1x MAC authentication
configured on different ports of the same switch is not supported.
Local Web Authentication Banner

You can create a banner that will appear when you log into a switch by using web authentication.
The Banner appears on both the login page and the authentication-result pop-up page. The banner
appears in these authentication-result pop-up pages
• Authentication Successful
• Authentication Failed
• Authentication Expired
You create a banner by using the ip admission auth-proxy-banner http global configuration command.
The default banner Cisco Systems and Switch host-name Authentication appear on the Login Page. Cisco
System appears on the authentication result pop-up page, as shown in Figure 10-7.

OL-8553-06 10-27
Figure 10-7 Authentication Successful” Banner
This banner can also be customized, as shown in Figure 10-8.

• Add a switch, router, or company name to the banner by using the ip admission auth-proxy-banner
http banner-text global configuration command.
• Add a logo or text file to the banner by using the ip admission auth-proxy-banner http file-path
Figure 10-8 Customized Web Banner
If you do not enable a banner, only the username and password dialog boxes appear in the web
authentication login screen, and no banner appears when you log into the switch, as shown in
Figure 10-9.

10-28 OL-8553-06
Configuring 802.1x Authentication
Figure 10-9 Login Screen With No Banner
For more information, see the “Configuring a Web Authentication Local Banner” section on page 10-64.

• Default 802.1x Authentication Configuration, page 10-30
• 802.1x Authentication Configuration Guidelines, page 10-31
• Configuring 802.1x Readiness Check, page 10-34 (optional)
• Configuring Voice Aware 802.1x Security, page 10-35 (optional)
• Configuring 802.1x Violation Modes, page 10-36 (optional)
• Configuring the Switch-to-RADIUS-Server Communication, page 10-38 (required)
• Configuring the Host Mode, page 10-40 (optional)
• Configuring Periodic Re-Authentication, page 10-41 (optional)
• Manually Re-Authenticating a Client Connected to a Port, page 10-42 (optional)
• Changing the Quiet Period, page 10-42 (optional)
• Changing the Switch-to-Client Retransmission Time, page 10-43 (optional)
• Setting the Switch-to-Client Frame-Retransmission Number, page 10-44 (optional)
• Setting the Re-Authentication Number, page 10-44 (optional)
• Configuring 802.1x Accounting, page 10-45 (optional)
• Configuring a Guest VLAN, page 10-46 (optional)

OL-8553-06 10-29
• Configuring a Restricted VLAN, page 10-47 (optional)

• Configuring the Inaccessible Authentication Bypass Feature, page 10-49 (optional)
• Configuring 802.1x Authentication with WoL, page 10-52 (optional)
• Configuring MAC Authentication Bypass, page 10-53 (optional)
• Configuring NAC Layer 2 802.1x Validation, page 10-54 (optional)
• Configuring 802.1x Switch Supplicant with NEAT, page 10-55
• Configuring 802.1x Authentication with Downloadable ACLs and Redirect URLs, page 10-57
• Configuring Flexible Authentication Ordering, page 10-59
• Configuring Web Authentication, page 10-60 (optional)
• Configuring a Web Authentication Local Banner, page 10-64 (optional)
• Disabling 802.1x Authentication on the Port, page 10-64 (optional)
• Resetting the 802.1x Authentication Configuration to the Default Values, page 10-65 (optional)
Default 802.1x Authentication Configuration

Table 10-4 shows the default 802.1x authentication configuration.
Table 10-4 Default 802.1x Authentication Configuration

Switch 802.1x enable state Disabled.
Per-port 802.1x enable state Disabled (force-authorized).
The port sends and receives normal traffic without 802.1x-based
authentication of the client.
AAA Disabled.
RADIUS server
• IP address • None specified.
• UDP authentication port • 1812.
• Key • None specified.
Host mode Single-host mode.
Control direction Bidirectional control.
Periodic re-authentication Disabled.
Number of seconds between 3600 seconds.
re-authentication attempts
Re-authentication number 2 times (number of times that the switch restarts the authentication process
before the port changes to the unauthorized state).
Quiet period 60 seconds (number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state
following a failed authentication exchange with the client).
Retransmission time 30 seconds (number of seconds that the switch should wait for a response to an
EAP request/identity frame from the client before resending the request).

10-30 OL-8553-06
Table 10-4 Default 802.1x Authentication Configuration (continued)

Maximum retransmission number 2 times (number of times that the switch will send an EAP-request/identity
frame before restarting the authentication process).
Client timeout period 30 seconds (when relaying a request from the authentication server to the
client, the amount of time the switch waits for a response before resending the
request to the client.)
Authentication server timeout period 30 seconds (when relaying a response from the client to the authentication
server, the amount of time the switch waits for a reply before resending the
response to the server.)
You can change this timeout period by using the authentication timer server
or dot1x timeout server-timeout interface configuration command.
Inactivity timeout Disabled.
Guest VLAN None specified.
Inaccessible authentication bypass Disabled.
Restricted VLAN None specified.
Authenticator (switch) mode None specified.
MAC authentication bypass Disabled.
Voice-aware security Disabled
802.1x Authentication Configuration Guidelines

These section has configuration guidelines for these features:
• 802.1x Authentication, page 10-31
• VLAN Assignment, Guest VLAN, Restricted VLAN, and Inaccessible Authentication Bypass,
page 10-32
• MAC Authentication Bypass, page 10-33
• Maximum Number of Allowed Devices Per Port, page 10-33
802.1x Authentication
These are the 802.1x authentication configuration guidelines:
• When 802.1x authentication is enabled, ports are authenticated before any other Layer 2 or Layer 3
features are enabled.
• If you try to change the mode of an 802.1x-enabled port (for example, from access to trunk), an error
message appears, and the port mode is not changed.
• If the VLAN to which an 802.1x-enabled port is assigned changes, this change is transparent and
does not affect the switch. For example, this change occurs if a port is assigned to a RADIUS
server-assigned VLAN and is then assigned to a different VLAN after re-authentication.
If the VLAN to which an 802.1x port is assigned to shut down, disabled, or removed, the port
becomes unauthorized. For example, the port is unauthorized after the access VLAN to which a port
is assigned shuts down or is removed.

OL-8553-06 10-31
• The 802.1x protocol is supported on Layer 2 static-access ports, voice VLAN ports, and Layer 3
routed ports, but it is not supported on these port types:
– Trunk port—If you try to enable 802.1x authentication on a trunk port, an error message
appears, and 802.1x authentication is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of
an 802.1x-enabled port to trunk, an error message appears, and the port mode is not changed.
– Dynamic ports—A port in dynamic mode can negotiate with its neighbor to become a trunk
port. If you try to enable 802.1x authentication on a dynamic port, an error message appears,
and 802.1x authentication is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of an 802.1x-enabled
port to dynamic, an error message appears, and the port mode is not changed.
– Dynamic-access ports—If you try to enable 802.1x authentication on a dynamic-access (VLAN
Query Protocol [VQP]) port, an error message appears, and 802.1x authentication is not
enabled. If you try to change an 802.1x-enabled port to dynamic VLAN assignment, an error
message appears, and the VLAN configuration is not changed.
– EtherChannel port—Do not configure a port that is an active or a not-yet-active member of an
EtherChannel as an 802.1x port. If you try to enable 802.1x authentication on an EtherChannel
port, an error message appears, and 802.1x authentication is not enabled.
– Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) and Remote SPAN (RSPAN) destination ports—You can
enable 802.1x authentication on a port that is a SPAN or RSPAN destination port.
However, 802.1x authentication is disabled until the port is removed as a SPAN or RSPAN
destination port. You can enable 802.1x authentication on a SPAN or RSPAN source port.
• Before globally enabling 802.1x authentication on a switch by entering the dot1x
system-auth-control global configuration command, remove the EtherChannel configuration from
the interfaces on which 802.1x authentication and EtherChannel are configured.
VLAN Assignment, Guest VLAN, Restricted VLAN, and Inaccessible Authentication Bypass
These are the configuration guidelines for VLAN assignment, guest VLAN, restricted VLAN, and
inaccessible authentication bypass:
• When 802.1x authentication is enabled on a port, you cannot configure a port VLAN that is equal
to a voice VLAN.
• The 802.1x authentication with VLAN assignment feature is not supported on trunk ports, dynamic
ports, or with dynamic-access port assignment through a VMPS.
• You can configure 802.1x authentication on a private-VLAN port, but do not configure 802.1x
authentication with port security, a voice VLAN, a guest VLAN, a restricted VLAN, or a per-user
ACL on private-VLAN ports.
• You can configure any VLAN except an RSPAN VLAN, private VLAN, or a voice VLAN as
an 802.1x guest VLAN. The guest VLAN feature is not supported on internal VLANs (routed ports)
or trunk ports; it is supported only on access ports.
• After you configure a guest VLAN for an 802.1x port to which a DHCP client is connected, you
might need to get a host IP address from a DHCP server. You can change the settings for restarting
the 802.1x authentication process on the switch before the DHCP process on the client times out and
tries to get a host IP address from the DHCP server. Decrease the settings for the 802.1x
authentication process (authentication timer inactivity or dot1x timeout quiet-period) and
authentication timer reauthentication or dot1x timeout tx-period) interface configuration
commands). The amount to decrease the settings depends on the connected 802.1x client type.
• When configuring the inaccessible authentication bypass feature, follow these guidelines:
– The feature is supported on 802.1x port in single-host mode and multihosts mode.

10-32 OL-8553-06
– If the client is running Windows XP and the port to which the client is connected is in the
critical-authentication state, Windows XP might report that the interface is not authenticated.
– If the Windows XP client is configured for DHCP and has an IP address from the DHCP server,
receiving an EAP-Success message on a critical port might not re-initiate the DHCP
configuration process.
– You can configure the inaccessible authentication bypass feature and the restricted VLAN on
an 802.1x port. If the switch tries to re-authenticate a critical port in a restricted VLAN and all
the RADIUS servers are unavailable, switch changes the port state to the critical authentication
state and remains in the restricted VLAN.
– You can configure the inaccessible bypass feature and port security on the same switch port.
• You can configure any VLAN except an RSPAN VLAN or a voice VLAN as an 802.1x restricted
VLAN. The restricted VLAN feature is not supported on internal VLANs (routed ports) or trunk
ports; it is supported only on access ports.
MAC Authentication Bypass

These are the MAC authentication bypass configuration guidelines:
• Unless otherwise stated, the MAC authentication bypass guidelines are the same as the 802.1x
authentication guidelines. For more information, see the “802.1x Authentication” section on
page 10-31.
• If you disable MAC authentication bypass from a port after the port has been authorized with its
MAC address, the port state is not affected.
• If the port is in the unauthorized state and the client MAC address is not the authentication-server
database, the port remains in the unauthorized state. However, if the client MAC address is added to
the database, the switch can use MAC authentication bypass to re-authorize the port.
• If the port is in the authorized state, the port remains in this state until re-authorization occurs.
• You can configure a timeout period for hosts that are connected by MAC authentication bypass but
are inactive. The range is 1to 65535 seconds. You must enable port security before configuring a
time out value. For more information, see the “Configuring Port Security” section on page 24-8.
Maximum Number of Allowed Devices Per Port

This is the maximum number of devices allowed on an 802.1x-enabled port:
• In single-host mode, only one device is allowed on the access VLAN. If the port is also configured with
a voice VLAN, an unlimited number of Cisco IP phones can send and receive traffic through the voice
VLAN.
• In multidomain authentication (MDA) mode, one device is allowed for the access VLAN, and one
IP phone is allowed for the voice VLAN.
• In multiple-host mode, only one 802.1x supplicant is allowed on the port, but an unlimited number
of non-802.1x hosts are allowed on the access VLAN. An unlimited number of devices are allowed
on the voice VLAN.

OL-8553-06 10-33
Configuring 802.1x Readiness Check

The 802.1x readiness check monitors 802.1x activity on all the switch ports and displays information
about the devices connected to the ports that support 802.1x. You can use this feature to determine if the
devices connected to the switch ports are 802.1x-capable.
The 802.1x readiness check is allowed on all ports that can be configured for 802.1x. The readiness
check is not available on a port that is configured as dot1x force-unauthorized.
Follow these guidelines to enable the readiness check on the switch:
• The readiness check is typically used before 802.1x is enabled on the switch.
• If you use the dot1x test eapol-capable privileged EXEC command without specifying an interface,
all the ports on the switch stack are tested.
• When you configure the dot1x test eapol-capable command on an 802.1x-enabled port, and the link
comes up, the port queries the connected client about its 802.1x capability. When the client responds
with a notification packet, it is 802.1x-capable. A syslog message is generated if the client responds
within the timeout period. If the client does not respond to the query, the client is
not 802.1x-capable. No syslog message is generated.
• The readiness check can be sent on a port that handles multiple hosts (for example, a PC that is
connected to an IP phone). A syslog message is generated for each of the clients that respond to the
readiness check within the timer period.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the 802.1x readiness check on the
switch:
Command Purpose
Step 1 dot1x test eapol-capable [interface Enable the 802.1x readiness check on the switch.
interface-id]
(Optional) For interface-id specify the port on which to check for 802.1x
readiness.
Note If you omit the optional interface keyword, all interfaces on the
switch are tested.
Step 1 configure terminal (Optional) Enter global configuration mode.
Step 2 dot1x test timeout timeout (Optional) Configure the timeout used to wait for EAPOL response. The
range is from 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.
Step 3 end (Optional) Return to privileged EXEC mode.
Step 4 show running-config (Optional) Verify your modified timeout values.
This example shows how to enable a readiness check on a switch to query a port. It also shows the
response received from the queried port verifying that the device connected to it is 802.1x-capable:
switch# dot1x test eapol-capable interface gigabitethernet0/13
DOT1X_PORT_EAPOL_CAPABLE:DOT1X: MAC 00-01-02-4b-f1-a3 on gigabitethernet0/13 is EAPOL

capable

10-34 OL-8553-06
Configuring Voice Aware 802.1x Security

You use the voice aware 802.1x security feature on the switch to disable only the VLAN on which a
security violation occurs, whether it is a data or voice VLAN. You can use this feature in IP phone
deployments where a PC is connected to the IP phone. A security violation found on the data VLAN
results in the shutdown of only the data VLAN. The traffic on the voice VLAN flows through the switch
without interruption.
Follow these guidelines to configure voice aware 802.1x voice security on the switch:
• You enable voice aware 802.1x security by entering the errdisable detect cause security-violation
shutdown vlan global configuration command. You disable voice aware 802.1x security by entering
the no version of this command. This command applies to all 802.1x-configured ports in the switch.
Note If you do not include the shutdown vlan keywords, the entire port is shut down when it enters the
error-disabled state.
• If you use the errdisable recovery cause security-violation global configuration command to
configure error-disabled recovery, the port is automatically re-enabled. If error-disabled recovery is
not configured for the port, you re-enable it by using the shutdown and no-shutdown interface
• You can re-enable individual VLANs by using the clear errdisable interface interface-id vlan
[vlan-list] privileged EXEC command. If you do not specify a range, all VLANs on the port are
enabled.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable voice aware 802.1x security:
Command Purpose
Step 2 errdisable detect cause Shut down any VLAN on which a security violation error occurs.
security-violation shutdown vlan
Note If the shutdown vlan keywords are not included, the entire port
enters the error-disabled state and shuts down.
Step 3 errdisable recovery cause (Optional) Enable automatic per-VLAN error recovery.
security-violation
Step 4 clear errdisable interface interface-id (Optional) Reenable individual VLANs that have been error disabled.
vlan [vlan-list]
• For interface-id specify the port on which to reenable individual
VLANs.
• (Optional) For vlan-list specify a list of VLANs to be re-enabled. If
vlan-list is not specified, all VLANs are re-enabled.
Step 5 shutdown (Optional) Re-enable an error-disabled VLAN, and clear all error-disable
indications.
no-shutdown
Step 7 show errdisable detect Verify your entries.

OL-8553-06 10-35
This example shows how to configure the switch to shut down any VLAN on which a security violation
error occurs:
Switch(config)# errdisable detect cause security-violation shutdown vlan
This example shows how to re-enable all VLANs that were error disabled on port Gigabit Ethernet 0/2.
Switch# clear errdisable interface gigabitethernet0/2 vlan
You can verify your settings by entering the show errdisable detect privileged EXEC command.
Configuring 802.1x Violation Modes

You can configure an 802.1x port so that it shuts down, generates a syslog error, or discards packets from
a new device when:
• a device connects to an 802.1x-enable port
• the maximum number of allowed about devices have been authenticated on the port
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the security violation actions on
the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 3 aaa authentication dot1x {default} Create an 802.1x authentication method list.
method1
To create a default list to use when a named list is not specified in the
authentication command, use the default keyword followed by the
method that is to be used in default situations. The default method list is
automatically applied to all ports.
For method1, enter the group radius keywords to use the list of all
RADIUS servers for authentication.
Note Though other keywords are visible in the command-line help
string, only the group radius keywords are supported.
Step 4 interface interface-id Specify the port connected to the client that is to be enabled for 802.1x
authentication, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 5 switchport mode access Set the port to access mode.
Step 6 authentication violation shutdown | Configure the violation mode. The keywords have these meanings:
restrict | protect}
• shutdown–Error disable the port.
or
• restrict–Generate a syslog error.
dot1x violation-mode {shutdown |
• protect–Drop packets from any new device that sends traffic to the
restrict | protect}
port.
Step 8 show authentication Verify your entries.
or
show dot1x

10-36 OL-8553-06

To configure 802.1x port-based authentication, you must enable authentication, authorization, and
accounting (AAA) and specify the authentication method list. A method list describes the sequence and
authentication method to be queried to authenticate a user.
To allow per-user ACLs or VLAN assignment, you must enable AAA authorization to configure the
switch for all network-related service requests.
This is the 802.1x AAA process:
Step 1 A user connects to a port on the switch.

Step 2 Authentication is performed.
Step 3 VLAN assignment is enabled, as appropriate, based on the RADIUS server configuration.
Step 4 The switch sends a start message to an accounting server.
Step 5 Re-authentication is performed, as necessary.
Step 6 The switch sends an interim accounting update to the accounting server, that is based on the result of
re-authentication.
Step 7 The user disconnects from the port.
Step 8 The switch sends a stop message to the accounting server.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure 802.1x port-based authentication:
Command Purpose
Step 3 aaa authentication dot1x {default} Create an 802.1x authentication method list.
method1
To create a default list to use when a named list is not specified in the
authentication command, use the default keyword followed by the
method to use in default situations. The default method list is
automatically applied to all ports.
For method1, enter the group radius keywords to use the list of all
RADIUS servers for authentication.
Note Though other keywords are visible in the command-line help
string, only the group radius keywords are supported.
Step 4 dot1x system-auth-control Enable 802.1x authentication globally on the switch.
Step 5 aaa authorization network {default} (Optional) Configure the switch to use user-RADIUS authorization for all
group radius network-related service requests, such as per-user ACLs or VLAN
assignment.
For per-user ACLs, single-host mode must be configured. This setting is
the default.
Step 6 radius-server host ip-address (Optional) Specify the IP address of the RADIUS server.
Step 7 radius-server key string (Optional) Specify the authentication and encryption key used between
the switch and the RADIUS daemon running on the RADIUS server.

OL-8553-06 10-37
Command Purpose
Step 8 interface interface-id Specify the port connected to the client to enable for 802.1x
authentication, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 9 switchport mode access (Optional) Set the port to access mode only if you configured the RADIUS
server in Step 6 and Step 7.
Step 10 authentication port-control auto Enable 802.1x authentication on the port.
or For feature interaction information, see the “802.1x Authentication
Configuration Guidelines” section on page 10-31.
dot1x port-control auto
Step 12 show authentication Verify your entries.
or
show dot1x
Configuring the Switch-to-RADIUS-Server Communication

RADIUS security servers are identified by their hostname or IP address, hostname and specific UDP port
numbers, or IP address and specific UDP port numbers. The combination of the IP address and the UDP
port number creates a unique identifier, which enables RADIUS requests to be sent to multiple UDP
ports on a server at the same IP address. If two different host entries on the same RADIUS server are
configured for the same service—for example, authentication—the second host entry configured acts as
the fail-over backup to the first one. The RADIUS host entries are tried in the order in which they were
configured.

10-38 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the RADIUS server parameters on
the switch. This procedure is required.
Command Purpose
Step 2 radius-server host {hostname | Configure the RADIUS server parameters.
ip-address} auth-port port-number key
For hostname | ip-address, specify the hostname or IP address of the
string
remote RADIUS server.
For auth-port port-number, specify the UDP destination port for
authentication requests. The default is 1812. The range is 0 to 65536.
For key string, specify the authentication and encryption key used
between the switch and the RADIUS daemon running on the RADIUS
server. The key is a text string that must match the encryption key used on
the RADIUS server.
Note Always configure the key as the last item in the radius-server
host command syntax because leading spaces are ignored, but
spaces within and at the end of the key are used. If you use spaces
in the key, do not enclose the key in quotation marks unless the
quotation marks are part of the key. This key must match the
encryption used on the RADIUS daemon.
If you want to use multiple RADIUS servers, re-enter this command.

To delete the specified RADIUS server, use the no radius-server host {hostname | ip-address} global
This example shows how to specify the server with IP address 172.20.39.46 as the RADIUS server, to
use port 1612 as the authorization port, and to set the encryption key to rad123, matching the key on the
RADIUS server:
Switch(config)# radius-server host 172.l20.39.46 auth-port 1612 key rad123
You can globally configure the timeout, retransmission, and encryption key values for all RADIUS
servers by using the radius-server host global configuration command. If you want to configure these
options on a per-server basis, use the radius-server timeout, radius-server retransmit and the
radius-server key global configuration commands. For more information, see the “Configuring Settings
for All RADIUS Servers” section on page 9-29.
You also need to configure some settings on the RADIUS server. These settings include the IP address
of the switch and the key string to be shared by both the server and the switch. For more information,
see the RADIUS server documentation.

OL-8553-06 10-39
Configuring the Host Mode

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to allow a single host (client) or multiple hosts
on an 802.1x-authorized port. Use the multi-domain keyword to configure multidomain authentication
(MDA) to enable authentication of both a host and a voice device, such as an IP phone (Cisco or
non-Cisco) on the same switch port. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 radius-server vsa send authentication Configure the network access server to recognize and use vendor-specific
attributes (VSAs).
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the port to which multiple hosts are indirectly attached, and enter
Step 4 authentication host-mode [multi-auth | The keywords have these meanings:
multi-domain | multi-host |
• multi-auth–Allow one client on the voice VLAN and multiple
single-host]
authenticated clients on the data VLAN.
or Note The multi-auth keyword is only available with the
dot1x host-mode {single-host | authentication host-mode command.
multi-host | multi-domain}
• multi-host–Allow multiple hosts on an 802.1x-authorized port after
a single host has been authenticated.
• multi-domain–Allow both a host and a voice device, such as an IP
phone (Cisco or non-Cisco), to be authenticated on
an 802.1x-authorized port.
Note You must configure the voice VLAN for the IP phone when the
host mode is set to multi-domain. For more information, see
Chapter 15, “Configuring Voice VLAN.”
• single-host–Allow a single host (client) on an 802.1x-authorized

port.
Make sure that the authentication port-control or dot1x port-control
interface configuration command set is set to auto for the specified
interface.
Step 5 switchport voice vlan vlan-id (Optional) Configure the voice VLAN.
Step 7 show authentication interface Verify your entries.
interface-id
or
show dot1x interface interface-id
To disable multiple hosts on the port, use the no authentication host-mode or the no dot1x host-mode
multi-host interface configuration command.

10-40 OL-8553-06
This example shows how to enable 802.1x authentication and to allow multiple hosts:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x port-control auto
Switch(config-if)# dot1x host-mode multi-host
This example shows how to enable MDA and to allow both a host and a voice device on the port:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x host-mode multi-domain
Switch(config-if)# switchport voice vlan 101
Configuring Periodic Re-Authentication

You can enable periodic 802.1x client re-authentication and specify how often it occurs. If you do not
specify a time period before enabling re-authentication, the number of seconds between attempts
is 3600.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable periodic re-authentication of the client
and to configure the number of seconds between re-authentication attempts. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port to be configured, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 authentication periodic Enable periodic re-authentication of the client, which is disabled by
default.
or
dot1x reauthentication
Step 4 authentication timer {{[inactivity | Set the number of seconds between re-authentication attempts.
reauthenticate] [server | am]} {restart
The authentication timer keywords have these meanings:
value}}
• inactivity—Interval in seconds after which if there is no activity from
or the client then it is unauthorized
dot1x timeout reauth-period {seconds |
• reauthenticate—Time in seconds after which an automatic
server}
re-authentication attempt is be initiated
• server am—Interval in seconds after which an attempt is made to
authenticate an unauthorized port
• restart value—Interval in seconds after which an attempt is made to
authenticate an unauthorized port
The dot1x timeout reauth-period keywords have these meanings:
• seconds—Sets the number of seconds from 1 to 65535; the default is
3600 seconds.
• server—Sets the number of seconds based on the value of the
Session-Timeout RADIUS attribute (Attribute[27]) and the
Termination-Action RADIUS attribute (Attribute [29]).
This command affects the behavior of the switch only if periodic
re-authentication is enabled.

OL-8553-06 10-41
Command Purpose
Step 6 show authentication interface-id Verify your entries.
or
To disable periodic re-authentication, use the no authentication periodic or the no dot1x

reauthentication interface configuration command. To return to the default number of seconds between
re-authentication attempts, use the no authentication timer or the no dot1x timeout reauth-period
interface configuration command.
This example shows how to enable periodic re-authentication and set the number of seconds between
re-authentication attempts to 4000:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x reauthentication
Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout reauth-period 4000
Manually Re-Authenticating a Client Connected to a Port

You can manually re-authenticate the client connected to a specific port at any time by entering the dot1x
re-authenticate interface interface-id privileged EXEC command. This step is optional. If you want to
enable or disable periodic re-authentication, see the “Configuring Periodic Re-Authentication” section
on page 10-41.
This example shows how to manually re-authenticate the client connected to a port:
Switch# dot1x re-authenticate interface gigabitethernet0/1
Changing the Quiet Period

When the switch cannot authenticate the client, the switch remains idle for a set period of time and then
tries again. The dot1x timeout quiet-period interface configuration command controls the idle period.
A failed client authentication might occur because the client provided an invalid password. You can
provide a faster response time to the user by entering a number smaller than the default.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the quiet period. This procedure is
optional.
Command Purpose
Step 3 dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds Set the number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state after
a failed authentication exchange with the client.
The range is 1 to 65535 seconds; the default is 60.

10-42 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
or
To return to the default quiet time, use the no dot1x timeout quiet-period interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to set the quiet time on the switch to 30 seconds:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout quiet-period 30
Changing the Switch-to-Client Retransmission Time

The client responds to the EAP-request/identity frame from the switch with an EAP-response/identity
frame. If the switch does not receive this response, it waits a set period of time (known as the
retransmission time) and then resends the frame.
Note You should change the default value of this command only to adjust for unusual circumstances such as
unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the amount of time that the switch
waits for client notification. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port to configure, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 dot1x timeout tx-period seconds Set the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an
EAP-request/identity frame from the client before resending the request.
The range is 1 to 65535 seconds; the default is 5.
or
To return to the default retransmission time, use the no dot1x timeout tx-period interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to set 60 as the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an
EAP-request/identity frame from the client before resending the request:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout tx-period 60

OL-8553-06 10-43
Setting the Switch-to-Client Frame-Retransmission Number

You can change the number of times that the switch sends an EAP-request/identity frame (assuming no
response is received) to the client before restarting the authentication process.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the switch-to-client frame-retransmission
number. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 3 dot1x max-reauth-req count Set the number of times that the switch sends an EAP-request/identity
frame to the client before restarting the authentication process. The range
is 1 to 10; the default is 2.
interface-id
or
To return to the default retransmission number, use the no dot1x max-req interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to set 5 as the number of times that the switch sends an EAP-request/identity
request before restarting the authentication process:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x max-req 5
Setting the Re-Authentication Number

You can also change the number of times that the switch restarts the authentication process before the
port changes to the unauthorized state.

10-44 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the re-authentication number. This
procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 3 dot1x max-reauth-req count Set the number of times that the switch restarts the authentication process
before the port changes to the unauthorized state. The range is 0 to 10; the
default is 2.
interface-id
or
To return to the default re-authentication number, use the no dot1x max-reauth-req interface
This example shows how to set 4 as the number of times that the switch restarts the authentication
process before the port changes to the unauthorized state:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x max-reauth-req 4
Configuring 802.1x Accounting

Enabling AAA system accounting with 802.1x accounting allows system reload events to be sent to the
accounting RADIUS server for logging. The server can then infer that all active 802.1x sessions are
closed.
Because RADIUS uses the unreliable UDP transport protocol, accounting messages might be lost due to
poor network conditions. If the switch does not receive the accounting response message from the
RADIUS server after a configurable number of retransmissions of an accounting request, this system
message appears:
Accounting message %s for session %s failed to receive Accounting Response.
When the stop message is not sent successfully, this message appears:
00:09:55: %RADIUS-4-RADIUS_DEAD: RADIUS server 172.20.246.201:1645,1646 is not responding.
Note You must configure the RADIUS server to perform accounting tasks, such as logging start, stop, and
interim-update messages and time stamps. To turn on these functions, enable logging of
“Update/Watchdog packets from this AAA client” in your RADIUS server Network Configuration tab.
Next, enable “CVS RADIUS Accounting” in your RADIUS server System Configuration tab.

OL-8553-06 10-45
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure 802.1x accounting after AAA is
enabled on your switch. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 3 aaa accounting dot1x default Enable 802.1x accounting using the list of all RADIUS servers.
start-stop group radius
Step 4 aaa accounting system default (Optional) Enables system accounting (using the list of all RADIUS
start-stop group radius servers) and generates system accounting reload event messages when the
switch reloads.
Step 5 end Return to privileged EXEc mode.
Step 7 copy running-config startup-config (Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.
Use the show radius statistics privileged EXEC command to display the number of RADIUS messages
that do not receive the accounting response message.
This example shows how to configure 802.1x accounting. The first command configures the RADIUS
server, specifying 1813 as the UDP port for accounting:
Switch(config)# radius-server host 172.120.39.46 auth-port 1812 acct-port 1813 key rad123
Switch(config)# aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius
Switch(config)# aaa accounting system default start-stop group radius
Configuring a Guest VLAN

When you configure a guest VLAN, clients that are not 802.1x-capable are put into the guest VLAN
when the server does not receive a response to its EAP request/identity frame. Clients that
are 802.1x-capable but that fail authentication are not granted network access. The switch supports guest
VLANs in single-host or multiple-hosts mode.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a guest VLAN. This procedure is
optional.
Command Purpose
For the supported port types, see the “802.1x Authentication
Step 3 switchport mode access Set the port to access mode
or or
switchport mode private-vlan host Configure the Layer 2 port as a private-VLAN host port.
or

10-46 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 5 dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id Specify an active VLAN as an 802.1x guest VLAN. The range is 1
to 4094.
You can configure any active VLAN except an internal VLAN (routed
port), an RSPAN VLAN, a primary private VLAN, or a voice VLAN as
an 802.1x guest VLAN.
or
To disable and remove the guest VLAN, use the no dot1x guest-vlan interface configuration command.
The port returns to the unauthorized state.
This example shows how to enable VLAN 2 as an 802.1x guest VLAN:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x guest-vlan 2
This example shows how to set 3 as the quiet time on the switch, to set 15 as the number of seconds that
the switch waits for a response to an EAP-request/identity frame from the client before re-sending the
request, and to enable VLAN 2 as an 802.1x guest VLAN when an 802.1x port is connected to a DHCP
client:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout quiet-period 3
Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout tx-period 15
Switch(config-if)# dot1x guest-vlan 2
Configuring a Restricted VLAN

When you configure a restricted VLAN on a switch, clients that are 802.1x-compliant are moved into
the restricted VLAN when the authentication server does not receive a valid username and password.
The switch supports restricted VLANs only in single-host mode.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a restricted VLAN. This procedure
is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 3 switchport mode access Set the port to access mode,
or or

OL-8553-06 10-47
Command Purpose
or
Step 5 dot1x auth-fail vlan vlan-id Specify an active VLAN as an 802.1x restricted VLAN. The range is 1
to 4094.
an 802.1x restricted VLAN.
Step 7 show authentication interface-id (Optional) Verify your entries.
or
To disable and remove the restricted VLAN, use the no dot1x auth-fail vlan interface configuration
command. The port returns to the unauthorized state.
This example shows how to enable VLAN 2 as an 802.1x restricted VLAN:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x auth-fail vlan 2
You can configure the maximum number of authentication attempts allowed before a user is assigned to
the restricted VLAN by using the dot1x auth-fail max-attempts interface configuration command. The
range of allowable authentication attempts is 1 to 3. The default is 3 attempts.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the maximum number of allowed
authentication attempts. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 3 switchport mode access Set the port to access mode,
or or
or
Step 5 dot1x auth-fail vlan vlan-id Specify an active VLAN as an 802.1x restricted VLAN. The range is 1
to 4094.
an 802.1x restricted VLAN.

10-48 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 6 dot1x auth-fail max-attempts max Specify a number of authentication attempts to allow before a port moves
attempts to the restricted VLAN. The range is 1 to 3, and the default is 3.
Step 8 show authentication interface-id (Optional) Verify your entries.
or
To return to the default value, use the no dot1x auth-fail max-attempts interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to set 2 as the number of authentication attempts allowed before the port moves
to the restricted VLAN:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x auth-fail max-attempts 2
Configuring the Inaccessible Authentication Bypass Feature

You can configure the inaccessible bypass feature, also referred to as critical authentication or the AAA
fail policy.
Note You must configure the RADIUS server parameters on the switch to monitor the RADIUS server state
(see the “Configuring the Switch-to-RADIUS-Server Communication” section on page 10-38). You
must also configure the idle time, dead time, and dead criteria.
If you do not configure these parameters, the switch prematurely changes the RADIUS server status to
dead.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the port as a critical port and enable
the inaccessible authentication bypass feature. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 radius-server dead-criteria time time (Optional) Set the conditions that are used to decide when a RADIUS
tries tries server is considered unavailable or dead.
The range for time is from 1 to 120 seconds. The switch dynamically
determines the default seconds value that is 10 to 60 seconds.
The range for tries is from 1 to 100. The switch dynamically determines
the default tries parameter that is 10 to 100.
Step 3 radius-server deadtime minutes (Optional) Set the number of minutes that a RADIUS server is not sent
requests. The range is from 0 to 1440 minutes (24 hours). The default is
0 minutes.

OL-8553-06 10-49
Command Purpose
Step 4 radius-server host ip-address (Optional) Configure the RADIUS server parameters by using these
[acct-port udp-port] [auth-port keywords:
udp-port] [test username name
• acct-port udp-port—Specify the UDP port for the RADIUS
[idle-time time] [ignore-acct-port]
accounting server. The range for the UDP port number is from 0 to
[ignore-auth-port]] [key string]
65536. The default is 1646.
• auth-port udp-port—Specify the UDP port for the RADIUS
authentication server. The range for the UDP port number is from 0
to 65536. The default is 1645.
Note You should configure the UDP port for the RADIUS accounting
server and the UDP port for the RADIUS authentication server to
nondefault values.
• test username name—Enable automated testing of the RADIUS

server status, and specify the username to be used.
• idle-time time—Set the interval of time in minutes after which the
switch sends test packets to the server. The range is from 1 to
35791 minutes. The default is 60 minutes (1 hour).
• ignore-acct-port—Disable testing on the RADIUS-server
accounting port.
• ignore-auth-port—Disable testing on the RADIUS-server
authentication port.
• key string—Specify the authentication and encryption key for all
RADIUS communication between the switch and the RADIUS
daemon.
Note Always configure the key as the last item in the radius-server
host command syntax because leading spaces are ignored, but
spaces within and at the end of the key are used. If you use spaces
in the key, do not enclose the key in quotation marks unless the
quotation marks are part of the key. This key must match the
encryption used on the RADIUS daemon.
You can also configure the authentication and encryption key by

using the radius-server key {0 string | 7 string | string} global
Step 5 dot1x critical {eapol | recovery delay (Optional) Configure the parameters for inaccessible authentication
milliseconds} bypass:
eapol—Specify that the switch sends an EAPOL-Success message when
the switch successfully authenticates the critical port.
recovery delay milliseconds—Set the recovery delay period during
which the switch waits to re-initialize a critical port when a RADIUS
server that was unavailable becomes available. The range is from 1 to
10000 milliseconds. The default is 1000 milliseconds (a port can be
re-initialized every second).

10-50 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 7 dot1x critical [recovery action Enable the inaccessible authentication bypass feature, and use these
reinitialize | vlan vlan-id] keywords to configure the feature:
• recovery action reinitialize—Enable the recovery feature, and
specify that the recovery action is to authenticate the port when an
authentication server is available.
• vlan vlan-id—Specify the access VLAN to which the switch can
assign a critical port. The range is from 1 to 4094.
Step 9 show authentication interface (Optional) Verify your entries.
interface-id
or
To return to the RADIUS server default settings, use the no radius-server dead-criteria, the no
radius-server deadtime, and the no radius-server host global configuration commands. To return to
the default settings of inaccessible authentication bypass, use the no dot1x critical {eapol | recovery
delay} global configuration command. To disable inaccessible authentication bypass, use the no dot1x
critical interface configuration command.
This example shows how to configure the inaccessible authentication bypass feature:
Switch(config)# radius-server dead-criteria time 30 tries 20
Switch(config)# radius-server deadtime 60
Switch(config)# radius-server host 1.1.1.2 acct-port 1550 auth-port 1560 test username
user1 idle-time 30 key abc1234
Switch(config)# dot1x critical eapol
Switch(config)# dot1x critical recovery delay 2000
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/1
Switch(config)# radius-server deadtime 60
Switch(config-if)# dot1x critical
Switch(config-if)# dot1x critical recovery action reinitialize
Switch(config-if)# dot1x critical vlan 20
Configuring 802.1x Authentication with WoL

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable 802.1x authentication with WoL. This
Command Purpose

OL-8553-06 10-51
Command Purpose
Step 3 authentication control-direction {both Enable 802.1x authentication with WoL on the port, and use these
| in} keywords to configure the port as bidirectional or unidirectional.
or • both—Sets the port as bidirectional. The port cannot receive packets
from or send packets to the host. By default, the port is bidirectional.
dot1x control-direction {both | in}
• in—Sets the port as unidirectional. The port can send packets to the
host but cannot receive packets from the host.
interface-id
or
To disable 802.1x authentication with WoL, use the no authentication control-direction or no dot1x
control-direction interface configuration command.
These examples show how to enable 802.1x authentication with WoL and set the port as bidirectional:
Switch(config-if)# authentication control-direction both
or
Switch(config-if)# dot1x control-direction both
Configuring MAC Authentication Bypass

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable MAC authentication bypass. This
Command Purpose
or

10-52 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 4 dot1x mac-auth-bypass [eap | timeout Enable MAC authentication bypass.
activity {value}]
(Optional) Use the eap keyword to configure the switch to use EAP for
authorization.
(Optional) Use the timeout activity keywords to configured the number
of seconds that a connected host can be inactive before it is placed in an
unauthorized state. The range is 1 to 65535.
You must enable port security before configuring a time out value. For
more information, see the “Configuring Port Security” section on
page 24-8.
or
To disable MAC authentication bypass, use the no dot1x mac-auth-bypass interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to enable MAC authentication bypass:
Switch(config-if)# dot1x mac-auth-bypass
Configuring NAC Layer 2 802.1x Validation

You can configure NAC Layer 2 802.1x validation, which is also referred to as 802.1x authentication
with a RADIUS server.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure NAC Layer 2 802.1x validation.
The procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 3 dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id Specify an active VLAN as an 802.1x guest VLAN. The range is 1 to
4094.
port), an RSPAN VLAN, or a voice VLAN as an 802.1x guest VLAN.
Step 4 authentication periodic Enable periodic re-authentication of the client, which is disabled by
default.
or
dot1x reauthentication

OL-8553-06 10-53
Command Purpose
Step 5 dot1x timeout reauth-period {seconds | Set the number of seconds between re-authentication attempts.
server}
• seconds—Sets the number of seconds from 1 to 65535; the default is
3600 seconds.
• server—Sets the number of seconds based on the value of the
Session-Timeout RADIUS attribute (Attribute[27]) and the
Termination-Action RADIUS attribute (Attribute [29]).
This command affects the behavior of the switch only if periodic
re-authentication is enabled.
Step 7 show authentication interface Verify your 802.1x authentication configuration.
interface-id
or
This example shows how to configure NAC Layer 2 802.1x validation:

Switch(config-if)# dot1x reauthentication
Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout reauth-period server
Configuring 802.1x Switch Supplicant with NEAT

Configuring this feature requires that one switch (outside a wiring closet) is configured as supplicant and
is connected to an authenticator switch.
Note You cannot enable MDA or multiauth mode on the authenticator switch interface that connects
to one more supplicant switches.
For overview information, see the “802.1x Switch Supplicant with Network Edge Access Topology
(NEAT)” section on page 10-25.
Note The cisco-av-pairs must be configured as device-traffic-class=switch on the ACS, which sets the
interface as a trunk after the supplicant is successfuly authenticated.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a switch as an authenticator:
Command Purpose
Step 2 cisp enable Enable CISP.

10-54 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the port to be configured, and enter interface configuration
mode.
Step 4 switchport mode access (Optional) Set the port mode to access.
Step 5 authentication port-control auto Set the port-authentication mode to auto.
Step 6 dot1x pae authenticator Configure the interface as a port access entity (PAE) authenticator.
Step 7 spanning-tree portfast Enable Port Fast on an access port connected to a single workstation or
server..
Step 9 show running-config interface Verify your configuration.
interface-id
This example shows how to configure a switch as an 802.1x authenticator:

Switch(config)# cisp enable
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet2/0/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access
Switch(config-if)# authentication port-control auto
Switch(config-if)# dot1x pae authenticator
Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast trunk
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a switch as a supplicant:
Command Purpose
Step 2 cisp enable Enable CISP.
Step 3 dot1x credentials profile Create 802.1x credentials profile. This must be attached to the port that
is configured as supplicant.
Step 4 username suppswitch Create a username.
Step 5 password password Create a password for the new username.
mode.
Step 7 switchport trunk encapsulation Set the port to trunk mode.
dot1q
Step 8 switchport mode trunk Configure the interface as a VLAN trunk port.
Step 9 dot1x pae supplicant Configure the interface as a port access entity (PAE) supplicant.
Step 10 dot1x credentials profile-name Attach the 802.1x credentials profile to the interface.
interface-id

OL-8553-06 10-55
This example shows how to configure a switch as a supplicant:

Switch(config)# cisp enable
Switch(config)# dot1x credentials test
Switch(config)# username suppswitch
Switch(config)# password myswitch
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q
Switch(config-if)# dot1x pae supplicant
Switch(config-if)# dot1x credentials test
Configuring 802.1x Authentication with Downloadable ACLs and Redirect URLs

In addition to configuring 802.1x authentication on the switch, you need to configure the ACS. For more
information, see the Cisco Secure ACS configuration guides.
Note You must configure a downloadable ACL on the ACS before downloading it to the switch.
After authentication on the port, you can use the show ip access-list privileged EXEC command to
display the downloaded ACLs on the port.
Configuring Downloadable ACLs

The policies take effect after client authentication and the client IP address addition to the IP device
tracking table. The switch then applies the downloadable ACL to the port.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip device tracking Configure the ip device tracking table.
Step 3 aaa new-model Enables AAA.
Step 4 aaa authorization network default group Sets the authorization method to local. To remove the
radius authorization method, use the no aaa authorization network
default group radius command.
Step 5 radius-server vsa send authentication Configure the radius vsa send authentication.
Step 6 interface interface-id Specify the port to be configured, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 7 ip access-group acl-id in Configure the default ACL on the port in the input direction.
Note The acl-id is an access list name or number.
Step 8 show running-config interface interface-id Verify your configuration.

10-56 OL-8553-06
Configuring a Downloadable Policy

Command Purpose
Step 2 access-list access-list-number deny Defines the default port ACL by using a source address and wildcard.
source source-wildcard log
The access-list-number is a decimal number from 1 to 99 or 1300 to 1999.
Enter deny or permit to specify whether to deny or permit access if
conditions are matched.
The source is the source address of the network or host that sends a packet,
such as this:
• The 32-bit quantity in dotted-decimal format.
• The keyword any as an abbreviation for source and source-wildcard
value of 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255. You do not need to enter a
source-wildcard value.
• The keyword host as an abbreviation for source and source-wildcard
of source 0.0.0.0.
(Optional) Applies the source-wildcard wildcard bits to the source.
(Optional) Enters log to cause an informational logging message about the
packet that matches the entry to be sent to the console.
Step 3 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode.
Step 4 ip access-group acl-id in Configure the default ACL on the port in the input direction.
Note The acl-id is an access list name or number.
Step 5 exit Returns to global configuration mode.
Step 6 aaa new-model Enables AAA.
Step 7 aaa authorization network default Sets the authorization method to local. To remove the authorization
group radius method, use the no aaa authorization network default group radius
command.
Step 8 ip device tracking Enables the IP device tracking table.
To disable the IP device tracking table, use the no ip device tracking
global configuration commands.
Step 9 ip device tracking probe count count (Optional) Configures the IP device tracking table:
• count count–Sets the number of times that the switch sends the ARP
probe. The range is from 1 to 5. The default is 3.
• interval interval–Sets the number of seconds that the switch waits for
a response before resending the ARP probe. The range is from 30 to
300 seconds. The default is 30 seconds.
Step 10 radius-server vsa send authentication Configures the network access server to recognize and use vendor-specific
attributes.
Note The downloadable ACL must be operational.
Step 11 end Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

OL-8553-06 10-57
Command Purpose
Step 12 show ip device tracking all Displays information about the entries in the IP device tracking table.
Step 13 copy running-config startup-config (Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.
This example shows how to configure a switch for a downloadable policy:

Switch(config)# aaa authorization network default group radius
Switch(config)# ip device tracking
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended default_acl
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip any any
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# exit
Switch(config)# radius-server vsa send authentication
Switch(config)# int fastEthernet 2/13
Switch(config-if)# ip access-group default_acl in
Switch(config-if)# exit
Configuring Flexible Authentication Ordering

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps:
Command Purpose
configuration mode.
Step 3 authentication order [dot1x | mab] | (Optional) Set the order of authentication methods used on a port.
{webauth}
Step 4 authentication priority [dot1x | mab] | (Optional) Add an authentication method to the port-priority list.
{webauth}
Step 5 show authentication (Optional) Verify your entries.
This example shows how to configure a port attempt 802.1x authentication first, followed by web
authentication as fallback method:
Switch(config)# authentication order dot1x webauth

10-58 OL-8553-06
Configuring Open1x
Command Purpose
configuration mode.
Step 3 authentication control-direction {both | in} (Optional) Configure the port control as unidirectional or
bidirectional.
Step 4 authentication fallback name (Optional) Configure a port to use web authentication as a
fallback method for clients that do not support 802.1x
authentication.
Step 5 authentication host-mode [multi-auth | (Optional) Set the authorization manager mode on a port.
multi-domain | multi-host | single-host]
Step 6 authentication open (Optional) Enable or disable open access on a port.
Step 7 authentication order [dot1x | mab] | (Optional) Set the order of authentication methods used on a port.
{webauth}
Step 8 authentication periodic (Optional) Enable or disable reauthentication on a port.
Step 9 authentication port-control {auto | (Optional) Enable manual control of the port authorization state.
force-authorized | force-un authorized}
Step 10 show authentication (Optional) Verify your entries.
This example shows how to configure open 1x on a port:

Switch(config)# authentication control-direction both
Switch(config)# autentication fallback profile1
Switch(config)# authentication host-mode multi-auth
Switch(config)# authentication open
Switch(config)# authentication order dot1x webauth
Switch(config)# authentication periodic
Switch(config)# authentication port-control auto
Configuring Web Authentication

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure authentication, authorization,
accounting (AAA) and RADIUS on a switch before configuring web authentication. The steps enable
AAA by using RADIUS authentication and enable device tracking.
Command Purpose

OL-8553-06 10-59
Command Purpose
Step 3 aaa authentication login default group Use RADIUS authentication. Before you can use this authentication
radius method, you must configure the RADIUS server. For more
information, see Chapter 9, “Configuring Switch-Based
Authentication.”
The console prompts you for a username and password on future
attempts to access the switch console after entering the aaa
authentication login command. If you do not want to be prompted for
a username and password, configure a second login authentication
list:
Switch# config t
Switch(config)# aaa authentication login line-console none
Switch(config)# line console 0
Switch(config-line)# login authentication line-console
Switch(config-line)# end
Step 4 aaa authorization auth-proxy default Use RADIUS for authentication-proxy (auth-proxy) authorization.
group radius
Step 5 radius-server host key radius-key Specify the authentication and encryption key for RADIUS
communication between the switch and the RADIUS daemon.
Step 6 radius-server attribute 8 Configure the switch to send the Framed-IP-Address RADIUS
include-in-access-req attribute (Attribute[8]) in access-request or accounting-request
packets.
Step 7 radius-server vsa send authentication Configure the network access server to recognize and use
vendor-specific attributes (VSAs).
Step 8 ip device tracking Enable the IP device tracking table.
To disable the IP device tracking table, use the no ip device tracking
This example shows how to enable AAA, use RADIUS authentication and enable device tracking:
Switch(config) configure terminal
Switch(config)# aaa authentication login default group radius
Switch(config)# aaa authorization auth-proxy default group radius
Switch(config)# radius-server host 1.1.1.2 key key1
Switch(config)# radius-server attribute 8 include-in-access-req
Switch(config)# radius-server vsa send authentication
Switch(config)# ip device tracking
Switch(config) end

10-60 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a port to use web authentication:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip admission name rule proxy http Define a web authentication rule.
Note The same rule cannot be used for both web authentication and
NAC Layer 2 IP validation. For more information, see the
Network Admission Control Software Configuration Guide on
Cisco.com.
mode.
Step 5 ip access-group access-list in Specify the default access control list to be applied to network traffic
before web authentication.
Step 6 ip admission rule Apply an IP admission rule to the interface.
interface-id
This example shows how to configure only web authentication on a switch port:
Switch(config)# ip admission name rule1 proxy http
Switch(config-if)# ip access-group policy1 in
Switch(config-if)# ip admission rule1
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a switch port for 802.1x
authentication with web authentication as a fallback method:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip admission name rule proxy http Define a web authentication rule.
Step 3 fallback profile fallback-profile Define a fallback profile to allow an 802.1x port to authenticate a
client by using web authentication.
Step 4 ip access-group policy in Specify the default access control list to apply to network traffic
before web authentication.
Step 5 ip admission rule Associate an IP admission rule with the profile, and specify that
a client connecting by web authentication uses this rule.
configuration mode.

OL-8553-06 10-61
Command Purpose
Step 9 authentication port-control auto Enable 802.1x authentication on the interface.
or
Step 10 authentication fallback fallback-profile Configure the port to authenticate a client by using web
authentication when no 802.1x supplicant is detected on the port.
or
Any change to the fallback-profile global configuration takes effect
dot1x fallback fallback-profile the next time 802.1x fallback is invoked on the interface.
Note Web authorization cannot be used as a fallback method
for 802.1x if the port is configured for multidomain
authentication.
Step 11 exit Return to privileged EXEC mode.
Step 12 show authentication interface interface-id Verify your configuration.
or
This example shows how to configure 802.1x authentication with web authentication as a fallback
method.
Switch(config)# ip admission name rule1 proxy http
Switch(config)# fallback profile fallback1
Switch(config-fallback-profile)# ip access-group default-policy in
Switch(config-fallback-profile)# ip admission rule1
Switch(config-fallback-profile)# exit
Switch(config-if)# dot1x fallback fallback1
For more information about the authentication fallback and dot1x fallback commands, see the
command reference for this release. For more information about the ip admission name and ip
access-group commands, see the Network Admission Control Software Configuration Guide on
Cisco.com.

10-62 OL-8553-06
Configuring a Web Authentication Local Banner

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a local banner on a switch that has
web authentication configured.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip admission auth-proxy-banner http Enable the local banner.
[banner-text | file-path] (Optional) Create a custom banner by entering C banner-text C, where
C is a delimiting character or file-path indicates a file (for example, a logo
or text file) that appears in the banner.
This example shows how to configure a local banner with the custom message My Switch:
Switch(config)# aaa ip auth-proxy auth-proxy-banner C My Switch C
Switch(config) end
For more information about the ip auth-proxy auth-proxy-banner command, see the “Authentication
Proxy Commands” section of the Cisco IOS Security Command Reference on Cisco.com.
Disabling 802.1x Authentication on the Port

You can disable 802.1x authentication on the port by using the no dot1x pae interface configuration
command.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable 802.1x authentication on the port.
This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 3 no dot1x pae Disable 802.1x authentication on the port.
or
To configure the port as an 802.1x port access entity (PAE) authenticator, which enables 802.1x on the
port but does not allow clients connected to the port to be authorized, use the dot1x pae authenticator

OL-8553-06 10-63
Displaying 802.1x Statistics and Status
This example shows how to disable 802.1x authentication on the port:

Switch(config-if)# no dot1x pae authenticator
Resetting the 802.1x Authentication Configuration to the Default Values

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to reset the 802.1x authentication configuration
to the default values. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the port to be configured.
Step 3 dot1x default Reset the 802.1x parameters to the default values.
interface-id
or
Displaying 802.1x Statistics and Status

To display 802.1x statistics for all ports, use the show dot1x all statistics privileged EXEC command.
To display 802.1x statistics for a specific port, use the show dot1x statistics interface interface-id
To display the 802.1x administrative and operational status for the switch, use the show dot1x all
[details | statistics | summary] privileged EXEC command. To display the 802.1x administrative and
operational status for a specific port, use the show dot1x interface interface-id privileged EXEC
command.
For detailed information about the fields in these displays, see the command reference for this release.

10-64 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 11
Configuring Interface Characteristics
This chapter defines the types of interfaces on the Catalyst 3560 switch and describes how to configure
them.
The chapter consists of these sections:
• Understanding Interface Types, page 11-1
• Using Interface Configuration Mode, page 11-10
• Configuring Ethernet Interfaces, page 11-14
• Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces, page 11-25
• Configuring the System MTU, page 11-27
• Monitoring and Maintaining the Interfaces, page 11-29
Note For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the switch
command reference for this release and the Cisco IOS Interface Command Reference, Release 12.2 from
the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command
References.
Understanding Interface Types

This section describes the different types of interfaces supported by the switch with references to
chapters that contain more detailed information about configuring these interface types. The rest of the
chapter describes configuration procedures for physical interface characteristics.
These sections describe the interface types:
• Port-Based VLANs, page 11-2
• Switch Ports, page 11-2
• Routed Ports, page 11-4
• Switch Virtual Interfaces, page 11-4
• EtherChannel Port Groups, page 11-6
• Dual-Purpose Uplink Ports, page 11-6
• Power over Ethernet Ports, page 11-7
• Connecting Interfaces, page 11-9

OL-8553-06 11-1
Chapter 11 Configuring Interface Characteristics
Port-Based VLANs
A VLAN is a switched network that is logically segmented by function, team, or application, without
regard to the physical location of the users. For more information about VLANs, see Chapter 13,
“Configuring VLANs.” Packets received on a port are forwarded only to ports that belong to the same
VLAN as the receiving port. Network devices in different VLANs cannot communicate with one another
without a Layer 3 device to route traffic between the VLANs.
VLAN partitions provide hard firewalls for traffic in the VLAN, and each VLAN has its own MAC
address table. A VLAN comes into existence when a local port is configured to be associated with the
VLAN, when the VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) learns of its existence from a neighbor on a trunk, or
when a user creates a VLAN.
To configure normal-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1 to 1005), use the vlan vlan-id global configuration
command to enter config-vlan mode or the vlan database privileged EXEC command to enter VLAN
database configuration mode. The VLAN configurations for VLAN IDs 1 to 1005 are saved in the VLAN
database. To configure extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4094), you must use config-vlan
mode with VTP mode set to transparent. Extended-range VLANs are not added to the VLAN database.
When VTP mode is transparent, the VTP and VLAN configuration is saved in the switch running
configuration, and you can save it in the switch startup configuration file by entering the copy
running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command.
Add ports to a VLAN by using the switchport interface configuration commands:
• Identify the interface.
• For a trunk port, set trunk characteristics, and if desired, define the VLANs to which it can belong.
• For an access port, set and define the VLAN to which it belongs.
• For a tunnel port, set and define the VLAN ID for the customer-specific VLAN tag. See Chapter 16,
“Configuring IEEE 802.1Q and Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling.”
Switch Ports
Switch ports are Layer 2-only interfaces associated with a physical port. Switch ports belong to one or
more VLANs.A switch port can be an access port, a trunk port, or a tunnel port. You can configure a port
as an access port or trunk port or let the Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) operate on a per-port basis
to set the switchport mode by negotiating with the port on the other end of the link. You must manually
configure tunnel ports as part of an asymmetric link connected to an IEEE 802.1Q trunk port. Switch
ports are used for managing the physical interface and associated Layer 2 protocols and do not handle
routing or bridging.
Configure switch ports by using the switchport interface configuration commands. Use the switchport
command with no keywords to put an interface that is in Layer 3 mode into Layer 2 mode.
Note When you put an interface that is in Layer 3 mode into Layer 2 mode, the previous configuration
information related to the affected interface might be lost, and the interface is returned to its default
configuration.
For detailed information about configuring access port and trunk port characteristics, see Chapter 13,
“Configuring VLANs.” For more information about tunnel ports, see Chapter 16, “Configuring IEEE
802.1Q and Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling.”

11-2 OL-8553-06
Access Ports
An access port belongs to and carries the traffic of only one VLAN (unless it is configured as a voice
VLAN port). Traffic is received and sent in native formats with no VLAN tagging. Traffic arriving on
an access port is assumed to belong to the VLAN assigned to the port. If an access port receives a tagged
packet (Inter-Switch Link [ISL] or IEEE 802.1Q tagged), the packet is dropped, and the source address
is not learned.
Two types of access ports are supported:
• Static access ports are manually assigned to a VLAN (or through a RADIUS server for use with
IEEE 802.1x. For more information, see the “802.1x Authentication with VLAN Assignment”
section on page 10-14.)
• VLAN membership of dynamic access ports is learned through incoming packets. By default, a
dynamic access port is not a member of any VLAN, and forwarding to and from the port is enabled
only when the VLAN membership of the port is discovered. Dynamic access ports on the switch are
assigned to a VLAN by a VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS). The VMPS can be a
Catalyst 6500 series switch; the Catalyst 3560 switch cannot be a VMPS server.
You can also configure an access port with an attached Cisco IP Phone to use one VLAN for voice traffic
and another VLAN for data traffic from a device attached to the phone. For more information about
voice VLAN ports, see Chapter 15, “Configuring Voice VLAN.”
Trunk Ports
A trunk port carries the traffic of multiple VLANs and by default is a member of all VLANs in the VLAN
database. These trunk port types are supported:
• In an ISL trunk port, all received packets are expected to be encapsulated with an ISL header, and
all transmitted packets are sent with an ISL header. Native (non-tagged) frames received from an
ISL trunk port are dropped.
• An IEEE 802.1Q trunk port supports simultaneous tagged and untagged traffic. An IEEE 802.1Q
trunk port is assigned a default port VLAN ID (PVID), and all untagged traffic travels on the port
default PVID. All untagged traffic and tagged traffic with a NULL VLAN ID are assumed to belong
to the port default PVID. A packet with a VLAN ID equal to the outgoing port default PVID is sent
untagged. All other traffic is sent with a VLAN tag.
Although by default, a trunk port is a member of every VLAN known to the VTP, you can limit VLAN
membership by configuring an allowed list of VLANs for each trunk port. The list of allowed VLANs
does not affect any other port but the associated trunk port. By default, all possible VLANs (VLAN ID 1
to 4094) are in the allowed list. A trunk port can become a member of a VLAN only if VTP knows of
the VLAN and if the VLAN is in the enabled state. If VTP learns of a new, enabled VLAN and the VLAN
is in the allowed list for a trunk port, the trunk port automatically becomes a member of that VLAN and
traffic is forwarded to and from the trunk port for that VLAN. If VTP learns of a new, enabled VLAN
that is not in the allowed list for a trunk port, the port does not become a member of the VLAN, and no
traffic for the VLAN is forwarded to or from the port.
For more information about trunk ports, see Chapter 13, “Configuring VLANs.”
Tunnel Ports
Tunnel ports are used in IEEE 802.1Q tunneling to segregate the traffic of customers in a
service-provider network from other customers who are using the same VLAN number. You configure
an asymmetric link from a tunnel port on a service-provider edge switch to an IEEE 802.1Q trunk port

OL-8553-06 11-3
on the customer switch. Packets entering the tunnel port on the edge switch, already
IEEE 802.1Q-tagged with the customer VLANs, are encapsulated with another layer of an IEEE 802.1Q
tag (called the metro tag), containing a VLAN ID unique in the service-provider network, for each
customer. The double-tagged packets go through the service-provider network keeping the original
customer VLANs separate from those of other customers. At the outbound interface, also a tunnel port,
the metro tag is removed, and the original VLAN numbers from the customer network are retrieved.
Tunnel ports cannot be trunk ports or access ports and must belong to a VLAN unique to each customer.
For more information about tunnel ports, see Chapter 16, “Configuring IEEE 802.1Q and Layer 2
Protocol Tunneling.”
Routed Ports
A routed port is a physical port that acts like a port on a router; it does not have to be connected to a
router. A routed port is not associated with a particular VLAN, as is an access port. A routed port
behaves like a regular router interface, except that it does not support VLAN subinterfaces. Routed ports
can be configured with a Layer 3 routing protocol. A routed port is a Layer 3 interface only and does not
support Layer 2 protocols, such as DTP and STP.
Configure routed ports by putting the interface into Layer 3 mode with the no switchport interface
configuration command. Then assign an IP address to the port, enable routing, and assign routing
protocol characteristics by using the ip routing and router protocol global configuration commands.
Note Entering a no switchport interface configuration command shuts down the interface and then re-enables
it, which might generate messages on the device to which the interface is connected. When you put an
interface that is in Layer 2 mode into Layer 3 mode, the previous configuration information related to
the affected interface might be lost.
The number of routed ports that you can configure is not limited by software. However, the
interrelationship between this number and the number of other features being configured might impact
CPU performance because of hardware limitations. See the “Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces” section on
page 11-25 for information about what happens when hardware resource limitations are reached.
For more information about IP unicast and multicast routing and routing protocols, see Chapter 36,
“Configuring IP Unicast Routing” and Chapter 44, “Configuring IP Multicast Routing.”
Note The IP base image (formerly known as the standard multilayer image [SMI]) supports static routing and
the Routing Information Protocol (RIP). For full Layer 3 routing or for fallback bridging, you must have
the IP services image (formerly known as the enhanced multilayer image [EMI]) installed on the switch.
Switch Virtual Interfaces

A switch virtual interface (SVI) represents a VLAN of switch ports as one interface to the routing or
bridging function in the system. Only one SVI can be associated with a VLAN, but you need to configure
an SVI for a VLAN only when you wish to route between VLANs, to fallback-bridge nonroutable
protocols between VLANs, or to provide IP host connectivity to the switch. By default, an SVI is created
for the default VLAN (VLAN 1) to permit remote switch administration. Additional SVIs must be
explicitly configured.

11-4 OL-8553-06
Note You cannot delete interface VLAN 1.
SVIs provide IP host connectivity only to the system; in Layer 3 mode, you can configure routing across
SVIs.
Although the switch supports a total or 1005 VLANs (and SVIs), the interrelationship between the
number of SVIs and routed ports and the number of other features being configured might impact CPU
performance because of hardware limitations. See the “Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces” section on
page 11-25 for information about what happens when hardware resource limitations are reached.
SVIs are created the first time that you enter the vlan interface configuration command for a VLAN
interface. The VLAN corresponds to the VLAN tag associated with data frames on an ISL or
IEEE 802.1Q encapsulated trunk or the VLAN ID configured for an access port. Configure a VLAN
interface for each VLAN for which you want to route traffic, and assign it an IP address. For more
information, see the “Manually Assigning IP Information” section on page 3-14.
Note When you create an SVI, it does not become active until it is associated with a physical port.
SVIs support routing protocols and bridging configurations. For more information about configuring IP
routing, see Chapter 36, “Configuring IP Unicast Routing,” Chapter 44, “Configuring IP Multicast
Routing,”and Chapter 46, “Configuring Fallback Bridging.”
Note The IP base image supports static routing and RIP; for more advanced routing or for fallback bridging,
you must have the IP services image installed on the switch.
SVI Autostate Exclude

The line state of an SVI with multiple ports on a VLAN is in the up state when it meets these conditions:
• The VLAN exists and is active in the VLAN database on the switch.
• The VLAN interface exists and is not administratively down.
• At least one Layer 2 (access or trunk) port exists, has a link in the up state on this VLAN, and is in
the spanning-tree forwarding state on the VLAN.
Note The protocol link state for VLAN interfaces come up when the first switchport belonging to the
corresponding VLAN link comes up and is in STP forwarding state.
The default action, when a VLAN has multiple ports, is that the SVI goes down when all ports in the
VLAN go down. You can use the SVI autostate exclude feature to configure a port so that it is not
included in the SVI line-state up-an- down calculation. For example, if the only active port on the VLAN

OL-8553-06 11-5
is a monitoring port, you might configure autostate exclude on that port so that the VLAN goes down
when all other ports go down. When enabled on a port, autostate exclude applies to all VLANs that are
enabled on that port.
The VLAN interface is brought up when one Layer 2 port in the VLAN has had time to converge
(transition from STP listening-learning state to forwarding state). This prevents features such as routing
protocols from using the VLAN interface as if it were fully operational and minimizes other problems,
such as routing black holes. For information about configuring autostate exclude, see the “Configuring
SVI Autostate Exclude” section on page 11-27.
EtherChannel Port Groups

EtherChannel port groups treat multiple switch ports as one switch port. These port groups act as a single
logical port for high-bandwidth connections between switches or between switches and servers. An
EtherChannel balances the traffic load across the links in the channel. If a link within the EtherChannel
fails, traffic previously carried over the failed link changes to the remaining links. You can group
multiple trunk ports into one logical trunk port, group multiple access ports into one logical access port,
group multiple tunnel ports into one logical tunnel port, or group multiple routed ports into one logical
routed port.Most protocols operate over either single ports or aggregated switch ports and do not
recognize the physical ports within the port group. Exceptions are the DTP, the Cisco Discovery
Protocol (CDP), and the Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), which operate only on physical ports.
When you configure an EtherChannel, you create a port-channel logical interface and assign an interface
to the EtherChannel. For Layer 3 interfaces, you manually create the logical interface by using the
interface port-channel global configuration command. Then you manually assign an interface to the
EtherChannel by using the channel-group interface configuration command. For Layer 2 interfaces, use
the channel-group interface configuration command to dynamically create the port-channel logical
interface. This command binds the physical and logical ports together. For more information, see
Chapter 35, “Configuring EtherChannels and Link-State Tracking.”
Dual-Purpose Uplink Ports

Some Catalyst 3560 switches support dual-purpose uplink ports. Each uplink port is considered as a
single interface with dual front ends—an RJ-45 connector and a small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
module connector. The dual front ends are not redundant interfaces, and the switch activates only one
connector of the pair.
By default, the switch dynamically selects the interface type that first links up. However, you can use the
media-type interface configuration command to manually select the RJ-45 connector or the SFP module
connector. For information about configuring speed and duplex settings for a dual-purpose uplink, see
the “Setting the Interface Speed and Duplex Parameters” section on page 11-18.
Each uplink port has two LEDs: one shows the status of the RJ-45 port, and one shows the status of the
SFP module port. The port LED is on for whichever connector is active. For more information about the
LEDs, see the hardware installation guide.

11-6 OL-8553-06
Power over Ethernet Ports

Catalyst 3560 PoE-capable switch ports automatically supply power to these connected devices (if the
switch senses that there is no power on the circuit):
• Cisco pre-standard powered devices (such as Cisco IP Phones and Cisco Aironet access points)
• IEEE 802.3af-compliant powered devices
A powered device can receive redundant power when it is connected only to a PoE switch port and to an
AC power source.
This section has this PoE information:
• Supported Protocols and Standards, page 11-7
• Powered-Device Detection and Initial Power Allocation, page 11-7
• Power Management Modes, page 11-8
Supported Protocols and Standards

The switch uses these protocols and standards to support PoE:
• CDP with power consumption—The powered device notifies the switch of the amount of power it
is consuming. The switch does not reply to the power-consumption messages. The switch can only
supply power to or remove power from the PoE port.
• Cisco intelligent power management—The powered device and the switch negotiate through
power-negotiation CDP messages for an agreed power-consumption level. The negotiation allows a
high-power Cisco powered device, which consumes more than 7 W, to operate at its highest power
mode. The powered device first boots up in low-power mode, consumes less than 7 W, and
negotiates to obtain enough power to operate in high-power mode. The device changes to
high-power mode only when it receives confirmation from the switch.
High-power devices can operate in low-power mode on switches that do not support
power-negotiation CDP.
Before Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE, Catalyst 3560 PoE-capable switches (without intelligent
power management support) caused high-power powered devices that supported intelligent power
management to operate in low-power mode. Devices in low-power mode are not fully functional.
Cisco intelligent power management is backward-compatible with CDP with power consumption;
the switch responds according to the CDP message that it receives. CDP is not supported on
third-party powered devices; therefore, the switch uses the IEEE classification to determine the
power usage of the device.
• IEEE 802.3af—The major features of this standard are powered-device discovery, power
administration, disconnect detection, and optional powered-device power classification. For more
information, see the standard.
Powered-Device Detection and Initial Power Allocation

The switch detects a Cisco pre-standard or an IEEE-compliant powered device when the PoE-capable
port is in the no-shutdown state, PoE is enabled (the default), and the connected device is not being
powered by an AC adaptor.

OL-8553-06 11-7
After device detection, the switch determines the device power requirements based on its type:
• A Cisco pre-standard powered device does not provide its power requirement when the switch
detects it, so the switch allocates 15.4 W as the initial allocation for power budgeting.
The initial power allocation is the maximum amount of power that a powered device requires. The
switch initially allocates this amount of power when it detects and powers the powered device. As
the switch receives CDP messages from the powered device and as the powered device negotiates
power levels with the switch through CDP power-negotiation messages, the initial power allocation
might be adjusted.
• The switch classifies the detected IEEE device within a power consumption class. Based on the
available power in the power budget, the switch determines if a port can be powered. Table 11-1 lists
these levels.
Table 11-1 IEEE Power Classifications
Class Maximum Power Level Required from the Switch

0 (class status unknown) 15.4 W
1 4W
2 7W
3 15.4 W
4 (reserved for future use) Treat as Class 0
The switch monitors and tracks requests for power and grants power only when it is available. The
switch tracks its power budget (the amount of power available on the switch for PoE). The switch
performs power-accounting calculations when a port is granted or denied power to keep the power
budget up to date.
After power is applied to the port, the switch uses CDP to determine the actual power consumption
requirement of the connected Cisco powered devices, and the switch adjusts the power budget
accordingly. This does not apply to third-party PoE devices. The switch processes a request and either
grants or denies power. If the request is granted, the switch updates the power budget. If the request is
denied, the switch ensures that power to the port is turned off, generates a syslog message, and updates
the LEDs. Powered devices can also negotiate with the switch for more power.
If the switch detects a fault caused by an undervoltage, overvoltage, overtemperature, oscillator-fault,
or short-circuit condition, it turns off power to the port, generates a syslog message, and updates the
power budget and LEDs.
Power Management Modes

The switch supports these PoE modes:
• auto—The switch automatically detects if the connected device requires power. If the switch
discovers a powered device connected to the port and if the switch has enough power, it grants
power, updates the power budget, turns on power to the port on a first-come, first-served basis, and
updates the LEDs. For LED information, see the hardware installation guide.
If the switch has enough power for all the powered devices, they all come up. If enough power is
available for all powered devices connected to the switch, power is turned on to all devices. If there
is not enough available PoE, or if a device is disconnected and reconnected while other devices are
waiting for power, it cannot be determined which devices are granted or are denied power.

11-8 OL-8553-06
If granting power would exceed the system power budget, the switch denies power, ensures that
power to the port is turned off, generates a syslog message, and updates the LEDs. After power has
been denied, the switch periodically rechecks the power budget and continues to attempt to grant
the request for power.
If a device being powered by the switch is then connected to wall power, the switch might continue
to power the device. The switch might continue to report that it is still powering the device whether
the device is being powered by the switch or receiving power from an AC power source.
If a powered device is removed, the switch automatically detects the disconnect and removes power
from the port. You can connect a nonpowered device without damaging it.
You can specify the maximum wattage that is allowed on the port. If the IEEE class maximum
wattage of the powered device is greater than the configured maximum value, the switch does not
provide power to the port. If the switch powers a powered device, but the powered device later
requests through CDP messages more than the configured maximum value, the switch removes
power to the port. The power that was allocated to the powered device is reclaimed into the global
power budget. If you do not specify a wattage, the switch delivers the maximum value. Use the auto
setting on any PoE port. The auto mode is the default setting.
• static—The switch pre-allocates power to the port (even when no powered device is connected) and
guarantees that power will be available for the port. The switch allocates the port configured
maximum wattage, and the amount is never adjusted through the IEEE class or by CDP messages
from the powered device. Because power is pre-allocated, any powered device that uses less than or
equal to the maximum wattage is guaranteed to be powered when it is connected to the static port.
The port no longer participates in the first-come, first-served model.
However, if the powered-device IEEE class is greater than the maximum wattage, the switch does
not supply power to it. If the switch learns through CDP messages that the powered device needs
more than the maximum wattage, the powered device is shutdown.
If you do not specify a wattage, the switch pre-allocates the maximum value. The switch powers the
port only if it discovers a powered device. Use the static setting on a high-priority interface.
• never—The switch disables powered-device detection and never powers the PoE port even if an
unpowered device is connected. Use this mode only when you want to make sure power is never
applied to a PoE-capable port, making the port a data-only port.
For information on configuring a PoE port, see the “Configuring a Power Management Mode on a PoE
Port” section on page 11-22.
Connecting Interfaces
Devices within a single VLAN can communicate directly through any switch. Ports in different VLANs
cannot exchange data without going through a routing device. With a standard Layer 2 switch, ports in
different VLANs have to exchange information through a router.
By using the switch with routing enabled, when you configure both VLAN 20 and VLAN 30 with an
SVI to which an IP address is assigned, packets can be sent from Host A to Host B directly through the
switch with no need for an external router (Figure 11-1).

OL-8553-06 11-9
Using Interface Configuration Mode
Figure 11-1 Connecting VLANs with the Catalyst 3560 Switch
Layer 3 switch
with routing enabled
172.20.128.1 SVI 1 SVI 2 172.20.129.1
Host A Host B
101350
VLAN 20 VLAN 30
When the IP services image is running on the switch, the switch supports two methods of forwarding
traffic between interfaces: routing and fallback bridging. If the IP base image is on the switch, only basic
routing (static routing and RIP) is supported. Whenever possible, to maintain high performance,
forwarding is done by the switch hardware. However, only IP Version 4 packets with Ethernet II
encapsulation can be routed in hardware. Non-IP traffic and traffic with other encapsulation methods can
be fallback-bridged by hardware.
• The routing function can be enabled on all SVIs and routed ports. The switch routes only IP traffic.
When IP routing protocol parameters and address configuration are added to an SVI or routed port,
any IP traffic received from these ports is routed. For more information, see Chapter 36,
“Configuring IP Unicast Routing,” Chapter 44, “Configuring IP Multicast Routing,” and
Chapter 45, “Configuring MSDP.”
• Fallback bridging forwards traffic that the switch does not route or traffic belonging to a nonroutable
protocol, such as DECnet. Fallback bridging connects multiple VLANs into one bridge domain by
bridging between two or more SVIs or routed ports. When configuring fallback bridging, you assign
SVIs or routed ports to bridge groups with each SVI or routed port assigned to only one bridge
group. All interfaces in the same group belong to the same bridge domain. For more information,
see Chapter 46, “Configuring Fallback Bridging.”

The switch supports these interface types:
• Physical ports—switch ports and routed ports
• VLANs—switch virtual interfaces
• Port channels—EtherChannel interfaces
You can also configure a range of interfaces (see the “Configuring a Range of Interfaces” section on
page 11-11).
To configure a physical interface (port), specify the interface type, module number, and switch port number,
and enter interface configuration mode.
• Type—Fast Ethernet (fastethernet or fa) for 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet (gigabitethernet
or gi) for 10/100/1000 Mb/s Ethernet ports, or small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module Gigabit
Ethernet interfaces.

11-10 OL-8553-06
• Module number—The module or slot number on the switch (always 0 on the Catalyst 3560 switch).
• Port number—The interface number on the switch. The port numbers always begin at 1, starting with
the far left port when facing the front of the switch, for example, fastethernet0/1 or
gigabitethernet0/1. If there is more than one interface type (for example, 10/100 ports and SFP
module ports, the port numbers restart with the second interface type: gigabitethernet0/1.
You can identify physical interfaces by looking at the switch. You can also use the show privileged
EXEC commands to display information about a specific interface or all the interfaces. The remainder
of this chapter primarily provides physical interface configuration procedures.
Procedures for Configuring Interfaces

These general instructions apply to all interface configuration processes.
Step 1 Enter the configure terminal command at the privileged EXEC prompt:
Switch(config)#
Step 2 Enter the interface global configuration command. Identify the interface type and the interface number.
In this example, Gigabit Ethernet port 1 is selected:
Switch(config-if)#
Note You do not need to add a space between the interface type and interface number. For example,
in the preceding line, you can specify either gigabitethernet 0/1, gigabitethernet0/1, gi 1/0/1,
or gi1/0/1.
Step 3 Follow each interface command with the interface configuration commands that the interface requires.
The commands that you enter define the protocols and applications that will run on the interface. The
commands are collected and applied to the interface when you enter another interface command or enter
end to return to privileged EXEC mode.
You can also configure a range of interfaces by using the interface range or interface range macro
global configuration commands. Interfaces configured in a range must be the same type and must be
configured with the same feature options.
Step 4 After you configure an interface, verify its status by using the show privileged EXEC commands listed
in the “Monitoring and Maintaining the Interfaces” section on page 11-29.
Enter the show interfaces privileged EXEC command to see a list of all interfaces on or configured for
the switch. A report is provided for each interface that the device supports or for the specified interface.
Configuring a Range of Interfaces

You can use the interface range global configuration command to configure multiple interfaces with the
same configuration parameters. When you enter the interface-range configuration mode, all command
parameters that you enter are attributed to all interfaces within that range until you exit this mode.

OL-8553-06 11-11
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a range of interfaces with the
same parameters:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface range {port-range | macro Specify the range of interfaces (VLANs or physical ports) to be
macro_name} configured, and enter interface-range configuration mode.
• You can use the interface range command to configure up to five
port ranges or a previously defined macro.
• The macro variable is explained in the “Configuring and Using
Interface Range Macros” section on page 11-13.
• In a comma-separated port-range, you must enter the interface
type for each entry and enter spaces before and after the comma.
• In a hyphen-separated port-range, you do not need to re-enter the
interface type, but you must enter a space before the hyphen.
Step 3 Use the normal configuration commands to apply the configuration
parameters to all interfaces in the range. Each command is executed
as it is entered.
Step 5 show interfaces [interface-id] Verify the configuration of the interfaces in the range.
When using the interface range global configuration command, note these guidelines:
• Valid entries for port-range:
– vlan vlan-ID - vlan-ID, where the VLAN ID is 1 to 4094
– fastethernet stack member/module/{first port} - {last port}, where the module is always 0
– gigabitethernet module/{first port} - {last port}, where the module is always 0
– port-channel port-channel-number - port-channel-number, where the port-channel-number
is 1 to 48
Note When you use the interface range command with port channels, the first and last
port-channel number must be active port channels.
• You must add a space between the first interface number and the hyphen when using the
interface range command. For example, the command interface range gigabitethernet0/1 - 4 is a
valid range; the command interface range gigabitethernet0/1-4 is not a valid range.
• The interface range command only works with VLAN interfaces that have been configured with
the interface vlan command. The show running-config privileged EXEC command displays the
configured VLAN interfaces. VLAN interfaces not displayed by the show running-config
command cannot be used with the interface range command.
• All interfaces defined in a range must be the same type (all Fast Ethernet ports, all Gigabit Ethernet
ports, all EtherChannel ports, or all VLANs), but you can enter multiple ranges in a command.

11-12 OL-8553-06
This example shows how to use the interface range global configuration command to set the speed on
ports 1 to 4 to 100 Mb/s:
Switch(config)# interface range gigabitethernet0/1 - 4
Switch(config-if-range)# speed 100
This example shows how to use a comma to add different interface type strings to the range to enable
Fast Ethernet ports 1 to 3 and Gigabit Ethernet ports 1 and 2 to receive flow-control pause frames:
Switch(config)# interface range fastethernet0/1 - 3, gigabitethernet0/1 - 2
Switch(config-if-range)# flowcontrol receive on
If you enter multiple configuration commands while you are in interface-range mode, each command is
executed as it is entered. The commands are not batched and executed after you exit interface-range
mode. If you exit interface-range configuration mode while the commands are being executed, some
commands might not be executed on all interfaces in the range. Wait until the command prompt
reappears before exiting interface-range configuration mode.
Configuring and Using Interface Range Macros

You can create an interface range macro to automatically select a range of interfaces for configuration.
Before you can use the macro keyword in the interface range macro global configuration command
string, you must use the define interface-range global configuration command to define the macro.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define an interface range macro:
Command Purpose
Step 2 define interface-range macro_name Define the interface-range macro, and save it in NVRAM.
interface-range
• The macro_name is a 32-character maximum character string.
• A macro can contain up to five comma-separated interface
ranges.
• Each interface-range must consist of the same port type.
Step 3 interface range macro macro_name Select the interface range to be configured using the values saved in
the interface-range macro called macro_name.
You can now use the normal configuration commands to apply the
configuration to all interfaces in the defined macro.
Step 5 show running-config | include define Show the defined interface range macro configuration.
Use the no define interface-range macro_name global configuration command to delete a macro.
When using the define interface-range global configuration command, note these guidelines:
• Valid entries for interface-range:
– vlan vlan-ID- vlan-ID, where the VLAN ID is 1 to 4094
– fastethernet module/{first port} - {last port}, where the module is always 0

OL-8553-06 11-13
Configuring Ethernet Interfaces
– gigabitethernet module/{first port} - {last port}, where the module is always 0

– port-channel port-channel-number - port-channel-number, where the port-channel-number
is 1 to 48.
Note When you use the interface ranges with port channels, the first and last port-channel
number must be active port channels.
• You must add a space between the first interface number and the hyphen when entering an
interface-range. For example, gigabitethernet0/1 - 4 is a valid range; gigabitethernet0/1-4 is not
a valid range.
• The VLAN interfaces must have been configured with the interface vlan command. The show
running-config privileged EXEC command displays the configured VLAN interfaces. VLAN
interfaces not displayed by the show running-config command cannot be used as interface-ranges.
• All interfaces defined as in a range must be the same type (all Fast Ethernet ports, all Gigabit
Ethernet ports, all EtherChannel ports, or all VLANs), but you can combine multiple interface types
in a macro.
This example shows how to define an interface-range named enet_list to include ports 1 and 2 and to
verify the macro configuration:
Switch(config)# define interface-range enet_list gigabitethernet0/1 - 2
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show running-config | include define
Switch# define interface-range enet_list gigabitethernet0/1 - 2
This example shows how to create a multiple-interface macro named macro1:

Switch(config)# define interface-range macro1 fastethernet0/1 - 2, gigabitethernet0/1 - 2
Switch(config)# end
This example shows how to enter interface-range configuration mode for the interface-range
macro enet_list:
Switch(config)# interface range macro enet_list
Switch(config-if-range)#
This example shows how to delete the interface-range macro enet_list and to verify that it was deleted.
Switch(config)# no define interface-range enet_list
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show run | include define
Switch#

• Default Ethernet Interface Configuration, page 11-15
• Setting the Type of a Dual-Purpose Uplink Port, page 11-16

11-14 OL-8553-06
• Configuring Interface Speed and Duplex Mode, page 11-17

• Configuring IEEE 802.3x Flow Control, page 11-20
• Configuring Auto-MDIX on an Interface, page 11-21
• Configuring a Power Management Mode on a PoE Port, page 11-22
• Budgeting Power for Devices Connected to a PoE Port, page 11-23
• Adding a Description for an Interface, page 11-24
Default Ethernet Interface Configuration

Table 11-2 shows the Ethernet interface default configuration, including some features that apply only
to Layer 2 interfaces. For more details on the VLAN parameters listed in the table, see Chapter 13,
“Configuring VLANs.” For details on controlling traffic to the port, see Chapter 24, “Configuring
Port-Based Traffic Control.”
Note To configure Layer 2 parameters, if the interface is in Layer 3 mode, you must enter the switchport
interface configuration command without any parameters to put the interface into Layer 2 mode. This
shuts down the interface and then re-enables it, which might generate messages on the device to which
the interface is connected. When you put an interface that is in Layer 3 mode into Layer 2 mode, the
previous configuration information related to the affected interface might be lost, and the interface is
returned to its default configuration.
Table 11-2 Default Layer 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration

Operating mode Layer 2 or switching mode (switchport command).
Allowed VLAN range VLANs 1 to 4094.
Default VLAN (for access ports) VLAN 1 (Layer 2 interfaces only).
Native VLAN (for IEEE 802.1Q VLAN 1 (Layer 2 interfaces only).
trunks)
VLAN trunking Switchport mode dynamic auto (supports DTP) (Layer 2 interfaces
only).
Port enable state All ports are enabled.
Port description None defined.
Speed Autonegotiate.
Duplex mode Autonegotiate.
Flow control Flow control is set to receive: off. It is always off for sent packets.
EtherChannel (PAgP) Disabled on all Ethernet ports. See Chapter 35, “Configuring
EtherChannels and Link-State Tracking.”
Port blocking (unknown multicast Disabled (not blocked) (Layer 2 interfaces only). See the
and unknown unicast traffic) “Configuring Port Blocking” section on page 24-7.
Broadcast, multicast, and unicast Disabled. See the “Default Storm Control Configuration” section
storm control on page 24-3.

OL-8553-06 11-15
Table 11-2 Default Layer 2 Ethernet Interface Configuration (continued)

Protected port Disabled (Layer 2 interfaces only). See the “Configuring Protected
Ports” section on page 24-6.
Port security Disabled (Layer 2 interfaces only). See the “Default Port Security
Configuration” section on page 24-11.
Port Fast Disabled. See the “Default Optional Spanning-Tree
Configuration” section on page 19-9.
Auto-MDIX Enabled.
Note The switch might not support a pre-standard powered
device—such as Cisco IP phones and access points that do
not fully support IEEE 802.3af—if that powered device is
connected to the switch through a crossover cable. This is
regardless of whether auto-MIDX is enabled on the switch
port.
Power over Ethernet (PoE) Enabled (auto).
Keepalive messages Disabled on SFP module ports; enabled on all other ports.
Setting the Type of a Dual-Purpose Uplink Port

Some Catalyst 3560 switches support dual-purpose uplink ports. By default, the switch dynamically
selects the interface type that first links up. However, you can use the media-type interface configuration
command to manually select the RJ-45 connector or the SFP module connector. For more information,
see the “Dual-Purpose Uplink Ports” section on page 11-6.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to select which dual-purpose uplink to activate so
that you can set the speed and duplex. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the dual-purpose uplink port to be configured, and enter

11-16 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 media-type {auto-select | rj45 | sfp} Select the interface and type of a dual-purpose uplink port. The
keywords have these meanings:
• auto-select—The switch dynamically selects the type. When link
up is achieved, the switch disables the other type until the active
link goes down. When the active link goes down, the switch
enables both types until one of them links up. In auto-select
mode, the switch configures both types with autonegotiation of
speed and duplex (the default). Depending on the type of installed
SFP module, the switch might not be able to dynamically select
it. For more information, see the information that follows this
procedure.
• rj45—The switch disables the SFP module interface. If you
connect an SFP module to this port, it cannot attain a link even if
the RJ-45 side is down or is not connected. In this mode, the
dual-purpose port behaves like a 10/100/1000BASE-TX
interface. You can configure the speed and duplex settings
consistent with this interface type.
• sfp—The switch disables the RJ-45 interface. If you connect a
cable to the RJ-45 port, it cannot attain a link even if the SFP
module side is down or if the SFP module is not present. Based
on the type of installed SFP module, you can configure the speed
and duplex settings consistent with this interface type.
For information about setting the speed and duplex, see the “Speed
and Duplex Configuration Guidelines” section on page 11-18.
Step 5 show interfaces interface-id transceiver Verify your setting.
properties
To return to the default setting, use the media-type auto interface or the no media-type interface
e switch configures both types to autonegotiate speed and duplex (the default). If you configure
auto-select, you cannot configure the speed and duplex interface configuration commands.
When the switch powers on or when you enable a dual-purpose uplink port through the shutdown and
the no shutdown interface configuration commands, the switch gives preference to the SFP module
interface. In all other situations, the switch selects the active link based on which type first links up.
Configuring Interface Speed and Duplex Mode

Ethernet interfaces on the switch operate at 10, 100, or 1000 Mb/s and in either full- or half-duplex mode.
In full-duplex mode, two stations can send and receive traffic at the same time. Normally, 10-Mb/s ports
operate in half-duplex mode, which means that stations can either receive or send traffic.
Switch models include combinations of Fast Ethernet (10/100-Mb/s) ports, Gigabit Ethernet
(10/100/1000-Mb/s) ports, and small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module slots supporting SFP
modules.

OL-8553-06 11-17
These sections describe how to configure the interface speed and duplex mode:
• Speed and Duplex Configuration Guidelines, page 11-18
• Setting the Interface Speed and Duplex Parameters, page 11-18
Speed and Duplex Configuration Guidelines

When configuring an interface speed and duplex mode, note these guidelines:
• Fast Ethernet (10/100-Mb/s) ports support all speed and duplex options.
• Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000-Mb/s) ports support all speed options and all duplex options (auto,
half, and full). However, Gigabit Ethernet ports operating at 1000 Mb/s do not support half-duplex
mode.
• For SFP module ports, the speed and duplex CLI options change depending on the SFP module type:
– The 1000BASE-x (where -x is -BX, -CWDM, -LX, -SX, and -ZX) SFP module ports support
the nonegotiate keyword in the speed interface configuration command. Duplex options are not
supported.
– The 1000BASE-T SFP module ports support the same speed and duplex options as the
10/100/1000-Mb/s ports.
– The 100BASE-x (where -x is -BX, -CWDM, -LX, -SX, and -ZX) SFP module ports support only
100 Mb/s. These modules support full- and half- duplex options but do not support
autonegotiation.
For information about which SFP modules are supported on your switch, see the product
release notes.
• If both ends of the line support autonegotiation, we highly recommend the default setting of auto
negotiation.
• If one interface supports autonegotiation and the other end does not, configure duplex and speed on
both interfaces; do not use the auto setting on the supported side.
• When STP is enabled and a port is reconfigured, the switch can take up to 30 seconds to check for
loops. The port LED is amber while STP reconfigures.
Caution Changing the interface speed and duplex mode configuration might shut down and re-enable the
interface during the reconfiguration.
Setting the Interface Speed and Duplex Parameters

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the speed and duplex mode for a physical
interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the physical interface to be configured, and enter interface
configuration mode.

11-18 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | auto [10 | 100 | Enter the appropriate speed parameter for the interface:
1000] | nonegotiate}
• Enter 10, 100, or 1000 to set a specific speed for the interface.
The 1000 keyword is available only for 10/100/1000 Mb/s ports.
• Enter auto to enable the interface to autonegotiate speed with the
connected device. If you use the 10, 100, or the 1000 keywords
with the auto keyword, the port autonegotiates only at the
specified speeds.
• The nonegotiate keyword is available only for SFP module ports.
SFP module ports operate only at 1000 Mb/s but can be
configured to not negotiate if connected to a device that does not
support autonegotiation.
For more information about speed settings, see the “Speed and Duplex
Step 4 duplex {auto | full | half} Enter the duplex parameter for the interface.
Enable half-duplex mode (for interfaces operating only at 10 or
100 Mb/s). You cannot configure half-duplex mode for interfaces
operating at 1000 Mb/s.
Beginning with Cisco IOS Release 12.2(20)SE1, you can configure
the duplex setting when the speed is set to auto.
For more information about duplex settings, see the “Speed and
Duplex Configuration Guidelines” section on page 11-18.
Step 6 show interfaces interface-id Display the interface speed and duplex mode configuration.
Use the no speed and no duplex interface configuration commands to return the interface to the default
speed and duplex settings (autonegotiate). To return all interface settings to the defaults, use the default
interface interface-id interface configuration command.
This example shows how to set the interface speed to 10 Mb/s and the duplex mode to half on a
10/100 Mb/s port:
Switch(config)# interface fasttethernet0/3
Switch(config-if)# speed 10
Switch(config-if)# duplex half
This example shows how to set the interface speed to 100 Mb/s on a 10/100/1000 Mb/s port:
Switch(config-if)# speed 100

OL-8553-06 11-19
Configuring IEEE 802.3x Flow Control

Flow control enables connected Ethernet ports to control traffic rates during congestion by allowing
congested nodes to pause link operation at the other end. If one port experiences congestion and cannot
receive any more traffic, it notifies the other port by sending a pause frame to stop sending until the
condition clears. Upon receipt of a pause frame, the sending device stops sending any data packets,
which prevents any loss of data packets during the congestion period.
Note Catalyst 3560 ports can receive, but not send, pause frames.
You use the flowcontrol interface configuration command to set the interface’s ability to receive pause
frames to on, off, or desired. The default state is off.
When set to desired, an interface can operate with an attached device that is required to send
flow-control packets or with an attached device that is not required to but can send flow-control packets.
These rules apply to flow control settings on the device:
• receive on (or desired): The port cannot send pause frames but can operate with an attached device
that is required to or can send pause frames; the port can receive pause frames.
• receive off: Flow control does not operate in either direction. In case of congestion, no indication
is given to the link partner, and no pause frames are sent or received by either device.
Note For details on the command settings and the resulting flow control resolution on local and remote ports,
see the flowcontrol interface configuration command in the command reference for this release.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure flow control on an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the physical interface to be configured, and enter
Step 3 flowcontrol {receive} {on | off | desired} Configure the flow control mode for the port.
Step 5 show interfaces interface-id Verify the interface flow control settings.
To disable flow control, use the flowcontrol receive off interface configuration command.
This example shows how to turn on flow control on a port:
Switch(config-if)# flowcontrol receive on

11-20 OL-8553-06
Configuring Auto-MDIX on an Interface

When automatic medium-dependent interface crossover (auto-MDIX) is enabled on an interface, the
interface automatically detects the required cable connection type (straight through or crossover) and
configures the connection appropriately. When connecting switches without the auto-MDIX feature, you
must use straight-through cables to connect to devices such as servers, workstations, or routers and
crossover cables to connect to other switches or repeaters. With auto-MDIX enabled, you can use either
type of cable to connect to other devices, and the interface automatically corrects for any incorrect
cabling. For more information about cabling requirements, see the hardware installation guide.
Auto-MDIX is enabled by default. When you enable auto-MDIX, you must also set the interface speed
and duplex to auto so that the feature operates correctly. Auto-MDIX is supported on all 10/100 and
10/100/1000-Mb/s interfaces and on 10/100/1000BASE-TX small form-factor pluggable (SFP)-module
interfaces. It is not supported on 1000BASE-SX or -LX SFP module interfaces.
Table 11-3 shows the link states that result from auto-MDIX settings and correct and incorrect cabling.
Table 11-3 Link Conditions and Auto-MDIX Settings
Local Side Auto-MDIX Remote Side Auto-MDIX With Correct Cabling With Incorrect Cabling
On On Link up Link up
On Off Link up Link up
Off On Link up Link up
Off Off Link up Link down
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure auto-MDIX on an interface:
Command Purpose
configuration mode.
Step 3 speed auto Configure the interface to autonegotiate speed with the connected device.
Step 4 duplex auto Configure the interface to autonegotiate duplex mode with the connected
device.
Step 5 mdix auto Enable auto-MDIX on the interface.
Step 7 show controllers ethernet-controller Verify the operational state of the auto-MDIX feature on the interface.
interface-id phy
To disable auto-MDIX, use the no mdix auto interface configuration command.

This example shows how to enable auto-MDIX on a port:
Switch(config-if)# speed auto
Switch(config-if)# duplex auto
Switch(config-if)# mdix auto

OL-8553-06 11-21
Configuring a Power Management Mode on a PoE Port

For most situations, the default configuration (auto mode) works well, providing plug-and-play
operation. No further configuration is required. However, use the following procedure to give a PoE port
higher priority, to make it data only, or to specify a maximum wattage to disallow high-power powered
devices on a port.
Note When you make PoE configuration changes, the port being configured drops power. Depending on the
new configuration, the state of the other PoE ports, and the state of the power budget, the port might not
be powered up again. For example, port 1 is in the auto and on state, and you configure it for static mode.
The switch removes power from port 1, detects the powered device, and repowers the port. If port 1 is
in the auto and on state and you configure it with a maximum wattage of 10 W, the switch removes power
from the port and then redetects the powered device. The switch repowers the port only if the powered
device is a Class 1, Class 2, or a Cisco-only powered device.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a power management mode on a
PoE-capable port:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the physical port to be configured, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 3 power inline {auto [max max-wattage] | Configure the PoE mode on the port. The keywords have these meanings:
never | static [max max-wattage]}
• auto—Enable powered-device detection. If enough power is
available, automatically allocate power to the PoE port after device
detection. This is the default setting.
• (Optional) max max-wattage—Limit the power allowed on the port.
The range is 4000 to 15400 milliwatts. If no value is specified, the
maximum is allowed (15400 milliwatts).
• never—Disable device detection, and disable power to the port.
Note If a port has a Cisco powered device connected to it, do not use
the power inline never command to configure the port. A false
link-up can occur, placing the port into an error-disabled state.
• static—Enable powered-device detection. Pre-allocate (reserve)

power for a port before the switch discovers the powered device. The
switch reserves power for this port even when no device is connected
and guarantees that power will be provided upon device detection.
The switch allocates power to a port configured in static mode before it
allocates power to a port configured in auto mode.
Step 5 show power inline [interface-id] Display PoE status for a switch or for the specified interface.

11-22 OL-8553-06
For information about the output of the show power inline user EXEC command, see the command
reference for this release. For more information about PoE-related commands, see the “Troubleshooting
Power over Ethernet Switch Ports” section on page 47-12. For information about configuring voice
VLAN, see Chapter 15, “Configuring Voice VLAN.”
Budgeting Power for Devices Connected to a PoE Port

When Cisco powered devices are connected to PoE ports, the switch uses Cisco Discovery Protocol
(CDP) to determine the actual power consumption of the devices, and the switch adjusts the power
budget accordingly. The CDP protocol works with Cisco powered devices and does not apply to IEEE
third-party powered devices. For these devices, when the switch grants a power request, the switch adjusts
the power budget according to the powered-device IEEE classification. If the powered device is a
Class 0 (class status unknown) or a Class 3, the switch budgets 15,400 milliwatts for the device,
regardless of the actual amount of power needed. If the powered device reports a higher class than its
actual consumption or does not support power classification (defaults to Class 0), the switch can power
fewer devices because it uses the IEEE class information to track the global power budget.
By using the power inline consumption wattage configuration command, you can override the default
power requirement specified by the IEEE classification. The difference between what is mandated by
the IEEE classification and what is actually needed by the device is reclaimed into the global power
budget for use by additional devices. You can then extend the switch power budget and use it more
effectively.
For example, if the switch budgets 15,400 milliwatts on each PoE port, you can connect only 24 Class 0
powered devices. If your Class 0 device power requirement is actually 5000 milliwatts, you can set the
consumption wattage to 5000 milliwatts and connect up to 48 devices. The total PoE output power
available on a 24-port or 48-port switch is 370,000 milliwatts.
Caution You should carefully plan your switch power budget and make certain not to oversubscribe the power
supply.
Note When you manually configure the power budget, you must also consider the power loss over the cable
between the switch and the powered device.
When you enter the power inline consumption default wattage or the no power inline consumption
default global configuration command, or the power inline consumption wattage or the no power
inline consumption interface configuration command this caution message appears:
%CAUTION: Interface interface-id: Misconfiguring the 'power inline consumption/allocation'
command may cause damage to the switch and void your warranty. Take precaution not to
oversubscribe the power supply.Refer to documentation.
If the power supply is over-subscribed to by up to 20 percent, the switch continues to operate but its
reliability is reduced. If the power supply is subscribed to by more than 20 percent, the short-circuit
protection circuitry triggers and shuts the switch down.
For more information about the IEEE power classifications, see the “Power over Ethernet Ports” section
on page 11-7.

OL-8553-06 11-23
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the amount of power budgeted to a
powered device connected to each PoE port on a switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no cdp run (Optional) Disable CDP.
Step 3 power inline consumption default Configure the power consumption of powered devices connected to each
wattage the PoE port on the switch. The range for each device is 4000 to
15400 milliwatts. The default is 15400 milliwatts.
Step 5 show power inline consumption Display the power consumption status.
To return to the default setting, use the no power inline consumption default global configuration
command.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure amount of power budgeted to a
powered device connected to a specific PoE port:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no cdp run (Optional) Disable CDP.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the physical port to be configured, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 4 power inline consumption wattage Configure the power consumption of a powered device connected to a
PoE port on the switch. The range for each device is 4000 to
15400 milliwatts. The default is 15400 milliwatts.
Step 6 show power inline consumption Display the power consumption status.
To return to the default setting, use the no power inline consumption interface configuration command.
For information about the output of the show power inline consumption privileged EXEC command,
Adding a Description for an Interface

You can add a description about an interface to help you remember its function. The description appears
in the output of these privileged EXEC commands: show configuration, show running-config, and
show interfaces.

11-24 OL-8553-06
Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to add a description for an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface for which you are adding a description, and enter
Step 3 description string Add a description (up to 240 characters) for an interface.
Step 5 show interfaces interface-id description Verify your entry.
or
show running-config
Use the no description interface configuration command to delete the description.

This example shows how to add a description on a port and how to verify the description:
Switch(config-if)# description Connects to Marketing
Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet0/2 description
Interface Status Protocol Description
Gi0/2 admin down down Connects to Marketing

The Catalyst 3560 switch supports these types of Layer 3 interfaces:
• SVIs: You should configure SVIs for any VLANs for which you want to route traffic. SVIs are
created when you enter a VLAN ID following the interface vlan global configuration command. To
delete an SVI, use the no interface vlan global configuration command. You cannot delete interface
VLAN 1.
Note When you create an SVI, it does not become active until it is associated with a physical port.
For information about assigning Layer 2 ports to VLANs, see Chapter 13, “Configuring
VLANs.”
When configuring SVIs, you can also configure SVI autostate exclude on a port in the SVI to
exclude that port from being included in determining SVI line-state status. See the “Configuring SVI
Autostate Exclude” section on page 11-27.
• Routed ports: Routed ports are physical ports configured to be in Layer 3 mode by using the no
switchport interface configuration command.
• Layer 3 EtherChannel ports: EtherChannel interfaces made up of routed ports.
EtherChannel port interfaces are described in Chapter 35, “Configuring EtherChannels and
Link-State Tracking.”

OL-8553-06 11-25
A Layer 3 switch can have an IP address assigned to each routed port and SVI.
There is no defined limit to the number of SVIs and routed ports that can be configured in a switch.
However, the interrelationship between the number of SVIs and routed ports and the number of other
features being configured might have an impact on CPU usage because of hardware limitations. If the
switch is using maximum hardware resources, attempts to create a routed port or SVI have these results:
• If you try to create a new routed port, the switch generates a message that there are not enough
resources to convert the interface to a routed port, and the interface remains as a switchport.
• If you try to create an extended-range VLAN, an error message is generated, and the extended-range
VLAN is rejected.
• If the switch is notified by VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) of a new VLAN, it sends a message that
there are not enough hardware resources available and shuts down the VLAN. The output of the
show vlan user EXEC command shows the VLAN in a suspended state.
• If the switch attempts to boot up with a configuration that has more VLANs and routed ports than
hardware can support, the VLANs are created, but the routed ports are shut down, and the switch
sends a message that this was due to insufficient hardware resources.
All Layer 3 interfaces require an IP address to route traffic. This procedure shows how to configure an
interface as a Layer 3 interface and how to assign an IP address to an interface.
Note If the physical port is in Layer 2 mode (the default), you must enter the no switchport interface
configuration command to put the interface into Layer 3 mode. Entering a no switchport command
disables and then re-enables the interface, which might generate messages on the device to which the
interface is connected. Furthermore, when you put an interface that is in Layer 2 mode into Layer 3
mode, the previous configuration information related to the affected interface might be lost, and the
interface is returned to its default configuration.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a Layer 3 interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface {{fastethernet | gigabitethernet} interface-id} Specify the interface to be configured as a Layer 3
| {vlan vlan-id} | {port-channel port-channel-number} interface, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 no switchport For physical ports only, enter Layer 3 mode.
Step 4 ip address ip_address subnet_mask Configure the IP address and IP subnet.
Step 5 no shutdown Enable the interface.
Step 7 show interfaces [interface-id] Verify the configuration.
show ip interface [interface-id]
show running-config interface [interface-id]
To remove an IP address from an interface, use the no ip address interface configuration command.

11-26 OL-8553-06
Configuring the System MTU
This example shows how to configure a port as a routed port and to assign it an IP address:
Configuring SVI Autostate Exclude

Configuring SVI autostate exclude on an access or trunk port in an SVI excludes that port in the
calculation of the status of the SVI (up or down line state) even if it belongs to the same VLAN. When
the excluded port is in the up state, and all other ports in the VLAN are in the down state, the SVI state
is changed to down.
At least one port in the VLAN should be up and not excluded to keep the SVI line state up. You can use
this command to exclude the monitoring port status when determining the status of the SVI.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to exclude a port from SVI state-change
calculations:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify a Layer 2 interface (physical port or port
channel), and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 switchport autostate exclude Exclude the access or trunk port when defining the
status of an SVI line state (up or down)
Step 5 show running config interface interface-id (Optional) Show the running configuration.
show interface interface-id switchport Verify the configuration.
This example shows how to configure an access or trunk port in an SVI to be excluded from the status
calculation:
Switch(config-if)# switchport autostate exclude

The default maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for frames received and transmitted on all interfaces
on the switch is 1500 bytes. You can increase the MTU size for all interfaces operating at 10 or 100 Mb/s
by using the system mtu global configuration command. You can increase the MTU size to support
jumbo frames on all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces by using the system mtu jumbo global configuration
command. You can change the MTU size for routed ports by using the system mtu routing global

OL-8553-06 11-27
Note You cannot configure a routing MTU size that exceeds the system MTU size. If you change the system
MTU size to a value smaller than the currently configured routing MTU size, the configuration change
is accepted, but not applied until the next switch reset. When the configuration change takes effect, the
routing MTU size automatically defaults to the new system MTU size.
Gigabit Ethernet ports are not affected by the system mtu command; 10/100 ports are not affected by
the system mtu jumbo command. If you do not configure the system mtu jumbo command, the setting
of the system mtu command applies to all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.
You cannot set the MTU size for an individual interface; you set it for all 10/100 or all Gigabit Ethernet
interfaces on the switch. When you change the system or jumbo MTU size, you must reset the switch
before the new configuration takes effect.The system mtu routing command does not require a switch
reset to take effect.
Frames sizes that can be received by the switch CPU are limited to 1998 bytes, no matter what value was
entered with the system mtu or system mtu jumbo commands. Although frames that are forwarded or
routed are typically not received by the CPU, in some cases packets are sent to the CPU, such as traffic
sent to control traffic, SNMP, Telnet, or routing protocols.
Routed packets are subjected to MTU checks on the output ports. The MTU value used for routed ports
is derived from the applied system mtu value (not the system mtu jumbo value). That is, the routed
MTU is never greater than the system MTU for any VLAN. The routing protocols use the system MTU
value when negotiating adjacencies and the MTU of the link. For example, the Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF) protocol uses this MTU value before setting up an adjacency with a peer router. To view the
MTU value for routed packets for a specific VLAN, use the show platform port-asic mvid privileged
EXEC command.
Note If Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces are configured to accept frames greater than the 10/100 interfaces,
jumbo frames received on a Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet interface and sent on a Layer 2 10/100 interface
are dropped.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change MTU size for all 10/100 or Gigabit
Ethernet interfaces:
Command Purpose
Step 2 system mtu bytes (Optional) Change the MTU size for all interfaces on
the switch that are operating at 10 or 100 Mb/s. The
range is 1500 to 1998 bytes; the default is 1500 bytes.
Step 3 system mtu jumbo bytes (Optional) Change the MTU size for all Gigabit
Ethernet interfaces on the switch. The range is 1500 to
9000 bytes; the default is 1500 bytes.
Step 4 system mtu routing bytes (Optional) Change the system MTU for routed ports.
The range is 1500 to the system MTU value, the
maximum MTU that can be routed for all ports.
Although larger packets can be accepted, they cannot be
routed.

11-28 OL-8553-06
Monitoring and Maintaining the Interfaces
Command Purpose
Step 6 copy running-config startup-config Save your entries in the configuration file.
If you enter a value that is outside the allowed range for the specific type of interface, the value is not
accepted.
Once the switch reloads, you can verify your settings by entering the show system mtu privileged EXEC
command.
This example shows how to set the maximum packet size for a Gigabit Ethernet port to 1800 bytes:
Switch(config)# system mtu jumbo 1800
Switch# reload
This example shows the response when you try to set Gigabit Ethernet interfaces to an out-of-range
number:
Switch(config)# system mtu jumbo 25000
^
% Invalid input detected at '^' marker.

These sections contain interface monitoring and maintenance information:
• Monitoring Interface Status, page 11-29
• Clearing and Resetting Interfaces and Counters, page 11-30
• Shutting Down and Restarting the Interface, page 11-31
Monitoring Interface Status

Commands entered at the privileged EXEC prompt display information about the interface, including
the versions of the software and the hardware, the configuration, and statistics about the interfaces.
Table 11-4 lists some of these interface monitoring commands. (You can display the full list of show
commands by using the show ? command at the privileged EXEC prompt.) These commands are fully
described in the Cisco IOS Interface Command Reference, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under
Table 11-4 Show Commands for Interfaces
Command Purpose
show interfaces [interface-id] (Optional) Display the status and configuration of all interfaces or a
specific interface.
show interfaces interface-id status [err-disabled] (Optional) Display interface status or a list of interfaces in an
show interfaces [interface-id] switchport (Optional) Display administrative and operational status of switching
(nonrouting) ports. You can use this command to find out if a port is
in routing or in switching mode.

OL-8553-06 11-29
Table 11-4 Show Commands for Interfaces (continued)
Command Purpose
show interfaces [interface-id] description (Optional) Display the description configured on an interface or all
interfaces and the interface status.
show ip interface [interface-id] (Optional) Display the usability status of all interfaces configured for
IP routing or the specified interface.
show interface [interface-id] stats (Optional) Display the input and output packets by the switching path
for the interface.
show interfaces tengigabitethernet interface-id (Optional) Display status of a connected ten gigabit module, such as
detail temperature and alarm status.
show interfaces tengigabitethernet interface-id (Optional) Display the speed and duplex settings of a connected
properties detail ten-gigabit module
show interfaces transceiver properties (Optional) Display speed, duplex, and inline power settings on the
interface.
show interfaces transceiver detail (Optional) Display temperature, voltage, or amount of current on the
interface.
show interfaces [interface-id] [{transceiver Display physical and operational status about an SFP module.
properties | detail}] module number]
show running-config interface [interface-id] Display the running configuration in RAM for the interface.
show version Display the hardware configuration, software version, the names and
sources of configuration files, and the boot images.
show controllers ethernet-controller interface-id Display the operational state of the auto-MDIX feature on the
phy interface.
show power inline [interface-id] Display PoE status for a switch or for an interface.
Clearing and Resetting Interfaces and Counters

Table 11-5 lists the privileged EXEC mode clear commands that you can use to clear counters and reset
interfaces.
Table 11-5 Clear Commands for Interfaces
Command Purpose
clear counters [interface-id] Clear interface counters.
clear interface interface-id Reset the hardware logic on an interface.
clear line [number | console 0 | vty number] Reset the hardware logic on an asynchronous serial line.
To clear the interface counters shown by the show interfaces privileged EXEC command, use the clear
counters privileged EXEC command. The clear counters command clears all current interface counters
from the interface unless you specify optional arguments that clear only a specific interface type from a
specific interface number.

11-30 OL-8553-06
Note The clear counters privileged EXEC command does not clear counters retrieved by using Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP), but only those seen with the show interface privileged EXEC
command.
Shutting Down and Restarting the Interface

Shutting down an interface disables all functions on the specified interface and marks the interface as
unavailable on all monitoring command displays. This information is communicated to other network
servers through all dynamic routing protocols. The interface is not mentioned in any routing updates.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to shut down an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface {vlan vlan-id} | {{fastethernet | gigabitethernet} Select the interface to be configured.
interface-id} | {port-channel port-channel-number}
Step 3 shutdown Shut down an interface.
Step 5 show running-config Verify your entry.
Use the no shutdown interface configuration command to restart the interface.

To verify that an interface is disabled, enter the show interfaces privileged EXEC command. A disabled
interface is shown as administratively down in the display.

OL-8553-06 11-31

11-32 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 12
Configuring Auto Smartports Macros
This chapter describes how to configure and apply Auto Smartports and static Smartports macros on the
• Understanding Auto Smartports and Static Smartports Macros, page 12-1

• Configuring Auto Smartports, page 12-2
• Configuring Static Smartports Macros, page 12-11
• Displaying Auto Smartports and Static Smartports Macros, page 12-14
Understanding Auto Smartports and Static Smartports Macros

Auto Smartports macros dynamically configure ports based on the device type detected on the port.
When the switch detects a new device on a port it applies the appropriate Auto Smartports macro on the
port. When there is a link-down event on the port, the switch removes the macro. For example, when you
connect a Cisco IP phone to a port, Auto Smartports automatically applies the IP phone macro. The IP
phone macro enables quality of service (QoS), security features, and a dedicated voice VLAN to ensure
proper treatment of delay-sensitive voice traffic.
In addition to Auto Smartports macros, static Smartports macros provide port configuration that you
manually apply based on the device connected to the port. When you apply a static Smartports macro
the CLI commands within the macro are added to the existing port configuration. When there is a
link-down event on the port, the switch does not remove the static macro.
Auto Smartports uses event triggers to map devices to macros. The most common event triggers are
based on Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) messages received from connected devices. The detection of
a device invokes a CDP event trigger: Cisco IP phone, Cisco wireless access point, Cisco switch, or
Cisco router. Other event triggers use MAC authentication bypass (MAB) and 802.1x authentication
messages.
The Auto Smartports macros embedded in the switch software are groups of CLI commands. The
CISCO_PHONE event detected on a port triggers the switch to apply the commands in the
CISCO_PHONE_AUTO_SMARTPORT macro. You can also create user-defined macros by using the
Cisco IOS scripting capability, which is a BASH-like language syntax for command automation and
variable replacement.

OL-8553-06 12-1
Chapter 12 Configuring Auto Smartports Macros
Configuring Auto Smartports

• Default Auto Smartports Configuration, page 12-2
• Auto Smartports Configuration Guidelines, page 12-3
• Enabling Auto Smartports, page 12-3
• Configuring Auto Smartports Built-in Macros, page 12-4
• Configuring Event Triggers, page 12-6
• Configuring Auto Smartports User-Defined Macros, page 12-9
Default Auto Smartports Configuration

• Auto Smartports is disabled.
• Cisco IOS shell is enabled.
Table 12-1 shows the Auto Smartports built-in macros that are embedded in the switch software.
Table 12-1 Auto Smartports Built-in Macros
Macro Name Description

CISCO_PHONE_AUTO_ Use this macro to apply the IP phone macro for Cisco IP phones. It enables QoS, port
SMARTPORT security, Address Resolution Protocol inspection (dynamic ARP inspection), IP source
guard, DHCP snooping, storm control and spanning-tree protection on the port.
CISCO_SWITCH_AUTO_ Use this macro to apply the switch macro for Cisco switches. It enables trunking on the
SMARTPORT port.
CISCO_ROUTER_AUTO_ Use this macro to apply the router macro for Cisco routers. It enables QoS, trunking, and
SMARTPORT spanning-tree protection on the port.
CISCO_AP_AUTO_ Use this macro to apply the wireless access point (AP) macro for Cisco APs. It enables
SMARTPORT support for an autonomous wireless access point and QoS on the port.
CISCO_LWAP_AUTO_ Use this macro to apply the light-weight wireless access point macro for Cisco light-weight
SMARTPORT wireless APs. It enables QoS, port security, dynamic ARP inspection, IP source guard,
DHCP snooping, storm control, and spanning-tree protection on the port.
CISCO_DOT1X_DESKTOP_ Use this macro to apply the desktop macro for IEEE 802.1x-authenticated devices. It
AUTO_SMARTPORT enables basic desktop configuration, including security and spanning-tree protection.
CISCO_DOT1X_EASY_AUTO Use this macro to apply the desktop macro for IEEE 802.1x-authenticated desktop devices.
_SMARTPORT It provides 802.1x, MAB, guest-VLAN, authentication-fail-VLAN support and reduces the
802.1x timeout to 3 seconds.
CISCO_DOT1X_MAB_ Use this macro to apply the desktop macro for 802.1x-, MAB-, and
GUEST_AUTO_SMARTPORT guest-VLAN-authenticated devices.
CISCO_DOT1X_MAB_ Use this macro to apply the desktop macro for 802.1x-, MAB-, and
TIMEOUT_AUTO_ guest-VLAN-authenticated devices configured with an aggressive timeout.
SMARTPORT
CISCO_DOT1X_AUTH_ Use this macro to apply the desktop macro for 802.1x-, MAB-, and
FAIL_AUTO_SMARTPORT authentication-fail-VLAN-authenticated devices.
CISCO_DOT1X_CRITICAL_ Use this macro to apply the desktop macro for 802.1x-, MAB-, and
AUTO_SMARTPORT critical-VLAN-authenticated devices.

12-2 OL-8553-06
Auto Smartports Configuration Guidelines

• The built-in macros cannot be deleted or changed. However, you can override a built-in macro by
creating a user-defined macro with the same name. To restore the original built-in macro, delete the
user-defined macro.
• To avoid system conflicts when Auto Smartports macros are applied, remove all port configuration
except for 802.1x authentication.
• If the macro conflicts with the original configuration, some macro commands might not be applied,
or some antimacro commands might not be removed. (The antimacro is the portion of the applied
macro that removes it at link down.)
For example, if 802.1x authentication is enabled, you cannot remove switchport-mode access
configuration. Remove the 802.1x authentication before removing the switchport mode
configuration.
• A port should not be a member of an EtherChannel when applying Auto Smartports macros.
• The built-in macro default data VLAN is VLAN 1. The default voice VLAN is VLAN 2. You should
modify the built-in macro default values if your switch uses different VLANs. To view all built-in
macro default values, use the show shell functions privileged EXEC command.
• For 802.1x authentication or MAB, configure the RADIUS server to support the Cisco
attribute-value (av) pair auto-smart-port=event trigger to detect non-Cisco devices.
• For stationary devices that do not support CDP, MAB, or 802.1x authentication, such as network
printers, we recommend that you disable Auto Smartports on the port.
• If authentication is enabled on a port, the switch ignores CDP unless the cdp-fallback keyword is
in the macro auto global processing global configuration command.
• The order of CLI commands within the macro and the corresponding antimacro can be different.
Enabling Auto Smartports

To configure the switch to automatically apply Auto Smartports macros on all ports, use the macro auto
global processing global configuration command. To disable Auto Smartports macros on a specific port,
use the no auto global processing in the interface mode.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps.
Command Purpose
Step 2 macro auto global processing Globally enable Auto Smartports on the switch.
[cdp-fallback]
(Optional) Use the cdp-fallback keyword to enable the switch to use
CDP capability information when a port is 802.1x-enabled and the
RADIUS server does not send an event trigger.
Step 4 show running-config Verify that Auto Smartports is enabled.
To return to the default setting, use the no macro auto global processing global configuration
command.

OL-8553-06 12-3
You can use the show shell functions and the show shell triggers privileged EXEC command to display
the event triggers, the built-in macros, and the built-in macro default values.
This example shows how enable Auto Smartports on the switch and how to disable the feature on a
specific interface:
Switch(config)# macro auto global processing
Switch(config)# interface interface_id
Switch(config-if)# no macro auto processing
Configuring Auto Smartports Built-in Macros

The switch automatically maps from event triggers to built-in macros. You can replace the built-in macro
default values with values that are specific to your switch.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps:
Command Purpose

12-4 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 2 macro auto execute event trigger Define mapping from an event trigger to a built-in macro.
builtin built-in macro name
Specify an event trigger:
[parameter=value] [parameter=value]
• CISCO_PHONE_EVENT
• CISCO_SWITCH_EVENT
• CISCO_ROUTER_EVENT
• CISCO_WIRELESS_AP_EVENT
• CISCO_WIRELESS_LIGHTWEIGHT_AP_EVENT
• WORD—Apply a user-defined event trigger.
Specify a builtin built-in macro name:
• CISCO_PHONE_AUTO_SMARTPORT
(Optional) Specify the parameter values: $ACCESS_VLAN=(1) and
$VOICE_VLAN=(2).
• CISCO_SWITCH_AUTO_SMARTPORT
(Optional) Specify the parameter values: $NATIVE_VLAN=(1).
• CISCO_ROUTER_AUTO_SMARTPORT
• CISCO_AP_AUTO_SMARTPORT
• CISCO_LWAP_AUTO_SMARTPORT
(Optional) Specify the parameter values: $ACCESS_VLAN=(1).
• CISCO_DOT1X_DESKTOP_AUTO_SMARTPORT
• CISCO_DOT1X_EASY_AUTO_SMARTPORT
• CISCO_DOT1X_MAB_GUEST_AUTO_SMARTPORT
• CISCO_DOT1X_MAB_TIMEOUT_AUTO_SMARTPORT
• CISCO_DOT1X_AUTH_FAIL_AUTO_SMARTPORT
• CISCO_DOT1X_CRITICAL_AUTO_SMARTPORT
(Optional) Specify the parameter values: $CRITICAL_VLAN=(1).
(Optional) parameter=value—Replace default values that begin with $.
Enter new values in the form of name value pair separated by a space:
[<name1>=<value1> <name2>=<value2>...]. Default values are shown in
parenthesis.

OL-8553-06 12-5
This example shows how to use two built-in Auto Smartports macros for connecting Cisco switches and
Cisco IP phones to the switch. This example modifies the default voice VLAN, access VLAN, and native
VLAN for the trunk interface:
Switch(config)#!!! the next command modifies the access and voice vlans
Switch(config)#!!! for the built in Cisco IP phone auto smartport macro
Switch(config)# macro auto execute CISCO_PHONE_EVENT builtin CISCO_PHONE_AUTO_SMARTPORT
ACCESS_VLAN=10 VOICE_VLAN=20
Switch(config)#
Switch(config)#!!! the next command modifies the Native vlan used for inter switch trunks
Switch(config)# macro auto execute CISCO_SWITCH_EVENT builtin CISCO_SWITCH_AUTO_SMARTPORT
NATIVE_VLAN=10
Switch(config)#
Switch(config)#!!! the next command enables auto smart ports globally
Switch(config)# macro auto global processing cdp-fallback
Switch(config)#
Switch# !!! here's the running configuration of the interface connected

Switch# !!! to another Cisco Switch after the Macro is applied
Switch#
Switch# show running-config interface Gi1/0/1
Current configuration : 284 bytes

!
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q
switchport trunk native vlan 10
switchport mode trunk
srr-queue bandwidth share 10 10 60 20
queue-set 2
priority-queue out
mls qos trust cos
auto qos voip trust
macro description CISCO_SWITCH_EVENT
end
Configuring Event Triggers

When using MAB or 802.1x authentication to trigger Auto Smartports macros, you need to create an
event trigger that corresponds to the Cisco attribute-value pair (auto-smart-port=event trigger) sent by
the RADIUS server.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure an event trigger.
Command Purpose
Step 2 shell trigger identifier description Specify the event trigger identifier and description. The identifier should
have no spaces or hyphens between words.
Step 4 show shell triggers Display the event triggers on the switch.

12-6 OL-8553-06
Use the no shell trigger identifier global configuration command to delete the event trigger.
This example shows how to map a user-defined event trigger called RADIUS_MAB_EVENT to the
built-in macro CISCO_DOT1X_MAB_GUEST_AUTO_SMARTPORT, replace the default VLAN with
VLAN 10, and how to verify the entries.
a. Connect the device to a MAB-enabled switch port.
b. On the RADIUS server, set the attribute-value pair to auto-smart-port=RADIUS_MAB_EVENT.
c. On the switch, create the event trigger RADIUS_MAB_EVENT.
d. The switch recognizes the attribute-value pair=RADIUS_MAB_EVENT response from the
RADIUS server and applies the macro CISCO_DOT1X_MAB_GUEST_AUTO_SMARTPORT.
Switch(config)# !!! create a user defined trigger and map
Switch(config)# !!! a system defined macro to it
Switch(config)# !!! first create the trigger event
Switch(config)# shell trigger RADIUS_MAB_EVENT MAC_AuthBypass Event
Switch(config)#
Switch(config)#!!! map a system defined macro to the trigger event
Switch(config)# macro auto execute RADIUS_MAB_EVENT builtin ?
CISCO_DOT1X_DESKTOP_AUTO_SMARTPORT
CISCO_DOT1X_EASY_AUTO_SMARTPORT
CISCO_DOT1X_MAB_GUEST_AUTO_SMARTPORT
CISCO_DOT1X_MAB_TIMEOUT_AUTO_SMARTPORT
CISCO_DOT1X_AUTH_FAIL_AUTO_SMARTPORT
CISCO_DOT1X_CRITICAL_AUTO_SMARTPORT
CISCO_AP_AUTO_SMARTPORT
CISCO_LWAP_AUTO_SMARTPORT
CISCO_PHONE_AUTO_SMARTPORT
CISCO_ROUTER_AUTO_SMARTPORT
CISCO_SWITCH_AUTO_SMARTPORT
LINE <cr>
Switch(config)# macro auto execute RADIUS_MAB_EVENT builtin
CISCO_DOT1X_MAB_GUEST_AUTO_SMARTPORT ACCESS_VLAN=10
Switch# show shell triggers
User defined triggers
---------------------
Trigger Id: RADIUS_MAB_EVENT
Trigger description: MAC_AuthBypass Event
Trigger environment:
Trigger mapping function: CISCO_DOT1X_MAB_GUEST_AUTO_SMARTPORT
<output truncated>
This example shows how to use the show shell triggers privileged EXEC command to view the event
triggers in the switch software:
Switch# show shell triggers
User defined triggers

---------------------
Built-in triggers
-----------------
Trigger Id: CISCO_PHONE_EVENT
Trigger description: Event for ip-phone macro
Trigger environment: ACCESS_VLAN=1 VOICE_VLAN=2
Trigger mapping function: CISCO_PHONE_AUTO_SMARTPORT

OL-8553-06 12-7
Trigger Id: CISCO_ROUTER_EVENT

Trigger description: Event for router macro
Trigger environment: NATIVE_VLAN=1
Trigger mapping function: CISCO_ROUTER_AUTO_SMARTPORT
Trigger Id: CISCO_SWITCH_EVENT

Trigger description: Event for switch macro
Trigger mapping function: CISCO_SWITCH_AUTO_SMARTPORT
Trigger Id: CISCO_WIRELESS_AP_EVENT

Trigger description: Event for Wireless Access Point macro
Trigger mapping function: CISCO_AP_AUTO_SMARTPORT
Trigger Id: CISCO_WIRELESS_LIGHTWEIGHT_AP_EVENT

Trigger description: Event for Wireless Lightweight Access Point macro
Trigger mapping function: CISCO_LWAP_AUTO_SMARTPORT
This example shows how to use the show shell functions privileged EXEC command to view the built-in
macros in the switch software:
Switch# show shell functions
#User defined functions:
#Built-in functions:
function CISCO_AP_AUTO_SMARTPORT () {
if [[ $LINKUP -eq YES ]]; then
conf t
interface $INTERFACE
macro description $TRIGGER
switchport trunk native vlan $NATIVE_VLAN
switchport trunk allowed vlan ALL
switchport nonegotiate
auto qos voip trust
mls qos trust cos
exit
end
fi
if [[ $LINKUP -eq NO ]]; then
conf t
no macro description
no switchport nonegotiate
no switchport trunk native vlan $NATIVE_VLAN
no switchport trunk allowed vlan ALL
no auto qos voip trust
no mls qos trust cos
if [[ $AUTH_ENABLED -eq NO ]]; then
no switchport mode
no switchport trunk encapsulation
fi
exit
end
fi
}

12-8 OL-8553-06
function CISCO_SWITCH_AUTO_SMARTPORT () {
conf t
auto qos voip trust
switchport trunk native vlan $NATIVE_VLAN
switchport trunk allowed vlan ALL
exit
end
else
conf t
no macro description
no auto qos voip trust
no switchport mode trunk
no switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q
no switchport trunk native vlan $NATIVE_VLAN
no switchport trunk allowed vlan ALL
exit
end
fi
}
<output truncated>
Configuring Auto Smartports User-Defined Macros

The Cisco IOS shell provides basic scripting capabilities for configuring the user-defined Auto
Smartports macros. These macros can contain multiple lines and can include any CLI command. You
can also define variable substitution, conditionals, functions, and triggers within the macro.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to map a user-defined event trigger to a
user-defined macro.
Command Purpose
Step 2 macro auto execute event trigger Specify a user-defined macro that maps to an event trigger.
[parameter=value] { function
{ function contents } Specify a user-defined macro to associate with the
contents }
trigger. Enter the macro contents within braces. Begin the IOS shell
commands with the left brace and end the command grouping with the right
brace.
(Optional) parameter=value—Replace default values that begin with $, enter
new values in the form of name value pair separated by a space:
[<name1>=<value1> <name2>=<value2>...].

OL-8553-06 12-9
This example shows how to map a user-defined event trigger called Cisco Digital Media Player (DMP)
to a user-defined macro.
a. Connect the DMP to an 802.1x- or MAB-enabled switch port.
b. On the RADIUS server, set the attribute-value pair to auto-smart-port =CISCO_DMP_EVENT.
c. On the switch, create the event trigger CISCO_DMP_EVENT, and enter the user-defined macro
commands shown below.
d. The switch recognizes the attribute-value pair=CISCO_DMP_EVENT response from the RADIUS
server and applies the macro associated with this event trigger.
Switch(config)# shell trigger CISCO_DMP_EVENT Cisco DMP player
Switch(config)# macro auto execute CISCO_DMP_EVENT {
conf t
switchport access vlan 1
switchport mode access
switchport port-security
switchport port-security maximum 1
switchport port-security violation restrict
switchport port-security aging time 2
switchport port-security aging type inactivity
spanning-tree portfast
spanning-tree bpduguard enable
exit
fi
if [[ $LINKUP -eq NO ]]; then
conf t
no macro description $TRIGGER
no switchport access vlan 1
if [[ $AUTH_ENABLED -eq NO ]]; then
no switchport mode access
fi
no switchport port-security
no switchport port-security maximum 1
no switchport port-security violation restrict
no switchport port-security aging time 2
no switchport port-security aging type inactivity
no spanning-tree portfast
no spanning-tree bpduguard enable
exit
fi
}
Switch(config)# end
Table 12-2 Supported Cisco IOS Shell Keywords
Command Description
{ Begin the command grouping.
} End the command grouping.
[[ Use as a conditional construct.
]] Use as a conditional construct.
else Use as a conditional construct.
-eq Use as a conditional construct.

12-10 OL-8553-06
Configuring Static Smartports Macros
Table 12-2 Supported Cisco IOS Shell Keywords (continued)
Command Description
fi Use as a conditional construct.
if Use as a conditional construct.
then Use as a conditional construct.
-z Use as a conditional construct.
$ Variables that begin with the $ character are
replaced with a parameter value.
# Use the # character to enter comment text.
Table 12-3 Unsupported Cisco IOS Shell Reserved Keywords
Command Description
| Pipeline.
case Conditional construct.
esac Conditional construct.
for Looping construct.
function Shell function.
in Conditional construct.
select Conditional construct.
time Pipeline.
until Looping construct.
while Looping construct.

This section describes how to configure and enable static Smartports macros.
• Default Static Smartports Configuration, page 12-11
• Static Smartports Configuration Guidelines, page 12-12
• Applying Static Smartports Macros, page 12-12
Default Static Smartports Configuration

There are no static Smartports macros enabled on the switch.

OL-8553-06 12-11
Table 12-4 Default Static Smartports Macros
Macro Name1 Description

cisco-global Use this global configuration macro to enable rapid PVST+, loop guard, and dynamic port error recovery
for link state failures.
cisco-desktop Use this interface configuration macro for increased network security and reliability when connecting a
desktop device, such as a PC, to a switch port.
cisco-phone Use this interface configuration macro when connecting a desktop device such as a PC with a Cisco IP
Phone to a switch port. This macro is an extension of the cisco-desktop macro and provides the same
security and resiliency features, but with the addition of dedicated voice VLANs to ensure proper
treatment of delay-sensitive voice traffic.
cisco-switch Use this interface configuration macro when connecting an access switch and a distribution switch or
between access switches connected by using small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules.
cisco-router Use this interface configuration macro when connecting the switch and a WAN router.
cisco-wireless Use this interface configuration macro when connecting the switch and a wireless access point.
1. Cisco-default Smartports macros vary, depending on the software version running on your switch.
Static Smartports Configuration Guidelines

• When a macro is applied globally to a switch or to a switch interface, all existing configuration on
the interface is retained. This is helpful when applying an incremental configuration.
• If a command fails because of a syntax or a configuration error, the macro continues to apply the
remaining commands. You can use the macro global trace macro-name global configuration
command or the macro trace macro-name interface configuration command to apply and debug a
macro to find any syntax or configuration errors.
• Some CLI commands are specific to certain interface types. If you apply a macro to an interface that
does not accept the configuration, the macro fails the syntax or the configuration check, and the
switch returns an error message.
• Applying a macro to an interface range is the same as applying a macro to a single interface. When
you use an interface range, the macro is applied sequentially to each interface within the range. If a
macro command fails on one interface, it is still applied to the remaining interfaces.
• When you apply a macro to a switch or a switch interface, the macro name is automatically added
to the switch or interface. You can display the applied commands and macro names by using the
show running-config user EXEC command.
Applying Static Smartports Macros

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to apply a static Smartports macro:
Command Purpose
Step 1 show parser macro Display the Cisco-default static Smartports macros embedded in the
switch software.
Step 2 show parser macro name macro-name Display the specific macro that you want to apply.

12-12 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 4 macro global {apply | trace} Apply each individual command defined in the macro to the switch by
macro-name [parameter {value}] entering macro global apply macro-name. Specify macro global trace
[parameter {value}] [parameter macro-name to apply and to debug a macro to find any syntax or
{value}] configuration errors.
Append the macro with the required values by using the parameter
value keywords. Keywords that begin with $ require a unique parameter
value.
You can use the macro global apply macro-name ? command to display
a list of any required values for the macro. If you apply a macro without
entering the keyword values, the commands are invalid and are not
applied.
(Optional) Specify unique parameter values that are specific to the
switch. You can enter up to three keyword-value pairs. Parameter
keyword matching is case sensitive. The corresponding value replaces
all matching occurrences of the keyword.
Step 5 interface interface-id (Optional) Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface
on which to apply the macro.
Step 6 default interface interface-id (Optional) Clear all configuration from the specified interface.
Step 7 macro {apply | trace} macro-name Apply each individual command defined in the macro to the port by
[parameter {value}] [parameter entering macro global apply macro-name. Specify macro global trace
{value}] [parameter {value}] macro-name to apply and to debug a macro to find any syntax or
configuration errors.
Append the macro with the required values by using the parameter
value keywords. Keywords that begin with $ require a unique parameter
value.
You can use the macro global apply macro-name ? command to display
a list of any required values for the macro. If you apply a macro without
entering the keyword values, the commands are invalid and are not
applied.
(Optional) Specify unique parameter values that are specific to the
switch. You can enter up to three keyword-value pairs. Parameter
keyword matching is case sensitive. The corresponding value replaces
all matching occurrences of the keyword.
Step 9 show running-config interface Verify that the macro is applied to an interface.
interface-id
You can only delete a global macro-applied configuration on a switch by entering the no version of each
command in the macro. You can delete a macro-applied configuration on a port by entering the default
interface interface-id interface configuration command.

OL-8553-06 12-13
Displaying Auto Smartports and Static Smartports Macros
This example shows how to display the cisco-desktop macro, to apply the macro and to set the access
VLAN ID to 25 on an interface:
Switch# show parser macro cisco-desktop
--------------------------------------------------------------
Macro name : cisco-desktop
Macro type : default
# Basic interface - Enable data VLAN only

# Recommended value for access vlan (AVID) should not be 1
switchport access vlan $AVID
switchport mode access
# Enable port security limiting port to a single

# MAC address -- that of desktop
switchport port-security
switchport port-security maximum 1
# Ensure port-security age is greater than one minute

# and use inactivity timer
switchport port-security violation restrict
switchport port-security aging time 2
switchport port-security aging type inactivity
# Configure port as an edge network port

spanning-tree portfast
spanning-tree bpduguard enable
--------------------------------------------------------------
Switch#
Switch(config-if)# macro apply cisco-desktop $AVID 25
Displaying Auto Smartports and Static Smartports Macros

To display the Auto Smartports and static Smartports macros, use one or more of the privileged EXEC
commands in Table 12-5.
Table 12-5 Commands for Displaying Auto Smartports and Static Smartports Macros
Command Purpose
show parser macro Displays all static Smartports macros.
show parser macro name macro-name Displays a specific static Smartports macro.
show parser macro brief Displays the static Smartports macro names.
show parser macro description [interface Displays the static Smartports macro description for all interfaces or
interface-id] for a specified interface.
show shell Displays information about Auto Smartports event triggers and
macros.

12-14 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 13
Configuring VLANs
This chapter describes how to configure normal-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1 to 1005) and
extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4094) on the Catalyst 3560 switch. It includes information
about VLAN membership modes, VLAN configuration modes, VLAN trunks, and dynamic VLAN
assignment from a VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS).

• Understanding VLANs, page 13-1
• Configuring Normal-Range VLANs, page 13-4
• Configuring Extended-Range VLANs, page 13-12
• Displaying VLANs, page 13-16
• Configuring VLAN Trunks, page 13-16
• Configuring VMPS, page 13-27
Understanding VLANs
A VLAN is a switched network that is logically segmented by function, project team, or application,
without regard to the physical locations of the users. VLANs have the same attributes as physical LANs,
but you can group end stations even if they are not physically located on the same LAN segment. Any
switch port can belong to a VLAN, and unicast, broadcast, and multicast packets are forwarded and
flooded only to end stations in the VLAN. Each VLAN is considered a logical network, and packets
destined for stations that do not belong to the VLAN must be forwarded through a router or a switch
supporting fallback bridging, as shown in Figure 13-1. Because a VLAN is considered a separate logical
network, it contains its own bridge Management Information Base (MIB) information and can support
its own implementation of spanning tree. See Chapter 17, “Configuring STP.”
Note Before you create VLANs, you must decide whether to use VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) to maintain
global VLAN configuration for your network. For more information on VTP, see Chapter 16,
“Configuring VTP.”

OL-8553-06 13-1
Chapter 13 Configuring VLANs
Understanding VLANs
Figure 13-1 shows an example of VLANs segmented into logically defined networks.
Figure 13-1 VLANs as Logically Defined Networks
Engineering Marketing Accounting

VLAN VLAN VLAN
Cisco router
Floor 3
Gigabit
Ethernet
Floor 2
Floor 1
90571
VLANs are often associated with IP subnetworks. For example, all the end stations in a particular IP
subnet belong to the same VLAN. Interface VLAN membership on the switch is assigned manually on
an interface-by-interface basis. When you assign switch interfaces to VLANs by using this method, it is
known as interface-based, or static, VLAN membership.
Traffic between VLANs must be routed or fallback bridged. The switch can route traffic between
VLANs by using switch virtual interfaces (SVIs). An SVI must be explicitly configured and assigned an
IP address to route traffic between VLANs. For more information, see the “Switch Virtual Interfaces”
section on page 11-4 and the “Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces” section on page 11-25.
Note If you plan to configure many VLANs on the switch and to not enable routing, you can use the sdm
prefer vlan global configuration command to set the Switch Database Management (sdm) feature to the
VLAN template, which configures system resources to support the maximum number of unicast MAC
addresses. For more information on the SDM templates, see Chapter 8, “Configuring SDM Templates,”
or see the sdm prefer command in the command reference for this release.
Supported VLANs
The switch supports VLANs in VTP client, server, and transparent modes. VLANs are identified by a
number from 1 to 4094. VLAN IDs 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs.
VTP only learns normal-range VLANs, with VLAN IDs 1 to 1005; VLAN IDs greater than 1005 are
extended-range VLANs and are not stored in the VLAN database. The switch must be in VTP
transparent mode when you create VLAN IDs from 1006 to 4094.

13-2 OL-8553-06
Understanding VLANs
Although the switch supports a total of 1005 (normal range and extended range) VLANs, the number of
routed ports, SVIs, and other configured features affects the use of the switch hardware.
The switch supports per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (PVST+) or rapid PVST+ with a maximum of 128
spanning-tree instances. One spanning-tree instance is allowed per VLAN. See the “Normal-Range
VLAN Configuration Guidelines” section on page 13-6 for more information about the number of
spanning-tree instances and the number of VLANs. The switch supports both Inter-Switch Link (ISL)
and IEEE 802.1Q trunking methods for sending VLAN traffic over Ethernet ports.
VLAN Port Membership Modes

You configure a port to belong to a VLAN by assigning a membership mode that specifies the kind of
traffic the port carries and the number of VLANs to which it can belong. Table 13-1 lists the membership
modes and membership and VTP characteristics.
Table 13-1 Port Membership Modes and Characteristics
Membership Mode VLAN Membership Characteristics VTP Characteristics

Static-access A static-access port can belong to one VLAN and is VTP is not required. If you do not want
manually assigned to that VLAN. VTP to globally propagate information, set
the VTP mode to transparent. To
For more information, see the “Assigning Static-Access
participate in VTP, there must be at least
Ports to a VLAN” section on page 13-11.
one trunk port on the switch connected to a
trunk port of a second switch.
Trunk (ISL or A trunk port is a member of all VLANs by default, VTP is recommended but not required.
IEEE 802.1Q) including extended-range VLANs, but membership can be VTP maintains VLAN configuration
limited by configuring the allowed-VLAN list. You can consistency by managing the addition,
also modify the pruning-eligible list to block flooded deletion, and renaming of VLANs on a
traffic to VLANs on trunk ports that are included in the network-wide basis. VTP exchanges
list. VLAN configuration messages with other
switches over trunk links.
For information about configuring trunk ports, see the
“Configuring an Ethernet Interface as a Trunk Port”
Dynamic access A dynamic-access port can belong to one VLAN (VLAN VTP is required.
ID 1 to 4094) and is dynamically assigned by a VMPS. The
Configure the VMPS and the client with
VMPS can be a Catalyst 5000 or Catalyst 6500 series
the same VTP domain name.
switch, for example, but never a Catalyst 3560 switch. The
Catalyst 3560 switch is a VMPS client. To participate in VTP, at least one trunk
port on the switch must be connected to a
You can have dynamic-access ports and trunk ports on the trunk port of a second switch.
same switch, but you must connect the dynamic-access
port to an end station or hub and not to another switch.
For configuration information, see the “Configuring
Dynamic-Access Ports on VMPS Clients” section on
page 13-30.

OL-8553-06 13-3
Configuring Normal-Range VLANs
Membership Mode VLAN Membership Characteristics VTP Characteristics

Voice VLAN A voice VLAN port is an access port attached to a Cisco VTP is not required; it has no effect on a
IP Phone, configured to use one VLAN for voice traffic voice VLAN.
and another VLAN for data traffic from a device attached
to the phone.
For more information about voice VLAN ports, see
Chapter 15, “Configuring Voice VLAN.”
Private VLAN A private VLAN port is a host or promiscuous port that The switch must be in VTP transparent
belongs to a private VLAN primary or secondary VLAN. mode when you configure private VLANs.
When private VLANs are configured on
For information about private VLANs, see Chapter 14,
the switch, do not change VTP mode from
“Configuring Private VLANs.”
transparent to client or server mode.
Tunnel Tunnel ports are used for IEEE 802.1Q tunneling to VTP is not required. You manually assign
(dot1q-tunnel) maintain customer VLAN integrity across a the tunnel port to a VLAN by using the
service-provider network. You configure a tunnel port on switchport access vlan interface
an edge switch in the service-provider network and configuration command.
connect it to an IEEE 802.1Q trunk port on a customer
interface, creating an asymetric link. A tunnel port belongs
to a single VLAN that is dedicated to tunneling.
For more information about tunnel ports, see Chapter 16,
“Configuring IEEE 802.1Q and Layer 2 Protocol
Tunneling.”
For more detailed definitions of access and trunk modes and their functions, see Table 13-4 on
page 13-18.
When a port belongs to a VLAN, the switch learns and manages the addresses associated with the port
on a per-VLAN basis. For more information, see the “Managing the MAC Address Table” section on
page 7-19.

Normal-range VLANs are VLANs with VLAN IDs 1 to 1005. If the switch is in VTP server or
VTP transparent mode, you can add, modify or remove configurations for VLANs 2 to 1001 in the
VLAN database. (VLAN IDs 1 and 1002 to 1005 are automatically created and cannot be removed.)
Note When the switch is in VTP transparent mode, you can also create extended-range VLANs (VLANs with
IDs from 1006 to 4094), but these VLANs are not saved in the VLAN database. See the “Configuring
Extended-Range VLANs” section on page 13-12.
Configurations for VLAN IDs 1 to 1005 are written to the file vlan.dat (VLAN database), and you can
display them by entering the show vlan privileged EXEC command. The vlan.dat file is stored in flash
memory.

13-4 OL-8553-06
Caution You can cause inconsistency in the VLAN database if you attempt to manually delete the vlan.dat file.
If you want to modify the VLAN configuration, use the commands described in these sections and in the
command reference for this release. To change the VTP configuration, see Chapter 16, “Configuring
VTP.”
You use the interface configuration mode to define the port membership mode and to add and remove
ports from VLANs. The results of these commands are written to the running-configuration file, and you
can display the file by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
You can set these parameters when you create a new normal-range VLAN or modify an existing VLAN
in the VLAN database:
• VLAN ID
• VLAN name
• VLAN type (Ethernet, Fiber Distributed Data Interface [FDDI], FDDI network entity title [NET],
TrBRF, or TrCRF, Token Ring, Token Ring-Net)
• VLAN state (active or suspended)
• Maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the VLAN
• Security Association Identifier (SAID)
• Bridge identification number for TrBRF VLANs
• Ring number for FDDI and TrCRF VLANs
• Parent VLAN number for TrCRF VLANs
• Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) type for TrCRF VLANs
• VLAN number to use when translating from one VLAN type to another
Note This section does not provide configuration details for most of these parameters. For complete
information on the commands and parameters that control VLAN configuration, see the command
These sections contain normal-range VLAN configuration information:

• Token Ring VLANs, page 13-6
• Normal-Range VLAN Configuration Guidelines, page 13-6
• VLAN Configuration Mode Options, page 13-7
• Saving VLAN Configuration, page 13-7
• Default Ethernet VLAN Configuration, page 13-8
• Creating or Modifying an Ethernet VLAN, page 13-9
• Deleting a VLAN, page 13-10
• Assigning Static-Access Ports to a VLAN, page 13-11

OL-8553-06 13-5
Token Ring VLANs

Although the switch does not support Token Ring connections, a remote device such as a Catalyst 5000
series switch with Token Ring connections could be managed from one of the supported switches.
Switches running VTP Version 2 advertise information about these Token Ring VLANs:
• Token Ring TrBRF VLANs
• Token Ring TrCRF VLANs
For more information on configuring Token Ring VLANs, see the Catalyst 5000 Series Software
Configuration Guide.
Normal-Range VLAN Configuration Guidelines

Follow these guidelines when creating and modifying normal-range VLANs in your network:
• The switch supports 1005 VLANs in VTP client, server, and transparent modes.
• Normal-range VLANs are identified with a number between 1 and 1001. VLAN numbers 1002
through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs.
• VLAN configuration for VLANs 1 to 1005 are always saved in the VLAN database. If the VTP
mode is transparent, VTP and VLAN configuration are also saved in the switch running
configuration file.
• The switch also supports VLAN IDs 1006 through 4094 in VTP transparent mode (VTP disabled).
These are extended-range VLANs and configuration options are limited. Extended-range VLANs
are not saved in the VLAN database. See the “Configuring Extended-Range VLANs” section on
page 13-12.
• Before you can create a VLAN, the switch must be in VTP server mode or VTP transparent mode.
If the switch is a VTP server, you must define a VTP domain or VTP will not function.
• The switch does not support Token Ring or FDDI media. The switch does not forward FDDI,
FDDI-Net, TrCRF, or TrBRF traffic, but it does propagate the VLAN configuration through VTP.
• The switch supports 128 spanning-tree instances. If a switch has more active VLANs than supported
spanning-tree instances, spanning tree can be enabled on 128 VLANs and is disabled on the
remaining VLANs. If you have already used all available spanning-tree instances on a switch,
adding another VLAN anywhere in the VTP domain creates a VLAN on that switch that is not
running spanning-tree. If you have the default allowed list on the trunk ports of that switch (which
is to allow all VLANs), the new VLAN is carried on all trunk ports. Depending on the topology of
the network, this could create a loop in the new VLAN that would not be broken, particularly if there
are several adjacent switches that all have run out of spanning-tree instances. You can prevent this
possibility by setting allowed lists on the trunk ports of switches that have used up their allocation
of spanning-tree instances.
If the number of VLANs on the switch exceeds the number of supported spanning-tree instances,
we recommend that you configure the IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP (MSTP) on your switch to map
multiple VLANs to a single spanning-tree instance. For more information about MSTP, see
Chapter 18, “Configuring MSTP.”

13-6 OL-8553-06
VLAN Configuration Mode Options

You can configure normal-range VLANs (with VLAN IDs 1 to 1005) by using these two configuration
modes:
• VLAN Configuration in config-vlan Mode, page 13-7
You access config-vlan mode by entering the vlan vlan-id global configuration command.
• VLAN Configuration in VLAN Database Configuration Mode, page 13-7
You access VLAN database configuration mode by entering the vlan database privileged EXEC
command.
VLAN Configuration in config-vlan Mode

To access config-vlan mode, enter the vlan global configuration command with a VLAN ID. Enter a new
VLAN ID to create a VLAN, or enter an existing VLAN ID to modify that VLAN. You can use the
default VLAN configuration (Table 13-2) or enter multiple commands to configure the VLAN. For more
information about commands available in this mode, see the vlan global configuration command
description in the command reference for this release. When you have finished the configuration, you
must exit config-vlan mode for the configuration to take effect. To display the VLAN configuration,
enter the show vlan privileged EXEC command.
You must use this config-vlan mode when creating extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs greater than
1005). See the “Configuring Extended-Range VLANs” section on page 13-12.
VLAN Configuration in VLAN Database Configuration Mode

To access VLAN database configuration mode, enter the vlan database privileged EXEC command.
Then enter the vlan command with a new VLAN ID to create a VLAN, or enter an existing VLAN ID
to modify the VLAN. You can use the default VLAN configuration (Table 13-2) or enter multiple
commands to configure the VLAN. For more information about keywords available in this mode, see the
vlan VLAN database configuration command description in the command reference for this release.
When you have finished the configuration, you must enter apply or exit for the configuration to take
effect. When you enter the exit command, it applies all commands and updates the VLAN database. VTP
messages are sent to other switches in the VTP domain, and the privileged EXEC mode prompt appears.
Saving VLAN Configuration

The configurations of VLAN IDs 1 to 1005 are always saved in the VLAN database (vlan.dat file). If
the VTP mode is transparent, they are also saved in the switch running configuration file. You can enter
the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command to save the configuration in the
startup configuration file. To display the VLAN configuration, enter the show vlan privileged EXEC
command.

OL-8553-06 13-7
When you save VLAN and VTP information (including extended-range VLAN configuration
information) in the startup configuration file and reboot the switch, the switch configuration is selected
as follows:
• If the VTP mode is transparent in the startup configuration, and the VLAN database and the VTP
domain name from the VLAN database matches that in the startup configuration file, the VLAN
database is ignored (cleared), and the VTP and VLAN configurations in the startup configuration
file are used. The VLAN database revision number remains unchanged in the VLAN database.
• If the VTP mode or domain name in the startup configuration does not match the VLAN database,
the domain name and VTP mode and configuration for the first 1005 VLANs use the VLAN
database information.
• If VTP mode is server, the domain name and VLAN configuration for the first 1005 VLANs use the
VLAN database information
Caution If the VLAN database configuration is used at startup and the startup configuration file contains
extended-range VLAN configuration, this information is lost when the system boots up.
Default Ethernet VLAN Configuration

Table 13-2 shows the default configuration for Ethernet VLANs.
Note The switch supports Ethernet interfaces exclusively. Because FDDI and Token Ring VLANs are not
locally supported, you only configure FDDI and Token Ring media-specific characteristics for VTP
global advertisements to other switches.
Table 13-2 Ethernet VLAN Defaults and Ranges
Parameter Default Range

VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094.
Note Extended-range VLANs (VLAN
IDs 1006 to 4094) are not saved in
the VLAN database.
VLAN name VLANxxxx, where xxxx No range
represents four numeric digits
(including leading zeros) equal
to the VLAN ID number
IEEE 802.10 SAID 100001 (100000 plus the 1 to 4294967294
VLAN ID)
MTU size 1500 1500 to 18190
Translational bridge 1 0 0 to 1005
Translational bridge 2 0 0 to 1005
VLAN state active active, suspend
Remote SPAN disabled enabled, disabled
Private VLANs none configured 2 to 1001, 1006 to 4094.

13-8 OL-8553-06
Creating or Modifying an Ethernet VLAN

Each Ethernet VLAN in the VLAN database has a unique, 4-digit ID that can be a number from 1 to
1001. VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs. To create a normal-range
VLAN to be added to the VLAN database, assign a number and name to the VLAN.
Note When the switch is in VTP transparent mode, you can assign VLAN IDs greater than 1006, but they are
not added to the VLAN database. See the “Configuring Extended-Range VLANs” section on
page 13-12.
For the list of default parameters that are assigned when you add a VLAN, see the “Configuring
Normal-Range VLANs” section on page 13-4.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to use config-vlan mode to create or modify an
Ethernet VLAN:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vlan vlan-id Enter a VLAN ID, and enter config-vlan mode. Enter a new VLAN ID
to create a VLAN, or enter an existing VLAN ID to modify that VLAN.
Note The available VLAN ID range for this command is 1 to 4094.
For information about adding VLAN IDs greater than 1005
(extended-range VLANs), see the “Configuring
Extended-Range VLANs” section on page 13-12.
Step 3 name vlan-name (Optional) Enter a name for the VLAN. If no name is entered for the
VLAN, the default is to append the vlan-id with leading zeros to the
word VLAN. For example, VLAN0004 is a default VLAN name for
VLAN 4.
Step 4 mtu mtu-size (Optional) Change the MTU size (or other VLAN characteristic).
Step 5 remote-span Note (Optional) Configure the VLAN as the RSPAN VLAN for a
remote SPAN session. For more information on remote SPAN,
see Chapter 28, “Configuring SPAN and RSPAN.”
Step 7 show vlan {name vlan-name | id vlan-id} Verify your entries.
Step 8 copy running-config startup config (Optional) If the switch is in VTP transparent mode, the VLAN
configuration is saved in the running configuration file as well as in the
VLAN database. This saves the configuration in the switch startup
configuration file.
To return the VLAN name to the default settings, use the no name, no mtu, or no remote-span
config-vlan commands.
This example shows how to use config-vlan mode to create Ethernet VLAN 20, name it test20, and add
it to the VLAN database:
Switch(config-vlan)# name test20
Switch(config-vlan)# end

OL-8553-06 13-9
You can also create or modify Ethernet VLANs by using the VLAN database configuration mode.
Note VLAN database configuration mode does not support RSPAN VLAN configuration or extended-range
VLANs.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to use VLAN database configuration mode to
create or modify an Ethernet VLAN:
Command Purpose
Step 1 vlan database Enter VLAN database configuration mode.
Step 2 vlan vlan-id name vlan-name Add an Ethernet VLAN by assigning a number to it. The range is 1 to
1001. You can create or modify a range of consecutive VLANs by
entering vlan first-vlan-id end last-vlan-id.
Note When entering a VLAN ID in VLAN database configuration
mode, do not enter leading zeros.
If no name is entered for the VLAN, the default is to append the vlan-id
with leading zeros to the word VLAN. For example, VLAN0004 is a
default VLAN name for VLAN 4.
Step 3 vlan vlan-id mtu mtu-size (Optional) To modify a VLAN, identify the VLAN and change a
characteristic, such as the MTU size.
Step 4 exit Update the VLAN database, propagate it throughout the administrative
domain, and return to privileged EXEC mode.
Step 5 show vlan {name vlan-name | id vlan-id} Verify your entries.
configuration is saved in the running configuration file as well as in the
VLAN database. This saves the configuration in the switch startup
configuration file.
To return the VLAN name to the default settings, use the no vlan vlan-id name or no vlan vlan-id mtu
VLAN database configuration command.
This example shows how to use VLAN configuration mode to create Ethernet VLAN 20, name it test20,
and add it to the VLAN database:
Switch# vlan database
Switch(vlan)# vlan 20 name test20
Switch(vlan)# exit
APPLY completed.
Exiting....
Deleting a VLAN
When you delete a VLAN from a switch that is in VTP server mode, the VLAN is removed from the
VLAN database for all switches in the VTP domain. When you delete a VLAN from a switch that is in
VTP transparent mode, the VLAN is deleted only on that specific switch.
You cannot delete the default VLANs for the different media types: Ethernet VLAN 1 and FDDI or
Token Ring VLANs 1002 to 1005.

13-10 OL-8553-06
Caution When you delete a VLAN, any ports assigned to that VLAN become inactive. They remain associated
with the VLAN (and thus inactive) until you assign them to a new VLAN.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to delete a VLAN on the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no vlan vlan-id Remove the VLAN by entering the VLAN ID.
Step 4 show vlan brief Verify the VLAN removal.
configuration is saved in the running configuration file as well as in
the VLAN database. This saves the configuration in the switch
startup configuration file.
To delete a VLAN by using VLAN database configuration mode, use the vlan database privileged
EXEC command to enter VLAN database configuration mode and the no vlan vlan-id VLAN database
Assigning Static-Access Ports to a VLAN

You can assign a static-access port to a VLAN without having VTP globally propagate VLAN
configuration information by disabling VTP (VTP transparent mode).
If you are assigning a port on a cluster member switch to a VLAN, first use the rcommand privileged
EXEC command to log in to the cluster member switch.
Note If you assign an interface to a VLAN that does not exist, the new VLAN is created. (See the “Creating
or Modifying an Ethernet VLAN” section on page 13-9.)
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to assign a port to a VLAN in the VLAN
database:
Command Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter the interface to be added to the VLAN.
Step 3 switchport mode access Define the VLAN membership mode for the port (Layer 2 access
port).
Step 4 switchport access vlan vlan-id Assign the port to a VLAN. Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to 4094.
Step 6 show running-config interface interface-id Verify the VLAN membership mode of the interface.

OL-8553-06 13-11
Configuring Extended-Range VLANs
Command Purpose
Step 7 show interfaces interface-id switchport Verify your entries in the Administrative Mode and the Access Mode
VLAN fields of the display.
To return an interface to its default configuration, use the default interface interface-id interface
This example shows how to configure a port as an access port in VLAN 2:
Switch(config-if)# switchport access vlan 2

When the switch is in VTP transparent mode (VTP disabled), you can create extended-range VLANs (in
the range 1006 to 4094). Extended-range VLANs enable service providers to extend their infrastructure
to a greater number of customers. The extended-range VLAN IDs are allowed for any switchport
commands that allow VLAN IDs. You always use config-vlan mode (accessed by entering the vlan
vlan-id global configuration command) to configure extended-range VLANs. The extended range is not
supported in VLAN database configuration mode (accessed by entering the vlan database privileged
EXEC command).
Extended-range VLAN configurations are not stored in the VLAN database, but because VTP mode is
transparent, they are stored in the switch running configuration file, and you can save the configuration
in the startup configuration file by using the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC
command.
Note Although the switch supports 4094 VLAN IDs, see the “Supported VLANs” section on page 13-2 for
the actual number of VLANs supported.
These sections contain extended-range VLAN configuration information:

• Default VLAN Configuration, page 13-12
• Extended-Range VLAN Configuration Guidelines, page 13-13
• Creating an Extended-Range VLAN, page 13-13
• Creating an Extended-Range VLAN with an Internal VLAN ID, page 13-15
Default VLAN Configuration

See Table 13-2 on page 13-8 for the default configuration for Ethernet VLANs. You can change only the
MTU size, private VLAN, and the remote SPAN configuration state on extended-range VLANs; all other
characteristics must remain at the default state.

13-12 OL-8553-06
Extended-Range VLAN Configuration Guidelines

Follow these guidelines when creating extended-range VLANs:
• To add an extended-range VLAN, you must use the vlan vlan-id global configuration command and
access config-vlan mode. You cannot add extended-range VLANs in VLAN database configuration
mode (accessed by entering the vlan database privileged EXEC command).
• VLAN IDs in the extended range are not saved in the VLAN database and are not recognized by
VTP.
• You cannot include extended-range VLANs in the pruning eligible range.
• The switch must be in VTP transparent mode when you create extended-range VLANs. If VTP mode
is server or client, an error message is generated, and the extended-range VLAN is rejected.
• You can set the VTP mode to transparent in global configuration mode or in VLAN database
configuration mode. See the “Disabling VTP (VTP Transparent Mode)” section on page 16-12. You
should save this configuration to the startup configuration so that the switch boots up in VTP
transparent mode. Otherwise, you lose the extended-range VLAN configuration if the switch resets.
• STP is enabled by default on extended-range VLANs, but you can disable it by using the no
spanning-tree vlan vlan-id global configuration command. When the maximum number of
spanning-tree instances are on the switch, spanning tree is disabled on any newly created VLANs.
If the number of VLANs on the switch exceeds the maximum number of spanning-tree instances,
we recommend that you configure the IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP (MSTP) on your switch to map
multiple VLANs to a single spanning-tree instance. For more information about MSTP, see
Chapter 18, “Configuring MSTP.”
• Each routed port on the switch creates an internal VLAN for its use. These internal VLANs use
extended-range VLAN numbers, and the internal VLAN ID cannot be used for an extended-range
VLAN. If you try to create an extended-range VLAN with a VLAN ID that is already allocated as
an internal VLAN, an error message is generated, and the command is rejected.
– Because internal VLAN IDs are in the lower part of the extended range, we recommend that you
create extended-range VLANs beginning from the highest number (4094) and moving to the
lowest (1006) to reduce the possibility of using an internal VLAN ID.
– Before configuring extended-range VLANs, enter the show vlan internal usage privileged
EXEC command to see which VLANs have been allocated as internal VLANs.
– If necessary, you can shut down the routed port assigned to the internal VLAN, which frees up
the internal VLAN, and then create the extended-range VLAN and re-enable the port, which
then uses another VLAN as its internal VLAN. See the “Creating an Extended-Range VLAN
with an Internal VLAN ID” section on page 13-15.
• Although the switch supports a total of 1005 (normal-range and extended-range) VLANs, the
number of routed ports, SVIs, and other configured features affects the use of the switch hardware.
If you try to create an extended-range VLAN and there are not enough hardware resources available,
an error message is generated, and the extended-range VLAN is rejected.
Creating an Extended-Range VLAN

You create an extended-range VLAN in global configuration mode by entering the vlan global
configuration command with a VLAN ID from 1006 to 4094. This command accesses the config-vlan
mode. The extended-range VLAN has the default Ethernet VLAN characteristics (see Table 13-2) and
the MTU size, private VLAN, and RSPAN configuration are the only parameters you can change. See
the description of the vlan global configuration command in the command reference for the default

OL-8553-06 13-13
settings of all parameters. If you enter an extended-range VLAN ID when the switch is not in VTP
transparent mode, an error message is generated when you exit from config-vlan mode, and the
extended-range VLAN is not created.
Extended-range VLANs are not saved in the VLAN database; they are saved in the switch running
configuration file. You can save the extended-range VLAN configuration in the switch startup
configuration file by using the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command.
Note Before you create an extended-range VLAN, you can verify that the VLAN ID is not used internally by
entering the show vlan internal usage privileged EXEC command. If the VLAN ID is used internally
and you want to free it up, go to the“Creating an Extended-Range VLAN with an Internal VLAN ID”
section on page 13-15 before creating the extended-range VLAN.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create an extended-range VLAN:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vtp mode transparent Configure the switch for VTP transparent mode, disabling VTP.
Step 3 vlan vlan-id Enter an extended-range VLAN ID and enter config-vlan mode. The
range is 1006 to 4094.
Step 4 mtu mtu-size (Optional) Modify the VLAN by changing the MTU size.
Note Although all VLAN commands appear in the CLI help in
config-vlan mode, only the mtu mtu-size, private-vlan, and
remote-span commands are supported for extended-range
VLANs.
Step 5 remote-span Note (Optional) Configure the VLAN as the RSPAN VLAN. See the
“Configuring a VLAN as an RSPAN VLAN” section on
page 28-17.
Step 7 show vlan id vlan-id Verify that the VLAN has been created.
Step 8 copy running-config startup config Save your entries in the switch startup configuration file. To save
extended-range VLAN configurations, you need to save the VTP
transparent mode configuration and the extended-range VLAN
configuration in the switch startup configuration file. Otherwise, if the
switch resets, it will default to VTP server mode, and the extended-range
VLAN IDs will not be saved.
To delete an extended-range VLAN, use the no vlan vlan-id global configuration command.
The procedure for assigning static-access ports to an extended-range VLAN is the same as for
normal-range VLANs. See the “Assigning Static-Access Ports to a VLAN” section on page 13-11.
This example shows how to create a new extended-range VLAN with all default characteristics, enter
config-vlan mode, and save the new VLAN in the switch startup configuration file:
Switch(config)# vtp mode transparent
Switch# copy running-config startup config

13-14 OL-8553-06
Creating an Extended-Range VLAN with an Internal VLAN ID

If you enter an extended-range VLAN ID that is already assigned to an internal VLAN, an error message
is generated, and the extended-range VLAN is rejected. To manually free an internal VLAN ID, you
must temporarily shut down the routed port that is using the internal VLAN ID.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to release a VLAN ID that is assigned to an
internal VLAN and to create an extended-range VLAN with that ID:
Command Purpose
Step 1 show vlan internal usage Display the VLAN IDs being used internally by the switch. If the VLAN
ID that you want to use is an internal VLAN, the display shows the routed
port that is using the VLAN ID. Enter that port number in Step 3.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the interface ID for the routed port that is using the VLAN ID,
Step 4 shutdown Shut down the port to free the internal VLAN ID.
Step 6 vtp mode transparent Set the VTP mode to transparent for creating extended-range VLANs.
Step 7 vlan vlan-id Enter the new extended-range VLAN ID, and enter config-vlan mode.
Step 8 exit Exit from config-vlan mode, and return to global configuration mode.
Step 9 interface interface-id Specify the interface ID for the routed port that you shut down in Step 4,
Step 10 no shutdown Re-enable the routed port. It will be assigned a new internal VLAN ID.
Step 12 copy running-config startup config Save your entries in the switch startup configuration file. To save an
extended-range VLAN configuration, you need to save the VTP
transparent mode configuration and the extended-range VLAN
configuration in the switch startup configuration file. Otherwise, if the
switch resets, it will default to VTP server mode, and the extended-range
VLAN IDs will not be saved.

OL-8553-06 13-15
Displaying VLANs
Displaying VLANs
Use the show vlan privileged EXEC command to display a list of all VLANs on the switch, including
extended-range VLANs. The display includes VLAN status, ports, and configuration information. To
view normal-range VLANs in the VLAN database (1 to 1005), use the show VLAN database
configuration command (accessed by entering the vlan database privileged EXEC command).
Table 13-3 lists the commands for monitoring VLANs.
Table 13-3 VLAN Monitoring Commands
Command Command Mode Purpose

show VLAN database configuration Display status of VLANs in the VLAN database.
show current [vlan-id] VLAN database configuration Display status of all or the specified VLAN in the VLAN
database.
show interfaces [vlan Privileged EXEC Display characteristics for all interfaces or for the specified
vlan-id] VLAN configured on the switch.
show vlan [id vlan-id] Privileged EXEC Display parameters for all VLANs or the specified VLAN on
the switch.
For more details about the show command options and explanations of output fields, see the command
Configuring VLAN Trunks

These sections contain this conceptual information:
• Trunking Overview, page 13-16
• Encapsulation Types, page 13-18
• Default Layer 2 Ethernet Interface VLAN Configuration, page 13-19
• Configuring an Ethernet Interface as a Trunk Port, page 13-19
• Configuring Trunk Ports for Load Sharing, page 13-24
Trunking Overview
A trunk is a point-to-point link between one or more Ethernet switch interfaces and another networking device
such as a router or a switch. Ethernet trunks carry the traffic of multiple VLANs over a single link, and you
can extend the VLANs across an entire network.
Two trunking encapsulations are available on all Ethernet interfaces:
• Inter-Switch Link (ISL)—Cisco-proprietary trunking encapsulation.
• IEEE 802.1Q— industry-standard trunking encapsulation.

13-16 OL-8553-06
Figure 13-2 shows a network of switches that are connected by ISL trunks.
Figure 13-2 Switches in an ISL Trunking Environment
Catalyst 6500 series

switch
ISL ISL ISL ISL

trunk trunk trunk trunk
Switch Switch
Switch Switch
VLAN1 VLAN3 VLAN2
VLAN2 VLAN1 VLAN3
45828
You can configure a trunk on a single Ethernet interface or on an EtherChannel bundle. For more
information about EtherChannel, see Chapter 35, “Configuring EtherChannels and Link-State
Tracking.”
Ethernet trunk interfaces support different trunking modes (see Table 13-4). You can set an interface as
trunking or nontrunking or to negotiate trunking with the neighboring interface. To autonegotiate
trunking, the interfaces must be in the same VTP domain.
Trunk negotiation is managed by the Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP), which is a Point-to-Point
Protocol. However, some internetworking devices might forward DTP frames improperly, which could
cause misconfigurations.
To avoid this, you should configure interfaces connected to devices that do not support DTP to not
forward DTP frames, that is, to turn off DTP.
• If you do not intend to trunk across those links, use the switchport mode access interface
configuration command to disable trunking.
• To enable trunking to a device that does not support DTP, use the switchport mode trunk and
switchport nonegotiate interface configuration commands to cause the interface to become a trunk
but to not generate DTP frames. Use the switchport trunk encapsulation isl or switchport trunk
encapsulation dot1q interface to select the encapsulation type on the trunk port.
You can also specify on DTP interfaces whether the trunk uses ISL or IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation or if
the encapsulation type is autonegotiated. The DTP supports autonegotiation of both ISL and
IEEE 802.1Q trunks.
Note DTP is not supported on private-VLAN ports or tunnel ports.

OL-8553-06 13-17
Table 13-4 Layer 2 Interface Modes
Mode Function
switchport mode access Puts the interface (access port) into permanent nontrunking mode and negotiates to
convert the link into a nontrunk link. The interface becomes a nontrunk interface
regardless of whether or not the neighboring interface is a trunk interface.
switchport mode dynamic auto Makes the interface able to convert the link to a trunk link. The interface becomes a trunk
interface if the neighboring interface is set to trunk or desirable mode. The default
switchport mode for all Ethernet interfaces is dynamic auto.
switchport mode dynamic Makes the interface actively attempt to convert the link to a trunk link. The interface
desirable becomes a trunk interface if the neighboring interface is set to trunk, desirable, or auto
mode.
switchport mode trunk Puts the interface into permanent trunking mode and negotiates to convert the
neighboring link into a trunk link. The interface becomes a trunk interface even if the
neighboring interface is not a trunk interface.
switchport nonegotiate Prevents the interface from generating DTP frames. You can use this command only
when the interface switchport mode is access or trunk. You must manually configure the
neighboring interface as a trunk interface to establish a trunk link.
switchport mode dot1q-tunnel Configures the interface as a tunnel (nontrunking) port to be connected in an asymmetric
link with an IEEE 802.1Q trunk port. The IEEE 802.1Q tunneling is used to maintain
customer VLAN integrity across a service provider network. See Chapter 16,
“Configuring IEEE 802.1Q and Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling,” for more information on
tunnel ports.
Encapsulation Types
Table 13-5 lists the Ethernet trunk encapsulation types and keywords.
Table 13-5 Ethernet Trunk Encapsulation Types
Encapsulation Function
switchport trunk encapsulation isl Specifies ISL encapsulation on the trunk link.
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q Specifies IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation on the trunk link.
switchport trunk encapsulation negotiate Specifies that the interface negotiate with the neighboring interface to become
an ISL (preferred) or IEEE 802.1Q trunk, depending on the configuration and
capabilities of the neighboring interface. This is the default for the switch.
Note The switch does not support Layer 3 trunks; you cannot configure subinterfaces or use the
encapsulation keyword on Layer 3 interfaces. The switch does support Layer 2 trunks and Layer 3
VLAN interfaces, which provide equivalent capabilities.
The trunking mode, the trunk encapsulation type, and the hardware capabilities of the two connected
interfaces decide whether a link becomes an ISL or IEEE 802.1Q trunk.

13-18 OL-8553-06
IEEE 802.1Q Configuration Considerations

The IEEE 802.1Q trunks impose these limitations on the trunking strategy for a network:
• In a network of Cisco switches connected through IEEE 802.1Q trunks, the switches maintain one
spanning-tree instance for each VLAN allowed on the trunks. Non-Cisco devices might support one
spanning-tree instance for all VLANs.
When you connect a Cisco switch to a non-Cisco device through an IEEE 802.1Q trunk, the Cisco
switch combines the spanning-tree instance of the VLAN of the trunk with the spanning-tree
instance of the non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q switch. However, spanning-tree information for each VLAN
is maintained by Cisco switches separated by a cloud of non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q switches. The
non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q cloud separating the Cisco switches is treated as a single trunk link between
the switches.
• Make sure the native VLAN for an IEEE 802.1Q trunk is the same on both ends of the trunk link. If
the native VLAN on one end of the trunk is different from the native VLAN on the other end,
spanning-tree loops might result.
• Disabling spanning tree on the native VLAN of an IEEE 802.1Q trunk without disabling spanning
tree on every VLAN in the network can potentially cause spanning-tree loops. We recommend that
you leave spanning tree enabled on the native VLAN of an IEEE 802.1Q trunk or disable spanning
tree on every VLAN in the network. Make sure your network is loop-free before you disable
spanning tree.
Default Layer 2 Ethernet Interface VLAN Configuration

Table 13-6 shows the default Layer 2 Ethernet interface VLAN configuration.
Table 13-6 Default Layer 2 Ethernet Interface VLAN Configuration

Interface mode switchport mode dynamic auto
Trunk encapsulation switchport trunk encapsulation negotiate
Allowed VLAN range VLANs 1 to 4094
VLAN range eligible for pruning VLANs 2 to 1001
Default VLAN (for access ports) VLAN 1
Native VLAN (for IEEE 802.1Q trunks) VLAN 1
Configuring an Ethernet Interface as a Trunk Port

Because trunk ports send and receive VTP advertisements, to use VTP you must ensure that at least one
trunk port is configured on the switch and that this trunk port is connected to the trunk port of a second
switch. Otherwise, the switch cannot receive any VTP advertisements.
• Interaction with Other Features, page 13-20
• Defining the Allowed VLANs on a Trunk, page 13-21

OL-8553-06 13-19
• Changing the Pruning-Eligible List, page 13-23

• Configuring the Native VLAN for Untagged Traffic, page 13-23
Note By default, an interface is in Layer 2 mode. The default mode for Layer 2 interfaces is switchport mode
dynamic auto. If the neighboring interface supports trunking and is configured to allow trunking, the
link is a Layer 2 trunk or, if the interface is in Layer 3 mode, it becomes a Layer 2 trunk when you enter
the switchport interface configuration command. By default, trunks negotiate encapsulation. If the
neighboring interface supports ISL and IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation and both interfaces are set to
negotiate the encapsulation type, the trunk uses ISL encapsulation.
Interaction with Other Features

Trunking interacts with other features in these ways:
• A trunk port cannot be a secure port.
• A trunk port cannot be a tunnel port.
• Trunk ports can be grouped into EtherChannel port groups, but all trunks in the group must have the
same configuration. When a group is first created, all ports follow the parameters set for the first
port to be added to the group. If you change the configuration of one of these parameters, the switch
propagates the setting you entered to all ports in the group:
– allowed-VLAN list.
– STP port priority for each VLAN.
– STP Port Fast setting.
– trunk status: if one port in a port group ceases to be a trunk, all ports cease to be trunks.
• We recommend that you configure no more than 24 trunk ports in PVST mode and no more than 40
trunk ports in MST mode.
• If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a trunk port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not
enabled. If you try to change the mode of an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to trunk, the port mode is
not changed.
• A port in dynamic mode can negotiate with its neighbor to become a trunk port. If you try to enable
IEEE 802.1x on a dynamic port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you
try to change the mode of an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to dynamic, the port mode is not changed.
Configuring a Trunk Port

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a port as a trunk port:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port to be configured for trunking, and enter interface
configuration mode.

13-20 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 switchport trunk encapsulation {isl | Configure the port to support ISL or IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation or to
dot1q | negotiate} negotiate (the default) with the neighboring interface for encapsulation
type.
You must configure each end of the link with the same encapsulation
type.
Step 4 switchport mode {dynamic {auto | Configure the interface as a Layer 2 trunk (required only if the interface
desirable} | trunk} is a Layer 2 access port or tunnel port or to specify the trunking mode).
• dynamic auto—Set the interface to a trunk link if the neighboring
interface is set to trunk or desirable mode. This is the default.
• dynamic desirable—Set the interface to a trunk link if the
neighboring interface is set to trunk, desirable, or auto mode.
• trunk—Set the interface in permanent trunking mode and negotiate
to convert the link to a trunk link even if the neighboring interface is
not a trunk interface.
Step 5 switchport access vlan vlan-id (Optional) Specify the default VLAN, which is used if the interface stops
trunking.
Step 6 switchport trunk native vlan vlan-id Specify the native VLAN for IEEE 802.1Q trunks.
Step 8 show interfaces interface-id switchport Display the switchport configuration of the interface in the
Administrative Mode and the Administrative Trunking Encapsulation
fields of the display.
Step 9 show interfaces interface-id trunk Display the trunk configuration of the interface.
configuration command. To reset all trunking characteristics of a trunking interface to the defaults, use
the no switchport trunk interface configuration command. To disable trunking, use the switchport
mode access interface configuration command to configure the port as a static-access port.
This example shows how to configure a port as an IEEE 802.1Q trunk. The example assumes that the
neighbor interface is configured to support IEEE 802.1Q trunking.
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode dynamic desirable
Defining the Allowed VLANs on a Trunk

By default, a trunk port sends traffic to and receives traffic from all VLANs. All VLAN IDs, 1 to 4094,
are allowed on each trunk. However, you can remove VLANs from the allowed list, preventing traffic
from those VLANs from passing over the trunk. To restrict the traffic a trunk carries, use the switchport
trunk allowed vlan remove vlan-list interface configuration command to remove specific VLANs from
the allowed list.

OL-8553-06 13-21
Note VLAN 1 is the default VLAN on all trunk ports in all Cisco switches, and it has previously been a
requirement that VLAN 1 always be enabled on every trunk link. You can use the VLAN 1 minimization
feature to disable VLAN 1 on any individual VLAN trunk link so that no user traffic (including
spanning-tree advertisements) is sent or received on VLAN 1.
To reduce the risk of spanning-tree loops or storms, you can disable VLAN 1 on any individual VLAN
trunk port by removing VLAN 1 from the allowed list. When you remove VLAN 1 from a trunk port,
the interface continues to sent and receive management traffic, for example, Cisco Discovery Protocol
(CDP), Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), DTP, and VTP
in VLAN 1.
If a trunk port with VLAN 1 disabled is converted to a nontrunk port, it is added to the access VLAN. If
the access VLAN is set to 1, the port will be added to VLAN 1, regardless of the switchport trunk
allowed setting. The same is true for any VLAN that has been disabled on the port.
A trunk port can become a member of a VLAN if the VLAN is enabled, if VTP knows of the VLAN,
and if the VLAN is in the allowed list for the port. When VTP detects a newly enabled VLAN and the
VLAN is in the allowed list for a trunk port, the trunk port automatically becomes a member of the
enabled VLAN. When VTP detects a new VLAN and the VLAN is not in the allowed list for a trunk
port, the trunk port does not become a member of the new VLAN.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to modify the allowed list of a trunk:
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 switchport mode trunk Configure the interface as a VLAN trunk port.
Step 4 switchport trunk allowed vlan {add | (Optional) Configure the list of VLANs allowed on the trunk.
all | except | remove} vlan-list
For explanations about using the add, all, except, and remove keywords,
The vlan-list parameter is either a single VLAN number from 1 to 4094
or a range of VLANs described by two VLAN numbers, the lower one
first, separated by a hyphen. Do not enter any spaces between
comma-separated VLAN parameters or in hyphen-specified ranges.
All VLANs are allowed by default.
Step 6 show interfaces interface-id switchport Verify your entries in the Trunking VLANs Enabled field of the display.
To return to the default allowed VLAN list of all VLANs, use the no switchport trunk allowed vlan
This example shows how to remove VLAN 2 from the allowed VLAN list on a port:
Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan remove 2

13-22 OL-8553-06
Changing the Pruning-Eligible List

The pruning-eligible list applies only to trunk ports. Each trunk port has its own eligibility list. VTP
pruning must be enabled for this procedure to take effect. The “Enabling VTP Pruning” section on
page 16-14 describes how to enable VTP pruning.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to remove VLANs from the pruning-eligible list
on a trunk port:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Select the trunk port for which VLANs should be pruned, and enter
Step 3 switchport trunk pruning vlan {add | Configure the list of VLANs allowed to be pruned from the trunk. (See
except | none | remove} vlan-list the “VTP Pruning” section on page 16-4).
[,vlan[,vlan[,,,]]
For explanations about using the add, except, none, and remove
keywords, see the command reference for this release.
Separate nonconsecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces; use a
hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Valid IDs are 2 to 1001.
Extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4094) cannot be pruned.
VLANs that are pruning-ineligible receive flooded traffic.
The default list of VLANs allowed to be pruned contains VLANs 2 to
1001.
Step 5 show interfaces interface-id switchport Verify your entries in the Pruning VLANs Enabled field of the display.
To return to the default pruning-eligible list of all VLANs, use the no switchport trunk pruning vlan
Configuring the Native VLAN for Untagged Traffic

A trunk port configured with IEEE 802.1Q tagging can receive both tagged and untagged traffic. By
default, the switch forwards untagged traffic in the native VLAN configured for the port. The native
VLAN is VLAN 1 by default.
Note The native VLAN can be assigned any VLAN ID.
For information about IEEE 802.1Q configuration issues, see the “IEEE 802.1Q Configuration
Considerations” section on page 13-19.

OL-8553-06 13-23
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the native VLAN on an
IEEE 802.1Q trunk:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Define the interface that is configured as the IEEE 802.1Q trunk, and
enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 switchport trunk native vlan vlan-id Configure the VLAN that is sending and receiving untagged traffic
on the trunk port.
For vlan-id, the range is 1 to 4094.
Step 5 show interfaces interface-id switchport Verify your entries in the Trunking Native Mode VLAN field.
To return to the default native VLAN, VLAN 1, use the no switchport trunk native vlan interface
If a packet has a VLAN ID that is the same as the outgoing port native VLAN ID, the packet is sent
untagged; otherwise, the switch sends the packet with a tag.
Configuring Trunk Ports for Load Sharing

Load sharing divides the bandwidth supplied by parallel trunks connecting switches. To avoid loops,
STP normally blocks all but one parallel link between switches. Using load sharing, you divide the traffic
between the links according to which VLAN the traffic belongs.
You configure load sharing on trunk ports by using STP port priorities or STP path costs. For load
sharing using STP port priorities, both load-sharing links must be connected to the same switch. For load
sharing using STP path costs, each load-sharing link can be connected to the same switch or to two
different switches. For more information about STP, see Chapter 17, “Configuring STP.”
Load Sharing Using STP Port Priorities

When two ports on the same switch form a loop, the switch uses the STP port priority to decide which
port is enabled and which port is in a blocking state. You can set the priorities on a parallel trunk port so
that the port carries all the traffic for a given VLAN. The trunk port with the higher priority (lower
values) for a VLAN is forwarding traffic for that VLAN. The trunk port with the lower priority (higher
values) for the same VLAN remains in a blocking state for that VLAN. One trunk port sends or receives
all traffic for the VLAN.
Figure 13-3 shows two trunks connecting supported switches. In this example, the switches are
configured as follows:
• VLANs 8 through 10 are assigned a port priority of 16 on Trunk 1.
• VLANs 3 through 6 retain the default port priority of 128 on Trunk 1.
• VLANs 3 through 6 are assigned a port priority of 16 on Trunk 2.
• VLANs 8 through 10 retain the default port priority of 128 on Trunk 2.

13-24 OL-8553-06
In this way, Trunk 1 carries traffic for VLANs 8 through 10, and Trunk 2 carries traffic for VLANs 3
through 6. If the active trunk fails, the trunk with the lower priority takes over and carries the traffic for
all of the VLANs. No duplication of traffic occurs over any trunk port.
Figure 13-3 Load Sharing by Using STP Port Priorities
Switch A
Trunk 1 Trunk 2
VLANs 8 – 10 (priority 16) VLANs 3 – 6 (priority 16)
VLANs 3 – 6 (priority 128) VLANs 8 – 10 (priority 128)
93370
Switch B
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the network shown in Figure 13-3.
Command Purpose
Step 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode on Switch A.
Step 2 vtp domain domain-name Configure a VTP administrative domain.
The domain name can be 1 to 32 characters.
Step 3 vtp mode server Configure Switch A as the VTP server.
Step 5 show vtp status Verify the VTP configuration on both Switch A and Switch B.
In the display, check the VTP Operating Mode and the VTP Domain
Name fields.
Step 6 show vlan Verify that the VLANs exist in the database on Switch A.
Step 8 interface gigabitethernet 0/1 Define the interface to be configured as a trunk, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 9 switchport trunk encapsulation {isl | Configure the port to support ISL or IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation or to
dot1q | negotiate} negotiate with the neighboring interface. You must configure each
end of the link with the same encapsulation type.
Step 10 switchport mode trunk Configure the port as a trunk port.
Step 12 show interfaces gigabitethernet 0/1 Verify the VLAN configuration.
switchport
Step 13 Repeat Steps 7 through 11 on Switch A for a second port in the switch.
Step 14 Repeat Steps 7 through 11 on Switch B to configure the trunk ports
that connect to the trunk ports configured on Switch A.
Step 15 show vlan When the trunk links come up, VTP passes the VTP and VLAN
information to Switch B. Verify that Switch B has learned the VLAN
configuration.

OL-8553-06 13-25
Command Purpose
Step 17 interface gigabitethernet 0/1 Define the interface to set the STP port priority, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 18 spanning-tree vlan 8-10 port-priority 16 Assign the port priority of 16 for VLANs 8 through 10.
Step 20 interface gigabitethernet0/2 Define the interface to set the STP port priority, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 21 spanning-tree vlan 3-6 port-priority 16 Assign the port priority of 16 for VLANs 3 through 6.
Load Sharing Using STP Path Cost

You can configure parallel trunks to share VLAN traffic by setting different path costs on a trunk and
associating the path costs with different sets of VLANs, blocking different ports for different VLANs.
The VLANs keep the traffic separate and maintain redundancy in the event of a lost link.
In Figure 13-4, Trunk ports 1 and 2 are configured as 100BASE-T ports. These VLAN path costs are
assigned:
• VLANs 2 through 4 are assigned a path cost of 30 on Trunk port 1.
• VLANs 8 through 10 retain the default 100BASE-T path cost on Trunk port 1 of 19.
• VLANs 8 through 10 are assigned a path cost of 30 on Trunk port 2.
• VLANs 2 through 4 retain the default 100BASE-T path cost on Trunk port 2 of 19.
Figure 13-4 Load-Sharing Trunks with Traffic Distributed by Path Cost
Switch A
Trunk port 1 Trunk port 2

VLANs 2 – 4 (path cost 30) VLANs 8 – 10 (path cost 30)
VLANs 8 – 10 (path cost 19) VLANs 2 – 4 (path cost 19)
90573
Switch B
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the network shown in Figure 13-4:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface gigabitethernet0/1 Define the interface to be configured as a trunk, and enter interface
configuration mode.

13-26 OL-8553-06
Configuring VMPS
Command Purpose
Step 3 switchport trunk encapsulation Configure the port to support ISL or IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. You
{isl | dot1q | negotiate} must configure each end of the link with the same encapsulation type.
Step 4 switchport mode trunk Configure the port as a trunk port. The trunk defaults to ISL trunking.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 on a second interface in Switch A.
Step 8 show running-config Verify your entries. In the display, make sure that the interfaces are
configured as trunk ports.
Step 9 show vlan When the trunk links come up, Switch A receives the VTP information
from the other switches. Verify that Switch A has learned the VLAN
configuration.
Step 11 interface gigabitethernet0/1 Define the interface on which to set the STP cost, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 12 spanning-tree vlan 2-4 cost 30 Set the spanning-tree path cost to 30 for VLANs 2 through 4.
Step 13 end Return to global configuration mode.
Step 14 Repeat Steps 9 through 13 on the other configured trunk interface on
Switch A, and set the spanning-tree path cost to 30 for VLANs 8, 9, and
10.
Step 16 show running-config Verify your entries. In the display, verify that the path costs are set
correctly for both trunk interfaces.
Configuring VMPS
The VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) is used to support dynamic-access ports, which are not permanently
assigned to a VLAN, but give VLAN assignments based on the MAC source addresses seen on the port.
Each time an unknown MAC address is seen, the switch sends a VQP query to a remote VMPS; the query
includes the newly seen MAC address and the port on which it was seen. The VMPS responds with a
VLAN assignment for the port. The switch cannot be a VMPS server but can act as a client to the VMPS
and communicate with it through VQP.
• “Understanding VMPS” section on page 13-28
• “Default VMPS Client Configuration” section on page 13-29
• “VMPS Configuration Guidelines” section on page 13-29
• “Configuring the VMPS Client” section on page 13-30
• “Monitoring the VMPS” section on page 13-32
• “Troubleshooting Dynamic-Access Port VLAN Membership” section on page 13-33
• “VMPS Configuration Example” section on page 13-33

OL-8553-06 13-27
Configuring VMPS
Understanding VMPS
Each time the client switch receives the MAC address of a new host, it sends a VQP query to the VMPS.
When the VMPS receives this query, it searches its database for a MAC-address-to-VLAN mapping. The
server response is based on this mapping and whether or not the server is in open or secure mode. In
secure mode, the server shuts down the port when an illegal host is detected. In open mode, the server
simply denies the host access to the port.
If the port is currently unassigned (that is, it does not yet have a VLAN assignment), the VMPS provides
one of these responses:
• If the host is allowed on the port, the VMPS sends the client a vlan-assignment response containing
the assigned VLAN name and allowing access to the host.
• If the host is not allowed on the port and the VMPS is in open mode, the VMPS sends an
access-denied response.
• If the VLAN is not allowed on the port and the VMPS is in secure mode, the VMPS sends a
port-shutdown response.
If the port already has a VLAN assignment, the VMPS provides one of these responses:
• If the VLAN in the database matches the current VLAN on the port, the VMPS sends an success
response, allowing access to the host.
• If the VLAN in the database does not match the current VLAN on the port and active hosts exist on
the port, the VMPS sends an access-denied or a port-shutdown response, depending on the secure
mode of the VMPS.
If the switch receives an access-denied response from the VMPS, it continues to block traffic to and from
the host MAC address. The switch continues to monitor the packets directed to the port and sends a query
to the VMPS when it identifies a new host address. If the switch receives a port-shutdown response from
the VMPS, it disables the port. The port must be manually re-enabled by using Network Assistant, the
CLI, or SNMP.
Dynamic-Access Port VLAN Membership

A dynamic-access port can belong to only one VLAN with an ID from 1 to 4094. When the link comes
up, the switch does not forward traffic to or from this port until the VMPS provides the VLAN
assignment. The VMPS receives the source MAC address from the first packet of a new host connected
to the dynamic-access port and attempts to match the MAC address to a VLAN in the VMPS database.
If there is a match, the VMPS sends the VLAN number for that port. If the client switch was not
previously configured, it uses the domain name from the first VTP packet it receives on its trunk port
from the VMPS. If the client switch was previously configured, it includes its domain name in the query
packet to the VMPS to obtain its VLAN number. The VMPS verifies that the domain name in the packet
matches its own domain name before accepting the request and responds to the client with the assigned
VLAN number for the client. If there is no match, the VMPS either denies the request or shuts down the
port (depending on the VMPS secure mode setting).
Multiple hosts (MAC addresses) can be active on a dynamic-access port if they are all in the same
VLAN; however, the VMPS shuts down a dynamic-access port if more than 20 hosts are active on the
port.
If the link goes down on a dynamic-access port, the port returns to an isolated state and does not belong
to a VLAN. Any hosts that come online through the port are checked again through the VQP with the
VMPS before the port is assigned to a VLAN.

13-28 OL-8553-06
Configuring VMPS
Dynamic-access ports can be used for direct host connections, or they can connect to a network. A
maximum of 20 MAC addresses are allowed per port on the switch. A dynamic-access port can belong
to only one VLAN at a time, but the VLAN can change over time, depending on the MAC addresses seen.
Default VMPS Client Configuration

Table 13-7 shows the default VMPS and dynamic-access port configuration on client switches.
Table 13-7 Default VMPS Client and Dynamic-Access Port Configuration

VMPS domain server None
VMPS reconfirm interval 60 minutes
VMPS server retry count 3
Dynamic-access ports None configured
VMPS Configuration Guidelines

These guidelines and restrictions apply to dynamic-access port VLAN membership:
• You should configure the VMPS before you configure ports as dynamic-access ports.
• When you configure a port as a dynamic-access port, the spanning-tree Port Fast feature is
automatically enabled for that port. The Port Fast mode accelerates the process of bringing the port
into the forwarding state.
• IEEE 802.1x ports cannot be configured as dynamic-access ports. If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x
on a dynamic-access (VQP) port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you
try to change an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to dynamic VLAN assignment, an error message appears,
and the VLAN configuration is not changed.
• Trunk ports cannot be dynamic-access ports, but you can enter the switchport access vlan dynamic
interface configuration command for a trunk port. In this case, the switch retains the setting and
applies it if the port is later configured as an access port.
You must turn off trunking on the port before the dynamic-access setting takes effect.
• Dynamic-access ports cannot be monitor ports.
• Secure ports cannot be dynamic-access ports. You must disable port security on a port before it
becomes dynamic.
• Private VLAN ports cannot be dynamic-access ports.
• Dynamic-access ports cannot be members of an EtherChannel group.
• Port channels cannot be configured as dynamic-access ports.
• A dynamic-access port can participate in fallback bridging.
• The VTP management domain of the VMPS client and the VMPS server must be the same.
• The VLAN configured on the VMPS server should not be a voice VLAN.

OL-8553-06 13-29
Configuring VMPS
Configuring the VMPS Client

You configure dynamic VLANs by using the VMPS (server). The switch can be a VMPS client; it cannot
be a VMPS server.
Entering the IP Address of the VMPS

You must first enter the IP address of the server to configure the switch as a client.
Note If the VMPS is being defined for a cluster of switches, enter the address on the command switch.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enter the IP address of the VMPS:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vmps server ipaddress primary Enter the IP address of the switch acting as the primary VMPS server.
Step 3 vmps server ipaddress (Optional) Enter the IP address of the switch acting as a secondary VMPS
server.
You can enter up to three secondary server addresses.
Step 5 show vmps Verify your entries in the VMPS Domain Server field of the display.
Note You must have IP connectivity to the VMPS for dynamic-access ports to work. You can test for IP
connectivity by pinging the IP address of the VMPS and verifying that you get a response.
Configuring Dynamic-Access Ports on VMPS Clients

If you are configuring a port on a cluster member switch as a dynamic-access port, first use the
rcommand privileged EXEC command to log in to the cluster member switch.
Caution Dynamic-access port VLAN membership is for end stations or hubs connected to end stations.
Connecting dynamic-access ports to other switches can cause a loss of connectivity.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a dynamic-access port on a VMPS
client switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the switch port that is connected to the end station, and enter

13-30 OL-8553-06
Configuring VMPS
Command Purpose
Step 4 switchport access vlan dynamic Configure the port as eligible for dynamic VLAN membership.
The dynamic-access port must be connected to an end station.
Step 6 show interfaces interface-id switchport Verify your entries in the Operational Mode field of the display.
configuration command. To return an interface to its default switchport mode (dynamic auto), use the no
switchport mode interface configuration command. To reset the access mode to the default VLAN for
the switch, use the no switchport access vlan interface configuration command.
Reconfirming VLAN Memberships

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to confirm the dynamic-access port VLAN
membership assignments that the switch has received from the VMPS:
Command Purpose
Step 1 vmps reconfirm Reconfirm dynamic-access port VLAN membership.
Step 2 show vmps Verify the dynamic VLAN reconfirmation status.
Changing the Reconfirmation Interval

VMPS clients periodically reconfirm the VLAN membership information received from the VMPS.You
can set the number of minutes after which reconfirmation occurs.
If you are configuring a member switch in a cluster, this parameter must be equal to or greater than the
reconfirmation setting on the command switch. You must also first use the rcommand privileged EXEC
command to log in to the member switch.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the reconfirmation interval:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vmps reconfirm minutes Enter the number of minutes between reconfirmations of the dynamic
VLAN membership. The range is 1 to 120. The default is 60 minutes.
Step 4 show vmps Verify the dynamic VLAN reconfirmation status in the Reconfirm Interval
field of the display.
To return the switch to its default setting, use the no vmps reconfirm global configuration command.

OL-8553-06 13-31
Configuring VMPS
Changing the Retry Count

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the number of times that the switch
attempts to contact the VMPS before querying the next server:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vmps retry count Change the retry count. The retry range is 1 to 10; the default is 3.
Step 4 show vmps Verify your entry in the Server Retry Count field of the display.
To return the switch to its default setting, use the no vmps retry global configuration command.
Monitoring the VMPS

You can display information about the VMPS by using the show vmps privileged EXEC command. The
switch displays this information about the VMPS:
• VMPS VQP Version—the version of VQP used to communicate with the VMPS. The switch queries
the VMPS that is using VQP Version 1.
• Reconfirm Interval—the number of minutes the switch waits before reconfirming the
VLAN-to-MAC-address assignments.
• Server Retry Count—the number of times VQP resends a query to the VMPS. If no response is
received after this many tries, the switch starts to query the secondary VMPS.
• VMPS domain server—the IP address of the configured VLAN membership policy servers. The
switch sends queries to the one marked current. The one marked primary is the primary server.
• VMPS Action—the result of the most recent reconfirmation attempt. A reconfirmation attempt can
occur automatically when the reconfirmation interval expires, or you can force it by entering the
vmps reconfirm privileged EXEC command or its Network Assistant or SNMP equivalent.
This is an example of output for the show vmps privileged EXEC command:
Switch# show vmps
VQP Client Status:
--------------------
VMPS VQP Version: 1
Reconfirm Interval: 60 min
Server Retry Count: 3
VMPS domain server: 172.20.128.86 (primary, current)
172.20.128.87
Reconfirmation status
---------------------
VMPS Action: other

13-32 OL-8553-06
Configuring VMPS
Troubleshooting Dynamic-Access Port VLAN Membership

The VMPS shuts down a dynamic-access port under these conditions:
• The VMPS is in secure mode, and it does not allow the host to connect to the port. The VMPS shuts
down the port to prevent the host from connecting to the network.
• More than 20 active hosts reside on a dynamic-access port.
To re-enable a disabled dynamic-access port, enter the shutdown interface configuration command
followed by the no shutdown interface configuration command.
VMPS Configuration Example

Figure 13-5 shows a network with a VMPS server switch and VMPS client switches with
dynamic-access ports. In this example, these assumptions apply:
• The VMPS server and the VMPS client are separate switches.
• The Catalyst 6500 series Switch A is the primary VMPS server.
• The Catalyst 6500 series Switch C and Switch J are secondary VMPS servers.
• End stations are connected to the clients, Switch B and Switch I.
• The database configuration file is stored on the TFTP server with the IP address 172.20.22.7.

OL-8553-06 13-33
Configuring VMPS
Figure 13-5 Dynamic Port VLAN Membership Configuration
Catalyst 6500 series switch A TFTP server
Primary VMPS
Server 1 Router
172.20.26.150
172.20.22.7
Client switch B
End Dynamic-access port
station 1 172.20.26.151
Trunk port
Switch C
Secondary VMPS 172.20.26.152
Server 2
Switch D 172.20.26.153
Ethernet segment
(Trunk link)
Switch E 172.20.26.154
Switch F 172.20.26.155
Switch G 172.20.26.156
Switch H 172.20.26.157
Client switch I
Dynamic-access port
End
station 2 172.20.26.158
Trunk port
101363t
172.20.26.159
Secondary VMPS Switch J
Server 3

13-34 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 15
Configuring Voice VLAN
This chapter describes how to configure the voice VLAN feature on the Catalyst 3560 switch. Voice
VLAN is referred to as an auxiliary VLAN in some Catalyst 6500 family switch documentation.

• Understanding Voice VLAN, page 15-1
• Configuring Voice VLAN, page 15-3
• Displaying Voice VLAN, page 15-7
Understanding Voice VLAN

The voice VLAN feature enables access ports to carry IP voice traffic from an IP phone. When the switch
is connected to a Cisco 7960 IP Phone, the phone sends voice traffic with Layer 3 IP precedence and
Layer 2 class of service (CoS) values, which are both set to 5 by default. Because the sound quality of
an IP phone call can deteriorate if the data is unevenly sent, the switch supports quality of service (QoS)
based on IEEE 802.1p CoS. QoS uses classification and scheduling to send network traffic from the
switch in a predictable manner. For more information on QoS, see Chapter 34, “Configuring QoS.”
The Cisco 7960 IP Phone is a configurable device, and you can configure it to forward traffic with an
IEEE 802.1p priority. You can configure the switch to trust or override the traffic priority assigned by a
Cisco IP Phone.
The Cisco IP Phone contains an integrated three-port 10/100 switch as shown in Figure 15-1. The ports
provide dedicated connections to these devices:
• Port 1 connects to the switch or other voice-over-IP (VoIP) device.
• Port 2 is an internal 10/100 interface that carries the IP Phone traffic.
• Port 3 (access port) connects to a PC or other device.

OL-8553-06 15-1
Chapter 15 Configuring Voice VLAN
Understanding Voice VLAN
Figure 15-1 shows one way to connect a Cisco 7960 IP Phone.
Figure 15-1 Cisco 7960 IP Phone Connected to a Switch
Cisco IP Phone 7960
Phone
ASIC
P2 PC
P1 3-port P3
switch Access
port
101351
Cisco IP Phone Voice Traffic
You can configure an access port with an attached Cisco IP Phone to use one VLAN for voice traffic
and another VLAN for data traffic from a device attached to the phone. You can configure access ports
on the switch to send Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) packets that instruct an attached phone to send
voice traffic to the switch in any of these ways:
• In the voice VLAN tagged with a Layer 2 CoS priority value
• In the access VLAN tagged with a Layer 2 CoS priority value
• In the access VLAN, untagged (no Layer 2 CoS priority value)
Note In all configurations, the voice traffic carries a Layer 3 IP precedence value (the default is 5 for voice
traffic and 3 for voice control traffic).
Cisco IP Phone Data Traffic

The switch can also process tagged data traffic (traffic in IEEE 802.1Q or IEEE 802.1p frame types)
from the device attached to the access port on the Cisco IP Phone (see Figure 15-1). You can configure
Layer 2 access ports on the switch to send CDP packets that instruct the attached phone to configure the
phone access port in one of these modes:
• In trusted mode, all traffic received through the access port on the Cisco IP Phone passes through
the phone unchanged.
• In untrusted mode, all traffic in IEEE 802.1Q or IEEE 802.1p frames received through the access
port on the Cisco IP Phone receive a configured Layer 2 CoS value. The default Layer 2 CoS value
is 0. Untrusted mode is the default.

15-2 OL-8553-06
Note Untagged traffic from the device attached to the Cisco IP Phone passes through the phone unchanged,
regardless of the trust state of the access port on the phone.

• Default Voice VLAN Configuration, page 15-3
• Voice VLAN Configuration Guidelines, page 15-3
• Configuring a Port Connected to a Cisco 7960 IP Phone, page 15-4
Default Voice VLAN Configuration

The voice VLAN feature is disabled by default.
When the voice VLAN feature is enabled, all untagged traffic is sent according to the default CoS
priority of the port.
The CoS value is not trusted for IEEE 802.1p or IEEE 802.1Q tagged traffic.
Voice VLAN Configuration Guidelines

These are the voice VLAN configuration guidelines:
• Voice VLAN configuration is only supported on switch access ports; voice VLAN configuration is
not supported on trunk ports.You can configure a voice VLAN only on Layer 2 ports.
Note Trunk ports can carry any number of voice VLANs, similar to regular VLANs. The configuration of
voice VLANs is not required on trunk ports.
• The voice VLAN should be present and active on the switch for the IP phone to correctly
communicate on the voice VLAN. Use the show vlan privileged EXEC command to see if the
VLAN is present (listed in the display). If the VLAN is not listed, see Chapter 13, “Configuring
VLANs,” for information on how to create the voice VLAN.
• Do not configure voice VLAN on private VLAN ports.
• The Power over Ethernet (PoE) switches are capable of automatically providing power to Cisco
pre-standard and IEEE 802.3af-compliant powered devices if they are not being powered by an AC
power source. For information about PoE interfaces, see the “Configuring a Power Management
Mode on a PoE Port” section on page 11-22.
• Before you enable voice VLAN, we recommend that you enable QoS on the switch by entering the
mls qos global configuration command and configure the port trust state to trust by entering the mls
qos trust cos interface configuration command. If you use the auto-QoS feature, these settings are
automatically configured. For more information, see Chapter 34, “Configuring QoS.”
• You must enable CDP on the switch port connected to the Cisco IP Phone to send the configuration
to the phone. (CDP is globally enabled by default on all switch interfaces.)

OL-8553-06 15-3
• The Port Fast feature is automatically enabled when voice VLAN is configured. When you disable
voice VLAN, the Port Fast feature is not automatically disabled.
• If the Cisco IP Phone and a device attached to the phone are in the same VLAN, they must be in the
same IP subnet. These conditions indicate that they are in the same VLAN:
– They both use IEEE 802.1p or untagged frames.
– The Cisco IP Phone uses IEEE 802.1p frames, and the device uses untagged frames.
– The Cisco IP Phone uses untagged frames, and the device uses IEEE 802.1p frames.
– The Cisco IP Phone uses IEEE 802.1Q frames, and the voice VLAN is the same as the access
VLAN.
• The Cisco IP Phone and a device attached to the phone cannot communicate if they are in the same
VLAN and subnet but use different frame types because traffic in the same subnet is not routed
(routing would eliminate the frame type difference).
• You cannot configure static secure MAC addresses in the voice VLAN.
• Voice VLAN ports can also be these port types:
– Dynamic access port. See the “Configuring Dynamic-Access Ports on VMPS Clients” section
on page 13-30 for more information.
– IEEE 802.1x authenticated port. See the “Configuring 802.1x Readiness Check” section on
page 10-34 for more information.
Note If you enable IEEE 802.1x on an access port on which a voice VLAN is configured and
to which a Cisco IP Phone is connected, the phone loses connectivity to the switch for
up to 30 seconds.
– Protected port. See the “Configuring Protected Ports” section on page 24-6 for more
information.
– A source or destination port for a SPAN or RSPAN session.
– Secure port. See the “Configuring Port Security” section on page 24-8 for more information.
Note When you enable port security on an interface that is also configured with a voice
VLAN, you must set the maximum allowed secure addresses on the port to two plus the
maximum number of secure addresses allowed on the access VLAN. When the port is
connected to a Cisco IP Phone, the phone requires up to two MAC addresses. The phone
address is learned on the voice VLAN and might also be learned on the access VLAN.
Connecting a PC to the phone requires additional MAC addresses.
Configuring a Port Connected to a Cisco 7960 IP Phone

Because a Cisco 7960 IP Phone also supports a connection to a PC or other device, a port connecting the
switch to a Cisco IP Phone can carry mixed traffic. You can configure a port to decide how the Cisco IP
Phone carries voice traffic and data traffic.
• Configuring Cisco IP Phone Voice Traffic, page 15-5
• Configuring the Priority of Incoming Data Frames, page 15-6

15-4 OL-8553-06
Configuring Cisco IP Phone Voice Traffic

You can configure a port connected to the Cisco IP Phone to send CDP packets to the phone to configure
the way in which the phone sends voice traffic. The phone can carry voice traffic in IEEE 802.1Q frames
for a specified voice VLAN with a Layer 2 CoS value. It can use IEEE 802.1p priority tagging to give
voice traffic a higher priority and forward all voice traffic through the native (access) VLAN. The Cisco
IP Phone can also send untagged voice traffic or use its own configuration to send voice traffic in the
access VLAN. In all configurations, the voice traffic carries a Layer 3 IP precedence value (the default
is 5).
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure voice traffic on a port:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface connected to the phone, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 3 mls qos trust cos Configure the interface to classify incoming traffic packets by using the
packet CoS value. For untagged packets, the port default CoS value is used.
Note Before configuring the port trust state, you must first globally enable
QoS by using the mls qos global configuration command.
Step 4 switchport voice {detect cisco-phone Configure how the Cisco IP Phone carries voice traffic:
[full-duplex] | vlan {vlan-id | dot1p |
• detect—Configure the interface to detect and recognize a Cisco IP
none | untagged}}
phone.
• cisco-phone—When you initially implement the switchport voice detect
command, this is the only allowed option. The default is no switchport
voice detect cisco-phone [full-duplex].
• full-duplex—(Optional) Configure the switch to only accept a
full-duplex Cisco IP phone.
• vlan-id—Configure the phone to forward all voice traffic through the
specified VLAN. By default, the Cisco IP Phone forwards the voice
traffic with an IEEE 802.1Q priority of 5. Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to
4094.
• dot1p—Configure the phone to use IEEE 802.1p priority tagging for
voice traffic and to use the default native VLAN (VLAN 0) to carry all
traffic. By default, the Cisco IP Phone forwards the voice traffic with an
IEEE 802.1p priority of 5.
• none—Allow the phone to use its own configuration to send untagged
voice traffic.
• untagged—Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic.
Step 6 show interfaces interface-id Verify your voice VLAN entries.
switchport or
show running-config interface Verify your QoS and voice VLAN entries.
interface-id

OL-8553-06 15-5
This example shows how to configure a port connected to a Cisco IP Phone to use the CoS value to
classify incoming traffic, to use IEEE 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic, and to use the default
native VLAN (VLAN 0) to carry all traffic:
Switch(config-if)# mls qos trust cos
Switch(config-if)# switchport voice vlan dot1p
To return the port to its default setting, use the no switchport voice vlan interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to enable switchport voice detect on a Cisco IP Phone:
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport voice?
detect detection enhancement keyword
vlan VLAN for voice traffic
Switch(config-if)# switchport voice detect?
cisco-phone Cisco IP Phone
Switch(config-if)# switchport voice detect cisco-phone?
full-duplex Cisco IP Phone
Switch(config-if)# switchport voice detect cisco-phone full-duplex

full-duplex full duplex keyword
This example shows how to disable switchport voice detect on a Cisco IP Phone:
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# no switchport voice detect cisco-phone
Switch(config-if)# no switchport voice detect cisco-phone full-duplex
Configuring the Priority of Incoming Data Frames

You can connect a PC or other data device to a Cisco IP Phone port. To process tagged data traffic (in
IEEE 802.1Q or IEEE 802.1p frames), you can configure the switch to send CDP packets to instruct the
phone how to send data packets from the device attached to the access port on the Cisco IP Phone. The
PC can generate packets with an assigned CoS value. You can configure the phone to not change (trust)
or to override (not trust) the priority of frames arriving on the phone port from connected devices.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the priority of data traffic received from
the nonvoice port on the Cisco IP Phone:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface connected to the Cisco IP Phone, and enter interface
configuration mode.

15-6 OL-8553-06
Displaying Voice VLAN
Command Purpose
Step 3 switchport priority extend Set the priority of data traffic received from the Cisco IP Phone access port:
{cos value | trust}
• cos value—Configure the phone to override the priority received from
the PC or the attached device with the specified CoS value. The value is
a number from 0 to 7, with 7 as the highest priority. The default priority
is cos 0.
• trust—Configure the phone access port to trust the priority received
from the PC or the attached device.
Step 5 show interfaces interface-id Verify your entries.
switchport
startup-config
This example shows how to configure a port connected to a Cisco IP Phone to not change the priority of
frames received from the PC or the attached device:
Switch(config-if)# switchport priority extend trust
To return the port to its default setting, use the no switchport priority extend interface configuration
command.

To display voice VLAN configuration for an interface, use the show interfaces interface-id switchport

OL-8553-06 15-7

15-8 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 16
Configuring VTP
This chapter describes how to use the VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) and the VLAN database for
managing VLANs with the Catalyst 3560 switch.

• Understanding VTP, page 16-1
• Configuring VTP, page 16-6
• Monitoring VTP, page 16-16
Understanding VTP
VTP is a Layer 2 messaging protocol that maintains VLAN configuration consistency by managing the
addition, deletion, and renaming of VLANs on a network-wide basis. VTP minimizes misconfigurations
and configuration inconsistencies that can cause several problems, such as duplicate VLAN names,
incorrect VLAN-type specifications, and security violations.
Before you create VLANs, you must decide whether to use VTP in your network. Using VTP, you can
make configuration changes centrally on one or more switches and have those changes automatically
communicated to all the other switches in the network. Without VTP, you cannot send information about
VLANs to other switches.
VTP is designed to work in an environment where updates are made on a single switch and are sent
through VTP to other switches in the domain. It does not work well in a situation where multiple updates
to the VLAN database occur simultaneously on switches in the same domain, which would result in an
inconsistency in the VLAN database.
The switch supports 1005 VLANs, but the number of routed ports, SVIs, and other configured features
affects the usage of the switch hardware. If the switch is notified by VTP of a new VLAN and the switch
is already using the maximum available hardware resources, it sends a message that there are not enough
hardware resources available and shuts down the VLAN. The output of the show vlan user EXEC
command shows the VLAN in a suspended state.
VTP only learns about normal-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1 to 1005). Extended-range VLANs (VLAN
IDs greater than 1005) are not supported by VTP or stored in the VTP VLAN database.

OL-8553-06 16-1
Chapter 16 Configuring VTP
Understanding VTP

• The VTP Domain, page 16-2
• VTP Modes, page 16-3
• VTP Advertisements, page 16-3
• VTP Version 2, page 16-4
• VTP Pruning, page 16-4
The VTP Domain

A VTP domain (also called a VLAN management domain) consists of one switch or several
interconnected switches under the same administrative responsibility sharing the same VTP domain
name. A switch can be in only one VTP domain. You make global VLAN configuration changes for the
domain.
By default, the switch is in the VTP no-management-domain state until it receives an advertisement for
a domain over a trunk link (a link that carries the traffic of multiple VLANs) or until you configure a
domain name. Until the management domain name is specified or learned, you cannot create or modify
VLANs on a VTP server, and VLAN information is not propagated over the network.
If the switch receives a VTP advertisement over a trunk link, it inherits the management domain name
and the VTP configuration revision number. The switch then ignores advertisements with a different
domain name or an earlier configuration revision number.
Caution Before adding a VTP client switch to a VTP domain, always verify that its VTP configuration revision
number is lower than the configuration revision number of the other switches in the VTP domain.
Switches in a VTP domain always use the VLAN configuration of the switch with the highest VTP
configuration revision number. If you add a switch that has a revision number higher than the revision
number in the VTP domain, it can erase all VLAN information from the VTP server and VTP domain.
See the “Adding a VTP Client Switch to a VTP Domain” section on page 16-14 for the procedure for
verifying and resetting the VTP configuration revision number.
When you make a change to the VLAN configuration on a VTP server, the change is propagated to all
switches in the VTP domain. VTP advertisements are sent over all IEEE trunk connections, including
Inter-Switch Link (ISL) and IEEE 802.1Q. VTP dynamically maps VLANs with unique names and
internal index associates across multiple LAN types. Mapping eliminates excessive device
administration required from network administrators.
If you configure a switch for VTP transparent mode, you can create and modify VLANs, but the changes
are not sent to other switches in the domain, and they affect only the individual switch. However,
configuration changes made when the switch is in this mode are saved in the switch running
configuration and can be saved to the switch startup configuration file.
For domain name and password configuration guidelines, see the “VTP Configuration Guidelines”

16-2 OL-8553-06
Understanding VTP
VTP Modes
You can configure a supported switch to be in one of the VTP modes listed in Table 16-1.
Table 16-1 VTP Modes
VTP Mode Description

VTP server In VTP server mode, you can create, modify, and delete VLANs, and specify other configuration
parameters (such as the VTP version) for the entire VTP domain. VTP servers advertise their VLAN
configurations to other switches in the same VTP domain and synchronize their VLAN configurations with
other switches based on advertisements received over trunk links.
In VTP server mode, VLAN configurations are saved in NVRAM. VTP server is the default mode.
VTP client A VTP client behaves like a VTP server and transmits and receives VTP updates on its trunks, but you
cannot create, change, or delete VLANs on a VTP client. VLANs are configured on another switch in the
domain that is in server mode.
In VTP client mode, VLAN configurations are not saved in NVRAM.
VTP transparent VTP transparent switches do not participate in VTP. A VTP transparent switch does not advertise its
VLAN configuration and does not synchronize its VLAN configuration based on received advertisements.
However, in VTP Version 2, transparent switches do forward VTP advertisements that they receive from
other switches through their trunk interfaces. You can create, modify, and delete VLANs on a switch in
VTP transparent mode.
The switch must be in VTP transparent mode when you create extended-range VLANs. See the
“Configuring Extended-Range VLANs” section on page 13-12.
The switch must be in VTP transparent mode when you create private VLANs. See Chapter 14,
“Configuring Private VLANs.” When private VLANs are configured, do not change the VTP mode from
When the switch is in VTP transparent mode, the VTP and VLAN configurations are saved in NVRAM,
but they are not advertised to other switches. In this mode, VTP mode and domain name are saved in the
switch running configuration, and you can save this information in the switch startup configuration file by
using the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command.
VTP Advertisements
Each switch in the VTP domain sends periodic global configuration advertisements from each trunk port
to a reserved multicast address. Neighboring switches receive these advertisements and update their
VTP and VLAN configurations as necessary.
Note Because trunk ports send and receive VTP advertisements, you must ensure that at least one trunk port
is configured on the switch and that this trunk port is connected to the trunk port of another switch.
Otherwise, the switch cannot receive any VTP advertisements. For more information on trunk ports, see
the “Configuring VLAN Trunks” section on page 13-16.
VTP advertisements distribute this global domain information:

• VTP domain name
• VTP configuration revision number
• Update identity and update timestamp

OL-8553-06 16-3
Understanding VTP
• MD5 digest VLAN configuration, including maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for each
VLAN.
• Frame format
VTP advertisements distribute this VLAN information for each configured VLAN:
• VLAN IDs (ISL and IEEE 802.1Q)
• VLAN name
• VLAN type
• VLAN state
• Additional VLAN configuration information specific to the VLAN type
VTP Version 2
If you use VTP in your network, you must decide whether to use Version 1 or Version 2. By default,
VTP operates in Version 1.
VTP Version 2 supports these features that are not supported in Version 1:
• Token Ring support—VTP Version 2 supports Token Ring Bridge Relay Function (TrBRF) and
Token Ring Concentrator Relay Function (TrCRF) VLANs. For more information about Token
Ring VLANs, see the “Configuring Normal-Range VLANs” section on page 13-4.
• Unrecognized Type-Length-Value (TLV) support—A VTP server or client propagates
configuration changes to its other trunks, even for TLVs it is not able to parse. The unrecognized
TLV is saved in NVRAM when the switch is operating in VTP server mode.
• Version-Dependent Transparent Mode—In VTP Version 1, a VTP transparent switch inspects VTP
messages for the domain name and version and forwards a message only if the version and domain
name match. Because VTP Version 2 supports only one domain, it forwards VTP messages in
transparent mode without inspecting the version and domain name.
• Consistency Checks—In VTP Version 2, VLAN consistency checks (such as VLAN names and
values) are performed only when you enter new information through the CLI or SNMP. Consistency
checks are not performed when new information is obtained from a VTP message or when
information is read from NVRAM. If the MD5 digest on a received VTP message is correct, its
information is accepted.
VTP Pruning
VTP pruning increases network available bandwidth by restricting flooded traffic to those trunk links
that the traffic must use to reach the destination devices. Without VTP pruning, a switch floods
broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast traffic across all trunk links within a VTP domain even
though receiving switches might discard them. VTP pruning is disabled by default.
VTP pruning blocks unneeded flooded traffic to VLANs on trunk ports that are included in the
pruning-eligible list. Only VLANs included in the pruning-eligible list can be pruned. By default,
VLANs 2 through 1001 are pruning eligible switch trunk ports. If the VLANs are configured as
pruning-ineligible, the flooding continues. VTP pruning is supported with VTP Version 1 and Version 2.

16-4 OL-8553-06
Understanding VTP
Figure 16-1 shows a switched network without VTP pruning enabled. Port 1 on Switch A and Port 2 on
Switch D are assigned to the Red VLAN. If a broadcast is sent from the host connected to Switch A,
Switch A floods the broadcast and every switch in the network receives it, even though Switches C, E,
and F have no ports in the Red VLAN.
Figure 16-1 Flooding Traffic without VTP Pruning
Switch D
Port 2
Switch E Switch B
Red
VLAN
Port 1
89240
Switch F Switch C Switch A
Figure 16-2 shows a switched network with VTP pruning enabled. The broadcast traffic from Switch A
is not forwarded to Switches C, E, and F because traffic for the Red VLAN has been pruned on the links
shown (Port 5 on Switch B and Port 4 on Switch D).
Figure 16-2 Optimized Flooded Traffic with VTP Pruning
Switch D
Port 2
Flooded traffic
is pruned. Port
4
Switch B
Red
VLAN
Switch E Flooded traffic
is pruned. Port
5
Port 1
89241
Switch F Switch C Switch A
Enabling VTP pruning on a VTP server enables pruning for the entire management domain. Making
VLANs pruning-eligible or pruning-ineligible affects pruning eligibility for those VLANs on that trunk
only (not on all switches in the VTP domain).

OL-8553-06 16-5
Configuring VTP
See the “Enabling VTP Pruning” section on page 16-14. VTP pruning takes effect several seconds after
you enable it. VTP pruning does not prune traffic from VLANs that are pruning-ineligible. VLAN 1 and
VLANs 1002 to 1005 are always pruning-ineligible; traffic from these VLANs cannot be pruned.
Extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs higher than 1005) are also pruning-ineligible.
VTP pruning is not designed to function in VTP transparent mode. If one or more switches in the
network are in VTP transparent mode, you should do one of these:
• Turn off VTP pruning in the entire network.
• Turn off VTP pruning by making all VLANs on the trunk of the switch upstream to the VTP
transparent switch pruning ineligible.
To configure VTP pruning on an interface, use the switchport trunk pruning vlan interface
configuration command (see the “Changing the Pruning-Eligible List” section on page 13-23). VTP
pruning operates when an interface is trunking. You can set VLAN pruning-eligibility, whether or not
VTP pruning is enabled for the VTP domain, whether or not any given VLAN exists, and whether or not
the interface is currently trunking.
Configuring VTP
• Default VTP Configuration, page 16-6
• VTP Configuration Options, page 16-7
• VTP Configuration Guidelines, page 16-8
• Configuring a VTP Server, page 16-9
• Configuring a VTP Client, page 16-11
• Disabling VTP (VTP Transparent Mode), page 16-12
• Enabling VTP Version 2, page 16-13
• Enabling VTP Pruning, page 16-14
• Adding a VTP Client Switch to a VTP Domain, page 16-14
Default VTP Configuration

Table 16-2 shows the default VTP configuration.
Table 16-2 Default VTP Configuration

VTP domain name Null.
VTP mode Server.
VTP version Version 1 (Version 2 is disabled).
VTP password None.
VTP pruning Disabled.

16-6 OL-8553-06
Configuring VTP
VTP Configuration Options

You can configure VTP by using these configuration modes.
• VTP Configuration in Global Configuration Mode, page 16-7
• VTP Configuration in VLAN Database Configuration Mode, page 16-7
You access VLAN database configuration mode by entering the vlan database privileged EXEC
command.
For detailed information about vtp commands, see the command reference for this release.
VTP Configuration in Global Configuration Mode

You can use the vtp global configuration command to set the VTP password, the version, the VTP file
name, the interface providing updated VTP information, the domain name, and the mode, and to disable
or enable pruning. For more information about available keywords, see the command descriptions in the
command reference for this release. The VTP information is saved in the VTP VLAN database. When
VTP mode is transparent, the VTP domain name and mode are also saved in the switch running
configuration file, and you can save it in the switch startup configuration file by entering the copy
running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command. You must use this command if you want to
save VTP mode as transparent, even if the switch resets.
When you save VTP information in the switch startup configuration file and reboot the switch, the
switch configuration is selected as follows:
• If the VTP mode is transparent in the startup configuration and the VLAN database and the VTP
domain name from the VLAN database matches that in the startup configuration file, the VLAN
database is ignored (cleared), and the VTP and VLAN configurations in the startup configuration
file are used. The VLAN database revision number remains unchanged in the VLAN database.
• If the VTP mode or domain name in the startup configuration do not match the VLAN database, the
domain name and VTP mode and configuration for the first 1005 VLANs use the VLAN database
information.
VTP Configuration in VLAN Database Configuration Mode

You can configure all VTP parameters in VLAN database configuration mode, which you access by
entering the vlan database privileged EXEC command. For more information about available keywords,
see the vtp VLAN database configuration command description in the command reference for this
release. When you enter the exit command in VLAN database configuration mode, it applies all the
commands that you entered and updates the VLAN database. VTP messages are sent to other switches
in the VTP domain, and the privileged EXEC mode prompt appears.
If VTP mode is transparent, the domain name and the mode (transparent) are saved in the switch running
configuration, and you can save this information in the switch startup configuration file by entering the
copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command.

OL-8553-06 16-7
Configuring VTP
VTP Configuration Guidelines

These sections describe guidelines you should follow when implementing VTP in your network.
Domain Names
When configuring VTP for the first time, you must always assign a domain name. You must configure
all switches in the VTP domain with the same domain name. Switches in VTP transparent mode do not
exchange VTP messages with other switches, and you do not need to configure a VTP domain name
for them.
Note If NVRAM and DRAM storage is sufficient, all switches in a VTP domain should be in VTP server
mode.
Caution Do not configure a VTP domain if all switches are operating in VTP client mode. If you configure the
domain, it is impossible to make changes to the VLAN configuration of that domain. Make sure that you
configure at least one switch in the VTP domain for VTP server mode.
Passwords
You can configure a password for the VTP domain, but it is not required. If you do configure a domain
password, all domain switches must share the same password and you must configure the password on
each switch in the management domain. Switches without a password or with the wrong password reject
VTP advertisements.
If you configure a VTP password for a domain, a switch that is booted without a VTP configuration does
not accept VTP advertisements until you configure it with the correct password. After the configuration,
the switch accepts the next VTP advertisement that uses the same password and domain name in the
advertisement.
If you are adding a new switch to an existing network with VTP capability, the new switch learns the
domain name only after the applicable password has been configured on it.
Caution When you configure a VTP domain password, the management domain does not function properly if you
do not assign a management domain password to each switch in the domain.
VTP Version
Follow these guidelines when deciding which VTP version to implement:
• All switches in a VTP domain must run the same VTP version.
• A VTP Version 2-capable switch can operate in the same VTP domain as a switch running VTP
Version 1 if Version 2 is disabled on the Version 2-capable switch (Version 2 is disabled by default).

16-8 OL-8553-06
Configuring VTP
• Do not enable VTP Version 2 on a switch unless all of the switches in the same VTP domain are
Version-2-capable. When you enable Version 2 on a switch, all of the Version-2-capable switches in
the domain enable Version 2. If there is a Version 1-only switch, it does not exchange VTP
information with switches that have Version 2 enabled.
• If there are TrBRF and TrCRF Token Ring networks in your environment, you must enable VTP
Version 2 for Token Ring VLAN switching to function properly. To run Token Ring and Token
Ring-Net, disable VTP Version 2.
Configuration Requirements
When you configure VTP, you must configure a trunk port so that the switch can send and receive VTP
advertisements to and from other switches in the domain.
For more information, see the “Configuring VLAN Trunks” section on page 13-16.
If you are configuring VTP on a cluster member switch to a VLAN, use the rcommand privileged EXEC
command to log in to the member switch. For more information about the command, see the command
If you are configuring extended-range VLANs on the switch, the switch must be in VTP transparent
mode.
VTP does not support private VLANs. If you configure private VLANs, the switch must be in VTP
transparent mode. When private VLANs are configured on the switch, do not change the VTP mode from
Configuring a VTP Server

When a switch is in VTP server mode, you can change the VLAN configuration and have it propagated
throughout the network.
Note If extended-range VLANs are configured on the switch, you cannot change VTP mode to server. You
receive an error message, and the configuration is not allowed.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch as a VTP server:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vtp mode server Configure the switch for VTP server mode (the default).
Step 3 vtp domain domain-name Configure the VTP administrative-domain name. The name can be 1 to 32
characters. All switches operating in VTP server or client mode under the
same administrative responsibility must be configured with the same
domain name.
Step 4 vtp password password (Optional) Set the password for the VTP domain. The password can be 8 to
64 characters.
If you configure a VTP password, the VTP domain does not function
properly if you do not assign the same password to each switch in the
domain.

OL-8553-06 16-9
Configuring VTP
Command Purpose
Step 6 show vtp status Verify your entries in the VTP Operating Mode and the VTP Domain Name
When you configure a domain name, it cannot be removed; you can only reassign a switch to a different
domain.
To return the switch to a no-password state, use the no vtp password global configuration command.
This example shows how to use global configuration mode to configure the switch as a VTP server with
the domain name eng_group and the password mypassword:
Switch(config)# vtp mode server
Switch(config)# vtp domain eng_group
Switch(config)# vtp password mypassword
Switch(config)# end
You can also use VLAN database configuration mode to configure VTP parameters.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to use VLAN database configuration mode to
configure the switch as a VTP server:
Command Purpose
Step 1 vlan database Enter VLAN database configuration mode.
Step 2 vtp server Configure the switch for VTP server mode (the default).
Step 3 vtp domain domain-name Configure a VTP administrative-domain name. The name can be 1 to 32
characters. All switches operating in VTP server or client mode under the
same administrative responsibility must be configured with the same domain
name.
Step 4 vtp password password (Optional) Set a password for the VTP domain. The password can be 8 to 64
characters.
If you configure a VTP password, the VTP domain does not function properly
if you do not assign the same password to each switch in the domain.
Step 5 exit Update the VLAN database, propagate it throughout the administrative
domain, and return to privileged EXEC mode.
When you configure a domain name, it cannot be removed; you can only reassign a switch to a different
domain.
To return the switch to a no-password state, use the no vtp password VLAN database configuration
command.
This example shows how to use VLAN database configuration mode to configure the switch as a VTP
server with the domain name eng_group and the password mypassword:
Switch# vlan database
Switch(vlan)# vtp server
Switch(vlan)# vtp domain eng_group
Switch(vlan)# vtp password mypassword
Switch(vlan)# exit

16-10 OL-8553-06
Configuring VTP
APPLY completed.
Exiting....
Switch#
Configuring a VTP Client

When a switch is in VTP client mode, you cannot change its VLAN configuration. The client switch
receives VTP updates from a VTP server in the VTP domain and then modifies its configuration
accordingly.
Follow these guidelines:
• If extended-range VLANs are configured on the switch, you cannot change VTP mode to client. You
• If you configure the switch for VTP client mode, the switch does not create the VLAN database file
(vlan.dat). If the switch is then powered off, it resets the VTP configuration to the default. To keep
the VTP configuration with VTP client mode after the switch restarts, you must first configure the
VTP domain name before the VTP mode.
Caution If all switches are operating in VTP client mode, do not configure a VTP domain name. If you do, it is
impossible to make changes to the VLAN configuration of that domain. Therefore, make sure you
configure at least one switch as a VTP server.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch as a VTP client:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vtp mode client Configure the switch for VTP client mode. The default setting is VTP
server.
Step 3 vtp domain domain-name (Optional) Enter the VTP administrative-domain name. The name can be 1
to 32 characters. This should be the same domain name as the VTP server.
All switches operating in VTP server or client mode under the same
administrative responsibility must be configured with the same domain
name.
Step 4 vtp password password (Optional) Enter the password for the VTP domain.
Use the no vtp mode global configuration command to return the switch to VTP server mode. To return
the switch to a no-password state, use the no vtp password privileged EXEC command. When you
configure a domain name, it cannot be removed; you can only reassign a switch to a different domain.

OL-8553-06 16-11
Configuring VTP
Note You can also configure a VTP client by using the vlan database privileged EXEC command to enter
VLAN database configuration mode and entering the vtp client command, similar to the second
procedure under “Configuring a VTP Server” section on page 16-9. Use the no vtp client VLAN
database configuration command to return the switch to VTP server mode or the no vtp password
VLAN database configuration command to return the switch to a no-password state. When you configure
a domain name, it cannot be removed; you can only reassign a switch to a different domain.
Disabling VTP (VTP Transparent Mode)

When you configure the switch for VTP transparent mode, VTP is disabled on the switch. The switch
does not send VTP updates and does not act on VTP updates received from other switches. However, a
VTP transparent switch running VTP Version 2 does forward received VTP advertisements on its trunk
links.
Note Before you create extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4094), you must set VTP mode to
transparent by using the vtp mode transparent global configuration command. Save this configuration
to the startup configuration so that the switch boots up in VTP transparent mode. Otherwise, you lose
the extended-range VLAN configuration if the switch resets and boots up in VTP server mode (the
default).
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure VTP transparent mode and save
the VTP configuration in the switch startup configuration file:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vtp mode transparent Configure the switch for VTP transparent mode (disable VTP).
Step 4 show vtp status Verify your entries in the VTP Operating Mode and the VTP Domain
Name fields of the display.
Step 5 copy running-config startup-config (Optional) Save the configuration in the startup configuration file.
Note Only VTP mode and domain name are saved in the switch running
configuration and can be copied to the startup configuration file.
To return the switch to VTP server mode, use the no vtp mode global configuration command.
Note If extended-range VLANs are configured on the switch, you cannot change the VTP mode to server. You

16-12 OL-8553-06
Configuring VTP
Note You can also configure VTP transparent mode by using the vlan database privileged EXEC command
to enter VLAN database configuration mode and by entering the vtp transparent command, similar to
the second procedure under the “Configuring a VTP Server” section on page 16-9. Use the no vtp
transparent VLAN database configuration command to return the switch to VTP server mode. If
extended-range VLANs are configured on the switch, you cannot change VTP mode to server. You
Enabling VTP Version 2

VTP Version 2 is disabled by default on VTP Version 2-capable switches. When you enable VTP
Version 2 on a switch, every VTP Version 2-capable switch in the VTP domain enables Version 2. You
can only configure the version when the switches are in VTP server or transparent mode.
Caution VTP Version 1 and VTP Version 2 are not interoperable on switches in the same VTP domain. Every
switch in the VTP domain must use the same VTP version. Do not enable VTP Version 2 unless every
switch in the VTP domain supports Version 2.
Note In TrCRF and TrBRF Token ring environments, you must enable VTP Version 2 for Token Ring VLAN
switching to function properly. For Token Ring and Token Ring-Net media, VTP Version 2 must be
disabled.
For more information on VTP version configuration guidelines, see the “VTP Version” section on
page 16-8.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable VTP Version 2:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vtp version 2 Enable VTP Version 2 on the switch.
VTP Version 2 is disabled by default on VTP Version 2-capable switches.
Step 4 show vtp status In the VTP V2 Mode field of the display, verify that VTP Version 2 is enabled.
To disable VTP Version 2, use the no vtp version global configuration command.
Note You can also enable VTP Version 2 by using the vlan database privileged EXEC command to enter
VLAN database configuration mode and by entering the vtp v2-mode VLAN database configuration
command. To disable VTP Version 2, use the no vtp v2-mode VLAN database configuration command.

OL-8553-06 16-13
Configuring VTP
Enabling VTP Pruning

Pruning increases available bandwidth by restricting flooded traffic to those trunk links that the traffic
must use to access the destination devices. You can only enable VTP pruning on a switch in VTP server
mode.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable VTP pruning in the VTP domain:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vtp pruning Enable pruning in the VTP administrative domain.
By default, pruning is disabled. You need to enable pruning on only one switch
in VTP server mode.
Step 4 show vtp status Verify your entries in the VTP Pruning Mode field of the display.
To disable VTP pruning, use the no vtp pruning global configuration command.
Note You can also enable VTP pruning by using the vlan database privileged EXEC command to enter
VLAN database configuration mode and entering the vtp pruning VLAN database configuration
command. To disable VTP pruning, use the no vtp pruning VLAN database configuration command.
You can also enable VTP Version 2 by using the vtp pruning privileged EXEC command.
Pruning is supported with VTP Version 1 and Version 2. If you enable pruning on the VTP server, it is
enabled for the entire VTP domain.
Only VLANs included in the pruning-eligible list can be pruned. By default, VLANs 2 through 1001 are
pruning-eligible on trunk ports. Reserved VLANs and extended-range VLANs cannot be pruned. To
change the pruning-eligible VLANs, see the “Changing the Pruning-Eligible List” section on
page 13-23.
Adding a VTP Client Switch to a VTP Domain

Before adding a VTP client to a VTP domain, always verify that its VTP configuration revision number
is lower than the configuration revision number of the other switches in the VTP domain. Switches in a
VTP domain always use the VLAN configuration of the switch with the highest VTP configuration
revision number. If you add a switch that has a revision number higher than the revision number in the
VTP domain, it can erase all VLAN information from the VTP server and VTP domain.

16-14 OL-8553-06
Configuring VTP
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to verify and reset the VTP configuration
revision number on a switch before adding it to a VTP domain:
Command Purpose
Step 1 show vtp status Check the VTP configuration revision number.
If the number is 0, add the switch to the VTP domain.
If the number is greater than 0, follow these steps:
a. Write down the domain name.
b. Write down the configuration revision number.
c. Continue with the next steps to reset the switch configuration revision number.
Step 3 vtp domain domain-name Change the domain name from the original one displayed in Step 1 to a new name.
Step 4 end The VLAN information on the switch is updated and the configuration revision
number is reset to 0. You return to privileged EXEC mode.
Step 5 show vtp status Verify that the configuration revision number has been reset to 0.
Step 7 vtp domain domain-name Enter the original domain name on the switch.
Step 8 end The VLAN information on the switch is updated, and you return to privileged EXEC
mode.
Step 9 show vtp status (Optional) Verify that the domain name is the same as in Step 1 and that the
configuration revision number is 0.
You can also change the VTP domain name by entering the vlan database privileged EXEC command
to enter VLAN database configuration mode and by entering the vtp domain domain-name command.
In this mode, you must enter the exit command to update VLAN information and return to privileged
EXEC mode.
After resetting the configuration revision number, add the switch to the VTP domain.
Note You can use the vtp mode transparent global configuration command or the vtp transparent VLAN
database configuration command to disable VTP on the switch, and then change its VLAN information
without affecting the other switches in the VTP domain.

OL-8553-06 16-15
Monitoring VTP
Monitoring VTP
You monitor VTP by displaying VTP configuration information: the domain name, the current VTP
revision, and the number of VLANs. You can also display statistics about the advertisements sent and
received by the switch.
Table 16-3 shows the privileged EXEC commands for monitoring VTP activity.
Table 16-3 VTP Monitoring Commands
Command Purpose
show vtp status Display the VTP switch configuration information.
show vtp counters Display counters about VTP messages that have been sent and received.

16-16 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 14
Configuring Private VLANs
This chapter describes how to configure private VLANs on the Cisco Catalyst 3560 switch.

• Understanding Private VLANs, page 14-1
• Configuring Private VLANs, page 14-5
• Monitoring Private VLANs, page 14-14
Note When you configure private VLANs, the switch must be in VTP transparent mode. See Chapter 16,
“Configuring VTP.”
Understanding Private VLANs

The private-VLAN feature addresses two problems that service providers face when using VLANs:
• Scalability: The switch supports up to 1005 active VLANs. If a service provider assigns one VLAN
per customer, this limits the numbers of customers that the service provider can support.
• To enable IP routing, each VLAN is assigned a subnet address space or a block of addresses, which
can waste the unused IP addresses and cause IP address management problems.
Using private VLANs addresses the scalability problem and provides IP address management benefits
for service providers and Layer 2 security for customers.
Private VLANs partition a regular VLAN domain into subdomains and can have multiple VLAN
pairs—one for each subdomain. A subdomain is represented by a primary VLAN and a secondary
VLAN.
All VLAN pairs in a private VLAN share the same primary VLAN. The secondary VLAN ID
differentiates one subdomain from another. See Figure 14-1.

OL-8553-06 14-1
Chapter 14 Configuring Private VLANs
Figure 14-1 Private-VLAN Domain
Primary
VLAN
Private
VLAN
domain
Subdomain Subdomain
Secondary Secondary
community VLAN isolated VLAN
116083
There are two types of secondary VLANs:

• Isolated VLANs—Ports within an isolated VLAN cannot communicate with each other at the
Layer 2 level.
• Community VLANs—Ports within a community VLAN can communicate with each other but
cannot communicate with ports in other communities at the Layer 2 level.
Private VLANs provide Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same private VLAN. Private-VLAN
ports are access ports that are one of these types:
• Promiscuous—A promiscuous port belongs to the primary VLAN and can communicate with all
interfaces, including the community and isolated host ports that belong to the secondary VLANs
associated with the primary VLAN.
• Isolated—An isolated port is a host port that belongs to an isolated secondary VLAN. It has
complete Layer 2 separation from other ports within the same private VLAN, except for the
promiscuous ports. Private VLANs block all traffic to isolated ports except traffic from promiscuous
ports. Traffic received from an isolated port is forwarded only to promiscuous ports.
• Community—A community port is a host port that belongs to a community secondary VLAN.
Community ports communicate with other ports in the same community VLAN and with
promiscuous ports. These interfaces are isolated at Layer 2 from all other interfaces in other
communities and from isolated ports within their private VLAN.
Note Trunk ports carry traffic from regular VLANs and also from primary, isolated, and community VLANs.

14-2 OL-8553-06
Primary and secondary VLANs have these characteristics:

• Primary VLAN—A private VLAN has only one primary VLAN. Every port in a private VLAN is a
member of the primary VLAN. The primary VLAN carries unidirectional traffic downstream from
the promiscuous ports to the (isolated and community) host ports and to other promiscuous ports.
• Isolated VLAN —A private VLAN has only one isolated VLAN. An isolated VLAN is a secondary
VLAN that carries unidirectional traffic upstream from the hosts toward the promiscuous ports and
the gateway.
• Community VLAN—A community VLAN is a secondary VLAN that carries upstream traffic from
the community ports to the promiscuous port gateways and to other host ports in the same
community. You can configure multiple community VLANs in a private VLAN.
A promiscuous port can serve only one primary VLAN, one isolated VLAN, and multiple community
VLANs. Layer 3 gateways are typically connected to the switch through a promiscuous port. With a
promiscuous port, you can connect a wide range of devices as access points to a private VLAN. For
example, you can use a promiscuous port to monitor or back up all the private-VLAN servers from an
administration workstation.
In a switched environment, you can assign an individual private VLAN and associated IP subnet to each
individual or common group of end stations. The end stations need to communicate only with a default
gateway to communicate outside the private VLAN.
You can use private VLANs to control access to end stations in these ways:
• Configure selected interfaces connected to end stations as isolated ports to prevent any
communication at Layer 2. For example, if the end stations are servers, this configuration prevents
Layer 2 communication between the servers.
• Configure interfaces connected to default gateways and selected end stations (for example, backup
servers) as promiscuous ports to allow all end stations access to a default gateway.
You can extend private VLANs across multiple devices by trunking the primary, isolated, and
community VLANs to other devices that support private VLANs. To maintain the security of your
private-VLAN configuration and to avoid other use of the VLANs configured as private VLANs,
configure private VLANs on all intermediate devices, including devices that have no private-VLAN
ports.
IP Addressing Scheme with Private VLANs

Assigning a separate VLAN to each customer creates an inefficient IP addressing scheme:
• Assigning a block of addresses to a customer VLAN can result in unused IP addresses.
• If the number of devices in the VLAN increases, the number of assigned address might not be large
enough to accommodate them.
These problems are reduced by using private VLANs, where all members in the private VLAN share a
common address space, which is allocated to the primary VLAN. Hosts are connected to secondary
VLANs, and the DHCP server assigns them IP addresses from the block of addresses allocated to the
primary VLAN. Subsequent IP addresses can be assigned to customer devices in different secondary
VLANs, but in the same primary VLAN. When new devices are added, the DHCP server assigns them
the next available address from a large pool of subnet addresses.

OL-8553-06 14-3
Private VLANs across Multiple Switches

As with regular VLANs, private VLANs can span multiple switches. A trunk port carries the primary
VLAN and secondary VLANs to a neighboring switch. The trunk port treats the private VLAN as any
other VLAN. A feature of private VLANs across multiple switches is that traffic from an isolated port
in switch A does not reach an isolated port on Switch B. See Figure 14-2.
Figure 14-2 Private VLANs across Switches
Trunk ports
VLAN 100 VLAN 100

Switch B
Switch A
VLAN 201 VLAN 202 VLAN 201 VLAN 202
116084
Carries VLAN 100,
201, and 202 traffic
VLAN 100 = Primary VLAN

VLAN 201 = Secondary isolated VLAN
VLAN 202 = Secondary community VLAN
Because VTP does not support private VLANs, you must manually configure private VLANs on all
switches in the Layer 2 network. If you do not configure the primary and secondary VLAN associations
in some switches in the network, the Layer 2 databases in these switches are not merged. This can result
in unnecessary flooding of private-VLAN traffic on those switches.
Note When configuring private VLANs on the switch, always use the default Switch Database Management
(SDM) template to balance system resources between unicast routes and Layer 2 entries. If another SDM
template is configured, use the sdm prefer default global configuration command to set the default
template. See Chapter 8, “Configuring SDM Templates.”
Private-VLAN Interaction with Other Features

Private VLANs have specific interaction with some other features, described in these sections:
• Private VLANs and Unicast, Broadcast, and Multicast Traffic, page 14-5
• Private VLANs and SVIs, page 14-5
You should also see the “Secondary and Primary VLAN Configuration” section on page 14-6 under the
“Private-VLAN Configuration Guidelines” section.

14-4 OL-8553-06
Private VLANs and Unicast, Broadcast, and Multicast Traffic

In regular VLANs, devices in the same VLAN can communicate with each other at the Layer 2 level,
but devices connected to interfaces in different VLANs must communicate at the Layer 3 level. In
private VLANs, the promiscuous ports are members of the primary VLAN, while the host ports belong
to secondary VLANs. Because the secondary VLAN is associated to the primary VLAN, members of the
these VLANs can communicate with each other at the Layer 2 level.
In a regular VLAN, broadcasts are forwarded to all ports in that VLAN. Private VLAN broadcast
forwarding depends on the port sending the broadcast:
• An isolated port sends a broadcast only to the promiscuous ports or trunk ports.
• A community port sends a broadcast to all promiscuous ports, trunk ports, and ports in the same
community VLAN.
• A promiscuous port sends a broadcast to all ports in the private VLAN (other promiscuous ports,
trunk ports, isolated ports, and community ports).
Multicast traffic is routed or bridged across private-VLAN boundaries and within a single community
VLAN. Multicast traffic is not forwarded between ports in the same isolated VLAN or between ports in
different secondary VLANs.
Private VLANs and SVIs

In a Layer 3 switch, a switch virtual interface (SVI) represents the Layer 3 interface of a VLAN. Layer 3
devices communicate with a private VLAN only through the primary VLAN and not through secondary
VLANs. Configure Layer 3 VLAN interfaces only for primary VLANs. You cannot configure Layer 3
VLAN interfaces for secondary VLANs. SVIs for secondary VLANs are inactive while the VLAN is
configured as a secondary VLAN.
• If you try to configure a VLAN with an active SVI as a secondary VLAN, the configuration is not
allowed until you disable the SVI.
• If you try to create an SVI on a VLAN that is configured as a secondary VLAN and the secondary
VLAN is already mapped at Layer 3, the SVI is not created, and an error is returned. If the SVI is
not mapped at Layer 3, the SVI is created, but it is automatically shut down.
When the primary VLAN is associated with and mapped to the secondary VLAN, any configuration on
the primary VLAN is propagated to the secondary VLAN SVIs. For example, if you assign an IP subnet
to the primary VLAN SVI, this subnet is the IP subnet address of the entire private VLAN.

• Tasks for Configuring Private VLANs, page 14-6
• Default Private-VLAN Configuration, page 14-6
• Private-VLAN Configuration Guidelines, page 14-6
• Configuring and Associating VLANs in a Private VLAN, page 14-9
• Configuring a Layer 2 Interface as a Private-VLAN Host Port, page 14-11
• Configuring a Layer 2 Interface as a Private-VLAN Promiscuous Port, page 14-12
• Mapping Secondary VLANs to a Primary VLAN Layer 3 VLAN Interface, page 14-13

OL-8553-06 14-5
Tasks for Configuring Private VLANs

To configure a private VLAN, follow these steps:
Step 1 Set VTP mode to transparent.

Step 2 Create the primary and secondary VLANs and associate them. See the “Configuring and Associating
VLANs in a Private VLAN” section on page 14-9.
Note If the VLAN is not created already, the private-VLAN configuration process creates it.
Step 3 Configure interfaces to be isolated or community host ports, and assign VLAN membership to the host
port. See the “Configuring a Layer 2 Interface as a Private-VLAN Host Port” section on page 14-11.
Step 4 Configure interfaces as promiscuous ports, and map the promiscuous ports to the primary-secondary
VLAN pair. See the “Configuring a Layer 2 Interface as a Private-VLAN Promiscuous Port” section on
page 14-12.
Step 5 If inter-VLAN routing will be used, configure the primary SVI, and map secondary VLANs to the
primary. See the “Mapping Secondary VLANs to a Primary VLAN Layer 3 VLAN Interface” section on
page 14-13.
Step 6 Verify private-VLAN configuration.
Default Private-VLAN Configuration

No private VLANs are configured.
Private-VLAN Configuration Guidelines

Guidelines for configuring private VLANs fall into these categories:
• Secondary and Primary VLAN Configuration, page 14-6
• Private-VLAN Port Configuration, page 14-8
• Limitations with Other Features, page 14-8
Secondary and Primary VLAN Configuration

Follow these guidelines when configuring private VLANs:
• Set VTP to transparent mode. After you configure a private VLAN, you should not change the VTP
mode to client or server. For information about VTP, see Chapter 16, “Configuring VTP.”
• You must use VLAN configuration (config-vlan) mode to configure private VLANs. You cannot
configure private VLANs in VLAN database configuration mode. For more information about
VLAN configuration, see “VLAN Configuration Mode Options” section on page 13-7.

14-6 OL-8553-06
• After you have configured private VLANs, use the copy running-config startup config privileged
EXEC command to save the VTP transparent mode configuration and private-VLAN configuration
in the switch startup configuration file. Otherwise, if the switch resets, it defaults to VTP server
mode, which does not support private VLANs.
• VTP does not propagate private-VLAN configuration. You must configure private VLANs on each
device where you want private-VLAN ports.
• You cannot configure VLAN 1 or VLANs 1002 to 1005 as primary or secondary VLANs. Extended
VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4094) can belong to private VLANs
• A primary VLAN can have one isolated VLAN and multiple community VLANs associated with it.
An isolated or community VLAN can have only one primary VLAN associated with it.
• Although a private VLAN contains more than one VLAN, only one Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
instance runs for the entire private VLAN. When a secondary VLAN is associated with the primary
VLAN, the STP parameters of the primary VLAN are propagated to the secondary VLAN.
• You can enable DHCP snooping on private VLANs. When you enable DHCP snooping on the
primary VLAN, it is propagated to the secondary VLANs. If you configure DHCP on a secondary
VLAN, the configuration does not take effect if the primary VLAN is already configured.
• When you enable IP source guard on private-VLAN ports, you must enable DHCP snooping on the
primary VLAN.
• We recommend that you prune the private VLANs from the trunks on devices that carry no traffic
in the private VLANs.
• You can apply different quality of service (QoS) configurations to primary, isolated, and community
VLANs.
• Sticky ARP
– Sticky ARP entries are those learned on SVIs and Layer 3 interfaces. They entries do not age
out.
– The ip sticky-arp global configuration command is supported only on SVIs belonging to
private VLANs.
– The ip sticky-arp interface configuration command is only supported on
Layer 3 interfaces
SVIs belonging to normal VLANs
SVIs belonging to private VLANs
For more information about using the ip sticky-arp global configuration and the ip sticky-arp
interface configuration commands, see the command reference for this release.
• You can configure VLAN maps on primary and secondary VLANs (see the “Configuring VLAN
Maps” section on page 33-29). However, we recommend that you configure the same VLAN maps
on private-VLAN primary and secondary VLANs.
• When a frame is Layer-2 forwarded within a private VLAN, the same VLAN map is applied at the
ingress side and at the egress side. When a frame is routed from inside a private VLAN to an external
port, the private-VLAN map is applied at the ingress side.
– For frames going upstream from a host port to a promiscuous port, the VLAN map configured
on the secondary VLAN is applied.
– For frames going downstream from a promiscuous port to a host port, the VLAN map
configured on the primary VLAN is applied.

OL-8553-06 14-7
To filter out specific IP traffic for a private VLAN, you should apply the VLAN map to both the
primary and secondary VLANs.
• You can apply router ACLs only on the primary-VLAN SVIs. The ACL is applied to both primary
and secondary VLAN Layer 3 traffic.
• Although private VLANs provide host isolation at Layer 2, hosts can communicate with each other
at Layer 3.
• Private VLANs support these Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) features:
– You can configure a private-VLAN port as a SPAN source port.
– You can use VLAN-based SPAN (VSPAN) on primary, isolated, and community VLANs or use
SPAN on only one VLAN to separately monitor egress or ingress traffic.
Private-VLAN Port Configuration

Follow these guidelines when configuring private-VLAN ports:
• Use only the private-VLAN configuration commands to assign ports to primary, isolated, or
community VLANs. Layer 2 access ports assigned to the VLANs that you configure as primary,
isolated, or community VLANs are inactive while the VLAN is part of the private-VLAN
configuration. Layer 2 trunk interfaces remain in the STP forwarding state.
• Do not configure ports that belong to a PAgP or LACP EtherChannel as private-VLAN ports. While
a port is part of the private-VLAN configuration, any EtherChannel configuration for it is inactive.
• Enable Port Fast and BPDU guard on isolated and community host ports to prevent STP loops due
to misconfigurations and to speed up STP convergence (see Chapter 19, “Configuring Optional
Spanning-Tree Features”). When enabled, STP applies the BPDU guard feature to all Port
Fast-configured Layer 2 LAN ports. Do not enable Port Fast and BPDU guard on promiscuous ports.
• If you delete a VLAN used in the private-VLAN configuration, the private-VLAN ports associated
with the VLAN become inactive.
• Private-VLAN ports can be on different network devices if the devices are trunk-connected and the
primary and secondary VLANs have not been removed from the trunk.
Limitations with Other Features

When configuring private VLANs, remember these limitations with other features:
Note In some cases, the configuration is accepted with no error messages, but the commands have no effect.
• Do not configure fallback bridging on switches with private VLANs.

• When IGMP snooping is enabled on the switch (the default), the switch supports no more than 20
private-VLAN domains.
• Do not configure a remote SPAN (RSPAN) VLAN as a private-VLAN primary or secondary VLAN.
For more information about SPAN, see Chapter 28, “Configuring SPAN and RSPAN.”

14-8 OL-8553-06
• Do not configure private-VLAN ports on interfaces configured for these other features:
– dynamic-access port VLAN membership
– Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP)
– Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP)
– Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
– Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR)
– voice VLAN
– Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP)
• A private-VLAN port cannot be a secure port and should not be configured as a protected port.
• You can configure IEEE 802.1x port-based authentication on a private-VLAN port, but do not
configure IEEE 802.1x with port security, voice VLAN, or per-user ACL on private-VLAN ports.
• A private-VLAN host or promiscuous port cannot be a SPAN destination port. If you configure a
SPAN destination port as a private-VLAN port, the port becomes inactive.
• If you configure a static MAC address on a promiscuous port in the primary VLAN, you must add
the same static address to all associated secondary VLANs. If you configure a static MAC address
on a host port in a secondary VLAN, you must add the same static MAC address to the associated
primary VLAN. When you delete a static MAC address from a private-VLAN port, you must remove
all instances of the configured MAC address from the private VLAN.
Note Dynamic MAC addresses learned in one VLAN of a private VLAN are replicated in the
associated VLANs. For example, a MAC address learned in a secondary VLAN is replicated
in the primary VLAN. When the original dynamic MAC address is deleted or aged out, the
replicated addresses are removed from the MAC address table.
• Configure Layer 3 VLAN interfaces only for primary VLANs.
Configuring and Associating VLANs in a Private VLAN

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a private VLAN:
Note The private-vlan commands do not take effect until you exit VLAN configuration mode.
Command Purpose
Step 2 vtp mode transparent Set VTP mode to transparent (disable VTP).
Step 3 vlan vlan-id Enter VLAN configuration mode and designate or create a VLAN that
will be the primary VLAN. The VLAN ID range is 2 to 1001 and 1006
to 4094.
Step 4 private-vlan primary Designate the VLAN as the primary VLAN.

OL-8553-06 14-9
Command Purpose
Step 6 vlan vlan-id (Optional) Enter VLAN configuration mode and designate or create a
VLAN that will be an isolated VLAN. The VLAN ID range is 2 to 1001
and 1006 to 4094.
Step 7 private-vlan isolated Designate the VLAN as an isolated VLAN.
Step 9 vlan vlan-id (Optional) Enter VLAN configuration mode and designate or create a
VLAN that will be a community VLAN. The VLAN ID range is 2 to
1001 and 1006 to 4094.
Step 10 private-vlan community Designate the VLAN as a community VLAN.
Step 12 vlan vlan-id Enter VLAN configuration mode for the primary VLAN designated in
Step 2.
Step 13 private-vlan association [add | remove] Associate the secondary VLANs with the primary VLAN.
secondary_vlan_list
Step 15 show vlan private-vlan [type] Verify the configuration.
or
show interfaces status
Step 16 copy running-config startup config Save your entries in the switch startup configuration file. To save the
private-VLAN configuration, you need to save the VTP transparent
mode configuration and private-VLAN configuration in the switch
startup configuration file. Otherwise, if the switch resets, it defaults to
VTP server mode, which does not support private VLANs.
When you associate secondary VLANs with a primary VLAN, note this syntax information:
• The secondary_vlan_list parameter cannot contain spaces. It can contain multiple comma-separated
items. Each item can be a single private-VLAN ID or a hyphenated range of private-VLAN IDs.
• The secondary_vlan_list parameter can contain multiple community VLAN IDs but only one
isolated VLAN ID.
• Enter a secondary_vlan_list, or use the add keyword with a secondary_vlan_list to associate
secondary VLANs with a primary VLAN.
• Use the remove keyword with a secondary_vlan_list to clear the association between secondary
VLANs and a primary VLAN.
• The command does not take effect until you exit VLAN configuration mode.
This example shows how to configure VLAN 20 as a primary VLAN, VLAN 501 as an isolated VLAN,
and VLANs 502 and 503 as community VLANs, to associate them in a private VLAN, and to verify the
configuration:
Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan primary
Switch(config-vlan)# exit
Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan isolated

14-10 OL-8553-06
Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan community

Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan community
Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan association 501-503
Switch(config)# show vlan private vlan
Primary Secondary Type Ports
------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------
20 501 isolated
20 502 community
20 503 community
20 504 non-operational
Configuring a Layer 2 Interface as a Private-VLAN Host Port

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a Layer 2 interface as a
private-VLAN host port and to associate it with primary and secondary VLANs:
Note Isolated and community VLANs are both secondary VLANs.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode for the Layer 2
interface to be configured.
Step 3 switchport mode private-vlan host Configure the Layer 2 port as a private-VLAN host port.
Step 4 switchport private-vlan host-association Associate the Layer 2 port with a private VLAN.
primary_vlan_id secondary_vlan_id
Step 6 show interfaces [interface-id] switchport Verify the configuration.
Step 7 copy running-config startup config (Optional) Save your entries in the switch startup
configuration file.
This example shows how to configure an interface as a private-VLAN host port, associate it with a
private-VLAN pair, and verify the configuration:
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/22
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan host
Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan host-association 20 25
Switch# show interfaces fastethernet0/22 switchport
Name: Fa0/22
Switchport: Enabled
Administrative Mode: private-vlan host
Operational Mode: private-vlan host
Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate
Operational Trunking Encapsulation: native
Negotiation of Trunking: Off
Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

OL-8553-06 14-11
Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled
Voice VLAN: none
Administrative private-vlan host-association: 20 (VLAN0020) 25 (VLAN0025)
Administrative private-vlan mapping: none
Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: none
Administrative private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled
Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q
Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: none
Administrative private-vlan trunk private VLANs: none
Operational private-vlan:
20 (VLAN0020) 25 (VLAN0025)
<output truncated>
Configuring a Layer 2 Interface as a Private-VLAN Promiscuous Port

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a Layer 2 interface as a
private-VLAN promiscuous port and map it to primary and secondary VLANs:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode for the Layer 2
interface to be configured.
Step 3 switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous Configure the Layer 2 port as a private-VLAN
promiscuous port.
Step 4 switchport private-vlan mapping primary_vlan_id Map the private-VLAN promiscuous port to a primary
{add | remove} secondary_vlan_list VLAN and to selected secondary VLANs.
Step 6 show interfaces [interface-id] switchport Verify the configuration.
configuration file.
When you configure a Layer 2 interface as a private-VLAN promiscuous port, note this syntax
information:
• Enter a secondary_vlan_list, or use the add keyword with a secondary_vlan_list to map the
secondary VLANs to the private-VLAN promiscuous port.
• Use the remove keyword with a secondary_vlan_list to clear the mapping between secondary
VLANs and the private-VLAN promiscuous port.
This example shows how to configure an interface as a private-VLAN promiscuous port and map it to a
private VLAN. The interface is a member of primary VLAN 20 and secondary VLANs 501 to 503 are
mapped to it.

14-12 OL-8553-06

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous
Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping 20 add 501-503
Use the show vlan private-vlan or the show interface status privileged EXEC command to display
primary and secondary VLANs and private-VLAN ports on the switch.
Mapping Secondary VLANs to a Primary VLAN Layer 3 VLAN Interface

If the private VLAN will be used for inter-VLAN routing, you configure an SVI for the primary VLAN
and map secondary VLANs to the SVI.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to map secondary VLANs to the SVI of a
primary VLAN to allow Layer 3 switching of private-VLAN traffic:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface vlan primary_vlan_id Enter interface configuration mode for the primary
VLAN, and configure the VLAN as an SVI. The VLAN
ID range is 2 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
Step 3 private-vlan mapping [add | remove] Map the secondary VLANs to the Layer 3 VLAN
secondary_vlan_list interface of a primary VLAN to allow Layer 3 switching
of private-VLAN ingress traffic.
Step 5 show interface private-vlan mapping Verify the configuration.
configuration file.
Note The private-vlan mapping interface configuration command only affects private-VLAN traffic that is
switched through Layer 3.
When you map secondary VLANs to the Layer 3 VLAN interface of a primary VLAN, note this syntax
information:
• Enter a secondary_vlan_list, or use the add keyword with a secondary_vlan_list to map the
secondary VLANs to the primary VLAN.
• Use the remove keyword with a secondary_vlan_list to clear the mapping between secondary
VLANs and the primary VLAN.
This example shows how to map the interfaces of VLANs 501 and 502 to primary VLAN 10, which
permits routing of secondary VLAN ingress traffic from private VLANs 501 to 502:

OL-8553-06 14-13
Monitoring Private VLANs
Switch(config)# interface vlan 10

Switch(config-if)# private-vlan mapping 501-502
Switch# show interfaces private-vlan mapping
Interface Secondary VLAN Type
--------- -------------- -----------------
vlan10 501 isolated
vlan10 502 community
Monitoring Private VLANs

Table 14-1 shows the privileged EXEC commands for monitoring private-VLAN activity.
Table 14-1 Private VLAN Monitoring Commands
Command Purpose
show interfaces status Displays the status of interfaces, including the VLANs to which they belongs.
show vlan private-vlan [type] Display the private-VLAN information for the switch.
show interface switchport Display the private-VLAN configuration on interfaces.
show interface private-vlan mapping Display information about the private-VLAN mapping for VLAN SVIs.
This is an example of the output from the show vlan private-vlan command:
Switch(config)# show vlan private-vlan
Primary Secondary Type Ports
------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------
10 501 isolated 0/1, Gi0/, Gi0/3
10 502 community 0/1, Gi0/, Gi0/4
10 503 non-operational

14-14 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 16
Configuring IEEE 802.1Q and Layer 2 Protocol
Tunneling
Virtual private networks (VPNs) provide enterprise-scale connectivity on a shared infrastructure, often
Ethernet-based, with the same security, prioritization, reliability, and manageability requirements of
private networks. Tunneling is a feature designed for service providers who carry traffic of multiple
customers across their networks and are required to maintain the VLAN and Layer 2 protocol
configurations of each customer without impacting the traffic of other customers. The Catalyst 3560
switch supports IEEE 802.1Q tunneling and Layer 2 protocol tunneling.
This chapter contains these sections:

• Understanding IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling, page 16-1
• Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling, page 16-4
• Understanding Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, page 16-7
• Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, page 16-10
• Monitoring and Maintaining Tunneling Status, page 16-17
Understanding IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling

Business customers of service providers often have specific requirements for VLAN IDs and the number
of VLANs to be supported. The VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same
service-provider network might overlap, and traffic of customers through the infrastructure might be
mixed. Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations
and could easily exceed the VLAN limit (4096) of the IEEE 802.1Q specification.
Using the IEEE 802.1Q tunneling feature, service providers can use a single VLAN to support customers
who have multiple VLANs. Customer VLAN IDs are preserved, and traffic from different customers is
segregated within the service-provider network, even when they appear to be in the same VLAN. Using
IEEE 802.1Q tunneling expands VLAN space by using a VLAN-in-VLAN hierarchy and retagging the
tagged packets. A port configured to support IEEE 802.1Q tunneling is called a tunnel port. When you
configure tunneling, you assign a tunnel port to a VLAN ID that is dedicated to tunneling. Each customer
requires a separate service-provider VLAN ID, but that VLAN ID supports all of the customer’s VLANs.

OL-8553-06 16-1
Chapter 16 Configuring IEEE 802.1Q and Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
Customer traffic tagged in the normal way with appropriate VLAN IDs comes from an IEEE 802.1Q
trunk port on the customer device and into a tunnel port on the service-provider edge switch. The link
between the customer device and the edge switch is asymmetric because one end is configured as an
IEEE 802.1Q trunk port, and the other end is configured as a tunnel port. You assign the tunnel port
interface to an access VLAN ID that is unique to each customer. See Figure 16-1.
Figure 16-1 IEEE 802.1Q Tunnel Ports in a Service-Provider Network
Customer A
VLANs 1 to 100
Customer A
VLANs 1 to 100
Service
provider
Tunnel port
VLAN 30 Tunnel port
Tunnel port VLAN 30
VLAN 30 Trunk Trunk
ports ports
Tunnel port Tunnel port

VLAN 40 VLAN 40
74016
Customer B Trunk Customer B
VLANs 1 to 200 Asymmetric link VLANs 1 to 200
Packets coming from the customer trunk port into the tunnel port on the service-provider edge switch
are normally IEEE 802.1Q-tagged with the appropriate VLAN ID. The the tagged packets remain intact
inside the switch and when they exit the trunk port into the service-provider network, they are
encapsulated with another layer of an IEEE 802.1Q tag (called the metro tag) that contains the VLAN
ID that is unique to the customer. The original customer IEEE 802.1Q tag is preserved in the
encapsulated packet. Therefore, packets entering the service-provider network are double-tagged, with
the outer (metro) tag containing the customer’s access VLAN ID, and the inner VLAN ID being that of
the incoming traffic.
When the double-tagged packet enters another trunk port in a service-provider core switch, the outer tag
is stripped as the switch processes the packet. When the packet exits another trunk port on the same core
switch, the same metro tag is again added to the packet. Figure 16-2 shows the tag structures of the
double-tagged packets.
Note Remove the Layer 2 protocol configuration from a trunk port because incoming encapsulated packets
change that trunk port to error disabled. The outgoing encapsulated VTP (CDP and STP) packets are
dropped on that trunk.

16-2 OL-8553-06
Figure 16-2 Original (Normal), IEEE 802.1Q, and Double-Tagged Ethernet Packet Formats
Source
address
Destination Length/ Frame Check
address EtherType Sequence
DA SA Len/Etype Data FCS Original Ethernet frame
DA SA Etype Tag Len/Etype Data FCS IEE 802.1Q frame from

customer network
74072
DA SA Etype Tag Etype Tag Len/Etype Data FCS
Double-tagged
frame in service
provider
infrastructure
When the packet enters the trunk port of the service-provider egress switch, the outer tag is again
stripped as the switch internally processes the packet. However, the metro tag is not added when the
packet is sent out the tunnel port on the edge switch into the customer network. The packet is sent as a
normal IEEE 802.1Q-tagged frame to preserve the original VLAN numbers in the customer network.
In Figure 16-1, Customer A was assigned VLAN 30, and Customer B was assigned VLAN 40. Packets
entering the edge switch tunnel ports with IEEE 802.1Q tags are double-tagged when they enter the
service-provider network, with the outer tag containing VLAN ID 30 or 40, appropriately, and the inner
tag containing the original VLAN number, for example, VLAN 100. Even if both Customers A and B
have VLAN 100 in their networks, the traffic remains segregated within the service-provider network
because the outer tag is different. Each customer controls its own VLAN numbering space, which is
independent of the VLAN numbering space used by other customers and the VLAN numbering space
used by the service-provider network.
At the outbound tunnel port, the original VLAN numbers on the customer’s network are recovered. It is
possible to have multiple levels of tunneling and tagging, but the switch supports only one level in this
release.
If traffic coming from a customer network is not tagged (native VLAN frames), these packets are bridged
or routed as normal packets. All packets entering the service-provider network through a tunnel port on
an edge switch are treated as untagged packets, whether they are untagged or already tagged with IEEE
802.1Q headers. The packets are encapsulated with the metro tag VLAN ID (set to the access VLAN of
the tunnel port) when they are sent through the service-provider network on an IEEE 802.1Q trunk port.
The priority field on the metro tag is set to the interface class of service (CoS) priority configured on the
tunnel port. (The default is zero if none is configured.)

OL-8553-06 16-3
Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling

• Default IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Configuration, page 16-4
• IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Configuration Guidelines, page 16-4
• IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling and Other Features, page 16-6
• Configuring an IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Port, page 16-6
Default IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Configuration

By default, IEEE 802.1Q tunneling is disabled because the default switchport mode is dynamic auto.
Tagging of IEEE 802.1Q native VLAN packets on all IEEE 802.1Q trunk ports is also disabled.
IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Configuration Guidelines

When you configure IEEE 802.1Q tunneling, you should always use an asymmetrical link between the
customer device and the edge switch, with the customer device port configured as an IEEE 802.1Q trunk
port and the edge switch port configured as a tunnel port.
Assign tunnel ports only to VLANs that are used for tunneling.
Configuration requirements for native VLANs and for and maximum transmission units (MTUs) are
explained in these next sections.
Native VLANs
When configuring IEEE 802.1Q tunneling on an edge switch, you must use IEEE 802.1Q trunk ports for
sending packets into the service-provider network. However, packets going through the core of the
service-provider network can be carried through IEEE 802.1Q trunks, ISL trunks, or nontrunking links.
When IEEE 802.1Q trunks are used in these core switches, the native VLANs of the IEEE 802.1Q trunks
must not match any native VLAN of the nontrunking (tunneling) port on the same switch because traffic
on the native VLAN would not be tagged on the IEEE 802.1Q sending trunk port.
See Figure 16-3. VLAN 40 is configured as the native VLAN for the IEEE 802.1Q trunk port from
Customer X at the ingress edge switch in the service-provider network (Switch B). Switch A of
Customer X sends a tagged packet on VLAN 30 to the ingress tunnel port of Switch B in the
service-provider network, which belongs to access VLAN 40. Because the access VLAN of the tunnel
port (VLAN 40) is the same as the native VLAN of the edge-switch trunk port (VLAN 40), the metro
tag is not added to tagged packets received from the tunnel port. The packet carries only the VLAN 30
tag through the service-provider network to the trunk port of the egress-edge switch (Switch C) and is
misdirected through the egress switch tunnel port to Customer Y.

16-4 OL-8553-06
These are some ways to solve this problem:

• Use ISL trunks between core switches in the service-provider network. Although customer
interfaces connected to edge switches must be IEEE 802.1Q trunks, we recommend using ISL trunks
for connecting switches in the core layer.
• Use the vlan dot1q tag native global configuration command to configure the edge switch so that
all packets going out an IEEE 802.1Q trunk, including the native VLAN, are tagged. If the switch
is configured to tag native VLAN packets on all IEEE 802.1Q trunks, the switch accepts untagged
packets, but sends only tagged packets.
• Ensure that the native VLAN ID on the edge-switch trunk port is not within the customer VLAN
range. For example, if the trunk port carries traffic of VLANs 100 to 200, assign the native VLAN
a number outside that range.
Figure 16-3 Potential Problem with IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling and Native VLANs
Switch D
Tag not added Tag Customer X
for VLAN 40 removed VLANs 30-40
Native VLAN 40
Service
provider
Tunnel port
Switch B VLANs 5-50 Switch C VLAN 40
Packet tagged
for VLAN 30 Q Native Q
VLAN 40
Tunnel port Tunnel port
Switch A Access VLAN 40 Access VLAN 30
Customer X
802.1Q
trunk port
VLANs 30-40 Switch E
Native VLAN 40 Customer Y
Trunk
Asymmetric link
Correct path for traffic
Incorrect path for traffic due to
misconfiguration of native VLAN
101820
by sending port on Switch B
Q = 802.1Q trunk ports
System MTU
The default system MTU for traffic on the switch is 1500 bytes. You can configure Fast Ethernet ports
to support frames larger than 1500 bytes by using the system mtu global configuration command. You
can configure Gigabit Ethernet ports to support frames larger than 1500 bytes by using the system mtu
jumbo global configuration command. Because the IEEE 802.1Q tunneling feature increases the frame
size by 4 bytes when the metro tag is added, you must configure all switches in the service-provider
network to be able to process maximum frames by increasing the switch system MTU size to at least
1504 bytes. The maximum allowable system MTU for Gigabit Ethernet interfaces is 9000 bytes; the
maximum system MTU for Fast Ethernet interfaces is 1998 bytes.

OL-8553-06 16-5
IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling and Other Features

Although IEEE 802.1Q tunneling works well for Layer 2 packet switching, there are incompatibilities
between some Layer 2 features and Layer 3 switching.
• A tunnel port cannot be a routed port.
• IP routing is not supported on a VLAN that includes IEEE 802.1Q ports. Packets received from a
tunnel port are forwarded based only on Layer 2 information. If routing is enabled on a switch
virtual interface (SVI) that includes tunnel ports, untagged IP packets received from the tunnel port
are recognized and routed by the switch. Customer can access the internet through its native VLAN.
If this access is not needed, you should not configure SVIs on VLANs that include tunnel ports.
• Fallback bridging is not supported on tunnel ports. Because all IEEE 802.1Q-tagged packets
received from a tunnel port are treated as non-IP packets, if fallback bridging is enabled on VLANs
that have tunnel ports configured, IP packets would be improperly bridged across VLANs.
Therefore, you must not enable fallback bridging on VLANs with tunnel ports.
• Tunnel ports do not support IP access control lists (ACLs).
• Layer 3 quality of service (QoS) ACLs and other QoS features related to Layer 3 information are
not supported on tunnel ports. MAC-based QoS is supported on tunnel ports.
• EtherChannel port groups are compatible with tunnel ports as long as the IEEE 802.1Q
configuration is consistent within an EtherChannel port group.
• Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), and UniDirectional
Link Detection (UDLD) are supported on IEEE 802.1Q tunnel ports.
• Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) is not compatible with IEEE 802.1Q tunneling because you must
manually configure asymmetric links with tunnel ports and trunk ports.
• VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) does not work between devices that are connected by an
asymmetrical link or devices that communicate through a tunnel.
• Loopback detection is supported on IEEE 802.1Q tunnel ports.
• When a port is configured as an IEEE 802.1Q tunnel port, spanning-tree bridge protocol data unit
(BPDU) filtering is automatically enabled on the interface. Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) and the
Layer Link Discovery Protocol (LLDP) are automatically disabled on the interface.
Configuring an IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Port

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a port as an IEEE 802.1Q tunnel
port:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode for the interface to be configured as a
tunnel port. This should be the edge port in the service-provider network
that connects to the customer switch. Valid interfaces include physical
interfaces and port-channel logical interfaces (port channels 1 to 48).
Step 3 switchport access vlan vlan-id Specify the default VLAN, which is used if the interface stops trunking.
This VLAN ID is specific to the particular customer.
Step 4 switchport mode dot1q-tunnel Set the interface as an IEEE 802.1Q tunnel port.

16-6 OL-8553-06
Understanding Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
Command Purpose
Step 6 vlan dot1q tag native (Optional) Set the switch to enable tagging of native VLAN packets on
all IEEE 802.1Q trunk ports. When not set, and a customer VLAN ID is
the same as the native VLAN, the trunk port does not apply a metro tag,
and packets could be sent to the wrong destination.
Step 8 show running-config Display the ports configured for IEEE 802.1Q tunneling.
show dot1q-tunnel Display the ports that are in tunnel mode.
Step 9 show vlan dot1q tag native Display IEEE 802.1Q native VLAN tagging status.
Use the no switchport mode dot1q-tunnel interface configuration command to return the port to the
default state of dynamic desirable. Use the no vlan dot1q tag native global configuration command to
disable tagging of native VLAN packets.
This example shows how to configure an interface as a tunnel port, enable tagging of native VLAN
packets, and verify the configuration. In this configuration, the VLAN ID for the customer connected to
Gigabit Ethernet interface 7 is VLAN 22.
% Access VLAN does not exist. Creating vlan 22
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode dot1q-tunnel
Switch(config)# vlan dot1q tag native
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show dot1q-tunnel interface gigabitethernet0/7
Port
-----
Gi0/1Port
-----
Switch# show vlan dot1q tag native
dot1q native vlan tagging is enabled

Customers at different sites connected across a service-provider network need to use various Layer 2
protocols to scale their topologies to include all remote sites, as well as the local sites. STP must run
properly, and every VLAN should build a proper spanning tree that includes the local site and all remote
sites across the service-provider network. Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) must discover neighboring
Cisco devices from local and remote sites. VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) must provide consistent
VLAN configuration throughout all sites in the customer network.

OL-8553-06 16-7
When protocol tunneling is enabled, edge switches on the inbound side of the service-provider network
encapsulate Layer 2 protocol packets with a special MAC address and send them across the
service-provider network. Core switches in the network do not process these packets but forward them
as normal packets. Layer 2 protocol data units (PDUs) for CDP, STP, or VTP cross the service-provider
network and are delivered to customer switches on the outbound side of the service-provider network.
Identical packets are received by all customer ports on the same VLANs with these results:
• Users on each of a customer’s sites can properly run STP, and every VLAN can build a correct
spanning tree based on parameters from all sites and not just from the local site.
• CDP discovers and shows information about the other Cisco devices connected through the
service-provider network.
• VTP provides consistent VLAN configuration throughout the customer network, propagating to all
switches through the service provider.
Note To provide interoperability with third-party vendors, you can use the Layer 2 protocol-tunnel bypass
feature. Bypass mode transparently forwards control PDUs to vendor switches that have different ways
of controlling protocol tunneling. You implement bypass mode by enabling Layer 2 protocol tunneling
on the egress trunk port. When Layer 2 protocol tunneling is enabled on the trunk port, the encapsulated
tunnel MAC address is removed and the protocol packets have their normal MAC address.
Layer 2 protocol tunneling can be used independently or can enhance IEEE 802.1Q tunneling. If protocol
tunneling is not enabled on IEEE 802.1Q tunneling ports, remote switches at the receiving end of the
service-provider network do not receive the PDUs and cannot properly run STP, CDP, and VTP. When
protocol tunneling is enabled, Layer 2 protocols within each customer’s network are totally separate
from those running within the service-provider network. Customer switches on different sites that send
traffic through the service-provider network with IEEE 802.1Q tunneling achieve complete knowledge
of the customer’s VLAN. If IEEE 802.1Q tunneling is not used, you can still enable Layer 2 protocol
tunneling by connecting to the customer switch through access ports and by enabling tunneling on the
service-provider access port.
For example, in Figure 16-4, Customer X has four switches in the same VLAN, that are connected
through the service-provider network. If the network does not tunnel PDUs, switches on the far ends of
the network cannot properly run STP, CDP, and VTP. For example, STP for a VLAN on a switch in
Customer X, Site 1, will build a spanning tree on the switches at that site without considering
convergence parameters based on Customer X’s switch in Site 2. This could result in the topology shown
in Figure 16-5.

16-8 OL-8553-06
Figure 16-4 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
Customer X Site 1
VLANs 1 to 100
Customer X Site 2
VLANs 1 to 100
VLAN 30 Service
provider
VLAN 30
VLAN 30
Trunk Trunk
ports ports
Switch A Switch C
Switch B Switch D
Trunk Trunk
ports ports
VLAN 40 VLAN 40
101822
Trunk
Customer Y Site 1 Asymmetric link
VLANs 1 to 200 Customer Y Site 2
VLANs 1 to 200
Figure 16-5 Layer 2 Network Topology without Proper Convergence
Customer X
virtual network
VLANs 1 to 100
101821
In an SP network, you can use Layer 2 protocol tunneling to enhance the creation of EtherChannels by
emulating a point-to-point network topology. When you enable protocol tunneling (PAgP or LACP) on
the SP switch, remote customer switches receive the PDUs and can negotiate the automatic creation of
EtherChannels.

OL-8553-06 16-9
Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
For example, in Figure 16-6, Customer A has two switches in the same VLAN that are connected
through the SP network. When the network tunnels PDUs, switches on the far ends of the network can
negotiate the automatic creation of EtherChannels without needing dedicated lines. See the “Configuring
Layer 2 Tunneling for EtherChannels” section on page 16-14 for instructions.
Figure 16-6 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling for EtherChannels
EtherChannel 1 Service EtherChannel 1

Provider
VLAN 17 VLAN 17
Customer A Customer A
Site 1 Site 2
VLAN 18 Switch A Switch C VLAN 18
VLAN 19 VLAN 19
101844
VLAN 20 VLAN 20
Switch B Switch D
Trunk
Asymmetric link

You can enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling (by protocol) on the ports that are connected to the customer
in the edge switches of the service-provider network. The service-provider edge switches connected to
the customer switch perform the tunneling process. Edge-switch tunnel ports are connected to customer
IEEE 802.1Q trunk ports. Edge-switch access ports are connected to customer access ports. The edge
switches connected to the customer switch perform the tunneling process.
You can enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling on ports that are configured as access ports or tunnel ports.
You cannot enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling on ports configured in either switchport mode dynamic
auto (the default mode) or switchport mode dynamic desirable.
The switch supports Layer 2 protocol tunneling for CDP, STP, and VTP. For emulated point-to-point
network topologies, it also supports PAgP, LACP, and UDLD protocols. The switch does not support
Layer 2 protocol tunneling for LLDP.
Caution PAgP, LACP, and UDLD protocol tunneling is only intended to emulate a point-to-point topology. An
erroneous configuration that sends tunneled packets to many ports could lead to a network failure.
When the Layer 2 PDUs that entered the service-provider inbound edge switch through a Layer 2
protocol-enabled port exit through the trunk port into the service-provider network, the switch
overwrites the customer PDU-destination MAC address with a well-known Cisco proprietary multicast
address (01-00-0c-cd-cd-d0). If IEEE 802.1Q tunneling is enabled, packets are also double-tagged; the
outer tag is the customer metro tag, and the inner tag is the customer’s VLAN tag. The core switches
ignore the inner tags and forward the packet to all trunk ports in the same metro VLAN. The edge
switches on the outbound side restore the proper Layer 2 protocol and MAC address information and
forward the packets to all tunnel or access ports in the same metro VLAN. Therefore, the Layer 2 PDUs
remain intact and are delivered across the service-provider infrastructure to the other side of the
customer network.

16-10 OL-8553-06
See Figure 16-4, with Customer X and Customer Y in access VLANs 30 and 40, respectively.
Asymmetric links connect the customers in Site 1 to edge switches in the service-provider network. The
Layer 2 PDUs (for example, BPDUs) coming into Switch 2 from Customer Y in Site 1 are forwarded to
the infrastructure as double-tagged packets with the well-known MAC address as the destination MAC
address. These double-tagged packets have the metro VLAN tag of 40, as well as an inner VLAN tag
(for example, VLAN 100). When the double-tagged packets enter Switch D, the outer VLAN tag 40 is
removed, the well-known MAC address is replaced with the respective Layer 2 protocol MAC address,
and the packet is sent to Customer Y on Site 2 as a single-tagged frame in VLAN 100.
You can also enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling on access ports on the edge switch connected to access
or trunk ports on the customer switch. In this case, the encapsulation and decapsulation process is the
same as described in the previous paragraph, except that the packets are not double-tagged in the
service-provider network. The single tag is the customer-specific access VLAN tag.
• Default Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Configuration, page 16-11
• Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Configuration Guidelines, page 16-11
• Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, page 16-12
• Configuring Layer 2 Tunneling for EtherChannels, page 16-14
Default Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Configuration

Table 16-1 shows the default Layer 2 protocol tunneling configuration.
Table 16-1 Default Layer 2 Ethernet Interface VLAN Configuration

Layer 2 protocol tunneling Disabled.
Shutdown threshold None set.
Drop threshold None set.
CoS value If a CoS value is configured on the interface for data packets, that
value is the default used for Layer 2 PDUs. If none is configured,
the default is 5.
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Configuration Guidelines

These are some configuration guidelines and operating characteristics of Layer 2 protocol tunneling:
• The switch supports tunneling of CDP, STP, including multiple STP (MSTP), and VTP. Protocol
tunneling is disabled by default but can be enabled for the individual protocols on IEEE 802.1Q
tunnel ports or access ports.
• The switch does not support Layer 2 protocol tunneling on ports with switchport mode dynamic
auto or dynamic desirable.
• DTP is not compatible with layer 2 protocol tunneling.
• The edge switches on the outbound side of the service-provider network restore the proper Layer 2
protocol and MAC address information and forward the packets to all tunnel and access ports in the
same metro VLAN.

OL-8553-06 16-11
• For interoperability with third-party vendor switches, the switch supports a Layer 2 protocol-tunnel
bypass feature. Bypass mode transparently forwards control PDUs to vendor switches that have
different ways of controlling protocol tunneling.When Layer 2 protocol tunneling is enabled on
ingress ports on a switch, egress trunk ports forward the tunneled packets with a special
encapsulation. If you also enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling on the egress trunk port, this behavior
is bypassed, and the switch forwards control PDUs without any processing or modification.
• The switch supports PAgP, LACP, and UDLD tunneling for emulated point-to-point network
topologies. Protocol tunneling is disabled by default but can be enabled for the individual protocols
on IEEE 802.1Q tunnel ports or on access ports.
• If you enable PAgP or LACP tunneling, we recommend that you also enable UDLD on the interface
for faster link-failure detection.
• Loopback detection is not supported on Layer 2 protocol tunneling of PAgP, LACP, or UDLD
packets.
• EtherChannel port groups are compatible with tunnel ports when the IEEE 802.1Q configuration is
consistent within an EtherChannel port group.
• If an encapsulated PDU (with the proprietary destination MAC address) is received from a tunnel
port or an access port with Layer 2 tunneling enabled, the tunnel port is shut down to prevent loops.
The port also shuts down when a configured shutdown threshold for the protocol is reached. You can
manually re-enable the port (by entering a shutdown and a no shutdown command sequence). If
errdisable recovery is enabled, the operation is retried after a specified time interval.
• Only decapsulated PDUs are forwarded to the customer network. The spanning-tree instance
running on the service-provider network does not forward BPDUs to tunnel ports. CDP packets are
not forwarded from tunnel ports.
• When protocol tunneling is enabled on an interface, you can set a per-protocol, per-port, shutdown
threshold for the PDUs generated by the customer network. If the limit is exceeded, the port shuts
down. You can also limit BPDU rate by using QoS ACLs and policy maps on a tunnel port.
• When protocol tunneling is enabled on an interface, you can set a per-protocol, per-port, drop
threshold for the PDUs generated by the customer network. If the limit is exceeded, the port drops
PDUs until the rate at which it receives them is below the drop threshold.
• Because tunneled PDUs (especially STP BPDUs) must be delivered to all remote sites so that the
customer virtual network operates properly, you can give PDUs higher priority within the
service-provider network than data packets received from the same tunnel port. By default, the
PDUs use the same CoS value as data packets.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a port for Layer 2 protocol
tunneling:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the interface to be configured
as a tunnel port. This should be the edge port in the service-provider
network that connects to the customer switch. Valid interfaces can be
physical interfaces and port-channel logical interfaces (port channels 1 to
48).

16-12 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 switchport mode access Configure the interface as an access port or an IEEE 802.1Q tunnel port.
or
switchport mode dot1q-tunnel
Step 4 l2protocol-tunnel [cdp | stp | vtp] Enable protocol tunneling for the desired protocol. If no keyword is entered,
tunneling is enabled for all three Layer 2 protocols.
Step 5 l2protocol-tunnel (Optional) Configure the threshold for packets-per-second accepted for
shutdown-threshold [cdp | stp | vtp] encapsulation. The interface is disabled if the configured threshold is
value exceeded. If no protocol option is specified, the threshold applies to each of
the tunneled Layer 2 protocol types. The range is 1 to 4096. The default is
to have no threshold configured.
Note If you also set a drop threshold on this interface, the
shutdown-threshold value must be greater than or equal to the
drop-threshold value.
Step 6 l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold (Optional) Configure the threshold for packets-per-second accepted for
[cdp | stp | vtp] value encapsulation. The interface drops packets if the configured threshold is
exceeded. If no protocol option is specified, the threshold applies to each of
If you also set a shutdown threshold on this interface, the drop-threshold
value must be less than or equal to the shutdown-threshold value.
Step 8 errdisable recovery cause l2ptguard (Optional) Configure the recovery mechanism from a Layer 2
maximum-rate error so that the interface is re-enabled and can try again.
Errdisable recovery is disabled by default; when enabled, the default time
interval is 300 seconds.
Step 9 l2protocol-tunnel cos value (Optional) Configure the CoS value for all tunneled Layer 2 PDUs. The
range is 0 to 7; the default is the default CoS value for the interface. If none
is configured, the default is 5.
Step 11 show l2protocol Display the Layer 2 tunnel ports on the switch, including the protocols
configured, the thresholds, and the counters.
Use the no l2protocol-tunnel [cdp | stp | vtp] interface configuration command to disable protocol
tunneling for one of the Layer 2 protocols or for all three. Use the no l2protocol-tunnel
shutdown-threshold [cdp | stp | vtp] and the no l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold [cdp | stp | vtp]
commands to return the shutdown and drop thresholds to the default settings.
This example shows how to configure Layer 2 protocol tunneling for CDP, STP, and VTP and to verify
the configuration.
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel cdp
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel stp
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel vtp
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold 1500
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold 1000
Switch(config)# l2protocol-tunnel cos 7

OL-8553-06 16-13
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show l2protocol
COS for Encapsulated Packets: 7
Port Protocol Shutdown Drop Encapsulation Decapsulation Drop
Threshold Threshold Counter Counter Counter
------- -------- --------- --------- ------------- ------------- -------------
Fa 0/11 cdp 1500 1000 2288 2282 0
stp 1500 1000 116 13 0
vtp 1500 1000 3 67 0
pagp ---- ---- 0 0 0
lacp ---- ---- 0 0 0
udld ---- ---- 0 0 0
Configuring Layer 2 Tunneling for EtherChannels

To configure Layer 2 point-to-point tunneling to facilitate the automatic creation of EtherChannels, you
need to configure both the SP edge switch and the customer switch.
Configuring the SP Edge Switch

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a SP edge switch for Layer 2
protocol tunneling for EtherChannels:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the interface to be configured
as a tunnel port. This should be the edge port in the SP network that
connects to the customer switch. Valid interfaces are physical interfaces.
Step 3 switchport mode dot1q-tunnel Configure the interface as an IEEE 802.1Q tunnel port.
Step 4 l2protocol-tunnel point-to-point (Optional) Enable point-to-point protocol tunneling for the desired
[pagp | lacp | udld] protocol. If no keyword is entered, tunneling is enabled for all three
protocols.
Caution To avoid a network failure, make sure that the network is a

point-to-point topology before you enable tunneling for PAgP,
LACP, or UDLD packets.
Step 5 l2protocol-tunnel (Optional) Configure the threshold for packets-per-second accepted for
shutdown-threshold [point-to-point encapsulation. The interface is disabled if the configured threshold is
[pagp | lacp | udld]] value exceeded. If no protocol option is specified, the threshold applies to each of
Note If you also set a drop threshold on this interface, the
shutdown-threshold value must be greater than or equal to the
drop-threshold value.

16-14 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 6 l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold (Optional) Configure the threshold for packets-per-second accepted for
[point-to-point [pagp | lacp | udld]] encapsulation. The interface drops packets if the configured threshold is
value exceeded. If no protocol option is specified, the threshold applies to each of
Note If you also set a shutdown threshold on this interface, the
drop-threshold value must be less than or equal to the
shutdown-threshold value.
Step 7 no cdp enable Disable CDP on the interface.
Step 8 spanning-tree bpdufilter enable Enable BPDU filtering on the interface.
Step 10 errdisable recovery cause l2ptguard (Optional) Configure the recovery mechanism from a Layer 2
maximum-rate error so that the interface is re-enabled and can try again.
Errdisable recovery is disabled by default; when enabled, the default time
interval is 300 seconds.
Step 11 l2protocol-tunnel cos value (Optional) Configure the CoS value for all tunneled Layer 2 PDUs. The
range is 0 to 7; the default is the default CoS value for the interface. If none
is configured, the default is 5.
Use the no l2protocol-tunnel [point-to-point [pagp | lacp | udld]] interface configuration command to
disable point-to-point protocol tunneling for one of the Layer 2 protocols or for all three. Use the no
l2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold [point-to-point [pagp | lacp | udld]] and the no
l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold [[point-to-point [pagp | lacp | udld]] commands to return the
shutdown and drop thresholds to the default settings.
Configuring the Customer Switch

After configuring the SP edge switch, begin in privileged EXEC mode and follow these steps to
configure a customer switch for Layer 2 protocol tunneling for EtherChannels:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter the interface configuration mode. This should be the customer switch
port.
Step 3 switchport trunk encapsulation Set the trunking encapsulation format to IEEE 802.1Q.
dot1q
Step 4 switchport mode trunk Enable trunking on the interface.
Step 5 udld enable Enable UDLD in normal mode on the interface.

OL-8553-06 16-15
Command Purpose
Step 6 channel-group channel-group-number Assign the interface to a channel group, and specify desirable for the PAgP
mode desirable mode. For more information about configuring EtherChannels, see
Chapter 35, “Configuring EtherChannels and Link-State Tracking.”
Step 8 interface port-channel port-channel Enter port-channel interface mode.
number
Step 9 shutdown Shut down the interface.
Use the no switchport mode trunk, the no udld enable, and the no channel group
channel-group-number mode desirable interface configuration commands to return the interface to the
default settings.
For EtherChannels, you need to configure both the SP edge switches and the customer switches for
Layer 2 protocol tunneling. (See Figure 16-6 on page 16-10.)
This example shows how to configure the SP edge switch 1 and edge switch 2. VLANs 17, 18, 19, and
20 are the access VLANs, Fast Ethernet interfaces 1 and 2 are point-to-point tunnel ports with PAgP and
UDLD enabled, the drop threshold is 1000, and Fast Ethernet interface 3 is a trunk port.
SP edge switch 1 configuration:
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel point-to-point pagp
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel point-to-point udld
Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold point-to-point pagp 1000
Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation isl
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
SP edge switch 2 configuration:


16-16 OL-8553-06
Monitoring and Maintaining Tunneling Status

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation isl
This example shows how to configure the customer switch at Site 1. Fast Ethernet interfaces 1, 2, 3, and
4 are set for IEEE 802.1Q trunking, UDLD is enabled, EtherChannel group 1 is enabled, and the port
channel is shut down and then enabled to activate the EtherChannel configuration.
Switch(config-if)# udld enable
Switch(config-if)# channel-group 1 mode desirable
Switch(config)# interface port-channel 1
Switch(config-if)# shutdown

Table 16-2 shows the privileged EXEC commands for monitoring and maintaining IEEE 802.1Q and
Layer 2 protocol tunneling.
Table 16-2 Commands for Monitoring and Maintaining Tunneling
Command Purpose
clear l2protocol-tunnel counters Clear the protocol counters on Layer 2 protocol tunneling ports.
show dot1q-tunnel Display IEEE 802.1Q tunnel ports on the switch.
show dot1q-tunnel interface interface-id Verify if a specific interface is a tunnel port.
show l2protocol-tunnel Display information about Layer 2 protocol tunneling ports.
show errdisable recovery Verify if the recovery timer from a Layer 2 protocol-tunnel error disable
state is enabled.

OL-8553-06 16-17
Table 16-2 Commands for Monitoring and Maintaining Tunneling (continued)
Command Purpose
show l2protocol-tunnel interface interface-id Display information about a specific Layer 2 protocol tunneling port.
show l2protocol-tunnel summary Display only Layer 2 protocol summary information.
show vlan dot1q tag native Display the status of native VLAN tagging on the switch.
For detailed information about these displays, see the command reference for this release.

16-18 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 17
Configuring STP
This chapter describes how to configure the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) on port-based VLANs on the
Catalyst 3560 switch. The switch can use either the per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (PVST+) protocol
based on the IEEE 802.1D standard and Cisco proprietary extensions, or the rapid per-VLAN
spanning-tree plus (rapid-PVST+) protocol based on the IEEE 802.1w standard.
For information about the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) and how to map multiple VLANs
to the same spanning-tree instance, see Chapter 18, “Configuring MSTP.” For information about other
spanning-tree features such as Port Fast, UplinkFast, root guard, and so forth, see Chapter 19,
“Configuring Optional Spanning-Tree Features.”

• Understanding Spanning-Tree Features, page 17-1
• Configuring Spanning-Tree Features, page 17-11
• Displaying the Spanning-Tree Status, page 17-22
Understanding Spanning-Tree Features

• STP Overview, page 17-2
• Spanning-Tree Topology and BPDUs, page 17-3
• Bridge ID, Switch Priority, and Extended System ID, page 17-4
• Spanning-Tree Interface States, page 17-4
• How a Switch or Port Becomes the Root Switch or Root Port, page 17-7
• Spanning Tree and Redundant Connectivity, page 17-8
• Spanning-Tree Address Management, page 17-8
• Accelerated Aging to Retain Connectivity, page 17-8
• Spanning-Tree Modes and Protocols, page 17-9
• Supported Spanning-Tree Instances, page 17-9

OL-8553-06 17-1
Chapter 17 Configuring STP
• Spanning-Tree Interoperability and Backward Compatibility, page 17-10

• STP and IEEE 802.1Q Trunks, page 17-10
• VLAN-Bridge Spanning Tree, page 17-10
For configuration information, see the “Configuring Spanning-Tree Features” section on page 17-11.
For information about optional spanning-tree features, see Chapter 19, “Configuring Optional
Spanning-Tree Features.”
STP Overview
STP is a Layer 2 link management protocol that provides path redundancy while preventing loops in the
network. For a Layer 2 Ethernet network to function properly, only one active path can exist between
any two stations. Multiple active paths among end stations cause loops in the network. If a loop exists
in the network, end stations might receive duplicate messages. Switches might also learn end-station
MAC addresses on multiple Layer 2 interfaces. These conditions result in an unstable network.
Spanning-tree operation is transparent to end stations, which cannot detect whether they are connected
to a single LAN segment or a switched LAN of multiple segments.
The STP uses a spanning-tree algorithm to select one switch of a redundantly connected network as the
root of the spanning tree. The algorithm calculates the best loop-free path through a switched Layer 2
network by assigning a role to each port based on the role of the port in the active topology:
• Root—A forwarding port elected for the spanning-tree topology
• Designated—A forwarding port elected for every switched LAN segment
• Alternate—A blocked port providing an alternate path to the root bridge in the spanning tree
• Backup—A blocked port in a loopback configuration
The switch that has all of its ports as the designated role or as the backup role is the root switch. The
switch that has at least one of its ports in the designated role is called the designated switch.
Spanning tree forces redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state. If a network segment in the
spanning tree fails and a redundant path exists, the spanning-tree algorithm recalculates the
spanning-tree topology and activates the standby path. Switches send and receive spanning-tree frames,
called bridge protocol data units (BPDUs), at regular intervals. The switches do not forward these frames
but use them to construct a loop-free path. BPDUs contain information about the sending switch and its
ports, including switch and MAC addresses, switch priority, port priority, and path cost. Spanning tree
uses this information to elect the root switch and root port for the switched network and the root port and
designated port for each switched segment.
When two ports on a switch are part of a loop, the spanning-tree port priority and path cost settings
control which port is put in the forwarding state and which is put in the blocking state. The spanning-tree
port priority value represents the location of a port in the network topology and how well it is located to
pass traffic. The path cost value represents the media speed.
Note In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(18)SE and later, the default is for the switch to send keepalive messages (to
ensure the connection is up) only on interfaces that do not have small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules. You can use the [no] keepalive interface configuration command to change the default for an
interface.

17-2 OL-8553-06
Spanning-Tree Topology and BPDUs

The stable, active spanning-tree topology of a switched network is controlled by these elements:
• The unique bridge ID (switch priority and MAC address) associated with each VLAN on each
switch.
• The spanning-tree path cost to the root switch.
• The port identifier (port priority and MAC address) associated with each Layer 2 interface.
When the switches in a network are powered up, each functions as the root switch. Each switch sends a
configuration BPDU through all of its ports. The BPDUs communicate and compute the spanning-tree
topology. Each configuration BPDU contains this information:
• The unique bridge ID of the switch that the sending switch identifies as the root switch
• The spanning-tree path cost to the root
• The bridge ID of the sending switch
• Message age
• The identifier of the sending interface
• Values for the hello, forward delay, and max-age protocol timers
When a switch receives a configuration BPDU that contains superior information (lower bridge ID,
lower path cost, and so forth), it stores the information for that port. If this BPDU is received on the root
port of the switch, the switch also forwards it with an updated message to all attached LANs for which
it is the designated switch.
If a switch receives a configuration BPDU that contains inferior information to that currently stored for
that port, it discards the BPDU. If the switch is a designated switch for the LAN from which the inferior
BPDU was received, it sends that LAN a BPDU containing the up-to-date information stored for that
port. In this way, inferior information is discarded, and superior information is propagated on the
network.
A BPDU exchange results in these actions:
• One switch in the network is elected as the root switch (the logical center of the spanning-tree
topology in a switched network).
For each VLAN, the switch with the highest switch priority (the lowest numerical priority value) is
elected as the root switch. If all switches are configured with the default priority (32768), the switch
with the lowest MAC address in the VLAN becomes the root switch. The switch priority value
occupies the most significant bits of the bridge ID, as shown in Table 17-1 on page 17-4.
• A root port is selected for each switch (except the root switch). This port provides the best path
(lowest cost) when the switch forwards packets to the root switch.
• The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch based on the path cost.
• A designated switch for each LAN segment is selected. The designated switch incurs the lowest path
cost when forwarding packets from that LAN to the root switch. The port through which the
designated switch is attached to the LAN is called the designated port.
All paths that are not needed to reach the root switch from anywhere in the switched network are placed
in the spanning-tree blocking mode.

OL-8553-06 17-3
Bridge ID, Switch Priority, and Extended System ID

The IEEE 802.1D standard requires that each switch has an unique bridge identifier (bridge ID), which
controls the selection of the root switch. Because each VLAN is considered as a different logical bridge
with PVST+ and rapid PVST+, the same switch must have a different bridge IDs for each configured
VLAN. Each VLAN on the switch has a unique 8-byte bridge ID. The 2 most-significant bytes are used
for the switch priority, and the remaining 6 bytes are derived from the switch MAC address.
The switch supports the IEEE 802.1t spanning-tree extensions, and some of the bits previously used for
the switch priority are now used as the VLAN identifier. The result is that fewer MAC addresses are
reserved for the switch, and a larger range of VLAN IDs can be supported, all while maintaining the
uniqueness of the bridge ID. As shown in Table 17-1, the 2 bytes previously used for the switch priority
are reallocated into a 4-bit priority value and a 12-bit extended system ID value equal to the VLAN ID.
Table 17-1 Switch Priority Value and Extended System ID
Switch Priority Value Extended System ID (Set Equal to the VLAN ID)
Bit 16 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Spanning tree uses the extended system ID, the switch priority, and the allocated spanning-tree MAC
address to make the bridge ID unique for each VLAN.
Support for the extended system ID affects how you manually configure the root switch, the secondary
root switch, and the switch priority of a VLAN. For example, when you change the switch priority value,
you change the probability that the switch will be elected as the root switch. Configuring a higher value
decreases the probability; a lower value increases the probability. For more information, see the
“Configuring the Root Switch” section on page 17-14, the “Configuring a Secondary Root Switch”
section on page 17-16, and the “Configuring the Switch Priority of a VLAN” section on page 17-19.
Spanning-Tree Interface States

Propagation delays can occur when protocol information passes through a switched LAN. As a result,
topology changes can take place at different times and at different places in a switched network. When
an interface transitions directly from nonparticipation in the spanning-tree topology to the forwarding
state, it can create temporary data loops. Interfaces must wait for new topology information to propagate
through the switched LAN before starting to forward frames. They must allow the frame lifetime to
expire for forwarded frames that have used the old topology.
Each Layer 2 interface on a switch using spanning tree exists in one of these states:
• Blocking—The interface does not participate in frame forwarding.
• Listening—The first transitional state after the blocking state when the spanning tree decides that
the interface should participate in frame forwarding.
• Learning—The interface prepares to participate in frame forwarding.
• Forwarding—The interface forwards frames.
• Disabled—The interface is not participating in spanning tree because of a shutdown port, no link on
the port, or no spanning-tree instance running on the port.

17-4 OL-8553-06
An interface moves through these states:

• From initialization to blocking
• From blocking to listening or to disabled
• From listening to learning or to disabled
• From learning to forwarding or to disabled
• From forwarding to disabled
Figure 17-1 illustrates how an interface moves through the states.
Figure 17-1 Spanning-Tree Interface States
Power-on
initialization
Blocking
state
Listening Disabled
state state
Learning
state
Forwarding
43569
state
When you power up the switch, spanning tree is enabled by default, and every interface in the switch,
VLAN, or network goes through the blocking state and the transitory states of listening and learning.
Spanning tree stabilizes each interface at the forwarding or blocking state.
When the spanning-tree algorithm places a Layer 2 interface in the forwarding state, this process occurs:
1. The interface is in the listening state while spanning tree waits for protocol information to move the
interface to the blocking state.
2. While spanning tree waits the forward-delay timer to expire, it moves the interface to the learning
state and resets the forward-delay timer.
3. In the learning state, the interface continues to block frame forwarding as the switch learns
end-station location information for the forwarding database.
4. When the forward-delay timer expires, spanning tree moves the interface to the forwarding state,
where both learning and frame forwarding are enabled.
Blocking State
A Layer 2 interface in the blocking state does not participate in frame forwarding. After initialization, a
BPDU is sent to each switch interface. A switch initially functions as the root until it exchanges BPDUs
with other switches. This exchange establishes which switch in the network is the root or root switch. If

OL-8553-06 17-5
there is only one switch in the network, no exchange occurs, the forward-delay timer expires, and the
interface moves to the listening state. An interface always enters the blocking state after switch
initialization.
An interface in the blocking state performs these functions:
• Discards frames received on the interface
• Discards frames switched from another interface for forwarding
• Does not learn addresses
• Receives BPDUs
Listening State
The listening state is the first state a Layer 2 interface enters after the blocking state. The interface enters
this state when the spanning tree decides that the interface should participate in frame forwarding.
An interface in the listening state performs these functions:
• Receives BPDUs
Learning State
A Layer 2 interface in the learning state prepares to participate in frame forwarding. The interface enters
the learning state from the listening state.
An interface in the learning state performs these functions:
• Learns addresses
• Receives BPDUs
Forwarding State
A Layer 2 interface in the forwarding state forwards frames. The interface enters the forwarding state
from the learning state.
An interface in the forwarding state performs these functions:
• Receives and forwards frames received on the interface
• Forwards frames switched from another interface
• Learns addresses
• Receives BPDUs

17-6 OL-8553-06
Disabled State
A Layer 2 interface in the disabled state does not participate in frame forwarding or in the spanning tree.
An interface in the disabled state is nonoperational.
A disabled interface performs these functions:
• Does not receive BPDUs
How a Switch or Port Becomes the Root Switch or Root Port

If all switches in a network are enabled with default spanning-tree settings, the switch with the lowest
MAC address becomes the root switch. In Figure 17-2, Switch A is elected as the root switch because
the switch priority of all the switches is set to the default (32768) and Switch A has the lowest MAC
address. However, because of traffic patterns, number of forwarding interfaces, or link types, Switch A
might not be the ideal root switch. By increasing the priority (lowering the numerical value) of the ideal
switch so that it becomes the root switch, you force a spanning-tree recalculation to form a new topology
with the ideal switch as the root.
Figure 17-2 Spanning-Tree Topology
DP
DP DP
A D
DP RP
RP RP DP
86475
B C
RP = Root Port
DP = Designated Port
When the spanning-tree topology is calculated based on default parameters, the path between source and
destination end stations in a switched network might not be ideal. For instance, connecting higher-speed
links to an interface that has a higher number than the root port can cause a root-port change. The goal
is to make the fastest link the root port.
For example, assume that one port on Switch B is a Gigabit Ethernet link and that another port on
Switch B (a 10/100 link) is the root port. Network traffic might be more efficient over the Gigabit
Ethernet link. By changing the spanning-tree port priority on the Gigabit Ethernet port to a higher
priority (lower numerical value) than the root port, the Gigabit Ethernet port becomes the new root port.

OL-8553-06 17-7
Spanning Tree and Redundant Connectivity

You can create a redundant backbone with spanning tree by connecting two switch interfaces to another
device or to two different devices, as shown in Figure 17-3. Spanning tree automatically disables one
interface but enables it if the other one fails. If one link is high-speed and the other is low-speed, the
low-speed link is always disabled. If the speeds are the same, the port priority and port ID are added
together, and spanning tree disables the link with the lowest value.
Figure 17-3 Spanning Tree and Redundant Connectivity
Active link
101226
Blocked link
Workstations
You can also create redundant links between switches by using EtherChannel groups. For more
information, see Chapter 35, “Configuring EtherChannels and Link-State Tracking.”
Spanning-Tree Address Management

IEEE 802.1D specifies 17 multicast addresses, ranging from 0x00180C2000000 to 0x0180C2000010, to
be used by different bridge protocols. These addresses are static addresses that cannot be removed.
Regardless of the spanning-tree state, each switch receives but does not forward packets destined for
addresses between 0x0180C2000000 and 0x0180C200000F.
If spanning tree is enabled, the CPU on the switch receives packets destined for 0x0180C2000000 and
0x0180C2000010. If spanning tree is disabled, the switch forwards those packets as unknown multicast
addresses.
Accelerated Aging to Retain Connectivity

The default for aging dynamic addresses is 5 minutes, the default setting of the mac address-table
aging-time global configuration command. However, a spanning-tree reconfiguration can cause many
station locations to change. Because these stations could be unreachable for 5 minutes or more during a
reconfiguration, the address-aging time is accelerated so that station addresses can be dropped from the
address table and then relearned. The accelerated aging is the same as the forward-delay parameter value
(spanning-tree vlan vlan-id forward-time seconds global configuration command) when the spanning
tree reconfigures.

17-8 OL-8553-06
Because each VLAN is a separate spanning-tree instance, the switch accelerates aging on a per-VLAN
basis. A spanning-tree reconfiguration on one VLAN can cause the dynamic addresses learned on that
VLAN to be subject to accelerated aging. Dynamic addresses on other VLANs can be unaffected and
remain subject to the aging interval entered for the switch.
Spanning-Tree Modes and Protocols

The switch supports these spanning-tree modes and protocols:
• PVST+—This spanning-tree mode is based on the IEEE 802.1D standard and Cisco proprietary
extensions. It is the default spanning-tree mode used on all Ethernet port-based VLANs. The PVST+
runs on each VLAN on the switch up to the maximum supported, ensuring that each has a loop-free
path through the network.
The PVST+ provides Layer 2 load balancing for the VLAN on which it runs. You can create different
logical topologies by using the VLANs on your network to ensure that all of your links are used but
that no one link is oversubscribed. Each instance of PVST+ on a VLAN has a single root switch.
This root switch propagates the spanning-tree information associated with that VLAN to all other
switches in the network. Because each switch has the same information about the network, this
process ensures that the network topology is maintained.
• Rapid PVST+—This spanning-tree mode is the same as PVST+ except that is uses a rapid
convergence based on the IEEE 802.1w standard. To provide rapid convergence, the rapid PVST+
immediately deletes dynamically learned MAC address entries on a per-port basis upon receiving a
topology change. By contrast, PVST+ uses a short aging time for dynamically learned MAC address
entries.
The rapid PVST+ uses the same configuration as PVST+ (except where noted), and the switch needs
only minimal extra configuration. The benefit of rapid PVST+ is that you can migrate a large PVST+
install base to rapid PVST+ without having to learn the complexities of the MSTP configuration and
without having to reprovision your network. In rapid-PVST+ mode, each VLAN runs its own
spanning-tree instance up to the maximum supported.
• MSTP—This spanning-tree mode is based on the IEEE 802.1s standard. You can map multiple
VLANs to the same spanning-tree instance, which reduces the number of spanning-tree instances
required to support a large number of VLANs. The MSTP runs on top of the RSTP (based on
IEEE 802.1w), which provides for rapid convergence of the spanning tree by eliminating the
forward delay and by quickly transitioning root ports and designated ports to the forwarding state.
You cannot run MSTP without RSTP.
The most common initial deployment of MSTP is in the backbone and distribution layers of a
Layer 2 switched network. For more information, see Chapter 18, “Configuring MSTP.”
For information about the number of supported spanning-tree instances, see the next section.
Supported Spanning-Tree Instances

In PVST+ or rapid-PVST+ mode, the switch supports up to 128 spanning-tree instances.
In MSTP mode, the switch supports up to 65 MST instances. The number of VLANs that can be mapped
to a particular MST instance is unlimited.
For information about how spanning tree interoperates with the VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP), see
the “Spanning-Tree Configuration Guidelines” section on page 17-12.

OL-8553-06 17-9
Spanning-Tree Interoperability and Backward Compatibility

Table 17-2 lists the interoperability and compatibility among the supported spanning-tree modes in a
network.
Table 17-2 PVST+, MSTP, and Rapid-PVST+ Interoperability
PVST+ MSTP Rapid PVST+

PVST+ Yes Yes (with restrictions) Yes (reverts to PVST+)
MSTP Yes (with restrictions) Yes Yes (reverts to PVST+)
Rapid PVST+ Yes (reverts to PVST+) Yes (reverts to PVST+) Yes
In a mixed MSTP and PVST+ network, the common spanning-tree (CST) root must be inside the MST
backbone, and a PVST+ switch cannot connect to multiple MST regions.
When a network contains switches running rapid PVST+ and switches running PVST+, we recommend
that the rapid-PVST+ switches and PVST+ switches be configured for different spanning-tree instances.
In the rapid-PVST+ spanning-tree instances, the root switch must be a rapid-PVST+ switch. In the
PVST+ instances, the root switch must be a PVST+ switch. The PVST+ switches should be at the edge
of the network.
STP and IEEE 802.1Q Trunks

The IEEE 802.1Q standard for VLAN trunks imposes some limitations on the spanning-tree strategy for
a network. The standard requires only one spanning-tree instance for all VLANs allowed on the trunks.
However, in a network of Cisco switches connected through IEEE 802.1Q trunks, the switches maintain
one spanning-tree instance for each VLAN allowed on the trunks.
When you connect a Cisco switch to a non-Cisco device through an IEEE 802.1Q trunk, the Cisco switch
uses PVST+ to provide spanning-tree interoperability. If rapid PVST+ is enabled, the switch uses it
instead of PVST+. The switch combines the spanning-tree instance of the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN of the
trunk with the spanning-tree instance of the non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q switch.
However, all PVST+ or rapid-PVST+ information is maintained by Cisco switches separated by a cloud
of non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q switches. The non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q cloud separating the Cisco switches
is treated as a single trunk link between the switches.
PVST+ is automatically enabled on IEEE 802.1Q trunks, and no user configuration is required. The
external spanning-tree behavior on access ports and Inter-Switch Link (ISL) trunk ports is not affected
by PVST+.
For more information on IEEE 802.1Q trunks, see Chapter 13, “Configuring VLANs.”
VLAN-Bridge Spanning Tree

Cisco VLAN-bridge spanning tree is used with the fallback bridging feature (bridge groups), which
forwards non-IP protocols such as DECnet between two or more VLAN bridge domains or routed ports.
The VLAN-bridge spanning tree allows the bridge groups to form a spanning tree on top of the
individual VLAN spanning trees to prevent loops from forming if there are multiple connections among
VLANs. It also prevents the individual spanning trees from the VLANs being bridged from collapsing
into a single spanning tree.

17-10 OL-8553-06
Configuring Spanning-Tree Features
To support VLAN-bridge spanning tree, some of the spanning-tree timers are increased. To use the
fallback bridging feature, you must have the enhanced multilayer image installed on your switch. For
more information, see Chapter 46, “Configuring Fallback Bridging.”

• Default Spanning-Tree Configuration, page 17-11
• Spanning-Tree Configuration Guidelines, page 17-12
• Changing the Spanning-Tree Mode., page 17-13 (required)
• Disabling Spanning Tree, page 17-14 (optional)
• Configuring the Root Switch, page 17-14 (optional)
• Configuring a Secondary Root Switch, page 17-16 (optional)
• Configuring Port Priority, page 17-17 (optional)
• Configuring Path Cost, page 17-18 (optional)
• Configuring the Switch Priority of a VLAN, page 17-19 (optional)
• Configuring Spanning-Tree Timers, page 17-20 (optional)
Default Spanning-Tree Configuration

Table 17-3 shows the default spanning-tree configuration.
Table 17-3 Default Spanning-Tree Configuration

Enable state Enabled on VLAN 1.
For more information, see the “Supported
Spanning-Tree Instances” section on
page 17-9.
Spanning-tree mode PVST+. (Rapid PVST+ and MSTP are
disabled.)
Switch priority 32768.
Spanning-tree port priority (configurable on a per-interface basis) 128.
Spanning-tree port cost (configurable on a per-interface basis) 1000 Mb/s: 4.
100 Mb/s: 19.
10 Mb/s: 100.
Spanning-tree VLAN port priority (configurable on a per-VLAN basis) 128.

OL-8553-06 17-11
Table 17-3 Default Spanning-Tree Configuration (continued)

Spanning-tree VLAN port cost (configurable on a per-VLAN basis) 1000 Mb/s: 4.
100 Mb/s: 19.
10 Mb/s: 100.
Spanning-tree timers Hello time: 2 seconds.
Forward-delay time: 15 seconds.
Maximum-aging time: 20 seconds.
Transmit hold count: 6 BPDUs
Spanning-Tree Configuration Guidelines

If more VLANs are defined in the VTP than there are spanning-tree instances, you can enable PVST+
or rapid PVST+ on only 128 VLANs on the switch. The remaining VLANs operate with spanning tree
disabled. However, you can map multiple VLANs to the same spanning-tree instances by using MSTP.
For more information, see Chapter 18, “Configuring MSTP.”
If 128 instances of spanning tree are already in use, you can disable spanning tree on one of the VLANs
and then enable it on the VLAN where you want it to run. Use the no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id global
configuration command to disable spanning tree on a specific VLAN, and use the spanning-tree vlan
vlan-id global configuration command to enable spanning tree on the desired VLAN.
Caution Switches that are not running spanning tree still forward BPDUs that they receive so that the other
switches on the VLAN that have a running spanning-tree instance can break loops. Therefore, spanning
tree must be running on enough switches to break all the loops in the network; for example, at least one
switch on each loop in the VLAN must be running spanning tree. It is not absolutely necessary to run
spanning tree on all switches in the VLAN. However, if you are running spanning tree only on a minimal
set of switches, an incautious change to the network that introduces another loop into the VLAN can
result in a broadcast storm.
Note If you have already used all available spanning-tree instances on your switch, adding another VLAN
anywhere in the VTP domain creates a VLAN that is not running spanning tree on that switch. If you
have the default allowed list on the trunk ports of that switch, the new VLAN is carried on all trunk ports.
Depending on the topology of the network, this could create a loop in the new VLAN that will not be
broken, particularly if there are several adjacent switches that have all run out of spanning-tree instances.
You can prevent this possibility by setting up allowed lists on the trunk ports of switches that have used
up their allocation of spanning-tree instances. Setting up allowed lists is not necessary in many cases and
can make it more labor-intensive to add another VLAN to the network.
Spanning-tree commands control the configuration of VLAN spanning-tree instances. You create a
spanning-tree instance when you assign an interface to a VLAN. The spanning-tree instance is removed
when the last interface is moved to another VLAN. You can configure switch and port parameters before
a spanning-tree instance is created; these parameters are applied when the spanning-tree instance is
created.

17-12 OL-8553-06
The switch supports PVST+, rapid PVST+, and MSTP, but only one version can be active at any time.
(For example, all VLANs run PVST+, all VLANs run rapid PVST+, or all VLANs run MSTP.) For
information about the different spanning-tree modes and how they interoperate, see the “Spanning-Tree
Interoperability and Backward Compatibility” section on page 17-10.
For configuration guidelines about UplinkFast and BackboneFast, see the “Optional Spanning-Tree
Caution Loop guard works only on point-to-point links. We recommend that each end of the link has a directly
connected device that is running STP.
Changing the Spanning-Tree Mode.

The switch supports three spanning-tree modes: PVST+, rapid PVST+, or MSTP. By default, the switch
runs the PVST+ protocol.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the spanning-tree mode. If you want
to enable a mode that is different from the default mode, this procedure is required.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree mode {pvst | mst | Configure a spanning-tree mode.
rapid-pvst}
• Select pvst to enable PVST+ (the default setting).
• Select mst to enable MSTP (and RSTP). For more configuration
steps, see Chapter 18, “Configuring MSTP.”
• Select rapid-pvst to enable rapid PVST+.
Step 3 interface interface-id (Recommended for rapid-PVST+ mode only) Specify an interface to
configure, and enter interface configuration mode. Valid interfaces
include physical ports, VLANs, and port channels. The VLAN ID range
is 1 to 4094. The port-channel range is 1 to 48.
Step 4 spanning-tree link-type point-to-point (Recommended for rapid-PVST+ mode only) Specify that the link type
for this port is point-to-point.
If you connect this port (local port) to a remote port through a
point-to-point link and the local port becomes a designated port, the
switch negotiates with the remote port and rapidly changes the local
port to the forwarding state.
Step 6 clear spanning-tree detected-protocols (Recommended for rapid-PVST+ mode only) If any port on the switch
is connected to a port on a legacy IEEE 802.1D switch, restart the
protocol migration process on the entire switch.
This step is optional if the designated switch detects that this switch is
running rapid PVST+.

OL-8553-06 17-13
Command Purpose
Step 7 show spanning-tree summary Verify your entries.
and
show spanning-tree interface
interface-id
To return to the default setting, use the no spanning-tree mode global configuration command. To
return the port to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree link-type interface configuration
command.
Disabling Spanning Tree

Spanning tree is enabled by default on VLAN 1 and on all newly created VLANs up to the spanning-tree
limit specified in the “Supported Spanning-Tree Instances” section on page 17-9. Disable spanning tree
only if you are sure there are no loops in the network topology.
Caution When spanning tree is disabled and loops are present in the topology, excessive traffic and indefinite
packet duplication can drastically reduce network performance.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable spanning-tree on a per-VLAN basis.
Command Purpose
Step 2 no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id For vlan-id, the range is 1 to 4094.
Step 4 show spanning-tree vlan vlan-id Verify your entries.
To re-enable spanning-tree, use the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id global configuration command.
Configuring the Root Switch

The switch maintains a separate spanning-tree instance for each active VLAN configured on it. A bridge
ID, consisting of the switch priority and the switch MAC address, is associated with each instance. For
each VLAN, the switch with the lowest bridge ID becomes the root switch for that VLAN.
To configure a switch to become the root for the specified VLAN, use the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id
root global configuration command to modify the switch priority from the default value (32768) to a
significantly lower value. When you enter this command, the software checks the switch priority of the
root switches for each VLAN. Because of the extended system ID support, the switch sets its own
priority for the specified VLAN to 24576 if this value will cause this switch to become the root for the
specified VLAN.

17-14 OL-8553-06
If any root switch for the specified VLAN has a switch priority lower than 24576, the switch sets its own
priority for the specified VLAN to 4096 less than the lowest switch priority. (4096 is the value of the
least-significant bit of a 4-bit switch priority value as shown in Table 17-1 on page 17-4.)
Note The spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root global configuration command fails if the value necessary to be
the root switch is less than 1.
Note If your network consists of switches that both do and do not support the extended system ID, it is
unlikely that the switch with the extended system ID support will become the root switch. The extended
system ID increases the switch priority value every time the VLAN number is greater than the priority
of the connected switches running older software.
Note The root switch for each spanning-tree instance should be a backbone or distribution switch. Do not
configure an access switch as the spanning-tree primary root.
Use the diameter keyword to specify the Layer 2 network diameter (that is, the maximum number of
switch hops between any two end stations in the Layer 2 network). When you specify the network
diameter, the switch automatically sets an optimal hello time, forward-delay time, and maximum-age
time for a network of that diameter, which can significantly reduce the convergence time. You can use
the hello keyword to override the automatically calculated hello time.
Note After configuring the switch as the root switch, we recommend that you avoid manually configuring the
hello time, forward-delay time, and maximum-age time through the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id
hello-time, spanning-tree vlan vlan-id forward-time, and the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id max-age
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a switch to become the root for the
specified VLAN. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root primary Configure a switch to become the root for the specified VLAN.
[diameter net-diameter [hello-time seconds]]
• For vlan-id, you can specify a single VLAN identified by
VLAN ID number, a range of VLANs separated by a
hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma. The
range is 1 to 4094.
• (Optional) For diameter net-diameter, specify the
maximum number of switches between any two end
stations. The range is 2 to 7.
• (Optional) For hello-time seconds, specify the interval in
seconds between the generation of configuration messages
by the root switch. The range is 1 to 10; the default is 2.

OL-8553-06 17-15
Command Purpose
Step 4 show spanning-tree detail Verify your entries.
To return to the default setting, use the no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root global configuration
command.
Configuring a Secondary Root Switch

When you configure a switch as the secondary root, the switch priority is modified from the default value
(32768) to 28672. The switch is then likely to become the root switch for the specified VLAN if the
primary root switch fails. This is assuming that the other network switches use the default switch priority
of 32768 and therefore are unlikely to become the root switch.
You can execute this command on more than one switch to configure multiple backup root switches. Use
the same network diameter and hello-time values that you used when you configured the primary root
switch with the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root primary global configuration command.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a switch to become the secondary
root for the specified VLAN. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root secondary Configure a switch to become the secondary root for the specified
[diameter net-diameter [hello-time VLAN.
seconds]]
• For vlan-id, you can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN
ID number, a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series
of VLANs separated by a comma. The range is 1 to 4094.
• (Optional) For diameter net-diameter, specify the maximum
number of switches between any two end stations. The range is
2 to 7.
seconds between the generation of configuration messages by
the root switch. The range is 1 to 10; the default is 2.
Use the same network diameter and hello-time values that you used
when configuring the primary root switch. See the “Configuring the
Root Switch” section on page 17-14.
To return to the default setting, use the no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root global configuration
command.

17-16 OL-8553-06
Configuring Port Priority

If a loop occurs, spanning tree uses the port priority when selecting an interface to put into the
forwarding state. You can assign higher priority values (lower numerical values) to interfaces that you
want selected first and lower priority values (higher numerical values) that you want selected last. If all
interfaces have the same priority value, spanning tree puts the interface with the lowest interface number
in the forwarding state and blocks the other interfaces.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the port priority of an interface.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify an interface to configure, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Valid interfaces include physical ports and port-channel
logical interfaces (port-channel port-channel-number).
Step 3 spanning-tree port-priority priority Configure the port priority for an interface.
For priority, the range is 0 to 240, in increments of 16; the
default is 128. Valid values are 0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96,
112, 128, 144, 160, 176, 192, 208, 224, and 240. All other
values are rejected. The lower the number, the higher the
priority.
Step 4 spanning-tree vlan vlan-id port-priority priority Configure the port priority for a VLAN.
• For vlan-id, you can specify a single VLAN identified
by VLAN ID number, a range of VLANs separated by
a hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma.
The range is 1 to 4094.
• For priority, the range is 0 to 240, in increments of 16;
the default is 128. Valid values are 0, 16, 32, 48, 64,
80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176, 192, 208, 224, and
240. All other values are rejected. The lower the
number, the higher the priority.
Step 6 show spanning-tree interface interface-id Verify your entries.
or
show spanning-tree vlan vlan-id
Note The show spanning-tree interface interface-id privileged EXEC command displays information only
if the port is in a link-up operative state. Otherwise, you can use the show running-config interface
privileged EXEC command to confirm the configuration.

OL-8553-06 17-17
To return to the default setting, use the no spanning-tree [vlan vlan-id] port-priority interface
configuration command. For information on how to configure load sharing on trunk ports by using
spanning-tree port priorities, see the “Configuring Trunk Ports for Load Sharing” section on page 13-24.
Configuring Path Cost

The spanning-tree path cost default value is derived from the media speed of an interface. If a loop
occurs, spanning tree uses cost when selecting an interface to put in the forwarding state. You can assign
lower cost values to interfaces that you want selected first and higher cost values that you want selected
last. If all interfaces have the same cost value, spanning tree puts the interface with the lowest interface
number in the forwarding state and blocks the other interfaces.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the cost of an interface. This
Command Purpose
configuration mode. Valid interfaces include physical ports and
port-channel logical interfaces (port-channel
port-channel-number).
Step 3 spanning-tree cost cost Configure the cost for an interface.
If a loop occurs, spanning tree uses the path cost when selecting
an interface to place into the forwarding state. A lower path cost
represents higher-speed transmission.
For cost, the range is 1 to 200000000; the default value is derived
from the media speed of the interface.
Step 4 spanning-tree vlan vlan-id cost cost Configure the cost for a VLAN.
If a loop occurs, spanning tree uses the path cost when selecting
an interface to place into the forwarding state. A lower path cost
VLAN ID number, a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen,
or a series of VLANs separated by a comma. The range is 1
to 4094.
• For cost, the range is 1 to 200000000; the default value is
derived from the media speed of the interface.
or
show spanning-tree vlan vlan-id

17-18 OL-8553-06
Note The show spanning-tree interface interface-id privileged EXEC command displays information only
for ports that are in a link-up operative state. Otherwise, you can use the show running-config
To return to the default setting, use the no spanning-tree [vlan vlan-id] cost interface configuration
command. For information on how to configure load sharing on trunk ports by using spanning-tree path
costs, see the “Configuring Trunk Ports for Load Sharing” section on page 13-24.
Configuring the Switch Priority of a VLAN

You can configure the switch priority and make it more likely that the switch will be chosen as the
root switch.
Note Exercise care when using this command. For most situations, we recommend that you use the
spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root primary and the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root secondary global
configuration commands to modify the switch priority.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch priority of a VLAN.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree vlan vlan-id priority priority Configure the switch priority of a VLAN.
range is 1 to 4094.
• For priority, the range is 0 to 61440 in increments of
4096; the default is 32768. The lower the number, the
more likely the switch will be chosen as the root switch.
Valid priority values are 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384,
20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056,
49152, 53248, 57344, and 61440. All other values are
rejected.
To return to the default setting, use the no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id priority global configuration
command.

OL-8553-06 17-19
Configuring Spanning-Tree Timers

Table 17-4 describes the timers that affect the entire spanning-tree performance.
Table 17-4 Spanning-Tree Timers
Variable Description
Hello timer Controls how often the switch broadcasts hello messages to other switches.
Forward-delay timer Controls how long each of the listening and learning states last before the interface begins
forwarding.
Maximum-age timer Controls the amount of time the switch stores protocol information received on an interface.
Transmit hold count Controls the number of BPDUs that can be sent before pausing for 1 second.
The sections that follow provide the configuration steps.
Configuring the Hello Time

You can configure the interval between the generation of configuration messages by the root switch by
changing the hello time.
spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root primary and the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root secondary global
configuration commands to modify the hello time.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the hello time of a VLAN. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree vlan vlan-id hello-time seconds Configure the hello time of a VLAN. The hello time is the
interval between the generation of configuration messages by
the root switch. These messages mean that the switch is alive.
range is 1 to 4094.
• For seconds, the range is 1 to 10; the default is 2.
To return to the default setting, use the no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id hello-time global configuration
command.

17-20 OL-8553-06
Configuring the Forwarding-Delay Time for a VLAN

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the forwarding-delay time for a
VLAN. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree vlan vlan-id forward-time Configure the forward time of a VLAN. The forward delay is the
seconds number of seconds an interface waits before changing from its
spanning-tree learning and listening states to the forwarding state.
VLAN ID number, a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen,
or a series of VLANs separated by a comma. The range is 1 to
4094.
To return to the default setting, use the no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id forward-time global
Configuring the Maximum-Aging Time for a VLAN

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the maximum-aging time for a
VLAN. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree vlan vlan-id max-age seconds Configure the maximum-aging time of a VLAN. The
maximum-aging time is the number of seconds a switch waits
without receiving spanning-tree configuration messages before
attempting a reconfiguration.
range is 1 to 4094.
To return to the default setting, use the no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id max-age global configuration
command.

OL-8553-06 17-21
Displaying the Spanning-Tree Status
Configuring the Transmit Hold-Count

You can configure the BPDU burst size by changing the transmit hold count value.
Note Changing this parameter to a higher value can have a significant impact on CPU utilization, especially
in Rapid-PVST mode. Lowering this value can slow down convergence in certain scenarios. We
recommend that you maintain the default setting.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the transmit hold-count. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree transmit hold-count value Configure the number of BPDUs that can be sent before pausing
for 1 second.
For value, the range is 1 to 20; the default is 6.
To return to the default setting, use the no spanning-tree transmit hold-count value global

To display the spanning-tree status, use one or more of the privileged EXEC commands in Table 17-5:
Table 17-5 Commands for Displaying Spanning-Tree Status
Command Purpose
show spanning-tree active Displays spanning-tree information on active interfaces only.
show spanning-tree detail Displays a detailed summary of interface information.
show spanning-tree interface interface-id Displays spanning-tree information for the specified interface.
show spanning-tree summary [totals] Displays a summary of interface states or displays the total lines of the STP
state section.
You can clear spanning-tree counters by using the clear spanning-tree [interface interface-id]
For information about other keywords for the show spanning-tree privileged EXEC command, see the
command reference for this release.

17-22 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 18
Configuring MSTP
This chapter describes how to configure the Cisco implementation of the IEEE 802.1s Multiple
STP (MSTP) on the Catalyst 3560 switch.
Note The multiple spanning-tree (MST) implementation in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SEC is based on the
IEEE 802.1s standard. The MST implementations in earlier Cisco IOS releases are prestandard.
The MSTP enables multiple VLANs to be mapped to the same spanning-tree instance, reducing the
number of spanning-tree instances needed to support a large number of VLANs. The MSTP provides for
multiple forwarding paths for data traffic and enables load balancing. It improves the fault tolerance of
the network because a failure in one instance (forwarding path) does not affect other instances
(forwarding paths). The most common initial deployment of MSTP is in the backbone and distribution
layers of a Layer 2 switched network. This deployment provides the highly available network required
in a service-provider environment.
When the switch is in the MST mode, the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), which is based on
IEEE 802.1w, is automatically enabled. The RSTP provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree
through explicit handshaking that eliminates the IEEE 802.1D forwarding delay and quickly transitions
root ports and designated ports to the forwarding state.
Both MSTP and RSTP improve the spanning-tree operation and maintain backward compatibility with
equipment that is based on the (original) IEEE 802.1D spanning tree, with existing Cisco-proprietary
Multiple Instance STP (MISTP), and with existing Cisco per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (PVST+) and
rapid per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (rapid PVST+). For information about PVST+ and rapid PVST+,
see Chapter 17, “Configuring STP.” For information about other spanning-tree features such as Port Fast,
UplinkFast, root guard, and so forth, see Chapter 19, “Configuring Optional Spanning-Tree Features.”

• Understanding MSTP, page 18-2
• Understanding RSTP, page 18-8
• Configuring MSTP Features, page 18-14
• Displaying the MST Configuration and Status, page 18-26

OL-8553-06 18-1
Chapter 18 Configuring MSTP
Understanding MSTP
Understanding MSTP
MSTP, which uses RSTP for rapid convergence, enables VLANs to be grouped into a spanning-tree
instance, with each instance having a spanning-tree topology independent of other spanning-tree
instances. This architecture provides multiple forwarding paths for data traffic, enables load balancing,
and reduces the number of spanning-tree instances required to support a large number of VLANs.
These sections describe how the MSTP works:
• Multiple Spanning-Tree Regions, page 18-2
• IST, CIST, and CST, page 18-2
• Hop Count, page 18-5
• Boundary Ports, page 18-6
• IEEE 802.1s Implementation, page 18-6
• Interoperability with IEEE 802.1D STP, page 18-8
For configuration information, see the “Configuring MSTP Features” section on page 18-14.
Multiple Spanning-Tree Regions

For switches to participate in multiple spanning-tree (MST) instances, you must consistently configure
the switches with the same MST configuration information. A collection of interconnected switches that
have the same MST configuration comprises an MST region as shown in Figure 18-1 on page 18-4.
The MST configuration controls to which MST region each switch belongs. The configuration includes
the name of the region, the revision number, and the MST VLAN-to-instance assignment map. You
configure the switch for a region by using the spanning-tree mst configuration global configuration
command, after which the switch enters the MST configuration mode. From this mode, you can map
VLANs to an MST instance by using the instance MST configuration command, specify the region
name by using the name MST configuration command, and set the revision number by using the
revision MST configuration command.
A region can have one or multiple members with the same MST configuration. Each member must be
capable of processing RSTP bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). There is no limit to the number of MST
regions in a network, but each region can support up to 65 spanning-tree instances. Instances can be
identified by any number in the range from 0 to 4094. You can assign a VLAN to only one spanning-tree
instance at a time.
IST, CIST, and CST

Unlike PVST+ and rapid PVST+ in which all the spanning-tree instances are independent, the MSTP
establishes and maintains two types of spanning trees:
• An internal spanning tree (IST), which is the spanning tree that runs in an MST region.
Within each MST region, the MSTP maintains multiple spanning-tree instances. Instance 0 is a
special instance for a region, known as the internal spanning tree (IST). All other MST instances are
numbered from 1 to 4094.

18-2 OL-8553-06
Understanding MSTP
The IST is the only spanning-tree instance that sends and receives BPDUs. All of the other
spanning-tree instance information is contained in M-records, which are encapsulated within MSTP
BPDUs. Because the MSTP BPDU carries information for all instances, the number of BPDUs that
need to be processed to support multiple spanning-tree instances is significantly reduced.
All MST instances within the same region share the same protocol timers, but each MST instance
has its own topology parameters, such as root switch ID, root path cost, and so forth. By default, all
VLANs are assigned to the IST.
An MST instance is local to the region; for example, MST instance 1 in region A is independent of
MST instance 1 in region B, even if regions A and B are interconnected.
• A common and internal spanning tree (CIST), which is a collection of the ISTs in each MST region,
and the common spanning tree (CST) that interconnects the MST regions and single spanning trees.
The spanning tree computed in a region appears as a subtree in the CST that encompasses the entire
switched domain. The CIST is formed by the spanning-tree algorithm running among switches that
support the IEEE 802.1w, IEEE 802.1s, and IEEE 802.1D standards. The CIST inside an MST
region is the same as the CST outside a region.
For more information, see the “Operations Within an MST Region” section on page 18-3 and the
“Operations Between MST Regions” section on page 18-3.
Note The implementation of the IEEE 802.1s standard, changes some of the terminology associated with MST
implementations. For a summary of these changes, see Table 17-1 on page 17-4.
Operations Within an MST Region

The IST connects all the MSTP switches in a region. When the IST converges, the root of the IST
becomes the CIST regional root (called the IST master before the implementation of the IEEE 802.1s
standard) as shown in Figure 18-1 on page 18-4. It is the switch within the region with the lowest switch
ID and path cost to the CIST root. The CIST regional root is also the CIST root if there is only one region
in the network. If the CIST root is outside the region, one of the MSTP switches at the boundary of the
region is selected as the CIST regional root.
When an MSTP switch initializes, it sends BPDUs claiming itself as the root of the CIST and the CIST
regional root, with both of the path costs to the CIST root and to the CIST regional root set to zero. The
switch also initializes all of its MST instances and claims to be the root for all of them. If the switch
receives superior MST root information (lower switch ID, lower path cost, and so forth) than currently
stored for the port, it relinquishes its claim as the CIST regional root.
During initialization, a region might have many subregions, each with its own CIST regional root. As
switches receive superior IST information, they leave their old subregions and join the new subregion
that contains the true CIST regional root. Thus all subregions shrink, except for the one that contains the
true CIST regional root.
For correct operation, all switches in the MST region must agree on the same CIST regional root.
Therefore, any two switches in the region only synchronize their port roles for an MST instance if they
converge to a common CIST regional root.
Operations Between MST Regions

If there are multiple regions or legacy IEEE 802.1D switches within the network, MSTP establishes and
maintains the CST, which includes all MST regions and all legacy STP switches in the network. The
MST instances combine with the IST at the boundary of the region to become the CST.

OL-8553-06 18-3
Understanding MSTP
The IST connects all the MSTP switches in the region and appears as a subtree in the CIST that
encompasses the entire switched domain. The root of the subtree is the CIST regional root. The MST
region appears as a virtual switch to adjacent STP switches and MST regions.
Figure 18-1 shows a network with three MST regions and a legacy IEEE 802.1D switch (D). The CIST
regional root for region 1 (A) is also the CIST root. The CIST regional root for region 2 (B) and the CIST
regional root for region 3 (C) are the roots for their respective subtrees within the CIST. The RSTP runs
in all regions.
Figure 18-1 MST Regions, CIST Masters, and CST Root
A IST master
and CST root
D
Legacy IEEE 802.1D
MST Region 1
B
IST master C IST master
MST Region 2 MST Region 3

92983
Only the CST instance sends and receives BPDUs, and MST instances add their spanning-tree
information into the BPDUs to interact with neighboring switches and compute the final spanning-tree
topology. Because of this, the spanning-tree parameters related to BPDU transmission (for example,
hello time, forward time, max-age, and max-hops) are configured only on the CST instance but affect
all MST instances. Parameters related to the spanning-tree topology (for example, switch priority, port
VLAN cost, and port VLAN priority) can be configured on both the CST instance and the MST instance.
MSTP switches use Version 3 RSTP BPDUs or IEEE 802.1D STP BPDUs to communicate with legacy
IEEE 802.1D switches. MSTP switches use MSTP BPDUs to communicate with MSTP switches.

18-4 OL-8553-06
Understanding MSTP
IEEE 802.1s Terminology

Some MST naming conventions used in Cisco’s prestandard implementation have been changed to
identify some internal or regional parameters. These parameters are significant only within an MST
region, as opposed to external parameters that are relevant to the whole network. Because the CIST is
the only spanning-tree instance that spans the whole network, only the CIST parameters require the
external rather than the internal or regional qualifiers.
• The CIST root is the root switch for the unique instance that spans the whole network, the CIST.
• The CIST external root path cost is the cost to the CIST root. This cost is left unchanged within an
MST region. Remember that an MST region looks like a single switch for the CIST. The CIST
external root path cost is the root path cost calculated between these virtual switches and switches
that do not belong to any region.
• The CIST regional root was called the IST master in the prestandard implementation. If the CIST
root is in the region, the CIST regional root is the CIST root. Otherwise, the CIST regional root is
the closest switch to the CIST root in the region. The CIST regional root acts as a root switch for
the IST.
• The CIST internal root path cost is the cost to the CIST regional root in a region. This cost is only
relevant to the IST, instance 0.
Table 18-1 on page 18-5 compares the IEEE standard and the Cisco prestandard terminology.
Table 18-1 Prestandard and Standard Terminology
IEEE Standard Cisco Prestandard Cisco Standard

CIST regional root IST master CIST regional root
CIST internal root path cost IST master path cost CIST internal path cost
CIST external root path cost Root path cost Root path cost
MSTI regional root Instance root Instance root
MSTI internal root path cost Root path cost Root path cost
Hop Count
The IST and MST instances do not use the message-age and maximum-age information in the
configuration BPDU to compute the spanning-tree topology. Instead, they use the path cost to the root
and a hop-count mechanism similar to the IP time-to-live (TTL) mechanism.
By using the spanning-tree mst max-hops global configuration command, you can configure the
maximum hops inside the region and apply it to the IST and all MST instances in that region. The hop
count achieves the same result as the message-age information (triggers a reconfiguration). The root
switch of the instance always sends a BPDU (or M-record) with a cost of 0 and the hop count set to the
maximum value. When a switch receives this BPDU, it decrements the received remaining hop count by
one and propagates this value as the remaining hop count in the BPDUs it generates. When the count
reaches zero, the switch discards the BPDU and ages the information held for the port.
The message-age and maximum-age information in the RSTP portion of the BPDU remain the same
throughout the region, and the same values are propagated by the region designated ports at the
boundary.

OL-8553-06 18-5
Understanding MSTP
Boundary Ports
In the Cisco prestandard implementation, a boundary port connects an MST region to a single
spanning-tree region running RSTP, to a single spanning-tree region running PVST+ or rapid PVST+,
or to another MST region with a different MST configuration. A boundary port also connects to a LAN,
the designated switch of which is either a single spanning-tree switch or a switch with a different MST
configuration.
There is no definition of a boundary port in the IEEE 802.1s standard. The IEEE 802.1Q-2002 standard
identifies two kinds of messages that a port can receive: internal (coming from the same region) and
external. When a message is external, it is received only by the CIST. If the CIST role is root or alternate,
or if the external BPDU is a topology change, it could have an impact on the MST instances. When a
message is internal, the CIST part is received by the CIST, and each MST instance receives its respective
M-record. The Cisco prestandard implementation treats a port that receives an external message as a
boundary port. This means a port cannot receive a mix of internal and external messages.
An MST region includes both switches and LANs. A segment belongs to the region of its designated
port. Therefore, a port in a different region than the designated port for a segment is a boundary port.
This definition allows two ports internal to a region to share a segment with a port belonging to a
different region, creating the possibility of receiving both internal and external messages on a port.
The primary change from the Cisco prestandard implementation is that a designated port is not defined
as boundary, unless it is running in an STP-compatible mode.
Note If there is a legacy STP switch on the segment, messages are always considered external.
The other change from the prestandard implementation is that the CIST regional root switch ID field is
now inserted where an RSTP or legacy IEEE 802.1Q switch has the sender switch ID. The whole region
performs like a single virtual switch by sending a consistent sender switch ID to neighboring switches.
In this example, switch C would receive a BPDU with the same consistent sender switch ID of root,
whether or not A or B is designated for the segment.
IEEE 802.1s Implementation

The Cisco implementation of the IEEE MST standard includes features required to meet the standard, as
well as some of the desirable prestandard functionality that is not yet incorporated into the published
standard.
Port Role Naming Change

The boundary role is no longer in the final MST standard, but this boundary concept is maintained in
Cisco’s implementation. However, an MST instance port at a boundary of the region might not follow
the state of the corresponding CIST port. Two cases exist now:
• The boundary port is the root port of the CIST regional root—When the CIST instance port is
proposed and is in sync, it can send back an agreement and move to the forwarding state only after
all the corresponding MSTI ports are in sync (and thus forwarding). The MSTI ports now have a
special master role.

18-6 OL-8553-06
Understanding MSTP
• The boundary port is not the root port of the CIST regional root—The MSTI ports follow the state
and role of the CIST port. The standard provides less information, and it might be difficult to
understand why an MSTI port can be alternately blocking when it receives no BPDUs (MRecords).
In this case, although the boundary role no longer exists, the show commands identify a port as
boundary in the type column of the output.
Interoperation Between Legacy and Standard Switches

Because automatic detection of prestandard switches can fail, you can use an interface configuration
command to identify prestandard ports. A region cannot be formed between a standard and a prestandard
switch, but they can interoperate by using the CIST. Only the capability of load balancing over different
instances is lost in that particular case. The CLI displays different flags depending on the port
configuration when a port receives prestandard BPDUs. A syslog message also appears the first time a
switch receives a prestandard BPDU on a port that has not been configured for prestandard BPDU
transmission.
Figure 18-2 illustrates this scenario. Assume that A is a standard switch and B a prestandard switch, both
configured to be in the same region. A is the root switch for the CIST, and thus B has a root port (BX)
on segment X and an alternate port (BY) on segment Y. If segment Y flaps, and the port on BY becomes
the alternate before sending out a single prestandard BPDU, AY cannot detect that a prestandard switch
is connected to Y and continues to send standard BPDUs. The port BY is thus fixed in a boundary, and
no load balancing is possible between A and B. The same problem exists on segment X, but B might
transmit topology changes.
Figure 18-2 Standard and Prestandard Switch Interoperation
Segment X MST
Region
Switch A
Switch B
92721
Segment Y
Note We recommend that you minimize the interaction between standard and prestandard MST
implementations.
Detecting Unidirectional Link Failure

This feature is not yet present in the IEEE MST standard, but it is included in this Cisco IOS release.
The software checks the consistency of the port role and state in the received BPDUs to detect
unidirectional link failures that could cause bridging loops.
When a designated port detects a conflict, it keeps its role, but reverts to discarding state because
disrupting connectivity in case of inconsistency is preferable to opening a bridging loop.

OL-8553-06 18-7
Understanding RSTP
Figure 18-3 illustrates a unidirectional link failure that typically creates a bridging loop. Switch A is the
root switch, and its BPDUs are lost on the link leading to switch B. RSTP and MST BPDUs include the
role and state of the sending port. With this information, switch A can detect that switch B does not react
to the superior BPDUs it sends and that switch B is the designated, not root switch. As a result, switch
A blocks (or keeps blocking) its port, thus preventing the bridging loop.
Figure 18-3 Detecting Unidirectional Link Failure
Superior
Switch BPDU Switch
A B
92722
Inferior BPDU,
Designated + Learning bit set
Interoperability with IEEE 802.1D STP

A switch running MSTP supports a built-in protocol migration mechanism that enables it to interoperate
with legacy IEEE 802.1D switches. If this switch receives a legacy IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDU
(a BPDU with the protocol version set to 0), it sends only IEEE 802.1D BPDUs on that port. An MSTP
switch also can detect that a port is at the boundary of a region when it receives a legacy BPDU, an MSTP
BPDU (Version 3) associated with a different region, or an RSTP BPDU (Version 2).
However, the switch does not automatically revert to the MSTP mode if it no longer receives
IEEE 802.1D BPDUs because it cannot detect whether the legacy switch has been removed from the link
unless the legacy switch is the designated switch. A switch might also continue to assign a boundary role
to a port when the switch to which this switch is connected has joined the region. To restart the protocol
migration process (force the renegotiation with neighboring switches), use the clear spanning-tree
detected-protocols privileged EXEC command.
If all the legacy switches on the link are RSTP switches, they can process MSTP BPDUs as if they are
RSTP BPDUs. Therefore, MSTP switches send either a Version 0 configuration and TCN BPDUs or
Version 3 MSTP BPDUs on a boundary port. A boundary port connects to a LAN, the designated switch
of which is either a single spanning-tree switch or a switch with a different MST configuration.
Understanding RSTP
The RSTP takes advantage of point-to-point wiring and provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree.
Reconfiguration of the spanning tree can occur in less than 1 second (in contrast to 50 seconds with the
default settings in the IEEE 802.1D spanning tree).
These sections describe how the RSTP works:
• Port Roles and the Active Topology, page 18-9
• Rapid Convergence, page 18-10
• Synchronization of Port Roles, page 18-11
• Bridge Protocol Data Unit Format and Processing, page 18-12
For configuration information, see the “Configuring MSTP Features” section on page 18-14.

18-8 OL-8553-06
Understanding RSTP
Port Roles and the Active Topology

The RSTP provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree by assigning port roles and by learning the
active topology. The RSTP builds upon the IEEE 802.1D STP to select the switch with the highest switch
priority (lowest numerical priority value) as the root switch as described in the “Spanning-Tree Topology
and BPDUs” section on page 17-3. Then the RSTP assigns one of these port roles to individual ports:
• Root port—Provides the best path (lowest cost) when the switch forwards packets to the root switch.
• Designated port—Connects to the designated switch, which incurs the lowest path cost when
forwarding packets from that LAN to the root switch. The port through which the designated switch
is attached to the LAN is called the designated port.
• Alternate port—Offers an alternate path toward the root switch to that provided by the current root
port.
• Backup port—Acts as a backup for the path provided by a designated port toward the leaves of the
spanning tree. A backup port can exist only when two ports are connected in a loopback by a
point-to-point link or when a switch has two or more connections to a shared LAN segment.
• Disabled port—Has no role within the operation of the spanning tree.
A port with the root or a designated port role is included in the active topology. A port with the alternate
or backup port role is excluded from the active topology.
In a stable topology with consistent port roles throughout the network, the RSTP ensures that every root
port and designated port immediately transition to the forwarding state while all alternate and backup
ports are always in the discarding state (equivalent to blocking in IEEE 802.1D). The port state controls
the operation of the forwarding and learning processes. Table 18-2 provides a comparison of
IEEE 802.1D and RSTP port states.
Table 18-2 Port State Comparison
STP Port State Is Port Included in the

Operational Status (IEEE 802.1D) RSTP Port State Active Topology?
Enabled Blocking Discarding No
Enabled Listening Discarding No
Enabled Learning Learning Yes
Enabled Forwarding Forwarding Yes
Disabled Disabled Discarding No
To be consistent with Cisco STP implementations, this guide defines the port state as blocking instead
of discarding. Designated ports start in the listening state.

OL-8553-06 18-9
Understanding RSTP
Rapid Convergence
The RSTP provides for rapid recovery of connectivity following the failure of a switch, a switch port, or
a LAN. It provides rapid convergence for edge ports, new root ports, and ports connected through
point-to-point links as follows:
• Edge ports—If you configure a port as an edge port on an RSTP switch by using the spanning-tree
portfast interface configuration command, the edge port immediately transitions to the forwarding
state. An edge port is the same as a Port Fast-enabled port, and you should enable it only on ports
that connect to a single end station.
• Root ports—If the RSTP selects a new root port, it blocks the old root port and immediately
transitions the new root port to the forwarding state.
• Point-to-point links—If you connect a port to another port through a point-to-point link and the local
port becomes a designated port, it negotiates a rapid transition with the other port by using the
proposal-agreement handshake to ensure a loop-free topology.
As shown in Figure 18-4, Switch A is connected to Switch B through a point-to-point link, and all
of the ports are in the blocking state. Assume that the priority of Switch A is a smaller numerical
value than the priority of Switch B. Switch A sends a proposal message (a configuration BPDU with
the proposal flag set) to Switch B, proposing itself as the designated switch.
After receiving the proposal message, Switch B selects as its new root port the port from which the
proposal message was received, forces all nonedge ports to the blocking state, and sends an
agreement message (a BPDU with the agreement flag set) through its new root port.
After receiving Switch B’s agreement message, Switch A also immediately transitions its designated
port to the forwarding state. No loops in the network are formed because Switch B blocked all of its
nonedge ports and because there is a point-to-point link between Switches A and B.
When Switch C is connected to Switch B, a similar set of handshaking messages are exchanged.
Switch C selects the port connected to Switch B as its root port, and both ends immediately
transition to the forwarding state. With each iteration of this handshaking process, one more switch
joins the active topology. As the network converges, this proposal-agreement handshaking
progresses from the root toward the leaves of the spanning tree.
The switch learns the link type from the port duplex mode: a full-duplex port is considered to have
a point-to-point connection; a half-duplex port is considered to have a shared connection. You can
override the default setting that is controlled by the duplex setting by using the spanning-tree
link-type interface configuration command.

18-10 OL-8553-06
Understanding RSTP
Figure 18-4 Proposal and Agreement Handshaking for Rapid Convergence
Switch A Proposal Switch B
Designated
Root Agreement switch
F F
DP RP
Designated
Root switch Proposal Switch C
F F
DP RP
Designated
Root switch Agreement
F F F F
DP RP DP RP
DP = designated port
88760
RP = root port
F = forwarding
Synchronization of Port Roles

When the switch receives a proposal message on one of its ports and that port is selected as the new root
port, the RSTP forces all other ports to synchronize with the new root information.
The switch is synchronized with superior root information received on the root port if all other ports are
synchronized. An individual port on the switch is synchronized if
• That port is in the blocking state.
• It is an edge port (a port configured to be at the edge of the network).
If a designated port is in the forwarding state and is not configured as an edge port, it transitions to the
blocking state when the RSTP forces it to synchronize with new root information. In general, when the
RSTP forces a port to synchronize with root information and the port does not satisfy any of the above
conditions, its port state is set to blocking.

OL-8553-06 18-11
Understanding RSTP
After ensuring that all of the ports are synchronized, the switch sends an agreement message to the
designated switch corresponding to its root port. When the switches connected by a point-to-point link
are in agreement about their port roles, the RSTP immediately transitions the port states to forwarding.
The sequence of events is shown in Figure 18-5.
Figure 18-5 Sequence of Events During Rapid Convergence
4. Agreement 1. Proposal
5. Forward
Edge port
2. Block 3. Block
9. Forward 11. Forward
8. Agreement 6. Proposal 7. Proposal 10. Agreement
Root port
88761
Designated port
Bridge Protocol Data Unit Format and Processing

The RSTP BPDU format is the same as the IEEE 802.1D BPDU format except that the protocol version
is set to 2. A new 1-byte Version 1 Length field is set to zero, which means that no version 1 protocol
information is present. Table 18-3 shows the RSTP flag fields.
Table 18-3 RSTP BPDU Flags
Bit Function
0 Topology change (TC)
1 Proposal
2–3: Port role:
00 Unknown
01 Alternate port
10 Root port
11 Designated port
4 Learning
5 Forwarding
6 Agreement
7 Topology change acknowledgement (TCA)

18-12 OL-8553-06
Understanding RSTP
The sending switch sets the proposal flag in the RSTP BPDU to propose itself as the designated switch
on that LAN. The port role in the proposal message is always set to the designated port.
The sending switch sets the agreement flag in the RSTP BPDU to accept the previous proposal. The port
role in the agreement message is always set to the root port.
The RSTP does not have a separate topology change notification (TCN) BPDU. It uses the topology
change (TC) flag to show the topology changes. However, for interoperability with IEEE 802.1D
switches, the RSTP switch processes and generates TCN BPDUs.
The learning and forwarding flags are set according to the state of the sending port.
Processing Superior BPDU Information

If a port receives superior root information (lower switch ID, lower path cost, and so forth) than currently
stored for the port, the RSTP triggers a reconfiguration. If the port is proposed and is selected as the new
root port, RSTP forces all the other ports to synchronize.
If the BPDU received is an RSTP BPDU with the proposal flag set, the switch sends an agreement
message after all of the other ports are synchronized. If the BPDU is an IEEE 802.1D BPDU, the switch
does not set the proposal flag and starts the forward-delay timer for the port. The new root port requires
twice the forward-delay time to transition to the forwarding state.
If the superior information received on the port causes the port to become a backup or alternate port,
RSTP sets the port to the blocking state but does not send the agreement message. The designated port
continues sending BPDUs with the proposal flag set until the forward-delay timer expires, at which time
the port transitions to the forwarding state.
Processing Inferior BPDU Information

If a designated port receives an inferior BPDU (higher switch ID, higher path cost, and so forth than
currently stored for the port) with a designated port role, it immediately replies with its own information.
Topology Changes
This section describes the differences between the RSTP and the IEEE 802.1D in handling spanning-tree
topology changes.
• Detection—Unlike IEEE 802.1D in which any transition between the blocking and the forwarding
state causes a topology change, only transitions from the blocking to the forwarding state cause a
topology change with RSTP (only an increase in connectivity is considered a topology change).
State changes on an edge port do not cause a topology change. When an RSTP switch detects a
topology change, it deletes the learned information on all of its nonedge ports except on those from
which it received the TC notification.
• Notification—Unlike IEEE 802.1D, which uses TCN BPDUs, the RSTP does not use them.
However, for IEEE 802.1D interoperability, an RSTP switch processes and generates TCN BPDUs.
• Acknowledgement—When an RSTP switch receives a TCN message on a designated port from an
IEEE 802.1D switch, it replies with an IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDU with the TCA bit set.
However, if the TC-while timer (the same as the topology-change timer in IEEE 802.1D) is active
on a root port connected to an IEEE 802.1D switch and a configuration BPDU with the TCA bit set
is received, the TC-while timer is reset.
This behavior is only required to support IEEE 802.1D switches. The RSTP BPDUs never have the
TCA bit set.

OL-8553-06 18-13
Configuring MSTP Features
• Propagation—When an RSTP switch receives a TC message from another switch through a

designated or root port, it propagates the change to all of its nonedge, designated ports and to the
root port (excluding the port on which it is received). The switch starts the TC-while timer for all
such ports and flushes the information learned on them.
• Protocol migration—For backward compatibility with IEEE 802.1D switches, RSTP selectively
sends IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDUs and TCN BPDUs on a per-port basis.
When a port is initialized, the migrate-delay timer is started (specifies the minimum time during
which RSTP BPDUs are sent), and RSTP BPDUs are sent. While this timer is active, the switch
processes all BPDUs received on that port and ignores the protocol type.
If the switch receives an IEEE 802.1D BPDU after the port migration-delay timer has expired, it
assumes that it is connected to an IEEE 802.1D switch and starts using only IEEE 802.1D BPDUs.
However, if the RSTP switch is using IEEE 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU
after the timer has expired, it restarts the timer and starts using RSTP BPDUs on that port.

• Default MSTP Configuration, page 18-14
• MSTP Configuration Guidelines, page 18-15
• Specifying the MST Region Configuration and Enabling MSTP, page 18-16 (required)
• Configuring the Root Switch, page 18-17 (optional)
• Configuring a Secondary Root Switch, page 18-18 (optional)
• Configuring Port Priority, page 18-19 (optional)
• Configuring Path Cost, page 18-20 (optional)
• Configuring the Switch Priority, page 18-21 (optional)
• Configuring the Hello Time, page 18-22 (optional)
• Configuring the Forwarding-Delay Time, page 18-23 (optional)
• Configuring the Maximum-Aging Time, page 18-23 (optional)
• Configuring the Maximum-Hop Count, page 18-24 (optional)
• Specifying the Link Type to Ensure Rapid Transitions, page 18-24 (optional)
• Designating the Neighbor Type, page 18-25 (optional)
• Restarting the Protocol Migration Process, page 18-25 (optional)
Default MSTP Configuration

Table 18-4 shows the default MSTP configuration.
Table 18-4 Default MSTP Configuration

Spanning-tree mode PVST+ (Rapid PVST+ and MSTP are disabled).
Switch priority (configurable on a per-CIST port basis) 32768.

18-14 OL-8553-06
Table 18-4 Default MSTP Configuration (continued)

Spanning-tree port priority (configurable on a per-CIST port basis) 128.
Spanning-tree port cost (configurable on a per-CIST port basis) 1000 Mbps: 4.
100 Mbps: 19.
10 Mbps: 100.
Hello time 2 seconds.
Forward-delay time 15 seconds.
Maximum-aging time 20 seconds.
Maximum hop count 20 hops.
For information about the supported number of spanning-tree instances, see the “Supported
Spanning-Tree Instances” section on page 17-9.
MSTP Configuration Guidelines

These are the configuration guidelines for MSTP:
• When you enable MST by using the spanning-tree mode mst global configuration command, RSTP
is automatically enabled.
• For two or more switches to be in the same MST region, they must have the same VLAN-to-instance
map, the same configuration revision number, and the same name.
• The switch supports up to 65 MST instances. The number of VLANs that can be mapped to a
particular MST instance is unlimited.
• PVST+, rapid PVST+, and MSTP are supported, but only one version can be active at any time. (For
example, all VLANs run PVST+, all VLANs run rapid PVST+, or all VLANs run MSTP.) For more
information, see the “Spanning-Tree Interoperability and Backward Compatibility” section on
page 17-10. For information on the recommended trunk port configuration, see the “Interaction with
Other Features” section on page 13-20.
• VTP propagation of the MST configuration is not supported. However, you can manually configure
the MST configuration (region name, revision number, and VLAN-to-instance mapping) on each
switch within the MST region by using the command-line interface (CLI) or through the SNMP
support.
• For load balancing across redundant paths in the network to work, all VLAN-to-instance mapping
assignments must match; otherwise, all traffic flows on a single link.
• All MST boundary ports must be forwarding for load balancing between a PVST+ and an MST
cloud or between a rapid-PVST+ and an MST cloud. For this to occur, the IST master of the MST
cloud should also be the root of the CST. If the MST cloud consists of multiple MST regions, one
of the MST regions must contain the CST root, and all of the other MST regions must have a better
path to the root contained within the MST cloud than a path through the PVST+ or rapid-PVST+
cloud. You might have to manually configure the switches in the clouds.
• Partitioning the network into a large number of regions is not recommended. However, if this
situation is unavoidable, we recommend that you partition the switched LAN into smaller LANs
interconnected by routers or non-Layer 2 devices.

OL-8553-06 18-15
• For configuration guidelines about UplinkFast and BackboneFast, see the “Optional Spanning-Tree
Specifying the MST Region Configuration and Enabling MSTP

For two or more switches to be in the same MST region, they must have the same VLAN-to-instance
mapping, the same configuration revision number, and the same name.
A region can have one member or multiple members with the same MST configuration; each member
must be capable of processing RSTP BPDUs. There is no limit to the number of MST regions in a
network, but each region can only support up to 65 spanning-tree instances. You can assign a VLAN to
only one spanning-tree instance at a time.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to specify the MST region configuration and
enable MSTP. This procedure is required.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree mst configuration Enter MST configuration mode.
Step 3 instance instance-id vlan vlan-range Map VLANs to an MST instance.
• For instance-id, the range is 0 to 4094.
• For vlan vlan-range, the range is 1 to 4094.
When you map VLANs to an MST instance, the mapping is
incremental, and the VLANs specified in the command are added to
or removed from the VLANs that were previously mapped.
To specify a VLAN range, use a hyphen; for example, instance 1 vlan
1-63 maps VLANs 1 through 63 to MST instance 1.
To specify a VLAN series, use a comma; for example, instance 1 vlan
10, 20, 30 maps VLANs 10, 20, and 30 to MST instance 1.
Step 4 name name Specify the configuration name. The name string has a maximum length
of 32 characters and is case sensitive.
Step 5 revision version Specify the configuration revision number. The range is 0 to 65535.
Step 6 show pending Verify your configuration by displaying the pending configuration.
Step 7 exit Apply all changes, and return to global configuration mode.
Step 8 spanning-tree mode mst Enable MSTP. RSTP is also enabled.
Caution Changing spanning-tree modes can disrupt traffic because all

spanning-tree instances are stopped for the previous mode and
restarted in the new mode.
You cannot run both MSTP and PVST+ or both MSTP and rapid PVST+
at the same time.

18-16 OL-8553-06
To return to the default MST region configuration, use the no spanning-tree mst configuration global
configuration command. To return to the default VLAN-to-instance map, use the no instance instance-id
[vlan vlan-range] MST configuration command. To return to the default name, use the no name MST
configuration command. To return to the default revision number, use the no revision MST configuration
command. To re-enable PVST+, use the no spanning-tree mode or the spanning-tree mode pvst global
This example shows how to enter MST configuration mode, map VLANs 10 to 20 to MST instance 1,
name the region region1, set the configuration revision to 1, display the pending configuration, apply the
changes, and return to global configuration mode:
Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
Switch(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan 10-20
Switch(config-mst)# name region1
Switch(config-mst)# revision 1
Switch(config-mst)# show pending
Pending MST configuration
Name [region1]
Revision 1
Instance Vlans Mapped
-------- ---------------------
0 1-9,21-4094
1 10-20
-------------------------------
Switch(config-mst)# exit
Switch(config)#
Configuring the Root Switch

The switch maintains a spanning-tree instance for the group of VLANs mapped to it. A switch ID,
consisting of the switch priority and the switch MAC address, is associated with each instance. For a
group of VLANs, the switch with the lowest switch ID becomes the root switch.
To configure a switch to become the root, use the spanning-tree mst instance-id root global
configuration command to modify the switch priority from the default value (32768) to a significantly
lower value so that the switch becomes the root switch for the specified spanning-tree instance. When
you enter this command, the switch checks the switch priorities of the root switches. Because of the
extended system ID support, the switch sets its own priority for the specified instance to 24576 if this
value will cause this switch to become the root for the specified spanning-tree instance.
If any root switch for the specified instance has a switch priority lower than 24576, the switch sets its
own priority to 4096 less than the lowest switch priority. (4096 is the value of the least-significant bit
of a 4-bit switch priority value as shown in Table 17-1 on page 17-4.)
If your network consists of switches that both do and do not support the extended system ID, it is unlikely
that the switch with the extended system ID support will become the root switch. The extended system
ID increases the switch priority value every time the VLAN number is greater than the priority of the
connected switches running older software.
The root switch for each spanning-tree instance should be a backbone or distribution switch. Do not
configure an access switch as the spanning-tree primary root.
Use the diameter keyword, which is available only for MST instance 0, to specify the Layer 2 network
diameter (that is, the maximum number of switch hops between any two end stations in the Layer 2
network). When you specify the network diameter, the switch automatically sets an optimal hello time,

OL-8553-06 18-17
forward-delay time, and maximum-age time for a network of that diameter, which can significantly
reduce the convergence time. You can use the hello keyword to override the automatically calculated
hello time.
Note After configuring the switch as the root switch, we recommend that you avoid manually configuring the
hello time, forward-delay time, and maximum-age time through the spanning-tree mst hello-time,
spanning-tree mst forward-time, and the spanning-tree mst max-age global configuration
commands.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a switch as the root switch. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree mst instance-id root primary Configure a switch as the root switch.
[diameter net-diameter [hello-time seconds]]
• For instance-id, you can specify a single instance, a range
of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances
separated by a comma. The range is 0 to 4094.
• (Optional) For diameter net-diameter, specify the
maximum number of switches between any two end
stations. The range is 2 to 7. This keyword is available
only for MST instance 0.
seconds between the generation of configuration messages
by the root switch. The range is 1 to 10 seconds; the
default is 2 seconds.
Step 4 show spanning-tree mst instance-id Verify your entries.
To return the switch to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree mst instance-id root global
Configuring a Secondary Root Switch

When you configure a switch with the extended system ID support as the secondary root, the switch
priority is modified from the default value (32768) to 28672. The switch is then likely to become the root
switch for the specified instance if the primary root switch fails. This is assuming that the other network
switches use the default switch priority of 32768 and therefore are unlikely to become the root switch.
You can execute this command on more than one switch to configure multiple backup root switches. Use
the same network diameter and hello-time values that you used when you configured the primary root
switch with the spanning-tree mst instance-id root primary global configuration command.

18-18 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a switch as the secondary root
switch. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree mst instance-id root Configure a switch as the secondary root switch.
secondary [diameter net-diameter
• For instance-id, you can specify a single instance, a range of
[hello-time seconds]]
instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances
• (Optional) For diameter net-diameter, specify the maximum
number of switches between any two end stations. The range is 2
to 7. This keyword is available only for MST instance 0.
seconds between the generation of configuration messages by
the root switch. The range is 1 to 10 seconds; the default
is 2 seconds.
Use the same network diameter and hello-time values that you used
when configuring the primary root switch. See the “Configuring the
Root Switch” section on page 18-17.
To return the switch to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree mst instance-id root global
Configuring Port Priority

If a loop occurs, the MSTP uses the port priority when selecting an interface to put into the forwarding
state. You can assign higher priority values (lower numerical values) to interfaces that you want selected
first and lower priority values (higher numerical values) that you want selected last. If all interfaces have
the same priority value, the MSTP puts the interface with the lowest interface number in the forwarding
state and blocks the other interfaces.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the MSTP port priority of an
interface. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
configuration mode.
Valid interfaces include physical ports and port-channel
logical interfaces. The port-channel range is 1 to 48.

OL-8553-06 18-19
Command Purpose
Step 3 spanning-tree mst instance-id port-priority priority Configure the port priority.
• For instance-id, you can specify a single instance, a
range of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of
instances separated by a comma. The range is 0 to
4094.
• For priority, the range is 0 to 240 in increments of 16.
The default is 128. The lower the number, the higher
the priority.
The priority values are 0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112,
128, 144, 160, 176, 192, 208, 224, and 240. All other
values are rejected.
Step 5 show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id Verify your entries.
or
show spanning-tree mst instance-id
Note The show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id privileged EXEC command displays information
only if the port is in a link-up operative state. Otherwise, you can use the show running-config interface
To return the interface to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree mst instance-id port-priority
Configuring Path Cost

The MSTP path cost default value is derived from the media speed of an interface. If a loop occurs, the
MSTP uses cost when selecting an interface to put in the forwarding state. You can assign lower cost
values to interfaces that you want selected first and higher cost values that you want selected last. If all
interfaces have the same cost value, the MSTP puts the interface with the lowest interface number in the
forwarding state and blocks the other interfaces.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the MSTP cost of an interface. This
Command Purpose
configuration mode. Valid interfaces include physical ports and
port-channel logical interfaces. The port-channel range is 1 to 48.

18-20 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 spanning-tree mst instance-id cost cost Configure the cost.
If a loop occurs, the MSTP uses the path cost when selecting an
interface to place into the forwarding state. A lower path cost
• For instance-id, you can specify a single instance, a range of
instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances
• For cost, the range is 1 to 200000000; the default value is
derived from the media speed of the interface.
or
show spanning-tree mst instance-id
Note The show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id privileged EXEC command displays information
only for ports that are in a link-up operative state. Otherwise, you can use the show running-config
To return the interface to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree mst instance-id cost interface
Configuring the Switch Priority

You can configure the switch priority and make it more likely that the switch will be chosen as the root
switch.
spanning-tree mst instance-id root primary and the spanning-tree mst instance-id root secondary
global configuration commands to modify the switch priority.

OL-8553-06 18-21
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch priority. This procedure
is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree mst instance-id priority priority Configure the switch priority.
• For instance-id, you can specify a single instance, a
range of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of
instances separated by a comma. The range is 0 to 4094.
• For priority, the range is 0 to 61440 in increments of
4096; the default is 32768. The lower the number, the
more likely the switch will be chosen as the root switch.
Priority values are 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480,
24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152,
53248, 57344, and 61440. All other values are rejected.
To return the switch to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree mst instance-id priority global
Configuring the Hello Time

You can configure the interval between the generation of configuration messages by the root switch by
changing the hello time.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the hello time for all MST
instances. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree mst hello-time seconds Configure the hello time for all MST instances. The hello time
is the interval between the generation of configuration
messages by the root switch. These messages mean that the
switch is alive.
For seconds, the range is 1 to 10; the default is 2.
Step 4 show spanning-tree mst Verify your entries.
To return the switch to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree mst hello-time global configuration
command.

18-22 OL-8553-06
Configuring the Forwarding-Delay Time

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the forwarding-delay time for all
MST instances. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree mst forward-time seconds Configure the forward time for all MST instances. The forward
delay is the number of seconds a port waits before changing from
its spanning-tree learning and listening states to the forwarding
state.
To return the switch to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree mst forward-time global
Configuring the Maximum-Aging Time

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the maximum-aging time for all
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree mst max-age seconds Configure the maximum-aging time for all MST instances. The
maximum-aging time is the number of seconds a switch waits
without receiving spanning-tree configuration messages before
attempting a reconfiguration.
To return the switch to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree mst max-age global configuration
command.

OL-8553-06 18-23
Configuring the Maximum-Hop Count

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the maximum-hop count for all
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree mst max-hops hop-count Specify the number of hops in a region before the BPDU is
discarded, and the information held for a port is aged.
For hop-count, the range is 1 to 255; the default is 20.
To return the switch to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree mst max-hops global configuration
command.
Specifying the Link Type to Ensure Rapid Transitions

If you connect a port to another port through a point-to-point link and the local port becomes a
designated port, the RSTP negotiates a rapid transition with the other port by using the
proposal-agreement handshake to ensure a loop-free topology as described in the “Rapid Convergence”
By default, the link type is controlled from the duplex mode of the interface: a full-duplex port is
considered to have a point-to-point connection; a half-duplex port is considered to have a shared
connection. If you have a half-duplex link physically connected point-to-point to a single port on a
remote switch running MSTP, you can override the default setting of the link type and enable rapid
transitions to the forwarding state.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to override the default link-type setting. This
Command Purpose
configuration mode. Valid interfaces include physical ports,
VLANs, and port-channel logical interfaces. The VLAN ID
range is 1 to 4094. The port-channel range is 1 to 48.
Step 3 spanning-tree link-type point-to-point Specify that the link type of a port is point-to-point.
To return the port to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree link-type interface configuration
command.

18-24 OL-8553-06
Designating the Neighbor Type

A topology could contain both prestandard and IEEE 802.1s standard compliant devices. By default,
ports can automatically detect prestandard devices, but they can still receive both standard and
prestandard BPDUs. When there is a mismatch between a device and its neighbor, only the CIST runs
on the interface.
You can choose to set a port to send only prestandard BPDUs. The prestandard flag appears in all the
show commands, even if the port is in STP compatibility mode.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to override the default link-type setting. This
Command Purpose
configuration mode. Valid interfaces include physical ports.
Step 3 spanning-tree mst pre-standard Specify that the port can send only prestandard BPDUs.
To return the port to its default setting, use the no spanning-tree mst prestandard interface
Restarting the Protocol Migration Process

A switch running MSTP supports a built-in protocol migration mechanism that enables it to interoperate
with legacy IEEE 802.1D switches. If this switch receives a legacy IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDU
(a BPDU with the protocol version set to 0), it sends only IEEE 802.1D BPDUs on that port. An MSTP
switch also can detect that a port is at the boundary of a region when it receives a legacy BPDU, an MST
BPDU (Version 3) associated with a different region, or an RST BPDU (Version 2).
However, the switch does not automatically revert to the MSTP mode if it no longer receives
IEEE 802.1D BPDUs because it cannot detect whether the legacy switch has been removed from the link
unless the legacy switch is the designated switch. A switch also might continue to assign a boundary role
to a port when the switch to which it is connected has joined the region.
To restart the protocol migration process (force the renegotiation with neighboring switches) on the
switch, use the clear spanning-tree detected-protocols privileged EXEC command.
To restart the protocol migration process on a specific interface, use the clear spanning-tree
detected-protocols interface interface-id privileged EXEC command.

OL-8553-06 18-25
Displaying the MST Configuration and Status
Displaying the MST Configuration and Status

Table 18-5 Commands for Displaying MST Status
Command Purpose
show spanning-tree mst configuration Displays the MST region configuration.
show spanning-tree mst configuration digest Displays the MD5 digest included in the current MSTCI.
show spanning-tree mst instance-id Displays MST information for the specified instance.
show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id Displays MST information for the specified interface.

18-26 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 19
Configuring Optional Spanning-Tree Features
This chapter describes how to configure optional spanning-tree features on the Catalyst 3560 switch.
You can configure all of these features when your switch is running the per-VLAN spanning-tree plus
(PVST+). You can configure only the noted features when your switch is running the Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol (MSTP) or the rapid per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (rapid-PVST+) protocol.
For information on configuring the PVST+ and rapid PVST+, see Chapter 17, “Configuring STP.” For
information about the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) and how to map multiple VLANs to the
same spanning-tree instance, see Chapter 18, “Configuring MSTP.”

• Understanding Optional Spanning-Tree Features, page 19-1
• Configuring Optional Spanning-Tree Features, page 19-9
• Displaying the Spanning-Tree Status, page 19-16
Understanding Optional Spanning-Tree Features

• Understanding Port Fast, page 19-2
• Understanding BPDU Guard, page 19-2
• Understanding BPDU Filtering, page 19-3
• Understanding UplinkFast, page 19-3
• Understanding BackboneFast, page 19-5
• Understanding EtherChannel Guard, page 19-7
• Understanding Root Guard, page 19-8
• Understanding Loop Guard, page 19-9

OL-8553-06 19-1
Chapter 19 Configuring Optional Spanning-Tree Features
Understanding Port Fast

Port Fast immediately brings an interface configured as an access or trunk port to the forwarding state
from a blocking state, bypassing the listening and learning states. You can use Port Fast on interfaces
connected to a single workstation or server, as shown in Figure 19-1, to allow those devices to
immediately connect to the network, rather than waiting for the spanning tree to converge.
Interfaces connected to a single workstation or server should not receive bridge protocol data units
(BPDUs). An interface with Port Fast enabled goes through the normal cycle of spanning-tree status
changes when the switch is restarted.
Note Because the purpose of Port Fast is to minimize the time interfaces must wait for spanning-tree to
converge, it is effective only when used on interfaces connected to end stations. If you enable Port Fast
on an interface connecting to another switch, you risk creating a spanning-tree loop.
You can enable this feature by using the spanning-tree portfast interface configuration or the
spanning-tree portfast default global configuration command.
Figure 19-1 Port Fast-Enabled Interfaces
Server
Port
Port Fast-enabled port
Fast-enabled
ports
101225
Workstations Workstations
Understanding BPDU Guard

The BPDU guard feature can be globally enabled on the switch or can be enabled per port, but the feature
operates with some differences.
At the global level, you enable BPDU guard on Port Fast-enabled ports by using the spanning-tree
portfast bpduguard default global configuration command. Spanning tree shuts down ports that are in
a Port Fast-operational state if any BPDU is received on them. In a valid configuration, Port Fast-enabled
ports do not receive BPDUs. Receiving a BPDU on a Port Fast-enabled port means an invalid
configuration, such as the connection of an unauthorized device, and the BPDU guard feature puts the
port in the error-disabled state. When this happens, the switch shuts down the entire port on which the
violation occurred.
To prevent the port from shutting down, you can use the errdisable detect cause bpduguard shutdown
vlan global configuration command to shut down just the offending VLAN on the port where the
violation occurred.

19-2 OL-8553-06
At the interface level, you enable BPDU guard on any port by using the spanning-tree bpduguard
enable interface configuration command without also enabling the Port Fast feature. When the port
receives a BPDU, it is put in the error-disabled state.
The BPDU guard feature provides a secure response to invalid configurations because you must
manually put the interface back in service. Use the BPDU guard feature in a service-provider network
to prevent an access port from participating in the spanning tree.
Understanding BPDU Filtering

The BPDU filtering feature can be globally enabled on the switch or can be enabled per interface, but
the feature operates with some differences.
At the global level, you can enable BPDU filtering on Port Fast-enabled interfaces by using the
spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default global configuration command. This command prevents
interfaces that are in a Port Fast-operational state from sending or receiving BPDUs. The interfaces still
send a few BPDUs at link-up before the switch begins to filter outbound BPDUs. You should globally
enable BPDU filtering on a switch so that hosts connected to these interfaces do not receive BPDUs. If
a BPDU is received on a Port Fast-enabled interface, the interface loses its Port Fast-operational status,
and BPDU filtering is disabled.
At the interface level, you can enable BPDU filtering on any interface by using the spanning-tree
bpdufilter enable interface configuration command without also enabling the Port Fast feature. This
command prevents the interface from sending or receiving BPDUs.
Caution Enabling BPDU filtering on an interface is the same as disabling spanning tree on it and can result in
spanning-tree loops.
You can enable the BPDU filtering feature for the entire switch or for an interface.
Understanding UplinkFast
Switches in hierarchical networks can be grouped into backbone switches, distribution switches, and
access switches. Figure 19-2 shows a complex network where distribution switches and access switches
each have at least one redundant link that spanning tree blocks to prevent loops.

OL-8553-06 19-3
Figure 19-2 Switches in a Hierarchical Network
Backbone switches
Root bridge
Distribution switches
101231
Active link Access switches
Blocked link
If a switch loses connectivity, it begins using the alternate paths as soon as the spanning tree selects a
new root port. By enabling UplinkFast with the spanning-tree uplinkfast global configuration
command, you can accelerate the choice of a new root port when a link or switch fails or when the
spanning tree reconfigures itself. The root port transitions to the forwarding state immediately without
going through the listening and learning states, as it would with the normal spanning-tree procedures.
When the spanning tree reconfigures the new root port, other interfaces flood the network with multicast
packets, one for each address that was learned on the interface. You can limit these bursts of multicast
traffic by reducing the max-update-rate parameter (the default for this parameter is 150 packets per
second). However, if you enter zero, station-learning frames are not generated, so the spanning-tree
topology converges more slowly after a loss of connectivity.
Note UplinkFast is most useful in wiring-closet switches at the access or edge of the network. It is not
appropriate for backbone devices. This feature might not be useful for other types of applications.
UplinkFast provides fast convergence after a direct link failure and achieves load balancing between
redundant Layer 2 links using uplink groups. An uplink group is a set of Layer 2 interfaces (per VLAN),
only one of which is forwarding at any given time. Specifically, an uplink group consists of the root port
(which is forwarding) and a set of blocked ports, except for self-looping ports. The uplink group
provides an alternate path in case the currently forwarding link fails.
Figure 19-3 shows an example topology with no link failures. Switch A, the root switch, is connected
directly to Switch B over link L1 and to Switch C over link L2. The Layer 2 interface on Switch C that
is connected directly to Switch B is in a blocking state.

19-4 OL-8553-06
Figure 19-3 UplinkFast Example Before Direct Link Failure
Switch A
(Root) Switch B
L1
L2 L3
Blocked port
43575
Switch C
If Switch C detects a link failure on the currently active link L2 on the root port (a direct link failure),
UplinkFast unblocks the blocked interface on Switch C and transitions it to the forwarding state without
going through the listening and learning states, as shown in Figure 19-4. This change takes
approximately 1 to 5 seconds.
Figure 19-4 UplinkFast Example After Direct Link Failure
Switch A
(Root) Switch B
L1
L2 L3
Link failure
UplinkFast transitions port
directly to forwarding state.
43576
Switch C
Understanding BackboneFast
BackboneFast detects indirect failures in the core of the backbone. BackboneFast is a complementary
technology to the UplinkFast feature, which responds to failures on links directly connected to access
switches. BackboneFast optimizes the maximum-age timer, which controls the amount of time the
switch stores protocol information received on an interface. When a switch receives an inferior BPDU
from the designated port of another switch, the BPDU is a signal that the other switch might have lost
its path to the root, and BackboneFast tries to find an alternate path to the root.
BackboneFast, which is enabled by using the spanning-tree backbonefast global configuration
command, starts when a root port or blocked interface on a switch receives inferior BPDUs from its
designated switch. An inferior BPDU identifies a switch that declares itself as both the root bridge and
the designated switch. When a switch receives an inferior BPDU, it means that a link to which the switch
is not directly connected (an indirect link) has failed (that is, the designated switch has lost its
connection to the root switch). Under spanning-tree rules, the switch ignores inferior BPDUs for the
configured maximum aging time specified by the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id max-age global

OL-8553-06 19-5
The switch tries to find if it has an alternate path to the root switch. If the inferior BPDU arrives on a
blocked interface, the root port and other blocked interfaces on the switch become alternate paths to the
root switch. (Self-looped ports are not considered alternate paths to the root switch.) If the inferior
BPDU arrives on the root port, all blocked interfaces become alternate paths to the root switch. If the
inferior BPDU arrives on the root port and there are no blocked interfaces, the switch assumes that it has
lost connectivity to the root switch, causes the maximum aging time on the root port to expire, and
becomes the root switch according to normal spanning-tree rules.
If the switch has alternate paths to the root switch, it uses these alternate paths to send a root link query
(RLQ) request. The switch sends the RLQ request on all alternate paths and waits for an RLQ reply from
other switches in the network.
If the switch discovers that it still has an alternate path to the root, it expires the maximum aging time
on the interface that received the inferior BPDU. If all the alternate paths to the root switch indicate that
the switch has lost connectivity to the root switch, the switch expires the maximum aging time on the
interface that received the RLQ reply. If one or more alternate paths can still connect to the root switch,
the switch makes all interfaces on which it received an inferior BPDU its designated ports and moves
them from the blocking state (if they were in the blocking state), through the listening and learning
states, and into the forwarding state.
Figure 19-5 shows an example topology with no link failures. Switch A, the root switch, connects
directly to Switch B over link L1 and to Switch C over link L2. The Layer 2 interface on Switch C that
connects directly to Switch B is in the blocking state.
Figure 19-5 BackboneFast Example Before Indirect Link Failure
Switch A
(Root) Switch B
L1
L2 L3
Blocked port
44963
Switch C
If link L1 fails as shown in Figure 19-6, Switch C cannot detect this failure because it is not connected
directly to link L1. However, because Switch B is directly connected to the root switch over L1, it detects
the failure, elects itself the root, and begins sending BPDUs to Switch C, identifying itself as the root.
When Switch C receives the inferior BPDUs from Switch B, Switch C assumes that an indirect failure
has occurred. At that point, BackboneFast allows the blocked interface on Switch C to move
immediately to the listening state without waiting for the maximum aging time for the interface to
expire. BackboneFast then transitions the Layer 2 interface on Switch C to the forwarding state,
providing a path from Switch B to Switch A. The root-switch election takes approximately 30 seconds,
twice the Forward Delay time if the default Forward Delay time of 15 seconds is set. Figure 19-6 shows
how BackboneFast reconfigures the topology to account for the failure of link L1.

19-6 OL-8553-06
Figure 19-6 BackboneFast Example After Indirect Link Failure
Switch A
(Root) Switch B
L1
Link failure
L2 L3
BackboneFast changes port

through listening and learning
states to forwarding state.
44964
Switch C
If a new switch is introduced into a shared-medium topology as shown in Figure 19-7, BackboneFast is
not activated because the inferior BPDUs did not come from the recognized designated switch
(Switch B). The new switch begins sending inferior BPDUs that indicate it is the root switch. However,
the other switches ignore these inferior BPDUs, and the new switch learns that Switch B is the
designated switch to Switch A, the root switch.
Figure 19-7 Adding a Switch in a Shared-Medium Topology
Switch A
(Root)
Switch C Switch B
(Designated bridge)
Blocked port
Added switch
44965
Understanding EtherChannel Guard

You can use EtherChannel guard to detect an EtherChannel misconfiguration between the switch and a
connected device. A misconfiguration can occur if the switch interfaces are configured in an
EtherChannel, but the interfaces on the other device are not. A misconfiguration can also occur if the
channel parameters are not the same at both ends of the EtherChannel. For EtherChannel configuration
guidelines, see the “EtherChannel Configuration Guidelines” section on page 35-9.
If the switch detects a misconfiguration on the other device, EtherChannel guard places the switch
interfaces in the error-disabled state, and displays an error message.
You can enable this feature by using the spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig global

OL-8553-06 19-7
Understanding Root Guard

The Layer 2 network of a service provider (SP) can include many connections to switches that are not
owned by the SP. In such a topology, the spanning tree can reconfigure itself and select a customer
switch as the root switch, as shown in Figure 19-8. You can avoid this situation by enabling root guard
on SP switch interfaces that connect to switches in your customer’s network. If spanning-tree
calculations cause an interface in the customer network to be selected as the root port, root guard then
places the interface in the root-inconsistent (blocked) state to prevent the customer’s switch from
becoming the root switch or being in the path to the root.
If a switch outside the SP network becomes the root switch, the interface is blocked (root-inconsistent
state), and spanning tree selects a new root switch. The customer’s switch does not become the root
switch and is not in the path to the root.
If the switch is operating in multiple spanning-tree (MST) mode, root guard forces the interface to be a
designated port. If a boundary port is blocked in an internal spanning-tree (IST) instance because of root
guard, the interface also is blocked in all MST instances. A boundary port is an interface that connects
to a LAN, the designated switch of which is either an IEEE 802.1D switch or a switch with a different
MST region configuration.
Root guard enabled on an interface applies to all the VLANs to which the interface belongs. VLANs can
be grouped and mapped to an MST instance.
You can enable this feature by using the spanning-tree guard root interface configuration command.
Caution Misuse of the root-guard feature can cause a loss of connectivity.
Figure 19-8 Root Guard in a Service-Provider Network
Customer network Service-provider network
Potential
spanning-tree root without
root guard enabled
Desired
root switch
Enable the root-guard feature

on these interfaces to prevent
switches in the customer
network from becoming
101232
the root switch or being

in the path to the root.

19-8 OL-8553-06
Understanding Loop Guard

You can use loop guard to prevent alternate or root ports from becoming designated ports because of a
failure that leads to a unidirectional link. This feature is most effective when it is enabled on the entire
switched network. Loop guard prevents alternate and root ports from becoming designated ports, and
spanning tree does not send BPDUs on root or alternate ports.
You can enable this feature by using the spanning-tree loopguard default global configuration
command.
When the switch is operating in PVST+ or rapid-PVST+ mode, loop guard prevents alternate and root
ports from becoming designated ports, and spanning tree does not send BPDUs on root or alternate ports.
When the switch is operating in MST mode, BPDUs are not sent on nonboundary ports only if the
interface is blocked by loop guard in all MST instances. On a boundary port, loop guard blocks the
interface in all MST instances.

• Default Optional Spanning-Tree Configuration, page 19-9
• Optional Spanning-Tree Configuration Guidelines, page 19-10
• Enabling Port Fast, page 19-10 (optional)
• Enabling BPDU Guard, page 19-11 (optional)
• Enabling BPDU Filtering, page 19-12 (optional)
• Enabling UplinkFast for Use with Redundant Links, page 19-13 (optional)
• Enabling BackboneFast, page 19-13 (optional)
• Enabling EtherChannel Guard, page 19-14 (optional)
• Enabling Root Guard, page 19-15 (optional)
• Enabling Loop Guard, page 19-15 (optional)
Default Optional Spanning-Tree Configuration

Table 19-1 shows the default optional spanning-tree configuration.
Table 19-1 Default Optional Spanning-Tree Configuration

Port Fast, BPDU filtering, BPDU guard Globally disabled (unless they are individually configured
per interface).
UplinkFast Globally disabled.
BackboneFast Globally disabled.
EtherChannel guard Globally enabled.
Root guard Disabled on all interfaces.
Loop guard Disabled on all interfaces.

OL-8553-06 19-9
Optional Spanning-Tree Configuration Guidelines

You can configure PortFast, BPDU guard, BPDU filtering, EtherChannel guard, root guard, or loop
guard if your switch is running PVST+, rapid PVST+, or MSTP.
You can configure the UplinkFast or the BackboneFast feature for rapid PVST+ or for the MSTP, but the
feature remains disabled (inactive) until you change the spanning-tree mode to PVST+.
Enabling Port Fast

An interface with the Port Fast feature enabled is moved directly to the spanning-tree forwarding state
without waiting for the standard forward-time delay.
Caution Use Port Fast only when connecting a single end station to an access or trunk port. Enabling this feature
on an interface connected to a switch or hub could prevent spanning tree from detecting and disabling
loops in your network, which could cause broadcast storms and address-learning problems.
If you enable the voice VLAN feature, the Port Fast feature is automatically enabled. When you disable
voice VLAN, the Port Fast feature is not automatically disabled. For more information, see Chapter 15,
“Configuring Voice VLAN.”
You can enable this feature if your switch is running PVST+, rapid PVST+, or MSTP.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable Port Fast. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
configuration mode.
Step 3 spanning-tree portfast [trunk] Enable Port Fast on an access port connected to a single
workstation or server. By specifying the trunk keyword, you can
enable Port Fast on a trunk port.
Note To enable Port Fast on trunk ports, you must use the
spanning-tree portfast trunk interface configuration
command. The spanning-tree portfast command will
not work on trunk ports.
Caution Make sure that there are no loops in the network

between the trunk port and the workstation or server
before you enable Port Fast on a trunk port.
By default, Port Fast is disabled on all interfaces.

portfast

19-10 OL-8553-06
Note You can use the spanning-tree portfast default global configuration command to globally enable the
Port Fast feature on all nontrunking ports.
To disable the Port Fast feature, use the spanning-tree portfast disable interface configuration
command.
Enabling BPDU Guard

When you globally enable BPDU guard on ports that are Port Fast-enabled (the ports are in a Port
Fast-operational state), spanning tree continues to run on the ports. They remain up unless they receive
a BPDU.
In a valid configuration, Port Fast-enabled ports do not receive BPDUs. Receiving a BPDU on a Port
Fast-enabled port means an invalid configuration, such as the connection of an unauthorized device, and
the BPDU guard feature puts the port in the error-disabled state. When this happens, the switch shuts
down the entire port on which the violation occurred.
To prevent the port from shutting down, you can use the errdisable detect cause bpduguard shutdown
vlan global configuration command to shut down just the offending VLAN on the port where the
violation occurred.
The BPDU guard feature provides a secure response to invalid configurations because you must
manually put the port back in service. Use the BPDU guard feature in a service-provider network to
prevent an access port from participating in the spanning tree.
Caution Configure Port Fast only on ports that connect to end stations; otherwise, an accidental topology loop
could cause a data packet loop and disrupt switch and network operation.
You also can use the spanning-tree bpduguard enable interface configuration command to enable
BPDU guard on any port without also enabling the Port Fast feature. When the port receives a BPDU, it
is put it in the error-disabled state.
You can enable the BPDU guard feature if your switch is running PVST+, rapid PVST+, or MSTP.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to globally enable the BPDU guard feature. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree portfast bpduguard default Globally enable BPDU guard.
By default, BPDU guard is disabled.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the interface connected to an end station, and enter
Step 4 spanning-tree portfast Enable the Port Fast feature.

OL-8553-06 19-11
To disable BPDU guard, use the no spanning-tree portfast bpduguard default global configuration
command.
You can override the setting of the no spanning-tree portfast bpduguard default global configuration
command by using the spanning-tree bpduguard enable interface configuration command.
Enabling BPDU Filtering

When you globally enable BPDU filtering on Port Fast-enabled interfaces, it prevents interfaces that are
in a Port Fast-operational state from sending or receiving BPDUs. The interfaces still send a few BPDUs
at link-up before the switch begins to filter outbound BPDUs. You should globally enable BPDU
filtering on a switch so that hosts connected to these interfaces do not receive BPDUs. If a BPDU is
received on a Port Fast-enabled interface, the interface loses its Port Fast-operational status, and BPDU
filtering is disabled.
Caution Configure Port Fast only on interfaces that connect to end stations; otherwise, an accidental topology
loop could cause a data packet loop and disrupt switch and network operation.
You can also use the spanning-tree bpdufilter enable interface configuration command to enable
BPDU filtering on any interface without also enabling the Port Fast feature. This command prevents the
interface from sending or receiving BPDUs.
Caution Enabling BPDU filtering on an interface is the same as disabling spanning tree on it and can result in
spanning-tree loops.
You can enable the BPDU filtering feature if your switch is running PVST+, rapid PVST+, or MSTP.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to globally enable the BPDU filtering feature.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default Globally enable BPDU filtering.
By default, BPDU filtering is disabled.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the interface connected to an end station, and enter
Step 4 spanning-tree portfast Enable the Port Fast feature.
To disable BPDU filtering, use the no spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default global configuration
command.
You can override the setting of the no spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default global configuration
command by using the spanning-tree bpdufilter enable interface configuration command.

19-12 OL-8553-06
Enabling UplinkFast for Use with Redundant Links

UplinkFast cannot be enabled on VLANs that have been configured with a switch priority. To enable
UplinkFast on a VLAN with switch priority configured, first restore the switch priority on the VLAN to
the default value by using the no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id priority global configuration command.
Note When you enable UplinkFast, it affects all VLANs on the switch. You cannot configure UplinkFast on
an individual VLAN.
You can configure the UplinkFast feature for rapid PVST+ or for the MSTP, but the feature remains
disabled (inactive) until you change the spanning-tree mode to PVST+.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable UplinkFast. This procedure is
optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree uplinkfast [max-update-rate Enable UplinkFast.
pkts-per-second]
(Optional) For pkts-per-second, the range is 0 to 32000 packets per
second; the default is 150.
If you set the rate to 0, station-learning frames are not generated,
and the spanning-tree topology converges more slowly after a loss
of connectivity.
When UplinkFast is enabled, the switch priority of all VLANs is set to 49152. If you change the path
cost to a value less than 3000 and you enable UplinkFast or UplinkFast is already enabled, the path cost
of all interfaces and VLAN trunks is increased by 3000 (if you change the path cost to 3000 or above,
the path cost is not altered). The changes to the switch priority and the path cost reduce the chance that
a switch will become the root switch.
When UplinkFast is disabled, the switch priorities of all VLANs and path costs of all interfaces are set
to default values if you did not modify them from their defaults.
To return the update packet rate to the default setting, use the no spanning-tree uplinkfast
max-update-rate global configuration command. To disable UplinkFast, use the no spanning-tree
uplinkfast command.
Enabling BackboneFast
You can enable BackboneFast to detect indirect link failures and to start the spanning-tree
reconfiguration sooner.
Note If you use BackboneFast, you must enable it on all switches in the network. BackboneFast is not
supported on Token Ring VLANs. This feature is supported for use with third-party switches.

OL-8553-06 19-13
You can configure the BackboneFast feature for rapid PVST+ or for the MSTP, but the feature remains
disabled (inactive) until you change the spanning-tree mode to PVST+.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable BackboneFast. This procedure is
optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree backbonefast Enable BackboneFast.
To disable the BackboneFast feature, use the no spanning-tree backbonefast global configuration
command.
Enabling EtherChannel Guard

You can enable EtherChannel guard to detect an EtherChannel misconfiguration if your switch is
running PVST+, rapid PVST+, or MSTP.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable EtherChannel guard. This procedure
is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 spanning-tree etherchannel guard Enable EtherChannel guard.
misconfig
To disable the EtherChannel guard feature, use the no spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig
You can use the show interfaces status err-disabled privileged EXEC command to show which switch
ports are disabled because of an EtherChannel misconfiguration. On the remote device, you can enter
the show etherchannel summary privileged EXEC command to verify the EtherChannel configuration.
After the configuration is corrected, enter the shutdown and no shutdown interface configuration
commands on the port-channel interfaces that were misconfigured.

19-14 OL-8553-06
Enabling Root Guard

Root guard enabled on an interface applies to all the VLANs to which the interface belongs. Do not
enable the root guard on interfaces to be used by the UplinkFast feature. With UplinkFast, the backup
interfaces (in the blocked state) replace the root port in the case of a failure. However, if root guard is
also enabled, all the backup interfaces used by the UplinkFast feature are placed in the root-inconsistent
state (blocked) and are prevented from reaching the forwarding state.
Note You cannot enable both root guard and loop guard at the same time.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable root guard on an interface. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify an interface to configure, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 spanning-tree guard root Enable root guard on the interface.
By default, root guard is disabled on all interfaces.
To disable root guard, use the no spanning-tree guard interface configuration command.
Enabling Loop Guard

You can use loop guard to prevent alternate or root ports from becoming designated ports because of a
failure that leads to a unidirectional link. This feature is most effective when it is configured on the entire
switched network. Loop guard operates only on interfaces that are considered point-to-point by the
spanning tree.
Note You cannot enable both loop guard and root guard at the same time.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable loop guard. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 1 show spanning-tree active Verify which interfaces are alternate or root ports.
or
show spanning-tree mst

OL-8553-06 19-15
Command Purpose
Step 3 spanning-tree loopguard default Enable loop guard.
By default, loop guard is disabled.
To globally disable loop guard, use the no spanning-tree loopguard default global configuration
command. You can override the setting of the no spanning-tree loopguard default global configuration
command by using the spanning-tree guard loop interface configuration command.

Table 19-2 Commands for Displaying the Spanning-Tree Status
Command Purpose
show spanning-tree active Displays spanning-tree information on active interfaces only.
show spanning-tree detail Displays a detailed summary of interface information.
show spanning-tree interface interface-id Displays spanning-tree information for the specified interface.
show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id Displays MST information for the specified interface.
show spanning-tree summary [totals] Displays a summary of interface states or displays the total lines of the
spanning-tree state section.
You can clear spanning-tree counters by using the clear spanning-tree [interface interface-id]

19-16 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 20
Configuring Flex Links and the MAC
Address-Table Move Update Feature
This chapter describes how to configure Flex Links, a pair of interfaces on the Catalyst 3560 switch that
provide a mutual backup. It also describes how to configure the MAC address-table move update feature,
also referred to as the Flex Links bidirectional fast convergence feature.

• Understanding Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move Update, page 20-1
• Configuring Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move Update, page 20-7
• Monitoring Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move Update, page 20-14
Understanding Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table

Move Update
This section contains this information:
• Flex Links, page 20-1
• VLAN Flex Link Load Balancing and Support, page 20-2
• Flex Link Multicast Fast Convergence, page 20-3
• MAC Address-Table Move Update, page 20-6
Flex Links
Flex Links are a pair of a Layer 2 interfaces (switch ports or port channels) where one interface is
configured to act as a backup to the other. The feature provides an alternative solution to the Spanning
Tree Protocol (STP). Users can disable STP and still retain basic link redundancy. Flex Links are
typically configured in service provider or enterprise networks where customers do not want to run STP
on the switch. If the switch is running STP, Flex Links is not necessary because STP already provides
link-level redundancy or backup.

OL-8553-06 20-1
Chapter 20 Configuring Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move Update Feature
Understanding Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move Update
You configure Flex Links on one Layer 2 interface (the active link) by assigning another Layer 2
interface as the Flex Link or backup link. When one of the links is up and forwarding traffic, the other
link is in standby mode, ready to begin forwarding traffic if the other link shuts down. At any given time,
only one of the interfaces is in the linkup state and forwarding traffic. If the primary link shuts down,
the standby link starts forwarding traffic. When the active link comes back up, it goes into standby mode
and does not forward traffic. STP is disabled on Flex Link interfaces.
In Figure 20-1, ports 1 and 2 on switch A are connected to uplink switches B and C. Because they are
configured as Flex Links, only one of the interfaces is forwarding traffic; the other is in standby mode.
If port 1 is the active link, it begins forwarding traffic between port 1 and switch B; the link between
port 2 (the backup link) and switch C is not forwarding traffic. If port 1 goes down, port 2 comes up and
starts forwarding traffic to switch C. When port 1 comes back up, it goes into standby mode and does
not forward traffic; port 2 continues forwarding traffic.
You can also choose to configure a preemption mechanism, specifying the preferred port for forwarding
traffic. For example, in the example in Figure 20-1, you can configure the Flex Links pair with
preemption mode. In the scenario shown, when port 1 comes back up and has more bandwidth than port
2, port 1 begins forwarding traffic after 60 seconds. Port 2 becomes the standby port. You do this by
entering the interface configuration switchport backup interface preemption mode bandwidth and
switchport backup interface preemption delay commands.
Figure 20-1 Flex Links Configuration Example
Uplink Uplink
switch B switch C
Port 1 Port 2
Switch A 116082
If a primary (forwarding) link goes down, a trap notifies the network management stations. If the standby
link goes down, a trap notifies the users.
Flex Links are supported only on Layer 2 ports and port channels, not on VLANs or on Layer 3 ports.
VLAN Flex Link Load Balancing and Support

VLAN Flex Link load-balancing allows you to configure a Flex Link pair so that both ports
simultaneously forward the traffic for some mutually exclusive VLANs. For example, if Flex Link ports
are configured for 1-100 VLANs, the traffic of the first 50 VLANs can be forwarded on one port and the
rest on the other port. If one of the ports fail, the other active port forwards all the traffic. When the failed
port comes back up, it resumes forwarding traffic in the preferred VLANs. This way, apart from
providing the redundancy, this Flex Link pair can be used for load balancing. Also, Flex Link VLAN
load-balancing does not impose any restrictions on uplink switches.

20-2 OL-8553-06
Figure 20-2 VLAN Flex Links Load Balancing Configuration Example
Uplink Uplink
switch B switch C
Forwarding Forwarding
(1-50) (51-100)
gi2/0/6 gi2/0/8
201398
Switch A
Flex Link Multicast Fast Convergence

Flex Link Multicast Fast Convergence reduces the multicast traffic convergence time after a Flex Link
failure. This is implemented by a combination of these solutions:
• Learning the Other Flex Link Port as the mrouter Port, page 20-3
• Generating IGMP Reports, page 20-3
• Leaking IGMP Reports, page 20-4
• Configuration Examples, page 20-4
Learning the Other Flex Link Port as the mrouter Port

In a typical multicast network, there is a querier for each VLAN. A switch deployed at the edge of a
network has one of its Flex Link ports receiving queries. Flex Link ports are also always forwarding at
any given time.
A port that receives queries is added as an mrouter port on the switch. An mrouter port is part of all the
multicast groups learned by the switch. After a changeover, queries are received by the other Flex Link
port. The other Flex Link port is then learned as the mrouter port. After changeover, multicast traffic
then flows through the other Flex Link port. To achieve faster convergence of traffic, both Flex Link
ports are learned as mrouter ports whenever either Flex Link port is learned as the mrouter port. Both
Flex Link ports are always part of multicast groups.
Though both Flex Link ports are part of the groups in normal operation mode, all traffic on the backup
port is blocked. So the normal multicast data flow is not affected by the addition of the backup port as
an mrouter port. When the changeover happens, the backup port is unblocked, allowing the traffic to
flow. In this case, the upstream multicast data flows as soon as the backup port is unblocked.
Generating IGMP Reports

When the backup link comes up after the changeover, the upstream new distribution switch does not start
forwarding multicast data, because the port on the upstream router, which is connected to the blocked
Flex Link port, is not part of any multicast group. The reports for the multicast groups were not
forwarded by the downstream switch because the backup link is blocked. The data does not flow on this
port, until it learns the multicast groups, which occurs only after it receives reports.
The reports are sent by hosts when a general query is received, and a general query is sent within 60
seconds in normal scenarios. When the backup link starts forwarding, to achieve faster convergence of
multicast data, the downstream switch immediately sends proxy reports for all the learned groups on this
port without waiting for a general query.

OL-8553-06 20-3
Leaking IGMP Reports

To achieve multicast traffic convergence with minimal loss, a redundant data path must be set up before
the Flex Link active link goes down. This can be achieved by leaking only IGMP report packets on the
Flex Link backup link. These leaked IGMP report messages are processed by upstream distribution
routers, so multicast data traffic gets forwarded to the backup interface. Because all incoming traffic on
the backup interface is dropped at the ingress of the access switch, no duplicate multicast traffic is
received by the host. When the Flex Link active link fails, the access switch starts accepting traffic from
the backup link immediately. The only disadvantage of this scheme is that it consumes bandwidth on the
link between the distribution switches and on the backup link between the distribution and access
switches. This feature is disabled by default and can be configured by using the switchport backup
interface interface-id multicast fast-convergence command.
When this feature has been enabled at changeover, the switch does not generate the proxy reports on the
backup port, which became the forwarding port.
Configuration Examples
These are configuration examples for learning the other Flex Link port as the mrouter port when Flex
Link is configured on Gigabit Ethernet0/11 and Gigabit Ethernet0/12, with output for the
show interfaces switchport backup command:
Switch(config)# interface gigabitehernet0/11
Switch(config-if)# switchport backup interface gigabitehernet0/12
Switch(config)# interface gigabitehernet0/12
Switch# show interfaces switchport backup detail
Switch Backup Interface Pairs:
Active Interface Backup Interface State
GigabitEthernet0/11 GigabitEthernet0/12 Active Up/Backup Standby
Preemption Mode : off
Multicast Fast Convergence : Off
Bandwidth : 100000 Kbit (Gi0/11), 100000 Kbit (Gi0/12)
Mac Address Move Update Vlan : auto
This output shows a querier for VLANs 1 and 401, with their queries reaching the switch through Gigabit
Ethernet0/11:
Switch# show ip igmp snooping querier
Vlan IP Address IGMP Version Port
-------------------------------------------------------------
1 1.1.1.1 v2 Gi0/11
401 41.41.41.1 v2 Gi0/11
Here is output for the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command for VLANs 1 and 401:
Switch# show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Vlan ports
---- -----
1 Gi0/11(dynamic), Gi0/12(dynamic)

20-4 OL-8553-06
Similarly, both Flex Link ports are part of learned groups. In this example, Gigabit Ethernet0/11 is a
receiver/host in VLAN 1, which is interested in two multicast groups:
Switch# show ip igmp snooping groups
Vlan Group Type Version Port List
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 228.1.5.1 igmp v2 Gi0/11, Gi0/12, Gi0/11
1 228.1.5.2 igmp v2 Gi0/11, Gi0/12, Gi0/11
When a host responds to the general query, the switch forwards this report on all the mrouter ports. In
this example, when a host sends a report for the group 228.1.5.1, it is forwarded only on Gigabit
Ethernet0/11, because the backup port Gigabit Ethernet0/12 is blocked. When the active link, Gigabit
Ethernet0/11, goes down, the backup port, Gigabit Ethernet0/12, begins forwarding.
As soon as this port starts forwarding, the switch sends proxy reports for the groups 228.1.5.1 and
228.1.5.2 on behalf of the host. The upstream router learns the groups and starts forwarding multicast
data. This is the default behavior of Flex Link. This behavior changes when the user configures fast
convergence using the switchport backup interface gigabitEthernet 0/12 multicast fast-convergence
command. This example shows turning on this feature:
Switch(config-if)# switchport backup interface gigabitethernet 0/12 multicast
fast-convergence
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Multicast Fast Convergence : On
This output shows a querier for VLAN 1 and 401 with their queries reaching the switch through Gigabit
Ethernet0/11:
Switch# show ip igmp snooping querier
Vlan IP Address IGMP Version Port
-------------------------------------------------------------
1 1.1.1.1 v2 Gi0/11
401 41.41.41.1 v2 Gi0/11
This is output for the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command for VLAN 1 and 401:
Switch# show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Vlan ports
---- -----
Similarly, both the Flex Link ports are a part of the learned groups. In this example, Gigabit Ethernet0/11
is a receiver/host in VLAN 1, which is interested in two multicast groups:
Switch# show ip igmp snooping groups
Vlan Group Type Version Port List
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 228.1.5.1 igmp v2 Gi0/11, Gi0/12, Gi0/11
1 228.1.5.2 igmp v2 Gi0/11, Gi0/12, Gi0/11

OL-8553-06 20-5
Whenever a host responds to the general query, the switch forwards this report on all the mrouter ports.
When you turn on this feature through the command-line port, and when a report is forwarded by the
switch on GigabitEthernet0/11, it is also leaked to the backup port GigabitEthernet0/12. The upstream
router learns the groups and starts forwarding multicast data, which is dropped at the ingress because
GigabitEthernet0/12 is blocked. When the active link, GigabitEthernet0/11, goes down, the backup port,
GigabitEthernet0/12, begins forwarding. You do not need to send any proxy reports because the
multicast data is already being forwarded by the upstream router. By leaking reports to the backup port,
a redundant multicast path has been set up, and the time taken for the multicast traffic convergence is
minimal.
MAC Address-Table Move Update

The MAC address-table move update feature allows the switch to provide rapid bidirectional
convergence when a primary (forwarding) link goes down and the standby link begins forwarding
traffic.
In Figure 20-3, switch A is an access switch, and ports 1 and 2 on switch A are connected to uplink
switches B and D through a Flex Link pair. Port 1 is forwarding traffic, and port 2 is in the backup state.
Traffic from the PC to the server is forwarded from port 1 to port 3. The MAC address of the PC has
been learned on port 3 of switch C. Traffic from the server to the PC is forwarded from port 3 to port 1.
If the MAC address-table move update feature is not configured and port 1 goes down, port 2 starts
forwarding traffic. However, for a short time, switch C keeps forwarding traffic from the server to the
PC through port 3, and the PC does not get the traffic because port 1 is down. If switch C removes the
MAC address of the PC on port 3 and relearns it on port 4, traffic can then be forwarded from the server
to the PC through port 2.
If the MAC address-table move update feature is configured and enabled on the switches in Figure 20-3
and port 1 goes down, port 2 starts forwarding traffic from the PC to the server. The switch sends a MAC
address-table move update packet from port 2. Switch C gets this packet on port 4 and immediately
learns the MAC address of the PC on port 4, which reduces the reconvergence time.
You can configure the access switch, switch A, to send MAC address-table move update messages. You
can also configure the uplink switches B, C, and D to get and process the MAC address-table move
update messages. When switch C gets a MAC address-table move update message from switch A,
switch C learns the MAC address of the PC on port 4. Switch C updates the MAC address table,
including the forwarding table entry for the PC.
Switch A does not need to wait for the MAC address-table update. The switch detects a failure on port 1
and immediately starts forwarding server traffic from port 2, the new forwarding port. This change
occurs in 100 milliseconds (ms). The PC is directly connected to switch A, and the connection status
does not change. Switch A does not need to update the PC entry in the MAC address table.

20-6 OL-8553-06
Configuring Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move Update
Figure 20-3 MAC Address-Table Move Update Example
Server
Switch C
Port 3 Port 4
Switch B Switch D
Port 1 Port 2
Switch A
141223
PC
Configuring Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move

Update
• Default Configuration, page 20-8
• Configuring Flex Links, page 20-9
• Configuring VLAN Load Balancing on Flex Links, page 20-11
• Configuring the MAC Address-Table Move Update Feature, page 20-12

OL-8553-06 20-7
Default Configuration
The Flex Links are not configured, and there are no backup interfaces defined.
The preemption mode is off.
The preemption delay is 35 seconds.
The MAC address-table move update feature is not configured on the switch.
Follow these guidelines to configure Flex Links:
• You can configure up to 16 backup links.
• You can configure only one Flex Link backup link for any active link, and it must be a different
interface from the active interface.
• An interface can belong to only one Flex Link pair. An interface can be a backup link for only one
active link. An active link cannot belong to another Flex Link pair.
• Neither of the links can be a port that belongs to an EtherChannel. However, you can configure two
port channels (EtherChannel logical interfaces) as Flex Links, and you can configure a port channel
and a physical interface as Flex Links, with either the port channel or the physical interface as the
active link.
• A backup link does not have to be the same type (Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, or port channel)
as the active link. However, you should configure both Flex Links with similar characteristics so that
there are no loops or changes in behavior if the standby link begins to forward traffic.
• STP is disabled on Flex Link ports. A Flex Link port does not participate in STP, even if the VLANs
present on the port are configured for STP. When STP is not enabled, be sure that there are no loops
in the configured topology. Once the Flex Link configurations are removed, STP is re-enabled on
the ports.
Follow these guidelines to configure VLAN load balancing on the Flex Links feature:
• For Flex Link VLAN load balancing, you must choose the preferred VLANs on the backup interface.
• You cannot configure a preemption mechanism and VLAN load balancing for the same Flex Links
pair.
Follow these guidelines to configure the MAC address-table move update feature:
• You can enable and configure this feature on the access switch to send the MAC address-table move
updates.
• You can enable and configure this feature on the uplink switches to receive the MAC address-table
move updates.

20-8 OL-8553-06
Configuring Flex Links

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a pair of Flex Links:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface, and enter interface configuration
mode. The interface can be a physical Layer 2 interface or
a port channel (logical interface). The port-channel range
is 1 to 48.
Step 3 switchport backup interface interface-id Configure a physical Layer 2 interface (or port channel)
as part of a Flex Link pair with the interface. When one
link is forwarding traffic, the other interface is in standby
mode.
Step 5 show interfaces [interface-id] switchport backup Verify the configuration.
configuration file.
To disable a Flex Link backup interface, use the no switchport backup interface interface-id interface
This example shows how to configure an interface with a backup interface and to verify the
configuration:
Switch(conf)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(conf-if)# switchport backup interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(conf-if)# end
Switch# show interfaces switchport backup


------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet0/1 GigabitEthernet0/3 Active Standby/Backup Up
Vlans Preferred on Active Interface: 1-3,5-4094
Vlans Preferred on Backup Interface: 4
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a preemption scheme for a pair of
Flex Links:
Command Purpose
is 1 to 48.

OL-8553-06 20-9
Command Purpose
Step 3 switchport backup interface interface-id Configure a physical Layer 2 interface (or port channel)
as part of a Flex Links pair with the interface. When one
link is forwarding traffic, the other interface is in standby
mode.
Step 4 switchport backup interface interface-id preemption Configure a preemption mechanism and delay for a Flex
mode [forced | bandwidth | off] Link interface pair. You can configure the preemption as:
• Forced—the active interface always preempts the
backup.
• Bandwidth—the interface with the higher bandwidth
always acts as the active interface.
• Off—no preemption happens from active to backup.
Step 5 switchport backup interface interface-id preemption Configure the time delay until a port preempts another
delay delay-time port.
Note Setting a delay time only works with forced and
bandwidth modes.
configuration file.
To remove a preemption scheme, use the no switchport backup interface interface-id preemption
mode interface configuration command. To reset the delay time to the default, use the no switchport
backup interface interface-id preemption delay interface configuration command.
This example shows how to configure the preemption mode as forced for a backup interface pair and to
verify the configuration:
Switch(conf-if)#switchport backup interface gigabitethernet0/2 preemption mode forced
Switch(conf-if)#switchport backup interface gigabitethernet0/2 preemption delay 50
Switch(conf-if)# end

------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interface Pair : Gi0/1, Gi0/2
Preemption Mode : forced
Preemption Delay : 50 seconds

20-10 OL-8553-06
Configuring VLAN Load Balancing on Flex Links

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure VLAN load balancing on Flex
Links:
Command Purpose
is 1 to 48.
Step 3 switchport backup interface interface-id prefer vlan Configure a physical Layer 2 interface (or port channel)
vlan-range as part of a Flex Links pair with the interface, and specify
the VLANs carried on the interface. The VLAN ID range
is 1 to 4094.
configuration file.
To disable the VLAN load balancing feature, use the no switchport backup interface interface-id
prefer vlan vlan-range interface configuration command.
In the following example, VLANs 1 to 50, 60, and 100 to 120 are configured on the switch:
Switch(config)#interface gigabitethernet 0/6
Switch(config-if)#switchport backup interface gigabitethernet 0/8 prefer vlan 60,100-120
When both interfaces are up, Gi0/8 forwards traffic for VLANs 60 and 100 to 120, and Gi0/6 forwards
traffic for VLANs 1 to 50.
Switch#show interfaces switchport backup

------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet0/6 GigabitEthernet0/8 Active Up/Backup Up
Vlans Preferred on Active Interface: 1-50
Vlans Preferred on Backup Interface: 60, 100-120
When a Flex Link interface goes down (LINK_DOWN), VLANs preferred on this interface are moved
to the peer interface of the Flex Link pair. In this example, if interface Gi0/6 goes down, Gi0/8 carries
all VLANs of the Flex Link pair.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet0/6 GigabitEthernet0/8 Active Down/Backup Up


OL-8553-06 20-11
When a Flex Link interface comes up, VLANs preferred on this interface are blocked on the peer
interface and moved to the forwarding state on the interface that has just come up. In this example, if
interface Gi0/6 comes up, VLANs preferred on this interface are blocked on the peer interface Gi0/8 and
forwarded on Gi0/6.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet0/6 GigabitEthernet0/8 Active Up/Backup Up

Switch#show interfaces switchport backup detail


------------------------------------------------------------------------
FastEthernet0/3 FastEthernet0/4 Active Down/Backup Up
Vlans Preferred on Active Interface: 1-2,5-4094

Vlans Preferred on Backup Interface: 3-4
Bandwidth : 10000 Kbit (Fa0/3), 100000 Kbit (Fa0/4)
Configuring the MAC Address-Table Move Update Feature

This section contains this information:
• Configuring a switch to send MAC address-table move updates
• Configuring a switch to get MAC address-table move updates
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure an access switch to send MAC
address-table move updates:
Command Purpose
is 1 to 48.
Step 3 switchport backup interface interface-id Configure a physical Layer 2 interface (or port channel),
as part of a Flex Link pair with the interface. The MAC
address-table move update VLAN is the lowest VLAN ID
or on the interface.
switchport backup interface interface-id mmu Configure a physical Layer 2 interface (or port channel)
primary vlan vlan-id and specify the VLAN ID on the interface, which is used
for sending the MAC address-table move update.
When one link is forwarding traffic, the other interface is
in standby mode.

20-12 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 5 mac address-table move update transmit Enable the access switch to send MAC address-table
move updates to other switches in the network if the
primary link goes down and the switch starts forwarding
traffic through the standby link.
Step 7 show mac address-table move update Verify the configuration.
configuration file.
To disable the MAC address-table move update feature, use the no mac address-table move update
transmit interface configuration command. To display the MAC address-table move update information,
use the show mac address-table move update privileged EXEC command.
This example shows how to configure an access switch to send MAC address-table move update
messages:
Switch(conf-if)# switchport backup interface gigabitethernet0/2 mmu primary vlan 2
Switch(conf-if)# exit
Switch(conf)# mac address-table move update transmit
Switch(conf)# end
This example shows how to verify the configuration:

Switch# show mac-address-table move update
Switch-ID : 010b.4630.1780
Dst mac-address : 0180.c200.0010
Vlans/Macs supported : 1023/8320
Default/Current settings: Rcv Off/On, Xmt Off/On
Max packets per min : Rcv 40, Xmt 60
Rcv packet count : 5
Rcv conforming packet count : 5
Rcv invalid packet count : 0
Rcv packet count this min : 0
Rcv threshold exceed count : 0
Rcv last sequence# this min : 0
Rcv last interface : Po2
Rcv last src-mac-address : 000b.462d.c502
Rcv last switch-ID : 0403.fd6a.8700
Xmt packet count : 0
Xmt packet count this min : 0
Xmt threshold exceed count : 0
Xmt pak buf unavail cnt : 0
Xmt last interface : None
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a switch to get and process MAC
address-table move update messages:
Command Purpose
Step 2 mac address-table move update receive Enable the switch to get and process the MAC
address-table move updates.

OL-8553-06 20-13
Monitoring Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table Move Update
Command Purpose
Step 4 show mac address-table move update Verify the configuration.
configuration file.
To disable the MAC address-table move update feature, use the no mac address-table move update
receive configuration command. To display the MAC address-table move update information, use the
show mac address-table move update privileged EXEC command.
This example shows how to configure a switch to get and process MAC address-table move update
messages:
Switch(conf)# mac address-table move update receive
Switch(conf)# end
Monitoring Flex Links and the MAC Address-Table

Move Update
Table 20-1 shows the privileged EXEC commands for monitoring the Flex Links configuration and the
MAC address-table move update information.
Table 20-1 Flex Links and MAC Address-Table Move Update Monitoring Commands
Command Purpose
show interfaces [interface-id] switchport Displays the Flex Link backup interface configured for an interface or all the
backup configured Flex Links and the state of each active and backup interface (up
or standby mode). When VLAN load balancing is enabled, the output
displays the preferred VLANS on Active and Backup interfaces.
show mac address-table move update Displays the MAC address-table move update information on the switch.

20-14 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 21
Configuring DHCP Features and IP Source Guard
This chapter describes how to configure DHCP snooping and option-82 data insertion, and the DHCP
server port-based address allocation features on the Catalyst 3560 switch. It also describes how to
configure the IP source guard feature.
reference for this release, and see the “DHCP Commands” section in the Cisco IOS IP Command
Reference, Volume 1 of 3: Addressing and Services, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under

• Understanding DHCP Snooping, page 21-1
• Configuring DHCP Snooping, page 21-8
• Displaying DHCP Snooping Information, page 21-15
• Understanding IP Source Guard, page 21-15
• Configuring IP Source Guard, page 21-16
• Displaying IP Source Guard Information, page 21-19
• Understanding DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation, page 21-19
• Configuring DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation, page 21-19
• Displaying DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation, page 21-22
Understanding DHCP Snooping

DHCP is widely used in LAN environments to dynamically assign host IP addresses from a centralized
server, which significantly reduces the overhead of administration of IP addresses. DHCP also helps
conserve the limited IP address space because IP addresses no longer need to be permanently assigned
to hosts; only those hosts that are connected to the network consume IP addresses.
• DHCP Server, page 21-2
• DHCP Relay Agent, page 21-2
• DHCP Snooping, page 21-2
• Option-82 Data Insertion, page 21-3

OL-8553-06 21-1
Chapter 21 Configuring DHCP Features and IP Source Guard
• Cisco IOS DHCP Server Database, page 21-6

• DHCP Snooping Binding Database, page 21-6
For information about the DHCP client, see the “Configuring DHCP” section of the “IP Addressing and
Services” section of the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under
Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Configuration Guides.
DHCP Server
The DHCP server assigns IP addresses from specified address pools on a switch or router to DHCP
clients and manages them. If the DHCP server cannot give the DHCP client the requested configuration
parameters from its database, it forwards the request to one or more secondary DHCP servers defined
by the network administrator.
DHCP Relay Agent

A DHCP relay agent is a Layer 3 device that forwards DHCP packets between clients and servers. Relay
agents forward requests and replies between clients and servers when they are not on the same physical
subnet. Relay agent forwarding is different from the normal Layer 2 forwarding, in which IP datagrams
are switched transparently between networks. Relay agents receive DHCP messages and generate new
DHCP messages to send on output interfaces.
DHCP Snooping
DHCP snooping is a DHCP security feature that provides network security by filtering untrusted DHCP
messages and by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding database, also referred to as a
DHCP snooping binding table.
DHCP snooping acts like a firewall between untrusted hosts and DHCP servers. You use DHCP
snooping to differentiate between untrusted interfaces connected to the end user and trusted interfaces
connected to the DHCP server or another switch.
Note For DHCP snooping to function properly, all DHCP servers must be connected to the switch through
trusted interfaces.
An untrusted DHCP message is a message that is received from outside the network or firewall. When
you use DHCP snooping in a service-provider environment, an untrusted message is sent from a device
that is not in the service-provider network, such as a customer’s switch. Messages from unknown
devices are untrusted because they can be sources of traffic attacks.
The DHCP snooping binding database has the MAC address, the IP address, the lease time, the binding
type, the VLAN number, and the interface information that corresponds to the local untrusted interfaces
of a switch. It does not have information regarding hosts interconnected with a trusted interface.
In a service-provider network, a trusted interface is connected to a port on a device in the same network.
An untrusted interface is connected to an untrusted interface in the network or to an interface on a device
that is not in the network.

21-2 OL-8553-06
When a switch receives a packet on an untrusted interface and the interface belongs to a VLAN in which
DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch compares the source MAC address and the DHCP client hardware
address. If the addresses match (the default), the switch forwards the packet. If the addresses do not
match, the switch drops the packet.
The switch drops a DHCP packet when one of these situations occurs:
• A packet from a DHCP server, such as a DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK, or
DHCPLEASEQUERY packet, is received from outside the network or firewall.
• A packet is received on an untrusted interface, and the source MAC address and the DHCP client
hardware address do not match.
• The switch receives a DHCPRELEASE or DHCPDECLINE broadcast message that has a MAC
address in the DHCP snooping binding database, but the interface information in the binding
database does not match the interface on which the message was received.
• A DHCP relay agent forwards a DHCP packet that includes a relay-agent IP address that is not
0.0.0.0, or the relay agent forwards a packet that includes option-82 information to an untrusted port.
If the switch is an aggregation switch supporting DHCP snooping and is connected to an edge switch
that is inserting DHCP option-82 information, the switch drops packets with option-82 information when
packets are received on an untrusted interface. If DHCP snooping is enabled and packets are received
on a trusted port, the aggregation switch does not learn the DHCP snooping bindings for connected
devices and cannot build a complete DHCP snooping binding database.
When option-82 information is inserted by an edge switch in software releases earlier than Cisco IOS
Release 12.2(25)SEA, you cannot configure DHCP snooping on an aggregation switch because the
DHCP snooping bindings database is not properly populated. You also cannot configure IP source guard
and dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) inspection on the switch unless you use static bindings
or ARP access control lists (ACLs).
When an aggregation switch can be connected to an edge switch through an untrusted interface and you
enter the ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted global configuration command, the
aggregation switch accepts packets with option-82 information from the edge switch. The aggregation
switch learns the bindings for hosts connected through an untrusted switch interface. The DHCP security
features, such as dynamic ARP inspection or IP source guard, can still be enabled on the aggregation
switch while the switch receives packets with option-82 information on untrusted input interfaces to
which hosts are connected. The port on the edge switch that connects to the aggregation switch must be
configured as a trusted interface.
Option-82 Data Insertion

In residential, metropolitan Ethernet-access environments, DHCP can centrally manage the IP address
assignments for a large number of subscribers. When the DHCP option-82 feature is enabled on the
switch, a subscriber device is identified by the switch port through which it connects to the network (in
addition to its MAC address). Multiple hosts on the subscriber LAN can be connected to the same port
on the access switch and are uniquely identified.
Note The DHCP option-82 feature is supported only when DHCP snooping is globally enabled and on the
VLANs to which subscriber devices using this feature are assigned.

OL-8553-06 21-3
Figure 21-1 is an example of a metropolitan Ethernet network in which a centralized DHCP server
assigns IP addresses to subscribers connected to the switch at the access layer. Because the DHCP clients
and their associated DHCP server do not reside on the same IP network or subnet, a DHCP relay agent
(the Catalyst switch) is configured with a helper address to enable broadcast forwarding and to transfer
DHCP messages between the clients and the server.
Figure 21-1 DHCP Relay Agent in a Metropolitan Ethernet Network
DHCP
server
Catalyst switch Access layer

(DHCP relay agent)
VLAN 10
Host A Subscribers Host B

(DHCP client) (DHCP client)
98813
When you enable the DHCP snooping information option 82 on the switch, this sequence of
events occurs:
• The host (DHCP client) generates a DHCP request and broadcasts it on the network.
• When the switch receives the DHCP request, it adds the option-82 information in the packet. By
default, the remote-ID suboption is the switch MAC address, and the circuit-ID suboption is the port
identifier, vlan-mod-port, from which the packet is received.
• If the IP address of the relay agent is configured, the switch adds this IP address in the DHCP packet.
• The switch forwards the DHCP request that includes the option-82 field to the DHCP server.
• The DHCP server receives the packet. If the server is option-82-capable, it can use the remote ID,
the circuit ID, or both to assign IP addresses and implement policies, such as restricting the number
of IP addresses that can be assigned to a single remote ID or circuit ID. Then the DHCP server
echoes the option-82 field in the DHCP reply.
• The DHCP server unicasts the reply to the switch if the request was relayed to the server by the
switch. The switch verifies that it originally inserted the option-82 data by inspecting the remote ID
and possibly the circuit ID fields. The switch removes the option-82 field and forwards the packet
to the switch port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request.
In the default suboption configuration, when the described sequence of events occurs, the values in these
fields in Figure 21-2 do not change:
• Circuit-ID suboption fields
– Suboption type
– Length of the suboption type
– Circuit-ID type
– Length of the circuit-ID type

21-4 OL-8553-06
• Remote-ID suboption fields

– Suboption type
– Length of the suboption type
– Remote-ID type
– Length of the remote-ID type
In the port field of the circuit-ID suboption, the port numbers start at 3. For example, on a switch with
24 10/100 ports and small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module slots, port 3 is the Fast Ethernet 0/1 port,
port 4 is the Fast Ethernet 0/2 port, and so forth. Port 27 is the SFP module slot 0/1, and so forth.
Figure 21-2 shows the packet formats for the remote-ID suboption and the circuit-ID suboption when
the default suboption configuration is used. The switch uses the packet formats when you globally enable
DHCP snooping and enter the ip dhcp snooping information option global configuration command.
Figure 21-2 Suboption Packet Formats
Circuit ID Suboption Frame Format

Suboption Circuit
type ID type
Length Length
1 6 0 4 VLAN Module Port
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte
Remote ID Suboption Frame Format

Suboption Remote
type ID type
Length Length
2 8 0 6 MAC address
116300
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 6 bytes
Figure 21-3 shows the packet formats for user-configured remote-ID and circuit-ID suboptions The
switch uses these packet formats when DHCP snooping is globally enabled and when the ip dhcp
snooping information option format remote-id global configuration command and the ip dhcp
snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id string interface configuration command are
entered.
The values for these fields in the packets change from the default values when you configure the
remote-ID and circuit-ID suboptions:
• Circuit-ID suboption fields
– The circuit-ID type is 1.
– The length values are variable, depending on the length of the string that you configure.

OL-8553-06 21-5
• Remote-ID suboption fields

– The remote-ID type is 1.
– The length values are variable, depending on the length of the string that you configure.
Figure 21-3 User-Configured Suboption Packet Formats
Circuit ID Suboption Frame Format (for user-configured string):

Suboption Circuit
type ID type
Length Length
1 N+2 1 N ASCII Circuit ID string
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte N bytes (N = 3-63)
Remote ID Suboption Frame Format (for user-configured string):

Suboption Remote
type ID type
Length Length
145774
2 N+2 1 N ASCII Remote ID string or hostname
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte N bytes (N = 1-63)
Cisco IOS DHCP Server Database

During the DHCP-based autoconfiguration process, the designated DHCP server uses the Cisco IOS
DHCP server database. It has IP addresses, address bindings, and configuration parameters, such as the
boot file.
An address binding is a mapping between an IP address and a MAC address of a host in the Cisco IOS
DHCP server database. You can manually assign the client IP address, or the DHCP server can allocate
an IP address from a DHCP address pool. For more information about manual and automatic address
bindings, see the “Configuring DHCP” chapter of the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide,
Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline
> Configuration Guides.
DHCP Snooping Binding Database

When DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch uses the DHCP snooping binding database to store
information about untrusted interfaces. The database can have up to 8192 bindings.
Each database entry (binding) has an IP address, an associated MAC address, the lease time (in
hexadecimal format), the interface to which the binding applies, and the VLAN to which the interface
belongs. The database agent stores the bindings in a file at a configured location. At the end of each entry
is a checksum that accounts for all the bytes from the start of the file through all the bytes associated
with the entry. Each entry is 72 bytes, followed by a space and then the checksum value.

21-6 OL-8553-06
To keep the bindings when the switch reloads, you must use the DHCP snooping database agent. If the
agent is disabled, dynamic ARP inspection or IP source guard is enabled, and the DHCP snooping
binding database has dynamic bindings, the switch loses its connectivity. If the agent is disabled and
only DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch does not lose its connectivity, but DHCP snooping might
not prevent DHCP spoofing attacks.
When reloading, the switch reads the binding file to build the DHCP snooping binding database. The
switch updates the file when the database changes.
When a switch learns of new bindings or when it loses bindings, the switch immediately updates the
entries in the database. The switch also updates the entries in the binding file. The frequency at which
the file is updated is based on a configurable delay, and the updates are batched. If the file is not updated
in a specified time (set by the write-delay and abort-timeout values), the update stops.
This is the format of the file with bindings:
<initial-checksum>
TYPE DHCP-SNOOPING
VERSION 1
BEGIN
<entry-1> <checksum-1>
<entry-2> <checksum-1-2>
...
...
<entry-n> <checksum-1-2-..-n>
END
Each entry in the file is tagged with a checksum value that the switch uses to verify the entries when it
reads the file. The initial-checksum entry on the first line distinguishes entries associated with the latest
file update from entries associated with a previous file update.
This is an example of a binding file:
2bb4c2a1
TYPE DHCP-SNOOPING
VERSION 1
BEGIN
192.1.168.1 3 0003.47d8.c91f 2BB6488E interface-id 21ae5fbb
192.1.168.3 3 0003.44d6.c52f 2BB648EB interface-id 1bdb223f
192.1.168.2 3 0003.47d9.c8f1 2BB648AB interface-id 584a38f0
END
When the switch starts and the calculated checksum value equals the stored checksum value, the switch
reads entries from the binding file and adds the bindings to its DHCP snooping binding database. The
switch ignores an entry when one of these situations occurs:
• The switch reads the entry and the calculated checksum value does not equal the stored checksum
value. The entry and the ones following it are ignored.
• An entry has an expired lease time (the switch might not remove a binding entry when the lease time
expires).
• The interface in the entry no longer exists on the system.
• The interface is a routed interface or a DHCP snooping-trusted interface.

OL-8553-06 21-7
Configuring DHCP Snooping

• Default DHCP Snooping Configuration, page 21-8
• DHCP Snooping Configuration Guidelines, page 21-9
• Configuring the DHCP Server, page 21-10
• Configuring the DHCP Relay Agent, page 21-10
• Specifying the Packet Forwarding Address, page 21-10
• Enabling DHCP Snooping and Option 82, page 21-12
• Enabling DHCP Snooping on Private VLANs, page 21-13
• Enabling the Cisco IOS DHCP Server Database, page 21-14
• Enabling the DHCP Snooping Binding Database Agent, page 21-14
Default DHCP Snooping Configuration

Table 21-1 shows the default DHCP snooping configuration.
Table 21-1 Default DHCP Snooping Configuration

DHCP server Enabled in Cisco IOS software, requires configuration1
DHCP relay agent Enabled2
DHCP packet forwarding address None configured
Checking the relay agent information Enabled (invalid messages are dropped)2
DHCP relay agent forwarding policy Replace the existing relay agent information2
DHCP snooping enabled globally Disabled
DHCP snooping information option Enabled
DHCP snooping option to accept packets on Disabled
untrusted input interfaces3
DHCP snooping limit rate None configured
DHCP snooping trust Untrusted
DHCP snooping VLAN Disabled
DHCP snooping MAC address verification Enabled
Cisco IOS DHCP server binding database Enabled in Cisco IOS software, requires configuration.
Note The switch gets network addresses and configuration parameters
only from a device configured as a DHCP server.
DHCP snooping binding database agent Enabled in Cisco IOS software, requires configuration. This feature is
operational only when a destination is configured.
1. The switch responds to DHCP requests only if it is configured as a DHCP server.
2. The switch relays DHCP packets only if the IP address of the DHCP server is configured on the SVI of the DHCP client.
3. Use this feature when the switch is an aggregation switch that receives packets with option-82 information from an edge switch.

21-8 OL-8553-06
DHCP Snooping Configuration Guidelines

These are the configuration guidelines for DHCP snooping.
• You must globally enable DHCP snooping on the switch.
• DHCP snooping is not active until DHCP snooping is enabled on a VLAN.
• Before globally enabling DHCP snooping on the switch, make sure that the devices acting as the
DHCP server and the DHCP relay agent are configured and enabled.
• When you globally enable DHCP snooping on the switch, these Cisco IOS commands are not
available until snooping is disabled. If you enter these commands, the switch returns an error
message, and the configuration is not applied.
– ip dhcp relay information check global configuration command
– ip dhcp relay information policy global configuration command
– ip dhcp relay information trust-all global configuration command
– ip dhcp relay information trusted interface configuration command
• Before configuring the DHCP snooping information option on your switch, be sure to configure the
device that is acting as the DHCP server. For example, you must specify the IP addresses that the
DHCP server can assign or exclude, or you must configure DHCP options for these devices.
• When configuring a large number of circuit IDs on a switch, consider the impact of lengthy
character strings on the NVRAM or the flash memory. If the circuit-ID configurations, combined
with other data, exceed the capacity of the NVRAM or the flash memory, an error message appears.
• Before configuring the DHCP relay agent on your switch, make sure to configure the device that is
acting as the DHCP server. For example, you must specify the IP addresses that the DHCP server
can assign or exclude, configure DHCP options for devices, or set up the DHCP database agent.
• If the DHCP relay agent is enabled but DHCP snooping is disabled, the DHCP option-82 data
insertion feature is not supported.
• If a switch port is connected to a DHCP server, configure a port as trusted by entering the ip dhcp
snooping trust interface configuration command.
• If a switch port is connected to a DHCP client, configure a port as untrusted by entering the no ip
dhcp snooping trust interface configuration command.
• Follow these guidelines when configuring the DHCP snooping binding database:
– Because both NVRAM and the flash memory have limited storage capacity, we recommend that
you store the binding file on a TFTP server.
– For network-based URLs (such as TFTP and FTP), you must create an empty file at the
configured URL before the switch can write bindings to the binding file at that URL. See the
documentation for your TFTP server to determine whether you must first create an empty file
on the server; some TFTP servers cannot be configured this way.
– To ensure that the lease time in the database is accurate, we recommend that you enable and
configure NTP. For more information, see the “Configuring NTP” section on page 7-3.
– If NTP is configured, the switch writes binding changes to the binding file only when the switch
system clock is synchronized with NTP.
• Do not enter the ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted command on an
aggregation switch to which an untrusted device is connected. If you enter this command, an
untrusted device might spoof the option-82 information.

OL-8553-06 21-9
• You can display DHCP snooping statistics by entering the show ip dhcp snooping statistics user
EXEC command, and you can clear the snooping statistics counters by entering the clear ip dhcp
snooping statistics privileged EXEC command.
Note Do not enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) snooping on RSPAN VLANs. If
DHCP snooping is enabled on RSPAN VLANs, DHCP packets might not reach the RSPAN
destination port.
Configuring the DHCP Server

The switch can act as a DHCP server. By default, the Cisco IOS DHCP server and relay agent features
are enabled on your switch but are not configured. These features are not operational.
For procedures to configure the switch as a DHCP server, see the “Configuring DHCP” section of the
“IP addressing and Services” section of the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide, Release 12.2 from the
Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Configuration
Guides.
Configuring the DHCP Relay Agent

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the DHCP relay agent on the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 service dhcp Enable the DHCP server and relay agent on your switch. By default, this
feature is enabled.
To disable the DHCP server and relay agent, use the no service dhcp global configuration command.
See the “Configuring DHCP” section of the “IP Addressing and Services” section of the Cisco IOS IP
Configuration Guide, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS
Software > 12.2 Mainline > Configuration Guides for these procedures:
• Checking (validating) the relay agent information
• Configuring the relay agent forwarding policy
Specifying the Packet Forwarding Address

If the DHCP server and the DHCP clients are on different networks or subnets, you must configure the
switch with the ip helper-address address interface configuration command. The general rule is to
configure the command on the Layer 3 interface closest to the client. The address used in the ip

21-10 OL-8553-06
helper-address command can be a specific DHCP server IP address, or it can be the network address if
other DHCP servers are on the destination network segment. Using the network address enables any
DHCP server to respond to requests.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to specify the packet forwarding address:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface vlan vlan-id Create a switch virtual interface by entering a VLAN
ID, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 ip address ip-address subnet-mask Configure the interface with an IP address and an IP
subnet.
Step 4 ip helper-address address Specify the DHCP packet forwarding address.
The helper address can be a specific DHCP server
address, or it can be the network address if other
DHCP servers are on the destination network
segment. Using the network address enables other
servers to respond to DHCP requests.
If you have multiple servers, you can configure one
helper address for each server.
Step 6 interface range port-range Configure multiple physical ports that are connected
to the DHCP clients, and enter interface range
configuration mode.
or or
interface interface-id Configure a single physical port that is connected to
the DHCP client, and enter interface configuration
mode.
Step 7 switchport mode access Define the VLAN membership mode for the port.
Step 8 switchport access vlan vlan-id Assign the ports to the same VLAN as configured in
Step 2.
To remove the DHCP packet forwarding address, use the no ip helper-address address interface

OL-8553-06 21-11
Enabling DHCP Snooping and Option 82

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable DHCP snooping on the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP snooping globally.
Step 3 ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range Enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN or range of VLANs. The range is 1
to 4094.
You can enter a single VLAN ID identified by VLAN ID number, a series
of VLAN IDs separated by commas, a range of VLAN IDs separated by
hyphens, or a range of VLAN IDs separated by entering the starting and
ending VLAN IDs separated by a space.
Step 4 ip dhcp snooping information option Enable the switch to insert and remove DHCP relay information
(option-82 field) in forwarded DHCP request messages to the DHCP
server. This is the default setting.
Step 5 ip dhcp snooping information option (Optional) Configure the remote-ID suboption.
format remote-id [string ASCII-string |
You can configure the remote ID to be:
hostname]
• String of up to 63 ASCII characters (no spaces)
• Configured hostname for the switch
Note If the hostname is longer than 63 characters, it is truncated to 63
characters in the remote-ID configuration.
The default remote ID is the switch MAC address.

Step 6 ip dhcp snooping information option (Optional) If the switch is an aggregation switch connected to an edge
allow-untrusted switch, enable the switch to accept incoming DHCP snooping packets
with option-82 information from the edge switch.
The default setting is disabled.
Note Enter this command only on aggregation switches that are
connected to trusted devices.
Step 7 interface interface-id Specify the interface to be configured, and enter interface configuration
mode.
Step 8 ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan information (Optional) Configure the circuit-ID suboption for the specified interface.
option format-type circuit-id string
Specify the VLAN and port identifier, using a VLAN ID in the range of 1
ASCII-string
to 4094. The default circuit ID is the port identifier, in the format
vlan-mod-port.
You can configure the circuit ID to be a string of 3 to 63 ASCII characters
(no spaces).
Step 9 ip dhcp snooping trust (Optional) Configure the interface as trusted or untrusted. You can use
the no keyword to configure an interface to receive messages from an
untrusted client. The default setting is untrusted.

21-12 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 10 ip dhcp snooping limit rate rate (Optional) Configure the number of DHCP packets per second that an
interface can receive. The range is 1 to 2048. By default, no rate limit is
configured.
Note We recommend an untrusted rate limit of not more than 100
packets per second. If you configure rate limiting for trusted
interfaces, you might need to increase the rate limit if the port is
a trunk port assigned to more than one VLAN on which DHCP
snooping is enabled.
Step 12 ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address (Optional) Configure the switch to verify that the source MAC address in
a DHCP packet that is received on untrusted ports matches the client
hardware address in the packet. The default is to verify that the source
MAC address matches the client hardware address in the packet.
To disable DHCP snooping, use the no ip dhcp snooping global configuration command. To disable
DHCP snooping on a VLAN or range of VLANs, use the no ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range global
configuration command. To disable the insertion and removal of the option-82 field, use the no ip dhcp
snooping information option global configuration command. To configure an aggregation switch to
drop incoming DHCP snooping packets with option-82 information from an edge switch, use the no ip
dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted global configuration command.
This example shows how to enable DHCP snooping globally and on VLAN 10 and to configure a rate
limit of 100 packets per second on a port:
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 10
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option
Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping limit rate 100
Enabling DHCP Snooping on Private VLANs

You can enable DHCP snooping on private VLANs. If DHCP snooping is enabled, the configuration is
propagated to both a primary VLAN and its associated secondary VLANs. If DHCP snooping is enabled
on the primary VLAN, it is also configured on the secondary VLANs.
If DHCP snooping is already configured on the primary VLAN and you configure DHCP snooping with
different settings on a secondary VLAN, the configuration for the secondary VLAN does not take effect.
You must configure DHCP snooping on the primary VLAN. If DHCP snooping is not configured on the
primary VLAN, this message appears when you are configuring DHCP snooping on the secondary
VLAN, such as VLAN 200:
2w5d:%DHCP_SNOOPING-4-DHCP_SNOOPING_PVLAN_WARNING:DHCP Snooping configuration may not take
effect on secondary vlan 200. DHCP Snooping configuration on secondary vlan is derived
from its primary vlan.
The show ip dhcp snooping privileged EXEC command output shows all VLANs, including primary
and secondary private VLANs, on which DHCP snooping is enabled.

OL-8553-06 21-13
Enabling the Cisco IOS DHCP Server Database

For procedures to enable and configure the Cisco IOS DHCP server database, see the “DHCP
Configuration Task List” section in the “Configuring DHCP” chapter of the Cisco IOS IP Configuration
Guide, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2
Mainline > Configuration Guides.
Enabling the DHCP Snooping Binding Database Agent

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable and configure the DHCP snooping
binding database agent on the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip dhcp snooping database Specify the URL for the database agent or the binding file by using one
{flash:/filename | of these forms:
ftp://user:password@host/filename |
• flash:/filename
http://[[username:password]@]{hostna
me | host-ip}[/directory] • ftp://user:password@host/filename
/image-name.tar | • http://[[username:password]@]{hostname | host-ip}[/directory]
rcp://user@host/filename}| /image-name.tar
tftp://host/filename
• rcp://user@host/filename
• tftp://host/filename
Step 3 ip dhcp snooping database timeout Specify (in seconds) how long to wait for the database transfer process to
seconds finish before stopping the process.
The default is 300 seconds. The range is 0 to 86400. Use 0 to define an
infinite duration, which means to continue trying the transfer
indefinitely.
Step 4 ip dhcp snooping database write-delay Specify the duration for which the transfer should be delayed after the
seconds binding database changes. The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds. The
default is 300 seconds (5 minutes).
Step 6 ip dhcp snooping binding mac-address (Optional) Add binding entries to the DHCP snooping binding database.
vlan vlan-id ip-address interface The vlan-id range is from 1 to 4904. The seconds range is from 1 to
interface-id expiry seconds 4294967295.
Enter this command for each entry that you add.
Note Use this command when you are testing or debugging the switch.
Step 7 show ip dhcp snooping database Display the status and statistics of the DHCP snooping binding database
[detail] agent.
To stop using the database agent and binding files, use the no ip dhcp snooping database global
configuration command. To reset the timeout or delay values, use the ip dhcp snooping database
timeout seconds or the ip dhcp snooping database write-delay seconds global configuration
command.

21-14 OL-8553-06
Displaying DHCP Snooping Information
To clear the statistics of the DHCP snooping binding database agent, use the clear ip dhcp snooping
database statistics privileged EXEC command. To renew the database, use the renew ip dhcp snooping
database privileged EXEC command.
To delete binding entries from the DHCP snooping binding database, use the no ip dhcp snooping
binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ip-address interface interface-id privileged EXEC command. Enter
this command for each entry that you want to delete.
Displaying DHCP Snooping Information

To display the DHCP snooping information, use the privileged EXEC commands in Table 21-2:
Table 21-2 Commands for Displaying DHCP Information
Command Purpose
show ip dhcp snooping Displays the DHCP snooping configuration for a switch
show ip dhcp snooping binding Displays only the dynamically configured bindings in the DHCP snooping binding
database, also referred to as a binding table.
show ip dhcp snooping database Displays the DHCP snooping binding database status and statistics.
show ip dhcp snooping statistics Displays the DHCP snooping statistics in summary or detail form.
show ip source binding Display the dynamically and statically configured bindings.
Note If DHCP snooping is enabled and an interface changes to the down state, the switch does not delete the
statically configured bindings.
Understanding IP Source Guard

IP source guard is a security feature that restricts IP traffic on nonrouted, Layer 2 interfaces by filtering
traffic based on the DHCP snooping binding database and on manually configured IP source bindings.
You can use IP source guard to prevent traffic attacks caused when a host tries to use the IP address of
its neighbor.
You can enable IP source guard when DHCP snooping is enabled on an untrusted interface. After IP
source guard is enabled on an interface, the switch blocks all IP traffic received on the interface, except
for DHCP packets allowed by DHCP snooping. A port access control list (ACL) is applied to the
interface. The port ACL allows only IP traffic with a source IP address in the IP source binding table
and denies all other traffic.
Note The port ACL takes precedence over any router ACLs or VLAN maps that affect the same interface.
The IP source binding table has bindings that are learned by DHCP snooping or are manually configured
(static IP source bindings). An entry in this table has an IP address with its associated MAC address and
VLAN number. The switch uses the IP source binding table only when IP source guard is enabled.
IP source guard is supported only on Layer 2 ports, including access and trunk ports.You can configure
IP source guard with source IP address filtering or with source IP and MAC address filtering.

OL-8553-06 21-15
Configuring IP Source Guard

• Source IP Address Filtering, page 21-16
• Source IP and MAC Address Filtering, page 21-16
Source IP Address Filtering

When IP source guard is enabled with this option, IP traffic is filtered based on the source IP address.
The switch forwards IP traffic when the source IP address matches an entry in the DHCP snooping
binding database or a binding in the IP source binding table.
When a DHCP snooping binding or static IP source binding is added, changed, or deleted on an interface,
the switch modifies the port ACL using the IP source binding changes, and re-applies the port ACL to
the interface.
If you enable IP source guard on an interface on which IP source bindings (dynamically learned by
DHCP snooping or manually configured) are not configured, the switch creates and applies a port ACL
that denies all IP traffic on the interface. If you disable IP source guard, the switch removes the port ACL
from the interface.
Source IP and MAC Address Filtering

When IP source guard is enabled with this option, IP traffic is filtered based on the source IP and MAC
addresses. The switch forwards traffic only when the source IP and MAC addresses match an entry in
the IP source binding table.
When IP source guard with source IP and MAC address filtering is enabled, the switch filters IP and
non-IP traffic. If the source MAC address of an IP or non-IP packet matches a valid IP source binding,
the switch forwards the packet. The switch drops all other types of packets except DHCP packets.
The switch uses port security to filter source MAC addresses. The interface can shut down when a
port-security violation occurs.

• Default IP Source Guard Configuration, page 21-16
• IP Source Guard Configuration Guidelines, page 21-17
• Enabling IP Source Guard, page 21-17
Default IP Source Guard Configuration

By default, IP source guard is disabled.

21-16 OL-8553-06
IP Source Guard Configuration Guidelines

These are the configuration guidelines for IP source guard:
• You can configure static IP bindings only on nonrouted ports. If you enter the ip source binding
mac-address vlan vlan-id ip-address interface interface-id global configuration command on a
routed interface, this error message appears:
Static IP source binding can only be configured on switch port.
• When IP source guard with source IP filtering is enabled on an interface, DHCP snooping must be
enabled on the access VLAN to which the interface belongs.
• If you are enabling IP source guard on a trunk interface with multiple VLANs and DHCP snooping
is enabled on all the VLANs, the source IP address filter is applied on all the VLANs.
Note If IP source guard is enabled and you enable or disable DHCP snooping on a VLAN on the
trunk interface, the switch might not properly filter traffic.
• When IP source guard with source IP and MAC address filtering is enabled, DHCP snooping and
port security must be enabled on the interface. You must also enter the ip dhcp snooping
information option global configuration command and ensure that the DHCP server supports
option 82. When IP source guard is enabled with MAC address filtering, the DHCP host MAC
address is not learned until the host is granted a lease. When forwarding packets from the server to
the host, DHCP snooping uses the option-82 data to identify the host port.
• When configuring IP source guard on interfaces on which a private VLAN is configured, port
security is not supported.
• IP source guard is not supported on EtherChannels.
• You can enable this feature when IEEE 802.1x port-based authentication is enabled.
• If the number of ternary content addressable memory (TCAM) entries exceeds the maximum
available, the CPU usage increases.
Enabling IP Source Guard

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable and configure IP source guard on an
interface.
Command Purpose
mode.

OL-8553-06 21-17
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip verify source Enable IP source guard with source IP address filtering.
or
ip verify source port-security Enable IP source guard with source IP and MAC address filtering.
Note When you enable both IP Source Guard and Port Security by
using the ip verify source port-security interface configuration
command, there are two caveats:
• The DHCP server must support option 82, or the client is not
assigned an IP address.
• The MAC address in the DHCP packet is not learned as a secure
address. The MAC address of the DHCP client is learned as a
secure address only when the switch receives non-DHCP data
traffic.
Step 5 ip source binding mac-address vlan Add a static IP source binding.
vlan-id ip-address inteface interface-id
Enter this command for each static binding.
Step 7 show ip verify source [interface Display the IP source guard configuration for all interfaces or for a
interface-id] specific interface.
Step 8 show ip source binding [ip-address] Display the IP source bindings on the switch, on a specific VLAN, or on
[mac-address] [dhcp-snooping | static] a specific interface.
[inteface interface-id] [vlan vlan-id]
To disable IP source guard with source IP address filtering, use the no ip verify source interface
To delete a static IP source binding entry, use the no ip source global configuration command.
This example shows how to enable IP source guard with source IP and MAC filtering on VLANs 10
and 11:
Switch(config-if)# ip verify source port-security
Switch(config)# ip source binding 0100.0022.0010 vlan 10 10.0.0.2 interface
gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config)# ip source binding 0100.0230.0002 vlan 11 10.0.0.4 interface
gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config)# end

21-18 OL-8553-06
Displaying IP Source Guard Information
Displaying IP Source Guard Information

To display the IP source guard information, use one or more of the privileged EXEC commands in
Table 21-3:
Table 21-3 Commands for Displaying IP Source Guard Information
Command Purpose
show ip source binding Display the IP source bindings on a switch.
show ip verify source Display the IP source guard configuration on the switch.
Understanding DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation

DHCP server port-based address allocation is a feature that enables DHCP to maintain the same IP
address on an Ethernet switch port regardless of the attached device client identifier or client hardware
address.
When Ethernet switches are deployed in the network, they offer connectivity to the directly connected
devices. In some environments, such as on a factory floor, if a device fails, the replacement device must
be working immediately in the existing network. With the current DHCP implementation, there is no
guarantee that DHCP would offer the same IP address to the replacement device. Control, monitoring,
and other software expect a stable IP address associated with each device. If a device is replaced, the
address assignment should remain stable even though the DHCP client has changed.
When configured, the DHCP server port-based address allocation feature ensures that the same IP
address is always offered to the same connected port even as the client identifier or client hardware
address changes in the DHCP messages received on that port. The DHCP protocol recognizes DHCP
clients by the client identifier option in the DHCP packet. Clients that do not include the client identifier
option are identified by the client hardware address. When you configure this feature, the port name of
the interface overrides the client identifier or hardware address and the actual point of connection, the
switch port, becomes the client identifier.
In all cases, by connecting the Ethernet cable to the same port, the same IP address is allocated through
DHCP to the attached device.
The DHCP server port-based address allocation feature is only supported on a Cisco IOS DHCP server
and not a third-party server.
Configuring DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation

This section contains this configuration information:
• Default Port-Based Address Allocation Configuration, page 21-19
• Port-Based Address Allocation Configuration Guidelines, page 21-20
• Enabling DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation, page 21-20
Default Port-Based Address Allocation Configuration

By default, DHCP server port-based address allocation is disabled.

OL-8553-06 21-19
Port-Based Address Allocation Configuration Guidelines

These are the configuration guidelines for DHCP port-based address allocation:
• Only one IP address can be assigned per port.
• Reserved addresses (preassigned) cannot be cleared by using the clear ip dhcp binding global
• Preassigned addresses are automatically excluded from normal dynamic IP address assignment.
Preassigned addresses cannot be used in host pools, but there can be multiple preassigned addresses
per DHCP address pool.
Enabling DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to globally enable port-based address allocation
and to automatically generate a subscriber identifier on an interface.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip dhcp use subscriber-id client-id Configure the DHCP server to globally use the
subscriber identifier as the client identifier on all
incoming DHCP messages.
Step 3 ip dhcp subscriber-id interface-name Automatically generate a subscriber identifier based
on the short name of the interface.
A subscriber identifier configured on a specific
interface takes precedence over this command.
Step 4 interface interface-id Specify the interface to be configured, and enter
Step 5 ip dhcp server use subscriber-id client-id Configure the DHCP server to use the subscriber
identifier as the client identifier on all incoming
DHCP messages on the interface.
Step 7 show running config Verify your entries.
After enabling DHCP port-based address allocation on the switch, use the ip dhcp pool global
configuration command to preassign IP addresses and to associate them to clients.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode follow these steps to preassign an IP address and to associate it to
a client identified by the interface name.

21-20 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip dhcp pool poolname Enter DHCP pool configuration mode, and define the
name for the DHCP pool. The pool name can be a
symbolic string (such as Engineering) or an integer
(such as 0).
Step 3 network network-number [mask | /prefix-length] Specify the subnet network number and mask of the
DHCP address pool.
Step 4 address ip-address client-id string [ascii] Reserve an IP address for a DHCP client identified by
the interface name.
string—can be an ASCII value or a hexadecimal
value.
Step 6 show ip dhcp pool Verify DHCP pool configuration.
To disable DHCP port-based address allocation, use the no ip dhcp use subscriber-id client-id global
configuration command. To disable the automatic generation of a subscriber identifier, use the no ip
dhcp subscriber-id interface-name global configuration command. To disable the subscriber identifier
on an interface, use the no ip dhcp server use subscriber-id client-id interface configuration command.
To remove an IP address reservation from a DHCP pool, use the no address ip-address client-id string
DHCP pool configuration command.
In this example, a subscriber identifier is automatically generated, and the DHCP server ignores any
client identifier fields in the DHCP messages and uses the subscriber identifier instead. The subscriber
identifier is based on the short name of the interface and the client preassigned IP address 10.1.1.7.
switch# show running config
Current configuration : 4899 bytes
!
version 12.2
!
hostname switch
!
no aaa new-model
clock timezone EST 0
ip subnet-zero
ip dhcp relay information policy removal pad
no ip dhcp use vrf connected
ip dhcp use subscriber-id client-id
ip dhcp subscriber-id interface-name
ip dhcp excluded-address 10.1.1.1 10.1.1.3
!
ip dhcp pool dhcppool
network 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0
address 10.1.1.7 client-id “Et1/0” ascii
<output truncated>
This example shows that the preassigned address was correctly reserved in the DHCP pool:
switch# show ip dhcp pool dhcppool
Pool dhcp pool:
Utilization mark (high/low) : 100 / 0

OL-8553-06 21-21
Displaying DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation
Subnet size (first/next) : 0 / 0

Total addresses : 254
Leased addresses : 0
Excluded addresses : 4
Pending event : none
1 subnet is currently in the pool:
Current index IP address range Leased/Excluded/Total
10.1.1.1 10.1.1.1 - 10.1.1.254 0 / 4 / 254
1 reserved address is currently in the pool
Address Client
10.1.1.7 Et1/0
For more information about configuring the DHCP server port-based address allocation feature, go to
Cisco.com, and enter Cisco IOS IP Addressing Services in the Search field to access the Cisco IOS
software documentation. You can also access the documentation at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/ipaddr/command/reference/iad_book.html
Displaying DHCP Server Port-Based Address Allocation

To display the DHCP server port-based address allocation information, use one or more of the privileged
EXEC commands in Table 21-4:
Table 21-4 Commands for Displaying DHCP Port-Based Address Allocation Information
Command Purpose
show interface interface id Display the status and configuration of a specific interface.
show ip dhcp pool Display the DHCP address pools.
show ip dhcp binding Display address bindings on the Cisco IOS DHCP server.

21-22 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 22
Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection
This chapter describes how to configure dynamic Address Resolution Protocol inspection (dynamic ARP
inspection) on the Catalyst 3560 switch. This feature helps prevent malicious attacks on the switch by
not relaying invalid ARP requests and responses to other ports in the same VLAN.

• Understanding Dynamic ARP Inspection, page 22-1
• Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection, page 22-5
• Displaying Dynamic ARP Inspection Information, page 22-14
Understanding Dynamic ARP Inspection

ARP provides IP communication within a Layer 2 broadcast domain by mapping an IP address to a MAC
address. For example, Host B wants to send information to Host A but does not have the MAC address
of Host A in its ARP cache. Host B generates a broadcast message for all hosts within the broadcast
domain to obtain the MAC address associated with the IP address of Host A. All hosts within the
broadcast domain receive the ARP request, and Host A responds with its MAC address. However,
because ARP allows a gratuitous reply from a host even if an ARP request was not received, an ARP
spoofing attack and the poisoning of ARP caches can occur. After the attack, all traffic from the device
under attack flows through the attacker’s computer and then to the router, switch, or host.
A malicious user can attack hosts, switches, and routers connected to your Layer 2 network by poisoning
the ARP caches of systems connected to the subnet and by intercepting traffic intended for other hosts
on the subnet. Figure 22-1 shows an example of ARP cache poisoning.

OL-8553-06 22-1
Chapter 22 Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection
Figure 22-1 ARP Cache Poisoning
A B
Host A Host B
(IA, MA) (IB, MB)
C
111750
Host C (man-in-the-middle)
(IC, MC)
Hosts A, B, and C are connected to the switch on interfaces A, B and C, all of which are on the same
subnet. Their IP and MAC addresses are shown in parentheses; for example, Host A uses IP address IA
and MAC address MA. When Host A needs to communicate to Host B at the IP layer, it broadcasts an
ARP request for the MAC address associated with IP address IB. When the switch and Host B receive
the ARP request, they populate their ARP caches with an ARP binding for a host with the IP address IA
and a MAC address MA; for example, IP address IA is bound to MAC address MA. When Host B
responds, the switch and Host A populate their ARP caches with a binding for a host with the IP address
IB and the MAC address MB.
Host C can poison the ARP caches of the switch, Host A, and Host B by broadcasting forged ARP
responses with bindings for a host with an IP address of IA (or IB) and a MAC address of MC. Hosts
with poisoned ARP caches use the MAC address MC as the destination MAC address for traffic intended
for IA or IB. This means that Host C intercepts that traffic. Because Host C knows the true MAC
addresses associated with IA and IB, it can forward the intercepted traffic to those hosts by using the
correct MAC address as the destination. Host C has inserted itself into the traffic stream from Host A to
Host B, the classic man-in-the middle attack.
Dynamic ARP inspection is a security feature that validates ARP packets in a network. It intercepts,
logs, and discards ARP packets with invalid IP-to-MAC address bindings. This capability protects the
network from certain man-in-the-middle attacks.
Dynamic ARP inspection ensures that only valid ARP requests and responses are relayed. The switch
performs these activities:
• Intercepts all ARP requests and responses on untrusted ports
• Verifies that each of these intercepted packets has a valid IP-to-MAC address binding before
updating the local ARP cache or before forwarding the packet to the appropriate destination
• Drops invalid ARP packets
Dynamic ARP inspection determines the validity of an ARP packet based on valid IP-to-MAC address
bindings stored in a trusted database, the DHCP snooping binding database. This database is built by
DHCP snooping if DHCP snooping is enabled on the VLANs and on the switch. If the ARP packet is
received on a trusted interface, the switch forwards the packet without any checks. On untrusted
interfaces, the switch forwards the packet only if it is valid.
You enable dynamic ARP inspection on a per-VLAN basis by using the ip arp inspection vlan
vlan-range global configuration command. For configuration information, see the “Configuring
Dynamic ARP Inspection in DHCP Environments” section on page 22-7.
In non-DHCP environments, dynamic ARP inspection can validate ARP packets against user-configured
ARP access control lists (ACLs) for hosts with statically configured IP addresses. You define an ARP
ACL by using the arp access-list acl-name global configuration command. For configuration
information, see the “Configuring ARP ACLs for Non-DHCP Environments” section on page 22-8. The
switch logs dropped packets. For more information about the log buffer, see the “Logging of Dropped
Packets” section on page 22-4.

22-2 OL-8553-06
You can configure dynamic ARP inspection to drop ARP packets when the IP addresses in the packets
are invalid or when the MAC addresses in the body of the ARP packets do not match the addresses
specified in the Ethernet header. Use the ip arp inspection validate {[src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip]} global
configuration command. For more information, see the “Performing Validation Checks” section on
page 22-11.
Interface Trust States and Network Security

Dynamic ARP inspection associates a trust state with each interface on the switch. Packets arriving on
trusted interfaces bypass all dynamic ARP inspection validation checks, and those arriving on untrusted
interfaces undergo the dynamic ARP inspection validation process.
In a typical network configuration, you configure all switch ports connected to host ports as untrusted
and configure all switch ports connected to switches as trusted. With this configuration, all ARP packets
entering the network from a given switch bypass the security check. No other validation is needed at any
other place in the VLAN or in the network. You configure the trust setting by using the ip arp inspection
trust interface configuration command.
Caution Use the trust state configuration carefully. Configuring interfaces as untrusted when they should be
trusted can result in a loss of connectivity.
In Figure 22-2, assume that both Switch A and Switch B are running dynamic ARP inspection on the
VLAN that includes Host 1 and Host 2. If Host 1 and Host 2 acquire their IP addresses from the DHCP
server connected to Switch A, only Switch A binds the IP-to-MAC address of Host 1. Therefore, if the
interface between Switch A and Switch B is untrusted, the ARP packets from Host 1 are dropped by
Switch B. Connectivity between Host 1 and Host 2 is lost.
Figure 22-2 ARP Packet Validation on a VLAN Enabled for Dynamic ARP Inspection
DHCP server
Switch A Switch B
Port 1 Port 3
111751
Host 1 Host 2
Configuring interfaces to be trusted when they are actually untrusted leaves a security hole in the
network. If Switch A is not running dynamic ARP inspection, Host 1 can easily poison the ARP cache
of Switch B (and Host 2, if the link between the switches is configured as trusted). This condition can
occur even though Switch B is running dynamic ARP inspection.

OL-8553-06 22-3
Dynamic ARP inspection ensures that hosts (on untrusted interfaces) connected to a switch running
dynamic ARP inspection do not poison the ARP caches of other hosts in the network. However, dynamic
ARP inspection does not prevent hosts in other portions of the network from poisoning the caches of the
hosts that are connected to a switch running dynamic ARP inspection.
In cases in which some switches in a VLAN run dynamic ARP inspection and other switches do not,
configure the interfaces connecting such switches as untrusted. However, to validate the bindings of
packets from nondynamic ARP inspection switches, configure the switch running dynamic ARP
inspection with ARP ACLs. When you cannot determine such bindings, at Layer 3, isolate switches
running dynamic ARP inspection from switches not running dynamic ARP inspection switches. For
configuration information, see the “Configuring ARP ACLs for Non-DHCP Environments” section on
page 22-8.
Note Depending on the setup of the DHCP server and the network, it might not be possible to validate a given
ARP packet on all switches in the VLAN.
Rate Limiting of ARP Packets

The switch CPU performs dynamic ARP inspection validation checks; therefore, the number of
incoming ARP packets is rate-limited to prevent a denial-of-service attack. By default, the rate for
untrusted interfaces is 15 packets per second (pps). Trusted interfaces are not rate-limited. You can
change this setting by using the ip arp inspection limit interface configuration command.
When the rate of incoming ARP packets exceeds the configured limit, the switch places the port in the
error-disabled state. The port remains in that state until you intervene. You can use the errdisable
recovery global configuration command to enable error disable recovery so that ports automatically
emerge from this state after a specified timeout period.
For configuration information, see the “Limiting the Rate of Incoming ARP Packets” section on
page 22-10.
Relative Priority of ARP ACLs and DHCP Snooping Entries

Dynamic ARP inspection uses the DHCP snooping binding database for the list of valid IP-to-MAC
address bindings.
ARP ACLs take precedence over entries in the DHCP snooping binding database. The switch uses ACLs
only if you configure them by using the ip arp inspection filter vlan global configuration command.
The switch first compares ARP packets to user-configured ARP ACLs. If the ARP ACL denies the ARP
packet, the switch also denies the packet even if a valid binding exists in the database populated by
DHCP snooping.
Logging of Dropped Packets

When the switch drops a packet, it places an entry in the log buffer and then generates system messages
on a rate-controlled basis. After the message is generated, the switch clears the entry from the log buffer.
Each log entry contains flow information, such as the receiving VLAN, the port number, the source and
destination IP addresses, and the source and destination MAC addresses.

22-4 OL-8553-06
You use the ip arp inspection log-buffer global configuration command to configure the number of
entries in the buffer and the number of entries needed in the specified interval to generate system
messages. You specify the type of packets that are logged by using the ip arp inspection vlan logging
global configuration command. For configuration information, see the “Configuring the Log Buffer”

• Default Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration, page 22-5
• Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration Guidelines, page 22-6
• Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection in DHCP Environments, page 22-7 (required in DHCP
environments)
• Configuring ARP ACLs for Non-DHCP Environments, page 22-8 (required in non-DHCP
environments)
• Limiting the Rate of Incoming ARP Packets, page 22-10 (optional)
• Performing Validation Checks, page 22-11 (optional)
• Configuring the Log Buffer, page 22-12 (optional)
Default Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration

Table 22-1 shows the default dynamic ARP inspection configuration.
Table 22-1 Default Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration

Dynamic ARP inspection Disabled on all VLANs.
Interface trust state All interfaces are untrusted.
Rate limit of incoming ARP packets The rate is 15 pps on untrusted interfaces, assuming that
the network is a switched network with a host
connecting to as many as 15 new hosts per second.
The rate is unlimited on all trusted interfaces.
The burst interval is 1 second.
ARP ACLs for non-DHCP environments No ARP ACLs are defined.
Validation checks No checks are performed.
Log buffer When dynamic ARP inspection is enabled, all denied or
dropped ARP packets are logged.
The number of entries in the log is 32.
The number of system messages is limited to 5 per
second.
The logging-rate interval is 1 second.
Per-VLAN logging All denied or dropped ARP packets are logged.

OL-8553-06 22-5
Dynamic ARP Inspection Configuration Guidelines

These are the dynamic ARP inspection configuration guidelines:
• Dynamic ARP inspection is an ingress security feature; it does not perform any egress checking.
• Dynamic ARP inspection is not effective for hosts connected to switches that do not support
dynamic ARP inspection or that do not have this feature enabled. Because man-in-the-middle
attacks are limited to a single Layer 2 broadcast domain, separate the domain with dynamic ARP
inspection checks from the one with no checking. This action secures the ARP caches of hosts in the
domain enabled for dynamic ARP inspection.
• Dynamic ARP inspection depends on the entries in the DHCP snooping binding database to verify
IP-to-MAC address bindings in incoming ARP requests and ARP responses. Make sure to enable
DHCP snooping to permit ARP packets that have dynamically assigned IP addresses. For
configuration information, see Chapter 21, “Configuring DHCP Features and IP Source Guard.”
When DHCP snooping is disabled or in non-DHCP environments, use ARP ACLs to permit or to
deny packets.
• Dynamic ARP inspection is supported on access ports, trunk ports, EtherChannel ports, and private
VLAN ports.
Note Do not enable Dynamic ARP inspection on RSPAN VLANs. If Dynamic ARP inspection is
enabled on RSPAN VLANs, Dynamic ARP inspection packets might not reach the RSPAN
destination port.
• A physical port can join an EtherChannel port channel only when the trust state of the physical port
and the channel port match. Otherwise, the physical port remains suspended in the port channel. A
port channel inherits its trust state from the first physical port that joins the channel. Consequently,
the trust state of the first physical port need not match the trust state of the channel.
Conversely, when you change the trust state on the port channel, the switch configures a new trust
state on all the physical ports that comprise the channel.
• The operating rate for the port channel is cumulative across all the physical ports within the channel.
For example, if you configure the port channel with an ARP rate-limit of 400 pps, all the interfaces
combined on the channel receive an aggregate 400 pps. The rate of incoming ARP packets on
EtherChannel ports is equal to the sum of the incoming rate of packets from all the channel
members. Configure the rate limit for EtherChannel ports only after examining the rate of incoming
ARP packets on the channel-port members.
The rate of incoming packets on a physical port is checked against the port-channel configuration
rather than the physical-ports configuration. The rate-limit configuration on a port channel is
independent of the configuration on its physical ports.
If the EtherChannel receives more ARP packets than the configured rate, the channel (including all
physical ports) is placed in the error-disabled state.
• Make sure to limit the rate of ARP packets on incoming trunk ports. Configure trunk ports with
higher rates to reflect their aggregation and to handle packets across multiple dynamic ARP
inspection-enabled VLANs. You also can use the ip arp inspection limit none interface
configuration command to make the rate unlimited. A high rate-limit on one VLAN can cause a
denial-of-service attack to other VLANs when the software places the port in the error-disabled
state.
• When you enable dynamic ARP inspection on the switch, policers that were configured to police
ARP traffic are no longer effective. The result is that all ARP traffic is sent to the CPU.

22-6 OL-8553-06
Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection in DHCP Environments

This procedure shows how to configure dynamic ARP inspection when two switches support this
feature. Host 1 is connected to Switch A, and Host 2 is connected to Switch B as shown in Figure 22-2
on page 22-3. Both switches are running dynamic ARP inspection on VLAN 1 where the hosts are
located. A DHCP server is connected to Switch A. Both hosts acquire their IP addresses from the same
DHCP server. Therefore, Switch A has the bindings for Host 1 and Host 2, and Switch B has the binding
for Host 2.
Note Dynamic ARP inspection depends on the entries in the DHCP snooping binding database to verify
IP-to-MAC address bindings in incoming ARP requests and ARP responses. Make sure to enable DHCP
snooping to permit ARP packets that have dynamically assigned IP addresses. For configuration
information, see Chapter 21, “Configuring DHCP Features and IP Source Guard.”
For information on how to configure dynamic ARP inspection when only one switch supports the
feature, see the “Configuring ARP ACLs for Non-DHCP Environments” section on page 22-8.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure dynamic ARP inspection. You
must perform this procedure on both switches. This procedure is required.
Command Purpose
Step 1 show cdp neighbors Verify the connection between the switches.
Step 3 ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range Enable dynamic ARP inspection on a per-VLAN basis. By
default, dynamic ARP inspection is disabled on all VLANs.
For vlan-range, specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID
number, a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of
VLANs separated by a comma. The range is 1 to 4094.
Specify the same VLAN ID for both switches.
Step 4 interface interface-id Specify the interface connected to the other switch, and enter
Step 5 ip arp inspection trust Configure the connection between the switches as trusted.
By default, all interfaces are untrusted.
The switch does not check ARP packets that it receives from the
other switch on the trusted interface. It simply forwards the
packets.
For untrusted interfaces, the switch intercepts all ARP requests
and responses. It verifies that the intercepted packets have valid
IP-to-MAC address bindings before updating the local cache and
before forwarding the packet to the appropriate destination. The
switch drops invalid packets and logs them in the log buffer
according to the logging configuration specified with the ip arp
inspection vlan logging global configuration command. For
more information, see the “Configuring the Log Buffer” section
on page 22-12.

OL-8553-06 22-7
Command Purpose
Step 7 show ip arp inspection interfaces Verify the dynamic ARP inspection configuration.
show ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range
Step 8 show ip dhcp snooping binding Verify the DHCP bindings.
Step 9 show ip arp inspection statistics vlan Check the dynamic ARP inspection statistics.
vlan-range
To disable dynamic ARP inspection, use the no ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range global configuration
command. To return the interfaces to an untrusted state, use the no ip arp inspection trust interface
This example shows how to configure dynamic ARP inspection on Switch A in VLAN 1. You would
perform a similar procedure on Switch B:
Switch(config)# ip arp inspection vlan 1
Switch(config-if)# ip arp inspection trust
Configuring ARP ACLs for Non-DHCP Environments

This procedure shows how to configure dynamic ARP inspection when Switch B shown in Figure 22-2
on page 22-3 does not support dynamic ARP inspection or DHCP snooping.
If you configure port 1 on Switch A as trusted, a security hole is created because both Switch A and
Host 1 could be attacked by either Switch B or Host 2. To prevent this possibility, you must configure
port 1 on Switch A as untrusted. To permit ARP packets from Host 2, you must set up an ARP ACL and
apply it to VLAN 1. If the IP address of Host 2 is not static (it is impossible to apply the ACL
configuration on Switch A) you must separate Switch A from Switch B at Layer 3 and use a router to
route packets between them.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure an ARP ACL on Switch A. This
procedure is required in non-DHCP environments.
Command Purpose
Step 2 arp access-list acl-name Define an ARP ACL, and enter ARP access-list
configuration mode. By default, no ARP access lists
are defined.
Note At the end of the ARP access list, there is an
implicit deny ip any mac any command.

22-8 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 permit ip host sender-ip mac host sender-mac [log] Permit ARP packets from the specified host (Host 2).
• For sender-ip, enter the IP address of Host 2.
• For sender-mac, enter the MAC address of
Host 2.
• (Optional) Specify log to log a packet in the log
buffer when it matches the access control entry
(ACE). Matches are logged if you also configure
the matchlog keyword in the ip arp inspection
vlan logging global configuration command. For
more information, see the “Configuring the Log
Buffer” section on page 22-12.
Step 5 ip arp inspection filter arp-acl-name vlan vlan-range Apply the ARP ACL to the VLAN. By default, no
[static] defined ARP ACLs are applied to any VLAN.
• For arp-acl-name, specify the name of the ACL
created in Step 2.
• For vlan-range, specify the VLAN that the
switches and hosts are in. You can specify a
single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a
range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a
series of VLANs separated by a comma. The
range is 1 to 4094.
• (Optional) Specify static to treat implicit denies
in the ARP ACL as explicit denies and to drop
packets that do not match any previous clauses in
the ACL. DHCP bindings are not used.
If you do not specify this keyword, it means that
there is no explicit deny in the ACL that denies
the packet, and DHCP bindings determine
whether a packet is permitted or denied if the
packet does not match any clauses in the ACL.
ARP packets containing only IP-to-MAC address
bindings are compared against the ACL. Packets are
permitted only if the access list permits them.
Step 6 interface interface-id Specify the Switch A interface that is connected to
Switch B, and enter interface configuration mode.

OL-8553-06 22-9
Command Purpose
Step 7 no ip arp inspection trust Configure the Switch A interface that is connected to
Switch B as untrusted.
By default, all interfaces are untrusted.
For untrusted interfaces, the switch intercepts all
ARP requests and responses. It verifies that the
intercepted packets have valid IP-to-MAC address
bindings before updating the local cache and before
forwarding the packet to the appropriate destination.
The switch drops invalid packets and logs them in the
log buffer according to the logging configuration
specified with the ip arp inspection vlan logging
global configuration command. For more
information, see the “Configuring the Log Buffer”
Step 9 show arp access-list [acl-name] Verify your entries.
show ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range
show ip arp inspection interfaces
To remove the ARP ACL, use the no arp access-list global configuration command. To remove the ARP
ACL attached to a VLAN, use the no ip arp inspection filter arp-acl-name vlan vlan-range global
This example shows how to configure an ARP ACL called host2 on Switch A, to permit ARP packets
from Host 2 (IP address 1.1.1.1 and MAC address 0001.0001.0001), to apply the ACL to VLAN 1, and
to configure port 1 on Switch A as untrusted:
Switch(config)# arp access-list host2
Switch(config-arp-acl)# permit ip host 1.1.1.1 mac host 1.1.1
Switch(config-arp-acl)# exit
Switch(config)# ip arp inspection filter host2 vlan 1
Switch(config-if)# no ip arp inspection trust
Limiting the Rate of Incoming ARP Packets

The switch CPU performs dynamic ARP inspection validation checks; therefore, the number of
incoming ARP packets is rate-limited to prevent a denial-of-service attack.
When the rate of incoming ARP packets exceeds the configured limit, the switch places the port in the
error-disabled state. The port remains in that state until you enable error-disabled recovery so that ports
automatically emerge from this state after a specified timeout period.
Note Unless you configure a rate limit on an interface, changing the trust state of the interface also changes
its rate limit to the default value for that trust state. After you configure the rate limit, the interface
retains the rate limit even when its trust state is changed. If you enter the no ip arp inspection limit
interface configuration command, the interface reverts to its default rate limit.

22-10 OL-8553-06
For configuration guidelines for rate limiting trunk ports and EtherChannel ports, see the “Dynamic ARP
Inspection Configuration Guidelines” section on page 22-6.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to limit the rate of incoming ARP packets. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface to be rate-limited, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 3 ip arp inspection limit {rate pps [burst Limit the rate of incoming ARP requests and responses on the interface.
interval seconds] | none}
The default rate is 15 pps on untrusted interfaces and unlimited on
trusted interfaces. The burst interval is 1 second.
• For rate pps, specify an upper limit for the number of incoming
packets processed per second. The range is 0 to 2048 pps.
• (Optional) For burst interval seconds, specify the consecutive
interval in seconds, over which the interface is monitored for a high
rate of ARP packets.The range is 1 to 15.
• For rate none, specify no upper limit for the rate of incoming ARP
packets that can be processed.
Step 5 errdisable recovery cause (Optional) Enable error recovery from the dynamic ARP inspection
arp-inspection interval interval error-disable state.
By default, recovery is disabled, and the recovery interval is 300
seconds.
For interval interval, specify the time in seconds to recover from the
error-disable state. The range is 30 to 86400.
Step 7 show ip arp inspection interfaces Verify your settings.
show errdisable recovery
To return to the default rate-limit configuration, use the no ip arp inspection limit interface
configuration command. To disable error recovery for dynamic ARP inspection, use the no errdisable
recovery cause arp-inspection global configuration command.
Performing Validation Checks

Dynamic ARP inspection intercepts, logs, and discards ARP packets with invalid IP-to-MAC address
bindings. You can configure the switch to perform additional checks on the destination MAC address,
the sender and target IP addresses, and the source MAC address.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to perform specific checks on incoming ARP
packets. This procedure is optional.

OL-8553-06 22-11
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip arp inspection validate Perform a specific check on incoming ARP packets. By default, no checks
{[src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip]} are performed.
• For src-mac, check the source MAC address in the Ethernet header
against the sender MAC address in the ARP body. This check is
performed on both ARP requests and responses. When enabled, packets
with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped.
• For dst-mac, check the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header
against the target MAC address in ARP body. This check is performed
for ARP responses. When enabled, packets with different MAC
addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped.
• For ip, check the ARP body for invalid and unexpected IP addresses.
Addresses include 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255, and all IP multicast
addresses. Sender IP addresses are checked in all ARP requests and
responses, and target IP addresses are checked only in ARP responses.
You must specify at least one of the keywords. Each command overrides the
configuration of the previous command; that is, if a command enables src
and dst mac validations, and a second command enables IP validation only,
the src and dst mac validations are disabled as a result of the second
command.
Step 4 show ip arp inspection vlan Verify your settings.
vlan-range
To disable checking, use the no ip arp inspection validate [src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip] global
configuration command. To display statistics for forwarded, dropped, and MAC and IP validation failure
packets, use the show ip arp inspection statistics privileged EXEC command.
Configuring the Log Buffer

When the switch drops a packet, it places an entry in the log buffer and then generates system messages
on a rate-controlled basis. After the message is generated, the switch clears the entry from the log buffer.
Each log entry contains flow information, such as the receiving VLAN, the port number, the source and
destination IP addresses, and the source and destination MAC addresses.
A log-buffer entry can represent more than one packet. For example, if an interface receives many
packets on the same VLAN with the same ARP parameters, the switch combines the packets as one entry
in the log buffer and generates a single system message for the entry.
If the log buffer overflows, it means that a log event does not fit into the log buffer, and the display for
the show ip arp inspection log privileged EXEC command is affected. A -- in the display appears in
place of all data except the packet count and the time. No other statistics are provided for the entry. If
you see this entry in the display, increase the number of entries in the log buffer or increase the logging
rate.

22-12 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the log buffer. This procedure is
optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip arp inspection log-buffer {entries Configure the dynamic ARP inspection logging buffer.
number | logs number interval
By default, when dynamic ARP inspection is enabled, denied or dropped
seconds}
ARP packets are logged. The number of log entries is 32. The number of
system messages is limited to 5 per second. The logging-rate interval is 1
second.
• For entries number, specify the number of entries to be logged in the
buffer. The range is 0 to 1024.
• For logs number interval seconds, specify the number of entries to
generate system messages in the specified interval.
For logs number, the range is 0 to 1024. A 0 value means that the entry
is placed in the log buffer, but a system message is not generated.
For interval seconds, the range is 0 to 86400 seconds (1 day). A 0 value
means that a system message is immediately generated (and the log
buffer is always empty).
An interval setting of 0 overrides a log setting of 0.
The logs and interval settings interact. If the logs number X is greater than
interval seconds Y, X divided by Y (X/Y) system messages are sent every
second. Otherwise, one system message is sent every Y divided by X (Y/X)
seconds.
Step 3 ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range Control the type of packets that are logged per VLAN. By default, all denied
logging {acl-match {matchlog | or all dropped packets are logged. The term logged means the entry is placed
none} | dhcp-bindings {all | none | in the log buffer and a system message is generated.
permit}}
• For vlan-range, specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number,
a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs
• For acl-match matchlog, log packets based on the ACE logging
configuration. If you specify the matchlog keyword in this command
and the log keyword in the permit or deny ARP access-list
configuration command, ARP packets permitted or denied by the ACL
are logged.
• For acl-match none, do not log packets that match ACLs.
• For dhcp-bindings all, log all packets that match DHCP bindings.
• For dhcp-bindings none, do not log packets that match DHCP
bindings.
• For dhcp-bindings permit, log DHCP-binding permitted packets.

OL-8553-06 22-13
Displaying Dynamic ARP Inspection Information
Command Purpose
Step 5 show ip arp inspection log Verify your settings.
To return to the default log buffer settings, use the no ip arp inspection log-buffer {entries | logs}
global configuration command. To return to the default VLAN log settings, use the no ip arp inspection
vlan vlan-range logging {acl-match | dhcp-bindings} global configuration command. To clear the log
buffer, use the clear ip arp inspection log privileged EXEC command.

To display dynamic ARP inspection information, use the privileged EXEC commands described in
Table 22-2:
Table 22-2 Commands for Displaying Dynamic ARP Inspection Information
Command Description
show arp access-list [acl-name] Displays detailed information about ARP ACLs.
show ip arp inspection interfaces [interface-id] Displays the trust state and the rate limit of ARP packets for the specified
interface or all interfaces.
show ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range Displays the configuration and the operating state of dynamic ARP
inspection for the specified VLAN. If no VLANs are specified or if a
range is specified, displays information only for VLANs with dynamic
ARP inspection enabled (active).
To clear or display dynamic ARP inspection statistics, use the privileged EXEC commands in
Table 22-3:
Table 22-3 Commands for Clearing or Displaying Dynamic ARP Inspection Statistics
Command Description
clear ip arp inspection statistics Clears dynamic ARP inspection statistics.
show ip arp inspection statistics [vlan Displays statistics for forwarded, dropped, MAC validation failure, IP
vlan-range] validation failure, ACL permitted and denied, and DHCP permitted and
denied packets for the specified VLAN. If no VLANs are specified or if
a range is specified, displays information only for VLANs with dynamic
ARP inspection enabled (active).
For the show ip arp inspection statistics command, the switch increments the number of forwarded
packets for each ARP request and response packet on a trusted dynamic ARP inspection port. The switch
increments the number of ACL or DHCP permitted packets for each packet that is denied by source
MAC, destination MAC, or IP validation checks, and the switch increments the appropriate failure
count.
To clear or display dynamic ARP inspection logging information, use the privileged EXEC commands
in Table 22-4:

22-14 OL-8553-06
Table 22-4 Commands for Clearing or Displaying Dynamic ARP Inspection Logging Information
Command Description
clear ip arp inspection log Clears the dynamic ARP inspection log buffer.
show ip arp inspection log Displays the configuration and contents of the dynamic ARP
inspection log buffer.
For more information about these commands, see the command reference for this release.

OL-8553-06 22-15

22-16 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 23
Configuring IGMP Snooping and MVR
This chapter describes how to configure Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping on the
Catalyst 3560 switch, including an application of local IGMP snooping, Multicast VLAN Registration
(MVR). It also includes procedures for controlling multicast group membership by using IGMP filtering
and procedures for configuring the IGMP throttling action.
Note For IP Version 6 (IPv6) traffic, Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping performs the same
function as IGMP snooping for IPv4 traffic. For information about MLD snooping, see Chapter 38,
“Configuring IPv6 MLD Snooping.”
command reference for this release and the “IP Multicast Routing Commands” section in the Cisco IOS
IP Command Reference, Volume 3 of 3:Multicast, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under

• Understanding IGMP Snooping, page 23-2
• Configuring IGMP Snooping, page 23-6
• Displaying IGMP Snooping Information, page 23-15
• Understanding Multicast VLAN Registration, page 23-17
• Configuring MVR, page 23-19
• Displaying MVR Information, page 23-23
• Configuring IGMP Filtering and Throttling, page 23-23
• Displaying IGMP Filtering and Throttling Configuration, page 23-28
Note You can either manage IP multicast group addresses through features such as IGMP snooping and MVR,
or you can use static IP addresses.

OL-8553-06 23-1
Chapter 23 Configuring IGMP Snooping and MVR
Understanding IGMP Snooping

Layer 2 switches can use IGMP snooping to constrain the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically
configuring Layer 2 interfaces so that multicast traffic is forwarded to only those interfaces associated
with IP multicast devices. As the name implies, IGMP snooping requires the LAN switch to snoop on
the IGMP transmissions between the host and the router and to keep track of multicast groups and
member ports. When the switch receives an IGMP report from a host for a particular multicast group,
the switch adds the host port number to the forwarding table entry; when it receives an IGMP Leave
Group message from a host, it removes the host port from the table entry. It also periodically deletes
entries if it does not receive IGMP membership reports from the multicast clients.
Note For more information on IP multicast and IGMP, see RFC 1112 and RFC 2236.
The multicast router sends out periodic general queries to all VLANs. All hosts interested in this
multicast traffic send join requests and are added to the forwarding table entry. The switch creates one
entry per VLAN in the IGMP snooping IP multicast forwarding table for each group from which it
receives an IGMP join request.
The switch supports IP multicast group-based bridging, rather than MAC-addressed based groups. With
multicast MAC address-based groups, if an IP address being configured translates (aliases) to a
previously configured MAC address or to any reserved multicast MAC addresses (in the range
224.0.0.xxx), the command fails. Because the switch uses IP multicast groups, there are no address
aliasing issues.
The IP multicast groups learned through IGMP snooping are dynamic. However, you can statically
configure multicast groups by using the ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip_address interface
interface-id global configuration command. If you specify group membership for a multicast group
address statically, your setting supersedes any automatic manipulation by IGMP snooping. Multicast
group membership lists can consist of both user-defined and IGMP snooping-learned settings.
You can configure an IGMP snooping querier to support IGMP snooping in subnets without multicast
interfaces because the multicast traffic does not need to be routed. For more information about the IGMP
snooping querier, see the “Configuring the IGMP Snooping Querier” section on page 23-14.
If a port spanning-tree, a port group, or a VLAN ID change occurs, the IGMP snooping-learned multicast
groups from this port on the VLAN are deleted.
These sections describe IGMP snooping characteristics:
• IGMP Versions, page 23-3
• Joining a Multicast Group, page 23-3
• Leaving a Multicast Group, page 23-5
• Immediate Leave, page 23-5
• IGMP Configurable-Leave Timer, page 23-6
• IGMP Report Suppression, page 23-6

23-2 OL-8553-06
IGMP Versions
The switch supports IGMP Version 1, IGMP Version 2, and IGMP Version 3. These versions are
interoperable on the switch. For example, if IGMP snooping is enabled on an IGMPv2 switch and the
switch receives an IGMPv3 report from a host, the switch can forward the IGMPv3 report to the
multicast router.
Note The switch supports IGMPv3 snooping based only on the destination multicast MAC address. It does
not support snooping based on the source MAC address or on proxy reports.
An IGMPv3 switch supports Basic IGMPv3 Snooping Support (BISS), which includes support for the
snooping features on IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 switches and for IGMPv3 membership report messages.
BISS constrains the flooding of multicast traffic when your network includes IGMPv3 hosts. It
constrains traffic to approximately the same set of ports as the IGMP snooping feature on IGMPv2 or
IGMPv1 hosts.
Note IGMPv3 join and leave messages are not supported on switches running IGMP filtering or MVR.
An IGMPv3 switch can receive messages from and forward messages to a device running the Source
Specific Multicast (SSM) feature. For more information about source-specific multicast with IGMPv3
and IGMP, see the following URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1834/products_feature_guide09186a008008048a
.html
Joining a Multicast Group

When a host connected to the switch wants to join an IP multicast group and it is an IGMP Version 2
client, it sends an unsolicited IGMP join message, specifying the IP multicast group to join.
Alternatively, when the switch receives a general query from the router, it forwards the query to all ports
in the VLAN. IGMP Version 1 or Version 2 hosts wanting to join the multicast group respond by sending
a join message to the switch. The switch CPU creates a multicast forwarding-table entry for the group if

OL-8553-06 23-3
it is not already present. The CPU also adds the interface where the join message was received to the
forwarding-table entry. The host associated with that interface receives multicast traffic for that
multicast group. See Figure 23-1.
Figure 23-1 Initial IGMP Join Message
Router A
1
IGMP report 224.1.2.3
VLAN
PFC
CPU
0
Forwarding
45750
table
2 3 4 5
Host 1 Host 2 Host 3 Host 4
Router A sends a general query to the switch, which forwards the query to ports 2 through 5, which are
all members of the same VLAN. Host 1 wants to join multicast group 224.1.2.3 and multicasts an IGMP
membership report (IGMP join message) to the group. The switch CPU uses the information in the IGMP
report to set up a forwarding-table entry, as shown in Table 23-1, that includes the port numbers
connected to Host 1 and the router.
Table 23-1 IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table
Destination Address Type of Packet Ports

224.1.2.3 IGMP 1, 2
The switch hardware can distinguish IGMP information packets from other packets for the multicast
group. The information in the table tells the switching engine to send frames addressed to the 224.1.2.3
multicast IP address that are not IGMP packets to the router and to the host that has joined the group.
If another host (for example, Host 4) sends an unsolicited IGMP join message for the same group
(Figure 23-2), the CPU receives that message and adds the port number of Host 4 to the forwarding table
as shown in Table 23-2. Note that because the forwarding table directs IGMP messages only to the CPU,
the message is not flooded to other ports on the switch. Any known multicast traffic is forwarded to the
group and not to the CPU.

23-4 OL-8553-06
Figure 23-2 Second Host Joining a Multicast Group
Router A
VLAN
PFC
CPU
0
Forwarding
45751
table
2 3 4 5
Host 1 Host 2 Host 3 Host 4
Table 23-2 Updated IGMP Snooping Forwarding Table
Destination Address Type of Packet Ports

224.1.2.3 IGMP 1, 2, 5
Leaving a Multicast Group

The router sends periodic multicast general queries, and the switch forwards these queries through all
ports in the VLAN. Interested hosts respond to the queries. If at least one host in the VLAN wishes to
receive multicast traffic, the router continues forwarding the multicast traffic to the VLAN. The switch
forwards multicast group traffic only to those hosts listed in the forwarding table for that IP multicast
group maintained by IGMP snooping.
When hosts want to leave a multicast group, they can silently leave, or they can send a leave message.
When the switch receives a leave message from a host, it sends a group-specific query to learn if any
other devices connected to that interface are interested in traffic for the specific multicast group. The
switch then updates the forwarding table for that MAC group so that only those hosts interested in
receiving multicast traffic for the group are listed in the forwarding table. If the router receives no
reports from a VLAN, it removes the group for the VLAN from its IGMP cache.
Immediate Leave
Immediate Leave is only supported on IGMP Version 2 hosts.
The switch uses IGMP snooping Immediate Leave to remove from the forwarding table an interface that
sends a leave message without the switch sending group-specific queries to the interface. The VLAN
interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message.
Immediate Leave ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network, even
when multiple multicast groups are simultaneously in use.

OL-8553-06 23-5
Configuring IGMP Snooping
Note You should only use the Immediate Leave feature on VLANs where a single host is connected to each
port. If Immediate Leave is enabled in VLANs where more than one host is connected to a port, some
hosts might inadvertently be dropped.
For configuration steps, see the “Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave” section on page 23-10.
IGMP Configurable-Leave Timer

You can configure the time that the switch waits after sending a group-specific query to determine if
hosts are still interested in a specific multicast group. The IGMP leave response time can be configured
from 100 to 5000 milliseconds. The timer can be set either globally or on a per-VLAN basis. The VLAN
configuration of the leave time overrides the global configuration.
For configuration steps, see the “Configuring the IGMP Leave Timer” section on page 23-11.
IGMP Report Suppression
Note IGMP report suppression is supported only when the multicast query has IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports.
This feature is not supported when the query includes IGMPv3 reports.
The switch uses IGMP report suppression to forward only one IGMP report per multicast router query
to multicast devices. When IGMP router suppression is enabled (the default), the switch sends the first
IGMP report from all hosts for a group to all the multicast routers. The switch does not send the
remaining IGMP reports for the group to the multicast routers. This feature prevents duplicate reports
from being sent to the multicast devices.
If the multicast router query includes requests only for IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports, the switch
forwards only the first IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 report from all hosts for a group to all the multicast routers.
If the multicast router query also includes requests for IGMPv3 reports, the switch forwards all IGMPv1,
IGMPv2, and IGMPv3 reports for a group to the multicast devices.
If you disable IGMP report suppression, all IGMP reports are forwarded to the multicast routers. For
configuration steps, see the “Disabling IGMP Report Suppression” section on page 23-15.

IGMP snooping allows switches to examine IGMP packets and make forwarding decisions based on
their content. These sections contain this configuration information:
• Default IGMP Snooping Configuration, page 23-7
• Enabling or Disabling IGMP Snooping, page 23-7
• Setting the Snooping Method, page 23-8
• Configuring a Multicast Router Port, page 23-9
• Configuring a Host Statically to Join a Group, page 23-10
• Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave, page 23-10

23-6 OL-8553-06
• Configuring the IGMP Leave Timer, page 23-11

• Configuring TCN-Related Commands, page 23-12
• Configuring the IGMP Snooping Querier, page 23-14
• Disabling IGMP Report Suppression, page 23-15
Default IGMP Snooping Configuration

Table 23-3 shows the default IGMP snooping configuration.
Table 23-3 Default IGMP Snooping Configuration

IGMP snooping Enabled globally and per VLAN
Multicast routers None configured
Multicast router learning (snooping) method PIM-DVMRP
IGMP snooping Immediate Leave Disabled
Static groups None configured
1
TCN flood query count 2
TCN query solicitation Disabled
IGMP snooping querier Disabled
IGMP report suppression Enabled
1. TCN = Topology Change Notification
Enabling or Disabling IGMP Snooping

By default, IGMP snooping is globally enabled on the switch. When globally enabled or disabled, it is
also enabled or disabled in all existing VLAN interfaces. IGMP snooping is by default enabled on all
VLANs, but can be enabled and disabled on a per-VLAN basis.
Global IGMP snooping overrides the VLAN IGMP snooping. If global snooping is disabled, you cannot
enable VLAN snooping. If global snooping is enabled, you can enable or disable VLAN snooping.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to globally enable IGMP snooping on the
switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp snooping Globally enable IGMP snooping in all existing VLAN interfaces.
To globally disable IGMP snooping on all VLAN interfaces, use the no ip igmp snooping global

OL-8553-06 23-7
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id Enable IGMP snooping on the VLAN interface.The VLAN ID range
is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
Note IGMP snooping must be globally enabled before you can
enable VLAN snooping.
To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface, use the no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id global
configuration command for the specified VLAN number.
Setting the Snooping Method

Multicast-capable router ports are added to the forwarding table for every Layer 2 multicast entry. The
switch learns of such ports through one of these methods:
• Snooping on IGMP queries, Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) packets, and Distance Vector
Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) packets
• Listening to Cisco Group Management Protocol (CGMP) packets from other routers
• Statically connecting to a multicast router port with the ip igmp snooping mrouter global
configuration command
You can configure the switch either to snoop on IGMP queries and PIM/DVMRP packets or to listen to
CGMP self-join or proxy-join packets. By default, the switch snoops on PIM/DVMRP packets on all
VLANs. To learn of multicast router ports through only CGMP packets, use the ip igmp snooping vlan
vlan-id mrouter learn cgmp global configuration command. When this command is entered, the router
listens to only CGMP self-join and CGMP proxy-join packets and to no other CGMP packets. To learn
of multicast router ports through only PIM-DVMRP packets, use the ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id
mrouter learn pim-dvmrp global configuration command.
Note If you want to use CGMP as the learning method and no multicast routers in the VLAN are CGMP
proxy-enabled, you must enter the ip cgmp router-only command to dynamically access the router. For
more information, see Chapter 44, “Configuring IP Multicast Routing.”

23-8 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to alter the method in which a VLAN interface
dynamically accesses a multicast router:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter Enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN. The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001
learn {cgmp | pim-dvmrp} and 1006 to 4094.
Specify the multicast router learning method:
• cgmp—Listen for CGMP packets. This method is useful for
reducing control traffic.
• pim-dvmrp—Snoop on IGMP queries and PIM-DVMRP
packets. This is the default.
Step 4 show ip igmp snooping Verify the configuration.
To return to the default learning method, use the no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter learn cgmp
This example shows how to configure IGMP snooping to use CGMP packets as the learning method:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter learn cgmp
Switch(config)# end
Configuring a Multicast Router Port

To add a multicast router port (add a static connection to a multicast router), use the ip igmp snooping
vlan mrouter global configuration command on the switch.
Note Static connections to multicast routers are supported only on switch ports.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable a static connection to a multicast
router:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter Specify the multicast router VLAN ID and the interface to the
interface interface-id multicast router.
• The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
• The interface can be a physical interface or a port channel.
The port-channel range is 1 to 48.

OL-8553-06 23-9
Command Purpose
Step 4 show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id] Verify that IGMP snooping is enabled on the VLAN interface.
To remove a multicast router port from the VLAN, use the no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter
interface interface-id global configuration command.
This example shows how to enable a static connection to a multicast router:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 200 mrouter interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config)# end
Configuring a Host Statically to Join a Group

Hosts or Layer 2 ports normally join multicast groups dynamically, but you can also statically configure
a host on an interface.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to add a Layer 2 port as a member of a multicast
group:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip_address Statically configure a Layer 2 port as a member of a multicast
interface interface-id group:
• vlan-id is the multicast group VLAN ID. The range is 1 to
1001 and 1006 to 4094.
• ip-address is the group IP address.
• interface-id is the member port. It can be a physical
interface or a port channel (1 to 48).
Step 4 show ip igmp snooping groups Verify the member port and the IP address.
To remove the Layer 2 port from the multicast group, use the no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static
mac-address interface interface-id global configuration command.
This example shows how to statically configure a host on a port:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 105 static 224.2.4.12 interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config)# end
Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave

When you enable IGMP Immediate Leave, the switch immediately removes a port when it detects an
IGMP Version 2 leave message on that port. You should only use the Immediate-Leave feature when
there is a single receiver present on every port in the VLAN.

23-10 OL-8553-06
Note Immediate Leave is supported only on IGMP Version 2 hosts.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable IGMP Immediate Leave:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id Enable IGMP Immediate Leave on the VLAN interface.
immediate-leave
Step 4 show ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id Verify that Immediate Leave is enabled on the VLAN interface.
To disable IGMP Immediate Leave on a VLAN, use the no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id
immediate-leave global configuration command.
This example shows how to enable IGMP Immediate Leave on VLAN 130:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 130 immediate-leave
Switch(config)# end
Configuring the IGMP Leave Timer

Follows these guidelines when configuring the IGMP leave timer:
• You can configure the leave time globally or on a per-VLAN basis.
• Configuring the leave time on a VLAN overrides the global setting.
• The default leave time is 1000 milliseconds.
• The IGMP configurable leave time is only supported on hosts running IGMP Version 2.
• The actual leave latency in the network is usually the configured leave time. However, the leave
time might vary around the configured time, depending on real-time CPU load conditions, network
delays and the amount of traffic sent through the interface.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the IGMP configurable-leave timer:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp snooping Configure the IGMP leave timer globally. The range is 100 to
last-member-query-interval time 32768 milliseconds. The default is 1000 seconds.
Step 3 ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id (Optional) Configure the IGMP leave time on the VLAN interface. The
last-member-query-interval time range is 100 to 32768 milliseconds.
Note Configuring the leave time on a VLAN overrides the globally
configured timer.

OL-8553-06 23-11
Command Purpose
Step 5 show ip igmp snooping (Optional) Display the configured IGMP leave time.
To globally reset the IGMP leave timer to the default setting, use the no ip igmp snooping
last-member-query-interval global configuration command.
To remove the configured IGMP leave-time setting from the specified VLAN, use the no ip igmp
snooping vlan vlan-id last-member-query-interval global configuration command.
Configuring TCN-Related Commands

These sections describe how to control flooded multicast traffic during a TCN event:
• Controlling the Multicast Flooding Time After a TCN Event, page 23-12
• Recovering from Flood Mode, page 23-13
• Disabling Multicast Flooding During a TCN Event, page 23-13
Controlling the Multicast Flooding Time After a TCN Event

You can control the time that multicast traffic is flooded after a TCN event by using the ip igmp
snooping tcn flood query count global configuration command. This command configures the number
of general queries for which multicast data traffic is flooded after a TCN event. Some examples of TCN
events are when the client changed its location and the receiver is on same port that was blocked but is
now forwarding, and when a port went down without sending a leave message.
If you set the TCN flood query count to 1 by using the ip igmp snooping tcn flood query count
command, the flooding stops after receiving 1 general query. If you set the count to 7, the flooding until
7 general queries are received. Groups are relearned based on the general queries received during the
TCN event.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the TCN flood query count:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp snooping tcn flood query count Specify the number of IGMP general queries for which the multicast
count traffic is flooded. The range is 1 to 10. By default, the flooding query
count is 2.
Step 4 show ip igmp snooping Verify the TCN settings.
To return to the default flooding query count, use the no ip igmp snooping tcn flood query count global

23-12 OL-8553-06
Recovering from Flood Mode

When a topology change occurs, the spanning-tree root sends a special IGMP leave message (also known
as global leave) with the group multicast address 0.0.0.0. However, when you enable the ip igmp
snooping tcn query solicit global configuration command, the switch sends the global leave message
whether or not it is the spanning-tree root. When the router receives this special leave, it immediately
sends general queries, which expedite the process of recovering from the flood mode during the TCN
event. Leaves are always sent if the switch is the spanning-tree root regardless of this configuration
command. By default, query solicitation is disabled.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the switch to send the global leave
message whether or not it is the spanning-tree root:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit Send an IGMP leave message (global leave) to speed the process of
recovering from the flood mode caused during a TCN event. By
default, query solicitation is disabled.
To return to the default query solicitation, use the no ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit global
Disabling Multicast Flooding During a TCN Event

When the switch receives a TCN, multicast traffic is flooded to all the ports until 2 general queries are
received. If the switch has many ports with attached hosts that are subscribed to different multicast
groups, this flooding might exceed the capacity of the link and cause packet loss. You can use the ip
igmp snooping tcn flood interface configuration command to control this behavior.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable multicast flooding on an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface to be configured, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 3 no ip igmp snooping tcn flood Disable the flooding of multicast traffic during a spanning-tree TCN
event.
By default, multicast flooding is enabled on an interface.
To re-enable multicast flooding on an interface, use the ip igmp snooping tcn flood interface

OL-8553-06 23-13
Configuring the IGMP Snooping Querier

Follow these guidelines when configuring the IGMP snooping querier:
• Configure the VLAN in global configuration mode.
• Configure an IP address on the VLAN interface. When enabled, the IGMP snooping querier uses the
IP address as the query source address.
• If there is no IP address configured on the VLAN interface, the IGMP snooping querier tries to use
the configured global IP address for the IGMP querier. If there is no global IP address specified, the
IGMP querier tries to use the VLAN switch virtual interface (SVI) IP address (if one exists). If there
is no SVI IP address, the switch uses the first available IP address configured on the switch. The
first IP address available appears in the output of the show ip interface privileged EXEC command.
The IGMP snooping querier does not generate an IGMP general query if it cannot find an available
IP address on the switch.
• The IGMP snooping querier supports IGMP Versions 1 and 2.
• When administratively enabled, the IGMP snooping querier moves to the nonquerier state if it
detects the presence of a multicast router in the network.
• When it is administratively enabled, the IGMP snooping querier moves to the operationally disabled
state under these conditions:
– IGMP snooping is disabled in the VLAN.
– PIM is enabled on the SVI of the corresponding VLAN.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the IGMP snooping querier feature in
a VLAN:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp snooping querier Enable the IGMP snooping querier.
Step 3 ip igmp snooping querier address (Optional) Specify an IP address for the IGMP snooping querier. If
ip_address you do not specify an IP address, the querier tries to use the global IP
address configured for the IGMP querier.
Note The IGMP snooping querier does not generate an IGMP
general query if it cannot find an IP address on the switch.
Step 4 ip igmp snooping querier query-interval (Optional) Set the interval between IGMP queriers. The range is 1 to
interval-count 18000 seconds.
Step 5 ip igmp snooping querier tcn query [count (Optional) Set the time between Topology Change Notification
count | interval interval] (TCN) queries. The count range is 1 to 10. The interval range is 1 to
255 seconds.
Step 6 ip igmp snooping querier timer expiry (Optional) Set the length of time until the IGMP querier expires.The
timeout range is 60 to 300 seconds.
Step 7 ip igmp snooping querier version version (Optional) Select the IGMP version number that the querier feature
uses. Select 1 or 2.
Step 9 show ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id (Optional) Verify that the IGMP snooping querier is enabled on the
VLAN interface. The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

23-14 OL-8553-06
Displaying IGMP Snooping Information
This example shows how to set the IGMP snooping querier source address to 10.0.0.64:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping querier 10.0.0.64
Switch(config)# end
This example shows how to set the IGMP snooping querier maximum response time to 25 seconds:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping querier query-interval 25
Switch(config)# end
This example shows how to set the IGMP snooping querier timeout to 60 seconds:
Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping querier timeout expiry 60
Switch(config)# end
This example shows how to set the IGMP snooping querier feature to version 2:
Switch(config)# no ip igmp snooping querier version 2
Switch(config)# end
Disabling IGMP Report Suppression
Note IGMP report suppression is supported only when the multicast query has IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports.
This feature is not supported when the query includes IGMPv3 reports.
IGMP report suppression is enabled by default. When it is enabled, the switch forwards only one IGMP
report per multicast router query. When report suppression is disabled, all IGMP reports are forwarded
to the multicast routers.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable IGMP report suppression:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no ip igmp snooping report-suppression Disable IGMP report suppression.
Step 4 show ip igmp snooping Verify that IGMP report suppression is disabled.
To re-enable IGMP report suppression, use the ip igmp snooping report-suppression global

You can display IGMP snooping information for dynamically learned and statically configured router
ports and VLAN interfaces. You can also display MAC address multicast entries for a VLAN configured
for IGMP snooping.

OL-8553-06 23-15
To display IGMP snooping information, use one or more of the privileged EXEC commands in
Table 23-4.
Table 23-4 Commands for Displaying IGMP Snooping Information
Command Purpose
show ip igmp snooping [vlan vlan-id] Display the snooping configuration information for all VLANs on the
switch or for a specified VLAN.
(Optional) Enter vlan vlan-id to display information for a single VLAN.
The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
show ip igmp snooping groups [count |dynamic Display multicast table information for the switch or about a specific
[count] | user [count]] parameter:
• count—Display the total number of entries for the specified
command options instead of the actual entries.
• dynamic—Display entries learned through IGMP snooping.
• user—Display only the user-configured multicast entries.
show ip igmp snooping groups vlan vlan-id Display multicast table information for a multicast VLAN or about a
[ip_address | count | dynamic [count] | specific parameter for the VLAN:
user[count]]
• vlan-id—The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
• count—Display the total number of entries for the specified
command options instead of the actual entries.
• dynamic—Display entries learned through IGMP snooping.
• ip_address—Display characteristics of the multicast group with the
specified group IP address.
• user—Display only the user-configured multicast entries.
show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id] Display information on dynamically learned and manually configured
multicast router interfaces.
Note When you enable IGMP snooping, the switch automatically
learns the interface to which a multicast router is connected.
These are dynamically learned interfaces.

show ip igmp snooping querier [vlan vlan-id] Display information about the IP address and receiving port for the
most-recently received IGMP query messages in the VLAN.
show ip igmp snooping querier [vlan vlan-id] Display information about the IP address and receiving port of the
detail most-recently received IGMP query message in the VLAN and the
configuration and operational state of the IGMP snooping querier in the
VLAN.
For more information about the keywords and options in these commands, see the command reference
for this release.

23-16 OL-8553-06
Understanding Multicast VLAN Registration

Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications using wide-scale deployment of
multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring-based service-provider network (for example, the broadcast of
multiple television channels over a service-provider network). MVR allows a subscriber on a port to
subscribe and unsubscribe to a multicast stream on the network-wide multicast VLAN. It allows the
single multicast VLAN to be shared in the network while subscribers remain in separate VLANs. MVR
provides the ability to continuously send multicast streams in the multicast VLAN, but to isolate the
streams from the subscriber VLANs for bandwidth and security reasons.
MVR assumes that subscriber ports subscribe and unsubscribe (join and leave) these multicast streams
by sending out IGMP join and leave messages. These messages can originate from an IGMP
Version-2-compatible host with an Ethernet connection. Although MVR operates on the underlying
mechanism of IGMP snooping, the two features operate independently of each other. One can be enabled
or disabled without affecting the behavior of the other feature. However, if IGMP snooping and MVR
are both enabled, MVR reacts only to join and leave messages from multicast groups configured under
MVR. Join and leave messages from all other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping.
The switch CPU identifies the MVR IP multicast streams and their associated IP multicast group in the
switch forwarding table, intercepts the IGMP messages, and modifies the forwarding table to include or
remove the subscriber as a receiver of the multicast stream, even though the receivers might be in a
different VLAN from the source. This forwarding behavior selectively allows traffic to cross between
different VLANs.
You can set the switch for compatible or dynamic mode of MVR operation:
• In compatible mode, multicast data received by MVR hosts is forwarded to all MVR data ports,
regardless of MVR host membership on those ports. The multicast data is forwarded only to those
receiver ports that MVR hosts have joined, either by IGMP reports or by MVR static configuration.
IGMP reports received from MVR hosts are never forwarded from MVR data ports that were
configured in the switch.
• In dynamic mode, multicast data received by MVR hosts on the switch is forwarded from only those
MVR data and client ports that the MVR hosts have joined, either by IGMP reports or by MVR static
configuration. Any IGMP reports received from MVR hosts are also forwarded from all the MVR
data ports in the switch. This eliminates using unnecessary bandwidth on MVR data port links,
which occurs when the switch runs in compatible mode.
Only Layer 2 ports take part in MVR. You must configure ports as MVR receiver ports. Only one MVR
multicast VLAN per switch is supported.
Using MVR in a Multicast Television Application

In a multicast television application, a PC or a television with a set-top box can receive the multicast
stream. Multiple set-top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port, which is a switch port
configured as an MVR receiver port. Figure 23-3 is an example configuration. DHCP assigns an IP
address to the set-top box or the PC. When a subscriber selects a channel, the set-top box or PC sends
an IGMP report to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast. If the IGMP report matches one of the
configured IP multicast group addresses, the switch CPU modifies the hardware address table to include
this receiver port and VLAN as a forwarding destination of the specified multicast stream when it is
received from the multicast VLAN. Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the
multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports.

OL-8553-06 23-17
Figure 23-3 Multicast VLAN Registration Example
Multicast VLAN Cisco router
Multicast
server
SP
Switch B
SP
SP
SP SP
SP
SP1 SP2
Multicast Multicast
data data
Switch A
RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4 RP5 RP6 RP7

Customer
premises Hub
IGMP join
Set-top box Set-top box

TV
data
PC
101364
TV TV
RP = Receiver Port Note: All source ports belong to
SP = Source Port the multicast VLAN.
When a subscriber changes channels or turns off the television, the set-top box sends an IGMP leave
message for the multicast stream. The switch CPU sends a MAC-based general query through the
receiver port VLAN. If there is another set-top box in the VLAN still subscribing to this group, that
set-top box must respond within the maximum response time specified in the query. If the CPU does not
receive a response, it eliminates the receiver port as a forwarding destination for this group.
Without Immediate Leave, when the switch receives an IGMP leave message from a subscriber on a
receiver port, it sends out an IGMP query on that port and waits for IGMP group membership reports. If
no reports are received in a configured time period, the receiver port is removed from multicast group
membership. With Immediate Leave, an IGMP query is not sent from the receiver port on which the
IGMP leave was received. As soon as the leave message is received, the receiver port is removed from
multicast group membership, which speeds up leave latency. Enable the Immediate-Leave feature only
on receiver ports to which a single receiver device is connected.
MVR eliminates the need to duplicate television-channel multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN.
Multicast traffic for all channels is only sent around the VLAN trunk once—only on the multicast
VLAN. The IGMP leave and join messages are in the VLAN to which the subscriber port is assigned.

23-18 OL-8553-06
Configuring MVR
These messages dynamically register for streams of multicast traffic in the multicast VLAN on the
Layer 3 device. Switch B. The access layer switch, Switch A, modifies the forwarding behavior to allow
the traffic to be forwarded from the multicast VLAN to the subscriber port in a different VLAN,
selectively allowing traffic to cross between two VLANs.
IGMP reports are sent to the same IP multicast group address as the multicast data. The Switch A CPU
must capture all IGMP join and leave messages from receiver ports and forward them to the multicast
VLAN of the source (uplink) port, based on the MVR mode.
Configuring MVR
• Default MVR Configuration, page 23-19
• MVR Configuration Guidelines and Limitations, page 23-19
• Configuring MVR Global Parameters, page 23-20
• Configuring MVR Interfaces, page 23-21
Default MVR Configuration

Table 23-5 shows the default MVR configuration.
Table 23-5 Default MVR Configuration

MVR Disabled globally and per interface
Multicast addresses None configured
Query response time 0.5 second
Multicast VLAN VLAN 1
Mode Compatible
Interface (per port) default Neither a receiver nor a source port
Immediate Leave Disabled on all ports
MVR Configuration Guidelines and Limitations

Follow these guidelines when configuring MVR:
• Receiver ports can only be access ports; they cannot be trunk ports. Receiver ports on a switch can
be in different VLANs, but should not belong to the multicast VLAN.
• The maximum number of multicast entries (MVR group addresses) that can be configured on a
switch (that is, the maximum number of television channels that can be received) is 256.
• MVR multicast data received in the source VLAN and leaving from receiver ports has its
time-to-live (TTL) decremented by 1 in the switch.

OL-8553-06 23-19
Configuring MVR
• Because MVR on the switch uses IP multicast addresses instead of MAC multicast addresses,
aliased IP multicast addresses are allowed on the switch. However, if the switch is interoperating
with Catalyst 3550 or Catalyst 3500 XL switches, you should not configure IP addresses that alias
between themselves or with the reserved IP multicast addresses (in the range 224.0.0.xxx).
• Do not configure MVR on private VLAN ports.
• MVR is not supported when multicast routing is enabled on a switch. If you enable multicast routing
and a multicast routing protocol while MVR is enabled, MVR is disabled, and you receive a warning
message. If you try to enable MVR while multicast routing and a multicast routing protocol are
enabled, the operation to enable MVR is cancelled, and you receive an error message.
• MVR can coexist with IGMP snooping on a switch.
• MVR data received on an MVR receiver port is not forwarded to MVR source ports.
• MVR does not support IGMPv3 messages.
Configuring MVR Global Parameters

You do not need to set the optional MVR parameters if you choose to use the default settings. If you do
want to change the default parameters (except for the MVR VLAN), you must first enable MVR.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure MVR parameters:
Command Purpose
Step 2 mvr Enable MVR on the switch.
Step 3 mvr group ip-address [count] Configure an IP multicast address on the switch or use the count parameter to
configure a contiguous series of MVR group addresses (the range for count is
1 to 256; the default is 1). Any multicast data sent to this address is sent to all
source ports on the switch and all receiver ports that have elected to receive
data on that multicast address. Each multicast address would correspond to
one television channel.
Step 4 mvr querytime value (Optional) Define the maximum time to wait for IGMP report memberships
on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership.
The value is in units of tenths of a second. The range is 1 to 100, and the
default is 5 tenths or one-half second.
Step 5 mvr vlan vlan-id (Optional) Specify the VLAN in which multicast data is received; all source
ports must belong to this VLAN. The VLAN range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to
4094. The default is VLAN 1.
Step 6 mvr mode {dynamic | compatible} (Optional) Specify the MVR mode of operation:
• dynamic—Allows dynamic MVR membership on source ports.
• compatible—Is compatible with Catalyst 3500 XL and Catalyst 2900 XL
switches and does not support IGMP dynamic joins on source ports.
The default is compatible mode.

23-20 OL-8553-06
Configuring MVR
Command Purpose
Step 8 show mvr or show mvr members Verify the configuration.
startup-config
To return the switch to its default settings, use the no mvr [mode | group ip-address | querytime | vlan]
This example shows how to enable MVR, configure the group address, set the query time to 1 second
(10 tenths), specify the MVR multicast VLAN as VLAN 22, and set the MVR mode as dynamic:
Switch(config)# mvr
Switch(config)# mvr group 228.1.23.4
Switch(config)# mvr querytime 10
Switch(config)# mvr vlan 22
Switch(config)# mvr mode dynamic
Switch(config)# end
You can use the show mvr members privileged EXEC command to verify the MVR multicast group
addresses on the switch.
Configuring MVR Interfaces

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure Layer 2 MVR interfaces:
Command Purpose
Step 2 mvr Enable MVR on the switch.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the Layer 2 port to configure, and enter interface configuration
mode.
Step 4 mvr type {source | receiver} Configure an MVR port as one of these:
• source—Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast data as
source ports. Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports.
All source ports on a switch belong to the single multicast VLAN.
• receiver—Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port
and should only receive multicast data. It does not receive data unless it
becomes a member of the multicast group, either statically or by using
IGMP leave and join messages. Receiver ports cannot belong to the
multicast VLAN.
The default configuration is as a non-MVR port. If you attempt to configure
a non-MVR port with MVR characteristics, the operation fails.

OL-8553-06 23-21
Configuring MVR
Command Purpose
Step 5 mvr vlan vlan-id group [ip-address] (Optional) Statically configure a port to receive multicast traffic sent to the
multicast VLAN and the IP multicast address. A port statically configured
as a member of a group remains a member of the group until statically
removed.
Note In compatible mode, this command applies to only receiver ports. In
dynamic mode, it applies to receiver ports and source ports.
Receiver ports can also dynamically join multicast groups by using IGMP
join and leave messages.
Step 6 mvr immediate (Optional) Enable the Immediate-Leave feature of MVR on the port.
Note This command applies to only receiver ports and should only be
enabled on receiver ports to which a single receiver device is
connected.
Step 8 show mvr Verify the configuration.
show mvr interface
or
show mvr members
To return the interface to its default settings, use the no mvr [type | immediate | vlan vlan-id | group]
interface configuration commands.
This example shows how to configure a port as a receiver port, statically configure the port to receive
multicast traffic sent to the multicast group address, configure Immediate Leave on the port, and verify
the results.
Switch(config)# mvr
Switch(config-if)# mvr type receiver
Switch(config-if)# mvr vlan 22 group 228.1.23.4
Switch(config-if)# mvr immediate
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show mvr interface
Port Type Status Immediate Leave
---- ---- ------- ---------------
Gi0/2 RECEIVER ACTIVE/DOWN ENABLED

23-22 OL-8553-06
Displaying MVR Information
Displaying MVR Information

You can display MVR information for the switch or for a specified interface. Beginning in privileged
EXEC mode, use the commands in Table 23-6 to display MVR configuration:
Table 23-6 Commands for Displaying MVR Information
Command Purpose
show mvr Displays MVR status and values for the switch—whether MVR is enabled or disabled,
the multicast VLAN, the maximum (256) and current (0 through 256) number of
multicast groups, the query response time, and the MVR mode.
show mvr interface [interface-id] Displays all MVR interfaces and their MVR configurations.
[members [vlan vlan-id]]
When a specific interface is entered, displays this information:
• Type—Receiver or Source
• Status—One of these:
– Active means the port is part of a VLAN.
– Up/Down means that the port is forwarding or nonforwarding.
– Inactive means that the port is not part of any VLAN.
• Immediate Leave—Enabled or Disabled
If the members keyword is entered, displays all multicast group members on this port or,
if a VLAN identification is entered, all multicast group members on the VLAN. The
VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
show mvr members [ip-address] Displays all receiver and source ports that are members of any IP multicast group or the
specified IP multicast group IP address.
Configuring IGMP Filtering and Throttling

In some environments, for example, metropolitan or multiple-dwelling unit (MDU) installations, you
might want to control the set of multicast groups to which a user on a switch port can belong. You can
control the distribution of multicast services, such as IP/TV, based on some type of subscription or
service plan. You might also want to limit the number of multicast groups to which a user on a switch
port can belong.
With the IGMP filtering feature, you can filter multicast joins on a per-port basis by configuring IP
multicast profiles and associating them with individual switch ports. An IGMP profile can contain one
or more multicast groups and specifies whether access to the group is permitted or denied. If an IGMP
profile denying access to a multicast group is applied to a switch port, the IGMP join report requesting
the stream of IP multicast traffic is dropped, and the port is not allowed to receive IP multicast traffic
from that group. If the filtering action permits access to the multicast group, the IGMP report from the
port is forwarded for normal processing. You can also set the maximum number of IGMP groups that a
Layer 2 interface can join.
IGMP filtering controls only group-specific query and membership reports, including join and leave
reports. It does not control general IGMP queries. IGMP filtering has no relationship with the function
that directs the forwarding of IP multicast traffic. The filtering feature operates in the same manner
whether CGMP or MVR is used to forward the multicast traffic.

OL-8553-06 23-23
IGMP filtering is applicable only to the dynamic learning of IP multicast group addresses, not static
configuration.
With the IGMP throttling feature, you can set the maximum number of IGMP groups that a Layer 2
interface can join. If the maximum number of IGMP groups is set, the IGMP snooping forwarding table
contains the maximum number of entries, and the interface receives an IGMP join report, you can
configure an interface to drop the IGMP report or to replace the randomly selected multicast entry with
the received IGMP report.
Note IGMPv3 join and leave messages are not supported on switches running IGMP filtering.

• Default IGMP Filtering and Throttling Configuration, page 23-24
• Configuring IGMP Profiles, page 23-24 (optional)
• Applying IGMP Profiles, page 23-26 (optional)
• Setting the Maximum Number of IGMP Groups, page 23-26 (optional)
• Configuring the IGMP Throttling Action, page 23-27 (optional)
Default IGMP Filtering and Throttling Configuration

Table 23-7 shows the default IGMP filtering configuration.
Table 23-7 Default IGMP Filtering Configuration

IGMP filters None applied
IGMP maximum number of IGMP groups No maximum set
IGMP profiles None defined
IGMP profile action Deny the range addresses
When the maximum number of groups is in forwarding table, the default IGMP throttling action is to
deny the IGMP report. For configuration guidelines, see the “Configuring the IGMP Throttling Action”
Configuring IGMP Profiles

To configure an IGMP profile, use the ip igmp profile global configuration command with a profile
number to create an IGMP profile and to enter IGMP profile configuration mode. From this mode, you
can specify the parameters of the IGMP profile to be used for filtering IGMP join requests from a port.
When you are in IGMP profile configuration mode, you can create the profile by using these commands:
• deny: Specifies that matching addresses are denied; this is the default.
• exit: Exits from igmp-profile configuration mode.
• no: Negates a command or returns to its defaults.

23-24 OL-8553-06
• permit: Specifies that matching addresses are permitted.

• range: Specifies a range of IP addresses for the profile. You can enter a single IP address or a range
with a start and an end address.
The default is for the switch to have no IGMP profiles configured. When a profile is configured, if
neither the permit nor deny keyword is included, the default is to deny access to the range of IP
addresses.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create an IGMP profile:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp profile profile number Assign a number to the profile you are configuring, and enter IGMP
profile configuration mode. The profile umber range is 1 to
4294967295.
Step 3 permit | deny (Optional) Set the action to permit or deny access to the IP multicast
address. If no action is configured, the default for the profile is to deny
access.
Step 4 range ip multicast address Enter the IP multicast address or range of IP multicast addresses to
which access is being controlled. If entering a range, enter the low IP
multicast address, a space, and the high IP multicast address.
You can use the range command multiple times to enter multiple
addresses or ranges of addresses.
Step 6 show ip igmp profile profile number Verify the profile configuration.
To delete a profile, use the no ip igmp profile profile number global configuration command.
To delete an IP multicast address or range of IP multicast addresses, use the no range ip multicast
address IGMP profile configuration command.
This example shows how to create IGMP profile 4 allowing access to the single IP multicast address and
how to verify the configuration. If the action was to deny (the default), it would not appear in the show
ip igmp profile output display.
Switch(config)# ip igmp profile 4
Switch(config-igmp-profile)# permit
Switch(config-igmp-profile)# range 229.9.9.0
Switch(config-igmp-profile)# end
Switch# show ip igmp profile 4
IGMP Profile 4
permit
range 229.9.9.0 229.9.9.0

OL-8553-06 23-25
Applying IGMP Profiles

To control access as defined in an IGMP profile, use the ip igmp filter interface configuration command
to apply the profile to the appropriate interfaces. You can apply IGMP profiles only to Layer 2 access
ports; you cannot apply IGMP profiles to routed ports or SVIs. You cannot apply profiles to ports that
belong to an EtherChannel port group. You can apply a profile to multiple interfaces, but each interface
can have only one profile applied to it.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to apply an IGMP profile to a switch port:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the physical interface, and enter interface configuration mode.
The interface must be a Layer 2 port that does not belong to an
EtherChannel port group.
Step 3 ip igmp filter profile number Apply the specified IGMP profile to the interface. The range is 1 to
4294967295.
Step 5 show running-config interface Verify the configuration.
interface-id
To remove a profile from an interface, use the no ip igmp filter profile number interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to apply IGMP profile 4 to a port:
Switch(config-if)# ip igmp filter 4
Setting the Maximum Number of IGMP Groups

You can set the maximum number of IGMP groups that a Layer 2 interface can join by using the ip igmp
max-groups interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to set the maximum
back to the default, which is no limit.
This restriction can be applied to Layer 2 ports only; you cannot set a maximum number of IGMP groups
on routed ports or SVIs. You also can use this command on a logical EtherChannel interface but cannot
use it on ports that belong to an EtherChannel port group.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the maximum number of IGMP groups in
the forwarding table:
Command Purpose
mode. The interface can be a Layer 2 port that does not belong to an
EtherChannel group or a EtherChannel interface.

23-26 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip igmp max-groups number Set the maximum number of IGMP groups that the interface can join.
The range is 0 to 4294967294. The default is to have no maximum set.
interface-id
To remove the maximum group limitation and return to the default of no maximum, use the no ip igmp
max-groups interface configuration command.
This example shows how to limit to 25 the number of IGMP groups that a port can join.
Switch(config-if)# ip igmp max-groups 25
Configuring the IGMP Throttling Action

After you set the maximum number of IGMP groups that a Layer 2 interface can join, you can configure
an interface to replace the existing group with the new group for which the IGMP report was received
by using the ip igmp max-groups action replace interface configuration command. Use the no form of
this command to return to the default, which is to drop the IGMP join report.
Follow these guidelines when configuring the IGMP throttling action:
• This restriction can be applied only to Layer 2 ports. You can use this command on a logical
EtherChannel interface but cannot use it on ports that belong to an EtherChannel port group.
• When the maximum group limitation is set to the default (no maximum), entering the ip igmp
max-groups action {deny | replace} command has no effect.
• If you configure the throttling action and set the maximum group limitation after an interface has
added multicast entries to the forwarding table, the forwarding-table entries are either aged out or
removed, depending on the throttling action.
– If you configure the throttling action as deny, the entries that were previously in the forwarding
table are not removed but are aged out. After these entries are aged out and the maximum
number of entries is in the forwarding table, the switch drops the next IGMP report received on
the interface.
– If you configure the throttling action as replace, the entries that were previously in the
forwarding table are removed. When the maximum number of entries is in the forwarding table,
the switch replaces a randomly selected entry with the received IGMP report.
To prevent the switch from removing the forwarding-table entries, you can configure the IGMP
throttling action before an interface adds entries to the forwarding table.

OL-8553-06 23-27
Displaying IGMP Filtering and Throttling Configuration
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the throttling action when the
maximum number of entries is in the forwarding table:
Command Purpose
configuration mode. The interface can be a Layer 2 port that does not
belong to an EtherChannel group or an EtherChannel interface. The
interface cannot be a trunk port.
Step 3 ip igmp max-groups action {deny | When an interface receives an IGMP report and the maximum number
replace} of entries is in the forwarding table, specify the action that the interface
takes:
• deny—Drop the report.
• replace—Replace the existing group with the new group for which
the IGMP report was received.
interface-id
To return to the default action of dropping the report, use the no ip igmp max-groups action interface
Displaying IGMP Filtering and Throttling Configuration

You can display IGMP profile characteristics, and you can display the IGMP profile and maximum
group configuration for all interfaces on the switch or for a specified interface. You can also display the
IGMP throttling configuration for all interfaces on the switch or for a specified interface.
Use the privileged EXEC commands in Table 23-8 to display IGMP filtering and throttling
configuration:
Table 23-8 Commands for Displaying IGMP Filtering and Throttling Configuration
Command Purpose
show ip igmp profile [profile Displays the specified IGMP profile or all the IGMP profiles defined on the switch.
number]
show running-config [interface Displays the configuration of the specified interface or the configuration of all interfaces
interface-id] on the switch, including (if configured) the maximum number of IGMP groups to which
an interface can belong and the IGMP profile applied to the interface.

23-28 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 24
Configuring Port-Based Traffic Control
This chapter describes how to configure the port-based traffic control features on the Catalyst 3560
switch.

• Configuring Storm Control, page 24-1
• Configuring Protected Ports, page 24-6
• Configuring Port Blocking, page 24-7
• Configuring Port Security, page 24-8
• Displaying Port-Based Traffic Control Settings, page 24-19
Configuring Storm Control

These sections contain this conceptual and configuration information:
• Understanding Storm Control, page 24-1
• Default Storm Control Configuration, page 24-3
• Configuring Storm Control and Threshold Levels, page 24-3
• Configuring Small-Frame Arrival Rate, page 24-5
Understanding Storm Control

Storm control prevents traffic on a LAN from being disrupted by a broadcast, multicast, or unicast storm
on one of the physical interfaces. A LAN storm occurs when packets flood the LAN, creating excessive
traffic and degrading network performance. Errors in the protocol-stack implementation, mistakes in
network configurations, or users issuing a denial-of-service attack can cause a storm.
Storm control (or traffic suppression) monitors packets passing from an interface to the switching bus
and determines if the packet is unicast, multicast, or broadcast. The switch counts the number of packets
of a specified type received within the 1-second time interval and compares the measurement with a
predefined suppression-level threshold.

OL-8553-06 24-1
Chapter 24 Configuring Port-Based Traffic Control
Storm control uses one of these methods to measure traffic activity:

• Bandwidth as a percentage of the total available bandwidth of the port that can be used by the
broadcast, multicast, or unicast traffic
• Traffic rate in packets per second at which broadcast, multicast, or unicast packets are received
(Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later).
• Traffic rate in bits per second at which broadcast, multicast, or unicast packets are received (Cisco
IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later).
• Traffic rate in packets per second and for small frames. This feature is enabled globally. The
threshold for small frames is configured for each interface. (Cisco IOS Release 12.2(44)SE or later)
With each method, the port blocks traffic when the rising threshold is reached. The port remains blocked
until the traffic rate drops below the falling threshold (if one is specified) and then resumes normal
forwarding. If the falling suppression level is not specified, the switch blocks all traffic until the traffic
rate drops below the rising suppression level. In general, the higher the level, the less effective the
protection against broadcast storms.
Note When the storm control threshold for multicast traffic is reached, all multicast traffic except control
traffic, such as bridge protocol data unit (BDPU) and Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) frames, are
blocked. However, the switch does not differentiate between routing updates, such as OSPF, and regular
multicast data traffic, so both types of traffic are blocked.
The graph in Figure 24-1 shows broadcast traffic patterns on an interface over a given period of time.
The example can also be applied to multicast and unicast traffic. In this example, the broadcast traffic
being forwarded exceeded the configured threshold between time intervals T1 and T2 and between T4
and T5. When the amount of specified traffic exceeds the threshold, all traffic of that kind is dropped for
the next time period. Therefore, broadcast traffic is blocked during the intervals following T2 and T5.
At the next time interval (for example, T3), if broadcast traffic does not exceed the threshold, it is again
forwarded.
Figure 24-1 Broadcast Storm Control Example
Forwarded traffic
Blocked traffic
Total
number of
Threshold
broadcast
packets
or bytes
46651
0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Time
The combination of the storm-control suppression level and the 1-second time interval controls the way
the storm control algorithm works. A higher threshold allows more packets to pass through. A threshold
value of 100 percent means that no limit is placed on the traffic. A value of 0.0 means that all broadcast,
multicast, or unicast traffic on that port is blocked.

24-2 OL-8553-06
Note Because packets do not arrive at uniform intervals, the 1-second time interval during which traffic
activity is measured can affect the behavior of storm control.
You use the storm-control interface configuration commands to set the threshold value for each traffic
type.
Default Storm Control Configuration

By default, unicast, broadcast, and multicast storm control are disabled on the switch interfaces; that is,
the suppression level is 100 percent.
Configuring Storm Control and Threshold Levels

You configure storm control on a port and enter the threshold level that you want to be used for a
particular type of traffic.
However, because of hardware limitations and the way in which packets of different sizes are counted,
threshold percentages are approximations. Depending on the sizes of the packets making up the
incoming traffic, the actual enforced threshold might differ from the configured level by several
percentage points.
Note Storm control is supported on physical interfaces. You can also configure storm control on an
EtherChannel. When storm control is configured on an EtherChannel, the storm control settings
propagate to the EtherChannel physical interfaces.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to storm control and threshold levels:
Command Purpose
configuration mode.

OL-8553-06 24-3
Command Purpose
Step 3 storm-control {broadcast | multicast | Configure broadcast, multicast, or unicast storm control. By
unicast} level {level [level-low] | bps bps default, storm control is disabled.
[bps-low] | pps pps [pps-low]}
• For level, specify the rising threshold level for broadcast,
multicast, or unicast traffic as a percentage (up to two decimal
places) of the bandwidth. The port blocks traffic when the
rising threshold is reached. The range is 0.00 to 100.00.
• (Optional) For level-low, specify the falling threshold level as
a percentage (up to two decimal places) of the bandwidth. This
value must be less than or equal to the rising suppression
value. The port forwards traffic when traffic drops below this
level. If you do not configure a falling suppression level, it is
set to the rising suppression level. The range is 0.00 to 100.00.
If you set the threshold to the maximum value (100 percent),
no limit is placed on the traffic. If you set the threshold to 0.0,
all broadcast, multicast, and unicast traffic on that port is
blocked.
• For bps bps, specify the rising threshold level for broadcast,
multicast, or unicast traffic in bits per second (up to one
decimal place). The port blocks traffic when the rising
threshold is reached. The range is 0.0 to 10000000000.0.
• (Optional) For bps-low, specify the falling threshold level in
bits per second (up to one decimal place). It can be less than or
equal to the rising threshold level. The port forwards traffic
when traffic drops below this level. The range is 0.0 to
10000000000.0.
• For pps pps, specify the rising threshold level for broadcast,
multicast, or unicast traffic in packets per second (up to one
decimal place). The port blocks traffic when the rising
threshold is reached. The range is 0.0 to 10000000000.0.
• (Optional) For pps-low, specify the falling threshold level in
packets per second (up to one decimal place). It can be less
than or equal to the rising threshold level. The port forwards
traffic when traffic drops below this level. The range is 0.0 to
10000000000.0.
For BPS and PPS settings, you can use metric suffixes such as k,
m, and g for large number thresholds.
Step 4 storm-control action {shutdown | trap} Specify the action to be taken when a storm is detected. The default
is to filter out the traffic and not to send traps.
• Select the shutdown keyword to error-disable the port during
a storm.
• Select the trap keyword to generate an SNMP trap when a
storm is detected.

24-4 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 6 show storm-control [interface-id] [broadcast | Verify the storm control suppression levels set on the interface for
multicast | unicast] the specified traffic type. If you do not enter a traffic type,
broadcast storm control settings are displayed.
To disable storm control, use the no storm-control {broadcast | multicast | unicast} level interface
This example shows how to enable unicast storm control on a port with an 87-percent rising suppression
level and a 65-percent falling suppression level:
Switch(config-if)# storm-control unicast level 87 65
This example shows how to enable broadcast address storm control on a port to a level of 20 percent.
When the broadcast traffic exceeds the configured level of 20 percent of the total available bandwidth
of the port within the traffic-storm-control interval, the switch drops all broadcast traffic until the end
of the traffic-storm-control interval:
Switch(config-if)# storm-control broadcast level 20
Configuring Small-Frame Arrival Rate

Incoming VLAN-tagged packets smaller than 67 bytes are considered small frames. They are forwarded
by the switch, but they do not cause the switch storm-control counters to increment. In Cisco IOS
Release 12.2(44)SE and later, you can configure a port to be error disabled if small frames arrive at a
specified rate (threshold).
You globally enable the small-frame arrival feature on the switch and then configure the small-frame
threshold for packets on each interface. Packets smaller than the minimum size and arriving at a
specified rate (the threshold) are dropped since the port is error disabled.
If the errdisable recovery cause small-frame global configuration command is entered, the port is
re-enabled after a specified time. (You specify the recovery time by using errdisable recovery global
configuration command.)
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the threshold level for each
interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 errdisable detect cause small-frame Enable the small-frame rate-arrival feature on the switch.
Step 3 errdisable recovery interval interval (Optional) Specify the time to recover from the specified
Step 4 errdisable recovery cause small-frame (Optional) Configure the recovery time for error-disabled ports to
be automatically re-enabled after they are error disabled by the
arrival of small frames

OL-8553-06 24-5
Configuring Protected Ports
Command Purpose
Step 5 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface to be
configured.
Step 6 small violation-rate pps Configure the threshold rate for the interface to drop incoming
packets and error disable the port. The range is 1 to 10,000 packets
per second (pps)
Step 8 show interfaces interface-id Verify the configuration.
This example shows how to enable the small-frame arrival-rate feature, configure the port recovery time,
and configure the threshold for error disabling a port:
Switch# errdisable detect cause small-frame
Switch# errdisable recovery cause small-frame
Switch(config-if)# small-frame violation rate 10000
Configuring Protected Ports

Some applications require that no traffic be forwarded at Layer 2 between ports on the same switch so
that one neighbor does not see the traffic generated by another neighbor. In such an environment, the
use of protected ports ensures that there is no exchange of unicast, broadcast, or multicast traffic between
these ports on the switch.
Protected ports have these features:
• A protected port does not forward any traffic (unicast, multicast, or broadcast) to any other port that
is also a protected port. Data traffic cannot be forwarded between protected ports at Layer 2; only
control traffic, such as PIM packets, is forwarded because these packets are processed by the CPU
and forwarded in software. All data traffic passing between protected ports must be forwarded
through a Layer 3 device.
• Forwarding behavior between a protected port and a nonprotected port proceeds as usual.
• Default Protected Port Configuration, page 24-6
• Protected Port Configuration Guidelines, page 24-7
• Configuring a Protected Port, page 24-7
Default Protected Port Configuration

The default is to have no protected ports defined.

24-6 OL-8553-06
Configuring Port Blocking
Protected Port Configuration Guidelines

You can configure protected ports on a physical interface (for example, Gigabit Ethernet port 1) or an
EtherChannel group (for example, port-channel 5). When you enable protected ports for a port channel,
it is enabled for all ports in the port-channel group.
Do not configure a private-VLAN port as a protected port. Do not configure a protected port as a
private-VLAN port. A private-VLAN isolated port does not forward traffic to other isolated ports or
community ports. For more information about private VLANs, see Chapter 14, “Configuring Private
VLANs.”
Configuring a Protected Port

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define a port as a protected port:
Command Purpose
configuration mode.
Step 3 switchport protected Configure the interface to be a protected port.
Step 5 show interfaces interface-id switchport Verify your entries.
To disable protected port, use the no switchport protected interface configuration command.
This example shows how to configure a port as a protected port:
Switch(config-if)# switchport protected
Configuring Port Blocking

By default, the switch floods packets with unknown destination MAC addresses out of all ports. If
unknown unicast and multicast traffic is forwarded to a protected port, there could be security issues. To
prevent unknown unicast or multicast traffic from being forwarded from one port to another, you can
block a port (protected or nonprotected) from flooding unknown unicast or multicast packets to other
ports.
• Default Port Blocking Configuration, page 24-8
• Blocking Flooded Traffic on an Interface, page 24-8

OL-8553-06 24-7
Configuring Port Security
Default Port Blocking Configuration

The default is to not block flooding of unknown multicast and unicast traffic out of a port, but to flood
these packets to all ports.
Blocking Flooded Traffic on an Interface
Note The interface can be a physical interface or an EtherChannel group. When you block multicast or unicast
traffic for a port channel, it is blocked on all ports in the port-channel group.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable the flooding of multicast and unicast
packets out of an interface:
Command Purpose
configuration mode.
Step 3 switchport block multicast Block unknown multicast forwarding out of the port.
Step 4 switchport block unicast Block unknown unicast forwarding out of the port.
Step 6 show interfaces interface-id switchport Verify your entries.
To return the interface to the default condition where no traffic is blocked and normal forwarding occurs
on the port, use the no switchport block {multicast | unicast} interface configuration commands.
This example shows how to block unicast and multicast flooding on a port:
Switch(config-if)# switchport block multicast
Switch(config-if)# switchport block unicast

You can use the port security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC
addresses of the stations allowed to access the port. When you assign secure MAC addresses to a secure
port, the port does not forward packets with source addresses outside the group of defined addresses. If
you limit the number of secure MAC addresses to one and assign a single secure MAC address, the
workstation attached to that port is assured the full bandwidth of the port.
If a port is configured as a secure port and the maximum number of secure MAC addresses is reached,
when the MAC address of a station attempting to access the port is different from any of the identified
secure MAC addresses, a security violation occurs. Also, if a station with a secure MAC address
configured or learned on one secure port attempts to access another secure port, a violation is flagged.

24-8 OL-8553-06
These sections contain this conceptual and configuration information:

• Understanding Port Security, page 24-9
• Default Port Security Configuration, page 24-11
• Port Security Configuration Guidelines, page 24-11
• Enabling and Configuring Port Security, page 24-13
• Enabling and Configuring Port Security Aging, page 24-17
• Port Security and Private VLANs, page 24-18
Understanding Port Security

• Secure MAC Addresses, page 24-9
• Security Violations, page 24-10
Secure MAC Addresses

You configure the maximum number of secure addresses allowed on a port by using the switchport
port-security maximum value interface configuration command.
Note If you try to set the maximum value to a number less than the number of secure addresses already
configured on an interface, the command is rejected.
The switch supports these types of secure MAC addresses:

• Static secure MAC addresses—These are manually configured by using the switchport
port-security mac-address mac-address interface configuration command, stored in the address
table, and added to the switch running configuration.
• Dynamic secure MAC addresses—These are dynamically configured, stored only in the address
table, and removed when the switch restarts.
• Sticky secure MAC addresses—These can be dynamically learned or manually configured, stored in
the address table, and added to the running configuration. If these addresses are saved in the
configuration file, when the switch restarts, the interface does not need to dynamically reconfigure
them.
You can configure an interface to convert the dynamic MAC addresses to sticky secure MAC addresses
and to add them to the running configuration by enabling sticky learning. To enable sticky learning, enter
the switchport port-security mac-address sticky interface configuration command. When you enter
this command, the interface converts all the dynamic secure MAC addresses, including those that were
dynamically learned before sticky learning was enabled, to sticky secure MAC addresses. All sticky
secure MAC addresses are added to the running configuration.
The sticky secure MAC addresses do not automatically become part of the configuration file, which is
the startup configuration used each time the switch restarts. If you save the sticky secure MAC addresses
in the configuration file, when the switch restarts, the interface does not need to relearn these addresses.
If you do not save the sticky secure addresses, they are lost.
If sticky learning is disabled, the sticky secure MAC addresses are converted to dynamic secure
addresses and are removed from the running configuration.

OL-8553-06 24-9
The maximum number of secure MAC addresses that you can configure on a switch is set by the
maximum number of available MAC addresses allowed in the system. This number is determined by the
active Switch Database Management (SDM) template. See Chapter 8, “Configuring SDM Templates.”
This number is the total of available MAC addresses, including those used for other Layer 2 functions
and any other secure MAC addresses configured on interfaces.
Security Violations
It is a security violation when one of these situations occurs:
• The maximum number of secure MAC addresses have been added to the address table, and a station
whose MAC address is not in the address table attempts to access the interface.
• An address learned or configured on one secure interface is seen on another secure interface in the
same VLAN.
You can configure the interface for one of four violation modes, based on the action to be taken if a
violation occurs:
• protect—When the number of secure MAC addresses reaches the maximum limit allowed on the
port, packets with unknown source addresses are dropped until you remove a sufficient number of
secure MAC addresses to drop below the maximum value or increase the number of maximum
allowable addresses. You are not notified that a security violation has occurred.
Note We do not recommend configuring the protect violation mode on a trunk port. The protect
mode disables learning when any VLAN reaches its maximum limit, even if the port has not
reached its maximum limit.
• restrict—When the number of secure MAC addresses reaches the maximum limit allowed on the
port, packets with unknown source addresses are dropped until you remove a sufficient number of
secure MAC addresses to drop below the maximum value or increase the number of maximum
allowable addresses. In this mode, you are notified that a security violation has occurred. An SNMP
trap is sent, a syslog message is logged, and the violation counter increments.
• shutdown—A port security violation causes the interface to become error-disabled and to shut down
immediately, and the port LED turns off. An SNMP trap is sent, a syslog message is logged, and the
violation counter increments. When a secure port is in the error-disabled state, you can bring it out
of this state by entering the errdisable recovery cause psecure-violation global configuration
command, or you can manually re-enable it by entering the shutdown and no shut down interface
configuration commands. This is the default mode.
• shutdown vlan—Use to set the security violation mode per-VLAN. In this mode, the VLAN is error
disabled instead of the entire port when a violation occurs
Table 24-1 shows the violation mode and the actions taken when you configure an interface for port
security.
Table 24-1 Security Violation Mode Actions
Violation
Traffic is Sends SNMP Sends syslog Displays error counter
Violation Mode forwarded1 trap message message2 increments Shuts down port
protect No No No No No No
restrict No Yes Yes No Yes No

24-10 OL-8553-06
Table 24-1 Security Violation Mode Actions (continued)
Violation
Traffic is Sends SNMP Sends syslog Displays error counter
Violation Mode forwarded1 trap message message2 increments Shuts down port
shutdown No Yes Yes No Yes Yes
shutdown vlan No Yes Yes No Yes No3
1. Packets with unknown source addresses are dropped until you remove a sufficient number of secure MAC addresses.
2. The switch returns an error message if you manually configure an address that would cause a security violation.
3. Shuts down only the VLAN on which the violation occurred.
Default Port Security Configuration

Table 24-2 shows the default port security configuration for an interface.
Table 24-2 Default Port Security Configuration

Port security Disabled on a port.
Sticky address learning Disabled.
Maximum number of secure 1
MAC addresses per port
Violation mode Shutdown. The port shuts down when the maximum number of
secure MAC addresses is exceeded.
Port security aging Disabled. Aging time is 0.
Static aging is disabled.
Type is absolute.
Port Security Configuration Guidelines

Follow these guidelines when configuring port security:
• Port security can only be configured on static access ports or trunk ports. A secure port cannot be a
dynamic access port.
• A secure port cannot be a destination port for Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN).
• A secure port cannot belong to a Fast EtherChannel or a Gigabit EtherChannel port group.
Note Voice VLAN is only supported on access ports and not on trunk ports, even though the
configuration is allowed.
• When you enable port security on an interface that is also configured with a voice VLAN, set the
maximum allowed secure addresses on the port to two. When the port is connected to a Cisco IP
phone, the IP phone requires one MAC address. The Cisco IP phone address is learned on the voice

OL-8553-06 24-11
VLAN, but is not learned on the access VLAN. If you connect a single PC to the Cisco IP phone,
no additional MAC addresses are required. If you connect more than one PC to the Cisco IP phone,
you must configure enough secure addresses to allow one for each PC and one for the phone.
• When a trunk port configured with port security and assigned to an access VLAN for data traffic
and to a voice VLAN for voice traffic, entering the switchport voice and switchport priority
extend interface configuration commands has no effect.
When a connected device uses the same MAC address to request an IP address for the access VLAN
and then an IP address for the voice VLAN, only the access VLAN is assigned an IP address.
• When you enter a maximum secure address value for an interface, and the new value is greater than
the previous value, the new value overwrites the previously configured value. If the new value is
less than the previous value and the number of configured secure addresses on the interface exceeds
the new value, the command is rejected.
• The switch does not support port security aging of sticky secure MAC addresses.
Table 24-3 summarizes port security compatibility with other port-based features.
Table 24-3 Port Security Compatibility with Other Switch Features
Type of Port or Feature on Port Compatible with Port Security

DTP1 port2 No
Trunk port Yes
3
Dynamic-access port No
Routed port No
SPAN source port Yes
SPAN destination port No
EtherChannel No
Tunneling port Yes
Protected port Yes
IEEE 802.1x port Yes
4
Voice VLAN port Yes
Private VLAN port Yes
IP source guard Yes
Dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) inspection Yes
Flex Links Yes
1. DTP = Dynamic Trunking Protocol
2. A port configured with the switchport mode dynamic interface configuration command.
3. A VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) port configured with the switchport access vlan dynamic interface configuration command.
4. You must set the maximum allowed secure addresses on the port to two plus the maximum number of secure addresses
allowed on the access VLAN.

24-12 OL-8553-06
Enabling and Configuring Port Security

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to restrict input to an interface by limiting and
identifying MAC addresses of the stations allowed to access the port:
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 switchport mode {access | trunk} Set the interface switchport mode as access or trunk; an interface in the
default mode (dynamic auto) cannot be configured as a secure port.
Step 4 switchport voice vlan vlan-id Enable voice VLAN on a port.
vlan-id—Specify the VLAN to be used for voice traffic.
Step 5 switchport port-security Enable port security on the interface.
Step 6 switchport port-security (Optional) Set the maximum number of secure MAC addresses for the
[maximum value [vlan {vlan-list | interface. The maximum number of secure MAC addresses that you can
{access | voice}}]] configure on a switch is set by the maximum number of available MAC
addresses allowed in the system. This number is set by the active Switch
Database Management (SDM) template. See Chapter 8, “Configuring the
Switch SDM Template.”This number is the total of available MAC addresses,
including those used for other Layer 2 functions and any other secure MAC
addresses configured on interfaces.
(Optional) vlan—set a per-VLAN maximum value
Enter one of these options after you enter the vlan keyword:
• vlan-list—On a trunk port, you can set a per-VLAN maximum value on
a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen or a series of VLANs separated
by commas. For nonspecified VLANs, the per-VLAN maximum value is
used.
• access—On an access port, specify the VLAN as an access VLAN.
• voice—On an access port, specify the VLAN as a voice VLAN.
Note The voice keyword is available only if a voice VLAN is configured
on a port and if that port is not the access VLAN. If an interface is
configured for voice VLAN, configure a maximum of two secure
MAC addresses.

OL-8553-06 24-13
Command Purpose
Step 7 switchport port-security [violation (Optional) Set the violation mode, the action to be taken when a security
{protect | restrict | shutdown | violation is detected, as one of these:
shutdown vlan}]
• protect—When the number of port secure MAC addresses reaches the
maximum limit allowed on the port, packets with unknown source
addresses are dropped until you remove a sufficient number of secure
MAC addresses to drop below the maximum value or increase the
number of maximum allowable addresses. You are not notified that a
security violation has occurred.
Note We do not recommend configuring the protect mode on a trunk port.
The protect mode disables learning when any VLAN reaches its
maximum limit, even if the port has not reached its maximum limit.
• restrict—When the number of secure MAC addresses reaches the limit

allowed on the port, packets with unknown source addresses are dropped
until you remove a sufficient number of secure MAC addresses or
increase the number of maximum allowable addresses. An SNMP trap is
sent, a syslog message is logged, and the violation counter increments.
• shutdown—The interface is error disabled when a violation occurs, and
the port LED turns off. An SNMP trap is sent, a syslog message is logged,
and the violation counter increments.
• shutdown vlan—Use to set the security violation mode per VLAN. In
this mode, the VLAN is error disabled instead of the entire port when a
violation occurs.
Note When a secure port is in the error-disabled state, you can bring it out
of this state by entering the errdisable recovery cause
psecure-violation global configuration command. You can manually
re-enable it by entering the shutdown and no shutdown interface
configuration commands or by using the clear errdisable interface
vlan privileged EXEC command.

24-14 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 8 switchport port-security (Optional) Enter a secure MAC address for the interface. You can use this
[mac-address mac-address [vlan command to enter the maximum number of secure MAC addresses. If you
{vlan-id | {access | voice}}] configure fewer secure MAC addresses than the maximum, the remaining
MAC addresses are dynamically learned.
Note If you enable sticky learning after you enter this command, the secure
addresses that were dynamically learned are converted to sticky
secure MAC addresses and are added to the running configuration.
(Optional) vlan—set a per-VLAN maximum value.

• vlan-id—On a trunk port, you can specify the VLAN ID and the MAC
address. If you do not specify a VLAN ID, the native VLAN is used.
on a port and if that port is not the access VLAN. If an interface is
configured for voice VLAN, configure a maximum of two secure
MAC addresses.
Step 9 switchport port-security (Optional) Enable sticky learning on the interface.
mac-address sticky
Step 10 switchport port-security (Optional) Enter a sticky secure MAC address, repeating the command as
mac-address sticky [mac-address | many times as necessary. If you configure fewer secure MAC addresses than
vlan {vlan-id | {access | voice}}] the maximum, the remaining MAC addresses are dynamically learned, are
converted to sticky secure MAC addresses, and are added to the running
configuration.
Note If you do not enable sticky learning before this command is entered,
an error message appears, and you cannot enter a sticky secure MAC
address.
(Optional) vlan—set a per-VLAN maximum value.

• vlan-id—On a trunk port, you can specify the VLAN ID and the MAC
address. If you do not specify a VLAN ID, the native VLAN is used.
on a port and if that port is not the access VLAN.
Step 12 show port-security Verify your entries.
startup-config

OL-8553-06 24-15
To return the interface to the default condition as not a secure port, use the no switchport port-security
interface configuration command. If you enter this command when sticky learning is enabled, the sticky
secure addresses remain part of the running configuration but are removed from the address table. All
addresses are now dynamically learned.
To return the interface to the default number of secure MAC addresses, use the no switchport
port-security maximum value interface configuration command. To return the violation mode to the
default condition (shutdown mode), use the no switchport port-security violation {protocol | restrict}
To disable sticky learning on an interface, use the no switchport port-security mac-address sticky
interface configuration command. The interface converts the sticky secure MAC addresses to dynamic
secure addresses. However, if you have previously saved the configuration with the sticky MAC
addresses, you should save the configuration again after entering the no switchport port-security
mac-address sticky command, or the sticky addresses will be restored if the switch reboots.
Use the clear port-security {all | configured | dynamic | sticky} privileged EXEC command to delete
from the MAC address table all secure addresses or all secure addresses of a specific type (configured,
dynamic, or sticky) on the switch or on an interface.
To delete a specific secure MAC address from the address table, use the no switchport port-security
mac-address mac-address interface configuration command. To delete all dynamic secure addresses on
an interface from the address table, enter the no switchport port-security interface configuration
command followed by the switchport port-security command (to re-enable port security on the
interface). If you use the no switchport port-security mac-address sticky interface configuration
command to convert sticky secure MAC addresses to dynamic secure MAC addresses before entering
the no switchport port-security command, all secure addresses on the interface except those that were
manually configured are deleted.
You must specifically delete configured secure MAC addresses from the address table by using the no
switchport port-security mac-address mac-address interface configuration command.
This example shows how to enable port security on a port and to set the maximum number of secure
addresses to 50. The violation mode is the default, no static secure MAC addresses are configured, and
sticky learning is enabled.
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 50
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky
This example shows how to configure a static secure MAC address on VLAN 3 on a port:
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address 0000.02000.0004 vlan 3
This example shows how to enable sticky port security on a port, to manually configure MAC addresses
for data VLAN and voice VLAN, and to set the total maximum number of secure addresses to 20 (10 for
data VLAN and 10 for voice VLAN).
Switch(config)# interface FastEthernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport voice vlan 22
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security violation restrict
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky 0000.0000.0002

24-16 OL-8553-06
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address 0000.0000.0003

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky 0000.0000.0001 vlan voice
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address 0000.0000.0004 vlan voice
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 10 vlan access
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 10 vlan voice
Enabling and Configuring Port Security Aging

You can use port security aging to set the aging time for all secure addresses on a port. Two types of
aging are supported per port:
• Absolute—The secure addresses on the port are deleted after the specified aging time.
• Inactivity—The secure addresses on the port are deleted only if the secure addresses are inactive for
the specified aging time.
Use this feature to remove and add devices on a secure port without manually deleting the existing secure
MAC addresses and to still limit the number of secure addresses on a port. You can enable or disable the
aging of secure addresses on a per-port basis.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure port security aging:
Command Purpose
configuration mode.
Step 3 switchport port-security aging {static | time time | Enable or disable static aging for the secure port, or set the
type {absolute | inactivity}} aging time or type.
Note The switch does not support port security aging of
sticky secure addresses.
Enter static to enable aging for statically configured secure

addresses on this port.
For time, specify the aging time for this port. The valid range
is from 0 to 1440 minutes.
For type, select one of these keywords:
• absolute—Sets the aging type as absolute aging. All the
secure addresses on this port age out exactly after the time
(minutes) specified lapses and are removed from the secure
address list.
• inactivity—Sets the aging type as inactivity aging. The
secure addresses on this port age out only if there is no data
traffic from the secure source addresses for the specified
time period.
Step 5 show port-security [interface interface-id] Verify your entries.
[address]

OL-8553-06 24-17
To disable port security aging for all secure addresses on a port, use the no switchport port-security
aging time interface configuration command. To disable aging for only statically configured secure
addresses, use the no switchport port-security aging static interface configuration command.
This example shows how to set the aging time as 2 hours for the secure addresses on a port:
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security aging time 120
This example shows how to set the aging time as 2 minutes for the inactivity aging type with aging
enabled for the configured secure addresses on the interface:
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security aging time 2
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security aging type inactivity
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security aging static
You can verify the previous commands by entering the show port-security interface interface-id
Port Security and Private VLANs

Port security allows an administrator to limit the number of MAC addresses learned on a port or to define
which MAC addresses can be learned on a port.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure port security on a PVLAN host and
promiscuous ports:
Command Purpose
configuration mode.
Step 3 switchport mode private-vlan {host | Enable a private vlan on the interface.
promiscuous}
Step 4 switchport port-security Enable port security on the interface.
Step 6 show port-security [interface interface-id] Verify your entries.
[address]
Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 0/8

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping 2061 2201-2206,3101
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security violation restrict
Note Ports that have both port security and private VLANs configured can be labeled secure PVLAN ports.
When a secure address is learned on a secure PVLAN port, the same secure address cannot be learned
on another secure PVLAN port belonging to the same primary VLAN. However, an address learned on
unsecure PVLAN port can be learned on a secure PVLAN port belonging to same primary VLAN.

24-18 OL-8553-06
Displaying Port-Based Traffic Control Settings
Secure addresses that are learned on host port get automatically replicated on associated primary
VLANs, and similarly, secure addresses learned on promiscuous ports automatically get replicated on
all associated secondary VLANs. Static addresses (using mac-address-table static command) cannot be
user configured on a secure port.

The show interfaces interface-id switchport privileged EXEC command displays (among other
characteristics) the interface traffic suppression and control configuration. The show storm-control and
show port-security privileged EXEC commands display those storm control and port security settings.
To display traffic control information, use one or more of the privileged EXEC commands in Table 24-4.
Table 24-4 Commands for Displaying Traffic Control Status and Configuration
Command Purpose
show interfaces [interface-id] switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of all switching
(nonrouting) ports or the specified port, including port blocking and
port protection settings.
show storm-control [interface-id] [broadcast | Displays storm control suppression levels set on all interfaces or the
multicast | unicast] specified interface for the specified traffic type or for broadcast traffic
if no traffic type is entered.
show port-security [interface interface-id] Displays port security settings for the switch or for the specified
interface, including the maximum allowed number of secure MAC
addresses for each interface, the number of secure MAC addresses on
the interface, the number of security violations that have occurred, and
the violation mode.
show port-security [interface interface-id] address Displays all secure MAC addresses configured on all switch interfaces
or on a specified interface with aging information for each address.
show port-security interface interface-id vlan Displays the number of secure MAC addresses configured per VLAN
on the specified interface.

OL-8553-06 24-19

24-20 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 25
Configuring CDP
This chapter describes how to configure Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) on the Catalyst 3560 switch.
reference for this release and the “System Management Commands” section in the Cisco IOS
Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference, Release 12.2.

• Understanding CDP, page 25-1
• Configuring CDP, page 25-2
• Monitoring and Maintaining CDP, page 25-4
Understanding CDP
CDP is a device discovery protocol that runs over Layer 2 (the data link layer) on all Cisco-manufactured
devices (routers, bridges, access servers, and switches) and allows network management applications to
discover Cisco devices that are neighbors of already known devices. With CDP, network management
applications can learn the device type and the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent
address of neighboring devices running lower-layer, transparent protocols. This feature enables
applications to send SNMP queries to neighboring devices.
CDP runs on all media that support Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP). Because CDP runs over the
data-link layer only, two systems that support different network-layer protocols can learn about each
other.
Each CDP-configured device sends periodic messages to a multicast address, advertising at least one
address at which it can receive SNMP messages. The advertisements also contain time-to-live, or
holdtime information, which is the length of time a receiving device holds CDP information before
discarding it. Each device also listens to the messages sent by other devices to learn about neighboring
devices.
On the switch, CDP enables Network Assistant to display a graphical view of the network. The switch
uses CDP to find cluster candidates and maintain information about cluster members and other devices
up to three cluster-enabled devices away from the command switch by default.
The switch supports CDP Version 2.

OL-8553-06 25-1
Chapter 25 Configuring CDP
Configuring CDP
Configuring CDP
• Default CDP Configuration, page 25-2
• Configuring the CDP Characteristics, page 25-2
• Disabling and Enabling CDP, page 25-3
• Disabling and Enabling CDP on an Interface, page 25-4
Default CDP Configuration

Table 25-1 shows the default CDP configuration.
Table 25-1 Default CDP Configuration

CDP global state Enabled
CDP interface state Enabled
CDP timer (packet update frequency) 60 seconds
CDP holdtime (before discarding) 180 seconds
CDP Version-2 advertisements Enabled
Configuring the CDP Characteristics

You can configure the frequency of CDP updates, the amount of time to hold the information before
discarding it, and whether or not to send Version-2 advertisements.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the CDP timer, holdtime, and
advertisement type.
Note Steps 2 through 4 are all optional and can be performed in any order.
Command Purpose
Step 2 cdp timer seconds (Optional) Set the transmission frequency of CDP updates in seconds.
The range is 5 to 254; the default is 60 seconds.
Step 3 cdp holdtime seconds (Optional) Specify the amount of time a receiving device should hold the
information sent by your device before discarding it.
The range is 10 to 255 seconds; the default is 180 seconds.
Step 4 cdp advertise-v2 (Optional) Configure CDP to send Version-2 advertisements.
This is the default state.

25-2 OL-8553-06
Configuring CDP
Command Purpose
Step 6 show cdp Verify your settings.
Use the no form of the CDP commands to return to the default settings.
This example shows how to configure CDP characteristics.
Switch(config)# cdp timer 50
Switch(config)# cdp holdtime 120
Switch(config)# cdp advertise-v2
Switch(config)# end
For additional CDP show commands, see the “Monitoring and Maintaining CDP” section on page 25-4.
Disabling and Enabling CDP

CDP is enabled by default.
Note Switch clusters and other Cisco devices (such as Cisco IP Phones) regularly exchange CDP messages.
Disabling CDP can interrupt cluster discovery and device connectivity. For more information, see
Chapter 6, “Clustering Switches” and see Getting Started with Cisco Network Assistant, available on
Cisco.com.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable the CDP device discovery capability:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no cdp run Disable CDP.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable CDP when it has been disabled:
Command Purpose
Step 2 cdp run Enable CDP after disabling it.
This example shows how to enable CDP if it has been disabled.

Switch(config)# cdp run
Switch(config)# end

OL-8553-06 25-3
Monitoring and Maintaining CDP
Disabling and Enabling CDP on an Interface

CDP is enabled by default on all supported interfaces to send and to receive CDP information.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable CDP on a port:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface on which you are disabling CDP, and enter
Step 3 no cdp enable Disable CDP on the interface.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable CDP on a port when it has been
disabled:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface on which you are enabling CDP, and enter
Step 3 cdp enable Enable CDP on the interface after disabling it.
This example shows how to enable CDP on a port when it has been disabled.
Switch(config-if)# cdp enable

To monitor and maintain CDP on your device, perform one or more of these tasks, beginning in
privileged EXEC mode.
Command Description
clear cdp counters Reset the traffic counters to zero.
clear cdp table Delete the CDP table of information about neighbors.
show cdp Display global information, such as frequency of transmissions and the holdtime
for packets being sent.

25-4 OL-8553-06
Command Description
show cdp entry entry-name Display information about a specific neighbor.
[protocol | version]
You can enter an asterisk (*) to display all CDP neighbors, or you can enter the
name of the neighbor about which you want information.
You can also limit the display to information about the protocols enabled on the
specified neighbor or information about the version of software running on the
device.
show cdp interface [interface-id] Display information about interfaces where CDP is enabled.
You can limit the display to the interface about which you want information.
show cdp neighbors [interface-id] Display information about neighbors, including device type, interface type and
[detail] number, holdtime settings, capabilities, platform, and port ID.
You can limit the display to neighbors of a specific interface or expand the
display to provide more detailed information.
show cdp traffic Display CDP counters, including the number of packets sent and received and
checksum errors.

OL-8553-06 25-5

25-6 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 27
Configuring UDLD
This chapter describes how to configure the UniDirectional Link Detection (UDLD) protocol on the

• Understanding UDLD, page 27-1
• Configuring UDLD, page 27-3
• Displaying UDLD Status, page 27-6
Understanding UDLD
UDLD is a Layer 2 protocol that enables devices connected through fiber-optic or twisted-pair Ethernet
cables to monitor the physical configuration of the cables and detect when a unidirectional link exists.
All connected devices must support UDLD for the protocol to successfully identify and disable
unidirectional links. When UDLD detects a unidirectional link, it disables the affected port and alerts
you. Unidirectional links can cause a variety of problems, including spanning-tree topology loops.
Modes of Operation
UDLD supports two modes of operation: normal (the default) and aggressive. In normal mode, UDLD
can detect unidirectional links due to misconnected ports on fiber-optic connections. In aggressive
mode, UDLD can also detect unidirectional links due to one-way traffic on fiber-optic and twisted-pair
links and to misconnected ports on fiber-optic links.
In normal and aggressive modes, UDLD works with the Layer 1 mechanisms to learn the physical status
of a link. At Layer 1, autonegotiation takes care of physical signaling and fault detection. UDLD
performs tasks that autonegotiation cannot perform, such as detecting the identities of neighbors and
shutting down misconnected ports. When you enable both autonegotiation and UDLD, the Layer 1 and
Layer 2 detections work together to prevent physical and logical unidirectional connections and the
malfunctioning of other protocols.
A unidirectional link occurs whenever traffic sent by a local device is received by its neighbor but traffic
from the neighbor is not received by the local device.

OL-8553-06 27-1
Chapter 27 Configuring UDLD
Understanding UDLD
In normal mode, UDLD detects a unidirectional link when fiber strands in a fiber-optic port are
misconnected and the Layer 1 mechanisms do not detect this misconnection. If the ports are connected
correctly but the traffic is one way, UDLD does not detect the unidirectional link because the Layer 1
mechanism, which is supposed to detect this condition, does not do so. In this case, the logical link is
considered undetermined, and UDLD does not disable the port.
When UDLD is in normal mode, if one of the fiber strands in a pair is disconnected, as long as
autonegotiation is active, the link does not stay up because the Layer 1 mechanisms detects a physical
problem with the link. In this case, UDLD does not take any action and the logical link is considered
undetermined.
In aggressive mode, UDLD detects a unidirectional link by using the previous detection methods. UDLD
in aggressive mode can also detect a unidirectional link on a point-to-point link on which no failure
between the two devices is allowed. It can also detect a unidirectional link when one of these problems
exists:
• On fiber-optic or twisted-pair links, one of the ports cannot send or receive traffic.
• On fiber-optic or twisted-pair links, one of the ports is down while the other is up.
• One of the fiber strands in the cable is disconnected.
In these cases, UDLD disables the affected port.
In a point-to-point link, UDLD hello packets can be considered as a heart beat whose presence
guarantees the health of the link. Conversely, the loss of the heart beat means that the link must be shut
down if it is not possible to re-establish a bidirectional link.
If both fiber strands in a cable are working normally from a Layer 1 perspective, UDLD in aggressive
mode detects whether those fiber strands are connected correctly and whether traffic is flowing
bidirectionally between the correct neighbors. This check cannot be performed by autonegotiation
because autonegotiation operates at Layer 1.
Methods to Detect Unidirectional Links

UDLD operates by using two mechanisms:
• Neighbor database maintenance
UDLD learns about other UDLD-capable neighbors by periodically sending a hello packet (also
called an advertisement or probe) on every active port to keep each device informed about its
neighbors.
When the switch receives a hello message, it caches the information until the age time (hold time or
time-to-live) expires. If the switch receives a new hello message before an older cache entry ages,
the switch replaces the older entry with the new one.
Whenever a port is disabled and UDLD is running, whenever UDLD is disabled on a port, or
whenever the switch is reset, UDLD clears all existing cache entries for the ports affected by the
configuration change. UDLD sends at least one message to inform the neighbors to flush the part of
their caches affected by the status change. The message is intended to keep the caches synchronized.
• Event-driven detection and echoing
UDLD relies on echoing as its detection mechanism. Whenever a UDLD device learns about a new
neighbor or receives a resynchronization request from an out-of-sync neighbor, it restarts the
detection window on its side of the connection and sends echo messages in reply. Because this
behavior is the same on all UDLD neighbors, the sender of the echoes expects to receive an echo in
reply.

27-2 OL-8553-06
Configuring UDLD
If the detection window ends and no valid reply message is received, the link might shut down,
depending on the UDLD mode. When UDLD is in normal mode, the link might be considered
undetermined and might not be shut down. When UDLD is in aggressive mode, the link is
considered unidirectional, and the port is disabled.
If UDLD in normal mode is in the advertisement or in the detection phase and all the neighbor cache
entries are aged out, UDLD restarts the link-up sequence to resynchronize with any potentially
out-of-sync neighbors.
If you enable aggressive mode when all the neighbors of a port have aged out either in the advertisement
or in the detection phase, UDLD restarts the link-up sequence to resynchronize with any potentially
out-of-sync neighbor. UDLD shuts down the port if, after the fast train of messages, the link state is still
undetermined.
Figure 27-1 shows an example of a unidirectional link condition.
Figure 27-1 UDLD Detection of a Unidirectional Link
Switch A
TX RX
Switch B successfully
receives traffic from
Switch A on this port. However, Switch A does not receive traffic
from Switch B on the same port. If UDLD
is in aggressive mode, it detects the
problem and disables the port. If UDLD is
in normal mode, the logical link is
considered undetermined, and UDLD
does not disable the interface.
TX RX
98648
Switch B
Configuring UDLD
• Default UDLD Configuration, page 27-4
• Enabling UDLD Globally, page 27-5
• Enabling UDLD on an Interface, page 27-5
• Resetting an Interface Disabled by UDLD, page 27-6

OL-8553-06 27-3
Configuring UDLD
Default UDLD Configuration

Table 27-1 shows the default UDLD configuration.
Table 27-1 Default UDLD Configuration

UDLD global enable state Globally disabled
UDLD per-port enable state for fiber-optic media Disabled on all Ethernet fiber-optic ports
UDLD per-port enable state for twisted-pair (copper) media Disabled on all Ethernet 10/100 and 1000BASE-TX ports
UDLD aggressive mode Disabled
These are the UDLD configuration guidelines:
• UDLD is not supported on ATM ports.
• A UDLD-capable port cannot detect a unidirectional link if it is connected to a UDLD-incapable
port of another switch.
• When configuring the mode (normal or aggressive), make sure that the same mode is configured on
both sides of the link.
Caution Loop guard works only on point-to-point links. We recommend that each end of the link has a directly
connected device that is running STP.

27-4 OL-8553-06
Configuring UDLD
Enabling UDLD Globally

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable UDLD in the aggressive or normal
mode and to set the configurable message timer on all fiber-optic ports on the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 udld {aggressive | enable | message time Specify the UDLD mode of operation:
message-timer-interval}
• aggressive—Enables UDLD in aggressive mode on all fiber-optic
ports.
• enable—Enables UDLD in normal mode on all fiber-optic ports on
the switch. UDLD is disabled by default.
An individual interface configuration overrides the setting of the
udld enable global configuration command.
For more information about aggressive and normal modes, see the
“Modes of Operation” section on page 27-1.
• message time message-timer-interval—Configures the period of
time between UDLD probe messages on ports that are in the
advertisement phase and are detected to be bidirectional. The range
is from 1 to 90 seconds.
Note This command affects fiber-optic ports only. Use the udld
interface configuration command to enable UDLD on other port
types. For more information, see the “Enabling UDLD on an
Interface” section on page 27-5.
Step 4 show udld Verify your entries.
To disable UDLD globally, use the no udld enable global configuration command to disable normal
mode UDLD on all fiber-optic ports. Use the no udld aggressive global configuration command to
disable aggressive mode UDLD on all fiber-optic ports.
Enabling UDLD on an Interface

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps either to enable UDLD in the aggressive or
normal mode or to disable UDLD on a port:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port to be enabled for UDLD, and enter interface
configuration mode.

OL-8553-06 27-5
Displaying UDLD Status
Command Purpose
Step 3 udld port [aggressive] UDLD is disabled by default.
• udld port—Enables UDLD in normal mode on the specified port.
• udld port aggressive—Enables UDLD in aggressive mode on the
specified port.
Note Use the no udld port interface configuration command to
disable UDLD on a specified fiber-optic port.
For more information about aggressive and normal modes, see the
“Modes of Operation” section on page 27-1.
Step 5 show udld interface-id Verify your entries.
Resetting an Interface Disabled by UDLD

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to reset all ports disabled by UDLD:
Command Purpose
Step 1 udld reset Reset all ports disabled by UDLD.
Step 2 show udld Verify your entries.
You can also bring up the port by using these commands:

• The shutdown interface configuration command followed by the no shutdown interface
configuration command restarts the disabled port.
• The no udld {aggressive | enable} global configuration command followed by the udld
{aggressive | enable} global configuration command re-enables the disabled ports.
• The no udld port interface configuration command followed by the udld port [aggressive]
interface configuration command re-enables the disabled fiber-optic port.
• The errdisable recovery cause udld global configuration command enables the timer to
automatically recover from the UDLD error-disabled state, and the errdisable recovery interval
interval global configuration command specifies the time to recover from the UDLD error-disabled
state.
Displaying UDLD Status

To display the UDLD status for the specified port or for all ports, use the show udld [interface-id]
For detailed information about the fields in the command output, see the command reference for this
release.

27-6 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 26
Configuring LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired
Location Service
This chapter describes how to configure the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), LLDP Media
Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) and wired location service on the Catalyst 3560 switch.
reference for this release and the “System Management Commands” section in the Cisco IOS
Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference, Release 12.2.
• Understanding LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired Location Service, page 26-1

• Configuring LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired Location Service, page 26-4
• Monitoring and Maintaining LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired Location Service, page 26-10
Understanding LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired Location Service
LLDP
The Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) is a device discovery protocol that runs over Layer 2 (the data link
layer) on all Cisco-manufactured devices (routers, bridges, access servers, and switches). CDP allows
network management applications to automatically discover and learn about other Cisco devices
connected to the network.
To support non-Cisco devices and to allow for interoperability between other devices, the switch
supports the IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). LLDP is a neighbor discovery
protocol that is used for network devices to advertise information about themselves to other devices on
the network. This protocol runs over the data-link layer, which allows two systems running different
network layer protocols to learn about each other.
LLDP supports a set of attributes that it uses to discover neighbor devices. These attributes contain type,
length, and value descriptions and are referred to as TLVs. LLDP supported devices can use TLVs to receive
and send information to their neighbors. This protocol can advertise details such as configuration
information, device capabilities, and device identity.

OL-8553-06 26-1
Chapter 26 Configuring LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired Location Service
The switch supports these basic management TLVs. These are mandatory LLDP TLVs.
• Port description TLV
• System name TLV
• System description TLV
• System capabilities TLV
• Management address TLV
These organizationally specific LLDP TLVs are also advertised to support LLDP-MED.
• Port VLAN ID TLV ((IEEE 802.1 organizationally specific TLVs)
• MAC/PHY configuration/status TLV(IEEE 802.3 organizationally specific TLVs)
Note A switch stack appears as a single switch in the network. Therefore, LLDP discovers the switch stack,
not the individual stack members.
LLDP-MED
LLDP for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) is an extension to LLDP that operates between
endpoint devices such as IP phones and network devices such as switches. It specifically provides
support for voice over IP (VoIP) applications and provides additional TLVs for capabilities discovery,
network policy, Power over Ethernet, inventory management and location information. By default, all
LLDP-MED TLVs are enabled.
LLDP-MED supports these TLVs:
• LLDP-MED capabilities TLV
Allows LLDP-MED endpoints to determine the capabilities that the connected device supports and
has enabled.
• Network policy TLV
Allows both network connectivity devices and endpoints to advertise VLAN configurations and
associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes for the specific application on that port. For example, the
switch can notify a phone of the VLAN number that it should use. The phone can connect to any
switch, obtain its VLAN number, and then start communicating with the call control.
By defining a network-policy profile TLV, you can create a profile for voice and voice-signalling by
specifying the values for VLAN, class of service (CoS), differentiated services code point (DSCP),
and tagging mode. These profile attributes are then maintained centrally on the switch and
propagated to the phone.
• Power management TLV
Enables advanced power management between LLDP-MED endpoint and network connectivity
devices. Allows switches and phones to convey power information, such as how the device is
powered, power priority, and how much power the device needs.
• Inventory management TLV
Allows an endpoint to send detailed inventory information about itself to the switch, including
information hardware revision, firmware version, software version, serial number, manufacturer
name, model name, and asset ID TLV.

26-2 OL-8553-06
• Location TLV
Provides location information from the switch to the endpoint device. The location TLV can send
this information:
– Civic location information
Provides the civic address information and postal information. Examples of civic location
information are street address, road name, and postal community name information.
– ELIN location information
Provides the location information of a caller. The location is determined by the Emergency
location identifier number (ELIN), which is a phone number that routes an emergency call to
the local public safety answering point (PSAP) and which the PSAP can use to call back the
emergency caller.
Wired Location Service

The switch uses the wired location service feature to send location and attachment tracking information
for its connected devices to a Cisco Mobility Services Engine (MSE). The tracked device can be a
wireless endpoint, a wired endpoint, or a wired switch or controller. The switch notifies the MSE of
device link up and link down events through the Network Mobility Services Protocol (NMSP) location
and attachment notifications.
The MSE starts the NMSP connection to the switch, which opens a server port. When the MSE connects
to the switch there are a set of message exchanges to establish version compatibility and service
exchange information followed by location information synchronization. After connection, the switch
periodically sends location and attachment notifications to the MSE. Any link up or link down events
detected during an interval are aggregated and sent at the end of the interval.
When the switch determines the presence or absence of a device on a link-up or link-down event, it
obtains the client-specific information such as the MAC address, IP address, and username. If the client
is LLDP-MED- or CDP-capable, the switch obtains the serial number and UDI through the LLDP-MED
location TLV or CDP.
Depending on the device capabilities, the switch obtains this client information at link up:
• Slot and port specified in port connection
• MAC address specified in the client MAC address
• IP address specified in port connection
• 802.1X username if applicable
• Device category is specified as a wired station
• State is specified as new
• Serial number, UDI
• Model number
• Time in seconds since the switch detected the association
Depending on the device capabilities, the switch obtains this client information at link down:
• Slot and port that was disconnected
• MAC address
• IP address
• 802.1X username if applicable

OL-8553-06 26-3
Configuring LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired Location Service
• Device category is specified as a wired station

• State is specified as delete
• Serial number, UDI
• Time in seconds since the switch detected the disassociation
When the switch shuts down, it sends an attachment notification with the state delete and the IP address
before closing the NMSP connection to the MSE. The MSE interprets this notification as disassociation
for all the wired clients associated with the switch.
If you change a location address on the switch, the switch sends an NMSP location notification message
that identifies the affected ports and the changed address information.

• Default LLDP Configuration, page 26-4
• Enabling LLDP, page 26-5
• Configuring LLDP Characteristics, page 26-5
• Configuring LLDP-MED TLVs, page 26-6
• Configuring Network-Policy TLV, page 26-7
• Configuring Location TLV and Wired Location Service, page 26-9
Default LLDP Configuration

Table 26-1 Default LLDP Configuration

LLDP global state Disabled
LLDP holdtime (before discarding) 120 seconds
LLDP timer (packet update frequency) 30 seconds
LLDP reinitialization delay 2 seconds
LLDP tlv-select Disabled to send and receive all TLVs
LLDP interface state Disabled
LLDP receive Disabled
LLDP transmit Disabled
LLDP med-tlv-select Disabled to send all LLDP-MED TLVs

26-4 OL-8553-06
• If the interface is configured as a tunnel port, LLDP is automatically disabled.
• If you first configure a network-policy profile on an interface, you cannot apply the switchport
voice vlan command on the interface. If the switchport voice vlan vlan-id is already configured on
an interface, you can apply a network-policy profile on the interface. This way the interface has the
voice or voice-signaling VLAN network-policy profile applied on the interface.
• You cannot configure static secure MAC addresses on an interface that has a network-policy profile.
• You cannot configure a network-policy profile on a private-VLAN port.
Enabling LLDP
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable LLDP:
Command Purpose
Step 2 lldp run Enable LLDP globally on the switch.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the interface on which you are enabling LLDP, and enter
Step 4 lldp transmit Enable the interface to send LLDP packets.
Step 5 lldp receive Enable the interface to receive LLDP packets.
Step 7 show lldp Verify the configuration.
To disable LLDP, use the no lldp run global configuration command. To disable LLDP on an interface,
use the no lldp transmit and the no lldp receive interface configuration commands.
This example shows how to globally enable LLDP.
Switch(config)# lldp run
Switch(config)# end
This example shows how to enable LLDP on an interface.

Switch(config-if)# lldp transmit
Switch(config-if)# lldp receive
Configuring LLDP Characteristics

You can configure the frequency of LLDP updates, the amount of time to hold the information before
discarding it, and the initialization delay time. You can also select the LLDP and LLDP-MED TLVs to
send and receive.

OL-8553-06 26-5
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the LLDP characteristics.
Note Steps 2 through 5 are optional and can be performed in any order.
Command Purpose
Step 2 lldp holdtime seconds (Optional) Specify the amount of time a receiving device should hold the
information from your device before discarding it.
Step 3 lldp reinit delay (Optional) Specify the delay time in seconds for LLDP to initialize on an
interface.
Step 4 lldp timer rate (Optional) Set the sending frequency of LLDP updates in seconds.
Step 5 lldp tlv-select (Optional) Specify the LLDP TLVs to send or receive.
Step 6 lldp med-tlv-select (Optional) Specify the LLDP-MED TLVs to send or receive.
Step 8 show lldp Verify the configuration.
Use the no form of each of the LLDP commands to return to the default setting.
This example shows how to configure LLDP characteristics.
Switch(config)# lldp holdtime 120
Switch(config)# lldp reinit 2
Switch(config)# lldp timer 30
Switch(config)# end
Configuring LLDP-MED TLVs

By default, the switch only sends LLDP packets until it receives LLDP-MED packets from the end
device. It then sends LLDP packets with MED TLVs, as well. When the LLDP-MED entry has been aged
out, it again only sends LLDP packets.
By using the lldp interface configuration command, you can configure the interface not to send the TLVs
listed in Table 26-2.
Table 26-2 LLDP-MED TLVs
LLDP-MED TLV Description

inventory-management LLDP-MED inventory management TLV
location LLDP-MED location TLV

26-6 OL-8553-06
Table 26-2 LLDP-MED TLVs
LLDP-MED TLV Description

network-policy LLDP-MED network policy TLV
power-management LLDP-MED power management TLV
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable a TLV on an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface on which you are configuring an LLDP-MED
TLV, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 lldp med-tlv-select tlv Specify the TLV to enable.
This example shows how to enable a TLV on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# lldp med-tlv-select inventory-management
Configuring Network-Policy TLV

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a network-policy profile, configure the
policy attributes, and apply it to an interface.
Command Purpose
Step 2 network-policy profile profile number Specify the network-policy profile number, and enter network-policy
configuration mode. The range is 1 to 4294967295.

OL-8553-06 26-7
Command Purpose
Step 3 {voice | voice-signaling} vlan [vlan-id Configure the policy attributes:
{cos cvalue | dscp dvalue}] | [[dot1p
voice—Specify the voice application type.
{cos cvalue | dscp dvalue}] | none |
untagged] voice-signaling—Specify the voice-signaling application type.
vlan—Specify the native VLAN for voice traffic.
vlan-id—(Optional) Specify the VLAN for voice traffic. The range is
1 to 4094.
cos cvalue—(Optional) Specify the Layer 2 priority class of service
(CoS) for the configured VLAN. The range is 0 to 7; the default is 0.
dscp dvalue—(Optional) Specify the differentiated services code
point (DSCP) value for the configured VLAN. The range is 0 to 63;
the default is 0.
dot1p—(Optional) Configure the telephone to use IEEE 802.1p
priority tagging and use VLAN 0 (the native VLAN).
none—(Optional) Do not instruct the IP telephone about the voice
VLAN. The telephone uses the configuration from the telephone key
pad.
untagged—(Optional) Configure the telephone to send untagged
voice traffic. This is the default for the telephone.
Step 5 interface interface-id Specify the interface on which you are configuring a network-policy
profile, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 6 network-policy profile number Specify the network-policy profile number.
Step 7 lldp med-tlv-select network-policy Specify the network-policy TLV.
Step 9 show network-policy profile Verify the configuration.
Use the no form of each command to return to the default setting.

This example shows how to configure VLAN 100 for voice application with CoS and to enable the
network-policy profile and network-policy TLV on an interface:
Switch(config)# network-policy profile 1
Switch(config-network-policy)# voice vlan 100 cos 4
Switch# interface_id
Switch(config-if)# network-policy profile 1
Switch(config-if)# lldp med-tlv-select network-policy
This example shows how to configure the voice application type for the native VLAN with priority
tagging:
Switch(config-network-policy)# voice vlan dot1p cos 4
Switch(config-network-policy)# voice vlan dot1p dscp 34

26-8 OL-8553-06
Configuring Location TLV and Wired Location Service

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure location information for an
endpoint and to apply it to an interface.
Command Purpose
Step 2 location {admin-tag string | civic-location Specify the location information for an endpoint.
identifier id | elin-location string identifier
• admin-tag—Specify an administrative tag or site information.
id}
• civic-location—Specify civic location information.
• elin-location—Specify emergency location information (ELIN).
• identifier id—Specify the ID for the civic location.
• string—Specify the site or location information in alphanumeric
format.
Step 4 interface interface-id Specify the interface on which you are configuring the location
information, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 5 location {additional-location-information Enter location information for an interface:
word | civic-location-id id | elin-location-id
additional-location-information—Specify additional information
id}
for a location or place.
civic-location-id—Specify global civic location information for an
interface.
elin-location-id—Specify emergency location information for an
interface.
id—Specify the ID for the civic location or the ELIN location. The ID
range is 1 to 4095.
word—Specify a word or phrase with additional location
information.
Step 7 show location Verify the configuration.
Use the no form of each command to return to the default setting.

This example shows how to configure civic location information on the switch:
Switch(config)# location civic-location identifier 1
Switch(config-civic)# number 3550
Switch(config-civic)# primary-road-name "Cisco Way"
Switch(config-civic)# city "San Jose"
Switch(config-civic)# state CA
Switch(config-civic)# building 19
Switch(config-civic)# room C6
Switch(config-civic)# county "Santa Clara"
Switch(config-civic)# country US
Switch(config-civic)# end

OL-8553-06 26-9
Monitoring and Maintaining LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired Location Service
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable wired location service on the switch.
Note Your switch must be running the cryptographic (encrypted) software image to enable the nmsp global
Command Purpose
Step 2 nmsp enable Enable the NMSP features on the switch.
Step 3 nmsp notification interval {attachment | Specify the NMSP notification interval.
location} interval-seconds
attachment—Specify the attachment notification interval.
location—Specify the location notification interval.
interval-seconds—Duration in seconds before the switch sends the
MSE the location or attachment updates. The range is 1 to 30; the
default is 30.
Step 5 show network-policy profile Verify the configuration.
This example shows how to enable NMSP on a switch and to set the location notification time to 10
seconds:
Switch(config)# nmsp enable
Switch(config)# nmsp notification interval location 10
Monitoring and Maintaining LLDP, LLDP-MED, and Wired

Location Service
To monitor and maintain LLDP, LLDP-MED, and wired location service on your device, perform one
or more of these tasks, beginning in privileged EXEC mode.
Command Description
clear lldp counters Reset the traffic counters to zero.
clear lldp table Delete the LLDP neighbor information table.
clear nmsp statistics Clear the NMSP statistic counters.
show lldp Display global information, such as frequency of transmissions, the holdtime for
packets being sent, and the delay time before LLDP initializes on an interface.
show lldp entry entry-name Display information about a specific neighbor.
You can enter an asterisk (*) to display all neighbors, or you can enter the
neighbor name.

26-10 OL-8553-06
Command Description
show lldp interface [interface-id] Display information about interfaces with LLDP enabled.
You can limit the display to a specific interface.
show lldp neighbors [interface-id] Display information about neighbors, including device type, interface type and
[detail] number, holdtime settings, capabilities, and port ID.
You can limit the display to neighbors of a specific interface or expand the display
for more detailed information.
show lldp traffic Display LLDP counters, including the number of packets sent and received,
number of packets discarded, and number of unrecognized TLVs.
show location Display the location information for an endpoint.
show network-policy profile Display the configured network-policy profiles.
show nmsp Display the NMSP information.

OL-8553-06 26-11

26-12 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 28
Configuring SPAN and RSPAN
This chapter describes how to configure Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) and Remote SPAN (RSPAN)
on the Catalyst 3560 switch.

• Understanding SPAN and RSPAN, page 28-1
• Configuring SPAN and RSPAN, page 28-9
• Displaying SPAN and RSPAN Status, page 28-23
Understanding SPAN and RSPAN

You can analyze network traffic passing through ports or VLANs by using SPAN or RSPAN to send a
copy of the traffic to another port on the switch or on another switch that has been connected to a network
analyzer or other monitoring or security device. SPAN copies (or mirrors) traffic received or sent (or
both) on source ports or source VLANs to a destination port for analysis. SPAN does not affect the
switching of network traffic on the source ports or VLANs. You must dedicate the destination port for
SPAN use. Except for traffic that is required for the SPAN or RSPAN session, destination ports do not
receive or forward traffic.
Only traffic that enters or leaves source ports or traffic that enters or leaves source VLANs can be
monitored by using SPAN; traffic routed to a source VLAN cannot be monitored. For example, if
incoming traffic is being monitored, traffic that gets routed from another VLAN to the source VLAN
cannot be monitored; however, traffic that is received on the source VLAN and routed to another VLAN
can be monitored.
You can use the SPAN or RSPAN destination port to inject traffic from a network security device. For
example, if you connect a Cisco Intrusion Detection System (IDS) sensor appliance to a destination port,
the IDS device can send TCP reset packets to close down the TCP session of a suspected attacker.

OL-8553-06 28-1
Chapter 28 Configuring SPAN and RSPAN

• Local SPAN, page 28-2
• Remote SPAN, page 28-2
• SPAN and RSPAN Concepts and Terminology, page 28-3
• SPAN and RSPAN Interaction with Other Features, page 28-8
Local SPAN
Local SPAN supports a SPAN session entirely within one switch; all source ports or source VLANs and
destination ports are in the same switch. Local SPAN copies traffic from one or more source ports in any
VLAN or from one or more VLANs to a destination port for analysis. For example, in Figure 28-1, all
traffic on port 5 (the source port) is mirrored to port 10 (the destination port). A network analyzer on
port 10receives all network traffic from port 5 without being physically attached to port 5.
Figure 28-1 Example of Local SPAN Configuration on a Single Switch
Port 5 traffic mirrored

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 on Port 10
6 7
5 8 11
4 9 12
3 10
2
1
43580
Network analyzer
Remote SPAN
RSPAN supports source ports, source VLANs, and destination ports on different switches, enabling
remote monitoring of multiple switches across your network. Figure 28-2 shows source ports on Switch
A and Switch B. The traffic for each RSPAN session is carried over a user-specified RSPAN VLAN that
is dedicated for that RSPAN session in all participating switches. The RSPAN traffic from the source
ports or VLANs is copied into the RSPAN VLAN and forwarded over trunk ports carrying the RSPAN
VLAN to a destination session monitoring the RSPAN VLAN. Each RSPAN source switch must have
either ports or VLANs as RSPAN sources. The destination is always a physical port, as shown on Switch
C in the figure.

28-2 OL-8553-06
Figure 28-2 Example of RSPAN Configuration
RSPAN
destination ports
RSPAN
Switch C
destination
session
Intermediate switches
must support RSPAN VLAN
RSPAN
VLAN
Switch A Switch B
RSPAN RSPAN
source source
session A session B
101366
RSPAN RSPAN
source ports source ports
SPAN and RSPAN Concepts and Terminology

This section describes concepts and terminology associated with SPAN and RSPAN configuration.
SPAN Sessions
SPAN sessions (local or remote) allow you to monitor traffic on one or more ports, or one or more
VLANs, and send the monitored traffic to one or more destination ports.
A local SPAN session is an association of a destination port with source ports or source VLANs, all on
a single network device. Local SPAN does not have separate source and destination sessions. Local
SPAN sessions gather a set of ingress and egress packets specified by the user and form them into a
stream of SPAN data, which is directed to the destination port.
RSPAN consists of at least one RSPAN source session, an RSPAN VLAN, and at least one RSPAN
destination session. You separately configure RSPAN source sessions and RSPAN destination sessions
on different network devices. To configure an RSPAN source session on a device, you associate a set of
source ports or source VLANs with an RSPAN VLAN. The output of this session is the stream of SPAN
packets that are sent to the RSPAN VLAN. To configure an RSPAN destination session on another
device, you associate the destination port with the RSPAN VLAN. The destination session collects all
RSPAN VLAN traffic and sends it out the RSPAN destination port.

OL-8553-06 28-3
An RSPAN source session is very similar to a local SPAN session, except for where the packet stream
is directed. In an RSPAN source session, SPAN packets are relabeled with the RSPAN VLAN ID and
directed over normal trunk ports to the destination switch.
An RSPAN destination session takes all packets received on the RSPAN VLAN, strips off the VLAN
tagging, and presents them on the destination port. Its purpose is to present a copy of all RSPAN VLAN
packets (except Layer 2 control packets) to the user for analysis.
There can be more than one source session and more than one destination session active in the same
RSPAN VLAN. There can also be intermediate switches separating the RSPAN source and destination
sessions. These switches need not be capable of running RSPAN, but they must respond to the
requirements of the RSPAN VLAN (see the “RSPAN VLAN” section on page 28-8).
Traffic monitoring in a SPAN session has these restrictions:
• Sources can be ports or VLANs, but you cannot mix source ports and source VLANs in the same
session.
• The switch supports up to two source sessions (local SPAN and RSPAN source sessions). You can
run both a local SPAN and an RSPAN source session in the same switch. The switch supports a total
of 66 source and RSPAN destination sessions.
• You can have multiple destination ports in a SPAN session, but no more than 64 destination ports.
• You can configure two separate SPAN or RSPAN source sessions with separate or overlapping sets
of SPAN source ports and VLANs. Both switched and routed ports can be configured as SPAN
sources and destinations.
• SPAN sessions do not interfere with the normal operation of the switch. However, an
oversubscribed SPAN destination, for example, a 10-Mb/s port monitoring a 100-Mb/s port, can
result in dropped or lost packets.
• When RSPAN is enabled, each packet being monitored is transmitted twice, once as normal traffic
and once as a monitored packet. Therefore monitoring a large number of ports or VLANs could
potentially generate large amounts of network traffic.
• You can configure SPAN sessions on disabled ports; however, a SPAN session does not become
active unless you enable the destination port and at least one source port or VLAN for that session.
• The switch does not support a combination of local SPAN and RSPAN in a single session. That is,
an RSPAN source session cannot have a local destination port, an RSPAN destination session
cannot have a local source port, and an RSPAN destination session and an RSPAN source session
that are using the same RSPAN VLAN cannot run on the same switch.
Monitored Traffic
SPAN sessions can monitor these traffic types:
• Receive (Rx) SPAN—The goal of receive (or ingress) SPAN is to monitor as much as possible all
the packets received by the source interface or VLAN before any modification or processing is
performed by the switch. A copy of each packet received by the source is sent to the destination port
for that SPAN session.
Packets that are modified because of routing or quality of service (QoS)—for example, modified
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)—are copied before modification.
Features that can cause a packet to be dropped during receive processing have no effect on ingress
SPAN; the destination port receives a copy of the packet even if the actual incoming packet is
dropped. These features include IP standard and extended input access control lists (ACLs), ingress
QoS policing, VLAN ACLs, and egress QoS policing.

28-4 OL-8553-06
• Transmit (Tx) SPAN—The goal of transmit (or egress) SPAN is to monitor as much as possible all
the packets sent by the source interface after all modification and processing is performed by the
switch. A copy of each packet sent by the source is sent to the destination port for that SPAN session.
The copy is provided after the packet is modified.
Packets that are modified because of routing—for example, with modified time-to-live (TTL),
MAC-address, or QoS values—are duplicated (with the modifications) at the destination port.
Features that can cause a packet to be dropped during transmit processing also affect the duplicated
copy for SPAN. These features include IP standard and extended output ACLs and egress QoS
policing.
• Both—In a SPAN session, you can also monitor a port or VLAN for both received and sent packets.
This is the default.
The default configuration for local SPAN session ports is to send all packets untagged. SPAN also does
not normally monitor bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets and Layer 2 protocols, such as Cisco
Discovery Protocol (CDP), VLAN Trunk Protocol (VTP), Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP), Spanning
Tree Protocol (STP), and Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP). However, when you enter the
encapsulation replicate keywords when configuring a destination port, these changes occur:
• Packets are sent on the destination port with the same encapsulation—untagged, Inter-Switch Link
(ISL), or IEEE 802.1Q—that they had on the source port.
• Packets of all types, including BPDU and Layer 2 protocol packets, are monitored.
Therefore, a local SPAN session with encapsulation replicate enabled can have a mixture of untagged,
ISL, and IEEE 802.1Q tagged packets appear on the destination port.
Switch congestion can cause packets to be dropped at ingress source ports, egress source ports, or SPAN
destination ports. In general, these characteristics are independent of one another. For example:
• A packet might be forwarded normally but dropped from monitoring due to an oversubscribed
SPAN destination port.
• An ingress packet might be dropped from normal forwarding, but still appear on the SPAN
destination port.
• An egress packet dropped because of switch congestion is also dropped from egress SPAN.
In some SPAN configurations, multiple copies of the same source packet are sent to the SPAN
destination port. For example, a bidirectional (both Rx and Tx) SPAN session is configured for the Rx
monitor on port A and Tx monitor on port B. If a packet enters the switch through port A and is switched
to port B, both incoming and outgoing packets are sent to the destination port. Both packets are the same
(unless a Layer-3 rewrite occurs, in which case the packets are different because of the packet
modification).
Source Ports
A source port (also called a monitored port) is a switched or routed port that you monitor for network
traffic analysis. In a local SPAN session or RSPAN source session, you can monitor source ports or
VLANs for traffic in one or both directions. The switch supports any number of source ports (up to the
maximum number of available ports on the switch) and any number of source VLANs (up to the
maximum number of VLANs supported). However, the switch supports a maximum of two sessions
(local or RSPAN) with source ports or VLANs, and you cannot mix ports and VLANs in a single session.

OL-8553-06 28-5
A source port has these characteristics:

• It can be monitored in multiple SPAN sessions.
• Each source port can be configured with a direction (ingress, egress, or both) to monitor.
• It can be any port type (for example, EtherChannel, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, and so forth).
• For EtherChannel sources, you can monitor traffic for the entire EtherChannel or individually on a
physical port as it participates in the port channel.
• It can be an access port, trunk port, routed port, or voice VLAN port.
• It cannot be a destination port.
• Source ports can be in the same or different VLANs.
• You can monitor multiple source ports in a single session.
Source VLANs
VLAN-based SPAN (VSPAN) is the monitoring of the network traffic in one or more VLANs. The
SPAN or RSPAN source interface in VSPAN is a VLAN ID, and traffic is monitored on all the ports for
that VLAN.
VSPAN has these characteristics:
• All active ports in the source VLAN are included as source ports and can be monitored in either or
both directions.
• On a given port, only traffic on the monitored VLAN is sent to the destination port.
• If a destination port belongs to a source VLAN, it is excluded from the source list and is not
monitored.
• If ports are added to or removed from the source VLANs, the traffic on the source VLAN received
by those ports is added to or removed from the sources being monitored.
• You cannot use filter VLANs in the same session with VLAN sources.
• You can monitor only Ethernet VLANs.
VLAN Filtering
When you monitor a trunk port as a source port, by default, all VLANs active on the trunk are monitored.
You can limit SPAN traffic monitoring on trunk source ports to specific VLANs by using VLAN
filtering.
• VLAN filtering applies only to trunk ports or to voice VLAN ports.
• VLAN filtering applies only to port-based sessions and is not allowed in sessions with VLAN
sources.
• When a VLAN filter list is specified, only those VLANs in the list are monitored on trunk ports or
on voice VLAN access ports.
• SPAN traffic coming from other port types is not affected by VLAN filtering; that is, all VLANs are
allowed on other ports.
• VLAN filtering affects only traffic forwarded to the destination SPAN port and does not affect the
switching of normal traffic.

28-6 OL-8553-06
Destination Port
Each local SPAN session or RSPAN destination session must have a destination port (also called a
monitoring port) that receives a copy of traffic from the source ports or VLANs and sends the SPAN
packets to the user, usually a network analyzer.
A destination port has these characteristics:
• For a local SPAN session, the destination port must reside on the same switch as the source port. For
an RSPAN session, it is located on the switch containing the RSPAN destination session. There is
no destination port on a switch running only an RSPAN source session.
• When a port is configured as a SPAN destination port, the configuration overwrites the original port
configuration. When the SPAN destination configuration is removed, the port reverts to its previous
configuration. If a configuration change is made to the port while it is acting as a SPAN destination
port, the change does not take effect until the SPAN destination configuration had been removed.
• If the port was in an EtherChannel group, it is removed from the group while it is a destination port.
If it was a routed port, it is no longer a routed port.
• It can be any Ethernet physical port.
• It cannot be a secure port.
• It cannot be a source port.
• It cannot be an EtherChannel group or a VLAN.
• It can participate in only one SPAN session at a time (a destination port in one SPAN session cannot
be a destination port for a second SPAN session).
• When it is active, incoming traffic is disabled. The port does not transmit any traffic except that
required for the SPAN session. Incoming traffic is never learned or forwarded on a destination port.
• If ingress traffic forwarding is enabled for a network security device, the destination port forwards
traffic at Layer 2.
• It does not participate in any of the Layer 2 protocols (STP, VTP, CDP, DTP, PagP).
• A destination port that belongs to a source VLAN of any SPAN session is excluded from the source
list and is not monitored.
• The maximum number of destination ports in a switch is 64.
Local SPAN and RSPAN destination ports behave differently regarding VLAN tagging and
encapsulation:
• For local SPAN, if the encapsulation replicate keywords are specified for the destination port, these
packets appear with the original encapsulation (untagged, ISL, or IEEE 802.1Q). If these keywords
are not specified, packets appear in the untagged format. Therefore, the output of a local SPAN
session with encapsulation replicate enabled can contain a mixture of untagged, ISL, or IEEE
802.1Q-tagged packets.
• For RSPAN, the original VLAN ID is lost because it is overwritten by the RSPAN VLAN
identification. Therefore, all packets appear on the destination port as untagged.

OL-8553-06 28-7
RSPAN VLAN
The RSPAN VLAN carries SPAN traffic between RSPAN source and destination sessions. It has these
special characteristics:
• All traffic in the RSPAN VLAN is always flooded.
• No MAC address learning occurs on the RSPAN VLAN.
• RSPAN VLAN traffic only flows on trunk ports.
• RSPAN VLANs must be configured in VLAN configuration mode by using the remote-span VLAN
configuration mode command.
• STP can run on RSPAN VLAN trunks but not on SPAN destination ports.
• An RSPAN VLAN cannot be a private-VLAN primary or secondary VLAN.
For VLANs 1 to 1005 that are visible to VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP), the VLAN ID and its
associated RSPAN characteristic are propagated by VTP. If you assign an RSPAN VLAN ID in the
extended VLAN range (1006 to 4094), you must manually configure all intermediate switches.
It is normal to have multiple RSPAN VLANs in a network at the same time with each RSPAN VLAN
defining a network-wide RSPAN session. That is, multiple RSPAN source sessions anywhere in the
network can contribute packets to the RSPAN session. It is also possible to have multiple RSPAN
destination sessions throughout the network, monitoring the same RSPAN VLAN and presenting traffic
to the user. The RSPAN VLAN ID separates the sessions.
SPAN and RSPAN Interaction with Other Features

SPAN interacts with these features:
• Routing—SPAN does not monitor routed traffic. VSPAN only monitors traffic that enters or exits
the switch, not traffic that is routed between VLANs. For example, if a VLAN is being
Rx-monitored and the switch routes traffic from another VLAN to the monitored VLAN, that traffic
is not monitored and not received on the SPAN destination port.
• STP—A destination port does not participate in STP while its SPAN or RSPAN session is active.
The destination port can participate in STP after the SPAN or RSPAN session is disabled. On a
source port, SPAN does not affect the STP status. STP can be active on trunk ports carrying an
RSPAN VLAN.
• CDP—A SPAN destination port does not participate in CDP while the SPAN session is active. After
the SPAN session is disabled, the port again participates in CDP.
• VTP—You can use VTP to prune an RSPAN VLAN between switches.
• VLAN and trunking—You can modify VLAN membership or trunk settings for source or
destination ports at any time. However, changes in VLAN membership or trunk settings for a
destination port do not take effect until you remove the SPAN destination configuration. Changes
in VLAN membership or trunk settings for a source port immediately take effect, and the respective
SPAN sessions automatically adjust accordingly.
• EtherChannel—You can configure an EtherChannel group as a source port but not as a SPAN
destination port. When a group is configured as a SPAN source, the entire group is monitored.
If a physical port is added to a monitored EtherChannel group, the new port is added to the SPAN
source port list. If a port is removed from a monitored EtherChannel group, it is automatically
removed from the source port list.

28-8 OL-8553-06
A physical port that belongs to an EtherChannel group can be configured as a SPAN source port and
still be a part of the EtherChannel. In this case, data from the physical port is monitored as it
participates in the EtherChannel. However, if a physical port that belongs to an EtherChannel group
is configured as a SPAN destination, it is removed from the group. After the port is removed from
the SPAN session, it rejoins the EtherChannel group. Ports removed from an EtherChannel group
remain members of the group, but they are in the inactive or suspended state.
If a physical port that belongs to an EtherChannel group is a destination port and the EtherChannel
group is a source, the port is removed from the EtherChannel group and from the list of monitored
ports.
• Multicast traffic can be monitored. For egress and ingress port monitoring, only a single unedited
packet is sent to the SPAN destination port. It does not reflect the number of times the multicast
packet is sent.
• A private-VLAN port cannot be a SPAN destination port.
• A secure port cannot be a SPAN destination port.
For SPAN sessions, do not enable port security on ports with monitored egress when ingress
forwarding is enabled on the destination port. For RSPAN source sessions, do not enable port
security on any ports with monitored egress.
• An IEEE 802.1x port can be a SPAN source port. You can enable IEEE 802.1x on a port that is a
SPAN destination port; however, IEEE 802.1x is disabled until the port is removed as a SPAN
destination.
For SPAN sessions, do not enable IEEE 802.1x on ports with monitored egress when ingress
forwarding is enabled on the destination port. For RSPAN source sessions, do not enable
IEEE 802.1x on any ports that are egress monitored.

• Default SPAN and RSPAN Configuration, page 28-9
• Configuring Local SPAN, page 28-10
• Configuring RSPAN, page 28-16
Default SPAN and RSPAN Configuration

Table 28-1 shows the default SPAN and RSPAN configuration.
Table 28-1 Default SPAN and RSPAN Configuration

SPAN state (SPAN and RSPAN) Disabled.
Source port traffic to monitor Both received and sent traffic (both).
Encapsulation type (destination port) Native form (untagged packets).
Ingress forwarding (destination port) Disabled

OL-8553-06 28-9
Table 28-1 Default SPAN and RSPAN Configuration (continued)

VLAN filtering On a trunk interface used as a source port, all VLANs are
monitored.
RSPAN VLANs None configured.
Configuring Local SPAN

• SPAN Configuration Guidelines, page 28-10
• Creating a Local SPAN Session, page 28-11
• Creating a Local SPAN Session and Configuring Incoming Traffic, page 28-13
• Specifying VLANs to Filter, page 28-15
SPAN Configuration Guidelines

Follow these guidelines when configuring SPAN:
• For SPAN sources, you can monitor traffic for a single port or VLAN or a series or range of ports
or VLANs for each session. You cannot mix source ports and source VLANs within a single SPAN
session.
• The destination port cannot be a source port; a source port cannot be a destination port.
• You cannot have two SPAN sessions using the same destination port.
• When you configure a switch port as a SPAN destination port, it is no longer a normal switch port;
only monitored traffic passes through the SPAN destination port.
• Entering SPAN configuration commands does not remove previously configured SPAN parameters.
You must enter the no monitor session {session_number | all | local | remote} global configuration
command to delete configured SPAN parameters.
• For local SPAN, outgoing packets through the SPAN destination port carry the original
encapsulation headers—untagged, ISL, or IEEE 802.1Q—if the encapsulation replicate keywords
are specified. If the keywords are not specified, the packets are sent in native form. For RSPAN
destination ports, outgoing packets are not tagged.
• You can configure a disabled port to be a source or destination port, but the SPAN function does not
start until the destination port and at least one source port or source VLAN are enabled.
• You can limit SPAN traffic to specific VLANs by using the filter vlan keyword. If a trunk port is
being monitored, only traffic on the VLANs specified with this keyword is monitored. By default,
all VLANs are monitored on a trunk port.
• You cannot mix source VLANs and filter VLANs within a single SPAN session.
• Catalyst 3560-24PS and 3560-48PS switches have hardware limitations related to SPAN. An egress
SPAN copy of routed unicast traffic might show an incorrect destination MAC address on both local
and remote SPAN sessions. This limitation does not apply to bridged packets. The workaround for
local SPAN is to use the replicate option.

28-10 OL-8553-06
• On Catalyst 3560-24PS and 3560-48PS switches, egress SPAN routed packets (both unicast and
multicast) show the incorrect source MAC address. For local SPAN packets with native
encapsulation on the destination port, the packet shows the MAC address of VLAN 1. This problem
does not appear with local SPAN when the encapsulation replicate option is used. This limitation
does not apply to bridged packets. The workaround is to use the encapsulate replicate keywords in
the monitor session global configuration command.
Creating a Local SPAN Session

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a SPAN session and specify the source
(monitored) ports or VLANs and the destination (monitoring) ports:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no monitor session {session_number | all | Remove any existing SPAN configuration for the session.
local | remote}
For session_number, the range is 1 to 66.
Specify all to remove all SPAN sessions, local to remove all local
sessions, or remote to remove all remote SPAN sessions.
Step 3 monitor session session_number source Specify the SPAN session and the source port (monitored port).
{interface interface-id | vlan vlan-id} [, | -]
[both | rx | tx]
For interface-id, specify the source port or source VLAN to monitor.
• For source interface-id, specify the source port to monitor. Valid
interfaces include physical interfaces and port-channel logical
interfaces (port-channel port-channel-number). Valid
port-channel numbers are 1 to 48.
• For vlan-id, specify the source VLAN to monitor. The range is 1
to 4094 (excluding the RSPAN VLAN).
Note A single session can include multiple sources (ports or
VLANs), defined in a series of commands, but you cannot
combine source ports and source VLANs in one session.
(Optional) [, | -] Specify a series or range of interfaces. Enter a space

before and after the comma; enter a space before and after the
hyphen.
(Optional) Specify the direction of traffic to monitor. If you do not
specify a traffic direction, the SPAN monitors both sent and received
traffic.
• both—Monitor both received and sent traffic. This is the
default.
• rx—Monitor received traffic.
• tx—Monitor sent traffic.
Note You can use the monitor session session_number source
command multiple times to configure multiple source ports.

OL-8553-06 28-11
Command Purpose
Step 4 monitor session session_number Specify the SPAN session and the destination port (monitoring port).
destination {interface interface-id [, | -]
For session_number, specify the session number entered in step 3.
[encapsulation replicate]}
Note For local SPAN, you must use the same session number for
the source and destination interfaces.
For interface-id, specify the destination port. The destination

interface must be a physical port; it cannot be an EtherChannel, and
it cannot be a VLAN.
hyphen.
(Optional) Enter encapsulation replicate to specify that the
destination interface replicates the source interface encapsulation
method. If not selected, the default is to send packets in native form
(untagged).
Note You can use monitor session session_number destination
command multiple times to configure multiple destination
ports.
Step 6 show monitor [session session_number] Verify the configuration.
show running-config
Step 7 copy running-config startup-config (Optional) Save the configuration in the configuration file.
To delete a SPAN session, use the no monitor session session_number global configuration command.
To remove a source or destination port or VLAN from the SPAN session, use the no monitor session
session_number source {interface interface-id | vlan vlan-id} global configuration command or the no
monitor session session_number destination interface interface-id global configuration command. For
destination interfaces, the encapsulation options are ignored with the no form of the command.
This example shows how to set up SPAN session 1 for monitoring source port traffic to a destination
port. First, any existing SPAN configuration for session 1 is deleted, and then bidirectional traffic is
mirrored from source Gigabit Ethernet port 1 to destination Gigabit Ethernet port 2, retaining the
encapsulation method.
Switch(config)# no monitor session 1
Switch(config)# monitor session 1 source interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config)# monitor session 1 destination interface gigabitethernet0/2
encapsulation replicate
Switch(config)# end
This example shows how to remove port 1 as a SPAN source for SPAN session 1:
Switch(config)# no monitor session 1 source interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config)# end

28-12 OL-8553-06
This example shows how to disable received traffic monitoring on port 1, which was configured for
bidirectional monitoring:
Switch(config)# no monitor session 1 source interface gigabitethernet0/1 rx
The monitoring of traffic received on port 1 is disabled, but traffic sent from this port continues to be
monitored.
This example shows how to remove any existing configuration on SPAN session 2, configure SPAN
session 2 to monitor received traffic on all ports belonging to VLANs 1 through 3, and send it to
destination Gigabit Ethernet port 2. The configuration is then modified to also monitor all traffic on all
ports belonging to VLAN 10.
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 source vlan 1 - 3 rx
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 source vlan 10
Switch(config)# end
Creating a Local SPAN Session and Configuring Incoming Traffic

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a SPAN session, to specify the source
ports or VLANs and the destination ports, and to enable incoming traffic on the destination port for a
network security device (such as a Cisco IDS Sensor Appliance).
For details about the keywords not related to incoming traffic, see the “Creating a Local SPAN Session”
Command Purpose
local | remote}
Step 3 monitor session session_number source Specify the SPAN session and the source port (monitored port).
[both | rx | tx]

OL-8553-06 28-13
Command Purpose
Step 4 monitor session session_number Specify the SPAN session, the destination port, the packet
destination {interface interface-id [, | -] encapsulation, and the ingress VLAN and encapsulation.
[encapsulation replicate] [ingress {dot1q
For session_number, specify the session number entered in Step 3.
vlan vlan-id | isl | untagged vlan vlan-id |
vlan vlan-id}]} For interface-id, specify the destination port. The destination
interface must be a physical port; it cannot be an EtherChannel, and
it cannot be a VLAN.
before and after the comma or hyphen.
(untagged).
Enter ingress with keywords to enable forwarding of incoming
traffic on the destination port and to specify the encapsulation type:
• dot1q vlan vlan-id—Accept incoming packets with IEEE
802.1Q encapsulation with the specified VLAN as the default
VLAN.
• isl—Forward ingress packets with ISL encapsulation.
• untagged vlan vlan-id or vlan vlan-id—Accept incoming
packets with untagged encapsulation type with the specified
VLAN as the default VLAN.
show running-config
To remove a source or destination port or VLAN from the SPAN session, use the no monitor session
session_number source {interface interface-id | vlan vlan-id} global configuration command or the no
monitor session session_number destination interface interface-id global configuration command. For
destination interfaces, the encapsulation and ingress options are ignored with the no form of the
command.
session 2 to monitor received traffic on Gigabit Ethernet source port 1, and send it to destination Gigabit
Ethernet port 2 with the same egress encapsulation type as the source port, and to enable ingress
forwarding with IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation and VLAN 6 as the default ingress VLAN.
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 source gigabitethernet0/1 rx
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 destination interface gigabitethernet0/2 encapsulation
replicate ingress dot1q vlan 6
Switch(config)# end

28-14 OL-8553-06
Specifying VLANs to Filter

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to limit SPAN source traffic to specific VLANs:
Command Purpose
local | remote}
Step 3 monitor session session_number source Specify the characteristics of the source port (monitored port) and
interface interface-id SPAN session.
For interface-id, specify the source port to monitor. The interface
specified must already be configured as a trunk port.
Step 4 monitor session session_number filter vlan Limit the SPAN source traffic to specific VLANs.
vlan-id [, | -]
For session_number, enter the session number specified in Step 3.
(Optional) Use a comma (,) to specify a series of VLANs, or use a
hyphen (-) to specify a range of VLANs. Enter a space before and after
the comma; enter a space before and after the hyphen.
Step 5 monitor session session_number Specify the SPAN session and the destination port (monitoring port).
destination {interface interface-id [, | -]
For session_number, specify the session number entered in Step 3.
[encapsulation replicate]}
For interface-id, specify the destination port. The destination
interface must be a physical port; it cannot be an EtherChannel, and it
cannot be a VLAN.
before and after the comma; enter a space before and after the hyphen.
(untagged).
show running-config
To monitor all VLANs on the trunk port, use the no monitor session session_number filter global

OL-8553-06 28-15
session 2 to monitor traffic received on Gigabit Ethernet trunk port 2, and send traffic for only VLANs
1 through 5 and VLAN 9 to destination Gigabit Ethernet port 1.
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 source interface gigabitethernet0/2 rx
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 filter vlan 1 - 5, 9
Switch(config)# end
Configuring RSPAN
• RSPAN Configuration Guidelines, page 28-16
• Configuring a VLAN as an RSPAN VLAN, page 28-17
• Creating an RSPAN Source Session, page 28-18
• Creating an RSPAN Destination Session, page 28-19
• Creating an RSPAN Destination Session and Configuring Incoming Traffic, page 28-20
• Specifying VLANs to Filter, page 28-22
RSPAN Configuration Guidelines

Follow these guidelines when configuring RSPAN:
• All the items in the “SPAN Configuration Guidelines” section on page 28-10 apply to RSPAN.
• As RSPAN VLANs have special properties, you should reserve a few VLANs across your network
for use as RSPAN VLANs; do not assign access ports to these VLANs.
• You can apply an output ACL to RSPAN traffic to selectively filter or monitor specific packets.
Specify these ACLs on the RSPAN VLAN in the RSPAN source switches.
• For RSPAN configuration, you can distribute the source ports and the destination ports across
multiple switches in your network.
• RSPAN does not support BPDU packet monitoring or other Layer 2 switch protocols.
• The RSPAN VLAN is configured only on trunk ports and not on access ports. To avoid unwanted
traffic in RSPAN VLANs, make sure that the VLAN remote-span feature is supported in all the
participating switches.
• Access ports (including voice VLAN ports) on the RSPAN VLAN are put in the inactive state.
• RSPAN VLANs are included as sources for port-based RSPAN sessions when source trunk ports
have active RSPAN VLANs. RSPAN VLANs can also be sources in SPAN sessions. However, since
the switch does not monitor spanned traffic, it does not support egress spanning of packets on any
RSPAN VLAN identified as the destination of an RSPAN source session on the switch.
• You can configure any VLAN as an RSPAN VLAN as long as these conditions are met:
– The same RSPAN VLAN is used for an RSPAN session in all the switches.
– All participating switches support RSPAN.

28-16 OL-8553-06
• We recommend that you configure an RSPAN VLAN before you configure an RSPAN source or a
destination session.
• If you enable VTP and VTP pruning, RSPAN traffic is pruned in the trunks to prevent the unwanted
flooding of RSPAN traffic across the network for VLAN IDs that are lower than 1005.
• Catalyst 3560-24PS and 3560-48PS switches have hardware limitations related to RSPAN:
– An egress SPAN copy of routed unicast traffic might show an incorrect destination MAC
address on both local and remote SPAN sessions. This limitation does not apply to bridged
packets. The workaround for local SPAN is to use the replicate option. For a remote SPAN
session, there is no workaround.
– Egress SPAN routed packets (both unicast and multicast) show the incorrect source MAC
address. For remote SPAN packets, the source MAC address should be the MAC address of the
egress VLAN, but instead the packet shows the MAC address of the RSPAN VLAN. There is
no workaround.
– During periods of very high traffic, when two RSPAN source sessions are configured, the
VLAN ID of packets in one RSPAN session might overwrite the VLAN ID of the other RSPAN
session. If this occurs, packets intended for one RSPAN VLAN are incorrectly sent to the other
RSPAN VLAN. This problem does not affect RSPAN destination sessions. The workaround is
to configure only one RSPAN source session.
Configuring a VLAN as an RSPAN VLAN

First create a new VLAN to be the RSPAN VLAN for the RSPAN session. You must create the RSPAN
VLAN in all switches that will participate in RSPAN. If the RSPAN VLAN-ID is in the normal range
(lower than 1005) and VTP is enabled in the network, you can create the RSPAN VLAN in one switch,
and VTP propagates it to the other switches in the VTP domain. For extended-range VLANs (greater
than 1005), you must configure RSPAN VLAN on both source and destination switches and any
intermediate switches.
Use VTP pruning to get an efficient flow of RSPAN traffic, or manually delete the RSPAN VLAN from
all trunks that do not need to carry the RSPAN traffic.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create an RSPAN VLAN:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vlan vlan-id Enter a VLAN ID to create a VLAN, or enter the VLAN ID of an
existing VLAN, and enter VLAN configuration mode. The range is
2 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
The RSPAN VLAN cannot be VLAN 1 (the default VLAN) or
VLAN IDs 1002 through 1005 (reserved for Token Ring and FDDI
VLANs).
Step 3 remote-span Configure the VLAN as an RSPAN VLAN.
To remove the remote SPAN characteristic from a VLAN and convert it back to a normal VLAN, use
the no remote-span VLAN configuration command.

OL-8553-06 28-17
This example shows how to create RSPAN VLAN 901.

Switch(config-vlan)# remote span
Creating an RSPAN Source Session

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to start an RSPAN source session and to specify
the monitored source and the destination RSPAN VLAN:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no monitor session {session_number | all | Remove any existing RSPAN configuration for the session.
local | remote}
Specify all to remove all RSPAN sessions, local to remove all local
Step 3 monitor session session_number source Specify the RSPAN session and the source port (monitored port).
[both | rx | tx]
Enter a source port or source VLAN for the RSPAN session:
• For interface-id, specify the source port to monitor. Valid
interfaces include physical interfaces and port-channel logical
interfaces (port-channel port-channel-number). Valid
port-channel numbers are 1 to 48.
• For vlan-id, specify the source VLAN to monitor. The range is 1
to 4094 (excluding the RSPAN VLAN).
A single session can include multiple sources (ports or VLANs),
defined in a series of commands, but you cannot combine source
ports and source VLANs in one session.
hyphen.
(Optional) Specify the direction of traffic to monitor. If you do not
specify a traffic direction, the source interface sends both sent and
received traffic.
• both—Monitor both received and sent traffic.
• rx—Monitor received traffic.
• tx—Monitor sent traffic.
Step 4 monitor session session_number Specify the RSPAN session and the destination RSPAN VLAN.
destination remote vlan vlan-id
For session_number, enter the number defined in Step 3.
For vlan-id, specify the source RSPAN VLAN to monitor.

28-18 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
show running-config
To remove a source port or VLAN from the SPAN session, use the no monitor session session_number
source {interface interface-id | vlan vlan-id} global configuration command. To remove the RSPAN
VLAN from the session, use the no monitor session session_number destination remote vlan vlan-id.
This example shows how to remove any existing RSPAN configuration for session 1, configure RSPAN
session 1 to monitor multiple source interfaces, and configure the destination as RSPAN VLAN 901.
Switch(config)# monitor session 1 source interface gigabitethernet0/1 tx
Switch(config)# monitor session 1 source interface port-channel 2

Switch(config)# monitor session 1 destination remote vlan 901
Switch(config)# end
Creating an RSPAN Destination Session

You configure the RSPAN destination session on a different switch; that is, not the switch on which the
source session was configured.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define the RSPAN VLAN on that switch, to
create an RSPAN destination session, and to specify the source RSPAN VLAN and the destination port:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vlan vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID of the RSPAN VLAN created from the source
switch, and enter VLAN configuration mode.
If both switches are participating in VTP and the RSPAN VLAN ID
is from 2 to 1005, Steps 2 through 4 are not required because the
RSPAN VLAN ID is propagated through the VTP network.
Step 3 remote-span Identify the VLAN as the RSPAN VLAN.
Step 5 no monitor session {session_number | all | Remove any existing RSPAN configuration for the session.
local | remote}
Specify all to remove all RSPAN sessions, local to remove all local
Step 6 monitor session session_number source Specify the RSPAN session and the source RSPAN VLAN.
remote vlan vlan-id

OL-8553-06 28-19
Command Purpose
Step 7 monitor session session_number Specify the RSPAN session and the destination interface.
destination interface interface-id
In an RSPAN destination session, you must use the same session
number for the source RSPAN VLAN and the destination port.
For interface-id, specify the destination interface. The destination
interface must be a physical interface.
Though visible in the command-line help string, encapsulation
replicate is not supported for RSPAN. The original VLAN ID is
overwritten by the RSPAN VLAN ID, and all packets appear on the
destination port as untagged.
show running-config
To remove a destination port from the SPAN session, use the no monitor session session_number
destination interface interface-id global configuration command. To remove the RSPAN VLAN from
the session, use the no monitor session session_number source remote vlan vlan-id.
This example shows how to configure VLAN 901 as the source remote VLAN and port 1 as the
destination interface:
Switch(config)# monitor session 1 source remote vlan 901
Switch(config)# end
Creating an RSPAN Destination Session and Configuring Incoming Traffic

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create an RSPAN destination session, to
specify the source RSPAN VLAN and the destination port, and to enable incoming traffic on the
destination port for a network security device (such as a Cisco IDS Sensor Appliance).
For details about the keywords not related to incoming traffic, see the “Creating an RSPAN Destination
Session” section on page 28-19. This procedure assumes that the RSPAN VLAN has already
been configured.
Command Purpose
local | remote}
Step 3 monitor session session_number source Specify the RSPAN session and the source RSPAN VLAN.
remote vlan vlan-id

28-20 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 4 monitor session session_number Specify the SPAN session, the destination port, the packet
destination {interface interface-id [, | -] encapsulation, and the incoming VLAN and encapsulation.
[ingress {dot1q vlan vlan-id | isl | untagged
vlan vlan-id | vlan vlan-id}]}
In an RSPAN destination session, you must use the same session
number for the source RSPAN VLAN and the destination port.
For interface-id, specify the destination interface. The destination
interface must be a physical interface.
Though visible in the command-line help string, encapsulation
replicate is not supported for RSPAN. The original VLAN ID is
overwritten by the RSPAN VLAN ID, and all packets appear on the
destination port as untagged.
hyphen.
Enter ingress with additional keywords to enable forwarding of
incoming traffic on the destination port and to specify the
encapsulation type:
• dot1q vlan vlan-id—Forward incoming packets with IEEE
802.1Q encapsulation with the specified VLAN as the default
VLAN.
• isl—Forward ingress packets with ISL encapsulation.
• untagged vlan vlan-id or vlan vlan-id—Forward incoming
packets with untagged encapsulation type with the specified
VLAN as the default VLAN.
show running-config
To delete an RSPAN session, use the no monitor session session_number global configuration
command. To remove a destination port from the RSPAN session, use the no monitor session
session_number destination interface interface-id global configuration command. The ingress options
are ignored with the no form of the command.
This example shows how to configure VLAN 901 as the source remote VLAN in RSPAN session 2, to
configure Gigabit Ethernet source port 2 as the destination interface, and to enable forwarding of
incoming traffic on the interface with VLAN 6 as the default receiving VLAN.
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 source remote vlan 901
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 destination interface gigabitethernet0/2 ingress vlan 6
Switch(config)# end

OL-8553-06 28-21
Specifying VLANs to Filter

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the RSPAN source session to limit
RSPAN source traffic to specific VLANs:
Command Purpose
local | remote}
Step 3 monitor session session_number source Specify the characteristics of the source port (monitored port) and
interface interface-id SPAN session.
For interface-id, specify the source port to monitor. The interface
specified must already be configured as a trunk port.
Step 4 monitor session session_number filter vlan Limit the SPAN source traffic to specific VLANs.
vlan-id [, | -]
For session_number, enter the session number specified in step 3.
(Optional) Use a comma (,) to specify a series of VLANs or use a
hyphen (-) to specify a range of VLANs. Enter a space before and after
the comma; enter a space before and after the hyphen.
Step 5 monitor session session_number Specify the RSPAN session and the destination remote VLAN
destination remote vlan vlan-id (RSPAN VLAN).
For session_number, enter the session number specified in step 3.
For vlan-id, specify the RSPAN VLAN to carry the monitored traffic
to the destination port.
show running-config
To monitor all VLANs on the trunk port, use the no monitor session session_number filter vlan global
This example shows how to remove any existing configuration on RSPAN session 2, configure RSPAN
session 2 to monitor traffic received on trunk port 2, and send traffic for only VLANs 1 through 5 and 9
to destination RSPAN VLAN 902.
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 filter vlan 1 - 5, 9
Switch(config)# monitor session 2 destination remote vlan 902
Switch(config)# end

28-22 OL-8553-06
Displaying SPAN and RSPAN Status

To display the current SPAN or RSPAN configuration, use the show monitor user EXEC command.
You can also use the show running-config privileged EXEC command to display configured SPAN or
RSPAN sessions.

OL-8553-06 28-23

28-24 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 29
Configuring RMON
This chapter describes how to configure Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) on the Catalyst 3560
switch.
RMON is a standard monitoring specification that defines a set of statistics and functions that can be
exchanged between RMON-compliant console systems and network probes. RMON provides you with
comprehensive network-fault diagnosis, planning, and performance-tuning information.
Note For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the “System
Management Commands” section in the Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference,
> Command References.

• Understanding RMON, page 29-1
• Configuring RMON, page 29-2
• Displaying RMON Status, page 29-6
Understanding RMON
RMON is an Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard monitoring specification that allows
various network agents and console systems to exchange network monitoring data. You can use the
RMON feature with the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent in the switch to monitor
all the traffic flowing among switches on all connected LAN segments as shown in Figure 29-1.

OL-8553-06 29-1
Chapter 29 Configuring RMON
Configuring RMON
Figure 29-1 Remote Monitoring Example
Network management station with

generic RMON console application
RMON alarms and events

configured. SNMP configured.
RMON history
and statistic
collection enabled.
101233
The switch supports these RMON groups (defined in RFC 1757):

• Statistics (RMON group 1)—Collects Ethernet statistics (including Fast Ethernet and Gigabit
Ethernet statistics, depending on the switch type and supported interfaces) on an interface.
• History (RMON group 2)—Collects a history group of statistics on Ethernet ports (including Fast
Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet statistics, depending on the switch type and supported interfaces) for
a specified polling interval.
• Alarm (RMON group 3)—Monitors a specific management information base (MIB) object for a
specified interval, triggers an alarm at a specified value (rising threshold), and resets the alarm at
another value (falling threshold). Alarms can be used with events; the alarm triggers an event, which
can generate a log entry or an SNMP trap.
• Event (RMON group 9)—Specifies the action to take when an event is triggered by an alarm. The
action can be to generate a log entry or an SNMP trap.
Because switches supported by this software release use hardware counters for RMON data processing,
the monitoring is more efficient, and little processing power is required.
Configuring RMON
• Default RMON Configuration, page 29-3
• Configuring RMON Alarms and Events, page 29-3 (required)
• Collecting Group History Statistics on an Interface, page 29-5 (optional)
• Collecting Group Ethernet Statistics on an Interface, page 29-5 (optional)

29-2 OL-8553-06
Configuring RMON
Default RMON Configuration

RMON is disabled by default; no alarms or events are configured.
Configuring RMON Alarms and Events

You can configure your switch for RMON by using the command-line interface (CLI) or an
SNMP-compatible network management station. We recommend that you use a generic RMON console
application on the network management station (NMS) to take advantage of the RMON network
management capabilities. You must also configure SNMP on the switch to access RMON MIB objects.
For more information, see Chapter 31, “Configuring SNMP.”
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable RMON alarms and events. This
procedure is required.
Command Purpose
Step 2 rmon alarm number variable interval {absolute | delta} Set an alarm on a MIB object.
rising-threshold value [event-number]
• For number, specify the alarm number. The
falling-threshold value [event-number] range is 1 to 65535.
[owner string]
• For variable, specify the MIB object to
monitor.
• For interval, specify the time in seconds the
alarm monitors the MIB variable. The range is
1 to 4294967295 seconds.
• Specify the absolute keyword to test each MIB
variable directly. Specify the delta keyword to
test the change between samples of a MIB
variable.
• For value, specify a number at which the alarm
is triggered and one for when the alarm is reset.
The range for the rising threshold and falling
threshold values is -2147483648 to
2147483647.
• (Optional) For event-number, specify the event
number to trigger when the rising or falling
threshold exceeds its limit.
• (Optional) For owner string, specify the owner
of the alarm.

OL-8553-06 29-3
Configuring RMON
Command Purpose
Step 3 rmon event number [description string] [log] [owner string] Add an event in the RMON event table that is
[trap community] associated with an RMON event number.
• For number, assign an event number. The range
is 1 to 65535.
• (Optional) For description string, specify a
description of the event.
• (Optional) Use the log keyword to generate an
RMON log entry when the event is triggered.
• (Optional) For owner string, specify the owner
of this event.
• (Optional) For trap community, enter the
SNMP community string used for this trap.
Step 6 copy running-config startup-config (Optional) Save your entries in the configuration
file.
To disable an alarm, use the no rmon alarm number global configuration command on each alarm you
configured. You cannot disable at once all the alarms that you configured. To disable an event, use the
no rmon event number global configuration command. To learn more about alarms and events and how
they interact with each other, see RFC 1757.
You can set an alarm on any MIB object. The following example configures RMON alarm number 10
by using the rmon alarm command. The alarm monitors the MIB variable ifEntry.20.1 once every 20
seconds until the alarm is disabled and checks the change in the variable’s rise or fall. If the ifEntry.20.1
value shows a MIB counter increase of 15 or more, such as from 100000 to 100015, the alarm is
triggered. The alarm in turn triggers event number 1, which is configured with the rmon event
command. Possible events can include a log entry or an SNMP trap. If the ifEntry.20.1 value changes
by 0, the alarm is reset and can be triggered again.
Switch(config)# rmon alarm 10 ifEntry.20.1 20 delta rising-threshold 15 1
falling-threshold 0 owner jjohnson
The following example creates RMON event number 1 by using the rmon event command. The event
is defined as High ifOutErrors and generates a log entry when the event is triggered by the alarm. The
user jjones owns the row that is created in the event table by this command. This example also generates
an SNMP trap when the event is triggered.
Switch(config)# rmon event 1 log trap eventtrap description "High ifOutErrors" owner
jjones

29-4 OL-8553-06
Configuring RMON
Collecting Group History Statistics on an Interface

You must first configure RMON alarms and events to display collection information.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to collect group history statistics on an
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface on which to collect history, and enter
Step 3 rmon collection history index Enable history collection for the specified number of buckets and
[buckets bucket-number] [interval seconds] time period.
[owner ownername]
• For index, identify the RMON group of statistics The range
is 1 to 65535.
• (Optional) For buckets bucket-number, specify the
maximum number of buckets desired for the RMON
collection history group of statistics. The range is 1 to
65535. The default is 50 buckets.
• (Optional) For interval seconds, specify the number of
seconds in each polling cycle. The range is 1 to 3600. The
• (Optional) For owner ownername, enter the name of the
owner of the RMON group of statistics.
Step 6 show rmon history Display the contents of the switch history table.
To disable history collection, use the no rmon collection history index interface configuration
command.
Collecting Group Ethernet Statistics on an Interface

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to collect group Ethernet statistics on an
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface on which to collect statistics, and enter

OL-8553-06 29-5
Displaying RMON Status
Command Purpose
Step 3 rmon collection stats index [owner ownername] Enable RMON statistic collection on the interface.
• For index, specify the RMON group of statistics. The range
is from 1 to 65535.
• (Optional) For owner ownername, enter the name of the
owner of the RMON group of statistics.
Step 6 show rmon statistics Display the contents of the switch statistics table.
To disable the collection of group Ethernet statistics, use the no rmon collection stats index interface
This example shows how to collect RMON statistics for the owner root:
Switch(config-if)# rmon collection stats 2 owner root
Displaying RMON Status

To display the RMON status, use one or more of the privileged EXEC commands in Table 29-1:
Table 29-1 Commands for Displaying RMON Status
Command Purpose
show rmon Displays general RMON statistics.
show rmon alarms Displays the RMON alarm table.
show rmon events Displays the RMON event table.
show rmon history Displays the RMON history table.
show rmon statistics Displays the RMON statistics table.
For information about the fields in these displays, see the “System Management Commands” section in
the Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page
under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command References.

29-6 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 30
Configuring System Message Logging
This chapter describes how to configure system message logging on the Catalyst 3560 switch.
Note For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the Cisco IOS
Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under

• Understanding System Message Logging, page 30-1
• Configuring System Message Logging, page 30-2
• Displaying the Logging Configuration, page 30-13
Caution Logging messages to the console at a high rate can cause high CPU utilization and adversely affect how
the switch operates.
Understanding System Message Logging

By default, a switch sends the output from system messages and debug privileged EXEC commands to
a logging process. The logging process controls the distribution of logging messages to various
destinations, such as the logging buffer, terminal lines, or a UNIX syslog server, depending on your
configuration. The process also sends messages to the console.
Note The syslog format is compatible with 4.3 BSD UNIX.
When the logging process is disabled, messages are sent only to the console. The messages are sent as
they are generated, so message and debug output are interspersed with prompts or output from other
commands. Messages appear on the console after the process that generated them has finished.
You can set the severity level of the messages to control the type of messages displayed on the consoles
and each of the destinations. You can time-stamp log messages or set the syslog source address to
enhance real-time debugging and management. For information on possible messages, see the system
message guide for this release.

OL-8553-06 30-1
Chapter 30 Configuring System Message Logging
You can access logged system messages by using the switch command-line interface (CLI) or by saving
them to a properly configured syslog server. The switch software saves syslog messages in an internal
buffer.
You can remotely monitor system messages by viewing the logs on a syslog server or by accessing the
switch through Telnet or through the console port.

• System Log Message Format, page 30-2
• Default System Message Logging Configuration, page 30-3
• Disabling Message Logging, page 30-4 (optional)
• Setting the Message Display Destination Device, page 30-5 (optional)
• Synchronizing Log Messages, page 30-6 (optional)
• Enabling and Disabling Time Stamps on Log Messages, page 30-7 (optional)
• Enabling and Disabling Sequence Numbers in Log Messages, page 30-8 (optional)
• Defining the Message Severity Level, page 30-8 (optional)
• Limiting Syslog Messages Sent to the History Table and to SNMP, page 30-10 (optional)
• Enabling the Configuration-Change Logger, page 30-10 (optional)
• Configuring UNIX Syslog Servers, page 30-12 (optional)
System Log Message Format

System log messages can contain up to 80 characters and a percent sign (%), which follows the optional
sequence number or time-stamp information, if configured. Messages appear in this format:
seq no:timestamp: %facility-severity-MNEMONIC:description
The part of the message preceding the percent sign depends on the setting of the service
sequence-numbers, service timestamps log datetime, service timestamps log datetime [localtime]
[msec] [show-timezone], or service timestamps log uptime global configuration command.

30-2 OL-8553-06
Table 30-1 describes the elements of syslog messages.
Table 30-1 System Log Message Elements
Element Description
seq no: Stamps log messages with a sequence number only if the service sequence-numbers global
configuration command is configured.
For more information, see the “Enabling and Disabling Sequence Numbers in Log Messages”
timestamp formats: Date and time of the message or event. This information appears only if the service timestamps
log [datetime | log] global configuration command is configured.
mm/dd hh:mm:ss
For more information, see the “Enabling and Disabling Time Stamps on Log Messages” section
or
on page 30-7.
hh:mm:ss (short uptime)
or
d h (long uptime)
facility The facility to which the message refers (for example, SNMP, SYS, and so forth). For a list of
supported facilities, see Table 30-4 on page 30-13.
severity Single-digit code from 0 to 7 that is the severity of the message. For a description of the severity
levels, see Table 30-3 on page 30-9.
MNEMONIC Text string that uniquely describes the message.
description Text string containing detailed information about the event being reported.
This example shows a partial switch system message:

00:00:46: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Port-channel1, changed state to up
00:00:47: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface GigabitEthernet0/1, changed state to up
00:00:47: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface GigabitEthernet0/2, changed state to up
00:00:48: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface Vlan1, changed state to down
00:00:48: %LINEPROTO-5-UPDOWN: Line protocol on Interface GigabitEthernet0/1, changed
state to down 2
*Mar 1 18:46:11: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by vty2 (10.34.195.36)
18:47:02: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by vty2 (10.34.195.36)
*Mar 1 18:48:50.483 UTC: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by vty2 (10.34.195.36)
Default System Message Logging Configuration

Table 30-2 shows the default system message logging configuration.
Table 30-2 Default System Message Logging Configuration

System message logging to the console Enabled.
Console severity Debugging (and numerically lower levels; see
Table 30-3 on page 30-9).
Logging file configuration No filename specified.
Logging buffer size 4096 bytes.
Logging history size 1 message.

OL-8553-06 30-3
Table 30-2 Default System Message Logging Configuration (continued)

Time stamps Disabled.
Synchronous logging Disabled.
Logging server Disabled.
Syslog server IP address None configured.
Configuration change logger Disabled
Server facility Local7 (see Table 30-4 on page 30-13).
Server severity Informational (and numerically lower levels; see
Table 30-3 on page 30-9).
Disabling Message Logging

Message logging is enabled by default. It must be enabled to send messages to any destination other than
the console. When enabled, log messages are sent to a logging process, which logs messages to
designated locations asynchronously to the processes that generated the messages.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable message logging. This procedure is
optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 no logging console Disable message logging.
or
show logging
Disabling the logging process can slow down the switch because a process must wait until the messages
are written to the console before continuing. When the logging process is disabled, messages appear on
the console as soon as they are produced, often appearing in the middle of command output.
The logging synchronous global configuration command also affects the display of messages to the
console. When this command is enabled, messages appear only after you press Return. For more
information, see the “Synchronizing Log Messages” section on page 30-6.
To re-enable message logging after it has been disabled, use the logging on global configuration
command.

30-4 OL-8553-06
Setting the Message Display Destination Device

If message logging is enabled, you can send messages to specific locations in addition to the console.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use one or more of the following commands to specify the
locations that receive messages. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 logging buffered [size] Log messages to an internal buffer on the switch. The range is 4096 to
2147483647 bytes. The default buffer size is 4096 bytes.
If the switch fails, the log file is lost unless you had previously saved it to
flash memory. See Step 4.
Note Do not make the buffer size too large because the switch could run
out of memory for other tasks. Use the show memory privileged
EXEC command to view the free processor memory on the switch.
However, this value is the maximum available, and the buffer size
should not be set to this amount.
Step 3 logging host Log messages to a UNIX syslog server host.
For host, specify the name or IP address of the host to be used as the
syslog server.
To build a list of syslog servers that receive logging messages, enter this
command more than once.
For complete syslog server configuration steps, see the “Configuring
UNIX Syslog Servers” section on page 30-12.
Step 4 logging file flash:filename Store log messages in a file in flash memory.
[max-file-size [min-file-size]]
• For filename, enter the log message filename.
[severity-level-number | type]
• (Optional) For max-file-size, specify the maximum logging file size.
The range is 4096 to 2147483647. The default is 4096 bytes.
• (Optional) For min-file-size, specify the minimum logging file size.
The range is 1024 to 2147483647. The default is 2048 bytes.
• (Optional) For severity-level-number | type, specify either the logging
severity level or the logging type. The severity range is 0 to 7. For a
list of logging type keywords, see Table 30-3 on page 30-9. By
default, the log file receives debugging messages and numerically
lower levels.
Step 6 terminal monitor Log messages to a nonconsole terminal during the current session.
Terminal parameter-setting commands are set locally and do not remain
in effect after the session has ended. You must perform this step for each
session to see the debugging messages.

OL-8553-06 30-5
The logging buffered global configuration command copies logging messages to an internal buffer. The
buffer is circular, so newer messages overwrite older messages after the buffer is full. To display the
messages that are logged in the buffer, use the show logging privileged EXEC command. The first
message displayed is the oldest message in the buffer. To clear the contents of the buffer, use the clear
logging privileged EXEC command.
Use the logging event power-inline-status interface configuration command to enable and to disable
logging of Power over Ethernet (PoE) events on specific PoE-capable ports. Logging on these ports is
enabled by default.
To disable logging to the console, use the no logging console global configuration command. To disable
logging to a file, use the no logging file [severity-level-number | type] global configuration command.
Synchronizing Log Messages

You can synchronize unsolicited messages and debug privileged EXEC command output with solicited
device output and prompts for a specific console port line or virtual terminal line. You can identify the
types of messages to be output asynchronously based on the level of severity. You can also configure
the maximum number of buffers for storing asynchronous messages for the terminal after which
messages are dropped.
When synchronous logging of unsolicited messages and debug command output is enabled, unsolicited
device output appears on the console or printed after solicited device output appears or is printed.
Unsolicited messages and debug command output appears on the console after the prompt for user input
is returned. Therefore, unsolicited messages and debug command output are not interspersed with
solicited device output and prompts. After the unsolicited messages appear, the console again displays
the user prompt.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure synchronous logging. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 line [console | vty] line-number Specify the line to be configured for synchronous logging of
[ending-line-number] messages.
• Use the console keyword for configurations that occur through
the switch console port.
• Use the line vty line-number command to specify which vty
lines are to have synchronous logging enabled. You use a vty
connection for configurations that occur through a Telnet
session. The range of line numbers is from 0 to 15.
You can change the setting of all 16 vty lines at once by entering:
line vty 0 15
Or you can change the setting of the single vty line being used for
your current connection. For example, to change the setting for vty
line 2, enter:
line vty 2
When you enter this command, the mode changes to line
configuration.

30-6 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 logging synchronous [level [severity-level | Enable synchronous logging of messages.
all] | limit number-of-buffers]
• (Optional) For level severity-level, specify the message severity
level. Messages with a severity level equal to or higher than this
value are printed asynchronously. Low numbers mean greater
severity and high numbers mean lesser severity. The default is 2.
• (Optional) Specifying level all means that all messages are
printed asynchronously regardless of the severity level.
• (Optional) For limit number-of-buffers, specify the number of
buffers to be queued for the terminal after which new messages
are dropped. The range is 0 to 2147483647. The default is 20.
To disable synchronization of unsolicited messages and debug output, use the no logging synchronous
[level severity-level | all] [limit number-of-buffers] line configuration command.
Enabling and Disabling Time Stamps on Log Messages

By default, log messages are not time-stamped.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable time-stamping of log messages. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 service timestamps log uptime Enable log time stamps.
or The first command enables time stamps on log messages,
showing the time since the system was rebooted.
service timestamps log datetime [msec] [localtime]
[show-timezone] The second command enables time stamps on log messages.
Depending on the options selected, the time stamp can
include the date, time in milliseconds relative to the local
time-zone, and the time zone name.
To disable time stamps for both debug and log messages, use the no service timestamps global
This example shows part of a logging display with the service timestamps log datetime global
configuration command enabled:
*Mar 1 18:46:11: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by vty2 (10.34.195.36)

OL-8553-06 30-7
This example shows part of a logging display with the service timestamps log uptime global
configuration command enabled:
00:00:46: %LINK-3-UPDOWN: Interface Port-channel1, changed state to up
Enabling and Disabling Sequence Numbers in Log Messages

Because there is a chance that more than one log message can have the same time stamp, you can display
messages with sequence numbers so that you can unambiguously see a single message. By default,
sequence numbers in log messages are not displayed.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable sequence numbers in log messages.
Command Purpose
Step 2 service sequence-numbers Enable sequence numbers.
To disable sequence numbers, use the no service sequence-numbers global configuration command.
This example shows part of a logging display with sequence numbers enabled:
000019: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by vty2 (10.34.195.36)
Defining the Message Severity Level

You can limit messages displayed to the selected device by specifying the severity level of the message,
which are described in Table 30-3.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define the message severity level. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 logging console level Limit messages logged to the console.
By default, the console receives debugging messages and numerically
lower levels (see Table 30-3 on page 30-9).
Step 3 logging monitor level Limit messages logged to the terminal lines.
By default, the terminal receives debugging messages and numerically
lower levels (see Table 30-3 on page 30-9).

30-8 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 4 logging trap level Limit messages logged to the syslog servers.
By default, syslog servers receive informational messages and
numerically lower levels (see Table 30-3 on page 30-9).
For complete syslog server configuration steps, see the “Configuring
UNIX Syslog Servers” section on page 30-12.
or
show logging
Note Specifying a level causes messages at that level and numerically lower levels to appear at the destination.
To disable logging to the console, use the no logging console global configuration command. To disable
logging to a terminal other than the console, use the no logging monitor global configuration command.
To disable logging to syslog servers, use the no logging trap global configuration command.
Table 30-3 describes the level keywords. It also lists the corresponding UNIX syslog definitions from
the most severe level to the least severe level.
Table 30-3 Message Logging Level Keywords
Level Keyword Level Description Syslog Definition

emergencies 0 System unstable LOG_EMERG
alerts 1 Immediate action needed LOG_ALERT
critical 2 Critical conditions LOG_CRIT
errors 3 Error conditions LOG_ERR
warnings 4 Warning conditions LOG_WARNING
notifications 5 Normal but significant condition LOG_NOTICE
informational 6 Informational messages only LOG_INFO
debugging 7 Debugging messages LOG_DEBUG
The software generates four other categories of messages:

• Error messages about software or hardware malfunctions, displayed at levels warnings through
emergencies. These types of messages mean that the functionality of the switch is affected. For
information on how to recover from these malfunctions, see the system message guide for this
release.
• Output from the debug commands, displayed at the debugging level. Debug commands are
typically used only by the Technical Assistance Center.
• Interface up or down transitions and system restart messages, displayed at the notifications level.
This message is only for information; switch functionality is not affected.

OL-8553-06 30-9
Limiting Syslog Messages Sent to the History Table and to SNMP

If you enabled syslog message traps to be sent to an SNMP network management station by using the
snmp-server enable trap global configuration command, you can change the level of messages sent and
stored in the switch history table. You also can change the number of messages that are stored in the
history table.
Messages are stored in the history table because SNMP traps are not guaranteed to reach their
destination. By default, one message of the level warning and numerically lower levels (see Table 30-3
on page 30-9) are stored in the history table even if syslog traps are not enabled.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the level and history table size
defaults. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 1
logging history level Change the default level of syslog messages stored in the history file and
sent to the SNMP server.
See Table 30-3 on page 30-9 for a list of level keywords.
By default, warnings, errors, critical, alerts, and emergencies messages
are sent.
Step 3 logging history size number Specify the number of syslog messages that can be stored in the history
table.
The default is to store one message. The range is 0 to 500 messages.
1. Table 30-3 lists the level keywords and severity level. For SNMP usage, the severity level values increase by 1. For example, emergencies
equal 1, not 0, and critical equals 3, not 2.
When the history table is full (it contains the maximum number of message entries specified with the
logging history size global configuration command), the oldest message entry is deleted from the table
to allow the new message entry to be stored.
To return the logging of syslog messages to the default level, use the no logging history global
configuration command. To return the number of messages in the history table to the default value, use
the no logging history size global configuration command.
Enabling the Configuration-Change Logger

You can enable a configuration logger to keep track of configuration changes made with the
command-line interface (CLI). When you enter the logging enable configuration-change logger
configuration command, the log records the session, the user, and the command that was entered to
change the configuration. You can configure the size of the configuration log from 1 to 1000 entries (the
default is 100). You can clear the log at any time by entering the no logging enable command followed
by the logging enable command to disable and reenable logging.

30-10 OL-8553-06
Use the show archive log config {all | number [end-number] | user username [session number] number
[end-number] | statistics} [provisioning] privileged EXEC command to display the complete
configuration log or the log for specified parameters.
The default is that configuration logging is disabled.
For information about the commands, see the Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals and Network
Management Command Reference, Release 12.3 T at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps5207/products_command_reference_chapter0918
6a00801a8086.html#wp1114989
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable configuration logging:
Command Purpose
Step 2 archive Enter archive configuration mode.
Step 3 log config Enter configuration-change logger configuration mode.
Step 4 logging enable Enable configuration change logging.
Step 5 logging size entries (Optional) Configure the number of entries retained in the configuration
log. The range is from 1 to 1000. The default is 100.
Note When the configuration log is full, the oldest log entry is
removed each time a new entry is entered.
Step 7 show archive log config Verify your entries by viewing the configuration log.
This example shows how to enable the configuration-change logger and to set the number of entries in
the log to 500.
Switch(config)# archive
Switch(config-archive)# log config
Switch(config-archive-log-cfg)# logging enable
Switch(config-archive-log-cfg)# logging size 500
Switch(config-archive-log-cfg)# end
This is an example of output for the configuration log:

Switch# show archive log config all
idx sess user@line Logged command
38 11 unknown user@vty3 |no aaa authorization config-commands
39 12 unknown user@vty3 |no aaa authorization network default group radius
40 12 unknown user@vty3 |no aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group
radius
41 13 unknown user@vty3 |no aaa accounting system default
42 14 temi@vty4 |interface GigabitEthernet4/0/1
43 14 temi@vty4 | switchport mode trunk
44 14 temi@vty4 | exit
45 16 temi@vty5 |interface FastEthernet5/0/1
46 16 temi@vty5 | switchport mode trunk
47 16 temi@vty5 | exit

OL-8553-06 30-11
Configuring UNIX Syslog Servers

The next sections describe how to configure the UNIX server syslog daemon and how to define the UNIX
system logging facility.
Logging Messages to a UNIX Syslog Daemon

Before you can send system log messages to a UNIX syslog server, you must configure the syslog
daemon on a UNIX server. This procedure is optional.
Log in as root, and perform these steps:
Note Some recent versions of UNIX syslog daemons no longer accept by default syslog packets from the
network. If this is the case with your system, use the UNIX man syslogd command to decide what
options must be added to or removed from the syslog command line to enable logging of remote syslog
messages.
Step 1 Add a line such as the following to the file /etc/syslog.conf:

local7.debug /usr/adm/logs/cisco.log
The local7 keyword specifies the logging facility to be used; see Table 30-4 on page 30-13 for
information on the facilities. The debug keyword specifies the syslog level; see Table 30-3 on page 30-9
for information on the severity levels. The syslog daemon sends messages at this level or at a more severe
level to the file specified in the next field. The file must already exist, and the syslog daemon must have
permission to write to it.
Step 2 Create the log file by entering these commands at the UNIX shell prompt:
$ touch /var/log/cisco.log
$ chmod 666 /var/log/cisco.log
Step 3 Make sure the syslog daemon reads the new changes:
$ kill -HUP `cat /etc/syslog.pid`
For more information, see the man syslog.conf and man syslogd commands on your UNIX system.
Configuring the UNIX System Logging Facility

When sending system log messages to an external device, you can cause the switch to identify its
messages as originating from any of the UNIX syslog facilities.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure UNIX system facility message
logging. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 logging host Log messages to a UNIX syslog server host by entering its IP address.
To build a list of syslog servers that receive logging messages, enter this
command more than once.

30-12 OL-8553-06
Displaying the Logging Configuration
Command Purpose
Step 3 logging trap level Limit messages logged to the syslog servers.
Be default, syslog servers receive informational messages and lower. See
Table 30-3 on page 30-9 for level keywords.
Step 4 logging facility facility-type Configure the syslog facility. See Table 30-4 on page 30-13 for
facility-type keywords.
The default is local7.
To remove a syslog server, use the no logging host global configuration command, and specify the
syslog server IP address. To disable logging to syslog servers, enter the no logging trap global
Table 30-4 lists the UNIX system facilities supported by the software. For more information about these
facilities, consult the operator’s manual for your UNIX operating system.
Table 30-4 Logging Facility-Type Keywords
Facility Type Keyword Description

auth Authorization system
cron Cron facility
daemon System daemon
kern Kernel
local0-7 Locally defined messages
lpr Line printer system
mail Mail system
news USENET news
sys9-14 System use
syslog System log
user User process
uucp UNIX-to-UNIX copy system

To display the logging configuration and the contents of the log buffer, use the show logging privileged
EXEC command. For information about the fields in this display, see the Cisco IOS Configuration
Fundamentals Command Reference, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation >

OL-8553-06 30-13

30-14 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 31
Configuring SNMP
This chapter describes how to configure the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) on the
reference for this release and the Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference, Release
12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline >
Command References.

• Understanding SNMP, page 31-1
• Configuring SNMP, page 31-6
• Displaying SNMP Status, page 31-18
Understanding SNMP
SNMP is an application-layer protocol that provides a message format for communication between
managers and agents. The SNMP system consists of an SNMP manager, an SNMP agent, and a MIB.
The SNMP manager can be part of a network management system (NMS) such as CiscoWorks. The
agent and MIB reside on the switch. To configure SNMP on the switch, you define the relationship
between the manager and the agent.
The SNMP agent contains MIB variables whose values the SNMP manager can request or change. A
manager can get a value from an agent or store a value into the agent. The agent gathers data from the
MIB, the repository for information about device parameters and network data. The agent can also
respond to a manager’s requests to get or set data.
An agent can send unsolicited traps to the manager. Traps are messages alerting the SNMP manager to
a condition on the network. Traps can mean improper user authentication, restarts, link status (up or
down), MAC address tracking, closing of a TCP connection, loss of connection to a neighbor, or other
significant events.
• SNMP Versions, page 31-2
• SNMP Manager Functions, page 31-3
• SNMP Agent Functions, page 31-3

OL-8553-06 31-1
Chapter 31 Configuring SNMP
Understanding SNMP
• SNMP Community Strings, page 31-4

• Using SNMP to Access MIB Variables, page 31-4
• SNMP Notifications, page 31-5
• SNMP ifIndex MIB Object Values, page 31-5
SNMP Versions
This software release supports these SNMP versions:
• SNMPv1—The Simple Network Management Protocol, a Full Internet Standard, defined in
RFC 1157.
• SNMPv2C replaces the Party-based Administrative and Security Framework of SNMPv2Classic
with the community-string-based Administrative Framework of SNMPv2C while retaining the bulk
retrieval and improved error handling of SNMPv2Classic. It has these features:
– SNMPv2—Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol, a Draft Internet Standard,
defined in RFCs 1902 through 1907.
– SNMPv2C—The community-string-based Administrative Framework for SNMPv2, an
Experimental Internet Protocol defined in RFC 1901.
• SNMPv3—Version 3 of the SNMP is an interoperable standards-based protocol defined in RFCs
2273 to 2275. SNMPv3 provides secure access to devices by authenticating and encrypting packets
over the network and includes these security features:
– Message integrity—ensuring that a packet was not tampered with in transit
– Authentication—determining that the message is from a valid source
– Encryption—mixing the contents of a package to prevent it from being read by an unauthorized
source.
Note To select encryption, enter the priv keyword. This keyword is available only when the
cryptographic (encrypted) software image is installed.
Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv2C use a community-based form of security. The community of managers
able to access the agent’s MIB is defined by an IP address access control list and password.
SNMPv2C includes a bulk retrieval mechanism and more detailed error message reporting to
management stations. The bulk retrieval mechanism retrieves tables and large quantities of information,
minimizing the number of round-trips required. The SNMPv2C improved error-handling includes
expanded error codes that distinguish different kinds of error conditions; these conditions are reported
through a single error code in SNMPv1. Error return codes in SNMPv2C report the error type.
SNMPv3 provides for both security models and security levels. A security model is an authentication
strategy set up for a user and the group within which the user resides. A security level is the permitted
level of security within a security model. A combination of the security level and the security model
determine which security mechanism is used when handling an SNMP packet. Available security models
are SNMPv1, SNMPv2C, and SNMPv3.

31-2 OL-8553-06
Understanding SNMP
Table 31-1 identifies the characteristics of the different combinations of security models and levels.
Table 31-1 SNMP Security Models and Levels
Model Level Authentication Encryption Result

SNMPv1 noAuthNoPriv Community string No Uses a community string match for authentication.
SNMPv2C noAuthNoPriv Community string No Uses a community string match for authentication.
SNMPv3 noAuthNoPriv Username No Uses a username match for authentication.
SNMPv3 authNoPriv MD5 or SHA No Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5
or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
SNMPv3 authPriv MD5 or SHA DES Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5
(requires the or HMAC-SHA algorithms.
cryptographic software Provides DES 56-bit encryption in addition to
image) authentication based on the CBC-DES (DES-56)
standard.
You must configure the SNMP agent to use the SNMP version supported by the management station.
Because an agent can communicate with multiple managers, you can configure the software to support
communications using SNMPv1, SNMPv2C, or SNMPv3.
SNMP Manager Functions

The SNMP manager uses information in the MIB to perform the operations described in Table 31-2.
Table 31-2 SNMP Operations
Operation Description
get-request Retrieves a value from a specific variable.
get-next-request Retrieves a value from a variable within a table.1
get-bulk-request2 Retrieves large blocks of data, such as multiple rows in a table, that would otherwise require the
transmission of many small blocks of data.
get-response Replies to a get-request, get-next-request, and set-request sent by an NMS.
set-request Stores a value in a specific variable.
trap An unsolicited message sent by an SNMP agent to an SNMP manager when some event has occurred.
1. With this operation, an SNMP manager does not need to know the exact variable name. A sequential search is performed to find the needed variable from
within a table.
2. The get-bulk command only works with SNMPv2 or later.
SNMP Agent Functions

The SNMP agent responds to SNMP manager requests as follows:
• Get a MIB variable—The SNMP agent begins this function in response to a request from the NMS.
The agent retrieves the value of the requested MIB variable and responds to the NMS with that value.
• Set a MIB variable—The SNMP agent begins this function in response to a message from the NMS.
The SNMP agent changes the value of the MIB variable to the value requested by the NMS.

OL-8553-06 31-3
Understanding SNMP
The SNMP agent also sends unsolicited trap messages to notify an NMS that a significant event has
occurred on the agent. Examples of trap conditions include, but are not limited to, when a port or module
goes up or down, when spanning-tree topology changes occur, and when authentication failures occur.
SNMP Community Strings

SNMP community strings authenticate access to MIB objects and function as embedded passwords. In
order for the NMS to access the switch, the community string definitions on the NMS must match at least
one of the three community string definitions on the switch.
A community string can have one of these attributes:
• Read-only (RO)—Gives read access to authorized management stations to all objects in the MIB
except the community strings, but does not allow write access
• Read-write (RW)—Gives read and write access to authorized management stations to all objects in
the MIB, but does not allow access to the community strings
• When a cluster is created, the command switch manages the exchange of messages among member
switches and the SNMP application. The Network Assistant software appends the member switch
number (@esN, where N is the switch number) to the first configured RW and RO community
strings on the command switch and propagates them to the member switches. For more information,
see Chapter 6, “Clustering Switches” and see Getting Started with Cisco Network Assistant,
available on Cisco.com.
Using SNMP to Access MIB Variables

An example of an NMS is the CiscoWorks network management software. CiscoWorks 2000 software
uses the switch MIB variables to set device variables and to poll devices on the network for specific
information. The results of a poll can be displayed as a graph and analyzed to troubleshoot
internetworking problems, increase network performance, verify the configuration of devices, monitor
traffic loads, and more.
As shown in Figure 31-1, the SNMP agent gathers data from the MIB. The agent can send traps, or
notification of certain events, to the SNMP manager, which receives and processes the traps. Traps alert
the SNMP manager to a condition on the network such as improper user authentication, restarts, link
status (up or down), MAC address tracking, and so forth. The SNMP agent also responds to MIB-related
queries sent by the SNMP manager in get-request, get-next-request, and set-request format.
Figure 31-1 SNMP Network
NMS Get-request, Get-next-request, Network device

Get-bulk, Set-request
43581
Get-response, traps MIB

SNMP Manager SNMP Agent
For information on supported MIBs and how to access them, see Appendix A, “Supported MIBs.”

31-4 OL-8553-06
Understanding SNMP
SNMP Notifications
SNMP allows the switch to send notifications to SNMP managers when particular events occur. SNMP
notifications can be sent as traps or inform requests. In command syntax, unless there is an option in the
command to select either traps or informs, the keyword traps refers to either traps or informs, or both.
Use the snmp-server host command to specify whether to send SNMP notifications as traps or informs.
Note SNMPv1 does not support informs.
Traps are unreliable because the receiver does not send an acknowledgment when it receives a trap, and
the sender cannot determine if the trap was received. When an SNMP manager receives an inform
request, it acknowledges the message with an SNMP response protocol data unit (PDU). If the sender
does not receive a response, the inform request can be sent again. Because they can be re-sent, informs
are more likely than traps to reach their intended destination.
The characteristics that make informs more reliable than traps also consume more resources in the switch
and in the network. Unlike a trap, which is discarded as soon as it is sent, an inform request is held in
memory until a response is received or the request times out. Traps are sent only once, but an inform
might be re-sent or retried several times. The retries increase traffic and contribute to a higher overhead
on the network. Therefore, traps and informs require a trade-off between reliability and resources. If it
is important that the SNMP manager receive every notification, use inform requests. If traffic on the
network or memory in the switch is a concern and notification is not required, use traps.
SNMP ifIndex MIB Object Values

In an NMS, the IF-MIB generates and assigns an interface index (ifIndex) object value that is a unique
number greater than zero to identify a physical or a logical interface. When the switch reboots or the
switch software is upgraded, the switch uses this same value for the interface. For example, if the switch
assigns a port 2 an ifIndex value of 10003, this value is the same after the switch reboots.
The switch uses one of the values in Table 31-3 to assign an ifIndex value to an interface:
Table 31-3 ifIndex Values
Interface Type ifIndex Range

1
SVI 1–4999
EtherChannel 5000–5012
Loopback 5013–5077
Tunnel 5078–5142
2
Physical (such as Gigabit Ethernet or SFP -module interfaces) 10000–14500
Null 14501
1. SVI = switch virtual interface
2. SFP = small form-factor pluggable
Note The switch might not use sequential values within a range.

OL-8553-06 31-5
Configuring SNMP
Configuring SNMP
• Default SNMP Configuration, page 31-6
• SNMP Configuration Guidelines, page 31-6
• Disabling the SNMP Agent, page 31-7
• Configuring Community Strings, page 31-8
• Configuring SNMP Groups and Users, page 31-9
• Configuring SNMP Notifications, page 31-11
• Setting the CPU Threshold Notification Types and Values, page 31-15
• Setting the Agent Contact and Location Information, page 31-16
• Limiting TFTP Servers Used Through SNMP, page 31-16
• SNMP Examples, page 31-17
Default SNMP Configuration

Table 31-4 shows the default SNMP configuration.
Table 31-4 Default SNMP Configuration

SNMP agent Disabled1.
SNMP trap receiver None configured.
SNMP traps None enabled except the trap for TCP connections (tty).
SNMP version If no version keyword is present, the default is Version 1.
SNMPv3 authentication If no keyword is entered, the default is the noauth (noAuthNoPriv)
security level.
SNMP notification type If no type is specified, all notifications are sent.
1. This is the default when the switch starts and the startup configuration does not have any snmp-server global configuration
commands.
SNMP Configuration Guidelines

If the switch starts and the switch startup configuration has at least one snmp-server global
configuration command, the SNMP agent is enabled.
An SNMP group is a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views. An SNMP user is a member of an
SNMP group. An SNMP host is the recipient of an SNMP trap operation. An SNMP engine ID is a name
for the local or remote SNMP engine.

31-6 OL-8553-06
Configuring SNMP
When configuring SNMP, follow these guidelines:

• When configuring an SNMP group, do not specify a notify view. The snmp-server host global
configuration command autogenerates a notify view for the user and then adds it to the group
associated with that user. Modifying the group's notify view affects all users associated with that
group. See the Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference, Release 12.2 for
information about when you should configure notify views.
• To configure a remote user, specify the IP address or port number for the remote SNMP agent of the
device where the user resides.
• Before you configure remote users for a particular agent, configure the SNMP engine ID, using the
snmp-server engineID global configuration with the remote option. The remote agent's SNMP
engine ID and user password are used to compute the authentication and privacy digests. If you do
not configure the remote engine ID first, the configuration command fails.
• When configuring SNMP informs, you need to configure the SNMP engine ID for the remote agent
in the SNMP database before you can send proxy requests or informs to it.
• If a local user is not associated with a remote host, the switch does not send informs for the auth
(authNoPriv) and the priv (authPriv) authentication levels.
• Changing the value of the SNMP engine ID has important side effects. A user's password (entered
on the command line) is converted to an MD5 or SHA security digest based on the password and the
local engine ID. The command-line password is then destroyed, as required by RFC 2274. Because
of this deletion, if the value of the engine ID changes, the security digests of SNMPv3 users become
invalid, and you need to reconfigure SNMP users by using the snmp-server user username global
configuration command. Similar restrictions require the reconfiguration of community strings when
the engine ID changes.
Disabling the SNMP Agent

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable the SNMP agent:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no snmp-server Disable the SNMP agent operation.
The no snmp-server global configuration command disables all running versions (Version 1,
Version 2C, and Version 3) on the device. No specific Cisco IOS command exists to enable SNMP. The
first snmp-server global configuration command that you enter enables all versions of SNMP.

OL-8553-06 31-7
Configuring SNMP
Configuring Community Strings

You use the SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and the
agent. The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the switch. Optionally,
you can specify one or more of these characteristics associated with the string:
• An access list of IP addresses of the SNMP managers that are permitted to use the community string
to gain access to the agent
• A MIB view, which defines the subset of all MIB objects accessible to the given community
• Read and write or read-only permission for the MIB objects accessible to the community
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a community string on the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 snmp-server community string [view Configure the community string.
view-name] [ro | rw] [access-list-number]
Note The @ symbol is used for delimiting the context
information. Avoid using the @ symbol as part of the
SNMP community string when configuring this command.
• For string, specify a string that acts like a password and

permits access to the SNMP protocol. You can configure one
or more community strings of any length.
• (Optional) For view, specify the view record accessible to the
community.
• (Optional) Specify either read-only (ro) if you want
authorized management stations to retrieve MIB objects, or
specify read-write (rw) if you want authorized management
stations to retrieve and modify MIB objects. By default, the
community string permits read-only access to all objects.
• (Optional) For access-list-number, enter an IP standard access
list numbered from 1 to 99 and 1300 to 1999.

31-8 OL-8553-06
Configuring SNMP
Command Purpose
Step 3 access-list access-list-number {deny | (Optional) If you specified an IP standard access list number in
permit} source [source-wildcard] Step 2, then create the list, repeating the command as many times
as necessary.
• For access-list-number, enter the access list number specified
in Step 2.
• The deny keyword denies access if the conditions are
matched. The permit keyword permits access if the conditions
are matched.
• For source, enter the IP address of the SNMP managers that
are permitted to use the community string to gain access to the
agent.
• (Optional) For source-wildcard, enter the wildcard bits in
dotted decimal notation to be applied to the source. Place ones
in the bit positions that you want to ignore.
Recall that the access list is always terminated by an implicit deny
statement for everything.
Note To disable access for an SNMP community, set the community string for that community to the null
string (do not enter a value for the community string).
To remove a specific community string, use the no snmp-server community string global configuration
command.
This example shows how to assign the string comaccess to SNMP, to allow read-only access, and to
specify that IP access list 4 can use the community string to gain access to the switch SNMP agent:
Switch(config)# snmp-server community comaccess ro 4
Configuring SNMP Groups and Users

You can specify an identification name (engine ID) for the local or remote SNMP server engine on the
switch. You can configure an SNMP server group that maps SNMP users to SNMP views, and you can
add new users to the SNMP group.

OL-8553-06 31-9
Configuring SNMP
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure SNMP on the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 snmp-server engineID {local engineid-string Configure a name for either the local or remote copy of SNMP.
| remote ip-address [udp-port port-number]
• The engineid-string is a 24-character ID string with the name
engineid-string}
of the copy of SNMP. You need not specify the entire
24-character engine ID if it has trailing zeros. Specify only the
portion of the engine ID up to the point where only zeros
remain in the value. For example, to configure an engine ID of
123400000000000000000000, you can enter this:
snmp-server engineID local 1234
• If you select remote, specify the ip-address of the device that
contains the remote copy of SNMP and the optional User
Datagram Protocol (UDP) port on the remote device. The
default is 162.
Step 3 snmp-server group groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 Configure a new SNMP group on the remote device.
{auth | noauth | priv}} [read readview]
• For groupname, specify the name of the group.
[write writeview] [notify notifyview] [access
access-list] • Specify a security model:
– v1 is the least secure of the possible security models.
– v2c is the second least secure model. It allows
transmission of informs and integers twice the normal
width.
– v3, the most secure, requires you to select an
authentication level:
auth—Enables the Message Digest 5 (MD5) and the
Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA) packet authentication.
noauth—Enables the noAuthNoPriv security level. This
is the default if no keyword is specified.
priv—Enables Data Encryption Standard (DES) packet
encryption (also called privacy).
Note The priv keyword is available only when the
cryptographic software image is installed.
• (Optional) Enter read readview with a string (not to exceed 64

characters) that is the name of the view in which you can only
view the contents of the agent.
• (Optional) Enter write writeview with a string (not to exceed
64 characters) that is the name of the view in which you enter
data and configure the contents of the agent.
• (Optional) Enter notify notifyview with a string (not to exceed
64 characters) that is the name of the view in which you
specify a notify, inform, or trap.
• (Optional) Enter access access-list with a string (not to exceed
64 characters) that is the name of the access list.

31-10 OL-8553-06
Configuring SNMP
Command Purpose
Step 4 snmp-server user username groupname Add a new user for an SNMP group.
{remote host [udp-port port]} {v1 [access
• The username is the name of the user on the host that connects
access-list] | v2c [access access-list] | v3
to the agent.
[encrypted] [access access-list] [auth {md5 |
sha} auth-password]} • The groupname is the name of the group to which the user is
associated.
• Enter remote to specify a remote SNMP entity to which the
user belongs and the hostname or IP address of that entity with
the optional UDP port number. The default is 162.
• Enter the SNMP version number (v1, v2c, or v3). If you enter
v3, you have these additional options:
– encrypted specifies that the password appears in
encrypted format. This keyword is available only when
the v3 keyword is specified.
– auth is an authentication level setting session that can be
either the HMAC-MD5-96 (md5) or the HMAC-SHA-96
(sha) authentication level and requires a password string
(not to exceed 64 characters).
• (Optional) Enter access access-list with a string (not to exceed
64 characters) that is the name of the access list.
Configuring SNMP Notifications

A trap manager is a management station that receives and processes traps. Traps are system alerts that
the switch generates when certain events occur. By default, no trap manager is defined, and no traps are
sent. Switches running this Cisco IOS release can have an unlimited number of trap managers.
Note Many commands use the word traps in the command syntax. Unless there is an option in the command
to select either traps or informs, the keyword traps refers to traps, informs, or both. Use the snmp-server
host global configuration command to specify whether to send SNMP notifications as traps or informs.
Table 31-5 describes the supported switch traps (notification types). You can enable any or all of these
traps and configure a trap manager to receive them.
Table 31-5 Switch Notification Types
Notification Type
Keyword Description
bgp Generates Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) state change traps. This option is only available when
the enhanced multilayer image is installed.
bridge Generates STP bridge MIB traps.
cluster Generates a trap when the cluster configuration changes.

OL-8553-06 31-11
Configuring SNMP
Table 31-5 Switch Notification Types (continued)
Notification Type
Keyword Description
config Generates a trap for SNMP configuration changes.
copy-config Generates a trap for SNMP copy configuration changes.
entity Generates a trap for SNMP entity changes.
cpu threshold Allow CPU-related traps.
envmon Generates environmental monitor traps. You can enable any or all of these environmental traps: fan,
shutdown, status, supply, temperature.
errdisable Generates a trap for a port VLAN errdisabled. You can also set a maximum trap rate per minute.
The range is from 0 to 10000; the default is 0, which means there is no rate limit.
flash Generates SNMP FLASH notifications.
hsrp Generates a trap for Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) changes.
ipmulticast Generates a trap for IP multicast routing changes.
mac-notification Generates a trap for MAC address notifications.
msdp Generates a trap for Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) changes.
ospf Generates a trap for Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) changes. You can enable any or all of these
traps: Cisco specific, errors, link-state advertisement, rate limit, retransmit, and state changes.
pim Generates a trap for Protocol-Independent Multicast (PIM) changes. You can enable any or all of
these traps: invalid PIM messages, neighbor changes, and rendezvous point (RP)-mapping changes.
port-security Generates SNMP port security traps. You can also set a maximum trap rate per second. The range
is from 0 to 1000; the default is 0, which means that there is no rate limit.
Note When you configure a trap by using the notification type port-security, configure the port
security trap first, and then configure the port security trap rate:
• snmp-server enable traps port-security

• snmp-server enable traps port-security trap-rate rate
rtr Generates a trap for the SNMP Response Time Reporter (RTR).
snmp Generates a trap for SNMP-type notifications for authentication, cold start, warm start, link up or
link down.
storm-control Generates a trap for SNMP storm-control. You can also set a maximum trap rate per minute. The
range is from 0 to 1000; the default is 0 (no limit is imposed; a trap is sent at every occurrence).
stpx Generates SNMP STP Extended MIB traps.
syslog Generates SNMP syslog traps.
tty Generates a trap for TCP connections. This trap is enabled by default.
vlan-membership Generates a trap for SNMP VLAN membership changes.
vlancreate Generates SNMP VLAN created traps.
vlandelete Generates SNMP VLAN deleted traps.
vtp Generates a trap for VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) changes.

31-12 OL-8553-06
Configuring SNMP
Note Though visible in the command-line help strings, the fru-ctrl, insertion, and removal keywords are not
supported. To enable the sending of SNMP inform notifications, use the snmp-server enable traps
global configuration command combined with the snmp-server host host-addr informs global
You can use the snmp-server host global configuration command to a specific host to receive the
notification types listed in Table 31-5.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch to send traps or informs
to a host:
Command Purpose
Step 2 snmp-server engineID remote Specify the engine ID for the remote host.
ip-address engineid-string
Step 3 snmp-server user username Configure an SNMP user to be associated with the remote host created in
groupname {remote host [udp-port Step 2.
port]} {v1 [access access-list] | v2c
Note You cannot configure a remote user for an address without first
[access access-list] | v3 [encrypted]
configuring the engine ID for the remote host. Otherwise, you
[access access-list] [auth {md5 | sha}
receive an error message, and the command is not executed.
auth-password]}
Step 4 snmp-server group groupname {v1 | Configure an SNMP group.
v2c | v3 {auth | noauth | priv}} [read
readview] [write writeview] [notify
notifyview] [access access-list]

OL-8553-06 31-13
Configuring SNMP
Command Purpose
Step 5 snmp-server host host-addr Specify the recipient of an SNMP trap operation.
[informs | traps] [version {1 | 2c | 3
• For host-addr, specify the name or Internet address of the host (the
{auth | noauth | priv}}]
targeted recipient).
community-string [notification-type]
• (Optional) Enter informs to send SNMP informs to the host.
• (Optional) Enter traps (the default) to send SNMP traps to the host.
• (Optional) Specify the SNMP version (1, 2c, or 3). SNMPv1 does
not support informs.
• (Optional) For Version 3, select authentication level auth, noauth,
or priv.
Note The priv keyword is available only when the cryptographic
software image is installed.
• For community-string, when version 1 or version 2c is specified,

enter the password-like community string sent with the notification
operation. When version 3 is specified, enter the SNMPv3 username.
Note The @ symbol is used for delimiting the context information.
Avoid using the @ symbol as part of the SNMP community string
when configuring this command.
• (Optional) For notification-type, use the keywords listed in

Table 31-5 on page 31-11. If no type is specified, all notifications are
sent.
Step 6 snmp-server enable traps Enable the switch to send traps or informs and specify the type of
notification-types notifications to be sent. For a list of notification types, see Table 31-5 on
page 31-11, or enter snmp-server enable traps ?
To enable multiple types of traps, you must enter a separate snmp-server
enable traps command for each trap type.
Note When you configure a trap by using the notification type
port-security, configure the port security trap first, and then
configure the port security trap rate:
• snmp-server enable traps port-security

• snmp-server enable traps port-security trap-rate rate
Step 7 snmp-server trap-source interface-id (Optional) Specify the source interface, which provides the IP address for
the trap message. This command also sets the source IP address for
informs.
Step 8 snmp-server queue-length length (Optional) Establish the message queue length for each trap host. The
range is 1 to 1000; the default is 10.
Step 9 snmp-server trap-timeout seconds (Optional) Define how often to resend trap messages. The range is 1 to
1000; the default is 30 seconds.

31-14 OL-8553-06
Configuring SNMP
The snmp-server host command specifies which hosts receive the notifications. The snmp-server
enable trap command globally enables the mechanism for the specified notification (for traps and
informs). To enable a host to receive an inform, you must configure an snmp-server host informs
command for the host and globally enable informs by using the snmp-server enable traps command.
To remove the specified host from receiving traps, use the no snmp-server host host global
configuration command. The no snmp-server host command with no keywords disables traps, but not
informs, to the host. To disable informs, use the no snmp-server host informs global configuration
command. To disable a specific trap type, use the no snmp-server enable traps notification-types global
Setting the CPU Threshold Notification Types and Values

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the CPU threshold notification types and
values:
Command Purpose
Step 2 process cpu threshold type {total | process Set the CPU threshold notification types and values:
| interrupt} rising percentage interval
• total—set the notification type to total CPU utilization.
seconds [falling fall-percentage interval
seconds] • process—set the notification type to CPU process utilization.
• interrupt—set the notification type to CPU interrupt utilization.
• rising percentage—the percentage (1 to 100) of CPU resources
that, when exceeded for the configured interval, sends a CPU
threshold notification.
• interval seconds—the duration of the CPU threshold violation in
seconds (5 to 86400) that, when met, sends a CPU threshold
notification.
• falling fall-percentage—the percentage (1 to 100) of CPU
resources that, when usage falls below this level for the
configured interval, sends a CPU threshold notification.
This value must be equal to or less than the rising percentage
value. If not specified, the falling fall-percentage value is the
same as the rising percentage value.

OL-8553-06 31-15
Configuring SNMP
Setting the Agent Contact and Location Information

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the system contact and location of the
SNMP agent so that these descriptions can be accessed through the configuration file:
Command Purpose
Step 2 snmp-server contact text Set the system contact string.
For example:
snmp-server contact Dial System Operator at beeper 21555.
Step 3 snmp-server location text Set the system location string.
For example:
snmp-server location Building 3/Room 222
Limiting TFTP Servers Used Through SNMP

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to limit the TFTP servers used for saving and
loading configuration files through SNMP to the servers specified in an access list:
Command Purpose
Step 2 snmp-server tftp-server-list Limit TFTP servers used for configuration file copies through
access-list-number SNMP to the servers in the access list.
For access-list-number, enter an IP standard access list numbered
from 1 to 99 and 1300 to 1999.
Step 3 access-list access-list-number {deny | Create a standard access list, repeating the command as many times
permit} source [source-wildcard] as necessary.
• For access-list-number, enter the access list number specified
in Step 2.
• The deny keyword denies access if the conditions are matched.
The permit keyword permits access if the conditions are
matched.
• For source, enter the IP address of the TFTP servers that can
access the switch.
• (Optional) For source-wildcard, enter the wildcard bits, in
dotted decimal notation, to be applied to the source. Place ones
in the bit positions that you want to ignore.

31-16 OL-8553-06
Configuring SNMP
Command Purpose
SNMP Examples
This example shows how to enable all versions of SNMP. The configuration permits any SNMP manager
to access all objects with read-only permissions using the community string public. This configuration
does not cause the switch to send any traps.
Switch(config)# snmp-server community public
This example shows how to permit any SNMP manager to access all objects with read-only permission
using the community string public. The switch also sends VTP traps to the hosts 192.180.1.111 and
192.180.1.33 using SNMPv1 and to the host 192.180.1.27 using SNMPv2C. The community string
public is sent with the traps.
Switch(config)# snmp-server community public
Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps vtp
Switch(config)# snmp-server host 192.180.1.27 version 2c public
Switch(config)# snmp-server host 192.180.1.111 version 1 public
Switch(config)# snmp-server host 192.180.1.33 public
This example shows how to allow read-only access for all objects to members of access list 4 that use
the comaccess community string. No other SNMP managers have access to any objects. SNMP
Authentication Failure traps are sent by SNMPv2C to the host cisco.com using the community string
public.
Switch(config)# snmp-server community comaccess ro 4
Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps snmp authentication
Switch(config)# snmp-server host cisco.com version 2c public
This example shows how to send Entity MIB traps to the host cisco.com. The community string is
restricted. The first line enables the switch to send Entity MIB traps in addition to any traps previously
enabled. The second line specifies the destination of these traps and overwrites any previous
snmp-server host commands for the host cisco.com.
Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps entity
Switch(config)# snmp-server host cisco.com restricted entity
This example shows how to enable the switch to send all traps to the host myhost.cisco.com using the
community string public:
Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps
Switch(config)# snmp-server host myhost.cisco.com public
This example shows how to associate a user with a remote host and to send auth (authNoPriv)
authentication-level informs when the user enters global configuration mode:
Switch(config)# snmp-server engineID remote 192.180.1.27 00000063000100a1c0b4011b
Switch(config)# snmp-server group authgroup v3 auth
Switch(config)# snmp-server user authuser authgroup remote 192.180.1.27 v3 auth md5
mypassword
Switch(config)# snmp-server user authuser authgroup v3 auth md5 mypassword
Switch(config)# snmp-server host 192.180.1.27 informs version 3 auth authuser config
Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps
Switch(config)# snmp-server inform retries 0

OL-8553-06 31-17
Displaying SNMP Status
Displaying SNMP Status

To display SNMP input and output statistics, including the number of illegal community string entries,
errors, and requested variables, use the show snmp privileged EXEC command. You also can use the
other privileged EXEC commands in Table 31-6 to display SNMP information. For information about
the fields in the displays, see the Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference, Release
12.2.
Table 31-6 Commands for Displaying SNMP Information

show snmp Displays SNMP statistics.
show snmp engineID [local | remote] Displays information on the local SNMP engine and all remote engines that have
been configured on the device.
show snmp group Displays information on each SNMP group on the network.
show snmp pending Displays information on pending SNMP requests.
show snmp sessions Displays information on the current SNMP sessions.
show snmp user Displays information on each SNMP user name in the SNMP users table.

31-18 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 32
Configuring Embedded Event Manager
For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the Catalyst 3560
switch command reference for this release and the Cisco IOS Network Management Command
Reference. For complete configuration information, see the Cisco IOS Network Management
Configuration Guide, Release 12.4T.
• Understanding Embedded Event Manager, page 32-1
• Configuring Embedded Event Manager, page 32-5
• Displaying Embedded Event Manager Information, page 32-7
Understanding Embedded Event Manager

The embedded event manager (EEM) monitors key system events and then acts on them through a set
policy. This policy is a programmed script that you can use to customize a script to invoke an action
based on a given set of events occurring. The script generates actions such as generating custom syslog
or Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps, invoking CLI commands, forcing a failover,
and so forth. The event management capabilities of EEM are useful because not all event management
can be managed from the switch and because some problems compromise communication between the
switch and the external network management device. Network availability is improved if automatic
recovery actions are performed without rebooting the switch.
Figure 32-1 shows the relationship between the EEM server, the core event publishers (event detectors),
and the event subscribers (policies). The event publishers screen events and publish them when there is
a match on an event specification that is provided by the event subscriber. Event detectors notify the
EEM server when an event occurs. The EEM policies then implement recovery based on the current state
of the system and the actions specified in the policy for the given event.

OL-8553-06 32-1
Chapter 32 Configuring Embedded Event Manager
Figure 32-1 Embedded Event Manager Core Event Detectors
Core event publishers

Cisco event
Syslog OIR Hardware
IOS manager run
message events timers
parser CLI command
queue
text
CLI SYSLOG OIR NONE Timer Counter

event event event event event event
detector detector detector detector detector detector
EMBEDDED EVENT MANAGER SERVER
EEM POLICY DIRECTOR

Event
subscribers Subscribes to receive events
and implements policy actions
127574
EEM APPLET EEM SCRIPT
See the EEM Configuration for Cisco Integrated Services Router Platforms Guide for examples of EEM
deployment.
• Event Detectors, page 32-2
• Embedded Event Manager Actions, page 32-4
• Embedded Event Manager Policies, page 32-4
• Embedded Event Manager Environment Variables, page 32-5
Event Detectors
EEM software programs known as event detectors determine when an EEM event occurs. Event
detectors are separate systems that provide an interface between the agent being monitored, for example
SNMP, and the EEM policies where an action can be implemented. Event detectors are generated only
by the master switch. CLI and routing processes also run only from the master switch.
Note The stack member switch does not generate events and does not support memory threshold notifications
or IOSWdSysmon event detectors.
• Application-specific event detector– Allows any EEM policy to publish an event.

• IOS CLI event detector– Generates policies based on the commands entered through the CLI.
• Generic Online Diagnostics (GOLD) event detector– Publishes an event when a GOLD failure event
is detected on a specified card and subcard.

32-2 OL-8553-06
• Counter event detector–Publishes an event when a named counter crosses a specified threshold.
• Interface counter event detector– Publishes an event when a generic Cisco IOS interface counter for
a specified interface crosses a defined threshold. A threshold can be specified as an absolute value
or an incremental value. For example, if the incremental value is set to 50 an event would be
published when the interface counter increases by 50.
This detector also publishes an event about an interface based on the rate of change for the entry and
exit values.
• None event detector– Publishes an event when the event manager run CLI command executes an
EEM policy. EEM schedules and runs policies on the basis on an event specification within the
policy itself. An EEM policy must be manually identified and registered before the event manager
run command executes.
• Online insertion and removal event detector–Publishes an event when a hardware insertion or
removal (OIR) event occurs.
• Resource threshold event detector– Generates policies based on global platform values and
thresholds. Includes resources such as CPU utilization and remaining buffer capacity. Applies only
to the master switch.
• Remote procedure call (RPC) event detector—Invokes EEM policies from outside the switch over
an encrypted connecting using Secure Shell (SSH) and uses Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP)
data encoding for exchanging XML-based messages. It also runs EEM policies and then gets the
output in a SOAP XML-formatted reply.
• SNMP event detector– Allows a standard SNMP MIB object to be monitored and an event to be
generated when
– The object matches specified values or crosses specified thresholds.
– The SNMP delta value, the difference between the monitored Object Identifier (OID) value at
the beginning the period and the actual OID value when the event is published, matches a
specified value.
• SNMP notification event detector—Intercepts SNMP trap and inform messages received by the
switch. The event is generated when an incoming message matches a specified value or crosses a
defined threshold.
• Syslog event detector– Allows for screening syslog messages for a regular expression pattern match.
The selected messages can be further qualified, requiring that a specific number of occurrences be
logged within a specified time. A match on a specified event criteria triggers a configured policy
action.
• Timer event detector— Publishes events for
– An absolute-time-of-day timer publishes an event when a specified absolute date and time
occurs.
– A countdown timer publishes an event when a timer counts down to zero.
– A watchdog timer publishes an event when a timer counts down to zero. The timer automatically
resets itself to its initial value and starts to count down again.

OL-8553-06 32-3
– A CRON timer publishes an event by using a UNIX standard CRON specification to define
when the event is to be published. A CRON timer never publishes events more than once per
minute.
• Watchdog event detector (IOSWDSysMon)—Publishes an event only on the master switch when
– CPU utilization for a Cisco IOS process crosses a threshold.
– Memory utilization for a Cisco IOS process crosses a threshold.
Two events can be monitored at the same time, and the event publishing criteria requires that one or
both events cross their specified thresholds.
Embedded Event Manager Actions

These actions occur in response to an event:
• Modifying a named counter.
• Publishing an application-specific event.
• Generating an SNMP trap.
• Generating prioritized syslog messages.
• Reloading the Cisco IOS software.
• Reloading the switch stack.
• Reloading the master switch in the event of a master switchover. If this occurs, a new master switch
is elected.
Embedded Event Manager Policies

EEM can monitor events and provide information, or take corrective action when the monitored events
occur or a threshold is reached. An EEM policy is an entity that defines an event and the actions to be
taken when that event occurs.
There are two types of EEM policies: an applet or a script. An applet is a simple policy that is defined
within the CLI configuration. It is a concise method for defining event screening criteria and the actions to
be taken when that event occurs. Scripts are defined on the networking device by using an ASCII editor.
The script, which can be a bytecode (.tbc) and text (.tcl) script, is then copied to the networking device
and registered with EEM. You can also register multiple events in a .tcl file.
You use EEM to write and implement your own policies using the EEM policy tool command language
(TCL) script. When you configure a TCL script on the master switch, the file is automatically sent to the
member switches. The user-defined TCL scripts must be available in the member switches so that if the
master switch changes, the TCL scripts policies continue to work.
Cisco enhancements to TCL in the form of keyword extensions facilitate the development of EEM
policies. These keywords identify the detected event, the subsequent action, utility information, counter
values, and system information.
For complete information on configuring EEM policies and scripts, see the Cisco IOS Network Management
Configuration Guide, Release 12.4T.

32-4 OL-8553-06
Embedded Event Manager Environment Variables

EEM uses environment variables in EEM policies. These variables are defined in a EEM policy tool
command language (TCL) script by running a CLI command and the event manager environment
command.
• User-defined variables
Defined by the user for a user-defined policy.
• Cisco-defined variables
Defined by Cisco for a specific sample policy.
• Cisco built-in variables (available in EEM applets)
Defined by Cisco and can be read-only or read-write. The read-only variables are set by the system
before an applet starts to execute. The single read-write variable, _exit_status, allows you to set the
exit status for policies triggered from synchronous events.
Cisco-defined environment variables and Cisco system-defined environment variables might apply to
one specific event detector or to all event detectors. Environment variables that are user-defined or
defined by Cisco in a sample policy are set by using the event manager environment global
configuration command. You must defined the variables in the EEM policy before you register the
policy.
For information about the environmental variables that EEM supports, see the Cisco IOS Network
Management Configuration Guide, Release 12.4T.

• Registering and Defining an Embedded Event Manager Applet, page 32-5
• Registering and Defining an Embedded Event Manager TCL Script, page 32-6
For complete information about configuring embedded event manager, see the Cisco IOS Network
Management Configuration Guide, Release 12.4T.
Registering and Defining an Embedded Event Manager Applet

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, perform this task to register an applet with EEM and to define the
EEM applet using the event applet and action applet configuration commands.
Command Purpose
Step 2 event manager applet applet-name Register the applet with EEM and enter applet configuration mode.
Step 3 event snmp oid oid-value get-type Specify the event criteria that causes the EEM applet to run.
{exact | next} entry-op {gt | ge | eq | ne |
(Optional) Exit criteria. If exit criteria are not specified, event monitoring
lt | le} entry-val entry-val [exit-comb
is re-enabled immediately.
{or | and}] [exit-op {gt | ge | eq | ne | lt |
le}] [exit-val exit-val] [exit-time
exit-time-val] poll-interval poll-int-val

OL-8553-06 32-5
Command Purpose
Step 4 action label syslog [priority Specify the action when an EEM applet is triggered. Repeat this action to
priority-level] msg msg-text add other CLI commands to the applet.
• (Optional) The priority keyword specifies the priority level of the
syslog messages. If selected, you need to define the priority-level
argument.
• For msg-text, the argument can be character text, an environment
variable, or a combination of the two.
Step 5 end Exit applet configuration mode and return to privileged EXEC mode.
This example shows the output for EEM when one of the fields specified by an SNMP object ID crosses
a defined threshold:
Switch(config-applet)# event snmp oid 1.3.6.1.4.1.9.9.48.1.1.1.6.1 get-type exact entry-op
lt entry-val 5120000 poll-interval 10
These examples show actions that are taken in response to an EEM event:
Switch(config-applet)# action 1.0 syslog priority critical msg "Memory exhausted; current
available memory is $_snmp_oid_val bytes"
Switch (config-applet)# action 2.0 force-switchover
Registering and Defining an Embedded Event Manager TCL Script

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, perform this task to register a TCL script with EEM and to define
the TCL script and policy commands.
Command Purpose
Step 1 show event manager (Optional) The show event manager environment command displays the name
environment [all | and value of the EEM environment variables.
variable-name]
(Optional) The all keyword displays the EEM environment variables.
(Optional) The variable-name argument displays information about the specified
environment variable.
Step 3 event manager environment Configure the value of the specified EEM environment variable. Repeat this step for
variable-name string all the required environment variables.
Step 4 event manager policy Register the EEM policy to be run when the specified event defined within the
policy-file-name [type policy occurs.
system] [trap]
Step 5 exit Exit global configuration mode and return to privileged EXEC mode.
This example shows the sample output for the show event manager environment command:
Switch# show event manager environment all
No. Name Value
1 _cron_entry 0-59/2 0-23/1 * * 0-6
2 _show_cmd show ver
3 _syslog_pattern .*UPDOWN.*Ethernet1/0.*

32-6 OL-8553-06
Displaying Embedded Event Manager Information
4 _config_cmd1 interface Ethernet1/0

5 _config_cmd2 no shut
This example shows a CRON timer environment variable, which is assigned by the software, to be set to
every second minute, every hour of every day:
Switch (config)# event manager environment_cron_entry 0-59/2 0-23/1 * * 0-6
This example shows the sample EEM policy named tm_cli_cmd.tcl registered as a system policy. The
system policies are part of the Cisco IOS image. User-defined TCL scripts must first be copied to flash
memory.
Switch (config)# event manager policy tm_cli_cmd.tcl type system

To display information about EEM, including EEM registered policies and EEM history data, see the
Cisco IOS Network Management Command Reference.

OL-8553-06 32-7

32-8 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 33
Configuring Network Security with ACLs
This chapter describes how to configure network security on the Catalyst 3560 switch by using access
control lists (ACLs), which in commands and tables are also referred to as access lists.
Note Information in this chapter about IP ACLs is specific to IP Version 4 (IPv4). For information about IPv6
ACLs, see Chapter 39, “Configuring IPv6 ACLs.”
For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the command
reference for this release, the “Configuring IP Services” section in the “IP Addressing and Services”
chapter of the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide, Release 12.2, and the Cisco IOS IP Command
Reference, Volume 1 of 3: Addressing and Services, Release 12.2. The Cisco IOS documentation is
available from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline >
Configuration Guides or Command References.
• Understanding ACLs, page 33-1
• Configuring IPv4 ACLs, page 33-6
• Creating Named MAC Extended ACLs, page 33-27
• Configuring VLAN Maps, page 33-29
• Using VLAN Maps with Router ACLs, page 33-36
• Displaying IPv4 ACL Configuration, page 33-40
Understanding ACLs
Packet filtering can help limit network traffic and restrict network use by certain users or devices. ACLs
filter traffic as it passes through a router or switch and permit or deny packets crossing specified
interfaces or VLANs. An ACL is a sequential collection of permit and deny conditions that apply to
packets. When a packet is received on an interface, the switch compares the fields in the packet against
any applied ACLs to verify that the packet has the required permissions to be forwarded, based on the
criteria specified in the access lists. One by one, it tests packets against the conditions in an access list.
The first match decides whether the switch accepts or rejects the packets. Because the switch stops
testing after the first match, the order of conditions in the list is critical. If no conditions match, the
switch rejects the packet. If there are no restrictions, the switch forwards the packet; otherwise, the
switch drops the packet. The switch can use ACLs on all packets it forwards, including packets bridged
within a VLAN.

OL-8553-06 33-1
Chapter 33 Configuring Network Security with ACLs
Understanding ACLs
You configure access lists on a router or Layer 3 switch to provide basic security for your network. If
you do not configure ACLs, all packets passing through the switch could be allowed onto all parts of the
network. You can use ACLs to control which hosts can access different parts of a network or to decide
which types of traffic are forwarded or blocked at router interfaces. For example, you can allow e-mail
traffic to be forwarded but not Telnet traffic. ACLs can be configured to block inbound traffic, outbound
traffic, or both.
An ACL contains an ordered list of access control entries (ACEs). Each ACE specifies permit or deny
and a set of conditions the packet must satisfy in order to match the ACE. The meaning of permit or deny
depends on the context in which the ACL is used.
The switch supports IP ACLs and Ethernet (MAC) ACLs:
• IP ACLs filter IPv4 traffic, including TCP, User Datagram Protocol (UDP), Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP), and Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
• Ethernet ACLs filter non-IP traffic.
This switch also supports quality of service (QoS) classification ACLs. For more information, see the
“Classification Based on QoS ACLs” section on page 34-7.
• Supported ACLs, page 33-2
• Handling Fragmented and Unfragmented Traffic, page 33-5
Supported ACLs
The switch supports three applications of ACLs to filter traffic:
• Port ACLs access-control traffic entering a Layer 2 interface. The switch does not support port
ACLs in the outbound direction. You can apply only one IP access list and one MAC access list to
a Layer 2 interface. For more information, see the “Port ACLs” section on page 33-3.
• Router ACLs access-control routed traffic between VLANs and are applied to Layer 3 interfaces in
a specific direction (inbound or outbound). For more information, see the “Router ACLs” section on
page 33-4.
• VLAN ACLs or VLAN maps access-control all packets (bridged and routed). You can use VLAN
maps to filter traffic between devices in the same VLAN. VLAN maps are configured to provide
access control based on Layer 3 addresses for IPv4. Unsupported protocols are access-controlled
through MAC addresses using Ethernet ACEs. After a VLAN map is applied to a VLAN, all packets
(routed or bridged) entering the VLAN are checked against the VLAN map. Packets can either enter
the VLAN through a switch port or through a routed port after being routed. For more information,
see the “VLAN Maps” section on page 33-5.
You can use input port ACLs, router ACLs, and VLAN maps on the same switch. However, a port ACL
takes precedence over a router ACL or VLAN map.
• When both an input port ACL and a VLAN map are applied, incoming packets received on ports
with a port ACL applied are filtered by the port ACL. Other packets are filtered by the VLAN map
• When an input router ACL and input port ACL exist in an switch virtual interface (SVI), incoming
packets received on ports to which a port ACL is applied are filtered by the port ACL. Incoming
routed IP packets received on other ports are filtered by the router ACL. Other packets are not
filtered.

33-2 OL-8553-06
Understanding ACLs
• When an output router ACL and input port ACL exist in an SVI, incoming packets received on the
ports to which a port ACL is applied are filtered by the port ACL. Outgoing routed IP packets are
filtered by the router ACL. Other packets are not filtered.
• When a VLAN map, input router ACL, and input port ACL exist in an SVI, incoming packets
received on the ports to which a port ACL is applied are only filtered by the port ACL. Incoming
routed IP packets received on other ports are filtered by both the VLAN map and the router ACL.
Other packets are filtered only by the VLAN map.
• When a VLAN map, output router ACL, and input port ACL exist in an SVI, incoming packets
received on the ports to which a port ACL is applied are only filtered by the port ACL. Outgoing
routed IP packets are filtered by both the VLAN map and the router ACL. Other packets are filtered
only by the VLAN map.
If IEEE 802.1Q tunneling is configured on an interface, any IEEE 802.1Q encapsulated IP packets
received on the tunnel port can be filtered by MAC ACLs, but not by IP ACLs. This is because the switch
does not recognize the protocol inside the IEEE 802.1Q header. This restriction applies to router ACLs,
port ACLs, and VLAN maps. For more information about IEEE 802.1Q tunneling, see Chapter 16,
“Configuring IEEE 802.1Q and Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling.”
Port ACLs
Port ACLs are ACLs that are applied to Layer 2 interfaces on a switch. Port ACLs are supported only
on physical interfaces and not on EtherChannel interfaces and can be applied only on interfaces in the
inbound direction. These access lists are supported:
• Standard IP access lists using source addresses
• Extended IP access lists using source and destination addresses and optional protocol type
information
• MAC extended access lists using source and destination MAC addresses and optional protocol type
information
The switch examines ACLs associated with all inbound features configured on a given interface and
permits or denies packet forwarding based on how the packet matches the entries in the ACL. In this
way, ACLs control access to a network or to part of a network. Figure 33-1 is an example of using port
ACLs to control access to a network when all workstations are in the same VLAN. ACLs applied at the
Layer 2 input would allow Host A to access the Human Resources network, but prevent Host B from
accessing the same network. Port ACLs can only be applied to Layer 2 interfaces in the inbound
direction.

OL-8553-06 33-3
Understanding ACLs
Figure 33-1 Using ACLs to Control Traffic to a Network
Host A
Host B
Human Research &

Resources Development
network network
= ACL denying traffic from Host B
101365
and permitting traffic from Host A
= Packet
When you apply a port ACL to a trunk port, the ACL filters traffic on all VLANs present on the trunk
port. When you apply a port ACL to a port with voice VLAN, the ACL filters traffic on both data and
voice VLANs.
With port ACLs, you can filter IP traffic by using IP access lists and non-IP traffic by using MAC
addresses. You can filter both IP and non-IP traffic on the same Layer 2 interface by applying both an
IP access list and a MAC access list to the interface.
Note You cannot apply more than one IP access list and one MAC access list to a Layer 2 interface. If an IP
access list or MAC access list is already configured on a Layer 2 interface and you apply a new IP access
list or MAC access list to the interface, the new ACL replaces the previously configured one.
Router ACLs
You can apply router ACLs on switch virtual interfaces (SVIs), which are Layer 3 interfaces to VLANs;
on physical Layer 3 interfaces; and on Layer 3 EtherChannel interfaces. You apply router ACLs on
interfaces for specific directions (inbound or outbound). You can apply one router ACL in each direction
on an interface.
One ACL can be used with multiple features for a given interface, and one feature can use multiple
ACLs. When a single router ACL is used by multiple features, it is examined multiple times.
The switch supports these access lists for IPv4 traffic:
• Standard IP access lists use source addresses for matching operations.
• Extended IP access lists use source and destination addresses and optional protocol type information
for matching operations.

33-4 OL-8553-06
Understanding ACLs
As with port ACLs, the switch examines ACLs associated with features configured on a given interface.
However, router ACLs are supported in both directions. As packets enter the switch on an interface,
ACLs associated with all inbound features configured on that interface are examined. After packets are
routed and before they are forwarded to the next hop, all ACLs associated with outbound features
configured on the egress interface are examined.
ACLs permit or deny packet forwarding based on how the packet matches the entries in the ACL, and
can be used to control access to a network or to part of a network. In Figure 33-1, ACLs applied at the
router input allow Host A to access the Human Resources network, but prevent Host B from accessing
the same network.
VLAN Maps
Use VLAN ACLs or VLAN maps to access-control all traffic. You can apply VLAN maps to all packets
that are routed into or out of a VLAN or are bridged within a VLAN in the switch.
Use VLAN maps for security packet filtering. VLAN maps are not defined by direction (input or output).
You can configure VLAN maps to match Layer 3 addresses for IPv4 traffic.
All non-IP protocols are access-controlled through MAC addresses and Ethertype using MAC VLAN
maps. (IP traffic is not access controlled by MAC VLAN maps.) You can enforce VLAN maps only on
packets going through the switch; you cannot enforce VLAN maps on traffic between hosts on a hub or
on another switch connected to this switch.
With VLAN maps, forwarding of packets is permitted or denied, based on the action specified in the
map. Figure 33-2 shows how a VLAN map is applied to prevent a specific type of traffic from Host A in
VLAN 10 from being forwarded. You can apply only one VLAN map to a VLAN.
Figure 33-2 Using VLAN Maps to Control Traffic
Host A Host B
(VLAN 10) (VLAN 10)
= VLAN map denying specific type

92919
of traffic from Host A

= Packet
Handling Fragmented and Unfragmented Traffic

IP packets can be fragmented as they cross the network. When this happens, only the fragment
containing the beginning of the packet contains the Layer 4 information, such as TCP or UDP port
numbers, ICMP type and code, and so on. All other fragments are missing this information.
Some ACEs do not check Layer 4 information and therefore can be applied to all packet fragments.
ACEs that do test Layer 4 information cannot be applied in the standard manner to most of the fragments
in a fragmented IP packet. When the fragment contains no Layer 4 information and the ACE tests some
Layer 4 information, the matching rules are modified:

OL-8553-06 33-5
Configuring IPv4 ACLs
• Permit ACEs that check the Layer 3 information in the fragment (including protocol type, such as
TCP, UDP, and so on) are considered to match the fragment regardless of what the missing Layer 4
information might have been.
• Deny ACEs that check Layer 4 information never match a fragment unless the fragment contains
Layer 4 information.
Consider access list 102, configured with these commands, applied to three fragmented packets:
Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit tcp any host 10.1.1.1 eq smtp
Switch(config)# access-list 102 deny tcp any host 10.1.1.2 eq telnet
Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit tcp any host 10.1.1.2
Switch(config)# access-list 102 deny tcp any any
Note In the first and second ACEs in the examples, the eq keyword after the destination address means to test
for the TCP-destination-port well-known numbers equaling Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and
Telnet, respectively.
• Packet A is a TCP packet from host 10.2.2.2., port 65000, going to host 10.1.1.1 on the SMTP port.
If this packet is fragmented, the first fragment matches the first ACE (a permit) as if it were a
complete packet because all Layer 4 information is present. The remaining fragments also match the
first ACE, even though they do not contain the SMTP port information, because the first ACE only
checks Layer 3 information when applied to fragments. The information in this example is that the
packet is TCP and that the destination is 10.1.1.1.
• Packet B is from host 10.2.2.2, port 65001, going to host 10.1.1.2 on the Telnet port. If this packet
is fragmented, the first fragment matches the second ACE (a deny) because all Layer 3 and Layer 4
information is present. The remaining fragments in the packet do not match the second ACE because
they are missing Layer 4 information. Instead, they match the third ACE (a permit).
Because the first fragment was denied, host 10.1.1.2 cannot reassemble a complete packet, so packet
B is effectively denied. However, the later fragments that are permitted will consume bandwidth on
the network and resources of host 10.1.1.2 as it tries to reassemble the packet.
• Fragmented packet C is from host 10.2.2.2, port 65001, going to host 10.1.1.3, port ftp. If this packet
is fragmented, the first fragment matches the fourth ACE (a deny). All other fragments also match
the fourth ACE because that ACE does not check any Layer 4 information and because Layer 3
information in all fragments shows that they are being sent to host 10.1.1.3, and the earlier permit
ACEs were checking different hosts.

Configuring IP v4ACLs on the switch is the same as configuring IPv4 ACLs on other Cisco switches
and routers. The process is briefly described here. For more detailed information on configuring ACLs,
see the “Configuring IP Services” section in the “IP Addressing and Services” chapter of the Cisco IOS
IP Configuration Guide, Release 12.2. For detailed information about the commands, see the Cisco IOS
IP Command Reference, Volume 1 of 3: Addressing and Services, Release 12.2. The Cisco IOS
documentation is available from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software >
12.2 Mainline > Configuration Guides or Command References.
The switch does not support these Cisco IOS router ACL-related features:
• Non-IP protocol ACLs (see Table 33-1 on page 33-8) or bridge-group ACLs
• IP accounting

33-6 OL-8553-06
• Inbound and outbound rate limiting (except with QoS ACLs)

• Reflexive ACLs or dynamic ACLs (except for some specialized dynamic ACLs used by the switch
clustering feature)
• ACL logging for port ACLs and VLAN maps
These are the steps to use IP ACLs on the switch:
Step 1 Create an ACL by specifying an access list number or name and the access conditions.
Step 2 Apply the ACL to interfaces or terminal lines. You can also apply standard and extended IP ACLs to
VLAN maps.

• Creating Standard and Extended IPv4 ACLs, page 33-7
• Applying an IPv4 ACL to a Terminal Line, page 33-18
• Applying an IPv4 ACL to an Interface, page 33-19
• Hardware and Software Treatment of IP ACLs, page 33-21
• Troubleshooting ACLs, page 33-21
• IPv4 ACL Configuration Examples, page 33-22
Creating Standard and Extended IPv4 ACLs

This section describes IP ACLs. An ACL is a sequential collection of permit and deny conditions. One
by one, the switch tests packets against the conditions in an access list. The first match determines
whether the switch accepts or rejects the packet. Because the switch stops testing after the first match,
the order of the conditions is critical. If no conditions match, the switch denies the packet.
The software supports these types of ACLs or access lists for IPv4:
• Standard IP access lists use source addresses for matching operations.
• Extended IP access lists use source and destination addresses for matching operations and optional
protocol-type information for finer granularity of control.
These sections describe access lists and how to create them:
• Access List Numbers, page 33-8
• ACL Logging, page 33-8
• Creating a Numbered Standard ACL, page 33-9
• Creating a Numbered Extended ACL, page 33-10
• Resequencing ACEs in an ACL, page 33-14
• Creating Named Standard and Extended ACLs, page 33-14
• Using Time Ranges with ACLs, page 33-16
• Including Comments in ACLs, page 33-18

OL-8553-06 33-7
Access List Numbers

The number you use to denote your ACL shows the type of access list that you are creating. Table 33-1
lists the access-list number and corresponding access list type and shows whether or not they are
supported in the switch. The switch supports IPv4 standard and extended access lists, numbers 1 to 199
and 1300 to 2699.
Table 33-1 Access List Numbers
Access List Number Type Supported

1–99 IP standard access list Yes
100–199 IP extended access list Yes
200–299 Protocol type-code access list No
300–399 DECnet access list No
400–499 XNS standard access list No
500–599 XNS extended access list No
600–699 AppleTalk access list No
700–799 48-bit MAC address access list No
800–899 IPX standard access list No
900–999 IPX extended access list No
1000–1099 IPX SAP access list No
1100–1199 Extended 48-bit MAC address access list No
1200–1299 IPX summary address access list No
1300–1999 IP standard access list (expanded range) Yes
2000–2699 IP extended access list (expanded range) Yes
Note In addition to numbered standard and extended ACLs, you can also create standard and extended named
IP ACLs by using the supported numbers. That is, the name of a standard IP ACL can be 1 to 99; the
name of an extended IP ACL can be 100 to 199. The advantage of using named ACLs instead of
numbered lists is that you can delete individual entries from a named list.
ACL Logging
The switch software can provide logging messages about packets permitted or denied by a standard IP
access list. That is, any packet that matches the ACL causes an informational logging message about the
packet to be sent to the console. The level of messages logged to the console is controlled by the logging
console commands controlling the syslog messages.
Note Because routing is done in hardware and logging is done in software, if a large number of packets match
a permit or deny ACE containing a log keyword, the software might not be able to match the hardware
processing rate, and not all packets will be logged.

33-8 OL-8553-06
The first packet that triggers the ACL causes a logging message right away, and subsequent packets are
collected over 5-minute intervals before they appear or logged. The logging message includes the access
list number, whether the packet was permitted or denied, the source IP address of the packet, and the
number of packets from that source permitted or denied in the prior 5-minute interval.
Creating a Numbered Standard ACL

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a numbered standard ACL:
Command Purpose
Step 2 access-list access-list-number {deny | permit} Define a standard IPv4 access list by using a source address and
source [source-wildcard] [log] wildcard.
The access-list-number is a decimal number from 1 to 99 or 1300
to 1999.
Enter deny or permit to specify whether to deny or permit access
if conditions are matched.
The source is the source address of the network or host from which
the packet is being sent specified as:
• The keyword any as an abbreviation for source and
source-wildcard of 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255. You do not need
to enter a source-wildcard.
• The keyword host as an abbreviation for source and
source-wildcard of source 0.0.0.0.
(Optional) The source-wildcard applies wildcard bits to the
source.
(Optional) Enter log to cause an informational logging message
about the packet that matches the entry to be sent to the console.
Step 4 show access-lists [number | name] Show the access list configuration.
Use the no access-list access-list-number global configuration command to delete the entire ACL. You
cannot delete individual ACEs from numbered access lists.
Note When creating an ACL, remember that, by default, the end of the ACL contains an implicit deny
statement for all packets that it did not find a match for before reaching the end. With standard access
lists, if you omit the mask from an associated IP host address ACL specification, 0.0.0.0 is assumed to
be the mask.
This example shows how to create a standard ACL to deny access to IP host 171.69.198.102, permit
access to any others, and display the results.
Switch (config)# access-list 2 deny host 171.69.198.102
Switch (config)# access-list 2 permit any

OL-8553-06 33-9
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show access-lists
Standard IP access list 2
10 deny 171.69.198.102
20 permit any
The switch always rewrites the order of standard access lists so that entries with host matches and entries
with matches having a don’t care mask of 0.0.0.0 are moved to the top of the list, above any entries with
non-zero don’t care masks. Therefore, in show command output and in the configuration file, the ACEs
do not necessarily appear in the order in which they were entered.
After creating a numbered standard IPv4 ACL, you can apply it to terminal lines (see the “Applying an
IPv4 ACL to a Terminal Line” section on page 33-18), to interfaces (see the “Applying an IPv4 ACL to
an Interface” section on page 33-19), or to VLANs (see the “Configuring VLAN Maps” section on
page 33-29).
Creating a Numbered Extended ACL

Although standard ACLs use only source addresses for matching, you can use extended ACL source and
destination addresses for matching operations and optional protocol type information for finer
granularity of control. When you are creating ACEs in numbered extended access lists, remember that
after you create the ACL, any additions are placed at the end of the list. You cannot reorder the list or
selectively add or remove ACEs from a numbered list.
Some protocols also have specific parameters and keywords that apply to that protocol.
These IP protocols are supported (protocol keywords are in parentheses in bold):
Authentication Header Protocol (ahp), Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (eigrp),
Encapsulation Security Payload (esp), generic routing encapsulation (gre), Internet Control Message
Protocol (icmp), Internet Group Management Protocol (igmp), any Interior Protocol (ip), IP in IP
tunneling (ipinip), KA9Q NOS-compatible IP over IP tunneling (nos), Open Shortest Path First routing
(ospf), Payload Compression Protocol (pcp), Protocol Independent Multicast (pim), Transmission
Control Protocol (tcp), or User Datagram Protocol (udp).
Note ICMP echo-reply cannot be filtered. All other ICMP codes or types can be filtered.
For more details on the specific keywords for each protocol, see these command references:
• Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 1 of 3: Addressing and Services, Release 12.2
• Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols, Release 12.2
• Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 3 of 3: Multicast, Release 12.2
These documents are available from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software
> 12.2 Mainline > Command References.
Note The switch does not support dynamic or reflexive access lists. It also does not support filtering based on
the type of service (ToS) minimize-monetary-cost bit.
Supported parameters can be grouped into these categories: TCP, UDP, ICMP, IGMP, or other IP.

33-10 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create an extended ACL:
Command Purpose
Step 2a access-list access-list-number Define an extended IPv4 access list and the access conditions.
{deny | permit} protocol
The access-list-number is a decimal number from 100 to 199 or 2000 to 2699.
source source-wildcard
destination destination-wildcard Enter deny or permit to specify whether to deny or permit the packet if
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] conditions are matched.
[fragments] [log] [log-input] For protocol, enter the name or number of an IP protocol: ahp, eigrp, esp, gre,
[time-range time-range-name] icmp, igmp, igrp, ip, ipinip, nos, ospf, pcp, pim, tcp, or udp, or an integer in
[dscp dscp] the range 0 to 255 representing an IP protocol number. To match any Internet
Note If you enter a dscp value, protocol (including ICMP, TCP, and UDP), use the keyword ip.
you cannot enter tos or Note This step includes options for most IP protocols. For additional specific
precedence. You can parameters for TCP, UDP, ICMP, and IGMP, see steps 2b through 2e.
enter both a tos and a
precedence value with no The source is the number of the network or host from which the packet is sent.
dscp.
The source-wildcard applies wildcard bits to the source.
The destination is the network or host number to which the packet is sent.
The destination-wildcard applies wildcard bits to the destination.
Source, source-wildcard, destination, and destination-wildcard can be specified
as:
• The keyword any for 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 (any host).
• The keyword host for a single host 0.0.0.0.
The other keywords are optional and have these meanings:
• precedence—Enter to match packets with a precedence level specified as a
number from 0 to 7 or by name: routine (0), priority (1), immediate (2),
flash (3), flash-override (4), critical (5), internet (6), network (7).
• fragments—Enter to check non-initial fragments.
• tos—Enter to match by type of service level, specified by a number from 0
to 15 or a name: normal (0), max-reliability (2), max-throughput (4),
min-delay (8).
• log—Enter to create an informational logging message to be sent to the
console about the packet that matches the entry or log-input to include the
input interface in the log entry.
• time-range—For an explanation of this keyword, see the “Using Time
Ranges with ACLs” section on page 33-16.
• dscp—Enter to match packets with the DSCP value specified by a number
from 0 to 63, or use the question mark (?) to see a list of available values.

OL-8553-06 33-11
Command Purpose
or access-list access-list-number In access-list configuration mode, define an extended IP access list using an
{deny | permit} protocol any any abbreviation for a source and source wildcard of 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 and
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] an abbreviation for a destination and destination wildcard of 0.0.0.0
[fragments] [log] [log-input] 255.255.255.255.
[time-range time-range-name]
You can use the any keyword in place of source and destination address and
[dscp dscp]
wildcard.
or access-list access-list-number Define an extended IP access list by using an abbreviation for a source and a
{deny | permit} protocol source wildcard of source 0.0.0.0 and an abbreviation for a destination and
host source host destination destination wildcard of destination 0.0.0.0.
[precedence precedence] [tos tos]
You can use the host keyword in place of the source and destination wildcard
[fragments] [log] [log-input]
or mask.
[time-range time-range-name]
[dscp dscp]
Step access-list access-list-number (Optional) Define an extended TCP access list and the access conditions.
2b {deny | permit} tcp source
Enter tcp for Transmission Control Protocol.
source-wildcard [operator port]
destination destination-wildcard The parameters are the same as those described in Step 2a, with these
[operator port] [established] exceptions:
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] (Optional) Enter an operator and port to compare source (if positioned after
[fragments] [log] [log-input] source source-wildcard) or destination (if positioned after destination
[time-range time-range-name] destination-wildcard) port. Possible operators include eq (equal), gt (greater
[dscp dscp] [flag] than), lt (less than), neq (not equal), and range (inclusive range). Operators
require a port number (range requires two port numbers separated by a space).
Enter the port number as a decimal number (from 0 to 65535) or the name of a
TCP port. To see TCP port names, use the ? or see the “Configuring IP Services”
section in the “IP Addressing and Services” chapter of the Cisco IOS IP
Configuration Guide, Release 12.2. Use only TCP port numbers or names when
filtering TCP.
The other optional keywords have these meanings:
• established—Enter to match an established connection. This has the same
function as matching on the ack or rst flag.
• flag—Enter one of these flags to match by the specified TCP header bits:
ack (acknowledge), fin (finish), psh (push), rst (reset), syn (synchronize),
or urg (urgent).
Step access-list access-list-number (Optional) Define an extended UDP access list and the access conditions.
2c {deny | permit} udp Enter udp for the User Datagram Protocol.
source source-wildcard [operator
port] destination The UDP parameters are the same as those described for TCP except that the
destination-wildcard [operator [operator [port]] port number or name must be a UDP port number or name, and
port] [precedence precedence] the flag and established parameters are not valid for UDP.
[tos tos] [fragments] [log]
[log-input] [time-range
time-range-name] [dscp dscp]

33-12 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step access-list access-list-number (Optional) Define an extended ICMP access list and the access conditions.
2d {deny | permit} icmp source
Enter icmp for Internet Control Message Protocol.
source-wildcard destination
destination-wildcard [icmp-type | The ICMP parameters are the same as those described for most IP protocols in
[[icmp-type icmp-code] | Step 2a, with the addition of the ICMP message type and code parameters.
[icmp-message]] [precedence These optional keywords have these meanings:
precedence] [tos tos] [fragments] • icmp-type—Enter to filter by ICMP message type, a number from 0 to 255.
[log] [log-input] [time-range
time-range-name] [dscp dscp] • icmp-code—Enter to filter ICMP packets that are filtered by the ICMP
message code type, a number from 0 to 255.
• icmp-message—Enter to filter ICMP packets by the ICMP message type
name or the ICMP message type and code name. To see a list of ICMP
message type names and code names, use the ?, or see the “Configuring IP
Services” section of the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide, Release 12.2.
Step access-list access-list-number (Optional) Define an extended IGMP access list and the access conditions.
2e {deny | permit} igmp source
Enter igmp for Internet Group Management Protocol.
source-wildcard destination
destination-wildcard [igmp-type] The IGMP parameters are the same as those described for most IP protocols in
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] Step 2a, with this optional parameter.
[fragments] [log] [log-input] igmp-type—To match IGMP message type, enter a number from 0 to 15, or enter
[time-range time-range-name] the message name (dvmrp, host-query, host-report, pim, or trace).
[dscp dscp]
Step 4 show access-lists [number | name] Verify the access list configuration.
startup-config
Use the no access-list access-list-number global configuration command to delete the entire access list.
You cannot delete individual ACEs from numbered access lists.
This example shows how to create and display an extended access list to deny Telnet access from any
host in network 171.69.198.0 to any host in network 172.20.52.0 and to permit any others. (The eq
keyword after the destination address means to test for the TCP destination port number equaling
Telnet.)
Switch(config)# access-list 102 deny tcp 171.69.198.0 0.0.0.255 172.20.52.0 0.0.0.255 eq
telnet
Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit tcp any any
Switch(config)# end
Extended IP access list 102
10 deny tcp 171.69.198.0 0.0.0.255 172.20.52.0 0.0.0.255 eq telnet
20 permit tcp any any
After an ACL is created, any additions (possibly entered from the terminal) are placed at the end of the
list. You cannot selectively add or remove access list entries from a numbered access list.
Note When you are creating an ACL, remember that, by default, the end of the access list contains an implicit
deny statement for all packets if it did not find a match before reaching the end.

OL-8553-06 33-13
After creating a numbered extended ACL, you can apply it to terminal lines (see the “Applying an IPv4
ACL to a Terminal Line” section on page 33-18), to interfaces (see the “Applying an IPv4 ACL to an
Interface” section on page 33-19), or to VLANs (see the “Configuring VLAN Maps” section on
page 33-29).
Resequencing ACEs in an ACL

Sequence numbers for the entries in an access list are automatically generated when you create a new
ACL. You can use the ip access-list resequence global configuration command to edit the sequence
numbers in an ACL and change the order in which ACEs are applied. For example, if you add a new
ACE to an ACL, it is placed at the bottom of the list. By changing the sequence number, you can move
the ACE to a different position in the ACL.
For more information about the ip access-list resequence command, see this URL:
http://preview.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1838/products_feature_guide09186a0080134a
60.html
Creating Named Standard and Extended ACLs

You can identify IPv4 ACLs with an alphanumeric string (a name) rather than a number. You can use
named ACLs to configure more IPv4 access lists in a router than if you were to use numbered access
lists. If you identify your access list with a name rather than a number, the mode and command syntax
are slightly different. However, not all commands that use IP access lists accept a named access list.
Note The name you give to a standard or extended ACL can also be a number in the supported range of access
list numbers. That is, the name of a standard IP ACL can be 1 to 99; the name of an extended IP ACL
can be 100 to 199. The advantage of using named ACLs instead of numbered lists is that you can delete
individual entries from a named list.
Consider these guidelines and limitations before configuring named ACLs:

• Not all commands that accept a numbered ACL accept a named ACL. ACLs for packet filters and
route filters on interfaces can use a name. VLAN maps also accept a name.
• A standard ACL and an extended ACL cannot have the same name.
• Numbered ACLs are also available, as described in the “Creating Standard and Extended IPv4
ACLs” section on page 33-7.
• You can use standard and extended ACLs (named or numbered) in VLAN maps.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a standard ACL using names:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip access-list standard name Define a standard IPv4 access list using a name, and enter
access-list configuration mode.
The name can be a number from 1 to 99.

33-14 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 deny {source [source-wildcard] | host source | In access-list configuration mode, specify one or more conditions
any} [log] denied or permitted to decide if the packet is forwarded or dropped.
or • host source—A source and source wildcard of source 0.0.0.0.
permit {source [source-wildcard] | host source • any—A source and source wildcard of 0.0.0.0
| any} [log] 255.255.255.255.
To remove a named standard ACL, use the no ip access-list standard name global configuration
command.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create an extended ACL using names:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip access-list extended name Define an extended IPv4 access list using a name, and enter
access-list configuration mode.
The name can be a number from 100 to 199.
Step 3 {deny | permit} protocol {source In access-list configuration mode, specify the conditions allowed
[source-wildcard] | host source | any} or denied. Use the log keyword to get access list logging messages,
{destination [destination-wildcard] | host including violations.
destination | any} [precedence precedence]
See the “Creating a Numbered Extended ACL” section on
[tos tos] [established] [log] [time-range
page 33-10 for definitions of protocols and other keywords.
time-range-name]
• host source—A source and source wildcard of source 0.0.0.0.
• host destination—A destination and destination wildcard of
destination 0.0.0.0.
• any—A source and source wildcard or destination and
destination wildcard of 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255.
To remove a named extended ACL, use the no ip access-list extended name global configuration
command.
When you are creating standard extended ACLs, remember that, by default, the end of the ACL contains
an implicit deny statement for everything if it did not find a match before reaching the end. For standard
ACLs, if you omit the mask from an associated IP host address access list specification, 0.0.0.0 is
assumed to be the mask.

OL-8553-06 33-15
After you create an ACL, any additions are placed at the end of the list. You cannot selectively add ACL
entries to a specific ACL. However, you can use no permit and no deny access-list configuration mode
commands to remove entries from a named ACL. This example shows how you can delete individual
ACEs from the named access list border-list:
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended border-list
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# no permit ip host 10.1.1.3 any
Being able to selectively remove lines from a named ACL is one reason you might use named ACLs
instead of numbered ACLs.
After creating a named ACL, you can apply it to interfaces (see the “Applying an IPv4 ACL to an
Interface” section on page 33-19) or to VLANs (see the “Configuring VLAN Maps” section on
page 33-29).
Using Time Ranges with ACLs

You can selectively apply extended ACLs based on the time of day and the week by using the
time-range global configuration command. First, define a time-range name and set the times and the
dates or the days of the week in the time range. Then enter the time-range name when applying an ACL
to set restrictions to the access list. You can use the time range to define when the permit or deny
statements in the ACL are in effect, for example, during a specified time period or on specified days of
the week. The time-range keyword and argument are referenced in the named and numbered extended
ACL task tables in the previous sections, the “Creating Standard and Extended IPv4 ACLs” section on
page 33-7, and the “Creating Named Standard and Extended ACLs” section on page 33-14.
These are some of the many possible benefits of using time ranges:
• You have more control over permitting or denying a user access to resources, such as an application
(identified by an IP address/mask pair and a port number).
• You can control logging messages. ACL entries can be set to log traffic only at certain times of the
day. Therefore, you can simply deny access without needing to analyze many logs generated during
peak hours.
Time-based access lists trigger CPU activity because the new configuration of the access list must be
merged with other features and the combined configuration loaded into the TCAM. For this reason, you
should be careful not to have several access lists configured to take affect in close succession (within a
small number of minutes of each other.)
Note The time range relies on the switch system clock; therefore, you need a reliable clock source. We
recommend that you use Network Time Protocol (NTP) to synchronize the switch clock. For more
information, see the “Managing the System Time and Date” section on page 7-1.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a time-range parameter for an
ACL:
Command Purpose
Step 2 time-range time-range-name Assign a meaningful name (for example, workhours) to the time range to
be created, and enter time-range configuration mode. The name cannot
contain a space or quotation mark and must begin with a letter.

33-16 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 absolute [start time date] Specify when the function it will be applied to is operational.
[end time date]
• You can use only one absolute statement in the time range. If you
or configure more than one absolute statement, only the one configured
periodic day-of-the-week hh:mm to last is executed.
[day-of-the-week] hh:mm
• You can enter multiple periodic statements. For example, you could
or configure different hours for weekdays and weekends.
periodic {weekdays | weekend | daily}
See the example configurations.
hh:mm to hh:mm
Step 5 show time-range Verify the time-range configuration.
Repeat the steps if you have multiple items that you want in effect at different times.
To remove a configured time-range limitation, use the no time-range time-range-name global
This example shows how to configure time ranges for workhours and to configure January 1, 2006, as a
company holiday and to verify your configuration.
Switch(config)# time-range workhours
Switch(config-time-range)# periodic weekdays 8:00 to 12:00
Switch(config-time-range)# periodic weekdays 13:00 to 17:00
Switch(config-time-range)# exit
Switch(config)# time-range new_year_day_2006
Switch(config-time-range)# absolute start 00:00 1 Jan 2006 end 23:59 1 Jan 2006
Switch(config-time-range)# end
Switch# show time-range
time-range entry: new_year_day_2003 (inactive)
absolute start 00:00 01 January 2006 end 23:59 01 January 2006
time-range entry: workhours (inactive)
periodic weekdays 8:00 to 12:00
periodic weekdays 13:00 to 17:00
To apply a time range, enter the time-range name in an extended ACL that can implement time ranges.
This example shows how to create and verify extended access list 188 that denies TCP traffic from any
source to any destination during the defined holiday times and permits all TCP traffic during work hours.
Switch(config)# access-list 188 deny tcp any any time-range new_year_day_2006
Switch(config)# access-list 188 permit tcp any any time-range workhours
Switch(config)# end
10 deny tcp any any time-range new_year_day_2006 (inactive)
20 permit tcp any any time-range workhours (inactive)
This example uses named ACLs to permit and deny the same traffic.
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended deny_access
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# deny tcp any any time-range new_year_day_2006
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended may_access
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit tcp any any time-range workhours
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# end
Switch# show ip access-lists
Extended IP access list lpip_default
10 permit ip any any

OL-8553-06 33-17
Extended IP access list deny_access

10 deny tcp any any time-range new_year_day_2006 (inactive)
Extended IP access list may_access
10 permit tcp any any time-range workhours (inactive)
Including Comments in ACLs

You can use the remark keyword to include comments (remarks) about entries in any IP standard or
extended ACL. The remarks make the ACL easier for you to understand and scan. Each remark line is
limited to 100 characters.
The remark can go before or after a permit or deny statement. You should be consistent about where you
put the remark so that it is clear which remark describes which permit or deny statement. For example,
it would be confusing to have some remarks before the associated permit or deny statements and some
remarks after the associated statements.
To include a comment for IP numbered standard or extended ACLs, use the access-list access-list
number remark remark global configuration command. To remove the remark, use the no form of this
command.
In this example, the workstation that belongs to Jones is allowed access, and the workstation that belongs
to Smith is not allowed access:
Switch(config)# access-list 1 remark Permit only Jones workstation through
Switch(config)# access-list 1 remark Do not allow Smith through
Switch(config)# access-list 1 deny 171.69.3.13
For an entry in a named IP ACL, use the remark access-list configuration command. To remove the
remark, use the no form of this command.
In this example, the Jones subnet is not allowed to use outbound Telnet:
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended telnetting
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# remark Do not allow Jones subnet to telnet out
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# deny tcp host 171.69.2.88 any eq telnet
Applying an IPv4 ACL to a Terminal Line

You can use numbered ACLs to control access to one or more terminal lines. You cannot apply named
ACLs to lines. You must set identical restrictions on all the virtual terminal lines because a user can
attempt to connect to any of them.
For procedures for applying ACLs to interfaces, see the “Applying an IPv4 ACL to an Interface” section
on page 33-19. For applying ACLs to VLANs, see the “Configuring VLAN Maps” section on
page 33-29.

33-18 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to restrict incoming and outgoing connections
between a virtual terminal line and the addresses in an ACL:
Command Purpose
Step 2 line [console | vty] line-number Identify a specific line to configure, and enter in-line configuration mode.
• console—Specify the console terminal line. The console port is DCE.
• vty—Specify a virtual terminal for remote console access.
The line-number is the first line number in a contiguous group that you want
to configure when the line type is specified. The range is from 0 to 16.
Step 3 access-class access-list-number Restrict incoming and outgoing connections between a particular virtual
{in | out} terminal line (into a device) and the addresses in an access list.
Step 5 show running-config Display the access list configuration.
To remove an ACL from a terminal line, use the no access-class access-list-number {in | out} line
Applying an IPv4 ACL to an Interface

This section describes how to apply IPv4 ACLs to network interfaces. Note these guidelines:
• Apply an ACL only to inbound Layer 2 interfaces. Apply an ACL to either outbound or inbound
Layer 3 interfaces.
• When controlling access to an interface, you can use a named or numbered ACL.
• If you apply an ACL to a Layer 2 interface that is a member of a VLAN, the Layer 2 (port) ACL
takes precedence over an input Layer 3 ACL applied to the VLAN interface or a VLAN map applied
to the VLAN. Incoming packets received on the Layer 2 port are always filtered by the port ACL.
• If you apply an ACL to a Layer 3 interface and routing is not enabled on the switch, the ACL only
filters packets that are intended for the CPU, such as SNMP, Telnet, or web traffic. You do not have
to enable routing to apply ACLs to Layer 2 interfaces.
• When private VLANs are configured, you can apply router ACLs only on the primary-VLAN SVIs.
The ACL is applied to both primary and secondary VLAN Layer 3 traffic.
Note By default, the router sends Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) unreachable messages when a
packet is denied by an access group. These access-group denied packets are not dropped in hardware but
are bridged to the switch CPU so that it can generate the ICMP-unreachable message.

OL-8553-06 33-19
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to control access to an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Identify a specific interface for configuration, and enter interface
configuration mode.
The interface can be a Layer 2 interface (port ACL), or a Layer 3 interface
(router ACL).
Step 3 ip access-group {access-list-number | Control access to the specified interface.
name} {in | out}
The out keyword is not supported for Layer 2 interfaces (port ACLs).
To remove the specified access group, use the no ip access-group {access-list-number | name} {in |
out} interface configuration command.
This example shows how to apply access list 2 to a port to filter packets entering the port:
Switch(config-if)# ip access-group 2 in
Note When you apply the ip access-group interface configuration command to a Layer 3 interface (an SVI,
a Layer 3 EtherChannel, or a routed port), the interface must have been configured with an IP address.
Layer 3 access groups filter packets that are routed or are received by Layer 3 processes on the CPU.
They do not affect packets bridged within a VLAN.
For inbound ACLs, after receiving a packet, the switch checks the packet against the ACL. If the ACL
permits the packet, the switch continues to process the packet. If the ACL rejects the packet, the switch
discards the packet.
For outbound ACLs, after receiving and routing a packet to a controlled interface, the switch checks the
packet against the ACL. If the ACL permits the packet, the switch sends the packet. If the ACL rejects
the packet, the switch discards the packet.
By default, the input interface sends ICMP Unreachable messages whenever a packet is discarded,
regardless of whether the packet was discarded because of an ACL on the input interface or because of
an ACL on the output interface. ICMP Unreachables are normally limited to no more than one every
one-half second per input interface, but this can be changed by using the ip icmp rate-limit
unreachable global configuration command.
When you apply an undefined ACL to an interface, the switch acts as if the ACL has not been applied
to the interface and permits all packets. Remember this behavior if you use undefined ACLs for network
security.

33-20 OL-8553-06
Hardware and Software Treatment of IP ACLs

ACL processing is primarily accomplished in hardware, but requires forwarding of some traffic flows to
the CPU for software processing. If the hardware reaches its capacity to store ACL configurations,
packets are sent to the CPU for forwarding. The forwarding rate for software-forwarded traffic is
substantially less than for hardware-forwarded traffic.
Note If an ACL configuration cannot be implemented in hardware due to an out-of-resource condition on a

switch, then only the traffic in that VLAN arriving on that switch is affected (forwarded in software).
Software forwarding of packets might adversely impact the performance of the switch, depending on the
number of CPU cycles that this consumes.
For router ACLs, other factors can cause packets to be sent to the CPU:
• Using the log keyword
• Generating ICMP unreachable messages
When traffic flows are both logged and forwarded, forwarding is done by hardware, but logging must be
done by software. Because of the difference in packet handling capacity between hardware and software,
if the sum of all flows being logged (both permitted flows and denied flows) is of great enough
bandwidth, not all of the packets that are forwarded can be logged.
If router ACL configuration cannot be applied in hardware, packets arriving in a VLAN that must be
routed are routed in software, but are bridged in hardware. If ACLs cause large numbers of packets to
be sent to the CPU, the switch performance can be negatively affected.
When you enter the show ip access-lists privileged EXEC command, the match count displayed does
not account for packets that are access controlled in hardware. Use the show access-lists hardware
counters privileged EXEC command to obtain some basic hardware ACL statistics for switched and
routed packets.
Troubleshooting ACLs
If this ACL manager message appears and [chars] is the access-list name,
ACLMGR-2-NOVMR: Cannot generate hardware representation of access list [chars]
The switch has insufficient resources to create a hardware representation of the ACL. The resources
include hardware memory and label space but not CPU memory. A lack of available logical operation
units or specialized hardware resources causes this problem. Logical operation units are needed for a
TCP flag match or a test other than eq (ne, gt, lt, or range) on TCP, UDP, or SCTP port numbers.
Use one of these workarounds:
• Modify the ACL configuration to use fewer resources.
• Rename the ACL with a name or number that alphanumerically precedes the ACL names or
numbers.
To determine the specialized hardware resources, enter the show platform layer4 acl map privileged
EXEC command. If the switch does not have available resources, the output shows that index 0 to
index 15 are not available.
For more information about configuring ACLs with insufficient resources, see CSCsq63926 in the Bug
Toolkit.
For example, if you apply this ACL to an interface:

OL-8553-06 33-21
permit tcp source source-wildcard destination destination-wildcard range 5 60

permit tcp source source-wildcard destination destination-wildcard
And if this message appears:

ACLMGR-2-NOVMR: Cannot generate hardware representation of access list [chars]
The flag-related operators are not available. To avoid this issue,

• Move the fourth ACE before the first ACE by using ip access-list resequence global configuration
command:
permit tcp source source-wildcard destination destination-wildcard
or
• Rename the ACL with a name or number that alphanumerically precedes the other ACLs (for
example, rename ACL 79 to ACL 1).
You can now apply the first ACE in the ACL to the interface. The switch allocates the ACE to available
mapping bits in the Opselect index and then allocates flag-related operators to use the same bits in the
TCAM.
Router ACLs function as follows:
• The hardware controls permit and deny actions of standard and extended ACLs (input and output)
for security access control.
• If log has not been specified, the flows that match a deny statement in a security ACL are dropped
by the hardware if ip unreachables is disabled. The flows matching a permit statement are switched
in hardware.
• Adding the log keyword to an ACE in a router ACL causes a copy of the packet to be sent to the
CPU for logging only. If the ACE is a permit statement, the packet is still switched and routed
in hardware.
IPv4 ACL Configuration Examples

This section provides examples of configuring and applying IPv4 ACLs. For detailed information about
compiling ACLs, see the Cisco IOS Security Configuration Guide, Release 12.2 and to the Configuring
IP Services” section in the “IP Addressing and Services” chapter of the Cisco IOS IP Configuration
Guide, Release 12.2.
Figure 33-3 shows a small networked office environment with routed Port 2 connected to Server A,
containing benefits and other information that all employees can access, and routed Port 1 connected to
Server B, containing confidential payroll data. All users can access Server A, but Server B has restricted
access.
Use router ACLs to do this in one of two ways:
• Create a standard ACL, and filter traffic coming to the server from Port 1.
• Create an extended ACL, and filter traffic coming from the server into Port 1.

33-22 OL-8553-06
Figure 33-3 Using Router ACLs to Control Traffic
Server A Server B
Benefits Payroll
Port 2 Port 1
Human Resources Accounting

172.20.128.0-31 172.20.128.64-95
101354
This example uses a standard ACL to filter traffic coming into Server B from a port, permitting traffic
only from Accounting’s source addresses 172.20.128.64 to 172.20.128.95. The ACL is applied to traffic
coming out of routed Port 1 from the specified source address.
Switch(config)# access-list 6 permit 172.20.128.64 0.0.0.31
Switch(config)# end
Standard IP access list 6
permit 172.20.128.64, wildcard bits 0.0.0.31
Switch(config-if)# ip access-group 6 out
This example uses an extended ACL to filter traffic coming from Server B into a port, permitting traffic
from any source address (in this case Server B) to only the Accounting destination addresses
172.20.128.64 to 172.20.128.95. The ACL is applied to traffic going into routed Port 1, permitting it to
go only to the specified destination addresses. Note that with extended ACLs, you must enter the
protocol (IP) before the source and destination information.
Switch(config)# access-list 106 permit ip any 172.20.128.64 0.0.0.31
Switch(config)# end
permit ip any 172.20.128.64 0.0.0.31

OL-8553-06 33-23
Numbered ACLs
In this example, network 36.0.0.0 is a Class A network whose second octet specifies a subnet; that is, its
subnet mask is 255.255.0.0. The third and fourth octets of a network 36.0.0.0 address specify a particular
host. Using access list 2, the switch accepts one address on subnet 48 and reject all others on that subnet.
The last line of the list shows that the switch accepts addresses on all other network 36.0.0.0 subnets.
The ACL is applied to packets entering a port.
Switch(config)# access-list 2 deny 36.48.0.0 0.0.255.255
Extended ACLs
In this example, the first line permits any incoming TCP connections with destination ports greater than
1023. The second line permits incoming TCP connections to the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
port of host 128.88.1.2. The third line permits incoming ICMP messages for error feedback.
Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit tcp any 128.88.0.0 0.0.255.255 gt 1023
Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit tcp any host 128.88.1.2 eq 25
Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit icmp any any
For another example of using an extended ACL, suppose that you have a network connected to the
Internet, and you want any host on the network to be able to form TCP connections to any host on the
Internet. However, you do not want IP hosts to be able to form TCP connections to hosts on your
network, except to the mail (SMTP) port of a dedicated mail host.
SMTP uses TCP port 25 on one end of the connection and a random port number on the other end. The
same port numbers are used throughout the life of the connection. Mail packets coming in from the
Internet have a destination port of 25. Outbound packets have the port numbers reversed. Because the
secure system of the network always accepts mail connections on port 25, the incoming and outgoing
services are separately controlled. The ACL must be configured as an input ACL on the outbound
interface and an output ACL on the inbound interface.
In this example, the network is a Class B network with the address 128.88.0.0, and the mail host address
is 128.88.1.2. The established keyword is used only for the TCP to show an established connection. A
match occurs if the TCP datagram has the ACK or RST bits set, which show that the packet belongs to
an existing connection. Gigabit Ethernet interface 1 is the interface that connects the router to the
Internet.
Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit tcp any 128.88.0.0 0.0.255.255 established
Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit tcp any host 128.88.1.2 eq 25
Named ACLs
This example creates a standard ACL named internet_filter and an extended ACL named
marketing_group. The internet_filter ACL allows all traffic from the source address 1.2.3.4.
Switch(config)# ip access-list standard Internet_filter
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit 1.2.3.4

33-24 OL-8553-06
The marketing_group ACL allows any TCP Telnet traffic to the destination address and wildcard
171.69.0.0 0.0.255.255 and denies any other TCP traffic. It permits ICMP traffic, denies UDP traffic
from any source to the destination address range 171.69.0.0 through 179.69.255.255 with a destination
port less than 1024, denies any other IP traffic, and provides a log of the result.
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended marketing_group
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit tcp any 171.69.0.0 0.0.255.255 eq telnet
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# deny tcp any any
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit icmp any any
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# deny udp any 171.69.0.0 0.0.255.255 lt 1024
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# deny ip any any log
TheInternet_filter ACL is applied to outgoing traffic and the marketing_group ACL is applied to
incoming traffic on a Layer 3 port.
Switch(config-if)# ip access-group Internet_filter out
Switch(config-if)# ip access-group marketing_group in
Time Range Applied to an IP ACL

This example denies HTTP traffic on IP on Monday through Friday between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and
6:00 p.m (18:00). The example allows UDP traffic only on Saturday and Sunday from noon to 8:00 p.m.
(20:00).
Switch(config)# time-range no-http
Switch(config)# periodic weekdays 8:00 to 18:00
!
Switch(config)# time-range udp-yes
Switch(config)# periodic weekend 12:00 to 20:00
!
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended strict
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# deny tcp any any eq www time-range no-http
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit udp any any time-range udp-yes
!
Switch(config-if)# ip access-group strict in
Commented IP ACL Entries

In this example of a numbered ACL, the workstation that belongs to Jones is allowed access, and the
workstation that belongs to Smith is not allowed access:
Switch(config)# access-list 1 remark Permit only Jones workstation through
Switch(config)# access-list 1 remark Do not allow Smith workstation through
In this example of a numbered ACL, the Winter and Smith workstations are not allowed to browse the
web:
Switch(config)# access-list 100 remark Do not allow Winter to browse the web
Switch(config)# access-list 100 deny host 171.69.3.85 any eq www
Switch(config)# access-list 100 remark Do not allow Smith to browse the web
Switch(config)# access-list 100 deny host 171.69.3.13 any eq www

OL-8553-06 33-25
In this example of a named ACL, the Jones subnet is not allowed access:
Switch(config)# ip access-list standard prevention
Switch(config-std-nacl)# remark Do not allow Jones subnet through
Switch(config-std-nacl)# deny 171.69.0.0 0.0.255.255
In this example of a named ACL, the Jones subnet is not allowed to use outbound Telnet:
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended telnetting
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# remark Do not allow Jones subnet to telnet out
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# deny tcp 171.69.0.0 0.0.255.255 any eq telnet
ACL Logging
Two variations of logging are supported on router ACLs. The log keyword sends an informational
logging message to the console about the packet that matches the entry; the log-input keyword includes
the input interface in the log entry.
In this example, standard named access list stan1 denies traffic from 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255, allows traffic
from all other sources, and includes the log keyword.
Switch(config)# ip access-list standard stan1
Switch(config-std-nacl)# deny 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 log
Switch(config-std-nacl)# permit any log
Switch(config-std-nacl)# exit
Switch(config-if)# ip access-group stan1 in
Switch# show logging
Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 flushes, 0 overruns)
Console logging: level debugging, 37 messages logged
Monitor logging: level debugging, 0 messages logged
Buffer logging: level debugging, 37 messages logged
File logging: disabled
Trap logging: level debugging, 39 message lines logged
Log Buffer (4096 bytes):
00:00:48: NTP: authentication delay calculation problems
<output truncated>
00:09:34:%SEC-6-IPACCESSLOGS:list stan1 permitted 0.0.0.0 1 packet

00:09:59:%SEC-6-IPACCESSLOGS:list stan1 denied 10.1.1.15 1 packet
00:10:11:%SEC-6-IPACCESSLOGS:list stan1 permitted 0.0.0.0 1 packet
This example is a named extended access list ext1 that permits ICMP packets from any source to 10.1.1.0
0.0.0.255 and denies all UDP packets.
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended ext1
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit icmp any 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 log
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# deny udp any any log
Switch(config-std-nacl)# exit
Switch(config-if)# ip access-group ext1 in
This is a an example of a log for an extended ACL:

01:24:23:%SEC-6-IPACCESSLOGDP:list ext1 permitted icmp 10.1.1.15 -> 10.1.1.61 (0/0), 1
packet
01:25:14:%SEC-6-IPACCESSLOGDP:list ext1 permitted icmp 10.1.1.15 -> 10.1.1.61 (0/0), 7
packets

33-26 OL-8553-06
Creating Named MAC Extended ACLs
01:26:12:%SEC-6-IPACCESSLOGP:list ext1 denied udp 0.0.0.0(0) -> 255.255.255.255(0), 1

packet
01:31:33:%SEC-6-IPACCESSLOGP:list ext1 denied udp 0.0.0.0(0) -> 255.255.255.255(0), 8
packets
Note that all logging entries for IP ACLs start with %SEC-6-IPACCESSLOG with minor variations in format
depending on the kind of ACL and the access entry that has been matched.
This is an example of an output message when the log-input keyword is entered:
00:04:21:%SEC-6-IPACCESSLOGDP:list inputlog permitted icmp 10.1.1.10 (Vlan1
0001.42ef.a400) -> 10.1.1.61 (0/0), 1 packet
A log message for the same sort of packet using the log keyword does not include the input interface
information:
00:05:47:%SEC-6-IPACCESSLOGDP:list inputlog permitted icmp 10.1.1.10 -> 10.1.1.61 (0/0), 1
packet

You can filter non-IPv4 traffic on a VLAN or on a Layer 2 interface by using MAC addresses and named
MAC extended ACLs. The procedure is similar to that of configuring other extended named ACLs.
Note You cannot apply named MAC extended ACLs to Layer 3 interfaces.
For more information about the supported non-IP protocols in the mac access-list extended command,
Note Though visible in the command-line help strings, appletalk is not supported as a matching condition for
the deny and permit MAC access-list configuration mode commands.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a named MAC extended ACL:
Command Purpose
Step 2 mac access-list extended name Define an extended MAC access list using a name.

OL-8553-06 33-27
Command Purpose
Step 3 {deny | permit} {any | host source MAC In extended MAC access-list configuration mode, specify to
address | source MAC address mask} {any | permit or deny any source MAC address, a source MAC address
host destination MAC address | destination with a mask, or a specific host source MAC address and any
MAC address mask} [type mask | lsap lsap mask destination MAC address, destination MAC address with a mask,
| aarp | amber | dec-spanning | decnet-iv | or a specific destination MAC address.
diagnostic | dsm | etype-6000 | etype-8042 | lat
(Optional) You can also enter these options:
| lavc-sca | mop-console | mop-dump | msdos |
mumps | netbios | vines-echo |vines-ip | • type mask—An arbitrary EtherType number of a packet with
xns-idp | 0-65535] [cos cos] Ethernet II or SNAP encapsulation in decimal, hexadecimal,
or octal with optional mask of don’t care bits applied to the
EtherType before testing for a match.
• lsap lsap mask—An LSAP number of a packet with
IEEE 802.2 encapsulation in decimal, hexadecimal, or octal
with optional mask of don’t care bits.
• aarp | amber | dec-spanning | decnet-iv | diagnostic | dsm |
etype-6000 | etype-8042 | lat | lavc-sca | mop-console |
mop-dump | msdos | mumps | netbios | vines-echo |vines-ip
| xns-idp—A non-IP protocol.
• cos cos—An IEEE 802.1Q cost of service number from 0 to 7
used to set priority.
Use the no mac access-list extended name global configuration command to delete the entire ACL. You
can also delete individual ACEs from named MAC extended ACLs.
This example shows how to create and display an access list named mac1, denying only EtherType
DECnet Phase IV traffic, but permitting all other types of traffic.
Switch(config)# mac access-list extended mac1
Switch(config-ext-macl)# deny any any decnet-iv
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit any any
Switch(config-ext-macl)# end
Switch # show access-lists
Extended MAC access list mac1
10 deny any any decnet-iv
20 permit any any
Applying a MAC ACL to a Layer 2 Interface

After you create a MAC ACL, you can apply it to a Layer 2 interface to filter non-IP traffic coming in
that interface. When you apply the MAC ACL, consider these guidelines:
• If you apply an ACL to a Layer 2 interface that is a member of a VLAN, the Layer 2 (port) ACL
takes precedence over an input Layer 3 ACL applied to the VLAN interface or a VLAN map applied
to the VLAN. Incoming packets received on the Layer 2 port are always filtered by the port ACL.
• You can apply no more than one IP access list and one MAC access list to the same Layer 2
interface. The IP access list filters only IP packets, and the MAC access list filters non-IP packets.

33-28 OL-8553-06
Configuring VLAN Maps
• A Layer 2 interface can have only one MAC access list. If you apply a MAC access list to a Layer 2
interface that has a MAC ACL configured, the new ACL replaces the previously configured one.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to apply a MAC access list to control access to
a Layer 2 interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Identify a specific interface, and enter interface configuration
mode. The interface must be a physical Layer 2 interface (port
ACL).
Step 3 mac access-group {name} {in} Control access to the specified interface by using the MAC access
list.
Port ACLs are supported only in the inbound direction.
Step 5 show mac access-group [interface interface-id] Display the MAC access list applied to the interface or all Layer 2
interfaces.
To remove the specified access group, use the no mac access-group {name} interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to apply MAC access list mac1 to a port to filter packets entering the port:
Router(config-if)# mac access-group mac1 in
Note The mac access-group interface configuration command is only valid when applied to a physical
Layer 2 interface.You cannot use the command on EtherChannel port channels.
After receiving a packet, the switch checks it against the inbound ACL. If the ACL permits it, the switch
continues to process the packet. If the ACL rejects the packet, the switch discards it. When you apply an
undefined ACL to an interface, the switch acts as if the ACL has not been applied and permits all
packets. Remember this behavior if you use undefined ACLs for network security.

This section describes how to configure VLAN maps, which is the only way to control filtering within
a VLAN. VLAN maps have no direction. To filter traffic in a specific direction by using a VLAN map,
you need to include an ACL with specific source or destination addresses. If there is a match clause for
that type of packet (IP or MAC) in the VLAN map, the default action is to drop the packet if the packet
does not match any of the entries within the map. If there is no match clause for that type of packet, the
default is to forward the packet.
For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this section, see the command

OL-8553-06 33-29
To create a VLAN map and apply it to one or more VLANs, perform these steps:
Step 1 Create the standard or extended IPv4 ACLs or named MAC extended ACLs that you want to apply to the
VLAN. See the “Creating Standard and Extended IPv4 ACLs” section on page 33-7 and the “Creating a
VLAN Map” section on page 33-31.
Step 2 Enter the vlan access-map global configuration command to create a VLAN ACL map entry.
Step 3 In access-map configuration mode, optionally enter an action—forward (the default) or drop—and
enter the match command to specify an IP packet or a non-IP packet (with only a known MAC address)
and to match the packet against one or more ACLs (standard or extended).
Note If the VLAN map is configured with a match clause for a type of packet (IP or MAC) and the map action
is drop, all packets that match the type are dropped. If the VLAN map has no match clause, and the
configured action is drop, all IP and Layer 2 packets are dropped.
Step 4 Use the vlan filter global configuration command to apply a VLAN map to one or more VLANs.

• VLAN Map Configuration Guidelines, page 33-30
• Creating a VLAN Map, page 33-31
• Applying a VLAN Map to a VLAN, page 33-34
• Using VLAN Maps in Your Network, page 33-34
VLAN Map Configuration Guidelines

Follow these guidelines when configuring VLAN maps:
• If there is no ACL configured to deny traffic on an interface and no VLAN map is configured, all
traffic is permitted.
• Each VLAN map consists of a series of entries. The order of entries in an VLAN map is important.
A packet that comes into the switch is tested against the first entry in the VLAN map. If it matches,
the action specified for that part of the VLAN map is taken. If there is no match, the packet is tested
against the next entry in the map.
• If the VLAN map has at least one match clause for the type of packet (IP or MAC) and the packet
does not match any of these match clauses, the default is to drop the packet. If there is no match
clause for that type of packet in the VLAN map, the default is to forward the packet.
• The system might take longer to boot up if you have configured a very large number of ACLs.
• Logging is not supported for VLAN maps.
• When a switch has an IP access list or MAC access list applied to a Layer 2 interface, and you apply
a VLAN map to a VLAN that the port belongs to, the port ACL takes precedence over the VLAN
map.
• If VLAN map configuration cannot be applied in hardware, all packets in that VLAN must be
bridged and routed by software.
• You can configure VLAN maps on primary and secondary VLANs. However, we recommend that
you configure the same VLAN maps on private-VLAN primary and secondary VLANs.

33-30 OL-8553-06
• When a frame is Layer-2 forwarded within a private VLAN, the same VLAN map is applied at the
ingress side and at the egress side. When a frame is routed from inside a private VLAN to an external
port, the private-VLAN map is applied at the ingress side.
– For frames going upstream from a host port to a promiscuous port, the VLAN map configured
on the secondary VLAN is applied.
– For frames going downstream from a promiscuous port to a host port, the VLAN map
configured on the primary VLAN is applied.
To filter out specific IP traffic for a private VLAN, you should apply the VLAN map to both the
primary and secondary VLANs. For more information about private VLANs, see Chapter 14,
“Configuring Private VLANs.”
For configuration examples, see the “Using VLAN Maps in Your Network” section on page 33-34.
For information about using both router ACLs and VLAN maps, see the “VLAN Maps and Router ACL
Creating a VLAN Map

Each VLAN map consists of an ordered series of entries. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow
these steps to create, add to, or delete a VLAN map entry:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vlan access-map name [number] Create a VLAN map, and give it a name and (optionally) a number. The
number is the sequence number of the entry within the map.
When you create VLAN maps with the same name, numbers are assigned
sequentially in increments of 10. When modifying or deleting maps, you
can enter the number of the map entry that you want to modify or delete.
Entering this command changes to access-map configuration mode.
Step 3 action {drop | forward} (Optional) Set the action for the map entry. The default is to forward.
Step 4 match {ip | mac} address {name | Match the packet (using either the IP or MAC address) against one or more
number} [name | number] standard or extended access lists. Note that packets are only matched
against access lists of the correct protocol type. IP packets are matched
against standard or extended IP access lists. Non-IP packets are only
matched against named MAC extended access lists.
Use the no vlan access-map name global configuration command to delete a map. Use the no vlan
access-map name number global configuration command to delete a single sequence entry from within
the map.
Use the no action access-map configuration command to enforce the default action, which is to forward.
VLAN maps do not use the specific permit or deny keywords. To deny a packet by using VLAN maps,
create an ACL that would match the packet, and set the action to drop. A permit in the ACL counts as a
match. A deny in the ACL means no match.

OL-8553-06 33-31
Examples of ACLs and VLAN Maps

These examples show how to create ACLs and VLAN maps that for specific purposes.
Example 1
This example shows how to create an ACL and a VLAN map to deny a packet. In the first map, any
packets that match the ip1 ACL (TCP packets) would be dropped. You first create the ip1ACL to permit
any TCP packet and no other packets. Because there is a match clause for IP packets in the VLAN map,
the default action is to drop any IP packet that does not match any of the match clauses.
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended ip1
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit tcp any any
Switch(config)# vlan access-map map_1 10
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address ip1
Switch(config-access-map)# action drop
This example shows how to create a VLAN map to permit a packet. ACL ip2 permits UDP packets and
any packets that match the ip2 ACL are forwarded. In this map, any IP packets that did not match any
of the previous ACLs (that is, packets that are not TCP packets or UDP packets) would get dropped.
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended ip2
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit udp any any
Switch(config)# vlan access-map map_1 20
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address ip2
Switch(config-access-map)# action forward
Example 2
In this example, the VLAN map has a default action of drop for IP packets and a default action of forward
for MAC packets. Used with standard ACL 101 and extended named access lists igmp-match and
tcp-match, the map will have the following results:
• Forward all UDP packets
• Drop all IGMP packets
• Forward all TCP packets
• Drop all other IP packets
• Forward all non-IP packets
Switch(config)# access-list 101 permit udp any any
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended igmp-match
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit igmp any any
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended tcp-match
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit tcp any any
Switch(config)# vlan access-map drop-ip-default 10
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address 101
Switch(config-access-map)# exit
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address igmp-match
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address tcp-match

33-32 OL-8553-06
Example 3
In this example, the VLAN map has a default action of drop for MAC packets and a default action of
forward for IP packets. Used with MAC extended access lists good-hosts and good-protocols, the map
will have the following results:
• Forward MAC packets from hosts 0000.0c00.0111 and 0000.0c00.0211
• Forward MAC packets with decnet-iv or vines-ip protocols
• Drop all other non-IP packets
• Forward all IP packets
Switch(config)# mac access-list extended good-hosts
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit host 000.0c00.0111 any
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit host 000.0c00.0211 any
Switch(config)# mac access-list extended good-protocols
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit any any decnet-ip
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit any any vines-ip
Switch(config)# vlan access-map drop-mac-default 10
Switch(config-access-map)# match mac address good-hosts
Switch(config)# vlan access-map drop-mac-default 20
Switch(config-access-map)# match mac address good-protocols
Example 4
In this example, the VLAN map has a default action of drop for all packets (IP and non-IP). Used with
access lists tcp-match and good-hosts from Examples 2 and 3, the map will have the following results:
• Forward all TCP packets
• Forward MAC packets from hosts 0000.0c00.0111 and 0000.0c00.0211
• Drop all other IP packets
• Drop all other MAC packets
Switch(config)# vlan access-map drop-all-default 10
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address tcp-match
Switch(config)# vlan access-map drop-all-default 20
Switch(config-access-map)# match mac address good-hosts

OL-8553-06 33-33
Applying a VLAN Map to a VLAN

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to apply a VLAN map to one or more VLANs:
Command Purpose
Step 2 vlan filter mapname vlan-list list Apply the VLAN map to one or more VLAN IDs.
The list can be a single VLAN ID (22), a consecutive list (10-22), or a string
of VLAN IDs (12, 22, 30). Spaces around the comma and hyphen are
optional.
To remove the VLAN map, use the no vlan filter mapname vlan-list list global configuration command.
This example shows how to apply VLAN map 1 to VLANs 20 through 22:
Switch(config)# vlan filter map 1 vlan-list 20-22
Using VLAN Maps in Your Network

These sections describes some typical uses for VLAN maps:
• Wiring Closet Configuration, page 33-34
• Denying Access to a Server on Another VLAN, page 33-35
Wiring Closet Configuration

In a wiring closet configuration, routing might not be enabled on the switch. In this configuration, the
switch can still support a VLAN map and a QoS classification ACL. In Figure 33-4, assume that Host X
and Host Y are in different VLANs and are connected to wiring closet switches A and C. Traffic from
Host X to Host Y is eventually being routed by Switch B, a Layer 3 switch with routing enabled. Traffic
from Host X to Host Y can be access-controlled at the traffic entry point, Switch A.

33-34 OL-8553-06
Figure 33-4 Wiring Closet Configuration
Switch B
Switch A Switch C
VLAN map: Deny HTTP

from X to Y.
HTTP is dropped
at entry point.
Host X Host Y
10.1.1.32 10.1.1.34
VLAN 1
101355
VLAN 2
Packet
If you do not want HTTP traffic switched from Host X to Host Y, you can configure a VLAN map on
Switch A to drop all HTTP traffic from Host X (IP address 10.1.1.32) to Host Y (IP address 10.1.1.34)
at Switch A and not bridge it to Switch B.
First, define the IP access list http that permits (matches) any TCP traffic on the HTTP port.
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended http
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit tcp host 10.1.1.32 host 10.1.1.34 eq www
Next, create VLAN access map map2 so that traffic that matches the http access list is dropped and all
other IP traffic is forwarded.
Switch(config)# vlan access-map map2 10
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address http
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended match_all
Switch(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip any any
Switch(config)# vlan access-map map2 20
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address match_all
Then, apply VLAN access map map2 to VLAN 1.

Switch(config)# vlan filter map2 vlan 1
Denying Access to a Server on Another VLAN

You can restrict access to a server on another VLAN. For example, server 10.1.1.100 in VLAN 10 needs
to have access denied to these hosts (see Figure 33-5):
• Hosts in subnet 10.1.2.0/8 in VLAN 20 should not have access.
• Hosts 10.1.1.4 and 10.1.1.8 in VLAN 10 should not have access.

OL-8553-06 33-35
Using VLAN Maps with Router ACLs
Figure 33-5 Deny Access to a Server on Another a VLAN
VLAN map
10.1.1.100
Subnet
Server (VLAN 10) 10.1.2.0/8
10.1.1.4
Host (VLAN 20)
Host (VLAN 10) Layer 3 switch
10.1.1.8
101356
Host (VLAN 10) Packet
This example shows how to deny access to a server on another VLAN by creating the VLAN map
SERVER 1 that denies access to hosts in subnet 10.1.2.0.8, host 10.1.1.4, and host 10.1.1.8 and permits
other IP traffic. The final step is to apply the map SERVER1 to VLAN 10.
Step 1 Define the IP ACL that will match the correct packets.
Switch(config)# ip access-list extended SERVER1_ACL
Switch(config-ext-nacl))# permit ip 10.1.2.0 0.0.0.255 host 10.1.1.100
Switch(config-ext-nacl))# permit ip host 10.1.1.4 host 10.1.1.100
Switch(config-ext-nacl))# permit ip host 10.1.1.8 host 10.1.1.100
Switch(config-ext-nacl))# exit
Step 2 Define a VLAN map using this ACL that will drop IP packets that match SERVER1_ACL and forward
IP packets that do not match the ACL.
Switch(config)# vlan access-map SERVER1_MAP
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address SERVER1_ACL
Switch(config)# vlan access-map SERVER1_MAP 20
Step 3 Apply the VLAN map to VLAN 10.

Switch(config)# vlan filter SERVER1_MAP vlan-list 10.

To access control both bridged and routed traffic, you can use VLAN maps only or a combination of
router ACLs and VLAN maps. You can define router ACLs on both input and output routed VLAN
interfaces, and you can define a VLAN map to access control the bridged traffic.
If a packet flow matches a VLAN-map deny clause in the ACL, regardless of the router ACL
configuration, the packet flow is denied.

33-36 OL-8553-06
Note When you use router ACLs with VLAN maps, packets that require logging on the router ACLs are not
logged if they are denied by a VLAN map.
If the VLAN map has a match clause for the type of packet (IP or MAC) and the packet does not match
the type, the default is to drop the packet. If there is no match clause in the VLAN map, and no action
specified, the packet is forwarded if it does not match any VLAN map entry.
These sections contain information about using VLAN maps with router ACLs:
• VLAN Maps and Router ACL Configuration Guidelines, page 33-37
• Examples of Router ACLs and VLAN Maps Applied to VLANs, page 33-38
VLAN Maps and Router ACL Configuration Guidelines

These guidelines are for configurations where you need to have an router ACL and a VLAN map on the
same VLAN. These guidelines do not apply to configurations where you are mapping router ACLs and
VLAN maps on different VLANs.
The switch hardware provides one lookup for security ACLs for each direction (input and output);
therefore, you must merge a router ACL and a VLAN map when they are configured on the same VLAN.
Merging the router ACL with the VLAN map might significantly increase the number of ACEs.
If you must configure a router ACL and a VLAN map on the same VLAN, use these guidelines for both
router ACL and VLAN map configuration:
• You can configure only one VLAN map and one router ACL in each direction (input/output) on a
VLAN interface.
• Whenever possible, try to write the ACL with all entries having a single action except for the final,
default action of the other type. That is, write the ACL using one of these two forms:
permit...
permit...
permit...
deny ip any any
or
deny...
deny...
deny...
permit ip any any
• To define multiple actions in an ACL (permit, deny), group each action type together to reduce the
number of entries.
• Avoid including Layer 4 information in an ACL; adding this information complicates the merging
process. The best merge results are obtained if the ACLs are filtered based on IP addresses (source
and destination) and not on the full flow (source IP address, destination IP address, protocol, and
protocol ports). It is also helpful to use don’t care bits in the IP address, whenever possible.
If you need to specify the full-flow mode and the ACL contains both IP ACEs and TCP/UDP/ICMP
ACEs with Layer 4 information, put the Layer 4 ACEs at the end of the list. This gives priority to
the filtering of traffic based on IP addresses.

OL-8553-06 33-37
Examples of Router ACLs and VLAN Maps Applied to VLANs

This section gives examples of applying router ACLs and VLAN maps to a VLAN for switched, bridged,
routed, and multicast packets. Although the following illustrations show packets being forwarded to
their destination, each time the packet’s path crosses a line indicating a VLAN map or an ACL, it is also
possible that the packet might be dropped, rather than forwarded.
ACLs and Switched Packets

Figure 33-6 shows how an ACL is applied on packets that are switched within a VLAN. Packets switched
within the VLAN without being routed or forwarded by fallback bridging are only subject to the VLAN
map of the input VLAN.
Figure 33-6 Applying ACLs on Switched Packets
Input Output
VLAN 10 router router VLAN 20
map ACL ACL map
Frame
Host A
(VLAN 10)
Routing function or
fallback bridge
Host C
(VLAN 10)
101357
VLAN 10 Packet VLAN 20
ACLs and Bridged Packets

Figure 33-7 shows how an ACL is applied on fallback-bridged packets. For bridged packets, only
Layer 2 ACLs are applied to the input VLAN. Only non-IP, non-ARP packets can be fallback-bridged.

33-38 OL-8553-06
Figure 33-7 Applying ACLs on Bridged Packets
VLAN 10 VLAN 20
map map
Frame
Host A Host B
(VLAN 10) (VLAN 20)
Fallback bridge
101358
ACLs and Routed Packets

Figure 33-8 shows how ACLs are applied on routed packets. For routed packets, the ACLs are applied
in this order:
1. VLAN map for input VLAN
2. Input router ACL
3. Output router ACL
4. VLAN map for output VLAN
Figure 33-8 Applying ACLs on Routed Packets
Input Output
map ACL ACL map
Frame
Host A Host B
(VLAN 10) (VLAN 20)
Routing function
101359

OL-8553-06 33-39
Displaying IPv4 ACL Configuration
ACLs and Multicast Packets

Figure 33-9 shows how ACLs are applied on packets that are replicated for IP multicasting. A multicast
packet being routed has two different kinds of filters applied: one for destinations that are other ports in
the input VLAN and another for each of the destinations that are in other VLANs to which the packet
has been routed. The packet might be routed to more than one output VLAN, in which case a different
router output ACL and VLAN map would apply for each destination VLAN.
The final result is that the packet might be permitted in some of the output VLANs and not in others. A
copy of the packet is forwarded to those destinations where it is permitted. However, if the input VLAN
map (VLAN 10 map in Figure 33-9) drops the packet, no destination receives a copy of the packet.
Figure 33-9 Applying ACLs on Multicast Packets
Input Output
map ACL ACL map
Frame
Host A Host B
(VLAN 10) (VLAN 20)
Routing function
Host C
(VLAN 10)
101360

You can display the ACLs that are configured on the switch, and you can display the ACLs that have
been applied to interfaces and VLANs.
When you use the ip access-group interface configuration command to apply ACLs to a Layer 2 or 3
interface, you can display the access groups on the interface. You can also display the MAC ACLs
applied to a Layer 2 interface. You can use the privileged EXEC commands as described in Table 33-2
to display this information.
Table 33-2 Commands for Displaying Access Lists and Access Groups
Command Purpose
show access-lists [number | name] Display the contents of one or all current IP and MAC address access lists
or a specific access list (numbered or named).
show ip access-lists [number | name] Display the contents of all current IP access lists or a specific IP access list
(numbered or named).

33-40 OL-8553-06
Table 33-2 Commands for Displaying Access Lists and Access Groups (continued)
Command Purpose
show ip interface interface-id Display detailed configuration and status of an interface. If IP is enabled
on the interface and ACLs have been applied by using the ip access-group
interface configuration command, the access groups are included in the
display.
show running-config [interface interface-id] Displays the contents of the configuration file for the switch or the
specified interface, including all configured MAC and IP access lists and
which access groups are applied to an interface.
show mac access-group [interface interface-id] Displays MAC access lists applied to all Layer 2 interfaces or the specified
Layer 2 interface.
You can also display information about VLAN access maps or VLAN filters. Use the privileged EXEC
commands in Table 33-3 to display VLAN map information.
Table 33-3 Commands for Displaying VLAN Map Information
Command Purpose
show vlan access-map [mapname] Show information about all VLAN access maps or the
specified access map.
show vlan filter [access-map name | vlan vlan-id] Show information about all VLAN filters or about a specified
VLAN or VLAN access map.

OL-8553-06 33-41

33-42 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 34
Configuring QoS
This chapter describes how to configure quality of service (QoS) by using automatic QoS (auto-QoS)
commands or by using standard QoS commands on the Catalyst 3560 switch. With QoS, you can provide
preferential treatment to certain types of traffic at the expense of others. Without QoS, the switch offers
best-effort service to each packet, regardless of the packet contents or size. It sends the packets without
any assurance of reliability, delay bounds, or throughput.
In software releases earlier than Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE, you can configure QoS only on physical
ports. In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later, you can configure QoS on physical ports and on switch
virtual interfaces (SVIs). Other than to apply policy maps, you configure the QoS settings, such as
classification, queueing, and scheduling, the same way on physical ports and SVIs. When configuring
QoS on a physical port, you apply a nonhierarchical policy map to a port. When configuring QoS on an
SVI, you apply a nonhierarchical or a hierarchical policy map. In the Catalyst 3750 Metro switch
documentation, nonhierarchical policy maps are referred to as nonhierarchical single-level policy maps,
and hierarchical policy maps are referred to as hierarchical dual-level policy maps.

• Understanding QoS, page 34-2
• Configuring Auto-QoS, page 34-20
• Displaying Auto-QoS Information, page 34-29
• Configuring Standard QoS, page 34-30
• Displaying Standard QoS Information, page 34-78
The switch supports some of the modular QoS CLI (MQC) commands. For more information about the
MQC commands, see the “Modular Quality of Service Command-Line Interface Overview” at this site:
6a00800bd908.html

OL-8553-06 34-1
Chapter 34 Configuring QoS
Understanding QoS
Understanding QoS
Typically, networks operate on a best-effort delivery basis, which means that all traffic has equal priority
and an equal chance of being delivered in a timely manner. When congestion occurs, all traffic has an
equal chance of being dropped.
When you configure the QoS feature, you can select specific network traffic, prioritize it according to
its relative importance, and use congestion-management and congestion-avoidance techniques to
provide preferential treatment. Implementing QoS in your network makes network performance more
predictable and bandwidth utilization more effective.
The QoS implementation is based on the Differentiated Services (Diff-Serv) architecture, an emerging
standard from the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). This architecture specifies that each packet
is classified upon entry into the network.
The classification is carried in the IP packet header, using 6 bits from the deprecated IP type of service
(ToS) field to carry the classification (class) information. Classification can also be carried in the
Layer 2 frame. These special bits in the Layer 2 frame or a Layer 3 packet are described here and shown
in Figure 34-1:
• Prioritization bits in Layer 2 frames:
Layer 2 Inter-Switch Link (ISL) frame headers have a 1-byte User field that carries an IEEE 802.1p
class of service (CoS) value in the three least-significant bits. On ports configured as Layer 2 ISL
trunks, all traffic is in ISL frames.
Layer 2 IEEE 802.1Q frame headers have a 2-byte Tag Control Information field that carries the CoS
value in the three most-significant bits, which are called the User Priority bits. On ports configured
as Layer 2 IEEE 802.1Q trunks, all traffic is in IEEE 802.1Q frames except for traffic in the native
VLAN.
Other frame types cannot carry Layer 2 CoS values.
Layer 2 CoS values range from 0 for low priority to 7 for high priority.
• Prioritization bits in Layer 3 packets:
Layer 3 IP packets can carry either an IP precedence value or a Differentiated Services Code Point
(DSCP) value. QoS supports the use of either value because DSCP values are backward-compatible
with IP precedence values.
IP precedence values range from 0 to 7.
DSCP values range from 0 to 63.
Note IPv6 QoS is not supported in this release.

34-2 OL-8553-06
Understanding QoS
Figure 34-1 QoS Classification Layers in Frames and Packets
Encapsulated Packet
Layer 2
IP header Data
header
Layer 2 ISL Frame

ISL header Encapsulated frame 1... FCS
(26 bytes) (24.5 KB) (4 bytes)
3 bits used for CoS
Layer 2 802.1Q and 802.1p Frame

Start frame
Preamble DA SA Tag PT Data FCS
delimiter
3 bits used for CoS (user priority)
Layer 3 IPv4 Packet

Version ToS
Len ID Offset TTL Proto FCS IP-SA IP-DA Data
46974
length (1 byte)
IP precedence or DSCP
All switches and routers that access the Internet rely on the class information to provide the same
forwarding treatment to packets with the same class information and different treatment to packets with
different class information. The class information in the packet can be assigned by end hosts or by
switches or routers along the way, based on a configured policy, detailed examination of the packet, or
both. Detailed examination of the packet is expected to happen closer to the edge of the network so that
the core switches and routers are not overloaded with this task.
Switches and routers along the path can use the class information to limit the amount of resources
allocated per traffic class. The behavior of an individual device when handling traffic in the DiffServ
architecture is called per-hop behavior. If all devices along a path provide a consistent per-hop behavior,
you can construct an end-to-end QoS solution.
Implementing QoS in your network can be a simple or complex task and depends on the QoS features
offered by your internetworking devices, the traffic types and patterns in your network, and the
granularity of control that you need over incoming and outgoing traffic.
Basic QoS Model

To implement QoS, the switch must distinguish packets or flow from one another (classify), assign a
label to indicate the given quality of service as the packets move through the switch, make the packets
comply with the configured resource usage limits (police and mark), and provide different treatment
(queue and schedule) in all situations where resource contention exists. The switch also needs to ensure
that traffic sent from it meets a specific traffic profile (shape).

OL-8553-06 34-3
Understanding QoS
Figure 34-2 shows the basic QoS model. Actions at the ingress port include classifying traffic, policing,
marking, queueing, and scheduling:
• Classifying a distinct path for a packet by associating it with a QoS label. The switch maps the CoS
or DSCP in the packet to a QoS label to distinguish one kind of traffic from another. The QoS label
that is generated identifies all future QoS actions to be performed on this packet. For more
information, see the “Classification” section on page 34-5.
• Policing determines whether a packet is in or out of profile by comparing the rate of the incoming
traffic to the configured policer. The policer limits the bandwidth consumed by a flow of traffic. The
result is passed to the marker. For more information, see the “Policing and Marking” section on
page 34-8.
• Marking evaluates the policer and configuration information for the action to be taken when a packet
is out of profile and determines what to do with the packet (pass through a packet without
modification, mark down the QoS label in the packet, or drop the packet). For more information, see
the “Policing and Marking” section on page 34-8.
• Queueing evaluates the QoS label and the corresponding DSCP or CoS value to select into which of
the two ingress queues to place a packet. Queueing is enhanced with the weighted tail-drop (WTD)
algorithm, a congestion-avoidance mechanism. If the threshold is exceeded, the packet is dropped.
For more information, see the “Queueing and Scheduling Overview” section on page 34-13.
• Scheduling services the queues based on their configured shaped round robin (SRR) weights. One
of the ingress queues is the priority queue, and SRR services it for its configured share before
servicing the other queue. For more information, see the “SRR Shaping and Sharing” section on
page 34-14.
Actions at the egress port include queueing and scheduling:
• Queueing evaluates the QoS packet label and the corresponding DSCP or CoS value before selecting
which of the four egress queues to use. Because congestion can occur when multiple ingress ports
simultaneously send data to an egress port, WTD differentiates traffic classes and subjects the
packets to different thresholds based on the QoS label. If the threshold is exceeded, the packet is
dropped. For more information, see the “Queueing and Scheduling Overview” section on
page 34-13.
• Scheduling services the four egress queues based on their configured SRR shared or shaped weights.
One of the queues (queue 1) can be the expedited queue, which is serviced until empty before the
other queues are serviced.
Figure 34-2 Basic QoS Model

34-4 OL-8553-06
Understanding QoS
Classification
Classification is the process of distinguishing one kind of traffic from another by examining the fields
in the packet. Classification is enabled only if QoS is globally enabled on the switch. By default, QoS is
globally disabled, so no classification occurs.
During classification, the switch performs a lookup and assigns a QoS label to the packet. The QoS label
identifies all QoS actions to be performed on the packet and from which queue the packet is sent.
The QoS label is based on the DSCP or the CoS value in the packet and decides the queueing and
scheduling actions to perform on the packet. The label is mapped according to the trust setting and the
packet type as shown in Figure 34-3 on page 34-6.
You specify which fields in the frame or packet that you want to use to classify incoming traffic. For
non-IP traffic, you have these classification options as shown in Figure 34-3:
• Trust the CoS value in the incoming frame (configure the port to trust CoS). Then use the
configurable CoS-to-DSCP map to generate a DSCP value for the packet. Layer 2 ISL frame headers
carry the CoS value in the 3 least-significant bits of the 1-byte User field. Layer 2 IEEE 802.1Q
frame headers carry the CoS value in the 3 most-significant bits of the Tag Control Information
field. CoS values range from 0 for low priority to 7 for high priority.
• Trust the DSCP or trust IP precedence value in the incoming frame. These configurations are
meaningless for non-IP traffic. If you configure a port with either of these options and non-IP traffic
is received, the switch assigns a CoS value and generates an internal DSCP value from the
CoS-to-DSCP map. The switch uses the internal DSCP value to generate a CoS value representing
the priority of the traffic.
• Perform the classification based on a configured Layer 2 MAC access control list (ACL), which can
examine the MAC source address, the MAC destination address, and other fields. If no ACL is
configured, the packet is assigned 0 as the DSCP and CoS values, which means best-effort traffic.
Otherwise, the policy-map action specifies a DSCP or CoS value to assign to the incoming frame.
For IP traffic, you have these classification options as shown in Figure 34-3:
• Trust the DSCP value in the incoming packet (configure the port to trust DSCP), and assign the same
DSCP value to the packet. The IETF defines the 6 most-significant bits of the 1-byte ToS field as
the DSCP. The priority represented by a particular DSCP value is configurable. DSCP values range
from 0 to 63.
For ports that are on the boundary between two QoS administrative domains, you can modify the
DSCP to another value by using the configurable DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map.
• Trust the IP precedence value in the incoming packet (configure the port to trust IP precedence), and
generate a DSCP value for the packet by using the configurable IP-precedence-to-DSCP map. The
IP Version 4 specification defines the 3 most-significant bits of the 1-byte ToS field as the IP
precedence. IP precedence values range from 0 for low priority to 7 for high priority.
• Trust the CoS value (if present) in the incoming packet, and generate a DSCP value for the packet by
using the CoS-to-DSCP map. If the CoS value is not present, use the default port CoS value.
• Perform the classification based on a configured IP standard or an extended ACL, which examines
various fields in the IP header. If no ACL is configured, the packet is assigned 0 as the DSCP and
CoS values, which means best-effort traffic. Otherwise, the policy-map action specifies a DSCP or
CoS value to assign to the incoming frame.
For information on the maps described in this section, see the “Mapping Tables” section on page 34-12.
For configuration information on port trust states, see the “Configuring Classification Using Port Trust
States” section on page 34-36.

OL-8553-06 34-5
Understanding QoS
After classification, the packet is sent to the policing, marking, and the ingress queueing and scheduling
stages.
Figure 34-3 Classification Flowchart
Start
Trust CoS (IP and non-IP traffic).

Read ingress interface
configuration for classification. Trust DSCP (IP traffic).
IP and
non-IP Trust DSCP or Trust IP
traffic IP precedence precedence
(non-IP traffic). (IP traffic).
Assign DSCP identical
Check if packet came to DSCP in packet.
with CoS label (tag).
Yes No (Optional) Modify the

DSCP by using the
DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation
Use CoS Assign default
map. Use the DSCP
from frame. port CoS.
value to generate
the QoS label.
Generate the DSCP based on

Generate DSCP from
IP precedence in packet. Use
CoS-to-DSCP map.
the IP-precedence-to-DSCP
Use the DSCP value to
map. Use the DSCP value to
generate the QoS label.
generate the QoS label.
Done Done
No Check if packet came

Are there any (more) QoS ACLs with CoS label (tag).
configured for this interface?
Yes No
Yes
Use the CoS value to Assign the default port
Read next ACL. Is there No generate the QoS label. CoS and generate a
a match with a "permit" action? DSCP from the
CoS-to-DSCP map.
Yes
Assign the DSCP or CoS as specified Assign the default Generate the DSCP by using
by ACL action to generate the QoS label. DSCP (0). the CoS-to-DSCP map.
86834
Done Done

34-6 OL-8553-06
Understanding QoS
Classification Based on QoS ACLs

You can use IP standard, IP extended, or Layer 2 MAC ACLs to define a group of packets with the same
characteristics (class). In the QoS context, the permit and deny actions in the access control entries
(ACEs) have different meanings than with security ACLs:
• If a match with a permit action is encountered (first-match principle), the specified QoS-related
action is taken.
• If a match with a deny action is encountered, the ACL being processed is skipped, and the next ACL
is processed.
• If no match with a permit action is encountered and all the ACEs have been examined, no QoS
processing occurs on the packet, and the switch offers best-effort service to the packet.
• If multiple ACLs are configured on a port, the lookup stops after the packet matches the first ACL
with a permit action, and QoS processing begins.
Note When creating an access list, remember that, by default, the end of the access list contains an implicit
deny statement for everything if it did not find a match before reaching the end.
After a traffic class has been defined with the ACL, you can attach a policy to it. A policy might contain
multiple classes with actions specified for each one of them. A policy might include commands to
classify the class as a particular aggregate (for example, assign a DSCP) or rate-limit the class. This
policy is then attached to a particular port on which it becomes effective.
You implement IP ACLs to classify IP traffic by using the access-list global configuration command;
you implement Layer 2 MAC ACLs to classify non-IP traffic by using the mac access-list extended
global configuration command. For configuration information, see the “Configuring a QoS Policy”
Classification Based on Class Maps and Policy Maps

A class map is a mechanism that you use to name a specific traffic flow (or class) and to isolate it from
all other traffic. The class map defines the criteria used to match against a specific traffic flow to further
classify it. The criteria can include matching the access group defined by the ACL or matching a specific
list of DSCP or IP precedence values. If you have more than one type of traffic that you want to classify,
you can create another class map and use a different name. After a packet is matched against the
class-map criteria, you further classify it through the use of a policy map.
A policy map specifies which traffic class to act on. Actions can include trusting the CoS, DSCP, or IP
precedence values in the traffic class; setting a specific DSCP or IP precedence value in the traffic class;
or specifying the traffic bandwidth limitations and the action to take when the traffic is out of profile.
Before a policy map can be effective, you must attach it to a port.
You create a class map by using the class-map global configuration command or the class policy-map
configuration command. You should use the class-map command when the map is shared among many
ports. When you enter the class-map command, the switch enters the class-map configuration mode. In
this mode, you define the match criterion for the traffic by using the match class-map configuration
command.
You create and name a policy map by using the policy-map global configuration command. When you
enter this command, the switch enters the policy-map configuration mode. In this mode, you specify the
actions to take on a specific traffic class by using the class, trust, or set policy-map configuration and
policy-map class configuration commands.

OL-8553-06 34-7
Understanding QoS
The policy map can contain the police and police aggregate policy-map class configuration commands,
which define the policer, the bandwidth limitations of the traffic, and the action to take if the limits are
exceeded.
To enable the policy map, you attach it to a port by using the service-policy interface configuration
command.
In software releases earlier than Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE, you can apply a policy map only to a
physical port. In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later, you can apply a nonhierarchical policy map to
a physical port or an SVI. However, a hierarchical policy map can only be applied to an SVI. A
hierarchical policy map contains two levels. The first level, the VLAN level, specifies the actions to be
taken against a traffic flow on the SVI. The second level, the interface level, specifies the actions to be
taken against the traffic on the physical ports that belong to the SVI. The interface-level actions are
specified in the interface-level policy map.
For more information, see the “Policing and Marking” section on page 34-8. For configuration
information, see the “Configuring a QoS Policy” section on page 34-42.
Policing and Marking

After a packet is classified and has a DSCP-based or CoS-based QoS label assigned to it, the policing
and marking process can begin as shown in Figure 34-4.
Policing involves creating a policer that specifies the bandwidth limits for the traffic. Packets that exceed
the limits are out of profile or nonconforming. Each policer decides on a packet-by-packet basis whether
the packet is in or out of profile and specifies the actions on the packet. These actions, carried out by the
marker, include passing through the packet without modification, dropping the packet, or modifying
(marking down) the assigned DSCP of the packet and allowing the packet to pass through. The
configurable policed-DSCP map provides the packet with a new DSCP-based QoS label. For
information on the policed-DSCP map, see the “Mapping Tables” section on page 34-12. Marked-down
packets use the same queues as the original QoS label to prevent packets in a flow from getting out of
order.
Note All traffic, regardless of whether it is bridged or routed, is subjected to a policer, if one is configured.
As a result, bridged packets might be dropped or might have their DSCP or CoS fields modified when
they are policed and marked.
In software releases earlier than Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE, you can configure policing only on a
physical port. You can configure the trust state, set a new DSCP or IP precedence value in the packet,
or define an individual or aggregate policer. For more information, see the “Policing on Physical Ports”
In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later, you can configure policing on a physical port or an SVI. For
more information about configuring policing on physical ports, see the “Policing on Physical Ports”
section on page 34-9. When configuring policy maps on an SVI, you can create a hierarchical policy map
and can define an individual policer only in the secondary interface-level policy map. For more
information, see the “Policing on SVIs” section on page 34-10.
After you configure the policy map and policing actions, attach the policy to an ingress port or SVI by
using the service-policy interface configuration command. For configuration information, see the
“Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic on Physical Ports by Using Policy Maps” section on
page 34-48, the “Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic on SVIs by Using Hierarchical Policy
Maps” section on page 34-52, and the “Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic by Using Aggregate
Policers” section on page 34-58.

34-8 OL-8553-06
Understanding QoS
Policing on Physical Ports

In policy maps on physical ports, you can create these types of policers:
• Individual—QoS applies the bandwidth limits specified in the policer separately to each matched
traffic class. You configure this type of policer within a policy map by using the police policy-map
class configuration command.
• Aggregate—QoS applies the bandwidth limits specified in an aggregate policer cumulatively to all
matched traffic flows. You configure this type of policer by specifying the aggregate policer name
within a policy map by using the police aggregate policy-map class configuration command. You
specify the bandwidth limits of the policer by using the mls qos aggregate-policer global
configuration command. In this way, the aggregate policer is shared by multiple classes of traffic
within a policy map.
Note In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later, you can only configure individual policers on an
SVI.
Policing uses a token-bucket algorithm. As each frame is received by the switch, a token is added to the
bucket. The bucket has a hole in it and leaks at a rate that you specify as the average traffic rate in bits
per second. Each time a token is added to the bucket, the switch verifies that there is enough room in the
bucket. If there is not enough room, the packet is marked as nonconforming, and the specified policer
action is taken (dropped or marked down).
How quickly the bucket fills is a function of the bucket depth (burst-byte), the rate at which the tokens
are removed (rate-b/s), and the duration of the burst above the average rate. The size of the bucket
imposes an upper limit on the burst length and limits the number of frames that can be transmitted
back-to-back. If the burst is short, the bucket does not overflow, and no action is taken against the traffic
flow. However, if a burst is long and at a higher rate, the bucket overflows, and the policing actions are
taken against the frames in that burst.
You configure the bucket depth (the maximum burst that is tolerated before the bucket overflows) by
using the burst-byte option of the police policy-map class configuration command or the mls qos
aggregate-policer global configuration command. You configure how fast (the average rate) that the
tokens are removed from the bucket by using the rate-bps option of the police policy-map class
configuration command or the mls qos aggregate-policer global configuration command.
Figure 34-4 shows the policing and marking process when these types of policy maps are configured:
• A nonhierarchical policy map on a physical port.
• The interface level of a hierarchical policy map attached to an SVI. The physical ports are specified
in this secondary policy map.

OL-8553-06 34-9
Understanding QoS
Figure 34-4 Policing and Marking Flowchart on Physical Ports
Start
Get the clasification

result for the packet.
Is a policer configured No
for this packet?
Yes
Check if the packet is in No

profile by querying the policer.
Yes
Pass
through Check out-of-profile action Drop
Drop packet.
configured for this policer.
Mark
Modify DSCP according to the

policed-DSCP map. Generate
a new QoS label.
86835
Done
Policing on SVIs
Note Before configuring a hierarchical policy map with individual policers on an SVI, you must enable
VLAN-based QoS on the physical ports that belong to the SVI. Though a policy map is attached to the
SVI, the individual policers only affect traffic on the physical ports specified in the secondary interface
level of the hierarchical policy map.
A hierarchical policy map has two levels. The first level, the VLAN level, specifies the actions to be
taken against a traffic flow on an SVI. The second level, the interface level, specifies the actions to be
taken against the traffic on the physical ports that belong to the SVI and are specified in the
interface-level policy map.

34-10 OL-8553-06
Understanding QoS
When configuring policing on an SVI, you can create and configure a hierarchical policy map with these
two levels:
• VLAN level—Create this primary level by configuring class maps and classes that specify the port
trust state or set a new DSCP or IP precedence value in the packet. The VLAN-level policy map
applies only to the VLAN in an SVI and does not support policers.
• Interface level—Create this secondary level by configuring class maps and classes that specify the
individual policers on physical ports the belong to the SVI. The interface-level policy map only
supports individual policers and does not support aggregate policers. Beginning with Cisco IOS
Release 12.2(25)SED, you can configure different interface-level policy maps for each class defined
in the VLAN-level policy map.
See the “Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic on SVIs by Using Hierarchical Policy Maps” section
on page 34-52 for an example of a hierarchical policy map.
Figure 34-5 shows the policing and marking process when hierarchical policy maps on an SVI.
Figure 34-5 Policing and Marking Flowchart on SVIs
Start
Get the VLAN and

interface-level classification
results for the packet.
Is an interface-level policer No
configured for this packet?
Yes
Verify if the packet is in the No

profile by querying the policer.
Yes
Pass
through Verify the out-of-profile action Drop
Drop packet.
configured for this policer.
Mark
Modify DSCP according to the

policed-DSCP map. Generate
a new QoS label.
92355
Done

OL-8553-06 34-11
Understanding QoS
Mapping Tables
During QoS processing, the switch represents the priority of all traffic (including non-IP traffic) with an
QoS label based on the DSCP or CoS value from the classification stage:
• During classification, QoS uses configurable mapping tables to derive a corresponding DSCP or
CoS value from a received CoS, DSCP, or IP precedence value. These maps include the
CoS-to-DSCP map and the IP-precedence-to-DSCP map. You configure these maps by using the mls
qos map cos-dscp and the mls qos map ip-prec-dscp global configuration commands.
On an ingress port configured in the DSCP-trusted state, if the DSCP values are different between
the QoS domains, you can apply the configurable DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map to the port that is
on the boundary between the two QoS domains. You configure this map by using the mls qos map
dscp-mutation global configuration command.
• During policing, QoS can assign another DSCP value to an IP or a non-IP packet (if the packet is
out of profile and the policer specifies a marked-down value). This configurable map is called the
policed-DSCP map. You configure this map by using the mls qos map policed-dscp global
• Before the traffic reaches the scheduling stage, QoS stores the packet in an ingress and an egress
queue according to the QoS label. The QoS label is based on the DSCP or the CoS value in the packet
and selects the queue through the DSCP input and output queue threshold maps or through the CoS
input and output queue threshold maps. In addition to an ingress or an egress queue, the QOS label
also identifies the WTD threshold value. You configure these maps by using the mls qos srr-queue
{input | output} dscp-map and the mls qos srr-queue {input | output} cos-map global
The CoS-to-DSCP, DSCP-to-CoS, and the IP-precedence-to-DSCP maps have default values that might
or might not be appropriate for your network.
The default DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map and the default policed-DSCP map are null maps; they map
an incoming DSCP value to the same DSCP value. The DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map is the only map
you apply to a specific port. All other maps apply to the entire switch.
For configuration information, see the “Configuring DSCP Maps” section on page 34-60.
For information about the DSCP and CoS input queue threshold maps, see the “Queueing and
Scheduling on Ingress Queues” section on page 34-15. For information about the DSCP and CoS output
queue threshold maps, see the “Queueing and Scheduling on Egress Queues” section on page 34-16.

34-12 OL-8553-06
Understanding QoS
Queueing and Scheduling Overview

The switch has queues at specific points to help prevent congestion as shown in Figure 34-6.
Figure 34-6 Ingress and Egress Queue Location
Policer Marker
Internal Egress
Policer Marker ring queues
Ingress
queues
Traffic
Classify SRR SRR
90563
Policer Marker
Policer Marker
Because the total inbound bandwidth of all ports can exceed the bandwidth of the internal ring, ingress
queues are located after the packet is classified, policed, and marked and before packets are forwarded
into the switch fabric. Because multiple ingress ports can simultaneously send packets to an egress port
and cause congestion, outbound queues are located after the internal ring.
Weighted Tail Drop

Both the ingress and egress queues use an enhanced version of the tail-drop congestion-avoidance
mechanism called weighted tail drop (WTD). WTD is implemented on queues to manage the queue
lengths and to provide drop precedences for different traffic classifications.
As a frame is enqueued to a particular queue, WTD uses the frame’s assigned QoS label to subject it to
different thresholds. If the threshold is exceeded for that QoS label (the space available in the destination
queue is less than the size of the frame), the switch drops the frame.
Each queue has three threshold values. The QOS label is determines which of the three threshold values
is subjected to the frame. Of the three thresholds, two are configurable (explicit) and one is not
(implicit).
Figure 34-7 shows an example of WTD operating on a queue whose size is 1000 frames. Three drop
percentages are configured: 40 percent (400 frames), 60 percent (600 frames), and 100 percent (1000
frames). These percentages mean that up to 400 frames can be queued at the 40-percent threshold, up to
600 frames at the 60-percent threshold, and up to 1000 frames at the 100-percent threshold.
In this example, CoS values 6 and 7 have a greater importance than the other CoS values, and they are
assigned to the 100-percent drop threshold (queue-full state). CoS values 4 and 5 are assigned to the
60-percent threshold, and CoS values 0 to 3 are assigned to the 40-percent threshold.
Suppose the queue is already filled with 600 frames, and a new frame arrives. It contains CoS values 4
and 5 and is subjected to the 60-percent threshold. If this frame is added to the queue, the threshold will
be exceeded, so the switch drops it.

OL-8553-06 34-13
Understanding QoS
Figure 34-7 WTD and Queue Operation
CoS 6-7
100% 1000
CoS 4-5
60% 600
CoS 0-3
40% 400
86692
0
For more information, see the “Mapping DSCP or CoS Values to an Ingress Queue and Setting WTD
Thresholds” section on page 34-67, the “Allocating Buffer Space to and Setting WTD Thresholds for an
Egress Queue-Set” section on page 34-71, and the “Mapping DSCP or CoS Values to an Egress Queue
and to a Threshold ID” section on page 34-73.
SRR Shaping and Sharing

Both the ingress and egress queues are serviced by SRR, which controls the rate at which packets are
sent. On the ingress queues, SRR sends packets to the internal ring. On the egress queues, SRR sends
packets to the egress port.
You can configure SRR on egress queues for sharing or for shaping. However, for ingress queues,
sharing is the default mode, and it is the only mode supported.
In shaped mode, the egress queues are guaranteed a percentage of the bandwidth, and they are
rate-limited to that amount. Shaped traffic does not use more than the allocated bandwidth even if the
link is idle. Shaping provides a more even flow of traffic over time and reduces the peaks and valleys of
bursty traffic. With shaping, the absolute value of each weight is used to compute the bandwidth
available for the queues.
In shared mode, the queues share the bandwidth among them according to the configured weights. The
bandwidth is guaranteed at this level but not limited to it. For example, if a queue is empty and no longer
requires a share of the link, the remaining queues can expand into the unused bandwidth and share it
among them. With sharing, the ratio of the weights controls the frequency of dequeuing; the absolute
values are meaningless. Shaping and sharing is configured per interface. Each interface can be uniquely
configured.
For more information, see the “Allocating Bandwidth Between the Ingress Queues” section on
page 34-68, the “Configuring SRR Shaped Weights on Egress Queues” section on page 34-74, and the
“Configuring SRR Shared Weights on Egress Queues” section on page 34-75.

34-14 OL-8553-06
Understanding QoS
Queueing and Scheduling on Ingress Queues

Figure 34-8 shows the queueing and scheduling flowchart for ingress ports.
Figure 34-8 Queueing and Scheduling Flowchart for Ingress Ports
Start
Read QoS label

(DSCP or CoS value).
Determine ingress queue

number, buffer allocation,
and WTD thresholds.
Are thresholds Yes

being exceeded?
No Drop packet.
Queue the packet. Service
the queue according to
the SRR weights.
Send packet to
the internal ring.
90564
Note SRR services the priority queue for its configured share before servicing the other queue.
The switch supports two configurable ingress queues, which are serviced by SRR in shared mode only.
Table 34-1 describes the queues.
Table 34-1 Ingress Queue Types
Queue Type1 Function

Normal User traffic that is considered to be normal priority. You can configure three different thresholds to
differentiate among the flows. You can use the mls qos srr-queue input threshold, the mls qos srr-queue
input dscp-map, and the mls qos srr-queue input cos-map global configuration commands.
Expedite High-priority user traffic such as differentiated services (DF) expedited forwarding or voice traffic. You can
configure the bandwidth required for this traffic as a percentage of the total traffic by using the mls qos
srr-queue input priority-queue global configuration command. The expedite queue has guaranteed bandwidth.
1. The switch uses two nonconfigurable queues for traffic that is essential for proper network operation.

OL-8553-06 34-15
Understanding QoS
You assign each packet that flows through the switch to a queue and to a threshold. Specifically, you
map DSCP or CoS values to an ingress queue and map DSCP or CoS values to a threshold ID. You use
the mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue queue-id {dscp1...dscp8 | threshold threshold-id
dscp1...dscp8} or the mls qos srr-queue input cos-map queue queue-id {cos1...cos8 | threshold
threshold-id cos1...cos8} global configuration command. You can display the DSCP input queue
threshold map and the CoS input queue threshold map by using the show mls qos maps privileged
EXEC command.
WTD Thresholds
The queues use WTD to support distinct drop percentages for different traffic classes. Each queue has
three drop thresholds: two configurable (explicit) WTD thresholds and one nonconfigurable (implicit)
threshold preset to the queue-full state. You assign the two explicit WTD threshold percentages for
threshold ID 1 and ID 2 to the ingress queues by using the mls qos srr-queue input threshold queue-id
threshold-percentage1 threshold-percentage2 global configuration command. Each threshold value is a
percentage of the total number of allocated buffers for the queue. The drop threshold for threshold ID 3
is preset to the queue-full state, and you cannot modify it. For more information about how WTD works,
see the “Weighted Tail Drop” section on page 34-13.
Buffer and Bandwidth Allocation
You define the ratio (allocate the amount of space) with which to divide the ingress buffers between the
two queues by using the mls qos srr-queue input buffers percentage1 percentage2 global
configuration command. The buffer allocation together with the bandwidth allocation control how much
data can be buffered and sent before packets are dropped. You allocate bandwidth as a percentage by
using the mls qos srr-queue input bandwidth weight1 weight2 global configuration command. The
ratio of the weights is the ratio of the frequency in which the SRR scheduler sends packets from each
queue.
Priority Queueing
You can configure one ingress queue as the priority queue by using the mls qos srr-queue input
priority-queue queue-id bandwidth weight global configuration command. The priority queue should
be used for traffic (such as voice) that requires guaranteed delivery because this queue is guaranteed part
of the bandwidth regardless of the load on the internal ring.
SRR services the priority queue for its configured weight as specified by the bandwidth keyword in the
mls qos srr-queue input priority-queue queue-id bandwidth weight global configuration command.
Then, SRR shares the remaining bandwidth with both ingress queues and services them as specified by
the weights configured with the mls qos srr-queue input bandwidth weight1 weight2 global
You can combine the commands described in this section to prioritize traffic by placing packets with
particular DSCPs or CoSs into certain queues, by allocating a large queue size or by servicing the queue
more frequently, and by adjusting queue thresholds so that packets with lower priorities are dropped. For
configuration information, see the “Configuring Ingress Queue Characteristics” section on page 34-66.
Queueing and Scheduling on Egress Queues

Figure 34-9 shows the queueing and scheduling flowchart for egress ports.
Note If the expedite queue is enabled, SRR services it until it is empty before servicing the other three queues.

34-16 OL-8553-06
Understanding QoS
Figure 34-9 Queueing and Scheduling Flowchart for Egress Ports
Start
Receive packet from

the internal ring.
Read QoS label

(DSCP or CoS value).
Determine egress queue

number and threshold
based on the label.
Are thresholds Yes

being exceeded?
No
Drop packet.
Queue the packet. Service
the queue according to
the SRR weights.
Rewrite DSCP and/or

CoS value as
appropriate.
Send the packet

out the port.
90565
Done
Each port supports four egress queues, one of which (queue 1) can be the egress expedite queue.These
queues are configured by a queue-set. All traffic leaving an egress port flows through one of these four
queues and is subjected to a threshold based on the QoS label assigned to the packet.
Figure 34-10 shows the egress queue buffer. The buffer space is divided between the common pool and
the reserved pool. The switch uses a buffer allocation scheme to reserve a minimum amount of buffers
for each egress queue, to prevent any queue or port from consuming all the buffers and depriving other
queues, and to control whether to grant buffer space to a requesting queue. The switch detects whether
the target queue has not consumed more buffers than its reserved amount (under-limit), whether it has
consumed all of its maximum buffers (over limit), and whether the common pool is empty (no free

OL-8553-06 34-17
Understanding QoS
buffers) or not empty (free buffers). If the queue is not over-limit, the switch can allocate buffer space
from the reserved pool or from the common pool (if it is not empty). If there are no free buffers in the
common pool or if the queue is over-limit, the switch drops the frame.
Figure 34-10 Egress Queue Buffer Allocation
Common pool
Port 1 queue 1
Port 1 queue 2
Port 1 queue 3
Port 1 queue 4
Port 2 queue 1
Port 2 queue 2
Reserved pool
86695
Buffer and Memory Allocation
You guarantee the availability of buffers, set drop thresholds, and configure the maximum memory
allocation for a queue-set by using the mls qos queue-set output qset-id threshold queue-id
drop-threshold1 drop-threshold2 reserved-threshold maximum-threshold global configuration command.
Each threshold value is a percentage of the queue’s allocated memory, which you specify by using the
mls qos queue-set output qset-id buffers allocation1 ... allocation4 global configuration command.
The sum of all the allocated buffers represents the reserved pool, and the remaining buffers are part of
the common pool.
Through buffer allocation, you can ensure that high-priority traffic is buffered. For example, if the buffer
space is 400, you can allocate 70 percent of it to queue 1 and 10 percent to queues 2 through 4. Queue
1 then has 280 buffers allocated to it, and queues 2 through 4 each have 40 buffers allocated to them.
You can guarantee that the allocated buffers are reserved for a specific queue in a queue-set. For
example, if there are 100 buffers for a queue, you can reserve 50 percent (50 buffers). The switch returns
the remaining 50 buffers to the common pool. You also can enable a queue in the full condition to obtain
more buffers than are reserved for it by setting a maximum threshold. The switch can allocate the needed
buffers from the common pool if the common pool is not empty.
WTD Thresholds
You can assign each packet that flows through the switch to a queue and to a threshold. Specifically, you
map DSCP or CoS values to an egress queue and map DSCP or CoS values to a threshold ID. You use
the mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map queue queue-id {dscp1...dscp8 | threshold threshold-id
dscp1...dscp8} or the mls qos srr-queue output cos-map queue queue-id {cos1...cos8 | threshold
threshold-id cos1...cos8} global configuration command. You can display the DSCP output queue
threshold map and the CoS output queue threshold map by using the show mls qos maps privileged
EXEC command.
The queues use WTD to support distinct drop percentages for different traffic classes. Each queue has
three drop thresholds: two configurable (explicit) WTD thresholds and one nonconfigurable (implicit)
threshold preset to the queue-full state. You assign the two WTD threshold percentages for threshold
ID 1 and ID 2. The drop threshold for threshold ID 3 is preset to the queue-full state, and you cannot

34-18 OL-8553-06
Understanding QoS
modify it. You map a port to queue-set by using the queue-set qset-id interface configuration command.
Modify the queue-set configuration to change the WTD threshold percentages. For more information
about how WTD works, see the “Weighted Tail Drop” section on page 34-13.
Shaped or Shared Mode
SRR services each queue-set in shared or shaped mode. You assign shared or shaped weights to the port
by using the srr-queue bandwidth share weight1 weight2 weight3 weight4 or the srr-queue
bandwidth shape weight1 weight2 weight3 weight4 interface configuration commands. For an
explanation of the differences between shaping and sharing, see the “SRR Shaping and Sharing” section
on page 34-14.
The buffer allocation together with the SRR weight ratios control how much data can be buffered and
sent before packets are dropped. The weight ratio is the ratio of the frequency in which the SRR
scheduler sends packets from each queue.
All four queues participate in the SRR unless the expedite queue is enabled, in which case the first
bandwidth weight is ignored and is not used in the ratio calculation. The expedite queue is a priority
queue, and it is serviced until empty before the other queues are serviced. You enable the expedite queue
by using the priority-queue out interface configuration command.
You can combine the commands described in this section to prioritize traffic by placing packets with
particular DSCPs or CoSs into certain queues, by allocating a large queue size or by servicing the queue
more frequently, and by adjusting queue thresholds so that packets with lower priorities are dropped. For
configuration information, see the “Configuring Egress Queue Characteristics” section on page 34-70.
Note The egress queue default settings are suitable for most situations. You should change them only when
you have a thorough understanding of the egress queues and if these settings do not meet your QoS
solution.
Packet Modification
A packet is classified, policed, and queued to provide QoS. Packet modifications can occur during this
process:
• For IP and non-IP packets, classification involves assigning a QoS label to a packet based on the
DSCP or CoS of the received packet. However, the packet is not modified at this stage; only an
indication of the assigned DSCP or CoS value is carried along. The reason for this is that QoS
classification and forwarding lookups occur in parallel, and it is possible that the packet is
forwarded with its original DSCP to the CPU where it is again processed through software.
• During policing, IP and non-IP packets can have another DSCP assigned to them (if they are out of
profile and the policer specifies a markdown DSCP). Once again, the DSCP in the packet is not
modified, but an indication of the marked-down value is carried along. For IP packets, the packet
modification occurs at a later stage; for non-IP packets the DSCP is converted to CoS and used for
queueing and scheduling decisions.
• Depending on the QoS label assigned to a frame and the mutation chosen, the DSCP and CoS values
of the frame are rewritten. If you do not configure the mutation map and if you configure the port
to trust the DSCP of the incoming frame, the DSCP value in the frame is not changed, but the CoS
is rewritten according to the DSCP-to-CoS map. If you configure the port to trust the CoS of the
incoming frame and it is an IP packet, the CoS value in the frame is not changed, but the DSCP
might be changed according to the CoS-to-DSCP map.

OL-8553-06 34-19
Configuring Auto-QoS
The input mutation causes the DSCP to be rewritten depending on the new value of DSCP chosen.
The set action in a policy map also causes the DSCP to be rewritten.
You can use the auto-QoS feature to simplify the deployment of existing QoS features. Auto-QoS makes
assumptions about the network design, and as a result, the switch can prioritize different traffic flows
and appropriately use the ingress and egress queues instead of using the default QoS behavior. (The
default is that QoS is disabled. The switch then offers best-effort service to each packet, regardless of
the packet contents or size, and sends it from a single queue.)
When you enable auto-QoS, it automatically classifies traffic based on the traffic type and ingress packet
label. The switch uses the resulting classification to choose the appropriate egress queue.
You use auto-QoS commands to identify ports connected to Cisco IP Phones and to devices running the
Cisco SoftPhone application. You also use the commands to identify ports that receive trusted traffic
through an uplink. Auto-QoS then performs these functions:
• Detects the presence or absence of Cisco IP Phones
• Configures QoS classification
• Configures egress queues
• Generated Auto-QoS Configuration, page 34-20
• Effects of Auto-QoS on the Configuration, page 34-25
• Auto-QoS Configuration Guidelines, page 34-25
• Upgrading from a Previous Software Release, page 34-26
• Enabling Auto-QoS for VoIP, page 34-27
• Auto-QoS Configuration Example, page 34-28
Generated Auto-QoS Configuration

By default, auto-QoS is disabled on all ports.
When auto-QoS is enabled, it uses the ingress packet label to categorize traffic, to assign packet labels,
and to configure the ingress and egress queues as shown in Table 34-2.
Table 34-2 Traffic Types, Packet Labels, and Queues
VoIP1 Data VoIP Control Routing Protocol STP BPDU Real-Time

Traffic Traffic Traffic Traffic Video Traffic All Other Traffic
DSCP 46 24, 26 48 56 34 –
CoS 5 3 6 7 4 –
CoS-to-Ingress 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (queue 2) 0, 1 (queue 1)
Queue Map
CoS-to-Egress 5 (queue 1) 3, 6, 7 (queue 2) 4 (queue 3) 2 (queue 3) 0, 1
Queue Map (queue 4)
1. VoIP = voice over IP

34-20 OL-8553-06
Table 34-3 shows the generated auto-QoS configuration for the ingress queues.
Table 34-3 Auto-QoS Configuration for the Ingress Queues
Queue Weight Queue (Buffer)

Ingress Queue Queue Number CoS-to-Queue Map (Bandwidth) Size
SRR shared 1 0, 1 81 percent 67 percent
Priority 2 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 19 percent 33 percent
Table 34-4 shows the generated auto-QoS configuration for the egress queues.
Table 34-4 Auto-QoS Configuration for the Egress Queues
Queue (Buffer) Size Queue (Buffer)

Queue Weight for Gigabit-Capable Size for 10/100
Egress Queue Queue Number CoS-to-Queue Map (Bandwidth) Ports Ethernet Ports
Priority 1 5 up to100 percent 16 percent 10 percent
SRR shared 2 3, 6, 7 10 percent 6 percent 10 percent
SRR shared 3 2, 4 60 percent 17 percent 26 percent
SRR shared 4 0, 1 20 percent 61 percent 54 percent
When you enable the auto-QoS feature on the first port, these automatic actions occur:
• QoS is globally enabled (mls qos global configuration command), and other global configuration
commands are added.
• When you enter the auto qos voip cisco-phone interface configuration command on a port at the
edge of the network that is connected to a Cisco IP Phone, the switch enables the trusted boundary
feature. The switch uses the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) to detect the presence or absence of a
Cisco IP Phone. When a Cisco IP Phone is detected, the ingress classification on the port is set to
trust the QoS label received in the packet. The switch also uses policing to determine whether a
packet is in or out of profile and to specify the action on the packet. If the packet does not have a
DSCP value of 24, 26, or 46 or is out of profile, the switch changes the DSCP value to 0. When a
Cisco IP Phone is absent, the ingress classification is set to not trust the QoS label in the packet. The
switch configures ingress and egress queues on the port according to the settings in Table 34-3 and
Table 34-4. The policing is applied to those traffic matching the policy-map classification before the
switch enables the trust boundary feature.
• When you enter the auto qos voip cisco-softphone interface configuration command on a port at
the edge of the network that is connected to a device running the Cisco SoftPhone, the switch uses
policing to determine whether a packet is in or out of profile and to specify the action on the packet.
If the packet does not have a DSCP value of 24, 26, or 46 or is out of profile, the switch changes the
DSCP value to 0. The switch configures ingress and egress queues on the port according to the
settings in Table 34-3 and Table 34-4.
• When you enter the auto qos voip trust interface configuration command on a port connected to
the interior of the network, the switch trusts the CoS value for nonrouted ports or the DSCP value
for routed ports in ingress packets (the assumption is that traffic has already been classified by other
edge devices). The switch configures the ingress and egress queues on the port according to the
settings in Table 34-3 and Table 34-4.
For information about the trusted boundary feature, see the “Configuring a Trusted Boundary to
Ensure Port Security” section on page 34-38.

OL-8553-06 34-21
When you enable auto-QoS by using the auto qos voip cisco-phone, the auto qos voip cisco-softphone,
or the auto qos voip trust interface configuration command, the switch automatically generates a QoS
configuration based on the traffic type and ingress packet label and applies the commands listed in
Table 34-5 to the port.
Table 34-5 Generated Auto-QoS Configuration
Description Automatically Generated Command

The switch automatically enables standard QoS and configures Switch(config)# mls qos
the CoS-to-DSCP map (maps CoS values in incoming packets Switch(config)# mls qos map cos-dscp 0 8 16 26 32 46
48 56
to a DSCP value).
The switch automatically maps CoS values to an ingress queue Switch(config)# no mls qos srr-queue input cos-map
and to a threshold ID. Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input cos-map
queue 1 threshold 3 0
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input cos-map
queue 2 threshold 2 4 6 7
queue 2 threshold 3 3 5
The switch automatically maps CoS values to an egress queue Switch(config)# no mls qos srr-queue output cos-map
and to a threshold ID. Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue output cos-map
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue output cos-map
queue 2 threshold 3 3 6 7
queue 3 threshold 3 2 4
The switch automatically maps DSCP values to an ingress Switch(config)# no mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map
queue and to a threshold ID. Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map
queue 1 threshold 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map
queue 1 threshold 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
queue 2 threshold 1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
queue 2 threshold 2 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 48
queue 2 threshold 2 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
queue 2 threshold 2 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
queue 2 threshold 3 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
queue 2 threshold 3 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

34-22 OL-8553-06
Table 34-5 Generated Auto-QoS Configuration (continued)

The switch automatically maps DSCP values to an egress Switch(config)# no mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map
queue and to a threshold ID. Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map
queue 1 threshold 3 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map
queue 2 threshold 3 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
queue 2 threshold 3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
queue 2 threshold 3 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
queue 3 threshold 3 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
queue 3 threshold 3 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
queue 4 threshold 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
queue 4 threshold 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
The switch automatically sets up the ingress queues, with Switch(config)# no mls qos srr-queue input
queue 2 as the priority queue and queue 1 in shared mode. The priority-queue 1
Switch(config)# no mls qos srr-queue input
switch also configures the bandwidth and buffer size for the priority-queue 2
ingress queues. Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input bandwidth 90
10
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input threshold 1
8 16
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input threshold 2
34 66
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input buffers 67
33
The switch automatically configures the egress queue buffer Switch(config)# mls qos queue-set output 1 threshold
sizes. It configures the bandwidth and the SRR mode (shaped 1 138 138 92 138
Switch(config)# mls qos queue-set output 1 threshold
or shared) on the egress queues mapped to the port. 2 138 138 92 400
3 36 77 100 318
4 20 50 67 400
1 149 149 100 149
2 118 118 100 235
3 41 68 100 272
4 42 72 100 242
Switch(config)# mls qos queue-set output 1 buffers
10 10 26 54
Switch(config)# mls qos queue-set output 2 buffers
16 6 17 61
Switch(config-if)# priority-que out
Switch(config-if)# srr-queue bandwidth share 10 10
60 20

OL-8553-06 34-23

If you entered the auto qos voip trust command, the switch Switch(config-if)# mls qos trust cos
automatically sets the ingress classification to trust the CoS Switch(config-if)# mls qos trust dscp
value received in the packet on a nonrouted port by using the
mls qos trust cos command or to trust the DSCP value
received in the packet on a routed port by using the mls qos
trust dscp command.
If you entered the auto qos voip cisco-phone command, the Switch(config-if)# mls qos trust device cisco-phone
switch automatically enables the trusted boundary feature,
which uses the CDP to detect the presence or absence of a
Cisco IP Phone.
If you entered the auto qos voip cisco-softphone command, Switch(config)# mls qos map policed-dscp 24 26 46 to
the switch automatically creates class maps and policy maps. 0
Switch(config)# class-map match-all
AutoQoS-VoIP-RTP-Trust
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp ef
AutoQoS-VoIP-Control-Trust
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp cs3 af31
Switch(config)# policy-map AutoQoS-Police-SoftPhone
Switch(config-pmap)# class AutoQoS-VoIP-RTP-Trust
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set dscp ef
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 320000 8000
exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit
Switch(config-pmap)# class
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set dscp cs3
After creating the class maps and policy maps, the switch Switch(config-if)# service-policy input
automatically applies the policy map called AutoQoS-Police-SoftPhone
AutoQoS-Police-SoftPhone to an ingress interface on which
auto-QoS with the Cisco SoftPhone feature is enabled.

34-24 OL-8553-06

If you entered the auto qos voip cisco-phone command, the witch(config)# mls qos map policed-dscp 24 26 46 to
switch automatically creates class maps and policy maps. 0
AutoQoS-VoIP-RTP-Trust
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp ef
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp cs3 af31
Switch(config)# policy-map AutoQoS-Police-CiscoPhone
Switch(config-pmap)# class AutoQoS-VoIP-RTP-Trust
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set dscp ef
Switch(config-pmap)# class
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set dscp cs3
After creating the class maps and policy maps, the switch Switch(config-if)# service-policy input
automatically applies the policy map named AutoQoS-Police-CiscoPhone
AutoQoS-Police-CiscoPhone to an ingress interface on which
auto-QoS with the Cisco Phone feature is enabled.
Effects of Auto-QoS on the Configuration

When auto-QoS is enabled, the auto qos voip interface configuration command and the generated
configuration are added to the running configuration.
The switch applies the auto-QoS-generated commands as if the commands were entered from the CLI.
An existing user configuration can cause the application of the generated commands to fail or to be
overridden by the generated commands. These actions occur without warning. If all the generated
commands are successfully applied, any user-entered configuration that was not overridden remains in
the running configuration. Any user-entered configuration that was overridden can be retrieved by
reloading the switch without saving the current configuration to memory. If the generated commands
fail to be applied, the previous running configuration is restored.
Auto-QoS Configuration Guidelines

Before configuring auto-QoS, you should be aware of this information:
• In releases earlier than Cisco IOS Release 12.2(20)SE, auto-QoS configures VoIP only on switch
ports with Cisco IP Phones.
• In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(20)SE or later, auto-QoS configures the switch for VoIP with Cisco IP
Phones on nonrouted and routed ports. Auto-QoS also configures the switch for VoIP with devices
running the Cisco SoftPhone application.
Note When a device running Cisco SoftPhone is connected to a nonrouted or routed port, the
switch supports only one Cisco SoftPhone application per port.

OL-8553-06 34-25
• Beginning with Cisco IOS Release 12.2(40)SE, Auto-Qos VoIP uses the priority-queue interface
configuration command for an egress interface. You can also configure a policy-map and trust
device on the same interface for Cisco IP phones.
• If the switch port was configure by using the auto qos voip cisco-phone interface configuration
command in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(37)SE or earlier, the auto-QoS generated commands new to
Cisco IOS Release 12.2(40)SE are not applied to the port. To have these commands automatically
applied, you must remove and then reapply the configuration to the port.
• To take advantage of the auto-QoS defaults, you should enable auto-QoS before you configure other
QoS commands. If necessary, you can fine-tune the QoS configuration, but we recommend that you
do so only after the auto-QoS configuration is completed. For more information, see the Effects of
Auto-QoS on the Configuration, page 34-25.
• After auto-QoS is enabled, do not modify a policy map or aggregate policer that includes AutoQoS
in its name. If you need to modify the policy map or aggregate policer, make a copy of it, and change
the copied policy map or policer. To use this new policy map instead of the generated one, remove
the generated policy map from the interface, and apply the new policy map to the interface.
• You can enable auto-QoS on static, dynamic-access, voice VLAN access, and trunk ports.
• By default, the CDP is enabled on all ports. For auto-QoS to function properly, do not disable the
CDP.
• When enabling auto-QoS with a Cisco IP Phone on a routed port, you must assign a static IP address
to the IP phone.
• This release supports only Cisco IP SoftPhone Version 1.3(3) or later.
• Connected devices must use Cisco Call Manager Version 4 or later.
Upgrading from a Previous Software Release

In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(20)SE, the implementation for auto-QoS changed from the previous release.
The generated auto-QoS configuration was changed, support for the Cisco SoftPhone feature was added,
and support for Cisco IP Phones on routed ports was added.
If auto-QoS is configured on the switch, your switch is running a release earlier than Cisco IOS
Release 12.2(20)SE, and you upgrade to Cisco IOS Release 12.2(20)SE or later, the configuration file
will not contain the new configuration, and auto-QoS will not operate. Follow these steps to update the
auto-QoS settings in your configuration file:
1. Upgrade your switch to Cisco IOS Release 12.2(20)SE or later.
2. Disable auto-QoS on all ports on which auto-QoS was enabled.
3. Return all the global auto-QoS settings to their default values by using the no commands.
4. Re-enable auto-QoS on the ports on which auto-QoS was disabled in Step 2. Configure the ports
with the same auto-QoS settings as the previous ones.

34-26 OL-8553-06
Enabling Auto-QoS for VoIP

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable auto-QoS for VoIP within a QoS
domain:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port that is connected to a Cisco IP Phone, the port that is
connected to a device running the Cisco SoftPhone feature, or the
uplink port that is connected to another trusted switch or router in the
interior of the network, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 auto qos voip {cisco-phone | Enable auto-QoS.
cisco-softphone | trust}
• cisco-phone—If the port is connected to a Cisco IP Phone, the
QoS labels of incoming packets are trusted only when the
telephone is detected.
• cisco-softphone—The port is connected to device running the
Cisco SoftPhone feature.
Note The cisco-softphone keyword is supported only in Cisco IOS
Release 12.2(20)SE or later.
• trust—The uplink port is connected to a trusted switch or router,

and the VoIP traffic classification in the ingress packet is trusted.
Step 5 show auto qos interface interface-id Verify your entries.
This command displays the auto-QoS command on the interface on
which auto-QoS was enabled. You can use the show running-config
privileged EXEC command to display the auto-QoS configuration
and the user modifications.
To display the QoS commands that are automatically generated when auto-QoS is enabled or disabled,
enter the debug auto qos privileged EXEC command before enabling auto-QoS. For more information,
see the debug autoqos command in the command reference for this release.
To disable auto-QoS on a port, use the no auto qos voip interface configuration command. Only the
auto-QoS-generated interface configuration commands for this port are removed. If this is the last port
on which auto-QoS is enabled and you enter the no auto qos voip command, auto-QoS is considered
disabled even though the auto-QoS-generated global configuration commands remain (to avoid
disrupting traffic on other ports affected by the global configuration).
You can use the no mls qos global configuration command to disable the auto-QoS-generated global
configuration commands. With QoS disabled, there is no concept of trusted or untrusted ports because
the packets are not modified (the CoS, DSCP, and IP precedence values in the packet are not changed).
Traffic is switched in pass-through mode (packets are switched without any rewrites and classified as
best effort without any policing).
This example shows how to enable auto-QoS and to trust the QoS labels received in incoming packets
when the switch or router connected to a port is a trusted device:

OL-8553-06 34-27
Switch(config-if)# auto qos voip trust
Auto-QoS Configuration Example

This section describes how you could implement auto-QoS in a network, as shown in Figure 34-11. For
optimum QoS performance, enable auto-QoS on all the devices in the network.
Figure 34-11 Auto-QoS Configuration Example Network
Cisco router
To Internet
Trunk Trunk
link link Video server
172.20.10.16
End stations
Identify this interface Identify this interface

as connected to a as connected to a
trusted switch or router trusted switch or router
IP IP
Identify these Identify these

interfaces as interfaces as
IP connected to connected to IP
IP phones IP phones
101234
Cisco IP phones Cisco IP phones
Figure 34-11 shows a network in which the VoIP traffic is prioritized over all other traffic. Auto-QoS is
enabled on the switches in the wiring closets at the edge of the QoS domain.
Note You should not configure any standard QoS commands before entering the auto-QoS commands. You
can fine-tune the QoS configuration, but we recommend that you do so only after the auto-QoS
configuration is completed.

34-28 OL-8553-06
Displaying Auto-QoS Information
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch at the edge of the QoS
domain to prioritize the VoIP traffic over all other traffic:
Command Purpose
Step 1 debug auto qos Enable debugging for auto-QoS. When debugging is enabled, the switch
displays the QoS configuration that is automatically generated when auto-QoS
is enabled.
Step 3 cdp enable Enable CDP globally. By default, it is enabled.
Step 4 interface interface-id Specify the switch port connected to the Cisco IP Phone, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 5 auto qos voip cisco-phone Enable auto-QoS on the port, and specify that the port is connected to a Cisco
IP Phone.
The QoS labels of incoming packets are trusted only when the Cisco IP Phone
is detected.
Step 7 Repeat Steps 4 to 6 for as many ports as are connected to the Cisco IP Phone.
Step 8 interface interface-id Specify the switch port identified as connected to a trusted switch or router, and
enter interface configuration mode. See Figure 34-11.
Step 9 auto qos voip trust Enable auto-QoS on the port, and specify that the port is connected to a trusted
router or switch.
Step 11 show auto qos Verify your entries.
This command displays the auto-QoS command on the interface on which
auto-QoS was enabled. You can use the show running-config privileged EXEC
command to display the auto-QoS configuration and the user modifications.
For information about the QoS configuration that might be affected by
auto-QoS, see the “Displaying Auto-QoS Information” section on page 26-12.
Step 12 copy running-config Save the auto qos voip interface configuration commands and the generated
startup-config auto-QoS configuration in the configuration file.
Displaying Auto-QoS Information

To display the initial auto-QoS configuration, use the show auto qos [interface [interface-id]]
privileged EXEC command. To display any user changes to that configuration, use the show
running-config privileged EXEC command. You can compare the show auto qos and the show
running-config command output to identify the user-defined QoS settings.
To display information about the QoS configuration that might be affected by auto-QoS, use one of these
commands:
• show mls qos
• show mls qos maps cos-dscp
• show mls qos interface [interface-id] [buffers | queueing]

OL-8553-06 34-29
Configuring Standard QoS
• show mls qos maps [cos-dscp | cos-input-q | cos-output-q | dscp-cos | dscp-input-q |

dscp-output-q]
• show mls qos input-queue
• show running-config
For more information about these commands, see the command reference for this release.

Before configuring standard QoS, you must have a thorough understanding of these items:
• The types of applications used and the traffic patterns on your network.
• Traffic characteristics and needs of your network. Is the traffic bursty? Do you need to reserve
bandwidth for voice and video streams?
• Bandwidth requirements and speed of the network.
• Location of congestion points in the network.
• Default Standard QoS Configuration, page 34-30
• Standard QoS Configuration Guidelines, page 34-33
• Enabling QoS Globally, page 34-35 (required)
• Enabling VLAN-Based QoS on Physical Ports, page 34-35 (optional)
• Configuring Classification Using Port Trust States, page 34-36 (required
• Configuring a QoS Policy, page 34-42 (required)
• Configuring DSCP Maps, page 34-60 (optional, unless you need to use the
DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map or the policed-DSCP map)
• Configuring Ingress Queue Characteristics, page 34-66 (optional)
• Configuring Egress Queue Characteristics, page 34-70 (optional)
Default Standard QoS Configuration

QoS is disabled. There is no concept of trusted or untrusted ports because the packets are not modified
(the CoS, DSCP, and IP precedence values in the packet are not changed). Traffic is switched in
pass-through mode (packets are switched without any rewrites and classified as best effort without any
policing).
When QoS is enabled with the mls qos global configuration command and all other QoS settings are at
their defaults, traffic is classified as best effort (the DSCP and CoS value is set to 0) without any
policing. No policy maps are configured. The default port trust state on all ports is untrusted. The default
ingress and egress queue settings are described in the “Default Ingress Queue Configuration” section on
page 34-31 and the “Default Egress Queue Configuration” section on page 34-31.

34-30 OL-8553-06
Default Ingress Queue Configuration

Table 34-6 shows the default ingress queue configuration when QoS is enabled.
Table 34-6 Default Ingress Queue Configuration
Feature Queue 1 Queue 2

Buffer allocation 90 percent 10 percent
Bandwidth allocation 1 4 4
2
Priority queue bandwidth 0 10
WTD drop threshold 1 100 percent 100 percent
WTD drop threshold 2 100 percent 100 percent
1. The bandwidth is equally shared between the queues. SRR sends packets in shared mode only.
2. Queue 2 is the priority queue. SRR services the priority queue for its configured share before servicing the other queue.
Table 34-7 shows the default CoS input queue threshold map when QoS is enabled.
Table 34-7 Default CoS Input Queue Threshold Map
CoS Value Queue ID–Threshold ID

0–4 1–1
5 2–1
6, 7 1–1
Table 34-8 shows the default DSCP input queue threshold map when QoS is enabled.
Table 34-8 Default DSCP Input Queue Threshold Map
DSCP Value Queue ID–Threshold ID

0–39 1–1
40–47 2–1
48–63 1–1
Default Egress Queue Configuration

Table 34-9 shows the default egress queue configuration for each queue-set when QoS is enabled. All
ports are mapped to queue-set 1. The port bandwidth limit is set to 100 percent and rate unlimited.
Table 34-9 Default Egress Queue Configuration
Feature Queue 1 Queue 2 Queue 3 Queue 4

Buffer allocation 25 percent 25 percent 25 percent 25 percent
WTD drop threshold 1 100 percent 200 percent 100 percent 100 percent
WTD drop threshold 2 100 percent 200 percent 100 percent 100 percent
Reserved threshold 50 percent 50 percent 50 percent 50 percent

OL-8553-06 34-31
Table 34-9 Default Egress Queue Configuration (continued)
Feature Queue 1 Queue 2 Queue 3 Queue 4

Maximum threshold 400 percent 400 percent 400 percent 400 percent
SRR shaped weights 25 0 0 0
(absolute) 1
SRR shared weights 2 25 25 25 25
1. A shaped weight of zero means that this queue is operating in shared mode.
2. One quarter of the bandwidth is allocated to each queue.
Table 34-10 shows the default CoS output queue threshold map when QoS is enabled.
Table 34-10 Default CoS Output Queue Threshold Map
CoS Value Queue ID–Threshold ID

0, 1 2–1
2, 3 3–1
4 4–1
5 1–1
6, 7 4–1
Table 34-11 shows the default DSCP output queue threshold map when QoS is enabled.
Table 34-11 Default DSCP Output Queue Threshold Map
DSCP Value Queue ID–Threshold ID

0–15 2–1
16–31 3–1
32–39 4–1
40–47 1–1
48–63 4–1
Default Mapping Table Configuration

The default CoS-to-DSCP map is shown in Table 34-12 on page 34-60.
The default IP-precedence-to-DSCP map is shown in Table 34-13 on page 34-62.
The default DSCP-to-CoS map is shown in Table 34-14 on page 34-64.
The default DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map is a null map, which maps an incoming DSCP value to the
same DSCP value.
The default policed-DSCP map is a null map, which maps an incoming DSCP value to the same DSCP
value (no markdown).

34-32 OL-8553-06
Standard QoS Configuration Guidelines

Before beginning the QoS configuration, you should be aware of this information in these sections:
• “QoS ACL Guidelines” section on page 34-33
• “Applying QoS on Interfaces” section on page 34-33
• “Policing Guidelines” section on page 34-34
• “General QoS Guidelines” section on page 34-34
QoS ACL Guidelines

These are the guidelines with for configuring QoS with access control lists (ACLs):
• It is not possible to match IP fragments against configured IP extended ACLs to enforce QoS. IP
fragments are sent as best-effort. IP fragments are denoted by fields in the IP header.
• Only one ACL per class map and only one match class-map configuration command per class map
are supported. The ACL can have multiple ACEs, which match fields against the contents of the
packet.
• A trust statement in a policy map requires multiple TCAM entries per ACL line. If an input service
policy map contains a trust statement in an ACL, the access-list might be too large to fit into the
available QoS TCAM and an error can occur when you apply the policy map to a port. Whenever
possible, you should minimize the number of lines in a QoS ACL.
Applying QoS on Interfaces

These are the guidelines with for configuring QoS on physical ports. This section also applies to SVIs
(Layer 3 interfaces):
• You can configure QoS on physical ports and SVIs. When configuring QoS on physical ports, you
create and apply nonhierarchical policy maps. When configuring QoS on SVIs, you can create and
apply nonhierarchical and hierarchical policy maps.
• Incoming traffic is classified, policed, and marked down (if configured) regardless of whether the
traffic is bridged, routed, or sent to the CPU. It is possible for bridged frames to be dropped or to
have their DSCP and CoS values modified.
• In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later, follow these guidelines when configuring policy maps on
physical ports or SVIs:
– You cannot apply the same policy map to a physical port and to an SVI.
– If VLAN-based QoS is configured on a physical port, the switch removes all the port-based
policy maps on the port. The traffic on this physical port is now affected by the policy map
attached to the SVI to which the physical port belongs.
– In a hierarchical policy map attached to an SVI, you can only configure an individual policer at
the interface level on a physical port to specify the bandwidth limits for the traffic on the port.
The ingress port must be configured as a trunk or as a static-access port. You cannot configure
policers at the VLAN level of the hierarchical policy map.
– The switch does not support aggregate policers in hierarchical policy maps.

OL-8553-06 34-33
– After the hierarchical policy map is attached to an SVI, the interface-level policy map cannot
be modified or removed from the hierarchical policy map. A new interface-level policy map
also cannot be added to the hierarchical policy map. If you want these changes to occur, the
hierarchical policy map must first be removed from the SVI. You also cannot add or remove a
class map specified in the hierarchical policy map.
Policing Guidelines
These are the policing guidelines:
• The port ASIC device, which controls more than one physical port, supports 256 policers (255
user-configurable policers plus 1 policer reserved for system internal use). The maximum number
of user-configurable policers supported per port is 63. For example, you could configure 32 policers
on a Gigabit Ethernet port and 8 policers on a Fast Ethernet port, or you could configure 64 policers
on a Gigabit Ethernet port and 5 policers on a Fast Ethernet port. Policers are allocated on demand
by the software and are constrained by the hardware and ASIC boundaries. You cannot reserve
policers per port; there is no guarantee that a port will be assigned to any policer.
• Only one policer is applied to a packet on an ingress port. Only the average rate and committed burst
parameters are configurable.
• You can create an aggregate policer that is shared by multiple traffic classes within the same
nonhierarchical policy map. However, you cannot use the aggregate policer across different policy
maps.
• On a port configured for QoS, all traffic received through the port is classified, policed, and marked
according to the policy map attached to the port. On a trunk port configured for QoS, traffic in all
VLANs received through the port is classified, policed, and marked according to the policy map
attached to the port.
• If you have EtherChannel ports configured on your switch, you must configure QoS classification,
policing, mapping, and queueing on the individual physical ports that comprise the EtherChannel.
You must decide whether the QoS configuration should match on all ports in the EtherChannel.
General QoS Guidelines

These are general QoS guidelines:
• Control traffic (such as spanning-tree bridge protocol data units [BPDUs] and routing update
packets) received by the switch are subject to all ingress QoS processing.
• You are likely to lose data when you change queue settings; therefore, try to make changes when
traffic is at a minimum.
A switch that is running the IP services image supports QoS DSCP and IP precedence matching in
policy-based routing (PBR) route maps with these limitations:
• You cannot apply QoS DSCP mutation maps and PBR route maps to the same interface.
• You cannot configure DSCP transparency and PBR DSCP route maps on the same switch.

34-34 OL-8553-06
Enabling QoS Globally

By default, QoS is disabled on the switch.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable QoS. This procedure is required.
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos Enable QoS globally.
QoS runs with the default settings described in the “Default Standard QoS
Configuration” section on page 34-30, the “Queueing and Scheduling on
Ingress Queues” section on page 34-15, and the “Queueing and Scheduling
on Egress Queues” section on page 34-16.
Step 4 show mls qos Verify your entries.
To disable QoS, use the no mls qos global configuration command.
Enabling VLAN-Based QoS on Physical Ports

By default, VLAN-based QoS is disabled on all physical switch ports. The switch applies QoS, including
class maps and policy maps, only on a physical-port basis. In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later,
yYou can enable VLAN-based QoS on a switch port.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable VLAN-based QoS. This procedure is
required on physical ports that are specified in the interface level of a hierarchical policy map on an SVI.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the physical port, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 mls qos vlan-based Enable VLAN-based QoS on the port.
Step 5 show mls qos interface interface-id Verify if VLAN-based QoS is enabled on the physical port.
Use the no mls qos vlan-based interface configuration command to disable VLAN-based QoS on the
physical port.

OL-8553-06 34-35
Configuring Classification Using Port Trust States

These sections describe how to classify incoming traffic by using port trust states. Depending on your
network configuration, you must perform one or more of these tasks or one or more of the tasks in the
“Configuring a QoS Policy” section on page 34-42:
• Configuring the Trust State on Ports within the QoS Domain, page 34-36
• Configuring the CoS Value for an Interface, page 34-38
• Configuring a Trusted Boundary to Ensure Port Security, page 34-38
• Enabling DSCP Transparency Mode, page 34-40
• Configuring the DSCP Trust State on a Port Bordering Another QoS Domain, page 34-40
Configuring the Trust State on Ports within the QoS Domain

Packets entering a QoS domain are classified at the edge of the QoS domain. When the packets are
classified at the edge, the switch port within the QoS domain can be configured to one of the trusted
states because there is no need to classify the packets at every switch within the QoS domain.
Figure 34-12 shows a sample network topology.
Figure 34-12 Port Trusted States within the QoS Domain
Trusted interface
Trunk
Traffic classification
performed here
P3 P1
101236
IP
Trusted boundary

34-36 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the port to trust the classification
of the traffic that it receives:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port to be trusted, and enter interface configuration
mode.
Valid interfaces include physical ports.
Step 3 mls qos trust [cos | dscp | ip-precedence] Configure the port trust state.
By default, the port is not trusted. If no keyword is specified, the
default is dscp.
• cos—Classifies an ingress packet by using the packet CoS value.
For an untagged packet, the port default CoS value is used. The
default port CoS value is 0.
• dscp—Classifies an ingress packet by using the packet DSCP
value. For a non-IP packet, the packet CoS value is used if the
packet is tagged; for an untagged packet, the default port CoS is
used. Internally, the switch maps the CoS value to a DSCP value
by using the CoS-to-DSCP map.
• ip-precedence—Classifies an ingress packet by using the
packet IP-precedence value. For a non-IP packet, the packet CoS
value is used if the packet is tagged; for an untagged packet, the
default port CoS is used. Internally, the switch maps the CoS
value to a DSCP value by using the CoS-to-DSCP map.
Step 5 show mls qos interface Verify your entries.
To return a port to its untrusted state, use the no mls qos trust interface configuration command.
For information on how to change the default CoS value, see the “Configuring the CoS Value for an
Interface” section on page 34-38. For information on how to configure the CoS-to-DSCP map, see the
“Configuring the CoS-to-DSCP Map” section on page 34-60.

OL-8553-06 34-37
Configuring the CoS Value for an Interface

QoS assigns the CoS value specified with the mls qos cos interface configuration command to untagged
frames received on trusted and untrusted ports.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define the default CoS value of a port or to
assign the default CoS to all incoming packets on the port:
Command Purpose
Step 3 mls qos cos {default-cos | override} Configure the default CoS value for the port.
• For default-cos, specify a default CoS value to be assigned to a port. If
the packet is untagged, the default CoS value becomes the packet CoS
value. The CoS range is 0 to 7. The default is 0.
• Use the override keyword to override the previously configured trust
state of the incoming packet and to apply the default port CoS value to
the port on all incoming packets. By default, CoS override is disabled.
Use the override keyword when all incoming packets on specified
ports deserve higher or lower priority than packets entering from other
ports. Even if a port was previously set to trust DSCP, CoS, or IP
precedence, this command overrides the previously configured trust
state, and all the incoming CoS values are assigned the default CoS
value configured with this command. If an incoming packet is tagged,
the CoS value of the packet is modified with the default CoS of the port
at the ingress port.
To return to the default setting, use the no mls qos cos {default-cos | override} interface configuration
command.
Configuring a Trusted Boundary to Ensure Port Security

In a typical network, you connect a Cisco IP Phone to a switch port, as shown in Figure 34-12 on
page 34-36, and cascade devices that generate data packets from the back of the telephone. The Cisco IP
Phone guarantees the voice quality through a shared data link by marking the CoS level of the voice
packets as high priority (CoS = 5) and by marking the data packets as low priority (CoS = 0). Traffic
sent from the telephone to the switch is typically marked with a tag that uses the IEEE 802.1Q header.
The header contains the VLAN information and the class of service (CoS) 3-bit field, which is the
priority of the packet.
For most Cisco IP Phone configurations, the traffic sent from the telephone to the switch should be
trusted to ensure that voice traffic is properly prioritized over other types of traffic in the network. By
using the mls qos trust cos interface configuration command, you configure the switch port to which

34-38 OL-8553-06
the telephone is connected to trust the CoS labels of all traffic received on that port. Use the mls qos
trust dscp interface configuration command to configure a routed port to which the telephone is
connected to trust the DSCP labels of all traffic received on that port.
With the trusted setting, you also can use the trusted boundary feature to prevent misuse of a
high-priority queue if a user bypasses the telephone and connects the PC directly to the switch. Without
trusted boundary, the CoS labels generated by the PC are trusted by the switch (because of the trusted
CoS setting). By contrast, trusted boundary uses CDP to detect the presence of a Cisco IP Phone (such
as the Cisco IP Phone 7910, 7935, 7940, and 7960) on a switch port. If the telephone is not detected, the
trusted boundary feature disables the trusted setting on the switch port and prevents misuse of a
high-priority queue. Note that the trusted boundary feature is not effective if the PC and Cisco IP Phone
are connected to a hub that is connected to the switch.
In some situations, you can prevent a PC connected to the Cisco IP Phone from taking advantage of a
high-priority data queue. You can use the switchport priority extend cos interface configuration
command to configure the telephone through the switch CLI to override the priority of the traffic
received from the PC.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable trusted boundary on a port:
Command Purpose
Step 2 cdp run Enable CDP globally. By default, CDP is enabled.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the port connected to the Cisco IP Phone, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 4 cdp enable Enable CDP on the port. By default, CDP is enabled.
Step 5 mls qos trust cos Configure the switch port to trust the CoS value in traffic received from the
Cisco IP Phone.
or
Configure the routed port to trust the DSCP value in traffic received from
mls qos trust dscp
the Cisco IP Phone.
By default, the port is not trusted.
Step 6 mls qos trust device cisco-phone Specify that the Cisco IP Phone is a trusted device.
You cannot enable both trusted boundary and auto-QoS (auto qos voip
interface configuration command) at the same time; they are mutually
exclusive.
To disable the trusted boundary feature, use the no mls qos trust device interface configuration
command.

OL-8553-06 34-39
Enabling DSCP Transparency Mode

In software releases earlier than Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE, if QoS is disabled, the DSCP value of
the incoming IP packet is not modified. If QoS is enabled and you configure the interface to trust DSCP,
the switch does not modify the DSCP value. If you configure the interface to trust CoS, the switch
modifies the DSCP value according to the CoS-to-DSCP map.
In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later, the switch supports the DSCP transparency feature. It affects
only the DSCP field of a packet at egress. By default, DSCP transparency is disabled. The switch
modifies the DSCP field in an incoming packet, and the DSCP field in the outgoing packet is based on
the quality of service (QoS) configuration, including the port trust setting, policing and marking, and the
DSCP-to-DSCP mutation map.
If DSCP transparency is enabled by using the no mls qos rewrite ip dscp command, the switch does not
modify the DSCP field in the incoming packet, and the DSCP field in the outgoing packet is the same
as that in the incoming packet.
Note Enabling DSCP transparency does not affect the port trust settings on IEEE 802.1Q tunneling ports.
Regardless of the DSCP transparency configuration, the switch modifies the internal DSCP value of the
packet, which the switch uses to generate a class of service (CoS) value that represents the priority of
the traffic. The switch also uses the internal DSCP value to select an egress queue and threshold.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable DSCP transparency on a switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos Enable QoS globally.
Step 3 no mls qos rewrite ip dscp Enable DSCP transparency. The switch is configured to not modify the
DSCP field of the IP packet.
Step 5 show mls qos interface [interface-id] Verify your entries.
To configure the switch to modify the DSCP value based on the trust setting or on an ACL by disabling
DSCP transparency, use the mls qos rewrite ip dscp global configuration command.
If you disable QoS by using the no mls qos global configuration command, the CoS and DSCP values
are not changed (the default QoS setting).
If you enter the no mls qos rewrite ip dscp global configuration command to enable DSCP transparency
and then enter the mls qos trust [cos | dscp] interface configuration command, DSCP transparency is
still enabled.
Configuring the DSCP Trust State on a Port Bordering Another QoS Domain
If you are administering two separate QoS domains between which you want to implement QoS features
for IP traffic, you can configure the switch ports bordering the domains to a DSCP-trusted state as shown
in Figure 34-13. Then the receiving port accepts the DSCP-trusted value and avoids the classification

34-40 OL-8553-06
stage of QoS. If the two domains use different DSCP values, you can configure the
DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map to translate a set of DSCP values to match the definition in the other
domain.
Figure 34-13 DSCP-Trusted State on a Port Bordering Another QoS Domain
QoS Domain 1 QoS Domain 2
IP traffic
101235
Set interface to the DSCP-trusted state.
Configure the DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the DSCP-trusted state on a port
and modify the DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map. To ensure a consistent mapping strategy across both QoS
domains, you must perform this procedure on the ports in both domains:
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos map dscp-mutation Modify the DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map.
dscp-mutation-name in-dscp to out-dscp
The default DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map is a null map, which maps
an incoming DSCP value to the same DSCP value.
• For dscp-mutation-name, enter the mutation map name. You can
create more than one map by specifying a new name.
• For in-dscp, enter up to eight DSCP values separated by spaces.
Then enter the to keyword.
• For out-dscp, enter a single DSCP value.
The DSCP range is 0 to 63.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the port to be trusted, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 4 mls qos trust dscp Configure the ingress port as a DSCP-trusted port. By default, the port
is not trusted.
Step 5 mls qos dscp-mutation Apply the map to the specified ingress DSCP-trusted port.
dscp-mutation-name
For dscp-mutation-name, specify the mutation map name created in
Step 2.
You can configure multiple DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation maps on an
ingress port.

OL-8553-06 34-41
Command Purpose
Step 7 show mls qos maps dscp-mutation Verify your entries.
To return a port to its non-trusted state, use the no mls qos trust interface configuration command. To
return to the default DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map values, use the no mls qos map dscp-mutation
dscp-mutation-name global configuration command.
This example shows how to configure a port to the DSCP-trusted state and to modify the
DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map (named gi0/2-mutation) so that incoming DSCP values 10 to 13 are
mapped to DSCP 30:
Switch(config)# mls qos map dscp-mutation gi0/2-mutation 10 11 12 13 to 30
Switch(config-if)# mls qos trust dscp
Switch(config-if)# mls qos dscp-mutation gi0/2-mutation
Configuring a QoS Policy

Configuring a QoS policy typically requires classifying traffic into classes, configuring policies applied
to those traffic classes, and attaching policies to ports.
For background information, see the “Classification” section on page 34-5 and the “Policing and
Marking” section on page 34-8. For configuration guidelines, see the “Standard QoS Configuration
Guidelines” section on page 34-33.
These sections describe how to classify, police, and mark traffic. Depending on your network
configuration, you must perform one or more of these tasks:
• Classifying Traffic by Using ACLs, page 34-43
• Classifying Traffic by Using Class Maps, page 34-46
• Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic on Physical Ports by Using Policy Maps, page 34-48
• Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic on SVIs by Using Hierarchical Policy Maps, page 34-52
• Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic by Using Aggregate Policers, page 34-58

34-42 OL-8553-06
Classifying Traffic by Using ACLs

You can classify IP traffic by using IP standard or IP extended ACLs; you can classify non-IP traffic by
using Layer 2 MAC ACLs.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create an IP standard ACL for IP traffic:
Command Purpose
Step 2 access-list access-list-number {deny | Create an IP standard ACL, repeating the command as many times as
permit} source [source-wildcard] necessary.
• For access-list-number, enter the access list number. The range is
1 to 99 and 1300 to 1999.
• Use the permit keyword to permit a certain type of traffic if the
conditions are matched. Use the deny keyword to deny a certain
type of traffic if conditions are matched.
• For source, enter the network or host from which the packet is
being sent. You can use the any keyword as an abbreviation for
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255.
• (Optional) For source-wildcard, enter the wildcard bits in dotted
decimal notation to be applied to the source. Place ones in the bit
positions that you want to ignore.
Step 4 show access-lists Verify your entries.
To delete an access list, use the no access-list access-list-number global configuration command.
This example shows how to allow access for only those hosts on the three specified networks. The
wildcard bits apply to the host portions of the network addresses. Any host with a source address that
does not match the access list statements is rejected.
! (Note: all other access implicitly denied)

OL-8553-06 34-43
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create an IP extended ACL for IP traffic:
Command Purpose
Step 2 access-list access-list-number {deny | Create an IP extended ACL, repeating the command as many times as
permit} protocol source source-wildcard necessary.
destination destination-wildcard
• For access-list-number, enter the access list number. The range is
100 to 199 and 2000 to 2699.
• Use the permit keyword to permit a certain type of traffic if the
conditions are matched. Use the deny keyword to deny a certain
type of traffic if conditions are matched.
• For protocol, enter the name or number of an IP protocol. Use the
question mark (?) to see a list of available protocol keywords.
• For source, enter the network or host from which the packet is
being sent. You specify this by using dotted decimal notation, by
using the any keyword as an abbreviation for source 0.0.0.0
source-wildcard 255.255.255.255, or by using the host keyword
for source 0.0.0.0.
• For source-wildcard, enter the wildcard bits by placing ones in the
bit positions that you want to ignore. You specify the wildcard by
using dotted decimal notation, by using the any keyword as an
abbreviation for source 0.0.0.0 source-wildcard 255.255.255.255,
or by using the host keyword for source 0.0.0.0.
• For destination, enter the network or host to which the packet is
being sent. You have the same options for specifying the
destination and destination-wildcard as those described by source
and source-wildcard.
Step 4 show access-lists Verify your entries.
To delete an access list, use the no access-list access-list-number global configuration command.
This example shows how to create an ACL that permits IP traffic from any source to any destination that
has the DSCP value set to 32:
Switch(config)# access-list 100 permit ip any any dscp 32
This example shows how to create an ACL that permits IP traffic from a source host at 10.1.1.1 to a
destination host at 10.1.1.2 with a precedence value of 5:
Switch(config)# access-list 100 permit ip host 10.1.1.1 host 10.1.1.2 precedence 5
This example shows how to create an ACL that permits PIM traffic from any source to a destination
group address of 224.0.0.2 with a DSCP set to 32:
Switch(config)# access-list 102 permit pim any 224.0.0.2 dscp 32

34-44 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a Layer 2 MAC ACL for non-IP traffic:
Command Purpose
Step 2 mac access-list extended name Create a Layer 2 MAC ACL by specifying the name of the list.
After entering this command, the mode changes to extended MAC
ACL configuration.
Step 3 {permit | deny} {host src-MAC-addr mask | Specify the type of traffic to permit or deny if the conditions are
any | host dst-MAC-addr | dst-MAC-addr matched, entering the command as many times as necessary.
mask} [type mask]
• For src-MAC-addr, enter the MAC address of the host from
which the packet is being sent. You specify this by using the
hexadecimal format (H.H.H), by using the any keyword as an
abbreviation for source 0.0.0, source-wildcard ffff.ffff.ffff, or
by using the host keyword for source 0.0.0.
• For mask, enter the wildcard bits by placing ones in the bit
• For dst-MAC-addr, enter the MAC address of the host to which
the packet is being sent. You specify this by using the
hexadecimal format (H.H.H), by using the any keyword as an
abbreviation for source 0.0.0, source-wildcard ffff.ffff.ffff, or
by using the host keyword for source 0.0.0.
• (Optional) For type mask, specify the Ethertype number of a
packet with Ethernet II or SNAP encapsulation to identify the
protocol of the packet. For type, the range is from 0 to 65535,
typically specified in hexadecimal. For mask, enter the don’t
care bits applied to the Ethertype before testing for a match.
Note When creating an access list, remember that, by default, the
end of the access list contains an implicit deny statement for
Step 5 show access-lists [access-list-number | Verify your entries.
access-list-name]
To delete an access list, use the no mac access-list extended access-list-name global configuration
command.
This example shows how to create a Layer 2 MAC ACL with two permit statements. The first statement
allows traffic from the host with MAC address 0001.0000.0001 to the host with MAC
address 0002.0000.0001. The second statement allows only Ethertype XNS-IDP traffic from the host
with MAC address 0001.0000.0002 to the host with MAC address 0002.0000.0002.
Switch(config)# mac access-list extended maclist1
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit 0001.0000.0001 0.0.0 0002.0000.0001 0.0.0
Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit 0001.0000.0002 0.0.0 0002.0000.0002 0.0.0 xns-idp
! (Note: all other access implicitly denied)

OL-8553-06 34-45
Classifying Traffic by Using Class Maps

You use the class-map global configuration command to name and to isolate a specific traffic flow (or
class) from all other traffic. The class map defines the criteria to use to match against a specific traffic
flow to further classify it. Match statements can include criteria such as an ACL, IP precedence values,
or DSCP values. The match criterion is defined with one match statement entered within the class-map
configuration mode.
Note You can also create class-maps during policy map creation by using the class policy-map configuration
command. For more information, see the “Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic on Physical Ports
by Using Policy Maps” section on page 34-48 and the “Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic on
SVIs by Using Hierarchical Policy Maps” section on page 34-52.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a class map and to define the match
criterion to classify traffic:
Command Purpose
Step 2 access-list access-list-number {deny | Create an IP standard or extended ACL for IP traffic or a Layer 2 MAC
permit} source [source-wildcard] ACL for non-IP traffic, repeating the command as many times as
necessary.
or
For more information, see the “Classifying Traffic by Using ACLs”
access-list access-list-number {deny |
permit} protocol source
[source-wildcard] destination Note When creating an access list, remember that, by default, the
[destination-wildcard] end of the access list contains an implicit deny statement for
or
mac access-list extended name
{permit | deny} {host src-MAC-addr mask
| any | host dst-MAC-addr | dst-MAC-addr
mask} [type mask]
Step 3 class-map [match-all | match-any] Create a class map, and enter class-map configuration mode.
class-map-name
By default, no class maps are defined.
• (Optional) Use the match-all keyword to perform a logical-AND
of all matching statements under this class map. All match criteria
in the class map must be matched.
• (Optional) Use the match-any keyword to perform a logical-OR
of all matching statements under this class map. One or more
match criteria must be matched.
• For class-map-name, specify the name of the class map.
If neither the match-all or match-any keyword is specified, the
default is match-all.
Note Because only one match command per class map is supported,
the match-all and match-any keywords function the same.

34-46 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 4 match {access-group acl-index-or-name | Define the match criterion to classify traffic.
ip dscp dscp-list | ip precedence
By default, no match criterion is defined.
ip-precedence-list}
Only one match criterion per class map is supported, and only one ACL
per class map is supported.
• For access-group acl-index-or-name, specify the number or name
of the ACL created in Step 2.
• For ip dscp dscp-list, enter a list of up to eight IP DSCP values to
match against incoming packets. Separate each value with a space.
• For ip precedence ip-precedence-list, enter a list of up to eight
IP-precedence values to match against incoming packets. Separate
each value with a space. The range is 0 to 7.
Step 6 show class-map Verify your entries.
To delete an existing policy map, use the no policy-map policy-map-name global configuration
command. To delete an existing class map, use the no class-map [match-all | match-any]
class-map-name global configuration command. To remove a match criterion, use the no match
{access-group acl-index-or-name | ip dscp | ip precedence} class-map configuration command.
This example shows how to configure the class map called class1. The class1 has one match criterion,
which is access list 103. It permits traffic from any host to any destination that matches a DSCP value
of 10.
Switch(config)# access-list 103 permit ip any any dscp 10
Switch(config)# class-map class1
Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 103
Switch(config-cmap)# end
Switch#
This example shows how to create a class map called class2, which matches incoming traffic with DSCP
values of 10, 11, and 12.
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp 10 11 12
Switch#
This example shows how to create a class map called class3, which matches incoming traffic with
IP-precedence values of 5, 6, and 7:
Switch(config-cmap)# match ip precedence 5 6 7
Switch#

OL-8553-06 34-47
Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic on Physical Ports by Using Policy Maps
You can configure a nonhierarchical policy map on a physical port that specifies which traffic class to
act on. Actions can include trusting the CoS, DSCP, or IP precedence values in the traffic class; setting
a specific DSCP or IP precedence value in the traffic class; and specifying the traffic bandwidth
limitations for each matched traffic class (policer) and the action to take when the traffic is out of profile
(marking).
A policy map also has these characteristics:
• A policy map can contain multiple class statements, each with different match criteria and policers.
• A separate policy-map class can exist for each type of traffic received through a port.
• A policy-map trust state and a port trust state are mutually exclusive, and whichever is configured
last takes affect.
Follow these guidelines when configuring policy maps on physical ports:
• You can attach only one policy map per ingress port.
• If you configure the IP-precedence-to-DSCP map by using the mls qos map ip-prec-dscp
dscp1...dscp8 global configuration command, the settings only affect packets on ingress interfaces
that are configured to trust the IP precedence value. In a policy map, if you set the packet IP
precedence value to a new value by using the set ip precedence new-precedence policy-map class
configuration command, the egress DSCP value is not affected by the IP-precedence-to-DSCP map.
If you want the egress DSCP value to be different than the ingress value, use the set dscp new-dscp
policy-map class configuration command.
• In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later, if you enter or have used the set ip dscp command, the
switch changes this command to set dscp in its configuration.
• In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SEC or later, you can use the set ip precedence or the set precedence
policy-map class configuration command to change the packet IP precedence value. This setting
appears as set ip precedence in the switch configuration.
• In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SED or later, you can configure a separate second-level policy map
for each class defined for the port. The second-level policy map specifies the police action to take
for each traffic class. For information on configuring a hierarchical policy map, see Classifying,
Policing, and Marking Traffic on SVIs by Using Hierarchical Policy Maps, page 34-52.
• Beginning with Cisco IOS Release 12.2(40)SE, a policy-map and a port trust state can both run on
a physical interface. The policy-map is applied before the port trust state.

34-48 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a nonhierarchical policy map:
Command Purpose
Step 2 class-map [match-all | match-any] Create a class map, and enter class-map configuration mode.
class-map-name
• (Optional) Use the match-any keyword to perform a logical-OR of
all matching statements under this class map. One or more match
criteria must be matched.
If neither the match-all or match-any keyword is specified, the default
is match-all.
Step 3 policy-map policy-map-name Create a policy map by entering the policy map name, and enter
policy-map configuration mode.
By default, no policy maps are defined.
The default behavior of a policy map is to set the DSCP to 0 if the
packet is an IP packet and to set the CoS to 0 if the packet is tagged.
No policing is performed.
Step 4 class class-map-name Define a traffic classification, and enter policy-map class configuration
mode.
By default, no policy map class-maps are defined.
If a traffic class has already been defined by using the class-map global
configuration command, specify its name for class-map-name in this
command.

OL-8553-06 34-49
Command Purpose
Step 5 trust [cos | dscp | ip-precedence] Configure the trust state, which QoS uses to generate a CoS-based or
DSCP-based QoS label.
Note This command is mutually exclusive with the set command
within the same policy map. If you enter the trust command,
go to Step 6.
By default, the port is not trusted. If no keyword is specified when the

command is entered, the default is dscp.
• cos—QoS derives the DSCP value by using the received or default
port CoS value and the CoS-to-DSCP map.
• dscp—QoS derives the DSCP value by using the DSCP value from
the ingress packet. For non-IP packets that are tagged, QoS derives
the DSCP value by using the received CoS value; for non-IP
packets that are untagged, QoS derives the DSCP value by using
the default port CoS value. In either case, the DSCP value is
derived from the CoS-to-DSCP map.
• ip-precedence—QoS derives the DSCP value by using the IP
precedence value from the ingress packet and the
IP-precedence-to-DSCP map. For non-IP packets that are tagged,
QoS derives the DSCP value by using the received CoS value; for
non-IP packets that are untagged, QoS derives the DSCP value by
using the default port CoS value. In either case, the DSCP value is
For more information, see the “Configuring the CoS-to-DSCP Map”
Step 6 set {dscp new-dscp | ip precedence Classify IP traffic by setting a new value in the packet.
new-precedence}
• For dscp new-dscp, enter a new DSCP value to be assigned to the
classified traffic. The range is 0 to 63.
• For ip precedence new-precedence, enter a new IP-precedence
value to be assigned to the classified traffic. The range is 0 to 7.
Step 7 police rate-bps burst-byte [exceed-action Define a policer for the classified traffic.
{drop | policed-dscp-transmit}]
By default, no policer is defined. For information on the number of
policers supported, see the “Standard QoS Configuration Guidelines”
• For rate-bps, specify average traffic rate in bits per second (b/s).
The range is 8000 to 1000000000.
• For burst-byte, specify the normal burst size in bytes. The range is
8000 to 1000000.
• (Optional) Specify the action to take when the rates are exceeded.
Use the exceed-action drop keywords to drop the packet. Use the
exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit keywords to mark down the
DSCP value (by using the policed-DSCP map) and to send the
packet. For more information, see the “Configuring the
Policed-DSCP Map” section on page 34-63.

34-50 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 8 exit Return to policy map configuration mode.
Step 10 interface interface-id Specify the port to attach to the policy map, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 11 service-policy input policy-map-name Specify the policy-map name, and apply it to an ingress port.
Only one policy map per ingress port is supported.
Step 13 show policy-map [policy-map-name [class Verify your entries.
class-map-name]]
command. To delete an existing class map, use the no class class-map-name policy-map configuration
command. To return to the untrusted state, use the no trust policy-map configuration command. To
remove an assigned DSCP or IP precedence value, use the no set {dscp new-dscp | ip precedence
new-precedence} policy-map configuration command. To remove an existing policer, use the no police
rate-bps burst-byte [exceed-action {drop | policed-dscp-transmit}] policy-map configuration
command. To remove the policy map and port association, use the no service-policy input
policy-map-name interface configuration command.
This example shows how to create a policy map and attach it to an ingress port. In the configuration, the
IP standard ACL permits traffic from network 10.1.0.0. For traffic matching this classification, the
DSCP value in the incoming packet is trusted. If the matched traffic exceeds an average traffic rate
of 48000 b/s and a normal burst size of 8000 bytes, its DSCP is marked down (based on the
policed-DSCP map) and sent:
Switch(config)# class-map ipclass1
Switch(config-cmap)# exit
Switch(config)# policy-map flow1t
Switch(config-pmap)# class ipclass1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# trust dscp
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 1000000 8000 exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
Switch(config-pmap)# exit
Switch(config-if)# service-policy input flow1t
This example shows how to create a Layer 2 MAC ACL with two permit statements and attach it to an
ingress port. The first permit statement allows traffic from the host with MAC address 0001.0000.0001
destined for the host with MAC address 0002.0000.0001. The second permit statement allows only
Ethertype XNS-IDP traffic from the host with MAC address 0001.0000.0002 destined for the host with
MAC address 0002.0000.0002.
Switch(config-ext-mac)# permit 0001.0000.0001 0.0.0 0002.0000.0001 0.0.0
Switch(config-ext-mac)# permit 0001.0000.0002 0.0.0 0002.0000.0002 0.0.0 xns-idp
Switch(config-ext-mac)# exit
Switch(config-ext-mac)# permit 0001.0000.0003 0.0.0 0002.0000.0003 0.0.0
Switch(config-ext-mac)# permit 0001.0000.0004 0.0.0 0002.0000.0004 0.0.0 aarp

OL-8553-06 34-51
Switch(config-ext-mac)# exit
Switch(config)# class-map macclass1
Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group maclist1
Switch(config)# policy-map macpolicy1
Switch(config-pmap)# class macclass1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# set dscp 63
Switch(config-pmap)# class macclass2 maclist2
Switch(config-if)# mls qos trust cos
Switch(config-if)# service-policy input macpolicy1
Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic on SVIs by Using Hierarchical Policy Maps
In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later, you can configure hierarchical policy maps on SVIs, but not
on other types of interfaces. Hierarchical policing combines the VLAN- and interface-level policy maps
to create a single policy map.
On an SVI, the VLAN-level policy map specifies which traffic class to act on. Actions can include
trusting the CoS, DSCP, or IP precedence values or setting a specific DSCP or IP precedence value in
the traffic class. Use the interface-level policy map to specify the physical ports that are affected by
individual policers.
Follow these guidelines when configuring hierarchical policy maps:
• Before configuring a hierarchical policy map, you must enable VLAN-based QoS on the physical
ports that are to be specified at the interface level of the policy map.
• You can attach only one policy map per ingress port or SVI.
• A policy map can contain multiple class statements, each with different match criteria and actions.
• A separate policy-map class can exist for each type of traffic received on the SVI.
• Beginning with Cisco IOS Release 12.2(40)SE, a policy-map and a port trust state can both run on
a physical interface. The policy-map is applied before the port trust state.
• If you configure the IP-precedence-to-DSCP map by using the mls qos map ip-prec-dscp
dscp1...dscp8 global configuration command, the settings only affect packets on ingress interfaces
that are configured to trust the IP precedence value. In a policy map, if you set the packet IP
precedence value to a new value by using the set ip precedence new-precedence policy-map class
configuration command, the egress DSCP value is not affected by the IP-precedence-to-DSCP map.
If you want the egress DSCP value to be different than the ingress value, use the set dscp new-dscp
policy-map class configuration command.
• In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SE or later, if you enter or have used the set ip dscp command, the
switch changes this command to set dscp in its configuration. If you enter the set ip dscp command,
this setting appears as set dscp in the switch configuration.
• In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SEC or later, you can use the set ip precedence or the set precedence
policy-map class configuration command to change the packet IP precedence value. This setting
appears as set ip precedence in the switch configuration.
• If VLAN-based QoS is enabled, the hierarchical policy map supersedes the previously configured
port-based policy map.

34-52 OL-8553-06
• The hierarchical policy map is attached to the SVI and affects all traffic belonging to the VLAN.
The actions specified in the VLAN-level policy map affect the traffic belonging to the SVI. The
police action on the port-level policy map affects the ingress traffic on the affected physical
interfaces.
• When configuring a hierarchical policy map on trunk ports, the VLAN ranges must not overlap. If
the ranges overlap, the actions specified in the policy map affect the incoming and outgoing traffic
on the overlapped VLANs.
• Aggregate policers are not supported in hierarchical policy maps.
• When VLAN-based QoS is enabled, the switch supports VLAN-based features, such as the VLAN
map.
• You can configure a hierarchical policy map only on the primary VLAN of a private VLAN.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a hierarchical policy map:
Command Purpose
Step 2 class-map [match-all | match-any] Create a VLAN-level class map, and enter class-map configuration
class-map-name mode. For information about creating a class map, see the “Classifying
Traffic by Using Class Maps” section on page 34-46.
is match-all.
Step 3 match {access-group acl-index-or-name | Define the match criterion to classify traffic.
ip dscp dscp-list | ip precedence
By default, no match criterion is defined.
ip-precedence-list}
Only one match criterion per class map is supported, and only one ACL
per class map is supported.
• For access-group acl-index-or-name, specify the number or name
of the ACL.
• For ip dscp dscp-list, enter a list of up to eight IP DSCP values to
match against incoming packets. Separate each value with a space.
• For ip precedence ip-precedence-list, enter a list of up to eight
IP-precedence values to match against incoming packets. Separate
Step 4 exit Return to class-map configuration mode.

OL-8553-06 34-53
Command Purpose
Step 6 class-map [match-all | match-any] Create an interface-level class map, and enter class-map configuration
class-map-name mode.
is match-all.
Step 7 match input-interface interface-id-list Specify the physical ports on which the interface-level class map acts.
You can specify up to six ports as follows:
• A single port (counts as one entry)
• A list of ports separated by a space (each port counts as an entry)
• A range of ports separated by a hyphen (counts as two entries)
This command can only be used in the child-level policy map and must
be the only match condition in the child-level policy map.
Step 8 exit Return to class-map configuration mode.
Step 10 policy-map policy-map-name Create an interface-level policy map by entering the policy-map name,
and enter policy-map configuration mode.
By default, no policy maps are defined, and no policing is performed.
Step 11 class-map class-map-name Define an interface-level traffic classification, and enter policy-map
configuration mode.
By default, no policy-map class-maps are defined.
command.

34-54 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 12 police rate-bps burst-byte [exceed-action Define an individual policer for the classified traffic.
{drop | policed-dscp-transmit}]
By default, no policer is defined. For information on the number of
policers supported, see the “Standard QoS Configuration Guidelines”
• For rate-bps, specify average traffic rate in bits per second (b/s).
The range is 8000 to 1000000000.
• For burst-byte, specify the normal burst size in bytes. The range is
8000 to 1000000.
• (Optional) Specify the action to take when the rates are exceeded.
Use the exceed-action drop keywords to drop the packet. Use the
exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit keywords to mark down the
DSCP value (by using the policed-DSCP map) and to send the
packet. For more information, see the “Configuring the
Step 13 exit Return to policy-map configuration mode.
Step 15 policy-map policy-map-name Create a VLAN-level policy map by entering the policy-map name, and
enter policy-map configuration mode.
By default, no policy maps are defined.
The default behavior of a policy map is to set the DSCP to 0 if the
packet is an IP packet and to set the CoS to 0 if the packet is tagged. No
policing is performed.
Step 16 class class-map-name Define a VLAN-level traffic classification, and enter policy-map class
configuration mode.
By default, no policy-map class-maps are defined.
command.

OL-8553-06 34-55
Command Purpose
Step 17 trust [cos | dscp | ip-precedence] Configure the trust state, which QoS uses to generate a CoS-based or
DSCP-based QoS label.
Note This command is mutually exclusive with the set command
within the same policy map. If you enter the trust command,
omit Step 18.
By default, the port is not trusted. If no keyword is specified when the

command is entered, the default is dscp.
• cos—QoS derives the DSCP value by using the received or default
port CoS value and the CoS-to-DSCP map.
• dscp—QoS derives the DSCP value by using the DSCP value from
the ingress packet. For non-IP packets that are tagged, QoS derives
the DSCP value by using the received CoS value; for non-IP
packets that are untagged, QoS derives the DSCP value by using
the default port CoS value. In either case, the DSCP value is
• ip-precedence—QoS derives the DSCP value by using the IP
precedence value from the ingress packet and the
IP-precedence-to-DSCP map. For non-IP packets that are tagged,
QoS derives the DSCP value by using the received CoS value; for
non-IP packets that are untagged, QoS derives the DSCP value by
using the default port CoS value. In either case, the DSCP value is
For more information, see the “Configuring the CoS-to-DSCP Map”
Step 18 set {dscp new-dscp | ip precedence Classify IP traffic by setting a new value in the packet.
new-precedence}
• For dscp new-dscp, enter a new DSCP value to be assigned to the
classified traffic. The range is 0 to 63.
• For ip precedence new-precedence, enter a new IP-precedence
value to be assigned to the classified traffic. The range is 0 to 7.
Step 19 service-policy policy-map-name Specify the interface-level policy-map name (from Step 10) and
associate it with the VLAN-level policy map.
If the VLAN-level policy map specifies more than one class, beginning
in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SED, each class can have a different
service-policy policy-map-name command.
Step 20 exit Return to policy-map configuration mode.
Step 22 interface interface-id Specify the SVI to which to attach the hierarchical policy map, and

34-56 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 23 service-policy input policy-map-name Specify the VLAN-level policy-map name, and apply it to the SVI.
Repeat the previous step and this command to apply the policy map to
other SVIs.
If the hierarchical VLAN-level policy map has more than one
interface-level policy map, all class maps must be configured to the
same VLAN-level policy map specified in the service-policy
policy-map-name command.
Step 25 show policy-map [policy-map-name [class Verify your entries.
class-map-name]]
or
show mls qos vlan-based
command. To delete an existing class map, use the no class class-map-name policy-map configuration
command.
To return to the untrusted state in a policy map, use the no trust policy-map configuration command.
To remove an assigned DSCP or IP precedence value, use the no set {dscp new-dscp | ip precedence
new-precedence} policy-map configuration command.
To remove an existing policer in an interface-level policy map, use the no police rate-bps burst-byte
[exceed-action {drop | policed-dscp-transmit}] policy-map configuration command. To remove the
hierarchical policy map and port associations, use the no service-policy input policy-map-name
This example shows how to create a hierarchical policy map:
Switch> enable
Switch(config)# access-list 101 permit ip any any
Switch(config)# class-map cm-1
Switch(config-cmap)# match access 101
Switch#
This example shows how to attach the new map to an SVI:

Switch(config)# class-map cm-interface-1
Switch(config-cmap)# match input g3/0/1 - g3/0/2
Switch(config)# policy-map port-plcmap
Switch(config-pmap)# class-map cm-interface-1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 900000 9000 exc policed-dscp-transmit
Switch(config)# policy-map vlan-plcmap
Switch(config-pmap)# class-map cm-1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# service-policy port-plcmap-1

OL-8553-06 34-57

Switch(config-pmap-c)# match ip dscp 2
Switch(config-pmap-c)# match ip dscp 3
Switch(config-if)# ser input vlan-plcmap
Switch#
Classifying, Policing, and Marking Traffic by Using Aggregate Policers

By using an aggregate policer, you can create a policer that is shared by multiple traffic classes within
the same policy map. However, you cannot use the aggregate policer across different policy maps or
ports.
You can configure aggregate policers only in nonhierarchical policy maps on physical ports.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create an aggregate policer:
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos aggregate-policer Define the policer parameters that can be applied to multiple traffic
aggregate-policer-name rate-bps burst-byte classes within the same policy map.
exceed-action {drop |
By default, no aggregate policer is defined. For information on the
policed-dscp-transmit}
number of policers supported, see the “Standard QoS Configuration
Guidelines” section on page 34-33.
• For aggregate-policer-name, specify the name of the aggregate
policer.
• For rate-bps, specify average traffic rate in bits per second
(b/s). The range is 8000 to 1000000000.
• For burst-byte, specify the normal burst size in bytes. The range
is 8000 to 1000000.
• Specify the action to take when the rates are exceeded. Use the
exceed-action drop keywords to drop the packet. Use the
exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit keywords to mark down
the DSCP value (by using the policed-DSCP map) and to send
the packet. For more information, see the “Configuring the
Step 3 class-map [match-all | match-any] Create a class map to classify traffic as necessary. For more
class-map-name information, see the “Classifying Traffic by Using Class Maps”

34-58 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 4 policy-map policy-map-name Create a policy map by entering the policy map name, and enter
policy-map configuration mode.
For more information, see the “Classifying, Policing, and Marking
Traffic on Physical Ports by Using Policy Maps” section on
page 34-48.
Step 5 class class-map-name Define a traffic classification, and enter policy-map class
configuration mode.
For more information, see the “Classifying, Policing, and Marking
Traffic on Physical Ports by Using Policy Maps” section on
page 34-48.
Step 6 police aggregate aggregate-policer-name Apply an aggregate policer to multiple classes in the same policy
map.
For aggregate-policer-name, enter the name specified in Step 2.
Step 8 interface interface-id Specify the port to attach to the policy map, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 9 service-policy input policy-map-name Specify the policy-map name, and apply it to an ingress port.
Only one policy map per ingress port is supported.
Step 11 show mls qos aggregate-policer Verify your entries.
[aggregate-policer-name]
To remove the specified aggregate policer from a policy map, use the no police aggregate
aggregate-policer-name policy map configuration mode. To delete an aggregate policer and its
parameters, use the no mls qos aggregate-policer aggregate-policer-name global configuration
command.
This example shows how to create an aggregate policer and attach it to multiple classes within a policy
map. In the configuration, the IP ACLs permit traffic from network 10.1.0.0 and from host 11.3.1.1. For
traffic coming from network 10.1.0.0, the DSCP in the incoming packets is trusted. For traffic coming
from host 11.3.1.1, the DSCP in the packet is changed to 56. The traffic rate from the 10.1.0.0 network
and from host 11.3.1.1 is policed. If the traffic exceeds an average rate of 48000 b/s and a normal burst
size of 8000 bytes, its DSCP is marked down (based on the policed-DSCP map) and sent. The policy
map is attached to an ingress port.
Switch(config)# mls qos aggregate-police transmit1 48000 8000 exceed-action
policed-dscp-transmit
Switch(config)# policy-map aggflow1

OL-8553-06 34-59

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police aggregate transmit1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police aggregate transmit1
Switch(config-if)# service-policy input aggflow1
Configuring DSCP Maps

• Configuring the CoS-to-DSCP Map, page 34-60 (optional)
• Configuring the IP-Precedence-to-DSCP Map, page 34-62 (optional)
• Configuring the Policed-DSCP Map, page 34-63 (optional, unless the null settings in the map are
not appropriate)
• Configuring the DSCP-to-CoS Map, page 34-64 (optional)
• Configuring the DSCP-to-DSCP-Mutation Map, page 34-65 (optional, unless the null settings in the
map are not appropriate)
All the maps, except the DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map, are globally defined and are applied to all ports.
Configuring the CoS-to-DSCP Map

You use the CoS-to-DSCP map to map CoS values in incoming packets to a DSCP value that QoS uses
internally to represent the priority of the traffic.
Table 34-12 shows the default CoS-to-DSCP map.
Table 34-12 Default CoS-to-DSCP Map
CoS Value DSCP Value

0 0
1 8
2 16
3 24
4 32
5 40
6 48
7 56
If these values are not appropriate for your network, you need to modify them.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to modify the CoS-to-DSCP map. This

34-60 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos map cos-dscp dscp1...dscp8 Modify the CoS-to-DSCP map.
For dscp1...dscp8, enter eight DSCP values that correspond to CoS values
0 to 7. Separate each DSCP value with a space.
Step 4 show mls qos maps cos-dscp Verify your entries.
To return to the default map, use the no mls qos cos-dscp global configuration command.
This example shows how to modify and display the CoS-to-DSCP map:
Switch(config)# mls qos map cos-dscp 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
Switch(config)# end

OL-8553-06 34-61
Switch# show mls qos maps cos-dscp
Cos-dscp map:
cos: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
--------------------------------
dscp: 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
Configuring the IP-Precedence-to-DSCP Map

You use the IP-precedence-to-DSCP map to map IP precedence values in incoming packets to a DSCP
value that QoS uses internally to represent the priority of the traffic.
Table 34-13 shows the default IP-precedence-to-DSCP map:
Table 34-13 Default IP-Precedence-to-DSCP Map
IP Precedence Value DSCP Value

0 0
1 8
2 16
3 24
4 32
5 40
6 48
7 56
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to modify the IP-precedence-to-DSCP map.
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos map ip-prec-dscp Modify the IP-precedence-to-DSCP map.
dscp1...dscp8
For dscp1...dscp8, enter eight DSCP values that correspond to the IP
precedence values 0 to 7. Separate each DSCP value with a space.
Step 4 show mls qos maps ip-prec-dscp Verify your entries.
To return to the default map, use the no mls qos ip-prec-dscp global configuration command.
This example shows how to modify and display the IP-precedence-to-DSCP map:
Switch(config)# mls qos map ip-prec-dscp 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
Switch(config)# end

34-62 OL-8553-06
Switch# show mls qos maps ip-prec-dscp
IpPrecedence-dscp map:
ipprec: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
--------------------------------
dscp: 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
Configuring the Policed-DSCP Map

You use the policed-DSCP map to mark down a DSCP value to a new value as the result of a policing
and marking action.
The default policed-DSCP map is a null map, which maps an incoming DSCP value to the same DSCP
value.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to modify the policed-DSCP map. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos map policed-dscp dscp-list to Modify the policed-DSCP map.
mark-down-dscp
• For dscp-list, enter up to eight DSCP values separated by spaces.
• For mark-down-dscp, enter the corresponding policed (marked down)
DSCP value.
Step 4 show mls qos maps policed-dscp Verify your entries.
To return to the default map, use the no mls qos policed-dscp global configuration command.
This example shows how to map DSCP 50 to 57 to a marked-down DSCP value of 0:
Switch(config)# mls qos map policed-dscp 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 to 0
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show mls qos maps policed-dscp
Policed-dscp map:
d1 : d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
---------------------------------------
0 : 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
1 : 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
2 : 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
3 : 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
4 : 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
5 : 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 58 59
6 : 60 61 62 63
Note In this policed-DSCP map, the marked-down DSCP values are shown in the body of the matrix. The d1
column specifies the most-significant digit of the original DSCP; the d2 row specifies the
least-significant digit of the original DSCP. The intersection of the d1 and d2 values provides the
marked-down value. For example, an original DSCP value of 53 corresponds to a marked-down DSCP
value of 0.

OL-8553-06 34-63
Configuring the DSCP-to-CoS Map

You use the DSCP-to-CoS map to generate a CoS value, which is used to select one of the four egress
queues.
Table 34-14 shows the default DSCP-to-CoS map.
Table 34-14 Default DSCP-to-CoS Map
DSCP Value CoS Value

0–7 0
8–15 1
16–23 2
24–31 3
32–39 4
40–47 5
48–55 6
56–63 7
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to modify the DSCP-to-CoS map. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos map dscp-cos dscp-list to cos Modify the DSCP-to-CoS map.
• For dscp-list, enter up to eight DSCP values separated by spaces.
• For cos, enter the CoS value to which the DSCP values correspond.
The DSCP range is 0 to 63; the CoS range is 0 to 7.
Step 4 show mls qos maps dscp-to-cos Verify your entries.
To return to the default map, use the no mls qos dscp-cos global configuration command.
This example shows how to map DSCP values 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, and 50 to CoS value 0 and to
display the map:
Switch(config)# mls qos map dscp-cos 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 50 to 0
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show mls qos maps dscp-cos
Dscp-cos map:
d1 : d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
---------------------------------------
0 : 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
1 : 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 02 02 02
2 : 02 02 02 02 00 03 03 03 03 03

34-64 OL-8553-06
3 : 03 03 00 04 04 04 04 04 04 04
4 : 00 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 00 06
5 : 00 06 06 06 06 06 07 07 07 07
6 : 07 07 07 07
Note In the above DSCP-to-CoS map, the CoS values are shown in the body of the matrix. The d1 column
specifies the most-significant digit of the DSCP; the d2 row specifies the least-significant digit of the
DSCP. The intersection of the d1 and d2 values provides the CoS value. For example, in the
DSCP-to-CoS map, a DSCP value of 08 corresponds to a CoS value of 0.
Configuring the DSCP-to-DSCP-Mutation Map

If two QoS domains have different DSCP definitions, use the DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map to translate
one set of DSCP values to match the definition of another domain. You apply the
DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map to the receiving port (ingress mutation) at the boundary of a QoS
administrative domain.
With ingress mutation, the new DSCP value overwrites the one in the packet, and QoS treats the packet
with this new value. The switch sends the packet out the port with the new DSCP value.
You can configure multiple DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation maps on an ingress port. The default
DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map is a null map, which maps an incoming DSCP value to the same DSCP
value.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to modify the DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map.
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos map dscp-mutation Modify the DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map.
dscp-mutation-name in-dscp to out-dscp
• For dscp-mutation-name, enter the mutation map name. You can
create more than one map by specifying a new name.
• For in-dscp, enter up to eight DSCP values separated by spaces.
• For out-dscp, enter a single DSCP value.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the port to which to attach the map, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 4 mls qos trust dscp Configure the ingress port as a DSCP-trusted port. By default, the port
is not trusted.
Step 5 mls qos dscp-mutation Apply the map to the specified ingress DSCP-trusted port.
dscp-mutation-name
For dscp-mutation-name, enter the mutation map name specified in
Step 2.
Step 7 show mls qos maps dscp-mutation Verify your entries.

OL-8553-06 34-65
To return to the default map, use the no mls qos dscp-mutation dscp-mutation-name global
This example shows how to define the DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map. All the entries that are not
explicitly configured are not modified (remains as specified in the null map):
Switch(config)# mls qos map dscp-mutation mutation1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 to 0
Switch(config)# mls qos map dscp-mutation mutation1 8 9 10 11 12 13 to 10
Switch(config)# mls qos map dscp-mutation mutation1 20 21 22 to 20
Switch(config)# mls qos map dscp-mutation mutation1 30 31 32 33 34 to 30
Switch(config-if)# mls qos trust dscp
Switch(config-if)# mls qos dscp-mutation mutation1
Switch# show mls qos maps dscp-mutation mutation1
Dscp-dscp mutation map:
mutation1:
d1 : d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
---------------------------------------
0 : 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 10
1 : 10 10 10 10 14 15 16 17 18 19
2 : 20 20 20 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
3 : 30 30 30 30 30 35 36 37 38 39
4 : 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
5 : 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
6 : 60 61 62 63
Note In the above DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map, the mutated values are shown in the body of the matrix. The
d1 column specifies the most-significant digit of the original DSCP; the d2 row specifies the
least-significant digit of the original DSCP. The intersection of the d1 and d2 values provides the
mutated value. For example, a DSCP value of 12 corresponds to a mutated value of 10.
Configuring Ingress Queue Characteristics

Depending on the complexity of your network and your QoS solution, you might need to perform all of
the tasks in the next sections. You will need to make decisions about these characteristics:
• Which packets are assigned (by DSCP or CoS value) to each queue?
• What drop percentage thresholds apply to each queue, and which CoS or DSCP values map to each
threshold?
• How much of the available buffer space is allocated between the queues?
• How much of the available bandwidth is allocated between the queues?
• Is there traffic (such as voice) that should be given high priority?
• Mapping DSCP or CoS Values to an Ingress Queue and Setting WTD Thresholds, page 34-67
(optional)
• Allocating Buffer Space Between the Ingress Queues, page 34-68 (optional)
• Allocating Bandwidth Between the Ingress Queues, page 34-68 (optional)
• Configuring the Ingress Priority Queue, page 34-69 (optional)

34-66 OL-8553-06
Mapping DSCP or CoS Values to an Ingress Queue and Setting WTD Thresholds
You can prioritize traffic by placing packets with particular DSCPs or CoSs into certain queues and
adjusting the queue thresholds so that packets with lower priorities are dropped.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to map DSCP or CoS values to an ingress queue
and to set WTD thresholds. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map Map DSCP or CoS values to an ingress queue and to a threshold ID.
queue queue-id threshold threshold-id
By default, DSCP values 0–39 and 48–63 are mapped to queue 1 and
dscp1...dscp8
threshold 1. DSCP values 40–47 are mapped to queue 2 and threshold 1.
or
By default, CoS values 0–4, 6, and 7 are mapped to queue 1 and threshold
mls qos srr-queue input cos-map 1. CoS value 5 is mapped to queue 2 and threshold 1.
• For queue-id, the range is 1 to 2.
cos1...cos8
• For threshold-id, the range is 1 to 3. The drop-threshold percentage
for threshold 3 is predefined. It is set to the queue-full state.
• For dscp1...dscp8, enter up to eight values, and separate each value
with a space. The range is 0 to 63.
• For cos1...cos8, enter up to eight values, and separate each value with
a space. The range is 0 to 7.
Step 3 mls qos srr-queue input threshold Assign the two WTD threshold percentages for (threshold 1 and 2) to an
queue-id threshold-percentage1 ingress queue. The default, both thresholds are set to 100 percent.
threshold-percentage2
• For threshold-percentage1 threshold-percentage2, the range is 1 to
100. Separate each value with a space.
Each threshold value is a percentage of the total number of queue
descriptors allocated for the queue.
Step 5 show mls qos maps Verify your entries.
The DSCP input queue threshold map appears as a matrix. The d1 column
specifies the most-significant digit of the DSCP number; the d2 row
specifies the least-significant digit in the DSCP number. The intersection
of the d1 and the d2 values provides the queue ID and threshold ID; for
example, queue 2 and threshold 1 (02-01).
The CoS input queue threshold map shows the CoS value in the top row
and the corresponding queue ID and threshold ID in the second row; for
To return to the default CoS input queue threshold map or the default DSCP input queue threshold map,
use the no mls qos srr-queue input cos-map or the no mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map global
configuration command. To return to the default WTD threshold percentages, use the no mls qos
srr-queue input threshold queue-id global configuration command.

OL-8553-06 34-67
This example shows how to map DSCP values 0 to 6 to ingress queue 1 and to threshold 1 with a drop
threshold of 50 percent. It maps DSCP values 20 to 26 to ingress queue 1 and to threshold 2 with a drop
threshold of 70 percent:
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue 1 threshold 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue 1 threshold 2 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input threshold 1 50 70
In this example, the DSCP values (0 to 6) are assigned the WTD threshold of 50 percent and will be
dropped sooner than the DSCP values (20 to 26) assigned to the WTD threshold of 70 percent.
Allocating Buffer Space Between the Ingress Queues

You define the ratio (allocate the amount of space) with which to divide the ingress buffers between the
two queues. The buffer and the bandwidth allocation control how much data can be buffered before
packets are dropped.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to allocate the buffers between the ingress
queues. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos srr-queue input buffers Allocate the buffers between the ingress queues
percentage1 percentage2
By default 90 percent of the buffers are allocated to queue 1, and 10
percent of the buffers are allocated to queue 2.
For percentage1 percentage2, the range is 0 to 100. Separate each value
with a space.
You should allocate the buffers so that the queues can handle any
incoming bursty traffic.
Step 4 show mls qos interface buffer Verify your entries.
or
show mls qos input-queue
To return to the default setting, use the no mls qos srr-queue input buffers global configuration
command.
This example shows how to allocate 60 percent of the buffer space to ingress queue 1 and 40 percent of
the buffer space to ingress queue 2:
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input buffers 60 40
Allocating Bandwidth Between the Ingress Queues

You need to specify how much of the available bandwidth is allocated between the ingress queues. The
ratio of the weights is the ratio of the frequency in which the SRR scheduler sends packets from each
queue. The bandwidth and the buffer allocation control how much data can be buffered before packets
are dropped. On ingress queues, SRR operates only in shared mode.

34-68 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to allocate bandwidth between the ingress
queues. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos srr-queue input bandwidth Assign shared round robin weights to the ingress queues.
weight1 weight2
The default setting for weight1 and weight2 is 4 (1/2 of the bandwidth is
equally shared between the two queues).
For weight1 and weight2, the range is 1 to 100. Separate each value with
a space.
SRR services the priority queue for its configured weight as specified by
the bandwidth keyword in the mls qos srr-queue input priority-queue
queue-id bandwidth weight global configuration command. Then, SRR
shares the remaining bandwidth with both ingress queues and services
them as specified by the weights configured with the mls qos srr-queue
input bandwidth weight1 weight2 global configuration command. For
more information, see the “Configuring the Ingress Priority Queue”
Step 4 show mls qos interface queueing Verify your entries.
or
To return to the default setting, use the no mls qos srr-queue input bandwidth global configuration
command.
This example shows how to assign the ingress bandwidth to the queues. Priority queueing is disabled,
and the shared bandwidth ratio allocated to queue 1 is 25/(25+75) and to queue 2 is 75/(25+75):
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input priority-queue 2 bandwidth 0
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input bandwidth 25 75
Configuring the Ingress Priority Queue

You should use the priority queue only for traffic that needs to be expedited (for example, voice traffic,
which needs minimum delay and jitter).
The priority queue is guaranteed part of the bandwidth to reduce the delay and jitter under heavy network
traffic on an oversubscribed ring (when there is more traffic than the backplane can carry, and the queues
are full and dropping frames).
SRR services the priority queue for its configured weight as specified by the bandwidth keyword in the
mls qos srr-queue input priority-queue queue-id bandwidth weight global configuration command.
Then, SRR shares the remaining bandwidth with both ingress queues and services them as specified by
the weights configured with the mls qos srr-queue input bandwidth weight1 weight2 global

OL-8553-06 34-69
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the priority queue. This procedure
is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos srr-queue input Assign a queue as the priority queue and guarantee bandwidth on the
priority-queue queue-id bandwidth internal ring if the ring is congested.
weight
By default, the priority queue is queue 2, and 10 percent of the bandwidth
is allocated to it.
• For bandwidth weight, assign the bandwidth percentage of the
internal ring. The range is 0 to 40. The amount of bandwidth that can
be guaranteed is restricted because a large value affects the entire ring
and can degrade performance.
Step 4 show mls qos interface queueing Verify your entries.
or
To return to the default setting, use the no mls qos srr-queue input priority-queue queue-id global
configuration command. To disable priority queueing, set the bandwidth weight to 0, for example, mls
qos srr-queue input priority-queue queue-id bandwidth 0.
This example shows how to assign the ingress bandwidths to the queues. Queue 1 is the priority queue
with 10 percent of the bandwidth allocated to it. The bandwidth ratios allocated to queues 1 and 2 is
4/(4+4). SRR services queue 1 (the priority queue) first for its configured 10 percent bandwidth. Then
SRR equally shares the remaining 90 percent of the bandwidth between queues 1 and 2 by allocating 45
percent to each queue:
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input priority-queue 1 bandwidth 10
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue input bandwidth 4 4
Configuring Egress Queue Characteristics

Depending on the complexity of your network and your QoS solution, you might need to perform all of
the tasks in the next sections. You will need to make decisions about these characteristics:
• Which packets are mapped by DSCP or CoS value to each queue and threshold ID?
• What drop percentage thresholds apply to the queue-set (four egress queues per port), and how much
reserved and maximum memory is needed for the traffic type?
• How much of the fixed buffer space is allocated to the queue-set?
• Does the bandwidth of the port need to be rate limited?
• How often should the egress queues be serviced and which technique (shaped, shared, or both)
should be used?

34-70 OL-8553-06

• Allocating Buffer Space to and Setting WTD Thresholds for an Egress Queue-Set, page 34-71
(optional)
• Mapping DSCP or CoS Values to an Egress Queue and to a Threshold ID, page 34-73 (optional)
• Configuring SRR Shaped Weights on Egress Queues, page 34-74 (optional)
• Configuring SRR Shared Weights on Egress Queues, page 34-75 (optional)
• Configuring the Egress Expedite Queue, page 34-76 (optional)
• Limiting the Bandwidth on an Egress Interface, page 34-77 (optional)
Follow these guidelines when the expedite queue is enabled or the egress queues are serviced based on
their SRR weights:
• If the egress expedite queue is enabled, it overrides the SRR shaped and shared weights for queue 1.
• If the egress expedite queue is disabled and the SRR shaped and shared weights are configured, the
shaped mode overrides the shared mode for queue 1, and SRR services this queue in shaped mode.
• If the egress expedite queue is disabled and the SRR shaped weights are not configured, SRR
services this queue in shared mode.
Allocating Buffer Space to and Setting WTD Thresholds for an Egress Queue-Set
You can guarantee the availability of buffers, set WTD thresholds, and configure the maximum
allocation for a queue-set by using the mls qos queue-set output qset-id threshold queue-id
drop-threshold1 drop-threshold2 reserved-threshold maximum-threshold global configuration
commands.
Each threshold value is a percentage of the queues allocated buffers, which you specify by using the mls
qos queue-set output qset-id buffers allocation1 ... allocation4 global configuration command. The
queues use WTD to support distinct drop percentages for different traffic classes.
solution.

OL-8553-06 34-71
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the memory allocation and to drop
thresholds for a queue-set. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos queue-set output qset-id Allocate buffers to a queue-set.
buffers allocation1 ... allocation4
By default, all allocation values are equally mapped among the four
queues (25, 25, 25, 25). Each queue has 1/4 of the buffer space.
• For qset-id, enter the ID of the queue-set. The range is 1 to 2. Each
port belongs to a queue-set, which defines all the characteristics of
the four egress queues per port.
• For allocation1 ... allocation4, specify four percentages, one for each
queue in the queue-set. For allocation1, allocation3, and allocation4,
the range is 0 to 99. For allocation2, the range is 1 to 100 (including
the CPU buffer).
Allocate buffers according to the importance of the traffic; for example,
give a large percentage of the buffer to the queue with the highest-priority
traffic.
Step 3 mls qos queue-set output qset-id Configure the WTD thresholds, guarantee the availability of buffers, and
threshold queue-id drop-threshold1 configure the maximum memory allocation for the queue-set (four egress
drop-threshold2 reserved-threshold queues per port).
maximum-threshold
By default, the WTD thresholds for queues 1, 3, and 4 are set to 100
percent. The thresholds for queue 2 are set to 200 percent. The reserved
thresholds for queues 1, 2, 3, and 4 are set to 50 percent. The maximum
thresholds for all queues are set to 400 percent.
• For qset-id, enter the ID of the queue-set specified in Step 2. The
range is 1 to 2.
• For queue-id, enter the specific queue in the queue-set on which the
command is performed. The range is 1 to 4.
• For drop-threshold1 drop-threshold2, specify the two WTD
thresholds expressed as a percentage of the queue’s allocated
memory. The range is 1 to 3200 percent.
• For reserved-threshold, enter the amount of memory to be guaranteed
(reserved) for the queue expressed as a percentage of the allocated
memory. The range is 1 to 100 percent.
• For maximum-threshold, enable a queue in the full condition to obtain
more buffers than are reserved for it. This is the maximum memory
the queue can have before the packets are dropped if the common
pool is not empty. The range is 1 to 3200 percent.
Step 4 interface interface-id Specify the port of the outbound traffic, and enter interface configuration
mode.
Step 5 queue-set qset-id Map the port to a queue-set.
For qset-id, enter the ID of the queue-set specified in Step 2. The range is
1 to 2. The default is 1.

34-72 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
buffers
To return to the default setting, use the no mls qos queue-set output qset-id buffers global
configuration command. To return to the default WTD threshold percentages, use the no mls qos
queue-set output qset-id threshold [queue-id] global configuration command.
This example shows how to map a port to queue-set 2. It allocates 40 percent of the buffer space to egress
queue 1 and 20 percent to egress queues 2, 3, and 4. It configures the drop thresholds for queue 2 to 40
and 60 percent of the allocated memory, guarantees (reserves) 100 percent of the allocated memory, and
configures 200 percent as the maximum memory that this queue can have before packets are dropped:
Switch(config)# mls qos queue-set output 2 buffers 40 20 20 20
Switch(config)# mls qos queue-set output 2 threshold 2 40 60 100 200
lSwitch(config-if)# queue-set 2
Mapping DSCP or CoS Values to an Egress Queue and to a Threshold ID

You can prioritize traffic by placing packets with particular DSCPs or costs of service into certain
queues and adjusting the queue thresholds so that packets with lower priorities are dropped.
solution.

OL-8553-06 34-73
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to map DSCP or CoS values to an egress queue
and to a threshold ID. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map Map DSCP or CoS values to an egress queue and to a threshold ID.
By default, DSCP values 0–15 are mapped to queue 2 and threshold 1.
dscp1...dscp8
DSCP values 16–31 are mapped to queue 3 and threshold 1. DSCP values
or 32–39 and 48–63 are mapped to queue 4 and threshold 1. DSCP values
40–47 are mapped to queue 1 and threshold 1.
mls qos srr-queue output cos-map
queue queue-id threshold threshold-id By default, CoS values 0 and 1 are mapped to queue 2 and threshold 1.
cos1...cos8 CoS values 2 and 3 are mapped to queue 3 and threshold 1. CoS values 4,
6, and 7 are mapped to queue 4 and threshold 1. CoS value 5 is mapped to
queue 1 and threshold 1.
• For threshold-id, the range is 1 to 3. The drop-threshold percentage
for threshold 3 is predefined. It is set to the queue-full state.
• For dscp1...dscp8, enter up to eight values, and separate each value
with a space. The range is 0 to 63.
• For cos1...cos8, enter up to eight values, and separate each value with
a space. The range is 0 to 7.
Step 4 show mls qos maps Verify your entries.
The DSCP output queue threshold map appears as a matrix. The d1
column specifies the most-significant digit of the DSCP number; the d2
row specifies the least-significant digit in the DSCP number. The
intersection of the d1 and the d2 values provides the queue ID and
threshold ID; for example, queue 2 and threshold 1 (02-01).
The CoS output queue threshold map shows the CoS value in the top row
and the corresponding queue ID and threshold ID in the second row; for
To return to the default DSCP output queue threshold map or the default CoS output queue threshold
map, use the no mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map or the no mls qos srr-queue output cos-map
This example shows how to map DSCP values 10 and 11 to egress queue 1 and to threshold 2:
Switch(config)# mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map queue 1 threshold 2 10 11
Configuring SRR Shaped Weights on Egress Queues

You can specify how much of the available bandwidth is allocated to each queue. The ratio of the weights
is the ratio of frequency in which the SRR scheduler sends packets from each queue.

34-74 OL-8553-06
You can configure the egress queues for shaped or shared weights, or both. Use shaping to smooth bursty
traffic or to provide a smoother output over time. For information about shaped weights, see the “SRR
Shaping and Sharing” section on page 34-14. For information about shared weights, see the
“Configuring SRR Shared Weights on Egress Queues” section on page 34-75.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to assign the shaped weights and to enable
bandwidth shaping on the four egress queues mapped to a port. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 srr-queue bandwidth shape weight1 Assign SRR weights to the egress queues.
weight2 weight3 weight4
By default, weight1 is set to 25; weight2, weight3, and weight4 are set to 0,
and these queues are in shared mode.
For weight1 weight2 weight3 weight4, enter the weights to control the
percentage of the port that is shaped. The inverse ratio (1/weight) controls
the shaping bandwidth for this queue. Separate each value with a space.
If you configure a weight of 0, the corresponding queue operates in shared
mode. The weight specified with the srr-queue bandwidth shape
command is ignored, and the weights specified with the srr-queue
bandwidth share interface configuration command for a queue come into
effect. When configuring queues in the same queue-set for both shaping
and sharing, make sure that you configure the lowest number queue for
shaping.
The shaped mode overrides the shared mode.
Step 5 show mls qos interface interface-id Verify your entries.
queueing
To return to the default setting, use the no srr-queue bandwidth shape interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to configure bandwidth shaping on queue 1. Because the weight ratios for
queues 2, 3, and 4 are set to 0, these queues operate in shared mode. The bandwidth weight for queue 1
is 1/8, which is 12.5 percent:
Switch(config-if)# srr-queue bandwidth shape 8 0 0 0
Configuring SRR Shared Weights on Egress Queues

In shared mode, the queues share the bandwidth among them according to the configured weights. The
bandwidth is guaranteed at this level but not limited to it. For example, if a queue empties and does not
require a share of the link, the remaining queues can expand into the unused bandwidth and share it
among them. With sharing, the ratio of the weights controls the frequency of dequeuing; the absolute
values are meaningless.

OL-8553-06 34-75
solution.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to assign the shared weights and to enable
bandwidth sharing on the four egress queues mapped to a port. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 srr-queue bandwidth share weight1 Assign SRR weights to the egress queues.
weight2 weight3 weight4
By default, all four weights are 25 (1/4 of the bandwidth is allocated to
each queue).
For weight1 weight2 weight3 weight4, enter the weights to control the
ratio of the frequency in which the SRR scheduler sends packets. Separate
Step 5 show mls qos interface interface-id Verify your entries.
queueing
To return to the default setting, use the no srr-queue bandwidth share interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to configure the weight ratio of the SRR scheduler running on an egress port.
Four queues are used, and the bandwidth ratio allocated for each queue in shared mode is 1/(1+2+3+4),
2/(1+2+3+4), 3/(1+2+3+4), and 4/(1+2+3+4), which is 10 percent, 20 percent, 30 percent, and 40
percent for queues 1, 2, 3, and 4. This means that queue 4 has four times the bandwidth of queue 1, twice
the bandwidth of queue 2, and one-and-a-third times the bandwidth of queue 3.
Switch(config-if)# srr-queue bandwidth share 1 2 3 4
Configuring the Egress Expedite Queue

You can ensure that certain packets have priority over all others by queuing them in the egress expedite
queue. SRR services this queue until it is empty before servicing the other queues.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the egress expedite queue. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 mls qos Enable QoS on a switch.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the egress port, and enter interface configuration mode.

34-76 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 4 priority-queue out Enable the egress expedite queue, which is disabled by default.
When you configure this command, the SRR weight and queue size ratios
are affected because there is one less queue participating in SRR. This
means that weight1 in the srr-queue bandwidth shape or the srr-queue
bandwidth share command is ignored (not used in the ratio calculation).
To disable the egress expedite queue, use the no priority-queue out interface configuration command.
This example shows how to enable the egress expedite queue when the SRR weights are configured. The
egress expedite queue overrides the configured SRR weights.
Switch(config-if)# srr-queue bandwidth shape 25 0 0 0
Switch(config-if)# srr-queue bandwidth share 30 20 25 25
Switch(config-if)# priority-queue out
Limiting the Bandwidth on an Egress Interface

You can limit the bandwidth on an egress port. For example, if a customer pays only for a small
percentage of a high-speed link, you can limit the bandwidth to that amount.
solution.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to limit the bandwidth on an egress port. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port to be rate limited, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 srr-queue bandwidth limit weight1 Specify the percentage of the port speed to which the port should be
limited. The range is 10 to 90.
By default, the port is not rate limited and is set to 100 percent.
queueing
To return to the default setting, use the no srr-queue bandwidth limit interface configuration
command.

OL-8553-06 34-77
Displaying Standard QoS Information
This example shows how to limit the bandwidth on a port to 80 percent:

Switch(config-if)# srr-queue bandwidth limit 80
When you configure this command to 80 percent, the port is idle 20 percent of the time. The line rate
drops to 80 percent of the connected speed, which is 800 Mb/s. These values are not exact because the
hardware adjusts the line rate in increments of six.
Displaying Standard QoS Information

To display standard QoS information, use one or more of the privileged EXEC commands in
Table 34-15:
Table 34-15 Commands for Displaying Standard QoS Information
Command Purpose
show class-map [class-map-name] Display QoS class maps, which define the match criteria to
classify traffic.
show mls qos Display global QoS configuration information.
show mls qos aggregate-policer Display the aggregate policer configuration.
[aggregate-policer-name]
show mls qos input-queue Display QoS settings for the ingress queues.
show mls qos interface [interface-id] [buffers | policers | Display QoS information at the port level, including the buffer
queueing | statistics] allocation, which ports have configured policers, the queueing
strategy, and the ingress and egress statistics.
show mls qos maps [cos-dscp | cos-input-q | Display QoS mapping information.
cos-output-q | dscp-cos | dscp-input-q | dscp-mutation
dscp-mutation-name | dscp-output-q | ip-prec-dscp |
policed-dscp]
show mls qos queue-set [qset-id] Display QoS settings for the egress queues.
show mls qos vlan vlan-id Display the policy maps attached to the specified SVI.
show policy-map [policy-map-name [class Display QoS policy maps, which define classification criteria for
class-map-name]] incoming traffic.
Note Do not use the show policy-map interface privileged
EXEC command to display classification information
for incoming traffic. The control-plane and interface
keywords are not supported, and the statistics shown in
the display should be ignored.
show running-config | include rewrite Display the DSCP transparency setting.

34-78 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 35
Configuring EtherChannels and Link-State
Tracking
This chapter describes how to configure EtherChannels on Layer 2 and Layer 3 ports on the
Catalyst 3560 switch. EtherChannel provides fault-tolerant high-speed links between switches, routers,
and servers. You can use it to increase the bandwidth between the wiring closets and the data center, and
you can deploy it anywhere in the network where bottlenecks are likely to occur. EtherChannel provides
automatic recovery for the loss of a link by redistributing the load across the remaining links. If a link
fails, EtherChannel redirects traffic from the failed link to the remaining links in the channel without
intervention. This chapter also describes how to configure link-state tracking.

• Understanding EtherChannels, page 35-1
• Configuring EtherChannels, page 35-8
• Displaying EtherChannel, PAgP, and LACP Status, page 35-20
• Understanding Link-State Tracking, page 35-21
• Configuring Link-State Tracking, page 35-23
Understanding EtherChannels
These sections describe how EtherChannels work:
• EtherChannel Overview, page 35-2
• Port-Channel Interfaces, page 35-3
• Port Aggregation Protocol, page 35-4
• Link Aggregation Control Protocol, page 35-5
• EtherChannel On Mode, page 35-6
• Load Balancing and Forwarding Methods, page 35-7

OL-8553-06 35-1
Chapter 35 Configuring EtherChannels and Link-State Tracking
EtherChannel Overview
An EtherChannel consists of individual Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet links bundled into a single
logical link as shown in Figure 35-1.
Figure 35-1 Typical EtherChannel Configuration
Catalyst 8500
series switch
Gigabit EtherChannel
1000BASE-X 1000BASE-X
10/100 10/100
Switched Switched
links links
101237
The EtherChannel provides full-duplex bandwidth up to 800 Mb/s (Fast EtherChannel) or 8 Gb/s
(Gigabit EtherChannel) between your switch and another switch or host.
Each EtherChannel can consist of up to eight compatibly configured Ethernet ports. All ports in each
EtherChannel must be configured as either Layer 2 or Layer 3 ports. The number of EtherChannels is
limited to 48. For more information, see the “EtherChannel Configuration Guidelines” section on
page 35-9. The EtherChannel Layer 3 ports are made up of routed ports. Routed ports are physical ports
configured to be in Layer 3 mode by using the no switchport interface configuration command. For
more information, see the Chapter 11, “Configuring Interface Characteristics.”
You can configure an EtherChannel in one of these modes: Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), Link
Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), or On. Configure both ends of the EtherChannel in the same
mode:
• When you configure one end of an EtherChannel in either PAgP or LACP mode, the system
negotiates with the other end of the channel to determine which ports should become active.
Incompatible ports are put into an independent state and continue to carry data traffic as would any
other single link. The port configuration does not change, but the port does not participate in the
EtherChannel.
• When you configure an EtherChannel in the on mode, no negotiations take place. The switch forces
all compatible ports to become active in the EtherChannel. The other end of the channel (on the other
switch) must also be configured in the on mode; otherwise, packet loss can occur.

35-2 OL-8553-06
If a link within an EtherChannel fails, traffic previously carried over that failed link moves to the
remaining links within the EtherChannel. If traps are enabled on the switch, a trap is sent for a failure
that identifies the switch, the EtherChannel, and the failed link. Inbound broadcast and multicast packets
on one link in an EtherChannel are blocked from returning on any other link of the EtherChannel.
Port-Channel Interfaces
When you create an EtherChannel, a port-channel logical interface is involved:
• With Layer 2 ports, use the channel-group interface configuration command to dynamically create
the port-channel logical interface.
You also can use the interface port-channel port-channel-number global configuration command
to manually create the port-channel logical interface, but then you must use the channel-group
channel-group-number command to bind the logical interface to a physical port. The
channel-group-number can be the same as the port-channel-number, or you can use a new number.
If you use a new number, the channel-group command dynamically creates a new port channel.
• With Layer 3 ports, you should manually create the logical interface by using the interface
port-channel global configuration command followed by the no switchport interface configuration
command. Then you manually assign an interface to the EtherChannel by using the channel-group
For both Layer 2 and Layer 3 ports, the channel-group command binds the physical port and the logical
interface together as shown in Figure 35-2.
Each EtherChannel has a port-channel logical interface numbered from 1 to 48. This port-channel
interface number corresponds to the one specified with the channel-group interface configuration
command.
Figure 35-2 Relationship of Physical Ports, Logical Port Channels, and Channel Groups
Logical
port-channel
Channel-group
binding
101238
Physical ports

OL-8553-06 35-3
After you configure an EtherChannel, configuration changes applied to the port-channel interface apply
to all the physical ports assigned to the port-channel interface. Configuration changes applied to the
physical port affect only the port where you apply the configuration. To change the parameters of all
ports in an EtherChannel, apply configuration commands to the port-channel interface, for example,
spanning-tree commands or commands to configure a Layer 2 EtherChannel as a trunk.
Port Aggregation Protocol

The Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) is a Cisco-proprietary protocol that can be run only on Cisco
switches and on those switches licensed by vendors to support PAgP. PAgP facilitates the automatic
creation of EtherChannels by exchanging PAgP packets between Ethernet ports.
By using PAgP, the switch learns the identity of partners capable of supporting PAgP and the capabilities
of each port. It then dynamically groups similarly configured ports into a single logical link (channel or
aggregate port). Similarly configured ports are grouped based on hardware, administrative, and port
parameter constraints. For example, PAgP groups the ports with the same speed, duplex mode, native
VLAN, VLAN range, and trunking status and type. After grouping the links into an EtherChannel, PAgP
adds the group to the spanning tree as a single switch port.
PAgP Modes
Table 35-1 shows the user-configurable EtherChannel PAgP modes for the channel-group interface
Table 35-1 EtherChannel PAgP Modes
Mode Description
auto Places a port into a passive negotiating state, in which the port responds to PAgP packets
it receives but does not start PAgP packet negotiation. This setting minimizes the
transmission of PAgP packets.
desirable Places a port into an active negotiating state, in which the port starts negotiations with
other ports by sending PAgP packets.
Switch ports exchange PAgP packets only with partner ports configured in the auto or desirable modes.
Ports configured in the on mode do not exchange PAgP packets.
Both the auto and desirable modes enable ports to negotiate with partner ports to form an EtherChannel
based on criteria such as port speed and, for Layer 2 EtherChannels, trunking state and VLAN numbers.
Ports can form an EtherChannel when they are in different PAgP modes as long as the modes are
compatible. For example:
• A port in the desirable mode can form an EtherChannel with another port that is in the desirable or
auto mode.
• A port in the auto mode can form an EtherChannel with another port in the desirable mode.
A port in the auto mode cannot form an EtherChannel with another port that is also in the auto mode
because neither port starts PAgP negotiation.
If your switch is connected to a partner that is PAgP-capable, you can configure the switch port for
nonsilent operation by using the non-silent keyword. If you do not specify non-silent with the auto or
desirable mode, silent mode is assumed.

35-4 OL-8553-06
Use the silent mode when the switch is connected to a device that is not PAgP-capable and seldom, if
ever, sends packets. An example of a silent partner is a file server or a packet analyzer that is not
generating traffic. In this case, running PAgP on a physical port connected to a silent partner prevents
that switch port from ever becoming operational. However, the silent setting allows PAgP to operate, to
attach the port to a channel group, and to use the port for transmission.
PAgP Interaction with Virtual Switches and Dual-Active Detection

A virtual switch can be two or more Catalyst 6500 core switches connected by virtual switch links
(VSLs) that carry control and data traffic between them. One of the switches is in active mode. The
others are in standby mode. For redundancy, remote switches, such as Catalyst 3650 switches, are
connected to the virtual switch by remote satellite links (RSLs).
If the VSL between two switches fails, one switch does not know the status of the other. Both switches
could change to the active mode, causing a dual-active situation in the network with duplicate
configurations (including duplicate IP addresses and bridge identifiers). The network might go down.
To prevent a dual-active situation, the core switches send PAgP protocol data units (PDUs) through the
RSLs to the remote switches. The PAgP PDUs identify the active switch, and the remote switches
forward the PDUs to core switches so that the core switches are in sync. If the active switch fails or
resets, the standby switch takes over as the active switch. If the VSL goes down, one core switch knows
the status of the other and does not change state.
PAgP Interaction with Other Features

The Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) and the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) send and receive
packets over the physical ports in the EtherChannel. Trunk ports send and receive PAgP protocol data
units (PDUs) on the lowest numbered VLAN.
In Layer 2 EtherChannels, the first port in the channel that comes up provides its MAC address to the
EtherChannel. If this port is removed from the bundle, one of the remaining ports in the bundle provides
its MAC address to the EtherChannel.
PAgP sends and receives PAgP PDUs only from ports that are up and have PAgP enabled for the auto
or desirable mode.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol

The LACP is defined in IEEE 802.3ad and enables Cisco switches to manage Ethernet channels between
switches that conform to the IEEE 802.3ad protocol. LACP facilitates the automatic creation of
EtherChannels by exchanging LACP packets between Ethernet ports.
By using LACP, the switch learns the identity of partners capable of supporting LACP and the
capabilities of each port. It then dynamically groups similarly configured ports into a single logical link
(channel or aggregate port). Similarly configured ports are grouped based on hardware, administrative,
and port parameter constraints. For example, LACP groups the ports with the same speed, duplex mode,
native VLAN, VLAN range, and trunking status and type. After grouping the links into an EtherChannel,
LACP adds the group to the spanning tree as a single switch port.

OL-8553-06 35-5
LACP Modes
Table 35-2 shows the user-configurable EtherChannel LACP modes for the channel-group interface
Table 35-2 EtherChannel LACP Modes
Mode Description
active Places a port into an active negotiating state in which the port starts negotiations with other
ports by sending LACP packets.
passive Places a port into a passive negotiating state in which the port responds to LACP packets
that it receives, but does not start LACP packet negotiation. This setting minimizes the
transmission of LACP packets.
Both the active and passive LACP modes enable ports to negotiate with partner ports to an
EtherChannel based on criteria such as port speed and, for Layer 2 EtherChannels, trunking state and
VLAN numbers.
Ports can form an EtherChannel when they are in different LACP modes as long as the modes are
compatible. For example:
• A port in the active mode can form an EtherChannel with another port that is in the active or passive
mode.
• A port in the passive mode cannot form an EtherChannel with another port that is also in the passive
mode because neither port starts LACP negotiation.
LACP Interaction with Other Features

The DTP and the CDP send and receive packets over the physical ports in the EtherChannel. Trunk ports
send and receive LACP PDUs on the lowest numbered VLAN.
In Layer 2 EtherChannels, the first port in the channel that comes up provides its MAC address to the
EtherChannel. If this port is removed from the bundle, one of the remaining ports in the bundle provides
its MAC address to the EtherChannel.
LACP sends and receives LACP PDUs only from ports that are up and have LACP enabled for the active
or passive mode.
EtherChannel On Mode
EtherChannel on mode can be used to manually configure an EtherChannel. The on mode forces a port
to join an EtherChannel without negotiations. The on mode can be useful if the remote device does not
support PAgP or LACP. In the on mode, a usable EtherChannel exists only when the switches at both
ends of the link are configured in the on mode.
Ports that are configured in the on mode in the same channel group must have compatible port
characteristics, such as speed and duplex. Ports that are not compatible are suspended, even though they
are configured in the on mode.

35-6 OL-8553-06
Caution You should use care when using the on mode. This is a manual configuration, and ports on both ends of
the EtherChannel must have the same configuration. If the group is misconfigured, packet loss or
spanning-tree loops can occur.
Load Balancing and Forwarding Methods

EtherChannel balances the traffic load across the links in a channel by reducing part of the binary pattern
formed from the addresses in the frame to a numerical value that selects one of the links in the channel.
EtherChannel load balancing can use MAC addresses or IP addresses, source or destination addresses,
or both source and destination addresses. The selected mode applies to all EtherChannels configured on
the switch. You configure the load balancing and forwarding method by using the port-channel
load-balance global configuration command.
With source-MAC address forwarding, when packets are forwarded to an EtherChannel, they are
distributed across the ports in the channel based on the source-MAC address of the incoming packet.
Therefore, to provide load balancing, packets from different hosts use different ports in the channel, but
packets from the same host use the same port in the channel.
With destination-MAC address forwarding, when packets are forwarded to an EtherChannel, they are
distributed across the ports in the channel based on the destination host’s MAC address of the incoming
packet. Therefore, packets to the same destination are forwarded over the same port, and packets to a
different destination are sent on a different port in the channel.
With source-and-destination MAC address forwarding, when packets are forwarded to an EtherChannel,
they are distributed across the ports in the channel based on both the source and destination MAC
addresses. This forwarding method, a combination source-MAC and destination-MAC address
forwarding methods of load distribution, can be used if it is not clear whether source-MAC or
destination-MAC address forwarding is better suited on a particular switch. With source-and-destination
MAC-address forwarding, packets sent from host A to host B, host A to host C, and host C to host B
could all use different ports in the channel.
With source-IP address-based forwarding, when packets are forwarded to an EtherChannel, they are
distributed across the ports in the EtherChannel based on the source-IP address of the incoming packet.
Therefore, to provide load-balancing, packets from different IP addresses use different ports in the
channel, but packets from the same IP address use the same port in the channel.
With destination-IP address-based forwarding, when packets are forwarded to an EtherChannel, they are
distributed across the ports in the EtherChannel based on the destination-IP address of the incoming
packet. Therefore, to provide load-balancing, packets from the same IP source address sent to different
IP destination addresses could be sent on different ports in the channel. But packets sent from different
source IP addresses to the same destination IP address are always sent on the same port in the channel.
With source-and-destination IP address-based forwarding, packets are sent to an EtherChannel and
distributed across the EtherChannel ports, based on both the source and destination IP addresses of the
incoming packet. This forwarding method, a combination of source-IP and destination-IP address-based
forwarding, can be used if it is not clear whether source-IP or destination-IP address-based forwarding
is better suited on a particular switch. In this method, packets sent from the IP address A to IP address
B, from IP address A to IP address C, and from IP address C to IP address B could all use different ports
in the channel.
Different load-balancing methods have different advantages, and the choice of a particular
load-balancing method should be based on the position of the switch in the network and the kind of
traffic that needs to be load-distributed. In Figure 35-3, an EtherChannel from a switch that is
aggregating data from four workstations communicates with a router. Because the router is a

OL-8553-06 35-7
Configuring EtherChannels
single-MAC-address device, source-based forwarding on the switch EtherChannel ensures that the
switch uses all available bandwidth to the router. The router is configured for destination-based
forwarding because the large number of workstations ensures that the traffic is evenly distributed from
the router EtherChannel.
Use the option that provides the greatest variety in your configuration. For example, if the traffic on a
channel is only going to a single MAC address, using the destination-MAC address always chooses the
same link in the channel. Using source addresses or IP addresses might result in better load balancing.
Figure 35-3 Load Distribution and Forwarding Methods
Switch with
source-based
forwarding enabled
EtherChannel
Cisco router
with destination-based
forwarding enabled
101239
• Default EtherChannel Configuration, page 35-9
• EtherChannel Configuration Guidelines, page 35-9
• Configuring Layer 2 EtherChannels, page 35-10 (required)
• Configuring Layer 3 EtherChannels, page 35-13 (required)
• Configuring EtherChannel Load Balancing, page 35-16 (optional)
• Configuring the PAgP Learn Method and Priority, page 35-16 (optional)
• Configuring LACP Hot-Standby Ports, page 35-18 (optional)

35-8 OL-8553-06
Note Make sure that the ports are correctly configured. For more information, see the “EtherChannel
Note After you configure an EtherChannel, configuration changes applied to the port-channel interface apply
to all the physical ports assigned to the port-channel interface, and configuration changes applied to the
physical port affect only the port where you apply the configuration.
Default EtherChannel Configuration

Table 35-3 shows the default EtherChannel configuration.
Table 35-3 Default EtherChannel Configuration

Channel groups None assigned.
Port-channel logical interface None defined.
PAgP mode No default.
PAgP learn method Aggregate-port learning on all ports.
PAgP priority 128 on all ports.
LACP mode No default.
LACP learn method Aggregate-port learning on all ports.
LACP port priority 32768 on all ports.
LACP system priority 32768.
LACP system ID LACP system priority and the switch MAC address.
Load balancing Load distribution on the switch is based on the
source-MAC address of the incoming packet.
EtherChannel Configuration Guidelines

If improperly configured, some EtherChannel ports are automatically disabled to avoid network loops
and other problems. Follow these guidelines to avoid configuration problems:
• Do not try to configure more than 48 EtherChannels on the switch.
• Configure a PAgP EtherChannel with up to eight Ethernet ports of the same type.
• Configure a LACP EtherChannel with up to16 Ethernet ports of the same type. Up to eight ports can
be active, and up to eight ports can be in standby mode.
• Configure all ports in an EtherChannel to operate at the same speeds and duplex modes.
• Enable all ports in an EtherChannel. A port in an EtherChannel that is disabled by using the
shutdown interface configuration command is treated as a link failure, and its traffic is transferred
to one of the remaining ports in the EtherChannel.

OL-8553-06 35-9
• When a group is first created, all ports follow the parameters set for the first port to be added to the
group. If you change the configuration of one of these parameters, you must also make the changes
to all ports in the group:
– Allowed-VLAN list
– Spanning-tree path cost for each VLAN
– Spanning-tree port priority for each VLAN
– Spanning-tree Port Fast setting
• Do not configure a port to be a member of more than one EtherChannel group.
• Do not configure an EtherChannel in both the PAgP and LACP modes. EtherChannel groups running
PAgP and LACP can coexist on the same switch. Individual EtherChannel groups can run either
PAgP or LACP, but they cannot interoperate.
• Do not configure a Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) destination port as part of an EtherChannel.
• Do not configure a secure port as part of an EtherChannel or the reverse.
• Do not configure a private-VLAN port as part of an EtherChannel.
• Do not configure a port that is an active or a not-yet-active member of an EtherChannel as an
IEEE 802.1x port. If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on an EtherChannel port, an error message
appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled.
Note In software releases earlier than Cisco IOS Release 12.2(18)SE, if IEEE 802.1x is enabled
on an inactive port of an EtherChannel, the port does not join the EtherChannel.
• If EtherChannels are configured on switch interfaces, remove the EtherChannel configuration from
the interfaces before globally enabling IEEE 802.1x on a switch by using the dot1x
system-auth-control global configuration command.
• For Layer 2 EtherChannels:
– Assign all ports in the EtherChannel to the same VLAN, or configure them as trunks. Ports with
different native VLANs cannot form an EtherChannel.
– If you configure an EtherChannel from trunk ports, verify that the trunking mode (ISL or
IEEE 802.1Q) is the same on all the trunks. Inconsistent trunk modes on EtherChannel ports can
have unexpected results.
– An EtherChannel supports the same allowed range of VLANs on all the ports in a trunking
Layer 2 EtherChannel. If the allowed range of VLANs is not the same, the ports do not form an
EtherChannel even when PAgP is set to the auto or desirable mode.
– Ports with different spanning-tree path costs can form an EtherChannel if they are otherwise
compatibly configured. Setting different spanning-tree path costs does not, by itself, make ports
incompatible for the formation of an EtherChannel.
• For Layer 3 EtherChannels, assign the Layer 3 address to the port-channel logical interface, not to
the physical ports in the channel.
Configuring Layer 2 EtherChannels

You configure Layer 2 EtherChannels by assigning ports to a channel group with the channel-group
interface configuration command. This command automatically creates the port-channel logical
interface.

35-10 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to assign a Layer 2 Ethernet port to a Layer 2
EtherChannel. This procedure is required.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify a physical port, and enter interface configuration mode.
For a PAgP EtherChannel, you can configure up to eight ports of
the same type and speed for the same group.
For a LACP EtherChannel, you can configure up to 16 Ethernet
ports of the same type. Up to eight ports can be active, and up to
eight ports can be in standby mode.
Step 3 switchport mode {access | trunk} Assign all ports as static-access ports in the same VLAN, or
configure them as trunks.
switchport access vlan vlan-id
If you configure the port as a static-access port, assign it to only
one VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.

OL-8553-06 35-11
Command Purpose
Step 4 channel-group channel-group-number mode Assign the port to a channel group, and specify the PAgP or the
{auto [non-silent] | desirable [non-silent] | on} | LACP mode.
{active | passive}
For channel-group-number, the range is 1 to 48.
For mode, select one of these keywords:
• auto—Enables PAgP only if a PAgP device is detected. It
places the port into a passive negotiating state, in which the
port responds to PAgP packets it receives but does not start
PAgP packet negotiation.
• desirable—Unconditionally enables PAgP. It places the
port into an active negotiating state, in which the port starts
negotiations with other ports by sending PAgP packets.
• on—Forces the port to channel without PAgP or LACP. In
the on mode, an EtherChannel exists only when a port group
in the on mode is connected to another port group in the on
mode.
• non-silent—(Optional) If your switch is connected to a
partner that is PAgP-capable, configure the switch port for
nonsilent operation when the port is in the auto or desirable
mode. If you do not specify non-silent, silent is assumed.
The silent setting is for connections to file servers or packet
analyzers. This setting allows PAgP to operate, to attach the
port to a channel group, and to use the port for transmission.
• active—Enables LACP only if a LACP device is detected. It
places the port into an active negotiating state in which the
port starts negotiations with other ports by sending LACP
packets.
• passive—Enables LACP on the port and places it into a
passive negotiating state in which the port responds to LACP
packets that it receives, but does not start LACP packet
negotiation.
For information on compatible modes for the switch and its
partner, see the “PAgP Modes” section on page 35-4 and the
“LACP Modes” section on page 35-6.
To remove a port from the EtherChannel group, use the no channel-group interface configuration
command.

35-12 OL-8553-06
This example shows how to configure an EtherChannel. It assigns two ports as static-access ports in
VLAN 10 to channel 5 with the PAgP mode desirable:
Switch(config)# interface range gigabitethernet0/1 -2
Switch(config-if-range)# switchport mode access
Switch(config-if-range)# switchport access vlan 10
Switch(config-if-range)# channel-group 5 mode desirable non-silent
Switch(config-if-range)# end
This example shows how to configure an EtherChannel. It assigns two ports as static-access ports in
VLAN 10 to channel 5 with the LACP mode active:
Switch(config-if-range)# channel-group 5 mode active
Configuring Layer 3 EtherChannels

To configure Layer 3 EtherChannels, you create the port-channel logical interface and then put the
Ethernet ports into the port-channel as described in the next two sections.
Creating Port-Channel Logical Interfaces

When configuring Layer 3 EtherChannels, you should first manually create the port-channel logical
interface by using the interface port-channel global configuration command. Then you put the logical
interface into the channel group by using the channel-group interface configuration command.
Note To move an IP address from a physical port to an EtherChannel, you must delete the IP address from the
physical port before configuring it on the port-channel interface.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a port-channel interface for a Layer 3
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface port-channel port-channel-number Specify the port-channel logical interface, and enter interface
configuration mode.
For port-channel-number, the range is 1 to 48.
Step 4 ip address ip-address mask Assign an IP address and subnet mask to the EtherChannel.
Step 6 show etherchannel channel-group-number detail Verify your entries.

OL-8553-06 35-13
Command Purpose
Step 8 Assign an Ethernet port to the Layer 3 EtherChannel. For
more information, see the “Configuring the Physical
Interfaces” section on page 35-14.
To remove the port-channel, use the no interface port-channel port-channel-number global

This example shows how to create the logical port channel 5 and assign 172.10.20.10 as its IP address:
Switch(config)# interface port-channel 5
Configuring the Physical Interfaces

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to assign an Ethernet port to a Layer 3
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify a physical port, and enter interface configuration mode.
For a PAgP EtherChannel, you can configure up to eight ports of
the same type and speed for the same group.
For a LACP EtherChannel, you can configure up to 16 Ethernet
ports of the same type. Up to eight ports can be active, and up to
eight ports can be in standby mode.
Step 3 no ip address Ensure that there is no IP address assigned to the physical port.
Step 4 no switchport Put the port into Layer 3 mode.

35-14 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 5 channel-group channel-group-number mode Assign the port to a channel group, and specify the PAgP or the
{auto [non-silent] | desirable [non-silent] | on} | LACP mode.
{active | passive}
For channel-group-number, the range is 1 to 48. This number
must be the same as the port-channel-number (logical port)
configured in the “Creating Port-Channel Logical Interfaces”
For mode, select one of these keywords:
• auto—Enables PAgP only if a PAgP device is detected. It
places the port into a passive negotiating state, in which the
port responds to PAgP packets it receives but does not start
PAgP packet negotiation.
• desirable—Unconditionally enables PAgP. It places the port
into an active negotiating state, in which the port starts
negotiations with other ports by sending PAgP packets.
• on—Forces the port to channel without PAgP or LACP. In
the on mode, an EtherChannel exists only when a port group
in the on mode is connected to another port group in the on
mode.
• non-silent—(Optional) If your switch is connected to a
partner that is PAgP capable, configure the switch port for
nonsilent operation when the port is in the auto or desirable
mode. If you do not specify non-silent, silent is assumed.
The silent setting is for connections to file servers or packet
analyzers. This setting allows PAgP to operate, to attach the
port to a channel group, and to use the port for transmission.
• active—Enables LACP only if a LACP device is detected. It
places the port into an active negotiating state in which the
port starts negotiations with other ports by sending LACP
packets.
• passive—Enables LACP on the port and places it into a
passive negotiating state in which the port responds to LACP
packets that it receives, but does not start LACP packet
negotiation.
For information on compatible modes for the switch and its
partner, see the “PAgP Modes” section on page 35-4 and the
“LACP Modes” section on page 35-6.
This example shows how to configure an EtherChannel. It assigns two ports to channel 5 with the LACP
mode active:
Switch(config-if-range)# no ip address
Switch(config-if-range)# no switchport

OL-8553-06 35-15
Switch(config-if-range)# channel-group 5 mode active

Configuring EtherChannel Load Balancing

This section describes how to configure EtherChannel load balancing by using source-based or
destination-based forwarding methods. For more information, see the “Load Balancing and Forwarding
Methods” section on page 35-7.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure EtherChannel load balancing. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 port-channel load-balance {dst-ip | dst-mac | Configure an EtherChannel load-balancing method.
src-dst-ip | src-dst-mac | src-ip | src-mac}
The default is src-mac.
Select one of these load-distribution methods:
• dst-ip—Load distribution is based on the destination-host IP
address.
• dst-mac—Load distribution is based on the destination-host
MAC address of the incoming packet.
• src-dst-ip—Load distribution is based on the
source-and-destination host-IP address.
• src-dst-mac—Load distribution is based on the
source-and-destination host-MAC address.
• src-ip—Load distribution is based on the source-host IP
address.
• src-mac—Load distribution is based on the source-MAC
address of the incoming packet.
Step 4 show etherchannel load-balance Verify your entries.
To return EtherChannel load balancing to the default configuration, use the no port-channel
load-balance global configuration command.
Configuring the PAgP Learn Method and Priority

Network devices are classified as PAgP physical learners or aggregate-port learners. A device is a
physical learner if it learns addresses by physical ports and directs transmissions based on that
knowledge. A device is an aggregate-port learner if it learns addresses by aggregate (logical) ports. The
learn method must be configured the same at both ends of the link.
When a device and its partner are both aggregate-port learners, they learn the address on the logical
port-channel. The device sends packets to the source by using any of the ports in the EtherChannel. With
aggregate-port learning, it is not important on which physical port the packet arrives.

35-16 OL-8553-06
PAgP cannot automatically detect when the partner device is a physical learner and when the local device
is an aggregate-port learner. Therefore, you must manually set the learning method on the local device
to learn addresses by physical ports. You also must set the load-distribution method to source-based
distribution, so that any given source MAC address is always sent on the same physical port.
You also can configure a single port within the group for all transmissions and use other ports for hot
standby. The unused ports in the group can be swapped into operation in just a few seconds if the selected
single port loses hardware-signal detection. You can configure which port is always selected for packet
transmission by changing its priority with the pagp port-priority interface configuration command. The
higher the priority, the more likely that the port will be selected.
Note The switch supports address learning only on aggregate ports even though the physical-port keyword
is provided in the CLI. The pagp learn-method command and the pagp port-priority command have
no effect on the switch hardware, but they are required for PAgP interoperability with devices that only
support address learning by physical ports.
When the link partner of the Catalyst 3560 switch is a physical learner (such as a Catalyst 1900 series
switch), we recommend that you configure the Catalyst 3560 switch as a physical-port learner by using
the pagp learn-method physical-port interface configuration command. Set the load-distribution
method based on the source MAC address by using the port-channel load-balance src-mac global
configuration command. The switch then sends packets to the Catalyst 1900 switch using the same port
in the EtherChannel from which it learned the source address. Only use the pagp learn-method
command in this situation.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure your switch as a PAgP
physical-port learner and to adjust the priority so that the same port in the bundle is selected for sending
packets. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port for transmission, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 3 pagp learn-method physical-port Select the PAgP learning method.
By default, aggregation-port learning is selected, which means
the switch sends packets to the source by using any of the ports
in the EtherChannel. With aggregate-port learning, it is not
important on which physical port the packet arrives.
Select physical-port to connect with another switch that is a
physical learner. Make sure to configure the port-channel
load-balance global configuration command to src-mac as
described in the “Configuring EtherChannel Load Balancing”
The learning method must be configured the same at both ends
of the link.

OL-8553-06 35-17
Command Purpose
Step 4 pagp port-priority priority Assign a priority so that the selected port is chosen for packet
transmission.
For priority, the range is 0 to 255. The default is 128. The higher
the priority, the more likely that the port will be used for PAgP
transmission.
or
show pagp channel-group-number internal
To return the priority to its default setting, use the no pagp port-priority interface configuration
command. To return the learning method to its default setting, use the no pagp learn-method interface
Configuring LACP Hot-Standby Ports

When enabled, LACP tries to configure the maximum number of LACP-compatible ports in a channel,
up to a maximum of 16 ports. Only eight LACP links can be active at one time. The software places any
additional links in a hot-standby mode. If one of the active links becomes inactive, a link that is in the
hot-standby mode becomes active in its place.
If you configure more than eight links for an EtherChannel group, the software automatically decides
which of the hot-standby ports to make active based on the LACP priority. To every link between
systems that operate LACP, the software assigns a unique priority made up of these elements (in priority
order):
• LACP system priority
• System ID (the switch MAC address)
• LACP port priority
• Port number
In priority comparisons, numerically lower values have higher priority. The priority decides which ports
should be put in standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports
from aggregating.
Determining which ports are active and which are hot standby is a two-step procedure. First the system
with a numerically lower system priority and system-id is placed in charge of the decision. Next, that
system decides which ports are active and which are hot standby, based on its values for port priority
and port number. The port-priority and port-number values for the other system are not used.
You can change the default values of the LACP system priority and the LACP port priority to affect how
the software selects active and standby links. For more information, see the “Configuring the LACP
System Priority” section on page 35-19 and the “Configuring the LACP Port Priority” section on
page 35-19.

35-18 OL-8553-06
Configuring the LACP System Priority

You can configure the system priority for all the EtherChannels that are enabled for LACP by using the
lacp system-priority global configuration command. You cannot configure a system priority for each
LACP-configured channel. By changing this value from the default, you can affect how the software
selects active and standby links.
You can use the show etherchannel summary privileged EXEC command to see which ports are in the
hot-standby mode (denoted with an H port-state flag).
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the LACP system priority. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 lacp system-priority priority Configure the LACP system priority.
For priority, the range is 1 to 65535. The default is 32768.
The lower the value, the higher the system priority.
or
show lacp sys-id
To return the LACP system priority to the default value, use the no lacp system-priority global
Configuring the LACP Port Priority

By default, all ports use the same port priority. If the local system has a lower value for the system
priority and the system ID than the remote system, you can affect which of the hot-standby links become
active first by changing the port priority of LACP EtherChannel ports to a lower value than the default.
The hot-standby ports that have lower port numbers become active in the channel first. You can use the
show etherchannel summary privileged EXEC command to see which ports are in the hot-standby
mode (denoted with an H port-state flag).
Note If LACP is not able to aggregate all the ports that are compatible (for example, the remote system might
have more restrictive hardware limitations), all the ports that cannot be actively included in the
EtherChannel are put in the hot-standby state and are used only if one of the channeled ports fails.

OL-8553-06 35-19
Displaying EtherChannel, PAgP, and LACP Status
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the LACP port priority. This
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 lacp port-priority priority Configure the LACP port priority.
For priority, the range is 1 to 65535. The default is 32768. The lower the
value, the more likely that the port will be used for LACP transmission.
or
show lacp [channel-group-number]
internal
To return the LACP port priority to the default value, use the no lacp port-priority interface
Displaying EtherChannel, PAgP, and LACP Status

To display EtherChannel, PAgP, and LACP status information, use the privileged EXEC commands
described in Table 35-4:
Table 35-4 Commands for Displaying EtherChannel, PAgP, and LACP Status
Command Description
show etherchannel [channel-group-number {detail | Displays EtherChannel information in a brief, detailed, and
port | port-channel | protocol | summary}] {detail | one-line summary form. Also displays the load-balance or
load-balance | port | port-channel | protocol | frame-distribution scheme, port, port-channel, and protocol
summary} information.
show pagp [channel-group-number] {counters | Displays PAgP information such as traffic information, the
internal | neighbor} internal PAgP configuration, and neighbor information.
show pagp [channel-group-number] dual-active Displays the dual-active detection status.
show lacp [channel-group-number] {counters | Displays LACP information such as traffic information, the
internal | neighbor} internal LACP configuration, and neighbor information.
You can clear PAgP channel-group information and traffic counters by using the clear pagp
{channel-group-number counters | counters} privileged EXEC command.
You can clear LACP channel-group information and traffic counters by using the clear lacp
{channel-group-number counters | counters} privileged EXEC command.
For detailed information about the fields in the displays, see the command reference for this release.

35-20 OL-8553-06
Understanding Link-State Tracking

Link-state tracking, also known as trunk failover, is a feature that binds the link state of multiple
interfaces. For example, link-state tracking provides redundancy in the network when used with server
NIC adapter teaming. When the server network adapters are configured in a primary or secondary
relationship known as teaming, if the link is lost on the primary interface, connectivity is transparently
changed to the secondary interface.
Figure 35-4 on page 35-23 shows a network configured with link-state tracking. To enable link-state
tracking, create a link-state group, and specify the interfaces that are assigned to the link-state group. An
interface can be an aggregation of ports (an EtherChannel), a single physical port in access or trunk
mode, or a routed port. In a link-state group, these interfaces are bundled together. The downstream
interfaces are bound to the upstream interfaces. Interfaces connected to servers are referred to as
downstream interfaces, and interfaces connected to distribution switches and network devices are
referred to as upstream interfaces.
The configuration in Figure 35-4 ensures that the network traffic flow is balanced as follows:
• For links to switches and other network devices
– Server 1 and server 2 use switch A for primary links and switch B for secondary links.
– Server 3 and server 4 use switch B for primary links and switch A for secondary links.
• Link-state group 1 on switch A
– Switch A provides primary links to server 1 and server 2 through link-state group 1. Port 1 is
connected to server 1, and port 2 is connected to server 2. Port 1 and port 2 are the downstream
interfaces in link-state group 1.
– Port 5 and port 6 are connected to distribution switch 1 through link-state group 1. Port 5 and
port 6 are the upstream interfaces in link-state group 1.
• Link-state group 2 on switch A
– Switch A provides secondary links to server 3 and server 4 through link-state group 2. Port 3 is
• Link-state group 2 on switch B
– Switch B provides primary links to server 3 and server 4 through link-state group 2. Port 3 is
• Link-state group 1 on switch B
– Switch B provides secondary links to server 1 and server 2 through link-state group 1. Port 1 is
In a link-state group, the upstream ports can become unavailable or lose connectivity because the
distribution switch or router fails, the cables are disconnected, or the link is lost. These are the
interactions between the downstream and upstream interfaces when link-state tracking is enabled:

OL-8553-06 35-21
• If any of the upstream interfaces are in the link-up state, the downstream interfaces can change to
or remain in the link-up state.
• If all of the upstream interfaces become unavailable, link-state tracking automatically puts the
downstream interfaces in the error-disabled state. Connectivity to and from the servers is
automatically changed from the primary server interface to the secondary server interface.
As an example of a connectivity change from link-state group 1 to link-state group 2 on switch A,
see Figure 35-4 on page 35-23. If the upstream link for port 6 is lost, the link states of downstream
ports 1 and 2 do not change. However, if the link for upstream port 5 is also lost, the link state of the
downstream ports changes to the link-down state. Connectivity to server 1 and server 2 is then
changed from link-state group1 to link-state group 2. The downstream ports 3 and 4 do not change
state because they are in link-group 2.
• If the link-state group is configured, link-state tracking is disabled, and the upstream interfaces lose
connectivity, the link states of the downstream interfaces remain unchanged. The server does not
recognize that upstream connectivity has been lost and does not failover to the secondary interface.
You can recover a downstream interface link-down condition by removing the failed downstream port
from the link-state group. To recover multiple downstream interfaces, disable the link-state group.

35-22 OL-8553-06
Configuring Link-State Tracking
Figure 35-4 Typical Link-State Tracking Configuration
Network
Distribution Layer 3 link Distribution

switch 1 switch 2
Link-state Link-state
Link-state group 1 group 2 Link-state
group 1 group 2
Port Port Port Port Port Port
5 6 7 7 6 5
Switch A Port Port Switch B

8 8
Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Link- Link-
state state
group 2 group 1
Link- Link-
state state
group 1 group 2
Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4
141680
Primary link
Secondary link

These sections describe how to configure link-state tracking ports:
• Default Link-State Tracking Configuration, page 35-24
• Link-State Tracking Configuration Guidelines, page 35-24
• Configuring Link-State Tracking, page 35-24
• Displaying Link-State Tracking Status, page 35-25

OL-8553-06 35-23
Default Link-State Tracking Configuration

There are no link-state groups defined, and link-state tracking is not enabled for any group.
Link-State Tracking Configuration Guidelines

Follow these guidelines to avoid configuration problems:
• An interface that is defined as an upstream interface cannot also be defined as a downstream
interface in the same or a different link-state group. The reverse is also true.
• An interface cannot be a member of more than one link-state group.
• You can configure only two link-state groups per switch.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a link-state group and to assign an
interface to a group:
Command Purpose
Step 2 link state track number Create a link-state group, and enable link-state tracking. The
group number can be 1 to 2; the default is 1.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify a physical interface or range of interfaces to configure,
Valid interfaces include switch ports in access or trunk mode
(IEEE 802.1q), routed ports, or multiple ports bundled into an
EtherChannel interface (static or LACP), also in trunk mode.
Step 4 link state group [number] {upstream | Specify a link-state group, and configure the interface as either
downstream} an upstream or downstream interface in the group.The group
number can be 1 to 2; the default is 1.
This example shows how to create a link-state group and configure the interfaces:
Switch(config)# link state track 1
Switch(config-if)# link state group 1 upstream
Switch(config-if)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# link state group 1 downstream

35-24 OL-8553-06
To disable a link-state group, use the no link state track number global configuration command.
Displaying Link-State Tracking Status

Use the show link state group command to display the link-state group information. Enter this
command without keywords to display information about all link-state groups. Enter the group number
to display information specific to the group. Enter the detail keyword to display detailed information
about the group.
This is an example of output from the show link state group 1 command:
Switch> show link state group 1
Link State Group: 1 Status: Enabled, Down
This is an example of output from the show link state group detail command:
Switch> show link state group detail
(Up):Interface up (Dwn):Interface Down (Dis):Interface disabled

Upstream Interfaces : Gi0/15(Dwn) Gi0/16(Dwn)
Downstream Interfaces : Gi0/11(Dis) Gi0/12(Dis) Gi0/13(Dis) Gi0/14(Dis)

Upstream Interfaces : Gi0/15(Dwn) Gi0/16(Dwn) Gi0/17(Dwn)
Downstream Interfaces : Gi0/11(Dis) Gi0/12(Dis) Gi0/13(Dis) Gi1/0/14(Dis)
(Up):Interface up (Dwn):Interface Down (Dis):Interface disabled
For detailed information about the fields in the display, see the command reference for this release.

OL-8553-06 35-25

35-26 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 36
Configuring IP Unicast Routing
This chapter describes how to configure IP Version 4 (IPv4) unicast routing on the Catalyst 3560 switch.
Basic routing functions, including static routing and the Routing Information Protocol (RIP), are
available with both the IP base image (formerly known as the standard multilayer image [SMI]) and the
IP services image (formerly known as the enhanced multilayer image [EMI]). To use advanced routing
features and other routing protocols, you must have the IP services image installed on the switch.
Note If the switch is running the IP services image, you can also enable IP Version 6 (IPv6) unicast routing
and configure interfaces to forward IPv6 traffic in addition to IPv4 traffic. For information about
configuring IPv6 on the switch, see Chapter 37, “Configuring IPv6 Unicast Routing.”
For more detailed IP unicast configuration information, see the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide,
> Configuration Guides. For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this
chapter, see these command references from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS
Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command References:
• Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 1 of 3: Addressing and Services, Release 12.2
• Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols, Release 12.2
• Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 3 of 3: Multicast, Release 12.2
• Understanding IP Routing, page 36-2
• Steps for Configuring Routing, page 36-3
• Configuring IP Addressing, page 36-4
• Enabling IP Unicast Routing, page 36-18
• Configuring RIP, page 36-18
• Configuring OSPF, page 36-24
• Configuring EIGRP, page 36-33
• Configuring BGP, page 36-40
• Configuring ISO CLNS Routing, page 36-61
• Configuring Multi-VRF CE, page 36-71

OL-8553-06 36-1
Chapter 36 Configuring IP Unicast Routing
Understanding IP Routing
• Configuring Protocol-Independent Features, page 36-86

• Monitoring and Maintaining the IP Network, page 36-100
Note When configuring routing parameters on the switch and to allocate system resources to maximize the
number of unicast routes allowed, you can use the sdm prefer routing global configuration command
to set the Switch Database Management (sdm) feature to the routing template. For more information on
the SDM templates, see Chapter 8, “Configuring SDM Templates” or see the sdm prefer command in
the command reference for this release.
Understanding IP Routing
In some network environments, VLANs are associated with individual networks or subnetworks. In an
IP network, each subnetwork is mapped to an individual VLAN. Configuring VLANs helps control the
size of the broadcast domain and keeps local traffic local. However, network devices in different VLANs
cannot communicate with one another without a Layer 3 device (router) to route traffic between the
VLAN, referred to as inter-VLAN routing. You configure one or more routers to route traffic to the
appropriate destination VLAN.
Figure 36-1 shows a basic routing topology. Switch A is in VLAN 10, and Switch B is in VLAN 20. The
router has an interface in each VLAN.
Figure 36-1 Routing Topology Example
VLAN 10 VLAN 20
A Switch A Switch B
Host
C
B Host
Host
18071
ISL Trunks
When Host A in VLAN 10 needs to communicate with Host B in VLAN 10, it sends a packet addressed
to that host. Switch A forwards the packet directly to Host B, without sending it to the router.
When Host A sends a packet to Host C in VLAN 20, Switch A forwards the packet to the router, which
receives the traffic on the VLAN 10 interface. The router checks the routing table, finds the correct
outgoing interface, and forwards the packet on the VLAN 20 interface to Switch B. Switch B receives
the packet and forwards it to Host C.
Types of Routing
Routers and Layer 3 switches can route packets in three different ways:
• By using default routing
• By using preprogrammed static routes for the traffic
• By dynamically calculating routes by using a routing protocol
Default routing refers to sending traffic with a destination unknown to the router to a default outlet
or destination.

36-2 OL-8553-06
Steps for Configuring Routing
Static unicast routing forwards packets from predetermined ports through a single path into and out of a
network. Static routing is secure and uses little bandwidth, but does not automatically respond to changes
in the network, such as link failures, and therefore, might result in unreachable destinations. As networks
grow, static routing becomes a labor-intensive liability.
Dynamic routing protocols are used by routers to dynamically calculate the best route for forwarding
traffic. There are two types of dynamic routing protocols:
• Routers using distance-vector protocols maintain routing tables with distance values of networked
resources, and periodically pass these tables to their neighbors. Distance-vector protocols use one
or a series of metrics for calculating the best routes. These protocols are easy to configure and use.
• Routers using link-state protocols maintain a complex database of network topology, based on the
exchange of link-state advertisements (LSAs) between routers. LSAs are triggered by an event in
the network, which speeds up the convergence time or time required to respond to these changes.
Link-state protocols respond quickly to topology changes, but require greater bandwidth and more
resources than distance-vector protocols.
Distance-vector protocols supported by the switch are Routing Information Protocol (RIP), which uses
a single distance metric (cost) to determine the best path and Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), which
adds a path vector mechanism. The switch also supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) link-state
protocol and Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), which adds some link-state routing features to traditional
Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (IGRP) to improve efficiency.
Note The supported protocols are determined by the software running on the switch. If the switch is running
the IP base image, only default routing, static routing and RIP are supported. All other routing protocols
require the IP services image.
Steps for Configuring Routing

By default, IP routing is disabled on the switch, and you must enable it before routing can take place.
For detailed IP routing configuration information, see the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide,
> Configuration Guides.
In the following procedures, the specified interface must be one of these Layer 3 interfaces:
• A routed port: a physical port configured as a Layer 3 port by using the no switchport interface
• A switch virtual interface (SVI): a VLAN interface created by using the interface vlan vlan_id
global configuration command and by default a Layer 3 interface.
• An EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode: a port-channel logical interface created by using
the interface port-channel port-channel-number global configuration command and binding the
Ethernet interface into the channel group. For more information, see the “Configuring Layer 3
EtherChannels” section on page 35-13.
Note The switch does not support tunnel interfaces for unicast routed traffic.
All Layer 3 interfaces on which routing will occur must have IP addresses assigned to them. See the
“Assigning IP Addresses to Network Interfaces” section on page 36-5.

OL-8553-06 36-3
Configuring IP Addressing
Note A Layer 3 switch can have an IP address assigned to each routed port and SVI. The number of routed
ports and SVIs that you can configure is not limited by software. However, the interrelationship between
this number and the number and volume of features being implemented might have an impact on CPU
utilization because of hardware limitations. To optimize system memory for routing, use the sdm prefer
routing global configuration command.
Configuring routing consists of several main procedures:

• To support VLAN interfaces, create and configure VLANs on the switch, and assign VLAN
membership to Layer 2 interfaces. For more information, see Chapter 13, “Configuring VLANs.”
• Configure Layer 3 interfaces.
• Enable IP routing on the switch.
• Assign IP addresses to the Layer 3 interfaces.
• Enable selected routing protocols on the switch.
• Configure routing protocol parameters (optional).
A required task for configuring IP routing is to assign IP addresses to Layer 3 network interfaces to
enable the interfaces and allow communication with the hosts on those interfaces that use IP. These
sections describe how to configure various IP addressing features. Assigning IP addresses to the
interface is required; the other procedures are optional.
• Default Addressing Configuration, page 36-4
• Assigning IP Addresses to Network Interfaces, page 36-5
• Configuring Address Resolution Methods, page 36-8
• Routing Assistance When IP Routing is Disabled, page 36-10
• Configuring Broadcast Packet Handling, page 36-13
• Monitoring and Maintaining IP Addressing, page 36-17
Default Addressing Configuration

Table 36-1 shows the default addressing configuration.
Table 36-1 Default Addressing Configuration

IP address None defined.
ARP No permanent entries in the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache.
Encapsulation: Standard Ethernet-style ARP.
Timeout: 14400 seconds (4 hours).
IP broadcast address 255.255.255.255 (all ones).
IP classless routing Enabled.

36-4 OL-8553-06
Table 36-1 Default Addressing Configuration (continued)

IP default gateway Disabled.
IP directed broadcast Disabled (all IP directed broadcasts are dropped).
IP domain Domain list: No domain names defined.
Domain lookup: Enabled.
Domain name: Enabled.
IP forward-protocol If a helper address is defined or User Datagram Protocol (UDP) flooding is
configured, UDP forwarding is enabled on default ports.
Any-local-broadcast: Disabled.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP): Disabled.
Turbo-flood: Disabled.
IP helper address Disabled.
IP host Disabled.
IRDP Disabled.
Defaults when enabled:
• Broadcast IRDP advertisements.
• Maximum interval between advertisements: 600 seconds.
• Minimum interval between advertisements: 0.75 times max interval
• Preference: 0.
IP proxy ARP Enabled.
IP routing Disabled.
IP subnet-zero Disabled.
Assigning IP Addresses to Network Interfaces

An IP address identifies a location to which IP packets can be sent. Some IP addresses are reserved for
special uses and cannot be used for host, subnet, or network addresses. RFC 1166, “Internet Numbers,”
contains the official description of IP addresses.
An interface can have one primary IP address. A mask identifies the bits that denote the network number
in an IP address. When you use the mask to subnet a network, the mask is referred to as a subnet mask.
To receive an assigned network number, contact your Internet service provider.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to assign an IP address and a network mask to
a Layer 3 interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3
interface to configure.

OL-8553-06 36-5
Command Purpose
Step 3 no switchport Remove the interface from Layer 2 configuration mode (if it is a
physical interface).
Step 4 ip address ip-address subnet-mask Configure the IP address and IP subnet mask.
Step 7 show interfaces [interface-id] Verify your entries.
show ip interface [interface-id]
show running-config interface [interface-id]
Use of Subnet Zero

Subnetting with a subnet address of zero is strongly discouraged because of the problems that can arise
if a network and a subnet have the same addresses. For example, if network 131.108.0.0 is subnetted as
255.255.255.0, subnet zero would be written as 131.108.0.0, which is the same as the network address.
You can use the all ones subnet (131.108.255.0) and even though it is discouraged, you can enable the
use of subnet zero if you need the entire subnet space for your IP address.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable subnet zero:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip subnet-zero Enable the use of subnet zero for interface addresses and routing updates.
Step 5 copy running-config startup-config (Optional) Save your entry in the configuration file.
Use the no ip subnet-zero global configuration command to restore the default and disable the use of
subnet zero.
Classless Routing
By default, classless routing behavior is enabled on the switch when it is configured to route. With
classless routing, if a router receives packets for a subnet of a network with no default route, the router
forwards the packet to the best supernet route. A supernet consists of contiguous blocks of Class C
address spaces used to simulate a single, larger address space and is designed to relieve the pressure on
the rapidly depleting Class B address space.
In Figure 36-2, classless routing is enabled. When the host sends a packet to 120.20.4.1, instead of
discarding the packet, the router forwards it to the best supernet route. If you disable classless routing
and a router receives packets destined for a subnet of a network with no network default route, the router

36-6 OL-8553-06
Figure 36-2 IP Classless Routing
128.0.0.0/8
128.20.4.1
128.20.0.0 IP classless
128.20.1.0 128.20.3.0
128.20.2.0 128.20.4.1
45749
Host
In Figure 36-3, the router in network 128.20.0.0 is connected to subnets 128.20.1.0, 128.20.2.0, and
128.20.3.0. If the host sends a packet to 120.20.4.1, because there is no network default route, the router
Figure 36-3 No IP Classless Routing
128.0.0.0/8
128.20.4.1
128.20.0.0
Bit bucket
128.20.1.0 128.20.3.0
128.20.2.0 128.20.4.1
45748
Host
To prevent the switch from forwarding packets destined for unrecognized subnets to the best supernet
route possible, you can disable classless routing behavior.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable classless routing:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no ip classless Disable classless routing behavior.

OL-8553-06 36-7
Command Purpose
To restore the default and have the switch forward packets destined for a subnet of a network with no
network default route to the best supernet route possible, use the ip classless global configuration
command.
Configuring Address Resolution Methods

You can control interface-specific handling of IP by using address resolution. A device using IP can have
both a local address or MAC address, which uniquely defines the device on its local segment or LAN,
and a network address, which identifies the network to which the device belongs.
The local address or MAC address is known as a data link address because it is contained in the data link
layer (Layer 2) section of the packet header and is read by data link (Layer 2) devices. To communicate
with a device on Ethernet, the software must learn the MAC address of the device. The process of
learning the MAC address from an IP address is called address resolution. The process of learning the
IP address from the MAC address is called reverse address resolution.
The switch can use these forms of address resolution:
• Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is used to associate IP address with MAC addresses. Taking an
IP address as input, ARP learns the associated MAC address and then stores the IP address/MAC
address association in an ARP cache for rapid retrieval. Then the IP datagram is encapsulated in a
link-layer frame and sent over the network. Encapsulation of IP datagrams and ARP requests or
replies on IEEE 802 networks other than Ethernet is specified by the Subnetwork Access Protocol
(SNAP).
• Proxy ARP helps hosts with no routing tables learn the MAC addresses of hosts on other networks
or subnets. If the switch (router) receives an ARP request for a host that is not on the same interface
as the ARP request sender, and if the router has all of its routes to the host through other interfaces,
it generates a proxy ARP packet giving its own local data link address. The host that sent the ARP
request then sends its packets to the router, which forwards them to the intended host.
The switch also uses the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP), which functions the same as
ARP does, except that the RARP packets request an IP address instead of a local MAC address. Using
RARP requires a RARP server on the same network segment as the router interface. Use the ip
rarp-server address interface configuration command to identify the server.
For more information on RARP, see the Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Configuration Guide,
Release 12.2 under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Configuration Guides
from the Cisco.com page.
You can perform these tasks to configure address resolution:
• Define a Static ARP Cache, page 36-9
• Set ARP Encapsulation, page 36-9
• Enable Proxy ARP, page 36-10

36-8 OL-8553-06
Define a Static ARP Cache

ARP and other address resolution protocols provide dynamic mapping between IP addresses and MAC
addresses. Because most hosts support dynamic address resolution, you usually do not need to specify
static ARP cache entries. If you must define a static ARP cache entry, you can do so globally, which
installs a permanent entry in the ARP cache that the switch uses to translate IP addresses into MAC
addresses. Optionally, you can also specify that the switch respond to ARP requests as if it were the
owner of the specified IP address. If you do not want the ARP entry to be permanent, you can specify a
timeout period for the ARP entry.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to provide static mapping between IP addresses
and MAC addresses:
Command Purpose
Step 2 arp ip-address hardware-address type Globally associate an IP address with a MAC (hardware) address
in the ARP cache, and specify encapsulation type as one of
these:
• arpa—ARP encapsulation for Ethernet interfaces
• snap—Subnetwork Address Protocol encapsulation for
Token Ring and FDDI interfaces
• sap—HP’s ARP type
Step 3 arp ip-address hardware-address type [alias] (Optional) Specify that the switch respond to ARP requests as if
it were the owner of the specified IP address.
Step 4 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface to
configure.
Step 5 arp timeout seconds (Optional) Set the length of time an ARP cache entry will stay in
the cache. The default is 14400 seconds (4 hours). The range is
0 to 2147483 seconds.
Step 7 show interfaces [interface-id] Verify the type of ARP and the timeout value used on all
interfaces or a specific interface.
Step 8 show arp View the contents of the ARP cache.
or
show ip arp
To remove an entry from the ARP cache, use the no arp ip-address hardware-address type global
configuration command. To remove all nonstatic entries from the ARP cache, use the clear arp-cache
Set ARP Encapsulation

By default, Ethernet ARP encapsulation (represented by the arpa keyword) is enabled on an IP interface.
You can change the encapsulation methods to SNAP if required by your network.

OL-8553-06 36-9
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to specify the ARP encapsulation type:
Command Purpose
Step 3 arp {arpa | snap} Specify the ARP encapsulation method:
• arpa—Address Resolution Protocol
• snap—Subnetwork Address Protocol
Step 5 show interfaces [interface-id] Verify ARP encapsulation configuration on all interfaces or
the specified interface.
To disable an encapsulation type, use the no arp arpa or no arp snap interface configuration command.
Enable Proxy ARP

By default, the switch uses proxy ARP to help hosts learn MAC addresses of hosts on other networks or
subnets.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable proxy ARP if it has been disabled:
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip proxy-arp Enable proxy ARP on the interface.
Step 5 show ip interface [interface-id] Verify the configuration on the interface or all interfaces.
To disable proxy ARP on the interface, use the no ip proxy-arp interface configuration command.
Routing Assistance When IP Routing is Disabled

These mechanisms allow the switch to learn about routes to other networks when it does not have IP
routing enabled:
• Proxy ARP, page 36-11
• Default Gateway, page 36-11
• ICMP Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP), page 36-11

36-10 OL-8553-06
Proxy ARP
Proxy ARP, the most common method for learning about other routes, enables an Ethernet host with no
routing information to communicate with hosts on other networks or subnets. The host assumes that all
hosts are on the same local Ethernet and that they can use ARP to learn their MAC addresses. If a switch
receives an ARP request for a host that is not on the same network as the sender, the switch evaluates
whether it has the best route to that host. If it does, it sends an ARP reply packet with its own Ethernet
MAC address, and the host that sent the request sends the packet to the switch, which forwards it to the
intended host. Proxy ARP treats all networks as if they are local and performs ARP requests for every
IP address.
Proxy ARP is enabled by default. To enable it after it has been disabled, see the “Enable Proxy ARP”
section on page 36-10. Proxy ARP works as long as other routers support it.
Default Gateway
Another method for locating routes is to define a default router or default gateway. All nonlocal packets
are sent to this router, which either routes them appropriately or sends an IP Control Message Protocol
(ICMP) redirect message back, defining which local router the host should use. The switch caches the
redirect messages and forwards each packet as efficiently as possible. A limitation of this method is that
there is no means of detecting when the default router has gone down or is unavailable.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define a default gateway (router) when IP
routing is disabled:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip default-gateway ip-address Set up a default gateway (router).
Step 4 show ip redirects Display the address of the default gateway router to verify the
setting.
Use the no ip default-gateway global configuration command to disable this function.
ICMP Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP)

Router discovery allows the switch to dynamically learn about routes to other networks using IRDP.
IRDP allows hosts to locate routers. When operating as a client, the switch generates router discovery
packets. When operating as a host, the switch receives router discovery packets. The switch can also
listen to Routing Information Protocol (RIP) routing updates and use this information to infer locations
of routers. The switch does not actually store the routing tables sent by routing devices; it merely keeps
track of which systems are sending the data. The advantage of using IRDP is that it allows each router
to specify both a priority and the time after which a device is assumed to be down if no further packets
are received.
Each device discovered becomes a candidate for the default router, and a new highest-priority router is
selected when a higher priority router is discovered, when the current default router is declared down,
or when a TCP connection is about to time out because of excessive retransmissions.

OL-8553-06 36-11
The only required task for IRDP routing on an interface is to enable IRDP processing on that interface.
When enabled, the default parameters apply. You can optionally change any of these parameters.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable and configure IRDP on an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to
configure.
Step 3 ip irdp Enable IRDP processing on the interface.
Step 4 ip irdp multicast (Optional) Send IRDP advertisements to the multicast address
(224.0.0.1) instead of IP broadcasts.
Note This command allows for compatibility with Sun Microsystems
Solaris, which requires IRDP packets to be sent out as multicasts.
Many implementations cannot receive these multicasts; ensure
end-host ability before using this command.
Step 5 ip irdp holdtime seconds (Optional) Set the IRDP period for which advertisements are valid. The
default is three times the maxadvertinterval value. It must be greater
than maxadvertinterval and cannot be greater than 9000 seconds. If you
change the maxadvertinterval value, this value also changes.
Step 6 ip irdp maxadvertinterval seconds (Optional) Set the IRDP maximum interval between advertisements. The
Step 7 ip irdp minadvertinterval seconds (Optional) Set the IRDP minimum interval between advertisements. The
default is 0.75 times the maxadvertinterval. If you change the
maxadvertinterval, this value changes to the new default (0.75 of
maxadvertinterval).
Step 8 ip irdp preference number (Optional) Set a device IRDP preference level. The allowed range is –231
to 231. The default is 0. A higher value increases the router preference
level.
Step 9 ip irdp address address [number] (Optional) Specify an IRDP address and preference to proxy-advertise.
Step 11 show ip irdp Verify settings by displaying IRDP values.
If you change the maxadvertinterval value, the holdtime and minadvertinterval values also change,
so it is important to first change the maxadvertinterval value, before manually changing either the
holdtime or minadvertinterval values.
Use the no ip irdp interface configuration command to disable IRDP routing.

36-12 OL-8553-06
Configuring Broadcast Packet Handling

After configuring an IP interface address, you can enable routing and configure one or more routing
protocols, or you can configure the way the switch responds to network broadcasts. A broadcast is a data
packet destined for all hosts on a physical network. The switch supports two kinds of broadcasting:
• A directed broadcast packet is sent to a specific network or series of networks. A directed broadcast
address includes the network or subnet fields.
• A flooded broadcast packet is sent to every network.
Note You can also limit broadcast, unicast, and multicast traffic on Layer 2 interfaces by using the
storm-control interface configuration command to set traffic suppression levels. For more information,
see Chapter 24, “Configuring Port-Based Traffic Control.”
Routers provide some protection from broadcast storms by limiting their extent to the local cable.
Bridges (including intelligent bridges), because they are Layer 2 devices, forward broadcasts to all
network segments, thus propagating broadcast storms. The best solution to the broadcast storm problem
is to use a single broadcast address scheme on a network. In most modern IP implementations, you can
set the address to be used as the broadcast address. Many implementations, including the one in the
switch, support several addressing schemes for forwarding broadcast messages.
Perform the tasks in these sections to enable these schemes:
• Enabling Directed Broadcast-to-Physical Broadcast Translation, page 36-13
• Forwarding UDP Broadcast Packets and Protocols, page 36-14
• Establishing an IP Broadcast Address, page 36-15
• Flooding IP Broadcasts, page 36-16
Enabling Directed Broadcast-to-Physical Broadcast Translation

By default, IP directed broadcasts are dropped; they are not forwarded. Dropping IP-directed broadcasts
makes routers less susceptible to denial-of-service attacks.
You can enable forwarding of IP-directed broadcasts on an interface where the broadcast becomes a
physical (MAC-layer) broadcast. Only those protocols configured by using the ip forward-protocol
global configuration command are forwarded.
You can specify an access list to control which broadcasts are forwarded. When an access list is
specified, only those IP packets permitted by the access list are eligible to be translated from directed
broadcasts to physical broadcasts. For more information on access lists, see Chapter 33, “Configuring
Network Security with ACLs.”
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable forwarding of IP-directed broadcasts
on an interface:
Command Purpose
configure.

OL-8553-06 36-13
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip directed-broadcast [access-list-number] Enable directed broadcast-to-physical broadcast translation on the
interface. You can include an access list to control which broadcasts
are forwarded. When an access list, only IP packets permitted by the
access list can be translated
Note The ip directed-broadcast interface configuration command
can be configured on a VPN routing/forwarding(VRF)
interface and is VRF-aware. Directed broadcast traffic is
routed only within the VRF.
Step 5 ip forward-protocol {udp [port] | nd | sdns} Specify which protocols and ports the router forwards when
forwarding broadcast packets.
• udp—Forward UPD datagrams.
port: (Optional) Destination port that controls which UDP
services are forwarded.
• nd—Forward ND datagrams.
• sdns—Forward SDNS datagrams
or
show running-config
Use the no ip directed-broadcast interface configuration command to disable translation of directed

broadcast to physical broadcasts. Use the no ip forward-protocol global configuration command to
remove a protocol or port.
Forwarding UDP Broadcast Packets and Protocols

User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is an IP host-to-host layer protocol, as is TCP. UDP provides a
low-overhead, connectionless session between two end systems and does not provide for
acknowledgment of received datagrams. Network hosts occasionally use UDP broadcasts to find
address, configuration, and name information. If such a host is on a network segment that does not
include a server, UDP broadcasts are normally not forwarded. You can remedy this situation by
configuring an interface on a router to forward certain classes of broadcasts to a helper address. You can
use more than one helper address per interface.
You can specify a UDP destination port to control which UDP services are forwarded. You can specify
multiple UDP protocols. You can also specify the Network Disk (ND) protocol, which is used by older
diskless Sun workstations and the network security protocol SDNS.
By default, both UDP and ND forwarding are enabled if a helper address has been defined for an
interface. The description for the ip forward-protocol interface configuration command in the Cisco
IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 1 of 3: Addressing and Services, Release 12.2 lists the ports that
are forwarded by default if you do not specify any UDP ports.
If you do not specify any UDP ports when you configure the forwarding of UDP broadcasts, you are
configuring the router to act as a BOOTP forwarding agent. BOOTP packets carry DHCP information.

36-14 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable forwarding UDP broadcast packets on
an interface and specify the destination address:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface
to configure.
Step 3 ip helper-address address Enable forwarding and specify the destination address for forwarding
UDP broadcast packets, including BOOTP.
Step 5 ip forward-protocol {udp [port] | nd | sdns} Specify which protocols the router forwards when forwarding
broadcast packets.
or
show running-config
Use the no ip helper-address interface configuration command to disable the forwarding of broadcast
packets to specific addresses. Use the no ip forward-protocol global configuration command to remove
a protocol or port.
Establishing an IP Broadcast Address

The most popular IP broadcast address (and the default) is an address consisting of all ones
(255.255.255.255). However, the switch can be configured to generate any form of IP broadcast address.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the IP broadcast address on an interface:
Command Purpose
configure.
Step 3 ip broadcast-address ip-address Enter a broadcast address different from the default, for example
128.1.255.255.
Step 5 show ip interface [interface-id] Verify the broadcast address on the interface or all interfaces.
To restore the default IP broadcast address, use the no ip broadcast-address interface configuration
command.

OL-8553-06 36-15
Flooding IP Broadcasts
You can allow IP broadcasts to be flooded throughout your internetwork in a controlled fashion by using
the database created by the bridging STP. Using this feature also prevents loops. To support this
capability, bridging must be configured on each interface that is to participate in the flooding. If bridging
is not configured on an interface, it still can receive broadcasts. However, the interface never forwards
broadcasts it receives, and the router never uses that interface to send broadcasts received on a
different interface.
Packets that are forwarded to a single network address using the IP helper-address mechanism can be
flooded. Only one copy of the packet is sent on each network segment.
To be considered for flooding, packets must meet these criteria. (Note that these are the same conditions
used to consider packet forwarding using IP helper addresses.)
• The packet must be a MAC-level broadcast.
• The packet must be an IP-level broadcast.
• The packet must be a TFTP, DNS, Time, NetBIOS, ND, or BOOTP packet, or a UDP specified by
the ip forward-protocol udp global configuration command.
• The time-to-live (TTL) value of the packet must be at least two.
A flooded UDP datagram is given the destination address specified with the ip broadcast-address
interface configuration command on the output interface. The destination address can be set to any
address. Thus, the destination address might change as the datagram propagates through the network.
The source address is never changed. The TTL value is decremented.
When a flooded UDP datagram is sent out an interface (and the destination address possibly changed),
the datagram is handed to the normal IP output routines and is, therefore, subject to access lists, if they
are present on the output interface.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to use the bridging spanning-tree database to
flood UDP datagrams:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip forward-protocol spanning-tree Use the bridging spanning-tree database to flood UDP datagrams.
Use the no ip forward-protocol spanning-tree global configuration command to disable the flooding
of IP broadcasts.
In the switch, the majority of packets are forwarded in hardware; most packets do not go through the
switch CPU. For those packets that do go to the CPU, you can speed up spanning tree-based UDP
flooding by a factor of about four to five times by using turbo-flooding. This feature is supported over
Ethernet interfaces configured for ARP encapsulation.

36-16 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to increase spanning-tree-based flooding:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip forward-protocol turbo-flood Use the spanning-tree database to speed up flooding of UDP datagrams.
To disable this feature, use the no ip forward-protocol turbo-flood global configuration command.
Monitoring and Maintaining IP Addressing

When the contents of a particular cache, table, or database have become or are suspected to be invalid,
you can remove all its contents by using the clear privileged EXEC commands. Table 36-2 lists the
commands for clearing contents.
Table 36-2 Commands to Clear Caches, Tables, and Databases
Command Purpose
clear arp-cache Clear the IP ARP cache and the fast-switching cache.
clear host {name | *} Remove one or all entries from the hostname and the address cache.
clear ip route {network [mask] |*} Remove one or more routes from the IP routing table.
You can display specific statistics, such as the contents of IP routing tables, caches, and databases; the
reachability of nodes; and the routing path that packets are taking through the network. Table 36-3 lists
the privileged EXEC commands for displaying IP statistics.
Table 36-3 Commands to Display Caches, Tables, and Databases
Command Purpose
show arp Display the entries in the ARP table.
show hosts Display the default domain name, style of lookup service, name server hosts,
and the cached list of hostnames and addresses.
show ip aliases Display IP addresses mapped to TCP ports (aliases).
show ip arp Display the IP ARP cache.
show ip interface [interface-id] Display the IP status of interfaces.
show ip irdp Display IRDP values.
show ip masks address Display the masks used for network addresses and the number of subnets
using each mask.
show ip redirects Display the address of a default gateway.
show ip route [address [mask]] | [protocol] Display the current state of the routing table.
show ip route summary Display the current state of the routing table in summary form.

OL-8553-06 36-17
Enabling IP Unicast Routing
Enabling IP Unicast Routing

By default, the switch is in Layer 2 switching mode and IP routing is disabled. To use the Layer 3
capabilities of the switch, you must enable IP routing.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable IP routing:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip routing Enable IP routing.
Step 3 router ip_routing_protocol Specify an IP routing protocol. This step might include other
commands, such as specifying the networks to route with the
network (RIP) router configuration command. For information on
specific protocols, see sections later in this chapter and the Cisco IOS
IP Configuration Guide, Release 12.2.
Note The IP base image supports only RIP as a routing protocol
Use the no ip routing global configuration command to disable routing.

This example shows how to enable IP routing using RIP as the routing protocol:
Switch(config)# ip routing
Switch(config)# router rip
Switch(config-router)# network 10.0.0.0
Switch(config-router)# end
You can now set up parameters for the selected routing protocols as described in these sections:
• Configuring RIP, page 36-18
• Configuring OSPF, page 36-24
• Configuring EIGRP, page 36-33
• Configuring BGP, page 36-40
• Configuring Protocol-Independent Features, page 36-86 (optional)
Configuring RIP
The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol (IGP) created for use in small,
homogeneous networks. It is a distance-vector routing protocol that uses broadcast User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) data packets to exchange routing information. The protocol is documented in RFC 1058.
You can find detailed information about RIP in IP Routing Fundamentals, published by Cisco Press.
Note RIP is the only routing protocol supported by the IP base image; other routing protocols require running
the IP services image.

36-18 OL-8553-06
Configuring RIP
Using RIP, the switch sends routing information updates (advertisements) every 30 seconds. If a router
does not receive an update from another router for 180 seconds or more, it marks the routes served by
that router as unusable. If there is still no update after 240 seconds, the router removes all routing table
entries for the non-updating router.
RIP uses hop counts to rate the value of different routes. The hop count is the number of routers that can
be traversed in a route. A directly connected network has a hop count of zero; a network with a hop count
of 16 is unreachable. This small range (0 to 15) makes RIP unsuitable for large networks.
If the router has a default network path, RIP advertises a route that links the router to the pseudonetwork
0.0.0.0. The 0.0.0.0 network does not exist; it is treated by RIP as a network to implement the default
routing feature. The switch advertises the default network if a default was learned by RIP or if the router
has a gateway of last resort and RIP is configured with a default metric. RIP sends updates to the
interfaces in specified networks. If an interface’s network is not specified, it is not advertised in any
RIP update.
• Default RIP Configuration, page 36-19
• Configuring Basic RIP Parameters, page 36-20
• Configuring RIP Authentication, page 36-21
• Configuring Summary Addresses and Split Horizon, page 36-22
Default RIP Configuration

Table 36-4 shows the default RIP configuration.
Table 36-4 Default RIP Configuration

Auto summary Enabled.
Default-information originate Disabled.
Default metric Built-in; automatic metric translations.
IP RIP authentication key-chain No authentication.
Authentication mode: clear text.
IP RIP receive version According to the version router configuration command.
IP RIP send version According to the version router configuration command.
IP RIP triggered According to the version router configuration command.
IP split horizon Varies with media.
Neighbor None defined.
Network None specified.
Offset list Disabled.
Output delay 0 milliseconds.

OL-8553-06 36-19
Configuring RIP
Table 36-4 Default RIP Configuration (continued)

Timers basic • Update: 30 seconds.
• Invalid: 180 seconds.
• Hold-down: 180 seconds.
• Flush: 240 seconds.
Validate-update-source Enabled.
Version Receives RIP Version 1 and 2 packets; sends Version 1 packets.
Configuring Basic RIP Parameters

To configure RIP, you enable RIP routing for a network and optionally configure other parameters. On
the Catalyst 3560 switch, RIP configuration commands are ignored until you configure the network
number.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable and configure RIP:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip routing Enable IP routing. (Required only if IP routing is disabled.)
Step 3 router rip Enable a RIP routing process, and enter router configuration mode.
Step 4 network network number Associate a network with a RIP routing process. You can specify multiple
network commands. RIP routing updates are sent and received through
interfaces only on these networks.
Note You must configure a network number for RIP commands to take
effect.
Step 5 neighbor ip-address (Optional) Define a neighboring router with which to exchange routing
information. This step allows routing updates from RIP (normally a
broadcast protocol) to reach nonbroadcast networks.
Step 6 offset list [access-list number | name] (Optional) Apply an offset list to routing metrics to increase incoming
{in | out} offset [type number] and outgoing metrics to routes learned through RIP. You can limit the
offset list with an access list or an interface.
Step 7 timers basic update invalid holddown (Optional) Adjust routing protocol timers. Valid ranges for all timers are
flush 0 to 4294967295 seconds.
• update—The time between sending routing updates. The default is
30 seconds.
• invalid—The timer after which a route is declared invalid. The
• holddown—The time before a route is removed from the routing
table. The default is 180 seconds.
• flush—The amount of time for which routing updates are postponed.
The default is 240 seconds.

36-20 OL-8553-06
Configuring RIP
Command Purpose
Step 8 version {1 | 2} (Optional) Configure the switch to receive and send only RIP Version 1
or RIP Version 2 packets. By default, the switch receives Version 1 and 2
but sends only Version 1.
You can also use the interface commands ip rip {send | receive} version
1 | 2 | 1 2} to control what versions are used for sending and receiving on
interfaces.
Step 9 no auto summary (Optional) Disable automatic summarization. By default, the switch
summarizes subprefixes when crossing classful network boundaries.
Disable summarization (RIP Version 2 only) to advertise subnet and host
routing information to classful network boundaries.
Step 10 no validate-update-source (Optional) Disable validation of the source IP address of incoming RIP
routing updates. By default, the switch validates the source IP address of
incoming RIP routing updates and discards the update if the source
address is not valid. Under normal circumstances, disabling this feature
is not recommended. However, if you have a router that is off-network
and you want to receive its updates, you can use this command.
Step 11 output-delay delay (Optional) Add interpacket delay for RIP updates sent.
By default, packets in a multiple-packet RIP update have no delay added
between packets. If you are sending packets to a lower-speed device, you
can add an interpacket delay in the range of 8 to 50 milliseconds.
Step 13 show ip protocols Verify your entries.
To turn off the RIP routing process, use the no router rip global configuration command.
To display the parameters and current state of the active routing protocol process, use the show ip
protocols privileged EXEC command. Use the show ip rip database privileged EXEC command to
display summary address entries in the RIP database.
Configuring RIP Authentication

RIP Version 1 does not support authentication. If you are sending and receiving RIP Version 2 packets,
you can enable RIP authentication on an interface. The key chain specifies \the set of keys that can be
used on the interface. If a key chain is not configured, no authentication is performed, not even the
default. Therefore, you must also perform the tasks in the “Managing Authentication Keys” section on
page 36-99.
The switch supports two modes of authentication on interfaces for which RIP authentication is enabled:
plain text and MD5. The default is plain text.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure RIP authentication on an interface:
Command Purpose

OL-8553-06 36-21
Configuring RIP
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip rip authentication key-chain name-of-chain Enable RIP authentication.
Step 4 ip rip authentication mode [text | md5} Configure the interface to use plain text authentication (the
default) or MD5 digest authentication.
Step 6 show running-config interface [interface-id] Verify your entries.
To restore clear text authentication, use the no ip rip authentication mode interface configuration
command. To prevent authentication, use the no ip rip authentication key-chain interface
Configuring Summary Addresses and Split Horizon

Routers connected to broadcast-type IP networks and using distance-vector routing protocols normally
use the split-horizon mechanism to reduce the possibility of routing loops. Split horizon blocks
information about routes from being advertised by a router on any interface from which that information
originated. This feature usually optimizes communication among multiple routers, especially when links
are broken.
Note In general, disabling split horizon is not recommended unless you are certain that your application
requires it to properly advertise routes.
If you want to configure an interface running RIP to advertise a summarized local IP address pool on a
network access server for dial-up clients, use the ip summary-address rip interface configuration
command.
Note If split horizon is enabled, neither autosummary nor interface IP summary addresses are advertised.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set an interface to advertise a summarized
local IP address and to disable split horizon on the interface:
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip address ip-address subnet-mask Configure the IP address and IP subnet.
Step 4 ip summary-address rip ip address ip-network mask Configure the IP address to be summarized and the IP
network mask.
Step 5 no ip split horizon Disable split horizon on the interface.
Step 7 show ip interface interface-id Verify your entries.

36-22 OL-8553-06
Configuring RIP
To disable IP summarization, use the no ip summary-address rip router configuration command.

In this example, the major net is 10.0.0.0. The summary address 10.2.0.0 overrides the autosummary
address of 10.0.0.0 so that 10.2.0.0 is advertised out interface Gigabit Ethernet port 2, and 10.0.0.0 is
not advertised. In the example, if the interface is still in Layer 2 mode (the default), you must enter a no
switchport interface configuration command before entering the ip address interface configuration
command.
Note If split horizon is enabled, neither autosummary nor interface summary addresses (those configured with
the ip summary-address rip router configuration command) are advertised.

Switch(config-router)# interface gi0/2
Switch(config-if)# ip summary-address rip 10.2.0.0 255.255.0.0
Switch(config-if)# no ip split-horizon
Switch(config-router)# network 10.0.0.0
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 2.2.2.2 peer-group mygroup
Configuring Split Horizon

Routers connected to broadcast-type IP networks and using distance-vector routing protocols normally
use the split-horizon mechanism to reduce the possibility of routing loops. Split horizon blocks
information about routes from being advertised by a router on any interface from which that information
originated. This feature can optimize communication among multiple routers, especially when links are
broken.
Note In general, we do not recommend disabling split horizon unless you are certain that your application
requires it to properly advertise routes.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable split horizon on the interface:
Command Purpose
configure.
Step 3 ip address ip-address subnet-mask Configure the IP address and IP subnet.
Step 4 no ip split-horizon Disable split horizon on the interface.
Step 6 show ip interface interface-id Verify your entries.
To enable the split horizon mechanism, use the ip split-horizon interface configuration command.

OL-8553-06 36-23
Configuring OSPF
Configuring OSPF
This section briefly describes how to configure Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). For a complete
description of the OSPF commands, see the “OSPF Commands” chapter of the Cisco IOS IP Command
Reference, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under
Note OSPF classifies different media into broadcast, nonbroadcast, and point-to-point networks. The switch
supports broadcast (Ethernet, Token Ring, and FDDI) and point-to-point networks (Ethernet interfaces
configured as point-to-point links).
OSPF is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) designed expressly for IP networks, supporting IP
subnetting and tagging of externally derived routing information. OSPF also allows packet
authentication and uses IP multicast when sending and receiving packets. The Cisco implementation
supports RFC 1253, OSPF management information base (MIB).
The Cisco implementation conforms to the OSPF Version 2 specifications with these key features:
• Definition of stub areas is supported.
• Routes learned through any IP routing protocol can be redistributed into another IP routing protocol.
At the intradomain level, this means that OSPF can import routes learned through EIGRP and RIP.
OSPF routes can also be exported into RIP.
• Plain text and MD5 authentication among neighboring routers within an area is supported.
• Configurable routing interface parameters include interface output cost, retransmission interval,
interface transmit delay, router priority, router dead and hello intervals, and authentication key.
• Virtual links are supported.
• Not-so-stubby-areas (NSSAs) per RFC 1587are supported.
OSPF typically requires coordination among many internal routers, area border routers (ABRs)
connected to multiple areas, and autonomous system boundary routers (ASBRs). The minimum
configuration would use all default parameter values, no authentication, and interfaces assigned to areas.
If you customize your environment, you must ensure coordinated configuration of all routers.
• Default OSPF Configuration, page 36-25
• Configuring Basic OSPF Parameters, page 36-26
• Configuring OSPF Interfaces, page 36-27
• Configuring OSPF Area Parameters, page 36-28
• Configuring Other OSPF Parameters, page 36-29
• Changing LSA Group Pacing, page 36-31
• Configuring a Loopback Interface, page 36-32
• Monitoring OSPF, page 36-32
Note To enable OSPF, the switch must be running the IP services image.

36-24 OL-8553-06
Configuring OSPF
Default OSPF Configuration

Table 36-5 shows the default OSPF configuration.
Table 36-5 Default OSPF Configuration

Interface parameters Cost: No default cost predefined.
Retransmit interval: 5 seconds.
Transmit delay: 1 second.
Priority: 1.
Hello interval: 10 seconds.
Dead interval: 4 times the hello interval.
No authentication.
No password specified.
MD5 authentication disabled.
Area Authentication type: 0 (no authentication).
Default cost: 1.
Range: Disabled.
Stub: No stub area defined.
NSSA: No NSSA area defined.
Auto cost 100 Mb/s.
Default-information originate Disabled. When enabled, the default metric setting is 10, and the
external route type default is Type 2.
Default metric Built-in, automatic metric translation, as appropriate for each
routing protocol.
Distance OSPF dist1 (all routes within an area): 110.
dist2 (all routes from one area to another): 110.
and dist3 (routes from other routing domains): 110.
OSPF database filter Disabled. All outgoing link-state advertisements (LSAs) are
flooded to the interface.
IP OSPF name lookup Disabled.
Log adjacency changes Enabled.
Neighbor None specified.
Neighbor database filter Disabled. All outgoing LSAs are flooded to the neighbor.
Network area Disabled.
1
NSF awareness Enabled2. Allows Layer 3 switches to continue forwarding
packets from a neighboring NSF-capable router during hardware
or software changes.
Router ID No OSPF routing process defined.
Summary address Disabled.

OL-8553-06 36-25
Configuring OSPF
Table 36-5 Default OSPF Configuration (continued)

Timers LSA group pacing 240 seconds.
Timers shortest path first (spf) spf delay: 5 seconds.
spf-holdtime: 10 seconds.
Virtual link No area ID or router ID defined.
Hello interval: 10 seconds.
Retransmit interval: 5 seconds.
Transmit delay: 1 second.
Dead interval: 40 seconds.
Authentication key: no key predefined.
Message-digest key (MD5): no key predefined.
1. NSF = Nonstop forwarding
2. OSPF NSF awareness is enabled for IPv4 on Catalyst 3550, 3560 and 3750 switches running the IP services image.
OSPF NSF Awareness

The IP services image supports OSPF NSF Awareness for IPv4. When a neighboring router is
NSF-capable, the Layer 3 switch continues to forward packets from the router before the backup Route
Processor (RP) in a router takes over after the primary RP fails, or while the primary RP is manually
reloaded for a nondisruptive software upgrade.
This feature cannot be disabled. For more information on this feature, see the OSPF Nonstop Forwarding
(NSF) Awareness Feature Guide at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1839/products_white_paper09186a0080153edd.s
html
Configuring Basic OSPF Parameters

Enabling OSPF requires that you create an OSPF routing process, specify the range of IP addresses to
be associated with the routing process, and assign area IDs to be associated with that range. Beginning
in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable OSPF:
Command Purpose
Step 2 router ospf process-id Enable OSPF routing, and enter router configuration mode. The
process ID is an internally used identification parameter that is
locally assigned and can be any positive integer. Each OSPF
routing process has a unique value.
Step 3 network address wildcard-mask area area-id Define an interface on which OSPF runs and the area ID for that
interface. You can use the wildcard mask as a single command to
define one or more interfaces to be associated with a specific
OSPF area. The area ID can be a decimal value or an IP address.

36-26 OL-8553-06
Configuring OSPF
Command Purpose
To end an OSPF routing process, use the no router ospf process-id global configuration command.
This example shows how to configure an OSPF routing process and assign it a process number of 109:
Switch(config)# router ospf 109
Switch(config-router)# network 131.108.0.0 255.255.255.0 area 24
Configuring OSPF Interfaces

You can use the ip ospf interface configuration commands to modify interface-specific OSPF
parameters. You are not required to modify any of these parameters, but some interface parameters (hello
interval, dead interval, and authentication key) must be consistent across all routers in an attached
network. If you modify these parameters, be sure all routers in the network have compatible values.
Note The ip ospf interface configuration commands are all optional.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to modify OSPF interface parameters:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface
to configure.
Step 3 ip ospf cost (Optional) Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on the
interface.
Step 4 ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds (Optional) Specify the number of seconds between link state
advertisement transmissions. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The
Step 5 ip ospf transmit-delay seconds (Optional) Set the estimated number of seconds to wait before
sending a link state update packet. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds.
The default is 1 second.
Step 6 ip ospf priority number (Optional) Set priority to help find the OSPF designated router for a
network. The range is from 0 to 255. The default is 1.
Step 7 ip ospf hello-interval seconds (Optional) Set the number of seconds between hello packets sent on
an OSPF interface. The value must be the same for all nodes on a
network. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.
Step 8 ip ospf dead-interval seconds (Optional) Set the number of seconds after the last device hello
packet was seen before its neighbors declare the OSPF router to be
down. The value must be the same for all nodes on a network. The
range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 4 times the hello interval.

OL-8553-06 36-27
Configuring OSPF
Command Purpose
Step 9 ip ospf authentication-key key (Optional) Assign a password to be used by neighboring OSPF
routers. The password can be any string of keyboard-entered
characters up to 8 bytes in length. All neighboring routers on the
same network must have the same password to exchange OSPF
information.
Step 10 ip ospf message digest-key keyid md5 key (Optional) Enable MDS authentication.
• keyid—An identifier from 1 to 255.
• key—An alphanumeric password of up to 16 bytes.
Step 11 ip ospf database-filter all out (Optional) Block flooding of OSPF LSA packets to the interface. By
default, OSPF floods new LSAs over all interfaces in the same area,
except the interface on which the LSA arrives.
Step 13 show ip ospf interface [interface-name] Display OSPF-related interface information.
Step 14 show ip ospf neighbor detail Display NSF awareness status of neighbor switch. The output
matches one of these examples:
• Options is 0x52
LLS Options is 0x1 (LR)
When both of these lines appear, the neighbor switch is NSF
aware.
• Options is 0x42—This means the neighbor switch is not NSF
aware.
Use the no form of these commands to remove the configured parameter value or return to the
default value.
Configuring OSPF Area Parameters

You can optionally configure several OSPF area parameters. These parameters include authentication for
password-based protection against unauthorized access to an area, stub areas, and not-so-stubby-areas
(NSSAs). Stub areas are areas into which information on external routes is not sent. Instead, the area
border router (ABR) generates a default external route into the stub area for destinations outside the
autonomous system (AS). An NSSA does not flood all LSAs from the core into the area, but can import
AS external routes within the area by redistribution.
Route summarization is the consolidation of advertised addresses into a single summary route to be
advertised by other areas. If network numbers are contiguous, you can use the area range router
configuration command to configure the ABR to advertise a summary route that covers all networks in
the range.
Note The OSPF area router configuration commands are all optional.

36-28 OL-8553-06
Configuring OSPF
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure area parameters:
Command Purpose
Step 2 router ospf process-id Enable OSPF routing, and enter router configuration mode.
Step 3 area area-id authentication (Optional) Allow password-based protection against unauthorized
access to the identified area. The identifier can be either a decimal
value or an IP address.
Step 4 area area-id authentication message-digest (Optional) Enable MD5 authentication on the area.
Step 5 area area-id stub [no-summary] (Optional) Define an area as a stub area. The no-summary keyword
prevents an ABR from sending summary link advertisements into the
stub area.
Step 6 area area-id nssa [no-redistribution] (Optional) Defines an area as a not-so-stubby-area. Every router
[default-information-originate] within the same area must agree that the area is NSSA. Select one of
[no-summary] these keywords:
• no-redistribution—Select when the router is an NSSA ABR and
you want the redistribute command to import routes into normal
areas, but not into the NSSA.
• default-information-originate—Select on an ABR to allow
importing type 7 LSAs into the NSSA.
• no-redistribution—Select to not send summary LSAs into the
NSSA.
Step 7 area area-id range address mask (Optional) Specify an address range for which a single route is
advertised. Use this command only with area border routers.
Step 9 show ip ospf [process-id] Display information about the OSPF routing process in general or for
a specific process ID to verify configuration.
show ip ospf [process-id [area-id]] database Display lists of information related to the OSPF database for a
specific router.
Use the no form of these commands to remove the configured parameter value or to return to the
default value.
Configuring Other OSPF Parameters

You can optionally configure other OSPF parameters in router configuration mode.
• Route summarization: When redistributing routes from other protocols as described in the “Using
Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information” section on page 36-90, each route is advertised
individually in an external LSA. To help decrease the size of the OSPF link state database, you can
use the summary-address router configuration command to advertise a single router for all the
redistributed routes included in a specified network address and mask.

OL-8553-06 36-29
Configuring OSPF
• Virtual links: In OSPF, all areas must be connected to a backbone area. You can establish a virtual
link in case of a backbone-continuity break by configuring two Area Border Routers as endpoints of
a virtual link. Configuration information includes the identity of the other virtual endpoint (the other
ABR) and the nonbackbone link that the two routers have in common (the transit area). Virtual links
cannot be configured through a stub area.
• Default route: When you specifically configure redistribution of routes into an OSPF routing
domain, the route automatically becomes an autonomous system boundary router (ASBR). You can
force the ASBR to generate a default route into the OSPF routing domain.
• Domain Name Server (DNS) names for use in all OSPF show privileged EXEC command displays
makes it easier to identify a router than displaying it by router ID or neighbor ID.
• Default Metrics: OSPF calculates the OSPF metric for an interface according to the bandwidth of
the interface. The metric is calculated as ref-bw divided by bandwidth, where ref is 10 by default,
and bandwidth (bw) is specified by the bandwidth interface configuration command. For multiple
links with high bandwidth, you can specify a larger number to differentiate the cost on those links.
• Administrative distance is a rating of the trustworthiness of a routing information source, an integer
between 0 and 255, with a higher value meaning a lower trust rating. An administrative distance of
255 means the routing information source cannot be trusted at all and should be ignored. OSPF uses
three different administrative distances: routes within an area (interarea), routes to another area
(interarea), and routes from another routing domain learned through redistribution (external). You
can change any of the distance values.
• Passive interfaces: Because interfaces between two devices on an Ethernet represent only one
network segment, to prevent OSPF from sending hello packets for the sending interface, you must
configure the sending device to be a passive interface. Both devices can identify each other through
the hello packet for the receiving interface.
• Route calculation timers: You can configure the delay time between when OSPF receives a topology
change and when it starts the shortest path first (SPF) calculation and the hold time between two
SPF calculations.
• Log neighbor changes: You can configure the router to send a syslog message when an OSPF
neighbor state changes, providing a high-level view of changes in the router.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure these OSPF parameters:
Command Purpose
Step 3 summary-address address mask (Optional) Specify an address and IP subnet mask for redistributed
routes so that only one summary route is advertised.
Step 4 area area-id virtual-link router-id (Optional) Establish a virtual link and set its parameters. See the
[hello-interval seconds] “Configuring OSPF Interfaces” section on page 36-27 for parameter
[retransmit-interval seconds] [trans] definitions and Table 36-5 on page 36-25 for virtual link defaults.
[[authentication-key key] |
message-digest-key keyid md5 key]]
Step 5 default-information originate [always] (Optional) Force the ASBR to generate a default route into the OSPF
[metric metric-value] [metric-type routing domain. Parameters are all optional.
type-value] [route-map map-name]
Step 6 ip ospf name-lookup (Optional) Configure DNS name lookup. The default is disabled.

36-30 OL-8553-06
Configuring OSPF
Command Purpose
Step 7 ip auto-cost reference-bandwidth ref-bw (Optional) Specify an address range for which a single route will be
advertised. Use this command only with area border routers.
Step 8 distance ospf {[inter-area dist1] [inter-area (Optional) Change the OSPF distance values. The default distance
dist2] [external dist3]} for each type of route is 110. The range is 1 to 255.
Step 9 passive-interface type number (Optional) Suppress the sending of hello packets through the
specified interface.
Step 10 timers throttle spf spf-delay spf-holdtime (Optional) Configure route calculation timers.
spf-wait
• spf-delay—Delay between receiving a change to SPF
calculation. The range is from 1 to 600000. miliseconds.
• spf-holdtime—Delay between first and second SPF calculation.
The range is form 1 to 600000 in milliseconds.
• spf-wait—Maximum wait time in milliseconds for SPF
calculations. The range is from 1 to 600000 in milliseconds.
Step 11 ospf log-adj-changes (Optional) Send syslog message when a neighbor state changes.
Step 13 show ip ospf [process-id [area-id]] database Display lists of information related to the OSPF database for a
specific router. For some of the keyword options, see the “Monitoring
OSPF” section on page 36-32.
Changing LSA Group Pacing

The OSPF LSA group pacing feature allows the router to group OSPF LSAs and pace the refreshing,
check-summing, and aging functions for more efficient router use. This feature is enabled by default with
a 4-minute default pacing interval, and you will not usually need to modify this parameter. The optimum
group pacing interval is inversely proportional to the number of LSAs the router is refreshing,
check-summing, and aging. For example, if you have approximately 10,000 LSAs in the database,
decreasing the pacing interval would benefit you. If you have a very small database (40 to 100 LSAs),
increasing the pacing interval to 10 to 20 minutes might benefit you slightly.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure OSPF LSA pacing:
Command Purpose
Step 3 timers lsa-group-pacing seconds Change the group pacing of LSAs.
To return to the default value, use the no timers lsa-group-pacing router configuration command.

OL-8553-06 36-31
Configuring OSPF
Configuring a Loopback Interface

OSPF uses the highest IP address configured on the interfaces as its router ID. If this interface is down
or removed, the OSPF process must recalculate a new router ID and resend all its routing information
out its interfaces. If a loopback interface is configured with an IP address, OSPF uses this IP address as
its router ID, even if other interfaces have higher IP addresses. Because loopback interfaces never fail,
this provides greater stability. OSPF automatically prefers a loopback interface over other interfaces, and
it chooses the highest IP address among all loopback interfaces.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a loopback interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface loopback 0 Create a loopback interface, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 ip address address mask Assign an IP address to this interface.
Step 5 show ip interface Verify your entries.
Use the no interface loopback 0 global configuration command to disable the loopback interface.
Monitoring OSPF
You can display specific statistics such as the contents of IP routing tables, caches, and databases.
Table 36-6 lists some of the privileged EXEC commands for displaying statistics. For more show ip ospf
database privileged EXEC command options and for explanations of fields in the resulting display, see
the Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols, Release 12.2.
Table 36-6 Show IP OSPF Statistics Commands
Command Purpose
show ip ospf [process-id] Display general information about OSPF routing
processes.
show ip ospf [process-id] database [router] [link-state-id] Display lists of information related to the OSPF
database.
show ip ospf [process-id] database [router] [self-originate]
show ip ospf [process-id] database [router] [adv-router [ip-address]]
show ip ospf [process-id] database [network] [link-state-id]
show ip ospf [process-id] database [summary] [link-state-id]
show ip ospf [process-id] database [asbr-summary] [link-state-id]
show ip ospf [process-id] database [external] [link-state-id]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [database-summary]
show ip ospf border-routes Display the internal OSPF routing ABR and ASBR
table entries.
show ip ospf interface [interface-name] Display OSPF-related interface information.

36-32 OL-8553-06
Configuring EIGRP
Table 36-6 Show IP OSPF Statistics Commands
Command Purpose
show ip ospf neighbor [interface-name] [neighbor-id] detail Display OSPF interface neighbor information.
show ip ospf virtual-links Display OSPF-related virtual links information.
Configuring EIGRP
Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP) is a Cisco proprietary enhanced version of the IGRP. EIGRP uses the same
distance vector algorithm and distance information as IGRP; however, the convergence properties and
the operating efficiency of EIGRP are significantly improved.
The convergence technology employs an algorithm referred to as the Diffusing Update Algorithm
(DUAL), which guarantees loop-free operation at every instant throughout a route computation and
allows all devices involved in a topology change to synchronize at the same time. Routers that are not
affected by topology changes are not involved in recomputations.
IP EIGRP provides increased network width. With RIP, the largest possible width of your network is
15 hops. Because the EIGRP metric is large enough to support thousands of hops, the only barrier to
expanding the network is the transport-layer hop counter. EIGRP increments the transport control field
only when an IP packet has traversed 15 routers and the next hop to the destination was learned through
EIGRP. When a RIP route is used as the next hop to the destination, the transport control field is
incremented as usual.
EIGRP offers these features:
• Fast convergence.
• Incremental updates when the state of a destination changes, instead of sending the entire contents
of the routing table, minimizing the bandwidth required for EIGRP packets.
• Less CPU usage because full update packets need not be processed each time they are received.
• Protocol-independent neighbor discovery mechanism to learn about neighboring routers.
• Variable-length subnet masks (VLSMs).
• Arbitrary route summarization.
• EIGRP scales to large networks.
EIGRP has these four basic components:
• Neighbor discovery and recovery is the process that routers use to dynamically learn of other routers
on their directly attached networks. Routers must also discover when their neighbors become
unreachable or inoperative. Neighbor discovery and recovery is achieved with low overhead by
periodically sending small hello packets. As long as hello packets are received, the Cisco IOS
software can learn that a neighbor is alive and functioning. When this status is determined, the
neighboring routers can exchange routing information.
• The reliable transport protocol is responsible for guaranteed, ordered delivery of EIGRP packets to
all neighbors. It supports intermixed transmission of multicast and unicast packets. Some EIGRP
packets must be sent reliably, and others need not be. For efficiency, reliability is provided only
when necessary. For example, on a multiaccess network that has multicast capabilities (such as
Ethernet), it is not necessary to send hellos reliably to all neighbors individually. Therefore, EIGRP
sends a single multicast hello with an indication in the packet informing the receivers that the packet
need not be acknowledged. Other types of packets (such as updates) require acknowledgment, which

OL-8553-06 36-33
Configuring EIGRP
is shown in the packet. The reliable transport has a provision to send multicast packets quickly when
there are unacknowledged packets pending. Doing so helps ensure that convergence time remains
low in the presence of varying speed links.
• The DUAL finite state machine embodies the decision process for all route computations. It tracks
all routes advertised by all neighbors. DUAL uses the distance information (known as a metric) to
select efficient, loop-free paths. DUAL selects routes to be inserted into a routing table based on
feasible successors. A successor is a neighboring router used for packet forwarding that has a
least-cost path to a destination that is guaranteed not to be part of a routing loop. When there are no
feasible successors, but there are neighbors advertising the destination, a recomputation must occur.
This is the process whereby a new successor is determined. The amount of time it takes to recompute
the route affects the convergence time. Recomputation is processor-intensive; it is advantageous to
avoid recomputation if it is not necessary. When a topology change occurs, DUAL tests for feasible
successors. If there are feasible successors, it uses any it finds to avoid unnecessary recomputation.
• The protocol-dependent modules are responsible for network layer protocol-specific tasks. An
example is the IP EIGRP module, which is responsible for sending and receiving EIGRP packets
that are encapsulated in IP. It is also responsible for parsing EIGRP packets and informing DUAL
of the new information received. EIGRP asks DUAL to make routing decisions, but the results are
stored in the IP routing table. EIGRP is also responsible for redistributing routes learned by other
IP routing protocols.
• Default EIGRP Configuration, page 36-34
• Configuring Basic EIGRP Parameters, page 36-36
• Configuring EIGRP Interfaces, page 36-37
• Configuring EIGRP Route Authentication, page 36-38
• Configuring EIGRP Stub Routing, page 36-39
• Monitoring and Maintaining EIGRP, page 36-40
Note To enable EIGRP, the switch must be running the IP services image.
Default EIGRP Configuration

Table 36-7 shows the default EIGRP configuration.
Table 36-7 Default EIGRP Configuration

Auto summary Enabled. Subprefixes are summarized to the classful network
boundary when crossing classful network boundaries.
Default-information Exterior routes are accepted and default information is passed
between EIGRP processes when doing redistribution.

36-34 OL-8553-06
Configuring EIGRP
Table 36-7 Default EIGRP Configuration (continued)

Default metric Only connected routes and interface static routes can be redistributed
without a default metric. The metric includes:
• Bandwidth: 0 or greater kb/s.
• Delay (tens of microseconds): 0 or any positive number that is a
multiple of 39.1 nanoseconds.
• Reliability: any number between 0 and 255 (255 means
100 percent reliability).
• Loading: effective bandwidth as a number between 0 and 255
(255 is 100 percent loading).
• MTU: maximum transmission unit size of the route in bytes. 0 or
any positive integer.
Distance Internal distance: 90.
External distance: 170.
EIGRP log-neighbor changes Disabled. No adjacency changes logged.
IP authentication key-chain No authentication provided.
IP authentication mode No authentication provided.
IP bandwidth-percent 50 percent.
IP hello interval For low-speed nonbroadcast multiaccess (NBMA) networks:
60 seconds; all other networks: 5 seconds.
IP hold-time For low-speed NBMA networks: 180 seconds; all other networks:
15 seconds.
IP split-horizon Enabled.
IP summary address No summary aggregate addresses are predefined.
Metric weights tos: 0; k1 and k3: 1; k2, k4, and k5: 0
Network None specified.
1
NSF Awareness Enabled2. Allows Layer 3 switches to continue forwarding packets
from a neighboring NSF-capable router during hardware or software
changes.
Offset-list Disabled.
Router EIGRP Disabled.
Set metric No metric set in the route map.
Traffic-share Distributed proportionately to the ratios of the metrics.
Variance 1 (equal-cost load balancing).
1. NSF = Nonstop Forwarding
2. EIGRP NSF awareness is enabled for IPv4 on Catalyst 3550, 3560 and 3750 switches running the IP services image.
To create an EIGRP routing process, you must enable EIGRP and associate networks. EIGRP sends
updates to the interfaces in the specified networks. If you do not specify an interface network, it is not
advertised in any EIGRP update.

OL-8553-06 36-35
Configuring EIGRP
Note If you have routers on your network that are configured for IGRP, and you want to change to EIGRP, you
must designate transition routers that have both IGRP and EIGRP configured. In these cases, perform
Steps 1 through 3 in the next section and also see the “Configuring Split Horizon” section on page 36-23.
You must use the same AS number for routes to be automatically redistributed.
EIGRP NSF Awareness

The EIGRP NSF Awareness feature is supported for IPv4 in the IP services image. When the neighboring
router is NSF-capable, the Layer 3 switch continues to forward packets from the neighboring router
during the interval between the primary Route Processor (RP) in a router failing and the backup RP
taking over, or while the primary RP is manually reloaded for a nondisruptive software upgrade.
This feature cannot be disabled. For more information on this feature, see the EIGRP Nonstop
Forwarding (NSF) Awareness Feature Guide at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1839/products_feature_guide09186a0080160010
.html
Configuring Basic EIGRP Parameters

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure EIGRP. Configuring the routing
process is required; other steps are optional:
Command Purpose
Step 2 router eigrp autonomous-system number Enable an EIGRP routing process, and enter router configuration
mode. The AS number identifies the routes to other EIGRP routers
and tags routing information.
Step 3 network network-number Associate networks with an EIGRP routing process. EIGRP sends
updates to the interfaces in the specified networks.
Step 4 eigrp log-neighbor-changes (Optional) Enable logging of EIGRP neighbor changes to monitor
routing system stability.
Step 5 metric weights tos k1 k2 k3 k4 k5 (Optional) Adjust the EIGRP metric. Although the defaults have
been carefully set to provide excellent operation in most networks,
you can adjust them.
Caution Setting metrics is complex and is not recommended

without guidance from an experienced network
designer.
Step 6 offset list [access-list number | name] {in | out} (Optional) Apply an offset list to routing metrics to increase
offset [type number] incoming and outgoing metrics to routes learned through EIGRP.
You can limit the offset list with an access list or an interface.
Step 7 no auto-summary (Optional) Disable automatic summarization of subnet routes into
network-level routes.
Step 8 ip summary-address eigrp (Optional) Configure a summary aggregate.
autonomous-system-number address mask

36-36 OL-8553-06
Configuring EIGRP
Command Purpose
For NSF awareness, the output shows:
*** IP Routing is NSF aware ***
EIGRP NSF enabled

Use the no forms of these commands to disable the feature or return the setting to the default value.
Configuring EIGRP Interfaces

Other optional EIGRP parameters can be configured on an interface basis.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure EIGRP interfaces:
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip bandwidth-percent eigrp percent (Optional) Configure the percentage of bandwidth that can
be used by EIGRP on an interface. The default is 50 percent.
Step 4 ip summary-address eigrp (Optional) Configure a summary aggregate address for a
autonomous-system-number address mask specified interface (not usually necessary if auto-summary is
enabled).
Step 5 ip hello-interval eigrp autonomous-system-number (Optional) Change the hello time interval for an EIGRP
seconds routing process. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The
default is 60 seconds for low-speed NBMA networks and 5
seconds for all other networks.
Step 6 ip hold-time eigrp autonomous-system-number (Optional) Change the hold time interval for an EIGRP
seconds routing process. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The
default is 180 seconds for low-speed NBMA networks and
15 seconds for all other networks.
Caution Do not adjust the hold time without consulting

Cisco technical support.
Step 7 no ip split-horizon eigrp autonomous-system-number (Optional) Disable split horizon to allow route information
to be advertised by a router out any interface from which that
information originated.

OL-8553-06 36-37
Configuring EIGRP
Command Purpose
Step 9 show ip eigrp interface Display which interfaces EIGRP is active on and
information about EIGRP relating to those interfaces.
Use the no forms of these commands to disable the feature or return the setting to the default value.
Configuring EIGRP Route Authentication

EIGRP route authentication provides MD5 authentication of routing updates from the EIGRP routing
protocol to prevent the introduction of unauthorized or false routing messages from unapproved sources.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable authentication:
Command Purpose
Layer 3 interface to configure.
Step 3 ip authentication mode eigrp autonomous-system md5 Enable MD5 authentication in IP EIGRP packets.
Step 4 ip authentication key-chain eigrp autonomous-system Enable authentication of IP EIGRP packets.
key-chain
Step 6 key chain name-of-chain Identify a key chain and enter key-chain configuration
mode. Match the name configured in Step 4.
Step 7 key number In key-chain configuration mode, identify the key
number.
Step 8 key-string text In key-chain key configuration mode, identify the key
string.
Step 9 accept-lifetime start-time {infinite | end-time | duration (Optional) Specify the time period during which the key
seconds} can be received.
The start-time and end-time syntax can be either
hh:mm:ss Month date year or hh:mm:ss date Month
year. The default is forever with the default start-time
and the earliest acceptable date as January 1, 1993. The
default end-time and duration is infinite.
Step 10 send-lifetime start-time {infinite | end-time | duration (Optional) Specify the time period during which the key
seconds} can be sent.

36-38 OL-8553-06
Configuring EIGRP
Command Purpose
Step 12 show key chain Display authentication key information.
Use the no forms of these commands to disable the feature or to return the setting to the default value.
Configuring EIGRP Stub Routing

The EIGRP stub routing feature, available in all images, reduces resource utilization by moving routed
traffic closer to the end user.
Note The IP base image contains only EIGRP stub routing capability, which only advertises connected or
summary routes from the routing tables to other switches in the network. The switch uses EIGRP stub
routing at the access layer to eliminate the need for other types of routing advertisements. For enhanced
capability and complete EIGRP routing, the switch must be running the IP services image.
On a switch running the IP base image, if you try to configure multi-VRF-CE and EIGRP stub routing
at the same time, the configuration is not allowed.
In a network using EIGRP stub routing, the only allowable route for IP traffic to the user is through a
switch that is configured with EIGRP stub routing. The switch sends the routed traffic to interfaces that
are configured as user interfaces or are connected to other devices.
When using EIGRP stub routing, you need to configure the distribution and remote routers to use EIGRP
and to configure only the switch as a stub. Only specified routes are propagated from the switch. The
switch responds to all queries for summaries, connected routes, and routing updates.
Any neighbor that receives a packet informing it of the stub status does not query the stub router for any
routes, and a router that has a stub peer does not query that peer. The stub router depends on the
distribution router to send the proper updates to all peers.
In Figure 36-4, switch B is configured as an EIGRP stub router. Switches A and C are connected to the
rest of the WAN. Switch B advertises connected, static, redistribution, and summary routes to switch A
and C. Switch B does not advertise any routes learned from switch A (and the reverse).

OL-8553-06 36-39
Configuring BGP
Figure 36-4 EIGRP Stub Router Configuration
Routed to WAN
Switch A Switch B Switch C
145776
Host A Host B Host C
For more information about EIGRP stub routing, see “Configuring EIGRP Stub Routing” part of the
Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com
page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Configuration Guides.
Monitoring and Maintaining EIGRP

You can delete neighbors from the neighbor table. You can also display various EIGRP routing statistics.
Table 36-8 lists the privileged EXEC commands for deleting neighbors and displaying statistics. For
explanations of fields in the resulting display, see the Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 2 of 3:
Routing Protocols, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software
> 12.2 Mainline > Command References.
Table 36-8 IP EIGRP Clear and Show Commands
Command Purpose
clear ip eigrp neighbors [if-address | interface] Delete neighbors from the neighbor table.
show ip eigrp interface [interface] [as number] Display information about interfaces configured for EIGRP.
show ip eigrp neighbors [type-number] Display EIGRP discovered neighbors.
show ip eigrp topology [autonomous-system-number] | Display the EIGRP topology table for a given process.
[[ip-address] mask]]
show ip eigrp traffic [autonomous-system-number] Display the number of packets sent and received for all or a
specified EIGRP process.
Configuring BGP
The Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an exterior gateway protocol used to set up an interdomain
routing system that guarantees the loop-free exchange of routing information between autonomous
systems. Autonomous systems are made up of routers that operate under the same administration and
that run Interior Gateway Protocols (IGPs), such as RIP or OSPF, within their boundaries and that
interconnect by using an Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP). BGP Version 4 is the standard EGP for
interdomain routing in the Internet. The protocol is defined in RFCs 1163, 1267, and 1771. You can find

36-40 OL-8553-06
Configuring BGP
detailed information about BGP in Internet Routing Architectures, published by Cisco Press, and in the
“Configuring BGP” chapter in the Cisco IP and IP Routing Configuration Guide from the Cisco.com
page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Configuration Guides.
For details about BGP commands and keywords, see the “IP Routing Protocols” part of the Cisco IOS
IP Command Reference, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols, Release 12.2 under Documentation > Cisco
IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command References. For a list of BGP commands that are visible
but not supported by the switch, see Appendix C, “Unsupported Commands in
Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE.”
Routers that belong to the same autonomous system (AS) and that exchange BGP updates run internal
BGP (IBGP), and routers that belong to different autonomous systems and that exchange BGP updates
run external BGP (EBGP). Most configuration commands are the same for configuring EBGP and IBGP.
The difference is that the routing updates are exchanged either between autonomous systems (EBGP) or
within an AS (IBGP). Figure 36-5 shows a network that is running both EBGP and IBGP.
Figure 36-5 EBGP, IBGP, and Multiple Autonomous Systems
AS 100 Router A Router D AS 300
129.213.1.2 192.208.10.1
EBGP EBGP
129.213.1.1 192.208.10.2
Router B IBGP Router C
175.220.212.1 175.220.1.2
74775
AS 200
Before exchanging information with an external AS, BGP ensures that networks within the AS can be
reached by defining internal BGP peering among routers within the AS and by redistributing BGP
routing information to IGPs that run within the AS, such as IGRP and OSPF.
Routers that run a BGP routing process are often referred to as BGP speakers. BGP uses the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) as its transport protocol (specifically port 179). Two BGP speakers
that have a TCP connection to each other for exchanging routing information are known as peers or
neighbors. In Figure 36-5, Routers A and B are BGP peers, as are Routers B and C and Routers C and
D. The routing information is a series of AS numbers that describe the full path to the destination
network. BGP uses this information to construct a loop-free map of autonomous systems.
The network has these characteristics:
• Routers A and B are running EBGP, and Routers B and C are running IBGP. Note that the EBGP
peers are directly connected and that the IBGP peers are not. As long as there is an IGP running that
allows the two neighbors to reach one another, IBGP peers do not have to be directly connected.
• All BGP speakers within an AS must establish a peer relationship with each other. That is, the BGP
speakers within an AS must be fully meshed logically. BGP4 provides two techniques that reduce
the requirement for a logical full mesh: confederations and route reflectors.
• AS 200 is a transit AS for AS 100 and AS 300—that is, AS 200 is used to transfer packets between
AS 100 and AS 300.

OL-8553-06 36-41
Configuring BGP
BGP peers initially exchange their full BGP routing tables and then send only incremental updates. BGP
peers also exchange keepalive messages (to ensure that the connection is up) and notification messages
(in response to errors or special conditions).
In BGP, each route consists of a network number, a list of autonomous systems that information has
passed through (the autonomous system path), and a list of other path attributes. The primary function
of a BGP system is to exchange network reachability information, including information about the list
of AS paths, with other BGP systems. This information can be used to determine AS connectivity, to
prune routing loops, and to enforce AS-level policy decisions.
A router or switch running Cisco IOS does not select or use an IBGP route unless it has a route available
to the next-hop router and it has received synchronization from an IGP (unless IGP synchronization is
disabled). When multiple routes are available, BGP bases its path selection on attribute values. See the
“Configuring BGP Decision Attributes” section on page 36-49 for information about BGP attributes.
BGP Version 4 supports classless interdomain routing (CIDR) so you can reduce the size of your routing
tables by creating aggregate routes, resulting in supernets. CIDR eliminates the concept of network
classes within BGP and supports the advertising of IP prefixes.
• Default BGP Configuration, page 36-43
• Enabling BGP Routing, page 36-45
• Managing Routing Policy Changes, page 36-47
• Configuring BGP Decision Attributes, page 36-49
• Configuring BGP Filtering with Route Maps, page 36-51
• Configuring BGP Filtering by Neighbor, page 36-51
• Configuring Prefix Lists for BGP Filtering, page 36-53
• Configuring BGP Community Filtering, page 36-54
• Configuring BGP Neighbors and Peer Groups, page 36-55
• Configuring Aggregate Addresses, page 36-57
• Configuring Routing Domain Confederations, page 36-58
• Configuring BGP Route Reflectors, page 36-58
• Configuring Route Dampening, page 36-59
• Monitoring and Maintaining BGP, page 36-60
For detailed descriptions of BGP configuration, see the “Configuring BGP” chapter in the “IP Routing
Protocols” part of the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide, Release 12.2. For details about specific
commands, see the Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols, Release 12.2.
Locate these documents from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2
Mainline > Configuration Guides or Command References.
For a list of BGP commands that are visible but not supported by the switch, see Appendix C,
“Unsupported Commands in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE.”

36-42 OL-8553-06
Configuring BGP
Default BGP Configuration

Table 36-9 shows the basic default BGP configuration. For the defaults for all characteristics, see the
specific commands in the Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols,
Release 12.2.
Table 36-9 Default BGP Configuration

Aggregate address Disabled: None defined.
AS path access list None defined.
Auto summary Enabled.
Best path • The router considers as-path in choosing a route and does not compare similar
routes from external BGP peers.
• Compare router ID: Disabled.
BGP community list • Number: None defined. When you permit a value for the community number, the
list defaults to an implicit deny for everything else that has not been permitted.
• Format: Cisco default format (32-bit number).
BGP confederation identifier/peers • Identifier: None configured.
• Peers: None identified.
BGP Fast external fallover Enabled.
BGP local preference 100. The range is 0 to 4294967295 with the higher value preferred.
BGP network None specified; no backdoor route advertised.
BGP route dampening Disabled by default. When enabled:
• Half-life is 15 minutes.
• Re-use is 750 (10-second increments).
• Suppress is 2000 (10-second increments).
• Max-suppress-time is 4 times half-life; 60 minutes.
BGP router ID The IP address of a loopback interface if one is configured or the highest IP address
configured for a physical interface on the router.
Default information originate Disabled.
(protocol or network redistribution)
Default metric Built-in, automatic metric translations.
Distance • External route administrative distance: 20 (acceptable values are from 1 to 255).
• Internal route administrative distance: 200 (acceptable values are from 1 to 255).
• Local route administrative distance: 200 (acceptable values are from 1 to 255).
Distribute list • In (filter networks received in updates): Disabled.
• Out (suppress networks from being advertised in updates): Disabled.
Internal route redistribution Disabled.
IP prefix list None defined.

OL-8553-06 36-43
Configuring BGP
Table 36-9 Default BGP Configuration (continued)

Multi exit discriminator (MED) • Always compare: Disabled. Does not compare MEDs for paths from neighbors in
different autonomous systems.
• Best path compare: Disabled.
• MED missing as worst path: Disabled.
• Deterministic MED comparison is disabled.
Neighbor • Advertisement interval: 30 seconds for external peers; 5 seconds for internal peers.
• Change logging: Enabled.
• Conditional advertisement: Disabled.
• Default originate: No default route is sent to the neighbor.
• Description: None.
• Distribute list: None defined.
• External BGP multihop: Only directly connected neighbors are allowed.
• Filter list: None used.
• Maximum number of prefixes received: No limit.
• Next hop (router as next hop for BGP neighbor): Disabled.
• Password: Disabled.
• Peer group: None defined; no members assigned.
• Prefix list: None specified.
• Remote AS (add entry to neighbor BGP table): No peers defined.
• Private AS number removal: Disabled.
• Route maps: None applied to a peer.
• Send community attributes: None sent to neighbors.
• Shutdown or soft reconfiguration: Not enabled.
• Timers: keepalive: 60 seconds; holdtime: 180 seconds.
• Update source: Best local address.
• Version: BGP Version 4.
• Weight: Routes learned through BGP peer: 0; routes sourced by the local router:
32768.
NSF1 Awareness Disabled2. Allows Layer 3 switches to continue forwarding packets from a neighboring
NSF-capable router during hardware or software changes.
Route reflector None configured.
Synchronization (BGP and IGP) Enabled.
Table map update Disabled.
Timers Keepalive: 60 seconds; holdtime: 180 seconds.
2. NSF Awareness can be enabled for IPv4 on Catalyst 3550, 3560, and 3750 switches with the IP services image by enabling Graceful Restart.

36-44 OL-8553-06
Configuring BGP
Nonstop Forwarding Awareness

The BGP NSF Awareness feature is supported for IPv4 in the IP services image. To enable this feature
with BGP routing, you need to enable Graceful Restart. When the neighboring router is NSF-capable,
and this feature is enabled, the Layer 3 switch continues to forward packets from the neighboring router
during the interval between the primary Route Processor (RP) in a router failing and the backup RP
taking over, or while the primary RP is manually reloaded for a nondisruptive software upgrade.
For more information, see the BGP Nonstop Forwarding (NSF) Awareness Feature Guide at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1839/products_feature_guide09186a008015fede.
html
Enabling BGP Routing

To enable BGP routing, you establish a BGP routing process and define the local network. Because BGP
must completely recognize the relationships with its neighbors, you must also specify a BGP neighbor.
BGP supports two kinds of neighbors: internal and external. Internal neighbors are in the same AS;
external neighbors are in different autonomous systems. External neighbors are usually adjacent to each
other and share a subnet, but internal neighbors can be anywhere in the same AS.
The switch supports the use of private AS numbers, usually assigned by service providers and given to
systems whose routes are not advertised to external neighbors. The private AS numbers are from 64512
to 65535. You can configure external neighbors to remove private AS numbers from the AS path by using
the neighbor remove-private-as router configuration command. Then when an update is passed to an
external neighbor, if the AS path includes private AS numbers, these numbers are dropped.
If your AS will be passing traffic through it from another AS to a third AS, it is important to be consistent
about the routes it advertises. If BGP advertised a route before all routers in the network had learned
about the route through the IGP, the AS might receive traffic that some routers could not yet route. To
prevent this from happening, BGP must wait until the IGP has propagated information across the AS so
that BGP is synchronized with the IGP. Synchronization is enabled by default. If your AS does not pass
traffic from one AS to another AS, or if all routers in your autonomous systems are running BGP, you
can disable synchronization, which allows your network to carry fewer routes in the IGP and allows BGP
to converge more quickly.
Note To enable BGP, the switch must be running the IP services image.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable BGP routing, establish a BGP routing
process, and specify a neighbor:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip routing Enable IP routing (required only if IP routing is disabled).
Step 3 router bgp autonomous-system Enable a BGP routing process, assign it an AS number, and
enter router configuration mode. The AS number can be from
1 to 65535, with 64512 to 65535 designated as private
autonomous numbers.
Step 4 network network-number [mask network-mask] Configure a network as local to this AS, and enter it in the BGP
[route-map route-map-name] table.

OL-8553-06 36-45
Configuring BGP
Command Purpose
Step 5 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} Add an entry to the BGP neighbor table specifying that the
remote-as number neighbor identified by the IP address belongs to the specified
AS.
For EBGP, neighbors are usually directly connected, and the IP
address is the address of the interface at the other end of the
connection.
For IBGP, the IP address can be the address of any of the router
interfaces.
Step 6 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Remove private AS numbers from the AS-path in
remove-private-as outbound routing updates.
Step 7 no synchronization (Optional) Disable synchronization between BGP and an IGP.
Step 8 no auto-summary (Optional) Disable automatic network summarization. By
default, when a subnet is redistributed from an IGP into BGP,
only the network route is inserted into the BGP table.
Step 9 bgp fast-external-fallover (Optional) Automatically reset a BGP session when a link
between external neighbors goes down. By default, the session
is not immediately reset.
Step 10 bgp graceful-restart (Optional) Enable NSF awareness on switch. By default, NSF
awareness is disabled.
Step 12 show ip bgp network network-number Verify the configuration.
or
show ip bgp neighbor

Verify that NSF awareness (Graceful Restart) is enabled on the
neighbor.
If NSF awareness is enabled on the switch and the neighbor,
this message appears:
Graceful Restart Capability: advertised and received
If NSF awareness is enabled on the switch, but not on the

neighbor, this message appears:
Graceful Restart Capability: advertised
Use the no router bgp autonomous-system global configuration command to remove a BGP AS. Use the
no network network-number router configuration command to remove the network from the BGP table.
Use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remote-as number router configuration command
to remove a neighbor. Use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as router
configuration command to include private AS numbers in updates to a neighbor. Use the
synchronization router configuration command to re-enable synchronization.
These examples show how to configure BGP on the routers in Figure 36-5.
Router A:
Switch(config)# router bgp 100
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 129.213.1.1 remote-as 200

36-46 OL-8553-06
Configuring BGP
Router B:
Router C:
Router D:
To verify that BGP peers are running, use the show ip bgp neighbors privileged EXEC command. This
is the output of this command on Router A:
Switch# show ip bgp neighbors
BGP neighbor is 129.213.1.1, remote AS 200, external link

BGP version 4, remote router ID 175.220.212.1
BGP state = established, table version = 3, up for 0:10:59
Last read 0:00:29, hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds
Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds
Received 2828 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue
Sent 2826 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue
Connections established 11; dropped 10
Anything other than state = established means that the peers are not running. The remote router ID is
the highest IP address on that router (or the highest loopback interface). Each time the table is updated
with new information, the table version number increments. A table version number that continually
increments means that a route is flapping, causing continual routing updates.
For exterior protocols, a reference to an IP network from the network router configuration command
controls only which networks are advertised. This is in contrast to Interior Gateway Protocols (IGPs),
such as EIGRP, which also use the network command to specify where to send updates.
For detailed descriptions of BGP configuration, see the “IP Routing Protocols” part of the Cisco IOS IP
Configuration Guide, Release 12.2. For details about specific commands, see the Cisco IOS IP
Command Reference, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols, Release 12.2. See Appendix C, “Unsupported
Commands in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE,” for a list of BGP commands that are visible but not
supported by the switch.
Managing Routing Policy Changes

Routing policies for a peer include all the configurations that might affect inbound or outbound routing
table updates. When you have defined two routers as BGP neighbors, they form a BGP connection and
exchange routing information. If you later change a BGP filter, weight, distance, version, or timer, or
make a similar configuration change, you must reset the BGP sessions so that the configuration changes
take effect.
There are two types of reset, hard reset and soft reset. The switch support a soft reset without any prior
configuration. To use a soft reset without preconfiguration, both BGP peers must support the soft route
refresh capability, which is advertised in the OPEN message sent when the peers establish a TCP session.
A soft reset allows the dynamic exchange of route refresh requests and routing information between BGP
routers and the subsequent re-advertisement of the respective outbound routing table.

OL-8553-06 36-47
Configuring BGP
• When soft reset generates inbound updates from a neighbor, it is called dynamic inbound soft reset.
• When soft reset sends a set of updates to a neighbor, it is called outbound soft reset.
A soft inbound reset causes the new inbound policy to take effect. A soft outbound reset causes the new
local outbound policy to take effect without resetting the BGP session. As a new set of updates is sent
during outbound policy reset, a new inbound policy can also take effect.
Table 36-10 lists the advantages and disadvantages hard reset and soft reset.
Table 36-10 Advantages and Disadvantages of Hard and Soft Resets
Type of Reset Advantages Disadvantages

Hard reset No memory overhead The prefixes in the BGP, IP, and FIB tables
provided by the neighbor are lost. Not
recommended.
Outbound soft reset No configuration, no storing of routing table Does not reset inbound routing table updates.
updates
Dynamic inbound soft reset Does not clear the BGP session and cache Both BGP routers must support the route
refresh capability.
Does not require storing of routing table updates
and has no memory overhead
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to learn if a BGP peer supports the route refresh
capability and to reset the BGP session:
Command Purpose
Step 1 show ip bgp neighbors Display whether a neighbor supports the route refresh capability. When supported,
this message appears for the router:
Received route refresh capability from peer.
Step 2 clear ip bgp {* | address | Reset the routing table on the specified connection.
peer-group-name}
• Enter an asterisk (*) to specify that all connections be reset.
• Enter an IP address to specify the connection to be reset.
• Enter a peer group name to reset the peer group.
Step 3 clear ip bgp {* | address | (Optional) Perform an outbound soft reset to reset the inbound routing table on the
peer-group-name} soft out specified connection. Use this command if route refresh is supported.
• Enter an asterisk (*) to specify that all connections be reset.
• Enter an IP address to specify the connection to be reset.
• Enter a peer group name to reset the peer group.
Step 4 show ip bgp Verify the reset by checking information about the routing table and about BGP
show ip bgp neighbors neighbors.

36-48 OL-8553-06
Configuring BGP
Configuring BGP Decision Attributes

When a BGP speaker receives updates from multiple autonomous systems that describe different paths
to the same destination, it must choose the single best path for reaching that destination. When chosen,
the selected path is entered into the BGP routing table and propagated to its neighbors. The decision is
based on the value of attributes that the update contains and other BGP-configurable factors.
When a BGP peer learns two EBGP paths for a prefix from a neighboring AS, it chooses the best path
and inserts that path in the IP routing table. If BGP multipath support is enabled and the EBGP paths are
learned from the same neighboring autonomous systems, instead of a single best path, multiple paths are
installed in the IP routing table. Then, during packet switching, per-packet or per-destination load
balancing is performed among the multiple paths. The maximum-paths router configuration command
controls the number of paths allowed.
These factors summarize the order in which BGP evaluates the attributes for choosing the best path:
1. If the path specifies a next hop that is inaccessible, drop the update. The BGP next-hop attribute,
automatically determined by the software, is the IP address of the next hop that is going to be used
to reach a destination. For EBGP, this is usually the IP address of the neighbor specified by the
neighbor remote-as router configuration command. You can disable next-hop processing by using
route maps or the neighbor next-hop-self router configuration command.
2. Prefer the path with the largest weight (a Cisco proprietary parameter). The weight attribute is local
to the router and not propagated in routing updates. By default, the weight attribute is 32768 for
paths that the router originates and zero for other paths. Routes with the largest weight are preferred.
You can use access lists, route maps, or the neighbor weight router configuration command to set
weights.
3. Prefer the route with the highest local preference. Local preference is part of the routing update and
exchanged among routers in the same AS. The default value of the local preference attribute is 100.
You can set local preference by using the bgp default local-preference router configuration
command or by using a route map.
4. Prefer the route that was originated by BGP running on the local router.
5. Prefer the route with the shortest AS path.
6. Prefer the route with the lowest origin type. An interior route or IGP is lower than a route learned
by EGP, and an EGP-learned route is lower than one of unknown origin or learned in another way.
7. Prefer the route with the lowest multi -exit discriminator (MED) metric attribute if the neighboring
AS is the same for all routes considered. You can configure the MED by using route maps or by using
the default-metric router configuration command. When an update is sent to an IBGP peer, the
MED is included.
8. Prefer the external (EBGP) path over the internal (IBGP) path.
9. Prefer the route that can be reached through the closest IGP neighbor (the lowest IGP metric). This
means that the router will prefer the shortest internal path within the AS to reach the destination (the
shortest path to the BGP next-hop).
10. If the following conditions are all true, insert the route for this path into the IP routing table:
• Both the best route and this route are external.
• Both the best route and this route are from the same neighboring autonomous system.
• maximum-paths is enabled.
11. If multipath is not enabled, prefer the route with the lowest IP address value for the BGP router ID.
The router ID is usually the highest IP address on the router or the loopback (virtual) address, but
might be implementation-specific.

OL-8553-06 36-49
Configuring BGP
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure some decision attributes:
Command Purpose
Step 2 router bgp autonomous-system Enable a BGP routing process, assign it an AS number, and enter
router configuration mode.
Step 3 bgp best-path as-path ignore (Optional) Configure the router to ignore AS path length in
selecting a route.
Step 4 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Disable next-hop processing on BGP updates to a
next-hop-self neighbor by entering a specific IP address to be used instead of
the next-hop address.
Step 5 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Assign a weight to a neighbor connection. Acceptable
weight weight values are from 0 to 65535; the largest weight is the preferred
route. Routes learned through another BGP peer have a default
weight of 0; routes sourced by the local router have a default
weight of 32768.
Step 6 default-metric number (Optional) Set a MED metric to set preferred paths to external
neighbors. All routes without a MED will also be set to this value.
The range is 1 to 4294967295. The lowest value is the most
desirable.
Step 7 bgp bestpath med missing-as-worst (Optional) Configure the switch to consider a missing MED as
having a value of infinity, making the path without a MED value
the least desirable path.
Step 8 bgp always-compare med (Optional) Configure the switch to compare MEDs for paths from
neighbors in different autonomous systems. By default, MED
comparison is only done among paths in the same AS.
Step 9 bgp bestpath med confed (Optional) Configure the switch to consider the MED in choosing
a path from among those advertised by different subautonomous
systems within a confederation.
Step 10 bgp deterministic med (Optional) Configure the switch to consider the MED variable
when choosing among routes advertised by different peers in the
same AS.
Step 11 bgp default local-preference value (Optional) Change the default local preference value. The range
is 0 to 4294967295; the default value is 100. The highest local
preference value is preferred.
Step 12 maximum-paths number (Optional) Configure the number of paths to be added to the IP
routing table. The default is to only enter the best path in the
routing table. The range is from 1 to 16. Having multiple paths
allows load balancing among the paths. (Although the switch
software allows a maximum of 32 equal-cost routes, the switch
hardware will never use more than 16 paths per route.)
Step 14 show ip bgp Verify the reset by checking information about the routing table
show ip bgp neighbors and about BGP neighbors.

36-50 OL-8553-06
Configuring BGP
Use the no form of each command to return to the default state.
Configuring BGP Filtering with Route Maps

Within BGP, route maps can be used to control and to modify routing information and to define the
conditions by which routes are redistributed between routing domains. See the “Using Route Maps to
Redistribute Routing Information” section on page 36-90 for more information about route maps. Each
route map has a name that identifies the route map (map tag) and an optional sequence number.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to use a route map to disable next-hop
processing:
Command Purpose
Step 2 route-map map-tag [[permit | deny] | Create a route map, and enter route-map configuration mode.
sequence-number]]
Step 3 set ip next-hop ip-address [...ip-address] (Optional) Set a route map to disable next-hop processing
[peer-address]
• In an inbound route map, set the next hop of matching routes to
be the neighbor peering address, overriding third-party next hops.
• In an outbound route map of a BGP peer, set the next hop to the
peering address of the local router, disabling the next-hop
calculation.
Step 5 show route-map [map-name] Display all route maps configured or only the one specified to verify
configuration.
Use the no route-map map-tag command to delete the route map. Use the no set ip next-hop ip-address
command to re-enable next-hop processing.
Configuring BGP Filtering by Neighbor

You can filter BGP advertisements by using AS-path filters, such as the as-path access-list global
configuration command and the neighbor filter-list router configuration command. You can also use
access lists with the neighbor distribute-list router configuration command. Distribute-list filters are
applied to network numbers. See the “Controlling Advertising and Processing in Routing Updates”
section on page 36-98 for information about the distribute-list command.
You can use route maps on a per-neighbor basis to filter updates and to modify various attributes. A route
map can be applied to either inbound or outbound updates. Only the routes that pass the route map are
sent or accepted in updates. On both inbound and outbound updates, matching is supported based on AS
path, community, and network numbers. Autonomous system path matching requires the match as-path
access-list route-map command, community based matching requires the match community-list
route-map command, and network-based matching requires the ip access-list global configuration
command.

OL-8553-06 36-51
Configuring BGP
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to apply a per-neighbor route map:
Command Purpose
Step 2 router bgp autonomous-system Enable a BGP routing process, assign it an AS number, and enter
router configuration mode.
Step 3 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} (Optional) Filter BGP routing updates to or from neighbors as
distribute-list {access-list-number | name} specified in an access list.
{in | out}
Note You can also use the neighbor prefix-list router
configuration command to filter updates, but you cannot use
both commands to configure the same BGP peer.
Step 4 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} (Optional) Apply a route map to filter an incoming or outgoing
route-map map-tag {in | out} route.
Step 6 show ip bgp neighbors Verify the configuration.
Use the no neighbor distribute-list command to remove the access list from the neighbor. Use the no
neighbor route-map map-tag router configuration command to remove the route map from the
neighbor.
Another method of filtering is to specify an access list filter on both incoming and outbound updates,
based on the BGP autonomous system paths. Each filter is an access list based on regular expressions.
(See the “Regular Expressions” appendix in the Cisco IOS Dial Technologies Command Reference,
Release 12.2 for more information on forming regular expressions.) To use this method, define an
autonomous system path access list, and apply it to updates to and from particular neighbors.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure BGP path filtering:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip as-path access-list access-list-number Define a BGP-related access list.
{permit | deny} as-regular-expressions
Step 3 router bgp autonomous-system Enter BGP router configuration mode.
Step 4 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} Establish a BGP filter based on an access list.
filter-list {access-list-number | name} {in |
out | weight weight}
Step 6 show ip bgp neighbors [paths Verify the configuration.
regular-expression]

36-52 OL-8553-06
Configuring BGP
Configuring Prefix Lists for BGP Filtering

You can use prefix lists as an alternative to access lists in many BGP route filtering commands, including
the neighbor distribute-list router configuration command. The advantages of using prefix lists include
performance improvements in loading and lookup of large lists, incremental update support, easier CLI
configuration, and greater flexibility.
Filtering by a prefix list involves matching the prefixes of routes with those listed in the prefix list, as
when matching access lists. When there is a match, the route is used. Whether a prefix is permitted or
denied is based upon these rules:
• An empty prefix list permits all prefixes.
• An implicit deny is assumed if a given prefix does not match any entries in a prefix list.
• When multiple entries of a prefix list match a given prefix, the sequence number of a prefix list entry
identifies the entry with the lowest sequence number.
By default, sequence numbers are generated automatically and incremented in units of five. If you
disable the automatic generation of sequence numbers, you must specify the sequence number for each
entry. You can specify sequence values in any increment. If you specify increments of one, you cannot
insert additional entries into the list; if you choose very large increments, you might run out of values.
You do not need to specify a sequence number when removing a configuration entry. Show commands
include the sequence numbers in their output.
Before using a prefix list in a command, you must set up the prefix list. Beginning in privileged EXEC
mode, follow these steps to create a prefix list or to add an entry to a prefix list:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip prefix-list list-name [seq seq-value] deny | Create a prefix list with an optional sequence number to deny or
permit network/len [ge ge-value] [le le-value] permit access for matching conditions. You must enter at least one
permit or deny clause.
• network/len is the network number and length (in bits) of the
network mask.
• (Optional) ge and le values specify the range of the prefix length
to be matched.The specified ge-value and le-value must satisfy
this condition: len < ge-value < le-value < 32
Step 3 ip prefix-list list-name seq seq-value deny | (Optional) Add an entry to a prefix list, and assign a sequence
permit network/len [ge ge-value] [le le-value] number to the entry.
Step 5 show ip prefix list [detail | summary] name Verify the configuration by displaying information about a prefix list
[network/len] [seq seq-num] [longer] or prefix list entries.
[first-match]
To delete a prefix list and all of its entries, use the no ip prefix-list list-name global configuration
command. To delete an entry from a prefix list, use the no ip prefix-list seq seq-value global
configuration command. To disable automatic generation of sequence numbers, use the no ip prefix-list

OL-8553-06 36-53
Configuring BGP
sequence number command; to reenable automatic generation, use the ip prefix-list sequence number
command. To clear the hit-count table of prefix list entries, use the clear ip prefix-list privileged EXEC
command.
Configuring BGP Community Filtering

One way that BGP controls the distribution of routing information based on the value of the
COMMUNITIES attribute. The attribute is a way to groups destinations into communities and to apply
routing decisions based on the communities. This method simplifies configuration of a BGP speaker to
control distribution of routing information.
A community is a group of destinations that share some common attribute. Each destination can belong
to multiple communities. AS administrators can define to which communities a destination belongs. By
default, all destinations belong to the general Internet community. The community is identified by the
COMMUNITIES attribute, an optional, transitive, global attribute in the numerical range from
1 to 4294967200. These are some predefined, well-known communities:
• internet—Advertise this route to the Internet community. All routers belong to it.
• no-export—Do not advertise this route to EBGP peers.
• no-advertise—Do not advertise this route to any peer (internal or external).
• local-as—Do not advertise this route to peers outside the local autonomous system.
Based on the community, you can control which routing information to accept, prefer, or distribute to
other neighbors. A BGP speaker can set, append, or modify the community of a route when learning,
advertising, or redistributing routes. When routes are aggregated, the resulting aggregate has a
COMMUNITIES attribute that contains all communities from all the initial routes.
You can use community lists to create groups of communities to use in a match clause of a route map.
As with an access list, a series of community lists can be created. Statements are checked until a match
is found. As soon as one statement is satisfied, the test is concluded.
To set the COMMUNITIES attribute and match clauses based on communities, see the match
community-list and set community route-map configuration commands in the “Using Route Maps to
Redistribute Routing Information” section on page 36-90.
By default, no COMMUNITIES attribute is sent to a neighbor. You can specify that the COMMUNITIES
attribute be sent to the neighbor at an IP address by using the neighbor send-community router
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create and to apply a community list:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip community-list community-list-number Create a community list, and assign it a number.
{permit | deny} community-number
• The community-list-number is an integer from 1 to 99 that
identifies one or more permit or deny groups of communities.
• The community-number is the number configured by a set
community route-map configuration command.
Step 4 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} Specify that the COMMUNITIES attribute be sent to the neighbor at
send-community this IP address.

36-54 OL-8553-06
Configuring BGP
Command Purpose
Step 5 set comm-list list-num delete (Optional) Remove communities from the community attribute of an
inbound or outbound update that match a standard or extended
community list specified by a route map.
Step 7 ip bgp-community new-format (Optional) Display and parse BGP communities in the format AA:NN.
A BGP community is displayed in a two-part format 2 bytes long. The
Cisco default community format is in the format NNAA. In the most
recent RFC for BGP, a community takes the form AA:NN, where the
first part is the AS number and the second part is a 2-byte number.
Step 9 show ip bgp community Verify the configuration.
Configuring BGP Neighbors and Peer Groups

Often many BGP neighbors are configured with the same update policies (that is, the same outbound
route maps, distribute lists, filter lists, update source, and so on). Neighbors with the same update
policies can be grouped into peer groups to simplify configuration and to make updating more efficient.
When you have configured many peers, we recommend this approach.
To configure a BGP peer group, you create the peer group, assign options to the peer group, and add
neighbors as peer group members. You configure the peer group by using the neighbor router
configuration commands. By default, peer group members inherit all the configuration options of the
peer group, including the remote-as (if configured), version, update-source, out-route-map,
out-filter-list, out-dist-list, minimum-advertisement-interval, and next-hop-self. All peer group members
also inherit changes made to the peer group. Members can also be configured to override the options that
do not affect outbound updates.
To assign configuration options to an individual neighbor, specify any of these router configuration
commands by using the neighbor IP address. To assign the options to a peer group, specify any of the
commands by using the peer group name. You can disable a BGP peer or peer group without removing
all the configuration information by using the neighbor shutdown router configuration command.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use these commands to configure BGP peers:
Command Purpose
Step 3 neighbor peer-group-name peer-group Create a BGP peer group.
Step 4 neighbor ip-address peer-group Make a BGP neighbor a member of the peer group.
peer-group-name
Step 5 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} Specify a BGP neighbor. If a peer group is not configured with a
remote-as number remote-as number, use this command to create peer groups
containing EBGP neighbors. The range is 1 to 65535.
Step 6 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Associate a description with a neighbor.
description text

OL-8553-06 36-55
Configuring BGP
Command Purpose
Step 7 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Allow a BGP speaker (the local router) to send the
default-originate [route-map map-name] default route 0.0.0.0 to a neighbor for use as a default route.
Step 8 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Specify that the COMMUNITIES attribute be sent to
send-community the neighbor at this IP address.
Step 9 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Allow internal BGP sessions to use any operational
update-source interface interface for TCP connections.
Step 10 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Allow BGP sessions, even when the neighbor is not
ebgp-multihop on a directly connected segment. The multihop session is not
established if the only route to the multihop peer’s address is the
default route (0.0.0.0).
Step 11 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Specify an AS number to use as the local AS. The
local-as number range is 1 to 65535.
Step 12 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Set the minimum interval between sending BGP
advertisement-interval seconds routing updates.
Step 13 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Control how many prefixes can be received from a
maximum-prefix maximum [threshold] neighbor. The range is 1 to 4294967295. The threshold
(optional) is the percentage of maximum at which a warning
message is generated. The default is 75 percent.
Step 14 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Disable next-hop processing on the BGP updates to a
next-hop-self neighbor.
Step 15 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Set MD5 authentication on a TCP connection to a
password string BGP peer. The same password must be configured on both BGP
peers, or the connection between them is not made.
Step 16 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Apply a route map to incoming or outgoing routes.
route-map map-name {in | out}
Step 17 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Specify that the COMMUNITIES attribute be sent to
send-community the neighbor at this IP address.
Step 18 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} timers (Optional) Set timers for the neighbor or peer group.
keepalive holdtime
• The keepalive interval is the time within which keepalive
messages are sent to peers. The range is 1 to 4294967295
seconds; the default is 60.
• The holdtime is the interval after which a peer is declared
inactive after not receiving a keepalive message from it. The
range is 1 to 4294967295 seconds; the default is 180.
Step 19 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} weight (Optional) Specify a weight for all routes from a neighbor.
weight
Step 20 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Filter BGP routing updates to or from neighbors, as
distribute-list {access-list-number | name} {in | specified in an access list.
out}
Step 21 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Establish a BGP filter.
filter-list access-list-number {in | out | weight
weight}
Step 22 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Specify the BGP version to use when communicating
version value with a neighbor.

36-56 OL-8553-06
Configuring BGP
Command Purpose
Step 23 neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} (Optional) Configure the software to start storing received
soft-reconfiguration inbound updates.
Step 25 show ip bgp neighbors Verify the configuration.
To disable an existing BGP neighbor or neighbor peer group, use the neighbor shutdown router
configuration command. To enable a previously existing neighbor or neighbor peer group that had been
disabled, use the no neighbor shutdown router configuration command.
Configuring Aggregate Addresses

Classless interdomain routing (CIDR) enables you to create aggregate routes (or supernets) to minimize
the size of routing tables. You can configure aggregate routes in BGP either by redistributing an
aggregate route into BGP or by creating an aggregate entry in the BGP routing table. An aggregate
address is added to the BGP table when there is at least one more specific entry in the BGP table.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use these commands to create an aggregate address in the routing
table:
Command Purpose
Step 3 aggregate-address address mask Create an aggregate entry in the BGP routing table. The aggregate
route is advertised as coming from the AS, and the atomic aggregate
attribute is set to indicate that information might be missing.
Step 4 aggregate-address address mask as-set (Optional) Generate AS set path information. This command
creates an aggregate entry following the same rules as the previous
command, but the advertised path will be an AS_SET consisting of
all elements contained in all paths. Do not use this keyword when
aggregating many paths because this route must be continually
withdrawn and updated.
Step 5 aggregate-address address-mask (Optional) Advertise summary addresses only.
summary-only
Step 6 aggregate-address address mask (Optional) Suppress selected, more specific routes.
suppress-map map-name
Step 7 aggregate-address address mask (Optional) Generate an aggregate based on conditions specified by
advertise-map map-name the route map.
Step 8 aggregate-address address mask (Optional) Generate an aggregate with attributes specified in the
attribute-map map-name route map.
Step 10 show ip bgp neighbors [advertised-routes] Verify the configuration.

OL-8553-06 36-57
Configuring BGP
To delete an aggregate entry, use the no aggregate-address address mask router configuration
command. To return options to the default values, use the command with keywords.
Configuring Routing Domain Confederations

One way to reduce the IBGP mesh is to divide an autonomous system into multiple subautonomous
systems and to group them into a single confederation that appears as a single autonomous system. Each
autonomous system is fully meshed within itself and has a few connections to other autonomous systems
in the same confederation. Even though the peers in different autonomous systems have EBGP sessions,
they exchange routing information as if they were IBGP peers. Specifically, the next hop, MED, and
local preference information is preserved. You can then use a single IGP for all of the autonomous
systems.
To configure a BGP confederation, you must specify a confederation identifier that acts as the
autonomous system number for the group of autonomous systems.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use these commands to configure a BGP confederation:
Command Purpose
Step 3 bgp confederation identifier autonomous-system Configure a BGP confederation identifier.
Step 4 bgp confederation peers autonomous-system Specify the autonomous systems that belong to the
[autonomous-system ...] confederation and that will be treated as special EBGP peers.
Step 6 show ip bgp neighbor Verify the configuration.
show ip bgp network
Configuring BGP Route Reflectors

BGP requires that all of the IBGP speakers be fully meshed. When a router receives a route from an
external neighbor, it must advertise it to all internal neighbors. To prevent a routing information loop,
all IBPG speakers must be connected. The internal neighbors do not send routes learned from internal
neighbors to other internal neighbors.
With route reflectors, all IBGP speakers need not be fully meshed because another method is used to
pass learned routes to neighbors. When you configure an internal BGP peer to be a route reflector, it is
responsible for passing IBGP learned routes to a set of IBGP neighbors. The internal peers of the route
reflector are divided into two groups: client peers and nonclient peers (all the other routers in the
autonomous system). A route reflector reflects routes between these two groups. The route reflector and
its client peers form a cluster. The nonclient peers must be fully meshed with each other, but the client
peers need not be fully meshed. The clients in the cluster do not communicate with IBGP speakers
outside their cluster.

36-58 OL-8553-06
Configuring BGP
When the route reflector receives an advertised route, it takes one of these actions, depending on the
neighbor:
• A route from an external BGP speaker is advertised to all clients and nonclient peers.
• A route from a nonclient peer is advertised to all clients.
• A route from a client is advertised to all clients and nonclient peers. Hence, the clients need not be
fully meshed.
Usually a cluster of clients have a single route reflector, and the cluster is identified by the route reflector
router ID. To increase redundancy and to avoid a single point of failure, a cluster might have more than
one route reflector. In this case, all route reflectors in the cluster must be configured with the same 4-byte
cluster ID so that a route reflector can recognize updates from route reflectors in the same cluster. All
the route reflectors serving a cluster should be fully meshed and should have identical sets of client and
nonclient peers.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use these commands to configure a route reflector and clients:
Command Purpose
Step 3 neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name Configure the local router as a BGP route reflector and the
route-reflector-client specified neighbor as a client.
Step 4 bgp cluster-id cluster-id (Optional) Configure the cluster ID if the cluster has more than
one route reflector.
Step 5 no bgp client-to-client reflection (Optional) Disable client-to-client route reflection. By default,
the routes from a route reflector client are reflected to other
clients. However, if the clients are fully meshed, the route
reflector does not need to reflect routes to clients.
Step 7 show ip bgp Verify the configuration. Display the originator ID and the
cluster-list attributes.
Configuring Route Dampening

Route flap dampening is a BGP feature designed to minimize the propagation of flapping routes across
an internetwork. A route is considered to be flapping when it is repeatedly available, then unavailable,
then available, then unavailable, and so on. When route dampening is enabled, a numeric penalty value
is assigned to a route when it flaps. When a route’s accumulated penalties reach a configurable limit,
BGP suppresses advertisements of the route, even if the route is running. The reuse limit is a
configurable value that is compared with the penalty. If the penalty is less than the reuse limit, a
suppressed route that is up is advertised again.
Dampening is not applied to routes that are learned by IBGP. This policy prevents the IBGP peers from
having a higher penalty for routes external to the AS.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use these commands to configure BGP route dampening:

OL-8553-06 36-59
Configuring BGP
Command Purpose
Step 3 bgp dampening Enable BGP route dampening.
Step 4 bgp dampening half-life reuse suppress (Optional) Change the default values of route dampening
max-suppress [route-map map] factors.
Step 6 show ip bgp flap-statistics [{regexp regexp} | (Optional) Monitor the flaps of all paths that are flapping. The
{filter-list list} | {address mask [longer-prefix]}] statistics are deleted when the route is not suppressed and is
stable.
Step 7 show ip bgp dampened-paths (Optional) Display the dampened routes, including the time
remaining before they are suppressed.
Step 8 clear ip bgp flap-statistics [{regexp regexp} | (Optional) Clear BGP flap statistics to make it less likely that a
{filter-list list} | {address mask [longer-prefix]} route will be dampened.
Step 9 clear ip bgp dampening (Optional) Clear route dampening information, and unsuppress
the suppressed routes.
To disable flap dampening, use the no bgp dampening router configuration command without
keywords. To set dampening factors back to the default values, use the no bgp dampening router
configuration command with values.
Monitoring and Maintaining BGP

You can remove all contents of a particular cache, table, or database. This might be necessary when the
contents of the particular structure have become or are suspected to be invalid.
You can display specific statistics, such as the contents of BGP routing tables, caches, and databases.
You can use the information to get resource utilization and solve network problems. You can also display
information about node reachability and discover the routing path your device’s packets are taking
through the network.
Table 36-8 lists the privileged EXEC commands for clearing and displaying BGP. For explanations of
the display fields, see the Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols,
> Command References.
Table 36-11 IP BGP Clear and Show Commands
Command Purpose
clear ip bgp address Reset a particular BGP connection.
clear ip bgp * Reset all BGP connections.
clear ip bgp peer-group tag Remove all members of a BGP peer group.
show ip bgp prefix Display peer groups and peers not in peer groups to which the
prefix has been advertised. Also display prefix attributes such as
the next hop and the local prefix.

36-60 OL-8553-06
Configuring ISO CLNS Routing
Table 36-11 IP BGP Clear and Show Commands (continued)
Command Purpose
show ip bgp cidr-only Display all BGP routes that contain subnet and supernet network
masks.
show ip bgp community [community-number] [exact] Display routes that belong to the specified communities.
show ip bgp community-list community-list-number Display routes that are permitted by the community list.
[exact-match]
show ip bgp filter-list access-list-number Display routes that are matched by the specified AS path access
list.
show ip bgp inconsistent-as Display the routes with inconsistent originating autonomous
systems.
show ip bgp regexp regular-expression Display the routes that have an AS path that matches the specified
regular expression entered on the command line.
show ip bgp Display the contents of the BGP routing table.
show ip bgp neighbors [address] Display detailed information on the BGP and TCP connections to
individual neighbors.
show ip bgp neighbors [address] [advertised-routes | Display routes learned from a particular BGP neighbor.
dampened-routes | flap-statistics | paths
regular-expression | received-routes | routes]
show ip bgp paths Display all BGP paths in the database.
show ip bgp peer-group [tag] [summary] Display information about BGP peer groups.
show ip bgp summary Display the status of all BGP connections.
You can also enable the logging of messages generated when a BGP neighbor resets, comes up, or goes
down by using the bgp log-neighbor changes router configuration command.

The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Connectionless Network Service (CLNS)
protocol is a standard for the network layer of the Open System Interconnection (OSI) model. Addresses
in the ISO network architecture are referred to as network service access point (NSAP) addresses and
network entity titles (NETs). Each node in an OSI network has one or more NETs. In addition, each node
has many NSAP addresses.
When you enable connectionless routing on the switch by using the clns routing global configuration
command, the switch makes only forwarding decisions, with no routing-related functionality. For
dynamic routing, you must also enable a routing protocol. The switch supports the Intermediate
System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) dynamic routing protocol that is based on the OSI routing
protocol for ISO CLNS networks.
When dynamically routing, you use IS-IS. This routing protocol supports the concept of areas. Within
an area, all routers know how to reach all the system IDs. Between areas, routers know how to reach the
proper area. IS-IS supports two levels of routing: station routing (within an area) and area routing
(between areas).

OL-8553-06 36-61
The key difference between the ISO IGRP and IS-IS NSAP addressing schemes is in the definition of
area addresses. Both use the system ID for Level 1 routing (routing within an area). However, they differ
in the way addresses are specified for area routing. An ISO IGRP NSAP address includes three separate
fields for routing: the domain, area, and system ID. An IS-IS address includes two fields: a single
continuous area field (comprising the domain and area fields) and the system ID.
Note For more detailed information about ISO CLNS, see the Cisco IOS Apollo Domain, Banyan VINES,
DECnet, ISO CLNS and XNS Configuration Guide, Release 12.2. For complete syntax and usage
information for the commands used in this chapter, see the Cisco IOS Apollo Domain, Banyan VINES,
DECnet, ISO CLNS and XNS Command Reference, Release 12.2, use the IOS command reference master
index, or search online.
Configuring IS-IS Dynamic Routing

IS-IS is an ISO dynamic routing protocol (described in ISO 105890). Unlike other routing protocols,
enabling IS-IS requires that you create an IS-IS routing process and assign it to a specific interface,
rather than to a network. You can specify more than one IS-IS routing process per Layer 3 switch or
router by using the multiarea IS-IS configuration syntax. You then configure the parameters for each
instance of the IS-IS routing process.
Small IS-IS networks are built as a single area that includes all the routers in the network. As the network
grows larger, it is usually reorganized into a backbone area made up of the connected set of all Level 2
routers from all areas, which is in turn connected to local areas. Within a local area, routers know how
to reach all system IDs. Between areas, routers know how to reach the backbone, and the backbone
routers know how to reach other areas.
Routers establish Level 1 adjacencies to perform routing within a local area (station routing). Routers
establish Level 2 adjacencies to perform routing between Level 1 areas (area routing).
A single Cisco router can participate in routing in up to 29 areas and can perform Level 2 routing in the
backbone. In general, each routing process corresponds to an area. By default, the first instance of the
routing process configured performs both Level 1and Level 2 routing. You can configure additional
router instances, which are automatically treated as Level 1 areas. You must configure the parameters
for each instance of the IS-IS routing process individually.
For IS-IS multiarea routing, you can configure only one process to perform Level 2 routing, although
you can define up to 29 Level 1 areas for each Cisco unit. If Level 2 routing is configured on any process,
all additional processes are automatically configured as Level 1. You can configure this process to
perform Level 1 routing at the same time. If Level 2 routing is not desired for a router instance, remove
the Level 2 capability using the is-type global configuration command. Use the is-type command also
to configure a different router instance as a Level 2 router.
Note For more detailed information about IS-IS, see the “IP Routing Protocols” chapter of the Cisco IOS IP
Configuration Guide, Release 12.2. For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used
in this section, see the Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Release 12.2.
This section briefly describes how to configure IS-IS routing. It includes this information:
• Default IS-IS Configuration, page 36-63
• Enabling IS-IS Routing, page 36-64

36-62 OL-8553-06
• Configuring IS-IS Global Parameters, page 36-66

• Configuring IS-IS Interface Parameters, page 36-68
Default IS-IS Configuration

Table 36-12 shows the default IS-IS configuration.
Table 36-12 Default IS-IS Configuration

Ignore link-state PDU (LSP) errors Enabled.
IS-IS type Conventional IS-IS: the router acts as both a Level 1 (station) and a Level 2
(area) router.
Multiarea IS-IS: the first instance of the IS-IS routing process is a Level 1-2
router. Remaining instances are Level 1 routers.
Default-information originate Disabled.
Log IS-IS adjacency state changes. Disabled.
LSP generation throttling timers Maximum interval between two consecutive occurrences: 5 seconds.
Initial LSP generation delay: 50 ms.
Hold time between the first and second LSP generation: 5000 ms.
LSP maximum lifetime (without a refresh) 1200 seconds (20 minutes) before t.he LSP packet is deleted.
LSP refresh interval Send LSP refreshes every 900 seconds (15 minutes).
Maximum LSP packet size 1497 bytes.
1
NSF Awareness Enabled2 . Allows Layer 3 switches to continue forwarding packets from a
neighboring NSF-capable router during hardware or software changes.
Partial route computation (PRC) throttling Maximum PRC wait interval: 5 seconds.
timers
Initial PRC calculation delay after a topology change: 2000 ms.
Hold time between the first and second PRC calculation: 5000 ms.
Partition avoidance Disabled.
Password No area or domain password is defined, and authentication is disabled.
Set-overload-bit Disabled. When enabled, if no arguments are entered, the overload bit is set
immediately and remains set until you enter the no set-overload-bit command.
Shortest path first (SPF) throttling timers Maximum interval between consecutive SFPs: 10 seconds.
Initial SFP calculation after a topology change: 5500 ms.
Holdtime between the first and second SFP calculation: 5500 ms.
Summary-address Disabled.
2. IS-IS NSF awareness is enabled for IPv4 on switches running Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SEG or later.

OL-8553-06 36-63
Nonstop Forwarding Awareness

The integrated IS-IS NSF Awareness feature is supported for IPv4, beginning with Cisco IOS
Release 12.2(25)SEG. The feature allows customer premises equipment (CPE) routers that are
NSF-aware to help NSF-capable routers perform nonstop forwarding of packets. The local router is not
necessarily performing NSF, but its awareness of NSF allows the integrity and accuracy of the routing
database and link-state database on the neighboring NSF-capable router to be maintained during the
switchover process.
This feature is automatically enabled and requires no configuration. For more information on this
feature, see the Integrated IS-IS Nonstop Forwarding (NSF) Awareness Feature Guide at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1839/products_white_paper09186a00801541c7.s
html
Enabling IS-IS Routing

To enable IS-IS, you specify a name and NET for each routing process. You then enable IS-IS routing
on the interface and specify the area for each instance of the routing process.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable IS-IS and specify the area for each
instance of the IS-IS routing process:
Command Purpose
Step 2 clns routing Enable ISO connectionless routing on the switch.
Step 3 router isis [area tag] Enable the IS-IS routing for the specified routing process and enter IS-IS
routing configuration mode.
(Optional) Use the area tag argument to identify the area to which the IS-IS
router is assigned. You must enter a value if you are configuring multiple
IS-IS areas.
The first IS-IS instance configured is Level 1-2 by default. Later instances
are automatically Level 1. You can change the level of routing by using the
is-type global configuration command.
Step 4 net network-entity-title Configure the NETs for the routing process. If you are configuring
multiarea IS-IS, specify a NET for each routing process. You can specify a
name for a NET and for an address.
Step 5 is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | (Optional) You can configure the router to act as a Level 1 (station) router,
level-2-only} a Level 2 (area) router for multi-area routing, or both (the default):
• level-1—act as a station router only
• level-1-2—act as both a station router and an area router
• level 2—act as an area router only
Step 7 interface interface-id Specify an interface to route IS-IS, and enter interface configuration mode.
If the interface is not already configured as a Layer 3 interface, enter the no
switchport command to put it into Layer 3 mode.
Step 8 ip router isis [area tag] Configure an IS-IS routing process for ISO CLNS on the interface and
attach an area designator to the routing process.

36-64 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 9 clns router isis [area tag] Enable ISO CLNS on the interface.
Step 10 ip address ip-address-mask Define the IP address for the interface. An IP address is required on all
interfaces in an area enabled for IS-IS if any one interface is configured for
IS-IS routing.
Step 12 show isis [area tag] database detail Verify your entries.
To disable IS-IS routing, use the no router isis area-tag router configuration command.
This example shows how to configure three routers to run conventional IS-IS as an IP routing protocol.
In conventional IS-IS, all routers act as Level 1 and Level 2 routers (by default).
Router A
Switch(config)# clns routing
Switch(config)# router isis
Switch(config-router)# net 49.0001.0000.0000.000a.00
Switch(config-router)# exit
Switch(config-if)# ip router isis
Switch(config-if)# clns router isis
Router B
Switch(config-router)# net 49.0001.0000.0000.000b.00
Router C
Switch(config-router)# net 49.0001.0000.0000.000c.00

OL-8553-06 36-65
Configuring IS-IS Global Parameters

These are some optional IS-IS global parameters that you can configure:
• You can force a default route into an IS-IS routing domain by configuring a default route controlled
by a route map. You can also specify other filtering options configurable under a route map.
• You can configure the router to ignore IS-IS LSPs that are received with internal checksum errors
or to purge corrupted LSPs, which causes the initiator of the LSP to regenerate it.
• You can assign passwords to areas and domains.
• You can create aggregate addresses that are represented in the routing table by a summary address
(route-summarization). Routes learned from other routing protocols can also be summarized. The
metric used to advertise the summary is the smallest metric of all the specific routes.
• You can set an overload bit.
• You can configure the LSP refresh interval and the maximum time that an LSP can remain in the
router database without a refresh
• You can set the throttling timers for LSP generation, shortest path first computation, and partial
route computation.
• You can configure the switch to generate a log message when an IS-IS adjacency changes state (up
or down).
• If a link in the network has a maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of less than 1500 bytes, you
can lower the LSP MTU so that routing will still occur.
• The partition avoidance router configuration command prevents an area from becoming partitioned
when full connectivity is lost among a Level1-2 border router, adjacent Level 1 routers, and end
hosts.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure IS-IS parameters:
Command Purpose
Step 2 clns routing Enable ISO connectionless routing on the switch.
Step 3 router isis Specify the IS-IS routing protocol and enter router configuration mode.
Step 4 default-information originate (Optional) Force a default route into the IS-IS routing domain.If you enter
[route-map map-name] route-map map-name, the routing process generates the default route if the
route map is satisfied.
Step 5 ignore-lsp-errors (Optional) Configure the router to ignore LSPs with internal checksum
errors, instead of purging the LSPs. This command is enabled by default
(corrupted LSPs are dropped). To purge the corrupted LSPs, enter the no
ignore-lsp-errors router configuration command.
Step 6 area-password password (Optional Configure the area authentication password, which is inserted in
Level 1 (station router level) LSPs.
Step 7 domain-password password (Optional) Configure the routing domain authentication password, which is
inserted in Level 2 (area router level) LSPs.
Step 8 summary-address address mask (Optional) Create a summary of addresses for a given level.
[level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2]

36-66 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 9 set-overload-bit [on-startup (Optional) Set an overload bit (a hippity bit) to allow other routers to ignore
{seconds | wait-for-bgp}] the router in their shortest path first (SPF) calculations if the router is
having problems.
• (Optional) on-startup—sets the overload bit only on startup. If
on-startup is not specified, the overload bit is set immediately and
remains set until you enter the no set-overload-bit command. If
on-startup is specified, you must enter a number of seconds or
wait-for-bgp.
• seconds—When the on-startup keyword is configured, causes the
overload bit to be set upon system startup and remain set for this
number of seconds. The range is from 5 to 86400 seconds.
• wait-for-bgp—When the on-startup keyword is configured, causes
the overload bit to be set upon system startup and remain set until BGP
has converged. If BGP does not signal IS-IS that it is converged, IS-IS
will turn off the overload bit after 10 minutes.
Step 10 lsp-refresh-interval seconds (Optional) Set an LSP refresh interval in seconds. The range is from 1 to
65535 seconds. The default is to send LSP refreshes every 900 seconds
(15 minutes).
Step 11 max-lsp-lifetime seconds (Optional) Set the maximum time that LSP packets remain in the router
database without being refreshed. The range is from 1 to 65535 seconds.
The default is 1200 seconds (20 minutes). After the specified time interval,
the LSP packet is deleted.
Step 12 lsp-gen-interval [level-1 | level-2] (Optional) Set the IS-IS LSP generation throttling timers:
lsp-max-wait [lsp-initial-wait
• lsp-max-wait—the maximum interval (in seconds) between two
lsp-second-wait]
consecutive occurrences of an LSP being generated. The range is 1 to
120, the default is 5.
• lsp-initial-wait—the initial LSP generation delay (in milliseconds).
The range is 1 to 10000; the default is 50.
• lsp-second-wait—the hold time between the first and second LSP
generation (in milliseconds). The range is 1 to 10000; the default is
5000.
Step 13 spf-interval [level-1 | level-2] (Optional) Sets IS-IS shortest path first (SPF) throttling timers.
spf-max-wait [spf-initial-wait
• spf-max-wait—the maximum interval between consecutive SFPs (in
spf-second-wait]
seconds). The range is 1 to 120, the default is 10.
• spf-initial-wait—the initial SFP calculation after a topology change (in
milliseconds). The range is 1 to 10000; the default is 5500.
• spf-second-wait—the holdtime between the first and second SFP
calculation (in milliseconds). The range is 1 to 10000; the default is
5500.

OL-8553-06 36-67
Command Purpose
Step 14 prc-interval prc-max-wait (Optional) Sets IS-IS partial route computation (PRC) throttling timers.
[prc-initial-wait prc-second-wait]
• prc-max-wait—the maximum interval (in seconds) between two
consecutive PRC calculations. The range is 1 to 120; the default is 5.
• prc-initial-wait—the initial PRC calculation delay (in milliseconds)
after a topology change. The range is 1 to 10,000; the default is 2000.
• prc-second-wait—the hold time between the first and second PRC
calculation (in milliseconds). The range is 1 to 10,000; the default is
5000.
Step 15 log-adjacency-changes [all] (Optional) Set the router to log IS-IS adjacency state changes. Enter all to
include all changes generated by events that are not related to the
Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System Hellos, including End
System-to-Intermediate System PDUs and link state packets (LSPs).
Step 16 lsp-mtu size (Optional) Specify the maximum LSP packet size in bytes. The range is 128
to 4352; the default is 1497 bytes.
Note If any link in the network has a reduced MTU size, you must change
the LSP MTU size on all routers in the network.
Step 17 partition avoidance (Optional) Causes an IS-IS Level 1-2 border router to stop advertising the
Level 1 area prefix into the Level 2 backbone when full connectivity is lost
among the border router, all adjacent level 1 routers, and end hosts.
Step 19 show clns Verify your entries.
To disable default route generation, use the no default-information originate router configuration
command. Use the no area-password or no domain-password router configuration command to disable
passwords. To disable LSP MTU settings, use the no lsp mtu router configuration command. To return
to the default conditions for summary addressing, LSP refresh interval, LSP lifetime, LSP timers, SFP
timers, and PRC timers, use the no form of the commands. Use the no partition avoidance router
configuration command to disable the output format.
Configuring IS-IS Interface Parameters

You can optionally configure certain interface-specific IS-IS parameters, independently from other
attached routers. However, if you change some values from the defaults, such as multipliers and time
intervals, it makes sense to also change them on multiple routers and interfaces. Most of the interface
parameters can be configured for level 1, level 2, or both.
These are some interface level parameters you can configure:
• The default metric on the interface, which is used as a value for the IS-IS metric and assigned when
there is no quality of service (QoS) routing performed.
• The hello interval (length of time between hello packets sent on the interface) or the default hello
packet multiplier used on the interface to determine the hold time sent in IS-IS hello packets. The
hold time determines how long a neighbor waits for another hello packet before declaring the
neighbor down. This determines how quickly a failed link or neighbor is detected so that routes can
be recalculated. Change the hello-multiplier in circumstances where hello packets are lost

36-68 OL-8553-06
frequently and IS-IS adjacencies are failing unnecessarily. You can raise the hello multiplier and
lower the hello interval correspondingly to make the hello protocol more reliable without increasing
the time required to detect a link failure.
• Other time intervals:
– Complete sequence number PDU (CSNP) interval. CSNPs are sent by the designated router to
maintain database synchronization
– Retransmission interval. This is the time between retransmission of IS-IS LSPs for
point-to-point links.
– IS-IS LSP retransmission throttle interval. This is the maximum rate (number of milliseconds
between packets) at which IS-IS LSPs are re-sent on point-to-point links This interval is
different from the retransmission interval, which is the time between successive retransmissions
of the same LSP
• Designated router election priority, which allows you to reduce the number of adjacencies required
on a multiaccess network, which in turn reduces the amount of routing protocol traffic and the size
of the topology database.
• The interface circuit type, which is the type of adjacency desired for neighbors on the specified
interface
• Password authentication for the interface
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure IS-IS interface parameters:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface to be configured and enter interface configuration
mode. If the interface is not already configured as a Layer 3 interface, enter
the no switchport command to put it into Layer 3 mode.
Step 3 isis metric default-metric [level-1 | (Optional) Configure the metric (or cost) for the specified interface. The
level-2] range is from 0 to 63. The default is 10. If no level is entered, the default is
to apply to both Level 1 and Level 2 routers.
Step 4 isis hello-interval {seconds | (Optional) Specify the length of time between hello packets sent by the
minimal} [level-1 | level-2] switch. By default, a value three times the hello interval seconds is
advertised as the holdtime in the hello packets sent. With smaller hello
intervals, topological changes are detected faster, but there is more routing
traffic.
• minimal—causes the system to compute the hello interval based on the
hello multiplier so that the resulting hold time is 1 second.
• seconds—the range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 10 seconds.
Step 5 isis hello-multiplier multiplier (Optional) Specify the number of IS-IS hello packets a neighbor must miss
[level-1 | level-2] before the router should declare the adjacency as down. The range is from
3 to 1000. The default is 3. Using a smaller hello-multiplier causes fast
convergence, but can result in more routing instability.
Step 6 isis csnp-interval seconds [level-1 | (Optional) Configure the IS-IS complete sequence number PDU (CSNP)
level-2] interval for the interface. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is
10 seconds.

OL-8553-06 36-69
Command Purpose
Step 7 isis retransmit-interval seconds (Optional) Configure the number of seconds between retransmission of
IS-IS LSPs for point-to-point links. The value you specify should be an
integer greater than the expected round-trip delay between any two routers
on the network. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 5 seconds.
Step 8 isis retransmit-throttle-interval (Optional) Configure the IS-IS LSP retransmission throttle interval, which
milliseconds is the maximum rate (number of milliseconds between packets) at which
IS-IS LSPs will be re-sent on point-to-point links. The range is from 0 to
65535. The default is determined by the isis lsp-interval command.
Step 9 isis priority value [level-1 | level-2] (Optional) Configure the priority to use for designated router election. The
range is from 0 to 127. The default is 64.
Step 10 isis circuit-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | (Optional) Configure the type of adjacency desired for neighbors on the
level-2-only} specified interface (specify the interface circuit type).
• level-1—a Level 1 adjacency is established if there is at least one area
address common to both this node and its neighbors.
• level-1-2—a Level 1 and 2 adjacency is established if the neighbor is
also configured as both Level 1 and Level 2 and there is at least one
area in common. If there is no area in common, a Level 2 adjacency is
established. This is the default.
• level 2—a Level 2 adjacency is established. If the neighbor router is a
Level 1 router, no adjacency is established.
Step 11 isis password password [level-1 | (Optional) Configure the authentication password for an interface. By
level-2] default, authentication is disabled. Specifying Level 1 or Level 2 enables
the password only for Level 1 or Level 2 routing, respectively. If you do not
specify a level, the default is Level 1 and Level 2.
Step 13 show clns interface interface-id Verify your entries.
To return to the default settings, use the no forms of the commands.
Monitoring and Maintaining ISO IGRP and IS-IS

You can remove all contents of a CLNS cache or remove information for a particular neighbor or route.
You can display specific CLNS or IS-IS statistics, such as the contents of routing tables, caches, and
databases. You can also display information about specific interfaces, filters, or neighbors.

36-70 OL-8553-06
Configuring Multi-VRF CE
Table 36-13 lists the privileged EXEC commands for clearing and displaying ISO CLNS and IS-IS
routing. For explanations of the display fields, see the Cisco IOS Apollo Domain, Banyan VINES,
DECnet, ISO CLNS and XNS Command Reference, Release 12.2, use the Cisco IOS command reference
master index, or search online.
Table 36-13 ISO CLNS and IS-IS Clear and Show Commands
Command Purpose
clear clns cache Clear and reinitialize the CLNS routing cache.
clear clns es-neighbors Remove end system (ES) neighbor information from the adjacency database.
clear clns is-neighbors Remove intermediate system (IS) neighbor information from the adjacency
database.
clear clns neighbors Remove CLNS neighbor information from the adjacency database.
clear clns route Remove dynamically derived CLNS routing information.
show clns Display information about the CLNS network.
show clns cache Display the entries in the CLNS routing cache.
show clns es-neighbors Display ES neighbor entries, including the associated areas.
show clns filter-expr Display filter expressions.
show clns filter-set Display filter sets.
show clns interface [interface-id] Display the CLNS-specific or ES-IS information about each interface.
show clns neighbor Display information about IS-IS neighbors.
show clns protocol List the protocol-specific information for each IS-IS or ISO IGRP routing
process in this router.
show clns route Display all the destinations to which this router knows how to route CLNS
packets.
show clns traffic Display information about the CLNS packets this router has seen.
show ip route isis Display the current state of the ISIS IP routing table.
show isis database Display the IS-IS link-state database.
show isis routes Display the IS-IS Level 1 routing table.
show isis spf-log Display a history of the shortest path first (SPF) calculations for IS-IS.
show isis topology Display a list of all connected routers in all areas.
show route-map Display all route maps configured or only the one specified.
trace clns destination Discover the paths taken to a specified destination by packets in the network.
which-route {nsap-address | clns-name} Display the routing table in which the specified CLNS destination is found.
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) provide a secure way for customers to share bandwidth over an ISP
backbone network. A VPN is a collection of sites sharing a common routing table. A customer site is
connected to the service-provider network by one or more interfaces, and the service provider associates
each interface with a VPN routing table, called a VPN routing/forwarding (VRF) table.

OL-8553-06 36-71
The Catalyst 3560 switch supports multiple VPN routing/forwarding (multi-VRF) instances in customer
edge (CE) devices (multi-VRF CE) when the switch is running the IP services image. If you try to
configure it on a switch running the IP base image, you see an error message. Multi-VRF CE allows a
service provider to support two or more VPNs with overlapping IP addresses. On a switch running the
IP base image, configuring multi-VRF-CE and EIGRP stub routing at the same time is not allowed.
Note The switch does not use Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) to support VPNs. For information about
MPLS VRF, refer to the Cisco IOS Switching Services Configuration Guide, Release 12.2 from the
References.

• Understanding Multi-VRF CE, page 36-72
• Default Multi-VRF CE Configuration, page 36-74
• Multi-VRF CE Configuration Guidelines, page 36-74
• Configuring VRFs, page 36-75
• Configuring VRF-Aware Services, page 36-77
• Configuring a VPN Routing Session, page 36-80
• Configuring BGP PE to CE Routing Sessions, page 36-81
• Multi-VRF CE Configuration Example, page 36-82
• Displaying Multi-VRF CE Status, page 36-86
Understanding Multi-VRF CE
Multi-VRF CE is a feature that allows a service provider to support two or more VPNs, where IP
addresses can be overlapped among the VPNs. Multi-VRF CE uses input interfaces to distinguish routes
for different VPNs and forms virtual packet-forwarding tables by associating one or more Layer 3
interfaces with each VRF. Interfaces in a VRF can be either physical, such as Ethernet ports, or logical,
such as VLAN SVIs, but an interface cannot belong to more than one VRF at any time.
Note Multi-VRF CE interfaces must be Layer 3 interfaces.
Multi-VRF CE includes these devices:

• Customer edge (CE) devices provide customers access to the service-provider network over a data
link to one or more provider edge routers. The CE device advertises the site’s local routes to the
router and learns the remote VPN routes from it. A Catalyst 3560 switch can be a CE.
• Provider edge (PE) routers exchange routing information with CE devices by using static routing or
a routing protocol such as BGP, RIPv2, OSPF, or EIGRP. The PE is only required to maintain VPN
routes for those VPNs to which it is directly attached, eliminating the need for the PE to maintain
all of the service-provider VPN routes. Each PE router maintains a VRF for each of its directly
connected sites. Multiple interfaces on a PE router can be associated with a single VRF if all of these
sites participate in the same VPN. Each VPN is mapped to a specified VRF. After learning local
VPN routes from CEs, a PE router exchanges VPN routing information with other PE routers by
using internal BGP (IBPG).

36-72 OL-8553-06
• Provider routers or core routers are any routers in the service provider network that do not attach to
CE devices.
With multi-VRF CE, multiple customers can share one CE, and only one physical link is used between
the CE and the PE. The shared CE maintains separate VRF tables for each customer and switches or
routes packets for each customer based on its own routing table. Multi-VRF CE extends limited PE
functionality to a CE device, giving it the ability to maintain separate VRF tables to extend the privacy
and security of a VPN to the branch office.
Figure 36-6 shows a configuration using Catalyst 3560 switches as multiple virtual CEs. This scenario
is suited for customers who have low bandwidth requirements for their VPN service, for example, small
companies. In this case, multi-VRF CE support is required in the Catalyst 3560 switches. Because
multi-VRF CE is a Layer 3 feature, each interface in a VRF must be a Layer 3 interface.
Figure 36-6 Catalyst 3560 Switches Acting as Multiple Virtual CEs
VPN 1 VPN 1
CE1 PE1 PE2 CE2

Service
provider
VPN 2 VPN 2
101385
CE = Customer-edge device
PE = Provider-edge device
When the CE switch receives a command to add a Layer 3 interface to a VRF, it sets up the appropriate
mapping between the VLAN ID and the policy label (PL) in multi-VRF-CE-related data structures and
adds the VLAN ID and PL to the VLAN database.
When multi-VRF CE is configured, the Layer 3 forwarding table is conceptually partitioned into two
sections:
• The multi-VRF CE routing section contains the routes from different VPNs.
• The global routing section contains routes to non-VPN networks, such as the Internet.
VLAN IDs from different VRFs are mapped into different policy labels, which are used to distinguish
the VRFs during processing. For each new VPN route learned, the Layer 3 setup function retrieves the
policy label by using the VLAN ID of the ingress port and inserts the policy label and new route to the
multi-VRF CE routing section. If the packet is received from a routed port, the port internal VLAN ID
number is used; if the packet is received from an SVI, the VLAN number is used.
This is the packet-forwarding process in a multi-VRF-CE-enabled network:
• When the switch receives a packet from a VPN, the switch looks up the routing table based on the
input policy label number. When a route is found, the switch forwards the packet to the PE.
• When the ingress PE receives a packet from the CE, it performs a VRF lookup. When a route is
found, the router adds a corresponding MPLS label to the packet and sends it to the MPLS network.
• When an egress PE receives a packet from the network, it strips the label and uses the label to
identify the correct VPN routing table. Then it performs the normal route lookup. When a route is
found, it forwards the packet to the correct adjacency.
• When a CE receives a packet from an egress PE, it uses the input policy label to look up the correct
VPN routing table. If a route is found, it forwards the packet within the VPN.

OL-8553-06 36-73
To configure VRF, you create a VRF table and specify the Layer 3 interface associated with the VRF.
Then configure the routing protocols in the VPN and between the CE and the PE. BGP is the preferred
routing protocol used to distribute VPN routing information across the provider’s backbone. The
multi-VRF CE network has three major components:
• VPN route target communities—lists of all other members of a VPN community. You need to
configure VPN route targets for each VPN community member.
• Multiprotocol BGP peering of VPN community PE routers—propagates VRF reachability
information to all members of a VPN community. You need to configure BGP peering in all PE
routers within a VPN community.
• VPN forwarding—transports all traffic between all VPN community members across a VPN
service-provider network.
Default Multi-VRF CE Configuration

Table 36-14 shows the default VRF configuration.
Table 36-14 Default VRF Configuration

VRF Disabled. No VRFs are defined.
Maps No import maps, export maps, or route maps are defined.
VRF maximum routes Fast Ethernet switches: 8000.
Gigabit Ethernet switches: 12000.
Forwarding table The default for an interface is the global routing table.
Multi-VRF CE Configuration Guidelines
Note To use multi-VRF CE, you must have the IP services image installed on your switch.
These are considerations when configuring VRF in your network:

• A switch with multi-VRF CE is shared by multiple customers, and each customer has its own routing
table.
• Because customers use different VRF tables, the same IP addresses can be re-used. Overlapped IP
addresses are allowed in different VPNs.
• Multi-VRF CE lets multiple customers share the same physical link between the provider edge (PE)
and the customer edge (CE). Trunk ports with multiple VLANs separate packets among customers.
Each customer has its own VLAN.
• Multi-VRF CE does not support all MPLS-VRF functionality. It does not support label exchange,
LDP adjacency, or labeled packets.
• For the PE router, there is no difference between using multi-VRF CE or using multiple CEs. In
Figure 36-6, multiple virtual Layer 3 interfaces are connected to the multi-VRF CE device.
• The switch supports configuring VRF by using physical ports, VLAN SVIs, or a combination of
both. The SVIs can be connected through an access port or a trunk port.

36-74 OL-8553-06
• A customer can use multiple VLANs as long as they do not overlap with those of other customers.
A customer’s VLANs are mapped to a specific routing table ID that is used to identify the
appropriate routing tables stored on the switch.
• A Catalyst 3560 switch supports one global network and up to 26 VRFs.
• Most routing protocols (BGP, OSPF, RIP, and static routing) can be used between the CE and the
PE. However, we recommend using external BGP (EBGP) for these reasons:
– BGP does not require multiple algorithms to communicate with multiple CEs.
– BGP is designed for passing routing information between systems run by different
administrations.
– BGP makes it easy to pass attributes of the routes to the CE.
• Multi-VRF CE does not affect the packet switching rate.
• VPN multicast is not supported.
• Line-rate multicast forwarding within a multi-VRF CE is supported.
• A multicast VRF cannot coexist with private VLANs on the same interface.
• A maximum of 1000 multicast routes is supported and can be shared on all VRFs.
• If no VRFs are configured, 104 policies can be configured.
• If even one VRF is configured, 41 policies can be configured.
• If more than 41 policies are configured, VRF cannot be configured.
• VRF and private VLANs are mutually exclusive. You cannot enable VRF on a private VLAN.
Similarly, you cannot enable a private VLAN on a VLAN with VRF configured on the VLAN
interface.
• VRF and policy-based routing (PBR) are mutually exclusive on a switch interface. You cannot
enable VRF when PBR is enabled on an interface. The reverse is also true; you cannot enable PBR
when VRF is enabled on an interface.
• VRF and Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP) are mutually exclusive on a switch
interface. You cannot enable VRF when WCCP is enabled on an interface. The reverse is also true;
you cannot enable WCCP when VRF is enabled on an interface.
Configuring VRFs
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure one or more VRFs. For complete
syntax and usage information for the commands, refer to the switch command reference for this release
and the Cisco IOS Switching Services Command Reference, Release 12.2.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip routing Enable IP routing.
Step 3 ip vrf vrf-name Name the VRF, and enter VRF configuration mode.
Step 4 rd route-distinguisher Create a VRF table by specifying a route distinguisher. Enter either an
AS number and an arbitrary number (xxx:y) or an IP address and an
arbitrary number (A.B.C.D:y)

OL-8553-06 36-75
Command Purpose
Step 5 route-target {export | import | both} Create a list of import, export, or import and export route target
route-target-ext-community communities for the specified VRF. Enter either an AS system number
and an arbitrary number (xxx:y) or an IP address and an arbitrary
number (A.B.C.D:y). The route-target-ext-community should be the
same as the route-distinguisher entered in Step 4.
Step 6 import map route-map (Optional) Associate a route map with the VRF.
Step 7 interface interface-id Specify the Layer 3 interface to be associated with the VRF, and enter
interface configuration mode. The interface can be a routed port or an
SVI.
Step 8 ip vrf forwarding vrf-name Associate the VRF with the Layer 3 interface.
Step 10 show ip vrf [brief | detail | interfaces] Verify the configuration. Display information about the configured
[vrf-name] VRFs.
Use the no ip vrf vrf-name global configuration command to delete a VRF and to remove all interfaces
from it. Use the no ip vrf forwarding interface configuration command to remove an interface from the
VRF.
Configuring Multicast VRFs

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a multicast within a VRF table. For
complete syntax and usage information for the commands, see the switch command reference for this
release and the Cisco IOS Switching Services Command Reference, Release 12.2.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip routing Enable IP routing mode.
Step 3 ip vrf vrf-name Name the VRF, and enter VRF configuration mode.
Step 4 rd route-distinguisher Create a VRF table by specifying a route distinguisher. Enter either an
AS number and an arbitrary number (xxx:y) or an IP address and an
arbitrary number (A.B.C.D:y)
Step 5 route-target {export | import | both} Create a list of import, export, or import and export route target
route-target-ext-community communities for the specified VRF. Enter either an AS system number
and an arbitrary number (xxx:y) or an IP address and an arbitrary
number (A.B.C.D:y). The route-target-ext-community should be the
same as the route-distinguisher entered in Step 4.
Step 6 import map route-map (Optional) Associate a route map with the VRF.
Step 7 ip multicast-routing vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enable global multicast routing for VRF table.
distributed
Step 8 interface interface-id Specify the Layer 3 interface to be associated with the VRF, and enter
interface configuration mode. The interface can be a routed port or an
SVI.

36-76 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 9 ip vrf forwarding vrf-name Associate the VRF with the Layer 3 interface.
Step 10 ip address ip-address mask Configure IP address for the Layer 3 interface.
Step 11 ip pim sparse-dense mode Enable PIM on the VRF-associated Layer 3 interface.
Step 13 show ip vrf [brief | detail | interfaces] Verify the configuration. Display information about the configured
[vrf-name] VRFs.
For more information about configuring a multicast within a Multi-VRF CE, see the Cisco IOS IP
Multicast Configuration Guide, Release 12.4.
Configuring VRF-Aware Services

IP services can be configured on global interfaces, and these services run within the global routing
instance. IP services are enhanced to run on multiple routing instances; they are VRF-aware. Any
configured VRF in the system can be specified for a VRF-aware service.
VRF-Aware services are implemented in platform-independent modules. VRF means multiple routing
instances in Cisco IOS. Each platform has its own limit on the number of VRFs it supports.
VRF-aware services have the following characteristics:
• The user can ping a host in a user-specified VRF.
• ARP entries are learned in separate VRFs. The user can display Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
entries for specific VRFs.
These services are VRF-Aware:
• ARP
• Ping
• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
• Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)
• Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (uRPF)
• Syslog
• Traceroute
• FTP and TFTP
User Interface for ARP

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure VRF-aware services for ARP. For
complete syntax and usage information for the commands, refer to the switch command reference for
this release and the Cisco IOS Switching Services Command Reference, Release 12.2.
Command Purpose
show ip arp vrf vrf-name Display the ARP table in the specified VRF.

OL-8553-06 36-77
User Interface for PING

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure VRF-aware services for ping. For
Command Purpose
ping vrf vrf-name ip-host Display the ARP table in the specified VRF.
User Interface for SNMP

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure VRF-aware services for SNMP. For
Command Purpose
Step 2 snmp-server trap authentication vrf Enable SNMP traps for packets on a VRF.
Step 3 snmp-server engineID remote <host> Configure a name for the remote SNMP engine on a switch.
vrf <vpn instance> <engine-id string>
Step 4 snmp-server host <host> vrf <vpn Specify the recipient of an SNMP trap operation and specify the VRF
instance> traps <community> table to be used for sending SNMP traps.
Step 5 snmp-server host <host> vrf <vpn Specify the recipient of an SNMP inform operation and specify the VRF
instance> informs <community> table to be used for sending SNMP informs.
Step 6 snmp-server user <user> <group> Add a user to an SNMP group for a remote host on a VRF for SNMP
remote <host> vrf <vpn instance> access.
<security model>
User Interface for HSRP

HSRP support for VRFs ensures that HSRP virtual IP addresses are added to the correct IP routing table.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure VRF-aware services for HSRP. For
Command Purpose
configure.
Step 3 no switchport Remove the interface from Layer 2 configuration mode if it is a physical
interface.
Step 4 ip vrf forwarding <vrf-name> Configure VRF on the interface.
Step 5 ip address ip address Enter the IP address for the interface.

36-78 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 6 standby 1 ip ip address Enable HSRP and configure the virtual IP address.
User Interface for uRPF

uRPF can be configured on an interface assigned to a VRF, and source lookup is done in the VRF table.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure VRF-aware services for uRPF. For
Command Purpose
configure.
Step 3 no switchport Remove the interface from Layer 2 configuration mode if it is a physical
interface.
Step 4 ip vrf forwarding <vrf-name> Configure VRF on the interface.
Step 5 ip address ip address Enter the IP address for the interface.
Step 6 ip verify unicast reverse-path Enable uRPF on the interface.
User Interface for Syslog

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure VRF-aware services for Syslog.
For complete syntax and usage information for the commands, refer to the switch command reference
for this release and the Cisco IOS Switching Services Command Reference, Release 12.2.
Command Purpose
Step 2 logging on Enable or temporarily disable logging of storage router event message.
Step 3 logging host ip address vrf vrf name Specify the host address of the syslog server where logging messages
are to be sent.
Step 4 logging buffered logging buffered size Log messages to an internal buffer.
debugging
Step 5 logging trap debugging Limit the logging messages sent to the syslog server.
Step 6 logging facility facility Send system logging messages to a logging facility.

OL-8553-06 36-79
User Interface for Traceroute

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure VRF-aware services for traceroute.
For complete syntax and usage information for the commands, refer to the switch command reference
for this release and the Cisco IOS Switching Services Command Reference, Release 12.2.
Command Purpose
traceroute vrf vrf-name ipaddress Specify the name of a VPN VRF in which to find the destination
address.
User Interface for FTP and TFTP

So that FTP and TFTP are VRF-aware, you must configure some FTP/TFTP CLIs. For example, if you
want to use a VRF table that is attached to an interface, say E1/0, you need to configure the CLI ip [t]ftp
source-interface E1/0 to inform [t]ftp to use a specific routing table. In this example, the VRF table is
used to look up the destination IP address. These changes are backward-compatible and do not affect
existing behavior. That is, you can use the source-interface CLI to send packets out a particular interface
even if no VRF is configured on that interface.
To specify the source IP address for FTP connections, use the ip ftp source-interface show mode
command. To use the address of the interface where the connection is made, use the no form of this
command.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip ftp source-interface interface-type Specify the source IP address for FTP connections.
interface-number
To specify the IP address of an interface as the source address for TFTP connections, use the ip tftp
source-interface show mode command. To return to the default, use the no form of this command.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip tftp source-interface interface-type Specify the source IP address for TFTP connections.
interface-number
Configuring a VPN Routing Session

Routing within the VPN can be configured with any supported routing protocol (RIP, OSPF, EIGRP, or
BGP) or with static routing. The configuration shown here is for OSPF, but the process is the same for
other protocols.

36-80 OL-8553-06
Note To configure an EIGRP routing process to run within a VRF instance, you must configure an
autonomous-system number by entering the autonomous-system autonomous-system-number
address-family configuration mode command.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure OSPF in the VPN:
Command Purpose
Step 2 router ospf process-id vrf vrf-name Enable OSPF routing, specify a VPN forwarding table, and enter router
configuration mode.
Step 3 log-adjacency-changes (Optional) Log changes in the adjacency state. This is the default state.
Step 4 redistribute bgp Set the switch to redistribute information from the BGP network to the
autonomous-system-number subnets OSPF network.
Step 5 network network-number area area-id Define a network address and mask on which OSPF runs and the area
ID for that network address.
Step 7 show ip ospf process-id Verify the configuration of the OSPF network.
Use the no router ospf process-id vrf vrf-name global configuration command to disassociate the VPN
forwarding table from the OSPF routing process.
Configuring BGP PE to CE Routing Sessions

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a BGP PE to CE routing session:
Command Purpose
Step 2 router bgp autonomous-system-number Configure the BGP routing process with the AS number passed to other
BGP routers, and enter router configuration mode.
Step 3 network network-number mask Specify a network and mask to announce using BGP.
network-mask
Step 4 redistribute ospf process-id match Set the switch to redistribute OSPF internal routes.
internal
Step 5 network network-number area area-id Define a network address and mask on which OSPF runs and the area
ID for that network address.
Step 6 address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name Define BGP parameters for PE to CE routing sessions, and enter VRF
address-family mode.
Step 7 neighbor address remote-as as-number Define a BGP session between PE and CE routers.
Step 8 neighbor address activate Activate the advertisement of the IPv4 address family.

OL-8553-06 36-81
Command Purpose
Step 10 show ip bgp [ipv4] [neighbors] Verify BGP configuration.
Use the no router bgp autonomous-system-number global configuration command to delete the BGP
routing process. Use the command with keywords to delete routing characteristics.
Multi-VRF CE Configuration Example

Figure 36-7 is a simplified example of the physical connections in a network similar to that in
Figure 36-6. OSPF is the protocol used in VPN1, VPN2, and the global network. BGP is used in the CE
to PE connections. The examples following the illustration show how to configure a Catalyst 3560 switch
as CE Switch A, and the VRF configuration for customer switches D and F. Commands for configuring
CE Switch C and the other customer switches are not included but would be similar. The example also
includes commands for configuring traffic to Switch A for a Catalyst 6000 or Catalyst 6500 switch acting
as a PE router.
Figure 36-7 Multi-VRF CE Configuration Example
Switch A Switch B Switch C

VPN1
Switch D VPN1
208.0.0.0
Fast Switch H
Ethernet
8
Switch E
108.0.0.0
Fast
Ethernet VPN2
7
Switch J
CE1 PE CE2
VPN2
Gigabit
Switch F Ethernet
118.0.0.0 1
Fast
Ethernet Global network
11
Switch K
Global network
Switch G
168.0.0.0
Fast
Ethernet
101386
CE = Customer-edge device
3
PE = Provider-edge device
Configuring Switch A
On Switch A, enable routing and configure VRF.


36-82 OL-8553-06
Switch(config)# ip vrf v11

Switch(config-vrf)# rd 800:1
Switch(config-vrf)# route-target export 800:1
Switch(config-vrf)# route-target import 800:1
Switch(config-vrf)# exit
Switch(config)# ip vrf v12
Switch(config-vrf)# rd 800:2
Switch(config-vrf)# route-target export 800:2
Switch(config-vrf)# route-target import 800:2
Switch(config-vrf)# exit
Configure the loopback and physical interfaces on Switch A. Gigabit Ethernet port 1 is a trunk
connection to the PE. Fast Ethernet ports 8 and 11 connect to VPNs:
Switch(config)# interface loopback1
Switch(config-if)# ip vrf forwarding v11
Switch(config)# interface loopback2


Switch(config-if)# no ip address


Configure the VLANs used on Switch A. VLAN 10 is used by VRF 11 between the CE and the PE.
VLAN 20 is used by VRF 12 between the CE and the PE. VLANs 118 and 208 are used for the VPNs
that include Switch F and Switch D, respectively:
Switch(config)# interface vlan10




OL-8553-06 36-83
Configure OSPF routing in VPN1 and VPN2.

Switch(config)# router ospf 1 vrf vl1
Switch(config-router)# redistribute bgp 800 subnets
Switch(config)# router ospf 2 vrf vl2
Switch(config-router)# redistribute bgp 800 subnets
Configure BGP for CE to PE routing.

Switch(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vl2
Switch(config-router-af)# redistribute ospf 2 match internal
Switch(config-router-af)# neighbor 83.0.0.3 remote-as 100
Switch(config-router-af)# neighbor 83.0.0.3 activate
Switch(config-router-af)# network 8.8.2.0 mask 255.255.255.0
Switch(config-router-af)# exit
Switch(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vl1

Switch(config-router-af)# redistribute ospf 1 match internal
Switch(config-router-af)# neighbor 38.0.0.3 remote-as 100
Switch(config-router-af)# neighbor 38.0.0.3 activate
Switch(config-router-af)# network 8.8.1.0 mask 255.255.255.0
Switch(config-router-af)# end
Configuring Switch D
Switch D belongs to VPN 1. Configure the connection to Switch A by using these commands.

Configuring Switch F
Switch F belongs to VPN 2. Configure the connection to Switch A by using these commands.


36-84 OL-8553-06

Configuring the PE Switch B
When used on switch B (the PE router), these commands configure only the connections to the CE
device, Switch A.
Router# configure terminal
Router(config)# ip vrf v1
Router(config-vrf)# rd 100:1
Router(config-vrf)# route-target export 100:1
Router(config-vrf)# route-target import 100:1
Router(config-vrf)# exit
Router(config)# ip vrf v2
Router(config-vrf)# rd 100:2
Router(config-vrf)# route-target export 100:2
Router(config-vrf)# route-target import 100:2
Router(config-vrf)# exit
Router(config)# ip cef
Router(config)# interface Loopback1
Router(config-if)# ip vrf forwarding v1
Router(config-if)# ip address 3.3.1.3 255.255.255.0
Router(config-if)# exit
Router(config)# interface Loopback2

Router(config)# interface gigabitthernet1/0.10

Router(config-if)# encapsulation dot1q 10
Router(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0.20

Router(config-if)# encapsulation dot1q 20
Router(config)# router bgp 100

Router(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf v2
Router(config-router-af)# neighbor 83.0.0.8 remote-as 800
Router(config-router-af)# neighbor 83.0.0.8 activate
Router(config-router-af)# network 3.3.2.0 mask 255.255.255.0
Router(config-router-af)# exit
Router(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vl
Router(config-router-af)# neighbor 38.0.0.8 remote-as 800
Router(config-router-af)# neighbor 38.0.0.8 activate
Router(config-router-af)# network 3.3.1.0 mask 255.255.255.0
Router(config-router-af)# end

OL-8553-06 36-85
Configuring Protocol-Independent Features
Displaying Multi-VRF CE Status

You can use the privileged EXEC commands in Table 36-15 to display information about multi-VRF CE
configuration and status.
Table 36-15 Commands for Displaying Multi-VRF CE Information
Command Purpose
show ip protocols vrf vrf-name Display routing protocol information associated
with a VRF.
show ip route vrf vrf-name [connected] [protocol [as-number]] [list] Display IP routing table information associated
[mobile] [odr] [profile] [static] [summary] [supernets-only] with a VRF.
show ip vrf [brief | detail | interfaces] [vrf-name] Display information about the defined VRF
instances.
For more information about the information in the displays, refer to the Cisco IOS Switching Services
Command Reference, Release 12.2.

This section describes how to configure IP routing protocol-independent features. These features are
available on switches running the IP base image or the IP services image; except that with the IP base
image, protocol-related features are available only for RIP. For a complete description of the IP routing
protocol-independent commands in this chapter, see the “IP Routing Protocol-Independent Commands”
chapter of the Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 2 of 3: Routing Protocols, Release 12.2 from
the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command
References.
• Configuring Cisco Express Forwarding, page 36-86
• Configuring the Number of Equal-Cost Routing Paths, page 36-88
• Configuring Static Unicast Routes, page 36-88
• Specifying Default Routes and Networks, page 36-89
• Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information, page 36-90
• Configuring Policy-Based Routing, page 36-94
• Filtering Routing Information, page 36-97
• Managing Authentication Keys, page 36-99
Configuring Cisco Express Forwarding

Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) is a Layer 3 IP switching technology used to optimize network
performance. CEF implements an advanced IP look-up and forwarding algorithm to deliver maximum
Layer 3 switching performance. CEF is less CPU-intensive than fast switching route caching, allowing
more CPU processing power to be dedicated to packet forwarding. In dynamic networks, fast switching

36-86 OL-8553-06
cache entries are frequently invalidated because of routing changes, which can cause traffic to be process
switched using the routing table, instead of fast switched using the route cache. CEF use the Forwarding
Information Base (FIB) lookup table to perform destination-based switching of IP packets.
The two main components in CEF are the distributed FIB and the distributed adjacency tables.
• The FIB is similar to a routing table or information base and maintains a mirror image of the
forwarding information in the IP routing table. When routing or topology changes occur in the
network, the IP routing table is updated, and those changes are reflected in the FIB. The FIB
maintains next-hop address information based on the information in the IP routing table. Because
the FIB contains all known routes that exist in the routing table, CEF eliminates route cache
maintenance, is more efficient for switching traffic, and is not affected by traffic patterns.
• Nodes in the network are said to be adjacent if they can reach each other with a single hop across a
link layer. CEF uses adjacency tables to prepend Layer 2 addressing information. The adjacency
table maintains Layer 2 next-hop addresses for all FIB entries.
Because the switch uses Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs) to achieve Gigabit-speed line
rate IP traffic, CEF forwarding applies only to the software-forwarding path, that is, traffic that is
forwarded by the CPU.
CEF is enabled globally by default. If for some reason it is disabled, you can re-enable it by using the ip
cef global configuration command.
The default configuration is CEF enabled on all Layer 3 interfaces. Entering the no ip route-cache cef
interface configuration command disables CEF for traffic that is being forwarded by software. This
command does not affect the hardware forwarding path. Disabling CEF and using the debug ip packet
detail privileged EXEC command can be useful to debug software-forwarded traffic. To enable CEF on
an interface for the software-forwarding path, use the ip route-cache cef interface configuration
command.
Caution Although the no ip route-cache cef interface configuration command to disable CEF on an interface is
visible in the CLI, we strongly recommend that you do not disable CEF on interfaces except for
debugging purposes.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable CEF globally and on an interface for
software-forwarded traffic if it has been disabled:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip cef Enable CEF operation.
Step 4 ip route-cache cef Enable CEF on the interface for software-forwarded traffic.
Step 6 show ip cef Display the CEF status on all interfaces.
Step 7 show cef linecard [detail] Display CEF-related interface information.
Step 8 show cef interface [interface-id] Display detailed CEF information for all interfaces or the
specified interface.
Step 9 show adjacency Display CEF adjacency table information.

OL-8553-06 36-87
Configuring the Number of Equal-Cost Routing Paths

When a router has two or more routes to the same network with the same metrics, these routes can be
thought of as having an equal cost. The term parallel path is another way to see occurrences of equal-cost
routes in a routing table. If a router has two or more equal-cost paths to a network, it can use them
concurrently. Parallel paths provide redundancy in case of a circuit failure and also enable a router to
load balance packets over the available paths for more efficient use of available bandwidth.
Even though the router automatically learns about and configures equal-cost routes, you can control the
maximum number of parallel paths supported by an IP routing protocol in its routing table. Although the
switch software allows a maximum of 32 equal-cost routes, the switch hardware will never use more than
16 paths per route.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the maximum number of parallel
paths installed in a routing table from the default:
Command Purpose
Step 2 router {bgp | rip | ospf | eigrp} Enter router configuration mode.
Step 3 maximum-paths maximum Set the maximum number of parallel paths for the protocol routing
table. The range is from 1 to 16; the default is 4 for most IP routing
protocols, but only 1 for BGP.
Step 5 show ip protocols Verify the setting in the Maximum path field.
Use the no maximum-paths router configuration command to restore the default value.
Configuring Static Unicast Routes

Static unicast routes are user-defined routes that cause packets moving between a source and a
destination to take a specified path. Static routes can be important if the router cannot build a route to a
particular destination and are useful for specifying a gateway of last resort to which all unroutable
packets are sent.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a static route:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip route prefix mask {address | interface} [distance] Establish a static route.
Step 4 show ip route Display the current state of the routing table to verify
the configuration.
Use the no ip route prefix mask {address | interface} global configuration command to remove a static
route.

36-88 OL-8553-06
The switch retains static routes until you remove them. However, you can override static routes with
dynamic routing information by assigning administrative distance values. Each dynamic routing
protocol has a default administrative distance, as listed in Table 36-16. If you want a static route to be
overridden by information from a dynamic routing protocol, set the administrative distance of the static
route higher than that of the dynamic protocol.
Table 36-16 Dynamic Routing Protocol Default Administrative Distances
Route Source Default Distance

Connected interface 0
Static route 1
Enhanced IRGP summary route 5
External BGP 20
Internal Enhanced IGRP 90
IGRP 100
OSPF 110
Internal BGP 200
Unknown 225
Static routes that point to an interface are advertised through RIP, IGRP, and other dynamic routing
protocols, whether or not static redistribute router configuration commands were specified for those
routing protocols. These static routes are advertised because static routes that point to an interface are
considered in the routing table to be connected and hence lose their static nature. However, if you define
a static route to an interface that is not one of the networks defined in a network command, no dynamic
routing protocols advertise the route unless a redistribute static command is specified for these
protocols.
When an interface goes down, all static routes through that interface are removed from the IP routing
table. When the software can no longer find a valid next hop for the address specified as the forwarding
router's address in a static route, the static route is also removed from the IP routing table.
Specifying Default Routes and Networks

A router might not be able to learn the routes to all other networks. To provide complete routing
capability, you can use some routers as smart routers and give the remaining routers default routes to the
smart router. (Smart routers have routing table information for the entire internetwork.) These default
routes can be dynamically learned or can be configured in the individual routers. Most dynamic interior
routing protocols include a mechanism for causing a smart router to generate dynamic default
information that is then forwarded to other routers.
If a router has a directly connected interface to the specified default network, the dynamic routing
protocols running on that device generate a default route. In RIP, it advertises the pseudonetwork
0.0.0.0.s
A router that is generating the default for a network also might need a default of its own. One way a
router can generate its own default is to specify a static route to the network 0.0.0.0 through the
appropriate device.

OL-8553-06 36-89
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define a static route to a network as the static
default route:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip default-network network number Specify a default network.
Step 4 show ip route Display the selected default route in the gateway of last resort
display.
Use the no ip default-network network number global configuration command to remove the route.
When default information is passed through a dynamic routing protocol, no further configuration is
required. The system periodically scans its routing table to choose the optimal default network as its
default route. In IGRP networks, there might be several candidate networks for the system default. Cisco
routers use administrative distance and metric information to set the default route or the gateway of last
resort.
If dynamic default information is not being passed to the system, candidates for the default route are
specified with the ip default-network global configuration command. If this network appears in the
routing table from any source, it is flagged as a possible choice for the default route. If the router has no
interface on the default network, but does have a path to it, the network is considered as a possible
candidate, and the gateway to the best default path becomes the gateway of last resort.
Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information

The switch can run multiple routing protocols simultaneously, and it can redistribute information from
one routing protocol to another. Redistributing information from one routing protocol to another applies
to all supported IP-based routing protocols.
You can also conditionally control the redistribution of routes between routing domains by defining
enhanced packet filters or route maps between the two domains. The match and set route-map
configuration commands define the condition portion of a route map. The match command specifies that
a criterion must be matched. The set command specifies an action to be taken if the routing update meets
the conditions defined by the match command. Although redistribution is a protocol-independent
feature, some of the match and set route-map configuration commands are specific to a particular
protocol.
One or more match commands and one or more set commands follow a route-map command. If there
are no match commands, everything matches. If there are no set commands, nothing is done, other than
the match. Therefore, you need at least one match or set command.
Note A route map with no set route-map configuration commands is sent to the CPU, which causes high CPU
utilization.

36-90 OL-8553-06
You can also identify route-map statements as permit or deny. If the statement is marked as a deny, the
packets meeting the match criteria are sent back through the normal forwarding channels
(destination-based routing). If the statement is marked as permit, set clauses are applied to packets
meeting the match criteria. Packets that do not meet the match criteria are forwarded through the normal
routing channel.
You can use the BGP route map continue clause to execute additional entries in a route map after an
entry is executed with successful match and set clauses. You can use the continue clause to configure
and organize more modular policy definitions so that specific policy configurations need not be repeated
within the same route map. The switch supports the continue clause for outbound policies. For more
information about using the route map continue clause, see the BGP Route-Map Continue Support for
an Outbound Policy feature guide for Cisco IOS Release 12.4(4)T at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6441/products_feature_guides_list.html
Note Although each of Steps 3 through 14 in the following section is optional, you must enter at least one
match route-map configuration command and one set route-map configuration command.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a route map for redistribution:
Command Purpose
Step 2 route-map map-tag [permit | deny] [sequence number] Define any route maps used to control redistribution and
enter route-map configuration mode.
map-tag—A meaningful name for the route map. The
redistribute router configuration command uses this
name to reference this route map. Multiple route maps
might share the same map tag name.
(Optional) If permit is specified and the match criteria
are met for this route map, the route is redistributed as
controlled by the set actions. If deny is specified, the
route is not redistributed.
sequence number (Optional)— Number that indicates the
position a new route map is to have in the list of route
maps already configured with the same name.
Step 3 match as-path path-list-number Match a BGP AS path access list.
Step 4 match community-list community-list-number [exact] Match a BGP community list.
Step 5 match ip address {access-list-number | Match a standard access list by specifying the name or
access-list-name} [...access-list-number | number. It can be an integer from 1 to 199.
...access-list-name]
Step 6 match metric metric-value Match the specified route metric. The metric-value can be
an EIGRP metric with a specified value from 0
to 4294967295.
Step 7 match ip next-hop {access-list-number | Match a next-hop router address passed by one of the
access-list-name} [...access-list-number | access lists specified (numbered from 1 to 199).
Step 8 match tag tag value [...tag-value] Match the specified tag value in a list of one or more route
tag values. Each can be an integer from 0 to 4294967295.

OL-8553-06 36-91
Command Purpose
Step 9 match interface type number [...type number] Match the specified next hop route out one of the
specified interfaces.
Step 10 match ip route-source {access-list-number | Match the address specified by the specified advertised
access-list-name} [...access-list-number | access lists.
Step 11 match route-type {local | internal | external [type-1 | Match the specified route-type:
type-2]}
• local—Locally generated BGP routes.
• internal—OSPF intra-area and interarea routes or
EIGRP internal routes.
• external—OSPF external routes (Type 1 or Type 2)
or EIGRP external routes.
Step 12 set dampening halflife reuse suppress Set BGP route dampening factors.
max-suppress-time
Step 13 set local-preference value Assign a value to a local BGP path.
Step 14 set origin {igp | egp as | incomplete} Set the BGP origin code.
Step 15 set as-path {tag | prepend as-path-string} Modify the BGP autonomous system path.
Step 16 set level {level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2 | stub-area | Set the level for routes that are advertised into the
backbone} specified area of the routing domain. The stub-area and
backbone are OSPF NSSA and backbone areas.
Step 17 set metric metric value Set the metric value to give the redistributed routes (for
EIGRP only). The metric value is an integer
from -294967295 to 294967295.
Step 18 set metric bandwidth delay reliability loading mtu Set the metric value to give the redistributed routes (for
EIGRP only):
• bandwidth—Metric value or IGRP bandwidth of the
route in kilobits per second in the range 0 to
4294967295
• delay—Route delay in tens of microseconds in the
range 0 to 4294967295.
• reliability—Likelihood of successful packet
transmission expressed as a number between 0 and
255, where 255 means 100 percent reliability and 0
means no reliability.
• loading— Effective bandwidth of the route expressed
as a number from 0 to 255 (255 is 100 percent
loading).
• mtu—Minimum maximum transmission unit (MTU)
size of the route in bytes in the range 0 to
4294967295.
Step 19 set metric-type {type-1 | type-2} Set the OSPF external metric type for redistributed routes.
Step 20 set metric-type internal Set the multi-exit discriminator (MED) value on prefixes
advertised to external BGP neighbor to match the IGP
metric of the next hop.

36-92 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 21 set weight Set the BGP weight for the routing table. The value can
be from 1 to 65535.
Step 23 show route-map Display all route maps configured or only the one
specified to verify configuration.
To delete an entry, use the no route-map map tag global configuration command or the no match or no
set route-map configuration commands.
You can distribute routes from one routing domain into another and control route distribution.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to control route redistribution. Note that the
keywords are the same as defined in the previous procedure.
Command Purpose
Step 3 redistribute protocol [process-id] {level-1 | level-1-2 | Redistribute routes from one routing protocol to
level-2} [metric metric-value] [metric-type type-value] another routing protocol. If no route-maps are
[match internal | external type-value] [tag tag-value] specified, all routes are redistributed. If the keyword
[route-map map-tag] [weight weight] [subnets] route-map is specified with no map-tag, no routes are
distributed.
Step 4 default-metric number Cause the current routing protocol to use the same
metric value for all redistributed routes (BGP, RIP and
OSPF).
Step 5 default-metric bandwidth delay reliability loading mtu Cause the EIGRP routing protocol to use the same
metric value for all non-EIGRP redistributed routes.
Step 7 show route-map Display all route maps configured or only the one
To disable redistribution, use the no form of the commands.

The metrics of one routing protocol do not necessarily translate into the metrics of another. For example,
the RIP metric is a hop count, and the IGRP metric is a combination of five qualities. In these situations,
an artificial metric is assigned to the redistributed route. Uncontrolled exchanging of routing information
between different routing protocols can create routing loops and seriously degrade network operation.
If you have not defined a default redistribution metric that replaces metric conversion, some automatic
metric translations occur between routing protocols:
• RIP can automatically redistribute static routes. It assigns static routes a metric of 1 (directly
connected).
• Any protocol can redistribute other routing protocols if a default mode is in effect.

OL-8553-06 36-93
Configuring Policy-Based Routing

You can use policy-based routing (PBR) to configure a defined policy for traffic flows. By using PBR,
you can have more control over routing by reducing the reliance on routes derived from routing
protocols. PBR can specify and implement routing policies that allow or deny paths based on:
• Identity of a particular end system
• Application
• Protocol
You can use PBR to provide equal-access and source-sensitive routing, routing based on interactive
versus batch traffic, or routing based on dedicated links. For example, you could transfer stock records
to a corporate office on a high-bandwidth, high-cost link for a short time while transmitting routine
application data such as e-mail over a low-bandwidth, low-cost link.
With PBR, you classify traffic using access control lists (ACLs) and then make traffic go through a
different path. PBR is applied to incoming packets. All packets received on an interface with PBR
enabled are passed through route maps. Based on the criteria defined in the route maps, packets are
forwarded (routed) to the appropriate next hop.
• If packets do not match any route map statements, all set clauses are applied.
• If a statement is marked as permit and the packets do not match any route-map statements, the
packets are sent through the normal forwarding channels, and destination-based routing is
performed.
• For PBR, route-map statements marked as deny are not supported.
For more information about configuring route maps, see the “Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing
Information” section on page 36-90.
You can use standard IP ACLs to specify match criteria for a source address or extended IP ACLs to
specify match criteria based on an application, a protocol type, or an end station. The process proceeds
through the route map until a match is found. If no match is found, normal destination-based routing
occurs. There is an implicit deny at the end of the list of match statements.
If match clauses are satisfied, you can use a set clause to specify the IP addresses identifying the next
hop router in the path.
For details about PBR commands and keywords, see the Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 2 of
3: Routing Protocols, Release 12.2. For a list of PBR commands that are visible but not supported by the
switch, see Appendix C, “Unsupported Commands in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE,”
Note This software release does not support PBR when processing IPv4 and IPv6 traffic.
PBR Configuration Guidelines

Before configuring PBR, you should be aware of this information:
• To use PBR, you must have the IP services image installed on the switch.
• Multicast traffic is not policy-routed. PBR applies to only to unicast traffic.
• You can enable PBR on a routed port or an SVI.
• The switch does not support route-map deny statements for PBR.

36-94 OL-8553-06
• You can apply a policy route map to an EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode, but you cannot
apply a policy route map to a physical interface that is a member of the EtherChannel. If you try to
do so, the command is rejected. When a policy route map is applied to a physical interface, that
interface cannot become a member of an EtherChannel.
• You can define a maximum of 246 IP policy route maps on the switch.
• You can define a maximum of 512 access control entries (ACEs) for PBR on the switch.
• When configuring match criteria in a route map, follow these guidelines:
– Do not match ACLs that permit packets destined for a local address. PBR would forward these
packets, which could cause ping or Telnet failure or route protocol flapping.
– Do not match ACLs with deny ACEs. Packets that match a deny ACE are sent to the CPU, which
could cause high CPU utilization.
• To use PBR, you must first enable the routing template by using the sdm prefer routing global
configuration command. PBR is not supported with the VLAN or default template. For more
information on the SDM templates, see Chapter 8, “Configuring SDM Templates.”
• VRF and PBR are mutually exclusive on a switch interface. You cannot enable VRF when PBR is
enabled on an interface. The reverse is also true, you cannot enable PBR when VRF is enabled on
an interface.
• Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP) and PBR are mutually exclusive on a switch
interface. You cannot enable WCCP when PBR is enabled on an interface. The reverse is also true,
you cannot enable PBR when WCCP is enabled on an interface.
• The number of TCAM entries used by PBR depends on the route map itself, the ACLs used, and the
order of the ACLs and route-map entries.
• Policy-based routing based on packet length, TOS, set interface, set default next hop, or set default
interface are not supported. Policy maps with no valid set actions or with set action set to Don’t
Fragment are not supported.
• The switch supports quality of service (QoS) DSCP and IP precedence matching in PBR route maps,
with these limitations:
– You cannot apply QoS DSCP mutation maps and PBR route maps to the same interface.
– You cannot configure DSCP transparency and PBR DSCP route maps on the same switch.
– When you configure PBR with QoS DSCP, you can set QoS to be enabled (by entering the mls
qos global configuration command) or disabled (by entering the no mls qos command). When
QoS is enabled, to ensure that the DSCP value of the traffic is unchanged, you should configure
a DSCP trust state on the port where traffic enters the switch by entering the mls qos trust dscp
interface configuration command. If the trust state is not DSCP, by default all nontrusted traffic
would have the DSCP value marked as 0.
Enabling PBR
By default, PBR is disabled on the switch. To enable PBR, you must create a route map that specifies
the match criteria and the resulting action if all of the match clauses are met. Then, you must enable PBR
for that route map on an interface. All packets arriving on the specified interface matching the match
clauses are subject to PBR.
PBR can be fast-switched or implemented at speeds that do not slow down the switch. Fast-switched
PBR supports most match and set commands. PBR must be enabled before you enable fast-switched
PBR. Fast-switched PBR is disabled by default.

OL-8553-06 36-95
Packets that are generated by the switch, or local packets, are not normally policy-routed. When you
globally enable local PBR on the switch, all packets that originate on the switch are subject to local PBR.
Local PBR is disabled by default.
Note To enable PBR, the switch must be running the IP services image.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure PBR:
Command Purpose
Step 2 route-map map-tag [permit] [sequence number] Define any route maps used to control where packets are
output, and enter route-map configuration mode.
• map-tag—A meaningful name for the route map. The ip
policy route-map interface configuration command uses
this name to reference the route map. Multiple route maps
might share the same map tag name.
• (Optional) If permit is specified and the match criteria
are met for this route map, the route is policy-routed as
controlled by the set actions.
Note The route-map deny statement is not supported in
PBR route maps to be applied to an interface.
• sequence number (Optional)— Number that shows the

position of a new route map in the list of route maps
already configured with the same name.
Step 3 match ip address {access-list-number | Match the source and destination IP address that is permitted
access-list-name} [...access-list-number | by one or more standard or extended access lists.
Note Do not enter an ACL with a deny ACE or an ACL that
permits a packet destined for a local address.
If you do not specify a match command, the route map applies

to all packets.
Step 4 set ip next-hop ip-address [...ip-address] Specify the action to take on the packets that match the
criteria. Set next hop to which to route the packet (the next hop
must be adjacent).
Step 6 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface
to configure.
Step 7 ip policy route-map map-tag Enable PBR on a Layer 3 interface, and identify the route map
to use. You can configure only one route map on an interface.
However, you can have multiple route map entries with
different sequence numbers. These entries are evaluated in
sequence number order until the first match. If there is no
match, packets are routed as usual.
Note If the IP policy route map contains a deny statement,
the configuration fails.

36-96 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 8 ip route-cache policy (Optional) Enable fast-switching PBR. You must first enable
PBR before enabling fast-switching PBR.
Step 10 ip local policy route-map map-tag (Optional) Enable local PBR to perform policy-based routing
on packets originating at the switch. This applies to packets
generated by the switch and not to incoming packets.
Step 12 show route-map [map-name] (Optional) Display all route maps configured or only the one
Step 13 show ip policy (Optional) Display policy route maps attached to interfaces.
Step 14 show ip local policy (Optional) Display whether or not local policy routing is
enabled and, if so, the route map being used.
Use the no route-map map-tag global configuration command or the no match or no set route-map
configuration commands to delete an entry. Use the no ip policy route-map map-tag interface
configuration command to disable PBR on an interface. Use the no ip route-cache policy interface
configuration command to disable fast-switching PBR. Use the no ip local policy route-map map-tag
global configuration command to disable policy-based routing on packets originating on the switch.
Filtering Routing Information

You can filter routing protocol information by performing the tasks described in this section.
Note When routes are redistributed between OSPF processes, no OSPF metrics are preserved.
Setting Passive Interfaces

To prevent other routers on a local network from dynamically learning about routes, you can use the
passive-interface router configuration command to keep routing update messages from being sent
through a router interface. When you use this command in the OSPF protocol, the interface address you
specify as passive appears as a stub network in the OSPF domain. OSPF routing information is neither
sent nor received through the specified router interface.
In networks with many interfaces, to avoid having to manually set them as passive, you can set all
interfaces to be passive by default by using the passive-interface default router configuration command
and manually setting interfaces where adjacencies are desired.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure passive interfaces:
Command Purpose

OL-8553-06 36-97
Command Purpose
Step 3 passive-interface interface-id Suppress sending routing updates through the specified Layer 3
interface.
Step 4 passive-interface default (Optional) Set all interfaces as passive by default.
Step 5 no passive-interface interface type (Optional) Activate only those interfaces that need to have
adjacencies sent.
Step 6 network network-address (Optional) Specify the list of networks for the routing process. The
network-address is an IP address.
Use a network monitoring privileged EXEC command such as show ip ospf interface to verify the
interfaces that you enabled as passive, or use the show ip interface privileged EXEC command to verify
the interfaces that you enabled as active.
To re-enable the sending of routing updates, use the no passive-interface interface-id router
configuration command. The default keyword sets all interfaces as passive by default. You can then
configure individual interfaces where you want adjacencies by using the no passive-interface router
configuration command. The default keyword is useful in Internet service provider and large enterprise
networks where many of the distribution routers have more than 200 interfaces.
Controlling Advertising and Processing in Routing Updates

You can use the distribute-list router configuration command with access control lists to suppress routes
from being advertised in routing updates and to prevent other routers from learning one or more routes.
When used in OSPF, this feature applies to only external routes, and you cannot specify an interface
name.
You can also use a distribute-list router configuration command to avoid processing certain routes listed
in incoming updates. (This feature does not apply to OSPF.)
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to control the advertising or processing of
routing updates:
Command Purpose
Step 2 router {bgp | rip | eigrp} Enter router configuration mode.
Step 3 distribute-list {access-list-number | Permit or deny routes from being advertised in routing
access-list-name} out [interface-name | routing updates, depending upon the action listed in the access list.
process | autonomous-system-number]
Step 4 distribute-list {access-list-number | Suppress processing in routes listed in updates.
access-list-name} in [type-number]
Use the no distribute-list in router configuration command to change or cancel a filter. To cancel
suppression of network advertisements in updates, use the no distribute-list out router configuration
command.

36-98 OL-8553-06
Filtering Sources of Routing Information

Because some routing information might be more accurate than others, you can use filtering to prioritize
information coming from different sources. An administrative distance is a rating of the trustworthiness
of a routing information source, such as a router or group of routers. In a large network, some routing
protocols can be more reliable than others. By specifying administrative distance values, you enable the
router to intelligently discriminate between sources of routing information. The router always picks the
route whose routing protocol has the lowest administrative distance. Table 36-16 on page 36-89 shows
the default administrative distances for various routing information sources.
Because each network has its own requirements, there are no general guidelines for assigning
administrative distances.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to filter sources of routing information:
Command Purpose
Step 3 distance weight {ip-address {ip-address mask}} Define an administrative distance.
[ip access list]
weight—The administrative distance as an integer from
10 to 255. Used alone, weight specifies a default
administrative distance that is used when no other
specification exists for a routing information source.
Routes with a distance of 255 are not installed in the
routing table.
(Optional) ip access list—An IP standard or extended
access list to be applied to incoming routing updates.
Step 5 show ip protocols Display the default administrative distance for a
specified routing process.
To remove a distance definition, use the no distance router configuration command.
Managing Authentication Keys

Key management is a method of controlling authentication keys used by routing protocols. Not all
protocols can use key management. Authentication keys are available for EIGRP and RIP Version 2.
Before you manage authentication keys, you must enable authentication. See the appropriate protocol
section to see how to enable authentication for that protocol. To manage authentication keys, define a
key chain, identify the keys that belong to the key chain, and specify how long each key is valid. Each
key has its own key identifier (specified with the key number key chain configuration command), which
is stored locally. The combination of the key identifier and the interface associated with the message
uniquely identifies the authentication algorithm and Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication key in use.
You can configure multiple keys with life times. Only one authentication packet is sent, regardless of
how many valid keys exist. The software examines the key numbers in order from lowest to highest, and
uses the first valid key it encounters. The lifetimes allow for overlap during key changes. Note that the
router must know these lifetimes.

OL-8553-06 36-99
Monitoring and Maintaining the IP Network
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to manage authentication keys:
Command Purpose
Step 2 key chain name-of-chain Identify a key chain, and enter key chain configuration
mode.
Step 3 key number Identify the key number. The range is 0 to 2147483647.
Step 4 key-string text Identify the key string. The string can contain from 1 to
80 uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric characters,
but the first character cannot be a number.
Step 5 accept-lifetime start-time {infinite | end-time | duration (Optional) Specify the time period during which the key
seconds} can be received.
Step 6 send-lifetime start-time {infinite | end-time | duration (Optional) Specify the time period during which the key
seconds} can be sent.
Step 8 show key chain Display authentication key information.
To remove the key chain, use the no key chain name-of-chain global configuration command.

You can remove all contents of a particular cache, table, or database. You can also display specific
statistics. Use the privileged EXEC commands in Table 36-17 to clear routes or display status:
Table 36-17 Commands to Clear IP Routes or Display Route Status
Command Purpose
clear ip route {network [mask | *]} Clear one or more routes from the IP routing table.
show ip protocols Display the parameters and state of the active routing protocol
process.
show ip route [address [mask] [longer-prefixes]] | Display the current state of the routing table.
[protocol [process-id]]
show ip route summary Display the current state of the routing table in summary form.

36-100 OL-8553-06
Table 36-17 Commands to Clear IP Routes or Display Route Status
Command Purpose
show ip route supernets-only Display supernets.
show ip cache Display the routing table used to switch IP traffic.
show route-map [map-name] Display all route maps configured or only the one specified.

OL-8553-06 36-101

36-102 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 37
Configuring IPv6 Unicast Routing
This chapter describes how to configure IPv6 unicast routing on the Catalyst 3560 switch.
For information about configuring IPv6 Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping, see Chapter 38,
“Configuring IPv6 MLD Snooping.” For information on configuring IPv6 access control lists (ACLs),
see Chapter 39, “Configuring IPv6 ACLs.” For information about configuring IPv4 unicast routing, see
Chapter 36, “Configuring IP Unicast Routing.”
To use this feature, the switch must be running the IP services image.
To enable IPv6 routing, you must configure the switch to use the a dual IPv4 and IPv6 switch database
management (SDM) template. See the “Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks” section on page 37-5.
Note For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the Cisco IOS
documentation referenced in the procedures

• “Understanding IPv6” section on page 37-1
• “Configuring IPv6” section on page 37-9
• “Displaying IPv6” section on page 37-25
Understanding IPv6
IPv4 users can move to IPv6 and receive services such as end-to-end security, quality of service (QoS),
and globally unique addresses. The IPv6 address space reduces the need for private addresses and
Network Address Translation (NAT) processing by border routers at network edges.
For information about how Cisco Systems implements IPv6, go to this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6553/products_ios_technology_home.html
For information about IPv6 and other features in this chapter
• See the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/ipv6/configuration/guide/12_4t/ipv6_12_4t.html

OL-8553-06 37-1
Chapter 37 Configuring IPv6 Unicast Routing
Understanding IPv6
• Use the Search field to locate the Cisco IOS software documentation. For example, if you want
information about static routes, you can enter Implementing Static Routes for IPv6 in the search field
to get this document about static routes:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/ipv6/configuration/guide/ip6-stat_routes_ps6441_TSD_Pro
ducts_Configuration_Guide_Chapter.html
This section describes IPv6 implementation on the switch. These sections are included:
• IPv6 Addresses, page 37-2
• Supported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features, page 37-2
• Unsupported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features, page 37-8
• Limitations, page 37-8
IPv6 Addresses
The switch supports only IPv6 unicast addresses. It does not support site-local unicast addresses, anycast
addresses, or multicast addresses.
The IPv6 128-bit addresses are represented as a series of eight 16-bit hexadecimal fields separated by
colons in the format: n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n. This is an example of an IPv6 address:
2031:0000:130F:0000:0000:09C0:080F:130B
For easier implementation, leading zeros in each field are optional. This is the same address without
leading zeros:
2031:0:130F:0:0:9C0:80F:130B
You can also use two colons (::) to represent successive hexadecimal fields of zeros, but you can use this
short version only once in each address:
2031:0:130F::09C0:080F:130B
For more information about IPv6 address formats, address types, and the IPv6 packet header, see the
“Implementing IPv6 Addressing and Basic Connectivity” chapter of Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration
Library on Cisco.com.
In the “Implementing Addressing and Basic Connectivity” chapter, these sections apply to the
Catalyst 3560 switch:
• IPv6 Address Formats
• IPv6 Address Type: Unicast
• IPv6 Address Output Display
• Simplified IPv6 Packet Header
Supported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features

These sections describe the IPv6 protocol features supported by the switch:
• 128-Bit Wide Unicast Addresses, page 37-3
• DNS for IPv6, page 37-4
• Path MTU Discovery for IPv6 Unicast, page 37-4
• ICMPv6, page 37-4

37-2 OL-8553-06
Understanding IPv6
• Neighbor Discovery, page 37-4

• Default Router Preference, page 37-4
• IPv6 Stateless Autoconfiguration and Duplicate Address Detection, page 37-5
• IPv6 Applications, page 37-5
• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks, page 37-5
• DHCP for IPv6 Address Assignment, page 37-6
• Static Routes for IPv6, page 37-6
• RIP for IPv6, page 37-6
• OSPF for IPv6, page 37-6 (only on switches running the IP services image)
• EIGRP for IPv6, page 37-7 (only on switches running the IP services image)
• HSRP for IPv6, page 37-7 (only on switches running the IP services image)
• SNMP and Syslog Over IPv6, page 37-7
• HTTP(S) Over IPv6, page 37-8
Support on the switch includes expanded address capability, header format simplification, improved
support of extensions and options, and hardware parsing of the extension header. The switch supports
hop-by-hop extension header packets, which are routed or bridged in software.
The switch provides IPv6 routing capability over native Ethernet Inter-Switch Link (ISL) or 802.1Q
trunk ports for static routes, Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for IPv6, and Open Shortest Path First
(OSPF) Version 3 Protocol. It supports up to 16 equal-cost routes and can simultaneously forward IPv4
and IPv6 frames at line rate.
128-Bit Wide Unicast Addresses

The switch supports aggregatable global unicast addresses and link-local unicast addresses. It does not
support site-local unicast addresses.
• Aggregatable global unicast addresses are IPv6 addresses from the aggregatable global unicast
prefix. The address structure enables strict aggregation of routing prefixes and limits the number of
routing table entries in the global routing table. These addresses are used on links that are aggregated
through organizations and eventually to the Internet service provider.
These addresses are defined by a global routing prefix, a subnet ID, and an interface ID. Current
global unicast address allocation uses the range of addresses that start with binary value 001
(2000::/3). Addresses with a prefix of 2000::/3(001) through E000::/3(111) must have 64-bit
interface identifiers in the extended unique identifier (EUI)-64 format.
• Link local unicast addresses can be automatically configured on any interface by using the link-local
prefix FE80::/10(1111 1110 10) and the interface identifier in the modified EUI format. Link-local
addresses are used in the neighbor discovery protocol (NDP) and the stateless autoconfiguration
process. Nodes on a local link use link-local addresses and do not require globally unique addresses
to communicate. IPv6 routers do not forward packets with link-local source or destination addresses
to other links.
For more information, see the section about IPv6 unicast addresses in the “Implementing IPv6
Addressing and Basic Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.

OL-8553-06 37-3
Understanding IPv6
DNS for IPv6

IPv6 supports Domain Name System (DNS) record types in the DNS name-to-address and
address-to-name lookup processes. The DNS AAAA resource record types support IPv6 addresses and
are equivalent to an A address record in IPv4. The switch supports DNS resolution for IPv4 and IPv6.
Path MTU Discovery for IPv6 Unicast

The switch supports advertising the system maximum transmission unit (MTU) to IPv6 nodes and path
MTU discovery. Path MTU discovery allows a host to dynamically discover and adjust to differences in
the MTU size of every link along a given data path. In IPv6, if a link along the path is not large enough
to accommodate the packet size, the source of the packet handles the fragmentation. The switch does not
support path MTU discovery for multicast packets.
ICMPv6
The Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) in IPv6 generates error messages, such as ICMP
destination unreachable messages, to report errors during processing and other diagnostic functions. In
IPv6, ICMP packets are also used in the neighbor discovery protocol and path MTU discovery.
Neighbor Discovery
The switch supports NDP for IPv6, a protocol running on top of ICMPv6, and static neighbor entries for
IPv6 stations that do not support NDP. The IPv6 neighbor discovery process uses ICMP messages and
solicited-node multicast addresses to determine the link-layer address of a neighbor on the same network
(local link), to verify the reachability of the neighbor, and to keep track of neighboring routers.
The switch supports ICMPv6 redirect for routes with mask lengths less than 64 bits. ICMP redirect is
not supported for host routes or for summarized routes with mask lengths greater than 64 bits.
Neighbor discovery throttling ensures that the switch CPU is not unnecessarily burdened while it is in
the process of obtaining the next hop forwarding information to route an IPv6 packet. The switch drops
any additional IPv6 packets whose next hop is the same neighbor that the switch is actively trying to
resolve. This drop avoids further load on the CPU.
Default Router Preference

The switch supports IPv6 default router preference (DRP), an extension in router advertisement
messages. DRP improves the ability of a host to select an appropriate router, especially when the host is
multihomed and the routers are on different links. The switch does not support the Route Information
Option in RFC 4191.
An IPv6 host maintains a default router list from which it selects a router for traffic to offlink
destinations. The selected router for a destination is then cached in the destination cache. NDP for IPv6
specifies that routers that are reachable or probably reachable are preferred over routers whose
reachability is unknown or suspect. For reachable or probably reachable routers, NDP can either select
the same router every time or cycle through the router list. By using DRP, you can configure an IPv6 host
to prefer one router over another, provided both are reachable or probably reachable.
For more information about DRP for IPv6, see the “Implementing IPv6 Addresses and Basic
Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.

37-4 OL-8553-06
Understanding IPv6
IPv6 Stateless Autoconfiguration and Duplicate Address Detection

The switch uses stateless autoconfiguration to manage link, subnet, and site addressing changes, such as
management of host and mobile IP addresses. A host autonomously configures its own link-local
address, and booting nodes send router solicitations to request router advertisements for configuring
interfaces.
For more information about autoconfiguration and duplicate address detection, see the “Implementing
IPv6 Addressing and Basic Connectivity” chapter of Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on
Cisco.com.
IPv6 Applications
The switch has IPv6 support for these applications:
• Ping, traceroute, Telnet, TFTP, and FTP
• Secure Shell (SSH) over an IPv6 transport
• HTTP server access over IPv6 transport
• DNS resolver for AAAA over IPv4 transport
• Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) support for IPv6 addresses
For more information about managing these applications, see the “Managing Cisco IOS Applications
over IPv6” chapter and the “Implementing IPv6 Addressing and Basic Connectivity” chapter in the
Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks

You must use the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template to allocate ternary content addressable memory (TCAM)
usage to both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols.
Figure 37-1 shows a router forwarding both IPv4 and IPv6 traffic through the same interface, based on
the IP packet and destination addresses.
Figure 37-1 Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Support on an Interface
IPv4
10.1.1.1
122379
IPv6
3ffe:yyyy::1
Use the dual IPv4 and IPv6 switch database management (SDM) template to enable IPv6 routing. For
more information about the dual IPv4 and IPv6 SDM template, see Chapter 8, “Configuring SDM
Templates.”

OL-8553-06 37-5
Understanding IPv6
The dual IPv4 and IPv6 templates allow the switch to be used in dual stack environments.
• If you try to configure IPv6 without first selecting a dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, a warning message
appears.
• In IPv4-only environments, the switch routes IPv4 packets and applies IPv4 QoS and ACLs in
hardware. IPv6 packets are not supported.
• In dual IPv4 and IPv6 environments, the switch routes both IPv4 and IPv6 packets and applies IPv4
QoS in hardware.
• IPv6 QoS is not supported.
• If you do not plan to use IPv6, do not use the dual stack template because this template results in
less TCAM capacity for each resource.
For more information about IPv4 and IPv6 protocol stacks, see the “Implementing IPv6 Addressing and
Basic Connectivity” chapter of Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
DHCP for IPv6 Address Assignment

DHCPv6 enables DHCP servers to pass configuration parameters, such as IPv6 network addresses, to
IPv6 clients. The address assignment feature manages nonduplicate address assignment in the correct
prefix based on the network where the host is connected. Assigned addresses can be from one or multiple
prefix pools. Additional options, such as default domain and DNS name-server address, can be passed
back to the client. Address pools can be assigned for use on a specific interface, on multiple interfaces,
or the server can automatically find the appropriate pool.
This document describes only the DHCPv6 address assignment. For more information about configuring
the DHCPv6 client, server, or relay agent functions, see the “Implementing DHCP for IPv6” chapter in
the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
Static Routes for IPv6

Static routes are manually configured and define an explicit route between two networking devices.
Static routes are useful for smaller networks with only one path to an outside network or to provide
security for certain types of traffic in a larger network.
For more information about static routes, see the “Implementing Static Routes for IPv6” chapter in the
RIP for IPv6

Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for IPv6 is a distance-vector protocol that uses hop count as a
routing metric. It includes support for IPv6 addresses and prefixes and the all-RIP-routers multicast
group address FF02::9 as the destination address for RIP update messages.
For more information about RIP for IPv6, see the “Implementing RIP for IPv6” chapter in the Cisco IOS
IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
OSPF for IPv6

The switch running the IP services image supports Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) for IPv6, a link-state
protocol for IP. For more information, see the “Implementing OSFP for IPv6” chapter in the Cisco IOS

37-6 OL-8553-06
Understanding IPv6
EIGRP for IPv6

The switch running the IP services image supports Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol
(EIGRP) for IPv6. It is configured on the interfaces on which it runs and does not require a global IPv6
address.
Before running, an instance of EIGRP IPv6 requires an implicit or explicit router ID. An implicit router
ID is derived from a local IPv4 address, so any IPv4 node always has an available router ID. However,
EIGRP IPv6 might be running in a network with only IPv6 nodes and therefore might not have an
available IPv4 router ID.
For more information about EIGRP for IPv6, see the “Implementing EIGRP for IPv6” chapter in the
HSRP for IPv6

The switch running the IP services image supports the Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for IPv6.
HSRP provides routing redundancy for routing IPv6 traffic not dependent on the availability of any
single router. IPv6 hosts learn of available routers through IPv6 neighbor discovery router advertisement
messages. These messages are multicast periodically or are solicited by hosts.
An HSRP IPv6 group has a virtual MAC address that is derived from the HSRP group number and a
virtual IPv6 link-local address that is, by default, derived from the HSRP virtual MAC address. Periodic
messages are sent for the HSRP virtual IPv6 link-local address when the HSRP group is active. These
messages stop after a final one is sent when the group leaves the active state.
For more information about configuring HSRP for IPv6, see the “Configuring First Hop Redundancy
Protocols in IPv6” chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
SNMP and Syslog Over IPv6

To support both IPv4 and IPv6, IPv6 network management requires both IPv6 and IPv4 transports.
Syslog over IPv6 supports address data types for these transports.
SNMP and syslog over IPv6 provide these features:
• Support for both IPv4 and IPv6
• IPv6 transport for SNMP and to modify the SNMP agent to support traps for an IPv6 host
• SNMP- and syslog-related MIBs to support IPv6 addressing
• Configuration of IPv6 hosts as trap receivers
For support over IPv6, SNMP modifies the existing IP transport mapping to simultaneously support IPv4
and IPv6. These SNMP actions support IPv6 transport management:
• Opens User Datagram Protocol (UDP) SNMP socket with default settings
• Provides a new transport mechanism called SR_IPV6_TRANSPORT
• Sends SNMP notifications over IPv6 transport
• Supports SNMP-named access lists for IPv6 transport
• Supports SNMP proxy forwarding using IPv6 transport
• Verifies SNMP Manager feature works with IPv6 transport
For information on SNMP over IPv6, including configuration procedures, see the “Managing Cisco IOS
Applications over IPv6” chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.

OL-8553-06 37-7
Understanding IPv6
For information about syslog over IPv6, including configuration procedures, see the “Implementing IPv6
Addressing and Basic Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
HTTP(S) Over IPv6

The HTTP client sends requests to both IPv4 and IPv6 HTTP servers, which respond to requests from
both IPv4 and IPv6 HTTP clients. URLs with literal IPv6 addresses must be specified in hexadecimal
using 16-bit values between colons.
The accept socket call chooses an IPv4 or IPv6 address family. The accept socket is either an IPv4 or
IPv6 socket. The listening socket continues to listen for both IPv4 and IPv6 signals that indicate a
connection. The IPv6 listening socket is bound to an IPv6 wildcard address.
The underlying TCP/IP stack supports a dual-stack environment. HTTP relies on the TCP/IP stack and
the sockets for processing network-layer interactions.
Basic network connectivity (ping) must exist between the client and the server hosts before HTTP
connections can be made.
For more information, see the “Managing Cisco IOS Applications over IPv6” chapter in the Cisco IOS
Unsupported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features

The switch does not support these IPv6 features:
• IPv6 policy-based routing
• IPv6 virtual private network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) table support
• Support for IPv6 routing protocols: multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and Intermediate
System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) routing
• IPv6 packets destined to site-local addresses
• Tunneling protocols, such as IPv4-to-IPv6 or IPv6-to-IPv4
• The switch as a tunnel endpoint supporting IPv4-to-IPv6 or IPv6-to-IPv4 tunneling protocols
• IPv6 unicast reverse-path forwarding
• IPv6 general prefixes
Limitations
Because IPv6 is implemented in switch hardware, some limitations occur due to the IPv6 compressed
addresses in the TCAM. These hardware limitations result in some loss of functionality and limits some
features.
These are feature limitations.
• ICMPv6 redirect functionality is not supported for IPv6 host routes (routes used to reach a specific
host) or for IPv6 routes with masks greater than 64 bits. The switch cannot redirect hosts to a better
first-hop router for a specific destination that is reachable through a host route or through a route
with masks greater than 64 bits.
• Load balancing using equal cost and unequal cost routes is not supported for IPv6 host routes or for
IPv6 routes with a mask greater than 64 bits.

37-8 OL-8553-06
Configuring IPv6
• The switch cannot forward SNAP-encapsulated IPv6 packets.
Note There is a similar limitation for IPv4 SNAP-encapsulated packets, but the packets are
dropped at the switch and are not forwarded.
• The switch routes IPv6-to-IPv4 and IPv4-to-IPv6 packets in hardware, but the switch cannot be an
IPv6-to-IPv4 or IPv4-to-IPv6 tunnel endpoint.
• Bridged IPv6 packets with hop-by-hop extension headers are forwarded in software. In IPv4, these
packets are routed in software, but bridged in hardware.
• In addition to the normal SPAN and RSPAN limitations defined in the software configuration guide,
these limitations are specific to IPv6 packets:
– When you send RSPAN IPv6-routed packets, the source MAC address in the SPAN output
packet can be incorrect.
– When you send RSPAN IPv6-routed packets, the destination MAC address can be incorrect.
Normal traffic is not affected.
• The switch cannot apply QoS classification or policy-based routing on source-routed IPv6 packets
in hardware.
• The switch cannot generate ICMPv6 Packet Too Big messages for multicast packets.
Configuring IPv6
These sections contain this IPv6 forwarding configuration information:
• Default IPv6 Configuration, page 37-10
• Configuring IPv6 Addressing and Enabling IPv6 Routing, page 37-10
• Configuring Default Router Preference, page 37-12
• Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks, page 37-13
• Configuring DHCP for IPv6 Address Assignment, page 37-14
• Configuring IPv6 ICMP Rate Limiting, page 37-18
• Configuring CEF for IPv6, page 37-18
• Configuring Static Routes for IPv6, page 37-19
• Configuring RIP for IPv6, page 37-20
• Configuring OSPF for IPv6, page 37-21
• Configuring EIGRP for IPv6, page 37-23
• Configuring HSRP for IPv6, page 37-23

OL-8553-06 37-9
Configuring IPv6
Default IPv6 Configuration

Table 37-1 shows the default IPv6 configuration.
Table 37-1 Default IPv6 Configuration

SDM template Default
IPv6 routing Disabled globally and on all interfaces.
CEFv6 or dCEFv6 Disabled (IPv4 CEF and dCEF are enabled by default).
Note When IPv6 routing is enabled, CEFv6 and dCEF6 are automatically
enabled.
IPv6 addresses None configured.
Configuring IPv6 Addressing and Enabling IPv6 Routing

This section describes how to assign IPv6 addresses to individual Layer 3 interfaces and to globally
forward IPv6 traffic on the switch.
Before configuring IPv6 on the switch, consider these guidelines:
• Be sure to select a dual IPv4 and IPv6 SDM template.
• Not all features discussed in this chapter are supported by the Catalyst 3560 switch. See the
“Unsupported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features” section on page 37-8.
• In the ipv6 address interface configuration command, you must enter the ipv6-address and
ipv6-prefix variables with the address specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons.
The prefix-length variable (preceded by a slash [/]) is a decimal value that shows how many of the
high-order contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix (the network portion of the address).
To forward IPv6 traffic on an interface, you must configure a global IPv6 address on that interface.
Configuring an IPv6 address on an interface automatically configures a link-local address and activates
IPv6 for the interface. The configured interface automatically joins these required multicast groups for
that link:
• solicited-node multicast group FF02:0:0:0:0:1:ff00::/104 for each unicast address assigned to the
interface (this address is used in the neighbor discovery process.)
• all-nodes link-local multicast group FF02::1
• all-routers link-local multicast group FF02::2
For more information about configuring IPv6 routing, see the “Implementing Addressing and Basic
Connectivity for IPv6” chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.

37-10 OL-8553-06
Configuring IPv6
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to assign an IPv6 address to a Layer 3 interface
and enable IPv6 routing:
Command Purpose
Step 2 sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default | Select an SDM template that supports IPv4 and IPv6.
routing | vlan}
• default—Set the switch to the default template to balance
system resources.
• routing—Set the switch to the routing template to support
IPv4 and IPv6 routing, including IPv4 policy-based routing.
• vlan—Maximize VLAN configuration on the switch with
no routing supported in hardware.
Step 5 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode after the switch reloads.
interface to configure. The interface can be a physical interface,
a switch virtual interface (SVI), or a Layer 3 EtherChannel.
Step 8 ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix length eui-64 Specify a global IPv6 address with an extended unique identifier
(EUI) in the low-order 64 bits of the IPv6 address. Specify only
the network prefix; the last 64 bits are automatically computed
from the switch MAC address. This enables IPv6 processing on
or the interface.
ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local Specify a link-local address on the interface to be used instead
of the link-local address that is automatically configured when
IPv6 is enabled on the interface. This command enables IPv6
or processing on the interface.
ipv6 enable Automatically configure an IPv6 link-local address on the
interface, and enable the interface for IPv6 processing. The
link-local address can only be used to communicate with nodes
on the same link.
Step 10 ip routing Enable IP routing on the switch.
Step 11 ipv6 unicast-routing Enable forwarding of IPv6 unicast data packets.
Step 13 show ipv6 interface interface-id Verify your entries.
To remove an IPv6 address from an interface, use the no ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix length eui-64
or no ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local interface configuration command. To remove all manually
configured IPv6 addresses from an interface, use the no ipv6 address interface configuration command

OL-8553-06 37-11
Configuring IPv6
without arguments. To disable IPv6 processing on an interface that has not been explicitly configured
with an IPv6 address, use the no ipv6 enable interface configuration command. To globally disable IPv6
routing, use the no ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command.
This example shows how to enable IPv6 with both a link-local address and a global address based on the
IPv6 prefix 2001:0DB8:c18:1::/64. The EUI-64 interface ID is used in the low-order 64 bits of both
addresses. Output from the show ipv6 interface EXEC command shows how the interface ID
(20B:46FF:FE2F:D940) is appended to the link-local prefix FE80::/64 of the interface.
Switch(config)# ipv6 unicast-routing
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001:0DB8:c18:1::/64 eui 64
Switch# show ipv6 interface fastethernet0/11
FastEthernet0/11 is up, line protocol is up
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::20B:46FF:FE2F:D940
Global unicast address(es):
2001:0DB8:c18:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D940, subnet is 2001:0DB8:c18:1::/64 [EUI]
Joined group address(es):
FF02::1
FF02::2
FF02::1:FF2F:D940
MTU is 1500 bytes
ICMP error messages limited to one every 100 milliseconds
ICMP redirects are enabled
ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 1
ND reachable time is 30000 milliseconds
ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds
ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds
ND router advertisements are sent every 200 seconds
ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds
Hosts use stateless autoconfig for addresses.
Configuring Default Router Preference

Router advertisement messages are sent with the default router preference (DRP) configured by the
ipv6 nd router-preference interface configuration command. If no DRP is configured, RAs are sent
with a medium preference.
A DRP is useful when two routers on a link might provide equivalent, but not equal-cost routing, and
policy might dictate that hosts should prefer one of the routers.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a DRP for a router on an interface.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the Layer 3 interface on
which you want to specify the DRP.
Step 3 ipv6 nd router-preference {high | Specify a DRP for the router on the switch interface.
medium | low}
Step 5 show ipv6 interface Verify the configuration.

37-12 OL-8553-06
Configuring IPv6
Use the no ipv6 nd router-preference interface configuration command to disable an IPv6 DRP.
This example shows how to configure a DRP of high for the router on an interface.
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 nd router-preference high
For more information about configuring DRP for IPv6, see the “Implementing IPv6 Addresses and Basic
Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks

Before configuring IPv6 routing, you must select an SDM template that supports IPv4 and IPv6. If not
already configured, use the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default | routing | vlan} [desktop] global
configuration command to configure a template that supports IPv6. When you select a new template, you
must reload the switch by using the reload privileged EXEC command so that the template takes effect.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a Layer 3 interface to support both
IPv4 and IPv6 and to enable IPv6 routing.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip routing Enable routing on the switch.
Step 3 ipv6 unicast-routing Enable forwarding of IPv6 data packets on the switch.
Step 6 ip address ip-address mask [secondary] Specify a primary or secondary IPv4 address for the interface.
Step 7 ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix length eui-64 Specify a global IPv6 address. Specify only the network prefix;
the last 64 bits are automatically computed from the switch
MAC address.
or
Specify a link-local address on the interface to be used instead
ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local of the automatically configured link-local address when IPv6 is
or enabled on the interface.
ipv6 enable Automatically configure an IPv6 link-local address on the

interface, and enable the interface for IPv6 processing. The
link-local address can only be used to communicate with nodes
on the same link.
Step 9 show interface interface-id Verify your entries.
show ip interface interface-id
show ipv6 interface interface-id

OL-8553-06 37-13
Configuring IPv6
To disable IPv4 routing, use the no ip routing global configuration command. To disable IPv6 routing,
use the no ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command. To remove an IPv4 address from an
interface, use the no ip address ip-address mask interface configuration command. To remove an IPv6
address from an interface, use the no ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix length eui-64 or no ipv6 address
ipv6-address link-local interface configuration command. To remove all manually configured IPv6
addresses from an interface, use the no ipv6 address interface configuration command without
arguments. To disable IPv6 processing on an interface that has not been explicitly configured with an
IPv6 address, use the no ipv6 enable interface configuration command.
This example shows how to enable IPv4 and IPv6 routing on an interface.
Switch(config)# ipv6 unicast-routing
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet1/0/11
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001:0DB8:c18:1::/64 eui 64
Configuring DHCP for IPv6 Address Assignment

These sections describe how to configure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6)
address assignment:
• Default DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration, page 37-14
• DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration Guidelines, page 37-14
• Enabling DHCPv6 Server Function, page 37-15
• Enabling DHCPv6 Client Function, page 37-17
Default DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration

By default, no DHCPv6 features are configured on the switch.
DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration Guidelines

When configuring DHCPv6 address assignment, consider these guidelines:
• In the procedures, the specified interface must be one of these Layer 3 interfaces:
– DHCPv6 IPv6 routing must be enabled on a Layer 3 interface.
– SVI: a VLAN interface created by using the interface vlan vlan_id command.
– EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode: a port-channel logical interface created by using
the interface port-channel port-channel-number command.
• Before configuring DHCPv6, you must select a Switch Database Management (SDM) template that
supports IPv4 and IPv6.
• The switch can act as a DHCPv6 client, server, or relay agent. The DHCPv6 client, server, and relay
function are mutually exclusive on an interface.

37-14 OL-8553-06
Configuring IPv6
Enabling DHCPv6 Server Function

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the DHCPv6 server function on an
interface.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 dhcp pool poolname Enter DHCP pool configuration mode, and define the name
for the IPv6 DHCP pool. The pool name can be a symbolic
string (such as Engineering) or an integer (such as 0).
Step 3 address prefix IPv6-prefix lifetime {t1 t1 | infinite} (Optional) Specify an address prefix for address assignment.
This address must be in hexadecimal, using 16-bit values
between colons.
lifetime t1 t1—Specify a time interval (in seconds) that an
IPv6 address prefix remains in the valid state. The range is 5
to 4294967295 seconds. Specify infinite for no time interval.
Step 4 link-address IPv6-prefix (Optional) Specify a link-address IPv6 prefix.
When an address on the incoming interface or a link-address
in the packet matches the specified IPv6 prefix, the server
uses the configuration information pool.
This address must be in hexadecimal, using 16-bit values
between colons.
Step 5 vendor-specific vendor-id (Optional) Enter vendor-specific configuration mode and
enter a vendor-specific identification number. This number is
the vendor IANA Private Enterprise Number. The range is 1
to 4294967295.
Step 6 suboption number {address IPv6-address | ascii (Optional) Enter a vendor-specific suboption number. The
ASCII-string | hex hex-string} range is 1 to 65535. Enter an IPv6 address, ASCII text, or a
hex string as defined by the suboption parameters.
Step 7 exit Return to DHCP pool configuration mode.
to configure.

OL-8553-06 37-15
Configuring IPv6
Command Purpose
Step 10 ipv6 dhcp server [poolname | automatic] Enable DHCPv6 server function on an interface.
[rapid-commit] [preference value] [allow-hint]
• poolname—(Optional) User-defined name for the IPv6
DHCP pool. The pool name can be a symbolic string
(such as Engineering) or an integer (such as 0).
• automatic—(Optional) Enables the system to
automatically determine which pool to use when
allocating addresses for a client.
• rapid-commit—(Optional) Allow two-message
exchange method.
• preference value—(Optional) The preference value
carried in the preference option in the advertise message
sent by the server. The range is from 0 to 255. The
preference value default is 0.
• allow-hint—(Optional) Specifies whether the server
should consider client suggestions in the SOLICIT
message. By default, the server ignores client hints.
Step 12 show ipv6 dhcp pool Verify DHCPv6 pool configuration.
or
show ipv6 dhcp interface Verify that the DHCPv6 server function is enabled on an
interface.
To delete a DHCPv6 pool, use the no ipv6 dhcp pool poolname global configuration command. Use the
no form of the DHCP pool configuration mode commands to change the DHCPv6 pool characteristics.
To disable the DHCPv6 server function on an interface, use the no ipv6 dhcp server interface
This example shows how to configure a pool called engineering with an IPv6 address prefix:
Switch(config)# ipv6 dhcp pool engineering
Switch(config-dhcpv6)#address prefix 2001:1000::0/64
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# end
This example shows how to configure a pool called testgroup with three link-addresses and an IPv6
address prefix:
Switch(config)# ipv6 dhcp pool testgroup
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# link-address 2001:1001::0/64
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# address prefix 2001:1003::0/64
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# end
This example shows how to configure a pool called 350 with vendor-specific options:
Switch(config)# ipv6 dhcp pool 350
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# address prefix 2001:1005::0/48
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# vendor-specific 9

37-16 OL-8553-06
Configuring IPv6
Switch(config-dhcpv6-vs)# suboption 1 address 1000:235D::1

Switch(config-dhcpv6-vs)# suboption 2 ascii "IP-Phone"
Switch(config-dhcpv6-vs)# end
Enabling DHCPv6 Client Function

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable DHCPv6 client function on an
interface.
Command Purpose
to configure.
Step 3 ipv6 address dhcp [rapid-commit] Enable the interface to acquire an IPv6 address from the
DHCPv6 server.
rapid-commit—(Optional) Allow two-message exchange
method for address assignment.
Step 4 ipv6 dhcp client request [vendor-specific] (Optional) Enable the interface to request the vendor-specific
option.
Step 6 show ipv6 dhcp interface Verify that the DHCPv6 client is enabled on an interface.
To disable the DHCPv6 client function, use the no ipv6 address dhcp interface configuration command.
To remove the DHCPv6 client request, use the no ipv6 address dhcp client request interface
This example shows how to acquire an IPv6 address and to enable the rapid-commit option:
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address dhcp rapid-commit
This document describes only the DHCPv6 address assignment. For more information about configuring
the DHCPv6 client, server, or relay agent functions, see the “Implementing DHCP for IPv6” chapter in
the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
Configuring IPv6 ICMP Rate Limiting

ICMP rate limiting is enabled by default with a default interval between error messages of 100
milliseconds and a bucket size (maximum number of tokens to be stored in a bucket) of 10.

OL-8553-06 37-17
Configuring IPv6
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the ICMP rate-limiting parameters:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 icmp error-interval interval [bucketsize] Configure the interval and bucket size for IPv6 ICMP error
messages:
• interval—The interval (in milliseconds) between tokens
being added to the bucket. The range is from 0 to
2147483647 milliseconds.
• bucketsize—(Optional) The maximum number of tokens
stored in the bucket. The range is from 1 to 200.
Step 4 show ipv6 interface [interface-id] Verify your entries.
To return to the default configuration, use the no ipv6 icmp error-interval global configuration
command.
This example shows how to configure an IPv6 ICMP error message interval of 50 milliseconds and a
bucket size of 20 tokens.
Switch(config)#ipv6 icmp error-interval 50 20
Configuring CEF for IPv6

Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) is a Layer 3 IP switching technology to improve network performance.
IPv6 CEF is disabled by default but are automatically enabled when you configure IPv6 routing.
To route IPv6 unicast packets, you must first globally configure IPv6 unicast packet forwarding by using
the ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command. You must configure an IPv6 address and IPv6
processing on an interface by using the ipv6 address interface configuration command.
To disable IPv6 CEF, use the no ipv6 cef global configuration command. To reenable IPv6 CEF or dCEF
if it has been disabled, use the ipv6 cef global configuration command. You can verify the IPv6 state by
entering the show ipv6 cef privileged EXEC command.
For more information about configuring CEF and dCEF, see the “Implementing IPv6 Addressing and
Basic Connectivity” chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
Configuring Static Routes for IPv6

Before configuring a static IPv6 route, you must enable routing by using the ip routing global
configuration command, enable the forwarding of IPv6 packets by using the ipv6 unicast-routing global
configuration command, and enable IPv6 on at least one Layer 3 interface by configuring an IPv6
address on the interface.

37-18 OL-8553-06
Configuring IPv6
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure an IPv6 static route:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix length Configure a static IPv6 route.
{ipv6-address | interface-id [ipv6-address]}
• ipv6-prefix—The IPv6 network that is the destination of the
[administrative distance]
static route. It can also be a hostname when static host routes are
configured.
• /prefix length—The length of the IPv6 prefix. A decimal value
that shows how many of the high-order contiguous bits of the
address comprise the prefix (the network portion of the address).
A slash mark must precede the decimal value.
• ipv6-address—The IPv6 address of the next hop that can be used
to reach the specified network. The IPv6 address of the next hop
need not be directly connected; recursion is done to find the
IPv6 address of the directly connected next hop. The address
must be specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between
colons.
• interface-id—Specify direct static routes from point-to-point
and broadcast interfaces. With point-to-point interfaces, there is
no need to specify the IPv6 address of the next hop. With
broadcast interfaces, you should always specify the IPv6
address of the next hop, or ensure that the specified prefix is
assigned to the link, specifying a link-local address as the next
hop. You can optionally specify the IPv6 address of the next hop
to which packets are sent.
Note You must specify an interface-id when using a link-local
address as the next hop (the link-local next hop must also be
an adjacent router).
• administrative distance—(Optional) An administrative distance.

The range is 1 to 254; the default value is 1, which gives static
routes precedence over any other type of route except connected
routes. To configure a floating static route, use an administrative
distance greater than that of the dynamic routing protocol.

OL-8553-06 37-19
Configuring IPv6
Command Purpose
Step 4 show ipv6 static [ipv6-address | Verify your entries by displaying the contents of the IPv6 routing
ipv6-prefix/prefix length] [interface table.
interface-id] [recursive] [detail]
• interface interface-id—(Optional) Display only those static
routes with the specified interface as an egress interface.
or • recursive—(Optional) Display only recursive static routes. The
recursive keyword is mutually exclusive with the interface
keyword, but it can be used with or without the IPv6 prefix
show ipv6 route static [updated] included in the command syntax.
• detail—(Optional) Display this additional information:
– For valid recursive routes, the output path set, and
maximum resolution depth.
– For invalid routes, the reason why the route is not valid.
To remove a configured static route, use the no ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix length {ipv6-address |
interface-id [ipv6-address]} [administrative distance] global configuration command.
This example shows how to configure a floating static route with an administrative distance of 130 to an
interface:
Switch(config)# ipv6 route 2001:0DB8::/32 gigabitethernet0/1 130
For more information about configuring static IPv6 routing, see the “Implementing Static Routes for
IPv6” chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
Configuring RIP for IPv6

Before configuring the switch to run IPv6 RIP, you must enable routing by using the ip routing global
configuration command, enable the forwarding of IPv6 packets by using the ipv6 unicast-routing global
configuration command, and enable IPv6 on any Layer 3 interfaces on which IPv6 RIP is to be enabled.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these required and optional steps to configure IPv6 RIP:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 router rip name Configure an IPv6 RIP routing process, and enter router
configuration mode for the process.
Step 3 maximum-paths number-paths (Optional) Define the maximum number of equal-cost routes
that IPv6 RIP can support. The range is from 1 to 64, and the
default is 4 routes.
Step 6 ipv6 rip name enable Enable the specified IPv6 RIP routing process on the interface.

37-20 OL-8553-06
Configuring IPv6
Command Purpose
Step 7 ipv6 rip name default-information {only | (Optional) Originate the IPv6 default route (::/0) into the RIP
originate} routing process updates sent from the specified interface.
Note To avoid routing loops after the IPv6 default route (::/0)
is originated from any interface, the routing process
ignores all default routes received on any interface.
• only—Select to originate the default route, but suppress all

other routes in the updates sent on this interface.
• originate—Select to originate the default route in addition
to all other routes in the updates sent on this interface.
Step 9 show ipv6 rip [name] [interface interface-id] Display information about IPv6 RIP processes.
[database] [next-hops]
or
show ipv6 route rip [updated] Display the contents of the IPv6 routing table.
To disable a RIP routing process, use the no ipv6 router rip name global configuration command. To
disable the RIP routing process for an interface, use the no ipv6 rip name interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to enable the RIP routing process cisco with a maximum of eight equal-cost
routes and to enable it on an interface:
Switch(config)# ipv6 router rip cisco
Switch(config-router)# maximum-paths 8
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet2/0/11
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 rip cisco enable
For more information about configuring RIP routing for IPv6, see the “Implementing RIP for IPv6”
chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com
Configuring OSPF for IPv6

You can customize OSPF for IPv6 for your network. However, the defaults for OSPF in IPv6 are set to
meet the requirements of most customers and features.
Follow these guidelines:
• The switch must be running the IP services image.
• Be careful when changing the defaults for IPv6 commands. Changing the defaults might adversely
affect OSPF for the IPv6 network.
• Before you enable IPv6 OSPF on an interface, you must enable routing by using the ip routing
global configuration command, enable the forwarding of IPv6 packets by using the ipv6
unicast-routing global configuration command, and enable IPv6 on Layer 3 interfaces on which
you are enabling IPv6 OSPF.

OL-8553-06 37-21
Configuring IPv6
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these required and optional steps to configure IPv6 OSPF:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 router ospf process-id Enable OSPF router configuration mode for the process. The
process ID is the number administratively assigned when
enabling the OSPF for IPv6 routing process. It is locally
assigned and can be a positive integer from 1 to 65535.
Step 3 area area-id range {ipv6-prefix/prefix length} (Optional) Consolidate and summarize routes at an area
[advertise | not-advertise] [cost cost] boundary.
• area-id—Identifier of the area about which routes are to be
summarized. It can be specified as either a decimal value or
as an IPv6 prefix.
• ipv6-prefix/prefix length—The destination IPv6 network and
a decimal value that shows how many of the high-order
contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix (the
network portion of the address). A slash mark (/) must
precede the decimal value.
• advertise—(Optional) Set the address range status to
advertise and to generate a Type 3 summary link-state
advertisement (LSA).
• not-advertise—(Optional) Set the address range status to
DoNotAdvertise. The Type 3 summary LSA is suppressed,
and component networks remain hidden from other
networks.
• cost cost—(Optional) Metric or cost for this summary route,
which is used during OSPF SPF calculation to determine the
shortest paths to the destination. The value can be 0 to
16777215.
Step 4 maximum paths number-paths (Optional) Define the maximum number of equal-cost routes to
the same destination that IPv6 OSPF should enter in the routing
table. The range is from 1 to 64, and the default is 16.
Step 7 ipv6 ospf process-id area area-id [instance Enable OSPF for IPv6 on the interface.
instance-id]
instance instance-id—(Optional) Instance identifier.
Step 9 show ipv6 ospf [process-id] [area-id] interface Display information about OSPF interfaces.
[interface-id]
or
show ipv6 ospf [process-id] [area-id] Display general information about OSPF routing processes.

37-22 OL-8553-06
Configuring IPv6
To disable an OSPF routing process, use the no ipv6 router ospf process-id global configuration
command. To disable the OSPF routing process for an interface, use the no ipv6 ospf process-id area
area-id interface configuration command.
For more information about configuring OSPF routing for IPv6, see the “Implementing OSPF for IPv6”
chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
Configuring EIGRP for IPv6

By default, EIGRP for IPv6 is disabled. You can configure EIGRP for IPv6 on an interface. After
configuring the router and the interface for EIGRP, enter the no shutdown privileged EXEC command
to start EIGRP.
Note If EIGRP for IPv6 is not in shutdown mode, EIGRP might start running before you enter the EIRGP
router-mode commands to configure the router and the interface.
The switch must be running the IP services image.

To set an explicit router ID, use the show ipv6 eigrp command to see the configured router IDs, and then
use the router-id command.
As with EIGRP IPv4, you can use EIGRPv6 to specify your EIGRP IPv4 interfaces and to select a subset
of those as passive interfaces. Use the passive-interface default command to make all interfaces
passive, and then use the no passive-interface command on selected interfaces to make them active.
EIGRP IPv6 does not need to be configured on a passive interface.
For more configuration procedures, see the “Implementing EIGRP for IPv6” chapter in the Cisco IOS
Configuring HSRP for IPv6

Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for IPv6 provides routing redundancy for routing IPv6 traffic not
dependent on the availability of any single router.
When HSRP for IPv6 is enabled on a switch, IPv6 hosts learn of available IPv6 routers through IPv6
neighbor discovery router advertisement messages. An HSRP IPv6 group has a virtual MAC address that
is derived from the HSRP group number. The group has a virtual IPv6 link-local address that is, by
default, derived from the HSRP virtual MAC address. Periodic messages are sent for the HSRP virtual
IPv6 link-local address when the HSRP group is active.
The switch must be running the IP services image.
When configuring HSRP for IPv6, you must enable HSRP version 2 (HSRPv2) on the interface.
For configuration guidelines when configuring HSRP for IPv6 with HSRPv1 and HSRPv2, see the
“HSRP Configuration Guidelines” section on page 40-5 and the “Troubleshooting HSRP” section on
page 40-12.
For more information about HSRP for IPv6 and HSRPv2, see the Chapter 40, “Configuring HSRP.”
Note Before configuring an HSRP for IPv6 group, you must enable the forwarding of IPv6 packets by using
the ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command and enable IPv6 on the interface on which you
will configure an HSRP for IPv6 group.

OL-8553-06 37-23
Configuring IPv6
Enabling HSRP Version 2

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable HSRP version 2 on a Layer 3 interface.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the
Layer 3 interface on which you want to specify the
standby version.
Step 3 standby version {1 | 2} Enter 2 to change the HSRP version. The default is 1.
Step 5 show standby Verify the configuration.
Enabling an HSRP Group for IPv6

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create or enable HSRP for IPv6 on a Layer 3
interface.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the Layer 3
interface on which you want to enable HSRP for IPv6.
Step 3 standby [group-number] ipv6 {link-local-address Create (or enable) the HSRP for IPv6 group.
| autoconfig}
• (Optional) group-number—The group number on the
interface for which HSRP is being enabled. The range is 0
to 4095. The default is 0. If there is only one HSRP group,
you do not need to enter a group number.
• Enter the link-local address of the Hot Standby router
interface, or enable the link-local address to be generated
automatically from the link-local prefix and a modified
EUI-64 format interface identifier, where the EUI-64
interface identifier is created from the relevant HSRP
virtual MAC address.

37-24 OL-8553-06
Displaying IPv6
Command Purpose
Step 4 standby [group-number] preempt [delay Configure the router to preempt, which means that when the
{minimum seconds | reload seconds | sync local router has a higher priority than the active router, it
seconds}] assumes control as the active router.
• (Optional) group-number—The group number to which the
command applies.
• (Optional) delay—Set to cause the local router to postpone
taking over the active role for the shown number of seconds.
The range is 0 to 3600 (1 hour). The default is 0 (no delay
before taking over).
• (Optional) reload—Set the preemption delay, in seconds,
after a reload. The delay period applies only to the first
interface-up event after the router reloads.
• (Optional) sync—Set the maximum synchronization
period, in seconds, for IP redundancy clients.
Use the no form of the command to restore the default values.
Step 5 standby [group-number] priority priority Set a priority value used in choosing the active router. The
range is 1 to 255; the default priority is 100. The highest number
represents the highest priority.
Step 7 show standby [interface-id [group-number]] Verify the configuration.
Use the no standby [group-number] ipv6 interface configuration command to disable HSRP for IPv6.
This example shows how to activate HSRP for IPv6 for group 1 on a port. The IP address used by the
hot standby group is learned by using HSRP for IPv6.
Note This procedure is the minimum number of steps required to enable HSRP for IPv6. Other configurations
are optional.

Switch(config-if)# standby 1 ipv6 autoconfig
Switch# show standby
For more information about configuring HSRP for IPv6, see the “Configuring First Hop Redundancy
Protocols in IPv6” chapter in the Cisco IOS IPv6 Configuration Library on Cisco.com.
Displaying IPv6
For complete syntax and usage information on these commands, see the Cisco IOS command reference
publications.

OL-8553-06 37-25
Displaying IPv6
Table 37-2 shows the privileged EXEC commands for monitoring IPv6 on the switch.
Table 37-2 Commands for Monitoring IPv6
Command Purpose
show ipv6 access-list Display a summary of access lists.
show ipv6 cef Display Cisco Express Forwarding for IPv6.
show ipv6 interface interface-id Display IPv6 interface status and configuration.
show ipv6 mtu Display IPv6 MTU per destination cache.
show ipv6 neighbors Display IPv6 neighbor cache entries.
show ipv6 ospf Display IPv6 OSPF information.
show ipv6 prefix-list Display a list of IPv6 prefix lists.
show ipv6 protocols Display IPv6 routing protocols on the switch.
show ipv6 rip Display IPv6 RIP routing protocol status.
show ipv6 route Display the IPv6 route table entries.
show ipv6 routers Display the local IPv6 routers.
show ipv6 static Display IPv6 static routes.
show ipv6 traffic Display IPv6 traffic statistics.
Table 37-3 shows the privileged EXEC command for displaying EIGRP IPv6 information.
Table 37-3 Commands for Displaying EIGRP IPv6 Information
Command Purpose
show ipv6 eigrp [as-number] interface Displays information about interfaces configured for EIGRP IPv6.
show ipv6 eigrp [as-number] neighbor Displays the neighbors discovered by EIGRP IPv6.
show ipv6 eigrp [as-number] traffic Displays the number of EIGRP IPv6 packets sent and received.
show ipv6 eigrp topology [as-number | ipv6-address] Displays EIGRP entries in the IPv6 topology table.
[active | all-links | detail-links | pending | summary |
zero-successors]
Table 37-4 shows the privileged EXEC commands for displaying information about IPv4 and IPv6 address
types.
Table 37-4 Commands for Displaying IPv4 and IPv6 Address Types
Command Purpose
show ip http server history Display the previous 20 connections to the HTTP server, including the IP
address accessed and the time when the connection was closed.
show ip http server connection Display the current connections to the HTTP server, including the local and
remote IP addresses being accessed.
show ip http client connection Display the configuration values for HTTP client connections to HTTP
servers.
show ip http client history Display a list of the last 20 requests made by the HTTP client to the server.

37-26 OL-8553-06
Displaying IPv6
This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 interface privileged EXEC command:
Switch# show ipv6 interface
Vlan1 is up, line protocol is up
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::20B:46FF:FE2F:D940
Global unicast address(es):
3FFE:C000:0:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D940, subnet is 3FFE:C000:0:1::/64 [EUI]
Joined group address(es):
FF02::1
FF02::2
FF02::1:FF2F:D940
MTU is 1500 bytes
ICMP error messages limited to one every 100 milliseconds
ICMP redirects are enabled
ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 1
ND reachable time is 30000 milliseconds
ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds
ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds
ND router advertisements are sent every 200 seconds
ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds
<output truncated>
This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 cef privileged EXEC command:
Switch# show ipv6 cef
::/0
nexthop 3FFE:C000:0:7::777 Vlan7
3FFE:C000:0:1::/64
attached to Vlan1
3FFE:C000:0:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D940/128
receive
3FFE:C000:0:7::/64
attached to Vlan7
3FFE:C000:0:7::777/128
attached to Vlan7
3FFE:C000:0:7:20B:46FF:FE2F:D97F/128
receive
3FFE:C000:111:1::/64
attached to FastEthernet1/0/11
3FFE:C000:111:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D945/128
receive
3FFE:C000:168:1::/64
attached to FastEthernet2/0/43
3FFE:C000:168:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D94B/128
receive
3FFE:C000:16A:1::/64
attached to Loopback10
3FFE:C000:16A:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D900/128
receive
<output truncated>
This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 protocols privileged EXEC command:
Switch# show ipv6 protocols
IPv6 Routing Protocol is “connected”
IPv6 Routing Protocol is “static”
IPv6 Routing Protocol is “rip fer”
Interfaces:
Vlan6
FastEthernet0/4
FastEthernet0/11
FastEthernet0/12
Redistribution:
None

OL-8553-06 37-27
Displaying IPv6
This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 rip privileged EXEC command:
Switch# show ipv6 rip
RIP process "fer", port 521, multicast-group FF02::9, pid 190
Administrative distance is 120. Maximum paths is 16
Updates every 30 seconds, expire after 180
Holddown lasts 0 seconds, garbage collect after 120
Split horizon is on; poison reverse is off
Default routes are not generated
Periodic updates 9040, trigger updates 60
Interfaces:
Vlan6
FastEthernet2/0/4
FastEthernet2/0/11
FastEthernet1/0/12
Redistribution:
None
This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 static privileged EXEC command:
Switch# show ipv6 static
IPv6 Static routes
Code: * - installed in RIB
* ::/0 via nexthop 3FFE:C000:0:7::777, distance 1
This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 neighbor privileged EXEC command:
Switch# show ipv6 neighbors
IPv6 Address Age Link-layer Addr State Interface
3FFE:C000:0:7::777 - 0007.0007.0007 REACH Vl7
3FFE:C101:113:1::33 - 0000.0000.0033 REACH Fa1/0/13
This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 route privileged EXEC command:
Switch# show ipv6 route
IPv6 Routing Table - Default - 1 entries
Codes: C - Connected, L - Local, S - Static, U - Per-user Static route
L FF00::/8 [0/0]
via Null0, receive
This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 traffic privileged EXEC command.
Switch# show ipv6 traffic
IPv6 statistics:
Rcvd: 1 total, 1 local destination
0 source-routed, 0 truncated
0 format errors, 0 hop count exceeded
0 bad header, 0 unknown option, 0 bad source
0 unknown protocol, 0 not a router
0 fragments, 0 total reassembled
0 reassembly timeouts, 0 reassembly failures
Sent: 36861 generated, 0 forwarded
0 fragmented into 0 fragments, 0 failed
0 encapsulation failed, 0 no route, 0 too big
0 RPF drops, 0 RPF suppressed drops
Mcast: 1 received, 36861 sent
ICMP statistics:
Rcvd: 1 input, 0 checksum errors, 0 too short
0 unknown info type, 0 unknown error type
unreach: 0 routing, 0 admin, 0 neighbor, 0 address, 0 port
parameter: 0 error, 0 header, 0 option
0 hopcount expired, 0 reassembly timeout,0 too big
0 echo request, 0 echo reply

37-28 OL-8553-06
Displaying IPv6
0 group query, 0 group report, 0 group reduce

1 router solicit, 0 router advert, 0 redirects
0 neighbor solicit, 0 neighbor advert
Sent: 10112 output, 0 rate-limited
unreach: 0 routing, 0 admin, 0 neighbor, 0 address, 0 port
parameter: 0 error, 0 header, 0 option
0 hopcount expired, 0 reassembly timeout,0 too big
0 echo request, 0 echo reply
0 group query, 0 group report, 0 group reduce
0 router solicit, 9944 router advert, 0 redirects
84 neighbor solicit, 84 neighbor advert
UDP statistics:
Rcvd: 0 input, 0 checksum errors, 0 length errors
0 no port, 0 dropped
Sent: 26749 output
TCP statistics:
Rcvd: 0 input, 0 checksum errors
Sent: 0 output, 0 retransmitted

OL-8553-06 37-29
Displaying IPv6

37-30 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 38
Configuring IPv6 MLD Snooping
You can use Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping to enable efficient distribution of IP
version 6 (IPv6) multicast data to clients and routers in a switched network on the Catalyst 3560 switch.
Note To use IPv6, you must configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template
on the switch. You select the template by entering the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 {default} global
For related information, see these chapters:

• For more information about SDM templates, see Chapter 8, “Configuring SDM Templates.”
• For information about IPv6 on the switch, see Chapter 37, “Configuring IPv6 Unicast Routing.”
reference for this release or the Cisco IOS documentation referenced in the procedures.
This chapter includes these sections:

• “Understanding MLD Snooping” section on page 38-1
• “Configuring IPv6 MLD Snooping” section on page 38-5
• “Displaying MLD Snooping Information” section on page 38-11
Understanding MLD Snooping

In IP version 4 (IPv4), Layer 2 switches can use Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping
to limit the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring Layer 2 interfaces so that multicast
traffic is forwarded to only those interfaces associated with IP multicast devices. In IPv6, MLD snooping
performs a similar function. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is selectively forwarded to a list
of ports that want to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all ports in a VLAN. This list is
constructed by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.
MLD is a protocol used by IPv6 multicast routers to discover the presence of multicast listeners (nodes
wishing to receive IPv6 multicast packets) on its directly attached links and to discover which multicast
packets are of interest to neighboring nodes. MLD is derived from IGMP; MLD version 1 (MLDv1) is
equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLD version 2 (MLDv2) is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD is a subprotocol of
Internet Control Message Protocol version 6 (ICMPv6), and MLD messages are a subset of ICMPv6
messages, identified in IPv6 packets by a preceding Next Header value of 58.

OL-8553-06 38-1
Chapter 38 Configuring IPv6 MLD Snooping
The switch supports two versions of MLD snooping:

• MLDv1 snooping detects MLDv1 control packets and sets up traffic bridging based on IPv6
destination multicast addresses.
• MLDv2 basic snooping (MBSS) uses MLDv2 control packets to set up traffic forwarding based on
IPv6 destination multicast addresses.
The switch can snoop on both MLDv1 and MLDv2 protocol packets and bridge IPv6 multicast data
based on destination IPv6 multicast addresses.
Note The switch does not support MLDv2 enhanced snooping (MESS), which sets up IPv6 source and
destination multicast address-based forwarding.
MLD snooping can be enabled or disabled globally or per VLAN. When MLD snooping is enabled, a
per-VLAN IPv6 multicast MAC address table is constructed in software and a per-VLAN IPv6 multicast
address table is constructed in software and hardware. The switch then performs IPv6 multicast-address
based bridging in hardware.
These sections describe some parameters of IPv6 MLD snooping:
• MLD Messages, page 38-2
• MLD Queries, page 38-2
• Multicast Client Aging Robustness, page 38-3
• Multicast Router Discovery, page 38-3
• MLD Reports, page 38-4
• MLD Done Messages and Immediate-Leave, page 38-4
• Topology Change Notification Processing, page 38-4
MLD Messages
MLDv1 supports three types of messages:
• Listener Queries are the equivalent of IGMPv2 queries and are either General Queries or
Multicast-Address-Specific Queries (MASQs).
• Multicast Listener Reports are the equivalent of IGMPv2 reports.
• Multicast Listener Done messages are the equivalent of IGMPv2 leave messages.
MLDv2 supports MLDv2 queries and reports, as well as MLDv1 Report and Done messages.
Message timers and state transitions resulting from messages being sent or received are the same as those
of IGMPv2 messages. MLD messages that do not have valid link-local IPv6 source addresses are ignored
by MLD routers and switches.
MLD Queries
The switch sends out MLD queries, constructs an IPv6 multicast address database, and generates MLD
group-specific and MLD group-and-source-specific queries in response to MLD Done messages. The
switch also supports report suppression, report proxying, Immediate-Leave functionality, and static IPv6
multicast MAC-address configuration.

38-2 OL-8553-06
When MLD snooping is disabled, all MLD queries are flooded in the ingress VLAN.
When MLD snooping is enabled, received MLD queries are flooded in the ingress VLAN, and a copy of
the query is sent to the CPU for processing. From the received query, MLD snooping builds the IPv6
multicast address database. It detects multicast router ports, maintains timers, sets report response time,
learns the querier IP source address for the VLAN, learns the querier port in the VLAN, and maintains
multicast-address aging.
Note When the IPv6 multicast router is a Catalyst 6500 switch and you are using extended VLANs (in the
range 1006 to 4094), IPv6 MLD snooping must be enabled on the extended VLAN on the Catalyst 6500
switch in order for the Catalyst 3560 switch to receive queries on the VLAN. For normal-range VLANs
(1 to 1005), it is not necessary to enable IPv6 MLD snooping on the VLAN on the Catalyst 6500 switch.
When a group exists in the MLD snooping database, the switch responds to a group-specific query by
sending an MLDv1 report. When the group is unknown, the group-specific query is flooded to the
ingress VLAN.
When a host wants to leave a multicast group, it can send out an MLD Done message (equivalent to
IGMP Leave message). When the switch receives an MLDv1 Done message, if Immediate- Leave is not
enabled, the switch sends an MASQ to the port from which the message was received to determine if
other devices connected to the port should remain in the multicast group.
Multicast Client Aging Robustness

You can configure port membership removal from addresses based on the number of queries. A port is
removed from membership to an address only when there are no reports to the address on the port for
the configured number of queries. The default number is 2.
Multicast Router Discovery

Like IGMP snooping, MLD snooping performs multicast router discovery, with these characteristics:
• Ports configured by a user never age out.
• Dynamic port learning results from MLDv1 snooping queries and IPv6 PIMv2 packets.
• If there are multiple routers on the same Layer 2 interface, MLD snooping tracks a single multicast
router on the port (the router that most recently sent a router control packet).
• Dynamic multicast router port aging is based on a default timer of 5 minutes; the multicast router is
deleted from the router port list if no control packet is received on the port for 5 minutes.
• IPv6 multicast router discovery only takes place when MLD snooping is enabled on the switch.
• Received IPv6 multicast router control packets are always flooded to the ingress VLAN, whether or
not MLD snooping is enabled on the switch.
• After the discovery of the first IPv6 multicast router port, unknown IPv6 multicast data is forwarded
only to the discovered router ports (before that time, all IPv6 multicast data is flooded to the ingress
VLAN).

OL-8553-06 38-3
MLD Reports
The processing of MLDv1 join messages is essentially the same as with IGMPv2. When no IPv6
multicast routers are detected in a VLAN, reports are not processed or forwarded from the switch. When
IPv6 multicast routers are detected and an MLDv1 report is received, an IPv6 multicast group address
and an IPv6 multicast MAC address are entered in the VLAN MLD database. Then all IPv6 multicast
traffic to the group within the VLAN is forwarded using this address. When MLD snooping is disabled,
reports are flooded in the ingress VLAN.
When MLD snooping is enabled, MLD report suppression, called listener message suppression, is
automatically enabled. With report suppression, the switch forwards the first MLDv1 report received by
a group to IPv6 multicast routers; subsequent reports for the group are not sent to the routers. When
MLD snooping is disabled, report suppression is disabled, and all MLDv1 reports are flooded to the
ingress VLAN.
The switch also supports MLDv1 proxy reporting. When an MLDv1 MASQ is received, the switch
responds with MLDv1 reports for the address on which the query arrived if the group exists in the switch
on another port and if the port on which the query arrived is not the last member port for the address.
MLD Done Messages and Immediate-Leave

When the Immediate-Leave feature is enabled and a host sends an MLDv1 Done message (equivalent to
an IGMP leave message), the port on which the Done message was received is immediately deleted from
the group.You enable Immediate-Leave on VLANs and (as with IGMP snooping), you should only use
the feature on VLANs where a single host is connected to the port. If the port was the last member of a
group, the group is also deleted, and the leave information is forwarded to the detected IPv6 multicast
routers.
When Immediate Leave is not enabled in a VLAN (which would be the case when there are multiple
clients for a group on the same port) and a Done message is received on a port, an MASQ is generated
on that port. The user can control when a port membership is removed for an existing address in terms
of the number of MASQs. A port is removed from membership to an address when there are no MLDv1
reports to the address on the port for the configured number of queries.
The number of MASQs generated is configured by using the ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query
count global configuration command. The default number is 2.
The MASQ is sent to the IPv6 multicast address for which the Done message was sent. If there are no
reports sent to the IPv6 multicast address specified in the MASQ during the switch maximum response
time, the port on which the MASQ was sent is deleted from the IPv6 multicast address database. The
maximum response time is the time configured by using the ipv6 mld snooping
last-listener-query-interval global configuration command. If the deleted port is the last member of the
multicast address, the multicast address is also deleted, and the switch sends the address leave
information to all detected multicast routers.
Topology Change Notification Processing

When topology change notification (TCN) solicitation is enabled by using the ipv6 mld snooping tcn
query solicit global configuration command, MLDv1 snooping sets the VLAN to flood all IPv6
multicast traffic with a configured number of MLDv1 queries before it begins sending multicast data
only to selected ports. You set this value by using the ipv6 mld snooping tcn flood query count global

38-4 OL-8553-06
configuration command. The default is to send two queries. The switch also generates MLDv1 global
Done messages with valid link-local IPv6 source addresses when the switch becomes the STP root in the
VLAN or when it is configured by the user. This is same as done in IGMP snooping.

These sections describe how to configure IPv6 MLD snooping:
• Default MLD Snooping Configuration, page 38-5
• MLD Snooping Configuration Guidelines, page 38-6
• Enabling or Disabling MLD Snooping, page 38-6
• Configuring a Static Multicast Group, page 38-7
• Configuring a Multicast Router Port, page 38-8
• Enabling MLD Immediate Leave, page 38-8
• Configuring MLD Snooping Queries, page 38-9
• Disabling MLD Listener Message Suppression, page 38-10
Default MLD Snooping Configuration

Table 38-1 shows the default MLD snooping configuration.
Table 38-1 Default MLD Snooping Configuration

MLD snooping (Global) Disabled.
MLD snooping (per VLAN) Enabled. MLD snooping must be globally enabled for VLAN
MLD snooping to take place.
IPv6 Multicast addresses None configured.
IPv6 Multicast router ports None configured.
MLD snooping Immediate Leave Disabled.
MLD snooping robustness variable Global: 2; Per VLAN: 0.
Note The VLAN value overrides the global setting. When the
VLAN value is 0, the VLAN uses the global count.
Last listener query count Global: 2; Per VLAN: 0.
VLAN value is 0, the VLAN uses the global count.
Last listener query interval Global: 1000 (1 second); VLAN: 0.
VLAN value is 0, the VLAN uses the global interval.
TCN query solicit Disabled.
TCN query count 2.
MLD listener suppression Enabled.

OL-8553-06 38-5
MLD Snooping Configuration Guidelines

When configuring MLD snooping, consider these guidelines:
• You can configure MLD snooping characteristics at any time, but you must globally enable MLD
snooping by using the ipv6 mld snooping global configuration command for the configuration to
take effect.
• When the IPv6 multicast router is a Catalyst 6500 switch and you are using extended VLANs (in the
range 1006 to 4094), IPv6 MLD snooping must be enabled on the extended VLAN on the Catalyst
6500 switch in order for the Catalyst 3560 switch to receive queries on the VLAN. For normal-range
VLANs (1 to 1005), it is not necessary to enable IPv6 MLD snooping on the VLAN on the Catalyst
6500 switch.
• MLD snooping and IGMP snooping act independently of each other. You can enable both features
at the same time on the switch.
• The maximum number of multicast entries allowed on the switch is determined by the configured
SDM template.
• The maximum number of address entries allowed for the switch is 1000.
Enabling or Disabling MLD Snooping

By default, IPv6 MLD snooping is globally disabled on the switch and enabled on all VLANs. When
MLD snooping is globally disabled, it is also disabled on all VLANs. When you globally enable MLD
snooping, the VLAN configuration overrides the global configuration. That is, MLD snooping is enabled
only on VLAN interfaces in the default state (enabled).
You can enable and disable MLD snooping on a per-VLAN basis or for a range of VLANs, but if you
globally disable MLD snooping, it is disabled in all VLANs. If global snooping is enabled, you can
enable or disable VLAN snooping.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to globally enable MLD snooping on the switch:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 mld snooping Globally enable MLD snooping on the switch.
To globally disable MLD snooping on the switch, use the no ipv6 mld snooping global configuration
command.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable MLD snooping on a VLAN.
Note When the IPv6 multicast router is a Catalyst 6500 switch and you are using extended VLANs (in the
range 1006 to 4094), IPv6 MLD snooping must be enabled on the extended VLAN on the Catalyst 6500
switch in order for the Catalyst 3560 switch to receive queries on the VLAN. For normal-range VLANs
(1 to 1005), it is not necessary to enable IPv6 MLD snooping on the VLAN on the Catalyst 6500 switch.

38-6 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 mld snooping Globally enable MLD snooping on the switch.
Step 3 ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id Enable MLD snooping on the VLAN.The VLAN ID range is 1 to
1001 and 1006 to 4094.
Note MLD snooping must be globally enabled for VLAN snooping
to be enabled.
To disable MLD snooping on a VLAN interface, use the no ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id global
configuration command for the specified VLAN number.
Configuring a Static Multicast Group

Hosts or Layer 2 ports normally join multicast groups dynamically, but you can also statically configure
an IPv6 multicast address and member ports for a VLAN.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to add a Layer 2 port as a member of a multicast
group:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id static Statically configure a multicast group with a Layer 2 port as a
ipv6_multicast_address interface interface-id member of a multicast group:
• vlan-id is the multicast group VLAN ID. The VLAN ID
range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
• ipv6_multicast_address is the 128-bit group IPv6 address.
The address must be in the form specified in RFC 2373.
• interface-id is the member port. It can be a physical
interface or a port channel (1 to 48).
Step 4 show ipv6 mld snooping multicast-address user Verify the static member port and the IPv6 address.
or
show ipv6 mld snooping multicast-address vlan
vlan-id user
To remove a Layer 2 port from the multicast group, use the no ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id static
mac-address interface interface-id global configuration command. If all member ports are removed
from a group, the group is deleted.
This example shows how to statically configure an IPv6 multicast group:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 2 static FF12::3 interface gigabitethernet0/1

OL-8553-06 38-7
Switch(config)# end
Configuring a Multicast Router Port

Although MLD snooping learns about router ports through MLD queries and PIMv6 queries, you can
also use the command-line interface (CLI) to add a multicast router port to a VLAN. To add a multicast
router port (add a static connection to a multicast router), use the ipv6 mld snooping vlan mrouter
global configuration command on the switch.
Note Static connections to multicast routers are supported only on switch ports.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to add a multicast router port to a VLAN:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter Specify the multicast router VLAN ID, and specify the interface
interface interface-id to the multicast router.
• The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.
• The interface can be a physical interface or a port channel.
The port-channel range is 1 to 48.
Step 4 show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id] Verify that IPv6 MLD snooping is enabled on the VLAN
interface.
To remove a multicast router port from the VLAN, use the no ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter
interface interface-id global configuration command.
This example shows how to add a multicast router port to VLAN 200:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 200 mrouter interface gigabitethernet0/2
Enabling MLD Immediate Leave

When you enable MLDv1 Immediate Leave, the switch immediately removes a port from a multicast
group when it detects an MLD Done message on that port. You should only use the Immediate-Leave
feature when there is a single receiver present on every port in the VLAN. When there are multiple
clients for a multicast group on the same port, you should not enable Immediate-Leave in a VLAN.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable MLDv1 Immediate Leave:

38-8 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id Enable MLD Immediate Leave on the VLAN interface.
immediate-leave
Step 4 show ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id Verify that Immediate Leave is enabled on the VLAN interface.
To disable MLD Immediate Leave on a VLAN, use the no ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id
immediate-leave global configuration command.
This example shows how to enable MLD Immediate Leave on VLAN 130:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 130 immediate-leave
Configuring MLD Snooping Queries

When Immediate Leave is not enabled and a port receives an MLD Done message, the switch generates
MASQs on the port and sends them to the IPv6 multicast address for which the Done message was sent.
You can optionally configure the number of MASQs that are sent and the length of time the switch waits
for a response before deleting the port from the multicast group.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure MLD snooping query
characteristics for the switch or for a VLAN:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable (Optional) Set the number of queries that are sent before switch will
value deletes a listener (port) that does not respond to a general query. The
range is 1 to 3; the default is 2.
Step 3 ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id (Optional) Set the robustness variable on a VLAN basis, which
robustness-variable value determines the number of general queries that MLD snooping sends
before aging out a multicast address when there is no MLD report
response. The range is 1 to 3; the default is 0. When set to 0, the number
used is the global robustness variable value.
Step 4 ipv6 mld snooping (Optional) Set the number of MASQs that the switch sends before
last-listener-query-count count aging out an MLD client. The range is 1 to 7; the default is 2. The
queries are sent 1 second apart.
Step 5 ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id (Optional) Set the last-listener query count on a VLAN basis. This
last-listener-query-count count value overrides the value configured globally. The range is 1 to 7; the
default is 0. When set to 0, the global count value is used. Queries are
sent 1 second apart.

OL-8553-06 38-9
Command Purpose
Step 6 ipv6 mld snooping (Optional) Set the maximum response time that the switch waits after
last-listener-query-interval interval sending out a MASQ before deleting a port from the multicast group.
The range is 100 to 32,768 thousands of a second. The default is 1000
(1 second).
Step 7 ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id (Optional) Set the last-listener query interval on a VLAN basis. This
last-listener-query-interval interval value overrides the value configured globally. The range is 0 to 32,768
thousands of a second. The default is 0. When set to 0, the global
last-listener query interval is used.
Step 8 ipv6 mld snooping tcn query solicit (Optional) Enable topology change notification (TCN) solicitation,
which means that VLANs flood all IPv6 multicast traffic for the
configured number of queries before sending multicast data to only
those ports requesting to receive it. The default is for TCN to be
disabled.
Step 9 ipv6 mld snooping tcn flood query count (Optional) When TCN is enabled, specify the number of TCN queries
count to be sent. The range is from 1 to 10; the default is 2.
Step 11 show ipv6 mld snooping querier [vlan (Optional) Verify that the MLD snooping querier information for the
vlan-id] switch or for the VLAN.
This example shows how to set the MLD snooping global robustness variable to 3:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable 3
This example shows how to set the MLD snooping last-listener query count for a VLAN to 3:
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 200 last-listener-query-count 3
This example shows how to set the MLD snooping last-listener query interval (maximum response time)
to 2000 (2 seconds):
Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval 2000
Disabling MLD Listener Message Suppression

MLD snooping listener message suppression is enabled by default. When it is enabled, the switch
forwards only one MLD report per multicast router query. When message suppression is disabled,
multiple MLD reports could be forwarded to the multicast routers.

38-10 OL-8553-06
Displaying MLD Snooping Information
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable MLD listener message suppression:
Command Purpose
Step 2 no ipv6 mld snooping Disable MLD message suppression.
listener-message-suppression
Step 4 show ipv6 mld snooping Verify that IPv6 MLD snooping report suppression is
disabled.
To re-enable MLD message suppression, use the ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression

You can display MLD snooping information for dynamically learned and statically configured router
ports and VLAN interfaces. You can also display MAC address multicast entries for a VLAN configured
for MLD snooping.
To display MLD snooping information, use one or more of the privileged EXEC commands in
Table 38-2.
Table 38-2 Commands for Displaying MLD Snooping Information
Command Purpose
show ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] Display the MLD snooping configuration information for all VLANs on
the switch or for a specified VLAN.
show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id] Display information on dynamically learned and manually configured
multicast router interfaces. When you enable MLD snooping, the switch
automatically learns the interface to which a multicast router is
connected. These are dynamically learned interfaces.
show ipv6 mld snooping querier [vlan vlan-id] Display information about the IPv6 address and incoming port for the
most-recently received MLD query messages in the VLAN.
(Optional) Enter vlan vlan-id to display information for a single
VLAN.The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

OL-8553-06 38-11
Table 38-2 Commands for Displaying MLD Snooping Information (continued)
Command Purpose
show ipv6 mld snooping multicast-address [vlan Display all IPv6 multicast address information or specific IPv6
vlan-id] [count | dynamic | user] multicast address information for the switch or a VLAN.
• Enter count to show the group count on the switch or in a VLAN.
• Enter dynamic to display MLD snooping learned group information
for the switch or for a VLAN.
• Enter user to display MLD snooping user-configured group
information for the switch or for a VLAN.
show ipv6 mld snooping multicast-address vlan Display MLD snooping for the specified VLAN and IPv6 multicast
vlan-id [ipv6-multicast-address] address.

38-12 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 39
This chapter includes information about configuring IPv6 ACLs on the Catalyst 3560 switch. You can
filter IP version 6 (IPv6) traffic by creating IPv6 access control lists (ACLs) and applying them to
interfaces similarly to the way that you create and apply IP version 4(IPv4) named ACLs. You can also
create and apply input router ACLs to filter Layer 3 management traffic.
Note To use IPv6, you must configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template
on the switch. You select the template by entering the sdm prefer {default | dual-ipv4-and-ipv6
{default} | qos} global configuration command.
For related information, see these chapters:

• For more information about SDM templates, see Chapter 8, “Configuring SDM Templates.”
• For information about ACLs on the switch, see Chapter 39, “Configuring IPv6 ACLs.”
reference for this release or the Cisco IOS documentation referenced in the procedures.
This chapter contains these sections:

• Understanding IPv6 ACLs, page 39-2
• Configuring IPv6 ACLs, page 39-3
• Displaying IPv6 ACLs, page 39-9

OL-8553-06 39-1
Chapter 39 Configuring IPv6 ACLs
Understanding IPv6 ACLs
Understanding IPv6 ACLs

A switch image supports two types of IPv6 ACLs:
• IPv6 router ACLs
– Supported on outbound or inbound traffic on Layer 3 interfaces, which can be routed ports,
switch virtual interfaces (SVIs), or Layer 3 EtherChannels.
– Applied to only IPv6 packets that are routed.
• IPv6 port ACLs
– Supported on inbound traffic on Layer 2 interfaces only.
– Applied to all IPv6 packets entering the interface.
The switch supports only input router IPv6 ACLs. It does not support port ACLs or output IPv6 router
ACLs.
Note If you configure unsupported IPv6 ACLs, an error message appears and the configuration does not take
affect.
The switch does not support VLAN ACLs (VLAN maps) for IPv6 traffic.
Note For more information about ACL support on the switch, see Chapter 33, “Configuring Network Security
with ACLs.”
You can apply both IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs to an interface.

As with IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 port ACLs take precedence over router ACLs:
• When an input router ACL and input port ACL exist in an SVI, packets received on ports to which
a port ACL is applied are filtered by the port ACL. Routed IP packets received on other ports are
filtered by the router ACL. Other packets are not filtered.
• When an output router ACL and input port ACL exist in an SVI, packets received on the ports to
which a port ACL is applied are filtered by the port ACL. Outgoing routed IPv6 packets are filtered
by the router ACL. Other packets are not filtered.
Note If any port ACL (IPv4, IPv6, or MAC) is applied to an interface, that port ACL is used to filter packets,
and any router ACLs attached to the SVI of the port VLAN are ignored.
These sections describe some characteristics of IPv6 ACLs on the switch:

• Supported ACL Features, page 39-2
• IPv6 ACL Limitations, page 39-3
Supported ACL Features

IPv6 ACLs on the switch have these characteristics:
• Fragmented frames (the fragments keyword as in IPv4) are supported.
• The same statistics supported in IPv4 are supported for IPv6 ACLs.

39-2 OL-8553-06
• If the switch runs out of TCAM space, packets associated with the ACL label are forwarded to the
CPU, and the ACLs are applied in software.
• Routed or bridged packets with hop-by-hop options have IPv6 ACLs applied in software.
• Logging is supported for router ACLs, but not for port ACLs.
IPv6 ACL Limitations

With IPv4, you can configure standard and extended numbered IP ACLs, named IP ACLs, and MAC
ACLs. IPv6 supports only named ACLs.
The switch supports most Cisco IOS-supported IPv6 ACLs with some exceptions:
• IPv6 source and destination addresses—ACL matching is supported only on prefixes from /0 to /64
and host addresses (/128) that are in the extended universal identifier (EUI)-64 format. The switch
supports only these host addresses with no loss of information:
– aggregatable global unicast addresses
– link local addresses
• The switch does not support matching on these keywords: flowlabel, routing header, and
undetermined-transport.
• The switch does not support reflexive ACLs (the reflect keyword).
• This release supports only port ACLs and router ACLs for IPv6; it does not support VLAN ACLs
(VLAN maps).
• The switch does not apply MAC-based ACLs on IPv6 frames.
• You cannot apply IPv6 port ACLs to Layer 2 EtherChannels.
• The switch does not support output port ACLs.
• Output router ACLs and input port ACLs for IPv6 are supported only on switches. Switches support
only control plane (incoming) IPv6 ACLs.
• When configuring an ACL, there is no restriction on keywords entered in the ACL, regardless of
whether or not they are supported on the platform. When you apply the ACL to an interface that
requires hardware forwarding (physical ports or SVIs), the switch checks to determine whether or
not the ACL can be supported on the interface. If not, attaching the ACL is rejected.
• If an ACL is applied to an interface and you attempt to add an access control entry (ACE) with an
unsupported keyword, the switch does not allow the ACE to be added to the ACL that is currently
attached to the interface.

Before configuring IPv6 ACLs, you must select one of the dual IPv4 and IPv6 SDM templates.
To filter IPv6 traffic, you perform these steps:
Step 1 Create an IPv6 ACL, and enter IPv6 access list configuration mode.
Step 2 Configure the IPv6 ACL to block (deny) or pass (permit) traffic.

OL-8553-06 39-3
Step 3 Apply the IPv6 ACL to an interface. For router ACLs, you must also configure an IPv6 address on the
Layer 3 interface to which the ACL is applied.
These sections describe how to configure and apply IPv6 ACLs:

• Default IPv6 ACL Configuration, page 39-4
• Interaction with Other Features, page 39-4
• Creating IPv6 ACLs, page 39-4
• Applying an IPv6 ACL to an Interface, page 39-8
Default IPv6 ACL Configuration

There are no IPv6 ACLs configured or applied.
Interaction with Other Features

Configuring IPv6 ACLs has these interactions with other features or switch characteristics:
• If an IPv6 router ACL is configured to deny a packet, the packet is dropped. A copy of the packet is
sent to the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) queue to generate an ICMP unreachable
message for the frame.
• If a bridged frame is to be dropped due to a port ACL, the frame is not bridged.
• You can create both IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs on a switch, and you can apply both IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs
to the same interface. Each ACL must have a unique name; an error message appears if you try to
use a name that is already configured.
You use different commands to create IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs and to attach IPv4 or IPv6 ACLs to the
same Layer 2 or Layer 3 interface. If you use the wrong command to attach an ACL (for example,
an IPv4 command to attach an IPv6 ACL), you receive an error message.
• You cannot use MAC ACLs to filter IPv6 frames. MAC ACLs can only filter non-IP frames.
• If the TCAM is full, for any additional configured ACLs, packets are forwarded to the CPU, and the
ACLs are applied in software.
Creating IPv6 ACLs

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create an IPv6 ACL:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ipv6 access-list access-list-name Define an IPv6 access list name, and enter IPv6 access-list configuration mode.

39-4 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3a deny | permit protocol Enter deny or permit to specify whether to deny or permit the packet if
{source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length conditions are matched. These are the conditions:
| any | host source-ipv6-address}
• For protocol, enter the name or number of an Internet protocol: ahp, esp,
[operator [port-number]]
icmp, ipv6, pcp, stcp, tcp, or udp, or an integer in the range 0 to 255
{destination-ipv6-prefix/
representing an IPv6 protocol number. For additional specific parameters for
prefix-length | any |
ICMP, TCP, and UDP, see Steps 3b through 3d.
host destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] • The source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length or destination-ipv6-prefix/
[dscp value] [fragments] [log] prefix-length is the source or destination IPv6 network or class of networks
[log-input] [sequence value] for which to set deny or permit conditions, specified in hexadecimal and
[time-range name] using 16-bit values between colons (see RFC 2373).
Note Although the CLI help shows a prefix-length range of /0 to /128, the
switch supports IPv6 address matching only for prefixes in the range of
/0 to /64 and EUI-based /128 prefixes for aggregatable global unicast and
link-local host addresses.
• Enter any as an abbreviation for the IPv6 prefix ::/0.

• For host source-ipv6-address or destination-ipv6-address, enter the source
or destination IPv6 host address for which to set deny or permit conditions,
specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons.
• (Optional) For operator, specify an operand that compares the source or
destination ports of the specified protocol. Operands are lt (less than), gt
(greater than), eq (equal), neq (not equal), and range.
If the operator follows the source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length argument, it must
match the source port. If the operator follows the destination-ipv6-
prefix/prefix-length argument, it must match the destination port.
• (Optional) The port-number is a decimal number from 0 to 65535 or the
name of a TCP or UDP port for filtering TCP or UDP, respectively.
• (Optional) Enter dscp value to match a differentiated services code point
value against the traffic class value in the Traffic Class field of each IPv6
packet header. The acceptable range is from 0 to 63.
• (Optional) Enter fragments to check noninitial fragments. This keyword is
visible only if the protocol is ipv6.
• (Optional) Enter log to cause an logging message to be sent to the console
about the packet that matches the entry. Enter log-input to include the input
interface in the log entry. Logging is supported only for router ACLs.
• (Optional) Enter sequence value to specify the sequence number for the
access list statement. The acceptable range is from 1 to 4294967295.
• (Optional) Enter time-range name to specify a time range for the statement.

OL-8553-06 39-5
Command Purpose
Step deny | permit tcp (Optional) Define a TCP access list and the access conditions.
3b {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
Enter tcp for Transmission Control Protocol. The parameters are the same as
those described in Step 3a, with these additional optional parameters:
{destination-ipv6- • ack—Acknowledgment bit set.
prefix/prefix-length | any | host • established—An established connection. A match occurs if the TCP
destination-ipv6-address} datagram has the ACK or RST bits set.
[operator [port-number]] [ack]
[dscp value] [established] [fin] • fin—Finished bit set; no more data from sender.
[log] [log-input] [neq {port | • neq {port | protocol}—Matches only packets that are not on a given port
protocol}] [psh] [range {port | number.
protocol}] [rst] [sequence value]
• psh—Push function bit set.
[syn] [time-range name] [urg]
• range {port | protocol}—Matches only packets in the port number range.
• rst—Reset bit set.
• syn—Synchronize bit set.
• urg—Urgent pointer bit set.
Step deny | permit udp (Optional) Define a UDP access list and the access conditions.
3c {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
Enter udp for the User Datagram Protocol. The UDP parameters are the same as
those described for TCP, except that the [operator [port]] port number or name
must be a UDP port number or name, and the established parameter is not valid
{destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-le
for UDP.
ngth | any | host
destination-ipv6-address}
[operator [port-number]] [dscp
value] [log] [log-input] [neq
{port | protocol}] [range {port |
protocol}] [sequence value]
[time-range name]
Step deny | permit icmp (Optional) Define an ICMP access list and the access conditions.
3d {source-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
Enter icmp for Internet Control Message Protocol. The ICMP parameters are the
same as those described for most IP protocols in Step 3a, with the addition of the
ICMP message type and code parameters. These optional keywords have these
{destination-ipv6-prefix/prefix-le
meanings:
ngth | any | host
destination-ipv6-address} • icmp-type—Enter to filter by ICMP message type, a number from 0 to 255.
[operator [port-number]] • icmp-code—Enter to filter ICMP packets that are filtered by the ICMP
[icmp-type [icmp-code] | message code type, a number from 0 to 255.
icmp-message] [dscp value] [log]
[log-input] [sequence value] • icmp-message—Enter to filter ICMP packets by the ICMP message type
[time-range name] name or the ICMP message type and code name. To see a list of ICMP
message type names and code names, use the ? key or see command
Step 5 show ipv6 access-list Verify the access list configuration.
startup-config

39-6 OL-8553-06
Use the no deny | permit IPv6 access-list configuration commands with keywords to remove the deny
or permit conditions from the specified access list.
This example configures the IPv6 access list named CISCO. The first deny entry in the list denies all
packets that have a destination TCP port number greater than 5000. The second deny entry denies
packets that have a source UDP port number less than 5000. The second deny also logs all matches to
the console. The first permit entry in the list permits all ICMP packets. The second permit entry in the
list permits all other traffic. The second permit entry is necessary because an implicit deny -all condition
is at the end of each IPv6 access list.
Switch(config)# ipv6 access-list CISCO
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# deny tcp any any gt 5000
Switch config-ipv6-acl)# deny ::/0 lt 5000 ::/0 log
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# permit icmp any any
Switch(config-ipv6-acl)# permit any any
Applying an IPv6 ACL to an Interface

This section describes how to apply IPv6 ACLs to network interfaces. You can apply an ACL to
outbound or inbound traffic on Layer 3 interfaces, or to inbound traffic on Layer 2 interfaces.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to control access to an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Identify a Layer 2 interface (for port ACLs) or Layer 3 interface (for router
ACLs) on which to apply an access list, and enter interface configuration mode.
Note Switches running the IP base image do not support port ACLs.
Step 3 no switchport If applying a router ACL, change the interface from Layer 2 mode (the default)
to Layer 3 mode.
Step 4 ipv6 address ipv6-address Configure an IPv6 address on a Layer 3 interface (for router ACLs).
This command is not required on Layer 2 interfaces or if the interface has
already been configured with an explicit IPv6 address.
Step 5 ipv6 traffic-filter access-list-name Apply the access list to incoming or outgoing traffic on the interface.
{in | out}
The out keyword is not supported for Layer 2 interfaces (port ACLs). If the
switch is running the IP base image, the out keyword is not supported for Layer
3 interfaces.
Step 7 show running-config Verify the access list configuration.
startup-config
Use the no ipv6 traffic-filter access-list-name interface configuration command to remove an access list
from an interface.
This example shows how to apply the access list Cisco to outbound traffic on a Layer 3 interface:
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001::/64 eui-64
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 traffic-filter CISCO out

OL-8553-06 39-7
Displaying IPv6 ACLs
Displaying IPv6 ACLs

You can display information about all configured access lists, all IPv6 access lists, or a specific access
list by using one or more of the privileged EXEC commands in Table 39-1.
Table 39-1 Commands for Displaying IPv6 Access List Information
Command Purpose
show access-lists Display all access lists configured on the switch.
show ipv6 access-list [access-list-name] Display all configured IPv6 access list or the access list specified by
name.
This is an example of the output from the show access-lists privileged EXEC command. The output
shows all access lists that are configured on the switch.
Switch #show access-lists
Extended IP access list hello
10 permit ip any any
IPv6 access list ipv6
permit ipv6 any any sequence 10
This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 access-lists privileged EXEC command. The output
shows only IPv6 access lists configured on the switch.
Switch# show ipv6 access-list
IPv6 access list inbound
permit tcp any any eq bgp (8 matches) sequence 10
permit tcp any any eq telnet (15 matches) sequence 20
permit udp any any sequence 30
IPv6 access list outbound

deny udp any any sequence 10
deny tcp any any eq telnet sequence 20

39-8 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 40
Configuring HSRP
This chapter describes how to use Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) on the Catalyst 3560 switch to
provide routing redundancy for routing IP traffic not dependent on the availability of any single router.
To use HSRP for IPv6, see Chapter 37, “Configuring IPv6 Unicast Routing.”
You can also use a version of HSRP in Layer 2 mode to configure a redundant command switch to take
over cluster management if the cluster command switch fails. For more information about clustering, see
Chapter 6, “Clustering Switches” and see the Getting Started with Cisco Network Assistant, available on
Cisco.com.
For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see these documents:
• Switch command reference for this release
• Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 1 of 3: Addressing and Services, Release 12.2 at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_2/ipaddr/command/reference/fipras_r.html
• Hot Standby Router Protocol Version 2 feature module at
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_3t/12_3t4/feature/guide/gthsrpv2.html
• Understanding HSRP, page 40-1
• Configuring HSRP, page 40-4
• Displaying HSRP Configurations, page 40-13
Understanding HSRP
HSRP is Cisco’s standard method of providing high network availability by providing first-hop
redundancy for IP hosts on an IEEE 802 LAN configured with a default gateway IP address. HSRP routes
IP traffic without relying on the availability of any single router. It enables a set of router interfaces to
work together to present the appearance of a single virtual router or default gateway to the hosts on a
LAN. When HSRP is configured on a network or segment, it provides a virtual Media Access Control
(MAC) address and an IP address that is shared among a group of configured routers. HSRP allows two
or more HSRP-configured routers to use the MAC address and IP network address of a virtual router.
The virtual router does not exist; it represents the common target for routers that are configured to
provide backup to each other. One of the routers is selected to be the active router and another to be the
standby router, which assumes control of the group MAC address and IP address should the designated
active router fail.

OL-8553-06 40-1
Chapter 40 Configuring HSRP
Understanding HSRP
Note Routers in an HSRP group can be any router interface that supports HSRP, including Catalyst 3560
routed ports and switch virtual interfaces (SVIs).
HSRP provides high network availability by providing redundancy for IP traffic from hosts on networks.
In a group of router interfaces, the active router is the router of choice for routing packets; the standby
router is the router that takes over the routing duties when an active router fails or when preset conditions
are met.
HSRP is useful for hosts that do not support a router discovery protocol and cannot switch to a new router
when their selected router reloads or loses power. When HSRP is configured on a network segment, it
provides a virtual MAC address and an IP address that is shared among router interfaces in a group of
router interfaces running HSRP. The router selected by the protocol to be the active router receives and
routes packets destined for the group’s MAC address. For n routers running HSRP, there are n +1 IP and
MAC addresses assigned.
HSRP detects when the designated active router fails, and a selected standby router assumes control of
the Hot Standby group’s MAC and IP addresses. A new standby router is also selected at that time.
Devices running HSRP send and receive multicast UDP-based hello packets to detect router failure and
to designate active and standby routers. When HSRP is configured on an interface, Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMP) redirect messages are disabled by default for the interface.
You can configure multiple Hot Standby groups among Catalyst 3560 switches that are operating in
Layer 3 to make more use of the redundant routers. To do so, specify a group number for each Hot
Standby command group you configure for an interface. For example, you might configure an interface
on switch 1 as an active router and one on switch 2 as a standby router and also configure another
interface on switch 2 as an active router with another interface on switch 1 as its standby router.
Figure 40-1 shows a segment of a network configured for HSRP. Each router is configured with the MAC
address and IP network address of the virtual router. Instead of configuring hosts on the network with
the IP address of Router A, you configure them with the IP address of the virtual router as their default
router. When Host C sends packets to Host B, it sends them to the MAC address of the virtual router. If
for any reason, Router A stops transferring packets, Router B responds to the virtual IP address and
virtual MAC address and becomes the active router, assuming the active router duties. Host C continues
to use the IP address of the virtual router to address packets destined for Host B, which Router B now
receives and sends to Host B. Until Router A resumes operation, HSRP allows Router B to provide
uninterrupted service to users on Host C’s segment that need to communicate with users on Host B’s
segment and also continues to perform its normal function of handling packets between the Host A
segment and Host B.

40-2 OL-8553-06
Understanding HSRP
Figure 40-1 Typical HSRP Configuration
Host B
172.20.130.5
Active Virtual Standby

router router router
172.20.128.1 172.20.128.3 172.20.128.2
Router A Router B
172.20.128.32 172.20.128.55
204345
Host C Host A
HSRP Versions
Cisco IOS Release 12.2(46)SE and later support these Hot Standby Redundancy Protocol (HSRP)
versions:
• HSRPv1—Version 1 of the HSRP, the default version of HSRP. It has these features:
– The HSRP group number can be from 0 to 255.
– HSRPv1 uses the multicast address 224.0.0.2 to send hello packets, which can conflict with
Cisco Group Management Protocol (CGMP) leave processing. You cannot enable HSRPv1 and
CGMP at the same time; they are mutually exclusive.
• HSRPv2—Version 2 of the HSRP has these features:
– To match the HSRP group number to the VLAN ID of a subinterface, HSRPv2 can use a group
number from 0 to 4095 and a MAC address from 0000.0C9F.F000 to 0000.0C9F.FFFF.
– HSRPv2 uses the multicast address 224.0.0.102 to send hello packets. HSRPv2 and CGMP
leave processing are no longer mutually exclusive, and both can be enabled at the same time.
– HSRPv2 has a different packet format than HRSPv1.
A switch running HSRPv1 cannot identify the physical router that sent a hello packet because
the source MAC address of the router is the virtual MAC address.
HSRPv2 has a different packet format than HSRPv1. A HSRPv2 packet uses the
type-length-value (TLV) format and has a 6-byte identifier field with the MAC address of the
physical router that sent the packet.
If an interface running HSRPv1 gets an HSRPv2 packet, the type field is ignored.

OL-8553-06 40-3
Configuring HSRP
Multiple HSRP
The switch supports Multiple HSRP (MHSRP), an extension of HSRP that allows load sharing between
two or more HSRP groups. You can configure MHSRP to achieve load balancing and to use two or more
standby groups (and paths) from a host network to a server network. In Figure 40-2, half the clients are
configured for Router A, and half the clients are configured for Router B. Together, the configuration for
Routers A and B establishes two HSRP groups. For group 1, Router A is the default active router because
it has the assigned highest priority, and Router B is the standby router. For group 2, Router B is the
default active router because it has the assigned highest priority, and Router A is the standby router.
During normal operation, the two routers share the IP traffic load. When either router becomes
unavailable, the other router becomes active and assumes the packet-transfer functions of the router that
is unavailable.
See the “Configuring MHSRP” section on page 40-10 for the example configuration steps.
Note For MHSRP, you need to enter the standby preempt interface configuration command on the HSRP
interfaces so that if a router fails and then comes back up, preemption restores load sharing.
Figure 40-2 MHSRP Load Sharing
Active router for group 1 Active router for group 2

Standby router for group 2 Standby router for group 1
Router A Router B
10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2
121235
Client 1 Client 2 Client 3 Client 4
Configuring HSRP
• Default HSRP Configuration, page 40-5
• HSRP Configuration Guidelines, page 40-5
• Enabling HSRP, page 40-6
• Configuring HSRP Priority, page 40-7

40-4 OL-8553-06
Configuring HSRP
• Configuring MHSRP, page 40-10

• Configuring HSRP Authentication and Timers, page 40-10
• Enabling HSRP Support for ICMP Redirect Messages, page 40-12
• Configuring HSRP Groups and Clustering, page 40-12
• Troubleshooting HSRP, page 40-12
Default HSRP Configuration

Table 40-1 shows the default HSRP configuration.
Table 40-1 Default HSRP Configuration

HSRP version Version 1
HSRP groups None configured
Standby group number 0
Standby MAC address System assigned as: 0000.0c07.acXX, where XX is the HSRP
group number
Standby priority 100
Standby delay 0 (no delay)
Standby track interface priority 10
Standby hello time 3 seconds
Standby holdtime 10 seconds
HSRP Configuration Guidelines

Follow these guidelines when configuring HSRP:
• HSRP for IPv4 and HSRP for IPv6 are mutually exclusive. You cannot enable both at the same time.
• HSRPv2 and HSRPv1 are mutually exclusive. HSRPv2 is not interoperable with HSRPv1 on an
interface and the reverse.
• You can configure up to 32 instances of HSRP groups.
If you configure the same HSRP group number on multiple interfaces, the switch counts each
interface as one instance:
For example, if you configure HSRP group 0 on VLAN 1 and on Gigabit Ethernet 1/0/1, the switch
counts this as two instances.

OL-8553-06 40-5
Configuring HSRP
• In the configuration procedures, the specified interface must be a Layer 3 interface:

– Routed port: a physical port configured as a Layer 3 port by entering the no switchport
– SVI: a VLAN interface created by using the interface vlan vlan_id global configuration
command and by default a Layer 3 interface.
– EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode: a port-channel logical interface created by using
the interface port-channel port-channel-number global configuration command and binding
the Ethernet interface into the channel group. For more information, see the “Configuring
Layer 3 EtherChannels” section.
• All Layer 3 interfaces must have assigned IP addresses. See the “Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces”
section.
• Configure only one instance of an FHRP. The switches support HSRPv1, HSRPv2, and HSRP for
IPv6.
• The version of an HSRP group can be changed from HSRPv2 to HSRPv1 only if the group number
is less than 256.
• When configuring group numbers for HSRPv2 and HSRP for IPv6, you must use group numbers in
ranges that are multiples of 256. Valid ranges are 0 to 255, 256 to 511, 512 to 767, 3840 to 4095,
and so on.
Examples of valid and invalid group numbers:
– If you configure groups with the numbers 2, 150, and 225, you cannot configure another group
with the number 3850. It is not in the range of 0 to 255.
– If you configure groups with the numbers 520, 600, and 700, you cannot configure another
group with the number 900. It is not in the range of 512 to 767.
• If you change the HSRP version on an interface, each HSRP group resets because it now has a new
virtual MAC address.
Enabling HSRP
The standby ip interface configuration command activates HSRP on the configured interface. If an IP
address is specified, that address is used as the designated address for the Hot Standby group. If no IP
address is specified, the address is learned through the standby function. You must configure at least one
Layer 3 port on the LAN with the designated address. Configuring an IP address always overrides
another designated address currently in use.
When the standby ip command is enabled on an interface and proxy ARP is enabled, if the interface’s
Hot Standby state is active, proxy ARP requests are answered using the Hot Standby group MAC
address. If the interface is in a different state, proxy ARP responses are suppressed.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create or enable HSRP on a Layer 3 interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the Layer 3 interface on
which you want to enable HSRP.

40-6 OL-8553-06
Configuring HSRP
Command Purpose
Step 3 standby version {1 | 2} (Optional) Configure the HSRP version on the interface.
• 1— Select HSRPv1.
• 2— Select HSRPv2.
If you do not enter this command or do not specify a keyword, the
interface runs the default HSRP version, HSRP v1.
Step 4 standby [group-number] ip [ip-address Create (or enable) the HSRP group using its number and virtual IP
[secondary]] address.
• (Optional) group-number—The group number on the interface for
which HSRP is being enabled. The range is 0 to 255; the default is 0.
If there is only one HSRP group, you do not need to enter a group
number.
• (Optional on all but one interface) ip-address—The virtual IP address
of the hot standby router interface. You must enter the virtual IP
address for at least one of the interfaces; it can be learned on the other
interfaces.
• (Optional) secondary—The IP address is a secondary hot standby
router interface. If neither router is designated as a secondary or
standby router and no priorities are set, the primary IP addresses are
compared and the higher IP address is the active router, with the next
highest as the standby router.
Step 6 show standby [interface-id [group]] Verify the configuration.
Use the no standby [group-number] ip [ip-address] interface configuration command to disable HSRP.
This example shows how to activate HSRP for group 1 on an interface. The IP address used by the hot
standby group is learned by using HSRP.
Note This procedure is the minimum number of steps required to enable HSRP. Other configuration is
optional.

Switch(config-if)# standby 1 ip
Configuring HSRP Priority

The standby priority, standby preempt, and standby track interface configuration commands are all
used to set characteristics for finding active and standby routers and behavior regarding when a new
active router takes over.

OL-8553-06 40-7
Configuring HSRP
When configuring HSRP priority, follow these guidelines:

• Assigning a priority allows you to select the active and standby routers. If preemption is enabled,
the router with the highest priority becomes the active router. If priorities are equal, the current
active router does not change.
• The highest number (1 to 255) represents the highest priority (most likely to become the active
router).
• When setting the priority, preempt, or both, you must specify at least one keyword (priority,
preempt, or both).
• The priority of the device can change dynamically if an interface is configured with the standby
track command and another interface on the router goes down.
• The standby track interface configuration command ties the router hot standby priority to the
availability of its interfaces and is useful for tracking interfaces that are not configured for HSRP.
When a tracked interface fails, the hot standby priority on the device on which tracking has been
configured decreases by 10. If an interface is not tracked, its state changes do not affect the hot
standby priority of the configured device. For each interface configured for hot standby, you can
configure a separate list of interfaces to be tracked.
• The standby track interface-priority interface configuration command specifies how much to
decrement the hot standby priority when a tracked interface goes down. When the interface comes
back up, the priority is incremented by the same amount.
• When multiple tracked interfaces are down and interface-priority values have been configured, the
configured priority decrements are cumulative. If tracked interfaces that were not configured with
priority values fail, the default decrement is 10, and it is noncumulative.
• When routing is first enabled for the interface, it does not have a complete routing table. If it is
configured to preempt, it becomes the active router, even though it is unable to provide adequate
routing services. To solve this problem, configure a delay time to allow the router to update its
routing table.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use one or more of these steps to configure HSRP priority
characteristics on an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the HSRP interface on which you
want to set priority.
Step 3 standby [group-number] priority Set a priority value used in choosing the active router. The range is 1 to 255;
priority [preempt [delay delay]] the default priority is 100. The highest number represents the highest priority.
• (Optional) group-number—The group number to which the command
applies.
• (Optional) preempt—Select so that when the local router has a higher
priority than the active router, it assumes control as the active router.
• (Optional) delay—Set to cause the local router to postpone taking over the
active role for the shown number of seconds. The range is 0 to
3600(1 hour); the default is 0 (no delay before taking over).

40-8 OL-8553-06
Configuring HSRP
Command Purpose
Step 4 standby [group-number] [priority Configure the router to preempt, which means that when the local router has
priority] preempt [delay delay] a higher priority than the active router, it assumes control as the active router.
applies.
• (Optional) priority—Enter to set or change the group priority. The range
is 1 to 255; the default is 100.
• (Optional) delay—Set to cause the local router to postpone taking over the
active role for the number of seconds shown. The range is 0 to 3600
(1 hour); the default is 0 (no delay before taking over).
Step 5 standby [group-number] track Configure an interface to track other interfaces so that if one of the other
type number [interface-priority] interfaces goes down, the device’s Hot Standby priority is lowered.
applies.
• type—Enter the interface type (combined with interface number) that is
tracked.
• number—Enter the interface number (combined with interface type) that is
tracked.
• (Optional) interface-priority—Enter the amount by which the hot standby
priority for the router is decremented or incremented when the interface
goes down or comes back up. The default value is 10.
Step 7 show running-config Verify the configuration of the standby groups.
startup-config
Use the no standby [group-number] priority priority [preempt [delay delay]] and no standby
[group-number] [priority priority] preempt [delay delay] interface configuration commands to restore
default priority, preempt, and delay values.
Use the no standby [group-number] track type number [interface-priority] interface configuration
command to remove the tracking.
This example activates a port, sets an IP address and a priority of 120 (higher than the default value),
and waits for 300 seconds (5 minutes) before attempting to become the active router:
Switch(config-if)# standby ip 172.20.128.3
Switch(config-if)# standby priority 120 preempt delay 300

OL-8553-06 40-9
Configuring HSRP
Configuring MHSRP
To enable MHSRP and load balancing, you configure two routers as active routers for their groups, with
virtual routers as standby routers. This example shows how to enable the MHSRP configuration shown
in Figure 40-2. You need to enter the standby preempt interface configuration command on each HSRP
interface so that if a router fails and comes back up, the preemption occurs and restores load balancing.
Router A is configured as the active router for group 1, and Router B is configured as the active router
for group 2. The HSRP interface for Router A has an IP address of 10.0.0.1 with a group 1 standby
priority of 110 (the default is 100). The HSRP interface for Router B has an IP address of 10.0.0.2 with
a group 2 standby priority of 110.
Group 1 uses a virtual IP address of 10.0.0.3 and group 2 uses a virtual IP address of 10.0.0.4.
Router A Configuration
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 ip 10.0.0.3
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 priority 110
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 preempt
Router B Configuration
Switch(config-if)# standby 2 priority 110
Configuring HSRP Authentication and Timers

You can optionally configure an HSRP authentication string or change the hello-time interval and
holdtime.
When configuring these attributes, follow these guidelines:
• The authentication string is sent unencrypted in all HSRP messages. You must configure the same
authentication string on all routers and access servers on a cable to ensure interoperation.
Authentication mismatch prevents a device from learning the designated Hot Standby IP address and
timer values from other routers configured with HSRP.
• Routers or access servers on which standby timer values are not configured can learn timer values
from the active or standby router. The timers configured on an active router always override any
other timer settings.
• All routers in a Hot Standby group should use the same timer values. Normally, the holdtime is
greater than or equal to 3 times the hellotime.

40-10 OL-8553-06
Configuring HSRP
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use one or more of these steps to configure HSRP authentication
and timers on an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the HSRP
interface on which you want to set authentication.
Step 3 standby [group-number] authentication string (Optional) authentication string—Enter a string to be carried in
all HSRP messages. The authentication string can be up to eight
characters in length; the default string is cisco.
(Optional) group-number—The group number to which the
command applies.
Step 4 standby [group-number] timers hellotime (Optional) Configure the time between hello packets and the
holdtime time before other routers declare the active router to be down.
• group-number—The group number to which the command
applies.
• hellotime—The hello interval in seconds. The range is from
1 to 255; the default is 3 seconds.
• holdtime—The time in seconds before the active or standby
router is declared to be down. The range is from 1 to 255;
the default is 10 seconds.
Step 6 show running-config Verify the configuration of the standby groups.
Use the no standby [group-number] authentication string interface configuration command to delete
an authentication string. Use the no standby [group-number] timers hellotime holdtime interface
configuration command to restore timers to their default values.
This example shows how to configure word as the authentication string required to allow Hot Standby
routers in group 1 to interoperate:
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 authentication word
This example shows how to set the timers on standby group 1 with the time between hello packets at 5
seconds and the time after which a router is considered down to be 15 seconds:
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 ip
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 timers 5 15

OL-8553-06 40-11
Configuring HSRP
Enabling HSRP Support for ICMP Redirect Messages

In releases earlier than Cisco IOS Release 12.2(18)SE, ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol)
redirect messages were automatically disabled on interfaces configured with HSRP. ICMP is a network
layer Internet protocol that provides message packets to report errors and other information relevant to
IP processing. ICMP provides diagnostic functions, such as sending and directing error packets to the host.
When the switch is running HSRP, make sure hosts do not discover the interface (or real) MAC addresses
of routers in the HSRP group. If a host is redirected by ICMP to the real MAC address of a router and
that router later fails, packets from the host will be lost.
In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(18)SE and later, ICMP redirect messages are automatically enabled on
interfaces configured with HSRP. This feature filters outgoing ICMP redirect messages through HSRP,
in which the next hop IP address might be changed to an HSRP virtual IP address. For more information,
see the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide, Release 12.2.
Configuring HSRP Groups and Clustering

When a device is participating in an HSRP standby routing and clustering is enabled, you can use the
same standby group for command switch redundancy and HSRP redundancy. Use the cluster
standby-group HSRP-group-name [routing-redundancy] global configuration command to enable the
same HSRP standby group to be used for command switch and routing redundancy. If you create a cluster
with the same HSRP standby group name without entering the routing-redundancy keyword, HSRP
standby routing is disabled for the group.
This example shows how to bind standby group my_hsrp to the cluster and enable the same HSRP group
to be used for command switch redundancy and router redundancy. The command can only be executed
on the cluster command switch. If the standby group name or number does not exist, or if the switch is
a cluster member switch, an error message appears.
Switch(config)# cluster standby-group my_hsrp routing-redundancy
Switch(config)# end
Troubleshooting HSRP
If one of the situations in Table 40-2 occurs, this message appears:
%FHRP group not consistent with already configured groups on the switch stack -
virtual MAC reservation failed
Table 40-2 Troubleshooting HSRP
Situation Action
You configure more than 32 HSRP group Remove HSRP groups so that up to 32 group
instances. instances are configured.
You configure HSRP for IPv4 and HSRP for IPv6 Configure either HSRP for IPv4 or HSRP for IPv6
at the same time on the switch.
You configure group numbers that are not in valid Configure group numbers in a valid range.
ranges of 256.

40-12 OL-8553-06
Displaying HSRP Configurations

From privileged EXEC mode, use this command to display HSRP settings:
show standby [interface-id [group]] [brief] [detail]
You can display HSRP information for the whole switch, for a specific interface, for an HSRP group, or
for an HSRP group on an interface. You can also specify whether to display a concise overview of HSRP
information or detailed HSRP information. The default display is detail. If there are a large number of
HSRP groups, using the show standby command without qualifiers can result in an unwieldy display.
This is a an example of output from the show standby privileged EXEC command, displaying HSRP
information for two standby groups (group 1 and group 100):
VLAN1 - Group 1
Local state is Standby, priority 105, may preempt
Hellotime 3 holdtime 10
Next hello sent in 00:00:02.182
Hot standby IP address is 172.20.128.3 configured
Active router is 172.20.128.1 expires in 00:00:09
Standby router is local
Standby virtual mac address is 0000.0c07.ac01
Name is bbb
VLAN1 - Group 100
Local state is Active, priority 105, may preempt
Hellotime 3 holdtime 10
Next hello sent in 00:00:02.262
Hot standby IP address is 172.20.138.51 configured
Active router is local
Standby router is unknown expired
Standby virtual mac address is 0000.0c07.ac64
Name is test

OL-8553-06 40-13

40-14 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 41
Configuring Cisco IOS IP SLAs Operations
This chapter describes how to use Cisco IOS IP Service Level Agreements (SLAs) on the Catalyst 3560
switch. Cisco IP SLAs is a part of Cisco IOS software that allows Cisco customers to analyze IP service
levels for IP applications and services by using active traffic monitoring—the generation of traffic in a
continuous, reliable, and predictable manner—for measuring network performance. With Cisco IOS IP
SLAs, service provider customers can measure and provide service level agreements, and enterprise
customers can verify service levels, verify outsourced service level agreements, and understand network
performance. Cisco IOS IP SLAs can perform network assessments, verify quality of service (QoS), ease
the deployment of new services, and assist with network troubleshooting.
Note Switches running the IP base image support only IP SLAs responder functionality and must be
configured with another device that supports full IP SLAs functionality, for example, a Catalyst 3560
switch running the IP services image.
For more information about IP SLAs, see the Cisco IOS IP SLAs Configuration Guide, Release 12.4T at
this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/ipsla/configuration/guide/12_4t/sla_12_4t_book.html
For command syntax information, see the command reference at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/ipsla/command/reference/sla_book.html
• Understanding Cisco IOS IP SLAs, page 41-1
• Configuring IP SLAs Operations, page 41-6
• Monitoring IP SLAs Operations, page 41-13
Understanding Cisco IOS IP SLAs

Cisco IOS IP SLAs sends data across the network to measure performance between multiple network
locations or across multiple network paths. It simulates network data and IP services and collects
network performance information in real time. Cisco IOS IP SLAs generates and analyzes traffic either
between Cisco IOS devices or from a Cisco IOS device to a remote IP device such as a network
application server. Measurements provided by the various Cisco IOS IP SLAs operations can be used
for troubleshooting, for problem analysis, and for designing network topologies.

OL-8553-06 41-1
Chapter 41 Configuring Cisco IOS IP SLAs Operations
Depending on the specific Cisco IOS IP SLAs operation, various network performance statistics are
monitored within the Cisco device and stored in both command-line interface (CLI) and Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) MIBs. IP SLAs packets have configurable IP and application layer
options such as source and destination IP address, User Datagram Protocol (UDP)/TCP port numbers, a
type of service (ToS) byte (including Differentiated Services Code Point [DSCP] and IP Prefix bits),
Virtual Private Network (VPN) routing/forwarding instance (VRF), and URL web address.
Because Cisco IP SLAs is Layer 2 transport independent, you can configure end-to-end operations over
disparate networks to best reflect the metrics that an end user is likely to experience. IP SLAs collects a
unique subset of these performance metrics:
• Delay (both round-trip and one-way)
• Jitter (directional)
• Packet loss (directional)
• Packet sequencing (packet ordering)
• Path (per hop)
• Connectivity (directional)
• Server or website download time
Because Cisco IOS IP SLAs is SNMP-accessible, it can also be used by performance-monitoring
applications like CiscoWorks Internetwork Performance Monitor (IPM) and other third-party Cisco
partner performance management products. You can find more details about network management
products that use Cisco IOS IP SLAs at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/go/ipsla
Using IP SLAs can provide these benefits:
• Service-level agreement monitoring, measurement, and verification.
• Network performance monitoring
– Measures the jitter, latency, or packet loss in the network.
– Provides continuous, reliable, and predictable measurements.
• IP service network health assessment to verify that the existing QoS is sufficient for new IP services.
• Edge-to-edge network availability monitoring for proactive verification and connectivity testing of
network resources (for example, shows the network availability of an NFS server used to store
business critical data from a remote site).
• Troubleshooting of network operation by providing consistent, reliable measurement that
immediately identifies problems and saves troubleshooting time.
• Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) performance monitoring and network verification (if the
switch supports MPLS)
This section includes this information about IP SLAs functionality:
• Using Cisco IOS IP SLAs to Measure Network Performance, page 41-3
• IP SLAs Responder and IP SLAs Control Protocol, page 41-4
• Response Time Computation for IP SLAs, page 41-4
• IP SLAs Operation Scheduling, page 41-5
• IP SLAs Operation Threshold Monitoring, page 41-5

41-2 OL-8553-06
Using Cisco IOS IP SLAs to Measure Network Performance

You can use IP SLAs to monitor the performance between any area in the network—core, distribution,
and edge—without deploying a physical probe. It uses generated traffic to measure network performance
between two networking devices. Figure 41-1 shows how IP SLAs begins when the source device sends
a generated packet to the destination device. After the destination device receives the packet, depending
on the type of IP SLAs operation, it responds with time-stamp information for the source to make the
calculation on performance metrics. An IP SLAs operation performs a network measurement from the
source device to a destination in the network using a specific protocol such as UDP.
Figure 41-1 Cisco IOS IP SLAs Operation
Performance
Any IP device management
application
IP SLA measurement
and IP SLA responder to
IP SLA Responder SNMP
IP SLA IP SLA
IP network
121381
IP SLA responder IP SLA source
IP SLA measurement
and IP SLA responder to
IP SLA Responder
To implement IP SLAs network performance measurement, you need to perform these tasks:
1. Enable the IP SLAs responder, if required.
2. Configure the required IP SLAs operation type.
3. Configure any options available for the specified operation type.
4. Configure threshold conditions, if required.
5. Schedule the operation to run, then let the operation run for a period of time to gather statistics.
6. Display and interpret the results of the operation using the Cisco IOS CLI or a network
management system (NMS) system with SNMP.
For more information about IP SLAs operations, see the operation-specific chapters in the Cisco IOS IP
SLAs Configuration Guide at this URL:
Note The switch does not support Voice over IP (VoIP) service levels using the gatekeeper registration delay
operations measurements. Before configuring any IP SLAs application, you can use the show ip sla
application privileged EXEC command to verify that the operation type is supported on your software
image.

OL-8553-06 41-3
IP SLAs Responder and IP SLAs Control Protocol

The IP SLAs responder is a component embedded in the destination Cisco device that allows the system
to anticipate and respond to IP SLAs request packets. The responder provides accurate measurements
without the need for dedicated probes. The responder uses the Cisco IOS IP SLAs Control Protocol to
provide a mechanism through which it can be notified on which port it should listen and respond. Only
a Cisco IOS device can be a source for a destination IP SLAs Responder.
Note The IP SLAs responder can be a Cisco IOS Layer 2, responder-configurable switch, such as a
Catalyst 2960, or a Cisco ME 2400 or IE 3000 switch, or a Catalyst 3560 or 3750 switch running the IP
base image. The responder does not need to support full IP SLAs functionality.
Figure 41-1 shows where the Cisco IOS IP SLAs responder fits in the IP network. The responder listens
on a specific port for control protocol messages sent by an IP SLAs operation. Upon receipt of the
control message, it enables the specified UDP or TCP port for the specified duration. During this time,
the responder accepts the requests and responds to them. It disables the port after it responds to the IP
SLAs packet, or when the specified time expires. MD5 authentication for control messages is available
for added security.
You do not need to enable the responder on the destination device for all IP SLAs operations. For
example, a responder is not required for services that are already provided by the destination router (such
as Telnet or HTTP). You cannot configure the IP SLAs responder on non-Cisco devices and Cisco IOS
IP SLAs can send operational packets only to services native to those devices.
Response Time Computation for IP SLAs

Switches and routers can take tens of milliseconds to process incoming packets due to other high priority
processes. This delay affects the response times because the test-packet reply might be in a queue while
waiting to be processed. In this situation, the response times would not accurately represent true network
delays. IP SLAs minimizes these processing delays on the source device as well as on the target device
(if the responder is being used) to determine true round-trip times. IP SLAs test packets use time
stamping to minimize the processing delays.
When the IP SLAs responder is enabled, it allows the target device to take time stamps when the packet
arrives on the interface at interrupt level and again just as it is leaving, eliminating the processing time.
This time stamping is made with a granularity of sub-milliseconds (ms).
Figure 41-2 demonstrates how the responder works. Four time stamps are taken to make the calculation
for round-trip time. At the target router, with the responder functionality enabled, time stamp 2 (TS2) is
subtracted from time stamp 3 (TS3) to produce the time spent processing the test packet as represented
by delta. This delta value is then subtracted from the overall round-trip time. Notice that the same
principle is applied by IP SLAs on the source router where the incoming time stamp 4 (TS4) is also taken
at the interrupt level to allow for greater accuracy.

41-4 OL-8553-06
Figure 41-2 Cisco IOS IP SLAs Responder Time Stamping
Source router Target router

T2 Responder
T1 T3
T4
=T3-T2
121380
RTT (Round-trip time) = T4 (Time stamp 4) - T1 (Time stamp 1) -
An additional benefit of the two time stamps at the target device is the ability to track one-way delay,
jitter, and directional packet loss. Because much network behavior is asynchronous, it is critical to have
these statistics. However, to capture one-way delay measurements, you must configure both the source
router and target router with Network Time Protocol (NTP) so that the source and target are
synchronized to the same clock source. One-way jitter measurements do not require clock
synchronization.
IP SLAs Operation Scheduling

When you configure an IP SLAs operation, you must schedule the operation to begin capturing statistics
and collecting error information. You can schedule an operation to start immediately or to start at a
certain month, day, and hour. You can use the pending option to set the operation to start at a later time.
The pending option is an internal state of the operation that is visible through SNMP. The pending state
is also used when an operation is a reaction (threshold) operation waiting to be triggered. You can
schedule a single IP SLAs operation or a group of operations at one time.
You can schedule several IP SLAs operations by using a single command through the Cisco IOS CLI or
the CISCO RTTMON-MIB. Scheduling the operations to run at evenly distributed times allows you to
control the amount of IP SLAs monitoring traffic. This distribution of IP SLAs operations helps
minimize the CPU utilization and thus improves network scalability.
For more details about the IP SLAs multioperations scheduling functionality, see the “IP
SLAs—Multiple Operation Scheduling” chapter of the Cisco IOS IP SLAs Configuration Guide at this
URL:
IP SLAs Operation Threshold Monitoring

To support successful service level agreement monitoring, you must have mechanisms that notify you
immediately of any possible violation. IP SLAs can send SNMP traps that are triggered by events such
as these:
• Connection loss
• Timeout
• Round-trip time threshold
• Average jitter threshold
• One-way packet loss
• One-way jitter

OL-8553-06 41-5
Configuring IP SLAs Operations
• One-way mean opinion score (MOS)

• One-way latency
An IP SLAs threshold violation can also trigger another IP SLAs operation for further analysis. For
example, the frequency could be increased or an ICMP path echo or ICMP path jitter operation could be
initiated for troubleshooting.
Determining the type of threshold and the level to set can be complex, and depends on the type of IP
service being used in the network. For more details on using thresholds with Cisco IOS IP SLAs
operations, see the “IP SLAs—Proactive Threshold Monitoring” chapter of the Cisco IOS IP SLAs
Configuration Guide at this URL:

Note This section does not include configuration information for all available operations as the configuration
information details are included in the Cisco IOS IP SLAs Configuration Guide. It does include several
operations as examples, including configuring the responder, configuring UDP jitter operation, which
requires a responder, and configuring ICMP echo operation, which does not require a responder. A
switch running the IP base image supports only IP SLAs responder functionality. The switch must be
running the IP services image for full IP SLAs functionality.
For details about configuring other operations, see he Cisco IOS IP SLAs Configuration Guide at this
URL:
This section includes this information:
• Configuring the IP SLAs Responder, page 41-8
• Analyzing IP Service Levels by Using the UDP Jitter Operation, page 41-8
• Analyzing IP Service Levels by Using the ICMP Echo Operation, page 41-11
No IP SLAs operations are configured.
For information on the IP SLAs commands, see the Cisco IOS IP SLAs Command Reference, Release
12.4T command reference at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/ipsla/command/reference/sla_book.html

41-6 OL-8553-06
For detailed descriptions and configuration procedures, see the Cisco IOS IP SLAs Configuration Guide,
Release 12.4T at this URL:
Note that not all of the IP SLAs commands or operations described in this guide are supported on the
switch. The switch supports IP service level analysis by using UDP jitter, UDP echo, HTTP, TCP
connect, ICMP echo, ICMP path echo, ICMP path jitter, FTP, DNS, and DHCP, as well as multiple
operation scheduling and proactive threshold monitoring. It does not support VoIP service levels using
the gatekeeper registration delay operations measurements.
Before configuring any IP SLAs application, you can use the show ip sla application privileged EXEC
command to verify that the operation type is supported on your software image. This is an example of
the output from the command:
Switch# show ip sla application
IP SLAs
Version: 2.2.0 Round Trip Time MIB, Infrastructure Engine-II
Time of last change in whole IP SLAs: 22:17:39.117 UTC Fri Jun
Estimated system max number of entries: 15801
Estimated number of configurable operations: 15801

Number of Entries configured : 0
Number of active Entries : 0
Number of pending Entries : 0
Number of inactive Entries : 0
Supported Operation Types

Type of Operation to Perform: 802.1agEcho
Type of Operation to Perform: 802.1agJitter
Type of Operation to Perform: dhcp
Type of Operation to Perform: dns
Type of Operation to Perform: echo
Type of Operation to Perform: ftp
Type of Operation to Perform: http
Type of Operation to Perform: jitter
Type of Operation to Perform: pathEcho
Type of Operation to Perform: pathJitter
Type of Operation to Perform: tcpConnect
Type of Operation to Perform: udpEcho
IP SLAs low memory water mark: 21741224

OL-8553-06 41-7
Configuring the IP SLAs Responder

The IP SLAs responder is available only on Cisco IOS software-based devices, including some Layer 2
switches that do not support full IP SLAs functionality, such as the Catalyst 2960 or the Cisco ME 2400
or IE 3000 switch. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the IP SLAs
responder on the target device (the operational target):
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip sla responder {tcp-connect | Configure the switch as an IP SLAs responder.
udp-echo} ipaddress ip-address port
The optional keywords have these meanings:
port-number
• tcp-connect—Enable the responder for TCP connect operations.
• udp-echo—Enable the responder for User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
echo or jitter operations.
• ipaddress ip-address—Enter the destination IP address.
• port port-number—Enter the destination port number.
Note The IP address and port number must match those configured on
the source device for the IP SLAs operation.
Step 4 show ip sla responder Verify the IP SLAs responder configuration on the device.
To disable the IP SLAs responder, enter the no ip sla responder global configuration command. This
example shows how to configure the device as a responder for the UDP jitter IP SLAs operation in the
next procedure:
Switch(config)# ip sla responder udp-echo 172.29.139.134 5000
Note For the IP SLAs responder to function, you must also configure a source device, such as a Catalyst 3750
or Catalyst 3560 switch running the IP services image, that has full IP SLAs support. Refer to the
documentation for the source device for configuration information.
Analyzing IP Service Levels by Using the UDP Jitter Operation

Jitter means interpacket delay variance. When multiple packets are sent consecutively 10 ms apart from
source to destination, if the network is behaving correctly, the destination should receive them 10 ms
apart. But if there are delays in the network (like queuing, arriving through alternate routes, and so on)
the arrival delay between packets might be more than or less than 10 ms with a positive jitter value
meaning that the packets arrived more than 10 ms apart. If the packets arrive 12 ms apart, positive jitter
is 2 ms; if the packets arrive 8 ms apart, negative jitter is 2 ms. For delay-sensitive networks, positive
jitter values are undesirable, and a jitter value of 0 is ideal.

41-8 OL-8553-06
In addition to monitoring jitter, the IP SLAs UDP jitter operation can be used as a multipurpose data
gathering operation. The packets IP SLAs generates carry packet sending and receiving sequence
information and sending and receiving time stamps from the source and the operational target. Based on
these, UDP jitter operations measure this data:
• Per-direction jitter (source to destination and destination to source)
• Per-direction packet-loss
• Per-direction delay (one-way delay)
• Round-trip delay (average round-trip time)
Because the paths for the sending and receiving of data can be different (asymmetric), you can use the
per-direction data to more readily identify where congestion or other problems are occurring in the
network.
The UDP jitter operation generates synthetic (simulated) UDP traffic and sends a number of UDP
packets, each of a specified size, sent a specified number of milliseconds apart, from a source router to
a target router, at a given frequency. By default, ten packet-frames, each with a payload size of 10 bytes
are generated every 10 ms, and the operation is repeated every 60 seconds. You can configure each of
these parameters to best simulate the IP service you want to provide.
To provide accurate one-way delay (latency) measurements, time synchronization, such as that provided
by NTP, is required between the source and the target device. Time synchronization is not required for
the one-way jitter and packet loss measurements. If the time is not synchronized between the source and
target devices, one-way jitter and packet loss data is returned, but values of 0 are returned for the
one-way delay measurements provided by the UDP jitter operation
Note Before you configure a UDP jitter operation on the source device, you must enable the IP SLAs
responder on the target device (the operational target).
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure UDP jitter operation on the source
device:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip sla operation-number Create an IP SLAs operation, and enter IP SLAs configuration mode.

OL-8553-06 41-9
Command Purpose
Step 3 udp-jitter {destination-ip-address Configure the IP SLAs operation as a UDP jitter operation, and enter UDP
| destination-hostname} jitter configuration mode.
destination-port [source-ip
• destination-ip-address | destination-hostname—Specify the destination IP
{ip-address | hostname}]
address or hostname.
[source-port port-number]
[control {enable | disable}] • destination-port—Specify the destination port number in the range from 1
[num-packets number-of-packets] to 65535.
[interval interpacket-interval] • (Optional) source-ip {ip-address | hostname}—Specify the source IP
address or hostname. When a source IP address or hostname is not
specified, IP SLAs chooses the IP address nearest to the destination
• (Optional) source-port port-number—Specify the source port number in
the range from 1 to 65535. When a port number is not specified, IP SLAs
chooses an available port.
• (Optional) control—Enable or disable sending of IP SLAs control
messages to the IP SLAs responder. By default, IP SLAs control messages
are sent to the destination device to establish a connection with the IP
SLAs responder
• (Optional) num-packets number-of-packets—Enter the number of
packets to be generated. The range is 1 to 6000; the default is 10.
• (Optional) interval inter-packet-interval—Enter the interval between
sending packets in milliseconds. The range is 1 to 6000; the default value
is 20 ms.
Step 4 frequency seconds (Optional) Set the rate at which a specified IP SLAs operation repeats. The
range is from 1 to 604800 seconds; the default is 60 seconds.
Step 5 exit Exit UDP jitter configuration mode, and return to global configuration mode.
Step 6 ip sla monitor schedule Configure the scheduling parameters for an individual IP SLAs operation.
operation-number [life {forever |
• operation-number—Enter the RTR entry number.
seconds}] [start-time {hh:mm [:ss]
[month day | day month] | pending • (Optional) life—Set the operation to run indefinitely (forever) or for a
| now | after hh:mm:ss] [ageout specific number of seconds. The range is from 0 to 2147483647. The
seconds] [recurring] default is 3600 seconds (1 hour).
• (Optional) start-time—Enter the time for the operation to begin collecting
information:
– To start at a specific time, enter the hour, minute, second (in 24-hour
notation), and day of the month. If no month is entered, the default is
the current month.
– Enter pending to select no information collection until a start time is
selected.
– Enter now to start the operation immediately.
– Enter after hh:mm:ss to show that the operation should start after the
entered time has elapsed.
• (Optional) ageout seconds—Enter the number of seconds to keep the
operation in memory when it is not actively collecting information. The
range is 0 to 2073600 seconds, the default is 0 seconds (never ages out).
• (Optional) recurring—Set the operation to automatically run every day.

41-10 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 8 show ip sla configuration (Optional) Display configuration values, including all defaults for all IP SLAs
[operation-number] operations or a specified operation.
startup-config
To disable the IP SLAs operation, enter the no ip sla operation-number global configuration command.
This example shows how to configure a UDP jitter IP SLAs operation:
Switch(config)# ip sla 10
Switch(config-ip-sla)# udp-jitter 172.29.139.134 5000
Switch(config-ip-sla-jitter)# frequency 30
Switch(config-ip-sla-jitter)# exit
Switch(config)# ip sla schedule 5 start-time now life forever
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show ip sla configuration 10
IP SLAs, Infrastructure Engine-II.
Entry number: 10
Owner:
Tag:
Type of operation to perform: udp-jitter
Target address/Source address: 1.1.1.1/0.0.0.0
Target port/Source port: 2/0
Request size (ARR data portion): 32
Operation timeout (milliseconds): 5000
Packet Interval (milliseconds)/Number of packets: 20/10
Type Of Service parameters: 0x0
Verify data: No
Vrf Name:
Control Packets: enabled
Schedule:
Operation frequency (seconds): 30
Next Scheduled Start Time: Pending trigger
Group Scheduled : FALSE
Randomly Scheduled : FALSE
Life (seconds): 3600
Entry Ageout (seconds): never
Recurring (Starting Everyday): FALSE
Status of entry (SNMP RowStatus): notInService
Threshold (milliseconds): 5000
Distribution Statistics:
Number of statistic hours kept: 2
Number of statistic distribution buckets kept: 1
Statistic distribution interval (milliseconds): 20
Enhanced History:
Analyzing IP Service Levels by Using the ICMP Echo Operation

The ICMP echo operation measures end-to-end response time between a Cisco device and any devices
using IP. Response time is computed by measuring the time taken between sending an ICMP echo
request message to the destination and receiving an ICMP echo reply. Many customers use IP SLAs
ICMP-based operations, in-house ping testing, or ping-based dedicated probes for response time
measurements between the source IP SLAs device and the destination IP device. The IP SLAs ICMP
echo operation conforms to the same specifications as ICMP ping testing, and the two methods result in
the same response times.

OL-8553-06 41-11
Note This operation does not require the IP SLAs responder to be enabled.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure an ICMP echo operation on the
source device:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip sla operation-number Create an IP SLAs operation and enter IP SLAs configuration mode.
Step 3 icmp-echo {destination-ip-address Configure the IP SLAs operation as an ICMP Echo operation and enter ICMP
| destination-hostname} [source-ip echo configuration mode.
{ip-address | hostname} |
• destination-ip-address | destination-hostname—Specify the destination IP
source-interface interface-id]
address or hostname.
• (Optional) source-ip {ip-address | hostname}—Specify the source IP
address or hostname. When a source IP address or hostname is not
specified, IP SLAs chooses the IP address nearest to the destination
• (Optional) source-interface interface-id—Specify the source interface
for the operation.
Step 4 frequency seconds (Optional) Set the rate at which a specified IP SLAs operation repeats. The
range is from 1 to 604800 seconds; the default is 60 seconds.
Step 5 exit Exit UDP jitter configuration mode, and return to global configuration mode.
Step 6 ip sla schedule operation-number Configure the scheduling parameters for an individual IP SLAs operation.
[life {forever | seconds}]
• operation-number—Enter the RTR entry number.
[start-time {hh:mm [:ss] [month
day | day month] | pending | now | • (Optional) life—Set the operation to run indefinitely (forever) or for a
after hh:mm:ss] [ageout seconds] specific number of seconds. The range is from 0 to 2147483647. The
[recurring] default is 3600 seconds (1 hour)
• (Optional) start-time—Enter the time for the operation to begin collecting
information:
– To start at a specific time, enter the hour, minute, second (in 24-hour
notation), and day of the month. If no month is entered, the default is
the current month.
– Enter pending to select no information collection until a start time is
selected.
– Enter now to start the operation immediately.
– Enter after hh:mm:ss to indicate that the operation should start after
the entered time has elapsed.
• (Optional) ageout seconds—Enter the number of seconds to keep the
operation in memory when it is not actively collecting information. The
range is 0 to 2073600 seconds; the default is 0 seconds (never ages out).
• (Optional) recurring—Set the operation to automatically run every day.

41-12 OL-8553-06
Monitoring IP SLAs Operations
Command Purpose
Step 8 show ip sla configuration (Optional) Display configuration values including all defaults for all IP SLAs
[operation-number] operations or a specified operation.
startup-config
To disable the IP SLAs operation, enter the no ip sla operation-number global configuration command.
This example shows how to configure an ICMP echo IP SLAs operation:
Switch(config)# ip sla 12
Switch(config-ip-sla)# icmp-echo 172.29.139.134
Switch(config-ip-sla-echo)# frequency 30
Switch(config-ip-sla-echo)# exit
Switch(config)# ip sla schedule 5 start-time now life forever
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show ip sla configuration 22
IP SLAs, Infrastructure Engine-II.
Entry number: 12
Owner:
Tag:
Type of operation to perform: echo
Target address: 2.2.2.2
Source address: 0.0.0.0
Request size (ARR data portion): 28
Operation timeout (milliseconds): 5000
Type Of Service parameters: 0x0
Verify data: No
Vrf Name:
Schedule:
Operation frequency (seconds): 60
Next Scheduled Start Time: Pending trigger
Group Scheduled : FALSE
Randomly Scheduled : FALSE
Life (seconds): 3600
Entry Ageout (seconds): never
Recurring (Starting Everyday): FALSE
Status of entry (SNMP RowStatus): notInService
Threshold (milliseconds): 5000
Distribution Statistics:
Number of statistic hours kept: 2
Number of statistic distribution buckets kept: 1
Statistic distribution interval (milliseconds): 20
History Statistics:
Number of history Lives kept: 0
Number of history Buckets kept: 15
History Filter Type: None
Enhanced History:

Use the User EXEC or Privileged EXEC commands in Table 41-1 to display IP SLAs operations
configuration and results.

OL-8553-06 41-13
Table 41-1 Monitoring IP SLAs Operations
Command Purpose
show ip sla application Display global information about Cisco IOS IP SLAs.
show ip sla authentication Display IP SLAs authentication information.
show ip sla configuration [entry-number] Display configuration values including all defaults for
all IP SLAs operations or a specific operation.
show ip sla enhanced-history {collection-statistics | distribution Display enhanced history statistics for collected history
statistics} [entry-number] buckets or distribution statistics for all IP SLAs
operations or a specific operation.
show ip sla ethernet-monitor configuration [entry-number] Display IP SLAs automatic Ethernet configuration.
show ip sla group schedule [schedule-entry-number] Display IP SLAs group scheduling configuration and
details.
show ip sla history [entry-number | full | tabular] Display history collected for all IP SLAs operations
show ip sla mpls-lsp-monitor {collection-statistics | Display MPLS label switched path (LSP) Health
configuration | ldp operational-state | scan-queue | summary Monitor operations,
[entry-number] | neighbors}
show ip sla reaction-configuration [entry-number] Display the configured proactive threshold monitoring
settings for all IP SLAs operations or a specific
operation.
show ip sla reaction-trigger [entry-number] Display the reaction trigger information for all IP SLAs
operations or a specific operation.
show ip sla responder Display information about the IP SLAs responder.
show ip sla statistics [entry-number | aggregated | details] Display current or aggregated operational status and
statistics.

41-14 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 42
Configuring Enhanced Object Tracking
This chapter describes how to configure enhanced object tracking on the Catalyst 3560 switch. This
feature provides a more complete alternative to the Hot Standby Routing Protocol (HSRP) tracking
mechanism. which allows you to track the line-protocol state of an interface. If the line protocol state of
an interface goes down, the HSRP priority of the interface is reduced and another HSRP device with a
higher priority becomes active. The enhanced object tracking feature separates the tracking mechanism
from HSRP and creates a separate, standalone tracking process that can be used by processes other than
HSRP. This allows tracking other objects in addition to the interface line-protocol state. A client process,
such as HSRP or Gateway Local Balancing Protocol (GLBP), can register an interest in tracking objects
and request notification when the tracked object changes state.This feature increases the availability and
speed of recovery of a routing system and decreases outages and outage duration.
For more information about enhanced object tracking and the commands used to configure it, see this
URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1839/products_feature_guide09186a00801541be
.html
The chapter includes these sections:
• Understanding Enhanced Object Tracking, page 42-1
• Configuring Enhanced Object Tracking Features, page 42-2
• Monitoring Enhanced Object Tracking, page 42-12
Understanding Enhanced Object Tracking

Each tracked object has a unique number that is specified in the tracking command-line interface (CLI).
Client processes use this number to track a specific object. The tracking process periodically polls the
tracked object for value changes and sends any changes (as up or down values) to interested client
processes, either immediately or after a specified delay. Several clients can track the same object, and
can take different actions when the object changes state.
You can also track a combination of objects in a list by using either a weight threshold or a percentage
threshold to measure the state of the list. You can combine objects using Boolean logic. A tracked list
with a Boolean “AND” function requires that each object in the list be in an up state for the tracked
object to be up. A tracked list with a Boolean “OR” function needs only one object in the list to be in the
up state for the tracked object to be up.

OL-8553-06 42-1
Chapter 42 Configuring Enhanced Object Tracking
Configuring Enhanced Object Tracking Features

These sections describe configuring enhanced object tracking:
• Tracking Interface Line-Protocol or IP Routing State, page 42-2
• Configuring a Tracked List, page 42-3
• Configuring HSRP Object Tracking, page 42-7
• Configuring Other Tracking Characteristics, page 42-8
• Configuring IP SLAs Object Tracking, page 42-9
• Configuring Static Routing Support, page 42-10
No type of object tracking is configured.
Tracking Interface Line-Protocol or IP Routing State

You can track either the interface line protocol state or the interface IP routing state. When you track the
IP routing state, these three conditions are required for the object to be up:
• IP routing must be enabled and active on the interface.
• The interface line-protocol state must be up.
• The interface IP address must be known.
If all three of these conditions are not met, the IP routing state is down.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to track the line-protocol state or IP routing
state of an interface:
Command Purpose
Step 2 track object-number interface (Optional) Create a tracking list to track the line-protocol state of an interface
interface-id line-protocol and enter tracking configuration mode.
• The object-number identifies the tracked object and can be from 1 to 500.
• The interface interface-id is the interface being tracked.
Step 3 delay {up seconds [down seconds] (Optional) Specify a period of time in seconds to delay communicating state
| [up seconds] down seconds} changes of a tracked object. The range is from 1 to 180 seconds.
Step 5 track object-number interface (Optional) Create a tracking list to track the IP routing state of an interface, and
interface-id ip routing enter tracking configuration mode. IP-route tracking tracks an IP route in the
routing table and the ability of an interface to route IP packets.
• The object-number identifies the tracked object and can be from 1 to 500.
• The interface interface-id is the interface being tracked.

42-2 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 6 delay {up seconds [down seconds] (Optional) Specify a period of time in seconds to delay communicating state
| [up seconds] down seconds} changes of a tracked object. The range is from 1 to 180 seconds.
Step 8 show track object-number Verify that the specified objects are being tracked.
startup-config
This example configures the tracking of an interface line-protocol state and verifies the configuration:
Switch(config)# track 33 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 line-protocol
Switch(config-track)# end
Switch# show track 33
Track 33
Interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 line-protocol
Line protocol is Down (hw down)
1 change, last change 00:18:28
Configuring a Tracked List

You can configure a tracked list of objects with a Boolean expression, a weight threshold, or a
percentage threshold. A tracked list contains one or more objects. An object must exist before it can be
added to the tracked list.
• You configure a Boolean expression to specify calculation by using either “AND” or “OR”
operators.
• When you measure the tracked list state by a weight threshold, you assign a weight number to each
object in the tracked list. The state of the tracked list is determined by whether or not the threshold
was met. The state of each object is determined by comparing the total weight of all objects against
a threshold weight for each object.
• When you measure the tracked list by a percentage threshold, you assign a percentage threshold to
all objects in the tracked list. The state of each object is determined by comparing the assigned
percentages of each object to the list.
Configuring a Tracked List with a Boolean Expression

Configuring a tracked list with a Boolean expression enables calculation by using either “AND” or “OR”
operators. For example, when tracking two interfaces using the “AND” operator, up means that both
interfaces are up, and down means that either interface is down.

OL-8553-06 42-3
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a tracked list of objects with a
Boolean expression:
Command Purpose
Step 2 track track-number list boolean Configure a tracked list object, and enter tracking configuration mode. The
{and | or} track-number can be from 1 to 500.
• boolean—Specify the state of the tracked list based on a Boolean
calculation.
• and—Specify that the list is up if all objects are up or down if one or
more objects are down.
• or—Specify that the list is up if one object is up or down if all objects
are down.
Step 3 object object-number [not] Specify the object to be tracked. The range is from 1 to 500. The keyword
not negates the state of the object, which means that when the object is up,
the tracked list detects the object as down.
Note An object must exist before you can add it to a tracked list.
Step 4 delay {up seconds [down seconds] | (Optional) Specify a period of time in seconds to delay communicating state
[up seconds] down seconds} changes of a tracked object. The range is from 1 to 180 seconds.
Use the no track track-number global configuration command to delete the tracked list.
This example configures track list 4 with a Boolean AND expression that contains two objects with one
object state negated. If the list is up, the list detects that object 2 is down:
Switch(config)# track 4 list boolean and
Switch(config-track)# object 1
Switch(config-track)# object 2 not
Switch(config-track)# exit
Configuring a Tracked List with a Weight Threshold

To track by weight threshold, configure a tracked list of objects, specify that weight is used as the
threshold, and configure a weight for each of its objects. The state of each object is determined by
comparing the total weight of all objects that are up against a threshold weight for each object.
You cannot use the Boolean “NOT” operator in a weight threshold list.

42-4 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a tracked list of objects by using a
weight threshold and to configure a weight for each object:
Command Purpose
Step 2 track track-number list threshold Configure a tracked list object and enter tracking configuration mode. The
weight track-number can be from 1 to 500.
• threshold—Specify the state of the tracked list based on a threshold.
• weight—Specify that the threshold is based on weight.
Step 3 object object-number [weight Specify the object to be tracked. The range is from 1 to 500. The optional
weight-number] weight weight-number specifies a threshold weight for the object. The range
is from 1 to 255.
Step 4 threshold weight {up number | Specify the threshold weight.
[down number]}
• up number—The valid range is from 1 to 255.
• down number—(Optional) The range depends on the number selected
for the up number. If you configure the up number as 25, the range
shown for the down number is 0 to 24.
The example configures track list 4 to track by weight threshold. If object 1 and object 2 are down, then
track list 4 is up because object 3 satisfies the up threshold value of up 30. But if object 3 is down, both
objects 1 and 2 must be up in order to satisfy the threshold weight.
Switch(config)# track 4 list threshold weight
Switch(config-track)# object 1 weight 15
Switch(config-track)# threshold weight up 30 down 10
This configuration can be useful if object 1 and object 2 represent two small bandwidth connections and
object 3 represents one large bandwidth connection. The configured down 10 value means that once the
tracked object is up, it will not go down until the threshold value is equal to or lower than 10, which in
this example means that all connections are down.
Configuring a Tracked List with a Percentage Threshold

To track by percentage threshold, configure a tracked list of objects, specify that a percentage will be
used as the threshold, and specify a percentage for all objects in the list. The state of the list is determined
by comparing the assigned percentage of each object to the list.
You cannot use the Boolean “NOT” operator in a percentage threshold list.

OL-8553-06 42-5
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a tracked list of objects by using a
percentage threshold:
Command Purpose
Step 2 track track-number list threshold Configure a tracked list object and enter tracking configuration mode. The
percentage track-number can be from 1 to 500.
• threshold—Specify the state of the tracked list based on a threshold.
• percentage—Specify that the threshold is based on percentage.
Step 3 object object-number Specify the object to be tracked. The range is from 1 to 500.
Step 4 threshold percentage {up number | Specify the threshold percentage.
[down number]}
• up number—The valid range is from 1 to 100.
• down number]—(Optional) The range depends on the number selected
for the up number. If you configure the up number as 25, the range
shown for the down number is 0 to 24.
This example configures tracked list 4 with three objects and a specified percentages to measure the state
of the list:
Switch(config)# track 4 list threshold percentage
Switch(config-track)# threshold percentage up 51 down 10

42-6 OL-8553-06
Configuring HSRP Object Tracking

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a standby HSRP group to track an
object and change the HSRP priority based on the object state:
Command Purpose
Step 2 track object-number {interface (Optional) Create a tracking list to track the configured state and enter
interface-id {line-protocol | ip tracking configuration mode.
routing} | ip route
• The object-number range is from 1 to 500.
ip-address/prefix-length {metric
threshold | reachability} | list • Enter interface interface-id to select an interface to track.
{boolean {and | or}} | {threshold • Enter line-protocol to track the interface line protocol state or enter ip
{weight | percentage}}} routing to track the interface IP routing state.
• Enter ip route ip-address/prefix-length to track the state of an IP route.
• Enter metric threshold to track the threshold metric or enter
reachability to track if the route is reachable.
The default up threshold is 254 and the default down threshold is 255.
• Enter list to track objects grouped in a list. Configure the list as
described on the previous pages.
– For boolean, see the “Configuring a Tracked List with a Boolean
Expression” section on page 42-3
– For threshold weight, see the “Configuring a Tracked List with a
Weight Threshold” section on page 42-4
– For threshold percentage, see the “Configuring a Tracked List with
a Percentage Threshold” section on page 42-5
Note Repeat this step for each interface to be tracked.
Step 4 interface interface-id Enter interface configuration mode.
Step 5 standby [group-number] ip Create (or enable) the HSRP group by using its number and virtual IP
[ip-address [secondary]] address.
• (Optional) group-number—Enter a group number on the interface for
which HSRP is being enabled. The range is 0 to 255; the default is 0. If
there is only one HSRP group, you do not need to enter a group number.
• (Optional on all but one interface) ip-address—Specify the virtual IP
address of the hot standby router interface. You must enter the virtual IP
address for at least one of the interfaces; it can be learned on the other
interfaces.
• (Optional) secondary—Specify that the IP address is a secondary hot
standby router interface. If this keyword is omitted, the configured
address is the primary IP address.

OL-8553-06 42-7
Command Purpose
Step 6 standby [group-number] track Configure HSRP to track an object and change the hot standby priority based
object-number [decrement on the state of the object.
[priority-decrement]]
• (Optional) group-number—Enter the group number to which the
tracking applies.
• object-number—Enter a number representing the object to be tracked.
The range is from 1 to 500; the default is 1.
• (Optional) decrement priority-decrement—Specify the amount by
which the hot standby priority for the router is decremented (or
incremented) when the tracked object goes down (or comes back up).
The range is from 1 to 255; the default is 10.
Step 8 show standby Verify the standby router IP address and tracking states.
Configuring Other Tracking Characteristics

You can also use the enhanced object tracking for tracking other characteristics.
• You can track the reachability of an IP route by using the track ip route reachability global
• You can use the track ip route metric threshold global configuration command to determine if a
route is above or below threshold.
• You can use the track resolution global configuration command to change the metric resolution
default values for routing protocols.
• You can use the track timer tracking configuration command to configure the tracking process to
periodically poll tracked objects.
Use the show track privileged EXEC command to verify enhanced object tracking configuration.
For more information about enhanced object tracking and the commands used to configure it, see this
URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1839/products_feature_guide09186a00801541be
.html

42-8 OL-8553-06
Configuring IP SLAs Object Tracking

Cisco IOS IP Service Level Agreements (IP SLAs) is a network performance measurement and
diagnostics tool that uses active monitoring by generating traffic to measure network performance. Cisco
IP SLAs operations collects real-time metrics that you can use for network troubleshooting, design, and
analysis.
For more information about Cisco IP SLAs on the switch, see Chapter 41, “Configuring Cisco IOS IP
SLAs Operations.” For IP SLAs command information see the Cisco IOS IP SLAs Command Reference,
Release 12.4T at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6441/products_command_reference_book09186a008049739b
.html
Object tracking of IP SLAs operations allows clients to track the output from IP SLAs objects and use
this information to trigger an action. Every IP SLAs operation maintains an SNMP operation return-code
value, such as OK or OverThreshold, that can be interpreted by the tracking process. You can track two
aspects of IP SLAs operation: state and reachability. For state, if the return code is OK, the track state is
up; if the return code is not OK, the track state is down. For reachability, if the return code is OK or
OverThreshold, reachability is up; if not OK, reachability is down.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to track the state of an IP SLAs operation or the
reachability of an IP SLAs IP host:
Command Purpose
Step 2 track object-number rtr Enter tracking configuration mode to track the state of an IP SLAs operation.
operation-number state
• The operation-number range is from 1 to 2147483647.
Step 5 track object-number rtr Enter tracking configuration mode to track the reachability of an IP SLAs IP
operation-number reachability host.
• The operation-number range is from 1 to 2147483647.
Step 8 show track object-number Display tracking information to verify the configuration.
This example shows how to configure and display IP SLAs state tracking:
Switch(config)# track 2 200 state
Switch(config)# end
Track 2
Response Time Reporter 1 state
State is Down

OL-8553-06 42-9
Latest operation return code: over threshold

Latest RTT (millisecs) 4
Tracked by:
HSRP Ethernet0/1 3
This example output shows whether a route is reachable:

Switch(config)# track 3 500 reachability
Switch(config)# end
Track 3
Response Time Reporter 1 reachability
Reachability is Up
Latest operation return code: over threshold
Latest RTT (millisecs) 4
Tracked by:
HSRP Ethernet0/1 3
Configuring Static Routing Support

Switches that are running the IP services image with Cisco IOS release 12.2(46)SE or later support
enhanced object tracking static routing. Static routing support using enhanced object tracking provides
the ability for the switch to use ICMP pings to identify when a preconfigured static route or a DHCP
route goes down. When tracking is enabled, the system tracks the state of the route and informs the client
when that state changes. Static route object tracking uses Cisco IP SLAs to generate ICMP pings to
monitor the state of the connection to the primary gateway.
• For more information about Cisco IP SLAs support on the switch, see Chapter 41, “Configuring
Cisco IOS IP SLAs Operations.”
• For more information about static route object tracking, see this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_3/12_3x/12_3xe/feature/guide/dbackupx.html
You use this process to configure static route object tracking:
Step 1 Configure a primary interface for static routing or for DHCP.

Step 2 Configure an IP SLAs agent to ping an IP address using a primary interface and a track object to monitor
the state of the agent.
Step 3 Configure a default static default route using a secondary interface. This route is used only if the primary
route is removed.
Configuring a Primary Interface

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a primary interface for static
routing:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Select a primary or secondary interface and enter interface
configuration mode.

42-10 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 description string Add a description to the interface.
Step 4 ip address ip-address mask [secondary] Set the primary or secondary IP address for the interface.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a primary interface for DHCP:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Select a primary or secondary interface and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 3 description string Add a description to the interface.
Step 4 ip dhcp client route track number Configure the DCHP client to associate any added routes with the
specified track number. Valid numbers are from 1 to 500.
Step 5 ip address dhcp Acquire an IP address on an Ethernet interface from DHCP.
Configuring a Cisco IP SLAs Monitoring Agent and Track Object

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure network monitoring with Cisco IP
SLAs:

Step 2 ip sla operation-number Begin configuring a Cisco IP SLAs operation and enter IP SLA
configuration mode.
Step 3 icmp-echo {destination-ip-address | Configure a Cisco IP SLAs end-to-end ICMP echo response time
destination hostname [source- ipaddr operation and enter IP SLAs ICMP echo configuration mode.
{ip-address | hostname source-interface
interface-id]
Step 4 timeout milliseconds Set the amount of time for which the operation waits for a response
from its request packet.
Step 5 frequency seconds Set the rate at which the operation is sent into the network.
Step 6 threshold milliseconds Set the rising threshold (hysteresis) that generates a reaction event
and stores history information for the operation.
Step 7 exit Exit IP SLAs ICMP echo configuration mode.
Step 8 ip sla schedule operation-number [life Configure the scheduling parameters for a single IP SLAs operation.
{forever | seconds}] start-time time |
pending | now | after time] [ageout
seconds] [recurring]
Step 9{ track object-number rtr operation-number Track the state of a Cisco IOS IP SLAs operation and enter tracking
{state | reachability} configuration mode.

OL-8553-06 42-11
Monitoring Enhanced Object Tracking
Step 11 show track object-number Display tracking information to verify the configuration.
Configuring a Routing Policy and Default Route

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a routing policy for backup static
routing by using object tracking. For more details about the commands in the procedure, see this URL:
:

Step 2 access-list access-list-number Define an extended IP access list. Configure any optional
characteristics.
Step 3 route-map map-tag [permit | deny] Enter route-map configuration mode and define conditions for
[sequence-number] redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another.
Step 4 match ip address {access-list number | Distribute any routes that have a destination network number address
access-list name} that is permitted by a standard or extended access list or performs
policy routing on packets. You can enter multiple numbers or names.
Step 5 set ip next-hop dynamic dhcp For DHCP networks only. Set the next hop to the gateway that was
most recently learned by the DHCP client.
Step 6 set interface interface-id For static routing networks only. Indicate where to send output
packets that pass a match clause of a route map for policy routing.
Step 7 exit Exit route-map configuration mode.
Step 8 ip local policy route-map map-tag Identify a route map to use for local policy routing.
Step 9{ ip route prefix mask {ip-address | For static routing networks only. Establish static routes.
interface-id [ip-address]} [distance] [name]
Entering track track-number specifies that the static route is installed
[permanent | track track-number] [tag tag]
only if the configured track object is up.
Step 11 show ip route track table Display information about the IP route track table.
For configuration examples, see this URL:


Use the privileged EXEC or User EXEC commands in Table 42-1 to display enhanced object tracking
information.
Table 42-1 Commands for Displaying Tracking Information
Command Purpose
show ip route track table Display information about the IP route track table.
show track [object-number] Display information about the all tracking lists or the specified list.

42-12 OL-8553-06
Table 42-1 Commands for Displaying Tracking Information (continued)
Command Purpose
show track brief Display a single line of tracking information output.
show track interface [brief] Display information about tracked interface objects.
show track ip [object-number] [brief] route Display information about tracked IP-route objects.
show track resolution Display the resolution of tracked parameters.
show track timers Display tracked polling interval timers.

OL-8553-06 42-13

42-14 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 43
Configuring Web Cache Services By Using
WCCP
This chapter describes how to configure your Catalyst 3560 switch to redirect traffic to wide-area
application engines (such as the Cisco Cache Engine 550) by using the Web Cache Communication
Protocol (WCCP). This software release supports only WCCP version 2 (WCCPv2).
WCCP is a Cisco-developed content-routing technology that you can use to integrate wide-area
application engines—referred to as application engines—into your network infrastructure. The
application engines transparently store frequently accessed content and then fulfill successive requests
for the same content, eliminating repetitive transmissions of identical content from web servers.
Application engines accelerate content delivery and ensure maximum scalability and availability of
content. In a service-provider network, you can deploy the WCCP and application engine solution at the
points of presence (POPs). In an enterprise network, you can deploy the WCCP and application engine
solution at the regional site and the small branch office.
To use this feature, the switch must be running the IP services image (formerly known as the enhanced
multilayer image [EMI]).
Note For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the “WCCP
Router Configuration Commands” section in the “System Management Commands” part of the Cisco
IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference, Release 12.2. Access this document from the
References.

• Understanding WCCP, page 43-1
• Configuring WCCP, page 43-5
• Monitoring and Maintaining WCCP, page 43-9
Understanding WCCP
The WCCP and Cisco cache engines (or other application engines running WCCP) localize traffic
patterns in the network, enabling content requests to be fulfilled locally.

OL-8553-06 43-1
Chapter 43 Configuring Web Cache Services By Using WCCP
Understanding WCCP
WCCP enables supported Cisco routers and switches to transparently redirect content requests. With
transparent redirection, users do not have to configure their browsers to use a web proxy. Instead, they
can use the target URL to request content, and their requests are automatically redirected to an
application engine. The word transparent means that the end user does not know that a requested file
(such as a web page) came from the application engine instead of from the originally specified server.
When an application engine receives a request, it attempts to service it from its own local cache. If the
requested information is not present, the application engine sends a separate request to the end server to
retrieve the requested information. After receiving the requested information, the application engine
forwards it to the requesting client and also caches it to fulfill future requests.
With WCCP, the application-engine cluster (a series of application engines) can service multiple routers
or switches, as shown Figure 43-1.
Figure 43-1 Cisco Cache Engine and WCCP Network Configuration
Web
clients
Internet
Layer 3
switches
100BASE-T
201294
Cache 1 Cache 2 Cache 3
WCCP Message Exchange

This sequence of events describes the WCCP message exchange:
1. The application engines send their IP addresses to the WCCP-enabled switch by using WCCP,
signaling their presence through a Here I am message. The switch and application engines
communicate to each other through a control channel based on UDP port 2048.
2. The WCCP-enabled switch uses the application engine IP information to create a cluster view (a list
of application engines in the cluster). This view is sent through an I see you message to each
application engine in the cluster, essentially making all the application engines aware of each other.
A stable view is established after the membership of the cluster remains the same for a certain
amount of time.
3. When a stable view is established, the application engine in the cluster with the lowest IP address
is elected as the designated application engine.

43-2 OL-8553-06
Understanding WCCP
WCCP Negotiation
In the exchange of WCCP protocol messages, the designated application engine and the WCCP-enabled
switch negotiate these items:
• Forwarding method (the method by which the switch forwards packets to the application engine).
The switch rewrites the Layer 2 header by replacing the packet destination MAC address with the
target application engine MAC address. It then forwards the packet to the application engine. This
forwarding method requires the target application engine to be directly connected to the switch at
Layer 2.
• Assignment method (the method by which packets are distributed among the application engines in
the cluster). The switch uses some bits of the destination IP address, the source IP address, the
destination Layer 4 port, and the source Layer 4 port to determine which application engine receives
the redirected packets.
• Packet-return method (the method by which packets are returned from the application engine to the
switch for normal forwarding). These are the typical reasons why an application engine rejects
packets and starts the packet-return feature:
– The application engine is overloaded and has no room to service the packets.
– The application engine receives an error message (such as a protocol or authentication error)
from the web server and uses the dynamic client bypass feature. The bypass enables clients to
bypass the application engines and to connect directly to the web server.
The application engine returns a packet to the WCCP-enabled switch to forward to the web server
as if the application engine is not present. The application engine does not intercept the reconnection
attempt. In this way, the application engine effectively cancels the redirection of a packet to the
application engine and creates a bypass flow. If the return method is generic-route encapsulation
(GRE), the switch receives the returned packet through a GRE tunnel that is configured in the
application engine. The switch CPU uses Cisco express forwarding to send these packets to the
target web server. If the return method is Layer 2 rewrite, the packets are forwarded in hardware to
the target web server. When the server responds with the requested information, the switch uses
normal Layer 3 forwarding to return the information to the requesting client.
MD5 Security
WCCP provides an optional security component in each protocol message to enable the switch to use
MD5 authentication on messages between the switch and the application engine. Messages that do not
authenticate by MD5 (when authentication of the switch is enabled) are discarded by the switch. The
password string is combined with the MD5 value to create security for the connection between the switch
and the application engine. You must configure the same password on each application engine.
Packet Redirection and Service Groups

You can configure WCCP to classify traffic for redirection, such as FTP, proxy-web-cache handling, and
audio and video applications. This classification, known as a service group, is based on the protocol type
(TCP or UDP) and the Layer 4 source destination port numbers. The service groups are identified either
by well-known names such as web-cache, which means TCP port 80, or a service number, 0 to 99.
Service groups are configured to map to a protocol and Layer 4 port numbers and are established and
maintained independently. WCCP allows dynamic service groups, where the classification criteria are
provided dynamically by a participating application engine.

OL-8553-06 43-3
Understanding WCCP
You can configure up to 8 service groups on a switch or switch stack and up to 32 cache engines per
service group. WCCP maintains the priority of the service group in the group definition. WCCP uses the
priority to configure the service groups in the switch hardware. For example, if service group 1 has a
priority of 100 and looks for destination port 80, and service group 2 has a priority of 50 and looks for
source port 80, the incoming packet with source and destination port 80 is forwarded by using service
group 1 because it has the higher priority.
WCCP supports a cluster of application engines for every service group. Redirected traffic can be sent
to any one of the application engines. The switch supports the mask assignment method of load
balancing the traffic among the application engines in the cluster for a service group.
After WCCP is configured on the switch, the switch forwards all service group packets received from
clients to the application engines. However, these packets are not redirected:
• Packets originating from the application engine and targeted to the web server.
• Packets originating from the application engine and targeted to the client.
• Packets returned or rejected by the application engine. These packets are sent to the web server.
You can configure a single multicast address per service group for sending and receiving protocol
messages. When there is a single multicast address, the application engine sends a notification to one
address, which provides coverage for all routers in the service group, for example, 225.0.0.0. If you add
and remove routers dynamically, using a single multicast address provides easier configuration because
you do not need to specifically enter the addresses of all devices in the WCCP network.
You can use a router group list to validate the protocol packets received from the application engine.
Packets matching the address in the group list are processed, packets not matching the group list address
are dropped.
To disable caching for specific clients, servers, or client/server pairs, you can use a WCCP redirect
access control list (ACL). Packets that do not match the redirect ACL bypass the cache and are
forwarded normally.
Before WCCP packets are redirected, the switch examines ACLs associated with all inbound features
configured on the interface and permits or denies packet forwarding based on how the packet matches
the entries in the ACL.
Note Only permit ACL entries are supported in WCCP redirect lists.
When packets are redirected, the output ACLs associated with the redirected interface are applied to the
packets. Any ACLs associated with the original port are not applied unless you specifically configure
the required output ACLs on the redirected interfaces.
Unsupported WCCP Features

These WCCP features are not supported in this software release:
• Packet redirection on an outbound interface that is configured by using the ip wccp redirect out
interface configuration command. This command is not supported.
• The GRE forwarding method for packet redirection is not supported.
• The hash assignment method for load balancing is not supported.
• There is no SNMP support for WCCP.

43-4 OL-8553-06
Configuring WCCP
Configuring WCCP
These sections describe how to configure WCCP on your switch:
• Default WCCP Configuration, page 43-5
• WCCP Configuration Guidelines, page 43-5
• Enabling the Web Cache Service, page 43-6 (required)
Default WCCP Configuration

Table 43-1 shows the default WCCP configuration.
Table 43-1 Default WCCP Configuration

WCCP enable state WCCP services are disabled.
Protocol version WCCPv2.
Redirecting traffic received on an interface Disabled.
WCCP Configuration Guidelines

Before configuring WCCP on your switch, make sure to follow these configuration guidelines:
• The application engines and switches in the same service group must be in the same subnetwork
directly connected to the switch that has WCCP enabled.
• Configure the switch interfaces that are connected to the web clients, the application engines, and
the web server as Layer 3 interfaces (routed ports and switch virtual interfaces [SVIs]). For WCCP
packet redirection to work, the servers, application engines, and clients must be on different subnets.
• Use only nonreserved multicast addresses when configuring a single multicast address for each
application engine.
• WCCP entries and PBR entries use the same TCAM region. WCCP is supported only on the
templates that support PBR: access, routing, and dual IPv4/v6 routing.
• When TCAM entries are not available to add WCCP entries, packets are not redirected and are
forwarded by using the standard routing tables.
• The number of available policy-based routing (PBR) labels are reduced as more interfaces are
enabled for WCCP ingress redirection. For every interface that supports service groups, one label is
consumed. The WCCP labels are taken from the PBR labels. You need to monitor and manage the
labels that are available between PBR and WCCP. When labels are not available, the switch cannot
add service groups. However, if another interface has the same sequence of service groups, a new
label is not needed, and the group can be added to the interface.
• The routing maximum transmission unit (MTU) size configured on the stack member switches
should be larger than the client MTU size. The MAC-layer MTU size configured on ports connected
to application engines should take into account the GRE tunnel header bytes.
• You cannot configure WCCP and VPN routing/forwarding (VRF) on the same switch interface.
• You cannot configure WCCP and PBR on the same switch interface.

OL-8553-06 43-5
Configuring WCCP
• You cannot configure WCCP and a private VLAN (PVLAN) on the same switch interface.
Enabling the Web Cache Service

For WCCP packet redirection to operate, you must configure the switch interface connected to the client
to redirect inbound packets.
This procedure shows how to configure these features on routed ports. To configure these features on
SVIs, see the configuration examples that follow the procedure.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the web cache service, to set a
multicast group address or group list, to configure routed interfaces, to redirect inbound packets received
from a client to the application engine, enable an interface to listen for a multicast address, and to set a
password. This procedure is required.
Note Before configuring WCCP commands, configure the SDM template, and reboot the switch. For more
information, see Chapter 8, “Configuring SDM Templates.”
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} Enable the web cache service, and specify the service number which
[group-address groupaddress] corresponds to a dynamic service that is defined by the application
[group-list access-list] [redirect-list engine. By default, this feature is disabled.
access-list] [password
(Optional) For group-address groupaddress, specify the multicast group
encryption-number password]
address used by the switches and the application engines to participate in
the service group.
(Optional) For group-list access-list, if a multicast group address is not
used, specify a list of valid IP addresses that correspond to the application
engines that are participating in the service group.
(Optional) For redirect-list access-list, specify the redirect service for
specific hosts or specific packets from hosts.
(Optional) For password encryption-number password, specify an
encryption number. The range is 0 to 7. Use 0 for not encrypted, and use
7 for proprietary. Specify a password name up to seven characters in
length. The switch combines the password with the MD5 authentication
value to create security for the connection between the switch and the
application engine. By default, no password is configured, and no
authentication is performed.
You must configure the same password on each application engine.
When authentication is enabled, the switch discards messages that are not
authenticated.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the interface connected to the application engine or the web
server, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 4 no switchport Enter Layer 3 mode.
Step 5 ip address ip-address subnet-mask Configure the IP address and subnet mask.

43-6 OL-8553-06
Configuring WCCP
Command Purpose
Step 7 exit Return to global configuration mode. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for each
application engine and web server.
Step 8 interface interface-id Specify the interface connected to the client, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 9 no switchport Enter Layer 3 mode.
Step 10 ip address ip-address subnet-mask Configure the IP address and subnet mask.
Step 12 ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} Redirect packets received from the client to the application engine.
redirect in Enable this on the interface connected to the client.
Step 13 ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} (Optional) When using a multicast group address, group-listen enables
group-listen the interface to listen for the multicast address. Enable this on the
interface connected to the application engine.
Step 14 exit Return to global configuration mode. Repeat Steps 8 through 13 for each
client.
Step 16 show ip wccp web-cache Verify your entries.
and
show running-config
To disable the web cache service, use the no ip wccp web-cache global configuration command. To
disable inbound packet redirection, use the no ip wccp web-cache redirect in interface configuration
command. After completing this procedure, you should configure the application engines in the network.
This example shows how to configure routed interfaces and to enable the web cache service with a
multicast group address and a redirect access list. Gigabit Ethernet port 1 is connected to the application
engine, is configured as a routed port with an IP address of 172.20.10.30, and is re-enabled. Gigabit
Ethernet port 2 is connected through the Internet to the web server, is configured as a routed port with
an IP address of 175.20.20.10, and is re-enabled. Gigabit Ethernet ports 3 to 6 are connected to the
clients and are configured as routed ports with IP addresses 175.20.30.20, 175.20.40.30, 175.20.50.40,
and 175.20.60.50. The switch listens for multicast traffic and redirects packets received from the client
interfaces to the application engine.
Switch(config)# ip wccp web-cache 80 group-address 224.1.1.100 redirect list 12
Switch(config)# access-list 12 permit host 10.1.1.1
Switch(config-if)# ip wccp web-cache group-listen

OL-8553-06 43-7
Configuring WCCP

Switch(config-if)# ip wccp web-cache redirect in
This example shows how to configure SVIs and how to enable the web cache service with a multicast
group list. VLAN 299 is created and configured with an IP address of 175.20.20.10. Gigabit Ethernet
port 1 is connected through the Internet to the web server and is configured as an access port in VLAN
299. VLAN 300 is created and configured with an IP address of 172.20.10.30. Gigabit Ethernet port 2
is connected to the application engine and is configured as an access port in VLAN 300. VLAN 301 is
created and configured with an IP address of 175.20.30.50. Fast Ethernet ports 3 to 6, which are
connected to the clients, are configured as access ports in VLAN 301. The switch redirects packets
received from the client interfaces to the application engine.
Note Only permit ACL entries are being used in the redirect-list; deny entries are unsupported.

Switch(config)# ip wccp web-cache 80 group-list 15

43-8 OL-8553-06
Monitoring and Maintaining WCCP

Switch(config)# interface range gigabitethernet0/3 - 6
Switch(config-if-range)# exit

To monitor and maintain WCCP, use one or more of the privileged EXEC commands in Table 43-2:
Table 43-2 Commands for Monitoring and Maintaining WCCP
Command Purpose
clear ip wccp web-cache Removes statistics for the web-cache service.
show ip wccp web-cache Displays global information related to WCCP.
show ip wccp web-cache detail Displays information for the switch and all application engines in the
WCCP cluster.
show ip interface Displays status about any IP WCCP redirection commands that are
configured on an interface; for example, Web Cache Redirect is
enabled / disabled.
show ip wccp web-cache view Displays which other members have or have not been detected.

OL-8553-06 43-9

43-10 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 44
Configuring IP Multicast Routing
This chapter describes how to configure IP multicast routing on the Catalyst 3560 switch. IP multicasting
is a more efficient way to use network resources, especially for bandwidth-intensive services such as
audio and video. IP multicast routing enables a host (source) to send packets to a group of hosts
(receivers) anywhere within the IP network by using a special form of IP address called the IP multicast
group address. The sending host inserts the multicast group address into the IP destination address field
of the packet, and IP multicast routers and multilayer switches forward incoming IP multicast packets
out all interfaces that lead to members of the multicast group. Any host, regardless of whether it is a
member of a group, can send to a group. However, only the members of a group receive the message.
To use the IP multicast routing features, the switch must be running the IP services image (formerly
known as the enhanced multilayer image [EMI]). To use the PIM stub routing feature, theswitch can be
running the IP base image.
Note For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the Cisco IOS IP
Command Reference, Volume 3 of 3: Multicast, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under

• Understanding Cisco’s Implementation of IP Multicast Routing, page 44-2
• Configuring IP Multicast Routing, page 44-9
• Configuring Advanced PIM Features, page 44-34
• Configuring Optional IGMP Features, page 44-37
• Configuring Optional Multicast Routing Features, page 44-43
• Configuring Basic DVMRP Interoperability Features, page 44-47
• Configuring Advanced DVMRP Interoperability Features, page 44-52
• Monitoring and Maintaining IP Multicast Routing, page 44-60
For information on configuring the Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP), see Chapter 45,
“Configuring MSDP.”

OL-8553-06 44-1
Chapter 44 Configuring IP Multicast Routing
Understanding Cisco’s Implementation of IP Multicast Routing

The Cisco IOS software supports these protocols to implement IP multicast routing:
• Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used among hosts on a LAN and the routers (and
multilayer switches) on that LAN to track the multicast groups of which hosts are members.
• Protocol-Independent Multicast (PIM) protocol is used among routers and multilayer switches to
track which multicast packets to forward to each other and to their directly connected LANs.
• Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) is used on the multicast backbone of the
Internet (MBONE). The software supports PIM-to-DVMRP interaction.
• Cisco Group Management Protocol (CGMP) is used on Cisco routers and multilayer switches
connected to Layer 2 Catalyst switches to perform tasks similar to those performed by IGMP.
Figure 44-1 shows where these protocols operate within the IP multicast environment.
Figure 44-1 IP Multicast Routing Protocols
Internet
MBONE
Cisco Catalyst switch
(CGMP client) DVMRP
CGMP
Host
PIM
Host 44966
IGMP
According to IPv4 multicast standards, the MAC destination multicast address begins with 0100:5e and
is appended by the last 23 bits of the IP address. On the Catalyst 3560 switch, if the multicast packet
does not match the switch multicast address, the packets are treated in this way:
• If the packet has a multicast IP address and a unicast MAC address, the packet is forwarded in
software. This can occur because some protocols on legacy devices use unicast MAC addresses with
multicast IP addresses.
• If the packet has a multicast IP address and an unmatched multicast MAC address, the packet is
dropped.
This section includes information about these topics:
• Understanding IGMP, page 44-3
• Understanding PIM, page 44-4
• Understanding DVMRP, page 44-8
• Understanding CGMP, page 44-9

44-2 OL-8553-06
Understanding IGMP
To participate in IP multicasting, multicast hosts, routers, and multilayer switches must have the IGMP
operating. This protocol defines the querier and host roles:
• A querier is a network device that sends query messages to discover which network devices are
members of a given multicast group.
• A host is a receiver that sends report messages (in response to query messages) to inform a querier
of a host membership.
A set of queriers and hosts that receive multicast data streams from the same source is called a multicast
group. Queriers and hosts use IGMP messages to join and leave multicast groups.
Any host, regardless of whether it is a member of a group, can send to a group. However, only the
members of a group receive the message. Membership in a multicast group is dynamic; hosts can join
and leave at any time. There is no restriction on the location or number of members in a multicast group.
A host can be a member of more than one multicast group at a time. How active a multicast group is and
what members it has can vary from group to group and from time to time. A multicast group can be active
for a long time, or it can be very short-lived. Membership in a group can constantly change. A group that
has members can have no activity.
IP multicast traffic uses group addresses, which are class D addresses. The high-order bits of a Class D
address are 1110. Therefore, host group addresses can be in the range 224.0.0.0 through
239.255.255.255. Multicast addresses in the range 224.0.0.0 to 224.0.0.255 are reserved for use by
routing protocols and other network control traffic. The address 224.0.0.0 is guaranteed not to be
assigned to any group.
IGMP packets are sent using these IP multicast group addresses:
• IGMP general queries are destined to the address 224.0.0.1 (all systems on a subnet).
• IGMP group-specific queries are destined to the group IP address for which the switch is querying.
• IGMP group membership reports are destined to the group IP address for which the switch is
reporting.
• IGMP Version 2 (IGMPv2) leave messages are destined to the address 224.0.0.2
(all-multicast-routers on a subnet). In some old host IP stacks, leave messages might be destined to
the group IP address rather than to the all-routers address.
IGMP Version 1
IGMP Version 1 (IGMPv1) primarily uses a query-response model that enables the multicast router and
multilayer switch to find which multicast groups are active (have one or more hosts interested in a
multicast group) on the local subnet. IGMPv1 has other processes that enable a host to join and leave a
multicast group. For more information, see RFC 1112.
IGMP Version 2
IGMPv2 extends IGMP functionality by providing such features as the IGMP leave process to reduce
leave latency, group-specific queries, and an explicit maximum query response time. IGMPv2 also adds
the capability for routers to elect the IGMP querier without depending on the multicast protocol to
perform this task. For more information, see RFC 2236.

OL-8553-06 44-3
Understanding PIM
PIM is called protocol-independent: regardless of the unicast routing protocols used to populate the
unicast routing table, PIM uses this information to perform multicast forwarding instead of maintaining
a separate multicast routing table.
PIM is defined in RFC 2362, Protocol-Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM): Protocol
Specification. PIM is defined in these Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) Internet drafts:
• Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM): Motivation and Architecture
• Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM), Dense Mode Protocol Specification
• Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM), Sparse Mode Protocol Specification
• draft-ietf-idmr-igmp-v2-06.txt, Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2
• draft-ietf-pim-v2-dm-03.txt, PIM Version 2 Dense Mode
PIM Versions
PIMv2 includes these improvements over PIMv1:
• A single, active rendezvous point (RP) exists per multicast group, with multiple backup RPs. This
single RP compares to multiple active RPs for the same group in PIMv1.
• A bootstrap router (BSR) provides a fault-tolerant, automated RP discovery and distribution
mechanism that enables routers and multilayer switches to dynamically learn the group-to-RP
mappings.
• Sparse mode and dense mode are properties of a group, as opposed to an interface. We strongly
recommend sparse-dense mode, as opposed to either sparse mode or dense mode only.
• PIM join and prune messages have more flexible encoding for multiple address families.
• A more flexible hello packet format replaces the query packet to encode current and future
capability options.
• Register messages to an RP specify whether they are sent by a border router or a designated router.
• PIM packets are no longer inside IGMP packets; they are standalone packets.
PIM Modes
PIM can operate in dense mode (DM), sparse mode (SM), or in sparse-dense mode (PIM DM-SM),
which handles both sparse groups and dense groups at the same time.
PIM DM
PIM DM builds source-based multicast distribution trees. In dense mode, a PIM DM router or multilayer
switch assumes that all other routers or multilayer switches forward multicast packets for a group. If a
PIM DM device receives a multicast packet and has no directly connected members or PIM neighbors
present, a prune message is sent back to the source to stop unwanted multicast traffic. Subsequent
multicast packets are not flooded to this router or switch on this pruned branch because branches without
receivers are pruned from the distribution tree, leaving only branches that contain receivers.

44-4 OL-8553-06
When a new receiver on a previously pruned branch of the tree joins a multicast group, the PIM DM
device detects the new receiver and immediately sends a graft message up the distribution tree toward
the source. When the upstream PIM DM device receives the graft message, it immediately puts the
interface on which the graft was received into the forwarding state so that the multicast traffic begins
flowing to the receiver.
PIM SM
PIM SM uses shared trees and shortest-path-trees (SPTs) to distribute multicast traffic to multicast
receivers in the network. In PIM SM, a router or multilayer switch assumes that other routers or switches
do not forward multicast packets for a group, unless there is an explicit request for the traffic (join
message). When a host joins a multicast group using IGMP, its directly connected PIM SM device sends
PIM join messages toward the root, also known as the RP. This join message travels router-by-router
toward the root, constructing a branch of the shared tree as it goes.
The RP keeps track of multicast receivers. It also registers sources through register messages received
from the source’s first-hop router (designated router [DR]) to complete the shared tree path from the
source to the receiver. When using a shared tree, sources must send their traffic to the RP so that the
traffic reaches all receivers.
Prune messages are sent up the distribution tree to prune multicast group traffic. This action permits
branches of the shared tree or SPT that were created with explicit join messages to be torn down when
they are no longer needed.
PIM Stub Routing

The PIM stub routing feature, available in all software images, reduces resource usage by moving routed
traffic closer to the end user.
Note The IP base image contains only PIM stub routing. The IP services image contains complete multicast
routing. On a switch running the IP base image, if you try to configure a VLAN interface with PIM
dense-mode, sparse-mode, or dense-sparse-mode, the configuration is not allowed.
In a network using PIM stub routing, the only allowable route for IP traffic to the user is through a switch
that is configured with PIM stub routing. PIM passive interfaces are connected to Layer 2 access
domains, such as VLANs, or to interfaces that are connected to other Layer 2 devices. Only directly
connected multicast (IGMP) receivers and sources are allowed in the Layer 2 access domains. The PIM
passive interfaces do not send or process any received PIM control packets.
When using PIM stub routing, you should configure the distribution and remote routers to use IP
multicast routing and configure only the switch as a PIM stub router. The switch does not route transit
traffic between distribution routers. You also need to configure a routed uplink port on the switch. The
switch uplink port cannot be used with SVIs. If you need PIM for an SVI uplink port, you should upgrade
to the IP services feature set.
You must also configure EIGRP stub routing when configuring PIM stub routing on the switch. For more
information, see the“Configuring EIGRP Stub Routing” section on page 36-39.
The redundant PIM stub router topology is not supported. The redundant topology exists when there is
more than one PIM router forwarding multicast traffic to a single access domain. PIM messages are
blocked, and the PIM asset and designated router election mechanisms are not supported on the PIM
passive interfaces. Only the nonredundant access router topology is supported by the PIM stub feature.
By using a nonredundant topology, the PIM passive interface assumes that it is the only interface and
designated router on that access domain.

OL-8553-06 44-5
The PIM stub feature is enforced in the IP base image. If you upgrade to a higher software version, the
PIM stub configuration remains until you reconfigure the interfaces.
In Figure 44-2, Switch A routed uplink port 25 is connected to the router and PIM stub routing is enabled
on the VLAN 100 interfaces and on Host 3. This configuration allows the directly connected hosts to
receive traffic from multicast source 200.1.1.3. See the “Configuring PIM Stub Routing” section on
page 44-22 for more information.
Figure 44-2 PIM Stub Router Configuration
Switch
A
3.1.1.2.255.255.255.0
Port 25 Port 20
Source Router
200.1.1.3
VLAN 100 Host 3
202361
Host 1 Host 2
IGMP Helper
PIM stub routing moves routed traffic closer to the end user and reduces network traffic. You can also
reduce traffic by configuring a stub router (switch) with the IGMP helper feature.
You can configure a stub router (switch) with the igmp helper help-address interface configuration
command to enable the switch to send reports to the next-hop interface. Hosts that are not directly
connected to a downstream router can then join a multicast group sourced from an upstream network.
The IGMP packets from a host wanting to join a multicast stream are forwarded upstream to the next-hop
device when this feature is configured. When the upstream central router receives the helper IGMP
reports or leaves, it adds or removes the interfaces from its outgoing interface list for that group.
For complete syntax and usage information for the ip igmp helper-address command, see the Cisco IOS
IP and IP Routing Command Reference, Release 12.1.
Auto-RP
This proprietary feature eliminates the need to manually configure the RP information in every router
and multilayer switch in the network. For auto-RP to work, you configure a Cisco router or multilayer
switch as the mapping agent. It uses IP multicast to learn which routers or switches in the network are
possible candidate RPs to receive candidate RP announcements. Candidate RPs periodically send
multicast RP-announce messages to a particular group or group range to announce their availability.
Mapping agents listen to these candidate RP announcements and use the information to create entries in
their Group-to-RP mapping caches. Only one mapping cache entry is created for any Group-to-RP range
received, even if multiple candidate RPs are sending RP announcements for the same range. As the
RP-announce messages arrive, the mapping agent selects the router or switch with the highest IP address
as the active RP and stores this RP address in the Group-to-RP mapping cache.

44-6 OL-8553-06
Mapping agents periodically multicast the contents of their Group-to-RP mapping caches. Thus, all
routers and switches automatically discover which RP to use for the groups that they support. If a router
or switch fails to receive RP-discovery messages and the Group-to-RP mapping information expires, it
changes to a statically configured RP that was defined with the ip pim rp-address global configuration
command. If no statically configured RP exists, the router or switch changes the group to dense-mode
operation.
Multiple RPs serve different group ranges or serve as hot backups of each other.
Bootstrap Router
PIMv2 BSR is another method to distribute group-to-RP mapping information to all PIM routers and
multilayer switches in the network. It eliminates the need to manually configure RP information in every
router and switch in the network. However, instead of using IP multicast to distribute group-to-RP
mapping information, BSR uses hop-by-hop flooding of special BSR messages to distribute the mapping
information.
The BSR is elected from a set of candidate routers and switches in the domain that have been configured
to function as BSRs. The election mechanism is similar to the root-bridge election mechanism used in
bridged LANs. The BSR election is based on the BSR priority of the device contained in the BSR
messages that are sent hop-by-hop through the network. Each BSR device examines the message and
forwards out all interfaces only the message that has either a higher BSR priority than its BSR priority
or the same BSR priority, but with a higher BSR IP address. Using this method, the BSR is elected.
The elected BSR sends BSR messages with a TTL of 1. Neighboring PIMv2 routers or multilayer
switches receive the BSR message and multicast it out all other interfaces (except the one on which it
was received) with a TTL of 1. In this way, BSR messages travel hop-by-hop throughout the PIM
domain. Because BSR messages contain the IP address of the current BSR, the flooding mechanism
enables candidate RPs to automatically learn which device is the elected BSR.
Candidate RPs send candidate RP advertisements showing the group range for which they are
responsible to the BSR, which stores this information in its local candidate-RP cache. The BSR
periodically advertises the contents of this cache in BSR messages to all other PIM devices in the
domain. These messages travel hop-by-hop through the network to all routers and switches, which store
the RP information in the BSR message in their local RP cache. The routers and switches select the same
RP for a given group because they all use a common RP hashing algorithm.
Multicast Forwarding and Reverse Path Check

With unicast routing, routers and multilayer switches forward traffic through the network along a single
path from the source to the destination host whose IP address appears in the destination address field of
the IP packet. Each router and switch along the way makes a unicast forwarding decision, using the
destination IP address in the packet, by looking up the destination address in the unicast routing table
and forwarding the packet through the specified interface to the next hop toward the destination.
With multicasting, the source is sending traffic to an arbitrary group of hosts represented by a multicast
group address in the destination address field of the IP packet. To decide whether to forward or drop an
incoming multicast packet, the router or multilayer switch uses a reverse path forwarding (RPF) check
on the packet as follows and shown in Figure 44-3:
1. The router or multilayer switch examines the source address of the arriving multicast packet to
decide whether the packet arrived on an interface that is on the reverse path back to the source.
2. If the packet arrives on the interface leading back to the source, the RPF check is successful and the
packet is forwarded to all interfaces in the outgoing interface list (which might not be all interfaces
on the router).

OL-8553-06 44-7
3. If the RPF check fails, the packet is discarded.

Some multicast routing protocols, such as DVMRP, maintain a separate multicast routing table and use
it for the RPF check. However, PIM uses the unicast routing table to perform the RPF check.
Figure 44-3 shows port 2 receiving a multicast packet from source 151.10.3.21. Table 44-1 shows that
the port on the reverse path to the source is port 1, not port 2. Because the RPF check fails, the multilayer
switch discards the packet. Another multicast packet from source 151.10.3.21 is received on port 1, and
the routing table shows this port is on the reverse path to the source. Because the RPF check passes, the
switch forwards the packet to all port in the outgoing port list.
Figure 44-3 RPF Check
Multicast Multicast
packet from packet from
source 151.10.3.21 source 151.10.3.21
is forwarded. packet is discarded.
Gigabit Ethernet 0/1 Gigabit Ethernet 0/2
Layer 3 switch
Gigabit Ethernet 0/3 Gigabit Ethernet 0/4
Table 44-1 Routing Table Example for an RPF Check 101242
Network Port
151.10.0.0/16 Gigabit Ethernet 0/1
PIM uses both source trees and RP-rooted shared trees to forward datagrams (described in the “PIM
DM” section on page 44-4 and the “PIM SM” section on page 44-5). The RPF check is performed
differently for each:
• If a PIM router or multilayer switch has a source-tree state (that is, an (S,G) entry is present in the
multicast routing table), it performs the RPF check against the IP address of the source of the
multicast packet.
• If a PIM router or multilayer switch has a shared-tree state (and no explicit source-tree state), it
performs the RPF check on the RP address (which is known when members join the group).
Sparse-mode PIM uses the RPF lookup function to decide where it needs to send joins and prunes:
• (S,G) joins (which are source-tree states) are sent toward the source.
• (*,G) joins (which are shared-tree states) are sent toward the RP.
DVMRP and dense-mode PIM use only source trees and use RPF as previously described.
Understanding DVMRP
DVMRP is implemented in the equipment of many vendors and is based on the public-domain mrouted
program. This protocol has been deployed in the MBONE and in other intradomain multicast networks.

44-8 OL-8553-06
Cisco routers and multilayer switches run PIM and can forward multicast packets to and receive from a
DVMRP neighbor. It is also possible to propagate DVMRP routes into and through a PIM cloud. The
software propagates DVMRP routes and builds a separate database for these routes on each router and
multilayer switch, but PIM uses this routing information to make the packet-forwarding decision. The
software does not implement the complete DVMRP. However, it supports dynamic discovery of
DVMRP routers and can interoperate with them over traditional media (such as Ethernet and FDDI) or
over DVMRP-specific tunnels.
DVMRP neighbors build a route table by periodically exchanging source network routing information
in route-report messages. The routing information stored in the DVMRP routing table is separate from
the unicast routing table and is used to build a source distribution tree and to perform multicast forward
using RPF.
DVMRP is a dense-mode protocol and builds a parent-child database using a constrained multicast
model to build a forwarding tree rooted at the source of the multicast packets. Multicast packets are
initially flooded down this source tree. If redundant paths are on the source tree, packets are not
forwarded along those paths. Forwarding occurs until prune messages are received on those parent-child
links, which further constrain the broadcast of multicast packets.
Understanding CGMP
This software release provides CGMP-server support on your switch; no client-side functionality is
provided. The switch serves as a CGMP server for devices that do not support IGMP snooping but have
CGMP-client functionality.
CGMP is a protocol used on Cisco routers and multilayer switches connected to Layer 2 Catalyst
switches to perform tasks similar to those performed by IGMP. CGMP permits Layer 2 group
membership information to be communicated from the CGMP server to the switch. The switch can then
can learn on which interfaces multicast members reside instead of flooding multicast traffic to all switch
interfaces. (IGMP snooping is another method to constrain the flooding of multicast packets. For more
information, see Chapter 23, “Configuring IGMP Snooping and MVR.”)
CGMP is necessary because the Layer 2 switch cannot distinguish between IP multicast data packets and
IGMP report messages, which are both at the MAC-level and are addressed to the same group address.
CGMP is mutually exclusive with HSRPv1. You cannot enable CGMP leaving processing and HSRPv1
at the same time. However, you can enable CGMP and HSRPv2 at the same time. For more information,
see the “HSRP Versions” section on page 40-3.

• Default Multicast Routing Configuration, page 44-10
• Multicast Routing Configuration Guidelines, page 44-10
• Configuring Basic Multicast Routing, page 44-11 (required)
• Configuring Source-Specific Multicast, page 44-13
• Configuring Source Specific Multicast Mapping, page 44-16
• Configuring PIM Stub Routing, page 44-22 (optional)
• Configuring a Rendezvous Point, page 44-23 (required if the interface is in sparse-dense mode, and
you want to treat the group as a sparse group)

OL-8553-06 44-9
• Using Auto-RP and a BSR, page 44-33 (required for non-Cisco PIMv2 devices to interoperate with
Cisco PIM v1 devices))
• Monitoring the RP Mapping Information, page 44-33 (optional)
• Troubleshooting PIMv1 and PIMv2 Interoperability Problems, page 44-34 (optional)
Default Multicast Routing Configuration

Table 44-2 shows the default multicast routing configuration.
Table 44-2 Default Multicast Routing Configuration

Multicast routing Disabled on all interfaces.
PIM version Version 2.
PIM mode No mode is defined.
PIM stub routing None configured.
PIM RP address None configured.
PIM domain border Disabled.
PIM multicast boundary None.
Candidate BSRs Disabled.
Candidate RPs Disabled.
Shortest-path tree threshold rate 0 kb/s.
PIM router query message interval 30 seconds.
Multicast Routing Configuration Guidelines

To avoid misconfiguring multicast routing on your switch, review the information in these sections:
• PIMv1 and PIMv2 Interoperability, page 44-10
• Auto-RP and BSR Configuration Guidelines, page 44-11
PIMv1 and PIMv2 Interoperability

The Cisco PIMv2 implementation provides interoperability and transition between Version 1 and
Version 2, although there might be some minor problems.
You can upgrade to PIMv2 incrementally. PIM Versions 1 and 2 can be configured on different routers
and multilayer switches within one network. Internally, all routers and multilayer switches on a shared
media network must run the same PIM version. Therefore, if a PIMv2 device detects a PIMv1 device,
the Version 2 device downgrades itself to Version 1 until all Version 1 devices have been shut down or
upgraded.
PIMv2 uses the BSR to discover and announce RP-set information for each group prefix to all the routers
and multilayer switches in a PIM domain. PIMv1, together with the Auto-RP feature, can perform the
same tasks as the PIMv2 BSR. However, Auto-RP is a standalone protocol, separate from PIMv1, and is

44-10 OL-8553-06
a proprietary Cisco protocol. PIMv2 is a standards track protocol in the IETF. We recommend that you
use PIMv2. The BSR mechanism interoperates with Auto-RP on Cisco routers and multilayer switches.
For more information, see the “Auto-RP and BSR Configuration Guidelines” section on page 44-11.
When PIMv2 devices interoperate with PIMv1 devices, Auto-RP should have already been deployed. A
PIMv2 BSR that is also an Auto-RP mapping agent automatically advertises the RP elected by Auto-RP.
That is, Auto-RP sets its single RP on every router or multilayer switch in the group. Not all routers and
switches in the domain use the PIMv2 hash function to select multiple RPs.
Dense-mode groups in a mixed PIMv1 and PIMv2 region need no special configuration; they
automatically interoperate.
Sparse-mode groups in a mixed PIMv1 and PIMv2 region are possible because the Auto-RP feature in
PIMv1 interoperates with the PIMv2 RP feature. Although all PIMv2 devices can also use PIMv1, we
recommend that the RPs be upgraded to PIMv2. To ease the transition to PIMv2, we have these
recommendations:
• Use Auto-RP throughout the region.
• Configure sparse-dense mode throughout the region.
If Auto-RP is not already configured in the PIMv1 regions, configure Auto-RP. For more information,
see the “Configuring Auto-RP” section on page 44-25.
Auto-RP and BSR Configuration Guidelines

There are two approaches to using PIMv2. You can use Version 2 exclusively in your network or migrate
to Version 2 by employing a mixed PIM version environment.
• If your network is all Cisco routers and multilayer switches, you can use either Auto-RP or BSR.
• If you have non-Cisco routers in your network, you must use BSR.
• If you have Cisco PIMv1 and PIMv2 routers and multilayer switches and non-Cisco routers, you
must use both Auto-RP and BSR. If your network includes routers from other vendors, configure
the Auto-RP mapping agent and the BSR on a Cisco PIMv2 device. Ensure that no PIMv1 device is
located in the path a between the BSR and a non-Cisco PIMv2 device.
• Because bootstrap messages are sent hop-by-hop, a PIMv1 device prevents these messages from
reaching all routers and multilayer switches in your network. Therefore, if your network has a
PIMv1 device in it and only Cisco routers and multilayer switches, it is best to use Auto-RP.
• If you have a network that includes non-Cisco routers, configure the Auto-RP mapping agent and
the BSR on a Cisco PIMv2 router or multilayer switch. Ensure that no PIMv1 device is on the path
between the BSR and a non-Cisco PIMv2 router.
• If you have non-Cisco PIMv2 routers that need to interoperate with Cisco PIMv1 routers and
multilayer switches, both Auto-RP and a BSR are required. We recommend that a Cisco PIMv2
device be both the Auto-RP mapping agent and the BSR. For more information, see the “Using
Auto-RP and a BSR” section on page 44-33.
Configuring Basic Multicast Routing

You must enable IP multicast routing and configure the PIM version and the PIM mode. Then the
software can forward multicast packets, and the switch can populate its multicast routing table.

OL-8553-06 44-11
You can configure an interface to be in PIM dense mode, sparse mode, or sparse-dense mode. The switch
populates its multicast routing table and forwards multicast packets it receives from its directly
connected LANs according to the mode setting. You must enable PIM in one of these modes for an
interface to perform IP multicast routing. Enabling PIM on an interface also enables IGMP operation on
that interface.
Note If you enable PIM on multiple interfaces, when most of them are not on the outgoing interface list, and
IGMP snooping is disabled, the outgoing interface might not be able to sustain line rate for multicast
traffic because of the extra replication.
In populating the multicast routing table, dense-mode interfaces are always added to the table.
Sparse-mode interfaces are added to the table only when periodic join messages are received from
downstream devices or when there is a directly connected member on the interface. When forwarding
from a LAN, sparse-mode operation occurs if there is an RP known for the group. If so, the packets are
encapsulated and sent toward the RP. When no RP is known, the packet is flooded in a dense-mode
fashion. If the multicast traffic from a specific source is sufficient, the receiver’s first-hop router might
send join messages toward the source to build a source-based distribution tree.
By default, multicast routing is disabled, and there is no default mode setting. This procedure is required.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable IP multicasting, to configure a PIM
version, and to configure a PIM mode. This procedure is required.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip multicast-routing distributed Enable IP multicast distributed switching.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the Layer 3 interface on which you want to enable multicast
routing, and enter interface configuration mode.
The specified interface must be one of the following:
• A routed port: a physical port that has been configured as a Layer 3
port by entering the no switchport interface configuration
command.
• An SVI: a VLAN interface created by using the interface vlan
vlan-id global configuration command.
These interfaces must have IP addresses assigned to them. For more
information, see the “Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces” section on
page 11-25.
Step 4 ip pim version [1 | 2] Configure the PIM version on the interface.
By default, Version 2 is enabled and is the recommended setting.
An interface in PIMv2 mode automatically downgrades to PIMv1 mode
if that interface has a PIMv1 neighbor. The interface returns to Version
2 mode after all Version 1 neighbors are shut down or upgraded.
For more information, see the “PIMv1 and PIMv2 Interoperability”

44-12 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 5 ip pim {dense-mode | sparse-mode | Enable a PIM mode on the interface.
sparse-dense-mode}
By default, no mode is configured.
• dense-mode—Enables dense mode of operation.
• sparse-mode—Enables sparse mode of operation. If you configure
sparse mode, you must also configure an RP. For more information,
see the “Configuring a Rendezvous Point” section on page 44-23.
• sparse-dense-mode—Causes the interface to be treated in the mode
in which the group belongs. Sparse-dense mode is the recommended
setting.
To disable multicasting, use the no ip multicast-routing distributed global configuration command.

To return to the default PIM version, use the no ip pim version interface configuration command. To
disable PIM on an interface, use the no ip pim interface configuration command.
Configuring Source-Specific Multicast

This section describes how to configure source-specific multicast (SSM). For a complete description of
the SSM commands in this section, refer to the “IP Multicast Routing Commands” chapter of the Cisco
IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 3 of 3: Multicast. To locate documentation for other commands that
appear in this chapter, use the command reference master index, or search online.
The SSM feature is an extension of IP multicast in which datagram traffic is forwarded to receivers from
only those multicast sources that the receivers have explicitly joined. For multicast groups configured
for SSM, only SSM distribution trees (no shared trees) are created.
SSM Components Overview

SSM is a datagram delivery model that best supports one-to-many applications, also known as broadcast
applications. SSM is a core networking technology for the Cisco implementation of IP multicast
solutions targeted for audio and video broadcast application environments. The switch supports these
components that support the implementation of SSM:
• Protocol independent multicast source-specific mode (PIM-SSM)
PIM-SSM is the routing protocol that supports the implementation of SSM and is derived from PIM
sparse mode (PIM-SM).
• Internet Group Management Protocol version 3 (IGMPv3)
To run SSM with IGMPv3, SSM must be supported in the Cisco IOS router, the host where the
application is running, and the application itself.

OL-8553-06 44-13
How SSM Differs from Internet Standard Multicast

The current IP multicast infrastructure in the Internet and many enterprise intranets is based on the
PIM-SM protocol and Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP). These protocols have the
limitations of the Internet Standard Multicast (ISM) service model. For example, with ISM, the network
must maintain knowledge about which hosts in the network are actively sending multicast traffic.
The ISM service consists of the delivery of IP datagrams from any source to a group of receivers called
the multicast host group. The datagram traffic for the multicast host group consists of datagrams with an
arbitrary IP unicast source address S and the multicast group address G as the IP destination address.
Systems receive this traffic by becoming members of the host group.
Membership in a host group simply requires signalling the host group through IGMP version 1, 2, or 3.
In SSM, delivery of datagrams is based on (S, G) channels. In both SSM and ISM, no signalling is
required to become a source. However, in SSM, receivers must subscribe or unsubscribe to (S, G)
channels to receive or not receive traffic from specific sources. In other words, receivers can receive
traffic only from (S, G) channels to which they are subscribed, whereas in ISM, receivers need not know
the IP addresses of sources from which they receive their traffic. The proposed standard approach for
channel subscription signalling use IGMP include mode membership reports, which are supported only
in IGMP version 3.
SSM IP Address Range

SSM can coexist with the ISM service by applying the SSM delivery model to a configured subset of the
IP multicast group address range. Cisco IOS software allows SSM configuration for the IP multicast
address range of 224.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255. When an SSM range is defined, existing IP
multicast receiver applications do not receive any traffic when they try to use an address in the SSM
range (unless the application is modified to use an explicit (S, G) channel subscription).
SSM Operations
An established network, in which IP multicast service is based on PIM-SM, can support SSM services.
SSM can also be deployed alone in a network without the full range of protocols that are required for
interdomain PIM-SM (for example, MSDP, Auto-RP, or bootstrap router [BSR]) if only SSM service is
needed.
If SSM is deployed in a network already configured for PIM-SM, only the last-hop routers support SSM.
Routers that are not directly connected to receivers do not require support for SSM. In general, these
not-last-hop routers must only run PIM-SM in the SSM range and might need additional access control
configuration to suppress MSDP signalling, registering, or PIM-SM shared tree operations from
occurring within the SSM range.
Use the ip pim ssm global configuration command to configure the SSM range and to enable SSM. This
configuration has the following effects:
• For groups within the SSM range, (S, G) channel subscriptions are accepted through IGMPv3
include-mode membership reports.
• PIM operations within the SSM range of addresses change to PIM-SSM, a mode derived from
PIM-SM. In this mode, only PIM (S, G) join and prune messages are generated by the router, and
no (S, G) rendezvous point tree (RPT) or (*, G) RPT messages are generated. Incoming messages
related to RPT operations are ignored or rejected, and incoming PIM register messages are
immediately answered with register-stop messages. PIM-SSM is backward-compatible with
PIM-SM unless a router is a last-hop router. Therefore, routers that are not last-hop routers can run
PIM-SM for SSM groups (for example, if they do not yet support SSM).

44-14 OL-8553-06
• No MSDP source-active (SA) messages within the SSM range are accepted, generated, or
forwarded.
IGMPv3 Host Signalling

In IGMPv3, hosts signal membership to last hop routers of multicast groups. Hosts can signal group
membership with filtering capabilities with respect to sources. A host can either signal that it wants to
receive traffic from all sources sending to a group except for some specific sources (called exclude
mode), or that it wants to receive traffic only from some specific sources sending to the group (called
include mode).
IGMPv3 can operate with both ISM and SSM. In ISM, both exclude and include mode reports are
applicable. In SSM, only include mode reports are accepted by the last-hop router. Exclude mode reports
are ignored.
This section contains the guidelines for configuring SSM.
Legacy Applications Within the SSM Range Restrictions
Existing applications in a network predating SSM do not work within the SSM range unless they are
modified to support (S, G) channel subscriptions. Therefore, enabling SSM in a network can cause
problems for existing applications if they use addresses within the designated SSM range.
Address Management Restrictions
Address management is still necessary to some degree when SSM is used with Layer 2 switching
mechanisms. Cisco Group Management Protocol (CGMP), IGMP snooping, or Router-Port Group
Management Protocol (RGMP) support only group-specific filtering, not (S, G) channel-specific
filtering. If different receivers in a switched network request different (S, G) channels sharing the same
group, they do not benefit from these existing mechanisms. Instead, both receivers receive all (S, G)
channel traffic and filter out the unwanted traffic on input. Because SSM can re-use the group addresses
in the SSM range for many independent applications, this situation can lead to decreased traffic filtering
in a switched network. For this reason, it is important to use random IP addresses from the SSM range
for an application to minimize the chance for re-use of a single address within the SSM range between
different applications. For example, an application service providing a set of television channels should,
even with SSM, use a different group for each television (S, G) channel. This setup guarantees that
multiple receivers to different channels within the same application service never experience traffic
aliasing in networks that include Layer 2 switches.
IGMP Snooping and CGMP Limitations
IGMPv3 uses new membership report messages that might not be correctly recognized by older IGMP
snooping switches.
For more information about switching issues related to IGMP (especially with CGMP), refer to the
“Understanding IGMP” section on page 44-3.

OL-8553-06 44-15
State Maintenance Limitations
In PIM-SSM, the last hop router continues to periodically send (S, G) join messages if appropriate (S,
G) subscriptions are on the interfaces. Therefore, as long as receivers send (S, G) subscriptions, the
shortest path tree (SPT) state from the receivers to the source is maintained, even if the source does not
send traffic for longer periods of time (or even never).
This case is opposite to PIM-SM, where (S, G) state is maintained only if the source is sending traffic
and receivers are joining the group. If a source stops sending traffic for more than 3 minutes in PIM-SM,
the (S, G) state is deleted and only re-established after packets from the source arrive again through the
RPT. Because no mechanism in PIM-SSM notifies a receiver that a source is active, the network must
maintain the (S, G) state in PIM-SSM as long as receivers are requesting receipt of that channel.
Configuring SSM
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure SSM:
Command Purpose
Step 1 ip pim ssm [default | range access-list] Define the SSM range of IP multicast addresses.
Step 2 interface type number Select an interface that is connected to hosts on which
IGMPv3 can be enabled, and enter the interface configuration
mode.
Step 3 ip pim {sparse-mode | sparse-dense-mode} Enable PIM on an interface. You must use either sparse mode
or sparse-dense mode.
Step 4 ip igmp version 3 Enable IGMPv3 on this interface. The default version of
IGMP is set to Version 2.
Monitoring SSM
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to monitor SSM.
Command Purpose
Router# show ip igmp groups detail Display the (S, G) channel subscription through IGMPv3.
Router# show ip mroute Display whether a multicast group supports SSM service or
whether a source-specific host report was received.
Configuring Source Specific Multicast Mapping

The Source Specific Multicast (SSM) mapping feature supports SSM transition when supporting SSM
on the end system is impossible or unwanted due to administrative or technical reasons. You can use
SSM mapping to leverage SSM for video delivery to legacy STBs that do not support IGMPv3 or for
applications that do not use the IGMPv3 host stack.
This section covers these topics:

44-16 OL-8553-06

• SSM Mapping Overview, page 44-17
• Configuring SSM Mapping, page 44-19
• Monitoring SSM Mapping, page 44-21
These are the SSM mapping configuration guidelines:
• Before you configure SSM mapping, enable IP multicast routing, enable PIM sparse mode, and
configure SSM. For information on enabling IP multicast routing and PIM sparse mode, see the
“Default Multicast Routing Configuration” section on page 44-10.
• Before you configure static SSM mapping, you must configure access control lists (ACLs) that
define the group ranges to be mapped to source addresses. For information on configuring an ACL,
see Chapter 33, “Configuring Network Security with ACLs.”
• Before you can configure and use SSM mapping with DNS lookups, you must be able to add records
to a running DNS server. If you do not already have a DNS server running, you need to install one.
You can use a product such as Cisco Network Registrar. Go to this URL for more information:
http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/cc/pd/nemnsw/nerr/index.shtml
These are the SSM mapping restrictions:
• The SSM mapping feature does not have all the benefits of full SSM. Because SSM mapping takes
a group join from a host and identifies this group with an application associated with one or more
sources, it can only support one such application per group. Full SSM applications can still share
the same group as in SSM mapping.
• Enable IGMPv3 with care on the last hop router when you rely solely on SSM mapping as a
transition solution for full SSM. When you enable both SSM mapping and IGMPv3 and the hosts
already support IGMPv3 (but not SSM), the hosts send IGMPv3 group reports. SSM mapping does
not support these IGMPv3 group reports, and the router does not correctly associate sources with
these reports.
SSM Mapping Overview

In a typical STB deployment, each TV channel uses one separate IP multicast group and has one active
server host sending the TV channel. A single server can send multiple TV channels, but each to a
different group. In this network environment, if a router receives an IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 membership
report for a particular group, the report addresses the well-known TV server for the TV channel
associated with the multicast group.
When SSM mapping is configured, if a router receives an IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 membership report for a
particular group, the router translates this report into one or more channel memberships for the
well-known sources associated with this group.
When the router receives an IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 membership report for a group, the router uses SSM
mapping to determine one or more source IP addresses for the group. SSM mapping then translates the
membership report as an IGMPv3 report and continues as if it had received an IGMPv3 report. The
router then sends PIM joins and continues to be joined to these groups as long as it continues to receive
the IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 membership reports, and the SSM mapping for the group remains the same.

OL-8553-06 44-17
SSM mapping enables the last hop router to determine the source addresses either by a statically
configured table on the router or through a DNS server. When the statically configured table or the DNS
mapping changes, the router leaves the current sources associated with the joined groups.
Go to this URL for additional information on SSM mapping:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps5207/products_feature_guide09186a00801a6d6f.
html
Static SSM Mapping
With static SSM mapping, you can configure the last hop router to use a static map to determine the
sources that are sending to groups. Static SSM mapping requires that you configure ACLs to define
group ranges. Then you can map the groups permitted by those ACLs to sources by using the ip igmp
static ssm-map global configuration command.
You can configure static SSM mapping in smaller networks when a DNS is not needed or to locally
override DNS mappings. When configured, static SSM mappings take precedence over DNS mappings.
DNS-Based SSM Mapping
You can use DNS-based SSM mapping to configure the last hop router to perform a reverse DNS lookup
to determine sources sending to groups. When DNS-based SSM mapping is configured, the router
constructs a domain name that includes the group address and performs a reverse lookup into the DNS.
The router looks up IP address resource records and uses them as the source addresses associated with
this group. SSM mapping supports up to 20 sources for each group. The router joins all sources
configured for a group (see Figure 44-4).
Figure 44-4 DNS-Based SSM-Mapping
Source
(S, G) Join
(S, G) Join
DNS response DNS server
Reverse DNS lookup
IGMPv2 membership report

146906
STB host 1 STB host 2 STB host 3
The SSM mapping mechanism that enables the last hop router to join multiple sources for a group can
provide source redundancy for a TV broadcast. In this context, the last hop router provides redundancy
using SSM mapping to simultaneously join two video sources for the same TV channel. However, to
prevent the last hop router from duplicating the video traffic, the video sources must use a server-side

44-18 OL-8553-06
switchover mechanism. One video source is active, and the other backup video source is passive. The
passive source waits until an active source failure is detected before sending the video traffic for the TV
channel. Thus, the server-side switchover mechanism ensures that only one of the servers is actively
sending video traffic for the TV channel.
To look up one or more source addresses for a group that includes G1, G2, G3, and G4, you must
configure these DNS records on the DNS server:
G4.G3.G2.G1 [multicast-domain] [timeout]IN A source-address-1
IN A source-address-2
IN A source-address-n
Refer to your DNS server documentation for more information about configuring DNS resource records,
and go to this URL for additional information on SSM mapping:
html
Configuring SSM Mapping

This section covers these topics:
• Configuring Static SSM Mapping, page 44-19 (required)
• Configuring DNS-Based SSM Mapping, page 44-20 (required)
• Configuring Static Traffic Forwarding with SSM Mapping, page 44-20 (optional)
Configuring Static SSM Mapping
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure static SSM mapping:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp ssm-map enable Enable SSM mapping for groups in the configured SSM range.
Note By default, this command enables DNS-based SSM mapping.
Step 3 no ip igmp ssm-map query dns (Optional) Disable DNS-based SSM mapping.
Note Disable DNS-based SSM mapping if you only want to rely on
static SSM mapping. By default, the ip igmp ssm-map global
configuration command enables DNS-based SSM mapping.
Step 4 ip igmp ssm-map static access-list Configure static SSM mapping.
source-address
The ACL supplied for access-list defines the groups to be mapped to the
source IP address entered for the source-address.
Note You can configure additional static SSM mappings. If additional
SSM mappings are configured and the router receives an
IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 membership report for a group in the SSM
range, the switch determines the source addresses associated
with the group by using each configured ip igmp ssm-map
static command. The switch associates up to 20 sources per
group.
Step 5 Repeat Step 4 to configure additional —
static SSM mappings, if required.

OL-8553-06 44-19
Command Purpose
Go to this URL to see SSM mapping configuration examples:

html
Configuring DNS-Based SSM Mapping
To configure DNS-based SSM mapping, you need to create a DNS server zone or add records to an
existing zone. If the routers that are using DNS-based SSM mapping are also using DNS for other
purposes, you should use a normally configured DNS server. If DNS-based SSM mapping is the only
DNS implementation being used on the router, you can configure a false DNS setup with an empty root
zone or a root zone that points back to itself.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure DNS-based SSM mapping:
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip igmp ssm-map enable Enable SSM mapping for groups in a configured SSM range.
Step 3 ip igmp ssm-map query dns (Optional) Enable DNS-based SSM mapping.
By default, the ip igmp ssm-map command enables DNS-based SSM
mapping. Only the no form of this command is saved to the running
configuration.
Note Use this command to re-enable DNS-based SSM mapping if
DNS-based SSM mapping is disabled.
Step 4 ip domain multicast domain-prefix (Optional) Change the domain prefix used by the switch for DNS-based
SSM mapping.
By default, the switch uses the ip-addr.arpa domain prefix.
Step 5 ip name-server server-address1 Specify the address of one or more name servers to use for name and
[server-address2... server-address6] address resolution.
Step 6 Repeat Step 5 to configure additional —
DNS servers for redundancy, if required.
Configuring Static Traffic Forwarding with SSM Mapping
Use static traffic forwarding with SSM mapping to statically forward SSM traffic for certain groups.

44-20 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure static traffic forwarding with SSM
mapping:
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface type number Select an interface on which to statically forward traffic for a multicast
group using SSM mapping, and enter interface configuration mode.
Note Static forwarding of traffic with SSM mapping works with
either DNS-based SSM mapping or statically configured SSM
mapping.
Step 3 ip igmp static-group group-address Configure SSM mapping to statically forward a (S, G) channel from the
source ssm-map interface.
Use this command if you want to statically forward SSM traffic for
certain groups. Use DNS-based SSM mapping to determine the source
addresses of the channels.
Monitoring SSM Mapping

Use the privileged EXEC commands in Table 44-3 to monitor SSM mapping.
Table 44-3 SSM Mapping Monitoring Commands
Command Purpose
show ip igmp ssm-mapping Display information about SSM mapping.
show ip igmp ssm-mapping Display the sources that SSM mapping uses for a particular
group-address group.
show ip igmp groups [group-name | Display the multicast groups with receivers that are directly
group-address | interface-type connected to the router and that were learned through IGMP.
interface-number] [detail]
show host Display the default domain name, the style of name lookup
service, a list of name server hosts, and the cached list of
hostnames and addresses.
debug ip igmp group-address Display the IGMP packets received and sent and IGMP
host-related events.
Go to this URL to see SSM mapping monitoring examples:

html#wp1047772

OL-8553-06 44-21
Configuring PIM Stub Routing

The PIM Stub routing feature supports multicast routing between the distribution layer and the access
layer. It supports two types of PIM interfaces, uplink PIM interfaces, and PIM passive interfaces. A
routed interface configured with the PIM passive mode does not pass or forward PIM control traffic, it
only passes and forwards IGMP traffic.
PIM Stub Routing Configuration Guidelines

Follow these guidelines when enabling PIM stub routing on an interface:
• Before configuring PIM stub routing, you must have IP multicast routing configured on both the stub
router and the central router. You must also have PIM mode (dense-mode, sparse-mode, or
dense-sparse-mode) configured on the uplink interface of the stub router.
• The PIM stub router does not route the transit traffic between the distribution routers. Unicast
(EIGRP) stub routing enforces this behavior. You must configure unicast stub routing to assist the
PIM stub router behavior. For more information, see the “Configuring EIGRP Stub Routing” section
on page 36-39.
• Only directly connected multicast (IGMP) receivers and sources are allowed in the Layer 2 access
domains. The PIM protocol is not supported in access domains.
• The redundant PIM stub router topology is not supported.
Enabling PIM Stub Routing

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable PIM stub routing on an interface. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface on which you want to enable PIM stub routing, and
Step 3 ip pim passive Configure the PIM stub feature on the interface.
Step 5 show ip pim interface Display the PIM stub that is enabled on each interface.
To disable PIM stub routing on an interface, use the no ip pim passive interface configuration command.
In this example, IP multicast routing is enabled, Switch A PIM uplink port 25 is configured as a routed
uplink port with spare-dense-mode enabled. PIM stub routing is enabled on the VLAN 100 interfaces
and on Gigabit Ethernet port 20 in Figure 44-2:
Switch(config)# ip multicast-routing distributed
Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet0/25
Switch(config-if)# ip pim sparse-dense-mode

44-22 OL-8553-06

Switch(config-if)# ip pim passive
To verify that PIM stub is enabled for each interface, use the show ip pim interface privileged EXEC
command:
Switch# show ip pim interface
Address Interface Ver/ Nbr Query DR DR
Mode Count Intvl Prior
3.1.1.2 GigabitEthernet3/0/25 v2/SD 1 30 1 3.1.1.2
100.1.1.1 Vlan100 v2/P 0 30 1 100.1.1.1
10.1.1.1 GigabitEthernet3/0/20 v2/P 0 30 1 10.1.1.1
Use these privileged EXEC commands to display information about PIM stub configuration and status:
• show ip pim interface displays the PIM stub that is enabled on each interface.
• show ip igmp detail displays the interested clients that have joined the specific multicast source
group.
• show ip igmp mroute verifies that the multicast stream forwards from the source to the interested
clients.
Configuring a Rendezvous Point

You must have an RP if the interface is in sparse-dense mode and if you want to treat the group as a
sparse group. You can use several methods, as described in these sections:
• Manually Assigning an RP to Multicast Groups, page 44-23
• Configuring Auto-RP, page 44-25 (a standalone, Cisco-proprietary protocol separate from PIMv1)
• Configuring PIMv2 BSR, page 44-29 (a standards track protocol in the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF)
You can use auto-RP, BSR, or a combination of both, depending on the PIM version that you are running
and the types of routers in your network. For more information, see the “PIMv1 and PIMv2
Interoperability” section on page 44-10 and the “Auto-RP and BSR Configuration Guidelines” section
on page 44-11.
Manually Assigning an RP to Multicast Groups

This section explains how to manually configure an RP. If the RP for a group is learned through a
dynamic mechanism (such as auto-RP or BSR), you need not perform this task for that RP.

OL-8553-06 44-23
Senders of multicast traffic announce their existence through register messages received from the source
first-hop router (designated router) and forwarded to the RP. Receivers of multicast packets use RPs to
join a multicast group by using explicit join messages. RPs are not members of the multicast group;
rather, they serve as a meeting place for multicast sources and group members.
You can configure a single RP for multiple groups defined by an access list. If there is no RP configured
for a group, the multilayer switch treats the group as dense and uses the dense-mode PIM techniques.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to manually configure the address of the RP.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip pim rp-address ip-address Configure the address of a PIM RP.
[access-list-number] [override]
By default, no PIM RP address is configured. You must configure the IP
address of RPs on all routers and multilayer switches (including the RP).
If there is no RP configured for a group, the switch treats the group as
dense, using the dense-mode PIM techniques.
A PIM device can be an RP for more than one group. Only one RP address
can be used at a time within a PIM domain. The access-list conditions
specify for which groups the device is an RP.
• For ip-address, enter the unicast address of the RP in dotted-decimal
notation.
• (Optional) For access-list-number, enter an IP standard access list
number from 1 to 99. If no access list is configured, the RP is used for
all groups.
• (Optional) The override keyword means that if there is a conflict
between the RP configured with this command and one learned by
Auto-RP or BSR, the RP configured with this command prevails.
Step 3 access-list access-list-number {deny | Create a standard access list, repeating the command as many times as
• For access-list-number, enter the access list number specified in
Step 2.
• The deny keyword denies access if the conditions are matched. The
permit keyword permits access if the conditions are matched.
• For source, enter the multicast group address for which the RP should
be used.

44-24 OL-8553-06
To remove an RP address, use the no ip pim rp-address ip-address [access-list-number] [override]

This example shows how to configure the address of the RP to 147.106.6.22 for multicast
group 225.2.2.2 only:
Switch(config)# ip pim rp-address 147.106.6.22 1
Configuring Auto-RP
Auto-RP uses IP multicast to automate the distribution of group-to-RP mappings to all Cisco routers and
multilayer switches in a PIM network. It has these benefits:
• It is easy to use multiple RPs within a network to serve different group ranges.
• It provides load splitting among different RPs and arrangement of RPs according to the location of
group participants.
• It avoids inconsistent, manual RP configurations on every router and multilayer switch in a PIM
network, which can cause connectivity problems.
Follow these guidelines when configuring Auto-RP:
• If you configure PIM in sparse mode or sparse-dense mode and do not configure Auto-RP, you must
manually configure an RP as described in the “Manually Assigning an RP to Multicast Groups”
• If routed interfaces are configured in sparse mode, Auto-RP can still be used if all devices are
configured with a manual RP address for the Auto-RP groups.
• If routed interfaces are configured in sparse mode and you enter the ip pim autorp listener global
configuration command, Auto-RP can still be used even if all devices are not configured with a
manual RP address for the Auto-RP groups.
These sections describe how to configure Auto-RP:
• Setting up Auto-RP in a New Internetwork, page 44-25 (optional)
• Adding Auto-RP to an Existing Sparse-Mode Cloud, page 44-25 (optional)
• Preventing Join Messages to False RPs, page 44-27 (optional)
• Filtering Incoming RP Announcement Messages, page 44-28 (optional)
For overview information, see the “Auto-RP” section on page 44-6.
Setting up Auto-RP in a New Internetwork
If you are setting up Auto-RP in a new internetwork, you do not need a default RP because you configure
all the interfaces for sparse-dense mode. Follow the process described in the “Adding Auto-RP to an
Existing Sparse-Mode Cloud” section on page 44-25. However, omit Step 3 if you want to configure a
PIM router as the RP for the local group.
Adding Auto-RP to an Existing Sparse-Mode Cloud
This section contains some suggestions for the initial deployment of Auto-RP into an existing
sparse-mode cloud to minimize disruption of the existing multicast infrastructure.

OL-8553-06 44-25
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to deploy Auto-RP in an existing sparse-mode
cloud. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 1 show running-config Verify that a default RP is already configured on all PIM devices and the
RP in the sparse-mode network. It was previously configured with the ip
pim rp-address global configuration command.
This step is not required for spare-dense-mode environments.
The selected RP should have good connectivity and be available across
the network. Use this RP for the global groups (for example 224.x.x.x
and other global groups). Do not reconfigure the group address range that
this RP serves. RPs dynamically discovered through Auto-RP take
precedence over statically configured RPs. Assume that it is desirable to
use a second RP for the local groups.
Step 3 ip pim send-rp-announce interface-id Configure another PIM device to be the candidate RP for local groups.
scope ttl group-list access-list-number
• For interface-id, enter the interface type and number that identifies
interval seconds
the RP address. Valid interfaces include physical ports, port
channels, and VLANs.
• For scope ttl, specify the time-to-live value in hops. Enter a hop
count that is high enough so that the RP-announce messages reach
all mapping agents in the network. There is no default setting. The
range is 1 to 255.
• For group-list access-list-number, enter an IP standard access list
number from 1 to 99. If no access list is configured, the RP is used
for all groups.
• For interval seconds, specify how often the announcement messages
must be sent. The default is 60 seconds. The range is 1 to 16383.
Step 3.
• For source, enter the multicast group address range for which the RP
should be used.

44-26 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 5 ip pim send-rp-discovery scope ttl Find a switch whose connectivity is not likely to be interrupted, and
assign it the role of RP-mapping agent.
For scope ttl, specify the time-to-live value in hops to limit the RP
discovery packets. All devices within the hop count from the source
device receive the Auto-RP discovery messages. These messages tell
other devices which group-to-RP mapping to use to avoid conflicts (such
as overlapping group-to-RP ranges). There is no default setting. The
range is 1 to 255.
show ip pim rp mapping Display active RPs that are cached with associated multicast routing
entries.
show ip pim rp
Display the information cached in the routing table.
To remove the PIM device configured as the candidate RP, use the no ip pim send-rp-announce
interface-id global configuration command. To remove the switch as the RP-mapping agent, use the no
ip pim send-rp-discovery global configuration command.
This example shows how to send RP announcements out all PIM-enabled interfaces for a maximum
of 31 hops. The IP address of port 1 is the RP. Access list 5 describes the group for which this switch
serves as RP:
Switch(config)# ip pim send-rp-announce gigabitethernet0/1 scope 31 group-list 5
Preventing Join Messages to False RPs
Find whether the ip pim accept-rp command was previously configured throughout the network by
using the show running-config privileged EXEC command. If the ip pim accept-rp command is not
configured on any device, this problem can be addressed later. In those routers or multilayer switches
already configured with the ip pim accept-rp command, you must enter the command again to accept
the newly advertised RP.
To accept all RPs advertised with Auto-RP and reject all other RPs by default, use the ip pim accept-rp
auto-rp global configuration command. This procedure is optional.
If all interfaces are in sparse mode, use a default-configured RP to support the two well-known
groups 224.0.1.39 and 224.0.1.40. Auto-RP uses these two well-known groups to collect and distribute
RP-mapping information. When this is the case and the ip pim accept-rp auto-rp command is
configured, another ip pim accept-rp command accepting the RP must be configured as follows:
Switch(config)# ip pim accept-rp 172.10.20.1 1

OL-8553-06 44-27
Filtering Incoming RP Announcement Messages
You can add configuration commands to the mapping agents to prevent a maliciously configured router
from masquerading as a candidate RP and causing problems.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to filter incoming RP announcement messages.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip pim rp-announce-filter rp-list Filter incoming RP announcement messages.
access-list-number group-list
Enter this command on each mapping agent in the network. Without
access-list-number
this command, all incoming RP-announce messages are accepted by
default.
For rp-list access-list-number, configure an access list of candidate RP
addresses that, if permitted, is accepted for the group ranges supplied
in the group-list access-list-number variable. If this variable is
omitted, the filter applies to all multicast groups.
If more than one mapping agent is used, the filters must be consistent
across all mapping agents to ensure that no conflicts occur in the
Group-to-RP mapping information.
Step 2.
The permit keyword permits access if the conditions are matched.
• Create an access list that specifies from which routers and
multilayer switches the mapping agent accepts candidate RP
announcements (rp-list ACL).
• Create an access list that specifies the range of multicast groups
from which to accept or deny (group-list ACL).
• For source, enter the multicast group address range for which the
RP should be used.
To remove a filter on incoming RP announcement messages, use the no ip pim rp-announce-filter

rp-list access-list-number [group-list access-list-number] global configuration command.

44-28 OL-8553-06
This example shows a sample configuration on an Auto-RP mapping agent that is used to prevent
candidate RP announcements from being accepted from unauthorized candidate RPs:
Switch(config)# ip pim rp-announce-filter rp-list 10 group-list 20
In this example, the mapping agent accepts candidate RP announcements from only two devices,
172.16.5.1 and 172.16.2.1. The mapping agent accepts candidate RP announcements from these two
devices only for multicast groups that fall in the group range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The
mapping agent does not accept candidate RP announcements from any other devices in the network.
Furthermore, the mapping agent does not accept candidate RP announcements from 172.16.5.1
or 172.16.2.1 if the announcements are for any groups in the 239.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255 range.
This range is the administratively scoped address range.
Configuring PIMv2 BSR

These sections describe how to set up BSR in your PIMv2 network:
• Defining the PIM Domain Border, page 44-29 (optional)
• Defining the IP Multicast Boundary, page 44-30 (optional)
• Configuring Candidate BSRs, page 44-31 (optional)
• Configuring Candidate RPs, page 44-32 (optional)
For overview information, see the “Bootstrap Router” section on page 44-7.
Defining the PIM Domain Border
As IP multicast becomes more widespread, the chance of one PIMv2 domain bordering another PIMv2
domain is increasing. Because these two domains probably do not share the same set of RPs, BSR,
candidate RPs, and candidate BSRs, you need to constrain PIMv2 BSR messages from flowing into or
out of the domain. Allowing these messages to leak across the domain borders could adversely affect the
normal BSR election mechanism and elect a single BSR across all bordering domains and co-mingle
candidate RP advertisements, resulting in the election of RPs in the wrong domain.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define the PIM domain border. This
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 ip pim bsr-border Define a PIM bootstrap message boundary for the PIM domain.
Enter this command on each interface that connects to other bordering
PIM domains. This command instructs the switch to neither send or
receive PIMv2 BSR messages on this interface as shown in Figure 44-5.

OL-8553-06 44-29
To remove the PIM border, use the no ip pim bsr-border interface configuration command.
Figure 44-5 Constraining PIMv2 BSR Messages
PIMv2 sparse-mode
Configure the network Configure the
ip pim bsr-border ip pim bsr-border
command on BSR BSR command on
this interface. messages messages this interface.
Neighboring Neighboring
PIMv2 domain Layer 3 BSR Layer 3 PIMv2 domain
switch switch
101243
Defining the IP Multicast Boundary
You define a multicast boundary to prevent Auto-RP messages from entering the PIM domain. You
create an access list to deny packets destined for 224.0.1.39 and 224.0.1.40, which carry Auto-RP
information.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define a multicast boundary. This procedure
is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 access-list access-list-number deny Create a standard access list, repeating the command as many times as
source [source-wildcard] necessary.
• For access-list-number, the range is 1 to 99.
• For source, enter multicast addresses 224.0.1.39 and 224.0.1.40,
which carry Auto-RP information.
mode.
Step 4 ip multicast boundary Configure the boundary, specifying the access list you created in Step 2.
access-list-number

44-30 OL-8553-06
To remove the boundary, use the no ip multicast boundary interface configuration command.
This example shows a portion of an IP multicast boundary configuration that denies Auto-RP
information:
Switch(config)# access-list 1 permit all
Switch(config-if)# ip multicast boundary 1
Configuring Candidate BSRs
You can configure one or more candidate BSRs. The devices serving as candidate BSRs should have
good connectivity to other devices and be in the backbone portion of the network.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure your switch as a candidate BSR.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip pim bsr-candidate interface-id Configure your switch to be a candidate BSR.
hash-mask-length [priority]
• For interface-id, enter the interface on this switch from which the
BSR address is derived to make it a candidate. This interface must
be enabled with PIM. Valid interfaces include physical ports, port
channels, and VLANs.
• For hash-mask-length, specify the mask length (32 bits maximum)
that is to be ANDed with the group address before the hash function
is called. All groups with the same seed hash correspond to the same
RP. For example, if this value is 24, only the first 24 bits of the
group addresses matter.
• (Optional) For priority, enter a number from 0 to 255. The BSR with
the larger priority is preferred. If the priority values are the same,
the device with the highest IP address is selected as the BSR. The
default is 0.
To remove this device as a candidate BSR, use the no ip pim bsr-candidate global configuration
command.
This example shows how to configure a candidate BSR, which uses the IP address 172.21.24.18 on a
port as the advertised BSR address, uses 30 bits as the hash-mask-length, and has a priority of 10.
Switch(config-if)# ip pim sparse-dense-mode
Switch(config-if)# ip pim bsr-candidate gigabitethernet0/2 30 10

OL-8553-06 44-31
Configuring Candidate RPs
You can configure one or more candidate RPs. Similar to BSRs, the RPs should also have good
connectivity to other devices and be in the backbone portion of the network. An RP can serve the entire
IP multicast address space or a portion of it. Candidate RPs send candidate RP advertisements to the
BSR. When deciding which devices should be RPs, consider these options:
• In a network of Cisco routers and multilayer switches where only Auto-RP is used, any device can
be configured as an RP.
• In a network that includes only Cisco PIMv2 routers and multilayer switches and with routers from
other vendors, any device can be used as an RP.
• In a network of Cisco PIMv1 routers, Cisco PIMv2 routers, and routers from other vendors,
configure only Cisco PIMv2 routers and multilayer switches as RPs.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure your switch to advertise itself as a
PIMv2 candidate RP to the BSR. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip pim rp-candidate interface-id Configure your switch to be a candidate RP.
[group-list access-list-number]
• For interface-id, specify the interface whose associated IP address
is advertised as a candidate RP address. Valid interfaces include
physical ports, port channels, and VLANs.
• (Optional) For group-list access-list-number, enter an IP standard
access list number from 1 to 99. If no group-list is specified, the
switch is a candidate RP for all groups.
Step 2.
• For source, enter the number of the network or host from which the
packet is being sent.
To remove this device as a candidate RP, use the no ip pim rp-candidate interface-id global

44-32 OL-8553-06
This example shows how to configure the switch to advertise itself as a candidate RP to the BSR in its
PIM domain. Standard access list number 4 specifies the group prefix associated with the RP that has
the address identified by a port. That RP is responsible for the groups with the prefix 239.
Switch(config)# ip pim rp-candidate gigabitethernet0/2 group-list 4
Using Auto-RP and a BSR

If there are only Cisco devices in you network (no routers from other vendors), there is no need to
configure a BSR. Configure Auto-RP in a network that is running both PIMv1 and PIMv2.
If you have non-Cisco PIMv2 routers that need to interoperate with Cisco PIMv1 routers and multilayer
switches, both Auto-RP and a BSR are required. We recommend that a Cisco PIMv2 router or multilayer
switch be both the Auto-RP mapping agent and the BSR.
If you must have one or more BSRs, we have these recommendations:
• Configure the candidate BSRs as the RP-mapping agents for Auto-RP. For more information, see
the “Configuring Auto-RP” section on page 44-25 and the “Configuring Candidate BSRs” section
on page 44-31.
• For group prefixes advertised through Auto-RP, the PIMv2 BSR mechanism should not advertise a
subrange of these group prefixes served by a different set of RPs. In a mixed PIMv1 and PIMv2
domain, have backup RPs serve the same group prefixes. This prevents the PIMv2 DRs from
selecting a different RP from those PIMv1 DRs, due to the longest match lookup in the RP-mapping
database.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to verify the consistency of group-to-RP
mappings. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 1 show ip pim rp [[group-name | On any Cisco device, display the available RP mappings.
group-address] | mapping]
• (Optional) For group-name, specify the name of the group about which to
display RPs.
• (Optional) For group-address, specify the address of the group about which
to display RPs.
• (Optional) Use the mapping keyword to display all group-to-RP mappings
of which the Cisco device is aware (configured or learned from Auto-RP).
Step 2 show ip pim rp-hash group On a PIMv2 router or multilayer switch, confirm that the same RP is the one that
a PIMv1 system chooses.
For group, enter the group address for which to display RP information.
Monitoring the RP Mapping Information

To monitor the RP mapping information, use these commands in privileged EXEC mode:
• show ip pim bsr displays information about the elected BSR.
• show ip pim rp-hash group displays the RP that was selected for the specified group.
• show ip pim rp [group-name | group-address | mapping] displays how the switch learns of the RP
(through the BSR or the Auto-RP mechanism).

OL-8553-06 44-33
Configuring Advanced PIM Features
Troubleshooting PIMv1 and PIMv2 Interoperability Problems

When debugging interoperability problems between PIMv1 and PIMv2, check these in the order shown:
1. Verify RP mapping with the show ip pim rp-hash privileged EXEC command, making sure that all
systems agree on the same RP for the same group.
2. Verify interoperability between different versions of DRs and RPs. Make sure the RPs are
interacting with the DRs properly (by responding with register-stops and forwarding decapsulated
data packets from registers).

These sections describe the optional advanced PIM features:
• Understanding PIM Shared Tree and Source Tree, page 44-34
• Delaying the Use of PIM Shortest-Path Tree, page 44-35 (optional)
• Modifying the PIM Router-Query Message Interval, page 44-36 (optional)
Understanding PIM Shared Tree and Source Tree

By default, members of a group receive data from senders to the group across a single data-distribution
tree rooted at the RP. Figure 44-6 shows this type of shared-distribution tree. Data from senders is
delivered to the RP for distribution to group members joined to the shared tree.
Figure 44-6 Shared Tree and Source Tree (Shortest-Path Tree)
Source
Router A Router B
Source tree
Shared tree
(shortest
from RP
path tree)
Router C RP
44967
Receiver
If the data rate warrants, leaf routers (routers without any downstream connections) on the shared tree
can use the data distribution tree rooted at the source. This type of distribution tree is called a
shortest-path tree or source tree. By default, the software switches to a source tree upon receiving the
first data packet from a source.

44-34 OL-8553-06
This process describes the move from a shared tree to a source tree:
1. A receiver joins a group; leaf Router C sends a join message toward the RP.
2. The RP puts a link to Router C in its outgoing interface list.
3. A source sends data; Router A encapsulates the data in a register message and sends it to the RP.
4. The RP forwards the data down the shared tree to Router C and sends a join message toward the
source. At this point, data might arrive twice at Router C, once encapsulated and once natively.
5. When data arrives natively (unencapsulated) at the RP, it sends a register-stop message to Router A.
6. By default, reception of the first data packet prompts Router C to send a join message toward the
source.
7. When Router C receives data on (S,G), it sends a prune message for the source up the shared tree.
8. The RP deletes the link to Router C from the outgoing interface of (S,G). The RP triggers a prune
message toward the source.
Join and prune messages are sent for sources and RPs. They are sent hop-by-hop and are processed by
each PIM device along the path to the source or RP. Register and register-stop messages are not sent
hop-by-hop. They are sent by the designated router that is directly connected to a source and are received
by the RP for the group.
Multiple sources sending to groups use the shared tree.
You can configure the PIM device to stay on the shared tree. For more information, see the “Delaying
the Use of PIM Shortest-Path Tree” section on page 44-35.
Delaying the Use of PIM Shortest-Path Tree

The change from shared to source tree happens when the first data packet arrives at the last-hop router
(Router C in Figure 44-6). This change occurs because the ip pim spt-threshold global configuration
command controls that timing.
The shortest-path tree requires more memory than the shared tree but reduces delay. You might want to
postpone its use. Instead of allowing the leaf router to immediately move to the shortest-path tree, you
can specify that the traffic must first reach a threshold.
You can configure when a PIM leaf router should join the shortest-path tree for a specified group. If a
source sends at a rate greater than or equal to the specified kb/s rate, the multilayer switch triggers a PIM
join message toward the source to construct a source tree (shortest-path tree). If the traffic rate from the
source drops below the threshold value, the leaf router switches back to the shared tree and sends a prune
message toward the source.
You can specify to which groups the shortest-path tree threshold applies by using a group list (a standard
access list). If a value of 0 is specified or if the group list is not used, the threshold applies to all groups.

OL-8553-06 44-35
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a traffic rate threshold that must
be reached before multicast routing is switched from the source tree to the shortest-path tree. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 access-list access-list-number {deny | Create a standard access list.
permit} source [source-wildcard]
matched.
• For source, specify the multicast group to which the threshold
applies.
decimal notation to be applied to the source. Place ones in the
bit positions that you want to ignore.
Step 3 ip pim spt-threshold {kbps | infinity} Specify the threshold that must be reached before moving to
[group-list access-list-number] shortest-path tree (spt).
• For kbps, specify the traffic rate in kilobits per second. The
default is 0 kb/s.
Note Because of switch hardware limitations, 0 kb/s is the only
valid entry even though the range is 0 to 4294967.
• Specify infinity if you want all sources for the specified group
to use the shared tree, never switching to the source tree.
• (Optional) For group-list access-list-number, specify the access
list created in Step 2. If the value is 0 or if the group-list is not
used, the threshold applies to all groups.
To return to the default setting, use the no ip pim spt-threshold {kbps | infinity} global configuration
command.
Modifying the PIM Router-Query Message Interval

PIM routers and multilayer switches send PIM router-query messages to find which device is the DR for
each LAN segment (subnet). The DR is responsible for sending IGMP host-query messages to all hosts
on the directly connected LAN.

44-36 OL-8553-06
Configuring Optional IGMP Features
With PIM DM operation, the DR has meaning only if IGMPv1 is in use. IGMPv1 does not have an IGMP
querier election process, so the elected DR functions as the IGMP querier. With PIM SM operation, the
DR is the device that is directly connected to the multicast source. It sends PIM register messages to
notify the RP that multicast traffic from a source needs to be forwarded down the shared tree. In this
case, the DR is the device with the highest IP address.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to modify the router-query message interval.
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 ip pim query-interval seconds Configure the frequency at which the switch sends PIM router-query
messages.
The default is 30 seconds. The range is 1 to 65535.
Step 5 show ip igmp interface [interface-id] Verify your entries.
To return to the default setting, use the no ip pim query-interval [seconds] interface configuration
command.

• Default IGMP Configuration, page 44-38
• Configuring the Switch as a Member of a Group, page 44-38 (optional)
• Controlling Access to IP Multicast Groups, page 44-39 (optional)
• Changing the IGMP Version, page 44-40 (optional)
• Modifying the IGMP Host-Query Message Interval, page 44-40 (optional)
• Changing the IGMP Query Timeout for IGMPv2, page 44-41 (optional)
• Changing the Maximum Query Response Time for IGMPv2, page 44-42 (optional)
• Configuring the Switch as a Statically Connected Member, page 44-42 (optional)

OL-8553-06 44-37
Default IGMP Configuration

Table 44-4 shows the default IGMP configuration.
Table 44-4 Default IGMP Configuration

Multilayer switch as a member of a multicast group No group memberships are defined.
Access to multicast groups All groups are allowed on an interface.
IGMP version Version 2 on all interfaces.
IGMP host-query message interval 60 seconds on all interfaces.
IGMP query timeout 60 seconds on all interfaces.
IGMP maximum query response time 10 seconds on all interfaces.
Multilayer switch as a statically connected member Disabled.
Configuring the Switch as a Member of a Group

You can configure the switch as a member of a multicast group and discover multicast reachability in a
network. If all the multicast-capable routers and multilayer switches that you administer are members of
a multicast group, pinging that group causes all these devices to respond. The devices respond to ICMP
echo-request packets addressed to a group of which they are members. Another example is the multicast
trace-route tools provided in the software.
Caution Performing this procedure might impact the CPU performance because the CPU receives all data traffic
for the group address.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch to be a member of a
group. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 ip igmp join-group group-address Configure the switch to join a multicast group.
By default, no group memberships are defined.
For group-address, specify the multicast IP address in dotted decimal
notation.
To cancel membership in a group, use the no ip igmp join-group group-address interface configuration
command.

44-38 OL-8553-06
This example shows how to enable the switch to join multicast group 255.2.2.2:
Switch(config-if)# ip igmp join-group 255.2.2.2
Controlling Access to IP Multicast Groups

The switch sends IGMP host-query messages to find which multicast groups have members on attached
local networks. The switch then forwards to these group members all packets addressed to the multicast
group. You can place a filter on each interface to restrict the multicast groups that hosts on the subnet
serviced by the interface can join.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to filter multicast groups allowed on an
Command Purpose
configuration mode.
Step 3 ip igmp access-group access-list-number Specify the multicast groups that hosts on the subnet serviced by an
interface can join.
By default, all groups are allowed on an interface.
For access-list-number, specify an IP standard access list number.
Step 5 access-list access-list-number {deny | Create a standard access list.
permit} source [source-wildcard]
• For access-list-number, specify the access list created in Step 3.
matched.
• For source, specify the multicast group that hosts on the subnet
can join.
To disable groups on an interface, use the no ip igmp access-group interface configuration command.
This example shows how to configure hosts attached to a port as able to join only group 255.2.2.2:
Switch(config)# access-list 1 255.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
Switch(config-if)# ip igmp access-group 1

OL-8553-06 44-39
Changing the IGMP Version

By default, the switch uses IGMP Version 2, which provides features such as the IGMP query timeout
and the maximum query response time.
All systems on the subnet must support the same version. The switch does not automatically detect
Version 1 systems and switch to Version 1. You can mix Version 1 and Version 2 hosts on the subnet
because Version 2 routers or switches always work correctly with IGMPv1 hosts.
Configure the switch for Version 1 if your hosts do not support Version 2.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the IGMP version. This procedure is
optional.
Command Purpose
configuration mode.
Step 3 ip igmp version {1 | 2} Specify the IGMP version that the switch uses.
Note If you change to Version 1, you cannot configure the ip igmp
query-interval or the ip igmp query-max-response-time
interface configuration commands.
To return to the default setting, use the no ip igmp version interface configuration command.
Modifying the IGMP Host-Query Message Interval

The switch periodically sends IGMP host-query messages to discover which multicast groups are present
on attached networks. These messages are sent to the all-hosts multicast group (224.0.0.1) with a
time-to-live (TTL) of 1. The switch sends host-query messages to refresh its knowledge of memberships
present on the network. If, after some number of queries, the software discovers that no local hosts are
members of a multicast group, the software stops forwarding multicast packets to the local network from
remote origins for that group and sends a prune message upstream toward the source.
The switch elects a PIM designated router (DR) for the LAN (subnet). The DR is the router or multilayer
switch with the highest IP address for IGMPv2. For IGMPv1, the DR is elected according to the
multicast routing protocol that runs on the LAN. The designated router is responsible for sending IGMP
host-query messages to all hosts on the LAN. In sparse mode, the designated router also sends PIM
register and PIM join messages toward the RP router.

44-40 OL-8553-06
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to modify the host-query interval. This
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 ip igmp query-interval seconds Configure the frequency at which the designated router sends IGMP
host-query messages.
By default, the designated router sends IGMP host-query messages
every 60 seconds to keep the IGMP overhead very low on hosts and
networks. The range is 1 to 65535.
To return to the default setting, use the no ip igmp query-interval interface configuration command.
Changing the IGMP Query Timeout for IGMPv2

If you are using IGMPv2, you can specify the period of time before the switch takes over as the querier
for the interface. By default, the switch waits twice the query interval controlled by the ip igmp
query-interval interface configuration command. After that time, if the switch has received no queries,
it becomes the querier.
You can configure the query interval by entering the show ip igmp interface interface-id privileged
EXEC command.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the IGMP query timeout. This
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 ip igmp querier-timeout seconds Specify the IGMP query timeout.
The default is 60 seconds (twice the query interval). The range is 60
to 300.
To return to the default setting, use the no ip igmp querier-timeout interface configuration command.

OL-8553-06 44-41
Changing the Maximum Query Response Time for IGMPv2

If you are using IGMPv2, you can change the maximum query response time advertised in IGMP
queries. The maximum query response time enables the switch to quickly detect that there are no more
directly connected group members on a LAN. Decreasing the value enables the switch to prune groups
faster.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the maximum query response time.
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 ip igmp query-max-response-time Change the maximum query response time advertised in IGMP queries.
seconds
The default is 10 seconds. The range is 1 to 25.
To return to the default setting, use the no ip igmp query-max-response-time interface configuration
command.
Configuring the Switch as a Statically Connected Member

Sometimes there is either no group member on a network segment or a host cannot report its group
membership by using IGMP. However, you might want multicast traffic to go to that network segment.
These are ways to pull multicast traffic down to a network segment:
• Use the ip igmp join-group interface configuration command. With this method, the switch accepts
the multicast packets in addition to forwarding them. Accepting the multicast packets prevents the
switch from fast switching.
• Use the ip igmp static-group interface configuration command. With this method, the switch does
not accept the packets itself, but only forwards them. This method enables fast switching. The
outgoing interface appears in the IGMP cache, but the switch itself is not a member, as evidenced
by lack of an L (local) flag in the multicast route entry.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch itself to be a statically
connected member of a group (and enable fast switching). This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 3 ip igmp static-group group-address Configure the switch as a statically connected member of a group.
By default, this feature is disabled.

44-42 OL-8553-06
Configuring Optional Multicast Routing Features
Command Purpose
To remove the switch as a member of the group, use the no ip igmp static-group group-address

These sections describe how to configure optional multicast routing features:
• Features for Layer 2 connectivity and MBONE multimedia conference session and set up:
– Enabling CGMP Server Support, page 44-43 (optional)
– Configuring sdr Listener Support, page 44-44 (optional)
• Features that control bandwidth utilization:
– Configuring an IP Multicast Boundary, page 44-45 (optional)
• Procedure for configuring a multicast within a VPN routing/forwarding (VRF) table:
– Configuring Multicast VRFs, page 36-76
Enabling CGMP Server Support

The switch serves as a CGMP server for devices that do not support IGMP snooping but have CGMP
client functionality. CGMP is a protocol used on Cisco routers and multilayer switches connected to
Layer 2 Catalyst switches to perform tasks similar to those performed by IGMP. CGMP is necessary
because the Layer 2 switch cannot distinguish between IP multicast data packets and IGMP report
messages, which are both at the MAC-level and are addressed to the same group address.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the CGMP server on the switch
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface that is connected to the Layer 2 Catalyst switch, and

OL-8553-06 44-43
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip cgmp [proxy] Enable CGMP on the interface.
By default, CGMP is disabled on all interfaces.
Enabling CGMP triggers a CGMP join message. Enable CGMP only on
Layer 3 interfaces connected to Layer 2 Catalyst switches.
(Optional) When you enter the proxy keyword, the CGMP proxy function
is enabled. The proxy router advertises the existence of
non-CGMP-capable routers by sending a CGMP join message with the
non-CGMP-capable router MAC address and a group address
of 0000.0000.0000.
Note To perform CGMP proxy, the switch must be the IGMP querier.
If you configure the ip cgmp proxy command, you must
manipulate the IP addresses so that the switch is the IGMP
querier, which might be the highest or lowest IP address,
depending on which version of IGMP is running on the network.
An IGMP Version 2 querier is selected based on the lowest IP
address on the interface. An IGMP Version 1 querier is selected
based on the multicast routing protocol used on the interface.
Step 7 Verify the Layer 2 Catalyst switch CGMP-client configuration. For more
information, see the documentation that shipped with the product.
To disable CGMP on the interface, use the no ip cgmp interface configuration command.
When multiple Cisco CGMP-capable devices are connected to a switched network and the ip cgmp
proxy command is needed, we recommend that all devices be configured with the same CGMP option
and have precedence for becoming the IGMP querier over non-Cisco routers.
Configuring sdr Listener Support

The MBONE is the small subset of Internet routers and hosts that are interconnected and capable of
forwarding IP multicast traffic. Other multimedia content is often broadcast over the MBONE. Before
you can join a multimedia session, you need to know what multicast group address and port are being
used for the session, when the session is going to be active, and what sort of applications (audio, video,
and so forth) are required on your workstation. The MBONE Session Directory Version 2 (sdr) tool
provides this information. This freeware application can be downloaded from several sites on the World
Wide Web, one of which is http://www.video.ja.net/mice/index.html.
SDR is a multicast application that listens to a well-known multicast group address and port for Session
Announcement Protocol (SAP) multicast packets from SAP clients, which announce their conference
sessions. These SAP packets contain a session description, the time the session is active, its IP multicast
group addresses, media format, contact person, and other information about the advertised multimedia
session. The information in the SAP packet is displayed in the SDR Session Announcement window.

44-44 OL-8553-06
Enabling sdr Listener Support

By default, the switch does not listen to session directory advertisements.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the switch to join the default session
directory group (224.2.127.254) on the interface and listen to session directory advertisements. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface to be enabled for sdr, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 3 ip sdr listen Enable sdr listener support.
To disable sdr support, use the no ip sdr listen interface configuration command.
Limiting How Long an sdr Cache Entry Exists

By default, entries are never deleted from the sdr cache. You can limit how long the entry remains active
so that if a source stops advertising SAP information, old advertisements are not needlessly kept.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to limit how long an sdr cache entry stays active
in the cache. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip sdr cache-timeout minutes Limit how long an sdr cache entry stays active in the cache.
By default, entries are never deleted from the cache.
For minutes, the range is 1 to 4294967295.
To return to the default setting, use the no ip sdr cache-timeout global configuration command. To
delete the entire cache, use the clear ip sdr privileged EXEC command.
To display the session directory cache, use the show ip sdr privileged EXEC command.
Configuring an IP Multicast Boundary

Administratively-scoped boundaries can be used to limit the forwarding of multicast traffic outside of a
domain or subdomain. This approach uses a special range of multicast addresses, called
administratively-scoped addresses, as the boundary mechanism. If you configure an

OL-8553-06 44-45
administratively-scoped boundary on a routed interface, multicast traffic whose multicast group

addresses fall in this range can not enter or exit this interface, thereby providing a firewall for multicast
traffic in this address range.
Note Multicast boundaries and TTL thresholds control the scoping of multicast domains; however, TTL
thresholds are not supported by the switch. You should use multicast boundaries instead of TTL
thresholds to limit the forwarding of multicast traffic outside of a domain or a subdomain.
Figure 44-7 shows that Company XYZ has an administratively-scoped boundary set for the multicast
address range 239.0.0.0/8 on all routed interfaces at the perimeter of its network. This boundary prevents
any multicast traffic in the range 239.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255 from entering or leaving the
network. Similarly, the engineering and marketing departments have an administratively-scoped
boundary of 239.128.0.0/16 around the perimeter of their networks. This boundary prevents multicast
traffic in the range of 239.128.0.0 through 239.128.255.255 from entering or leaving their respective
networks.
Figure 44-7 Administratively-Scoped Boundaries
Company XYZ
Engineering Marketing
45154
239.128.0.0/16
239.0.0.0/8
You can define an administratively-scoped boundary on a routed interface for multicast group addresses.
A standard access list defines the range of addresses affected. When a boundary is defined, no multicast
data packets are allowed to flow across the boundary from either direction. The boundary allows the
same multicast group address to be reused in different administrative domains.
The IANA has designated the multicast address range 239.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 as the
administratively-scoped addresses. This range of addresses can then be reused in domains administered
by different organizations. The addresses would be considered local, not globally unique.

44-46 OL-8553-06
Configuring Basic DVMRP Interoperability Features
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set up an administratively-scoped boundary.
Command Purpose
mode.
Step 4 ip multicast boundary Configure the boundary, specifying the access list you created in Step 2.
access-list-number
To remove the boundary, use the no ip multicast boundary interface configuration command.
This example shows how to set up a boundary for all administratively-scoped addresses:
Switch(config-if)# ip multicast boundary 1

• Configuring DVMRP Interoperability, page 44-48 (optional)
• Configuring a DVMRP Tunnel, page 44-50 (optional)
• Advertising Network 0.0.0.0 to DVMRP Neighbors, page 44-51 (optional)
• Responding to mrinfo Requests, page 44-52 (optional)
For more advanced DVMRP features, see the “Configuring Advanced DVMRP Interoperability
Features” section on page 44-52.

OL-8553-06 44-47
Configuring DVMRP Interoperability

Cisco multicast routers and multilayer switches using PIM can interoperate with non-Cisco multicast
routers that use the DVMRP.
PIM devices dynamically discover DVMRP multicast routers on attached networks by listening to
DVMR probe messages. When a DVMRP neighbor has been discovered, the PIM device periodically
sends DVMRP report messages advertising the unicast sources reachable in the PIM domain. By default,
directly connected subnets and networks are advertised. The device forwards multicast packets that have
been forwarded by DVMRP routers and, in turn, forwards multicast packets to DVMRP routers.
You can configure an access list on the PIM routed interface connected to the MBONE to limit the
number of unicast routes that are advertised in DVMRP route reports. Otherwise, all routes in the unicast
routing table are advertised.
Note The mrouted protocol is a public-domain implementation of DVMRP. You must use mrouted
Version 3.8 (which implements a nonpruning version of DVMRP) when Cisco routers and multilayer
switches are directly connected to DVMRP routers or interoperate with DVMRP routers over an
MBONE tunnel. DVMRP advertisements produced by the Cisco IOS software can cause older versions
of the mrouted protocol to corrupt their routing tables and those of their neighbors.
You can configure what sources are advertised and what metrics are used by configuring the ip dvmrp
metric interface configuration command. You can also direct all sources learned through a particular
unicast routing process to be advertised into DVMRP.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the sources that are advertised and
the metrics that are used when DVMRP route-report messages are sent. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the interface connected to the MBONE and enabled for
multicast routing, and enter interface configuration mode.

44-48 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 4 ip dvmrp metric metric [list Configure the metric associated with a set of destinations for DVMRP
access-list-number] [[protocol process-id] reports.
| [dvmrp]]
• For metric, the range is 0 to 32. A value of 0 means that the route
is not advertised. A value of 32 is equivalent to infinity
(unreachable).
• (Optional) For list access-list-number, enter the access list number
created in Step 2. If specified, only the multicast destinations that
match the access list are reported with the configured metric.
• (Optional) For protocol process-id, enter the name of the unicast
routing protocol, such as eigrp, igrp, ospf, rip, static, or dvmrp,
and the process ID number of the routing protocol. If specified,
only routes learned by the specified routing protocol are advertised
in DVMRP report messages.
• (Optional) If specified, the dvmrp keyword allows routes from the
DVMRP routing table to be advertised with the configured metric
or filtered.
To disable the metric or route map, use the no ip dvmrp metric metric [list access-list-number]
[[protocol process-id] | [dvmrp]] or the no ip dvmrp metric metric route-map map-name interface
A more sophisticated way to achieve the same results as the preceding command is to use a route map
(ip dvmrp metric metric route-map map-name interface configuration command) instead of an access
list. You subject unicast routes to route-map conditions before they are injected into DVMRP.
This example shows how to configure DVMRP interoperability when the PIM device and the DVMRP
router are on the same network segment. In this example, access list 1 advertises the networks
(198.92.35.0, 198.92.36.0, 198.92.37.0, 131.108.0.0, and 150.136.0.0) to the DVMRP router, and access
list 2 prevents all other networks from being advertised (ip dvmrp metric 0 interface configuration
command).
Switch(config-if)# ip pim dense-mode
Switch(config-if)# ip dvmrp metric 1 list 1
Switch(config-if)# ip dvmrp metric 0 list 2

OL-8553-06 44-49
Configuring a DVMRP Tunnel

The software supports DVMRP tunnels to the MBONE. You can configure a DVMRP tunnel on a router
or multilayer switch if the other end is running DVMRP. The software then sends and receives multicast
packets through the tunnel. This strategy enables a PIM domain to connect to the DVMRP router when
all routers on the path do not support multicast routing. You cannot configure a DVMRP tunnel between
two routers.
When a Cisco router or multilayer switch runs DVMRP through a tunnel, it advertises sources in
DVMRP report messages, much as it does on real networks. The software also caches DVMRP report
messages it receives and uses them in its RPF calculation. This behavior enables the software to forward
multicast packets received through the tunnel.
When you configure a DVMRP tunnel, you should assign an IP address to a tunnel in these cases:
• To send IP packets through the tunnel
• To configure the software to perform DVMRP summarization
The software does not advertise subnets through the tunnel if the tunnel has a different network number
from the subnet. In this case, the software advertises only the network number through the tunnel.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a DVMRP tunnel. This procedure
is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 3 interface tunnel number Specify a tunnel interface, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 4 tunnel source ip-address Specify the source address of the tunnel interface. Enter the IP address
of the interface on the switch.
Step 5 tunnel destination ip-address Specify the destination address of the tunnel interface. Enter the IP
address of the mrouted router.
Step 6 tunnel mode dvmrp Configure the encapsulation mode for the tunnel to DVMRP.
Step 7 ip address address mask Assign an IP address to the interface.
or or
ip unnumbered type number Configure the interface as unnumbered.
Step 8 ip pim [dense-mode | sparse-mode] Configure the PIM mode on the interface.

44-50 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 9 ip dvmrp accept-filter Configure an acceptance filter for incoming DVMRP reports.
access-list-number [distance]
By default, all destination reports are accepted with a distance of 0.
neighbor-list access-list-number
Reports from all neighbors are accepted.
• For access-list-number, specify the access list number created in
Step 2. Any sources that match the access list are stored in the
DVMRP routing table with distance.
• (Optional) For distance, enter the administrative distance to the
destination. By default, the administrative distance for DVMRP
routes is 0 and take precedence over unicast routing table routes. If
you have two paths to a source, one through unicast routing (using
PIM as the multicast routing protocol) and another using DVMRP,
and if you want to use the PIM path, increase the administrative
distance for DVMRP routes. The range is 1 to 255.
• For neighbor-list access-list-number, enter the number of the
neighbor list created in Step 2. DVMRP reports are accepted only by
those neighbors on the list.
To disable the filter, use the no ip dvmrp accept-filter access-list-number [distance] neighbor-list
access-list-number interface configuration command.
This example shows how to configure a DVMRP tunnel. In this configuration, the IP address of the
tunnel on the Cisco switch is assigned unnumbered, which causes the tunnel to appear to have the same
IP address as port 1. The tunnel endpoint source address is 172.16.2.1, and the tunnel endpoint address
of the remote DVMRP router to which the tunnel is connected is 192.168.1.10. Any packets sent through
the tunnel are encapsulated in an outer IP header. The Cisco switch is configured to accept incoming
DVMRP reports with a distance of 100 from 198.92.37.0 through 198.92.37.255.
Switch(config)# ip multicast-routing
Switch(config)# interface tunnel 0
Switch(config-if)# ip unnumbered gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# tunnel source gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# tunnel destination 192.168.1.10
Switch(config-if)# tunnel mode dvmrp
Switch(config-if)# ip dvmrp accept-filter 1 100
Advertising Network 0.0.0.0 to DVMRP Neighbors

If your switch is a neighbor of an mrouted Version 3.6 device, you can configure the software to
advertise network 0.0.0.0 (the default route) to the DVMRP neighbor. The DVMRP default route
computes the RPF information for any multicast sources that do not match a more specific route.
Do not advertise the DVMRP default into the MBONE.

OL-8553-06 44-51
Configuring Advanced DVMRP Interoperability Features
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to advertise network 0.0.0.0 to DVMRP
neighbors on an interface. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface that is connected to the DVMRP router, and enter
Step 3 ip dvmrp default-information Advertise network 0.0.0.0 to DVMRP neighbors.
{originate | only}
Use this command only when the switch is a neighbor of mrouted
Version 3.6 machines.
• originate—Specifies that other routes more specific than 0.0.0.0 can
also be advertised.
• only—Specifies that no DVMRP routes other than 0.0.0.0 are
advertised.
To prevent the default route advertisement, use the no ip dvmrp default-information interface
Responding to mrinfo Requests

The software answers mrinfo requests sent by mrouted systems and Cisco routers and multilayer
switches. The software returns information about neighbors through DVMRP tunnels and all the routed
interfaces. This information includes the metric (always set to 1), the configured TTL threshold, the
status of the interface, and various flags. You can also use the mrinfo privileged EXEC command to
query the router or switch itself, as in this example:
Switch# mrinfo
171.69.214.27 (mm1-7kd.cisco.com) [version cisco 11.1] [flags: PMS]:
171.69.214.27 -> 171.69.214.26 (mm1-r7kb.cisco.com) [1/0/pim/querier]
171.69.214.27 -> 171.69.214.25 (mm1-45a.cisco.com) [1/0/pim/querier]
171.69.214.33 -> 171.69.214.34 (mm1-45c.cisco.com) [1/0/pim]
171.69.214.137 -> 0.0.0.0 [1/0/pim/querier/down/leaf]
171.69.214.203 -> 0.0.0.0 [1/0/pim/querier/down/leaf]
171.69.214.18 -> 171.69.214.20 (mm1-45e.cisco.com) [1/0/pim]
171.69.214.18 -> 171.69.214.19 (mm1-45c.cisco.com) [1/0/pim]
171.69.214.18 -> 171.69.214.17 (mm1-45a.cisco.com) [1/0/pim]

Cisco routers and multilayer switches run PIM to forward multicast packets to receivers and receive
multicast packets from senders. It is also possible to propagate DVMRP routes into and through a PIM
cloud. PIM uses this information; however, Cisco routers and multilayer switches do not implement
DVMRP to forward multicast packets.

44-52 OL-8553-06

• Enabling DVMRP Unicast Routing, page 44-53 (optional)
• Rejecting a DVMRP Nonpruning Neighbor, page 44-54 (optional)
• Controlling Route Exchanges, page 44-55 (optional)
For information on basic DVMRP features, see the “Configuring Basic DVMRP Interoperability
Features” section on page 44-47.
Enabling DVMRP Unicast Routing

Because multicast routing and unicast routing require separate topologies, PIM must follow the
multicast topology to build loopless distribution trees. Using DVMRP unicast routing, Cisco routers,
multilayer switches, and mrouted-based machines exchange DVMRP unicast routes, to which PIM can
then reverse-path forward.
Cisco devices do not perform DVMRP multicast routing among each other, but they can exchange
DVMRP routes. The DVMRP routes provide a multicast topology that might differ from the unicast
topology. This enables PIM to run over the multicast topology, thereby enabling sparse-mode PIM over
the MBONE topology.
When DVMRP unicast routing is enabled, the router or switch caches routes learned in DVMRP report
messages in a DVMRP routing table. When PIM is running, these routes might be preferred over routes
in the unicast routing table, enabling PIM to run on the MBONE topology when it is different from the
unicast topology.
DVMRP unicast routing can run on all interfaces. For DVMRP tunnels, it uses DVMRP multicast
routing. This feature does not enable DVMRP multicast routing among Cisco routers and multilayer
switches. However, if there is a DVMRP-capable multicast router, the Cisco device can do PIM/DVMRP
multicast routing.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable DVMRP unicast routing. This
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip dvmrp unicast-routing Enable DVMRP unicast routing (to send and receive DVMRP routes).
This feature is disabled by default.
To disable this feature, use the no ip dvmrp unicast-routing interface configuration command.

OL-8553-06 44-53
Rejecting a DVMRP Nonpruning Neighbor

By default, Cisco devices accept all DVMRP neighbors as peers, regardless of their DVMRP capability.
However, some non-Cisco devices run old versions of DVMRP that cannot prune, so they continuously
receive forwarded packets, wasting bandwidth. Figure 44-8 shows this scenario.
Figure 44-8 Leaf Nonpruning DVMRP Neighbor
Source router or RP
RP PIM dense mode
Router A
Valid Router B
multicast
Receiver
traffic
Layer 3 switch
Unnecessary
multicast
traffic
Leaf nonpruning
DVMRP device
101244
Stub LAN with no members
You can prevent the switch from peering (communicating) with a DVMRP neighbor if that neighbor
does not support DVMRP pruning or grafting. To do so, configure the switch (which is a neighbor to the
leaf, nonpruning DVMRP machine) with the ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners interface configuration
command on the interface connected to the nonpruning machine as shown in Figure 44-9. In this case,
when the switch receives DVMRP probe or report message without the prune-capable flag set, the switch
logs a syslog message and discards the message.

44-54 OL-8553-06
Figure 44-9 Router Rejects Nonpruning DVMRP Neighbor
Source router or RP
RP
Router A
Multicast
traffic gets Router B
to receiver, Receiver
not to leaf
DVMRP
device
Layer 3 switch
Configure the ip dvmrp

reject-non-pruners command
on this interface.
101245
Leaf nonpruning DVMRP device
Note that the ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners interface configuration command prevents peering with
neighbors only. If there are any nonpruning routers multiple hops away (downstream toward potential
receivers) that are not rejected, a nonpruning DVMRP network might still exist.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to prevent peering with nonpruning DVMRP
neighbors. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface connected to the nonpruning DVMRP neighbor,
Step 3 ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners Prevent peering with nonpruning DVMRP neighbors.
To disable this function, use the no ip dvmrp reject-non-pruners interface configuration command.
Controlling Route Exchanges

These sections describe how to tune the Cisco device advertisements of DVMRP routes:
• Limiting the Number of DVMRP Routes Advertised, page 44-56 (optional)
• Changing the DVMRP Route Threshold, page 44-56 (optional)

OL-8553-06 44-55
• Configuring a DVMRP Summary Address, page 44-57 (optional)

• Disabling DVMRP Autosummarization, page 44-59 (optional)
• Adding a Metric Offset to the DVMRP Route, page 44-59 (optional)
Limiting the Number of DVMRP Routes Advertised

By default, only 7000 DVMRP routes are advertised over an interface enabled to run DVMRP (that is,
a DVMRP tunnel, an interface where a DVMRP neighbor has been discovered, or an interface
configured to run the ip dvmrp unicast-routing interface configuration command).
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the DVMRP route limit. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip dvmrp route-limit count Change the number of DVMRP routes advertised over an interface
enabled for DVMRP.
This command prevents misconfigured ip dvmrp metric interface
configuration commands from causing massive route injection into the
MBONE.
By default, 7000 routes are advertised. The range is 0 to 4294967295.
To configure no route limit, use the no ip dvmrp route-limit global configuration command.
Changing the DVMRP Route Threshold

By default, 10,000 DVMRP routes can be received per interface within a 1-minute interval. When that
rate is exceeded, a syslog message is issued, warning that there might be a route surge occurring. The
warning is typically used to quickly detect when devices have been misconfigured to inject a large
number of routes into the MBONE.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the threshold number of routes that
trigger the warning. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip dvmrp routehog-notification Configure the number of routes that trigger a syslog message.
route-count
The default is 10,000 routes. The range is 1 to 4294967295.

44-56 OL-8553-06
To return to the default setting use the no ip dvmrp routehog-notification global configuration
command.
Use the show ip igmp interface privileged EXEC command to display a running count of routes. When
the count is exceeded, *** ALERT *** is appended to the line.
Configuring a DVMRP Summary Address

By default, a Cisco device advertises in DVMRP route-report messages only connected unicast routes
(that is, only routes to subnets that are directly connected to the router) from its unicast routing table.
These routes undergo normal DVMRP classful route summarization. This process depends on whether
the route being advertised is in the same classful network as the interface over which it is being
advertised.
Figure 44-10 shows an example of the default behavior. This example shows that the DVMRP report sent
by the Cisco router contains the three original routes received from the DVMRP router that have been
poison-reversed by adding 32 to the DVMRP metric. Listed after these routes are two routes that are
advertisements for the two directly connected networks (176.32.10.0/24 and 176.32.15.0/24) that were
taken from the unicast routing table. Because the DVMRP tunnel shares the same IP address as Fast
Ethernet port 1 and falls into the same Class B network as the two directly connected subnets, classful
summarization of these routes was not performed. As a result, the DVMRP router is able to
poison-reverse only these two routes to the directly connected subnets and is able to only RPF properly
for multicast traffic sent by sources on these two Ethernet segments. Any other multicast source in the
network behind the Cisco router that is not on these two Ethernet segments does not properly RPF-check
on the DVMRP router and is discarded.
You can force the Cisco router to advertise the summary address (specified by the address and mask pair
in the ip dvmrp summary-address address mask interface configuration command) in place of any
route that falls in this address range. The summary address is sent in a DVMRP route report if the unicast
routing table contains at least one route in this range; otherwise, the summary address is not advertised.
In Figure 44-10, you configure the ip dvmrp summary-address command on the Cisco router tunnel
interface. As a result, the Cisco router sends only a single summarized Class B advertisement for
network 176.32.0.0.16 from the unicast routing table.

OL-8553-06 44-57
Figure 44-10 Only Connected Unicast Routes Are Advertised by Default
DVMRP Report interface tunnel 0

151.16.0.0/16 m = 39 ip unnumbered fa0/1
172.34.15.0/24 m = 42
202.13.3.0/24 m = 40 interface fastethernet 0/1
176.32.10.0/24 m=1 ip addr 176.32.10.1 255.255.255.0
176.32.15.0/24 m=1 ip pim dense-mode
DVMRP router interface fastethernet 0/2

ip addr 176.32.15.1 255.255.255.0
ip pim dense-mode
Tunnel
DVMRP Route Table Cisco Unicast Routing Table (10,000 Routes)

router
Src Network Intf Metric Dist Network Intf Metric Dist
151.16.0/16 Fa0/1 7 0 176.13.10.0/24 Fa0/1 10514432 90
172.34.15.0/24 Fa0/1 10 0 Fast Fast 176.32.15.0/24 Fa0/2 10512012 90
202.13.3.0/24 Fa0/1 8 0 Ethernet Ethernet 176.32.20.0/24 Fa0/2 45106372 90
0/1 0/2
45156
176.32.10.0/24 176.32.15.0/24
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to customize the summarization of DVMRP
routes if the default classful autosummarization does not suit your needs. This procedure is optional.
Note At least one more-specific route must be present in the unicast routing table before a configured
summary address is advertised.
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip dvmrp summary-address address Specify a DVMRP summary address.
mask [metric value]
• For summary-address address mask, specify the summary IP
address and mask that is advertised instead of the more specific
route.
• (Optional) For metric value, specify the metric that is advertised
with the summary address. The default is 1. The range is 1 to 32.
To remove the summary address, use the no ip dvmrp summary-address address mask [metric value]

44-58 OL-8553-06
Disabling DVMRP Autosummarization

By default, the software automatically performs some level of DVMRP summarization. Disable this
function if you want to advertise all routes, not just a summary. In some special cases, you can use the
neighboring DVMRP router with all subnet information to better control the flow of multicast traffic in
the DVMRP network. One such case might occur if the PIM network is connected to the DVMRP cloud
at several points and more specific (unsummarized) routes are being injected into the DVMRP network
to advertise better paths to individual subnets inside the PIM cloud.
If you configure the ip dvmrp summary-address interface configuration command and did not
configure no ip dvmrp auto-summary, you get both custom and autosummaries.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable DVMRP autosummarization. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface connected to the DVMRP router, and enter
Step 3 no ip dvmrp auto-summary Disable DVMRP autosummarization.
To re-enable auto summarization, use the ip dvmrp auto-summary interface configuration command.
Adding a Metric Offset to the DVMRP Route

By default, the switch increments by one the metric (hop count) of a DVMRP route advertised in
incoming DVMRP reports. You can change the metric if you want to favor or not favor a certain route.
For example, a route is learned by multilayer switch A, and the same route is learned by multilayer
switch B with a higher metric. If you want to use the path through switch B because it is a faster path,
you can apply a metric offset to the route learned by switch A to make it larger than the metric learned
by switch B, and you can choose the path through switch B.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the default metric. This procedure is
optional.
Command Purpose
mode.

OL-8553-06 44-59
Monitoring and Maintaining IP Multicast Routing
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip dvmrp metric-offset [in | out] Change the metric added to DVMRP routes advertised in incoming
increment reports.
• (Optional) in—Specifies that the increment value is added to
incoming DVMRP reports and is reported in mrinfo replies.
• (Optional) out—Specifies that the increment value is added to
outgoing DVMRP reports for routes from the DVMRP routing
table.
If neither in nor out is specified, in is the default.
For increment, specify the value that is added to the metric of a DVMRP
router advertised in a report message. The range is 1 to 31.
If the ip dvmrp metric-offset command is not configured on an
interface, the default increment value for incoming routes is 1, and the
default for outgoing routes is 0.
To return to the default setting, use the no ip dvmrp metric-offset interface configuration command.

These sections describe how to monitor and maintain IP multicast routing:
• Clearing Caches, Tables, and Databases, page 44-60
• Displaying System and Network Statistics, page 44-61
• Monitoring IP Multicast Routing, page 44-62
Clearing Caches, Tables, and Databases

You can remove all contents of a particular cache, table, or database. Clearing a cache, table, or database
might be necessary when the contents of the particular structure are or suspected to be invalid.
You can use any of the privileged EXEC commands in Table 44-5 to clear IP multicast caches, tables,
and databases:
Table 44-5 Commands for Clearing Caches, Tables, and Databases
Command Purpose
clear ip cgmp Clear all group entries the Catalyst switches have
cached.
clear ip dvmrp route {* | route} Delete routes from the DVMRP routing table.

44-60 OL-8553-06
Table 44-5 Commands for Clearing Caches, Tables, and Databases (continued)
Command Purpose
clear ip igmp group [group-name | Delete entries from the IGMP cache.
group-address | interface]
clear ip mroute {* | group [source]} Delete entries from the IP multicast routing table.
clear ip pim auto-rp rp-address Clear the auto-RP cache.
clear ip sdr [group-address | “session-name”] Delete the Session Directory Protocol Version 2
cache or an sdr cache entry.
Displaying System and Network Statistics

You can display specific statistics, such as the contents of IP routing tables, caches, and databases.
Note This release does not support per-route statistics.
You can display information to learn resource usage and solve network problems. You can also display
information about node reachability and discover the routing path that packets of your device are taking
through the network.
You can use any of the privileged EXEC commands in Table 44-6 to display various routing statistics:
Table 44-6 Commands for Displaying System and Network Statistics
Command Purpose
ping [group-name | group-address] Send an ICMP Echo Request to a multicast group
address.
show ip dvmrp route [ip-address] Display the entries in the DVMRP routing table.
show ip igmp groups [group-name | Display the multicast groups that are directly
group-address | type number] connected to the switch and that were learned
through IGMP.
show ip igmp interface [type number] Display multicast-related information about an
interface.
show ip mcache [group [source]] Display the contents of the IP fast-switching
cache.
show ip mpacket [source-address | name] Display the contents of the circular cache-header
[group-address | name] [detail] buffer.
show ip mroute [group-name | group-address] Display the contents of the IP multicast routing
[source] [summary] [count] [active kbps] table.
show ip pim interface [type number] [count] Display information about interfaces configured
[detail] for PIM. This command is available in all software
images.
show ip pim neighbor [type number] List the PIM neighbors discovered by the switch.
This command is available in all software images.

OL-8553-06 44-61
Table 44-6 Commands for Displaying System and Network Statistics (continued)
Command Purpose
show ip pim rp [group-name | group-address] Display the RP routers associated with a
sparse-mode multicast group. This command is
available in all software images.
show ip rpf {source-address | name} Display how the switch is doing Reverse-Path
Forwarding (that is, from the unicast routing table,
DVMRP routing table, or static mroutes).
show ip sdr [group | “session-name” | detail] Display the Session Directory Protocol Version 2
cache.
Monitoring IP Multicast Routing

You can use the privileged EXEC commands in Table 44-7 to monitor IP multicast routers, packets, and
paths:
Table 44-7 Commands for Monitoring IP Multicast Routing
Command Purpose
mrinfo [hostname | address] [source-address | Query a multicast router or multilayer switch about
interface] which neighboring multicast devices are peering
with it.
mstat source [destination] [group] Display IP multicast packet rate and loss
information.
mtrace source [destination] [group] Trace the path from a source to a destination
branch for a multicast distribution tree for a given
group.

44-62 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 45
Configuring MSDP
This chapter describes how to configure the Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) on the
Catalyst 3560 switch. The MSDP connects multiple Protocol-Independent Multicast sparse-mode
(PIM-SM) domains.
MSDP is not fully supported in this software release because of a lack of support for Multicast Border
Gateway Protocol (MBGP), which works closely with MSDP. However, it is possible to create default
peers that MSDP can operate with if MBGP is not running.
To use this feature, the switch must be running the IP services image (formerly known as the enhanced
multilayer image [EMI]).
Note For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the Cisco IOS IP
Command Reference, Volume 3 of 3: Multicast, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under

• Understanding MSDP, page 45-1
• Configuring MSDP, page 45-3
• Monitoring and Maintaining MSDP, page 45-18
Understanding MSDP
MSDP allows multicast sources for a group to be known to all rendezvous points (RPs) in different
domains. Each PIM-SM domain uses its own RPs and does not depend on RPs in other domains. An RP
runs MSDP over the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to discover multicast sources in other
domains.
An RP in a PIM-SM domain has an MSDP peering relationship with MSDP-enabled devices in another
domain. The peering relationship occurs over a TCP connection, primarily exchanging a list of sources
sending to multicast groups. The TCP connections between RPs are achieved by the underlying routing
system. The receiving RP uses the source lists to establish a source path.
The purpose of this topology is to have domains discover multicast sources in other domains. If the
multicast sources are of interest to a domain that has receivers, multicast data is delivered over the
normal, source-tree building mechanism in PIM-SM. MSDP is also used to announce sources sending
to a group. These announcements must originate at the domain’s RP.

OL-8553-06 45-1
Chapter 45 Configuring MSDP
Understanding MSDP
MSDP depends heavily on the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) or MBGP for interdomain operation. We
recommend that you run MSDP in RPs in your domain that are RPs for sources sending to global groups
to be announced to the Internet.
MSDP Operation
Figure 45-1 shows MSDP operating between two MSDP peers. PIM uses MSDP as the standard
mechanism to register a source with the RP of a domain. When MSDP is configured, this sequence
occurs.
When a source sends its first multicast packet, the first-hop router (designated router or RP) directly
connected to the source sends a PIM register message to the RP. The RP uses the register message to
register the active source and to forward the multicast packet down the shared tree in the local domain.
With MSDP configured, the RP also forwards a source-active (SA) message to all MSDP peers. The SA
message identifies the source, the group the source is sending to, and the address of the RP or the
originator ID (the IP address of the interface used as the RP address), if configured.
Each MSDP peer receives and forwards the SA message away from the originating RP to achieve peer
reverse-path flooding (RPF). The MSDP device examines the BGP or MBGP routing table to discover
which peer is the next hop toward the originating RP of the SA message. Such a peer is called an RPF
peer (reverse-path forwarding peer). The MSDP device forwards the message to all MSDP peers other
than the RPF peer. For information on how to configure an MSDP peer when BGP and MBGP are not
supported, see the “Configuring a Default MSDP Peer” section on page 45-4.
If the MSDP peer receives the same SA message from a non-RPF peer toward the originating RP, it drops
the message. Otherwise, it forwards the message to all its MSDP peers.
The RP for a domain receives the SA message from an MSDP peer. If the RP has any join requests for
the group the SA message describes and if the (*,G) entry exists with a nonempty outgoing interface list,
the domain is interested in the group, and the RP triggers an (S,G) join toward the source. After the (S,G)
join reaches the source’s DR, a branch of the source tree has been built from the source to the RP in the
remote domain. Multicast traffic can now flow from the source across the source tree to the RP and then
down the shared tree in the remote domain to the receiver.

45-2 OL-8553-06
Configuring MSDP
Figure 45-1 MSDP Running Between RP Peers
RP + MSDP peer MSDP peer
MSDP SA Peer RPF flooding
SA
P
SD
M
MSDP SA
TCP connection
BGP MSDP peer Receiver
Register
49885
Multicast
(S,G) Join
PIM
Source DR
PIM sparse-mode
domain
MSDP Benefits
MSDP has these benefits:
• It breaks up the shared multicast distribution tree. You can make the shared tree local to your
domain. Your local members join the local tree, and join messages for the shared tree never need to
leave your domain.
• PIM sparse-mode domains can rely only on their own RPs, decreasing reliance on RPs in another
domain. This increases security because you can prevent your sources from being known outside
your domain.
• Domains with only receivers can receive data without globally advertising group membership.
• Global source multicast routing table state is not required, saving memory.
Configuring MSDP
• Default MSDP Configuration, page 45-4
• Configuring a Default MSDP Peer, page 45-4 (required)
• Caching Source-Active State, page 45-6 (optional)
• Requesting Source Information from an MSDP Peer, page 45-8 (optional)

OL-8553-06 45-3
Configuring MSDP
• Controlling Source Information that Your Switch Originates, page 45-8 (optional)
• Controlling Source Information that Your Switch Forwards, page 45-11 (optional)
• Controlling Source Information that Your Switch Receives, page 45-13 (optional)
• Configuring an MSDP Mesh Group, page 45-15 (optional)
• Shutting Down an MSDP Peer, page 45-15 (optional)
• Including a Bordering PIM Dense-Mode Region in MSDP, page 45-16 (optional)
• Configuring an Originating Address other than the RP Address, page 45-17 (optional)
Default MSDP Configuration

MSDP is not enabled, and no default MSDP peer exists.
Configuring a Default MSDP Peer

In this software release, because BGP and MBGP are not supported, you cannot configure an MSDP peer
on the local switch by using the ip msdp peer global configuration command. Instead, you define a
default MSDP peer (by using the ip msdp default-peer global configuration command) from which to
accept all SA messages for the switch. The default MSDP peer must be a previously configured MSDP
peer. Configure a default MSDP peer when the switch is not BGP- or MBGP-peering with an MSDP
peer. If a single MSDP peer is configured, the switch always accepts all SA messages from that peer.
Figure 45-2 shows a network in which default MSDP peers might be used. In Figure 45-2, a customer
who owns Switch B is connected to the Internet through two Internet service providers (ISPs), one
owning Router A and the other owning Router C. They are not running BGP or MBGP between them.
To learn about sources in the ISP’s domain or in other domains, Switch B at the customer site identifies
Router A as its default MSDP peer. Switch B advertises SA messages to both Router A and Router C
but accepts SA messages only from Router A or only from Router C. If Router A is first in the
configuration file, it is used if it is running. If Router A is not running, only then does Switch B accept
SA messages from Router C. This is the default behavior without a prefix list.
If you specify a prefix list, the peer is a default peer only for the prefixes in the list. You can have
multiple active default peers when you have a prefix list associated with each. When you do not have
any prefix lists, you can configure multiple default peers, but only the first one is the active default peer
as long as the router has connectivity to this peer and the peer is alive. If the first configured peer fails
or the connectivity to this peer fails, the second configured peer becomes the active default, and so on.
The ISP probably uses a prefix list to define which prefixes it accepts from the customer’s router.

45-4 OL-8553-06
Configuring MSDP
Figure 45-2 Default MSDP Peer Network
Router C
Default MSDP peer
ISP C PIM domain
SA 10.1.1.1
SA
SA
Router A Switch B
Default MSDP peer Default MSDP peer
86515
ISP A PIM domain Customer PIM domain
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to specify a default MSDP peer. This procedure
is required.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp default-peer ip-address | name Define a default peer from which to accept all MSDP SA messages.
[prefix-list list]
• For ip-address | name, enter the IP address or Domain Name
System (DNS) server name of the MSDP default peer.
• (Optional) For prefix-list list, enter the list name that specifies the
peer to be the default peer only for the listed prefixes. You can have
multiple active default peers when you have a prefix list associated
with each.
When you enter multiple ip msdp default-peer commands with the
prefix-list keyword, you use all the default peers at the same time
for different RP prefixes. This syntax is typically used in a service
provider cloud that connects stub site clouds.
When you enter multiple ip msdp default-peer commands without
the prefix-list keyword, a single active peer accepts all SA
messages. If that peer fails, the next configured default peer accepts
all SA messages. This syntax is typically used at a stub site.

OL-8553-06 45-5
Configuring MSDP
Command Purpose
Step 3 ip prefix-list name [description string] | (Optional) Create a prefix list using the name specified in Step 2.
seq number {permit | deny} network
• (Optional) For description string, enter a description of up to 80
length
characters to describe this prefix list.
• For seq number, enter the sequence number of the entry. The range
is 1 to 4294967294.
• The deny keyword denies access to matching conditions.
• The permit keyword permits access to matching conditions.
• For network length, specify the network number and length (in bits)
of the network mask that is permitted or denied.
Step 4 ip msdp description {peer-name | (Optional) Configure a description for the specified peer to make it
peer-address} text easier to identify in a configuration or in show command output.
By default, no description is associated with an MSDP peer.
To remove the default peer, use the no ip msdp default-peer ip-address | name global configuration
command.
This example shows a partial configuration of Router A and Router C in Figure 45-2. Each of these ISPs
have more than one customer (like the customer in Figure 45-2) who use default peering (no BGP or
MBGP). In that case, they might have similar configurations. That is, they accept SAs only from a default
peer if the SA is permitted by the corresponding prefix list.
Router A
Router(config)# ip msdp default-peer 10.1.1.1
Router(config)# ip msdp default-peer 10.1.1.1 prefix-list site-a
Router(config)# ip prefix-list site-b permit 10.0.0.0/1
Router C
Router(config)# ip msdp default-peer 10.1.1.1 prefix-list site-a
Router(config)# ip prefix-list site-b permit 10.0.0.0/1
Caching Source-Active State

By default, the switch does not cache source/group pairs from received SA messages. When the switch
forwards the MSDP SA information, it does not store it in memory. Therefore, if a member joins a group
soon after a SA message is received by the local RP, that member needs to wait until the next SA
message to hear about the source. This delay is known as join latency.
If you want to sacrifice some memory in exchange for reducing the latency of the source information,
you can configure the switch to cache SA messages.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to enable the caching of source/group pairs.

45-6 OL-8553-06
Configuring MSDP
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp cache-sa-state [list Enable the caching of source/group pairs (create an SA state). Those
access-list-number] pairs that pass the access list are cached.
For list access-list-number, the range is 100 to 199.
Step 3 access-list access-list-number {deny | Create an IP extended access list, repeating the command as many times
permit} protocol source source-wildcard as necessary.
• For access-list-number, the range is 100 to 199. Enter the same
number created in Step 2.
• For protocol, enter ip as the protocol name.
• For source-wildcard, enter the wildcard bits in dotted decimal
notation to be applied to the source. Place ones in the bit positions
that you want to ignore.
• For destination, enter the number of the network or host to which
the packet is being sent.
• For destination-wildcard, enter the wildcard bits in dotted decimal
notation to be applied to the destination. Place ones in the bit
Note An alternative to this command is the ip msdp sa-request global configuration command, which causes
the switch to send an SA request message to the MSDP peer when a new member for a group becomes
active. For more information, see the next section.
To return to the default setting (no SA state is created), use the no ip msdp cache-sa-state global
This example shows how to enable the cache state for all sources in 171.69.0.0/16 sending to
groups 224.2.0.0/16:
Switch(config)# ip msdp cache-sa-state 100
Switch(config)# access-list 100 permit ip 171.69.0.0 0.0.255.255 224.2.0.0 0.0.255.255

OL-8553-06 45-7
Configuring MSDP
Requesting Source Information from an MSDP Peer

Local RPs can send SA requests and get immediate responses for all active sources for a given group.
By default, the switch does not send any SA request messages to its MSDP peers when a new member
joins a group and wants to receive multicast traffic. The new member waits to receive the next periodic
SA message.
If you want a new member of a group to learn the active multicast sources in a connected PIM
sparse-mode domain that are sending to a group, configure the switch to send SA request messages to
the specified MSDP peer when a new member joins a group. The peer replies with the information in its
SA cache. If the peer does not have a cache configured, this command has no result. Configuring this
feature reduces join latency but sacrifices memory.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the switch to send SA request
messages to the MSDP peer when a new member joins a group and wants to receive multicast traffic.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp sa-request {ip-address | name} Configure the switch to send SA request messages to the specified
MSDP peer.
For ip-address | name, enter the IP address or name of the MSDP peer
from which the local switch requests SA messages when a new member
for a group becomes active.
Repeat the command for each MSDP peer that you want to supply with
SA messages.
To return to the default setting, use the no ip msdp sa-request {ip-address | name} global configuration
command.
This example shows how to configure the switch to send SA request messages to the MSDP peer
at 171.69.1.1:
Switch(config)# ip msdp sa-request 171.69.1.1
Controlling Source Information that Your Switch Originates

You can control the multicast source information that originates with your switch:
• Sources you advertise (based on your sources)
• Receivers of source information (based on knowing the requestor)
For more information, see the “Redistributing Sources” section on page 45-9 and the “Filtering
Source-Active Request Messages” section on page 45-10.

45-8 OL-8553-06
Configuring MSDP
Redistributing Sources
SA messages originate on RPs to which sources have registered. By default, any source that registers
with an RP is advertised. The A flag is set in the RP when a source is registered, which means the source
is advertised in an SA unless it is filtered.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to further restrict which registered sources are
advertised. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp redistribute [list Configure which (S,G) entries from the multicast routing table are
access-list-name] [asn advertised in SA messages.
aspath-access-list-number] [route-map
By default, only sources within the local domain are advertised.
map]
• (Optional) For list access-list-name, enter the name or number of an
IP standard or extended access list. The range is 1 to 99 for standard
access lists and 100 to 199 for extended lists. The access list
controls which local sources are advertised and to which groups
they send.
• (Optional) For asn aspath-access-list-number, enter the IP standard
or extended access list number in the range 1 to 199. This access list
number must also be configured in the ip as-path access-list
command.
• (Optional) For route-map map, enter the IP standard or extended
access list number in the range 1 to 199. This access list number
must also be configured in the ip as-path access-list command.
The switch advertises (S,G) pairs according to the access list or
autonomous system path access list.

OL-8553-06 45-9
Configuring MSDP
Command Purpose
Step 3 access-list access-list-number {deny | Create an IP standard access list, repeating the command as many times
or or
access-list access-list-number {deny | Create an IP extended access list, repeating the command as many times
permit} protocol source source-wildcard as necessary.
• For access-list-number, the range is 1 to 99 for standard access lists
and 100 to 199 for extended lists. Enter the same number created in
Step 2.
To remove the filter, use the no ip msdp redistribute global configuration command.
Filtering Source-Active Request Messages

By default, only switches that are caching SA information can respond to SA requests. By default, such
a switch honors all SA request messages from its MSDP peers and supplies the IP addresses of the active
sources.
However, you can configure the switch to ignore all SA requests from an MSDP peer. You can also
honor only those SA request messages from a peer for groups described by a standard access list. If the
groups in the access list pass, SA request messages are accepted. All other such messages from the peer
for other groups are ignored.

45-10 OL-8553-06
Configuring MSDP
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure one of these options. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp filter-sa-request ip-address | Filter all SA request messages from the specified MSDP peer.
name
or
or
Filter SA request messages from the specified MSDP peer for groups
ip msdp filter-sa-request {ip-address | that pass the standard access list. The access list describes a multicast
name} list access-list-number group address. The range for the access-list-number is 1 to 99.
Step 3 access-list access-list-number {deny | Create an IP standard access list, repeating the command as many times
To return to the default setting, use the no ip msdp filter-sa-request {ip-address | name} global
This example shows how to configure the switch to filter SA request messages from the MSDP peer
at 171.69.2.2. SA request messages from sources on network 192.4.22.0 pass access list 1 and are
accepted; all others are ignored.
Switch(config)# ip msdp filter sa-request 171.69.2.2 list 1
Controlling Source Information that Your Switch Forwards

By default, the switch forwards all SA messages it receives to all its MSDP peers. However, you can
prevent outgoing messages from being forwarded to a peer by using a filter or by setting a time-to-live
(TTL) value. These methods are described in the next sections.

OL-8553-06 45-11
Configuring MSDP
Using a Filter
By creating a filter, you can perform one of these actions:
• Filter all source/group pairs
• Specify an IP extended access list to pass only certain source/group pairs
• Filter based on match criteria in a route map
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to apply a filter. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp sa-filter out ip-address | name Filter all SA messages to the specified MSDP peer.
or or
ip msdp sa-filter out {ip-address | name} To the specified peer, pass only those SA messages that pass the IP
list access-list-number extended access list. The range for the extended access-list-number
is 100 to 199.
If both the list and the route-map keywords are used, all conditions
must be true to pass any (S,G) pair in outgoing SA messages.
or
or
To the specified MSDP peer, pass only those SA messages that meet the
ip msdp sa-filter out {ip-address | name} match criteria in the route map map-tag.
route-map map-tag
If all match criteria are true, a permit from the route map passes routes
through the filter. A deny filters routes.
Step 3 access-list access-list-number {deny | (Optional) Create an IP extended access list, repeating the command as
permit} protocol source source-wildcard many times as necessary.

45-12 OL-8553-06
Configuring MSDP
Command Purpose
To remove the filter, use the no ip msdp sa-filter out {ip-address | name} [list access-list-number]
[route-map map-tag] global configuration command.
This example shows how to allow only (S,G) pairs that pass access list 100 to be forwarded in an SA
message to the peer named switch.cisco.com:
Switch(config)# ip msdp peer switch.cisco.com connect-source gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config)# ip msdp sa-filter out switch.cisco.com list 100
Switch(config)# access-list 100 permit ip 171.69.0.0 0.0.255.255 224.20 0 0.0.255.255
Using TTL to Limit the Multicast Data Sent in SA Messages

You can use a TTL value to control what data is encapsulated in the first SA message for every source.
Only multicast packets with an IP-header TTL greater than or equal to the ttl argument are sent to the
specified MSDP peer. For example, you can limit internal traffic to a TTL of 8. If you want other groups
to go to external locations, you must send those packets with a TTL greater than 8.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to establish a TTL threshold. This procedure is
optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp ttl-threshold {ip-address | Limit which multicast data is encapsulated in the first SA message to
name} ttl the specified MSDP peer.
• For ip-address | name, enter the IP address or name of the MSDP
peer to which the TTL limitation applies.
• For ttl, enter the TTL value. The default is 0, which means all
multicast data packets are forwarded to the peer until the TTL is
exhausted. The range is 0 to 255.
To return to the default setting, use the no ip msdp ttl-threshold {ip-address | name} global
Controlling Source Information that Your Switch Receives

By default, the switch receives all SA messages that its MSDP RPF peers send to it. However, you can
control the source information that you receive from MSDP peers by filtering incoming SA messages.
In other words, you can configure the switch to not accept them.

OL-8553-06 45-13
Configuring MSDP
You can perform one of these actions:

• Filter all incoming SA messages from an MSDP peer
• Specify an IP extended access list to pass certain source/group pairs
• Filter based on match criteria in a route map
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to apply a filter. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp sa-filter in ip-address | name Filter all SA messages from the specified MSDP peer.
or or
ip msdp sa-filter in {ip-address | name} From the specified peer, pass only those SA messages that pass the IP
list access-list-number extended access list. The range for the extended access-list-number
is 100 to 199.
If both the list and the route-map keywords are used, all conditions
must be true to pass any (S,G) pair in incoming SA messages.
or or
ip msdp sa-filter in {ip-address | name} From the specified MSDP peer, pass only those SA messages that meet
route-map map-tag the match criteria in the route map map-tag.
If all match criteria are true, a permit from the route map passes routes
through the filter. A deny will filter routes.
Step 3 access-list access-list-number {deny | (Optional) Create an IP extended access list, repeating the command as
permit} protocol source source-wildcard many times as necessary.

45-14 OL-8553-06
Configuring MSDP
To remove the filter, use the no ip msdp sa-filter in {ip-address | name} [list access-list-number]
[route-map map-tag] global configuration command.
This example shows how to filter all SA messages from the peer named switch.cisco.com:
Switch(config)# ip msdp peer switch.cisco.com connect-source gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config)# ip msdp sa-filter in switch.cisco.com
Configuring an MSDP Mesh Group

An MSDP mesh group is a group of MSDP speakers that have fully meshed MSDP connectivity among
one another. Any SA messages received from a peer in a mesh group are not forwarded to other peers in
the same mesh group. Thus, you reduce SA message flooding and simplify peer-RPF flooding. Use the
ip msdp mesh-group global configuration command when there are multiple RPs within a domain. It is
especially used to send SA messages across a domain. You can configure multiple mesh groups (with
different names) in a single switch.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a mesh group. This procedure is
optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp mesh-group name {ip-address | Configure an MSDP mesh group, and specify the MSDP peer belonging
name} to that mesh group.
By default, the MSDP peers do not belong to a mesh group.
• For name, enter the name of the mesh group.
• For ip-address | name, enter the IP address or name of the MSDP
peer to be a member of the mesh group.
Step 6 Repeat this procedure on each MSDP peer in the group.
To remove an MSDP peer from a mesh group, use the no ip msdp mesh-group name
{ip-address | name} global configuration command.
Shutting Down an MSDP Peer

If you want to configure many MSDP commands for the same peer and you do not want the peer to
become active, you can shut down the peer, configure it, and later bring it up. When a peer is shut down,
the TCP connection is terminated and is not restarted. You can also shut down an MSDP session without
losing configuration information for the peer.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to shut down a peer. This procedure is optional.

OL-8553-06 45-15
Configuring MSDP
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp shutdown {peer-name | peer Administratively shut down the specified MSDP peer without losing
address} configuration information.
For peer-name | peer address, enter the IP address or name of the MSDP
peer to shut down.
To bring the peer back up, use the no ip msdp shutdown {peer-name | peer address} global
configuration command. The TCP connection is reestablished
Including a Bordering PIM Dense-Mode Region in MSDP

You can configure MSDP on a switch that borders a PIM sparse-mode region with a dense-mode region.
By default, active sources in the dense-mode region do not participate in MSDP.
Note We do not recommend using the ip msdp border sa-address global configuration command. It is better
to configure the border router in the sparse-mode domain to proxy-register sources in the dense-mode
domain to the RP of the sparse-mode domain and have the sparse-mode domain use standard MSDP
procedures to advertise these sources.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the border router to send SA
messages for sources active in the dense-mode region to the MSDP peers. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp border sa-address interface-id Configure the switch on the border between a dense-mode and
sparse-mode region to send SA messages about active sources in the
dense-mode region.
For interface-id, specify the interface from which the IP address is
derived and used as the RP address in SA messages.
The IP address of the interface is used as the Originator-ID, which is the
RP field in the SA message.
Step 3 ip msdp redistribute [list Configure which (S,G) entries from the multicast routing table are
access-list-name] [asn advertised in SA messages.
aspath-access-list-number] [route-map
For more information, see the “Redistributing Sources” section on
map]
page 45-9.

45-16 OL-8553-06
Configuring MSDP
Note that the ip msdp originator-id global configuration command also identifies an interface to be
used as the RP address. If both the ip msdp border sa-address and the ip msdp originator-id global
configuration commands are configured, the address derived from the ip msdp originator-id command
specifies the RP address.
To return to the default setting (active sources in the dense-mode region do not participate in MSDP),
use the no ip msdp border sa-address interface-id global configuration command.
Configuring an Originating Address other than the RP Address

You can allow an MSDP speaker that originates an SA message to use the IP address of the interface as
the RP address in the SA message by changing the Originator ID. You might change the Originator ID
in one of these cases:
• If you configure a logical RP on multiple switches in an MSDP mesh group.
• If you have a switch that borders a PIM sparse-mode domain and a dense-mode domain. If a switch
borders a dense-mode domain for a site, and sparse-mode is being used externally, you might want
dense-mode sources to be known to the outside world. Because this switch is not an RP, it would not
have an RP address to use in an SA message. Therefore, this command provides the RP address by
specifying the address of the interface.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to allow an MSDP speaker that originates an
SA message to use the IP address on the interface as the RP address in the SA message. This procedure
is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 ip msdp originator-id interface-id Configures the RP address in SA messages to be the address of the
originating device interface.
For interface-id, specify the interface on the local switch.
If both the ip msdp border sa-address and the ip msdp originator-id global configuration commands
are configured, the address derived from the ip msdp originator-id command specifies the address of
the RP.
To prevent the RP address from being derived in this way, use the no ip msdp originator-id interface-id

OL-8553-06 45-17
Monitoring and Maintaining MSDP
Monitoring and Maintaining MSDP

To monitor MSDP SA messages, peers, state, or peer status, use one or more of the privileged EXEC
commands in Table 45-1:
Table 45-1 Commands for Monitoring and Maintaining MSDP
Command Purpose
debug ip msdp [peer-address | name] [detail] [routes] Debugs an MSDP activity.
debug ip msdp resets Debugs MSDP peer reset reasons.
show ip msdp count [autonomous-system-number] Displays the number of sources and groups originated in SA
messages from each autonomous system. The ip msdp
cache-sa-state command must be configured for this command
to produce any output.
show ip msdp peer [peer-address | name] Displays detailed information about an MSDP peer.
show ip msdp sa-cache [group-address | source-address Displays (S,G) state learned from MSDP peers.
| group-name | source-name]
[autonomous-system-number]
show ip msdp summary Displays MSDP peer status and SA message counts.
To clear MSDP connections, statistics, or SA cache entries, use the privileged EXEC commands in
Table 45-2:
Table 45-2 Commands for Clearing MSDP Connections, Statistics, or SA Cache Entries
Command Purpose
clear ip msdp peer peer-address | name Clears the TCP connection to the specified MSDP peer, resetting all
MSDP message counters.
clear ip msdp statistics [peer-address | name] Clears statistics counters for one or all the MSDP peers without resetting
the sessions.
clear ip msdp sa-cache [group-address | name] Clears the SA cache entries for all entries, all sources for a specific group,
or all entries for a specific source/group pair.

45-18 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 46
Configuring Fallback Bridging
This chapter describes how to configure fallback bridging (VLAN bridging) on the Catalyst 3560 switch.
With fallback bridging, you can forward non-IP packets that the switch does not route between VLAN
bridge domains and routed ports.
Note To use this feature, the switch must be running the IP services image (formerly known as the enhanced
multilayer image [EMI]). For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this
chapter, see the Cisco IOS Bridging and IBM Networking Command Reference, Volume 1 of 2, Release
12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline >
Command References.

• Understanding Fallback Bridging, page 46-1
• Configuring Fallback Bridging, page 46-2
• Monitoring and Maintaining Fallback Bridging, page 46-10
Understanding Fallback Bridging

With fallback bridging, the switch bridges together two or more VLANs or routed ports, essentially
connecting multiple VLANs within one bridge domain. Fallback bridging forwards traffic that the switch
does not route and forwards traffic belonging to a nonroutable protocol such as DECnet.
A VLAN bridge domain is represented with switch virtual interfaces (SVIs). A set of SVIs and routed
ports (which do not have any VLANs associated with them) can be configured (grouped together) to
form a bridge group. Recall that an SVI represents a VLAN of switch ports as one interface to the routing
or bridging function in the system. You associate only one SVI with a VLAN, and you configure an SVI
for a VLAN only when you want to route between VLANs, to fallback-bridge nonroutable protocols
between VLANs, or to provide IP host connectivity to the switch. A routed port is a physical port that
acts like a port on a router, but it is not connected to a router. A routed port is not associated with a
particular VLAN, does not support VLAN subinterfaces, but behaves like a normal routed port. For more
information about SVIs and routed ports, see Chapter 11, “Configuring Interface Characteristics.”
A bridge group is an internal organization of network interfaces on a switch. You cannot use bridge
groups to identify traffic switched within the bridge group outside the switch on which they are defined.
Bridge groups on the switch function as distinct bridges; that is, bridged traffic and bridge protocol data
units (BPDUs) are not exchanged between different bridge groups on a switch.

OL-8553-06 46-1
Chapter 46 Configuring Fallback Bridging
Fallback bridging does not allow the spanning trees from the VLANs being bridged to collapse. Each
VLAN has its own spanning-tree instance and a separate spanning tree, called the VLAN-bridge
spanning tree, which runs on top of the bridge group to prevent loops.
The switch creates a VLAN-bridge spanning-tree instance when a bridge group is created. The switch
runs the bridge group and treats the SVIs and routed ports in the bridge group as its spanning-tree ports.
These are the reasons for placing network interfaces into a bridge group:
• To bridge all nonrouted traffic among the network interfaces making up the bridge group. If the
packet destination address is in the bridge table, the packet is forwarded on a single interface in the
bridge group. If the packet destination address is not in the bridge table, the packet is flooded on all
forwarding interfaces in the bridge group. A source MAC address is learned on a bridge group only
when the address is learned on a VLAN (the reverse is not true).
• To participate in the spanning-tree algorithm by receiving, and in some cases sending, BPDUs on
the LANs to which they are attached. A separate spanning-tree process runs for each configured
bridge group. Each bridge group participates in a separate spanning-tree instance. A bridge group
establishes a spanning-tree instance based on the BPDUs it receives on only its member interfaces.
If the bridge STP BPDU is received on a port whose VLAN does not belong to a bridge group, the
BPDU is flooded on all the forwarding ports of the VLAN.
Figure 46-1 shows a fallback bridging network example. The switch has two ports configured as SVIs
with different assigned IP addresses and attached to two different VLANs. Another port is configured as
a routed port with its own IP address. If all three of these ports are assigned to the same bridge group,
non-IP protocol frames can be forwarded among the end stations connected to the switch even though
they are on different networks and in different VLANs. IP addresses do not need to be assigned to routed
ports or SVIs for fallback bridging to work.
Figure 46-1 Fallback Bridging Network Example
Routed port
Layer 3 switch
172.20.130.1
Host C
172.20.128.1 SVI 1 SVI 2 172.20.129.1
Host A Host B
101240
VLAN 20 VLAN 30

• Default Fallback Bridging Configuration, page 46-3
• Fallback Bridging Configuration Guidelines, page 46-3

46-2 OL-8553-06
• Creating a Bridge Group, page 46-3 (required)

• Adjusting Spanning-Tree Parameters, page 46-5 (optional)
Default Fallback Bridging Configuration

Table 46-1 shows the default fallback bridging configuration.
Table 46-1 Default Fallback Bridging Configuration

Bridge groups None are defined or assigned to a port. No
VLAN-bridge STP is defined.
Switch forwards frames for stations that it has Enabled.
dynamically learned
Spanning tree parameters:
• Switch priority • 32768.
• Port priority • 128.
• Port path cost • 10 Mb/s: 100.
100 Mb/s: 19.
1000 Mb/s: 4.
• Hello BPDU interval • 2 seconds.
• Forward-delay interval • 20 seconds.
• Maximum idle interval • 30 seconds.
Fallback Bridging Configuration Guidelines

Up to 32 bridge groups can be configured on the switch.
An interface (an SVI or routed port) can be a member of only one bridge group.
Use a bridge group for each separately bridged (topologically distinct) network connected to the switch.
Do not configure fallback bridging on a switch configured with private VLANs.
All protocols except IP (Version 4 and Version 6), Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), reverse ARP
(RARP), LOOPBACK, Frame Relay ARP, and shared STP packets are fallback bridged.
Creating a Bridge Group

To configure fallback bridging for a set of SVIs or routed ports, these interfaces must be assigned to
bridge groups. All interfaces in the same group belong to the same bridge domain. Each SVI or routed
port can be assigned to only one bridge group.
Note The protected port feature is not compatible with fallback bridging. When fallback bridging is enabled,
it is possible for packets to be forwarded from one protected port on a switch to another protected port
on the same switch if the ports are in different VLANs.

OL-8553-06 46-3
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create a bridge group and to assign an
interface to it. This procedure is required.
Command Purpose
Step 2 bridge bridge-group protocol Assign a bridge group number, and specify the VLAN-bridge
vlan-bridge spanning-tree protocol to run in the bridge group. The ibm and dec
keywords are not supported.
For bridge-group, specify the bridge group number. The range is 1
to 255. You can create up to 32 bridge groups.
Frames are bridged only among interfaces in the same group.
Step 3 interface interface-id Specify the interface on which you want to assign the bridge group, and
The specified interface must be one of these:
• A routed port: a physical port that you have configured as a Layer 3
port by entering the no switchport interface configuration
command.
• An SVI: a VLAN interface that you created by using the interface
vlan vlan-id global configuration command.
Note You can assign an IP address to the routed port or to the SVI,
but it is not required.
Step 4 bridge-group bridge-group Assign the interface to the bridge group created in Step 2.
By default, the interface is not assigned to any bridge group. An
interface can be assigned to only one bridge group.
To remove a bridge group, use the no bridge bridge-group global configuration command. The no
bridge bridge-group command automatically removes all SVIs and routes ports from that bridge group.
To remove an interface from a bridge group and to remove the bridge group, use the no bridge-group
bridge-group interface configuration command.
This example shows how to create bridge group 10, to specify that the VLAN-bridge STP runs in the
bridge group, to define a port as a routed port, and to assign the port to the bridge group:
Switch(config)# bridge 10 protocol vlan-bridge
Switch(config-if)# bridge-group 10
This example shows how to create bridge group 10 and to specify that the VLAN-bridge STP runs in the
bridge group. It defines an SVI for VLAN 2 and assigns it to the bridge group:
Switch(config)# bridge 10 protocol vlan-bridge
Switch(config-if)# bridge-group 10

46-4 OL-8553-06
Adjusting Spanning-Tree Parameters

You might need to adjust certain spanning-tree parameters if the default values are not suitable. You
configure parameters affecting the entire spanning tree by using variations of the bridge global
configuration command. You configure interface-specific parameters by using variations of the
bridge-group interface configuration command.
You can adjust spanning-tree parameters by performing any of the tasks in these sections:
• Changing the VLAN-Bridge Spanning-Tree Priority, page 46-5 (optional)
• Changing the Interface Priority, page 46-6 (optional)
• Assigning a Path Cost, page 46-6 (optional)
• Adjusting BPDU Intervals, page 46-7 (optional)
• Disabling the Spanning Tree on an Interface, page 46-9 (optional)
Note Only network administrators with a good understanding of how switches and STP function should make
adjustments to spanning-tree parameters. Poorly planned adjustments can have a negative impact on
performance. A good source on switching is the IEEE 802.1D specification. For more information, see
the “References and Recommended Reading” appendix in the Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals
Command Reference.
Changing the VLAN-Bridge Spanning-Tree Priority

You can globally configure the VLAN-bridge spanning-tree priority of a switch when it ties with another
switch for the position as the root switch. You also can configure the likelihood that the switch will be
selected as the root switch.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the switch priority. This procedure is
optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 bridge bridge-group priority number Change the VLAN-bridge spanning-tree priority of the switch.
• For bridge-group, specify the bridge group number. The range is 1
to 255.
• For number, enter a number from 0 to 65535. The default is 32768.
The lower the number, the more likely the switch will be chosen as
the root.

OL-8553-06 46-5
To return to the default setting, use the no bridge bridge-group priority global configuration command.
To change the priority on a port, use the bridge-group priority interface configuration command
(described in the next section).
This example shows how to set the switch priority to 100 for bridge group 10:
Switch(config)# bridge 10 priority 100
Changing the Interface Priority

You can change the priority for a port. When two switches tie for position as the root switch, you
configure a port priority to break the tie. The switch with the lowest interface value is elected.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the interface priority. This procedure
is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the interface to set the priority, and enter interface
configuration mode.
Step 3 bridge-group bridge-group priority Change the priority of a port.
number
to 255.
• For number, enter a number from 0 to 255 in increments of 4. The
lower the number, the more likely that the port on the switch will
be chosen as the root. The default is 128.
To return to the default setting, use the no bridge-group bridge-group priority interface configuration
command.
This example shows how to change the priority to 20 on a port in bridge group 10:
Switch(config-if)# bridge-group 10 priority 20
Assigning a Path Cost

Each port has a path cost associated with it. By convention, the path cost is 1000/data rate of the attached
LAN, in Mb/s.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to assign a path cost. This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port to set the path cost, and enter interface configuration
mode.

46-6 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 bridge-group bridge-group path-cost Assign the path cost of a port.
cost
to 255.
• For cost, enter a number from 0 to 65535. The higher the value, the
higher the cost.
– For 10 Mb/s, the default path cost is 100.
To return to the default path cost, use the no bridge-group bridge-group path-cost interface
This example shows how to change the path cost to 20 on a port in bridge group 10:
Switch(config-if)# bridge-group 10 path-cost 20
Adjusting BPDU Intervals

You can adjust BPDU intervals as described in these sections:
• Adjusting the Interval between Hello BPDUs, page 46-7 (optional)
• Changing the Forward-Delay Interval, page 46-8 (optional)
• Changing the Maximum-Idle Interval, page 46-9 (optional)
Note Each switch in a spanning tree adopts the interval between hello BPDUs, the forward delay interval, and
the maximum idle interval parameters of the root switch, regardless of what its individual configuration
might be.
Adjusting the Interval between Hello BPDUs
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these step to adjust the interval between hello BPDUs. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 bridge bridge-group hello-time seconds Specify the interval between hello BPDUs.
to 255.
• For seconds, enter a number from 1 to 10. The default is 2.

OL-8553-06 46-7
Command Purpose
To return to the default setting, use the no bridge bridge-group hello-time global configuration
command.
This example shows how to change the hello interval to 5 seconds in bridge group 10:
Switch(config)# bridge 10 hello-time 5
Changing the Forward-Delay Interval
The forward-delay interval is the amount of time spent listening for topology change information after
a port has been activated for switching and before forwarding actually begins.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the forward-delay interval. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 bridge bridge-group forward-time Specify the forward-delay interval.
seconds
to 255.
To return to the default setting, use the no bridge bridge-group forward-time global configuration
command.
This example shows how to change the forward-delay interval to 10 seconds in bridge group 10:
Switch(config)# bridge 10 forward-time 10

46-8 OL-8553-06
Changing the Maximum-Idle Interval
If a switch does not receive BPDUs from the root switch within a specified interval, it recomputes the
spanning-tree topology.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the maximum-idle interval (maximum
aging time). This procedure is optional.
Command Purpose
Step 2 bridge bridge-group max-age seconds Specify the interval that the switch waits to hear BPDUs from the root
switch.
to 255.
To return to the default setting, use the no bridge bridge-group max-age global configuration command.
This example shows how to change the maximum-idle interval to 30 seconds in bridge group 10:
Switch(config)# bridge 10 max-age 30
Disabling the Spanning Tree on an Interface

When a loop-free path exists between any two switched subnetworks, you can prevent BPDUs generated
in one switching subnetwork from impacting devices in the other switching subnetwork, yet still permit
switching throughout the network as a whole. For example, when switched LAN subnetworks are
separated by a WAN, BPDUs can be prevented from traveling across the WAN link.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to disable spanning tree on a port. This
Command Purpose
Step 2 interface interface-id Specify the port, and enter interface configuration mode.
Step 3 bridge-group bridge-group Disable spanning tree on the port.
spanning-disabled
For bridge-group, specify the bridge group number. The range is 1
to 255.
To re-enable spanning tree on the port, use the no bridge-group bridge-group spanning-disabled

OL-8553-06 46-9
Monitoring and Maintaining Fallback Bridging
This example shows how to disable spanning tree on a port in bridge group 10:
Switch(config-if)# bridge group 10 spanning-disabled
Monitoring and Maintaining Fallback Bridging

To monitor and maintain the network, use one or more of the privileged EXEC commands in Table 46-2:
Table 46-2 Commands for Monitoring and Maintaining Fallback Bridging
Command Purpose
clear bridge bridge-group Removes any learned entries from the forwarding
database.
show bridge [bridge-group] group Displays details about the bridge group.
show bridge [bridge-group] [interface-id | Displays MAC addresses learned in the bridge group.
mac-address | verbose]
For information about the fields in these displays, see the Cisco IOS Bridging and IBM Networking
Command Reference, Volume 1 of 2, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com page under Documentation >

46-10 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 47
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes how to identify and resolve software problems related to the Cisco IOS software
on the Catalyst 3560 switch. Depending on the nature of the problem, you can use the command-line
interface (CLI), the device manager, or Network Assistant to identify and solve problems.
Additional troubleshooting information, such as LED descriptions, is provided in the hardware
installation guide.
reference for this release and the Cisco IOS Commands Master List, Release 12.2 from the Cisco.com
page under Documentation > Cisco IOS Software > 12.2 Mainline > Command References.

• Recovering from a Software Failure, page 47-2
• Recovering from a Lost or Forgotten Password, page 47-3
• Recovering from a Command Switch Failure, page 47-7
• Recovering from Lost Cluster Member Connectivity, page 47-11
Note Recovery procedures require that you have physical access to the switch.
• Preventing Autonegotiation Mismatches, page 47-11

• Troubleshooting Power over Ethernet Switch Ports, page 47-12
• SFP Module Security and Identification, page 47-12
• Monitoring SFP Module Status, page 47-13
• Monitoring Temperature, page 47-13
• Using Ping, page 47-13
• Using Layer 2 Traceroute, page 47-15
• Using IP Traceroute, page 47-16
• Using TDR, page 47-18
• Using Debug Commands, page 47-19
• Using the show platform forward Command, page 47-20
• Using the crashinfo Files, page 47-23

OL-8553-06 47-1
Chapter 47 Troubleshooting
Recovering from a Software Failure
• Troubleshooting Tables, page 47-24
Recovering from a Software Failure

Switch software can be corrupted during an upgrade, by downloading the wrong file to the switch, and
by deleting the image file. In all of these cases, the switch does not pass the power-on self-test (POST),
and there is no connectivity.
This procedure uses the Xmodem Protocol to recover from a corrupt or wrong image file. There are many
software packages that support the Xmodem Protocol, and this procedure is largely dependent on the
emulation software that you are using.
This recovery procedure requires that you have physical access to the switch.
Step 1 From your PC, download the software image tar file (image_filename.tar) from Cisco.com.
The Cisco IOS image is stored as a bin file in a directory in the tar file. For information about locating
the software image files on Cisco.com, see the release notes.
Step 2 Extract the bin file from the tar file.
• If you are using Windows, use a zip program that can read a tar file. Use the zip program to navigate
to and extract the bin file.
• If you are using UNIX, follow these steps:
1. Display the contents of the tar file by using the tar -tvf <image_filename.tar> UNIX command.
unix-1% tar -tvf image_filename.tar
2. Locate the bin file, and extract it by using the tar -xvf <image_filename.tar>
<image_filename.bin> UNIX command.
unix-1% tar -xvf image_filename.tar image_filename.bin
x c3560-ipservices-mz.122-25.SEB/c3560-ipservices-mz.122-25.SEB.bin, 3970586
bytes, 7756 tape blocks
3. Verify that the bin file was extracted by using the ls -l <image_filename.bin> UNIX command.
unix-1% ls -l image_filename.bin
-rw-r--r-- 1 boba 3970586 Apr 21 12:00
c3560-ipservices-mz.122-25.SEB/c3560-ipservices-mz.122-25.SEB.bin
Step 3 Connect your PC with terminal-emulation software supporting the Xmodem Protocol to the switch
console port.
Step 4 Set the line speed on the emulation software to 9600 baud.
Step 5 Unplug the switch power cord.
Step 6 Press the Mode button and at the same time, reconnect the power cord to the switch.
You can release the Mode button a second or two after the LED above port 1 goes off. Several lines of
information about the software appear along with instructions:
The system has been interrupted prior to initializing the flash file system. The following
commands will initialize the flash file system, and finish loading the operating system
software#
flash_init
load_helper
boot
Step 7 Initialize the flash file system:

47-2 OL-8553-06
Recovering from a Lost or Forgotten Password
switch: flash_init
Step 8 If you had set the console port speed to anything other than 9600, it has been reset to that particular
speed. Change the emulation software line speed to match that of the switch console port.
Step 9 Load any helper files:
switch: load_helper
Step 10 Start the file transfer by using the Xmodem Protocol.

switch: copy xmodem: flash:image_filename.bin
Step 11 After the Xmodem request appears, use the appropriate command on the terminal-emulation software to
start the transfer and to copy the software image into flash memory.
Step 12 Boot the newly downloaded Cisco IOS image.
switch:boot flash:image_filename.bin
Step 13 Use the archive download-sw privileged EXEC command to download the software image to the
switch.
Step 14 Use the reload privileged EXEC command to restart the switch and to verify that the new software
image is operating properly.
Step 15 Delete the flash:image_filename.bin file from the switch.
The default configuration for the switch allows an end user with physical access to the switch to recover
from a lost password by interrupting the boot process during power-on and by entering a new password.
These recovery procedures require that you have physical access to the switch.
Note On these switches, a system administrator can disable some of the functionality of this feature by
allowing an end user to reset a password only by agreeing to return to the default configuration. If you
are an end user trying to reset a password when password recovery has been disabled, a status message
shows this during the recovery process.
These sections describes how to recover a forgotten or lost switch password:

• Procedure with Password Recovery Enabled, page 47-4
• Procedure with Password Recovery Disabled, page 47-6
You enable or disable password recovery by using the service password-recovery global configuration
command. Follow the steps in this procedure if you have forgotten or lost the switch password.
Step 1 Connect a terminal or PC with terminal-emulation software to the switch console port.
Step 2 Set the line speed on the emulation software to 9600 baud.
Step 3 Power off the switch.

OL-8553-06 47-3
Step 4 Reconnect the power cord to the switch and, within 15 seconds, press the Mode button while the System
LED is still flashing green. Continue pressing the Mode button until the System LED turns briefly amber
and then solid green; then release the Mode button.
Several lines of information about the software appear with instructions, informing you if the password
recovery procedure has been disabled or not.
• If you see a message that begins with this:
The system has been interrupted prior to initializing the flash file system. The
following commands will initialize the flash file system
go to the “Procedure with Password Recovery Enabled” section on page 47-4, and follow the steps.
• If you see a message that begins with this:
The password-recovery mechanism has been triggered, but is currently disabled.
go to the “Procedure with Password Recovery Disabled” section on page 47-6, and follow the steps.
Step 5 After recovering the password, reload the switch:
Switch> reload
Proceed with reload? [confirm] y
Procedure with Password Recovery Enabled

If the password-recovery mechanism is enabled, this message appears:
The system has been interrupted prior to initializing the flash file system. The following
commands will initialize the flash file system, and finish loading the operating system
software:
flash_init
load_helper
boot
Step 1 Initialize the flash file system:

switch: flash_init
Step 2 If you had set the console port speed to anything other than 9600, it has been reset to that particular
speed. Change the emulation software line speed to match that of the switch console port.
switch: load_helper
Step 4 Display the contents of flash memory:

switch: dir flash:
The switch file system appears:

Directory of flash:
13 drwx 192 Mar 01 1993 22:30:48 c3560-ipservices-mz-122-25.SEB
11 -rwx 5825 Mar 01 1993 22:31:59 config.text
18 -rwx 720 Mar 01 1993 02:21:30 vlan.dat
16128000 bytes total (10003456 bytes free)

47-4 OL-8553-06
Step 5 Rename the configuration file to config.text.old.

This file contains the password definition.
switch: rename flash:config.text flash:config.text.old
Step 6 Boot up the system:

switch: boot
You are prompted to start the setup program. Enter N at the prompt:
Continue with the configuration dialog? [yes/no]: N
Step 7 At the switch prompt, enter privileged EXEC mode:

Switch> enable
Step 8 Rename the configuration file to its original name:

Switch# rename flash:config.text.old flash:config.text
Step 9 Copy the configuration file into memory:

Switch# copy flash:config.text system:running-config
Source filename [config.text]?
Destination filename [running-config]?
Press Return in response to the confirmation prompts.

The configuration file is now reloaded, and you can change the password.
Step 10 Enter global configuration mode:
Step 11 Change the password:

Switch (config)# enable secret password
The secret password can be from 1 to 25 alphanumeric characters, can start with a number, is case
sensitive, and allows spaces but ignores leading spaces.
Step 12 Return to privileged EXEC mode:
Switch (config)# exit
Switch#
Step 13 Write the running configuration to the startup configuration file:
The new password is now in the startup configuration.
Note This procedure is likely to leave your switch virtual interface in a shutdown state. You can see
which interface is in this state by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
To re-enable the interface, enter the interface vlan vlan-id global configuration command, and
specify the VLAN ID of the shutdown interface. With the switch in interface configuration
mode, enter the no shutdown command.
Step 14 Reload the switch:

Switch# reload

OL-8553-06 47-5
Procedure with Password Recovery Disabled

If the password-recovery mechanism is disabled, this message appears:
The password-recovery mechanism has been triggered, but
is currently disabled. Access to the boot loader prompt
through the password-recovery mechanism is disallowed at
this point. However, if you agree to let the system be
reset back to the default system configuration, access
to the boot loader prompt can still be allowed.
Would you like to reset the system back to the default configuration (y/n)?
Caution Returning the switch to the default configuration results in the loss of all existing configurations. We
recommend that you contact your system administrator to verify if there are backup switch and VLAN
configuration files.
• If you enter n (no), the normal boot process continues as if the Mode button had not been pressed;
you cannot access the boot loader prompt, and you cannot enter a new password. You see the
message:
Press Enter to continue........
• If you enter y (yes), the configuration file in flash memory and the VLAN database file are deleted.
When the default configuration loads, you can reset the password.
Step 1 Elect to continue with password recovery and lose the existing configuration:
Would you like to reset the system back to the default configuration (y/n)? Y

Switch: load_helper
Step 3 Display the contents of flash memory:

switch: dir flash:
The switch file system appears:
Directory of flash:
13 drwx 192 Mar 01 1993 22:30:48 c3560-i5-mz.121.19-EA1.0
16128000 bytes total (10003456 bytes free)
Step 4 Boot up the system:

Switch: boot
You are prompted to start the setup program. To continue with password recovery, enter N at the prompt:
Continue with the configuration dialog? [yes/no]: N

Switch> enable

47-6 OL-8553-06
Recovering from a Command Switch Failure
Step 6 Enter global configuration mode:

Step 7 Change the password:

Switch (config)# enable secret password
The secret password can be from 1 to 25 alphanumeric characters, can start with a number, is case
sensitive, and allows spaces but ignores leading spaces.
Step 8 Return to privileged EXEC mode:
Switch (config)# exit
Switch#
Step 9 Write the running configuration to the startup configuration file:

The new password is now in the startup configuration.
Note This procedure is likely to leave your switch virtual interface in a shutdown state. You can see
which interface is in this state by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.
To re-enable the interface, enter the interface vlan vlan-id global configuration command, and
specify the VLAN ID of the shutdown interface. With the switch in interface configuration
mode, enter the no shutdown command.
Step 10 You must now reconfigure the switch. If the system administrator has the backup switch and VLAN
configuration files available, you should use those.

This section describes how to recover from a failed command switch. You can configure a redundant
command switch group by using the Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP). For more information, see
Chapter 6, “Clustering Switches” and Chapter 40, “Configuring HSRP.” Also see the Getting Started
with Cisco Network Assistant, available on Cisco.com.
Note HSRP is the preferred method for supplying redundancy to a cluster.
If you have not configured a standby command switch, and your command switch loses power or fails
in some other way, management contact with the member switches is lost, and you must install a new
command switch. However, connectivity between switches that are still connected is not affected, and
the member switches forward packets as usual. You can manage the members as standalone switches
through the console port, or, if they have IP addresses, through the other management interfaces.

OL-8553-06 47-7
You can prepare for a command switch failure by assigning an IP address to a member switch or another
switch that is command-capable, making a note of the command-switch password, and cabling your
cluster to provide redundant connectivity between the member switches and the replacement command
switch. These sections describe two solutions for replacing a failed command switch:
• Replacing a Failed Command Switch with a Cluster Member, page 47-8
• Replacing a Failed Command Switch with Another Switch, page 47-10
These recovery procedures require that you have physical access to the switch.
For information on command-capable switches, see the release notes.
Replacing a Failed Command Switch with a Cluster Member

To replace a failed command switch with a command-capable member in the same cluster, follow these
steps:
Step 1 Disconnect the command switch from the member switches, and physically remove it from the cluster.
Step 2 Insert the member switch in place of the failed command switch, and duplicate its connections to the
cluster members.
Step 3 Start a CLI session on the new command switch.
You can access the CLI by using the console port or, if an IP address has been assigned to the switch,
by using Telnet. For details about using the console port, see the switch hardware installation guide.
Switch> enable
Switch#
Step 5 Enter the password of the failed command switch.

Step 6 Enter global configuration mode.
Step 7 Remove the member switch from the cluster.

Switch(config)# no cluster commander-address
Step 8 Return to privileged EXEC mode.

Switch(config)# end
Switch#
Step 9 Use the setup program to configure the switch IP information. This program prompts you for IP address
information and passwords. From privileged EXEC mode, enter setup, and press Return.
Switch# setup
--- System Configuration Dialog ---
Continue with configuration dialog? [yes/no]: y
At any point you may enter a question mark '?' for help.
Use ctrl-c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt.
Default settings are in square brackets '[]'.

47-8 OL-8553-06
Basic management setup configures only enough connectivity

for management of the system, extended setup will ask you
to configure each interface on the system
Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]:
Step 10 Enter Y at the first prompt.

The prompts in the setup program vary depending on the member switch that you selected to be the
command switch:
or
Configuring global parameters:
If this prompt does not appear, enter enable, and press Return. Enter setup, and press Return to start
the setup program.
Step 11 Respond to the questions in the setup program.
When prompted for the hostname, recall that on a command switch, the hostname is limited to
28 characters; on a member switch to 31 characters. Do not use -n, where n is a number, as the last
characters in a hostname for any switch.
When prompted for the Telnet (virtual terminal) password, recall that it can be from 1 to 25 alphanumeric
characters, is case sensitive, allows spaces, but ignores leading spaces.
Step 12 When prompted for the enable secret and enable passwords, enter the passwords of the failed command
switch again.
Step 13 When prompted, make sure to enable the switch as the cluster command switch, and press Return.
Step 14 When prompted, assign a name to the cluster, and press Return.
The cluster name can be 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters, dashes, or underscores.
Step 15 After the initial configuration displays, verify that the addresses are correct.
Step 16 If the displayed information is correct, enter Y, and press Return.
If this information is not correct, enter N, press Return, and begin again at Step 9.
Step 17 Start your browser, and enter the IP address of the new command switch.
Step 18 From the Cluster menu, select Add to Cluster to display a list of candidate switches to add to the cluster.

OL-8553-06 47-9
Replacing a Failed Command Switch with Another Switch

To replace a failed command switch with a switch that is command-capable but not part of the cluster,
follow these steps:
Step 1 Insert the new switch in place of the failed command switch, and duplicate its connections to the cluster
members.
Step 2 Start a CLI session on the new command switch.
You can access the CLI by using the console port or, if an IP address has been assigned to the switch,
by using Telnet. For details about using the console port, see the switch hardware installation guide.
Switch> enable
Switch#
Step 4 Enter the password of the failed command switch.

Step 5 Use the setup program to configure the switch IP information.
This program prompts you for IP address information and passwords. From privileged EXEC mode,
enter setup, and press Return.
Switch# setup
--- System Configuration Dialog ---
At any point you may enter a question mark '?' for help.
Use ctrl-c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt.
Default settings are in square brackets '[]'.
Basic management setup configures only enough connectivity

for management of the system, extended setup will ask you
to configure each interface on the system
Would you like to enter basic management setup? [yes/no]:
Step 6 Enter Y at the first prompt.

The prompts in the setup program vary depending on the switch you selected to be the command switch:
or
Configuring global parameters:
If this prompt does not appear, enter enable, and press Return. Enter setup, and press Return to start
the setup program.
Step 7 Respond to the questions in the setup program.
When prompted for the hostname, recall that on a command switch, the hostname is limited to 28
characters. Do not use -n, where n is a number, as the last character in a hostname for any switch.
When prompted for the Telnet (virtual terminal) password, recall that it can be from 1 to 25
alphanumeric characters, is case sensitive, allows spaces, but ignores leading spaces.
Step 8 When prompted for the enable secret and enable passwords, enter the passwords of the failed command
switch again.
Step 9 When prompted, make sure to enable the switch as the cluster command switch, and press Return.

47-10 OL-8553-06
Recovering from Lost Cluster Member Connectivity
Step 10 When prompted, assign a name to the cluster, and press Return.
The cluster name can be 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters, dashes, or underscores.
Step 11 When the initial configuration displays, verify that the addresses are correct.
Step 12 If the displayed information is correct, enter Y, and press Return.
If this information is not correct, enter N, press Return, and begin again at Step 9.
Step 13 Start your browser, and enter the IP address of the new command switch.
Step 14 From the Cluster menu, select Add to Cluster to display a list of candidate switches to add to the cluster.
Recovering from Lost Cluster Member Connectivity

Some configurations can prevent the command switch from maintaining contact with member switches.
If you are unable to maintain management contact with a member, and the member switch is forwarding
packets normally, check for these conflicts:
• A member switch (Catalyst 3750, Catalyst 3560, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 3500 XL, Catalyst 2970,
Catalyst 2960, Catalyst 2950, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2820, and Catalyst 1900 switch) cannot
connect to the command switch through a port that is defined as a network port.
• Catalyst 3500 XL, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2820, and Catalyst 1900 member switches must
connect to the command switch through a port that belongs to the same management VLAN.
• A member switch (Catalyst 3750, Catalyst 3560, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 2970, Catalyst 2960,
Catalyst 2950, Catalyst 3500 XL, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2820, and Catalyst 1900 switch)
connected to the command switch through a secured port can lose connectivity if the port is disabled
because of a security violation.
Preventing Autonegotiation Mismatches

The IEEE 802.3ab autonegotiation protocol manages the switch settings for speed (10 Mb/s, 100 Mb/s,
and 1000 Mb/s, excluding SFP module ports) and duplex (half or full). There are situations when this
protocol can incorrectly align these settings, reducing performance. A mismatch occurs under these
circumstances:
• A manually set speed or duplex parameter is different from the manually set speed or duplex
parameter on the connected port.
• A port is set to autonegotiate, and the connected port is set to full duplex with no autonegotiation.
To maximize switch performance and ensure a link, follow one of these guidelines when changing the
settings for duplex and speed:
• Let both ports autonegotiate both speed and duplex.
• Manually set the speed and duplex parameters for the ports on both ends of the connection.
Note If a remote device does not autonegotiate, configure the duplex settings on the two ports to match. The
speed parameter can adjust itself even if the connected port does not autonegotiate.

OL-8553-06 47-11
Troubleshooting Power over Ethernet Switch Ports
Troubleshooting Power over Ethernet Switch Ports

These sections describe how to troubleshoot Power over Ethernet (PoE) ports.
Disabled Port Caused by Power Loss

If a powered device (such as a Cisco IP Phone 7910) that is connected to a PoE switch port and is
powered by an AC power source loses power from the AC power source, the device might enter an
error-disabled state. To recover from an error-disabled state, enter the shutdown interface configuration
command, and then enter the no shutdown interface command. You can also configure automatic
recovery on the switch to recover from the error-disabled state. The errdisable recovery cause
loopback and the errdisable recovery interval seconds global configuration commands automatically
take the interface out of the error-disabled state after the specified period of time.
Use these commands, described in the command reference for this release, to monitor the PoE port
status:
• show controllers power inline privileged EXEC command
• show power inline privileged EXEC command
• debug ilpower privileged EXEC command
Disabled Port Caused by False Link Up

If a Cisco powered device is connected to a port and you configure the port by using the power inline
never interface configuration command, a false link up can occur, placing the port into an error-disabled
state. To take the port out of the error-disabled state, enter the shutdown and the no shutdown interface
You should not connect a Cisco powered device to a port that has been configured with the power inline
never command.
SFP Module Security and Identification

Cisco small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules have a serial EEPROM that contains the module serial
number, the vendor name and ID, a unique security code, and cyclic redundancy check (CRC). When an
SFP module is inserted in the switch, the switch software reads the EEPROM to verify the serial number,
vendor name and vendor ID, and recompute the security code and CRC. If the serial number, the vendor
name or vendor ID, the security code, or CRC is invalid, the software generates a security error message
and places the interface in an error-disabled state.
Note The security error message references the GBIC_SECURITY facility. The switch supports SFP modules
and does not support GBIC modules. Although the error message text refers to GBIC interfaces and
modules, the security messages actually refer to the SFP modules and module interfaces. For more
information about error messages, see the system message guide for this release.
If you are using a non-Cisco SFP module, remove the SFP module from the switch, and replace it with
a Cisco module. After inserting a Cisco SFP module, use the errdisable recovery cause gbic-invalid
global configuration command to verify the port status, and enter a time interval for recovering from the

47-12 OL-8553-06
Monitoring SFP Module Status
error-disabled state. After the elapsed interval, the switch brings the interface out of the error-disabled
state and retries the operation. For more information about the errdisable recovery command, see the
If the module is identified as a Cisco SFP module, but the system is unable to read vendor-data
information to verify its accuracy, an SFP module error message is generated. In this case, you should
remove and re-insert the SFP module. If it continues to fail, the SFP module might be defective.
Monitoring SFP Module Status

You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module by using the show interfaces
transceiver privileged EXEC command. This command shows the operational status, such as the
temperature and the current for an SFP module on a specific interface and the alarm status. You can also
use the command to check the speed and the duplex settings on an SFP module. For more information,
see the show interfaces transceiver command in the command reference for this release.
Monitoring Temperature
The Catalyst 3560G-48TS, 3560G-48PS, 3560G-24TS, and 3560G-24PS switches monitor the
temperature conditions. The switch also uses the temperature information to control the fans.
Use the show env temperature status privileged EXEC command to display the temperature value,
state, and thresholds. The temperature value is the temperature in the switch (not the external
temperature).You can configure only the yellow threshold level (in Celsius) by using the system env
temperature threshold yellow value global configuration command to set the difference between the
yellow and red thresholds. You cannot configure the green or red thresholds. For more information, see
the command reference for this release.
Using Ping
• Understanding Ping, page 47-13
• Executing Ping, page 47-14
Understanding Ping
The switch supports IP ping, which you can use to test connectivity to remote hosts. Ping sends an echo
request packet to an address and waits for a reply. Ping returns one of these responses:
• Normal response—The normal response (hostname is alive) occurs in 1 to 10 seconds, depending
on network traffic.
• Destination does not respond—If the host does not respond, a no-answer message is returned.
• Unknown host—If the host does not exist, an unknown host message is returned.

OL-8553-06 47-13
Using Ping
• Destination unreachable—If the default gateway cannot reach the specified network, a
destination-unreachable message is returned.
• Network or host unreachable—If there is no entry in the route table for the host or network, a
network or host unreachable message is returned.
Executing Ping
If you attempt to ping a host in a different IP subnetwork, you must define a static route to the network
or have IP routing configured to route between those subnets. For more information, see Chapter 36,
“Configuring IP Unicast Routing.”
IP routing is disabled by default on all switches. If you need to enable or configure IP routing, see
Chapter 36, “Configuring IP Unicast Routing.”
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use this command to ping another device on the network from the
switch:
Command Purpose
ping ip host | address Ping a remote host through IP or by supplying the hostname or
network address.
Note Though other protocol keywords are available with the ping command, they are not supported in this
release.
This example shows how to ping an IP host:

Switch# ping 172.20.52.3
Type escape sequence to abort.

Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echoes to 172.20.52.3, timeout is 2 seconds:
!!!!!
Success rate is 100 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/4 ms
Switch#
Table 47-1 describes the possible ping character output.
Table 47-1 Ping Output Display Characters
Character Description
! Each exclamation point means receipt of a reply.
. Each period means the network server timed out while waiting for a reply.
U A destination unreachable error PDU was received.
C A congestion experienced packet was received.
I User interrupted test.
? Unknown packet type.
& Packet lifetime exceeded.

47-14 OL-8553-06
Using Layer 2 Traceroute
To end a ping session, enter the escape sequence (Ctrl-^ X by default). Simultaneously press and release
the Ctrl, Shift, and 6 keys and then press the X key.
Using Layer 2 Traceroute

• Understanding Layer 2 Traceroute, page 47-15
• Usage Guidelines, page 47-15
• Displaying the Physical Path, page 47-16
Understanding Layer 2 Traceroute

The Layer 2 traceroute feature allows the switch to identify the physical path that a packet takes from a
source device to a destination device. Layer 2 traceroute supports only unicast source and destination
MAC addresses. It finds the path by using the MAC address tables of the switches in the path. When the
switch detects a device in the path that does not support Layer 2 traceroute, the switch continues to send
Layer 2 trace queries and lets them time out.
The switch can only identify the path from the source device to the destination device. It cannot identify
the path that a packet takes from source host to the source device or from the destination device to the
destination host.
Usage Guidelines
These are the Layer 2 traceroute usage guidelines:
• Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) must be enabled on all the devices in the network. For Layer 2
traceroute to function properly, do not disable CDP.
For a list of switches that support Layer 2 traceroute, see the “Usage Guidelines” section on
page 47-15. If any devices in the physical path are transparent to CDP, the switch cannot identify
the path through these devices. For more information about enabling CDP, see Chapter 25,
“Configuring CDP.”
• A switch is reachable from another switch when you can test connectivity by using the ping
privileged EXEC command. All switches in the physical path must be reachable from each other.
• The maximum number of hops identified in the path is ten.
• You can enter the traceroute mac or the traceroute mac ip privileged EXEC command on a switch
that is not in the physical path from the source device to the destination device. All switches in the
path must be reachable from this switch.
• The traceroute mac command output shows the Layer 2 path only when the specified source and
destination MAC addresses belong to the same VLAN. If you specify source and destination MAC
addresses that belong to different VLANs, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and an error message
appears.
• If you specify a multicast source or destination MAC address, the path is not identified, and an error
message appears.

OL-8553-06 47-15
Using IP Traceroute
• If the source or destination MAC address belongs to multiple VLANs, you must specify the VLAN
to which both the source and destination MAC addresses belong. If the VLAN is not specified, the
path is not identified, and an error message appears.
• The traceroute mac ip command output shows the Layer 2 path when the specified source and
destination IP addresses belong to the same subnet. When you specify the IP addresses, the switch
uses the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to associate the IP addresses with the corresponding
MAC addresses and the VLAN IDs.
– If an ARP entry exists for the specified IP address, the switch uses the associated MAC address
and identifies the physical path.
– If an ARP entry does not exist, the switch sends an ARP query and tries to resolve the IP
address. If the IP address is not resolved, the path is not identified, and an error message
appears.
• When multiple devices are attached to one port through hubs (for example, multiple CDP neighbors
are detected on a port), the Layer 2 traceroute feature is not supported. When more than one CDP
neighbor is detected on a port, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and an error message appears.
• This feature is not supported in Token Ring VLANs.
Displaying the Physical Path

You can display physical path that a packet takes from a source device to a destination device by using
one of these privileged EXEC commands:
• tracetroute mac [interface interface-id] {source-mac-address} [interface interface-id]
{destination-mac-address} [vlan vlan-id] [detail]
• tracetroute mac ip {source-ip-address | source-hostname}{destination-ip-address |
destination-hostname} [detail]
For more information, see the command reference for this release.
Using IP Traceroute
• Understanding IP Traceroute, page 47-16
• Executing IP Traceroute, page 47-17
Understanding IP Traceroute
You can use IP traceroute to identify the path that packets take through the network on a hop-by-hop
basis. The command output displays all network layer (Layer 3) devices, such as routers, that the traffic
passes through on the way to the destination.
Your switches can participate as the source or destination of the traceroute privileged EXEC command
and might or might not appear as a hop in the traceroute command output. If the switch is the destination
of the traceroute, it is displayed as the final destination in the traceroute output. Intermediate switches
do not show up in the traceroute output if they are only bridging the packet from one port to another
within the same VLAN. However, if the intermediate switch is a multilayer switch that is routing a
particular packet, this switch shows up as a hop in the traceroute output.

47-16 OL-8553-06
Using IP Traceroute
The traceroute privileged EXEC command uses the Time To Live (TTL) field in the IP header to cause
routers and servers to generate specific return messages. Traceroute starts by sending a User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) datagram to the destination host with the TTL field set to 1. If a router finds a TTL value
of 1 or 0, it drops the datagram and sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
time-to-live-exceeded message to the sender. Traceroute finds the address of the first hop by examining
the source address field of the ICMP time-to-live-exceeded message.
To identify the next hop, traceroute sends a UDP packet with a TTL value of 2. The first router
decrements the TTL field by 1 and sends the datagram to the next router. The second router sees a TTL
value of 1, discards the datagram, and returns the time-to-live-exceeded message to the source. This
process continues until the TTL is incremented to a value large enough for the datagram to reach the
destination host (or until the maximum TTL is reached).
To learn when a datagram reaches its destination, traceroute sets the UDP destination port number in the
datagram to a very large value that the destination host is unlikely to be using. When a host receives a
datagram destined to itself containing a destination port number that is unused locally, it sends an ICMP
port-unreachable error to the source. Because all errors except port-unreachable errors come from
intermediate hops, the receipt of a port-unreachable error means that this message was sent by the
destination port.
Executing IP Traceroute
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow this step to trace that the path packets take through the
network:
Command Purpose
traceroute ip host Trace the path that packets take through the network.
Note Though other protocol keywords are available with the traceroute privileged EXEC command, they are
not supported in this release.
This example shows how to perform a traceroute to an IP host:

Switch# traceroute ip 171.9.15.10
Type escape sequence to abort.

Tracing the route to 171.69.115.10
1 172.2.52.1 0 msec 0 msec 4 msec

2 172.2.1.203 12 msec 8 msec 0 msec
3 171.9.16.6 4 msec 0 msec 0 msec
4 171.9.4.5 0 msec 4 msec 0 msec
5 171.9.121.34 0 msec 4 msec 4 msec
6 171.9.15.9 120 msec 132 msec 128 msec
7 171.9.15.10 132 msec 128 msec 128 msec
Switch#
The display shows the hop count, the IP address of the router, and the round-trip time in milliseconds
for each of the three probes that are sent.

OL-8553-06 47-17
Using TDR
Table 47-2 Traceroute Output Display Characters
Character Description
* The probe timed out.
? Unknown packet type.
A Administratively unreachable. Usually, this output means that an access list is
blocking traffic.
H Host unreachable.
N Network unreachable.
P Protocol unreachable.
Q Source quench.
U Port unreachable.
To end a trace in progress, enter the escape sequence (Ctrl-^ X by default). Simultaneously press and
release the Ctrl, Shift, and 6 keys and then press the X key.
Using TDR
• Understanding TDR, page 47-18
• Running TDR and Displaying the Results, page 47-19
Understanding TDR
You can use the Time Domain Reflector (TDR) feature to diagnose and resolve cabling problems. When
running TDR, a local device sends a signal through a cable and compares the reflected signal to the initial
signal.
TDR is supported only on 10/100/1000 copper Ethernet ports. It is not supported on 10/100 ports or on
SFP module ports.
TDR can detect these cabling problems:
• Open, broken, or cut twisted-pair wires—The wires are not connected to the wires from the remote
device.
• Shorted twisted-pair wires—The wires are touching each other or the wires from the remote device.
For example, a shorted twisted pair can occur if one wire of the twisted pair is soldered to the other
wire.
If one of the twisted-pair wires is open, TDR can find the length at which the wire is open.
Use TDR to diagnose and resolve cabling problems in these situations:
• Replacing a switch
• Setting up a wiring closet
• Troubleshooting a connection between two devices when a link cannot be established or when it is
not operating properly

47-18 OL-8553-06
Using Debug Commands
Running TDR and Displaying the Results

To run TDR, enter the test cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id privileged EXEC command:
To display the results, enter the show cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id privileged EXEC
command. For a description of the fields in the display, see the command reference for this release.
Using Debug Commands

These sections explains how you use debug commands to diagnose and resolve internetworking
problems:
• Enabling Debugging on a Specific Feature, page 47-19
• Enabling All-System Diagnostics, page 47-20
• Redirecting Debug and Error Message Output, page 47-20
Caution Because debugging output is assigned high priority in the CPU process, it can render the system
unusable. For this reason, use debug commands only to troubleshoot specific problems or during
troubleshooting sessions with Cisco technical support staff. It is best to use debug commands during
periods of lower network traffic and fewer users. Debugging during these periods decreases the
likelihood that increased debug command processing overhead will affect system use.
Note For complete syntax and usage information for specific debug commands, see the command reference
for this release.
Enabling Debugging on a Specific Feature

All debug commands are entered in privileged EXEC mode, and most debug commands take no
arguments. For example, beginning in privileged EXEC mode, enter this command to enable the
debugging for Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN):
Switch# debug span-session
The switch continues to generate output until you enter the no form of the command.
If you enable a debug command and no output appears, consider these possibilities:
• The switch might not be properly configured to generate the type of traffic you want to monitor. Use
the show running-config command to check its configuration.
• Even if the switch is properly configured, it might not generate the type of traffic you want to
monitor during the particular period that debugging is enabled. Depending on the feature you are
debugging, you can use commands such as the TCP/IP ping command to generate network traffic.
To disable debugging of SPAN, enter this command in privileged EXEC mode:
Switch# no debug span-session
Alternately, in privileged EXEC mode, you can enter the undebug form of the command:
Switch# undebug span-session

OL-8553-06 47-19
Using the show platform forward Command
To display the state of each debugging option, enter this command in privileged EXEC mode:
Switch# show debugging
Enabling All-System Diagnostics

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, enter this command to enable all-system diagnostics:
Switch# debug all
Caution Because debugging output takes priority over other network traffic, and because the debug all privileged
EXEC command generates more output than any other debug command, it can severely diminish switch
performance or even render it unusable. In virtually all cases, it is best to use more specific debug
commands.
The no debug all privileged EXEC command disables all diagnostic output. Using the no debug all
command is a convenient way to ensure that you have not accidentally left any debug commands
enabled.
Redirecting Debug and Error Message Output

By default, the network server sends the output from debug commands and system error messages to the
console. If you use this default, you can use a virtual terminal connection to monitor debug output
instead of connecting to the console port.
Possible destinations include the console, virtual terminals, internal buffer, and UNIX hosts running a
syslog server. The syslog format is compatible with 4.3 Berkeley Standard Distribution (BSD) UNIX
and its derivatives.
Note Be aware that the debugging destination you use affects system overhead. Logging messages to the
console produces very high overhead, whereas logging messages to a virtual terminal produces less
overhead. Logging messages to a syslog server produces even less, and logging to an internal buffer
produces the least overhead of any method.
For more information about system message logging, see Chapter 30, “Configuring System Message
Logging.”

The output from the show platform forward privileged EXEC command provides some useful
information about the forwarding results if a packet entering an interface is sent through the system.
Depending upon the parameters entered about the packet, the output provides lookup table results and
port maps used to calculate forwarding destinations, bitmaps, and egress information.
Note For more syntax and usage information for the show platform forward command, see the switch

47-20 OL-8553-06
Most of the information in the output from the command is useful mainly for technical support
personnel, who have access to detailed information about the switch application-specific integrated
circuits (ASICs). However, packet forwarding information can also be helpful in troubleshooting.
This is an example of the output from the show platform forward command on port 1 in VLAN 5 when
the packet entering that port is addressed to unknown MAC addresses. The packet should be flooded to
all other ports in VLAN 5.
Switch# show platform forward gigabitethernet0/1 vlan 5 1.1.1 2.2.2 ip 13.1.1.1 13.2.2.2
udp 10 20
Global Port Number:24, Asic Number:5
Src Real Vlan Id:5, Mapped Vlan Id:5
Ingress:
Lookup Key-Used Index-Hit A-Data
InptACL 40_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFA 03000000
L2Local 80_00050002_00020002-00_00000000_00000000 00C71 0000002B
Station Descriptor:02340000, DestIndex:0239, RewriteIndex:F005
==========================================
Egress:Asic 2, switch 1
Output Packets:
------------------------------------------
Packet 1
OutptACL 50_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFE 03000000
Port Vlan SrcMac DstMac Cos Dscpv

Gi0/1 0005 0001.0001.0001 0002.0002.0002
------------------------------------------
Packet 2
OutptACL 50_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFE 03000000

Gi0/2 0005 0001.0001.0001 0002.0002.0002
------------------------------------------
<output truncated>
------------------------------------------
Packet 10
OutptACL 50_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFE 03000000
Packet dropped due to failed DEJA_VU Check on Gi0/2
This is an example of the output when the packet coming in on port 1 in VLAN 5 is sent to an address
already learned on the VLAN on another port. It should be forwarded from the port on which the address
was learned.
Switch# show platform forward gigabitethernet0/1 vlan 5 1.1.1 0009.43a8.0145 ip 13.1.1.1
13.2.2.2 udp 10 20
Ingress:
InptACL 40_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFA 03000000
L2Local 80_00050009_43A80145-00_00000000_00000000 00086 02010197
Station Descriptor:F0050003, DestIndex:F005, RewriteIndex:0003
==========================================

OL-8553-06 47-21
Output Packets:
------------------------------------------
Packet 1
OutptACL 50_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFE 03000000

interface-id 0005 0001.0001.0001 0009.43A8.0145
This is an example of the output when the packet coming in on port 1 in VLAN 5 has a destination MAC
address set to the router MAC address in VLAN 5 and the destination IP address unknown. Because there
is no default route set, the packet should be dropped.
Switch# show platform forward gigabitethernet0/1 vlan 5 1.1.1 03.e319.ee44 ip 13.1.1.1
13.2.2.2 udp 10 20
Ingress:
InptACL 40_0D020202_0D010101-00_41000014_000A0000 01FFA 03000000
L3Local 00_00000000_00000000-90_00001400_0D020202 010F0 01880290
L3Scndr 12_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 034E0 000C001D_00000000
Lookup Used:Secondary
Station Descriptor:02260000, DestIndex:0226, RewriteIndex:0000
This is an example of the output when the packet coming in on port 1 in VLAN 5 has a destination MAC
address set to the router MAC address in VLAN 5 and the destination IP address set to an IP address that
is in the IP routing table. It should be forwarded as specified in the routing table.
Switch# show platform forward gigabitethernet0/1 vlan 5 1.1.1 03.e319.ee44 ip 110.1.5.5
16.1.10.5
Ingress:
InptACL 40_10010A05_0A010505-00_41000014_000A0000 01FFA 03000000
L3Local 00_00000000_00000000-90_00001400_10010A05 010F0 01880290
L3Scndr 12_10010A05_0A010505-00_40000014_000A0000 01D28 30090001_00000000
Lookup Used:Secondary
Station Descriptor:F0070007, DestIndex:F007, RewriteIndex:0007
==========================================
Output Packets:
------------------------------------------
Packet 1
OutptACL 50_10010A05_0A010505-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFE 03000000

Gi0/2 0007 XXXX.XXXX.0246 0009.43A8.0147

47-22 OL-8553-06
Using the crashinfo Files
Using the crashinfo Files

The crashinfo files save information that helps Cisco technical support representatives to debug
problems that caused the Cisco IOS image to fail (crash). The switch writes the crash information to the
console at the time of the failure. The switch creates two types of crashinfo files:
• Basic crashinfo file—The switch automatically creates this file the next time you boot up the Cisco
IOS image after the failure.
• Extended crashinfo file—The switch automatically creates this file when the system is failing.
Basic crashinfo Files

The information in the basic file includes the Cisco IOS image name and version that failed, a list of the
processor registers, and other switch-specific information. You can provide this information to the Cisco
technical support representative by using the show tech-support privileged EXEC command.
Basic crashinfo files are kept in this directory on the flash file system:
flash:/crashinfo/.
The filenames are crashinfo_n where n is a sequence number.
Each new crashinfo file that is created uses a sequence number that is larger than any previously existing
sequence number, so the file with the largest sequence number describes the most recent failure. Version
numbers are used instead of a timestamp because the switches do not include a real-time clock. You
cannot change the name of the file that the system will use when it creates the file. However, after the
file is created, you can use the rename privileged EXEC command to rename it, but the contents of the
renamed file will not be displayed by the show tech-support privileged EXEC command. You can delete
crashinfo files by using the delete privileged EXEC command.
You can display the most recent basic crashinfo file (that is, the file with the highest sequence number
at the end of its filename) by entering the show tech-support privileged EXEC command. You also can
access the file by using any command that can copy or display files, such as the more or the copy
Extended crashinfo Files

The switch creates the extended crashinfo file when the system is failing. The information in the
extended file includes additional information that can help determine the cause of the switch failure. You
provide this information to the Cisco technical support representative by manually accessing the file and
using the more or the copy privileged EXEC command.
Extended crashinfo files are kept in this directory on the flash file system:
flash:/crashinfo_ext/.
The filenames are crashinfo_ext_n where n is a sequence number.
You can configure the switch to not create the extended creashinfo file by using the no exception
crashinfo global configuration command.

OL-8553-06 47-23
Troubleshooting Tables
These tables are a condensed version of troubleshooting documents on Cisco.com.
• “Troubleshooting CPU Utilization” on page -24
• “Troubleshooting Power over Ethernet (PoE)” on page -26
• “Troubleshooting Stackwise” on page -29
Troubleshooting CPU Utilization

This section lists some possible symptoms that could be caused by the CPU being too busy and shows
how to verify a CPU utilization problem. Table 47-3 lists the primary types of CPU utilization problems
that you can identify. It gives possible causes and corrective action with links to the Troubleshooting
High CPU Utilization document on Cisco.com.
Possible Symptoms of High CPU Utilization

Note that excessive CPU utilization might result in these symptoms, but the symptoms could also result
from other causes.
• Spanning tree topology changes
• EtherChannel links brought down due to loss of communication
• Failure to respond to management requests (ICMP ping, SNMP timeouts, slow Telnet or SSH
sessions)
• UDLD flapping
• IP SLAs failures because of SLAs responses beyond an acceptable threshold
• DHCP or IEEE 802.1x failures if the switch does not forward or respond to requests
Layer 3 switches:
• Dropped packets or increased latency for packets routed in software
• BGP or OSPF routing topology changes
• HSRP flapping
Verifying the Problem and Cause

To determine if high CPU utilization is a problem, enter the show processes cpu sorted privileged
EXEC command. Note the underlined information in the first line of the output example.
Switch# show processes cpu sorted
CPU utilization for five seconds: 8%/0%; one minute: 7%; five minutes: 8%
PID Runtime(ms) Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY Process
309 42289103 752750 56180 1.75% 1.20% 1.22% 0 RIP Timers
140 8820183 4942081 1784 0.63% 0.37% 0.30% 0 HRPC qos request
100 3427318 16150534 212 0.47% 0.14% 0.11% 0 HRPC pm-counters
192 3093252 14081112 219 0.31% 0.14% 0.11% 0 Spanning Tree
143 8 37 216 0.15% 0.01% 0.00% 0 Exec
...
<output truncated>

47-24 OL-8553-06
This example shows normal CPU utilization. The output shows that utilization for the last 5 seconds is
8%/0%, which has this meaning:
• The total CPU utilization is 8 percent, including both time running Cisco IOS processes and time
spent handling interrupts
• The time spent handling interrupts is zero percent.
\
Table 47-3 Troubleshooting CPU Utilization Problems
Type of Problem Cause Corrective Action

Interrupt percentage value is almost The CPU is receiving too many packets Determine the source of the network
as high as total CPU utilization value. from the network. packet. Stop the flow, or change the
switch configuration. See the section on
“Analyzing Network Traffic.”
Total CPU utilization is greater than One or more Cisco IOS process is Identify the unusual event, and
50% with minimal time spent on consuming too much CPU time. This is troubleshoot the root cause. See the
interrupts. usually triggered by an event that activated section on “Debugging Active
the process. Processes.”
For complete information about CPU utilization and how to troubleshoot utilization problems, see the
Troubleshooting High CPU Utilization document on Cisco.com.

OL-8553-06 47-25
Troubleshooting Power over Ethernet (PoE)

Figure 47-1 Power Over Ethernet Troubleshooting Scenarios
Symptom or problem Possible cause and solution

No PoE on only one port. Verify that the powered device works on another PoE port.
Trouble is on only one switch port. PoE and Use the show run, show interface status, or show power inline detail
non-PoE devices do not work on this port, but do user EXEC commands to verify that the port is not shut down or error
on other ports. disabled.
Note Most switches turn off port power when the port is shut down,
even though the IEEE specifications make this optional.
Verify that the Ethernet cable from the powered device to the switch port
is good: Connect a known good non-PoE Ethernet device to the Ethernet
cable, and make sure that the powered device establishes a link and
exchanges traffic with another host.
Verify that the total cable length from the switch front panel to the
powered device is not more than 100 meters.
Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the switch port. Use a short Ethernet
cable to connect a known good Ethernet device directly to this port on
the switch front panel (not on a patch panel). Verify that it can establish
an Ethernet link and exchange traffic with another host, or ping the port
VLAN SVI. Next, connect a powered device to this port, and verify that
it powers on.
If a powered device does not power on when connected with a patch cord to
the switch port, compare the total number of connected powered devices
to the switch power budget (available PoE). Use the show inline power
and show inline power detail commands to verify the amount of
available power.
For more information, see No PoE On One Port on Cisco.com.

47-26 OL-8553-06
Figure 47-1 Power Over Ethernet Troubleshooting Scenarios (continued)

No PoE on all ports or a group of ports. If there is a continuous, intermittent, or reoccuring alarm related to
power, replace the power supply if possible it is a field-replacable unit.
Trouble is on all switch ports. Nonpowered
Otherwise, replace the switch.
Ethernet devices cannot establish an Ethernet link
on any port, and PoE devices do not power on. If the problem is on a consecutive group of ports but not all ports, the
power supply is probably not defective, and the problem could be related
to PoE regulators in the switch.
Use the show log privileged EXEC command to review alarms or system
messages that previously reported PoE conditions or status changes.
If there are no alarms, use the show interface status command to verify
that the ports are not shut down or error-disabled. If ports are
error-disabled, use the shut and no shut interface configuration
commands to re-enable the ports.
Use the show env power and show power inline privileged EXEC
commands to review the PoE status and power budget (available PoE).
Review the running configuration to verify that power inline never is
not configured on the ports.
Connect a nonpowered Ethernet device directly to a switch port. Use
only a short patch cord. Do not use the existing distribution cables. Enter
the shut and no shut interface configuration commands, and verify that
an Ethernet link is established. If this connection is good, use a short
patch cord to connect a powered device to this port and verify that it
powers on. If the device powers on, verify that all intermediate patch
panels are correctly connected.
Disconnect all but one of the Ethernet cables from switch ports. Using a
short patch cord, connect a powered device to only one PoE port. Verify
the powered device does not require more power than can be delivered
by the switch port.
Use the show power inline privileged EXEC command to verify that the
powered device can receive power when the port is not shut down.
Alternatively, watch the powered device to verify that it powers on.
If a powered device can power on when only one powered device is
connected to the switch, enter the shut and no shut interface
configuration commands on the remaining ports, and then reconnect the
Ethernet cables one at a time to the switch PoE ports. Use the show
interface status and show power inline privileged EXEC commands to
monitor inline power statistics and port status.
If there is still no PoE at any port, a fuse might be open in the PoE
section of the power supply. This normally produces an alarm. Check the
log again for alarms reported earlier by system messages.
For more information, see No PoE On Any Port or a Group of Ports on
Cisco.com.

OL-8553-06 47-27
Figure 47-1 Power Over Ethernet Troubleshooting Scenarios (continued)

Cisco IP Phone disconnects or resets. Verify all electrical connections from the switch to the powered device.
Any unreliable connection results in power interruptions and irregular
After working normally, a Cisco phone or
powered device functioning such as erratic powered device disconnects
wireless access point intermittently reloads or
and reloads.
disconnects from PoE.
Verify that the cable length is not more than 100 meters from the switch
port to the powered device.
Notice what changes in the electrical environment at the switch location
or what happens at the powered device when the disconnect occurs?
Notice whether any error messages appear at the same time a disconnect
occurs. Use the show log privileged EXEC command to review error
messages.
Verify that an IP phone is not losing access to the Call Manager
immediately before the reload occurs. (It might be a network problem
and not a PoE problem.)
Replace the powered device with a non-PoE device, and verify that the
device works correctly. If a non-PoE device has link problems or a high
error rate, the problem might be an unreliable cable connection between
the switch port and the powered device.
For more information, see Cisco Phone Disconnects or Resets on
Cisco.com.
Non-Cisco powered device does not work on Use the show power inline command to verify that the switch power
Cisco PoE switch. budget (available PoE) is not depleted before or after the powered device
is connected. Verify that sufficient power is available for the powered
A non-Cisco powered device is connected to a
device type before you connect it.
Cisco PoE switch, but never powers on or powers
on and then quickly powers off. Non-PoE devices Use the show interface status command to verify that the switch detects
work normally. the connected powered device.
Use the show log command to review system messages that reported an
overcurrent condition on the port. Identify the symptom precisely: Does
the powered device initially power on, but then disconnect? If so, the
problem might be an initial surge-in (or inrush) current that exceeds a
current-limit threshold for the port.
For more information, see Non-Cisco PD Does Not Work Correctly on
Cisco PoE Switch on Cisco.com.

47-28 OL-8553-06
Troubleshooting Stackwise
Table 47-4 Switch Stack Troubleshooting Scenarios
Symptom/problem How to Verify Problem Possible Cause/Solution

General troubleshooting of Review this document. Use the Troubleshooting Switch Stacks
switch stack issues document for problem solutions and tutorial
information.
Switch cannot join stack Enter the show switch privileged EXEC Incompatible Cisco IOS versions between
command. stack members and new switch (see
Confirming Cisco IOS Versions).
Enter the show version user EXEC Incompatible license levels in a Catalyst
command. 3750-E switch (see Verifying Software
License Compatibility).
Enter the show platform stack-manager Incompatible Cisco IOS version numbers
all command. between stack members and new switch (see
Confirming Cisco IOS Versions).
Look carefully at the cables and Unreliable StackWise cable or incomplete
connections. connection (see Testing StackWise Cables and
Interfaces)
Enter the show sdm prefer command. Configuration mismatch (that is, SDM
templates) if switch was used for other
applications before you added it to the stack.
Incompatible IOS version between stack
members and new switch (see Configuration
Mismatch).
StackWise port frequently or Error messages report stack link Unreliable StackWise cable connection or
rapidly changing up/down states problems. Possible traffic disruption. interface (see StackWise Port Flapping).
(flapping)
Switch member port not coming Enter the show switch detail privileged Unreliable StackWise cable connection or
up EXEC command. interface (see StackWise Port Flapping).
Reduced stack ring bandwidth, Enter the show switch stack-ring speed Bad connection between StackWise cable
or slow throughput between user EXEC command. connection and switch chassis connector (see
switch ports or between switches Testing StackWise Cables and Interfaces).
in the stack. Enter the show switch detail user EXEC Defective or missing StackWise cable (see
command to see which stack cable or Testing StackWise Cables and Interfaces).
connection is causing the problem.
• Check the retainer screws on the • Loose retainer screws or overly tightened
StackWise cable connectors. retainer screws (see Verifying StackWise
Enter the show switch privileged
•
Cable Connections).
EXEC command to see whether new • Check status of stack members (see
switch shows as Ready, Progressing, Verifying StackWise Cable Connections).
or Provisioned.
Port numbering in one or more Enter the show switch detail user EXEC Multiple StackWise cables are disconnected
switches is incorrect or changed. command. from stack members creating two separate
stacks. (see Stack Master Election and Port
Number Assignment).

OL-8553-06 47-29
Table 47-4 Switch Stack Troubleshooting Scenarios (continued)
Symptom/problem How to Verify Problem Possible Cause/Solution

Slow traffic throughput on stack Test the switch interface. Defective StackWise switch interface.
ring
Note The only solution is to replace the
switch.
Problems with stack master Review the rules of stack master election. Current stack master is rebooted or
election. stacks merging, or new disconnected (see Stack Master is Rebooted or
switches joining stack Disconnected).
Port numbering seems off. Verify port numbering (see Stack Master
Election and Port Number Assignment.)
Enter the show switch privileged EXEC Interpret state messages. (see Joining a Stack:
command. Typical Sequence States and Rules.)
Stack members need to be Stack members running different major Defective StackWise switch interface or cable
upgraded. or minor versions of the Cisco IOS (see Quick-and-Easy Catalyst 3750 and
software. Catalyst 3750E Switch Stack Upgrades.)
StackWise link connection Look at the LED behavior. Stack not operating at full bandwidth (see
problems Verifying StackWise Link Connections Using
LEDs.)

47-30 OL-8553-06
CH A P T E R 48
Configuring Online Diagnostics
This chapter describes how to configure the online diagnostics on the Catalyst 3560 switches.
command reference at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/switches/ps5528/prod_command_reference_list.html

• Understanding How Online Diagnostics Work, page 48-1
• Running Online Diagnostic Tests, page 48-3
Understanding How Online Diagnostics Work

With online diagnostics, you can test and verify the hardware functionality of the switch while the switch
is connected to a live network.
The online diagnostics contain packet switching tests that check different hardware components and
verify the data path and the control signals.
The online diagnostics detect problems in these areas:
• Hardware components
• Interfaces (Ethernet ports and so forth)
• Solder joints
Online diagnostics are categorized as on-demand, scheduled, or health-monitoring diagnostics.
On-demand diagnostics run from the CLI; scheduled diagnostics run at user-designated intervals or at
specified times when the switch is connected to a live network; and health-monitoring runs in the
background.
Scheduling Online Diagnostics

You can schedule online diagnostics to run at a designated time of day or on a daily, weekly, or monthly
basis for a specific switch. Use the no form of this command to remove the scheduling.

OL-8553-06 48-1
Chapter 48 Configuring Online Diagnostics
Configuring Health-Monitoring Diagnostics
Beginning in global configuration mode, use this command to schedule online diagnostics:
Command Purpose
diagnostic schedule test {test_id | test_id_range | all | basic Schedule on-demand diagnostic tests for a specific date and
| non-disruptive} {daily hh:mm | on mm dd yyyy hh:mm} | time, how many times to run the test (iterations), and what
weekly day_of_week hh:mm} action to take when errors are found.
This example shows how to schedule diagnostic testing on a specific date and time for a specific switch:
Switch(config)# diagnostic schedule test 1,2,4-6 on january 3 2006 23:32
This example shows how to schedule diagnostic testing to occur weekly at a certain time for a specific
switch:
Switch(config)# diagnostic schedule test 1,2,4-6 weekly friday 09:23
Configuring Health-Monitoring Diagnostics

You can configure health-monitoring diagnostic testing while the switch is connected to a live network.
You can configure the execution interval for each health-monitoring test, whether or not to generate a
system message upon a test failure, or to enable or disable an individual test. Use the no form of this
command to disable testing.
Beginning in global configuration mode, use these commands to configure health-monitoring
diagnostics:
Command Purpose
diagnostic monitor interval test {test_id | Configure the health-monitoring interval of the specified tests. By
test_id_range} hour:mm:ss milliseconds day default, monitoring is disabled.
diagnostic monitor syslog Enable the generation of a syslog message for health-monitoring
test failures. By default, syslog is disabled.
diagnostic monitor threshold test {test_id | Set the failure threshold for monitoring tests. By default,
test_id_range} failure count count monitoring is disabled.
Use the no diagnostic monitor interval test {test-id | test-id-range} global configuration command to
change the interval to the default value or to zero. Use the no diagnostic monitor syslog command to
disable generation of syslog messages when a health-monitoring test fails. Use the diagnostic monitor
threshold test {test_id | test_id_range} failure count command to remove the failure threshold.
This example shows how to configure the specified test to run every 2 minutes:
Switch(config)# diagnostic monitor interval test 1 00:02:00 0 1
This example shows how to set the failure threshold for test monitoring on a switch:
Switch(config)# diagnostic monitor threshold test 1 failure count 50
This example shows how to enable the generation of a syslog message when any health monitoring test
fails:
Switch(config)# diagnostic monitor syslog

48-2 OL-8553-06
Running Online Diagnostic Tests
Running Online Diagnostic Tests

After you configure online diagnostics, you can start diagnostic tests or display the test results. You can
also see which tests are configured for each switch and what diagnostic tests have already run.
These sections describe how to run online diagnostic tests after they have been configured:
• Starting Online Diagnostic Tests, page 48-3
• Displaying Online Diagnostic Tests and Test Results, page 48-3
Starting Online Diagnostic Tests

After you configure diagnostic tests to run on the switch or on individual switches, you can use start to
begin a diagnostic test.
Beginning in global configuration mode, use this command to start an online diagnostic test:
Command Purpose
diagnostic start test {test-id | test-id-range | all | basic | Start a diagnostic test on a specific switch.
non-disruptive}
This example shows how to start a diagnostic test on a specific switch:

Switch# diagnostic start test 1
Switch#
06:27:50: %DIAG-6-TEST_RUNNING: Running TestPortAsicStackPortLoopback{ID=1} ...
06:27:51: %DIAG-6-TEST_OK: TestPortAsicStackPortLoopback{ID=1} has completed
successfully Switch#
Displaying Online Diagnostic Tests and Test Results

You can display the online diagnostic tests that are configured for specific switches and check the results
of the tests using the show commands.
To display the diagnostic tests that are configured for a switch and the test results, use these privileged
EXEC commands:
Table 48-1 show diagnostic Commands
Command Purpose
show diagnostic content Display the online diagnostics configured for a switch.
show diagnostic status Display whether a switch is running a test.
show diagnostic result detail Display the online diagnostics test results.
show diagnostic result test [test_id | test_id_range] [detail]
show diagnostic schedule Display the online diagnostics test schedule.
show diagnostic post Display the results of POST. (The same as the show post
command.)

OL-8553-06 48-3
Displaying Online Diagnostic Tests and Test Results
This example shows how to display the online diagnostics that are configured on a switch:
Switch# show diagnostic content
Diagnostics test suite attributes:
B/* - Basic ondemand test / NA
P/V/* - Per port test / Per device test / NA
D/N/* - Disruptive test / Non-disruptive test / NA
S/* - Only applicable to standby unit / NA
X/* - Not a health monitoring test / NA
F/* - Fixed monitoring interval test / NA
E/* - Always enabled monitoring test / NA
A/I - Monitoring is active / Monitoring is inactive
R/* - Switch will reload after test list completion / NA
P/* - will partition stack / NA
Test Interval Thre-
ID Test Name attributes day hh:mm:ss.ms shold
==== ================================== ============ =============== =====
1) TestPortAsicStackPortLoopback B*N****A** 000 00:01:00.00 n/a
2) TestPortAsicLoopback B*D*X**IR* not configured n/a
3) TestPortAsicCam B*D*X**IR* not configured n/a
4) TestPortAsicRingLoopback B*D*X**IR* not configured n/a
5) TestMicRingLoopback B*D*X**IR* not configured n/a
6) TestPortAsicMem B*D*X**IR* not configured n/a
This example shows how to display the online diagnostic results for a switch:
Switch# show diagnostic result
Overall diagnostic result: PASS
Test results: (. = Pass, F = Fail, U = Untested)
1) TestPortAsicStackPortLoopback ---> .
2) TestPortAsicLoopback ------------> .
3) TestPortAsicCam -----------------> .
4) TestPortAsicRingLoopback --------> .
5) TestMicRingLoopback -------------> .
6) TestPortAsicMem -----------------> .
This example shows how to display the online diagnostic test schedule for a switch:
Switch# show diagnostic scheduleCurrent Time = 14:39:49 PST Tue Jul 5 2005
Schedule #1:
To be run daily 12:00
Test ID(s) to be executed: 1.

48-4 OL-8553-06
A P P E N D I X A
Supported MIBs
This appendix lists the supported management information base (MIBs) for this release on the
Catalyst 3560 switch. It contains these sections:
• MIB List, page A-1
• Using FTP to Access the MIB Files, page A-3
MIB List
• BRIDGE-MIB
Note The BRIDGE-MIB supports the context of a single VLAN. By default, SNMP messages
using the configured community string always provide information for VLAN 1. To obtain
the BRIDGE-MIB information for other VLANs, for example VLAN x, use this community
string in the SNMP message: configured community string @x.
• CISCO-AUTH-FRAMEWORK-MIB
• CISCO-CABLE-DIAG-MIB
• CISCO-CDP-MIB
• CISCO-CLUSTER-MIB
• CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB
• CISCO-CONFIG-MAN-MIB
• CISCO-ENTITY-FRU-CONTROL-MIB
• CISCO-ENTITY-VENDORTYPE-OID-MIB
• CISCO-ENVMON-MIB
• CISCO-ERR-DISABLE-MIB
• CISCO-FLASH-MIB (Flash memory on all switches is modeled as removable flash memory.)
• CISCO-FTP-CLIENT-MIB
• CISCO-HSRP-MIB
• CISCO-HSRP-EXT-MIB (partial support)
• CISCO-IETF-IP-MIB

OL-8553-06 A-1
Appendix A Supported MIBs
MIB List
• CISCO-IETF-IP-FORWARDING-MIB
• CISCO-IGMP-FILTER-MIB
• CISCO-IMAGE-MIB
• CISCO IP-STAT-MIB
• CISCO-L2L3-INTERFACE-CONFIG-MIB
• CISCO-LAG-MIB
• CISCO-MAC-AUTH-BYPASS
• CISCO-MAC-NOTIFICATION-MIB
• CISCO-MEMORY-POOL-MIB
• CISCO-NAC-NAD-MIB
• CISCO-PAE-MIB
• CISCO-PAGP-MIB
• CISCO-PING-MIB
• CISCO-PORT-QOS-MIB (only the packet counters are supported; the octet counters are not
supported)
• CISCO-POWER-ETHERNET-EXT-MIB
• CISCO-PRODUCTS-MIB
• CISCO-PROCESS-MIB
• CISCO-RTTMON-MIB
• CISCO-SMI-MIB
• CISCO-STP-EXTENSIONS-MIB
• CISCO-SYSLOG-MIB
• CISCO-TC-MIB
• CISCO-TCP-MIB
• CISCO-UDLDP-MIB
• CISCO-VLAN-IFTABLE-RELATIONSHIP-MIB
• CISCO-VLAN-MEMBERSHIP-MIB
• CISCO-VTP-MIB
• CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB
• ENTITY-MIB
• ETHERLIKE-MIB
• IEEE8021-PAE-MIB
• IEEE8023-LAG-MIB
• IF-MIB (In and out counters for VLANs are not supported.)
• IGMP-MIB
• INET-ADDRESS-MIB
• IPMROUTE-MIB
• LLDP MED MIB

A-2 OL-8553-06
Using FTP to Access the MIB Files
• OLD-CISCO-CHASSIS-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-FLASH-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-INTERFACES-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-IP-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-SYS-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-TCP-MIB
• OLD-CISCO-TS-MIB
• PIM-MIB
• RFC1213-MIB (Functionality is as per the agent capabilities specified in the
CISCO-RFC1213-CAPABILITY.my.)
• RFC1253-MIB (OSPF-MIB)
• RMON-MIB
• RMON2-MIB
• SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
• SNMP-MPD-MIB
• SNMP-NOTIFICATION-MIB
• SNMP-TARGET-MIB
• SNMPv2-MIB
• TCP-MIB
• UDP-MIB
Note You can also use this URL for a list of supported MIBs for the Catalyst 3560 switch:
ftp://ftp.cisco.com/pub/mibs/supportlists/cat3560/cat3560-supportlist.htm
You can access other information about MIBs and Cisco products on the Cisco web site:
http://www.cisco.com/public/sw-center/netmgmt/cmtk/mibs.shtml

You can get each MIB file by using this procedure:
Step 1 Make sure that your FTP client is in passive mode.
Note Some FTP clients do not support passive mode.
Step 2 Use FTP to access the server ftp.cisco.com.

Step 3 Log in with the username anonymous.
Step 4 Enter your e-mail username when prompted for the password.

OL-8553-06 A-3
Step 5 At the ftp> prompt, change directories to /pub/mibs/v1 and /pub/mibs/v2.

Step 6 Use the get MIB_filename command to obtain a copy of the MIB file.

A-4 OL-8553-06
A P P E N D I X B
Working with the Cisco IOS File System,
Configuration Files, and Software Images
This appendix describes how to manipulate the Catalyst 3560 switch flash file system, how to copy
configuration files, and how to archive (upload and download) software images to a switch.
command reference for this release and the Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command
This appendix consists of these sections:

• Working with the Flash File System, page B-1
• Working with Configuration Files, page B-8
• Working with Software Images, page B-23
Working with the Flash File System

The flash file system is a single flash device on which you can store files. It also provides several
commands to help you manage software image and configuration files. The default flash file system on
the switch is named flash:.
• Displaying Available File Systems, page B-2
• Setting the Default File System, page B-3
• Displaying Information about Files on a File System, page B-3
• Creating and Removing Directories, page B-4
• Copying Files, page B-5
• Deleting Files, page B-5
• Creating, Displaying, and Extracting tar Files, page B-6
• Displaying the Contents of a File, page B-8

OL-8553-06 B-1
Appendix B Working with the Cisco IOS File System, Configuration Files, and Software Images
Displaying Available File Systems

To display the available file systems on your switch, use the show file systems privileged EXEC
command as shown in this example.
Switch# show file systems
File Systems:
Size(b) Free(b) Type Flags Prefixes
* 15998976 5135872 flash rw flash:flash3:
- - opaque rw bs:
- - opaque rw vb:
524288 520138 nvram rw nvram:
- - network rw tftp:
- - opaque rw null:
- - opaque rw system:
- - opaque ro xmodem:
- - opaque ro ymodem:

B-2 OL-8553-06
Setting the Default File System

Table B-1 show file systems Field Descriptions
Field Value
Size(b) Amount of memory in the file system in bytes.
Free(b) Amount of free memory in the file system in bytes.
Type Type of file system.
flash—The file system is for a flash memory device.
nvram—The file system is for a NVRAM device.
opaque—The file system is a locally generated pseudo file system (for example, the system) or a download
interface, such as brimux.
unknown—The file system is an unknown type.
Flags Permission for file system.
ro—read-only.
rw—read/write.\
wo—write-only.
Prefixes Alias for file system.
flash:—Flash file system.
nvram:—NVRAM.
null:—Null destination for copies. You can copy a remote file to null to find its size.
rcp:—Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) network server.
system:—Contains the system memory, including the running configuration.
tftp:—TFTP network server.
xmodem:—Obtain the file from a network machine by using the Xmodem protocol.
ymodem:—Obtain the file from a network machine by using the Ymodem protocol.
You can specify the file system or directory that the system uses as the default file system by using the
cd filesystem: privileged EXEC command. You can set the default file system to omit the filesystem:
argument from related commands. For example, for all privileged EXEC commands that have the
optional filesystem: argument, the system uses the file system specified by the cd command.
By default, the default file system is flash:.
You can display the current default file system as specified by the cd command by using the pwd
Displaying Information about Files on a File System

You can view a list of the contents of a file system before manipulating its contents. For example, before
copying a new configuration file to flash memory, you might want to verify that the file system does not
already contain a configuration file with the same name. Similarly, before copying a flash configuration
file to another location, you might want to verify its filename for use in another command.

OL-8553-06 B-3
To display information about files on a file system, use one of the privileged EXEC commands in
Table B-2:
Table B-2 Commands for Displaying Information About Files
Command Description
dir [/all] [filesystem:][filename] Display a list of files on a file system.
show file systems Display more information about each of the files on a file system.
show file information file-url Display information about a specific file.
show file descriptors Display a list of open file descriptors. File descriptors are the internal representations
of open files. You can use this command to see if another user has a file open.
Changing Directories and Displaying the Working Directory

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change directories and display the working
directory.
Command Purpose
Step 1 dir filesystem: Display the directories on the specified file system.
For filesystem:, use flash: for the system board flash device.
Step 2 cd new_configs Change to the directory of interest.
The command example shows how to change to the directory named
new_configs.
Step 3 pwd Display the working directory.
Creating and Removing Directories

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create and remove a directory:
Command Purpose
Step 1 dir filesystem: Display the directories on the specified file system.
For filesystem:, use flash: for the system board flash device.
Step 2 mkdir old_configs Create a new directory.
The command example shows how to create the directory named old_configs.
Directory names are case sensitive.
Directory names are limited to 45 characters between the slashes (/); the name
cannot contain control characters, spaces, deletes, slashes, quotes, semicolons,
or colons.
Step 3 dir filesystem: Verify your entry.
To delete a directory with all its files and subdirectories, use the delete /force /recursive
filesystem:/file-url privileged EXEC command.

B-4 OL-8553-06
Use the /recursive keyword to delete the named directory and all subdirectories and the files contained
in it. Use the /force keyword to suppress the prompting that confirms a deletion of each file in the
directory. You are prompted only once at the beginning of this deletion process. Use the /force and
/recursive keywords for deleting old software images that were installed by using the archive
download-sw command but are no longer needed.
For filesystem, use flash: for the system board flash device. For file-url, enter the name of the directory
to be deleted. All the files in the directory and the directory are removed.
Caution When files and directories are deleted, their contents cannot be recovered.
Copying Files
To copy a file from a source to a destination, use the copy source-url destination-url privileged EXEC
command. For the source and destination URLs, you can use running-config and startup-config
keyword shortcuts. For example, the copy running-config startup-config command saves the currently
running configuration file to the NVRAM section of flash memory to be used as the configuration during
system initialization.
You can also copy from special file systems (xmodem:, ymodem:) as the source for the file from a
network machine that uses the Xmodem or Ymodem protocol.
Network file system URLs include ftp:, rcp:, and tftp: and have these syntaxes:
• FTP—ftp:[[//username [:password]@location]/directory]/filename
• RCP—rcp:[[//username@location]/directory]/filename
• TFTP—tftp:[[//location]/directory]/filename
Local writable file systems include flash:.
Some invalid combinations of source and destination exist. Specifically, you cannot copy these
combinations:
• From a running configuration to a running configuration
• From a startup configuration to a startup configuration
• From a device to the same device (for example, the copy flash: flash: command is invalid)
For specific examples of using the copy command with configuration files, see the “Working with
Configuration Files” section on page B-8.
To copy software images either by downloading a new version or by uploading the existing one, use the
archive download-sw or the archive upload-sw privileged EXEC command. For more information, see
the “Working with Software Images” section on page B-23.
Deleting Files
When you no longer need a file on a flash memory device, you can permanently delete it. To delete a
file or directory from a specified flash device, use the delete [/force] [/recursive] [filesystem:]/file-url

OL-8553-06 B-5
Use the /recursive keyword for deleting a directory and all subdirectories and the files contained in it.
Use the /force keyword to suppress the prompting that confirms a deletion of each file in the directory.
You are prompted only once at the beginning of this deletion process. Use the /force and /recursive
keywords for deleting old software images that were installed by using the archive download-sw
command but are no longer needed.
If you omit the filesystem: option, the switch uses the default device specified by the cd command. For
file-url, you specify the path (directory) and the name of the file to be deleted.
When you attempt to delete any files, the system prompts you to confirm the deletion.
Caution When files are deleted, their contents cannot be recovered.
This example shows how to delete the file myconfig from the default flash memory device:
Switch# delete myconfig
Creating, Displaying, and Extracting tar Files

You can create a tar file and write files into it, list the files in a tar file, and extract the files from a tar
file as described in the next sections.
Note Instead of using the copy privileged EXEC command or the archive tar privileged EXEC command, we
recommend using the archive download-sw and archive upload-sw privileged EXEC commands to
download and upload software image files.
Creating a tar File

To create a tar file and write files into it, use this privileged EXEC command:
archive tar /create destination-url flash:/file-url
For destination-url, specify the destination URL alias for the local or network file system and the name
of the tar file to create. These options are supported:
• For the local flash file system, the syntax is
flash:
• For the FTP, the syntax is
ftp:[[//username[:password]@location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
• For the RCP, the syntax is
rcp:[[//username@location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
• For the TFTP, the syntax is
tftp:[[//location]/directory]/tar-filename.tar
The tar-filename.tar is the tar file to be created.
For flash:/file-url, specify the location on the local flash file system from which the new tar file is
created. You can also specify an optional list of files or directories within the source directory to write
to the new tar file. If none are specified, all files and directories at this level are written to the newly
created tar file.

B-6 OL-8553-06
This example shows how to create a tar file. This command writes the contents of the new-configs
directory on the local flash device to a file named saved.tar on the TFTP server at 172.20.10.30:
Switch# archive tar /create tftp:172.20.10.30/saved.tar flash:/new-configs
Displaying the Contents of a tar File

To display the contents of a tar file on the screen, use this privileged EXEC command:
archive tar /table source-url
For source-url, specify the source URL alias for the local or network file system. These options are
supported:
flash:
The tar-filename.tar is the tar file to display.
You can also limit the display of the files by specifying an optional list of files or directories after the tar
file; then only those files appear. If none are specified, all files and directories appear.
This example shows how to display the contents of a switch tar file that is in flash memory:
Switch# archive tar /table flash:image-name.tar
image-name/ (directory)
image-name/html/ (directory)
image-name/html/foo.html (0 bytes)
image-name/image-name.bin (610856 bytes)
image-name/info (219 bytes)
This example shows how to display only the /html directory and its contents:
Switch# archive tar /table flash: image-name/html
cimage-name/html
cimage-name/html/ (directory)
cimage-name/html/const.htm (556 bytes)
cimage-name/html/xhome.htm (9373 bytes)
cimage-name/html/menu.css (1654 bytes)
<output truncated>
Extracting a tar File

To extract a tar file into a directory on the flash file system, use this privileged EXEC command:
archive tar /xtract source-url flash:/file-url [dir/file...]
For source-url, specify the source URL alias for the local file system. These options are supported:
flash:

OL-8553-06 B-7
Working with Configuration Files

The tar-filename.tar is the tar file from which to extract files.
For flash:/file-url [dir/file...], specify the location on the local flash file system into which the tar file is
extracted. Use the dir/file... option to specify an optional list of files or directories within the tar file to
be extracted. If none are specified, all files and directories are extracted.
This example shows how to extract the contents of a tar file located on the TFTP server at 172.20.10.30.
This command extracts just the new-configs directory into the root directory on the local flash file
system. The remaining files in the saved.tar file are ignored.
Switch# archive tar /xtract tftp://172.20.10.30/saved.tar flash:/new-configs
Displaying the Contents of a File

To display the contents of any readable file, including a file on a remote file system, use the more [/ascii
| /binary | /ebcdic] file-url privileged EXEC command:.
This example shows how to display the contents of a configuration file on a TFTP server:
Switch# more tftp://serverA/hampton/savedconfig
!
! Saved configuration on server
!
version 11.3
service timestamps log datetime localtime
service linenumber
service udp-small-servers
service pt-vty-logging
!
<output truncated>

This section describes how to create, load, and maintain configuration files.
Configuration files contain commands entered to customize the function of the Cisco IOS software. A
way to create a basic configuration file is to use the setup program or to enter the setup privileged EXEC
command. For more information, see Chapter 3, “Assigning the Switch IP Address and Default
Gateway.”
You can copy (download) configuration files from a TFTP, FTP, or RCP server to the running
configuration or startup configuration of the switch. You might want to perform this for one of these
reasons:
• To restore a backed-up configuration file.
• To use the configuration file for another switch. For example, you might add another switch to your
network and want it to have a configuration similar to the original switch. By copying the file to the
new switch, you can change the relevant parts rather than recreating the whole file.
• To load the same configuration commands on all the switches in your network so that all the
switches have similar configurations.

B-8 OL-8553-06
You can copy (upload) configuration files from the switch to a file server by using TFTP, FTP, or RCP.
You might perform this task to back up a current configuration file to a server before changing its
contents so that you can later restore the original configuration file from the server.
The protocol you use depends on which type of server you are using. The FTP and RCP transport
mechanisms provide faster performance and more reliable delivery of data than TFTP. These
improvements are possible because FTP and RCP are built on and use the TCP/IP stack, which is
connection-oriented.
• Guidelines for Creating and Using Configuration Files, page B-9
• Configuration File Types and Location n, page B-10
• Creating a Configuration File By Using a Text Editor, page B-10
• Copying Configuration Files By Using TFTP, page B-10
• Copying Configuration Files By Using FTP, page B-12
• Copying Configuration Files By Using RCP, page B-15
• Clearing Configuration Information, page B-18
• Replacing and Rolling Back Configurations, page B-19
Guidelines for Creating and Using Configuration Files

Creating configuration files can aid in your switch configuration. Configuration files can contain some
or all of the commands needed to configure one or more switches. For example, you might want to
download the same configuration file to several switches that have the same hardware configuration.
Use these guidelines when creating a configuration file:
• We recommend that you connect through the console port for the initial configuration of the switch.
If you are accessing the switch through a network connection instead of through a direct connection
to the console port, keep in mind that some configuration changes (such as changing the switch IP
address or disabling ports) can cause a loss of connectivity to the switch.
• If no password has been set on the switch, we recommend that you set one by using the enable secret
secret-password global configuration command.
Note The copy {ftp: | rcp: | tftp:} system:running-config privileged EXEC command loads the
configuration files on the switch as if you were entering the commands at the command line. The switch
does not erase the existing running configuration before adding the commands. If a command in the
copied configuration file replaces a command in the existing configuration file, the existing command
is erased. For example, if the copied configuration file contains a different IP address in a particular
command than the existing configuration, the IP address in the copied configuration is used. However,
some commands in the existing configuration might not be replaced or negated. In this case, the resulting
configuration file is a mixture of the existing configuration file and the copied configuration file, with
the copied configuration file having precedence.
To restore a configuration file to an exact copy of a file stored on a server, copy the configuration file
directly to the startup configuration (by using the copy {ftp: | rcp: | tftp:} nvram:startup-config
privileged EXEC command), and reload the switch.

OL-8553-06 B-9
Configuration File Types and Location n

Startup configuration files are used during system startup to configure the software. Running
configuration files contain the current configuration of the software. The two configuration files can be
different. For example, you might want to change the configuration for a short time period rather than
permanently. In this case, you would change the running configuration but not save the configuration by
using the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command.
The running configuration is saved in DRAM; the startup configuration is stored in the NVRAM section
of flash memory.
Creating a Configuration File By Using a Text Editor

When creating a configuration file, you must list commands logically so that the system can respond
appropriately. This is one method of creating a configuration file:
Step 1 Copy an existing configuration from a switch to a server.

For more information, see the “Downloading the Configuration File By Using TFTP” section on
page B-11, the “Downloading a Configuration File By Using FTP” section on page B-13, or the
“Downloading a Configuration File By Using RCP” section on page B-17.
Step 2 Open the configuration file in a text editor, such as vi or emacs on UNIX or Notepad on a PC.
Step 3 Extract the portion of the configuration file with the desired commands, and save it in a new file.
Step 4 Copy the configuration file to the appropriate server location. For example, copy the file to the TFTP
directory on the workstation (usually /tftpboot on a UNIX workstation).
Step 5 Make sure the permissions on the file are set to world-read.
Copying Configuration Files By Using TFTP

You can configure the switch by using configuration files you create, download from another switch, or
download from a TFTP server. You can copy (upload) configuration files to a TFTP server for storage.
• Preparing to Download or Upload a Configuration File B y Using TFTP, page B-10
• Downloading the Configuration File By Using TFTP, page B-11
• Uploading the Configuration File By Using TFTP, page B-12
Preparing to Download or Upload a Configuration File B y Using TFTP

Before you begin downloading or uploading a configuration file by using TFTP, do these tasks:
• Ensure that the workstation acting as the TFTP server is properly configured. On a Sun workstation,
make sure that the /etc/inetd.conf file contains this line:
tftp dgram udp wait root /usr/etc/in.tftpd in.tftpd -p -s /tftpboot

B-10 OL-8553-06
Make sure that the /etc/services file contains this line:

tftp 69/udp
Note You must restart the inetd daemon after modifying the /etc/inetd.conf and /etc/services files.
To restart the daemon, either stop the inetd process and restart it, or enter a fastboot
command (on the SunOS 4.x) or a reboot command (on Solaris 2.x or SunOS 5.x). For more
information on the TFTP daemon, see the documentation for your workstation.
• Ensure that the switch has a route to the TFTP server. The switch and the TFTP server must be in
the same subnetwork if you do not have a router to route traffic between subnets. Check connectivity
to the TFTP server by using the ping command.
• Ensure that the configuration file to be downloaded is in the correct directory on the TFTP server
(usually /tftpboot on a UNIX workstation).
• For download operations, ensure that the permissions on the file are set correctly. The permission
on the file should be world-read.
• Before uploading the configuration file, you might need to create an empty file on the TFTP server.
To create an empty file, enter the touch filename command, where filename is the name of the file
you will use when uploading it to the server.
• During upload operations, if you are overwriting an existing file (including an empty file, if you had
to create one) on the server, ensure that the permissions on the file are set correctly. Permissions on
the file should be world-write.
Downloading the Configuration File By Using TFTP

To configure the switch by using a configuration file downloaded from a TFTP server, follow these
steps:
Step 1 Copy the configuration file to the appropriate TFTP directory on the workstation.
Step 2 Verify that the TFTP server is properly configured by referring to the “Preparing to Download or Upload
a Configuration File B y Using TFTP” section on page B-10.
Step 3 Log into the switch through the console port or a Telnet session.
Step 4 Download the configuration file from the TFTP server to configure the switch.
Specify the IP address or hostname of the TFTP server and the name of the file to download.
Use one of these privileged EXEC commands:
• copy tftp:[[[//location]/directory]/filename] system:running-config
• copy tftp:[[[//location]/directory]/filename] nvram:startup-config
The configuration file downloads, and the commands are executed as the file is parsed line-by-line.
This example shows how to configure the software from the file tokyo-confg at IP address 172.16.2.155:
Switch# copy tftp://172.16.2.155/tokyo-confg system:running-config
Configure using tokyo-confg from 172.16.2.155? [confirm] y
Booting tokyo-confg from 172.16.2.155:!!! [OK - 874/16000 bytes]

OL-8553-06 B-11
Uploading the Configuration File By Using TFTP

To upload a configuration file from a switch to a TFTP server for storage, follow these steps:
Step 1 Verify that the TFTP server is properly configured by referring to the “Preparing to Download or Upload
a Configuration File B y Using TFTP” section on page B-10.
Step 3 Upload the switch configuration to the TFTP server. Specify the IP address or hostname of the TFTP
server and the destination filename.
Use one of these privileged EXEC commands:
• copy system:running-config tftp:[[[//location]/directory]/filename]
• copy nvram:startup-config tftp:[[[//location]/directory]/filename]
The file is uploaded to the TFTP server.
This example shows how to upload a configuration file from a switch to a TFTP server:
Switch# copy system:running-config tftp://172.16.2.155/tokyo-confg
Write file tokyo-confg on host 172.16.2.155? [confirm] y
#
Writing tokyo-confg!!! [OK]
Copying Configuration Files By Using FTP

You can copy configuration files to or from an FTP server.
The FTP protocol requires a client to send a remote username and password on each FTP request to a
server. When you copy a configuration file from the switch to a server by using FTP, the Cisco IOS
software sends the first valid username in this list:
• The username specified in the copy command if a username is specified.
• The username set by the ip ftp username username global configuration command if the command
is configured.
• Anonymous.
The switch sends the first valid password in this list:
• The password specified in the copy command if a password is specified.
• The password set by the ip ftp password password global configuration command if the command
is configured.
• The switch forms a password named username@switchname.domain. The variable username is the
username associated with the current session, switchname is the configured hostname, and domain
is the domain of the switch.
The username and password must be associated with an account on the FTP server. If you are writing to
the server, the FTP server must be properly configured to accept your FTP write request.
Use the ip ftp username and ip ftp password commands to specify a username and password for all
copies. Include the username in the copy command if you want to specify only a username for that copy
operation.

B-12 OL-8553-06
If the server has a directory structure, the configuration file is written to or copied from the directory
associated with the username on the server. For example, if the configuration file resides in the home
directory of a user on the server, specify that user's name as the remote username.
For more information, see the documentation for your FTP server.
• Preparing to Download or Upload a Configuration File By Using FTP, page B-13
• Downloading a Configuration File By Using FTP, page B-13
• Uploading a Configuration File By Using FTP, page B-14
Preparing to Download or Upload a Configuration File By Using FTP

Before you begin downloading or uploading a configuration file by using FTP, do these tasks:
• Ensure that the switch has a route to the FTP server. The switch and the FTP server must be in the
same subnetwork if you do not have a router to route traffic between subnets. Check connectivity to
the FTP server by using the ping command.
• If you are accessing the switch through the console or a Telnet session and you do not have a valid
username, make sure that the current FTP username is the one that you want to use for the FTP
download. You can enter the show users privileged EXEC command to view the valid username. If
you do not want to use this username, create a new FTP username by using the ip ftp username
username global configuration command during all copy operations. The new username is stored in
NVRAM. If you are accessing the switch through a Telnet session and you have a valid username,
this username is used, and you do not need to set the FTP username. Include the username in the
copy command if you want to specify a username for only that copy operation.
• When you upload a configuration file to the FTP server, it must be properly configured to accept the
write request from the user on the switch.
Downloading a Configuration File By Using FTP

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to download a configuration file by using FTP:
Command Purpose
Step 1 Verify that the FTP server is properly configured by
referring to the “Preparing to Download or Upload a
Configuration File By Using FTP” section on page B-13.
Step 2 Log into the switch through the console port or a Telnet
session.
Step 3 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode on the switch.
This step is required only if you override the default remote
username or password (see Steps 4, 5, and 6).
Step 4 ip ftp username username (Optional) Change the default remote username.
Step 5 ip ftp password password (Optional) Change the default password.

OL-8553-06 B-13
Command Purpose
Step 7 copy Using FTP, copy the configuration file from a network
ftp:[[[//[username[:password]@]location]/directory] server to the running configuration or to the startup
/filename] system:running-config configuration file.
or
copy
ftp:[[[//[username[:password]@]location]/directory]
/filename] nvram:startup-config
This example shows how to copy a configuration file named host1-confg from the netadmin1 directory
on the remote server with an IP address of 172.16.101.101 and to load and run those commands on the
switch:
Switch# copy ftp://netadmin1:mypass@172.16.101.101/host1-confg system:running-config
Configure using host1-confg from 172.16.101.101? [confirm]
Connected to 172.16.101.101
Loading 1112 byte file host1-confg:![OK]
Switch#
%SYS-5-CONFIG: Configured from host1-config by ftp from 172.16.101.101
This example shows how to specify a remote username of netadmin1. The software copies the
configuration file host2-confg from the netadmin1 directory on the remote server with an IP address
of 172.16.101.101 to the switch startup configuration.
Switch(config)# ip ftp username netadmin1
Switch(config)# ip ftp password mypass
Switch(config)# end
Switch# copy ftp: nvram:startup-config
Address of remote host [255.255.255.255]? 172.16.101.101
Name of configuration file[rtr2-confg]? host2-confg
Configure using host2-confg from 172.16.101.101?[confirm]
[OK]
Switch#
%SYS-5-CONFIG_NV:Non-volatile store configured from host2-config by ftp from
172.16.101.101
Uploading a Configuration File By Using FTP

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to upload a configuration file by using FTP:
Command Purpose
session.

B-14 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 7 copy system:running-config Using FTP, store the switch running or startup configuration
ftp:[[[//[username[:password]@]location]/directory] file to the specified location.
/filename]
or
copy nvram:startup-config
ftp:[[[//[username[:password]@]location]/directory]
/filename]
This example shows how to copy the running configuration file named switch2-confg to the netadmin1
directory on the remote host with an IP address of 172.16.101.101:
Switch# copy system:running-config ftp://netadmin1:mypass@172.16.101.101/switch2-confg
Write file switch2-confg on host 172.16.101.101?[confirm]
Building configuration...[OK]
Switch#
This example shows how to store a startup configuration file on a server by using FTP to copy the file:
Switch(config)# ip ftp username netadmin2
Switch(config)# ip ftp password mypass
Switch(config)# end
Switch# copy nvram:startup-config ftp:
Remote host[]? 172.16.101.101
Name of configuration file to write [switch2-confg]?
![OK]
Copying Configuration Files By Using RCP

The RCP provides another method of downloading, uploading, and copying configuration files between
remote hosts and the switch. Unlike TFTP, which uses User Datagram Protocol (UDP), a connectionless
protocol, RCP uses TCP, which is connection-oriented.
To use RCP to copy files, the server from or to which you will be copying files must support RCP. The
RCP copy commands rely on the rsh server (or daemon) on the remote system. To copy files by using
RCP, you do not need to create a server for file distribution as you do with TFTP. You only need to have
access to a server that supports the remote shell (rsh). (Most UNIX systems support rsh.) Because you
are copying a file from one place to another, you must have read permission on the source file and write
permission on the destination file. If the destination file does not exist, RCP creates it for you.

OL-8553-06 B-15
The RCP requires a client to send a remote username with each RCP request to a server. When you copy
a configuration file from the switch to a server, the Cisco IOS software sends the first valid username in
this list:
• The username specified in the copy command if a username is specified.
• The username set by the ip rcmd remote-username username global configuration command if the
command is configured.
• The remote username associated with the current TTY (terminal) process. For example, if the user
is connected to the router through Telnet and was authenticated through the username command,
the switch software sends the Telnet username as the remote username.
• The switch hostname.
For a successful RCP copy request, you must define an account on the network server for the remote
username. If the server has a directory structure, the configuration file is written to or copied from the
directory associated with the remote username on the server. For example, if the configuration file is in
the home directory of a user on the server, specify that user's name as the remote username.
• Preparing to Download or Upload a Configuration File By Using RCP, page B-16
• Downloading a Configuration File By Using RCP, page B-17
• Uploading a Configuration File By Using RCP, page B-18
Preparing to Download or Upload a Configuration File By Using RCP

Before you begin downloading or uploading a configuration file by using RCP, do these tasks:
• Ensure that the workstation acting as the RCP server supports the remote shell (rsh).
• Ensure that the switch has a route to the RCP server. The switch and the server must be in the same
subnetwork if you do not have a router to route traffic between subnets. Check connectivity to the
RCP server by using the ping command.
username, make sure that the current RCP username is the one that you want to use for the RCP
you do not want to use this username, create a new RCP username by using the ip rcmd
remote-username username global configuration command to be used during all copy operations.
The new username is stored in NVRAM. If you are accessing the switch through a Telnet session
and you have a valid username, this username is used, and you do not need to set the RCP username.
Include the username in the copy command if you want to specify a username for only that copy
operation.
• When you upload a file to the RCP server, it must be properly configured to accept the RCP write
request from the user on the switch. For UNIX systems, you must add an entry to the .rhosts file for
the remote user on the RCP server. For example, suppose that the switch contains these
configuration lines:
hostname Switch1
ip rcmd remote-username User0
If the switch IP address translates to Switch1.company.com, the .rhosts file for User0 on the RCP
server should contain this line:
Switch1.company.com Switch1
For more information, see the documentation for your RCP server.

B-16 OL-8553-06
Downloading a Configuration File By Using RCP

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to download a configuration file by using RCP:
Command Purpose
Step 1 Verify that the RCP server is properly configured by
Configuration File By Using RCP” section on page B-16.
session.
username (see Steps 4 and 5).
Step 4 ip rcmd remote-username username (Optional) Specify the remote username.
Step 6 copy Using RCP, copy the configuration file from a network
rcp:[[[//[username@]location]/directory]/filename] server to the running configuration or to the startup
system:running-config configuration file.
or
copy
rcp:[[[//[username@]location]/directory]/filename]
nvram:startup-config
This example shows how to copy a configuration file named host1-confg from the netadmin1 directory
on the remote server with an IP address of 172.16.101.101 and load and run those commands on the
switch:
Switch# copy rcp://netadmin1@172.16.101.101/host1-confg system:running-config
Configure using host1-confg from 172.16.101.101? [confirm]
Switch#
%SYS-5-CONFIG: Configured from host1-config by rcp from 172.16.101.101
This example shows how to specify a remote username of netadmin1. Then it copies the configuration
file host2-confg from the netadmin1 directory on the remote server with an IP address of 172.16.101.101
to the startup configuration:
Switch(config)# ip rcmd remote-username netadmin1
Switch(config)# end
Switch# copy rcp: nvram:startup-config
Address of remote host [255.255.255.255]? 172.16.101.101
Name of configuration file[rtr2-confg]? host2-confg
Configure using host2-confg from 172.16.101.101?[confirm]
[OK]
Switch#
%SYS-5-CONFIG_NV:Non-volatile store configured from host2-config by rcp from
172.16.101.101

OL-8553-06 B-17
Uploading a Configuration File By Using RCP

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to upload a configuration file by using RCP:
Command Purpose
Configuration File By Using RCP” section on page B-16.
session.
Step 6 copy system:running-config Using RCP, copy the configuration file from a switch
rcp:[[[//[username@]location]/directory]/filename] running or startup configuration file to a network server.
or
copy nvram:startup-config
rcp:[[[//[username@]location]/directory]/filename]
This example shows how to copy the running configuration file named switch2-confg to the netadmin1
directory on the remote host with an IP address of 172.16.101.101:
Switch# copy system:running-config rcp://netadmin1@172.16.101.101/switch2-confg
Write file switch-confg on host 172.16.101.101?[confirm]
Building configuration...[OK]
Switch#
This example shows how to store a startup configuration file on a server:

Switch(config)# ip rcmd remote-username netadmin2
Switch(config)# end
Switch# copy nvram:startup-config rcp:
Remote host[]? 172.16.101.101
Name of configuration file to write [switch2-confg]?
![OK]
Clearing Configuration Information

You can clear the configuration information from the startup configuration. If you reboot the switch with
no startup configuration, the switch enters the setup program so that you can reconfigure the switch with
all new settings.

B-18 OL-8553-06
Clearing the Startup Configuration File

To clear the contents of your startup configuration, use the erase nvram: or the erase startup-config
Caution You cannot restore the startup configuration file after it has been deleted.
Deleting a Stored Configuration File

To delete a saved configuration from flash memory, use the delete flash:filename privileged EXEC
command. Depending on the setting of the file prompt global configuration command, you might be
prompted for confirmation before you delete a file. By default, the switch prompts for confirmation on
destructive file operations. For more information about the file prompt command, see the Cisco IOS
Command Reference for Release 12.2.
Caution You cannot restore a file after it has been deleted.
Replacing and Rolling Back Configurations

The configuration replacement and rollback feature replaces the running configuration with any saved
Cisco IOS configuration file. You can use the rollback function to roll back to a previous configuration.
• Understanding Configuration Replacement and Rollback, page B-19
• Configuration Guidelines, page B-21
• Configuring the Configuration Archive, page B-21
• Performing a Configuration Replacement or Rollback Operation, page B-22
Understanding Configuration Replacement and Rollback

To use the configuration replacement and rollback feature, you should understand these concepts:
• Archiving a Configuration, page B-19
• Replacing a Configuration, page B-20
• Rolling Back a Configuration, page B-20
Archiving a Configuration
The configuration archive provides a mechanism to store, organize, and manage an archive of
configuration files. The configure replace privileged EXEC command increases the configuration
rollback capability. As an alternative, you can save copies of the running configuration by using the copy
running-config destination-url privileged EXEC command, storing the replacement file either locally
or remotely. However, this method lacks any automated file management. The configuration
replacement and rollback feature can automatically save copies of the running configuration to the
configuration archive.

OL-8553-06 B-19
You use the archive config privileged EXEC command to save configurations in the configuration
archive by using a standard location and filename prefix that is automatically appended with an
incremental version number (and optional timestamp) as each consecutive file is saved. You can specify
how many versions of the running configuration are kept in the archive. After the maximum number of
files are saved, the oldest file is automatically deleted when the next, most recent file is saved. The show
archive privileged EXEC command displays information for all the configuration files saved in the
configuration archive.
The Cisco IOS configuration archive, in which the configuration files are stored and available for use
with the configure replace command, is in any of these file systems: FTP, HTTP, RCP, TFTP.
Replacing a Configuration
The configure replace privileged EXEC command replaces the running configuration with any saved
configuration file. When you enter the configure replace command, the running configuration is
compared with the specified replacement configuration, and a set of configuration differences is
generated. The resulting differences are used to replace the configuration. The configuration
replacement operation is usually completed in no more than three passes. To prevent looping behavior
no more than five passes are performed.
You can use the copy source-url running-config privileged EXEC command to copy a stored
configuration file to the running configuration. When using this command as an alternative to the
configure replace target-url privileged EXEC command, note these major differences:
• The copy source-url running-config command is a merge operation and preserves all the
commands from both the source file and the running configuration. This command does not remove
commands from the running configuration that are not present in the source file. In contrast, the
configure replace target-url command removes commands from the running configuration that are
not present in the replacement file and adds commands to the running configuration that are not
present.
• You can use a partial configuration file as the source file for the copy source-url running-config
command. You must use a complete configuration file as the replacement file for the configure
replace target-url command.
Rolling Back a Configuration
You can also use the configure replace command to roll back changes that were made since the previous
configuration was saved. Instead of basing the rollback operation on a specific set of changes that were
applied, the configuration rollback capability reverts to a specific configuration based on a saved
configuration file.
If you want the configuration rollback capability, you must first save the running configuration before
making any configuration changes. Then, after entering configuration changes, you can use that saved
configuration file to roll back the changes by using the configure replace target-url command.
You can specify any saved configuration file as the rollback configuration. You are not limited to a fixed
number of rollbacks, as is the case in some rollback models.

B-20 OL-8553-06
Follow these guidelines when configuring and performing configuration replacement and rollback:
• Make sure that the switch has free memory larger than the combined size of the two configuration
files (the running configuration and the saved replacement configuration). Otherwise, the
configuration replacement operation fails.
• Make sure that the switch also has sufficient free memory to execute the configuration replacement
or rollback configuration commands.
• Certain configuration commands, such as those pertaining to physical components of a networking
device (for example, physical interfaces), cannot be added or removed from the running
configuration.
– A configuration replacement operation cannot remove the interface interface-id command line
from the running configuration if that interface is physically present on the device.
– The interface interface-id command line cannot be added to the running configuration if no
such interface is physically present on the device.
• When using the configure replace command, you must specify a saved configuration as the
replacement configuration file for the running configuration. The replacement file must be a
complete configuration generated by a Cisco IOS device (for example, a configuration generated by
the copy running-config destination-url command).
Note If you generate the replacement configuration file externally, it must comply with the format of files
generated by Cisco IOS devices.
Configuring the Configuration Archive

Using the configure replace command with the configuration archive and with the archive config
command is optional but offers significant benefit for configuration rollback scenarios. Before using the
archive config command, you must first configure the configuration archive. Starting in privileged
EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the configuration archive:
Command Purpose
Step 2 archive Enter archive configuration mode.
Step 3 path url Specify the location and filename prefix for the files in the configuration
archive.
Step 4 maximum number (Optional) Set the maximum number of archive files of the running
configuration to be saved in the configuration archive.
number—Maximum files of the running configuration file in the configuration
archive. Valid values are from 1 to 14. The default is 10.
Note Before using this command, you must first enter the path archive
configuration command to specify the location and filename prefix for
the files in the configuration archive.

OL-8553-06 B-21
Command Purpose
Step 5 time-period minutes (Optional) Set the time increment for automatically saving an archive file of
the running configuration in the configuration archive.
minutes—Specify how often, in minutes, to automatically save an archive file
of the running configuration in the configuration archive.
Step 7 show running-config Verify the configuration.
startup-config
Performing a Configuration Replacement or Rollback Operation

Starting in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to replace the running configuration file with a
saved configuration file:
Command Purpose
Step 1 archive config (Optional) Save the running configuration file to the configuration archive.
Note Enter the path archive configuration command before using this
command.
Step 3 Make necessary changes to the running configuration.
Step 5 configure replace target-url [list] Replace the running configuration file with a saved configuration file.
[force] [time seconds] [nolock]
target-url—URL (accessible by the file system) of the saved configuration file
that is to replace the running configuration, such as the configuration file
created in Step 2 by using the archive config privileged EXEC command.
list—Display a list of the command entries applied by the software parser
during each pass of the configuration replacement operation. The total number
of passes also appears.
force— Replace the running configuration file with the specified saved
configuration file without prompting you for confirmation.
time seconds—Specify the time (in seconds) within which you must enter the
configure confirm command to confirm replacement of the running
configuration file. If you do not enter the configure confirm command within
the specified time limit, the configuration replacement operation is
automatically stopped. (In other words, the running configuration file is
restored to the configuration that existed before you entered the configure
replace command).
Note You must first enable the configuration archive before you can use the
time seconds command line option.
nolock—Disable the locking of the running configuration file that prevents

other users from changing the running configuration during a configuration
replacement operation.

B-22 OL-8553-06
Working with Software Images
Command Purpose
Step 6 configure confirm (Optional) Confirm replacement of the running configuration with a saved
configuration file.
Note Use this command only if the time seconds keyword and argument of
the configure replace command are specified.
startup-config

This section describes how to archive (download and upload) software image files, which contain the
system software, the Cisco IOS code, and the embedded device manager software.
download and upload software image files. .
You can download a switch image file from a TFTP, FTP, or RCP server to upgrade the switch software.
If you do not have access to a TFTP server, you can download a software image file directly to your PC
or workstation by using a web browser (HTTP) and then by using the device manager or Cisco Network
Assistant to upgrade your switch. For information about upgrading your switch by using a TFTP server
or a web browser (HTTP), see the release notes.
You can replace the current image with the new one or keep the current image in flash memory after a
download.
You can use the archive download-sw /allow-feature-upgrade privileged EXEC command to allow
installation of an image with a different feature set, for example, upgrading from the IP base image to
the IP services image. Beginning in this release, you can also use the boot auto-download-sw global
configuration command to specify a URL to use to get an image for automatic software upgrades.
You upload a switch image file to a TFTP, FTP, or RCP server for backup purposes. You can use this
uploaded image for future downloads to the same switch or to another of the same type.
The protocol that you use depends on which type of server you are using. The FTP and RCP transport
mechanisms provide faster performance and more reliable delivery of data than TFTP. These
improvements are possible because FTP and RCP are built on and use the TCP/IP stack, which is
connection-oriented.
• Image Location on the Switch, page B-24
• tar File Format of Images on a Server or Cisco.com, page B-24
• Copying Image Files By Using TFTP, page B-25
• Copying Image Files By Using FTP, page B-28
• Copying Image Files By Using RCP, page B-32
Note For a list of software images and the supported upgrade paths, see the release notes.

OL-8553-06 B-23
Image Location on the Switch

The Cisco IOS image is stored as a .bin file in a directory that shows the version number. A subdirectory
contains the files needed for web management. The image is stored on the system board flash memory
(flash:).
You can use the show version privileged EXEC command to see the software version that is currently
running on your switch. In the display, check the line that begins with System image file is... . It
shows the directory name in flash memory where the image is stored.
You can also use the dir filesystem: privileged EXEC command to see the directory names of other
software images that might be stored in flash memory.The archive download-sw /directory privileged
EXEC command allows you to specify a directory one time followed by a tar file or list of tar files to be
downloaded instead of specifying complete paths with each tar file.
tar File Format of Images on a Server or Cisco.com

Software images located on a server or downloaded from Cisco.com are provided in a tar file format,
which contains these files:
• An info file, which serves as a table of contents for the tar file
• One or more subdirectories containing other images and files, such as Cisco IOS images and web
management files
This example shows some of the information contained in the info file. Table B-3 provides additional
details about this information:
system_type:0x00000000:image-name
image_family:xxxx
stacking_number:x
info_end:
version_suffix:xxxx
version_directory:image-name
image_system_type_id:0x00000000
image_name:image-nameB.bin
ios_image_file_size:6398464
total_image_file_size:8133632
image_feature:IP|LAYER_3|PLUS|MIN_DRAM_MEG=128
image_family:xxxx
stacking_number:x
board_ids:0x401100c4 0x00000000 0x00000001 0x00000003 0x00000002 0x00008000 0x00008002
0x40110000
info_end:
Note Disregard the stacking_number field. It does not apply to the switch.
Table B-3 info File Description
Field Description
version_suffix Specifies the Cisco IOS image version string suffix
version_directory Specifies the directory where the Cisco IOS image and the HTML subdirectory are installed
image_name Specifies the name of the Cisco IOS image within the tar file
ios_image_file_size Specifies the Cisco IOS image size in the tar file, which is an approximate measure of how
much flash memory is required to hold just the Cisco IOS image

B-24 OL-8553-06
Table B-3 info File Description (continued)
Field Description
total_image_file_size Specifies the size of all the images (the Cisco IOS image and the web management files) in the
tar file, which is an approximate measure of how much flash memory is required to hold them
image_feature Describes the core functionality of the image
image_min_dram Specifies the minimum amount of DRAM needed to run this image
image_family Describes the family of products on which the software can be installed
Copying Image Files By Using TFTP

You can download a switch image from a TFTP server or upload the image from the switch to a TFTP
server.
You download a switch image file from a server to upgrade the switch software. You can overwrite the
current image with the new one or keep the current image after a download.
You upload a switch image file to a server for backup purposes; this uploaded image can be used for
future downloads to the same or another switch of the same type.

• Preparing to Download or Upload an Image File By Using TFTP, page B-25
• Downloading an Image File By Using TFTP, page B-26
• Uploading an Image File By Using TFTP, page B-28
Preparing to Download or Upload an Image File By Using TFTP

Before you begin downloading or uploading an image file by using TFTP, do these tasks:
• Ensure that the workstation acting as the TFTP server is properly configured. On a Sun workstation,
make sure that the /etc/inetd.conf file contains this line:
tftp dgram udp wait root /usr/etc/in.tftpd in.tftpd -p -s /tftpboot
Make sure that the /etc/services file contains this line:

tftp 69/udp
Note You must restart the inetd daemon after modifying the /etc/inetd.conf and /etc/services files.
To restart the daemon, either stop the inetd process and restart it, or enter a fastboot
command (on the SunOS 4.x) or a reboot command (on Solaris 2.x or SunOS 5.x). For more
information on the TFTP daemon, see the documentation for your workstation.

OL-8553-06 B-25
• Ensure that the switch has a route to the TFTP server. The switch and the TFTP server must be in
the same subnetwork if you do not have a router to route traffic between subnets. Check connectivity
to the TFTP server by using the ping command.
• Ensure that the image to be downloaded is in the correct directory on the TFTP server (usually
/tftpboot on a UNIX workstation).
• For download operations, ensure that the permissions on the file are set correctly. The permission
on the file should be world-read.
• Before uploading the image file, you might need to create an empty file on the TFTP server. To
create an empty file, enter the touch filename command, where filename is the name of the file you
will use when uploading the image to the server.
• During upload operations, if you are overwriting an existing file (including an empty file, if you had
to create one) on the server, ensure that the permissions on the file are set correctly. Permissions on
the file should be world-write.
Downloading an Image File By Using TFTP

You can download a new image file and replace the current image or keep the current image.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow Steps 1 through 3 to download a new image from a TFTP
server and overwrite the existing image. To keep the current image, go to Step 3.
Command Purpose
Step 1 Copy the image to the appropriate TFTP directory on the
workstation. Make sure that the TFTP server is properly
configured; see the “Preparing to Download or Upload an Image
File By Using TFTP” section on page B-25.

B-26 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 3 archive download-sw Download the image file from the TFTP server to the switch, and
/allow-feature-upgrade /overwrite /reload overwrite the current image.
tftp:[[//location]/directory]/image-name.tar
• The /allow-feature-upgrade option allows installation of an
image with a different feature set.
• The /overwrite option overwrites the software image in flash
memory with the downloaded image.
• The /reload option reloads the system after downloading the
image unless the configuration has been changed and not been
saved.
• For //location, specify the IP address of the TFTP server.
• For /directory/image-name.tar, specify the directory
(optional) and the image to download. Directory and image
names are case sensitive.
Step 4 archive download-sw /leave-old-sw /reload Download the image file from the TFTP server to the switch, and
tftp:[[//location]/directory]/image-name.tar keep the current image.
• The /leave-old-sw option keeps the old software version after
a download.
• The /reload option reloads the system after downloading the
image unless the configuration has been changed and not been
saved.
(optional) and the image to download. Directory and image
names are case sensitive.
The download algorithm verifies that the image is appropriate for the switch model and that enough
DRAM is present, or it aborts the process and reports an error. If you specify the /overwrite option, the
download algorithm removes the existing image on the flash device whether or not it is the same as the
new one, downloads the new image, and then reloads the software.
Note If the flash device has sufficient space to hold two images and you want to overwrite one of these images
with the same version, you must specify the /overwrite option.
If you specify the /leave-old-sw, the existing files are not removed. If there is not enough space to install
the new image and keep the running image, the download process stops, and an error message is
displayed.
The algorithm installs the downloaded image on the system board flash device (flash:). The image is
placed into a new directory named with the software version string, and the BOOT environment variable
is updated to point to the newly installed image.
If you kept the old image during the download process (you specified the /leave-old-sw keyword), you
can remove it by entering the delete /force /recursive filesystem:/file-url privileged EXEC command.
For filesystem, use flash: for the system board flash device. For file-url, enter the directory name of the
old image. All the files in the directory and the directory are removed.

OL-8553-06 B-27
Caution For the download and upload algorithms to operate properly, do not rename image names.
Uploading an Image File By Using TFTP

You can upload an image from the switch to a TFTP server. You can later download this image to the
switch or to another switch of the same type.
Use the upload feature only if the web management pages associated with the embedded device manager
have been installed with the existing image.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to upload an image to a TFTP server:
Command Purpose
Step 1 Make sure the TFTP server is properly configured; see the
“Preparing to Download or Upload an Image File By Using TFTP”
section on page B-25.
Step 3 archive upload-sw Upload the currently running switch image to the TFTP server.
tftp:[[//location]/directory]/image-name.tar
(optional) and the name of the software image to be uploaded.
Directory and image names are case sensitive. The
image-name.tar is the name of the software image to be stored
on the server.
The archive upload-sw privileged EXEC command builds an image file on the server by uploading
these files in order: info, the Cisco IOS image, and the web management files. After these files are
uploaded, the upload algorithm creates the tar file format.
Copying Image Files By Using FTP

You can download a switch image from an FTP server or upload the image from the switch to an FTP
server.
You upload a switch image file to a server for backup purposes. You can use this uploaded image for
future downloads to the switch or another switch of the same type.

B-28 OL-8553-06

• Preparing to Download or Upload an Image File By Using FTP, page B-29
• Downloading an Image File By Using FTP, page B-30
• Uploading an Image File By Using FTP, page B-31
Preparing to Download or Upload an Image File By Using FTP

You can copy images files to or from an FTP server.
The FTP protocol requires a client to send a remote username and password on each FTP request to a
server. When you copy an image file from the switch to a server by using FTP, the Cisco IOS software
sends the first valid username in this list:
• The username specified in the archive download-sw or archive upload-sw privileged EXEC
command if a username is specified.
• The username set by the ip ftp username username global configuration command if the command
is configured.
• Anonymous.
The switch sends the first valid password in this list:
• The password specified in the archive download-sw or archive upload-sw privileged EXEC
command if a password is specified.
• The password set by the ip ftp password password global configuration command if the command
is configured.
• The switch forms a password named username@switchname.domain. The variable username is the
username associated with the current session, switchname is the configured hostname, and domain
is the domain of the switch.
The username and password must be associated with an account on the FTP server. If you are writing to
the server, the FTP server must be properly configured to accept the FTP write request from you.
Use the ip ftp username and ip ftp password commands to specify a username and password for all
copies. Include the username in the archive download-sw or archive upload-sw privileged EXEC
command if you want to specify a username only for that operation.
If the server has a directory structure, the image file is written to or copied from the directory associated
with the username on the server. For example, if the image file resides in the home directory of a user
on the server, specify that user's name as the remote username.
Before you begin downloading or uploading an image file by using FTP, do these tasks:
• Ensure that the switch has a route to the FTP server. The switch and the FTP server must be in the
same subnetwork if you do not have a router to route traffic between subnets. Check connectivity to
the FTP server by using the ping command.
username, make sure that the current FTP username is the one that you want to use for the FTP
you do not want to use this username, create a new FTP username by using the ip ftp username
username global configuration command. This new name will be used during all archive operations.
The new username is stored in NVRAM. If you are accessing the switch through a Telnet session
and you have a valid username, this username is used, and you do not need to set the FTP username.
Include the username in the archive download-sw or archive upload-sw privileged EXEC
command if you want to specify a username for that operation only.

OL-8553-06 B-29
• When you upload an image file to the FTP server, it must be properly configured to accept the write
request from the user on the switch.
Downloading an Image File By Using FTP

You can download a new image file and overwrite the current image or keep the current image.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow Steps 1 through 7 to download a new image from an FTP
Command Purpose
Step 1 Verify that the FTP server is properly configured by referring
to the “Preparing to Download or Upload an Image File By
Using FTP” section on page B-29.
session.
Step 7 archive download-sw /allow-feature-upgrade Download the image file from the FTP server to the switch,
/overwrite /reload and overwrite the current image.
ftp:[[//username[:password]@location]/directory]
• The /allow-feature-upgrade option allows installation of
/image-name.tar
an image with a different feature set.
• The /overwrite option overwrites the software image in
flash memory with the downloaded image.
• The /reload option reloads the system after downloading
the image unless the configuration has been changed and
not been saved.
• For //username[:password], specify the username and
password; these must be associated with an account on the
FTP server. For more information, see the “Preparing to
Download or Upload an Image File By Using FTP”
• For @location, specify the IP address of the FTP server.
• For directory/image-name.tar, specify the directory
(optional) and the image to download. Directory and
image names are case sensitive.

B-30 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 8 archive download-sw /leave-old-sw /reload Download the image file from the FTP server to the switch,
ftp:[[//username[:password]@location]/directory] and keep the current image.
/image-name.tar
• The /leave-old-sw option keeps the old software version
after a download.
• The /reload option reloads the system after downloading
the image unless the configuration has been changed and
not been saved.
• For //username[:password], specify the username and
password. These must be associated with an account on
the FTP server. For more information, see the “Preparing
to Download or Upload an Image File By Using FTP”
• For directory/image-name.tar, specify the directory
download algorithm removes the existing image on the flash device, whether or not it is the same as the
If you specify the /leave-old-sw, the existing files are not removed. If there is not enough space to install
the new image and keep the running image, the download process stops, and an error message is
displayed.
The algorithm installs the downloaded image onto the system board flash device (flash:). The image is
If you kept the old image during the download process (you specified the /leave-old-sw keyword), you
old software image. All the files in the directory and the directory are removed.
Uploading an Image File By Using FTP

You can upload an image from the switch to an FTP server. You can later download this image to the
same switch or to another switch of the same type.
Use the upload feature only if the web management pages associated with the embedded device manager
have been installed with the existing image.

OL-8553-06 B-31
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to upload an image to an FTP server:
Command Purpose
session.
Step 7 archive upload-sw Upload the currently running switch image to the FTP
ftp:[[//[username[:password]@]location]/directory]/ server.
image-name.tar
• For //username:password, specify the username and
password. These must be associated with an account on
the FTP server. For more information, see the “Preparing
to Download or Upload an Image File By Using FTP”
(optional) and the name of the software image to be
uploaded. Directory and image names are case sensitive.
The image-name.tar is the name of the software image
to be stored on the server.
The archive upload-sw command builds an image file on the server by uploading these files in order:
info, the Cisco IOS image, and the web management files. After these files are uploaded, the upload
algorithm creates the tar file format.
Copying Image Files By Using RCP

You can download a switch image from an RCP server or upload the image from the switch to an RCP
server.
You upload a switch image file to a server for backup purposes. You can use this uploaded image for
future downloads to the same switch or another of the same type.

B-32 OL-8553-06

• Preparing to Download or Upload an Image File By Using RCP, page B-33
• Downloading an Image File By Using RCP, page B-34
• Uploading an Image File By Using RCP, page B-36
Preparing to Download or Upload an Image File By Using RCP

RCP provides another method of downloading and uploading image files between remote hosts and the
switch. Unlike TFTP, which uses User Datagram Protocol (UDP), a connectionless protocol, RCP uses
TCP, which is connection-oriented.
To use RCP to copy files, the server from or to which you will be copying files must support RCP. The
RCP copy commands rely on the rsh server (or daemon) on the remote system. To copy files by using
RCP, you do not need to create a server for file distribution as you do with TFTP. You only need to have
access to a server that supports the remote shell (rsh). (Most UNIX systems support rsh.) Because you
are copying a file from one place to another, you must have read permission on the source file and write
permission on the destination file. If the destination file does not exist, RCP creates it for you.
RCP requires a client to send a remote username on each RCP request to a server. When you copy an
image from the switch to a server by using RCP, the Cisco IOS software sends the first valid username
in this list:
• The username specified in the archive download-sw or archive upload-sw privileged EXEC
command if a username is specified.
• The username set by the ip rcmd remote-username username global configuration command if the
command is entered.
• The remote username associated with the current TTY (terminal) process. For example, if the user
is connected to the router through Telnet and was authenticated through the username command,
the switch software sends the Telnet username as the remote username.
• The switch hostname.
For the RCP copy request to execute successfully, an account must be defined on the network server for
the remote username. If the server has a directory structure, the image file is written to or copied from
the directory associated with the remote username on the server. For example, if the image file resides
in the home directory of a user on the server, specify that user’s name as the remote username.
Before you begin downloading or uploading an image file by using RCP, do these tasks:
• Ensure that the workstation acting as the RCP server supports the remote shell (rsh).
• Ensure that the switch has a route to the RCP server. The switch and the server must be in the same
subnetwork if you do not have a router to route traffic between subnets. Check connectivity to the
RCP server by using the ping command.
username, make sure that the current RCP username is the one that you want to use for the RCP
you do not want to use this username, create a new RCP username by using the ip rcmd
remote-username username global configuration command to be used during all archive

OL-8553-06 B-33
operations. The new username is stored in NVRAM. If you are accessing the switch through a Telnet
session and you have a valid username, this username is used, and there is no need to set the RCP
username. Include the username in the archive download-sw or archive upload-sw privileged
EXEC command if you want to specify a username only for that operation.
• When you upload an image to the RCP to the server, it must be properly configured to accept the
RCP write request from the user on the switch. For UNIX systems, you must add an entry to the
.rhosts file for the remote user on the RCP server.
For example, suppose the switch contains these configuration lines:
hostname Switch1
ip rcmd remote-username User0
If the switch IP address translates to Switch1.company.com, the .rhosts file for User0 on the RCP
server should contain this line:
Switch1.company.com Switch1
For more information, see the documentation for your RCP server.
Downloading an Image File By Using RCP

You can download a new image file and replace or keep the current image.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow Steps 1 through 6 to download a new image from an RCP
Command Purpose
referring to the “Preparing to Download or Upload an Image
File By Using RCP” section on page B-33.
session.

B-34 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 6 archive download-sw /allow-feature-upgrade Download the image file from the RCP server to the switch,
/overwrite /reload and overwrite the current image.
rcp:[[[//[username@]location]/directory]/image-na
• The /allow-feature-upgrade option allows installation
me.tar]
of an image with a different feature set.
• The /overwrite option overwrites the software image in
flash memory with the downloaded image.
• The /reload option reloads the system after
downloading the image unless the configuration has
been changed and not been saved.
• For //username, specify the username. For the RCP copy
request to execute successfully, an account must be
defined on the network server for the remote username.
For more information, see the “Preparing to Download
or Upload an Image File By Using RCP” section on
page B-33.
• For @location, specify the IP address of the RCP server.
Step 7 archive download-sw /leave-old-sw /reload Download the image file from the RCP server to the switch,
rcp:[[[//[username@]location]/directory]/image-na and keep the current image.
me.tar]
• The /leave-old-sw option keeps the old software version
after a download.
• The /reload option reloads the system after
downloading the image unless the configuration has
been changed and not been saved.
• For //username, specify the username. For the RCP copy
request to execute, an account must be defined on the
network server for the remote username. For more
information, see the “Preparing to Download or Upload
an Image File By Using RCP” section on page B-33.
• For @location, specify the IP address of the RCP server.
• For /directory]/image-name.tar, specify the directory
download algorithm removes the existing image on the flash device whether or not it is the same as the

OL-8553-06 B-35
If you specify the /leave-old-sw, the existing files are not removed. If there is not enough room to install
the new image an keep the running image, the download process stops, and an error message is
displayed.
The algorithm installs the downloaded image onto the system board flash device (flash:). The image is
If you kept the old software during the download process (you specified the /leave-old-sw keyword), you
old software image. All the files in the directory and the directory are removed.
Uploading an Image File By Using RCP

You can upload an image from the switch to an RCP server. You can later download this image to the
same switch or to another switch of the same type.
The upload feature should be used only if the web management pages associated with the embedded
device manager have been installed with the existing image.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to upload an image to an RCP server:
Command Purpose
referring to the “Preparing to Download or Upload an Image
File By Using RCP” section on page B-33.
session.

B-36 OL-8553-06
Command Purpose
Step 6 archive upload-sw Upload the currently running switch image to the RCP
rcp:[[[//[username@]location]/directory]/image-na server.
me.tar]
• For //username, specify the username; for the RCP copy
request to execute, an account must be defined on the
network server for the remote username. For more
information, see the “Preparing to Download or Upload
an Image File By Using RCP” section on page B-33.
• For @location, specify the IP address of the RCP
server.
• For /directory]/image-name.tar, specify the directory
(optional) and the name of the software image to be
uploaded. Directory and image names are case
sensitive.
• The image-name.tar is the name of software image to
be stored on the server.
The archive upload-sw privileged EXEC command builds an image file on the server by uploading
these files in order: info, the Cisco IOS image, and the web management files. After these files are
uploaded, the upload algorithm creates the tar file format.

OL-8553-06 B-37

B-38 OL-8553-06
A P P E N D I X C
Unsupported Commands in
Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE
This appendix lists some of the command-line interface (CLI) commands that appear when you enter the
question mark (?) at the Catalyst 3560 switch prompt but are not supported in this release, either because
they are not tested or because of switch hardware limitations. This is not a complete list. These
unsupported commands are listed by software feature and command mode:
• Access Control Lists, page C-2
• Archive Commands, page C-2
• Boot Loader Commands, page C-3
• Embedded Event Manager, page C-3
• Debug Commands, page C-4
• FallBack Bridging, page C-4
• High Availability, page C-6
• HSRP, page C-6
• IGMP Snooping Commands, page C-6
• Interface Commands, page C-7
• IP Multicast Routing, page C-7
• IP SLA, page C-8
• IP Unicast Routing, page C-9
• IPv6, page C-11
• Layer 3, page C-11
• MAC Address Commands, page C-13
• Miscellaneous, page C-14
• MSDP, page C-14
• Multicast, page C-15
• NetFlow Commands, page C-15
• Network Address Translation (NAT) Commands, page C-15
• QoS, page C-16
• RADIUS, page C-16

OL-8553-06 C-1
Appendix C Unsupported Commands in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SE
Access Control Lists
• SNMP, page C-16

• SNMPv3, page C-17
• Spanning Tree, page C-17
• VLAN, page C-17
• VTP, page C-17
Access Control Lists
Unsupported Privileged EXEC Commands

access-enable [host] [timeout minutes]
access-template [access-list-number | name] [dynamic-name] [source] [destination] [timeout minutes]
clear access-template [access-list-number | name] [dynamic-name] [source] [destination].
show access-lists rate-limit [destination]
show accounting
show ip accounting [checkpoint] [output-packets | access violations]
show ip cache [prefix-mask] [type number]
Unsupported Global Configuration Commands

access-list rate-limit acl-index {precedence | mask prec-mask}
access-list dynamic extended
Unsupported Route-Map Configuration Commands

match ip address prefix-list prefix-list-name [prefix-list-name...]
Archive Commands

archive config
logging persistent
show archive config
show archive log

C-2 OL-8553-06
ARP Commands
ARP Commands

arp ip-address hardware-address smds
arp ip-address hardware-address srp-a
arp ip-address hardware-address srp-b
Unsupported Interface Configuration Commands

arp probe
ip probe proxy
Boot Loader Commands

boot buffersize
Embedded Event Manager

event manager update user policy [policy-filename | group [group name expression] ] | repository [url
location]
Parameters are not supported for this command:
event manager run [policy name] |<paramater1>|... <paramater15>|

no event manager directory user repository [url location ]
event manager applet [applet-name] maxrun

OL-8553-06 C-3
Debug Commands
Unsupported Commands in Applet Configuration Mode

no event interface name [interface-name ] parameter [counter-name] entry-val [entry counter value]
entry-op {gt|ge|eq|ne|lt|le} [entry-type {increment | rate | value] [exit-val [exit value] exit-op
{gt|ge|eq|ne|lt|le} exit-type { increment | rate | value}][average-factor <average-factor-value>]
no trigger
tag
Debug Commands

debug platform cli-redirection main
debug platform configuration
FallBack Bridging

clear bridge [bridge-group] multicast [router-ports | groups | counts] [group-address] [interface-unit]
[counts]
clear vlan statistics
show bridge [bridge-group] circuit-group [circuit-group] [src-mac-address] [dst-mac-address]
show bridge [bridge-group] multicast [router-ports | groups] [group-address]
show bridge vlan
show interfaces crb
show interfaces {ethernet | fastethernet} [interface | slot/port] irb
show subscriber-policy range

bridge bridge-group acquire
bridge bridge-group address mac-address {forward | discard} [interface-id]
bridge bridge-group aging-time seconds
bridge bridge-group bitswap_l3_addresses
bridge bridge-group bridge ip
bridge bridge-group circuit-group circuit-group pause milliseconds
bridge bridge-group circuit-group circuit-group source-based

C-4 OL-8553-06
FallBack Bridging
bridge cmf
bridge crb
bridge bridge-group domain domain-name
bridge irb
bridge bridge-group mac-address-table limit number
bridge bridge-group multicast-source
bridge bridge-group protocol dec
bridge bridge-group route protocol
bridge bridge-group subscriber policy policy
subscriber-policy policy [|no | default] packet [permit | deny]]

bridge-group bridge-group cbus-bridging
bridge-group bridge-group circuit-group circuit-number
bridge-group bridge-group input-address-list access-list-number
bridge-group bridge-group input-lat-service-deny group-list
bridge-group bridge-group input-lat-service-permit group-list
bridge-group bridge-group input-lsap-list access-list-number
bridge-group bridge-group input-pattern-list access-list-number
bridge-group bridge-group input-type-list access-list-number
bridge-group bridge-group lat-compression
bridge-group bridge-group output-address-list access-list-number
bridge-group bridge-group output-lat-service-deny group-list
bridge-group bridge-group output-lat-service-permit group-list
bridge-group bridge-group output-lsap-list access-list-number
bridge-group bridge-group output-pattern-list access-list-number
bridge-group bridge-group output-type-list access-list-number
bridge-group bridge-group sse
bridge-group bridge-group subscriber-loop-control
bridge-group bridge-group subscriber-trunk
bridge bridge-group lat-service-filtering
frame-relay map bridge dlci broadcast
interface bvi bridge-group
x25 map bridge x.121-address broadcast [options-keywords]

OL-8553-06 C-5
High Availability
High Availability
Unsupported SSO-Aware HSRP Commands

All
HSRP

interface Async
interface BVI
interface Dialer
interface Group-Async
interface Lex
interface Multilink
interface Virtual-Template
interface Virtual-Tokenring

mtu
standby mac-refresh seconds
standby use-bia
IGMP Snooping Commands

ip igmp snooping tcn

C-6 OL-8553-06
Interface Commands
Interface Commands

show interfaces [interface-id | vlan vlan-id] [crb | fair-queue | irb | mac-accounting | precedence | irb
| random-detect | rate-limit | shape]

interface tunnel

transmit-interface type number
IP Multicast Routing

clear ip rtp header-compression [type number]
The debug ip packet command displays packets received by the switch CPU. It does not display packets
that are hardware-switched.
The debug ip mcache command affects packets received by the switch CPU. It does not display packets
that are hardware-switched.
The debug ip mpacket [detail] [access-list-number [group-name-or-address] command affects only
packets received by the switch CPU. Because most multicast packets are hardware-switched, use this
command only when you know that the route will forward the packet to the CPU.
debug ip pim atm
show frame-relay ip rtp header-compression [interface type number]
The show ip mcache command displays entries in the cache for those packets that are sent to the switch
CPU. Because most multicast packets are switched in hardware without CPU involvement, you can use
this command, but multicast packet information is not displayed.
The show ip mpacket commands are supported but are only useful for packets received at the switch
CPU. If the route is hardware-switched, the command has no effect because the CPU does not receive
the packet and cannot display it.
show ip pim vc [group-address | name] [type number]
show ip rtp header-compression [type number] [detail]

OL-8553-06 C-7
IP SLA

ip multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name]
ip pim accept-rp {address | auto-rp} [group-access-list-number]
ip pim message-interval seconds

frame-relay ip rtp header-compression [active | passive]
frame-relay map ip ip-address dlci [broadcast] compress
frame-relay map ip ip-address dlci rtp header-compression [active | passive]
ip igmp helper-address ip-address
ip multicast helper-map {group-address | broadcast} {broadcast-address | multicast-address}
extended-access-list-number
ip multicast rate-limit {in | out} [video | whiteboard] [group-list access-list] [source-list access-list]
kbps
ip multicast ttl-threshold ttl-value (instead, use the ip multicast boundary access-list-number
interface configuration command)
ip multicast use-functional
ip pim minimum-vc-rate pps
ip pim multipoint-signalling
ip pim nbma-mode
ip pim vc-count number
ip rtp compression-connections number
ip rtp header-compression [passive]
IP SLA
Unsupported MPLS Health Monitor Commands

All
Unsupported Ethernet Gatekeeper Registration Commands

All
Unsupported VoIP Call Setup Probe Commands

All

C-8 OL-8553-06
IP Unicast Routing
IP Unicast Routing
Unsupported Privileged EXEC or User EXEC Commands

clear ip accounting [checkpoint]
clear ip bgp address flap-statistics
clear ip bgp prefix-list
debug ip cef stats
show cef [drop | not-cef-switched]
show ip accounting [checkpoint] [output-packets | access-violations]
show ip bgp dampened-paths
show ip bgp inconsistent-as
show ip bgp regexp regular expression
show ip prefix-list regular expression

ip accounting precedence {input | output}
ip accounting-list ip-address wildcard
ip as-path access-list
ip accounting-transits count
ip cef traffic-statistics [load-interval seconds] [update-rate seconds]]
ip flow-aggregation
ip flow-cache
ip flow-export
ip gratuitous-arps
ip local
ip prefix-list
ip reflexive-list
router egp
router-isis
router iso-igrp
router mobile
router odr
router static

OL-8553-06 C-9
IP Unicast Routing

ip accounting
ip load-sharing [per-packet]
ip mtu bytes
ip ospf dead-interval minimal hello-multiplier multiplier
ip verify
ip unnumbered type number
All ip security commands
Unsupported BGP Router Configuration Commands

address-family vpnv4
default-information originate
neighbor advertise-map
neighbor allowas-in
neighbor default-originate
neighbor description
network backdoor
table-map
Unsupported VPN Configuration Commands

All
Unsupported Route Map Commands

match route-type for policy-based routing (PBR)
set as-path {tag | prepend as-path-string}
set automatic-tag
set dampening half-life reuse suppress max-suppress-time
set default interface interface-id [interface-id.....]
set interface interface-id [interface-id.....]
set ip default next-hop ip-address [ip-address.....]
set ip destination ip-address mask
set ip next-hop verify-availability
set ip precedence value
set ip qos-group
set metric-type internal

C-10 OL-8553-06
IPv6
set origin
set metric-type internal
set tag tag-value
IPv6
IPv4-v6 Tunneling Commands

All
Layer 3
BGP
All commands for these features:
• BGP Support for Dual AS Configuration for Network AS Migrations
• BGP Support for IP Prefix Import from Global Table into a VRF Table
• BGP Support for Named Extended Community Lists
• BGP Support for Sequenced Entries in Extended Community Lists
• BGP Support for TTL Security Check
• BGP Route-Map Policy List Support
• BGP Next Hop Propagation
• BGP Policy Accounting
• BGP Policy Accounting output interface accounting
• BGP Link Bandwidth
• BGP Hybrid CLI Support
• BGP Cost Community
• BGP Dynamic Update Peer-Groups
• BGP Conditional Route Injection
• BGP Configuration Using Peer Templates
• BGP Increased Support of Numbered as-path Access Lists to 500
Other Unsupported BGP Commands

address-family l2vpn
address-family vpnv4
bgp-policyclear bgp nsapaddress-family nsap

OL-8553-06 C-11
Layer 3
clear bgp nsap dampening

clear bgp nsap external
clear bgp nsap flap-statistics
clear bgp nsap peer-group
clear ip bgp ipv6
clear ip bgp l2vpn
clear ip bgp vpnv4
clear ip bgp vpnv6
ha-mode graceful-restartip extcommunity-list redistribute (BGP to ISO IS-IS)
ip policy-listredistribute (ISO IS-IS to BGP)
match extcommunity
neighbor ha-mode graceful-restart
neighbor sooredistribute dvmrp
neighbor ttl-securityset extcommunity
set extcommunity cost
show bgp nsap
show bgp nsap community
show bgp nsap community-list
show bgp nsap dampening
show bgp nsap dampened-paths
show bgp nsap filter-list
show bgp nsap flap-statistics
show bgp nsap inconsistent-as
show bgp nsap neighbors
show bgp nsap paths
show bgp nsap quote-regexp
show bgp nsap regexp
show bgp nsap summary
show ip bgp ipv4 multicast
show ip bgp ipv4 multicast summary
show ip bgp l2vpn
show ip bgp vpnv4
show ip extcommunity-list
show ip policy-list
OSPF
area sham-link

C-12 OL-8553-06
MAC Address Commands
ignore lsa mospf

nsf ietf
nsf ietf helper disable
nsf ietf helper strict-lsa-checking
show ip ospf sham-links
VRF aware AAA

All
MAC Address Commands

show mac-address-table
show mac-address-table address
show mac-address-table aging-time
show mac-address-table count
show mac-address-table dynamic
show mac-address-table interface
show mac-address-table multicast
show mac-address-table notification
show mac-address-table static
show mac-address-table vlan
show mac address-table multicast
Note Use the show ip igmp snooping groups privileged EXEC command to display Layer 2 multicast
address-table entries for a VLAN.

mac-address-table aging-time
mac-address-table notification
mac-address-table static

OL-8553-06 C-13
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous
Unsupported User EXEC Commands

verify

file verify auto
remote command
show cable-diagnostics prbs
test cable-diagnostics prbs

errdisable recovery cause unicast flood
l2protocol-tunnel global drop-threshold
memory reserve critical
service compress-config
track object-number rtr
stack-mac persistent timer
MSDP

show access-expression
show exception
show location
show pm LINE
show smf [interface-id]
show subscriber-policy [policy-number]
show template [template-name]

ip msdp default-peer ip-address | name [prefix-list list] (Because BGP/MBGP is not supported, use the
ip msdp peer command instead of this command.)

C-14 OL-8553-06
Multicast
Multicast
Unsupported BiDirectional PIM Commands

All
Unsupported Multicast Routing Manager Commands

All
Unsupported IP Multicast Rate Limiting Commands

All
Unsupported UDLR Commands

All
Unsupported Multicast Over GRE Commands

All
NetFlow Commands

ip flow-aggregation cache
ip flow-cache entries
ip flow-export
Network Address Translation (NAT) Commands

show ip nat statistics
show ip nat translations

OL-8553-06 C-15
QoS
QoS
Unsupported Global Configuration Command

priority-list

priority-group
rate-limit
Unsupported Policy-Map Configuration Command

class class-default where class-default is the class-map-name.
RADIUS

aaa nas port extended
aaa authentication feature default enable
aaa authentication feature default line
aaa nas port extended
radius-server attribute nas-port
radius-server configure
radius-server extended-portnames
SNMP

snmp-server enable informs
snmp-server ifindex persist

C-16 OL-8553-06
SNMPv3
SNMPv3
Unsupported 3DES Encryption Commands

All
Spanning Tree

spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short}
Unsupported Interface Configuration Command

spanning-tree stack-port
VLAN

vlan internal allocation policy {ascending | descending}
Unsupported User EXEC Commands

show running-config vlan
show vlan ifindex
VTP

vtp {password password | pruning | version number}
Note This command has been replaced by the vtp global configuration command.

OL-8553-06 C-17
VTP

C-18 OL-8553-06
INDEX
ACEs
A
and QoS 7
AAA down policy, NAC Layer 2 IP validation 10 defined 2
abbreviating commands 4 Ethernet 2
ABRs 24 IP 2
AC (command switch) 10 ACLs
access-class command 19 ACEs 2
access control entries any keyword 12
See ACEs applying
access control entry (ACE) 3 on bridged packets 38
access-denied response, VMPS 28 on multicast packets 40
access groups on routed packets 39
applying IPv4 ACLs to interfaces 20 on switched packets 38
Layer 2 20 time ranges to 16
Layer 3 20 to an interface 19, 8
accessing to IPv6 interfaces 8
clusters, switch 13 to QoS 7
command switches 11 classifying traffic for QoS 43
member switches 13 comments in 18
switch clusters 13 compiling 22
access lists defined 1, 7
See ACLs examples of 22, 43
access ports extended IP, configuring for QoS classification 44
and Layer 2 protocol tunneling 11 extended IPv4
defined 3 creating 10
in switch clusters 9 matching criteria 7
access template 1 hardware and software handling 21
accounting host keyword 12
with 802.1x 45
with IEEE 802.1x 12
with RADIUS 28
with TACACS+ 11, 17

OL-8553-06 IN-1
Index
ACLs (continued) ACLs (continued)

IP resequencing entries 14
creating 7 router 2
fragments and QoS guidelines 33 router ACLs and VLAN map configuration
guidelines 37
implicit deny 9, 13, 15
standard IP, configuring for QoS classification 43
implicit masks 9
standard IPv4
matching criteria 7
creating 9
undefined 20
matching criteria 7
IPv4
support for 9
applying to interfaces 19
support in hardware 21
creating 7
time ranges 16
matching criteria 7
named 14
types supported 2
numbers 8
unsupported features, IPv4 6
terminal lines, setting on 18

unsupported features, IPv6 3
unsupported features 6
using router ACLs with VLAN maps 36
IPv6 VLAN maps
configuration guidelines 30
configuring 3, 4
configuring 29
displaying 9
active link 4, 5, 6
interactions with other features 4

active links 2
limitations 3
active router 1
matching criteria 3
active traffic monitoring, IP SLAs 1
named 3
address aliasing 2
precedence of 2
addresses
supported 2
displaying the MAC address table 27
unsupported features 3
dynamic
accelerated aging 8
Layer 4 information in 37
changing the aging time 21
logging messages 8
default aging 8
MAC extended 27, 45
defined 19
matching 7, 20, 3
learning 20
monitoring 40, 9
removing 22
named, IPv4 14
IPv6 2
named, IPv6 3
names 4
MAC, discovering 28
number per QoS class map 33

multicast
port 2
group address range 3
precedence of 2
STP address management 8
QoS 7, 43

IN-2 OL-8553-06
Index
addresses (continued) area routing

static IS-IS 61
adding and removing 24 ISO IGRP 61
defined 19 ARP
address resolution 28, 8 configuring 9
Address Resolution Protocol defined 5, 28, 8
See ARP encapsulation 9
adjacency tables, with CEF 87 static cache configuration 9
administrative distances table
defined 99 address resolution 28
OSPF 30 managing 28
routing protocol defaults 89 ASBRs 24
advertisements AS-path filters, BGP 51
CDP 1 asymmetrical links, and IEEE 802.1Q tunneling 4
LLDP 1, 2 attributes, RADIUS
RIP 19 vendor-proprietary 31
VTP 19, 3 vendor-specific 29
aggregatable global unicast addresses 3 attribute-value pairs 11, 13, 17, 26
aggregate addresses, BGP 57 authentication
aggregated ports EIGRP 38
See EtherChannel HSRP 10
aggregate policers 58 local mode with AAA 36
aggregate policing 11 NTP associations 4
aging, accelerating 8 open1x 25
aging time RADIUS
accelerated key 21
for MSTP 23 login 23
for STP 8, 21 TACACS+
MAC address table 21 defined 11
maximum key 13
for MSTP 23, 24 login 14
for STP 21, 22 See also port-based authentication
alarms, RMON 3 authentication compatibility with Catalyst 6000
switches 8
allowed-VLAN list 21
application engines, redirecting traffic to 1
authentication failed VLAN
area border routers See restricted VLAN
See ABRs authentication keys, and routing protocols 99

OL-8553-06 IN-3
Index
authentication manager Auto Smartports macros

CLI commands 8 built-in macros 2, 4
compatibility with older 802.1x CLI commands 8 to 9 configuration guidelines 3
overview 7 default configuration 2
authoritative time source, described 2 defined 1
authorization displaying 14
with RADIUS 27 enabling 3
with TACACS+ 11, 16 event triggers 6
authorized ports with IEEE 802.1x 9 IOS shell 1, 9
autoconfiguration 3 mapping 4
auto enablement 26 user-defined macros 9
automatic discovery autostate exclude 5
considerations Auto Smartports macros
beyond a noncandidate device 7 See also Smartports macros
brand new switches 9 auxiliary VLAN
connectivity 4 See voice VLAN
different VLANs 6 availability, features 7
management VLANs 7
non-CDP-capable devices 6
B
noncluster-capable devices 6
routed ports 8 BackboneFast
in switch clusters 4 described 5
See also CDP disabling 14
automatic QoS enabling 13
See QoS support for 7
automatic recovery, clusters 10 backup interfaces
See also HSRP See Flex Links
auto-MDIX backup links 2
configuring 21 backup static routing, configuring 12
described 21 banners
autonegotiation configuring
duplex mode 3 login 18
interface configuration guidelines 18 message-of-the-day login 18
mismatches 11 default configuration 17
autonomous system boundary routers when displayed 17
See ASBRs Berkeley r-tools replacement 48
autonomous systems, in BGP 45
Auto-RP, described 6
autosensing, port speed 3

IN-4 OL-8553-06
Index
BGP Boolean expressions in tracked lists 4

aggregate addresses 57 booting
aggregate routes, configuring 57 boot loader, function of 2
CIDR 57 boot process 2
clear commands 60 manually 17
community filtering 54 specific image 18
configuring neighbors 55 boot loader
default configuration 43 accessing 18
described 42 described 2
enabling 45 environment variables 18
monitoring 60 prompt 18
multipath support 49 trap-door mechanism 2
neighbors, types of 45 bootstrap router (BSR), described 7
path selection 49 Border Gateway Protocol
peers, configuring 55 See BGP
prefix filtering 53 BPDU
resetting sessions 47 error-disabled state 2
route dampening 59 filtering 3
route maps 51 RSTP format 12
route reflectors 58 BPDU filtering
routing domain confederation 58 described 3
routing session with multi-VRF CE 81 disabling 12
show commands 60 enabling 12
supernets 57 support for 7
support for 12 BPDU guard
Version 4 42 described 2
binding cluster group and HSRP group 12 disabling 12
binding database enabling 11
address, DHCP server support for 7
See DHCP, Cisco IOS server database bridged packets, ACLs on 38
DHCP snooping bridge groups
See DHCP snooping binding database See fallback bridging
bindings bridge protocol data unit
address, Cisco IOS DHCP server 6 See BPDU
DHCP snooping database 6 broadcast flooding 16
IP source guard 15 broadcast packets
binding table, DHCP snooping directed 13
See DHCP snooping binding database flooded 13
blocking packets 7

OL-8553-06 IN-5
Index
broadcast storm-control command 4 CGMP

broadcast storms 1, 13 as IGMP snooping learning method 8
clearing cached group entries 60
enabling server support 43
C
joining multicast group 3
cables, monitoring for unidirectional links 1 overview 9
candidate switch server support only 9
automatic discovery 4 switch support of 4
defined 3 CIDR 57
requirements 3 CipherSuites 44
See also command switch, cluster standby group, and Cisco 7960 IP Phone 1
member switch Cisco Discovery Protocol
Catalyst 6000 switches See CDP
authentication compatibility 8 Cisco Express Forwarding
CA trustpoint See CEF
configuring 45 Cisco Group Management Protocol
defined 43 See CGMP
CDP Cisco intelligent power management 7
and trusted boundary 39 Cisco IOS DHCP server
automatic discovery in switch clusters 4 See DHCP, Cisco IOS DHCP server
configuring 2 Cisco IOS File System
default configuration 2 See IFS
defined with LLDP 1 Cisco IOS IP SLAs 1
described 1 Cisco Secure ACS
disabling for routing device 3 to 4 attribute-value pairs for downloadable ACLs 17
enabling and disabling attribute-value pairs for redirect URL 17
on an interface 4 Cisco Secure ACS configuration guide 57
on a switch 3 CiscoWorks 2000 5, 4
Layer 2 protocol tunneling 8 CISP 25
monitoring 4 CIST regional root
overview 1 See MSTP
power negotiation extensions 7 CIST root
support for 5 See MSTP
transmission timer and holdtime, setting 2 civic location 3
updates 2 classless interdomain routing
CEF See CIDR
defined 86 classless routing 6
enabling 87
IPv6 18

IN-6 OL-8553-06
Index
class maps for QoS clusters, switch (continued)

configuring 46 compatibility 4
displaying 78 LRE profile considerations 14
class of service managing
See CoS through CLI 15
clearing interfaces 30 through SNMP 15
CLI planning 4
abbreviating commands 4 planning considerations
command modes 1 automatic discovery 4
configuration logging 5 automatic recovery 10
described 5 CLI 15
editing features host names 13
enabling and disabling 7 IP addresses 13
keystroke editing 7 LRE profiles 14
wrapped lines 9 passwords 13
error messages 5 RADIUS 14
filtering command output 10 SNMP 14, 15
getting help 3 TACACS+ 14
history See also candidate switch, command switch, cluster
changing the buffer size 6
standby group, member switch, and standby command
switch
described 6
cluster standby group
disabling 7
and HSRP group 12
recalling commands 6
automatic recovery 12
managing clusters 15
considerations 11
no and default forms of commands 4
defined 2
Client Information Signalling Protocol
requirements 3
See CISP
virtual IP address 11
client mode, VTP 3
See also HSRP
client processes, tracking 1
CNS 5
CLNS
Configuration Engine
See ISO CLNS
configID, deviceID, hostname 3
clock
configuration service 2
See system clock
described 1
clusters, switch
event service 3
accessing 13
automatic discovery 4
automatic recovery 10
benefits 2

OL-8553-06 IN-7
Index
CNS (continued) community strings

embedded agents configuring 14, 8
described 5 for cluster switches 4
enabling automated configuration 6 in clusters 14
enabling configuration agent 9 overview 4
enabling event agent 7 SNMP 14
management functions 5 community VLANs 2, 3
Coarse Wave Division Multiplexer compatibility, feature 12
See CWDM SFPs config.text 16
command-line interface configurable leave timer, IGMP 6
See CLI configuration, initial
command modes 1 defaults 14
commands Express Setup 2
abbreviating 4 configuration changes, logging 10
no and default 4 configuration conflicts, recovering from lost member
connectivity 11
commands, setting privilege levels 8
command switch configuration examples, network 17
accessing 11
configuration files
active (AC) 10
archiving 19
configuration conflicts 11
clearing the startup configuration 19
defined 2
creating using a text editor 10
passive (PC) 10
default name 16
password privilege levels 15

deleting a stored configuration 19
priority 10
described 8
recovery downloading
from command-switch failure 10, 7

automatically 16
from lost member connectivity 11

preparing 10, 13, 16
reasons for 8
redundant 10
using FTP 13
replacing
using RCP 17
with another switch 10
using TFTP 11
with cluster member 8
guidelines for creating and using 9
requirements 3
guidelines for replacing and rolling back 21
standby (SC) 10
invalid combinations when copying 5
See also candidate switch, cluster standby group,
member switch, and standby command switch limiting TFTP server access 16
community list, BGP 54 obtaining with DHCP 8
community ports 2 password recovery disable considerations 5
replacing a running configuration 19, 20
rolling back a running configuration 19, 20

IN-8 OL-8553-06
Index
configuration files (continued) critical authentication, IEEE 802.1x 49

specifying the filename 16 cryptographic software image
system contact and location information 16 Kerberos 32
types and location 10 SSH 37
uploading SSL 42
preparing 10, 13, 16 customer edge devices 72
reasons for 9 CWDM SFPs 23
using FTP 14
using RCP 18
D
using TFTP 12
configuration guidelines, multi-VRF CE 74 DACL
configuration logger 10 See downloadable ACL
configuration logging 5 daylight saving time 13
configuration replacement 19 debugging
configuration rollback 19 enabling all system diagnostics 20
configuration settings, saving 15 enabling for a specific feature 19
configure terminal command 11 redirecting error message output 20
configuring port-based authentication violation modes 36 using commands 19
configuring small-frame arrival rate 5 default commands 4
config-vlan mode 2, 7 default configuration
conflicts, configuration 11 802.1x 30
connections, secure remote 38 auto-QoS 20
connectivity problems 13, 15, 16 banners 17
consistency checks in VTP Version 2 4 BGP 43
console port, connecting to 10 booting 16
content-routing technology CDP 2
See WCCP DHCP 8
control protocol, IP SLAs 4 DHCP option 82 8
corrupted software, recovery steps with Xmodem 2 DHCP snooping 8
CoS DHCP snooping binding database 8
in Layer 2 frames 2 DNS 16
override priority 6 dynamic ARP inspection 5
trust priority 6 EIGRP 34
CoS input queue threshold map for QoS 16 EtherChannel 9
CoS output queue threshold map for QoS 18 Ethernet interfaces 15
CoS-to-DSCP map for QoS 60 fallback bridging 3
counters, clearing interface 30 Flex Links 8
CPU utilization, troubleshooting 24 HSRP 5
crashinfo file 23 IEEE 802.1Q tunneling 4

OL-8553-06 IN-9
Index
default configuration (continued) default configuration (continued)

IGMP 38 TACACS+ 13
IGMP filtering 24 UDLD 4
IGMP snooping 7, 5, 6 VLAN, Layer 2 Ethernet interfaces 19
IGMP throttling 24 VLANs 8
initial switch information 3 VMPS 29
IP addressing, IP routing 4 voice VLAN 3
IP multicast routing 10 VTP 6
IP SLAs 6 WCCP 5
IP source guard 16 default gateway 14, 11
IPv6 10 default networks 89
IS-IS 63 default router preference
Layer 2 interfaces 15 See DRP
Layer 2 protocol tunneling 11 default routes 89
LLDP 4 default routing 2
MAC address table 21 deleting VLANs 10
MAC address-table move update 8 denial-of-service attack 1
MSDP 4 description command 24
MSTP 14 designing your network, examples 17
multi-VRF CE 74 destination addresses
MVR 19 in IPv4 ACLs 11
NTP 4 in IPv6 ACLs 5, 6
optional spanning-tree configuration 9 destination-IP address-based forwarding, EtherChannel 7
OSPF 25 destination-MAC address forwarding, EtherChannel 7
password and privilege level 2 detecting indirect link failures, STP 5
PIM 10 device 23
private VLANs 6 device discovery protocol 1
RADIUS 20 device manager
RIP 19 benefits 2
RMON 3 described 2, 4
RSPAN 9 in-band management 6
SDM template 3 upgrading a switch 23
SNMP 6 DHCP
SPAN 9 Cisco IOS server database
SSL 45 configuring 14
standard QoS 30 default configuration 8
STP 11 described 6
system message logging 3 DHCP for IPv6
system name and prompt 15 See DHCPv6

IN-10 OL-8553-06
Index
DHCP (continued) DHCP option 82 (continued)

enabling packet format, suboption
relay agent 10 circuit ID 5
server 10 remote ID 5
DHCP-based autoconfiguration remote ID suboption 5
client request message exchange 4 DHCP server port-based address allocation
configuring configuration guidelines 20
client side 3 default configuration 19
DNS 7 described 19
relay device 8 displaying 22
server side 6 enabling 20
server-side 10 DHCP server port-based address assignment
TFTP server 7 support for 5
example 9 DHCP snooping
lease options accepting untrusted packets form edge switch 3, 12
for IP address information 6 and private VLANs 13
for receiving the configuration file 6 binding database
overview 3 See DHCP snooping binding database
relationship to BOOTP 4 configuration guidelines 9
relay support 5, 12 default configuration 8
support for 5 displaying binding tables 15
DHCP-based autoconfiguration and image update message exchange process 4
configuring 11 to 13 option 82 data insertion 3
understanding 5 trusted interface 2
DHCP binding database untrusted interface 2
See DHCP snooping binding database untrusted messages 2
DHCP binding table DHCP snooping binding database
See DHCP snooping binding database adding bindings 14
DHCP object tracking, configuring primary interface 11 binding file
DHCP option 82 format 7
circuit ID suboption 5 location 6
configuration guidelines 9 bindings 6
default configuration 8 clearing agent statistics 15
displaying 15 configuration guidelines 9
forwarding address, specifying 10 configuring 14
helper address 10 default configuration 8
overview 3

OL-8553-06 IN-11
Index
DHCP snooping binding database (continued) DNS

deleting and DHCP-based autoconfiguration 7
binding file 14 default configuration 16
bindings 15 displaying the configuration 17
database agent 14 in IPv6 4
described 6 overview 15
displaying 15 setting up 16
binding entries 15 support for 5
status and statistics 15 DNS-based SSM mapping 18, 20
enabling 14 domain names
entry 6 DNS 15
renewing database 15 VTP 8
resetting Domain Name System
delay value 14 See DNS
timeout value 14 domains, ISO IGRP routing 62
DHCP snooping binding table dot1q-tunnel switchport mode 18
See DHCP snooping binding database double-tagged packets
DHCPv6 IEEE 802.1Q tunneling 2
configuration guidelines 14 Layer 2 protocol tunneling 10
default configuration 14 downloadable ACL 16, 17, 57
described 6 downloading
enabling client function 17 configuration files
enabling DHCPv6 server function 15 preparing 10, 13, 16
support for 12 reasons for 8
Differentiated Services architecture, QoS 2 using FTP 13
Differentiated Services Code Point 2 using RCP 17
Diffusing Update Algorithm (DUAL) 33 using TFTP 11
directed unicast requests 5 image files
directories deleting old image 27
changing 4 preparing 25, 29, 33
creating and removing 4 reasons for 23
displaying the working 4 using CMS 2
discovery, clusters using FTP 30
See automatic discovery using HTTP 2, 23
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol using RCP 34
See DVMRP using TFTP 26
distance-vector protocols 3 using the device manager or Network
Assistant 23
distribute-list command 98
drop threshold for Layer 2 protocol packets 11

IN-12 OL-8553-06
Index
DRP DVMRP (continued)

configuring 12 overview 8
described 4 routes
IPv6 4 adding a metric offset 59
support for 12 advertising all 59
DSCP 11, 2 advertising the default route to neighbors 51
DSCP input queue threshold map for QoS 16 caching DVMRP routes learned in report
messages 53
DSCP output queue threshold map for QoS 18
changing the threshold for syslog messages 56
DSCP-to-CoS map for QoS 64
deleting 60
DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map for QoS 65
displaying 61
DSCP transparency 40
favoring one over another 59
DTP 8, 17
dual-action detection 5
limiting the number injected into MBONE 56
DUAL finite state machine, EIGRP 34

limiting unicast route advertisements 48
dual IPv4 and IPv6 templates 2, 5, 6

routing table 9
dual protocol stacks source distribution tree, building 9
IPv4 and IPv6 6

support for 12
SDM templates supporting 6

tunnels
dual-purpose uplinks configuring 50
defined 6
displaying neighbor information 52
LEDs 6
dynamic access ports
link selection 6, 16
characteristics 3
setting the type 16

configuring 30
DVMRP defined 3
autosummarization dynamic addresses
configuring a summary address 57

See addresses
disabling 59
dynamic ARP inspection
ARP cache poisoning 1
connecting PIM domain to DVMRP router 50
ARP requests, described 1
enabling unicast routing 53
ARP spoofing attack 1
interoperability
clearing
with Cisco devices 48
log buffer 14
with Cisco IOS software 9
statistics 14
mrinfo requests, responding to 52
neighbors
advertising the default route to 51
configuring
discovery with Probe messages 48

ACLs for non-DHCP environments 8
displaying information 52
in DHCP environments 7
prevent peering with nonpruning 55

log buffer 12
rejecting nonpruning 54
rate limit for incoming ARP packets 4, 10

OL-8553-06 IN-13
Index
dynamic ARP inspection (continued) dynamic routing 3

default configuration 5 ISO CLNS 61
denial-of-service attacks, preventing 10 Dynamic Trunking Protocol
described 1 See DTP
DHCP snooping binding database 2
displaying
E
ARP ACLs 14
configuration and operating state 14 EBGP 41
log buffer 14 editing features
statistics 14 enabling and disabling 7
trust state and rate limit 14 keystrokes used 7
error-disabled state for exceeding rate limit 4 wrapped lines 9
function of 2 EIGRP
interface trust states 3 authentication 38
log buffer components 33
clearing 14 configuring 36
configuring 12 default configuration 34
displaying 14 definition 33
logging of dropped packets, described 4 interface parameters, configuring 37
man-in-the middle attack, described 2 monitoring 40
network security issues and interface trust states 3 stub routing 39
priority of ARP ACLs and DHCP snooping entries 4 ELIN location 3
rate limiting of ARP packets embedded event manager
configuring 10 actions 4
described 4 configuring 1, 5
error-disabled state 4 displaying information 7
statistics environmental variables 5
clearing 14 event detectors 2
displaying 14 policies 4
validation checks, performing 11 registering and defining an applet 5
dynamic auto trunking mode 18 registering and defining a TCL script 6
dynamic desirable trunking mode 18 understanding 1
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol enable password 3
See DHCP-based autoconfiguration enable secret password 3
dynamic port VLAN membership encryption, CipherSuite 44
described 28 encryption for passwords 3
reconfirming 31 Enhanced IGRP
troubleshooting 33 See EIGRP
types of connections 30

IN-14 OL-8553-06
Index
enhanced object tracking EtherChannel (continued)

backup static routing 12 LACP
commands 1 described 5
defined 1 displaying status 20
DHCP primary interface 11 hot-standby ports 18
HSRP 7 interaction with other features 6
IP routing state 2 modes 6
IP SLAs 9 port priority 19
line-protocol state 2 system priority 19
network monitoring with IP SLAs 11 Layer 3 interface 3
routing policy, configuring 12 load balancing 7, 16
static route primary interface 10 logical interfaces, described 3
tracked lists 3 PAgP
enhanced object tracking static routing 10 aggregate-port learners 16
environmental variables, embedded event manager 5 compatibility with Catalyst 1900 17
environment variables, function of 19 described 4
equal-cost routing 12, 88 displaying status 20
error-disabled state, BPDU 2 interaction with other features 5
error messages during command entry 5 interaction with virtual switches 5
EtherChannel learn method and priority configuration 16
automatic creation of 4, 5 modes 4
channel groups support for 3
binding physical and logical interfaces 3 with dual-action detection 5
numbering of 3 port-channel interfaces
configuration guidelines 9 described 3
configuring numbering of 3
Layer 2 interfaces 10 port groups 6
Layer 3 physical interfaces 14 support for 3
Layer 3 port-channel logical interfaces 13 EtherChannel guard
default configuration 9 described 7
described 2 disabling 14
displaying status 20 enabling 14
forwarding methods 7, 16 Ethernet VLANs
IEEE 802.3ad, described 5 adding 9
interaction defaults and ranges 8
with STP 10 modifying 9
with VLANs 10 EUI 3
event detectors, embedded event manager 2
events, RMON 3

OL-8553-06 IN-15
Index
examples fallback bridging (continued)

network configuration 17 default configuration 3
expedite queue for QoS 76 described 1
Express Setup 2 frame forwarding
See also getting started guide flooding packets 2
extended crashinfo file 23 forwarding packets 2
extended-range VLANs overview 1
configuration guidelines 13 protocol, unsupported 3
configuring 12 STP
creating 13 disabling on an interface 9
creating with an internal VLAN ID 15 forward-delay interval 8
defined 1 hello BPDU interval 7
extended system ID interface priority 6
MSTP 17 keepalive messages 2
STP 4, 14 maximum-idle interval 9
extended universal identifier path cost 6
See EUI VLAN-bridge spanning-tree priority 5
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN 1 VLAN-bridge STP 2
external BGP support for 12
See EBGP SVIs and routed ports 1
external neighbors, BGP 45 unsupported protocols 3
VLAN-bridge STP 10
Fast Convergence 3
F
features, incompatible 12
fa0 interface 6 FIB 87
fallback bridging fiber-optic, detecting unidirectional links 1
and protected ports 3 files
bridge groups basic crashinfo
creating 3 description 23
described 1 location 23
displaying 10 copying 5
function of 2 crashinfo, description 23
number supported 4 deleting 5
removing 4 displaying the contents of 8
bridge table extended crashinfo
clearing 10 description 23
displaying 10 location 23
connecting interfaces with 10

IN-16 OL-8553-06
Index
files (continued) flowcharts

tar QoS classification 6
creating 6 QoS egress queueing and scheduling 17
displaying the contents of 7 QoS ingress queueing and scheduling 15
extracting 7 QoS policing and marking 10
image file format 24 flowcontrol
file system configuring 20
displaying available file systems 2 described 20
displaying file information 3 forward-delay time
local file system names 1 MSTP 23
network file system names 5 STP 21
setting the default 3 Forwarding Information Base
filtering See FIB
in a VLAN 29 forwarding nonroutable protocols 1
IPv6 traffic 3, 8 FTP
non-IP traffic 27 accessing MIB files 3
show and more command output 10 configuration files
filtering show and more command output 10 downloading 13
filters, IP overview 12
See ACLs, IP preparing the server 13
flash device, number of 1 uploading 14
flexible authentication ordering image files
configuring 59 deleting old image 31
overview 24 downloading 30
Flex Link Multicast Fast Convergence 3 preparing the server 29
Flex Links uploading 31
configuring 9
G
configuring preferred VLAN 12
configuring VLAN load balancing 11 general query 5
default configuration 8 Generating IGMP Reports 3
description 1 get-bulk-request operation 3
link load balancing 2 get-next-request operation 3, 4
monitoring 14 get-request operation 3, 4
VLANs 2 get-response operation 3
flooded traffic, blocking 8 global configuration mode 2
flow-based packet classification 11 global leave, IGMP 13
guest VLAN and 802.1x 17
guide mode 2

OL-8553-06 IN-17
Index
GUIs HSRP (continued)

See device manager and Network Assistant bject tracking 7
overview 1
priority 8
H
routing redundancy 12
hardware limitations and Layer 3 interfaces 26 support for ICMP redirect messages 12
hello time timers 10
MSTP 22 tracking 8
STP 20 See also clusters, cluster standby group, and standby
command switch
help, for the command line 3
HSRP for IPv6
hierarchical policy maps 8
configuring 24
guidelines 23
configuring 52
HTTP over SSL
described 11
see HTTPS
history
HTTPS 42
changing the buffer size 6
configuring 46
described 6
self-signed certificate 43
disabling 7
HTTP secure server 42
recalling commands 6
history table, level and number of syslog messages 10
host names, in clusters 13 I
host ports
IBPG 41
configuring 11
ICMP
kinds of 2
IPv6 4
hosts, limit on dynamic ports 33
redirect messages 11
Hot Standby Router Protocol
support for 12
See HSRP
time-exceeded messages 17
HP OpenView 5
traceroute and 17
HSRP
unreachable messages 19
authentication string 10
unreachable messages and IPv6 4
automatic cluster recovery 12
unreachables and ACLs 21
binding to cluster group 12
ICMP Echo operation
cluster standby group considerations 11
configuring 12
command-switch redundancy 1, 7
IP SLAs 11
configuring 4
ICMP ping
default configuration 5
executing 14
definition 1
overview 13
guidelines 5
monitoring 13

IN-18 OL-8553-06
Index
ICMP Router Discovery Protocol IGMP (continued)

See IRDP controlling access to groups 39
ICMPv6 4 default configuration 38
IDS appliances deleting cache entries 61
and ingress RSPAN 20 displaying groups 61
and ingress SPAN 13 fast switching 42
IEEE 802.1D flooded multicast traffic
See STP controlling the length of time 12
IEEE 802.1p 1 disabling on an interface 13
IEEE 802.1Q global leave 13
and trunk ports 3 query solicitation 13
configuration limitations 19 recovering from flood mode 13
encapsulation 16 host-query interval, modifying 40
native VLAN for untagged traffic 23 joining multicast group 3
tunneling join messages 3
compatibility with other features 6 leave processing, enabling 10, 8
defaults 4 leaving multicast group 5
described 1 multicast reachability 38
tunnel ports with other features 6 overview 3
IEEE 802.1s queries 4
See MSTP report suppression
IEEE 802.1w described 6
See RSTP disabling 15, 11
IEEE 802.1x supported versions 3
See port-based authentication support for 4
IEEE 802.3ad Version 1
See EtherChannel changing to Version 2 40
IEEE 802.3af described 3
See PoE Version 2
IEEE 802.3x flow control 20 changing to Version 1 40
ifIndex values, SNMP 5 described 3
IFS 5 maximum query response time value 42
IGMP pruning groups 42
configurable leave timer query timeout value 41
described 6 IGMP filtering
enabling 11 configuring 24
configuring the switch default configuration 24
as a member of a group 38 described 23
statically connected member 42

OL-8553-06 IN-19
Index
IGMP filtering (continued) inaccessible authentication bypass 19

monitoring 28 initial configuration
support for 4 defaults 14
IGMP groups Express Setup 2
configuring filtering 27 interface
setting the maximum number 26 number 11
IGMP helper 4, 6 range macros 13
IGMP Immediate Leave interface command 10 to 11
configuration guidelines 11 interface configuration mode 3
described 5 interfaces
enabling 10 auto-MDIX, configuring 21
IGMP profile configuration guidelines
applying 26 duplex and speed 18
configuration mode 24 configuring
configuring 25 procedure 11
IGMP snooping counters, clearing 30
and address aliasing 2 default configuration 15
configuring 6 described 24
default configuration 7, 5, 6 descriptive name, adding 24
definition 2 displaying information about 29
enabling and disabling 7, 6 flow control 20
global configuration 7 management 4
Immediate Leave 5 monitoring 29
method 8 naming 24
monitoring 15, 11 physical, identifying 10
querier range of 11
configuration guidelines 14 restarting 31
configuring 14 shutting down 31
supported versions 3 speed and duplex, configuring 18
support for 4 status 29
VLAN configuration 8 supported 10
IGMP throttling types of 1
configuring 27 interfaces range macro command 13
default configuration 24 interface types 10
described 24 Interior Gateway Protocol
displaying action 28 See IGP
IGP 24 internal BGP
Immediate Leave, IGMP 5 See IBGP
enabling 8 internal neighbors, BGP 45

IN-20 OL-8553-06
Index
Internet Control Message Protocol ip igmp profile command 24

See ICMP IP information
Internet Group Management Protocol assigned
See IGMP manually 14
Internet Protocol version 6 through DHCP-based autoconfiguration 3
See IPv6 default configuration 3
Inter-Switch Link IP multicast routing
See ISL addresses
inter-VLAN routing 12, 2 all-hosts 3
Intrusion Detection System all-multicast-routers 3
See IDS appliances host group address range 3
inventory management TLV 2, 6 administratively-scoped boundaries, described 45
IOS shell and IGMP snooping 2
See Auto Smartports macros Auto-RP
IP ACLs adding to an existing sparse-mode cloud 25
for QoS classification 7 benefits of 25
implicit deny 9, 13 clearing the cache 61
implicit masks 9 configuration guidelines 11
named 14 filtering incoming RP announcement
messages 28
undefined 20
IP addresses overview 6
128-bit 2
preventing candidate RP spoofing 28
candidate or member 3, 13
preventing join messages to false RPs 27
classes of 5
setting up in a new internetwork 25
cluster access 2
using with BSR 33
command switch 3, 11, 13

bootstrap router
configuring candidate BSRs 31
discovering 28
configuring candidate RPs 32
for IP routing 4
defining the IP multicast boundary 30
IPv6 2
defining the PIM domain border 29
MAC address association 8
overview 7
monitoring 17
using with Auto-RP 33
redundant clusters 11
Cisco implementation 2
standby command switch 11, 13
See also IP information configuring
IP base image 1
basic multicast routing 11
IP broadcast address 15
IP multicast boundary 45
ip cef distributed command 87

IP directed broadcasts 13

OL-8553-06 IN-21
Index
IP multicast routing (continued) IP phones

enabling and QoS 1
multicast forwarding 12 automatic classification and queueing 20
PIM mode 13 configuring 4
group-to-RP mappings ensuring port security with QoS 38
Auto-RP 6 trusted boundary for QoS 38
BSR 7 IP precedence 2
MBONE IP-precedence-to-DSCP map for QoS 62
deleting sdr cache entries 61 IP protocols
described 44 in ACLs 11
displaying sdr cache 62 routing 12
enabling sdr listener support 45 IP routes, monitoring 100
limiting DVMRP routes advertised 56 IP routing
limiting sdr cache entry lifetime 45 connecting interfaces with 10
SAP packets for conference session disabling 18
announcement 44
enabling 18
Session Directory (sdr) tool, described 44
IP Service Level Agreements
monitoring See IP SLAs
packet rate loss 62
IP service levels, analyzing 1
peering devices 62
IP services image 1
tracing a path 62
IP SLAs
multicast forwarding, described 7
benefits 2
PIMv1 and PIMv2 interoperability 10
protocol interaction 2
configuring object tracking 9
reverse path check (RPF) 7
Control Protocol 4
routing table default configuration 6
deleting 61
definition 1
displaying 61
ICMP echo operation 11
RP
measuring network performance 3
assigning manually 23
monitoring 13
configuring Auto-RP 25
multioperations scheduling 5
configuring PIMv2 BSR 29
object tracking 9
monitoring mapping information 33
operation 3
using Auto-RP and BSR 33
reachability tracking 9
statistics, displaying system and network 61
responder
See also CGMP described 4
See also DVMRP enabling 8
See also IGMP response time 4
See also PIM scheduling 5

IN-22 OL-8553-06
Index
IP SLAs (continued) IP traceroute

SNMP support 2 executing 17
supported metrics 2 overview 16
threshold monitoring 6 IP unicast routing
track object monitoring agent, configuring 11 address resolution 8
track state 9 administrative distances 89, 99
UDP jitter operation 9 ARP 8
IP source guard assigning IP addresses to Layer 3 interfaces 5
and 802.1x 17 authentication keys 99
and DHCP snooping 15 broadcast
and EtherChannels 17 address 15
and port security 17 flooding 16
and private VLANs 17 packets 13
and routed ports 17 storms 13
and TCAM entries 17 classless routing 6
and trunk interfaces 17 configuring static routes 88
and VRF 17 default
binding configuration addressing configuration 4
automatic 15 gateways 11
manual 15 networks 89
binding table 15 routes 89
configuration guidelines 17 routing 2
default configuration 16 directed broadcasts 13
described 15 disabling 18
disabling 18 dynamic routing 3
displaying enabling 18
bindings 19 EtherChannel Layer 3 interface 3
configuration 19 IGP 24
enabling 17 inter-VLAN 2
filtering IP addressing
source IP address 16 classes 5
source IP and MAC address 16 configuring 4
source IP address filtering 16 IPv6 3
source IP and MAC address filtering 16 IRDP 11
static bindings Layer 3 interfaces 3
adding 17 MAC address and IP address 8
deleting 18 passive interfaces 97

OL-8553-06 IN-23
Index
IP unicast routing (continued) IPv6 (continued)

protocols assigning address 10
distance-vector 3 autoconfiguration 5
dynamic 3 CEFv6 18
link-state 3 configuring static routes 19
proxy ARP 8 default configuration 10
redistribution 90 default router preference (DRP) 4
reverse address resolution 8 defined 1
routed ports 3 Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP)
IPv6 7
static routing 3
EIGRP IPv6 Commands 7
steps to configure 4
Router ID 7
subnet mask 5
subnet zero 6
feature limitations 8
supernet 6
features not supported 8
UDP 14
forwarding 10
with SVIs 3
ICMP 4
See also BGP monitoring 26
See also EIGRP neighbor discovery 4
See also OSPF OSPF 6
See also RIP path MTU discovery 4
IPv4 ACLs SDM templates 2, 1
Stateless Autoconfiguration 5
extended, creating 10
supported features 2
named 14
switch limitations 8
standard, creating 9
understanding static routes 6
IPv4 and IPv6 IPv6 traffic, filtering 3
dual protocol stacks 5

IRDP
configuring 12
IPv6
definition 11
ACLs
support for 12
displaying 9
IS-IS
limitations 3
addresses 62
matching criteria 3
area routing 61
port 2
precedence 2
router 2
monitoring 71
supported 2
show commands 71
addresses 2
system routing 61
address formats 2
applications 5

IN-24 OL-8553-06
Index
ISL Kerberos (continued)

and IPv6 3 KDC 32
and trunk ports 3 operation 34
encapsulation 8, 16 realm 34
trunking with IEEE 802.1 tunneling 5 server 34
ISO CLNS support for 10
clear commands 71 switch as trusted third party 32
dynamic routing protocols 61 terms 33
monitoring 71 TGT 34
NETs 61 tickets 32
NSAPs 61 key distribution center
OSI standard 61 See KDC
ISO IGRP
area routing 61
L
system routing 61
isolated port 2 l2protocol-tunnel command 13
isolated VLANs 2, 3 LACP
Layer 2 protocol tunneling 9
See EtherChannel
J
Layer 2 frames, classification with CoS 2
join messages, IGMP 3 Layer 2 interfaces, default configuration 15
Layer 2 protocol tunneling
configuring 10
K
configuring for EtherChannels 14
KDC default configuration 11
described 32 defined 8
See also Kerberos guidelines 11
keepalive messages 2 Layer 2 traceroute
Kerberos and ARP 16
authenticating to and CDP 15
boundary switch 35 broadcast traffic 15
KDC 35 described 15
network services 35 IP addresses and subnets 16
configuration examples 32 MAC addresses and VLANs 15
configuring 35 multicast traffic 15
credentials 32 multiple devices on a port 16
cryptographic software image 32 unicast traffic 15
described 32 usage guidelines 15
Layer 3 features 12

OL-8553-06 IN-25
Index
Layer 3 interfaces LLDP-MED

assigning IP addresses to 5 configuring
assigning IPv4 and IPv6 addresses to 13 procedures 4
assigning IPv6 addresses to 11 TLVs 6
changing from Layer 2 mode 5, 78, 79 monitoring and maintaining 10
types of 3 overview 1, 2
Layer 3 packets, classification methods 2 supported TLVs 2
LDAP 2 LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery
Leaking IGMP Reports 4 See LLDP-MED
LEDs, switch load balancing 4
See hardware installation guide local SPAN 2
lightweight directory access protocol location TLV 3, 6
See LDAP logging messages, ACL 8
line configuration mode 3 login authentication
Link Aggregation Control Protocol with RADIUS 23
See EtherChannel with TACACS+ 14
link failure, detecting unidirectional 7 login banners 17
Link Layer Discovery Protocol log messages
See CDP See system message logging
link local unicast addresses 3 Long-Reach Ethernet (LRE) technology 18
link redundancy loop guard
See Flex Links described 9
links, unidirectional 1 enabling 15
link state advertisements (LSAs) 28 support for 7
link-state protocols 3 LRE profiles, considerations in switch clusters 14
link-state tracking
configuring 23
M
described 21
LLDP MAB
configuring 4 See MAC authentication bypass
characteristics 5 MAB aging timer 8
default configuration 4 MAB inactivity timer
enabling 5 default setting 31
monitoring and maintaining 10 range 33
overview 1 MAC/PHY configuration status TLV 2
supported TLVs 2 MAC addresses
switch stack considerations 2 aging time 21
transmission timer and holdtime, setting 5 and VLAN association 20
building the address table 20

IN-26 OL-8553-06
Index
MAC addresses (continued) macros

default configuration 21 See Auto Smartports macros
disabling learning on a VLAN 27 See Smartports macros
discovering 28 magic packet 22
displaying 27 manageability features 5
displaying in the IP source binding table 19 management access
dynamic in-band
learning 20 browser session 6
removing 22 CLI session 6
in ACLs 27 device manager 6
IP address association 8 SNMP 6
static out-of-band console port connection 6
adding 24 management address TLV 2
allowing 26, 27 management options
characteristics of 24 CLI 1
dropping 25 clustering 3
removing 24 CNS 1
MAC address learning 5 Network Assistant 2
MAC address learning, disabling on a VLAN 27 overview 4
MAC address notification, support for 13 management VLAN
MAC address-table move update considerations in switch clusters 7
configuration guidelines 8 discovery through different management VLANs 7
configuring 12 mapping tables for QoS
default configuration 8 configuring
description 6 CoS-to-DSCP 60
monitoring 14 DSCP 60
MAC address-to-VLAN mapping 28 DSCP-to-CoS 64
MAC authentication bypass 33 DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation 65
configuring 53 IP-precedence-to-DSCP 62
overview 14 policed-DSCP 63
See MAB described 12
MAC extended access lists marking
applying to Layer 2 interfaces 28 action with aggregate policers 58
configuring for QoS 45 described 4, 8
creating 27 matching
defined 27 IPv6 ACLs 3
for QoS classification 5 matching, IPv4 ACLs 7

OL-8553-06 IN-27
Index
maximum aging time monitoring (continued)

MSTP 23 CDP 4
STP 21 CEF 87
maximum hop count, MSTP 24 EIGRP 40
maximum number of allowed devices, port-based fallback bridging 10
authentication 33
features 13
maximum-paths command 49, 88
Flex Links 14
MDA
HSRP 13
configuration guidelines 11 to 12
IEEE 802.1Q tunneling 17
described 9, 11
IGMP
exceptions with authentication process 5
filters 28
membership mode, VLAN port 3
snooping 15, 11
member switch interfaces 29
automatic discovery 4
IP
defined 2
address tables 17
managing 15
multicast routing 60
passwords 13
routes 100
recovering from lost connectivity 11
IP SLAs operations 13
requirements 3
IPv4 ACL configuration 40
See also candidate switch, cluster standby group, and IPv6 26
standby command switch
IPv6 ACL configuration 9
messages, to users through banners 17
IS-IS 71
metrics, in BGP 49
ISO CLNS 71
metric translations, between routing protocols 93
Layer 2 protocol tunneling 17
metro tags 2
MAC address-table move update 14
MHSRP 4
MSDP peers 18
MIBs
multicast router interfaces 16, 11
accessing files with FTP 3
multi-VRF CE 86
location of files 3
MVR 23
overview 1
network traffic for analysis with probe 2
SNMP interaction with 4
object tracking 12
supported 1
OSPF 32
mirroring traffic for analysis 1
port
mismatches, autonegotiation 11
blocking 19
module number 11
protection 19
monitoring
private VLANs 14
access groups 40
RP mapping information 33
BGP 60
SFP status 30, 13
cables for unidirectional links 1
source-active messages 18

IN-28 OL-8553-06
Index
monitoring (continued) MSDP (continued)

speed and duplex mode 19 peers
SSM mapping 21 configuring a default 4
traffic flowing among switches 1 monitoring 18
traffic suppression 19 peering relationship, overview 1
tunneling 17 requesting source information from 8
VLAN shutting down 15
filters 41 source-active messages
maps 41 caching 6
VLANs 16 clearing cache entries 18
VMPS 32 defined 2
VTP 16 filtering from a peer 10
mrouter Port 3 filtering incoming 14
mrouter port 5 filtering to a peer 12
MSDP limiting data with TTL 13
benefits of 3 monitoring 18
clearing MSDP connections and statistics 18 restricting advertised sources 9
controlling source information support for 12
forwarded by switch 11 MSTP
originated by switch 8 boundary ports
received by switch 13 configuration guidelines 15
default configuration 4 described 6
dense-mode regions BPDU filtering
sending SA messages to 16 described 3
specifying the originating address 17 enabling 12
filtering BPDU guard
incoming SA messages 14 described 2
SA messages to a peer 12 enabling 11
SA requests from a peer 10 CIST, described 3
join latency, defined 6 CIST regional root 3
meshed groups CIST root 5
configuring 15 configuration guidelines 15, 10
defined 15 configuring
originating address, changing 17 forward-delay time 23
overview 1 hello time 22
peer-RPF flooding 2 link type for rapid convergence 24
maximum aging time 23
maximum hop count 24
MST region 16

OL-8553-06 IN-29
Index
MSTP (continued) MSTP (continued)

neighbor type 25 MST region
path cost 20 CIST 3
port priority 19 configuring 16
root switch 17 described 2
secondary root switch 18 hop-count mechanism 5
switch priority 21 IST 2
CST supported spanning-tree instances 2
defined 3 optional features supported 7
operations between regions 3 overview 2
default configuration 14 Port Fast
default optional feature configuration 9 described 2
displaying status 26 enabling 10
enabling the mode 16 preventing root switch selection 8
EtherChannel guard root guard
enabling 14 enabling 15
extended system ID root switch
effects on root switch 17 configuring 17
effects on secondary root switch 18 effects of extended system ID 17
unexpected behavior 17 unexpected behavior 17
IEEE 802.1s shutdown Port Fast-enabled port 2
implementation 6 status, displaying 26
port role naming change 6 multiauth mode
terminology 5 See multiple-authentication mode
instances supported 9 multicast groups
interface state, blocking to forwarding 2 Immediate Leave 5
interoperability and compatibility among modes 10 joining 3
interoperability with IEEE 802.1D leaving 5
described 8 static joins 10, 7
restarting migration process 25 multicast packets
IST ACLs on 40
defined 2 blocking 8
master 3 multicast router interfaces, monitoring 16, 11
operations within a region 3 multicast router ports, adding 9, 8
loop guard Multicast Source Discovery Protocol
described 9 See MSDP
enabling 15 multicast storm 1
mapping VLANs to MST instance 16 multicast storm-control command 4

IN-30 OL-8553-06
Index
multicast television application 17

N
multicast VLAN 17
Multicast VLAN Registration NAC
See MVR AAA down policy 10
multidomain authentication critical authentication 19, 49
See MDA IEEE 802.1x authentication using a RADIUS
server 54
multioperations scheduling, IP SLAs 5
IEEE 802.1x validation using RADIUS server 54
multiple authentication 12
inaccessible authentication bypass 10, 49
multiple authentication mode
Layer 2 IEEE 802.1x validation 10, 24, 54
configuring 40
Layer 2 IP validation 10
Multiple HSRP
named IPv4 ACLs 14
See MHSRP
NameSpace Mapper
multiple VPN routing/forwarding in customer edge
devices See NSM
See multi-VRF CE native VLAN
multi-VRF CE and IEEE 802.1Q tunneling 4
configuration example 82 configuring 23
configuration guidelines 74 default 23
configuring 74 NEAT
default configuration 74 configuring 55
defined 72 overview 25
displaying 86 neighbor discovery, IPv6 4
monitoring 86 neighbor discovery/recovery, EIGRP 33
network components 74 neighbors, BGP 55
packet-forwarding process 73 Network Admission Control
support for 12 NAC
MVR Network Admission Control Software Configuration
Guide 62, 63
and address aliasing 20
Network Assistant
and IGMPv3 20
benefits 2
described 4
configuring interfaces 21
downloading image files 2
guide mode 2
described 17
management options 2
example application 17
upgrading a switch 23
modes 20
wizards 2
monitoring 23
multicast television application 17
setting global parameters 20
support for 4

OL-8553-06 IN-31
Index
network configuration examples NTP

increasing network performance 17 associations
large network 21 authenticating 4
long-distance, high-bandwidth transport 23 defined 2
providing network services 17 enabling broadcast messages 6
server aggregation and Linux server cluster 19 peer 5
small to medium-sized network 20 server 5
network design default configuration 4
performance 17 displaying the configuration 11
services 17 overview 2
Network Edge Access Toplogy restricting access
See NEAT creating an access group 8
network management disabling NTP services per interface 10
CDP 1 source IP address, configuring 10
RMON 1 stratum 2
SNMP 1 support for 5
network performance, measuring with IP SLAs 3 synchronizing devices 5
network policy TLV 2, 7 time
Network Time Protocol services 2
See NTP synchronizing 2
no commands 4
nonhierarchical policy maps
O
described 9 object tracking
non-IP traffic filtering 27 HSRP 7
nontrunking mode 18 IP SLAs 9
normal-range VLANs 4 IP SLAs, configuring 9
configuration guidelines 6 monitoring 12
configuration modes 7 online diagnostics
configuring 4 overview 1
defined 1 running tests 3
no switchport command 4 understanding 1
not-so-stubby areas open1x
See NSSA configuring 60
NSAPs, as ISO IGRP addresses 62 open1x authentication
NSF Awareness overview 25
IS-IS 64 Open Shortest Path First
NSM 3 See OSPF
NSSA, OSPF 28 optimizing system resources 1

IN-32 OL-8553-06
Index
options, management 4 passwords (continued)

OSPF setting
area parameters, configuring 28 enable 3
configuring 26 enable secret 3
default configuration Telnet 6
metrics 30 with usernames 6
route 30 VTP domain 8
settings 25 path cost
described 24 MSTP 20
for IPv6 6 STP 18
interface parameters, configuring 27 path MTU discovery 4
LSA group pacing 31 PBR
monitoring 32 defined 94
router IDs 32 enabling 95
route summarization 29 fast-switched policy-based routing 97
support for 12 local policy-based routing 97
virtual links 30 PC (passive command switch) 10
out-of-profile markdown 11 peers, BGP 55
percentage thresholds in tracked lists 6
performance, network design 17
P
performance features 3
packet modification, with QoS 19 persistent self-signed certificate 43
PAgP per-user ACLs and Filter-Ids 8
Layer 2 protocol tunneling 9 per-VLAN spanning-tree plus
See EtherChannel See PVST+
parallel paths, in routing tables 88 PE to CE routing, configuring 81
passive interfaces physical ports 2
configuring 97 PIM
OSPF 30 default configuration 10
passwords dense mode
default configuration 2 overview 4
disabling recovery of 5 rendezvous point (RP), described 5
encrypting 3 RPF lookups 8
for security 8 displaying neighbors 61
in clusters 13 enabling a mode 13
overview 1 overview 4
recovery of 3 router-query message interval, modifying 36
shared tree and source tree, overview 34
shortest path tree, delaying the use of 35

OL-8553-06 IN-33
Index
PIM (continued) policed-DSCP map for QoS 63

sparse mode policers
join messages and shared tree 5 configuring
overview 5 for each matched traffic class 48
prune messages 5 for more than one traffic class 58
RPF lookups 8 described 4
stub routing displaying 78
configuration guidelines 22 number of 34
displaying 61 types of 9
enabling 22 policing
overview 5 described 4
support for 12 hierarchical
versions See hierarchical policy maps
interoperability 10 token-bucket algorithm 9
troubleshooting interoperability problems 34 policy-based routing
v2 improvements 4 See PBR
PIM-DVMRP, as snooping method 8 policy maps for QoS
ping characteristics of 48
character output description 14 described 7
executing 14 displaying 78
overview 13 hierarchical 8
PoE hierarchical on SVIs
auto mode 8 configuration guidelines 33
CDP with power consumption, described 7 configuring 52
CDP with power negotiation, described 7 described 11
Cisco intelligent power management 7 nonhierarchical on physical ports
configuring 22 configuration guidelines 33
devices supported 7 described 9
high-power devices operating in low-power mode 7 port ACLs
IEEE power classification levels 8 defined 2
power budgeting 23 types of 3
power consumption 23 Port Aggregation Protocol
powered-device detection and initial power See EtherChannel
allocation 7
port-based authentication
power management modes 8
accounting 12
power negotiation extensions to CDP 7
authentication server
standards supported 7
defined 3
static mode 9
RADIUS server 3
troubleshooting 12
client, defined 2

IN-34 OL-8553-06
Index
port-based authentication (continued) port-based authentication (continued)

configuration guidelines 31 initiation and message exchange 5
configuring magic packet 22
802.1x authentication 37 maximum number of allowed devices per port 33
guest VLAN 46 method lists 37
host mode 40 multiple authentication 12
inaccessible authentication bypass 49 per-user ACLs
manual re-authentication of a client 42 AAA authorization 37
periodic re-authentication 41 configuration tasks 16
quiet period 42 described 15
RADIUS server 39 RADIUS server attributes 15
RADIUS server parameters on the switch 38 ports
restricted VLAN 47 authorization state and dot1x port-control
command 9
switch-to-client frame-retransmission
number 44 authorized and unauthorized 9
switch-to-client retransmission time 43 critical 19
violation modes 36 voice VLAN 21
default configuration 30 port security
described 1 and voice VLAN 22
device roles 2 described 21
displaying statistics 65 interactions 21
downloadable ACLs and redirect URLs multiple-hosts mode 10
configuring 57 to 59 readiness check
overview 16 to 17 configuring 34
EAPOL-start frame 5 described 14, 34
EAP-request/identity frame 5 resetting to default values 65
EAP-response/identity frame 5 statistics, displaying 65
encapsulation 3 switch
flexible authentication ordering as proxy 3
configuring 59 RADIUS client 3
overview 24 switch supplicant
guest VLAN configuring 55
configuration guidelines 18, 19 overview 25
described 17 upgrading from a previous release 26
host mode 10 VLAN assignment
inaccessible authentication bypass AAA authorization 37
configuring 49 characteristics 14
described 19 configuration tasks 15
guidelines 32 described 14

OL-8553-06 IN-35
Index
port-based authentication (continued) VLAN assignments 11

voice aware 802.1x security port security
configuring 35 aging 17
described 25, 35 and private VLANs 18
voice VLAN and QoS trusted boundary 38
described 21 configuring 13
PVID 21 default configuration 11
VVID 21 described 8
wake-on-LAN, described 22 displaying 19
port-based authentication methods, supported 7 enabling 18
port blocking 4, 7 on trunk ports 14
port-channel sticky learning 9
See EtherChannel violations 10
port description TLV 2 with other features 11
Port Fast port-shutdown response, VMPS 28
described 2 port VLAN ID TLV 2
enabling 10 power management TLV 2, 7
mode, spanning tree 29 Power over Ethernet
support for 7 See PoE
port membership modes, VLAN 3 preemption, default configuration 8
port priority preemption delay, default configuration 8
MSTP 19 preferential treatment of traffic
STP 17 See QoS
ports prefix lists, BGP 53
access 3 preventing unauthorized access 1
blocking 7 primary interface for object tracking, DHCP,
configuring 11
dual-purpose uplink 6
primary interface for static routing, configuring 10
dynamic access 3
primary links 2
IEEE 802.1Q tunnel 4
primary VLANs 1, 3
protected 6
priority
routed 4
HSRP 8
secure 8
overriding CoS 6
static-access 3, 11
trusting CoS 6
switch 2
trunks 3, 16
private VLAN edge ports
See protected ports

IN-36 OL-8553-06
Index
private VLANs promiscuous ports

across multiple switches 4 configuring 12
and SDM template 4 defined 2
and SVIs 5 protected ports 8, 6
benefits of 1 protocol-dependent modules, EIGRP 34
community ports 2 Protocol-Independent Multicast Protocol
community VLANs 2, 3 See PIM
configuration guidelines 6, 8 provider edge devices 72
configuration tasks 6 proxy ARP
configuring 9 configuring 10
default configuration 6 definition 8
end station access to 3 with IP routing disabled 11
IP addressing 3 proxy reports 3
isolated port 2 pruning, VTP
isolated VLANs 2, 3 disabling
mapping 13 in VTP domain 14
monitoring 14 on a port 23
ports enabling
community 2 in VTP domain 14
configuration guidelines 8 on a port 23
configuring host ports 11 examples 5
configuring promiscuous ports 12 overview 4
described 4 pruning-eligible list
isolated 2 changing 23
promiscuous 2 for VTP pruning 4
primary VLANs 1, 3 VLANs 14
promiscuous ports 2 PVST+
secondary VLANs 2 described 9
subdomains 1 IEEE 802.1Q trunking interoperability 10
traffic in 5 instances supported 9
privileged EXEC mode 2
privilege levels
changing the default for lines 9
command switch 15
exiting 9
logging into 9
mapping on member switches 15
overview 2, 7
setting a command with 8

OL-8553-06 IN-37
Index
QoS (continued)
Q
configuration guidelines
QoS auto-QoS 25
and MQC commands 1 standard QoS 33
auto-QoS configuring
categorizing traffic 20 aggregate policers 58
configuration and defaults display 29 auto-QoS 20
configuration guidelines 25 default port CoS value 38
described 20 DSCP maps 60
disabling 27 DSCP transparency 40
displaying generated commands 27 DSCP trust states bordering another domain 40
displaying the initial configuration 29 egress queue characteristics 70
effects on running configuration 25 ingress queue characteristics 66
egress queue defaults 21 IP extended ACLs 44
enabling for VoIP 27 IP standard ACLs 43
example configuration 28 MAC ACLs 45
ingress queue defaults 21 policy maps, hierarchical 52
list of generated commands 22 port trust states within the domain 36
basic model 4 trusted boundary 38
classification default auto configuration 20
class maps, described 7 default standard configuration 30
defined 4 displaying statistics 78
DSCP transparency, described 40 DSCP transparency 40
flowchart 6 egress queues
forwarding treatment 3 allocating buffer space 71
in frames and packets 3 buffer allocation scheme, described 17
IP ACLs, described 5, 7 configuring shaped weights for SRR 74
MAC ACLs, described 5, 7 configuring shared weights for SRR 75
options for IP traffic 5 described 4
options for non-IP traffic 5 displaying the threshold map 74
policy maps, described 7 flowchart 17
trust DSCP, described 5 mapping DSCP or CoS values 73
trusted CoS, described 5 scheduling, described 4
trust IP precedence, described 5 setting WTD thresholds 71
class maps WTD, described 18
configuring 46 enabling globally 35
displaying 78

IN-38 OL-8553-06
Index
QoS (continued) QoS (continued)

flowcharts policers
classification 6 configuring 50, 55, 58
egress queueing and scheduling 17 described 8
ingress queueing and scheduling 15 displaying 78
policing and marking 10 number of 34
implicit deny 7 types of 9
ingress queues policies, attaching to an interface 8
allocating bandwidth 68 policing
allocating buffer space 68 described 4, 8
buffer and bandwidth allocation, described 16 token bucket algorithm 9
configuring shared weights for SRR 68 policy maps
configuring the priority queue 69 characteristics of 48
described 4 displaying 78
displaying the threshold map 67 hierarchical 8
flowchart 15 hierarchical on SVIs 52
mapping DSCP or CoS values 67 nonhierarchical on physical ports 48
priority queue, described 16 QoS label, defined 4
scheduling, described 4 queues
setting WTD thresholds 67 configuring egress characteristics 70
WTD, described 16 configuring ingress characteristics 66
IP phones high priority (expedite) 19, 76
automatic classification and queueing 20 location of 13
detection and trusted settings 20, 38 SRR, described 14
limiting bandwidth on egress interface 77 WTD, described 13
mapping tables rewrites 19
CoS-to-DSCP 60 support for 11
displaying 78 trust states
DSCP-to-CoS 64 bordering another domain 40
DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation 65 described 5
IP-precedence-to-DSCP 62 trusted device 38
policed-DSCP 63 within the domain 36
types of 12 quality of service
marked-down actions 50, 55 See QoS
marking, described 4, 8 queries, IGMP 4
overview 2 query solicitation, IGMP 13
packet modification 19

OL-8553-06 IN-39
Index
rcommand command 15
R
RCP
RADIUS configuration files
attributes downloading 17
vendor-proprietary 31 overview 15
vendor-specific 29 preparing the server 16
configuring uploading 18
accounting 28 image files
authentication 23 deleting old image 36
authorization 27 downloading 34
communication, global 21, 29 preparing the server 33
communication, per-server 20, 21 uploading 36
multiple UDP ports 20 reachability, tracking IP SLAs IP host 9
default configuration 20 readiness check
defining AAA server groups 25 port-based authentication
displaying the configuration 32 configuring 34
identifying the server 20 described 14, 34
in clusters 14 reconfirmation interval, VMPS, changing 31
limiting the services to the user 27 reconfirming dynamic VLAN membership 31
method list, defined 19 recovery procedures 1
operation of 19 redirect URL 16, 17, 57
overview 18 redundancy
server load balancing 31 EtherChannel 3
suggested network environments 18 HSRP 1
support for 10 STP
tracking services accessed by user 28 backbone 8
range path cost 26
macro 13 port priority 24
of interfaces 12 redundant links and UplinkFast 13
rapid convergence 10 reliable transport protocol, EIGRP 33
rapid per-VLAN spanning-tree plus reloading software 20
See rapid PVST+ Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
rapid PVST+ See RADIUS
described 9 Remote Copy Protocol
IEEE 802.1Q trunking interoperability 10 See RCP
instances supported 9 Remote Network Monitoring
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RMON
See RSTP Remote SPAN
RARP 8 See RSPAN

IN-40 OL-8553-06
Index
remote SPAN 2 RFC (continued)

report suppression, IGMP 2236, IP multicast and IGMP 2
described 6 2273-2275, SNMPv3 2
disabling 15, 11 RIP
resequencing ACL entries 14 advertisements 19
resets, in BGP 47 authentication 21
resetting a UDLD-shutdown interface 6 configuring 20
responder, IP SLAs default configuration 19
enabling 8 for IPv6 6
response time, measuring with IP SLAs 4 hop counts 19
restricted VLAN split horizon 22
configuring 47 summary addresses 22
described 18 support for 12
using with IEEE 802.1x 18 RMON
restricting access default configuration 3
NTP services 8 displaying status 6
overview 1 enabling alarms and events 3
passwords and privilege levels 2 groups supported 2
RADIUS 17 overview 1
TACACS+ 10 statistics
retry count, VMPS, changing 32 collecting group Ethernet 5
reverse address resolution 8 collecting group history 5
Reverse Address Resolution Protocol support for 13
See RARP root guard
RFC described 8
1058, RIP 18 enabling 15
1112, IP multicast and IGMP 2 support for 7
1157, SNMPv1 2 root switch
1163, BGP 40 MSTP 17
1166, IP addresses 5 STP 14
1253, OSPF 24 route calculation timers, OSPF 30
1267, BGP 40 route dampening, BGP 59
1305, NTP 2 routed packets, ACLs on 39
1587, NSSAs 24 routed ports
1757, RMON 2 configuring 3
1771, BGP 40 defined 4
1901, SNMPv2C 2 in switch clusters 8
1902 to 1907, SNMPv2 2 IP addresses on 26, 4

OL-8553-06 IN-41
Index
route-map command 96 RSPAN (continued)

route maps source ports 5
BGP 51 transmitted traffic 5
policy-based routing 94 VLAN-based 6
router ACLs RSTP
defined 2 active topology 9
types of 4 BPDU
route reflectors, BGP 58 format 12
router ID, OSPF 32 processing 13
route selection, BGP 49 designated port, defined 9
route summarization, OSPF 29 designated switch, defined 9
route targets, VPN 74 interoperability with IEEE 802.1D
routing described 8
default 2 restarting migration process 25
dynamic 3 topology changes 13
redistribution of information 90 overview 8
static 3 port roles
routing domain confederation, BGP 58 described 9
Routing Information Protocol synchronized 11
See RIP proposal-agreement handshake process 10
routing protocol administrative distances 89 rapid convergence
RSPAN described 10
characteristics 8 edge ports and Port Fast 10
configuration guidelines 16 point-to-point links 10, 24
default configuration 9 root ports 10
defined 2 root port, defined 9
destination ports 7 See also MSTP
displaying status 23 running configuration
interaction with other features 8 replacing 19, 20
monitored ports 5 rolling back 19, 20
monitoring ports 7 running configuration, saving 15
overview 13, 1
received traffic 4
S
sessions
creating 17 SC (standby command switch) 10
defined 3 scheduled reloads 20
limiting source traffic to specific VLANs 22 scheduling, IP SLAs operations 5
specifying monitored ports 17
with ingress traffic enabled 20

IN-42 OL-8553-06
Index
SCP service-provider networks

and SSH 49 and customer VLANs 2
configuring 49 and IEEE 802.1Q tunneling 1
SDM Layer 2 protocols across 8
described 1 Layer 2 protocol tunneling for EtherChannels 9
templates set-request operation 4
configuring 4 setup program
number of 1 failed command switch replacement 10
SDM template 3 replacing failed command switch 8
configuration guidelines 3 severity levels, defining in system messages 8
configuring 3 SFPs
dual IPv4 and IPv6 2 monitoring status of 30, 13
types of 1 security and identification 12
secondary VLANs 2 status, displaying 13
Secure Copy Protocol shaped round robin
secure HTTP client See SRR
configuring 47 Shell functions
displaying 48 See Auto Smartports macros
secure HTTP server Shell triggers
configuring 46 See Auto Smartports macros
displaying 48 show access-lists hw-summary command 21
secure MAC addresses show and more command output, filtering 10
deleting 16 show cdp traffic command 5
maximum number of 10 show cluster members command 15
types of 9 show configuration command 24
secure ports, configuring 8 show forward command 20
secure remote connections 38 show interfaces command 19, 24
Secure Shell show interfaces switchport 4
See SSH show l2protocol command 13, 15, 16
Secure Socket Layer show lldp traffic command 11
See SSL show platform forward command 20
security, port 8 show running-config command
security features 8 displaying ACLs 19, 20, 31, 34
See SCP interface description in 24
sequence numbers in log messages 8 shutdown command on interfaces 31
server mode, VTP 3 shutdown threshold for Layer 2 protocol packets 11
service-provider network, MSTP and RSTP 1 Simple Network Management Protocol
See SNMP
small-frame arrival rate, configuring 5

OL-8553-06 IN-43
Index
Smartports macros SNMP (continued)

applying Cisco-default macros 12 MIBs
applying global parameter values 13 location of 3
configuration guidelines 12 supported 1
default configuration 11 notifications 5
defined 1 overview 1, 4
displaying 14 security levels 3
tracing 12 setting CPU threshold notification 15
SNAP 1 status, displaying 18
SNMP system contact and location 16
accessing MIB variables with 4 trap manager, configuring 13
agent traps
described 3 described 3, 5
disabling 7 differences from informs 5
and IP SLAs 2 disabling 15
authentication level 10 enabling 11
community strings enabling MAC address notification 22
configuring 8 overview 1, 4
for cluster switches 4 types of 11
overview 4 users 6, 9
configuration examples 17 versions supported 2
default configuration 6 SNMP and Syslog Over IPv6 7
engine ID 7 SNMPv1 2
groups 6, 9 SNMPv2C 2
host 6 SNMPv3 2
ifIndex values 5 snooping, IGMP 2
in-band management 6 software images
in clusters 14 location in flash 24
informs recovery procedures 2
and trap keyword 11 scheduling reloads 20
described 5 tar file format, described 24
differences from traps 5 See also downloading and uploading
disabling 15 source addresses
enabling 15 in IPv4 ACLs 11
limiting access by TFTP servers 16 in IPv6 ACLs 5, 6
limiting system log messages to NMS 10 source-and-destination-IP address based forwarding,
EtherChannel 7
manager functions 5, 3
managing clusters with 15
source-and-destination MAC address forwarding,
EtherChannel 7

IN-44 OL-8553-06
Index
source-IP address based forwarding, EtherChannel 7 SRR (continued)

source-MAC address forwarding, EtherChannel 7 support for 11
Source-specific multicast SSH
See SSM configuring 39
SPAN cryptographic software image 37
configuration guidelines 10 described 6, 38
default configuration 9 encryption methods 38
destination ports 7 user authentication methods, supported 38
displaying status 23 SSL
interaction with other features 8 configuration guidelines 45
monitored ports 5 configuring a secure HTTP client 47
monitoring ports 7 configuring a secure HTTP server 46
overview 13, 1 cryptographic software image 42
ports, restrictions 12 described 42
received traffic 4 monitoring 48
sessions SSM
configuring ingress forwarding 14, 21 address management restrictions 15
creating 11 CGMP limitations 15
defined 3 components 13
limiting source traffic to specific VLANs 15 configuration guidelines 15
removing destination (monitoring) ports 12 configuring 13, 16
specifying monitored ports 11 differs from Internet standard multicast 14
with ingress traffic enabled 13 IGMP snooping 15
source ports 5 IGMPv3 13
transmitted traffic 5 IGMPv3 Host Signalling 15
VLAN-based 6 IP address range 14
spanning tree and native VLANs 19 monitoring 16
Spanning Tree Protocol operations 14
See STP PIM 13
SPAN traffic 4 state maintenance limitations 16
split horizon, RIP 22 SSM mapping 16
SRR configuration guidelines 17
configuring configuring 16, 19
shaped weights on egress queues 74 DNS-based 18, 20
shared weights on egress queues 75 monitoring 21
shared weights on ingress queues 68 overview 17
described 14 restrictions 17
shaped mode 14 static 18, 19
shared mode 14 static traffic forwarding 20

OL-8553-06 IN-45
Index
standby command switch static VLAN membership 2

configuring statistics
considerations 11 802.1x 65
defined 2 CDP 4
priority 10 interface 29
requirements 3 IP multicast routing 61
virtual IP address 11 LLDP 10
See also cluster standby group and HSRP LLDP-MED 10
standby group, cluster NMSP 10
See cluster standby group and HSRP OSPF 32
standby ip command 6 QoS ingress and egress 78
standby links 2 RMON group Ethernet 5
standby router 1 RMON group history 5
standby timers, HSRP 10 SNMP input and output 18
startup configuration VTP 16
booting sticky learning 9
manually 17 storm control
specific image 18 configuring 3
clearing 19 described 1
configuration file disabling 5
automatically downloading 16 displaying 19
specifying the filename 16 support for 3
default boot configuration 16 thresholds 1
static access ports STP
assigning to VLAN 11 accelerating root port selection 4
defined 3 BackboneFast
static addresses described 5
See addresses disabling 14
static IP routing 12 enabling 13
static MAC addressing 8 BPDU filtering
static route primary interface,configuring 10 described 3
static routes disabling 12
configuring 88 enabling 12
configuring for IPv6 19 BPDU guard
understanding 6 described 2
static routing 3 disabling 12
static routing support, enhanced object tracking 10 enabling 11
static SSM mapping 18, 19 BPDU message exchange 3
static traffic forwarding 20 configuration guidelines 12, 10

IN-46 OL-8553-06
Index
STP (continued) STP (continued)

configuring interface states
forward-delay time 21 blocking 5
hello time 20 disabled 7
maximum aging time 21 forwarding 5, 6
path cost 18 learning 6
port priority 17 listening 6
root switch 14 overview 4
secondary root switch 16 interoperability and compatibility among modes 10
spanning-tree mode 13 keepalive messages 2
switch priority 19 Layer 2 protocol tunneling 8
transmit hold-count 22 limitations with IEEE 802.1Q trunks 10
counters, clearing 22 load sharing
default configuration 11 overview 24
default optional feature configuration 9 using path costs 26
designated port, defined 3 using port priorities 24
designated switch, defined 3 loop guard
detecting indirect link failures 5 described 9
disabling 14 enabling 15
displaying status 22 modes supported 9
EtherChannel guard multicast addresses, effect of 8
described 7 optional features supported 7
disabling 14 overview 2
enabling 14 path costs 26
extended system ID Port Fast
effects on root switch 14 described 2
effects on the secondary root switch 16 enabling 10
overview 4 port priorities 25
unexpected behavior 15 preventing root switch selection 8
features supported 7 protocols supported 9
IEEE 802.1D and bridge ID 4 redundant connectivity 8
IEEE 802.1D and multicast addresses 8 root guard
IEEE 802.1t and VLAN identifier 4 described 8
inferior BPDU 3 enabling 15
instances supported 9 root port, defined 3
interface state, blocking to forwarding 2

OL-8553-06 IN-47
Index
STP (continued) switch clustering technology 1

root switch See also clusters, switch
configuring 15 switch console port 6
effects of extended system ID 4, 14 Switch Database Management
election 3 See SDM
unexpected behavior 15 switched packets, ACLs on 38
shutdown Port Fast-enabled port 2 Switched Port Analyzer
status, displaying 22 See SPAN
superior BPDU 3 switched ports 2
timers, described 20 switchport backup interface 4, 5
UplinkFast switchport block multicast command 8
described 3 switchport block unicast command 8
enabling 13 switchport command 15
VLAN-bridge 10 switchport mode dot1q-tunnel command 6
stratum, NTP 2 switchport protected command 7
stub areas, OSPF 28 switch priority
stub routing, EIGRP 39 MSTP 21
subdomains, private VLAN 1 STP 19
subnet mask 5 switch software features 1
subnet zero 6 switch virtual interface
success response, VMPS 28 See SVI
summer time 13 synchronization, BGP 45
SunNet Manager 5 syslog
supernet 6 See system message logging
supported port-based authentication methods 7 system capabilities TLV 2
Smartports macros system clock
See also Auto Smartports macros configuring
SVI autostate exclude daylight saving time 13
configuring 27 manually 11
defined 5 summer time 13
SVI link state 5 time zones 12
SVIs displaying the time and date 12
and IP unicast routing 3 overview 1
and router ACLs 4 See also NTP
connecting VLANs 9 system description TLV 2
defined 4 system message logging
routing between VLANs 2 default configuration 3
switch 2 defining error message severity levels 8
disabling 4

IN-48 OL-8553-06
Index
system message logging (continued) TACACS+ (continued)

displaying the configuration 13 configuring
enabling 4 accounting 17
facility keywords, described 13 authentication key 13
level keywords, described 9 authorization 16
limiting messages 10 login authentication 14
message format 2 default configuration 13
overview 1 displaying the configuration 17
sequence numbers, enabling and disabling 8 identifying the server 13
setting the display destination device 5 in clusters 14
synchronizing log messages 6 limiting the services to the user 16
syslog facility 13 operation of 12
time stamps, enabling and disabling 7 overview 10
UNIX syslog servers support for 10
configuring the daemon 12 tracking services accessed by user 17
configuring the logging facility 12 tagged packets
facilities supported 13 IEEE 802.1Q 3
system MTU Layer 2 protocol 8
and IS-IS LSPs 66 tar files
system MTU and IEEE 802.1Q tunneling 5 creating 6
system name displaying the contents of 7
default configuration 15 extracting 7
default setting 15 image file format 24
manual configuration 15 TCL script, registering and defining with embedded event
manager 6
See also DNS
system name TLV 2
TDR 14
system prompt, default setting 14, 15

Telnet
accessing management interfaces 10
system resources, optimizing 1
number of connections 6
system routing
setting a password 6
IS-IS 61
templates, SDM 1
ISO IGRP 61
temporary self-signed certificate 43
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus
T See TACACS+
terminal lines, setting a password 6
TACACS+
accounting, defined 11
authentication, defined 11
authorization, defined 11

OL-8553-06 IN-49
Index
TFTP traceroute, Layer 2 (continued)

configuration files multicast traffic 15
downloading 11 multiple devices on a port 16
preparing the server 10 unicast traffic 15
uploading 12 usage guidelines 15
configuration files in base directory 7 traceroute command 17
configuring for autoconfiguration 7 See also IP traceroute
image files tracked lists
deleting 27 configuring 3
downloading 26 types 3
preparing the server 25 tracked objects
uploading 28 by Boolean expression 4
limiting access by servers 16 by threshold percentage 6
TFTP server 5 by threshold weight 5
threshold, traffic level 2 tracking interface line-protocol state 2
threshold monitoring, IP SLAs 6 tracking IP routing state 2
time tracking objects 1
See NTP and system clock tracking process 1
Time Domain Reflector track state, tracking IP SLAs 9
See TDR traffic
time-range command 16 blocking flooded 8
time ranges in ACLs 16 fragmented 5
time stamps in log messages 7 fragmented IPv6 2
time zones 12 unfragmented 5
TLVs traffic policing 11
defined 1 traffic suppression 1
LLDP 2 transmit hold-count
LLDP-MED 2 see STP
Token Ring VLANs transparent mode, VTP 3, 12
support for 6 trap-door mechanism 2
VTP support 4 traps
ToS 11 configuring MAC address notification 22
traceroute, Layer 2 configuring managers 11
and ARP 16 defined 3
and CDP 15 enabling 22, 11
broadcast traffic 15 notification types 11
described 15 overview 1, 4
IP addresses and subnets 16
MAC addresses and VLANs 15

IN-50 OL-8553-06
Index
troubleshooting trustpoints, CA 42
connectivity problems 13, 15, 16 tunneling
CPU utilization 24 defined 1
detecting unidirectional links 1 IEEE 802.1Q 1
displaying crash information 23 Layer 2 protocol 8
PIMv1 and PIMv2 interoperability problems 34 tunnel ports
setting packet forwarding 20 defined 4
SFP security and identification 12 described 3, 1
show forward command 20 IEEE 802.1Q, configuring 6
with CiscoWorks 4 incompatibilities with other features 6
with debug commands 19 twisted-pair Ethernet, detecting unidirectional links 1
with ping 13 type of service
with system message logging 1 See ToS
with traceroute 16
trunk failover
U
See link-state tracking
trunking encapsulation 8 UDLD
trunk ports configuration guidelines 4
configuring 20 default configuration 4
defined 3 disabling
encapsulation 21, 25, 27 globally 5
trunks on fiber-optic interfaces 5
allowed-VLAN list 21 per interface 5
configuring 21, 25, 27 echoing detection mechanism 2
ISL 16 enabling
load sharing globally 5
setting STP path costs 26 per interface 5
using STP port priorities 24, 25 Layer 2 protocol tunneling 10
native VLAN for untagged traffic 23 link-detection mechanism 1
parallel 26 neighbor database 2
pruning-eligible list 23 overview 1
to non-DTP device 17 resetting an interface 6
trusted boundary for QoS 38 status, displaying 6
trusted port states support for 7
between QoS domains 40 UDP, configuring 14
classification options 5 UDP jitter, configuring 9
ensuring port security for IP phones 38 UDP jitter operation, IP SLAs 9
support for 11 unauthorized ports with IEEE 802.1x 9
within a QoS domain 36

OL-8553-06 IN-51
Index
unicast MAC address filtering 5 User Datagram Protocol

and adding static addresses 25 See UDP
and broadcast MAC addresses 25 user EXEC mode 2
and CPU packets 25 username-based authentication 6
and multicast addresses 25
and router MAC addresses 25
V
described 25 version-dependent transparent mode 4
unicast storm 1 virtual IP address
unicast storm control command 4 cluster standby group 11
unicast traffic, blocking 8 command switch 11
UniDirectional Link Detection protocol Virtual Private Network
See UDLD See VPN
UNIX syslog servers virtual router 1, 2
daemon configuration 12 virtual switches and PAgP 5
facilities supported 13 vlan.dat file 5
message logging configuration 12 VLAN 1, disabling on a trunk port 22
unrecognized Type-Length-Value (TLV) support 4 VLAN 1 minimization 22
upgrading software images VLAN ACLs
See downloading See VLAN maps
UplinkFast vlan-assignment response, VMPS 28
described 3 VLAN configuration
disabling 13 at bootup 8
enabling 13 saving 8
support for 7 VLAN configuration mode 2, 7
uploading VLAN database
configuration files and startup configuration file 8
preparing 10, 13, 16 and VTP 1
reasons for 9 VLAN configuration saved in 7
using FTP 14 VLANs saved in 4
using RCP 18 vlan database command 7
using TFTP 12 vlan dot1q tag native command 5
image files VLAN filtering and SPAN 6
preparing 25, 29, 33 vlan global configuration command 7
reasons for 23 VLAN ID, discovering 28
using FTP 31 VLAN link state 5
using RCP 36 VLAN load balancing on flex links 2
using TFTP 28 configuration guidelines 8
VLAN management domain 2

IN-52 OL-8553-06
Index
VLAN Management Policy Server VLANs (continued)

See VMPS described 2, 1
VLAN map entries, order of 30 displaying 16
VLAN maps extended-range 1, 12
applying 34 features 7
common uses for 34 illustrated 2
configuration guidelines 30 internal 13
configuring 29 limiting source traffic with RSPAN 22
creating 31 limiting source traffic with SPAN 15
defined 2 modifying 9
denying access to a server example 35 multicast 17
denying and permitting packets 31 native, configuring 23
displaying 41 normal-range 1, 4
examples of ACLs and VLAN maps 32 number supported 7
removing 34 parameters 5
support for 9 port membership modes 3
wiring closet configuration example 35 static-access ports 11
VLAN membership STP and IEEE 802.1Q trunks 10
confirming 31 supported 2
modes 3 Token Ring 6
VLAN Query Protocol traffic between 2
See VQP VLAN-bridge STP 10, 2
VLANs VTP modes 3
adding 9 VLAN Trunking Protocol
adding to VLAN database 9 See VTP
aging dynamic addresses 9 VLAN trunks 16
allowed on trunk 21 VMPS
and spanning-tree instances 3, 6, 13 administering 32
configuration guidelines, extended-range VLANs 13 configuration example 33
configuration guidelines, normal-range VLANs 6 configuration guidelines 29
configuration options 7 default configuration 29
configuring 1 description 27
configuring IDs 1006 to 4094 13 dynamic port membership
connecting through SVIs 9 described 28
creating in config-vlan mode 9 reconfirming 31
creating in VLAN configuration mode 10 troubleshooting 33
customer numbering in service-provider networks 3 entering server address 30
default configuration 8 mapping MAC addresses to VLANs 28
deleting 10 monitoring 32

OL-8553-06 IN-53
Index
VMPS (continued) VRF-aware services (continued)

reconfirmation interval, changing 31 HSRP 78
reconfirming membership 31 ping 78
retry count, changing 32 SNMP 78
voice aware 802.1x security syslog 79
port-based authentication tftp 80
configuring 35 traceroute 80
described 25, 35 uRPF 79
voice-over-IP 1 VTP
voice VLAN adding a client to a domain 14
Cisco 7960 phone, port connections 1 advertisements 19, 3
configuration guidelines 3 and extended-range VLANs 1
configuring IP phones for data traffic and normal-range VLANs 1
override CoS of incoming frame 6 client mode, configuring 11
trust CoS priority of incoming frame 6 configuration
configuring ports for voice traffic in global configuration mode 7
802.1p priority tagged frames 5 guidelines 8
802.1Q frames 5 privileged EXEC mode 7
connecting to an IP phone 4 requirements 9
default configuration 3 saving 7
described 1 VLAN configuration mode 7
displaying 7 configuration mode options 7
IP phone data traffic, described 2 configuration requirements 9
IP phone voice traffic, described 2 configuration revision number
VPN guideline 14
configuring routing in 80 resetting 15
forwarding 74 configuring
in service provider networks 71 client mode 11
routes 72 server mode 9
VPN routing and forwarding table transparent mode 12
See VRF consistency checks 4
VQP 7, 27 default configuration 6
VRF described 1
defining 74 disabling 12
tables 71 domain names 8
VRF-aware services domains 2
ARP 77 Layer 2 protocol tunneling 8
configuring 77
ftp 80

IN-54 OL-8553-06
Index
VTP (continued) WCCP (continued)

modes features unsupported 4
client 3, 11 forwarding method 3
server 3, 9 Layer-2 header rewrite 3
transitions 3 MD5 security 3
transparent 3, 12 message exchange 2
monitoring 16 monitoring and maintaining 9
passwords 8 negotiation 3
pruning packet redirection 3
disabling 14 packet-return method 3
enabling 14 redirecting traffic received from a client 6
examples 5 setting the password 6
overview 4 unsupported WCCPv2 features 4
support for 8 web authentication 14
pruning-eligible list, changing 23 configuring 60 to 63, 64 to ??
server mode, configuring 9 described 8, 26
statistics 16 fallback for IEEE 802.1x 62
support for 8 Web Cache Communication Protocol
Token Ring support 4 See WCCP
transparent mode, configuring 12 weighted tail drop
using 1 See WTD
version, guidelines 8 weight thresholds in tracked lists 5
Version 1 4 wired location service
Version 2 configuring 9
configuration guidelines 8 displaying 10
disabling 13 location TLV 3
enabling 13 understanding 3
overview 4 wizards 2
WTD
described 13
W
setting thresholds
WCCP egress queue-sets 71
authentication 3 ingress queues 67
configuration guidelines 5 support for 11
described 1
X
displaying 9
dynamic service groups 3 Xmodem protocol 2
enabling 6

OL-8553-06 IN-55
Index

IN-56 OL-8553-06

Catalyst 3560 Switch Software Configuration Guide

Uploaded by

Catalyst 3560 Switch Software Configuration Guide

Uploaded by

Catalyst 3560 Switch Software

Text Part Number: OL-8553-06